Typographical printing-surfaces

- - TYPOGRAPHICA
  - DIN ST
  - E “= T E 2 Ei : 5 1 ' Ce s 2 —
  - ter - wo —. *— % wo — - $ --------- eve * - -- — he mere wewt’s mo—ri “werh
  - ROS & GRAI T
- p.n.n. - vue 1/901
- p.n.n. - vue 2/901
- - TYPOGRAPHICAL
  - PRINTING - SURFACES
- p.n.n. - vue 3/901
- - 2
  - 0 v
  - 3 N
  - s
  - %
  - 1
  - S x
  - & o S V %
  - 0
  - A W € AS $, 84 N LSN
  - JI
  - IPNI t x 1 MSI 490
  - s
  - * & +
  - {
  - 1 E
  - %
  - g
  - * i $ 1
  - 4
  - 3
  - R o
  - 3 a
  - 7 ,3
  - 7
  - 0
  - 5 u
  - 2 &
  - -ss
- p.n.n. - vue 4/901
- - A £ Axe* &C-ooazoe /E- • 014 •(‘-»-, . 8K.227 —24
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL
  - PRINTING - SURFACES
  - THE TECHNOLOGY AND MECHANISM OF THEIR PRODUCTION
  - BY
  - LUCIEN ALPHONSE LEGROS
  - MEMBER OF THE INSTITUTION OF CIVIL ENGINEERS MEMBER OF THE INSTITUTION OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS MEMBER OF THE INSTITUTION OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS ST-PRESIDENT OF THE INSTITUTION OF AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERS
  - AND
  - JOHN CAMERON GRANT
  - AUTHOR OF "A YEAR OF LIFE”; “THE PRICE OF THE BISHOP”; “PRAIRIE PICTURES” BITS OF BRAZIL”; "TORRIBA: A PRINCESS OF THE AMORAYES"; ETC. ETC.
  - BIBLIOTHQUE
  - DU CON 27 F TONAL
  - e
  - LONGMANS, GREEN, AND GO. 39 PATERNOSTER ROW, LONDON FOURTH AVENUE & 30TH STREET, NEW YORK
  - BOMBAY, CALCUTTA, AND MADRAS
  - 1916
  - All rights reserved
- Page de titre n.n. - vue 5/901
- - PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN BY WILLIAM CLOWES & SONS, LIMITED LONDON AND BECCLES.
- p.n.n. - vue 6/901
- - INTRODUCTION
  - « Now of Introductions sooth be it Said that in them it behoveth to Speak fair, and with nice Tongue and Quaint upon the matter, yet not so far Removed therefrom that he that heareth be set Astray in his Expectations of things that be to Come.” Mirrour of Pryntyng.
  - Long primer ancient (Miller & Richard).
  - IF we except the marks left by fossils such as those of leaves, shells, and other natural objects in the soft clay, hardened and turned to stone by the long-drawn action of ages, probably the first printing-surface in the world was the thumb or finger of some hunter ancestor of our race, producing its impress in blood on the blue-white surface of the skin freshly torn from his quarry.
  - Though the methods that produced this mark were similar, very different indeed was our antique hunter from our modern savages, regarded askance by society, whose thumb and finger prints present such interest to the Bertillons and to the Galtons and, incidentally, to the police of all civilized nations. It is indeed a far cry from the mark of prehistoric fingers on fresh-plucked skin to the marks the burglar leaves behind him on an incautiously handled beer-bottle, but the mechanical conditions which result in these marks are the same, and both are produced from a similar printing-surface.
  - In this work it is practically with printing-surfaces alone that the authors propose to deal, and not with the impressions produced ; therefore, from their point of view, the thumb or the finger and its series of depressions and ridges which are the origin of the print, have for them more interest than the print itself. Within the same category fall all those processes which they are about to describe as contributing to the formation of a proper typographical printing surface. Though ever striving to obtain perfection for the production of the printed page—to the printed page itself, except contingently, their subject will not take them.
  - Contrary to common opinion, the art of producing a printing-surface is a very old one indeed, and it was not so much the want of knowledge of how to print that retarded its development for so long, as the want of a proper fluid medium with which to print. It was ignorance of a proper ink and not of a proper type that kept this art almost unknown, and only led to its practical inception in the fifteenth century on the continent of Europe.
- p.r5 - vue 7/901
- - vi
  - INTRODUCTION.
  - Printing on clay tablets or cylinders—in idea like the most approved modern methods—was practised in Babylon at least three or four thousand years ago. Printing on a plastic clay-surface with movable types was known in classic times, and the art was to a limited extent adopted among potters. Printing on tissues of various surface-qualities, continuous such as those of paper, or cellular, such as those of silk or other fabrics, was understood and used in China in remote ages. At all periods within civilization there have been printing-processes of some kind or other going on in the world, and therefore printing-surfaces have always been in use somewhere or other.
  - Interesting, however, as the matter may be from a philosophical or historic standpoint, it has but little importance so far as the scope of this present treatise is concerned, and therefore the brief remarks already made upon the subject must suffice in this introductory note. Reference, however, to the bibliography at the end of the volume will direct any, who may wish to investigate the matter at greater length, to works that contain information concerning a question full of interest.
  - The first really practical typographical printing-surface was an engraved block. Similar blocks are still in use to-day in certain parts of the world, for instance, in China and Japan, where the number and complexity of the ideographs, when this form of conveying ideas is employed, often render the use of movable type unremunerative and unpractical. The next improvement, useful only for languages possessing comparatively simple alphabets, was the separation of the characters, which composed the words engraved upon a block, into separate units.
  - This, about a.d. 1454, constituted the invention of Johann Gutenberg and Peter Schoeffer : " The Harlemers plead that Lawrence Jansz Koster of Harlem was the first inventor of printing in the year of Our Lord 1430.” With the addition of this quaint sentence from Moxon, the first Englishman to write on the subject of the mechanical side of the printing art in 1683, is summed up what we know of the dawn of printing in Europe.
  - A word here, however, must be given to Moxon, whose " Mechanick Exercises " is the only English book that, so far as the authors know, has yet appeared on the subject of their treatise. Several chapters of the present work are headed by a quotation from this delightful old author, the study of whose volume has been a " pleasant drudgerie,” and has never become, as has often been the case in wading through the works of some of his more ponderous contemporaries and followers, a " labour would make Hercules sweat.”
  - In the initial stages of the art, printing was done from wooden types. The next step was the substitution of suitable metal types for the wooden ones, and this involved a much greater advance than is at first apparent, for it ultimately required the production of a steel punch from which to strike a matrix by means of which in turn, with proper appliances, to produce a type.
- p.r6 - vue 8/901
- - INTRODUCTION.
  - vii
  - Hand-setting at this period, and for many years afterwards, was the means adopted for assembling the different units that went to form the page. In the early part of last century efforts were made to introduce mechanical composition, and probably to Church—whose patent, a British one, is dated 1822—the honour of this innovation must be allowed. This process of composing or creating the printing-surface by mechanical means was carried to a considerable state of perfection and real usefulness towards the end of the nineteenth century, and probably, had it commenced earlier, and had the production of cheap type been as far advanced then as it is to-day, it would have been one of the chief methods employed by the printer for the production of his printing-surface.
  - In the latter quarter of the last century, however, Ottmar Mergenthaler conceived the idea, along with many other fellow-workers of less note, of not only mechanically assembling type already cast, but of casting the type themselves, or their equivalent, from previously assembled matrices. Without going into details or referring to similar but unfruitful lines of invention, the advent and improvement of the Linotype on the one hand, and of the Monotype on the other, and of all their kith and kin, have carried things forward to the pitch of excellence marked by the closing years of the nineteenth century. A further advance seems likely to mark a new departure in these early years of the twentieth century, and what the next fifty years may show of yet further developments, it were hard to say.
  - In every instance, however, from the impress of the early hunter’s finger upon the smooth white surface of the freshly separated skin to the most perfect example of modern letterpress work, the ultimate aim of the originator of the printing-surface is to produce a series of surfaces and depressions from which to reproduce the desired design. The end, unconsciously or consciously sought, has been the same, only the means for its realization have altered, changed and improved. It is with the more modern of these changes and alterations that the authors of this treatise have to deal.
- p.r7 - vue 9/901
- p.r8 - vue 10/901
- - THIS
  - TREATISE IS DEDICATED
  - BY
  - THE
  - AUTHORS
  - TO
  - THE
  - MEMORY OF
  - JOSEPH MOXON
  - AND
  - PIERRE SIMON FOURNIER
  - OF ENGLAND
  - OF FRANCE
  - 1627-1700
  - 1712-1768
  - WHO PUBLISHED THEIR
  - “MECHANICK EXERCISES” and " MANUEL TYPOGRAPHIQUE"
  - IN THE YEARS
  - 1683 And 1764
  - RESPECTIVELY ;
  - THE ONLY TWO MEN WHO HAVE, HITHERTO, SO FAR AS CAN BE ASCERTAINED, ATTEMPTED,
  - IN COMPARATIVELY SMALL PART
  - --FOR THE MATTER THEN ITSELF WAS SMALL-
  - BUT WITH THE BEST CONTEMPORARY KNOWLEDGE AVAILABLE, TO GRAPPLE WITH THE PROBLEMS OF THE SUBJECT.
- p.r9 - vue 11/901
- - “ I hold every man a debtor to his profession, from the which, as men do of course seek to receive countenance and profit, so ought they of duty to endeavour themselves by way of amends to be a help and an ornament thereunto.”
  - Lord Bacon.
  - " Founders and senators of states and cities, lawgivers, extirpators of tyrants, fathers of the people, and other eminent persons in civil government, were honoured but with titles of worthies or demi-gods; whereas, such as were inventors and authors of new arts, endowments and commodities towards man’s life, were ever consecrated amongst the gods themselves : and justly, for the merit of the former is confined within a circle of an age or a nation, and is like fruitful showers, which, though they be profitable and good, yet serve but for that season, and for a latitude of ground where they fall; but the other is, indeed, like the benefits of Heaven, which are permanent and universal, coming 4 in aura leni,’ without noise or agitation.”
  - Lord Bacon,
  - « Les grands services font les grands hommes, car la vraie gloire n’appartient qu’aux idees fecondes.”
  - " C’est de Dieu que nous vient cet Art ingenieux De peindre la parole et de parler aux yeux, Et par des traits divers de figures tracees, Donner de la couleur et du corps aux pensees.”
  - Pierre Simon Fournier. Preface to " Manuel Typographique.”
- p.r10 - vue 12/901
- - PREFACE.
  - “ Never let it, then, be said, that a British Public have encouraged the introduction of that machinery, which can only tend to damp and destroy all the energy and talent of those who have hitherto upheld and exercised the Art. . .
  - Preface to Johnson’s Typographia (1824).
  - "... mais nous avons change tout cela.”
  - Moliere, Le Medecin Malgre Lui.
  - In dealing with typographical printing-surfaces and the processes and mechanisms of their production, one of the great difficulties experienced has been, not so much to know what to include in this treatise as to decide what to leave out ; the aim having been not only to produce an interesting volume, but to make it also a standard text-book on the subject of which it treats.
  - The foundation of the present work is a paper read by one of the authors before the Institution of Mechanical Engineers and published by that body in their proceedings. The widespread interest it aroused, and the demand for copies of the excerpt as a work of reference, suggested the turning of a technical paper into a manual of technology ; the one containing in all some hundred and fifty pages of illustrations and printed matter, and the other between six hundred and seven hundred pages of letterpress and over six hundred illustrations.
  - None can be so well aware as the writers themselves of their own deficiencies and of the skeleton fashion in which important sections of their thesis have been discussed, but the subject as a whole is so vast and so complex, and embraces so many fields of human activity, industry, and invention, that, if treated in a more prolix and less practical manner, the result would have rivalled the ponderous tomes of the old schoolmen themselves.
  - The time and trouble involved in the production of the book, even in its present form, have been very considerable, and the large amount of what may be called " dead work ” is little apparent in the pages as they appear in their finished state.
  - To take the single instance of patents: thousands of these, both British and foreign, have had to be looked up, compared, abstracted, or
- p.r11 - vue 13/901
- - xii PREFACE.
  - considered, a task not rendered any the easier from the curious Patent Office classifications that confuse the multitudinous masses of typewriter detail with things that are more nearly pertinent to the printer.
  - The authors do not grudge their labour, for it has been a labour of love and one that has led to numerous friendships, but where thanks are due to so many, it would be invidious to particularize. The courtesy, however, of the Institution of Mechanical Engineers demands unique acknowledgment, for ready permission for the reproduction of parts of the original paper and kindly liberality in allowing the use of their blocks and drawings. Special help is referred to in the text as occasion demands, and all those, whose names are recorded in the following pages, and without whose friendly co-operation this work could never have come into being, are here very heartily thanked.
  - London, 1915.
  - Note.—The authors will be much obliged if any one consulting this book and discovering error, mis-statement, or omission, will communicate with them directly or through their publishers, with a view to having the matter rectified in a following edition.
- p.r12 - vue 14/901
- - HAEC OLIM MEMINISSE JUVABIT.
  - Subjoined is a list of the names of those who either in their individual or corporate capacity, or both, have been of assistance to the authors by advice or act, helpful material or confirmation of data. Some, of course, have done more than others, but where the goodwill of so many has been obvious, it would be invidious to particularize.
  - Alford, L. P., Editor, " American Machinist,” U.S.A.
  - Allibone, A. C., Town Clerk, Wakefield.
  - American Type Founders Co., New Jersey, U.S.A.
  - Andem, James L., New Jersey, U.S.A.
  - Anthony, Messrs., '' Hereford Times,” Hereford.
  - Arnold, T., London Manager, Northern Press and Engineering Co., Ltd., London and South Shields.
  - Ashworth & Meredith, Photo-engravers, London.
  - Babbage, Major-General Henry P., Cheltenham.
  - Baillie, G. H., M.I.A.E., London.
  - BARNARD, W. N., Secretary, Cornell University, Ithaca, N.Y., U.S.A.
  - Barr, Mark, M.I.E.E., formerly of Linotype & Machinery, Ltd., Broadheath and London.
  - Barre, L. Charles, The late, Ingenieur des Arts et Manufactures, Paris, France. Baxandall, D., A.R.C.S., Science Museum, South Kensington, London.
  - Bhisey, Prof. S. A., Tata-Bhisotype Syndicate, London.
  - Bland, J. P., Printer, “ The Times,” London.
  - Boss, Benjamin, Carnegie Institution, Department of Meridian Astrometry, Dudley Observatory, Albany, N.Y., U.S.A.
  - Bottger, Gottfried, Maschinenbau Paunsdorf, Leipzig, Germany.
  - Boulat, Miss Milda, Reval, Russia.
  - Bower, W. M., Advertisement Manager, Linotype & Machinery, Ltd., London. British Association for the Advancement of Science, Burlington House, London. BRITISH Journal of Psychology, The Editors of the, Cambridge.
  - Bullen, Henry L., Typographic Library and Museum, Jersey City, N.J., U.S.A. Burch, J. W., Secretary, Lanston Monotype Corporation, Ltd., London.
  - BURNS, F. A. J., English and Foreign Braille Literature Society, London.
  - Capehart, A. S., formerly of the Monoline Co., Paris, France.
  - Campbell, G. M., Principal, Royal Normal College for the Blind, Upper Norwood, S.E. Champion, Miss C. E., formerly of Grant, Legros & Co., Ltd., Willesden, London. Chatterton, B., A.M.Inst.C.E., London.
  - Clephane, M. W., Manhattan, N.Y., U.S.A.
  - Clinch, George, F.G.S., F.S.A.Scot., Librarian, Society of Antiquaries of London. Clowes, Maurice, William Clowes & Sons, Ltd., London.
  - Colebrook, C., The late, of the Wicks Rotary Typecasting Co., Ltd., London. Colebrook, Eric, Watford.
  - Colombe, R. M. de la, formerly of the Pinel Dyotype, Paris, France.
  - Columbia Photo Engraving Co. of New York, U.S.A.
  - Conrad, B. B., American Numbering Machine Co., Brooklyn, N.Y., U.S A.
  - Crabb, A. P., Addressograph Ltd., London.
  - Curry & Paxton, Opticians, London.
- p.r13 - vue 15/901
- - xiv ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.
  - Davis, Charles Ethan, B.S., formerly of the Paige Compositor Co. of Hartford, Conn., and Chicago, Ill., now of New York City, U.S.A.
  - Davis, George, formerly of Grant, Legros & Co., Ltd., Willesden, London.
  - Davis, Harry, formerly of Grant, Legros & Co., Ltd., Willesden, London.
  - Davis, Percy W., formerly of the Wicks Rotary Typecasting Co., Ltd., London, and of the Goodson Graphotype Co., Northfleet.
  - Dawson, Alfred, formerly of the Typographic Etching Co., Ltd., London.
  - Dawson, Charles E., formerly of the Typographic Etching Co., Ltd., London.
  - de Dax, M. le Comte, Secretaire de la Societe des Ingenieurs Civils, Paris, France.
  - Defries, Wolf, London.
  - Derriey, Jules, Paris, France.
  - Dodge, Philip T., President, Mergenthaler Linotype Co. of New York City, U.S.A.
  - DRUITT, P. W., Stringertype Manufacturing Co., Ltd., South Norwood.
  - Ducrot, Andre, Syndicat Patronal des Imprimeurs Typographes, Paris.
  - Duncan, H. M., Managing Director, Lanston Monotype Corporation, Ltd., London.
  - Earle, Hardman A., M.Inst.C.E., M.I.E.E., London.
  - Earle, J. W., Remington Typewriter Co., Ltd., New York City, U.S.A.
  - Eckenstein, Oscar, South Hampstead, London.
  - Elwes, H. Geoffrey, “ Boy Scout Association Headquarters Gazette,” Colchester.
  - Fackenthal, Frank D., Secretary, Columbia University, N.Y., U.S.A.
  - FIELDWICK, R. W., formerly of the Wicks Rotary Typecasting Co., Ltd., London.
  - Fletcher, David W., Patent Attorney, Chicago, Ill., U.S.A.
  - Flinn, H. H., Secretary, “ Inland Printer,” Chicago, Ill., U.S.A.
  - Foster, T. Gregory, B.A., Ph.D., Provost, University College, London.
  - Foucher, Societe des Etablissements A., Paris, France.
  - Fraser, Dr. James, Deputy Medical Superintendent, Central London Sick Asylum.
  - Gauthier-Villars, Paris.
  - Genzsch & Heyse, Schriftgiesserei-Akt.-Ges., Hamburg and Munich, Germany.
  - Gibson, Miss E. F., London.
  - Gilbert-Stringer, H. J. S., Brighton.
  - Gilmore, J. F., formerly of the Wicks Rotary Typecasting Co., Ltd., London.
  - Gilpin, W. R., Stringertype Manufacturing Co., Ltd., South Norwood.
  - Gold, E., M.A., Meteorological Office, South Kensington, London.
  - Gollancz, The Rev. Prof. Hermann, M.A., D.Lit., London.
  - Goodson Graphotype Co. of America, now the United States Graphotype Co., New York City, U.S.A.
  - Goulding, B. J. J., Linotype and Machinery, Ltd., London.
  - Grassi, Enrico, Rome, Italy.
  - Gursch, Emil, Gneisenaustrasse, Berlin, Germany.
  - Haas, A. L., Tooting, London.
  - Haddon, W., Market Harborough and London.
  - Hatg, Mrs. (n^e Moxon), Kensington, London.
  - Hammond, Guy L., M.E., formerly of the Electric Compositor Co., Woonsocket, R.I., U.S.A.
  - Harrison, Robert, Assistant Secretary, Royal Society, London.
  - HARTLEY, G. D., Messrs. Sleeper & Hartley, Worcester, Mass., U.S.A.
  - HEATH, H. F., C.B., B.A., Ph.D., Board of Education, Whitehall, S.W.
  - Heinemann, W., London.
  - Higham, H. W., The Remington Typewriter Co., Ltd., London.
  - Hillier, Sir Walter, K.C.M.G., C.B., Kensington, London.
  - Hilton, P. R., President, “ Inland Printer,” Chicago, Ill., U.S.A.
  - Hilton, R., “ Caxton Magazine.”
  - Hilton, W., The late.
  - Hodgkin, J. E., F.S.A., The late.
- p.r14 - vue 16/901
- - ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.
  - xv
  - Hogarth, D. G., M.A., F.S.A., Keeper, Ashmolean Museum, Oxford.
  - Hudson, S. T., The English Herald Company, Montreux, Switzerland.
  - Illustrated London News, Strand, London.
  - Institution of Mechanical Engineers, The Council of The, London.
  - International Type-setting Machine Co. (The Intertype), New York City, U.S.A.
  - Janin, Clement, Bibliotheque d’Art et d’Archeologie, Paris.
  - Jennings, J., Stringertype Manufacturing Co., Ltd., South Norwood.
  - JOHNSON, H. T., M.I.Mech.E., Canadian-American Machinery Co., Ltd., London.
  - Joy, Basil H., M.I.Mech.E., M.I.A.E., Secretary, Institution of Automobile Engineers, London.
  - Kenyon, Sir Frederick G., K.C.B., M.A., Director and Principal Librarian, British Museum, London.
  - Kustermann & Co., Berlin, Germany.
  - Lanteri, Prof. Edouard, Royal College of Art, South Kensington, London.
  - Legros, MISS M. F., London.
  - Legros, MISS N. E., London.
  - Le Maistre, C. D., A.M.Inst.C.E., M.I.E.E., Secretary, International Symbols Commission, London.
  - Link, Rolls P., The Uni-Typebar (1912) Ltd., London.
  - Linke, E. F., General Manager, Unitype Co., Brooklyn, N.Y., U.S.A.
  - Lock, W. H., Director, Linotype & Machinery, Ltd., London.
  - Locking, J., English Herald Co., Montreux, Switzerland.
  - Longhurst, H. A., A.M.I.Mech.E., Soldan & Co., Ltd., London.
  - Macauley, C. R., A.M.I.Mech.E., Lanston Monotype Corporation, Ltd., London.
  - Mann, Ernest L., formerly of Grant, Legros, & Co., Ltd., Willesden, London.
  - Masson & Cie., “ L’Anthropologie,” Paris, France.
  - Maudslay, A. P., London.
  - Maw, W. H., LL.D., M.Inst.C.E., M.I.Mech.E., F.R.A.S., “ Engineering,” London.
  - Maw, Henry, A.M.I.Mech.E., The late.
  - Maw, Robert L., A.M.I.Mech.E., London.
  - Maw, Thomas F., A.M.I.Mech.E., London.
  - MCQUILKIN, A. H., Editor, " Inland Printer,” Chicago, Ill., U.S.A.
  - Mears, J. Arch., International Typesetting Machine Co., Brooklyn, N.Y., U.S.A.
  - Mergenthaler Linotype Co., Brooklyn, N.Y., U.S.A.
  - Meynell, MISS A. L., London.
  - Morgenstern, Ernst, Publisher, “ Deutscher Buch- und Steindrucker,” Berlin, Germany.
  - Murphy, John T., American Type Founders Co., Jersey City, N.J., U.S.A.
  - Murray, John, Director-Manager, P. Lawrence Printing Machine Co., London.
  - Murray, John, Albemarle Street, London.
  - Myers, Charles S., M.A., M.D., Sc.D., Director, Psychological Laboratory, Cambridge.
  - Nathan, Paul, Treasurer and General Manager, Wood, Nathan & Co., New York City, U.S.A.
  - Nelson, W. P., President, American Type Founders Co., New Jersey, U.S.A.
  - Newsome, J., Parish Clerk, Wakefield.
  - Nicholas, W., United States Graphotype Co., New York City, U.S.A.
  - Northern Press And Engineering Co., Ltd., South Shields.
  - Oddur manufacturing Co., Manhattan, N.Y., U.S.A.
  - Ogden Rowotype Co., Chicago, Ill., U.S.A.
  - Ogilvie, F. G., C.B., LL.D., Director, Science Museum, South Kensington, London.
  - Orde, J. W., Secretary, Royal Automobile Club, London.
- p.r15 - vue 17/901
- - xvi
  - ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.
  - PATTINSON, P. W., formerly of Grant, Legros & Co., Ltd., Willesden, London.
  - Pearson, Prof. Karl, M.A., F.R.S., University College, London.
  - Peignot et Fils, G., Paris, France.
  - PETERSEN, H., The Linograph Manufacturing Co., Minneapolis, Minn., U.S.A.
  - PIDGEN, Albert, A.M.I.Mech.E., formerly of the Thorne Compositor Co., U.S.A.
  - PIERPONT, F. H., Lanston Monotype Corporation, Ltd., Horley.
  - Pitman, Sir Isaac & Sons, Ltd., I>ondon and Bath.
  - Porter, Robert P., “ The Times,” Printing House Square, London.
  - Prain, Lt.-Col, Sir D., I.M.S., C.M.G., C.I.E., M.A., M.B., LL.D., F.R.S., Director of the Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, London.
  - Pulsometer Engineering Company, Limited, London and Reading.
  - Raworth, B. A., M.I.Mech.E., M.I.S.I., " Engineering,” London.
  - Reed, A. H., formerly of the Wicks Rotary Typecasting Co., Ltd., London.
  - Remington Typewriter Co., Ltd., London.
  - Royal Astronomical Society, The Secretary of the, London.
  - Schimmel, F., La Rototype, Nancy, France.
  - Scout, The Editor of the, London.
  - Shanks, E. L. S., Shanks Patent Type Foundry, London.
  - Shanks, James, Shanks Patent Type Foundry, London.
  - Sigurdsson, Oddur V., Oddur Typebar Machine Co., New York City, U.S.A.
  - Slastionoff, Miss Anna, Mirgorod, Poltava, Russia.
  - Smith, Albert W., Director, Sibley College, Cornell University, Ithaca, N.Y., U.S.A.
  - Smith, Percy J., Dulwich, London.
  - Smith, Prof. R. H., A.M.Inst.C.E., M.I.Mech.E., M.I.E.E., London.
  - SOLDAN & Co., Ltd. (The Typograph), London.
  - Stainsby, Henry, Secretary-General, National Institution for the Blind, Great Portland Street, London.
  - STRANGE, E. F., Assistant-Keeper, Victoria and Albert Museum, South Kensington, London.
  - TALBOT, P. Amaury, Abbots Norton, Inkberrow, Worcs.
  - Taylor, Taylor & Hobson, Ltd., Leicester.
  - Thompson, John S., Chicago, Ill., U.S.A.
  - Thompson, Walter H., South Kensington, London.
  - Titchener, Oliver, The late.
  - Troy, John P., Troy & Keith, Photographers to Cornell University, U.S.A.
  - Turner, Alexander, Printer, “ Morning Post,” London.
  - Unitype Company, Brooklyn, N.Y., U.S.A.
  - Uni-Typebar (1912), Ltd., Broad Street House, London.
  - Van, Alexander & Co., Strand, London.
  - Velin, M., La Rototype, Nancy, France.
  - Voisin, Ralph, St. Helier, Jersey, Channel Islands.
  - Walker, A. H., Linotype & Machinery, Ltd., London.
  - Walker, Emery, F.S.A., of Emery Walker, Ltd., London.
  - Waynforth, Pr0f. H. M., A.M.Inst.C.E., M.I.Mech.E., King’s College, University of London, London.
  - Wheeler, H. J., “ South Wales Daily News,” Cardiff, South Wales.
  - Whetton, H., “ British Printer,” London.
  - Whiskin, Percy H., Leyton, London.
  - Wicks, Frederick, The late, of the Wicks Rotary Typecasting Machine Co., Ltd.
  - Williams, V. S., formerly of Grant, Legros & Co., Ltd., Willesden, London.
  - Wood, Nathan & Co., Unitype Co., Madison Avenue, New York, U.S.A.
  - Worthington, Edgar, B.Sc., M.Inst.C.E., M.I.Mech.E., Secretary, Institution of Mechanical Engineers, London.
- p.r16 - vue 18/901
- - CONTENTS
  - INTRODUCTION................................................
  - PREFACE...................................................... K.
  - Acknowledgments.............................................
  - Glossary of common Technical terms.................XX1
  - I. PRINTING-SURFACES..................................
  - II. TYPOGRAPHY......................................... 4
  - III. Description of type.................................. 10
  - IV. TYPEFOUNDING......................................... 15
  - V. Type design......................................... 24
  - VI. Founts of type....................................... 34
  - VII. Units and Dimensions.....................................
  - VIII. Type faces........................................... 82
  - IX. Series, proportions, and Weight......................12
  - X. LOGOTYPES...........................................146
  - XI. LEGIBILITY.........................................156
  - XII. punch-Cutting........................................193
  - XIII. MATRICES.............................................216
  - XIV. MOULDS...............................................24I
  - XV. PUMPS...............................................271
  - XVI. Classification of typecasting, composing, line-justifying
  - AND DISTRIBUTING MACHINERY..........................279
  - XVII. KEYBOARDS...........................................283
  - XVIII. Casting Machines.....................................301
  - XIX. Composing machines.........................................321
  - XX. line-Justifying MACHINES.................................342
  - XXI. Distributing machines....................................35°
  - XXII. Casting and COMPOSING machines...........................355
  - XXIII. Casting and line-Justifying machines.....................357
  - XXIV. CASTING AND DISTRIBUTING machines..........................358
  - XXV. Composing and LINE-JUSTIFYING machines...................363
  - XXVI. Composing and DISTRIBUTING Machines........................367
  - XXVII. Casting, COMPOSING, AND LINE-JUSTIFYING MACHINES . . . 374
  - XXVIII. Composing, line-JUSTIFYING, AND DISTRIBUTING machines . 376
  - XXIX. matrix-Composing, LINE-JUSTIFYING, and TYPE or slug
  - CASTING MACHINES....................................................392
  - XXX. Impression machines, transfer machines, type-bar MACHINES, PHOTOGRAPHIC AND UNCLASSIFIED MACHINES . 453
- p.r17 - vue 19/901
- - xviii CONTENTS.
  - CHAPTER PAGE
  - XXXT. Stereotyping..........................................471
  - XXXTI. Typographical ETCHING, RELIEF PROCESS Blocks, AND ELECTROTYPING...........................................483
  - XXXIII. THE LANGUAGE of China and ITS TYPOGRAPHICAL EXPRESSION 495
  - XXXIV. Hieroglyphic, COGNATE, SYLLABIC, and OTHER Scripts . . 515
  - XXXV. Ancient and MODERN scripts and their uses.........533
  - XXXVI. CONCLUSION.........................................565
  - APPENDICES
  - Appendix I. BIBLIOGRAPHY.....................................575
  - Appendix II. PATENTS.........................................577
  - List of BRITISH PATENTS and Patentees . . 581
  - List of UNITED STATES PATENTS and PATENTEES 623
  - Appendix III. Technical vocabulary...................669
  - Appendix IV. Note on STANDARDIZATION of NOMENCLATURE. 689
  - Appendix V. List of ILLUSTRATIONS..................691
  - INDEX...........................697
- p.r18 - vue 20/901
- - TABLES.
  - TABLE PAGE
  - 1. Ordinary Fount of type................................................35
  - 2. Pica sizes.............................................................58
  - 3. Body-sizes of type....................................................59
  - 4. Faces and BODY-SIZES................................................ 60
  - 5. SHANKS’S POINT SYSTEM.................................................$7
  - 6. Comparative table giving names of ENGLISH and FOREIGN TYPE AND THEIR DIMENSIONAL RELATIONSHIPS IN FOURNIER, DIDOT, AND STANDARD POINTS, IN INCHES AND IN MILLIMETRES...................................70-7T
  - 7. SET WIDTHS of a PICA FOUNT (modern) WITHOUT SPACES AND QUADS ... 72
  - 8. Set WIDTHS of a pica fount (old-Style) WITHOUT SPACES and quads . . 73
  - 9. Self-spacing type.....................................................78
  - 10. Amount of beard expressed In points.................................124
  - ii. Position of THE STANDARD line IN GERMAN type.........................125
  - 12. Bill of 1,000,000 TYPE, EXCLUSIVE of SPACES and Quads (England). 128-29
  - 13. Bill of 1,000,000 TYPE, INCLUSIVE of SPACES and Quads (England) . 130-31
  - 14. Welsh BILL of fount for 100,000 CHARACTERS, EXCLUSIVE of SPACES AND QUADS.................................................................132-33
  - 15. FRENCH BILL of fount for 100,000 CHARACTERS, EXCLUSIVE of SPACES AND
  - Quads.....................................................................134-35
  - 16. German bill of fount for 100,000 Characters (FRAKTUR), EXCLUSIVE of SPACES AND QUADS............................................... ... I36
  - 17. German bill of fount for 100,000 characters (ANTIQUA), EXCLUSIVE of SPACES AND QUADS......................................................137
  - 18. ITALIAN BILL of fount for 100,000 CHARACTERS, EXCLUSIVE of SPACES AND QUADS.................................................................138
  - 19. Spanish BILL of fount for 100,000 CHARACTERS, EXCLUSIVE of SPACES AND Quads.................................................................139
  - 20. Bohemian BILL of fount for 100,000 CHARACTERS, EXCLUSIVE of SPACES AND QUADS............................................................ 140
  - 21. Greek BILL OF FOUNT FOR 100,000 CHARACTERS, EXCLUSIVE OF SPACES AND QUADS.................................................................141
  - 22. RUSSIAN BILL of fount for 100,000 CHARACTERS, EXCLUSIVE of SPACES and QUADS.................................................................142
  - 23. Russian ITALIC BILL of fount for 10,000 CHARACTERS, EXCLUSIVE of SPACES AND QUADS......................................................143
  - 24. Hebrew BILL of fount for 100,000 CHARACTERS, EXCLUSIVE of spaces, Quads, AND POINTS.....................................................143
  - 2 5. APPROXIMATE WEIGHT of 1,000,000 type in Pounds, EXCLUSIVE of SPACES AND QUADS 144
  - 26. Weight of French TYPE: APPROXIMATE weight of 1,000,000 TYPE In
  - Kilograms, EXCLUSIVE OF SPACES AND QUADS.................................145
- p.r19 - vue 21/901
- - XX
  - TABLES.
  - TABLE PAGE
  - 27. Number Of LOGOTYPES in 100,000 CHARACTERS...........................148
  - 28. Logotypes per 100,000 CHARACTERS, ROMAN LOWER-CASE, CAPITALS, And
  - POINTS. (COMPARISON.)...................................................149
  - 29. Logotypes per 100,000 CHARACTERS, ROMAN LOWER-CASE, CAPITALS, AND
  - POINTS; VARIATION IN FREQUENCY OF OCCURRENCE............................150
  - 30. Comparison of OBSERVED AND CALCULATED FREQUENCY of OCCURRENCE
  - OF INDIVIDUAL CHARACTERS PER 100,000 ...................................151
  - 31. Sounds REPRESENTED By TWO-LETTER COMBINATIONS PER 100,000
  - CHARACTERS..............................................................152
  - 32. ILLEGIBILITY OF ROMAN MODERN (LOWER-CASE) 12-POINT..................163
  - 33. Illegibility OF ROMAN OLD-STYLE (LOWER-CASE) 12-POINT...............165
  - 34. Illegibility OF ROMAN BLACKFRIARS (LOWER-CASE) 12-POINT.............167
  - 35. Illegibility OF ROMAN SANS SERIF (LOWER-CASE) 12-point..............169
  - 36. Illegibility OF German FRAKTUR (LOWER-CASE) 12-POINT................171
  - 37. Illegibility OF MODERN, OLD-STYLE, BLACKFRIARS, AND SANS SERIF
  - figures; 12-POINT................................................173
  - 38. Summary FOR LATIN, German, AND Greek FOUNTS. Comparison OF THE
  - ILLEGIBILITY OF CAPITALS; ROMAN, German FRAKTUR, AND GREEK . . 177
  - 39. Illegibility OF Greek AND RUSSIAN (lower-case), AND OF Hebrew, 12-POINT................................................................181
  - 40. Illegibility OF DEVANAGARI AND ARABIC CHARACTERS....................183
  - 41. Depth of strike of ORDINARY Matrices............................... 219
  - 42. Depth of strike of COMPOSING-MACHINE matrices.......................240
  - 43. Errors of division-plate AFTER APPLYING THREE SERIES of CORRECTIONS 254
  - 44. Errors of division-plate AFTER EACH CORRECTION; EXPRESSED IN
  - MILLIONTHS OF AN INCH AT A ID-INCH RADIUS...............................256
  - 45. DELIVERY OF SINGLE-ACTING PUMPS WITH ONE PLUNGER, OR WITH MORE THAN
  - ONE PLUNGER, DRIVEN BY CRANKS SET AT EQUAL ANGLES TO EACH OTHER AND COMPLETING THEIR CYCLE IN ONE REVOLUTION.......................276
  - 46. Squares of THE NATURAL numbers......................................456
  - 47. Number of shot In piles.............................................457
  - 48. Cubes of THE NATURAL numbers ...................................... 458
  - A LIST OF THE ILLUSTRATIONS IS GIVEN IN APPENDIX V.
- p.r20 - vue 22/901
- - GLOSSARY OF COMMON TECHNICAL TERMS.
  - . I do not exhibit this as a Dictionary so perfect, that all the obstruce Words and Phrases used among Printers, Lettan cutters and Founders are here exposed; for Words and P offer themselves either as Discourse or Contemplation occurs a Moxon’s Mechanick Exercises.
  - 8-point De Vinne, roman and italic (American Type Founders Co.).
  - agate ; an American size of type, see p. 59, table 3.
  - Alinement, see p. 24, par. 2 ; and p. 28, par. 2. . 1 g ,
  - antique ; a style of type, see p. 30, § 2 ; pp. 84-5, fig. 59 , P- > § 5ia above the Ascenders ; capital letters and lower-case b, d, f, h, i, 1, k, 1, t, which ascend above the small sorts.
  - atlas ; a style of type, see p. 33, § 10. , , ,
  - a-z length (in ems); the overall length set-wise of the lower-case alphab . Bastard body, see p. 68, par. 3.
  - Beard or neck, see p. II, fig. 3- - __,
  - Beard or kern (at front or back), see p. 22, par. 1 ; p. 7 as par., p.
  - Beard ; the dimension line-to-front, see p. 14, par. 3.
  - Bill of fount or scheme, see p. 126, pars. 3 and 4.
  - black ; a style of type, see p. 83, par. 6 ; and pp. 84-5, fig. 59, ST. . -
  - Blacks; impressions of spaces, quads, furniture, etc., which have risen in he form ’ , blackfriars ; a style of type, see p. 82, §3 ; pp. 84-7, figs. 59 an 0 , an p. , 7
  - and 16.
  - Body or stem or shank ; part of a type, see p. 11, fig. 3-
  - Body-size (of type); now usually defined as a number of points, see p. 59, P bold ; a heavy face of type, see p. 31, last par.
  - booklet; a style of type, see p. 577, ex. 1.
  - Borders and corners, see p. 109, pars. 1 to 3 and figs. 95 to 97.
  - bourgeois ; a size of type, see p. 59, table 3 ; and p. 60, par. 3.
  - Bowl ; part of a letter, see p. 11, par. 2.
  - Braces, see p. III, fig. 104.
  - Break, see pp. 12-14.
  - brevier ; a size of type, see p. 59, table 3.
  - brilliant; a size of type, see p. 71, table 6.
  - broad face, see p. 89, fig. 61.
  - canon ; a size of type, see p. 58, last line.
  - Capitals, see p. 35, table 3, line 3.
  - Cat’s ears ; part of a letter, see p. 11, par. 2.
  - Chase ; an iron frame for holding a page or pages of composed type.
  - Cheltenham; a family of type faces, see pp. 84-7, figs. 59 and 60, p. 86, 55 an 17, and pp. 91 and 92.
  - clarendon ; a style of type, see p. 30, § 2.
  - Clump ; a thick lead, see p. 55, par. 4 ; and p. 114, par. 1.
  - Colophons, see p. 112, last par. and fig. 108.
  - Columbian ; an American size of type, see p. 70, table 6.
  - Columbus ; a style of type, see p. 91, ex. 13.
  - Composing; setting up matter in type or matrices with spaces between the worcs. compressed face, see p. 89, par. 1.
  - condensed face, see p. 89, par. 1 and fig. 61.
  - Counter ; part of a type, see p. 11, fig. 3.
- p.r21 - vue 23/901
- - xxii
  - GLOSSARY OF COMMON TECHNICAL TERMS.
  - Crotch ; part of a letter, see p. ii, par. 2.
  - Dashes, see p. 112, pars. 1 and 2, and figs. 106 and 107.
  - Depth of strike, see p. 11, par. 1.
  - Descenders ; letters or characters that descend below the line.
  - De Vinne ; a family of type faces, see p. 32, § 8; pp. 84-7, figs. 59 and 60; p. 86, §§ 6 and 15; and p. 92.
  - diamond ; a size of type, see p. 58, par. 4.
  - Distributing ; putting back sorts of type or matrices, letters or spaces, into their boxes or compartments in the case or magazine.
  - doric ; a style of type, see p. 30, § 1.
  - Dot ; part of the type tang, see p. 11, fig. 2.
  - Dot ; part of a letter, see p. 28, fig. 41 ; and p. 29, par. 1.
  - double english ;----great primer;-----small pica; American sizes of type, see p. 70, table 6.
  - double pica ; a size of type, see pp. 70-1, table 6 (24-point in America, 22-point in England).
  - Dressing (type) ; see p. 20, pars. 2 and 3.
  - egyptian ; a style of type, see p. 30, § 2 ; pp. 84-5, fig. 59 ; ana p. 87, § 12.
  - em ; a set-wise dimension equal to the body of the type ; also used for defining widths of columns, the pica em being the unit; thus 15 ems = about 24 inches.
  - em quad, see p. 55, par. 1.
  - emerald ; a size of type, see p. 58, par. 4.
  - em-set ; the set width equal to the body of the type.
  - en ; a set-wise dimension equal to half the body of the type.
  - en quad, see p. 55, par. 1.
  - english ; a size of type, see p. 58, par. 4.
  - en-set; the set width equal to half the body of the type.
  - excelsior ; an American size of type, see p. 58, par. 4.
  - expanded face, see p. 89, par. 1 and fig. 61.
  - extended face, see p. 89, par. 1.
  - extra-condensed face, see p. 89, fig. 61.
  - Face ; a designation for styles of type, see p. 10, par. 4.
  - Face ; the printing-surface of type, see p. 11, fig. 3.
  - Family (of type faces), see p. 122, par. 8.
  - fancy face, see p. 83, par. 4.
  - fat face, see p. 89, fig. 61.
  - Foot (of type), see p. 11, fig. 3.
  - Flong, see p. 473, par. 2.
  - Forme; a page or pages of type, secured in a chase, for printing from; see p. 689, par. 8.
  - Former, see p. 122, par. 3.
  - Fount scheme, see p. 126, pars. 3 and 4.
  - Fount of type, see p. 34, par. 3.
  - four-line pica or canon; a size of type, see p. 71, table 6.
  - french antique ; a style of type, see p. 30, last ex.; and p. 31, par. 1.
  - french clarendon ; a style of type, see p. 31, par. 1.
  - Full point or period ; the full stop: full point inverted ; the decimal point.
  - Furniture, see p. 55, par. 3.
  - Galley ; an oblong tray with vertical sides, usually of metal, to which composed type 0 r type-slugs are transferred.
  - Gauge (of type), see p. 11, fig. 4.
  - gothic; a style of type; the American name for sans, sans serif, sanserif, doric or grotesque.
  - great primer ; a size of type, see p. 59, table 3.
  - Groove or heel-nick, see p. 11, fig. 3.
  - grotesque ; a style of type, see p. 30, § 1.
  - Groundwork, see p. 110, par. 2 and fig. 100.
- p.r22 - vue 24/901
- - GLOSSARY OF COMMON TECHNICAL TERMS. xxiil
  - Hair-line, see p. ii, fig. 4.
  - Hair-space, see p. 55, par. 1.
  - hawarden; a style of type, see p. 91, ex. 5.
  - Heel-nick or groove, see p. 11, fig. 3.
  - Height-to-paper, high-to-paper, see p. 14, last par.
  - Inferiors, see p. 39, algebraical signs.
  - inclined sans serif,---gothic,----grotesque; a style of type, see p. 83, par. 9.
  - ionic ; a style of type, see p. 31, § 4.
  - Italian ; a style of type, see p. 90, exs. 8 and 18.
  - italic, see p. 95, last par.
  - jenson ; a style of type, see p. 31, § 5.
  - jobbing faces ; fancy faces, see p. 83, par. 4.
  - Justifying, see p. 19, par. 3.
  - Kern, see p. 21, last par.; and p. 79, fig. 57.
  - latin ; a style of type, see p. 31, § 6.
  - latin character ; as contrasted with the german, greek, arabic, and other characters.
  - Lay of case ; the arrangement adopted for the type in the compartments of the case.
  - Lead, leads, see p. 55, par. 4.
  - Leaders ; dots or dashes placed at intervals in letterpress to guide the eye; two or more dots cast on the same type thus.............
  - lean face, see p. 89, fig. 61.
  - Ligatures, see p. 147, fig. 122; and p. 150, par. 1.
  - Line, alinement, see p. 11, fig. 4; p. 28, fig. 41 and last par.; and p. 122, last par. to p. 126.
  - Line-justification, see p. 77, par. 4.
  - Line-to-back, see p. 11, fig. 4; and p. 14, par. 3.
  - Lock-up (test), see p. 116, fig. 118.
  - Logotypes, see p. 108, par. 4.
  - long primer ; a size of type, see p. 59, table 3 ; and p. 60, par. 3.
  - Lower-case letters ; specifically those letters which are placed in the compartments of the lower case (p. 285, fig. 263); now often used for small letters as opposed to capitals.
  - Low-to-paper, see p. 14, last par.
  - Main-stroke, see p. 11, fig. 4.
  - Matrix, see p. 216, par. 1.
  - Matter ; type set up; dead--------, no longer required for printing; leaded------, with leads between the lines ; live ——, ready and required for printing ; solid -----------,
  - without leads.
  - meridian ; an American size of type, see p. 58, last par. ; and p. 70, table 6.
  - Middle space, see p. 55, par. 1.
  - minikin ; a size of type, see p. 58, par. 4.
  - minion ; a size of type, see p. 59, table 3.
  - minionette ; an American size of type, see p. 70, table 6.
  - modern ; agroup of styles of type, see p. 33,§9; pp. 84-7, figs. 59 and 60 ; and p. 87 §§ II and 19.
  - modernized old-style ; a style of type, see pp. 84-7, figs. 59 and 60; and p. 87, §§ 10 and 18.
  - Monks and friars ; heavy and light impressions of type, high or low to paper respectively, morland ; a style of type, see p. 91, ex. 14.
  - Mould, see p. 241, par. 1.
  - Neck or beard ; part of a type, see p. II, fig. 3.
  - Nick ; part of a type, see p. 11, fig. 3.
  - nonpareil ; a size of type, see p. 59, table 3.
  - old-face ; a style of type, see p. 32, § 8 ; p. 83, last par. ; and pp. 84-7, figs. 59 and 60, §§ 4 and 14.
  - old-style ; a group of styles of type, see p. 32, pars. I and 2 ; and pp. 82-3, § 1.
  - Ornaments, see p. 109, last two pars.; and figs. 98-9.
- p.r23 - vue 25/901
- - xxiv GLOSSARY OF COMMON TECHNICAL TERMS.
  - Page (of type), see p. 144, par. 1.
  - paragon ; pearl; sizes of type, see p. 59, table 3.
  - pica ; a size of type, see p. 58, table 2 ; and p. 59, table 3.
  - Pie ; type which has fallen down or become indiscriminately mixed.
  - Plate ; abbreviation for stereotype-plate.
  - Pocket, to work in ; to pool wages.
  - Point; the unit for type body-sizes = 0'013837 inch, see p. 59, par. 1.
  - Point common line ; point title line, see p. 124, par. 3 and table 10.
  - Point system, see p. 60, par. 3.
  - Points ; punctuation marks, see p. 35, table 1.
  - Punch, see p. 194, par. 2.
  - Quad or quadrat, see p. 55, par. 1.
  - Quotations, see p. 55, par. 3.
  - Reglet, see p. 55, par. 4 ; and p. 113, last par.
  - roman ; type with vertical main strokes, as contrasted with italic, see p. 35, table 1.
  - ronaldson ; a style of type, see p. 91, ex. 8.
  - Rubbing, see p. 19, last par.
  - ruby ; a size of type, see p. 59, table 3.
  - Rules, see p. Iio, last par.; and p. III, fig. 102.
  - sans or sans serif or sanserif; a style of type, see p. 30, § 1.
  - Scheme or bill of fount, see p. 126, pars. 3 and 4.
  - script; a style of type, see p. 96, par. 3; and p. 279, ex.
  - script; a system of written or printed characters.
  - Scrolls, see p. in, par. 2 and fig. 103.
  - Series (of type faces), see p. 121, par. 1.
  - Serif, see p. 11, fig. 4.
  - Set, see p. 11, fig. 4.
  - Shoulder ; part of a type, see p. 11, fig. 3.
  - Side-wall, see p. 11, fig. 4.
  - skeleton antique; a style of type, see p. 90, last ex.
  - Slug or clump, see p. 689, par. 4.
  - Slug ; abbreviation for type-slug.
  - Small capitals, see p. 35, table 1, line 2.
  - small pica ; a size of type, see p. 59, table 3 ; and p. 60, par. 3.
  - Small sorts ; lower-case characters which neither ascend nor descend.
  - Sorts ; the general term for any particular letter or letters as distinguished from a fount.
  - Spaces; hair-------; middle-----; thick------; thin ——, see p. 55, par. t.
  - Stem or shank, see p. 11, fig. 3.
  - Strike (of matrix), see p. 218, par. 1.
  - Superiors, see p. 39, algebraical signs.
  - Tang, see p. 10, par. 1 ; and p. II, fig. 2.
  - three-line pica or two-line great primer ; a size of type, see p. 71, table 6.
  - trafalgar or two-line double pica ; a size of type, see p. 58, last par.
  - tudor black ; a style of type face, see pp. 84-5, fig. 59.
  - two-em quad, see p. 55, par. 1.
  - two-line brevier ; a size of type, see p. 59, table 3.
  - two-line double pica ; —— english ;-------great primer ; —— paragon ; sizes of type, see p. 71, table 6.
  - two-line letter ; a type, usually of the same series, of twice the body-size of others.
  - two-line pica ; ---small pica ; sizes of type, see p. 59, table 3.
  - Type-high ; the same height as type = 0'918 inch.
  - Type-slug, see p. 689, par. 4.
  - typewriter ; a style of type, see p. 91, ex. 9.
  - venetian ; a style of type, see p. 31, par. 5.
  - Winchell ; a style of type, see p. 91, ex. 6.
  - windsor ; a style of type, see p. 91, ex. 7.
- p.r24 - vue 26/901
- - TYPOGRAPHICAL
  - PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - CHAPTER I.
  - PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - " TRatsed work of Metal engraved and eke of Ulood, wherefrom impressions may be wrought before Men’s Eyes, outsbooteth the Art of bim that Hryntetb W00ks; JFor they be Many and of Diverse wise, and out of our ‘knowledge and by us not to be treated. The Hrynter bath Woes of bis own enow: God Rnowetb!” Mirrour of Hryntyng.
  - Brevier old tudor black (Miller & Richard).
  - Printing-surfaces may be divided into several classes, all of which are comprised under intaglio printing-surfaces, lithographic or what may be called smooth printing-surfaces, and relievo or typographical printing-surfaces.
  - I. Intaglio printing-surf aces, which may include the cylindrical as well as the plane surface.
  - (a) Etching.—An ink-containing depression produced by the localized action of an acid or other solvent on a smooth surface.
  - (b) Engraving.—An ink-containing depression produced by the action of a cutting tool or graver on a smooth surface.
  - (c) Dry-point.—An ink-containing depression produced by the scoring of a smooth surface by a pointed tool, ridges being thrown up by its action on one or both sides of the score.
  - (d) Dry-point ebarbee.—A process similar to the preceding, but in which the ridges on the sides of the ink-containing depression are removed.
  - (e) Mezzotint.—Cellular ink-containing depressions produced in (or removed from) a suitable smooth surface at more or less regular intervals.
  - I
  - B
- p.1 - vue 27/901
- - 2 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - (f) Aquatint.—An ink-containing surface interrupted by projecting portions of the original plane surface which are formed by the protection afforded from the mordant by a rosin solution which has granulated in drying on the plate. The most usual materials in which these various forms of ink-containing depressions are produced are steel, zinc, or copper plates suitably prepared. These are generally inked by hand; the surplus ink is removed from the original smooth surfaces, and a damp sheet of paper is laid on the face of the plate. The plate and paper are then passed through a roller press in which a blanket is interposed between the roller and the paper, and the latter is forced into the depressions in the plate. All these intaglio processes are usually confined to the production of artists’ original works, or reproductions of them. They are comparatively slow and costly on account of the very considerable skill required to carry them out successfully.
  - 2. Lithographic or smooth printing-surf aces, also known as planographic printing-surfaces in America, which may include the plane, cylinder and cone, and in which there is little or no appreciable difference of elevation or depression.
  - (a) Lithography.—All forms of lithography proper, which it is unnecessary to describe, save to say that the parts required to receive the ink are kept greasy by suitable means while the parts required to refuse it are kept wet.
  - (b) Anastatic printing.—A form of lithography in which an existing print is used to effect a transfer to a metal plate by a somewhat complicated process in which the elements of lithography and etching are combined.
  - (c) Photographic printing, which includes a large number of diverse processes, but which all practically come under the heading of printing from smooth surfaces.
  - (d) Photographic printing, which includes a large number of diverse processes, some of which approximate to certain of the methods included under intaglio printing.
  - (e) Photographic printing, which depends for its results upon a chemical reaction caused by the transmission of light through a negative on to prepared paper.
  - 3. Relievo or typographical printing-surf aces.—Relievo or typographical printing-surfaces, which include the plane and cylinder, are those in which the printing-surface is in relief, and may be inked by means of an inking-roller.
  - (a) Various forms of relievo, or relief, printing-surfaces known as Process blocks, and chiefly used for illustration, which may be roughly grouped under the terms half-tone blocks, zincographs, etc., all of which can be used in conjunction with the more common typographical surfaces.
- p.2 - vue 28/901
- - PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - 3
  - (b) Typographical printing-surf aces, which are produced directly by means of movable type or indirectly by means of movable matrices which mechanically compose the desired characters, combinations, or groups of suitable length correctly dimensioned, or consist of relief surfaces embossed in thin sheet metal.
  - (c) Typographical etching is akin to the various forms of relief printing just mentioned. One notable use of this method of producing the printing-surface is in the production of the shorthand pages of “ Pitman’s Shorthand Weekly.” In this process a metal plate is covered with a wax etching-ground through which the characters are engraved by means of tools of appropriate shape. When the engraving is completed an electrotype is taken from the plate, from which impressions can be printed. The printing-surface is formed by that portion of the electrotype which was in contact with the metal plate and the whites occur where the wax was left.
  - (d) Graphotype.—In this process a layer of prepared chalk is compressed on a suitable backing so as to present a smooth outer surface. The drawing is made with a glutinous ink on this surface, and after drying, the adjacent non-treated material is removed with a pad of velvet or a brush to a depth of about O’OI inch ; suitable tools are used to obtain increased depth in the whites. The block is then treated with a solution of alkaline silicate, and, when dry, a mould is taken from it, from which an electrotype or stereo-plate can be made.
  - The extent and complexity of the subject of printing-surfaces may easily be realized when it is considered that this entire work will be limited to the consideration of the technology of the production of typographical printing-surfaces, and that not only one, but many volumes could be written about this branch of the subject.
  - Strictly speaking, under this head should also be included various methods employed for the transference of the capabilities of the original printing-surfaces in metal to plaster, paper, flong or papier mache, and all the mechanical and other processes connected therewith. These, however, are treated more briefly, for, though cognate and presenting features of great interest, they do not come under the strict definition of typographical printing-surfaces, but are rather to be regarded as secondary processes or a means for multiplying and rendering available the original metal surfaces for the more rapid production on the press of printed matter, or as a means for preserving a typographical surface by a more economical method than that of keeping the actual type masses.
- p.3 - vue 29/901
- - CHAPTER II.
  - TYPOGRAPHY.
  - “ The setting of Type to Tppe, each Aannikin beside his Brother, duly and as bescemeth his quality, is an Art not to be lightly Learned, and, being apprehended, one that is to be honoured in the Act, as, sooth it is of both high and low in the Result; AFor it is a derp Prince, nay, the mightiest of AHonarchs among the Arts, habing in it the power of Man his Brayne, nay, also of the Tongue, as Saint Paul saith." Mirrour of Pryntpng.
  - Long primer black No. 1 (Figgins).
  - Typography, or, literally, the art of writing by means of movable types, now includes the art of printing on paper or any similar surface not only from movable types, but from printing-surfaces produced as a secondary product from movable types or their equivalent. In this treatise printing-surfaces only are dealt with, or, to speak more accurately, only printing-surfaces such as are produced by the methods specified above. The consideration of this matter, however, presents to-day the peculiar difficulty that, whereas the records of all other callings and industries are effected by means of typography, yet the records of that art itself are singularly deficient, and, for a trade of such antiquity as that of printing, the data available are very meagre.
  - Before, however, entering into the more particular history of this subject, it may be as well to give a brief recital of some salient points in the art generally.
  - Apart from those forms of printing on clay or other plastic surfaces already alluded to in a paragraph of the introduction, the earliest attempts at printing are believed to have been made in China about the commencement of the Christian era. It is said that in the year A.D. 175 the text of the Chinese classics was cut into tables which were erected outside the national university, and that impressions—probably rubbings—were taken of them. It is stated that some of these are still in existence.
  - Printing from engraved wood-blocks was almost contemporaneous with the Christian era, and printing from movable types seems to have been practised in China many centuries before the invention of the art in Europe.
  - In reply to a query addressed to the authorities at the British Museum, the authors are informed that " Chinese writers state that a certain Pi Sheng in the eleventh century invented movable type. This Department
  - 4
- p.4 - vue 30/901
- - TYPOGRAPHY.
  - [the Department of Oriental Printed Books and Manuscripts] possesses a copy of the Wen hsien tung Kao, a Chinese encyclopaedia printed in Korea from movable type in 1337. Further information on the subject will be found in the ‘Chinese Repository,’ volume xix., p. 247 foll. The British
  - -- AepegIH
  - FIG. 1.—Reproduction of xylographic printing.
  - Museum possesses no books printed, or supposed to have been printed, from type made by Pi Sheng.”
  - In Europe xylography, or printing from wood-blocks on paper, does not seem to have been practised before the latter half of the fourteenth
- p.5 - vue 31/901
- - 6
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - century, though this art was certainly applied to the printing of designs, patterns and decorations on woven fabrics, skins, and vellum, and also to the imprinting of single initials and like characters in manuscript works for subsequent filling and illumination by hand. The example from a block-book given in the text, fig. I—a page reproduced on a slightly reduced scale from a facsimile of a page of the original German work, “ Der Entkrist ” (The Antichrist), circa 1450, appearing in the work of Drs. Lippmann and Dohme—will show to what a pitch of practical excellence the art had been carried prior to the advent of individual types.
  - Engraved wood-blocks were formerly used by kings and other important personages for signing documents. Engraved seals are still used in this way in the East as relief printing-surfaces, with the advantage that the prints can be identified with certainty by the illiterate, whereas a written signature, which varies, cannot. A modern revival of this method of attestation is exemplified by the rubber signature stamps used by many of those engaged in the cycle, automobile, and other industries.
  - Without going into the vexed question as to who the original inventor of printing by movable types was, it is sufficient to say that the first authentic European printing-surface composed of movable types, from which we have any recorded impression, was that from which two different editions of Letters of Indulgence issued in the year 1454 by Pope Nicholas V in behalf of the kingdom of Cyprus were produced. This, though the earliest authentic specimen of printing from movable types, was certainly not the earliest specimen that had been produced in this way in Europe, for it is certain that at that date there were at least two rival firms of printers at work, and earlier impressions from movable types must have been taken, though none of them has come down to us, so far as is known.
  - From this date on, the history of printing from movable types is simply part of the general history of human civilization, and does not require further comment here.
  - Though movable types were, in the first instance, possibly made from engraved blocks sawn into rectangular prisms, so roughly fashioned that they were incapable of being locked up, and required other devices to hold them in position, such, for instance, as being bored through or pierced and threaded on wires, or possibly nicked in one or both sides and held in position with strips, the art must have rapidly progressed, for wooden types of fairly good form are stated to have been made. This wooden type, however, must have proved weak and short-lived, and the obvious step was the substitution of some harder material.
  - After various experiments, an alloy of the metals lead and tin was adopted, with, subsequently, the addition of varying quantities of antimony, and occasionally of other metals such as copper and bismuth. These metal types may at first have been produced by engraving, but if so the process was too slow and costly, and ended in types being cast from matrices which,
- p.6 - vue 32/901
- - TYPOGRAPHY. 7
  - in the first instance, were made of wood and later on of lead. Here, again, the inferior hardness of the material demanded the use of a harder matrix. After various attempts to engrave metal matrices, the tedious repetition involved in this process led to the production of engraved steel punches which were struck into copper. Having arrived at this stage, the art of producing a printing-surface had made a fair start.
  - The early types, however formed, were not very accurate, and piobably could not be secured by locking up as they are to-day. To enable them to be handled when set up, their shanks, as mentioned, may have sometimes been pierced and the types strung together with thread or wire, or otherwise secured. As the individual types required much handwork in their making, the printer could not carry a large stock, and in this pristine period in the history of typography, books were often printed page by page, and, after the requisite number of impressions had been struck off, the types were distributed, and the composition of the next page was commenced.
  - The paper used by the early printers was hand-made, much tougher and better capable of adapting itself to the inequalities of the printing surface than the highly-glazed, machine-made papers of to-day. This old paper, owing to its power of adaptation to inequalities, has been much sought after by artists for printing etchings. Hand-made paper of long fibre, used damp and with an elastic back, gave an impression in which the breadth of the actual lines forming the face of the type was uniformly widened, and consequently the hair-lines and serifs were broadened out of proportion to the main-strokes, the external corners at the same time becoming rounded. One has only to examine old prints with the micro-scope to see this; under a suitable power the circumjacent surplus ink appears as a band, almost detached from the edge of the actual impression of the type itself. This defect contributed in a rather marked degree to legibility, for it tended, as has been said, to thicken the hair-lines and thus render more pronounced the difference between the less dissimilar letters. The highly-glazed papers of to-day, of short fibre, containing much sizing and mineral matter, are not adapted for printing from such irregular surfaces ; their want of flexibility requires a hard and true backing, and hence increased accuracy in the printing-surface in order to obtain a uniformly sharp impression. Modern calendered paper has, however, rendered possible the reproduction of the admirable process blocks with which the current high-class papers and periodicals are illustrated. The depth of the grain in process blocks is so small that the old paper can not be used effectively for direct printing from this small height of relief.
  - From the earliest days of printing to the present day the thickness of paper used for ordinary book-work, however, has kept approximately between the same limits.
  - What, moreover, we term paper, did not exist, except in China and Japan, before the eighth century; it is stated not to have been manufactured in Europe before the twelfth century. According to the Italian
- p.7 - vue 33/901
- - 8
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - professor, Jos. La Mantia, as quoted by the " Inland Printer,” the earliest known piece of [European] paper in existence is a letter from Adelaide, third wife of Roger I, Count of Sicily, written about A.D. 1109. It measures eleven inches by thirteen inches, is of a strong texture, and has a pinkish white tinge. According to the " Deutscher Buch- und Stein-drucker,” the oldest piece of paper known is one which dates to a.d. 399, and was found near the Turfan Oasis, in Asia. The papyrus generally used as a writing-surface prior to the dates given could not be folded like ordinary rag-paper, and would probably have been torn to pieces under the action of the printing-press. Being built up of separate portions of the papyrus reed, it could not be rolled up in the same way as a sheet of paper can be rolled, but had to be wound round a wooden cylinder or roller. Parchment, the earliest common medium for carrying writing, is greasy, resists ink, and is comparatively troublesome to handle, being regarded even at the present day as a most undesirable printing, or even writing, material; moreover, as a rule its surface is not a plane.
  - Combined with the paper difficulty, there was another difficulty. The ancients, as has been said, lacked a suitable printing-ink, and, trifling as this fact may seem, it was one of the chief obstacles in the way of successful progress ; for even had types been invented, printing from them would have been an impossibility without the contemporaneous invention of a suitable printing-ink.
  - The Chinese, thanks to the highly absorbent nature of their paper, were never confronted with this difficulty; so that although, strictly speaking, they were printers even at that remote period, yet they were not printers in the special sense in which the term has from the commencement been understood in Europe.
  - The writing-ink of European classical antiquity was made of a thin wash of soot, thickened with gum, with an acid sometimes added to make it bite into the surface of the parchment or papyrus. Later, oak galls and sulphate of iron were also used in the early writing-inks. These thin watery inks would have collected in blotches on a smooth metal surface, and if stamped on ordinary paper or parchment, the impressions would have been of irregular blackness and illegible in many places. The discovery which proved a kind and helpful godfather to the invention of printing was the invention of the mixing of colours with oil—a step which wrought a revolution in the art, or rather, really made the art a practical possibility. It is generally, but erroneously, attributed to Jan van Eyck, of Holland, or to his brother Hubert, who lived during the early part of the fifteenth century. The printers, it is said, finding that they could not use the ink of the copyists, took a hint from the painters, and, mixing their lamp-black with oil, succeeded in making an ink which answered their purpose admirably, and enabled them to give to the world books, which, after more than four centuries, are still beautifully legible.
  - Since the foregoing paragraph was written, the authors’ attention
- p.8 - vue 34/901
- - TYPOGRAPHY,
  - 9
  - has been called to William A. Shaw’s remarkable article in the " Connoisseur,” of October, I9II, Apart from the vindication of the latent artistic nature of Englishmen and of our grand old school of painting and its masters, who in their age were second to none, the fact that the use of oil-painting was known in England possibly more than a century before it was independently discovered—which it is difficult to suppose or borrowed by the van Eycks, is a matter of singular interest. Had the need for printing been pressing in this country in the fourteenth century, doubtless necessity, the mother of invention, would have given Englishmen the pride of place in that art owing to the power which they would then unquestionably have had of producing a proper printer’s ink with materials ready to hand and with the help of methods well known and in common use.
  - Further research while these pages were going through the press has carried the knowledge of the’ discovery of the method of painting in oils back by at least a couple of centuries, and probably a wider sweep of investigation would take the date of its invention yet deeper into the past.
  - The work of the monk Theophilus, " Diversarum artium Schaedula, a translation of which was published in 1843 by Count Charles de 1 Escalopier, should give its quietus to the widespread error that credited Jan van Eyck with the invention of oil-painting about the year 1410. Theophilus noted its use, and himself employed this method between the end of the eleventh and the beginning of the twelfth century. Jan van Eyck was probably the inventor of drying or siccative varnish for pictures, and it is not unlikely that this fact gave rise to the general misconception.
  - Possibly, moreover, the retardation of the invention of printing, though doubtless largely due to ignorance as to the potentialities that lay latent in a proper printer’s ink, was due quite as much to the fact that no real necessity for the invention existed; for it must never be forgotten in connexion with printing, that cheapness of production of manuscript works, at any rate in the days of ancient Rome, actually to a certain extent rivalled the productions of the present-day printing-press when the limited editions and the limited number of readers are considered. The press of the day consisted of scribes who were educated slaves ; their food and clothing cost but little, and they could produce books faster than the books could be sold. A large number of these slaves would be assembled in a great hall and write from the dictation of a reader selected for his accuracy and clearness of enunciation, with the result that an edition of a poet’s latest work or the latest declamation of an orator, or the commentary of a jurist on some edict or current law, was produced at a price which rendered all thought of the invention of any further labour-saving methods unnecessary.
  - It is stated that a roll of Martial’s " First Book of Epigrams ” in plain binding or casing was sold for six sesterces, or about one shilling, by the Roman booksellers. It is only in the last few years, indeed, that this price . has been approached in the twelve-penny volumes and cheap editions of the day.
- p.9 - vue 35/901
- - CHAPTER III.
  - DESCRIPTION OF TYPE.
  - “ Types to they that be of the Craft are as things that be Alibc. He is an ill Worker that handleth them not gently and foith Meberence. n them is the poker of Thought contained, and all that cometh therefrom."
  - Mirrour of Aryntyng.
  - Long primer augustan black (Stephenson, Blake & Co.).
  - As usually cast, a type has attached to it a tang or gate which carries with it a small plug, generally the frustum of a cone, known as the dot. This dot consists of the metal which remains in a piece intermediate between the mould and the nozzle of the metal-pot from which the supply of liquid metal for casting the types is ejected. The tang, of course, has to be removed, and the lower surface or foot of the type dressed or grooved so as to get rid of the projecting irregularities resulting from the fracture of the tang. This operation has usually been carried out by hand, and the types, after the removal of the tang, are set up, also by hand, on sticks preparatory to their transfer to the dressing-bench, where they have the irregularities at the break removed by the passage of a hand-plane along the inverted line of type, the plane at the same time producing what is known as the heel-nick.
  - Hitherto this groove in the foot has been considered as essential in good type, but modern practice, supported by the experience gained from several machines which cast and trim the type by other methods, or cast the type perfect as regards its foot bearing, has shown that the mere removal of projecting metal is all that is really necessary, and that the provision of the heel-nick as a distinct depression is unnecessary.
  - The names for the various parts of a type are shown in figs. 2 and 3.
  - The term face is also generally applied to any fount of type when describing its features, for instance broad face, narrow face, etc.
  - The names of the various parts of the face and of the dimensions are given in fig. 4.
  - The dimension given as side-wall does not appear to have had a name till recently, when it was thus named in the matrices of the Wicks machine.
  - TO
- p.10 - vue 36/901
- - DESCRIPTION OF TYPE.
  - II
  - The distance from the face to the shoulder is known as the depth of strike.
  - In addition to the names given to the various parts shown in figs. 2. 3, and 4, certain parts of characters have names of their own, for example, the round portion of the letters b d p q surrounding the counter is known as the bowl, the bulb at the end of the tail of the letters
  - fj y is the tail-dot, the lugs at the top of the capital letters C G are cat’s ears, and the sharp extremities of the counters of the letters KMN VW and many other sorts are styled crotches.
  - Various devices, at present by no means universally adopted, have been designed with a view to eliminating the work of breaking off the tang, setting up the type and planing the heel-nick; all of
  - 5
  - 5
  - 2
  - Fig. 2.—Isometric view of type as usually cast before and after breaking off the tang.
  - I. The dot. 3. The body.
  - 2. The tang. 4. The nick.
  - 5. The face.
  - Fig. 3.—Isometric view of type. (21 times full size.)
  - I. The face.
  - 2. The counter.
  - 3. The neck (or beard).
  - 4. The shoulder.
  - 5. The stem or shank.
  - 6. The front.
  - 7. The back.
  - 8. The nicks.
  - 9. The heel-nick or groove.
  - 10. The feet.
  - II. The pin-mark or drag.
  - 2
  - 12
  - 117
  - Fig. 4.—Plan 0/ type.
  - (2 times full size.)
  - I. The line.
  - 2. Serifs.
  - 3. Main-stroke.
  - 4. Hair-line.
  - 5. Line-to-back.
  - 6. Beard.
  - 7. Side-wall.
  - 8. Body.
  - 9. Set.
  - The body-wise dimension of the face is called the gauge.
- p.11 - vue 37/901
- - 12
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - these operations were formerly performed by hand. A few typical examples of breaks may now be considered:—
  - I. Mason’s break, fig. 5, which has been adopted in type-moulds
  - Fig. 5.—Mason’s break.
  - prior to the introduction of self-dressing matrices. Two inclined recesses are formed in the breaks of the mould which produce projecting shoulders on the tang; these are caught by the inclined faces of the breaks and the upward movement of the top break causes a greater rotational movement of the tang than the movement of the mould-faces permits to the
  - type-body, thus causing the tang to be twisted away from the body of the type.
  - 2. Non-dressing break, fig. 6. An improvement made in moulds fitted with Mason’s breaking arrangement, consisted in fitting two
  - semicylin drical wires, each containing one-half of a cylindrical hole having its axis at right angles to the axes of the wires, which are coincident. The tang-wire requires to be set to position for each alteration in set width
  - Fig. 6.—Non-dressing break.
  - of the matrix which is in use. By the introduction of self-dressing matrices, the type were ejected finished from the mould, the break being effected in the small cylindrical portion of the tang contained between the wires and occurring below the surface of the foot.
  - 3. The Davis break, fig. 7. In this a triangular wire having a short slot
  - Fig. 7.—Davis break.
  - at one end is fitted to the lower half of the mould. The type is broken away from the tang by the action of the drag fitted to the upper half of the mould, when the mould commences to open, and the tang is subsequently ejected from the wire by means of a pusher.
  - 4. The Nuernberger-Rettig break, fig. 8. In this break two sections of cylindrical surfaces are formed in the top and bottom halves
- p.12 - vue 38/901
- - DESCRIPTION OF TYPE.
  - 0
  - of the mould into which they project from the tang-blocks ; these are guided by plates in, and are spring-operated from, the carriages. After the cast is completed and when the pressure against the tang-blocks has been removed, these retire under
  - the action of the springs, dragging the tang with them and subsequently ejecting it. The break takes place within the depression at the foot of the type, but the method evidently re
  - Fig. 8.—Nuernberger-Rettig break.
  - quires the use of springs of considerable strength when the set
  - width of the type is large.
  - 5 The Stringer break, fig.
  - Fig. 9.—Stringer break.
  - 9. Two V-shaped nicks are formed one on each side of the tang by means of inset pieces working in conjunction with the mould. The type, after ejection from the mould by the action of the body-slide, is automatically passed into a raceway, and the tang fractured by a blow or thrust.
  - 6. The Typograph break, fig. 10.
  - In this form, which is applied to
  - a slug-casting machine, the jet does not run the whole length of the slug, and a portion of the base of the slug is depressed over a slightly greater length. The jet is sheared off within the boundary of this depressed surface, the fractured metal coming below the foot which surrounds it on three sides.
  - 7- The Monotype break, fig. II. In the Monotype mould, which casts single type, no provision is made for ensuring that fracture takes place below the
  - Fig. io.—Typograph break.
  - surface of the foot, but the tang which joins the body at one
  - FIG. II.—Monotype break.
  - the Grantype—which casts
  - edge is sheared off by the movement of the mould, leaving a surface which has been found to be sufficiently true for all practical purposes.
  - 8. The Grantype break, fig. 12. In a line of single or loose type in one
- p.13 - vue 39/901
- - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - operation—by designing the blocks of appropriate form,
  - Dimension 5, fig. 4 (line-to-back).
  - Fig. 12.—Grantype break.
  - foot of the type and the tang-the fracture below the surface of the foot of the break, which is confined to one side of the stem or body of the type, is mechanically ensured ; and this method also is found to be perfectly adequate to all the requirements of the modern printer.
  - Efforts have been made to cast type from other portions than the foot, but they have not met with success in practice hitherto, as far as the authors know.
  - is the datum for all measurements
  - of a fount—pronounced font, and so spelt in America—of type, and that of the lower-case m or capital H is usually taken as the standard, but the difference between the body-size and this dimension is also frequently referred to as a dimension, and called the beard. In actually measuring type, dimension 5 is that which is measured.
  - The nick is in the front of the type in England, America, Germany, and most other countries, but in France and Belgium it is placed at the
  - back. A supplementary nick is cut, usually just below the shoulder, in the small capitals os v w x z to enable these characters to be distinguished from the lower-case. In old-style the small capital I is also marked to enable it to be distinguished from the figure 1.
  - When finished type is produced direct from the casting machine, as in the case of Wicks type, a different method of identification is required. This can be effected by the provision of a projection on the beard having its upper surface a sufficient distance below the face of the character to avoid producing an impression on the paper. This is shown in fig. 13. The pin-mark, or drag, shown in fig. 3, only occurs in certain machine-made type. The dimension from the
  - Identification mark.
  - Supplementary nick.
  - Me
  - Fig. 13.—Small capital types showing means of identification.
  - foot to the face is called the
  - height-to-paper ; the standard for this in England is now 0*918 inch. The term high-to-paper is used to express a deviation in excess of the standard ; thus type 0’920 inch high is described as being 0’002 inch high-to-paper. The converse is expressed by the term low-to-paper.
- p.14 - vue 40/901
- - CHAPTER IV.
  - TYPEFOUNDING.
  - “ Now (according to Custom) is Half a Pint of Sack mingled with Sallad Oyl provided for each "Workman to drink, . , ,” Moxon’s Mechanick Exercises.
  - Long primer old-style antique No. 2 (Shanks & Sons).
  - IN the early days of printing, the typefounder was not only a founder pure and simple, but also to some extent a metallurgist and mixer of metals, and that some of his experiences in the pursuit of his art were not altogether pleasant is evidenced by the quaint quotation from Moxon’s famous work, which is given at the head of this chapter.
  - Sir Henry Bessemer, whose father was originally the engraver to the French Mint, and afterwards in England became a punch-cutter and typefounder, also alludes in his autobiography to the trouble arising from the dust of the crude antimony when it was being broken up for the melting-pot, this work often seriously affecting the workmen engaged in it. He adds that his father also used tin and copper, which made his type superior in hardness to that of his contemporaries.
  - Moxon says, “ What the metal founders make printing letters of is lead hardened with iron: thus, they choose stub nails for the best iron to melt. . . .” Nearly a century later iron was still used, but it was subsequently shown that its utility in the making of type-metal was due to its combining with the sulphur contained in the crude antimony then available ; when purer forms of the latter metal were commercially obtainable, iron was no longer used.
  - Type-metal at the present day consists chiefly of lead, antimony and tin, with, in some cases, the addition of a small percentage of copper. Experiment has demonstrated that from 1'8 to 2 per cent of copper is the maximum which it is possible to alloy with typefounders’ metal.
  - Line-casting machine type-metal undergoes a wastage or depreciation ; this depreciation amounts often to an average of 2 per cent each time the metal passes through one complete cycle of making and using. The proportions, in which the metals are combined, are usually varied according to the size of type to be cast. Type of small size requires a hard alloy 15
- p.15 - vue 41/901
- - r6 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - which also must flow very freely ; it usually contains a much higher percentage of tin and antimony. The percentage of tin falls more rapidly than does the percentage of antimony as the size of type to be cast increases ; in fact, in the case of furniture and leads, no tin at all need be used. The proportions in which the metals are mixed vary considerably with different founders, but a general idea of the proportions generally
  - Per cent.
  - 100 r-r
  - Per cent.
  - Tin.
  - 60
  - 20
  - 20
  - 40
  - 8
  - 40
  - 20
  - Lead.
  - 40
  - Antimony.
  - so
  - Size of body.
  - Fig. 14.—Composition of type-metal for different body-sizes.
  - —___ 100 80 Points.
  - used may be obtained from the diagram, fig. 14, which shows the percentages and their variation for different sizes of type. In general, only three or four alloys are used in any particular foundry, as these are found sufficient to cover the requirements of practice.
  - Casting.—In the early days of typefounding the metal was first melted in a pot from which it was taken in a ladle and poured by hand into the mould. This was jerked upwards by the founder with a peculiar and
- p.16 - vue 42/901
- - TYPEFOUNDING.
  - 17
  - dexterous motion, so as to cause the liquid metal to reach the matrix at its end and so obtain a cast of the impression previously made by the punch.
  - Furniture and leads, which are usually of too great and too variable length to be conveniently produced in casting machines, are still being cast by this method.
  - Early in the nineteenth century a pump, partially immersed in the metal-pot, was brought into use, so that the molten metal was injected into the mould under considerable pressure, and the cast effected with greater certainty and speed.
  - The United States patent of M. D. Mann and S. Sturdevant, of 7 January, 1831, shows a pump with a spring-propelled plunger. This appears to the authors to forestall both the patents of Sir Henry Bessemer, No. 7585, of 8 March, 1838, and the United States patent of D. Bruce, jun., No. 632, of 17 March, 1838, which cover a pump with a spring-propelled piston and an opening and closing mould.
  - The improvement resulting from the use of such a pump in the process of typecasting, being such an interesting and important one, the authors make no apology for inserting here an extract from that extremely interesting book, “ The Autobiography of Sir Henry Bessemer,” which practically covers the whole question of the change of typefounding from a purely manual to a mechanical art; for though forestalled in actual date by the patent of Mann and Sturdevant of 1831, as has been pointed out, Sir Henry’s patent carried out and virtually made use of improved methods, certain of which, as far as the authors are aware, have been brought into practical use by no other inventor up to the present day. Sir Henry, so far as can be ascertained, has nowhere left an exact description of how he carried out his invention of exhausting the air from the mould at a moment prior to the injection of the molten metal.
  - It is within the authors’ knowledge that, about the year 1899, a patent was applied for, or proposed to be applied for, for producing a vacuum in moulds and that a sum of money was paid for the patent or the suggestion, which, had the interested parties known of Sir Henry Bessemer’s work, would not have been done. The authors are also aware that the idea has been revived and its application suggested as a novelty in connexion with another patent of quite recent date.
  - Sir Henry writes, in his " Autobiography,” as follows:
  - " When I was experimenting with plumbago (about 1838) I was engaged in designing a new system of casting types by machinery, some features of which are of sufficient interest to be recorded. The moulds in this machine were entirely composed of hardened and tempered steel, shaped by laps, as the metal could be neither planed nor filed. From fifty-five to sixty types were cast per minute in each of the two compartments of the mould ; and in order that the solidification of the metal should take place in the extremely small interval of time allowed for that purpose, the moulds were cooled by a constant flow of cold water through suitable
  - C
- p.17 - vue 43/901
- - 18 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - passages made in them, in close proximity to those parts where the fluid metal came in contact. Another special feature of this mode of casting was the employment of a force-pump placed within the bath of melted metal, by means of which the latter was injected into the mould at the proper moment, the pressure of the injected fluid being under the perfect control of a loaded valve. It will be readily understood that a sharp jet of fluid metal would propel with it an induced current of air, and consequently produce a bubbly and spongy casting, which would have been wholly valueless. The short space of time occupied in its solidification afforded no opportunity for the escape of air in the usual way by floating in bubbles upward, as in the case of castings where the metal is retained in its molten state in the mould for several minutes.
  - “ I found an absolute cure for this apparently insuperable difficulty, by forming a vacuum in the mould at the very instant at which the injection of metal took place ; and so successful was this system of exhausting the moulds, that one might break a hundred types in succession without finding a single blowhole in any one of them.
  - " The iron or brass founder, whose slow and tedious operations are performed by quietly pouring his molten metal into the mould with a ladle, will at once see what a new departure in the art of founding this machine presented. Firstly, there was the same mould producing fifty-five to sixty castings per minute, instead of being broken up and destroyed after one cast: then pouring the metal from a ladle was replaced by injecting it with a force-pump, the mould itself having a continuous stream of cold water running through suitable passages formed in it so as to cool every part of its surface in contact with the fluid metal; and, finally, instead of the mould being composed of porous materials through which the confined air gradually escaped, there was an almost indestructible mould, wholly free from pores, from which all the contained air was withdrawn in the fraction of a second by its sudden connection with an exhausted vessel at the moment when the metal was injected.
  - " The valve through which the metal was injected into the mould, being extremely small, required to be fitted very closely to prevent its leaking ; it was found that after it had been opened and closed some six or seven thousand times, a portion of the fluid metal would, by friction against the sides of the valve, be rubbed into powder, and more or less obstruct its action. Otherwise, the really beautiful mechanism of this casting machine performed all its functions with perfect precision, and formed the bodies of the type so parallel and so perfect in other respects, that it soon began to create much jealous feeling and opposition among the type-founders, whose occupation was threatened by it. For this reason, Messrs. Wilson, the well-known type-founders, of Edinburgh, to whom I had sold my invention, preferred to make no further efforts to improve the valve arrangements, and allowed the whole matter to sink quietly into oblivion rather than face the storm they saw was brewing.”
- p.18 - vue 44/901
- - TYPEFOUNDING.
  - The gate through which the metal passes into the mould becomes also filled with type-metal, and forms the projecting tang which must be removed subsequently from the type, which in itself is either cast finished from the mould or has to go through various other operations already alluded to
  - before the foot is finished.
  - The face of the type is obtained from an impression, usually made by a punch, in a piece of soft copper, of bronze, or of nickel called a matrix. The sides of the mould are formed of steel, ground and lapped. As the mould goes through the various stages of opening and closing at each cast, the surfaces must be so true that the molten type-metal will not flow between them under the pressure at which it is injected into the mould, as otherwise a fin or fringe would be formed at the joints of the mould. The
  - position of the matrix relatively to the sides of the mould must be very accurately determined, so that the face may be cast in the proper position on the shoulder. This work requires careful positioning of the matrix to bring the strike into its proper place relatively to the mould cavity. This may be effected by stops or registers attached to the mould or by mechanical constraint of the matrix independently of the mould. In any case, the strike must be accurately placed relatively to some portions of the external surfaces of the matrix.
  - The work of shaping by hand or machining the exterior of the matrix so as to be true and correctly placed re
  - Fig. 15—Type before rubbing.
  - Fig. 16.—Type after rubbing.
  - latively to the shank of the type to be
  - cast from it, is known as justifying; it is very highly-skilled work, an is performed by casting a type from the mould, and comparing it with a standard lower-case m and correcting the matrix till the face of the trial type agrees with the standard for alinement, and occupies its correct position on the shoulder, so that the proper amount of side-wall is given
  - on each side. .
  - When type are cast in matrices which are not of the non-rubbing n , that portion which projects beyond the stem of the type, fig. 15, is usua y removed by rubbing on the sides and occasionally at the top and bottom a so. This operation is performed by hand on a rubbing-file, which is a large at piece of steel cut with teeth like a file over the whole of its surface, or more usually on a rubbing-stone, which is similar to an ordinary grindstone, but is used lying on a bench on one of its flat sides; it is usually of sufficient area to allow of its use by two or more workmen at the same time. After
- p.19 - vue 45/901
- - 20
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - the sides of the type have been rubbed sufficiently to remove these projections, as is shown in fig. 16, it is set up by boys or girls upon a stick, fig. 17, in line, in the first operation, face outwards.
  - The sticks of type are then passed to a workman known as a dresser,
  - Fig. 17.—Setting-up stick.
  - who at the dressing-bench, fig. 18, transfers the lines individually to the dressing-rod, fig. 19, in which each of them in turn is supported on the face of the type by a brass strip and clamped for length by an adjustable jaw operated by a screw. In order that the line may be securely held and supported, the dressing-rod is then
  - placed in the dressing-bench, which is practically a vice with jaws of sufficient length to clamp the whole line of type. A piece of hardwood is rubbed to and fro over the length of the line, now occupying a position
  - Fig. 18.—Dressing-bench.
  - with the face downwards, with sufficient pressure to ensure the faces coming down evenly on to the brass supporting-surfaces of the dressing-rod.
  - Fig. 19.—Dressing-rod.
  - The dressing-plane, fig. 20, now comes into operation, and is used by the dresser to plough out the groove between the feet, frequently known
- p.20 - vue 46/901
- - TYPEFOUNDING.
  - 21
  - as the heel-nick. The manner in which the dressing-rod is held between the jaws of the dressing-bench and in which the dressing-plane is guided by the line of type while the nick is being cut, is shown in fig. 21.
  - In some cases, and particularly for the purpose of enabling certain small-capital sorts to be readily distinguished from lower-case or other sorts of the same fount so closely resembling them that there is the ns of confusing them, for example, the o s v w x z, and I in old-style, it is necessary to cut a supplementary nick, usually placed high on the stem,
  - Fig. 20.—Dressing-plane.
  - Fig. 21.—Section of dressing-plane, rod and bench.
  - for identification purposes in these small capitals. This operation is also performed by the dresser, who uses a somewhat different plane, fig. 22.
  - When the actual printing-face of the character projects set-wise beyond the stem of the type, it is said to kern, and the projecting portion, which in this case cannot be removed by rubbing, must be trimmed so that it does not, when set up, foul the bevel of any type to which it may be adjacent. This operation also comes within the province of the dresser, who uses the same plane as that used for cutting the supplementary nick, or one somewhat similar. The type are set up body-wise on the stick instead of set-wise, as in the former operations of cutting the heel-nick or the supplementary nick, and the planing operation bevels the overhanging portion down from the face to meet the body, as shown in figs. 56 and 57, p. 79.
- p.21 - vue 47/901
- - 22
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - When the actual printing-face of the character projects body-wise beyond the stern of the type, it is said to beard, and the projecting portion must be treated as in the case of a kerned sort. Bearding was a troublesome peculiarity not unusual in early printed works, where, especially in the capital letters, ornamental flourishes were liberally added, while, in
  - Fig. 22.—Nicking, kerning, and bearding plane.
  - the lower-case those abbreviations (a relic of the days of manuscript books) which represented omitted letters or syllables, made this peculiar feature quite common. Bearding is becoming rare because of the obvious
  - Elevation.
  - Fig. 23.—Kerning file.
  - Plan.
  - 1
  - O ©
  - 1
  - risk of fouling between ascenders and descenders in consecutive lines of printed matter when set without leading.
  - In the case of type of large body and where the amount of kern is very great, as in some oriental founts—such as Arabic, Sanskrit, Gujarati, the members of the Dravidian group, namely Tamil, Malayalim, Telugu and
- p.22 - vue 48/901
- - TYPEFOUNDING.
  - 23
  - Kanarese, and to go further east Burmese, Javanese and various neighbour scripts—a different method is applied, because the overhanging portion is of such length that it must be reduced on its flat lower surface so as
  - Fig. 24.—Detail of kerning file.
  - just to clear the shoulder of the adjacent type. Such type, of course, is much more liable to damage and breakage. The operation of dressing the kern is in this case effected by rubbing the type singly over a kerning file held in an apparatus shown in fig. 23; this contrivance is fitte wit 1 a sliding guide for the type, shown full size in fig. 24.
- p.23 - vue 49/901
- - CHAPTER V.
  - TYPE DESIGN.
  - “ God hath given us Eyes, but herein is Mystery, for the Devil of his Malice hath them marred that they see not at all Times aright.” Mirrour of Pryntyng.
  - la-point Cheltenham bold condensed (American Type Founders Co.).
  - PROBABLY not one reader in a thousand appreciates the degree to which he is critical about size and alinement of type ; the ease with which the eye detects want of alinement in two adjacent lines, used by the engineer in the vernier for obtaining accuracy, here acts conversely in requiring it. A difference of 0’001 or 0’002 inch in alinement is readily apparent, and a difference of 0’002 or 0-003 inch in the size of a character is easily noticeable; not only must the characters be of the correct size and truly placed, but the proper proportions of thickness of stroke,
  - FIG. 25.—Brick ornamentation ; Gloucester Road tube station.
  - length of serif, and other variable dimensions must be maintained throughout the fount.
  - In justifying and in punch-cutting it is necessary to remember that type faces must not be made so as actually to be in alinement, or so that the characters are of equal size, but they must be made to appear so.
  - To show the very great importance of adopting what may be styled accurate inaccuracies by the use of which the human eye is deceived, or deceives itself, inaccuracies which are necessary in the designing of type owing to the failure of the eye to differentiate realities from illusions, a few examples are given which show in accentuated form the difficulties that have to be considered and overcome by the punch-cutter or the designer of type faces.
  - 24
- p.24 - vue 50/901
- - TYPE DESIGN.
  - 25
  - Included among the specimens illustrated are two, the effect of which on a large scale can be observed in certain of the London tube railway stations, where the patterns set out in coloured tiles on some of the station walls produce curious and not infrequently startling effects.
  - Fig. 26.—Brick ornamentation ; Down Street tube station.
  - These are shown in figs. 25 and 26, which should be viewed from a distance of about four feet.
  - In fig. 27 the lines AB, CD, EF, and GH are all strictly parallel, but
  - Fig. 27.—Combined parallel and diagonal lines.
  - =***D
  - E AX F
  - -=====
  - the diagonal lines drawn across them produce the illusion of their being convergent and divergent. If, however, they are viewed from a sufficient distance, the illusion is destroyed.
  - Fig. 28.—Combined arrow-heads and vertical lines.
  - The vertical lines in fig. 28 are of equal length, though the 2nd, 4th, and 6th appear shorter than the 1st, 3rd, 5th, and 7th.
  - If the eyesight is perfect, the letters in fig. 29, from a block supplied by the courtesy of Curry & Paxton, should all appear of the same
- p.25 - vue 51/901
- - 26
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - shade in any position through which the page may be turned. But perfect eyesight is very rare.
  - Before coming to a definite conclusion about the nature of some of these errors, it is necessary to turn the book through 360°, and notice whether the apparent errors remain uniform for all changes of position. Any noticeable difference is probably due to astigmatism, which should be corrected by proper glasses before the comparison of characters and the estimation of their errors are undertaken.
  - HORIZONTAL. 15° 309
  - 459 609 759
  - O' O O)
  - 1059
  - 1209
  - Cn O • a a
  - Hatched letters (Curry 6 Paxton, London).
  - Fig. 29.—Block letters with white hatched lines.
  - Nearly all the illusions given are traceable to two factors shown in figs. 27 and 28 respectively; that is to say, firstly, the difficulty which the eye finds in correctly defining the direction of a line crossed by a series of oblique lines ; and secondly, the difficulty the eye finds in estimating the length of a line, especially when its limits are defined by arrow points or similar converging lines. The authors, however, in this as in other similar matters do not profess to be able to give a satisfactory explanation of these phenomena, but must leave them to the specialist.
  - The example shown in fig. 30, in which the circular dots appear
- p.26 - vue 52/901
- - [To face page 26.
  - 2
  - 5
  - er
  - CO 6 E
  - 5
  - co
  - 08 e
- p.n.n. - vue 53/901
- - n
  - H.
  - H
  - 1 O
  - so-Me. Eh
  - -
  - 4 o or
  - i
  - 1 V.S s oxtie
  - -
  - 1 tin"
  - 00 eoe — 51,0 ameste 9. MT a Be
  - virds
  - 4o
  - A. - iore
  - be gon and gsai
  - ,.ET e. Tm set oot o 11
  - -
  - oedEE Toe oe s. 1 tsn oapoou oi
  - gotoi ~ . Sat ' sti Trooet
  - i . t -
  - -- -' st, ale , - - ns D ooe
  - so ,
  - o .
  - a - w gio o
  - ‘- : rd 78, -"
  - " : -
  - -
  - 0
- p.n.n. - vue 54/901
- - PLATE I.
  - Fig. 31.—Inclined strokes on background of square black dots.
  - FIG. 32.—Inclined strokes and black dots intersected.
  - I 1 1 I L
  - I I I I L
  - 7
  - I I I I
  - FIG. 33.—Inclined strokes overlapping.
  - Fig. 34.—Short inclined strokes not overlapping.
  - Fig. 35.—Zig-zag strokes.
  - [To face page 26.
- pl.1 - vue 55/901
- - PLATE II.
  - Fig. 36.—Inclined strokes on chequered background.
  - Fig. 37.—Circles appearing flattened in two directions each, at right angles.
  - t he eh
  - j,
  - $ *
  - < § s 2 85 o s 2 & Xoi co /
  - :6
  - Fig. 40.—Distorted figures appearing to be of circular form.
- pl.2 - vue 56/901
- - o
  - : g
  - 1
  - 1 on.
  - Tee nil . -inn M
  - * go "
  - ids - ,
  - Thnor To pni
  - 8 of
  - 2
- p.n.n. - vue 57/901
- - Fig. 36.
  - Fig 37.
  - To tellow plate I.
  - FIG. 40.
- p.n.n. - vue 58/901
- - j
  - Fro. 38
  - FIG. 39
  - a
  - - - 4
  - -
  - gntis . si
  - vol
  - opnt Nrv -s
  - 7
  - --2 - -
  - 6/ 1-50S53 — o A se gut -------so (A. - , gioping
  - Can w
  - was wu -
  - o - T — -
  - Song .
  - [To follow plate
  - A y *
  - si
  - i iocoi 4
  - y
  - T
  - , ele “-0 A. h -
  - (si) Y
  - 6 d
- p.n.n. - vue 59/901
- - T A o
  - -
  - 1
  - 15-1
  - * -
  - -oaio i & . -
  - Rei in la
  - les woliolI
  - -o o
  - TEE nd
  - iop tn t -> S feo s . -o onigi
  - AU 3 . 5
  - -- so soin
  - 10 — - to -ioine 1 —
  - h -si vin-nn
  - n — 11 - -
  - too o ah Dne o NS Dosh
  - - for . . iso oos he -w disto e
  - - -
  - -------toes
  - toyeeh
  - snod - pen e •
  - -
  - Looeem-RT < Fil 1. in 27 " A : Lr • dm - 17 - 2 Po L.
  - T - - A , enul , s .
  - -nd Goso Pay -- s . hie, -m -C5. EaoT s KA s ,io. wety -T -
  - EC
  - --es - is
- p.n.n. - vue 60/901
- - PLATE III.
  - Fig. 38.—Circles appearing as logarithmic spirals.
  - Fig. 39.—Circles appearing flattened in two directions, alternately at right angles.
  - R
- pl.3 - vue 61/901
- p.n.n. - vue 62/901
- - TYPE DESIGN.
  - 27
  - hexagonal, has a curious history: in many insects the eye consists of a group of ocelli or small circular eyes arranged as in the figure; these ocelli were for many years believed to be hexagonal, an error which for some time even appeared in text-books.
  - The authors are indebted to a very interesting article by Dr. James Fraser, which appeared in the “ British Journal of Psychology ” for January, 1908, for several of the suggestions and illustrations here given, in which the illusion of extreme distortion is brought about by comparatively simple
  - Fig. 30.—Circular dots appearing hexagonal.
  - means ; see figs. 31 to 40, plates I to III. The subject has quite a literature of its own, as curious as it is voluminous.
  - In figs. 31 to 36, plates I and II, the ends of the short lines composing the strokes of the characters lie actually on vertical and horizontal lines respectively, but the effect of the inclination of the strokes causes the letters to appear out of the vertical in figs. 31 to 35, and the effacement of part of the chequered background by means of white lines causes still further exaggeration of this effect in the case of fig. 36, and in figs. 37 to 39, plates II and III, it is carried still further by showing a series of circles built up of white and black sections of spirals and superimposed on a chequered background. The result produced is one of symmetrical irregularity in the case of fig. 37, of a system of logarithmic spirals in fig. 38, and of two forms of distortion at 900 to each other in fig. 39. It can be easily confirmed, by applying the circles given on tracing paper, that these apparent distortions are merely optical illusions, and that the boundary lines are in every instance actually placed in the form of true circles.
  - Still more interesting as affording direct evidence on the subject of errors intentionally introduced in order to obtain apparent truth are the curves shown in fig. 40, plate II. These appear to be truly circular, but their outlines as printed on the transparent sheet covering the plate show that they are in fact much distorted, and that the appearance of truth has been obtained by the introduction of a real error of opposite sign to the apparent
- p.27 - vue 63/901
- - 28
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - error visible in a diagram constructed with true circles. The actual amount of distortion is apparent when the lines on the tracing are examined apart from the figure.
  - THE INFLUENCE OF ILLUSION ON THE FORM OF CHARACTERS.
  - Accurate inaccuracies.—If the characters used on the printed page were all made equal in their dimensions and true to line, they would
  - Fig. 41.—Alinement and peculiarities of type, 20 times full size.
  - appear unequal. Fig. 41 shows the relative magnitude of the errors which must be introduced in order to make the characters of uniform appearance. Almost all the characters in a fount have some peculiarity which must be retained if they are to appear true; thus the round sorts must be larger than the square sorts and come above the square
- p.28 - vue 64/901
- - TYPE DESIGN.
  - 29
  - small sorts, and to a greater extent below the line, in order that they may seem to be of the same size. The upper part of the lower-case S must be smaller than the lower part; the lower-case t must not be vertical or of uniform thickness in the main-stroke, or it will seem to lean back ; the dot must not be placed centrally over the main-stroke of the lower-case i, or it will seem to be on one side; the strokes of the w must be slightly curved at the lower extremities in order that they may seem to be straight; the 0 projects more below the line than it does above the upper line; and other characters have their own peculiarities.
  - THE INFLUENCE OF THE SERIF.
  - The serif.-There are few who, when they look at the characters of a fount of type, consider the extreme accuracy tha t is necessarX to observe in their design and production, and fewer still, perhapstae those who have considered the influence o e seri
  - durability, and legibility of the character that they see e although It has even been stated that the serif makes the character and altbanea the authors cannot endorse this somewhat sweeping statement, in a modi sense it certainly has in it a good deal of truth. tons on
  - All European faces whose origin can be traced bac i P Kara stone or to inscriptions formed as continuous ines 0 strokes material, were first produced, so far as the authors are awa ’ sans of approximately uniform width. As a matter 0 ac , ordinal f h serif of to-day reproduces almost exactly the characteristic features of early Roman incised lettering.
  - Possibly, as has been lately stated, the effect of shadow in obauena the terminations of incisions in stone-carved charac ers a inf tense in bringing the serif into being, but the authors are inc ne desire that the serif also had in great part a simpler origin, namely, the Xh, of the scribe or penman to define accurately the en s 0 te demar-in the form of writing now developed into print, require bottom ends as cation at the top ends, and often even more so at the bottom endkari well as at some horizontal terminations. If this was no ° > the ragged tendency for the stroke to finish with a somewhat roun ed, ADSLI upon end, giving the appearance of irregular and uneven alinemen ’ ESS efforts the scribe the necessity for obviating this defect, an encesin.I resulted to define the stroke-ends, the most natural tren 0 evelopmen- however in the evolution of the serif. Once the advantages ue 0 advance
  - crude and rudimentary its form, made themselves apparent however, and differentiation became only a question of time. IS » authors does not call for historic treatment: it is rather t e aim compara-to show how the modern use of serifs tends to separa e tively few different groups the whole range of type a
- p.29 - vue 65/901
- - 30
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Faces of type may be classified, according to the shapes of their serifs (if any), as follows :—
  - I. Characters devoid of serif. John Day, 1546
  - Canon condensed sans (Miller & Richard).
  - JOHN GRISMAND
  - 30-point condensed sans serif.
  - Thomas Wright
  - 2-line great primer grotesque No. 4 (Miller & Richard).
  - Characters devoid of serif, as shown by the examples given above from the catalogues of two leading British typefounders, are known by various names, and, save for the absence of serif, vary within the same limits as any other form of face. These faces are generally called sans serif, more correctly sanserif, sometimes abbreviated as sans, but occasionally they bear the quite irrelevant titles of grotesque and doric; in the United States of America they are known as gothic.
  - 2. Characters in which the upper and lower bounding lines of the serif are horizontal, and in which the depth of the serif is less than, or approximately equal to the width of the main-stroke.
  - Arthur Nichols
  - 30-point antique No. 3 (Shanks).
  - This face is frequently known in England, and usually in France, as egyptian ; in England it is sometimes styled clarendon, and occasionally antique.
  - 3. Characters in which the upper and lower bounding lines of the serif are horizontal, and in which the depth of the serif is greater than the thickness of the main-stroke.
  - Wynkyn de Worde
  - 2-line english (27-point) french antique (Miller & Richard).
- p.30 - vue 66/901
- - TYPE DESIGN.
  - C
  - This last face and its derivatives are widely used in France for display and advertisement purposes. In England it is frequently called french clarendon or french antique, whereas in France, judging from its name italien, a different origin is implied.
  - 4. Characters in which the upper and lower bounding lines of the serif, as in class 2, are horizontal over a portion of their length, but in which the serif is connected to the main-stroke by a fillet or radius.
  - John James
  - 36-point ionic.
  - In some examples of this style, commonly known as ionic, the radius or fillet is so extremely small, that it is hard to differentiate it from the style called antique.
  - 5- Characters in which the upper and lower bounding lines of the serif are horizontal, except that the upper serif of the lower-case sorts has its bounding lines parallel and inclined to the main-stroke of the letter.
  - Nicholas Jenson
  - 36-point venetian old-style (Shanks).
  - The characteristic features of this style follow those of the face originated by Jenson, whose name it generally bears, though it is sometimes known as venetian.
  - 6. Characters in which the respective upper and lower external bounding lines of the serifs are horizontal, and the two internal bounding lines of the serifs are inclined to the horizontal, forming pointed serifs with their extremities on the respective upper or lower lines of the type.
  - DOCTOR FELL
  - 2-line great primer antique No. 8 {Millen & Richard)-
  - Faces having this peculiarity are usually known as latin, or, when heavy, as bold latin, though they are occasionally and ambiguously styled antique.
- p.31 - vue 67/901
- - 32
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - 7. Characters in which the serifs have the outer bounding hnes usually horizontal and the inner bounding lines inclined, also a short vertical bounding line terminating the serifs and a small fillet or radius connecting the serif to the main-stroke, except that in those lower-case letters which have vertical stems the upper serif has its upper bounding line inclined and the lower bounding line horizontal.
  - John Bagford
  - 36-point old-style [Miller & Richard).
  - Robert Andrews
  - 36-point kladdonian (Haddon).
  - Henry Bessemer 2-line english ( 27-point) old-style antique No. 7 (Miller & Richard).
  - These are the characteristic features of the old-style group. By a system of hybridization between various forms of capitals and lower-case letters having these peculiarities, derivative old-styles are formed, such as old-style ionic, old-style antique, etc.
  - 8. Characters in which the serifs have the outer bounding lines usually horizontal and the inner bounding lines formed entirely by a radius or fillet, and also have a short vertical bounding line terminating the serifs. In the lower-case the upper serifs generally have their upper bounding lines inclined.
  - Joseph Moxon
  - 2-line great primer old-face.
  - Rowe Mores
  - 3-line pica De Vinne (Stephenson & Blake).
  - This style is termed old-face, and perhaps the finest example of it known to the authors is that cut in Glasgow by Wilson, about 1768, and used for a notable edition of Virgil published by Fowler in 1778.
  - Foulis
- p.32 - vue 68/901
- - TYPE DESIGN.
  - 33
  - 9. Characters in which the serifs are reduced to a simple horizontal hair-line, connected by a small fillet or radius to the main-stroke.
  - Jolin Baskerville
  - 2-line great primer No. 4.
  - This form of serif is that common to the great group of faces known as modern, one of the most extensively-used styles, whether in some of its extreme forms as a book face, or in its somewhat heavier form with shortened and thickened serifs as a news fount. It is in this style that the punch-cutters of the nineteenth century manifested the greatest technical skill on the steel of the punch and the least kindly consideration for the eyes of the unfortunate readers of the ultimate product of their inconsiderate ingenuity.
  - 10. Characters in which the serif is rudimentary and indistinguishable from the gradual thickening of the main-stroke towards the ends in following a curved outline.
  - Alexander Wilson
  - 24-point atlas.
  - The term generally used to describe this style of character is atlas.
  - A curious instance of the small effect that the serif alone may have in differentiating a type face is shown in example 8, where two founts, ordinary old-face and De Vinne, differ very widely and yet possess serifs that are practically identical.
  - In addition to the various forms of serif which have been classified among the foregoing typical examples, there are numerous varieties of serif, developed and undeveloped, exaggerated and minified, angular, bulbous, vermiform, undulating, many apparently suffering from strange and distressing maladies such as elephantiasis, rheumatic arthritis, and phage-danic ulcerations, to mention nothing worse. In all seriousness, some of the incongruous serif forms which the authors have met with, fully merit the names attached to them above, though such nomenclatures may @ppear foreign to a technical work on typographical printing-surfaces. Applied knowledge is always to be respected; applied ignorance is not so worthy, but, perhaps unfortunately, these curious serifs are not so much examples of failing or ignorance on the part of type producers, as they are evidence of a depraved taste on the part of what is happily but a minority of their public.
  - It is a great pity that no standard nomenclature exists for the various Styles of type face, but those names to which the authors give priority their descriptions are those which they would suggest ought to adopted for general convenience.
- p.33 - vue 69/901
- - CHAPTER VI.
  - FOUNTS OF TYPE.
  - " Imps of Hell are busy but in Mischief; Whereto work also Symbols and Abbreviations which ever have wise men held to be Imps of the Case; For of them alack the Printer maketh use but to his own woe seeing that Memory worketh not ever alike to him that Readeth and in him that Buildeth his Bookes.”
  - Mirrour of Pryntyng.
  - 8-point condensed clarendon (Shanks & Sons).
  - According to Moxon, a fount is the whole number of letters that are cast of the same body and face at one time. Possibly this restriction to " one time " was due to the fact that with earlier and cruder methods than those at present in use, a fount produced at one time never exactly corresponded with a fount produced at another. He derives the word " fount" from the same source as to found or cast, and says that the word should be properly called " fund,” the product of a type fundry, or foundry.
  - In the early days of printing there were, strictly speaking, no founts. In Caxton’s time, for instance, the character itself, according to Hansard, was a rude old gothic, mixed with secretary, designed on purpose to imitate the handwriting of those times ; the words were printed so closely to each other that the result was difficult and tedious to be read, even by those who were used to manuscripts, and often led the inattentive reader into mistakes. Even after the introduction of roman, founts were still very incomplete, and italic, which forms part of every full fount to-day, and which is said to be based upon the handwriting of the poet Petrarch, was not introduced till 1501.
  - A fount of type to-day comprises all the characters which commonly occur in books and papers. A fount adapted to ordinary purposes is given in table 1.
  - It would be an interesting line of inquiry to follow out and classify the shapes common to the largest number of alphabets—an esperanto of letters as it were—for there may be some law that governs the genesis of character shapes and the authors are not aware of any attempt to discover it, nor even do they remember seeing anywhere a suggestion 34
- p.34 - vue 70/901
- - FOUNTS OF TYPE. 3
  - that such exists. Accents would naturally fall into the scope o the investigation, for an accented letter is virtually only a new with a different outline from its fellows.
  - TABLE 1.
  - Ordinary fount of type.
  - Kind. Characters. Number.
  - Roman lower-case . a to z and « ce # fi fl mm m | 33
  - Roman small capitals a to z and AC& 29
  - Roman capitals A to Z and E CE & 29 10
  - Roman figures Fractions 123456789° **** 9
  - .1( 10
  - Roman points
  - Roman accents ( 6 a a a a e e e e fi i i | 1 6 0 6 0 u u u u w w $ n % 26
  - Peculiars *1I-==* 12
  - Commercial signs . @B/£$%+- **= 12
  - Italic lower-case a to z and afffiffif 33
  - Italic capitals A to Z and EC64 3° 10
  - Italic figures . 1234567890 6
  - Italic points . (I J 26
  - Italic accents 1 6dnifistf"s
  - 275
  - Total
  - -______-__________________-____________ nd
  - The fount given in the preceding table comprises ahtteAAgTC-saxon, accented sorts used in the principal languages of the require some special and Teutonic groups; other languages an lace may be taken as accents or characters. Those shown on quoted. The border
  - typical of the large number of examples whtc ml letters cannot easily be line between letters bearing accents an spec 11 letters are them-defined, a further variety being introduced when characters of the body selves used as accents in conjunction wi 1 or occasionally, the latin fount. Only languages employing genera y, the vowel signs, tonal character are here considered. Any ana ysis
- p.35 - vue 71/901
- - 36
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - marks and other variations (usually termed accents by the printer) of character, in languages still making use of their own alphabet (such as the Semitic group, the Indian groups, the languages of the near and far East, of Melanesia, of Polynesia, and the native languages of North and South America), would be quite outside the scope of this brief reference. In a later chapter, however, a classification is given of languages using the accents peculiar to various European and other groups of languages for which the latin character is the basic script.
  - Albanian K g • Icelandic PSp Norwegian $
  - Amoy 6 A Jaunsari n d Nupe u oe 6
  - Annamite D de Kienning A a 6 e 1 Polish X a z fi 6
  - Ashanti e w n 0 Latin a 6 u a 0 u Roumanian sdt
  - Bohemian u z e f c Magyar 6 Slovenian c 3
  - Cree e a Maltese H h Swedish a
  - Guarani ft y Micmac a ui € 0 a- Urdu k t n
  - Ibo Q 6 e Nkondi ft e 1 Yahgan u u quis
  - All these varieties of accents, however, fade into insignificance when contrasted with some of the proposed universal international systems. The " Standard Alphabet " of C. R. Lepsius (2nd ed. 1863) bristles with accents both above and below the line, and a single vowel may be accented in more than thirty different ways, while the consonants also are freely marked. The Berlin Academy of Oriental Languages applies a very elaborate system of accents. In one of its recent volumes, dealing with a single language, forty-five vowels are thus distinguished, the a appearing in no fewer than thirteen different guises. Even under the best conditions, with new type, the best paper, the blackest ink, and the brightest light, it is very difficult to differentiate between several of these accented sorts, while in less favourable circumstances to do so becomes a virtual impossibility.
  - The task which confronts the designer of a totally new letter is twofold. In the first place the new letter must be sufficiently distinct from any of the old ones, so that its impression can be read even under unfavourable conditions; and in the second place it must be sufficiently strong to enable it to withstand the same treatment as the rest of the fount. For nearly half a century Isaac Pitman strove to find the best working compromise between these two claims, but only some half-dozen of his inventions met with his unqualified approval.
  - Several of these new forms have been adopted by the International Phonetic Association, which, however, avoids many difficulties by eliminating all the capital letters. Its system of phonetic printing is now widely diffused, one single publisher having employed it in upwards of seventy books. The following is an example of the system as applied to the English language :—
- p.36 - vue 72/901
- - FOUNTS OF TYPE.
  - 37
  - So no:0 wind end fra SAn wa: dis‘pju:tin wit waz Sa strong®, wen a traevla keim o’lon rapt in a worm klouk. Sei a gri:d dot Sa wan hu: feist meid Sa traevla teik of (h)iz klouk Jud bi ken'sidad strong an Si ASa. Ssn Sa no:0 wind blu: wiS eil hiz mait, bat Sa moi hi; blu:. So mo: klousli did Sa traevla fould (h)iz klouk e’raund him; and at last Sa no:0 wind geiv AP Si a tem(p)t. Sen So sAn Jon aut wo:mli, and i'mndjatli Sa traevla tuk of (h)iz klouk; and sou So no:0 wind waz a blaidzd ta kon’fes Set Sa sAn waz Sa stronger av So tu-
  - Fig. 42.— International Phonetic Association type.
  - From page 20 of “The Principles of the International Phonetic Association, London, 1912.
  - CONVENTIONAL AND IDEOGRAPHIC SIGNS.
  - Conventional signs.—In addition to the characters in common use which, taken together, make up what is called a fount of type, there are numerous other characters and signs of special meaning. Their use has greatly extended in these last few years, owing to the increase in the number of guide-books, route-books, hotel, hydro and health-resort announcements, and works of a similar nature that are now published in response to the desire for general knowledge, and the vastly-increased restlessness of the human race.
  - Never was truer prophecy uttered by any seer than that made by Daniel, more than twenty-five centuries ago, that a particular epoch of one of the future stages of our world’s life-history would be characterized by the words : " Many shall run to and fro, and knowledge shall be increased. There is no arguing with the Prophet ! Even in a technical book like this, his statement is full of relevance and truth, and a brief consideration of the enormous modern increase of signs bears testimony to it, if nothing else does. In some ways it is a curious reversion to an earlier state of things i it is the old sign-board thrusting itself upon mine host s customers once more, but in another form, the old representation of a natural object announcing what was to be had within the shop or workshop, when we come across in a modern guide-book a neat little representation of an hotel for the traveller, a garage for the car. a well-limned can of petrol, gasolene or essence for the motor, a well-drawn spanner to notify the existence of a repair shop. Truly "Time sweeps on in cycles, with changing, Xe changeless wing.” : ,
  - The signs shown below are placed more or less in chronologica ore the astronomical being given priority, as being probably among the d Conventional signs that can be properly credited with that name, at anX rate, they were undoubtedly the first that were brought into gene
  - y the educated.
- p.37 - vue 73/901
- - 38
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES
  - ASTRONOMICAL SIGNS.
  - SOLAR SYSTEM, INCLUDING SUN AND GREATER PLANETS.
  - © % 9 0 or Sun ( or O Moon I? Saturn Mercury 6 Earth and moon H or 6 Uranus Venus 8 Mars 44 or V Neptune Earth 24 Jupiter
  - ASTEROIDS, OR TELESCOPIC PLANETS.
  - P or Q Ceres ‘ Astraea (9) Metis
  - * or 1 Pallas T Hebe (10) Hygeia
  - 6 Juno ? Iris (11) Parthenope
  - A Vesta * Flora (12) Victoria
  - and some 700 others, all of which are now denoted by numerical signs.
  - LUNATIONS.
  - • New moon O Full moon
  - D First quarter ( Last quarter
  - and many other forms.
  - ASPECTS.
  - 8 Ascending node % Descending node © Quintile 6 Conjunction Trine * Sextile and many other forms. 8 Opposition Quadrature
  - SIGNS OF THE ZODIAC.
  - cyo Aries & Leo # Sagittarius
  - 8 Taurus m Virgo VJ Capricornus
  - n Gemini - Libra AW Aquarius
  - 0 Cancer m Scorpio X Pisces
  - and many other forms.
  - ALMANAC SIGNS.
  - BBBBGBBGDBIACII ^^ Hours of light and darkness; weekdays.
  - MISCELLANEOUS.
  - RR Right ascension
  - Stars. Comets.
  - and many other forms.
  - Pseudo-scientific signs.—In addition to the astronomical signs already given, there are numerous other signs and symbols which have been invented by pseudo-astronomers and astrologers, apparently for the purpose of hiding their own ignorance from the ignorant and of filling up with pretentious-looking symbolism the pages of their almanacs. These signs are too numerous to give here, and are hardly of sufficient importance at this
- p.38 - vue 74/901
- - FOUNTS OF TYPE.
  - 39
  - date. Among them, it may be stated, to mention only a few, are signs giving notice on what day it is proper to let blood, to bathe, an o P2 to sow and to plant, to take physic, to have the hair cut, to have the cut, to have children weaned, together with endless other absur tesa well as symbols that serve to indicate the approach of hail, of thunder-storms, of lightning ; and, in addition to these natural phenomena, symbo s that have reference to many occult marvels. Those interested in ies symbols, which have no technical importance, will probably discover em in old almanacs and even in the present astrological and prophetic a m that are still on sale, and, what is more extraordinary, still find believers.
  - MATHEMATICAL SIGNS.
  - Geometrical.
  - > is greater than < is less than < is greater or less than S is less or greater than * is not greater than * is not less than Z angle L right angle perpendicular to II parallel # equal and parallel X equiangular O circle V sector e segment A arc A triangle square • rectangle Z rhombus H cube and many others. © pentagon O hexagon /. therefore because 0 degree ‘ minute " second OQ similar to : is to, or divided by :: or :: as, or is equal to
  - + plus • - minus 123-n = plus or minus 123..n = equal to x * not equal to + o varies as Co infinity f ALGEBRAICAL square root, radix exponents or powers suffixes multiplied by divided by congruent integral n or n! factorial n or nj subfactorial finite difference ~ difference § used for partial differential co efficients
  - and many others.
  - Exponents and suffixes are known in printing as superiors and inferiors.
  - MISCELLANEOUS.
  - All those characters of the greek lower-case and capitals which differ from
  - a, B, y, 8. €. S 7, 6, t, K, X, u, 1, &, IT, p, o, t, $, X, Y, &, I, 4,
  - the roman.
  - 4, H, II, 2, $, Y, n.
  - D 9 Crossed letters and scratched figures
  - S 4 Overscored letters and figures
  - 1234567890
  - Split fractions
  - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 PP-Lg .
  - • Decimal point (full point inverted)
  - 7 Dotted figures
  - 7 Double-dotted figures ’/ V Root signs
  - Vinculum
  - / Bar or solidus
  - and many other signs.
- p.39 - vue 75/901
- - 40 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The interrelation between typesetting and mathematical notation.—The difficulty which the printer encounters in the composition of even simple arithmetical work has long since been recognized, and has resulted in the placing of the figures upon the en-set. With the advent of the decimal system this influence has become extended to the points, the full point and some other points now being cast on the quarter-em or middle-space set to facilitate the composition of tabular work. In the composition of mathematical formulae this influence has already made itself felt to such an extent that changes have been brought about in mathematical notation with a view to facilitating the work of the compositor. First among such changes may be mentioned that made some thirty years ago in the expression for factorials. These quantities, which occur so frequently in all matters relating to permutations, combinations, probability, etc., were |n formerly represented thus, n, and expressions of the form m(n—-m) gave rise to a very large amount of work in composition, the short rules requiring much time and skill for their justification. The introduction of the exclamation sign (!) in place of the combination of rules formerly used reduces this expression to —;_ and eliminates much of the labour m!(n —m)!
  - of composition. Similarly subfactorial n, (n), is now written nj.
  - The progress of machine-composition has already begun to make itself felt in the simplification of fractions from the compositor’s point of view. It is now quite usual to arrange in one line fractions which previously required at least two fines of type separated by a rule; by this method what the French term le parangonnage, or the building up of a line out of several bodies, is avoided. It is true that the point system has greatly simplified such work when set by hand, but with machine-composition, whether the machine produces lines of loose type, or slugs, further simplification is desirable in order that formulae may, as far as possible, be capable of composition in single lines. The fraction has been the commonest and one of the greatest stumbling-blocks, but its horizontal division line or bar is now, in many cases, replaced by the solidus or diagonal stroke ; thus the formula quoted above can now be written on one line, n! /[m! (n — m) !], without the least danger of misunderstanding.
  - The above, however, shows that at present the application of the method is somewhat restricted for want of other appropriate symbols for such additional brackets as may be required. It is to be noted that the brace {} also might be cut on a small body, and that it is an already familiar sign ; furthermore, it would be easy and would in no way interfere with legibility to make use of parentheses and brackets of much-increased thickness of main-stroke, and by so doing to retain the familiar form while obtaining the requisite difference essential to accurate interpretation.
  - Another sign which could easily be dispensed with is the radix «. This has frequently to be made of --section to allow for the insertion of
- p.40 - vue 76/901
- - FOUNTS OF TYPE.
  - 41
  - the index of the root, thus, V, V(A + B)3. This can be equally well expressed by a fractional index and the expression set up in the form (A + B)3. The use of the small index fraction, however, produces results the reverse of legible, besides involving, in many cases, the difficulty of composing with split fractions of minute body. Increased legibility can be obtained by the use of ordinary superiors in combination with a solidus cast as a superior, the expression then becoming (A + B)33 and ceasing to present any difficulty to the compositor. The size of the figures forming the fraction can thus be increased by about one-half beyond that necessary in the case of the horizontal bar. If the powers are cast as superiors on a half-body of the size used for the matter being composed, it is possible to use inferiors also on a half-body for suffixes, and an expression of the form M^) + M(e,2) + M(e:t2) + . . . presents no difficulty in setting up; in fact, as it is here set up, it could be composed and cast on the Linotype or any other composing and casting machine. It is to be recommended that the solidus should be put on the same set-width as the figures and that the characters used for superiors and inferiors should, whenever possible, be cast on the en-set or the em-set, as this would make the work of composition much simpler. Moreover, the solidus should be made heavier, to render it more visible.
  - The long J used for integration offers similar difficulty in many formulae, and the loss of time which it occasions in a printing-office where mathematical works are composed is sufficiently great to warrant mathematicians permitting the adoption of some more convenient substitute for this familiar sign, such, for instance, as a greatly expanded doric italic S, in which case an expression now written and printed
  - B V29 /““.
  - would become B(29)1/2S0H [(H - h)/H]WV/Pdh.
  - This question, as well as the many others involved in that of a universal notation for mathematical and physical constants, is worthy of the very careful and serious consideration of an international commission. The commission engaged on this work should have the advice not only of publishers and authors whose province is the use of type faces, not only of typefounders and printers who deal with the production and manipulation of type, but should be especially advised by those who know the limitations imposed by machine-composition and appreciate the constant change and advance in methods of typesetting. The leading mathematicians anj physicists have in the Oxford, the Cambridge, and the other university presses large stores of material for hand-composition; the difficulties of converting old methods to meet the exigencies of the modern press-room are as unknown to those who have such access, as they are to their confreres of continental countries like France, where the influence of machine-composition has yet scarcely made itself felt. The
- p.41 - vue 77/901
- - 42
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - professor and the editor of technical proceedings have difficulty to-day in finding in London a greek alpha, a, which can be distinguished from an italic latin a; the physicist and the electrical engineer are endeavouring to find a type face which will provide many symbols they require ; Fraktur, script, heavy-face and other special type have been proposed, but each of these is either troublesome to write or to distinguish from others on the blackboard or in manuscript; and the difficulties of those engaged in other branches of science may be estimated from the fact that it has taken nearly two years to collect from the foundries of England, America, and various European countries a small percentage only of the signs given in the preceding and following lists.
  - The whole of the lower-case and capital letters of the roman alphabet, the lower-case italic, and those letters of the greek alphabet which differ from the roman or italic, have almost all found familiar uses, many of them for several different purposes. There are an ample number of signs in existence for covering the range of expressions used or required for mathematical work and physical research without drawing upon the very illegible gothic or german characters or even upon the more legible of those Russian characters which differ from the greek or roman, though these would be far preferable to the gothic. Moreover, there are available among the lesser-known languages of Europe and the near East many simpler but beautiful and easily-written characters which would readily amplify the list of universal notation characters should this be found necessary.
  - In many cases fractions may be avoided by the use of negative indices, 12
  - for example, „ can be written on one line, thus, m‘n-1, though in so simple a case the solidus is to be preferred.
  - -o Jo 2a
  - X = ---- -----------= —-
  - .a Na — a2 ,---5
  - dx rox+r’dr
  - Jo Jo
  - Fig. 43.—Example of mathematical composition and cross-section through the component type.
  - A difficulty which is met with by the compositor in setting up complex mathematical formulae is illustrated in fig. 43, in which a formula
- p.42 - vue 78/901
- - FOUNTS OF TYPE.
  - 43
  - is shown as set up, and below it a horizontal section of the type of which it is composed. The total number of leads, rules, spaces, quads and type shown here, apart from quotations and furniture to make up the measure of the page, amounts to 159 pieces of which only 58 form the actual typographical printing-surface.
  - The difficulties of mathematical composition are increasing to such an extent that in the future, unless a simplified notation is adopted, it will be necessary for the mathematician to obtain the reproduction of his formulas in the shape of zinco-blocks instead of having them set up from loose type of many bodies and founts, made up with leads and rules of various thicknesses, cut specially to length for the individual formula and laboriously packed with the necessary spaces and quads.
  - ECCLESIASTICAL SIGNS.
  - Greek cross
  - Latin cross
  - St. Andrew’s cross
  - Tau cross
  - St. Anthony’s cross
  - Ornamental cross Miscellaneous crosses Buddhist cross Mitres
  - T Calvary cross
  - = Triple cross of the Pope
  - * Double cross of Archbishops and Cardinals
  - # Double Jerusalem cross
  - 2) -&
  - Ave Marias
  - Sacred Heart and Crown
  - Tears
  - Response
  - Versicle
  - Monograms
  - Crowned M
  - t
  - X
  - +
  - &
  - and many others.
  - R
  - 0
  - =
  - 3
  - 9
  - 8 or m O.
  - ft or H
  - 8 or gr. § or ss. j, ij, iij P.
  - MEDICAL
  - Recipe
  - Ounce
  - Drachm
  - Scruple
  - Minim, or drop Octarius, or pint Congius, or gallon Libra, or pound Grain
  - Semi, or half One, two, three, etc. Particular
  - SIGNS.
  - P. aeq.
  - aa
  - q.s.
  - q-p-
  - Partes aquales, or equal parts
  - Ana, or of each
  - Quantum sufficit, or as much as is sufficient
  - Quantum placit, or as much as you please
  - Misce, or mix-
  - s.a. Secundum artem, or according to art p.r.n. Pro re nata, or sionally
  - and many others.
- p.43 - vue 79/901
- - 44
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - ARCHAEOLOGICAL SIGNS.
  - BEAMNPRNNCE
  - NP WNDMNN PTW E
  - AAAANTEFGSBbFLMNNNP kMNK RERITIRP
  - V VWWR W x x x Y
  - and many others.
  - SCRIBAL ABBREVIATIONS.
  - abtbccddeefffghh 1 i j k I I it ft m m (m m Ji n n 6 6 PpppBqqrsSttt uuuv^wxSyyzz &€799>31,5€2 ADEIOMPPPRV
  - CARTOGRAPHICAL SIGNS.
  - s Battle O Town mb Church
  - © County town ++++ Railway ===== Road
  - •=•• Canal Castle or abbey * Lighthouse and many others.
  - CARTOGRAPHICAL SIGNS INDICATING ARCHEOLOGICAL REMAINS.
  - Colour. Pre-Roman. Colour. Roman.
  - Black © Earthworks and oppida Red Walled towns
  - Blue Jt Megalithic remains „ • Castra
  - 99 X Coins and miscellaneous finds » • Interments Foundations of buildings
  - 3) Settlements . • Potteries
  - 2) X Torques, etc., also bronze weapons 3) 32 Roman roads Probable Roman roads
  - 39 ») • Interments ,, X — Drift implements Colour. Anglo-Saxon. Green @ Interments Coins and miscellaneous finds
  - X Coins and miscellaneous finds
- p.44 - vue 80/901
- - 8 Male
  - FOUNTS OF TYPE.
  - NATURAL HISTORY SIGNS.
  - $ Hermaphrodite and others.
  - $ Female
  - 45
  - BOTANICAL SIGNS.
  - O Plants capable of but a single fructescence
  - (D Monocarpic annual
  - @ Monocarpic biennial
  - © Hardy monocarpic plant which only flowers after a number of years and dies after so doing
  - T Rhizocarpic plant; that is to say, a plant whose roots are hardy and throw up flower-bearing stems each year
  - • Caulocarpic plant as a rule, whose stalk survives and fructifies many times
  - * Perennial herb
  - 5 Suffrutex, an undershrub
  - 5 Frutex, a shrub
  - 5 Arbuscula, a bush or small tree
  - 5 Arbor, a tree more than 25 feet high
  - C Climbing plant
  - C Right-handed climbing plant
  - D Left-handed climbing plant
  - A Evergreen
  - 6 Male plant
  - ? Female plant
  - % Hermaphroditic plant
  - O= Cotyledons accumbent to the radicle
  - Oil Cotyledons incumbent on the radicle
  - 00 Indefinite number of petals, stamens, etc.
  - P Casts doubt upon a preceding word or phrase
  - ! Indicates certainty
  - + Following a name, signifies that the object is not well-known
  - — Between two figures, as in 5-10, indicates the extremes of difference, as the stamens are from 5 to 10
  - X After a synonym, indicates that a description from nature will be found in the work of the author cited
  - Some of these signs are also used by Linnaeus, but with different meanings in a few cases. Many other signs are used by various authorities.
  - MONEY SIGNS.
  - £ Pounds sterling (roman) € Cents 5 Reis
  - £ Pounds sterling (italic) & Deniers $ Dollars (roman)
  - £ Pound sign (Italian) B Bolivars $ Dollars (italic)
  - E. Pesetas (roman) $ Schellings E Pound (Roman)
  - A. Pesetas (italic) S Sous # Pound (Tournoi)
  - and many others.
- p.45 - vue 81/901
- - 6
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - COMMERCIAL SIGNS.
  - • Per
  - % Per cent
  - % Per mil
  - USED
  - @ At % Account % Care of
  - Number (used in America) and others.
  - METEOROLOGICAL SIGNS.
  - INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS
  - FOR RECORDING WEATHER PHENOMENA.
  - = Fog
  - = ° Mist
  - = Wet fog, from which moisture is deposited copiously on exposed surfaces
  - CO Dust-haze, or smoke
  - T Thunder
  - < Lightning
  - K Thunder-storm
  - • Rain
  - * Snow
  - +> Snow-drift
  - EX Snow lying *
  - • Ice crystals
  - Hail A Soft hail ~ Dew
  - .— Hoar-frost V Rime
  - ~ Glazed frost 9 Gale
  - ( Solar corona
  - © Solar halo
  - ( Lunar corona CD Lunar halo A Rainbow
  - W Aurora
  - • Zodiacal light
  - Exponents o or 2 applied to symbols indicate respectively light and heavy. Thus A2 indicates heavy hail, •" light rain, =° light fog or mist.
  - OTHER METEOROLOGICAL SIGNS.
  - *0008*00
  - »<80 001--1 3 • ©
  - ‘••e®0e0000
  - O O 0 © v n n fl n nn+%46
  - * More than half the country covered with snow.
- p.46 - vue 82/901
- - FOUNTS OF TYPE.
  - 47
  - WEIGHTS AND MEASURES SIGNS.
  - It Pound WP Pound
  - (a) Arrobas (roman)
  - @ Arrobas (italic) and many others.
  - ENGINEERING SIGNS.
  - IP Horse-power
  - A Alternation
  - PEDIGREE SIGNS.
  - F F r F -
  - I
  - II
  - L 1 -IF
  - -
  - CROWNS, CORONETS, WREATHS, HERALDIC SIGNS.
  - HELMETS, AND
  - VARIOUS.
  - FOREIGN.
  - BRITISH.
  - Imperial crown Imperial crown
  - Royal crown 4 Royal crown
  - Ducal coronet Ducal coronet
  - Marquis’s coronet *Y Marquis’s coronet
  - Earl’s coronet Count’s coronet
  - Viscount’s coronet <&& Viscount’s coronet
  - Baron’s coronet Baron’s coronet
  - Antique crown Naval crown
  - Civic crown the Military crown
  - 00 Laurel wreaths
  - Knights
  - Knights Bachelor
  - Red hand of Ulster
  - and many others.
  - Scotland or
  - Nova Scotia
  - Fleur-de-Lys
  - Ermine
  - Double cross of Lorraine
  - Archbishop’s mitre
  - A Bishop’s mitre
- p.47 - vue 83/901
- - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - ORDERS.
  - BRITISH.
  - Order of the Garter
  - Order of the Thistle
  - Order of Saint Patrick
  - Distinguished Service Order
  - Imperial Service Order
  - Saint John of Jerusalem (Military) Order of Merit
  - (Civil) Order of Merit
  - Foreign.
  - % Saint-Esprit
  - * Saint-Michel
  - Saint-Louis
  - 4 % Saint-Georges
  - Saint-Sepulcre
  - Legion of Honour : white
  - Legion of Honour : white with ribbon
  - Legion of Honour: with ring
  - Merite militaire
  - Merite militaire; with ring
  - Merite agricole
  - and many others.
  - MEDALS.
  - Victoria Cross
  - New Zealand Cross
  - * Iron Cross
  - * Montana Cross
  - and many others.
  - MASONIC AND OTHER SECRET AND PHILANTHROPIC
  - ASSOCIATION SIGNS.
  - and many others.
  - POLITICAL SIGNS.
  - A Phrygian cap
  - Primrose League
  - and others.
- p.48 - vue 84/901
- - FOUNTS OF TYPE.
  - 49
  - METAL SIGNS.
  - (Au) or @ Gold
  - (Ag) or (A) Silver
  - Ch or (B) Bronze (Fe) or (F) Iron
  - and others.
  - TRAVEL SIGNS.
  - O Country A Mountain
  - ‘A: Range of mountains
  - ( Fortress
  - O Town
  - CT County town
  - UD Urban district
  - RB Royal borough CB County borough MB Municipal borough PB Police borough © Police station
  - Ch.S Syndical room
  - 1 Monument
  - L Cathedral
  - Am Church a Cemetery
  - 1 Castle
  - 6" Country-seat
  - * Chateau
  - :: House
  - mm Hotel (first class) fm Hotel (second class) * Hotel (third class) Mi Hotel (fourth class) • Hotel (fifth class) * Hotel (sixth class) CH Central heating * Lift
  - 0ep Meat-market 0% Poultry-market
  - Ovec Fish-market
  - O % Fruit-market O % Flower-market O $ Grain-market aain Wine stores
  - F Wine-shop
  - 2 Music-shop
  - Jo, Pawnshop
  - Jud- Dark-room
  - o^ Photographic stores
  - £ Central post, telegraph, and telephone office
  - • Post office
  - PP Parcel post
  - * Redirection
  - T Telegraph office
  - P Telephone office
  - P 357 Telephone and number
  - a Railway station
  - # Level crossing
  - RDC Railway delivery company
  - I Electric tramway Dn-Yoit, Horse and carriage
  - * si Veterinary
  - C) 42 Farrier
  - -&• ForSe
  - * Motor-car
  - / Recharging accumulators a- Air cylinders wa Repair shop 6] Garage, and number of cars it will hold
  - Box [2 Private lock-up compartments, and number
  - E
- p.49 - vue 85/901
- - 50
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - 6 Curling
  - —® Lawn-tennis
  - • Ice hockey
  - I Croquet
  - G Golf
  - = Ski-ing
  - rise Fishing
  - #6 Tobogganing
  - area Ice-run ocuim Rowing
  - — Guides
  - 1x3 Skating
  - • Bob-sleighing exon Steamer excursions phis Theatre
  - © Concert-hall
  - • Ambulance
  - + Hospital
  - $ Doctor
  - C Apothecary
  - g’a Chemist
  - L Inspection-pit
  - G Benzene
  - © Naphtha
  - © Lubricating oil va Is Motor-car works ( Velodrome 47 Bicycle hire
  - • Balloon station Aeroplanes Aeroplane repair shop
  - Ship
  - Steamer
  - Motor-boat
  - Arrows
  - Fist
  - Curved fist Golf-links Race-course
  - Harbour
  - 1 Anchorage
  - and very many others.
  - 4- Keep straight on.
  - 4 Turn to left.
  - + Turn to right.
  - 4 Keep straight on.
  - 4 Turn to left.
  - + Keep straight on.
  - • Turn to right.
  - * Turn to left.
  - + Turn to right.
  - DIRECTION SIGNS.
  - When three roads, diverging from the same point, are met with, one going straight ahead, one turning to the left, and one to the right (whatever may be their angle of intersection).
  - When two roads, diverging from the same point, are met with, one going straight ahead, and the other turning to the left (whatever may be their angle of intersection).
  - When, of two roads diverging from the same point, one goes straight ahead, and the other turns to the right (whatever may be their angle of intersection).
  - When two roads are met with, one turning to the left, the other to the right (at any angle of intersection).
- p.50 - vue 86/901
- - FOUNTS OF TYPE.
  - CAUTION SIGNS.
  - ENGLISH.
  - Y Prohibition ; red disk A Caution; red triangle
  - Q Speed limit; white ring with 23 Cross-roads
  - " limit in figures
  - and others, usually of diamond shape.
  - FRENCH.
  - Steep rise
  - P-XTEP
  - Turn to right Hump or bridge Level crossing
  - Rails projecting upwards Dangerous cross-roads
  - Turn to left
  - Gulley
  - Low bridge
  - Bad pave
  - Village
  - Winding descent with corners
  - bad
  - and others.
  - SPORT SIGNS.
  - Coursing
  - XX 2% Cricket
  - Hunting
  - Football
  - Horse-racing
  - X Lawn-tennis and many others.
  - MISCELLANEOUS SIGNS.
  - at
  - Caduceus
  - KK
  - 6
  - Heart and cross
  - Heart
  - Bretons
  - Siphons
  - Trefoil Hearts Diamonds Clubs Spades
  - 88
  - 4
  - and many others.
- p.51 - vue 87/901
- - 52
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - SYMBOLIC SIGNS.
  - These symbols are used as substitutes not only for the substantives they represent, but also for adjectives, thus, for example, while € stands for " drama " or “ actor,” dr stands for " dramatic author " ; similarly #h t signifies " naval engineer,” and fat signifies “ military engineer.” One example given at the end of this section, taken from an actual work, shows the practical usefulness of these signs, and another given in the form of a guide-book page illustrates their power of conveying meaning while saving at the same time a very great amount of print.
  - Was born in
  - + Died in
  - * Theologian
  - » or *** Philosopher
  - 28 Lawyer
  - $/ Surgeon
  - $ Physician
  - P $ Naval officer
  - P Military officer
  - 7 Musician
  - • Musical composer
  - & Painter
  - O € Picture
  - P Sculptor
  - O > Statue
  - • Drama or actor
  - / Writer
  - 7 Agriculturist
  - € Geographer
  - fh Engineer
  - T or V Geologist
  - ( Mineralogist % Historian 9 Chemist »3 Botanist © Astronomer A Architect Y Archaeologist 27 A literary work
  - • Philologist
  - * Mythologist n Physicist
  - 0 Poet
  - & Trader
  - AS Commerce
  - 8 Prophet
  - — Ornithologist ar- Entomologist • Philatelist L Miner 8’ Apothecary se Battle
  - and many others.
  - EXAMPLE OF USE OF SYMBOLIC SIGNS IN CONTEMPORARY WORK.
  - Fothergill, John $ &*, * 1712 Carr End, + 1780 London “.
  - From Cassell’s " Miniature Cyclopaedia.”
  - Note.—The signs here used are similar to but not identical with those used in Messrs. Cassell’s work, which itself is based on the " Taschen-Konversations-Lexikon ” of Dr. Kurschner of Stuttgart.
- p.52 - vue 88/901
- - FOUNTS OF TYPE.
  - 53
  - EXAMPLE OF GUIDE-BOOK MATTER
  - Here 0 • 1760 who T 1810 in
  - SET UP IDEOGRAPHICALLY.
  - + circumstances in 4
  - O °f Tretz; O once admirably defended against ( by the heroic 41, who finally vanquished his adversary in the great se at A near # at the foot of A in A of the Carpathians. It is a spot well known to »3 and $. * and *% have moralized over it even as CI, G and ^ have 5 each exercised their art in connection with its beauties, while € ^ and other • have laid within its district the scene of their 27. % and / on early n have disputed with , • and * over the meaning of its ruins and even over the very stones disinterred by chance by the plough of Z. T and ( have studied its rocks, and It assisted by 2, have given A products 10 to distribute through every O known to @. In this district are to
  - O are held weekly; every facility in the shape of B,
  - and facilities on
  - river and * ;
  - THE PRECEDING EXAMPLE IN ORDINARY LETTERPRESS.
  - Here the poet was born in 1760, who died in 1810 in tragic circum stances in the cathedral fortress town of Tretz ; a fortress once admirably defended against the Turkish Sultan by the heroic King-Emperor, w 0 finally vanquished his adversary in the great battle at the cross-road near the ford at the foot of the highest mountain in the range of the Carpathians. 5 It is a spot well known to botanists and ornithologists. Theologians an philosophers have moralized over it even as musicians, painters an sculptors have each exercised their art in connexion with its eau ic , while dramatic and other authors have laid within its district t e seen their works. The historian and the writer on early law have ispu e with the archaeologist, philologist and mythologist over the meaning ruins and even over the very stones disinterred by chance by the P S of the agriculturist. The geologist and mineralogist have stu e 1 s and the mining engineer, assisted by the chemist, have given com products to distribute through every country known to t e geogr p In this district are to be found hotels of every class, every conve exists for the horse and motor; fish, flesh, fowl, flower, rit, honey markets are held weekly; every facility in the shape of pos s, g telephones, post-horses, steamboats, rowing-boats, motor-boats an 3
  - boats and facilities on the river and railways ; electric an steam am on the land are there, with garages, and even aeroplane esta is m ’ of course bicycle repair shops and the necessary outfit or pneum
- p.53 - vue 89/901
- - 54
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - It is obvious that the foregoing guide-book or Baedeker example could be extended, page after page, through ecclesiasticism, chivalry, heraldry, etc., but even the matter given above shows that it is possible to effect a saving on the ordinary letter-press of nearly one-third, or say 30 per cent, when the matter is set up with symbols and abbreviations, or as it may be truly called ideographically, though the saving in space is reduced in the actual example given owing to the extra leading made necessary by the large sorts used in it for many of the symbols.
  - The spoken words which directly represent thought are called ideo-phones, and the written symbols which directly represent thought are called ideograms. It is probable that for some considerable time after its introduction writing was ideographic, but at length it was extended so as to represent the sounds of the ideophones, and the symbols which perform this function are called phonograms. The crucial distinction between ideograms and phonograms lies in the fact that the former, since they represent nothing but soundless thought, cannot have any fixed sound of their own ; whereas the latter represent sound and nothing else. Yet, since every language, for the sake of convenience, bestows names on most ideograms, and since these names are usually reduced again to writing —which is then only the great-grandchild of thought—we find that speech and writing are so closely interwoven in actual practice that it is rarely necessary to remember that they really constitute two totally different methods of expressing thought.
  - All pictures, maps, and diagrams, when they convey any meaning at all, may be regarded as ideograms, since the meaning they convey to the eye is independent of the language spoken by the owner of the eye. They address one in a language that practically no one has to learn, a language that is international and that stands in its ready simplicity in the same relationship to Esperanto as Esperanto itself may be said to stand in relationship to any human language of ordinary complexity. The method, in its proper sphere, is perfectly legitimate, logical, legible, and instantly comprehensible, and its use is ever widening and increasing. Furthermore the method of appealing to the eye (and not to the ear as is done in the case of all other written speech, with one great exception), links it to the only living human language—Chinese—that like itself in its recorded expression has practically no sound, no grammar, and no troubles save the trouble of memorizing an enormous number of signs which convey every shade of meaning, and, in practice, of automatically and instantaneously allotting the correct meaning to each individual symbol.
- p.54 - vue 90/901
- - CHAPTER VII.
  - UNITS AND DIMENSIONS.
  - " And by complicating the Letters and Points, as aforesaid, you will have any Thickness, either to make a Gage by, or to use otherwise.”
  - Moxon’s Mechanick Exercises.
  - Minion on brevier, antique (Clowes).
  - Spaces and quads.—In addition to the letter characters, spaces and quadrats, or quads, must be provided for separating the words and spacing out the lines. These usually have the following set widths : hair-space = } body, thin space = 3 body, middle space = 4 body, thick space = 3 body, en quad = 2 body, em quad = the body, two-em quad = 2 x body, three-em quad = 3 x body and four-em quad = 4 x body. It might be inferred that the en and em quads are of the same set as the n and m characters, but this only occurs in exceptional circumstances. Owing to modern conditions of noise in printing-works, and to make orders clear on the telephone, these are better called " nut ” and “ mutton " quads respectivel
  - In most cases where typecasting machines are concerned it is necessary to consider the quads larger than the em, as they are usu softer and cheaper metal and cast separately.
  - When quads are of 18-point or larger body they are frequent! hollow, in which form they are known as quotations when they do exceed 8 ems in length. Quotations of 8 ems and upwards in these bodies are known as furniture ; this is generally cast hollow and cored from both sides instead of from only one side, as is usual with quotations. Quotations and furniture are used for making up the blank spaces on pages having a considerable area of white.
  - In order to separate lines of type and increase the amount of white between them, leads are used ; these are thin strips of metal of thicknesses varying up to 4-point, generally expressed as fractions of a pica thus : a 3-to-pica lead, that is a lead $ pica in thickness. Above the thickness of 4 points, leads are usually called clumps, and this term covers the size from 4 points to 18 points, above which the term furniture is generally adopted. A reglet is a strip of hard-wood sometimes used in place of a clump, and is made of the same thickness as a clump.
  - Height-to-paper.—In the “ British Printer,” Hermann Smalian, of
  - 55
- p.55 - vue 91/901
- - UL O
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Berlin, with whom the study of type standards is a hobby, controverts some statements made in a lecture by Wightman regarding the heights of types in use on the Continent. On collating the quotation (given by Smalian below) with the original in De Vinne’s work, the authors find that it is incorrectly termed a quotation, being really more in the nature of a paraphrase ; for though the sense is correctly rendered the wording differs in several places from that of the author quoted.
  - Smalian says, " These particulars appear to have been taken from Mr. Th. L. De Vinne’s book, ‘ The Practice of Typography.’ (New York, 1900.)
  - " They read as follows :—
  - " ‘ Variations in the height of types have not been as marked as variations in body. British and American founders came to a practical agreement at the beginning of this century that the standard of height should be eleven-twelfths of an English inch. In France the height of type has been fixed by law at ten and a half geometric lines. Modern French types are higher than American types; the two heights cannot be used together. German types were still higher, but are now made to the French standard. This reform was made by H. Berthold. He modelled and had constructed several standards of steel, and sent one gratuitously to every German typefounder. The types of Russia and Poland, once more than one inch in height, are now made to conform to the Berthold system.’
  - “ These particulars are altogether incorrect. The correct height of types is as follows :—
  - “ I. Frankfort height of type.—Nearly 68 Didot points in height. This was the height of the typefoundries at Frankfort-on-the-Main. Very old printing establishments have this height up to the present day.
  - “ 2. Russian height of type.—Nearly 663 Didot points in height. This is the only height of type in Russia proper.
  - " 3. Leipzig height of type.—Nearly 66 Didot points in height. This was the height of the typefoundries at Berlin, Leipzig, Hamburg, and so forth. Same is still to be found in many old printing establishments in Germany, Switzerland, Denmark, Norway, Sweden, in the Russian Baltic Provinces and in Russian Poland. In addition that is the standard of the type-founders in Holland.
  - “ 4. Haase height.—Nearly 631 Didot points in height. This is the height of type of the typefounder Gottlieb Haase of Prague. Same is still in existence in very old printing establishments in Austria-Hungary.
  - " 5. Fournier height of type.—Nearly 63 Didot points in height (10 lines of the French foot). This height was laid down in 1723 by the French law. This is still to-day the standard height for typefoundries in Belgium and Austria.
  - " 6. French height of type.—Nearly 623 Didot points in height. This is the height of the typefoundries in Paris. All typefoundries on the Continent desirous of having a uniform height of type now introduce this
- p.56 - vue 92/901
- - UNITS AND dimensions.
  - 57
  - French height, i.e. all typefoundries in France, Spain, Italy, Greece, Germany, Switzerland, &c. In Germany, ever since 1879 all new printing establishments have been set up on the basis of this French height of type. Ever since 1840 individual German typefoundries have fitted out new printing establishments with this height of type. It is evident from this that Berthold did not require to create this height of type.
  - “ Th. L. De Vinne has confounded body of type with height of type. Hermann Berthold’s great service to typefounding consisted in the scientific adaptation of the Didot system based upon the Paris foot. In 1879 he adapted same to the metric scale, and prepared about forty steel typometers of 300 mm. = 133 Nonpareil (798 Didot points), and handed one copy to each foundry without charge. (Vide, " British Printer,” No. 69, 1899, p. 130).
  - " In Germany an effort was made to gradually supersede the old heights of types by the French height. In order that this height might not suffer any modification, the combined German typefounders deposited a standard of this height of type with the authorities in 1905: 623 points = 23:566 mm.
  - “ The British height of type is nearly 62 Didot points in height.
  - " Hermann Smalian.”
  - The height-to-paper of type in America and England is now standardized at 0’918 inch, or 23*317 mm. Certain typefounders still cast the points and dots of the i and j about O'OOI inch high-to-paper, that is of a height of 0'919 inch, while in the case of some composing and casting machines the height-to-paper is made as much as 0'920 inch, or 0'002 inch high-to-paper, when new, to allow for the wear which takes place in the matrices.
  - The trade height-to-paper of spaces, quads, quotations, furniture, leads and clumps is usually 075 inch, but where stereotypes are to be taken, the height-to-paper is frequently made as much as 0'88 inch so that the top of the spaces, quads, leads or clumps comes to the height of the shoulder of the type: quotations and furniture are but rarely made of this stereo height. Some special furniture is also made cored from one side only with a flat surface on the other; this is known as table-top furniture, and is used extensively for mounting the metal plates of process blocks in place of the mahogany backing generally used for that purpose.
  - UNITS, LIMITS OF ACCURACY, AND SPACING.
  - Units.—In order to appreciate fully the difficulties to be contended with in typecasting and composing machines, the degree of accuracy required must first be considered.
  - The unit for measurement in this country and in America is the pica
- p.57 - vue 93/901
- - 00
  - 10
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - which is approximately one-sixth of an inch; until quite recently the size of the pica varied from 0’1678 inch to 0'1664 inch, but now most founders are in agreement and the size 0'16604 inch adopted in America has become standard.
  - The size of pica as made by the leading English typefounders recently varied as follows :—
  - TABLE 2.—Pica sizes.
  - Maker. Pica erns per foot. Size of pica. In.
  - Standard size 72'272 0'16604
  - Stephenson and Blake 72′125 0'16638
  - P. M. Shanks and Sons 72'000 0-16667
  - Caslon . . . . 71:875 0'16696
  - Figgins’. 71'708 0-16735
  - Sir Chas. Reed and Sons . 71'667 0'16744
  - Miller and Richard 71′500 0'16783
  - The Monotype moulds and matrices used in England do not cast type of standard-point bodies, the size of the 12-point being 0'1668 inch. Not only does this differ from standard practice, but the height-to-paper is also slightly different from standard, being 0'920 inch.
  - Not only was there a difference between the sizes of pica cast by different firms, but other sizes, such as english, varied, one being 14-point and another 131-point. Further, some other sizes such as emerald, the half of 131-point english, or 6|-point ; diamond, the half of 81-point bourgeois, or 41-point ; and minikin, the half of nonpareil or 3-point, were made by some founders and not by others. Of these, minikin, or excelsior, by which name it is known in America, is used for split fractions in mathematical work and also occasionally in the setting up of musical matter.
  - The sizes above paragon were formerly known by names which were in some cases confusing, thus, double pica was the size intermediate between paragon and 2-line pica, being equal to 2-line small pica or 22-point. The five sizes above double pica were—
  - 2-line pica .. .. .. 24-point.
  - 2-line english .. .. 27-point to 28-point.
  - 2-line great primer .. 36-point.
  - trafalgar (known in America
  - as meridian) .. .. 44-point.
  - canon .. .. .. 48-point.
- p.58 - vue 94/901
- - UNITS AND DIMENSIONS.
  - 59
  - The pica (0’166044 inch) -is divided into twelve points (1 point = 0’013837 inch). The sizes of the various bodies are measured by points, and are as follows:—
  - TABLE 3.—Body-sizes of type.
  - Name. Example. Used in Points. Body. In.
  - 2-line pica1 . Typecas ) / 24 0-33209
  - These larger
  - 2-line small pica1. Typecasti sizes are 22 0’30441
  - Paragon Typecastin / mainly used / 20 0*27674
  - for display
  - Great primer 2 Typecasting purposes. 18 0-24907
  - 2-line brevier 4 Typecasting a / 16 0-22139
  - English Typecasting an 1 Scotland for 1 I legal reports. j) 14 0-19372
  - Pica1 Typecasting and c ( Parliamentary ) 1 reports. j 12 0-16604
  - Small pica 1 .1 Typecasting and co ( Text-books and ) 1 novels. / II 0’15221
  - Typecasting and com / Patent ) I specifications. / 10 0-14529
  - Long primer 2 I Typecasting and comp ( Text-books and ) I novels. ) IO 0-13837
  - Typecasting and comp / “Proc. Inst. 1 1 Mech. Eng." / 94 0-13145
  - Bourgeois 3 . { Typecasting and compo Typecasting and composi " Times ” leaders. 9 81 0-12453 0-11761
  - Brevier 4 Typecasting and composi “ Punch.” 8 0-11070
  - Minion . Typecasting and composing “ Times.” 7 0-09686
  - Nonpareil5 Typecasting and composing m ‘ Engineering ” ads. 6 0-08302
  - Agate Typecasting and composing mac Used in America. 51 0-07610
  - Ruby Typecasting and composing mach " Times ” ads. 51 0-07264
  - Five-point . / Devotional works. 5 0-06919
  - Pearl . ./ Typecasting and composing machin | “ Bradshaw.” 41 0-06573
  - 1 Pronounced Pie'ca. 2 Pronounced Prim'er. 3 Pronounced Bur-joice"-.-
  - 4 Pronounced Bre-veer’. 5 Pronounced Non’parel. ,qal
  - Note.—Since the above table was compiled, some of the examp 16-81 ven have changed the body-size of the type used. 3 834/07
- p.59 - vue 95/901
- - 6o
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The relative importance of the various body-sizes may to some extent be gauged by the following table, which shows how many different faces of each body the American Type Founders Company supply according to one of their specimen books :—
  - TABLE 4.—Faces and body-sizes.
  - Body. Faces. Body. Faces. Body. Faces. Body. Faces.
  - 3-pt. .I 6-pt. • 27 9-pt. 22 12-pt. • 19
  - 4-pt. .2 7-pt. • 19 10-pt. . 28 14-pt. • 5
  - 5-pt. • 5 8-pt. 28 11-pt. • 17 15-pt. .1
  - 51-pt. • 9
  - From this table it will appear that the even-point bodies are most in demand. Of these 183 faces, 99 are modern and 84 are old-style.
  - Point System.—Much confusion and trouble has been caused in the past through want of adherence to a definite unit, and some evidences of this remain in the half-point sizes, for example small pica (101), long primer (92), and bourgeois (8%), still in use in England.
  - In the United States of America the point system has for nearly twenty years been in universal use. It may be said also that its use is now practically universal throughout Great Britain and her colonies and dependencies. The system has for its basis the point or unit of 0’013837 inch. It has been stated that it was originally intended to make the unit one seventy-second of an inch, and the nearness of the measurements gives some colour to the statement, for, as a matter of fact, 72 points are nearly equal to an inch. It was found, however, more convenient, as the result of a careful discussion and a report following on the meeting of the United States Type Founders’ Association held at Niagara in 1886, to adopt the pica of the MacKellar, Smiths & Jordan Company as the standard basis, the subdivision of which into twelve equal parts gave the unit or point of 0’013837 inch (0*3515 mm.).
  - Incidentally it may be mentioned that 996 points are very nearly equal to 35 centimetres, the difference in the length being only about one five-hundredth of an inch. In this connexion it may also be as well to state here that the British and the United States inches are not absolutely identical, one British inch being equal to 0’999997 United States inch. There is, roughly speaking, a difference of one three-hundred-thousandth of an inch between the standard inches of the two countries.
  - The French point system is of much earlier date, and was originated about the year 1737. Its author was Fournier, le jeune, by whose name it is still known, and in this system the unit or point is equivalent to
- p.60 - vue 96/901
- - UNITS AND dimensions.
  - 61
  - 0*34875 mm. The following is a careful translation of the chapter in his famous work in which its originator explains his point system, and the illustrations that accompany it, figs. 44 to 49, are reproductions in facsimile from the copy of his book, in the possession of the authors of this treatise. The figures are interesting, for they exhibit not only the names and distinguishing numerals of his type and their equivalent in his points, but also show a scale. They are further remarkable from the fact that the illustration given in De Vinne’s work is apparently from a later edition of the “ Manuel Typographique,” for the page, given in De Vinne’s book as the page of Fournier’s work which carries the illustration, is not the same as the page which carries it in the authors’ own copy of his work : the type also appears somewhat battered and the scale -not so correct. In the case of such a careful author as De Vinne, these differences must have some good reason and cannot be mere clerical errors or errors of reproduction.
  - " DETAIL AS TO DIFFERENT COMPONENTS OF A FOUNT OF CHARACTERS.
  - OF TYPOGRAPHIC POINTS.
  - " This chapter demands particular explanation, for the subject of which it treats is novel and unknown. I introduce it here to make known the new proportions that I have given to Letter-Bodies by fixed dimensions which I have named Typographic Points.
  - " The latest Government Regulation (‘ Reglement de la Librairie ’) issued in 1723 has fixed the height-to-paper at ten and a half geometric lines : this rule is as easy to give out as it is easy to put into practice, but the same was not the case when the Regulation sought to establish laws to settle the body-sizes of the said Letters. At the time when this rule was made, there was apparently nobody to be found sufficiently informed to furnish true ideas on the matter, which was of great importance, since the endeavour was to correct abuses and put into order and standardization that which had hitherto had neither the one nor the other. Through lack of enlightenment on this point a certain Master-Printer gave with all their defects, as a standard, such Letters as he found in his own printing establishment. The law which was promulgated, not being founded on any principle, remained unenforced ; for this reason the body-sizes of Type have never had fixed and rational dimensions, and so the result is that this want of system is at the present time as great as it has ever been.
  - " It is stated, in Article LIX of this Regulation, that, of bodies proper, the Petit-canon is equal to two Saint-augustins ; the Gros-parangon to a Cicero and a Petit-romain, etc., but it is not stated what size this Saint-augustin, this Cicero and this Petit-romain should have that their sum may equal the Petit-canon or the Gros-parangon. It is therefore always possible to deviate from the Regulation, and this has been freely done without infringing the letter of the Regulation, because if one makes one Saint-augustin body of smaller size than another, it is possible to make the Petit-canon
- p.61 - vue 97/901
- - TABLE GENERALE
  - de LA PROPORTION
  - des differens Carps de. Caraleres.
  - SCHELLE FIXE de 144 points Typographiques.
  - [iiliilniiilnhil I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I -
  - Nomb. CORps. Points
  - I PARISIENNE 5
  - 2 Nompareille 6
  - 3 MIGNONE 7
  - 4 petit-texte 8
  - 5 GAILLARDE 9
  - 6 Petit-romain. — 2 Parifiennes. 10
  - 7 PHILOSOPHIE. = 1 Panf. I Nom- 11
  - pareille.
  - 8 Cicero. — 2 Nomp. = I Parifienne, I Mignone. 12
  - 9 Saint-Augustin. — 2 Mignones. 14
  - = i Nompareille, 1 Petit-texte.
  - Fig. 44.—Facsimile reproduction of Fournier’s table of proportions of body-sizes.
  - I 3
  - 8 A A
  - %
  - E
  - des Proportions. 135
  - GROS-TEXTE. - 2 Petit-textes. 16 = ! Panf. i Philofophie. = I Nomp. i Perit-rom. = i Mignone, i Gail. + 2 Parifiennes , I Nompareille.
  - GROS-ROMAIN, — 2 Gaillardes. 18
  - — 3 Nompareilles. = i Nompareille, 1 Cicero. = i Mign. I Philofophie. = I Petit - texte, I Petit - romain. + 2 Parif. I Petit-texte. + 1 Parif. I Nompareille, 1 Mignone.
  - PETITPARANGON. - 2 Petit-rom. 20 - 4 Parifiennes, = 1 Nompareille, i Saint-Augustin. = 1 Petit-texte , I Cice'ro. = 1 Gaillarde, 1 Philofoph. + 2 Panf. I Petit-rom. + 2 Nomp. 1 Petit-texte. + z Mign. 1 Nomp. + i Parifienne, I Nomp. 1 Gaill. + I Parifienne, 1 Mign. 1 Petit-texte.
  - GROS-PARANGON. — 2 Philofoph. 22 = I Nomp. I Gros-tex. = i Petit-tex. I Saint-auguftin. = 1 Petit-romain , I Cice'ro. + 2 Parifiennes, 1 Cicero. + 2 Nomp. I Petit-rom. + 2. Mign.
  - 1 Petit-texte. + 2 Petit-tex. 1 Nomp.
  - Fig. 45.—Fournier’s table (page 2), continued.
  - Cones. Points
  - + 1 Parif. i Nomp. 1 Philofophie. + i Nomp. i Mignone, j Gaill. + 2 Panf. 2 Nomp. + 3 Parifiennes, I Mignone.
  - Palestine. - 2 Cic. - 3 Petit-tex. 24 — 4 Nomp. = i Nomp. i Gros-rom. = i Petit-tex. i Gros-tex. = 1 Petit-rom. I Saint-auguft. + 2 Panfiennes, I Saint-auguftin. + 2 Nomp. i Cic. + 2 Mign. I Petit-rom. + 2 Gaill. i Nomp. + I Parif. 1 Mign. 1 Cic. + 1 Parif. i Gaill. 1 Petit-romain. + 1 Nomp. i Mign. i Philofophie. + i Nomp. i Petit-tex. 1 Petit-rom. + i Mignone, i Petit-texte,i Gaill. + 2 Parif. 2 Mign. + 3 Parif. 1 Gaill. PETIT-CANON. — 2 Saint-auguftin. 28 — 4 Mign. + i Nomp. I Gros-par. + i Petit-texte, 1 Petit-parangon. + I Petit-rom. i Gros-rom. + 1 Cic. i Gros-texte. + 2 Panf. I Gros-rom. + 2 Nomp. i Gros-texte. + 2 Mign. I Saint-auguftin. + 2 Petit-textes. I Cic. + 2 Gaill. i Petit-romain.
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Fig. 46.—Fournier’s table (page 3), continued.
- p.62 - vue 98/901
- - 2
  - 2
  - I 6
  - TABLE
  - Points
  - + 2 Petit-rom. 1 Petit-tex. + 2 Phil.
  - I Nomp. + 2 Parifiennes, 2 Gaill. + 2 Nomp. 2 Petit-textes. + 2 Parif. 3 Nomp. + 3 Nomp. 1 Petit-rom. + 4 Parif. I Petit-texte. + I Parif. i Mign. I Gros-texte. + 1 Nomp.
  - 1 Petit-texte, 1 Saint-aug. + 1 Parif. i Gaill. I Saint-auguftin. + I Parif. I Philofophie, x Cicero. + I Nomp. I Petit-rom. 1 Cicero. + 1 Mign. i Gaill. I Cic. + 2 Nomp. 1 Mign. I Gaill. + 2 Mign. 1 Nompareille , i Petit-texte.
  - TrismEGISTE. — 2 Gros-romains. - 3 Cice'ros. — 4 Gaillardes. — 6 Nompareilles. = 1 Petit-tex, I Petit-canon. = 1 Cic. I Palelt. = I Saint-auguftin, 1 Gros-parang. = 1 Gros-texte, i Petit-parang. + 2 Petit-rom. I Gros-texte. + 1 Petit-tex. 2 Saint-auguft. + 2 Philofoph. X Saint-auguft. + I Nomp. 3 Petit-rom. + 3 Petit-
  - o
  - 4 Mign. i Petit-tex.
  - 6 Parifiennes, 1 Nomp.
  - textes, I
  - Fournier’s table (page 4), continued.
  - DES PROPORTIONS. 137 Nomb. Corps. Points
  - 17 Gros-canon. —2 Gros-parangons. 44
  - —’ 4 Philosophies. = 1 Petit-texte.
  - i Trifmegifte. = 1 Gros-texte, I Petit-canon. = X Petit-parangon, I Pal. + 2 Cic. I Petit-par. + 1 Petit-tex.
  - 2 Gros-rom. + 1 Cic. 2 Gros-textes.
  - + 2 Petit-texte , 2 Saint-auguftins.
  - + I Petit-texte, 3 Cic. + 2 Mign.
  - 3 Petit-rom. + 1 Petit-tex. 4 Gaill.
  - + 2 Nomp. 4 Petit-tex. -1- 5 Mign.
  - X Gaill. + 6 Nomp. 1 Petit-texte.
  - + 7 Parif. 1 Gaill.
  - 18 DOUBLE-CANON. - 2Petit-canons. 56 - 4 Saint-auguftins. — 8 Mignones.
  - = I Cic. I Gros-canon = 1 Petit-par.
  - I Trilmeg. + I Petit-texte, 2 Paleft.
  - + 1 Cic. 2 Gros-parang. + 1 Gros-texte, 2 Petit-parang. + 2 Petit-rom. 2 Gros-rom. + 1 Petit-tex. 3 Gr;-tex.
  - + 1 Petit-texte, 4 Cic. + 2 Nomp.
  - 4 Philofoph. + 1 Nomp. 5 Petit-rom.
  - + X Parif. I Nomp. 5 Gaill: + 1 Petit-texte, 8 Nomp. + 1 o Parifiennes, I Nompareille.
  - Fig. 48.—Fournier’s table (page 5), continued.
  - 3 2. 0
  - n so
  - 138 TABLE
  - Nomb.
  - 0
  - O A
  - CORPS.
  - Points
  - Triple-canon. — 2 Trifmegifte. - 3 Paleftine. — 4 Gros-romain. - 6 Cicero. - 8 Gaillarde. - 9 Pe-tit-tex. — 12 Nompareilles. = i«Gr. texte, I Double-canon. = 1 Petit-canon, I Gros-canon. + I Gros-tex. 2 Petit-canon. + 1 Nomp. 3 Gros-parang.. + I Cic. 3 Petit-parangons. + 6 Petit-rom. 1 Cic. + 1 Petit-tex. 4 Gros-tex. + 2 Petit-tex. 4 Saint-auguft. + I Nomp. 6 Philosophies. + 2 Nomp. 6 Petit-rom. + 1 Gaill. 9 Mignones. + 1 Mignone. 1 3 Parif.
  - GROSSE-NOMPAREILLE. - 4 Pa-leftines. - 6 Gros-tex. - 8 Ciceros. - 12 Petit-tex. - 1 6 Nompareilles. + I Paleft. 1 Triple-canon. + 2 Petit-parang. I Double-canon. + 1 Petit-texte, 2 Gros-canons. + 1 Paleft. 2 Trifmegiftes. + 1 Cic. 3 Petit-can. + 1 Pet.-tex. 4 Gros-par. + i Nomp. 5 Gros-rom. + 1 Cic. 6 Saint-aug. + i Petit-tex. 8 Philof. + 1 Nomp. 9 Petit-rom. + 1 Nomp. to Gaill.&c.
  - 33
  - NO O
  - Fig. 49.—Fournier’s table (page 6), concluded.
  - UNITS AND DIMENSIONS.
- p.63 - vue 99/901
- - 64
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - to double that body-size, by which means the Regulation is fulfilled : another makes his Saint-augustin bodies of greater or lesser size and from the two body-sizes he makes his Petit-canon ; here again the Regulation is fulfilled although in spirit it has been evaded. Thus has confusion been perpetuated in the matter and to such an extent that it is sometimes difficult to distinguish between two bodies of which the larger is of small size for its kind and the smaller of large size. It follows that Types reputedly of the same body-size vary to greater or lesser extent, and when such type find their way into a Printing-Office the workmen mix the quads and spaces together, thus spoiling both founts.
  - " The Regulation has provided against this mischance, I shall be told, since it requires that a certain number of type of each body-size shall be delivered to the Founders to which they shall work, under penalty. But these type, selected haphazard, were never delivered, and they could in no way have remedied the evil which it was desired to avoid since their body-sizes would not have been correlated to one another, they would have been devoid of any reasoned out proportion, would not have worked together, and finally were without any definite underlying principle. These farcical Regulations, instead of introducing precision and order, have on the other hand increased confusion by an unnecessary multiplication of units. Hence it happens that the bodies of Petit-canon, of Gros-parangon, of Gros-romain, of Cicero, of Philosophie, of Gaillarde, of Mignonne, according to the Regulation, are without double bodies on which two-line letters can be made, notwithstanding that such are necessary for all these bodies. Hence there arise seven or eight bastard body-sizes, useless for any other purpose, and mere useless burdens on the Printing-Office. Moreover, this division of bodies using a Cicero and a Petit-romain to equal a Gros-parangon, using a Petit-romain and a Petit-texte to equal a Gros-romain, using a Petit-texte and a Nompareille to form a Saint-augustin, clearly show the limited experience and knowledge of those who proposed this method. Why make a division of the type-bodies into these unequal parts which lead nowhere, and of which one cannot render any account ? Moreover, this clause in the Regulation has never been carried into effect. The trouble was indeed realized, though no one knew how to find the remedy for it, and for the good reason that the Printers, who alone are called into consultation on these matters, are not themselves Typographers enough to be able to discuss with authority, and to make regulations respecting, a branch of the art which they do not themselves practise, and of which frequently they know nothing but the name.
  - " It is this fact which led me to unravel this tangle by establishing order where no order had ever previously existed: I think that by my invention of the Typographic point system, I have had the good fortune to succeed with an exactitude and a precision that leave nothing to be desired. This system consists merely in the division of the body-sizes of the type into equal and definite parts which I call Points. By this means the
- p.64 - vue 100/901
- - UNITS AND DIMENSIONS.
  - 65
  - difference between and ratio to one another of the body-sizes can be exactly determined. They can be associated together in the same manner as numerical signs can be combined ; and, as two and two make four, add two, and six will result; double this total and the result will be twelve, etc., similarly a Nompareille, which consists of six points, taken with another Nompareille, will together equal a Cicero which consists of twelve points ; add to this another Nompareille and a body of eighteen points or the Gros-romain will result; double this total, making thirty-six points, and the Trismegiste, which contains this number, will result, and thus with other sizes, as will be seen from the Table of Sizes which follows [figs. 44 to 49].
  - " In order to combine bodies, it is merely necessary to know the number of Typographic points of which each consists. For this reason it is necessary that the points, or given dimensions, should be constant, so that they may serve as guides in the Printing-Office, just as the pied de roi, the inches, and the lines are used in Mensuration [Geometrie]. With this object I have fixed the exact size which the point should have, in the scale which appears at the head of the Table of Sizes ; and in order to ensure uniform exactitude of workmanship in the production of the body-sizes of Type, I have designed an appliance which I have called the Prototype, and which is described and figured later.
  - " The invention of these points is the first tribute which I paid to Typography in 1737. Thereafter compelled to carry on continuously a painful and exacting profession, that of cutting all the punches necessary for the equipment of my Foundry, I could find no established rule which might have guided me in determining the body-sizes of the Type I had to produce. This being the case, I was compelled to set up laws for myself; this I did, and I kept my record of them in the following Table [pp. 62-63].
  - “ At the head of this Table a definite scale is printed divided into two inches, the inch divided into twelve lines, and the line into six of these typographical points ; the total length is 144 points. The small divisions at one end are each of two points, which is the exact difference between the Petit-texte and the Petit-romain, between the latter and the Cicero, etc. The number of points which I assign to each body-size must be taken from this scale. These sizes when accurately taken for each particular body-size, and after they have been verified upon the Prototype, will together show a general agreement amongst all the body-sizes of type, as will be shown by the combinations which follow.
  - " This scale has a total length equal to twelve Ciceros. After the printing of this Table, which I published in 1737, I found that in drying, the paper had slightly reduced the true length of the scale: in the present case I have taken precautions against this defect by adding what was required for the shrinkage of the paper.
  - " Each body-size at the head of its own paragraph is divided or made up with the greatest exactitude by the combinations which are recorded in
  - F
- p.65 - vue 101/901
- - 66
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - the Table, combinations which are made up of equal bodies, unequal bodies and multiples. The first are preceded by a —, the second by =, and the third by +." [Fournier uses these signs for reference marks and not in their arithmetical sense ; figs. 44 to 49 are self-explanatory.]
  - Fournier’s system has now, however, been almost entirely superseded by the system of Didot, and the Fournier point or corps is now used only in Belgium, in parts of Austria, and in the North of France.
  - THE DIDOT POINT SYSTEM.
  - Didot was a celebrated typefounder of Paris, who somewhere about 1770, or not long after the death of Fournier, proposed the improvement of that reformer’s system of typographic points, basing the point upon some well-known and authoritative lineal measure, selecting for this purpose the pied de roi, or the governmental standard foot of France. This foot is the equivalent of 127897 English inches. He retained Fournier’s subdivisions and made no alteration in the number of 72 points to the inch ; twelve inches of course went to the foot, and twelve lines to the inch ; each line was divided into six typographic points.
  - The Didot system, now generally adopted, has as its basis the point or corps of 0’376 millimetre. It is to this Didot unit that most foreign type-casting and composing machines are designed. The philosophic or corps onze, of II Didot points, measures 0'1628 inch and is therefore nearly equal to the English pica. The corps douze, now generally regarded as the standard for body-sizes, measures 4 512 millimetres or 0’1776 inch. The French point is 0'01480 inch, whereas the English point is 0′013837 inch.
  - The bodies in use are named according to the number of points; the sizes most generally in use are 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, II, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 28, etc.
  - The height-to-paper of French type is 23-50 millimetres, but is increased to 23'545 millimetres for very fat black faces. The height of quads and spaces is from 19'18 millimetres to 19'50 millimetres. The height of leads and furniture is about the same, the minimum being 18'05 millimetres.
  - OTHER SYSTEMS.
  - Other plans for securing uniformity in type-bodies were proposed by Fergusson of Scotland in 1824, by Bower of Sheffield in 1841, and Shanks of London in 1857; but, with the exception of the last mentioned, none of these suggestions ever came into practical use.
  - Fergusson’s system, which is quoted from Hansard’s " Typographia,” is interesting, as the sizes would form a harmonic in place of an arithmetical progression ; but obviously the bodies would not work together as in the arithmetical and more rational systems that have been adopted.
- p.66 - vue 102/901
- - UNITS AND DIMENSIONS.
  - 9
  - " PLAIN AND ACCURATE RULES
  - " For obtaining Permanent Uniformity in the Sizes of the Bodies of Types and in their Height to Paper.
  - “ I. Let the fount called Nonpareil be made the fundamental standard, and make 12 lines of Nonpareil measure exactly one inch.—2. Let 14 lines of Nonpareil be the common measure for all other founts; this measure to take in 5 lines of Great Primer, 6 of English, 7 of Pica, 8 of Small Pica, 9 of Long Primer, 10 of Bourgeois, 11 of Brevier, and 12 of Minion.—3. Let II lines of Nonpareil be the standard height to paper.
  - " A conformity with these three rules would evidently prove a great benefit to Printers, and might ultimately not be less so to Letter-founders. If adopted, the bodies of English, Pica, and Small Pica will be a little enlarged ; Long Primer and Brevier a little diminished.
  - “ The standard foot measure kept at the Royal Society should be made use of for obtaining an accurate inch to proceed upon. I shall be glad to find these hints taken into due consideration ; and unless some strong objection be stated, I trust they will be readily adopted.
  - " James Fergusson.”
  - The system introduced by Shanks in the Patent Type Foundry, and there used for many years, differed from the foregoing system insomuch as it adopted a decimal division of his nonpareil body, which latter was one-twelfth of an inch. The following table (table 5) shows the number of points and the actual sizes of the various bodies up to english.
  - TABLE 5.—Shanks’s point system.
  - Body. Points. In. Body. Points. In.
  - Semi-nonpareil 5 0'0417 Brevier 13 0-1083
  - Brilliant 6 0’0500 Bourgeois . 14 0-1167
  - Diamond 7 00583 Long primer 16 0’1333
  - Pearl. 8 0'0667 Small pica . 18 0-1500
  - Ruby 9 0-0750 Pica. 20 0-1667
  - Nonpareil . 10 0-0833 English 22 0-1833
  - Minion 12 O'lOOO
  - It will be seen that these sizes, based on a different point system, agreed very closely with the body-sizes then in use by many founders.
- p.67 - vue 103/901
- - 68 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - It is strange that in the history of this subject a geometrical progression for the sizes of type does not appear to have ever been proposed. Had the art of typefounding not come into being until the latter half of the nineteenth century, it is probable that a system of increase of body in geometrical proportions, each size being six-fifths of the next smaller body, or some similar ratio, would have received serious attention. Although difficulty would have occurred in working the different bodies together, there would yet have been found partisans of such a system amongst those who print different sizes of the same works, for instance Bibles, prayer-books, and other devotional compilations, in which type of different sizes are required at different periods of human life, each new volume resembling its predecessor in every respect save in its dimensions and in those of the characters used.
  - With such an arrangement of geometrically-proportioned body, a man, whose failing sight required him to have recourse to large type, would find on the same page of the work and in the same relative position, the same word, the same letter and the same space as in the smaller copy to which daily use had made him accustomed. This result is now actually attained, but it requires very careful workmanship and elaborate precaution in the selection of the founts and in the spacing.
  - To facilitate comparison between type made to the various point systems at present in use, table 6 (pp. 70-71) is given. In this table the sizes of each body are given in decimals of inches and millimetres with their corresponding names, which practically cover the field for Great Britain, her colonies and dependencies, Europe, the United States of America and all South America, and indeed, for the matter of that, the whole civilized world. The point, or one of the corps systems, is now in use everywhere, and though, in consequence of the large quantities of standing matter that yet exist, bastard bodies, namely, bodies not conforming to any of the point or corps systems, are still in use and still produced, their employment is steadily dying out. Moreover, the names which originally belonged to them, are now occasionally applied to the next larger or nearest true point size, as the faces have been transferred to such sizes. It is, however, preferable to avoid this use of the old names, and to style the different body-sizes by the number of points or corps which truly represent them, reserving the old names only to designate bastard sizes, in which case it is further advisable to supplement the name of the body with that of the maker, for example pica (Caslon’s), bourgeois (Figgins’), minion (Miller & Richard’s).
  - In the European names for bodies still further confusion arises from the fact that the cicero of 12 Fournier points measured 0'1648 inch. When the Didot system was introduced it was found that 11 Didot points were nearly equal to the Fournier cicero, and the name cicero was generally applied to corps onze. In the specimen book of Didot aine, Paris 1819, the writer recommends the use of numbers of points to designate size
- p.68 - vue 104/901
- - UNITS AND DIMENSIONS.
  - 69
  - owing to the confusion caused by names relating to the old sizes. The confusion commenced at mignonne, the next name petit-texte being used for 71 Didot points ; saint-augustin was used indifferently for 12 or 13 points ; gros-romain for 15 or 16 points; petit-parangon for 18 or 20 points; gros-parangon for 21 or 22 points; petit-canon for 28 to 32 points; gros-canon for 40 to 44 points; and doublecanon for 48 to 56 points Didot. The Germans, who appear to prefer names to numbers, called the body of 12 Didot points the Cicero. So that the French cicero had II points while the German had 12 points; after much confusion the cicero was accepted in France, about i860, to mean corps 12, or 12 Didot points. The names and sizes of type-bodies are given in table 6, pp. 70 and 71.
  - ACCURACY OF BODY AND SET.
  - Limits of accuracy.—Most of the matter which is printed is set in type of the sizes comprised between english and ruby, and it is generally with these and the intermediate sizes that typecasting and composing machines deal. A column of newspaper commonly measures about 22 to 25 inches in height, and is very usually set in brevier or minion; it therefore contains from 200 to 250 lines. The type must be sufficiently parallel in body to lock up in the forme. A uniform error of one ten-thousandth of an inch in parallelism would result in the end lines being inclined each over 0 01 inch from the vertical. Greater inclination would interfere with the truth of impression and with safety in handling ; therefore every endeavour must be used to keep the body of the type uniform and the product of every machine has to be continually checked. This can readily be done in practice by means of an |___-gauge, fig. 50, measuring about two inches, but actually made to the calculated length of the type to be received.
  - &
  - Fig. 50.—Body-gauge for type, single-ended, il times full size.
  - K
  - 7 I 3 2 7 7 7 7 * 7 * 7 * 7 ha
  - X %
  - The type are carefully cleaned from grease and small particles of metal and then pressed firmly against the stop a with the fingers. The finger-nail is then passed over the flat surface b of the end of the gauge and the end of the line of type, where a total difference of one-thousandth of an inch in the total body and of inequality in parallelism can easily be felt. A better form of gauge is made with two ends screwed to a base-block
- p.69 - vue 105/901
- - 70
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - TABLE 6.—Comparative table giving names of English and foreign type and their dimensional relationships in Fournier, Didot, and standard points, in inches, and in millimetres (continued on opposite page).
  - Fournier. French names of bodies. DIDOT. Standard. American names of bodies.
  - = Mm. | Corps. | Fournier. Didot. j Corps. S X Hi fl H Mm. j Points.
  - 0-0137 0’0275 0’0343 0’0412 0*0481 0-0549 0’0618 0’0686 0’0755 0'0824 0’0892 0-0961 0*1098 0'1236 0-1373 0’1510 0'1648 0-1922 0*2197 0*2471 0*2746 0'3020 0*3295 0*3844 0-4119 0'4393 0-4942 0-5492 0-5766 0’6041 0-6590 0 7139 0-7414 0-7688 0-8238 0’9061 0’9884 0*349 0-697 0’872 1’046 I‘221 1'395 1'569 1’744 1-918 2'093 2’267 2*441 2*790 3*139 3'438 3'836 4*185 4'883 5'58o 6*278 6’975 7-672 8-370 9'765 10-464 11-160 12-555 13’950 14-648 15*356 16*740 18*137 18-834 19*530 20*928 23’019 25-110 I 2 24 3 34 4 44 5 51 6 61 7 8 9 IO II 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 28 30 32 36 40 42 44 48 52 54 56 60 66 72 Micro-scopique Semi-nompareille Diamant ( Sedanoise € Parisienne Nompareille Mignone Petit-texte Gaillarde Petit-romain Philosophie Cicero * Saint-augustin Gros-texte Gros-romain Petit-parangon Gros-parangon Palestine Petit-canon i Trism6giste Gros-canon Double-canon Triple-canon or deux points de trismegiste Diamant Sedanoise Parisienne Nonpareille Mignonne Gaillarde Petit-romain Philosophie Cicero * Saint-augustin* Gros-texte Gros-romain Petit- ( parangon 1 Gros-parangon Palestine Petit-canon 1 Trism6giste Gros-canon 1 Double- ) canon 1 Triple-canon * See p. 69. I 2 21 3 31 4 41 5 51 6 61 7 8 9 Io II 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 28 30 32 36 4° 42 44 48 52 54 56 60 66 72 0*376 0-752 0-940 1*128 1-316 1'504 1'692 1’880 2'068 2'256 2'444 2'632 3’008 3'384 3'760 4’136 4'512 5'264 6'016 6-768 7'520 8'272 9'024 10*528 11'280 12'032 131536 15’040 151792 16 544 18:048 19'552 20*304 21'056 22*560 24'816 27'072 0'0148 0’0296 0’0370 0'0444 0’0518 0'0592 o‘0666 0'0740 0’0814 0’0888 0'0962 0'1036 0'1184 0'1332 0'1480 0'1628 0'1776 0*2072 0'2369 0'2665 0'2961 0'3257 0’3553 0*4145 0'4441 0'4737 0*5329 0*5922 0'6218 0'6514 0*7106 0'7698 0'7994 0'8290 0'8883 0*9770 1'0658 0’0138 0’0277 0'0346 0'0415 0'0484 0'0553 0’0623 0’0692 0'0761 0'0830 0'0899 0'0969 0'ii07 0'1245 0'1384 0'1522 o'i66o 0*1937 0’2214 0*2491 0'2767 0'3044 0'3321 0*3874 0*4151 0'4428 0'4981 0*5535 0*5811 0'6088 0'6642 0'7195 0 7472 0 7748 0'8302 0'9132 0'9962 0*351 0'703 0-879 1’055 1’230 1’406 1'582 1'757 1’933 2-109 2*285 2'460 2-812 3'163 3’515 3'866 4-218 4’921 5:624 6*327 7’029 7'732 8'436 9’842 10-543 II‘247 12:653 14-058 14*761 15'464 16:870 18*278 18'978 19*684 21'087 23*196 25'304 I 2 21 3 31 4 41 5 51 6 61 7 8 9 10 II 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 28 30 32 36 40 42 44 48 52 54 56 60 66 72 Excelsior Brilliant Diamond Pearl Agate Nonpareil Minionette Minion Brevier Bourgeois Long primer Small pica Pica English Columbian Great primer Paragon Double small pica Double pica Double english Five-line nonpareil Four-line brevier Double great primer Double paragon Meridian Pica canon or four-line pica Five-line pica Six-line pica
  - DES, 2D.DLIOTHEQUEZ ^, so
- p.70 - vue 106/901
- - UNITS AND DIMENSIONS. 71
  - TABLE 6.—Comparative table giving names of English and foreign type and their dimensional relationships in Fournier, Didot, and standard points, in inches, and in millimetres (concluded from opposite page).
  - Standard points. English names of bodies. Corps Didot. German names of bodies. Dutch names of bodies. Italian names of bodies. Spanish names of bodies.
  - I
  - 2 Non-plus-ultra
  - 21
  - 3 Minikin 3 Seminonpareille Occhio di mosca Brillante
  - 34 31
  - 4 Brilliant 4 Diamant Diamant or Robijn Diamante Diamante
  - 4i Diamond 4*
  - 5 Pearl 5 Perl Parel or Jolij Parmigianina Perla
  - 5± Ruby 51
  - 6 Nonpareil 6 Nonpareille Nonparel Nompariglia Nomparelle
  - 64 Emerald 64
  - 7 Minion 7 Kolonel Colonel Mignone Minona or glo-silla
  - 8 Brevier 8 Petit or Jungfer Brevier Testino Breviario
  - 9 Bourgeois 9 Borgis Burgeois or Galjar Garamoncino Medio texto
  - IO II Long primer Small pica IO II Korpus or Gar-mond Brevier or Garmond Dessendiaan Garamone Filosofia Entredos Lecturita
  - 12 Pica 12 Rheinlander Cicero Mediaan Lettura Lectura
  - 14 English 14 Mittel Augustijn Silvio San Agustin
  - 16 Two-line brevier 16 Tertia Soprasilvio Atanasia
  - 18 Great primer 18 Tekst Testo Texto
  - 20 Paragon 20 Text or Secunda Paragon Parangone Parangona
  - 22 Double pica 22 Assendonica or Dub- Ascendonica Doble lecturita
  - 24 Two-line pica 24 Doppelcicero bele Dessendiaan Dubbele Mediaan Palestina Doble lectura
  - 28 Two-line english 28 Doppelmittel Dubbele Augustijn Canoncino
  - 30 30
  - 32 32 Kleine Kanon Doble atanasia
  - 36 Two-line great 36 Kanon Kanon Sopracanoncino Doble texto
  - 40 primer Two-line paragon 40 Groote Kanon Canone Doble parangona
  - 42 42 Grobe Kanon
  - 44 Two-line double 44 Parijs Kanon Corale Canon
  - 48 pica Canon or four-line 48 Kleine Missal Ducale Cuatro lectura
  - 52 pica 52 Missal
  - 54 54
  - 56 56 •
  - 60 Five-line pica 60 Grobe Missal Reale Cinco lectura
  - 66 66
  - 72 Six-line pica 72 Kleine Sabon Imperiale
- p.71 - vue 107/901
- - 72
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - TABLE 7.
  - Set widths of a pica fount (modern) without spaces and quads.
  - Set. Characters. Matrices. Type.
  - 0*16604 0-13145 0′12453 0’11761 0’11070 0-10378 0-08994 0-08302 0-07610 0-07264 0-06573 0′05535 0-04843 0*04151 IW E C + — x : = — ... 1 j AWAC. . . J KMffifflm 1b fifl H KMNX . HGNUX$mADUVY ADEOQRVYwafEFRww (BCFLTew*cS£&wcc \ & BGLP TZ £ Qww . .( PZfiflCJOQQ SJbdghknpqufffKMa dnu%Snu\i\i idaaaanu [huu . (vxyGHNUXl 23456789 0] ***§-kpy1133888 5$1234567890 aOZADEOQRVYbfgqaaaal jaodod. . De CBCFLPTZ&rv?ceeeeo j 060 . I r s ? j s c e s z q e ^ e e fjtijii . il-/[)lt!])Iili. . . ’ 1 . . •?•, ..,. . . . . 18 13 12 16 27 9 37 48 24 23 15 9 16 8 10,770 26,650 14,750 38,270 25,900 4,965 206,655 82,190 118,270 125,700 108,680 80,920 100,120 56,160
  - 275 1,000,000
  - 5 1#CQUES2l * SO2 Length a to z = 12’50 ems. Length of 1,000,000 type = 77,630 inches = 467,600 ems.
  - carefully prepared to the correct length. The type are laid on this, and the last type inserted gives the feel of the fit and consequently an appreciation that the type are of the requisite degree of accuracy. A gauge of this kind is shown in fig. 51.
  - Such a gauge would measure 1’9924 inches for 12 pica, for 18 brevier, or for 24 nonpareil; a gauge 2'0340 inches would serve for 14 small pica or 28 ruby and also for 21 minion. In this connexion it should be noted that
  - the multiples of the decimal sizes given in table 3 (p. 59) do not agree exactly, but this gauge should be 147 points in length. The variations in approximate decimal sizes have proved a great stumbling-block to some founders
- p.72 - vue 108/901
- - UNITS AND DIMENSIONS.
  - 73
  - TABLE 8.
  - Set widths of a pica fount (old-style) without spaces and quads.
  - Matrices.
  - Set.
  - Characters.
  - 0-17296 W ^ C M W Z (E . 7 4,970
  - 0-16604 ...— + — x : =-% II 5,880
  - 0-13837 H Mm o @ lb ‘ ffi ffl X D ffi ffl . 13 27,910
  - 0-13145 DGKNOORXW&WACH KNRSmww 21 39,530
  - ACTUVYABGLPUV 21,830
  - 0-12107 Y C www . 19
  - 0-11416 BEFLPZ£$MCEFOQT iZSfaa C. . . . 21 21,685
  - 0-09340 Sbdghknpquxfffl DG H j K N R u & S J g y fi fl n u u u u| 33 205,180
  - faOVyABCELOPQTVXYZ]
  - 0-08648 3 a d h k n p u x a. a. & a. a. 6 b 0 d\ 44 161,855
  - [ dda dan^uuu )
  - 0-08302 123 4 5 6 7 8 9o*11%-114 | 335123456789 0 . 36 43,380
  - 0-07264 JcezFsIbqrvz?[ceeee . 19 117,880
  - 0-06054 Irst-/? J cefjostoeede 6 0 0 0 j 25 180,990
  - 0-05189 fijl)[Ili!iiii{>6 18 112,750
  - 0-04151 S’ •** 8 56,160
  - 275 1,000,000
  - Length a to z = 12-99 ems.
  - Length of 1,000,000 types = 77,300 inches = 465,600 ems.
  - Fig 51.—Body-gauge for type, double-ended.
- p.73 - vue 109/901
- - 74
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - who, for the body, have first worked out the decimal approximation and then multiplied it, and have so obtained varying results, which would have been avoided entirely by working from the point as the unit.
  - A still better form of body-gauge would be one in which one end of the gauge was replaced with a micrometer-screw reading to thousandths of an inch and enabling a direct measurement of the error to be obtained. Such a gauge is not, so far as the authors are aware, in actual use at present among typefounders, though it would have advantages over the old methods where determinations of such accuracy are left largely to the personal equation of the operator. A gauge of the form suggested is shown in fig. 52.
  - In setting up tabular work it is necessary that the points, figures, and fractions should all agree, so that the figures may fall vertically under each other and the columns may be of uniform width. For this reason the figures and two-figure fractions (1, 3) are almost invariably made on the en set ; the
  - Fig. 52.—Micrometer body-gauge.
  - diagonal and straight fractions (%, 1, 32) on the em set; and those points used in tabular work, such as the full point, which inverted becomes the decimal point, the comma, the colon and the semicolon are usually placed on the same set as the middle space, namely, one-fourth of the body.
  - Some founders place these points on the thick-space set (or 3 body), but with this arrangement spacing is more difficult, as the column can only be made a multiple of the en or em by adding two thick spaces, whereas with the points on the middle space the addition of a single middle space will bring the column to a multiple of the en.
  - The same gauge that is used for the body will serve for checking the set of these particular characters; but as a column of matter is seldom more than four inches wide, a larger error is here admissible than in the body-size.
  - It may be of interest to show the means employed by practical mould-makers and typefounders for the last 150 years to ensure the requisite degree of accuracy in type without the use of the, then unknown, micrometer. The instrument used for this purpose is known in the trade as the
- p.74 - vue 110/901
- - UNITS AND DIMENSIONS.
  - 75
  - turning-gauge, and is shown in fig. 53. The upper jaw of the gauge is fixed to the stem by screws, and the lower jaw, which is made a good sliding fit on the stem by grinding and lapping, can be secured in any desired position by the thumb-screw. The jaws are made with a small amount of taper, the inclination being usually 3 in 1000, or less if required. The sides of the jaws have lines engraved % inch apart; each division ordinarily, therefore, equals 0'0005 inch. To use the gauge the type are rubbed free from grease and gently pushed into the taper opening of the jaws, the
  - A # u.
  - Fig. 54.—Height-to-paper gauge. Full size.
  - Fig. 53.—Turning-gauge. Full size. Inverted view.
  - position of the type being as shown in fig. 53; the type are turned end-for-end to compare the sizes at head and foot; a variation of 0’0001 inch can be as easily detected by feel as can a similar variation in the size of a shaft when compared with a Whitworth gauge by means of callipers. The gauge is also used for checking parallelism in set as well as the definite set width produced by the typefounder. Still greater delicacy of comparison can be obtained by using three or four types together in the turning-gauge. This is actually the usual practice in typefoundries. Commercially perfect type should fulfil the following conditions :—
  - I. The face must be true for flatness, that is its plane must be normal to the four sides of the body ; the degree of accuracy is governed by condition 4.
- p.75 - vue 111/901
- - 76 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - 2. The face must be true for position, that is in plan the vertical main-strokes must be parallel to the set and the line parallel to the body ; the degree of accuracy is governed by condition 3.
  - 3. It must also be true for alinement, that is within plus or minus 0'0005 inch the dimension line-to-back must be correct to gauge.
  - 4. The height-to-paper must be correct within plus or minus 0'0005 inch.
  - 5. The body must be parallel within plus or minus 0'000i inch.
  - 6. The set width must give the correct side-wall on both sides of the character; the tolerance varies according to the character.
  - The height-to-paper gauge in ordinary use by the typefounder is shown in fig. 54. This gauge is generally used for testing flatness of face for compliance with condition I above, and, unlike the turning-gauge, the jaws are made parallel. The type is placed in the gauge and sighted against the light in two directions, in the plane of the face of the upper jaw, at right angles to each other and inclined each at 45° to the faces of the body.
  - A steel gauge, shown in place in fig. 54, is used for verifying that
  - Fig. 55.—Lining-gauge.
  - the height-to-paper is correct. In some foundries a gauge of simple horse-shoe form, like the engineers’ outside-calliper gauge, but with the jaws arranged at a small angle to each other, is used; and in others a gauge with a sliding carriage and a guide against which the type is placed enables any error in height-to-paper to be estimated by the distance of the type from a mark made where the jaws of the gauge are separated by the dimension of the true standard height ; this form was invented by Henry Barth, of the Cincinnati Typefoundry, and is illustrated by De Vinne in his book on " Plain Printing Types.” It is, however, little used in this country.
  - The dimension line-to-back is checked by comparing the type on a lining-gauge with a lower-case m, this letter being taken as the standard. An ordinary lining-gauge is shown in fig. 55. One somewhat similar in principle, but more elaborate, is shown in fig. 209, p. 234.
  - Spacing.—The width of a column of newspaper or a printed page of a book generally varies between 14 and 40 ems. Where this is ordinary reading matter each line contains on the average from 7 to 10 words. As many
- p.76 - vue 112/901
- - UNITS AND DIMENSIONS.
  - 77
  - of the letters are unequal in set, and since the widths of set generally bear no particular relation to the ern (or body), it follows that the spacing has to be done after the line has been composed. If the line, made up with thick spaces in hand-composition, comes short, or long, some or all of the spaces must be removed and replaced with others.
  - The hair-space is not used for this purpose, but only for spacing out between the characters of words where a very narrow column of matter runs alongside a block or table, and occasionally its use is allowed to obviate overrunning where author’s corrections occur.
  - The spacing must therefore be obtained by the use of the thin, middle and thick spaces forming 3, 1, and 3 of the body respectively. Obviously the minimum error obtainable with such a system, in the most favourable circumstances, is the product of the fractions of the body, namely 2 em. The line cannot be made longer than the allowed width, therefore the amount of admissible error based on practical experience may be taken at ~ em, and it is probable that it frequently amounts to 3 em. This in pica becomes about -1 inch, and in nonpareil about -1- inch.
  - The problem of spacing is one of the most serious difficulties met with in composing-machinery; throughout this work it is defined as line-justification, but is known to printers by the unfortunate name of justification, a term which is always used elsewhere in this treatise for those manufacturing operations to which the term justification has also been applied. Various attempts have been made to effect the spacing more readily than by the crude trial and error method just mentioned. It is, however, by no means a simple problem. Even if all letters were equal in set width, as in the case of most typewriter faces, there would be a variable number from nought to nine to be added and inserted with those already in the line. Taking a line ending in the longest English indivisible word known to the authors, that is strengths, there are nine letters to be considered, and if this word comes at the end of the line and proves one letter too long, there are still nine spaces to be dealt with since one space precedes the last word. In German still longer indivisible words exist, for instance schleichst and schnarchst.
  - SELF-SPACING TYPE.
  - Thick added spaces would generally make large, irregular, and unsightly white gaps over the page. The nearest approach to accurate spacing of type is afforded by the so-called self-spacing type invented by L. B. Benton. In this all characters are made on set widths each multiples of one-sixth of the body, so that any combination can be made up to a multiple of the em by the addition of some of the self-spacing spaces which are also equal multiples of the sixth of the body; the arrangement is shown in table 9, p. 78.
  - The provision of so small a number of set sizes results in the production of characters which do not conform sufficiently closely to those ordinarily
- p.77 - vue 113/901
- - 78 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - in use to secure the general adoption of the system, and the difficulty, which becomes apparent if table 9 is compared with tables 7 and 8, pp. 72 and 73, is even more marked with the italic sorts.
  - TABLE 9.
  - Self-spacing type.
  - Set. Characters. Number.
  - 2 body 2em quad ....... 1
  - z body WECffW EC 8
  - I body fem-quad m fi ffl H K M X lb % @ ... — x +) 1 - + = % % % % 3/3%/mHKMX 32
  - I body (w^ceABDEFGNOPQRTUVY&HKj 3 MWAGwaCfffABDEFGNOPO RTUVYSwww® ... .J 51
  - % body (3-to-2-em quad a b d g h k n o p q u v x y ff fi fl £ $CJLSZabcdefglnopqrtuvxy ) & .. (leader) — (rule) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o\ \ CJL SZabdgh k n op q uv xy I 1 2 j ./ 6 7 8 0 0 a a a a a n 0 6 0 6 u u u u Q 9 d d a d\ ( a n o d b o u d u u Q . . 120
  - 1 body en-quad cerstzyszI?(]*t#§Icefys 1 t z ? } ] Q e e e e q e e e e . 40
  - J body (3-to-em spacefij 11 .,;:’!-/ ij 1 ;:! i i 1 i) 1 ii. . . 28
  - 3 body Hair-space . I
  - Total Spaces and quads, 6. Characters, 275 281
  - KERNING AND BEARDING.
  - Kerned type and italics.—Some of the italic sorts, and occasionally the roman lower-case f and j in certain display and fancy faces, project beyond the sides of the body, fig. 56; these are known as kerned characters. The projecting kern requires to be dressed by hand, as explained on p. 21, so as to enable the face to approach closely to that of the adjacent character and to clear its shoulder when composed, fig. 57. This, of course, makes the type extremely weak, the sharp projecting edges of the face being peculiarly liable to damage.
  - In early printing some of the characters kerned above or below the body, or bearded, and this was liable to cause fouling where an ascending or a
- p.78 - vue 114/901
- - UNITS AND dimensions.
  - 79
  - descending kern in one line came immediately under a descending or over an ascending letter in the next line. A still more exaggerated form of kerning was found in some seventeenth century type to which ornamentation was added at the top to fill up part of the white adjacent to the much-inclined italic letters and some characters, among which may be quoted the K, N, Q, R, X, and Z, had their tails greatly extended to the right; so much so that in certain instances they would come under two or three succeeding lower-case characters. These bizarre forms are now seldom found, for the
  - Fig. 56.—Kerned type, as cast: isometric view. About 24 times full size.
  - Fig. 57.—Kerned type, after dressing: isometric view. About 24 times full size.
  - artistic effect produced is not commensurate with the technical difficulties of the construction and use of such letters.
  - In modern type, kerning above and below the body is rare; the only notable exceptions are accented capitals—the use of which is now being abandoned by the French—and the very ingenious two-fine letter for commencing advertisements introduced by the Linotype Company, a form of overhang which is described on p. 429.
  - The French have for many years abandoned the grave accent on A while retaining it in the lower-case: “ A Paris il faisait beau, a Londres un brouillard.”
  - In the head-lines of the French newspapers, while the accent is now almost universally omitted on A, one finds accents sometimes on other characters; but the influence of the composing machine is to be seen in the gradual abandonment of accented capitals, which is now in progress.
- p.79 - vue 115/901
- - o 00
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - For example: “L’ANGLETERRE REFUSE LE SYSTEME METRIQUE ......car la plus grande partie du commerce exterieur britannique interesse des pays qui n’ont pas le systeme metrique. ... ” Le Matin, 23 mars, 1907.
  - One instance of the ill-advised use of accented type kerning above the body occurs in the case of Esperanto, for which several accented ascending characters are used, for example, C H G J S U h, apart from the lower-case characters c g ] s u, which, of course, present no difficulty except that they require special matrices. The Esperantists would have done far better in adopting a non-kerning form of modification ; examples of such modifications are the Danish 0, the Polish I, a and e, and the Maltese H; and they would have been better advised had they adopted a simple bar or a dot added within the body of the character, thus : J orC.
  - In one specimen of Esperanto printed in Switzerland we find that owing to the absence of accented characters a substitute has been formed by using an inverted full point after each such letter:—
  - " Ni donas ci sube kiel specimenon la tradukon de la antauparolo. Oni vidas ke la tradukinto ne uzis la kutimajn supersignojn, sed anstatauigis ilin per ordinara punkto renversita.
  - " Kompreneble, io ajn nova prezentas unuavide aspekton iom nekuti-man, sed antau ol esprimi definitivan jug on pri g’i, oni devas uzi gin dum tempo sufice longa."
  - The difficulty of kerning accented characters also affects German type, the modified capital vowels having this peculiarity. The difficulty can be overcome by placing the dots lower at each side of the vertex of the A and within the O and U respectively: a practice now occasionally adopted.
  - It is difficult to understand why different nations should cling to these accented or modified characters; they usually represent sounds quite dissimilar from those of the primary form, and it is but seldom that the use of a particular accent is intended to produce a consistent change in sound.
  - Speaking generally, it would be better for these countries to abandon the accents altogether and to produce and adopt a few national characters in their place. That there is no difficulty whatever in reading a language fluently in which a few only of the less important characters are changed is apparent from the two paragraphs forming fig. 123, p. 154, the second being set up in a slightly-reformed English alphabet.
  - Characters kerned in set are, however, still common in the case of many of the best book-founts ; they present a serious difficulty to most type-casting and composing machines. Where the type is ejected through the length of the mould, as in the Wicks machine, they cannot be made. Where no subsequent dressing operation can be performed, as in the Monotype, they must be of the form left by the matrix in its withdrawal, and although the sides of the kern may be nearly vertical, as shown in fig. 56, yet these portions will, when the line is closed, come into juxtaposition with the base of the neck of the next character and fouling will very easily occur.
- p.80 - vue 116/901
- - UNITS AND DIMENSIONS.
  - 00 H
  - The use of a small percentage of kerning sorts in hand-composition is not a very serious matter, nor does it add greatly to the cost of the type ; in fact, the founders may supply it at the same cost in order to secure a demand, but the questions involved in the various forms of machine-composition are so greatly and unnecessarily complicated by these few and little-used characters that it would be better to face the problem once and for all and adopt non-kerning italics and accents as the general rule.
  - In any case the weakness of the kern renders such italic type easily damaged in distributing and composing, and it is probably only a matter of time for the kern to be abandoned, except in the case of the highest classes of printing and in artistic work where appearance is considered to be the most important factor.
  - Example of kerning italic :—
  - The ejection of kerned italic type offers difficulty.
  - Example of non-kerning italic :—
  - The ejection of non-kerned italic type offers no difficulty.
  - The principal difficulty in designing a non-kerning italic lies in the ascending and descending sorts and particularly in the letters f and j, which have to be somewhat modified from the more familiar shape. Whereas the slope of the italic main-strokes in the kerning type will be found frequently to be as much as I in 3, it is necessary to reduce it to about 1 in 5 in designing a non-kerning fount, and I in 4 is generally the maximum slope permissible. With this the f requires to be considerably distorted and shows excess of side-wall and consequent space between it and the adjacent characters.
  - Nicking, bearding, and kerning planes are used in conjunction with a dressing-stick for putting the extra nicks in certain small capitals and for other purposes, such as bevelling the top or bottom kern, known as the beard, of accented and certain other sorts, and for dressing the kern in set of italics and other type respectively ; this latter operation, however, is more generally done by hand by rubbing the type on a dressing-file, or by treating it, when set up in line, with a small milling-cutter on a power-driven kerning-machine.
- p.81 - vue 117/901
- - CHAPTER VIII.
  - TYPE FACES.
  - " He that readeth a Face at Sight hath the Gift of Kings; And verily for him that is of the Craft it is a Dower-Royal so to tell Face from Face, for some be Right-Rogues and offend in any Forme.”
  - Mirrour of Pryntyng.
  - Long primer condensed De Vinne.
  - Variety of faces.—Type faces may be divided into three main groups so far as they concern the maker of typecasting and composing machines.
  - I. Old-style faces. Example :—
  - Notice the short serifs and the ample fillet connecting each to the main-stroke. These features tend to durability as well as to legibility. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7890.
  - Pica old-style (Miller & Richard).
  - 2. Modern faces. Example :—
  - Note how thin are the hair lines, how long are the serifs, and how small the fillet connecting each to the main-stroke. Wear takes place more rapidly and legibility is sacrificed. 123456789 0.
  - Pica modern (Stephenson & Blake).
  - 3. Fancy faces. Example :—
  - Our eyesight is one of our most precious assets, and the designer of type should therefore consider legibility as of greater importance than artistic effect. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0.
  - 12-point blackfriars (Blackfriars, formerly Wicks, Type Foundry).
  - The faces may be extended or condensed, and the strokes may be fat or lean. The faces used for the greater part of the printed matter of the day are either old-style, or modern, or follow the leading features of one or of the other very closely.
  - 82
- p.82 - vue 118/901
- - TYPE FACES.
  - 00 co
  - I. The old-style face has thick hair-lines and a large radius connecting the serif with the main-stroke. These features render it more legible and durable. On the other hand the old-style numerals are irregular, and, owing to the smallness of some sorts, their legibility is no greater than that of the modern figures. Moreover, the fact that they comprise ascenders, descenders and small sorts makes them unsuitable for most scientific works. Old-style founts are therefore frequently ordered with modern figures.
  - 2. The modern face—to which reference is again made under sections II and 12 of ordinary faces—is very largely used ; the defect from which it suffers has arisen from the endeavour to obtain a more highly-finished outline without regard to the ultimate object in view. Thicker hair-lines and a larger radius connecting the serif and main-stroke increase both the clearness and the durability of the type, and a face comprising these features is very suitable for most newspapers, periodicals, magazines, text-books and novels.
  - De Vinne, in his classical work, has not only drawn attention to the requisites for legibility, but has himself produced some excellent examples of easily-readable type faces.
  - 3. Fancy faces.—'There are so many varieties of fancy faces, and they differ so widely, that they rarely come into question under conditions which permit of their production in large quantity. These faces are used chiefly for advertisements, circulars, bill-heads and titling; that is in instances in which the fount occurs in such small quantity that hand-composition is the only effective method of setting.
  - The chief varieties of faces in ordinary use, figs. 58 to 60, may be broadly subdivided into the following classes :—
  - I. Black.—This is the old English character used by the earliest printers and now reproduced more or less correctly by modern type-founders for various uses, for the headings of certain journals, for Christmas cards, etc.
  - 2. Black ecclesiastical.—A variety of the preceding, used principally for prayer-books and texts. Ornamented forms of the two preceding are known, with a more or less degree of ornament, under various names, such as Anglo-Saxon and St. John.
  - The term gothic, which was formerly and correctly applied by most people to describe nearly all forms of black-letter, is not used here, being restricted by modern usage, and especially American usage, to a simple, and “ sturdy type that has neither serif nor hair-line.”
  - 3. Sans serif, or, to be strictly accurate, sanserif.—In modern usage frequently called gothic, grotesque or sans. In its italic form, 13, fig. 60, this face is generally referred to as inclined sans serif, gothic, grotesque, etc.
  - 4. Old-face is a light face, very open and with long ascenders. This face has inclined serifs, is accompanied by an italic, 14, fig. 60, and is a precursor of the old-style already mentioned, which has a heavier face and also small sorts of larger size.
- p.83 - vue 119/901
- - 84
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - I. a 8 C D € d 6 3 t 3 A T dtl dl 0 # Q A S T 2.A3 CDEf6b331OPQRS% 3. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST 4. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST 5. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST 6. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST 7. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
  - 8. ABCDEFGH IJKLMNOPQRST 9. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
  - io. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
  - II. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
  - 12 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
  - Fig. 58.—Roman capitals and figures (continued on opposite page).
  - 1. a b c d e f 9 h i j k I in n 0 p q r s t u b w z.abcdefgbijkImnopqrstuvw 3. abcdefgh ij k l mnopq rstuvw 4. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw 5. abcdefgh ijklmnopqrstuvw
  - 6. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw
  - 7. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw
  - 8. abcdefghij kImnopq rstuvw
  - 9. abcdefg’hijklmnopqrstuvw
  - 10. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw
  - II. abcdefghij klmnopqrstuvw
  - 12. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw
  - FIG. 59.—Roman lower-case, ligatures and points (continued on opposite page).
  - I. Black.
  - 2. Tudor black (ecclesiastical).
  - 3. Sanserif.
  - 4. Old-face.
  - 5. Antique old-style.
  - 6. De Vinne.
  - 7. Blackfriars.
  - 8. Cheltenham old-style.
  - 9. Bold latin.
  - io. Modernized old-style.
  - II. Modern.
  - 12. Egyptian.
- p.84 - vue 120/901
- - TYPE FACES.
  - i. a v dx D
  - 2. uvaxvz 3UVWXYZEC 4UVWXYZEC 5.UVWXYZEC
  - 6. U V W X Y Z /E CE
  - 7.UYWXYZE C
  - 8. U V W X Y Z Qu 9.UVWXYZEG
  - 10. UVWXYZ H C 1IUVWXYZE CE
  - 12. UVWXYZ EC
  - 85 1234567890 €$ ivrIcdm
  - 12345678906$ 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 £ $ 123 4 5 6 7 89 0 £ $ 12345 67890 £$ 123 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 € $ 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 £ $ 1234567890€$ 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 £ $ 1234 5 6 7 8 9 0 £ $ 1234567890$
  - Fig. 58.—Roman capitals and figures (concluded from opposite page).
  - 1. XD F
  - 2. 1 2 3
  - 3. x y z
  - 4. x y z
  - 5. x y z
  - 6. x y z
  - 7. x y z
  - 8. x y z
  - 9- x y z
  - 10. x y z
  - II. x y z
  - 12. xyz
  - acfffff&
  - a ce fi ff fl ffi fft a cfi ff fl fi fl & ecf fAl fi An & acffffl ffi ffl & a c fi ff fl ffi ffi & ac fi ff fl f fn & Et acfff A ff ffl & &
  - ofi fffl fi fl & acfif fl fi fl & acfiffl ffi fl &
  - ecfiffi ffi fil &
  - I—I—I—— EI—I!—CI—I E o. A. c- A. A. A. o- A 0. < o e-
  - FIG. 59.— Roman lower-case, ligatures and points
  - (concluded from opposite page).
  - I. Black.
  - 2. Tudor black (ecclesiastical).
  - 3. Sanserif.
  - 4. Old-face.
  - 5. Antique old-style.
  - 6. De Vinne.
  - 7.
  - 8.
  - 9.
  - 10.
  - II.
  - 12.
  - Blackfriars.
  - Cheltenham old-style.
  - Bold latin.
  - Modernized old-style
  - Modern.
  - Egyptian.
- p.85 - vue 121/901
- - 86 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - 13.AB CDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST 14.BCDEFGHIXKLMNOPORST
  - 15. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
  - 16. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
  - 17. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
  - 18. ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRST
  - 19. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
  - 13. a b c d e f g h i j k / mnopgrstuum
  - 14. a b c de f g h ij k l m n o pqrstuvw
  - 15.abcdefghijkImn opqrstuvw
  - 16. abcdefghijkimnopqrstuvw
  - 17. a bcdefghijklmnopqrst u v w
  - 18.a bcdefgh i j klmnopqrstuvw 1g. a b c d e f gh ijklmnopqrstuvw
  - Fig. 60.—Italic capitals, figures, lower-case, ligatures and points (continued on opposite page).
  - 13. Inclined sanserif. 17. Cheltenham old-style.
  - 14. Old-face. 18. Modernized old-style.
  - 15. De Vinne. 19. Modern.
  - 16. Blackfriars.
  - 5. Old-style antique is similar in its general features to old-style, but has a still heavier face ; like the preceding, it has inclined serifs and is sometimes accompanied by an italic.
  - 6. De Vinne is based on the old-style, modernized with inclined serifs, made heavier and with some features specially modified with a view to improving its effect and increasing its legibility. The italic is shown in 15.
  - 7. Blackfriars is a modernized old-style in which the actual serifs have been to a great extent replaced by thickening the main-strokes, the object being an increase in durability and legibility. The italic is shown in 16.
  - 8. Cheltenham.—A very popular series which comprises many forms of modernized old-face and retains its long ascenders and its short small characters, but is made heavier and has further peculiarities. The italic is shown in 17. With regard to Nos. 6, 7, and 8, italic is generally regarded as a separate fount.
  - 9. Latin.—Sometimes called antique, has triangular serifs and a heavy face. This class of character usually has no italic.
- p.86 - vue 122/901
- - TYPE
  - 13.UVWXYZ E G 14.UVWXYZAG
  - 15. UVWXYZG
  - 16. UFWYYZEC
  - 17. U V W X Y Z
  - 18.UVWXYZE
  - 19.UVWXYZ EC
  - FACES. 87
  - 1234567890£$ 1234 5 67 89 0 % 1234567890€ 1234567890£^ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 € 1234 5 67 890 £ 19345678902
  - 13. x y z as oe fi ff fl ffi ffi & ,: 14*yz*ff Afif & ,.;
  - 15. x y z a c fi ff fl ffi ffl & ,.;
  - 16.xy z a c fi ff fi fi fI &,.;
  - 17. *J2 fi f A flf & ,.:
  - 8.xyz c afiff fffifl 6 ..:
  - Ig.cyz c o fi ff fl fi fl &
  - I i i—1mm ir—ii r—1 I1
  - 1---1 i— L--------------I—i i—1 i—i
  - -A c. ^ a. o. A. A. ~.
  - Fig. 60.—Italic capitals, figures, lower-case, ligatures and points (concluded from opposite page).
  - 13. Inclined sanserif.
  - 14. Old-face.
  - 15. De Vinne.
  - 16. Blackfriars.
  - 17. Cheltenham old-style.
  - 18. Modernized old-style.
  - 19. Modern.
  - I0. Modernized old-style.—To avoid the inconveniences attendant on the use of the modern face in its most pronounced form, many faces of modernized old-style have been produced with a view to greater durability, the serifs being shortened, thickened and better supported by more adequate connexion to the main-strokes. In these series the slope of the italic, 18, is usually made less and the amount of kerning thereby considerably reduced.
  - II. Modern. — This is an example of over-development resulting from a slavish attention to the technicalities of an art rather than to the object for which that art was originated. In consequence of its weakness and want of legibility it is now being rapidly replaced owing to a more healthy taste which is leading the reader back to insist on legibility rather than on uniformity of tint, delicacy of appearance, and beauty of workmanship ; an apparently happy combination which, however, was unfortunately not productive of a durable or desirable result. The italic is shown in 19.
  - 12. Antique, sometimes called clarendon or egyptian,is a. development,with
- p.87 - vue 123/901
- - 88
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - its derivatives ionic and french antique, of the modern face in which the serifs are made parallel and heavy, thereby rendering it legible and durable. It has, however, a heavy appearance, which is perhaps slightly incongruous with the characteristics of the style; none the less for such purposes as the printing of railway time-tables and directories it is largely used for the sake of contrast with a lighter face.
  - The foregoing classification, however, must really be considered a very imperfect resume of the matter, for the subject is such a large one that it is impossible to do more within the scope and limits of this treatise than sketch out some leading features. Those interested are therefore referred to text-books such as De Vinne’s " Plain Printing Types,” which is perhaps the most complete work known to the authors. For examples of early printing, readers should consult the fine work of Drs. F. Lippmann and R. Dohme, " Druckschriften des funfzehnten bis achtzehnten Jahrhunderts in getreuen Nachbildungen.”
  - In order to facilitate the comparison of the various styles of faces mentioned in the foregoing brief classification, the sorts have been arranged in tabular form for capitals, lower-case, figures and points, and for italics where such are used, in figs. 58, 59 and 60, pp. 84 to 87.
  - Founts of fancy faces usually comprise from 78 to 111 sorts.
  - WIDTH OF FACE.
  - Standard width of face.—There is no definite standard width for any character ; in fact, what appears standard on one body will, if proportionately reduced or enlarged, appear narrower on a smaller body and wider on a larger body. This applies to all the characters of a fount, and the actual mean set can only be obtained by taking the aggregate set of a true fount scheme and dividing it by the total number of type in the scheme. It is found more convenient in practice to use the a-z length in ems as the measure by which to judge the width of a face. This does not permit of a very fair comparison because the a-z length of an old-style face, for instance, may measure 4 per cent more than that of a modern face of the same gauge and body and yet have a slightly smaller true mean set.
  - As the compositor in England and America is paid by the ens or ems he sets up, this question of the a-z length affects the cost of composition and tends to the use of faces of shorter a-z length. In France a fairer system prevails based on filling the measure with the alphabet, and its characters repeated in order, and taking the total thus obtained as the basis for payment. This question, together with its bearing on legibility, is treated at greater length in a subsequent chapter.
  - In calculating the comparative weights of different founts given in tables 25 and 26, the authors have adopted increases and decreases of percentage of 10, 20 and 30 per cent of the standard width, and have also allowed for the variation with change of body of the standard a-z length.
- p.88 - vue 124/901
- - TYPE FACES.
  - 00
  - NO
  - Unfortunately in England the term fat, like the French gras, is applied to the thickness of stroke and hence to define a group of faces such as antique and egyptian. Moreover, the terms compressed and condensed, elongated, extended and expanded, are used very loosely by different British founders to cover different proportional variations of width ; nor does the same founder always maintain a uniform use of the terms even in his own specimen book.
  - A face having an a-z length of 13 ems in pica to bourgeois may be taken as the standard, and other faces referred to it will be differently styled according to the proportion the a-z length bears to this standard ; they may be roughly classified as follows :—
  - Narrower faces. Standard face. Wider faces.
  - Lean 86 to 90 per cent. no to 114 per cent, fat.
  - Condensed 72 to 80 ,, roo per cent. 120 to 128 „. broad-
  - Extra faced.
  - condensed 58 to 70 ,, 130 to 142 ,, expanded.
  - Extra condensed.
  - ___________I
  - Condensed.
  - __________I Lean.
  - I_____________ Standard.
  - L U U U • • ±1L
  - Standard. Fat. Broad-faced. Expanded.
  - Fig 61.—Narrow, standard, and wide type. Enlarged 6 times.
  - In this arrangement the authors have followed De Vinne, and the American nomenclature adopted by him has been used, for it has the virtue of consistency and reasonableness.
  - TYPE OF MATERIALS OTHER THAN TYPE-METAL.
  - Steel letters.—Apart from steel punches, steel wheels for telegraphic printing machines and for numbering-machines, actual steel type are produced for setting the date in postmarking stamps and in ticket-dating stamps, as well as for other similar purposes involving hard, rough wear; these types are usually produced by engraving. Steel types cut by machines are used for the production of logotype matrices, and in particular for the preparation of the matrices for rubber type for addressing-machines.
- p.89 - vue 125/901
- - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Length a-z, ems.
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstubwry? 13-4
  - Nonpareil black No. 3 (Figgins).
  - abcdefgbi jklmnopqrstuvwryz 15’1
  - Nonpareil tudor black (Miller & Richard).
  - abcdefghifhlmnopqrstubwrpe 138
  - Long primer black No. 1 (Stephenson 6 Blake).
  - abcdefgbijklmnopqrstubboryz 10-8
  - Long primer augustan black (Stephenson & Blake).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 15-7
  - Long primer old-style antique No. 3 (Miller & Richard).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 13-9
  - Brevier old-style antique No. 7 (Miller & Richard).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 15:6
  - Minion on brevier antique (Stephenson & Blake).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 13-2
  - Brevier italian (Reed).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 12-3
  - Pica old-style (Miller & Richard).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 12-8
  - Bourgeois old-style (Miller & Richard).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 160
  - Brevier old-style antique No. 8 (Miller & Richard).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 130
  - Pica modern (Monotype).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 13-8
  - Brevier modern (Monotype).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 11-7
  - 22 long primer italic modern.
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 12-1
  - Pica modern (Miller & Richard).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 13-1
  - 17 bourgeois (Figgins).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 13-2
  - 23 bourgeois (Miller & Richard).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 13-9
  - Long primer italian (Reed).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 11:4
  - Long primer skeleton antique (Stephenson & Blake).
  - 162.—Comparison of a-z lengths of type founts (continued on pp. 91 and 92).
- p.90 - vue 126/901
- - TYPE FACES.
  - Length a-z, ems.
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 12-7
  - Long primer condensed sans No. 5 (Stephenson & Blake).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 12-3 Brevier condensed sans italic (Miller & Richard).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 11-3 Long primer condensed sans (Wicks). abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 171 Long primer gothic (Clowes). abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 13-5 10-point hawarden (Haddon). abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 16-7 10-point winchell (American Type Founders Co.). abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 12-2 8-point condensed Windsor (Stephenson & Blake). abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 12-9 Long primer ronaldson (Monotype). abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 15-8 Pica typewriter (Marr). abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 13-0 12-point blackfriars roman (Blackfriars).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 13-0 8-point blackfriars roman (Blackfriars). abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 12-1 10-point blackfriars italic (Blackfriars). abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 14-5 12-point columbus (Haddon).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 17-8 8-point morland. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 10-7 12-point Cheltenham old-style (American Type Founders Co.).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz . 11-2 10-point Cheltenham old-style (American Type Founders Co.).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
  - 8-point Cheltenham old-style (A merican Type Founders Co.).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
  - 12-point Cheltenham bold condensed (American Type Founders Co.).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
  - 10-point cneltenham bold condensed (American Type Founders Co.).
  - E
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
  - 8-point Cheltenham bold condensed (American Type Founders Co.).
  - FIG. 62.—Comparison of a-z lengths of type founts (continued on
  - 10-65
  - 11-3
  - 11-1
  - p. 92)
  - a
- p.91 - vue 127/901
- - 92
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Length a-z, ems
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 12-point Cheltenham bold (American Type Founders Co.). 13-25
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 10-point Cheltenham bold (American Type Founders Co.). 14-25
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 8-point Cheltenham bold (American Type Founders Co.). 13-8
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 6-point Cheltenham bold (American Type Founders Co.). 15-4
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 12-point Cheltenham bold expanded (American Type Founders Co.). 17-9
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 10-point Cheltenham bold expanded (American Type Founders Co.). 191
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 8-point Cheltenham bold expanded (American Type Founders Co.). 18-7
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 12-point Cheltenham wide (American Type Founders Co.). 12-2
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 10-point Cheltenham wide (American Type Founders Co.). 12-9
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 8-point Cheltenham wide (American Type Founders Co.). 13-4
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 12-point De Vinne condensed (American Type Founders Co.). 11-9
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 10-point De Vinne condensed (American Type Founders Co.). 11-3
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 8-point De Vinne condensed (American Type Founders Co.). 12-8
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
  - 6-point De Vinne condensed (American Type Founders Co.).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
  - 12-point De Vinne (American Type Founders Co.).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
  - 10-point De Vinne (American Type Founders Co.).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
  - 8-point De Vinne (A merican Type Founders Co.).
  - 151
  - 13-8
  - 15-5
  - F
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
  - 6-point De Vinne (American Type Founders Co.).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
  - 12-point De Vinne italic (American Type Founders Co.),
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
  - 10-point De Vinne italic (American Type Founders Co.).
  - abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
  - 8-point De Vinne italic (American Type Founders Co.).
  - 16-8
  - or
  - Lo
  - 13-8
  - 15-5
  - A Fig. 62.—Comparison of a-z lengths of type founts (concluded from p. 91).
- p.92 - vue 128/901
- - TYPE FACES.
  - 93
  - Brass letters.—Brass letters are used by bookbinders, leather-stampers, and other craftsmen working in similar materials. Not only are letters used, but also stamps of various designs, floral, classical, and others. The technology of these forms of printing-surface presents nothing of special interest, as they are produced in the usual way by engraving blanks of suitable size and section, though occasionally they are made by casting.
  - Wooden letters.—Characters of large size made of wood are used for the production of printed matter, but almost always for advertisements. It is a curious reversion to the earliest type, for the first types were wooden ; but these were comparatively small and used for book-work, whereas the modern wooden types are all large and used, as has been said, for the production of printing practically unknown to our forefathers; advertisement—as we understand it—being a comparatively late development in the history of the credulity of mankind.
  - The technology of the components of this form of printing-surface presents nothing particularly novel, the letters being developed from drawings or templets by various specialized forms of routing machines (usually pantographic), high-speed cutters, saws, abrading tools, etc., similar to those forming part of any fully-organized and extensive woodworking-pl ant.
  - INITIALS.
  - nitial letters.—The initial letter which commences a chapter is usually of much larger body than the normal type of the work. Some modern specimens of these are among the most tasteful examples of the typefounder’s art, and when properly reproduced, frequently in more than one colour, are, apart from sentiment, quite equal to many of the masterpieces of the old penmen.
  - Their use, however, is a relic of the early printed
  - book in which a space for an initial letter of large size was left blank by the printer for the work of the skilled professional illuminator, whose duties also included that of marginal decoration. Subsequently combined engraved blocks inked separately in different colours were used in order to complete the work from the printer’s hands, and at a later period the single-colour ornamented initial letter took the place of these composite characters.
  - THE initial letter subsequently became of less and less importance, becoming the 2-line letter still retained in advertisements, and the capital letter followed by small capitals of the ordinary publications of the day.
  - The later history of initials is this: firstly, complete blanks were left by the printer for the illuminator to fill in; secondly, outlines were printed in for a less skilled illuminator to go over and fill up with colour; thirdly, outline letters were printed in the blank spaces, and it was left to the fancy
- p.93 - vue 129/901
- - 94 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - of the purchaser to fill them in for himself. Subsequently the whole art of initial-letter illumination degenerated until mechanically revived by the modern typographer, who cut beautiful letters or blocks, by the use of which the printer himself now completes the page when these adjuncts are desired.
  - TYPE FOR ILLUSTRATING GAMES.
  - Chess and draughts.—To illustrate the handbooks on the subjects of chess and draughts and the problems, resulting from the study of these games, so often given in the daily press and the special journals devoted to
  - Fig. 63.—Chess.
  - Fig. 64.—Draughts.
  - the matter, type are made for representing the various pieces on the white or black squares which they may respectively occupy. Of course, these
  - rai’s
  - 1P *
  - ♦ ♦♦ $2
  - ••• ?
  - • • • » » »
  - • •
  - •___•
  - < « «
  - Fig. 65.—Playing-cards.
  - *,*
  - Pghh
  - €
  - € €
  - pieces are cast on the em-quad and their production involves no technical difficulty.
  - Playing-cards.—To illustrate the handbooks on card games and games
- p.94 - vue 130/901
- - TYPE FACES.
  - 95
  - of patience, complete sets of playing-cards are represented in type as shown in fig. 65. These are usually cast on a 36-point body and have a set width of 24 points. As in the preceding case, these present no technical difficulty.
  - Dice, dominoes, and backgammon or trick-track are also cast as type and used for the illustration of works on the games in which the pieces
  - Fig. 66.—Dice.
  - Fig. 67.—Dominoes.
  - Fig. 68.—Backgammon or trick-track, showing small dice and counters.
  - represented take part; they are shown in figs. 66 to 68, and their
  - production involves no technical difficulty.
  - ITALICS AND SCRIPT.
  - Italic is a form of type directly imitative of the art of the penman and is said to have been founded on the handwriting of Petrarch, which it closely resembles. It was first produced by Aldus Manutius, and used
- p.95 - vue 131/901
- - 96 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - by him in his famous edition of Virgil published in 1501 ; for this Pope Leo X granted a Letter of Privilege entitling him to the sole use of the type he had invented.
  - Italic was formerly much more largely used than at present, and in early founts amounted to perhaps forty per cent of the total. Its use in conjunction with roman type is rapidly decreasing. With few exceptions it is now not used as a body type.
  - Script.—Script type, called in French anglaise (an example of curious modesty, for it is really a French invention), is a yet closer imitation of handwriting of the form frequently used by early scribes and popularly
  - Fig. 69.—Script type section.
  - known as copper-plate. Much technical skill and attention were devoted to this face on the Continent, particularly with a view to designing the characters so that they would join up properly in combination, and give the
  - Fig. 70.—Script type section ; Laurent and Deberny.
  - effect of continuous writing, without requiring a large number of shapes to be given to each character according to the combination in which it was to be used. The difficulty is analogous to that met with in the arabic
  - Fig. 71.—Script type section ; Firmin Didot.
  - face, in which some characters are made in four forms, initial, medial, final and detached.
  - Owing to its great inchnation, the kerning of script much exceeds that of italic characters ; to meet this difficulty, type have been made of a section composed of two rhomboids with sides inclined to each other. Type cast on this form of body kerns but little, and the angle of one type fitting into the recess in the adjacent type enables the line to be locked up as securely as if it were composed of rectangular type ; an end type of appropriate shape is provided for each end of the line, having a face at right angles to the front and back of the body, fig. 69. Other sections adopted in France to arrive at this simple result are shown in figs. 70 and 71.
- p.96 - vue 132/901
- - TYPE FACES.
  - 97
  - In some cases the difficulty has been overcome in another manner, the shank of the type being retained of rectangular form for the greater portion of its length ; inclined pieces are cut away in the mould and added on the corresponding halves, so that the upper portion of the type forms a supporting bracket to the kern and nests against the cut-away corner of the succeeding type. This may be done by removing and adding portions of a pyramidal form, as in the script type shown in fig. 72 ; or portions of a prismatic form, as in the test type shown in fig. 73, cast in moulds
  - Fig. 72.—Script type with bracketed kern
  - Fig. 73.—Test
  - type from mould for Kanarese.
  - made for Kanarese but without the face, a plain matrix, as is usual in testing, having been used instead of a struck matrix.
  - TYPEWRITER AND DUPLICATING-MACHINE TYPE.
  - Typewriter type.—The type used generally on typewriters differs to a marked extent from printers’ type, because, with a view to avoiding complication in the typewriting machine, it is necessary to make it of uniform set-width. A few machines, it is true, have been constructed to work with differential spacing, but these have not found popular favour. Typewriter faces in use are generally either one-tenth or one-twelfth of an inch in set width, all the characters coming on the same set. Another peculiarity of the hardened steel type-heads used on typewriting machines is that the actual faces are made slightly curved instead of plane. The magnitude of the sagitta of the small arc of contact of the type with the paper is less than 0'003 inch for j, which is the longest character, and amounts to only 0'0005 inch in the lower-case small sorts. It is somewhat remarkable that notwithstanding the elastic rubber backing of the roller it should be necessary to allow for so small an amount of curvature.
  - For many commercial purposes a close imitation of typewriter type is required. This has led to the production of ordinary type with typewriter characters of the kinds most generally in use ; it presents no special technical
- p.97 - vue 133/901
- - 00
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - difficulties. In some few cases the face has been cut with chequered lines so as to reproduce more accurately the effect given by the ribbon in
  - Fig. 74.—Chequered face typewriter type. Scale: about 16 times full size.
  - typewritten manuscript. The resemblance between work printed from typewriter type and actual typewriting is increased to a very marked extent if the points (.,;:) are made from 0'003 to 0'005 inch high-to-paper. The illusion is carried even further in some founts which comprise cancelled characters, so that the typist’s corrections can be imitated.
  - Duplicating-machine type. — The remarks already made relating to typewriter faces apply here also, but the peculiar troubles attendant on the production of characters so short in body
  - and so irregular in shape as are some of those required in certain of these machines, often present technical difficulties which necessitate the
  - Fig. 75.—Duplicating machine type; cored.
  - Fig. 76.—Gammeter multigraph type.
  - Fig. 77.— Roneo type.
  - —
  - Fig. 78.—Neostyle type.
  - Fig. 79.—Duplicating machine type; grooved.
  - construction of special moulds for their production. Examples of these are given in figs. 75 to 79.
- p.98 - vue 134/901
- - TYPE FACES.
  - 99
  - Addressograph type.—Very similar to the preceding are the short-body types used in some forms of addressing-machines ; the example shown in fig. 80 is cored with a double core to obtain lightness and a drag is fitted to ensure delivery ; this type shows marks indicating that it has been finished
  - Section through A B above the foot.
  - D
  - Fig. 80.—Addressograph metal type.
  - Section through C D.
  - Fig. 81.—Addressograph rubber type.
  - and dressed by knives on the machine. It is more usual to use rubber type of the section shown in fig. 81.
  - TYPE FOR MISCELLANEOUS PURPOSES.
  - Semaphore type. — In consequence of the interest signalling systems, particularly in this country with respect to the boy-scout movement, the authors have designed and cut punches for a fount of type in which a small ordinary capital character is cut at a lower level than that of the actual signal formed by the printing-surface. These small characters enable the sorts to be recognized by any one not conversant with semaphore signals, and as they are intended to be read by those not accustomed to the setting of type, they have been cut erect instead of inverted, fig. 82. A specimen set up in this semaphore character is shown in fig. 83.
  - taken in various
  - Fig. 82.—Semaphore type with designating letter.
  - 141 11 171)11) 1. 7)/11111) A]] 111T 7)17174 TH 11T MITTY11111/ 71 T11 TIT (1T11T fill in 10111/T 1 Ti) 117 1)71)14
  - 11 111 111TT 41TT 1. T)/1111)11. ill 11
  - 111 r(1 /101111T 11 11 ihtItt 7)1117
  - 111 11 T) Till 11 1/11 (1)1 111(T 111 11 1177 11 41)1 111(T1 1(1111(1 If 11111(11111 1)17 11 1111111111 11K 1 1 111 1 1 11RT 1(1(111 TI 11 11 14141344114
  - Fig. 83.—Semaphore type.
  - In the actual sending of messages by semaphore, each word is concluded by bringing the arms down to their lowest or zero position. The authors have consulted several authorities on signalling and have been
- p.99 - vue 135/901
- - TOO
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - advised by them that in the case of the printed character it is preferable to use an ordinary space between the words, reserving the zero sign for the full stop.
  - Morse type.—For the same reason as that mentioned in connexion with semaphore type, the authors have designed and cut a face of Morse
  - Fig. 84.—Morse type.
  - type following the Estienne form rather than the continuous line as recorded on the tape. An example of this type is shown in fig. 84 and a specimen of matter printed from it is given in fig. 85.
  - In this form the printed message has the advantage that the same actual length of line is occupied by the symbol sent, whether dot or dash, but like the ‘ sounder ’ it has not the advantage, possessed by the tape, of similarity to the actual impression to be made on the brain of the receiving operator. The visible interrupted line of the tape resembles the wireless telegram as heard in the telephone receiver and is as easy to read; it is this perfect clearness of the telephonically-received wireless message that has led the authors to devise a similar
  - system of embossed type for the blind to which allusion is made later.
  - iiiii II III ill 1111 1
  - It nil
  - iiiii I11111
  - I Hil ll
  - Iliili ililiiilii It 111 ii III ii iii
  - Fig. 85.—Morse type; Estienne form.
  - Figure 86 shows the Wheatstone perforated ribbon as well as the Morse tape printed from it. This perforated ribbon is the earliest practical
  - Fig. 86.—Wheatstone perforated ribbon and Morse tape; full size.
  - example of the widened application of the Jacquard principle to printing, a principle which is now extensively adopted in many composing machines.
  - Embossed metal type has been proposed for many purposes—frequently for large body type for display work, in place of wood type—but its chief utility as a typographical printing-surface is in certain forms of addressingmachines. The plates used in these machines are usually of zinc about O’OI to 0’0i6 inch thick and the blanks are first stamped out to shape, so as to be capable of being ultimately linked together in order to form a continuous chain for use on the addressing-machine. In other patterns of
- p.100 - vue 136/901
- p.n.n. - vue 137/901
- - PLATE IV.
  - I-
  - 0-
  - L (A
  - L 5. -
  - Lrw M
  - G C
  - E M E
  - Co
  - A W I
  - S t e.E
  - 4 E C L
  - I 12
  - x Le - 2 Li hr Cc
  - Fig. 87.—Embossed metal type ; Addressograph.
  - Fig. 88.—Embossing machine: hand "Graphotype"; Addressograph. To face page 101.]
- pl.4 - vue 138/901
- - TYPE FACES.
  - IO I
  - machines the plates are worked automatically in conjunction with a card-index system.
  - An embossed, address-bearing plate is shown in fig. 87, plate IV.
  - The embossing is effected by means of a machine somewhat similar to a typewriter, fig. 88, plate IV, but carrying dies and punches arranged in pairs above each other in two revolving die-heads, set approximately to position by a hand-wheel on the left of the machine, and finally to register by a taper-ended piece which comes between guides on the die-head as the lever on the right of the machine is brought down. The plate is held by a holder which advances step by step as each character is embossed, and can also be moved radially towards the centre of the die-head so as to cover the range of lines the machine is capable of embossing. This varies from four to five lines according to the size of type face used. The style of face generally adopted is one of the usual typewriter faces. The die and punch are each about 0'31 inch square by 1’25 inches long, and the die is chamfered to clear the projecting portion of the preceding embossed character. For erasing mistakes a flat punch and die are provided. The machine illustrated is an office pattern known as the hand Graphotype, a name which has no connexion with the Graphotype keyboard and casting machines illustrated and described in a subsequent chapter. The machine here shown is intended for use in offices where the plates are prepared from time to time in small quantities. Where large numbers of plates have to be prepared a similar, but power-driven, machine is used. In this the power for embossing is obtained from a continuously-revolving shaft carrying an eccentric, which, as in the case of punching, shearing or stamping machines, can be thrown into gear by the depression of a key.
  - Printing-telegraph type.—Another form of type is that which is used in various machines, all of which perform somewhat similar functions ; among these may be enumerated the printing-telegraph, by which news is distributed to the various journals, news-agencies, clubs, offices, and a few private persons. In this class of machines the type themselves are carried in relief, generally on an aluminium wheel.
  - On certain of the receiving-telegraphs, such as the Hughes, in which the relief type are carried on a steel wheel, they are formed by actually engraving away the portions of the wheel not required for producing the impression. But a number of the telegraphs, especially some of the more modern systems, use type-heads and methods similar in character to those adopted in ordinary typewriters, modified, however, to admit of a higher speed than would be possible to a hand-operated machine. It has not been thought necessary to give illustrations of all these varied but very similar forms of type.
  - Numbering-machine type are of different kinds and uses; some of these types are used in numbering-machines, pure and simple, and some of them in other machines which are made of small size and type-high. These machines can be locked up in the forme with printing-surfaces and effect
- p.101 - vue 139/901
- - I02
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - the numbering with their type after inking in the usual way. They are used for printing tickets, manifold books and other business documents requiring consecutive numbering.
  - Whereas twenty-five years ago the output of numbering-machines in America was only some twenty-five per week, it has risen to approximately one thousand per week at the present time. The chief difficulty in the way of manufacturing these machines at the commencement was caused by the engraving of the wheels: these were formerly engraved by hand, the number of figures which a skilled engraver could turn out being from twenty-five to fifty per day. The wheels are now engraved by machines operated by girls who can each produce from 300 to 1000 figures per day.
  - A
  - Re 11
  - T
  - L N m ML w R
  - % < % OL mr a mr • * " AL aa \ ch
  - + A aa € AN * + op 1 s r ,
  - == 5 4
  - Diamond music characters (P. M. Shanks & Co., The Patent Type Foundry). Fig. 89.—Music type.
  - The typographical numbering-wheels are first blanked out of sheet steel practically to size. The drop-cipher grooves are then milled, after which a ratchet-wheel with the proper number of teeth, usually ten, is riveted to the blank. The blank is then milled to leave the spots for engraving and the drop-cipher is inserted. After engraving the wheel is ground, the drop-cipher freed, and the central hole reamed out to size, this last operation finishing the wheel.
  - It is within the authors’ knowledge that wheels for numbering-machines have been produced by casting instead of by engraving, but they are not aware of any extended use of this method.
  - Music type.—Music type, fig. 89, is cast on an em basis, and the smallest
- p.102 - vue 140/901
- - TYPE FACES.
  - 103 type are on the en. As the note heads are on the lines or on the spaces, and as the stems may cut one or more lines or form angles with them, and as the number of parts required for building up the whole line is very large, it is necessary that the type should be of the highest quality as regards accuracy, and that it should be justified specially with a view to the use of all the various components in any combination which may occur in practice. As a music fount runs to some 260 characters or portions of characters, the difficulties connected with this type are those of composition rather than those of typefounding. So far as the authors are aware, no advance has been made of recent years towards a simplification in the method of setting music other than by the use of a large number of small individual component pieces.
  - Shorthand type.—With regard to shorthand type, fig. 90, it would be ungracious to mention the subject without bringing in the name of Sir Isaac Pitman, to whom the present very generally-used system of shorthand owes its existence. Prior to 1873 this tireless reformer made experiments on printing shorthand from metal type, but owing to the cost of
  - Shorthand characters (Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons).
  - Fig. 90.—Shorthand type; from “ The Life and Work of Sir Isaac Pitman.”
  - punches, he subsequently tried the process of engraving as a means by which type might be reproduced. He found the plan of forming shorthand words by combining their separate parts less practicable than engraving the whole word on the blank; the blanks used are selected of the width required by the word from i-en to 3-ems in set width. The shorthand pages of the " Phonetic Journal" and similar publications are composed of type prepared from engravings. The pages of shorthand are distributed each week into cases so arranged as to enable any given word to be found readily, but in distributing, the types are not thrown loose into the case as with ordinary printing-type ; they are placed in position showing their faces to the compositor. Two sizes are used, and in the composition of shorthand printing-faces a difficulty somewhat similar to that which must be experienced by the classical Chinese printer has been satisfactorily overcome. On the excellent authority of the late Samuel L. Clemens, better known as Mark Twain, it sometimes takes forty years to sort a pie of Chinese type. This information is doubtlessly not new to all who recollect his description of a Chinese printing-establishment in San Francisco, and whose hearts are yet warm with affectionate recollection of the great and kindly
- p.103 - vue 141/901
- - 104
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - humorist who has not long passed away, leaving a name that is almost a household word with the Anglo-Saxon race.
  - Type for the blind.—The introduction of printing for the blind is generally ascribed to Valentin Hauy, of Paris, who about 1784 used a large
  - ABCDEFGHI J
  - K • . • • L • • • -• • M • • • N • • • • • • O •. • • • • P • • • • • • Q • • • • • • R • • • • • • S • • • • • T • • • • • •
  - U • • • • V • • • • • • • • • • Y • • • • • • Z • • • • • • and • • • • • • for • • • • • • of • • • • • • the • • • • • • with • • • • • •
  - ch • • • • gh • • • • • • sh • • • • th • • • • • • wh • • • • • ed • • • • • • er • • • • • • ou • • • • • • ow • • • • • • W • • • • • •
  - » ea be bb con cc dis dd en ! ff 0 gg « ? in
  - • * • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •. • • • • • • • • • •
  - Fraction-line sign st • • • • ing • • • • Numeral sign ble • • • • • • Poetry sign ar • • • • • • Apostrophe and abbreviation Hyphen sign com • • ••
  - Accent sign Initial signs Final signs Capital or decimal- Letter sign • • • • Italic sign • •
  - • • • • • • • • -• • • • • • • • • -• • -•
  - Fig. 91.— Braille type alphabet.
  - relief script character. Various relief alphabets have been invented but of these it will only be necessary to describe one, the braille, alphabet consists of combinations of dots formed as hemispheres in by pressing suitable dies into a specially-prepared paper, generally moist, or warm and plastic. since, This relief while
- p.104 - vue 142/901
- - TYPE FACES.
  - O Ln
  - The braille alphabet uses dots occupying any one of the possible combinations of six positions taken one or more at a time. The total number of combinations is therefore the sum of those taken one at a time, two at a time,.......six at a time, or I, 6, 15, 20, 15, 6, 1, that is, 64 in all, including the space (no dots) and the whole six dots. The six dots are arranged in three horizontal rows of two each and two vertical columns of three each, thus :: ; the dots are described and recognized by numbering them thus: 34.
  - 56
  - Somewhat like the semaphore alphabet the braille uses special signs to change from lower-case to capitals and italics and vice versa. The position occupied by the W among the logotypes proclaims the French origin of the alphabet. The last three signs given representing the change to capitals, letters and italics respectively, are also used as final signs.
  - It is in the method adopted for printing the relief sheets that great originality has been displayed. In the first instance depressions were formed in a malleable metal sheet, and paper in a plastic state was pressed into these by an elastic backing, the plate being itself supported by a rubber or other elastic medium.
  - A great advance on this method was made when a double sheet of metal, usually zinc, was used and the depressions were formed in both sheets simultaneously by a machine somewhat resembling a heavy typewriter; the depressions thus form both type and matrix, but it is from the matrix that the actual reading-surface is produced ; the process is therefore one of composition of matrices in which the printed surface is formed, and the number of consecutive operations necessary is remarkably small in comparison with those involved in the preparation of an ordinary printed page.
  - A still further improvement was effected by simply folding the zinc plate so that the halves would always register when opened and closed, the fold being held in the printing machine and the thinness of the plate permitting of the two parts being pulled by clips sufficiently wide open to receive the sheet to be printed ; the zinc plate used is about o’oi inch thick.
  - Subsequent to the invention of the double metal sheet came that of printing in relief on both sides of the paper, which was first accomplished by the interline method ; in this the space between consecutive lines of reliefs on one side of the paper was used for the depressions corresponding to the printing on the other side; the dots are raised 0'023 to 0-030 inch.
  - The latest advance has been the placing of one of the dots on the one side so that it occupies the centre of the square formed by four dots on the other side ; by this interdot arrangement the amount of matter which can be printed on each side of the paper is increased some 50 per cent.
  - The same alphabet is used on a machine, somewhat like the steno-type, for printing relief characters on a paper ribbon. The speed attainable with these machines is practically as great as that obtained by ordinary shorthand. In fact, the authors have seen a letter taken down by a blind girl at the rate of 160 words per minute ; read back by passing the ribbon
- p.105 - vue 143/901
- - io6 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - through the fingers at the same rate as the ordinary written stenography is read back; and finally typed by the same girl without a single error on an ordinary typewriter.
  - The braille alphabet has been coded for most of the European and many other languages, and many books—educational, literary, and scientific—are now printed in it. F. A. J. Burns of the English and Foreign Braille Literature Society has, for some thirty years, been engaged in the disinterested and philanthropic work of the society which provides syllabaries which enable a sighted person who can read to instruct a blind learner; following the syllabaries introductory reading books are used for such knowledge as is usually taught in elementary schools, and, of course, this is followed with the biblical matter which comes more particularly within the scope of the society’s efforts.
  - Should it be found necessary to produce an edition of a work simultaneously in the same language, in several different countries, a process suggested by the authors for this purpose might be found practical and
  - klmnopqrs t
  - u v w x y z and the for of
  - Fig. 92.—Line-braille.
  - advantageous, especially as books for the blind are very bulky, and it would be more convenient to send the metal matrix-sheets to countries in which editions were required than to send the printed editions of the books themselves.
  - The process would consist in the cutting of a small fount of steel braille characters which would be sufficient for the composition of two or more pages and would be redistributed after each page was completed, as was done with ordinary type in the early days of printing. The forme of steel type would be used as stamps for the production of a number of the sheet metal matrices under a press, and these matrices could then be distributed to the various countries in question where the actual printing would be performed by the local blind institutions where such existed, or by ordinary hands.
  - A further suggestion, here merely put forward, however, by the authors for what it is worth, is an idea that occurred to them of line-braille.
  - In this system of writing braille, the points are arranged in two horizontal rows and three vertical columns, and placed, not as at present
- p.106 - vue 144/901
- - TYPE FACES.
  - 107 separately from each other, but lying contiguously on both sides of a raised straight line or straight depression, as may be found most suitable to the sense of touch.
  - If this system is feasible, it is, in the authors’ opinion, fraught with many practical advantages, which, for lack of space, they are not able to discuss here. Among these are technical details connected with saving of space, ease of composition, tension of paper, and printing upon a rotary machine for cheapness and rapidity of reproduction. The number of different punches required to strike the matrices for this form of braille could be reduced to three for producing the components from which the characters would be formed, that is the double dot, the single dot above and below the line—the second form being the inversion of the first—and the plain line used where no dots occur and, when duplicated or multiplied, serving as the space between the letters and words. In practice it might be found more convenient to use a plain space instead of the raised line for the separation of the letters and words. It would, therefore, not be a costly matter to make the type. This type could be made, if necessary, of bronze or other practically unwearable material, and, as has been said, at first sight many technical advantages apparently group themselves about this method of writing braille. The blind, for instance, could with the greatest ease and rapidity set up a letter, circular, or other original or dictated correspondence and reproduce the matter by means of a simple press as often as wished. It is not, however, a question on which the authors are competent to pronounce an opinion, though their idea has been received with kindly consideration by several authorities not only competent and interested, but occupied in dealing technically with the requirements of the blind. One advantage possessed by this system is that it makes no alteration in the present braille beyond one of position, an alteration which could be mastered almost as soon as explained, or in other words, in the course of a few minutes.
  - Braille, in its latest developments, owes much to the sympathetic ability of the Secretary General of the National Institute for the Blind, Henry Stainsby, to whose inventive powers, the authors believe, are due many of the latest and most important improvements in connexion with what might be termed the giving of sight to the sightless. In this treatise the authors have always carefully avoided anything which might savour of advertisement of any corporation, individual, or machine. They make, however, one exception, and that is in the case of the blind ; and if in any way they can influence any reader of this work, they would like that influence used for the purpose of calling attention to this excellent society, with the hope that it may receive not only what they believe no human being would refuse, namely, sympathy, but also some practical help. The address of the Institute is 206 Great Portland Street, London, W., and they are sure that any calling there will receive the same courtesy and attention that the authors received when investigating the matter of
- p.107 - vue 145/901
- - Io8 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - braille type for the purposes of this book, and will themselves be as interested and moved by what they there see.
  - Reversed type.—The advent of the offset printing-press has given rise to a demand for type faces in reverse. This, of course, presents no new technical difficulties, but involves the cutting of reversed punches and the striking of reversed matrices throughout, as well as the construction of special moulds of the opposite hand where these have been required for the production of an inclined ordinary face.
  - It is interesting to note that patents for reversed type were taken out in Great Britain as early as 1864, nearly half a century before they were
  - .YXDOWHHAl
  - eovof vAtila odt bns (gilliid aswT’
  - : odsw odi ni oldmig bis 91Y9 bid
  - vogood odt 913W vamim IIA .odmgtuo edisi omom odi bnA
  - From “ Through the Looking Glass,” by Lewis Carroll.
  - Fig. 93.—Reversed type.
  - put to any real and practical use. The pneumatic tyre presents another instance of long lapse of time between the taking out of a really useful and valuable patent and its coming into general practical use.
  - Logotypes.—When two or more characters are cast together on the same body, the resulting type bearing the word or combination of letters
  - Fig. 94.—Logotype matrix-box for the Davis pivotal typecaster, using modified Linotype matrices.
  - and symbols on its face is known as a logotype. These are largely used for such works as directories and railway time-tables, for example : street, Mr., p.m., stop. In the case of railway time-tables in particular, they present the advantage of exactly filling the column of figures. Such logotypes may be cast from single matrices, or, in some forms of casting machine, by utilizing a group of composing-machine matrices in combination.
- p.108 - vue 146/901
- - TYPE FACES.
  - 109
  - Borders.—This term was originally used to apply to the illuminated border with which the printed page was surrounded. It is now generally applied to ornament-designs so cast as to be capable of being combined to
  - 20000°°°°°°°0°00 °00000000000°
  - Fig. 95.—Borders.
  - form continuous lines or borders, for which purpose they are largely used in advertisement and fancy printing, as in fig. 95.
  - Corners are special ornaments made with a view to enabling the design
  - Fig. g6.-—Corners.
  - of a border to be changed from one direction to another at right angles to it without destroying the general spirit of the design, fig. 96.
  - Combination borders.—These are cast so that some portion of the design terminates at a definite portion of the body corresponding to a similar termination on the body of another design in such manner that two or more
  - O 0
  - O 0 0 0
  - 0 0 0 0 0
  - 0 0
  - 0 0
  - 00 00 0 0
  - 0 0
  - OO 00
  - 0 O 00 00 00
  - Fig. 97.—Combination borders.
  - portions of the design can be fitted together, producing a complete design in which there is no break but which is capable of variation when the arrangement of the component parts is altered, fig. 97.
  - Ornaments are small figures or designs capable of being used independently for decorative and fancy printing.
  - Fig. 98.—Ornaments.
  - Combination ornaments are similarly designed to the above, so that
  - various designs can be built up by means of modified arrangements of
- p.109 - vue 147/901
- - no
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - similar parts. Type used in such combinations is generally cast on 6-point and 12-point bodies or multiples of them for convenience of fitting together and assembling into complete and frequently very complex designs.
  - BE.
  - Fig. 99.—Combination ornaments.
  - Groundwork is formed by the aggregation of the same ornament either in the same position in each line, or inverted, or turned through a right
  - XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
  - Fig. ioo.—Groundwork.
  - angle. It serves to cover space in which much predominance of white is not desired.
  - Natural objects are what their name implies and are cast on large bodies, generally not exceeding 72 points. They include everything in heaven above.
  - Fig. 101.—Natural objects.
  - in the earth beneath, and in the water under the earth, from Beelzebub on a bicycle to the fatted calf, or the fish that swallowed Jonah. Their classification is absolutely hopeless, and their technology presents no difficulty whatever to the skilled typefounder.
  - Rules and cheque-rules are strips of metal, type-high, accurately
- p.110 - vue 148/901
- - TYPE FACES.
  - Ill
  - machined or cast to form a printing-surface which may be a plain line, a series of dots or a recurring pattern. When of brass they are machined from the solid; when of metal they are cast in type-metal in a rule-mould
  - Fig. 102.—Rules and cheque-rules.
  - and finished on the foot by machining, as in the case of brass rules. They must be cast in a rule-mould by hand when they exceed 12 pica ems in length. Scrolls are a survival of the finish to the old scribes’ signatures, and are at present chiefly used in commercial work to form a background for writing
  - Fig. 103.—Scrolls.
  - as a safeguard against alteration in business documents, such, for example, as cheques and bills.
  - Braces are the larger forms of bracket and are generally cast in rule-moulds except when they exceed 12 pica ems in length, in which case they
  - Fig. 104.—Braces.
  - are cast in a hand rule-mould. Line or pen dashes, ornamental rules, curves and various other similar designs used in printing are similarly produced.
  - Arrows are made of various lengths, usually straight, but occasionally curved or irregular. Some are made with the head and feathers in two
  - Fig. 105.—Arrows.
  - separate parts so that by the use of a rule for the shaft, they may be made up to any desired length; these are used for the direction of trains in railway time-tables and for route-books and other similar purposes; the shape of the arrow, however, is by no means confined to the above, and takes various forms in fancy and jobbing printing.
- p.111 - vue 149/901
- - I12
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Ornamental dashes are usually symmetrical designs of short lengths used
  - principally to decorate tradesmen’s circulars and similar jobbing work.
  - Fig. 106.—Ornamental dashes.
  - Pen or line dashes, flourishes and combination flourishes, are frequently made right and left handed, though sometimes only one-handed. They are used for the same purpose as the ornamental dashes, but occasionally also for terminating the signature at the foot of letters printed
  - Fig. 107 —Pen or line dashes; flourishes and combination flourishes.
  - in script type. They are a survival of the old writing-masters’ flourishes, and are made both as simple flourishes and in more elaborate form as combination flourishes, fig. 107.
  - Colophons, sometimes called imprints, were originally the individual
  - Fig. 108.—Colophons.
  - devices of early printers, but became generalized later on as an ornamental finish or ending to a book and occasionally to each chapter.
- p.112 - vue 150/901
- - TYPE FACES.
  - H
  - CO
  - Screw-heads.
  - Nail-heads.
  - 9 9
  - Ink blots.
  - Illusional forms.—Another use of the typographical surface is the representation of various concrete objects, more or less accidental to ordinary printing, such as screw-heads, nail-heads and ink blots, fig. 109.
  - Although the authors have not come across other examples of these illusional forms, it is obvious that the paper-fastener, the pin, or rather those parts of a pin which show when one is used to secure papers together, the turned-up or turned-down corner of a sheet and other additions to or alterations in the appearance of the printed sheet could be simulated equally satisfactorily and the thumb print of the printer might be added to the list, although, under modern conditions, it is more rarely seen
  - Fig. 109.—Illusional forms.
  - than was the case when inking was performed with balls and by hand.
  - Leads, which have already been defined on page 55, were formerly usually cast in a lead-mould by hand and cut to length to gauge by a lead-
  - cutting machine, fig. Iio.
  - fig. IIO.—Lead-cutting machine.
  - Leads, when cast in the hand-mould, usually do not exceed 60 ems, or ten inches in length ; the sharp corners left by the mould are removed by means of a scraper of hardened steel having a v notch. The casting of leads accurate both for thickness and parallelism throughout their length demands high skill on the part of the founder. Modern, improved, or standard leads can be obtained of greater length than the old hand-cast leads ; they are scraped by machine, and should be so true when finished that they are capable of standing on a level plane surface.
  - Space lines are made of
  - brass; they are of greater strength and durability than ordinary leads and can be obtained of greater length; they are frequently known as brass leads and are much used for
  - newspaper work.
  - Reglets are made of wood, usually oak or beech, of thicknesses equal to those body-sizes in most common use; they are produced in 36-inch lengths. Frequently only two or three sizes, multiples of 6-point, are used.
  - I
- p.113 - vue 151/901
- - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Clumps are also cast in a lead-mould, and in some cases a core is fixed to one side of the lead-mould so that the clump may be lightened by the
  - Fig. III.—Cored clumps.
  - recess so formed. In America clumps are known as slugs and several improved patterns of tying-up clumps have been devised in that country. These have a groove or hollow in one side to receive the paging cord ; this groove is of sufficient depth to permit of locking up with the cord in place. Clumps are usually made of thicknesses equal to the commonest body-sizes, and often serve as
  - foot-lines to pages or columns.
  - Quotations.—Quotations are usually cast on a casting machine, special
  - provision being made in the mould for the withdrawal of the core to permit of the quotation being ejected. The large quads now known as quotations will probably in time be comprised under the definition of furniture.
  - Furniture.—Frequently known as metal furniture, to distinguish it from the hardwood
  - Fig. II2.—Quotations.
  - furniture previously used
  - for the purpose, is of H or girder section throughout its length, fig. 113. When made of this section, however, it is liable to become distorted under the pressure applied in locking up the forme. When this class of metal furniture is used it is frequently the practice to supplement it with wood furniture, using the latter for actual contact with the chase.
  - Fig. 113.—H or girder furnittire. Ordinary french metal furniture, which is shown in isometric projection and in cross-section in fig. 114, has the core for one side made shorter
  - than the length of the piece of furniture to be cast, and has grooves cut across it so that the furniture is cast with ends extending for one-half of the depth, and with stiffening bars forming ribs on the medial web. This style of furniture is merely a compromise between girder furniture and the improved french furniture, described next, which has superseded it for most purposes as it has the advantage of greater stiffness for the same weight of material.
  - Fig. 114.—Ordinary french metal furniture.
  - Improved french metal furniture, fig. 115, is cast in a mould in which both cores are of less length than the furniture to be cast, and are provided
- p.114 - vue 152/901
- - TYPE FACES.
  - J
  - with grooves ; the cores in this instance are made deeper so as to meet each other, and the furniture formed has rectangular holes through it, besides
  - being connected by struts of approximately circular section.
  - Furniture is usually cast of 24, 36, 48, 72, and 96-point widths and of lengths varying from 36 points or 3 ems up to 48 ems, the lengths advancing by two or three ems to give multiples of 2 or 3 ems.
  - Locket furniture, fig. 116, is an improvement on french metal furniture. It is made in 36-point size and has a projection 12 points square at the centre
  - Fig. 115.—Improved french metal furniture.
  - of each end. It can be made
  - with special corners to
  - facilitate the setting of inclined lines, as is shown in fig. 116.
  - Mild-steel furniture.— Of late, furniture of mild steel, either milled or stamped, fig. 117, has
  - Fig. 116.—Locket furniture.
  - been introduced, but this in turn is likely from some of the alloys of aluminium. Such a material appears to be the ideal substance for this particular purpose.
  - Another and very ingenious form of steel furniture recently exhibited consists of two pressed-steel halves placed back to back and secured by short tubes passing through the central rib so formed and beaded over. The resulting structure is finished on the vertical surfaces by grinding on a disk-grinding machine.
  - to give way to furniture cast
  - Fig. 117.—Mild-steel furniture.
- p.115 - vue 153/901
- - II6 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - ACCURACY OF TYPE FACES.
  - The same degree of accuracy is required in type cast by typecasting and composing machines as in the type cast in the simple typecaster. The
  - Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt Wtttt
  - WttttttjfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiiiilll..,,,?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrrs88S?eBT£aaaaaooooxz... WttttttjfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiiiilll..,?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrrsss8?eBT£aaaaaooooxz...
  - Wtttttt jfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456i ii i illl..., ,?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrrssss?eBT£aaaaaooooxz... Wtttttt jfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiii illl..,,, ?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrrs8S8?eBT£aaaaaooooxz... WttttttjfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiiiilll..,,,?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrr88S8?eBT£aaaaaooooxz...
  - WttttttjfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiiiilll..,, ,?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrr8888?eBT£aaaaaooooxz...
  - WttttttjfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiiiilll..., ,?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADE wIrrrs888?eBT£aaaaaooooxz... WttttttjfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiiiilll.?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrrs8ss?eBT£aaaaaooooxz... Wtttttt jfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456i i i i illl...,,? ;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrrs888?eBT£aaaaaooooxz... WttttttjfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiiiilll..,,,?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrr8888?eBT£aaaaaooooxz...
  - WttttttjfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiiiilll..,, ,?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrrs888?eBT£aaaaaooooxz... Wtttttt jfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiii illl..,,,?; HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnh ADEwIrrrssss?eBT£aaaaaooooxz... WttttttjfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiiiilll,.,,,?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrr8888?eBT£aaaaaooooxz... WttttttjfPeeeeeeeeccorMmfliyy0123456iiiii]ll..,,,?; HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnh ADEwfrrrssss?eBT£aaaaaooooxz...
  - WttttttjfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiiiilll. .,,,?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrr8888?eBT£aaaaaooooxz... Wttttttj fPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiiiilll,?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrrssss?eBT£aaaaaooooxz...
  - WttttttjfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiiiilll..,, ,?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrrss88?eBT£aaaaaooooxz...
  - WttttttjfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiiiilll..,, ,?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrrss8s?eBT£aaaaaooooxz... WttttttjfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiiiilll..,, ,?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrr888s?eBT£aaaaaooooxz... WttttttjfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiiiilll..,,,?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrr8888?eBT£aaaaaooooxz... Wtttttt j fPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456i i i i illl..,, ,?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrrssss?eBT£aaaaaooooxz...
  - WttttttjfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiiiilll..,, ,?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrr8888?eBT£aaaaaooooxz...
  - WttttttjfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiiiilll.?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrr8S8s?eBT£aaaaaooooxz... WttttttjfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiiiilll. .,,,?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubgSnhADEwIrrr8888?eBT£aaaaaooooxz...
  - WttttttjfPeeeeeeeeccorMmffiyy0123456iiiiilll..,,,?;HGnnnnnhhhhddduuubg8nhADEwIrrr888s?eBT£aaaaaooooxz...
  - Fig. 118.—Lock-up test for accuracy of type.
  - The types shown in this figure represent rather more than a block of type as delivered by the Wicks rotary type-casting machine. The types for this example were cast in a mould of the body-slide class at the rate of 160 types per minute. The speed of the Wicks machine was 1000 types per minute, but as there were 100 moulds only ten types were cast per mould per minute. Omitting the five sorts which are repeated, this example represents two-and-a-half minutes’ work for the Wicks rotary typecasting machine.
  - test usually applied to check accuracy is that known as the lock-up, which consists of repeating the same characters for a whole page. A page
- p.116 - vue 154/901
- - TYPEFACES. 117 thus set up is shown in fig. 118; the type for the example given were actually cast in a single mould at the rate of 160 per minute.
  - In another form the accuracy and interchangeability of foundry type is well illustrated by the following incident, a form of experience from which others engaged in the wide fields of mechanical work have doubtless suffered as well as the authors. All are acquainted with the “ expert,” the “ practical man ” of unpractical people ; the man who knows all type by sight; can tell the house of its origin, the very composition of its metal, its hardness and durability, and every face cast upon any particular body. With such a one the authors came in contact, and the following was their answer to his ipse dixit:—
  - THE EXPERT.
  - I.
  - The expert is a man of worth, Far above me and you; For he knows everything on earth From China to Peru!
  - II.
  - Should you engage him on the spot To criticize you this,
  - You’ll find his criticism not, The thing he thinks it is.
  - III.
  - Suppose he says, “It’s clear as day,” The thing he’s asked to do, Well, it’s been done the other way: We’ve different points of view.
  - IV.
  - Which type is which? “Aye, there’s the rub!” Come Experts to the test;
  - From London even to the “ Hub” And do your very best!
  - Fig. 119.—Exactitude of face reproductions.
  - These verses are set up in type from three different foundries using different matrices, different moulds, and different machines. In one verse the product is entirely that of foundry A ; in another it is mixed with sorts from foundry B; in yet another it is mixed with sorts from foundry C, while in the remaining verse the products of the three foundries are mingled. Which verse is the product of the one foundry and which of the three? In the other verses which are the sorts that have been introduced in place of the original characters ?
- p.117 - vue 155/901
- - II8 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Our friend, the expert, fled before the test when it took practical shape as here given. He was wise in his generation, knowing the difficulty which faced him. These few verses, fig. 119, are set up in type of the same body, set and face, made by different leading typefounders and in quite different machines, and to distinguish which individual type is the product of which individual typefoundry is probably beyond the limits of human achievement. Immediately after the completion of his work, the very compositor who set up the specimen confessed himself unable to solve the problem, without referring to the back of the forme in which this curious puzzle was locked up. The authors themselves were almost as surprised as their friend, the " expert,” and the compositor, at the severity of the test they had devised, and hope that they have profited from what was equally a lesson to themselves. Apart, however, from anything connected with personal equation in this matter, the essential facts brought to light by the above test are the faithfulness to the original of electrotype reproduction, the accuracy of the justifiers in positioning the characters, the accuracy of the mould makers in the construction and finish of their moulds, and generally the smallness of the total error resulting from the combination of the many different processes which are applied in the production of a type, even when carried out independently by different firms with different workpeople, and under different conditions.
  - The matter has, moreover, a very important side with regard to the question of copyright in type faces. The production of letters, founts and matrices has in the course of the development of printing been so gigantic that the authors have no hesitation in stating that to originate a new letter for the latin faces, or, in other words, one that has no affinity with, or similarity to, a predecessor is a practical impossibility.
  - In dealing with questions of design in individual type and type faces, in the first place, actual size in vertical height, in width, and in thickness of stroke, speaking broadly, cannot count as constituting a difference of design.
  - Imagine five mirrors, one a normal or plane glass, one a proportionately enlarging or spherical glass, one a proportionately diminishing or spherical glass, one a proportionately expanding or broadening cylindrical glass, and one a proportionately narrowing cylindrical glass; the curvature of the glasses being convex or concave as necessary. With these five mirrors successively placed in front of him, a man would be shown in five different states: normal, large, small, stout, and thin. The design of the man, however, would remain the same. He would still be the same individual. Similarly with type, a new design must not comprise anything that is merely an enlarging, a diminishing, a broadening, a lengthening, or even a distorting of some already-known form ; although another kind of optical device may be imagined giving the effect known generally as shearing and showing a sloping figure for a vertical one, which in type is known as italic, even this alteration is not sufficient to produce change in the
- p.118 - vue 156/901
- - TYPE FACES.
  - 119
  - design. Nor can a new design be produced by the mere removal of some portion of a letter, and the substitution of another portion, from a type form already known, for the portion removed.
  - A new design in type must present an actual and demonstrable difference of outline and change when compared with any of the existing forms of type, or indeed, of any existing forms of portions of type. New design must mean an essential change in the structure of the character, and an essential change in its outline, so as to produce not only a different form and effect for the eye, but also an altogether different set of proportional measurements.
  - The standard type forms, apart from sans serif, fall under less than a dozen heads, depending upon the shape, position, and relative dimension of the serif, and the means by which the serif itself is joined to the strokes. Outside of these, practically only freak faces are formed, and with freak faces the authors are not dealing here. The likenesses in two apparently different faces of type are often not immediately apparent to one who has not made a study of the matter.
  - Two pages of type set up from two founts might appear different to the ordinary observer, and yet from the point of view of the designer the individual letters might be identical, the characteristics causing the change of appearance to the reader having no place in the question of type design.
  - The authors have themselves produced what have been and would still be called original faces, but, for their part, they have never attempted to register them, as with their present knowledge of type faces they cannot honestly declare that anything they have ever done in this matter has been truly original. A merciless analysis has shown these designs to have merely been the unconscious adaptation or combination of some already-existing, if not well-known, designs.
  - What frequently comes under the head of new design in typefounders’ catalogues and circulars is simply a compilation from and variation in dimension of existing originals, by which an apparent or temporary novelty or improvement is brought about to meet the taste of the day.
  - The form of each character in a fount of type can only vary between those limits outside of which the individual character ceases to be recognizable : the impression formed by the same type under different conditions of printing varies by a relatively large amount; recognizable differences of thickness of line, of ratio of height to length of line, of position and even of curve of line are therefore numerically limited, and although the total number of forms which can be produced of any individual character will be expressed by the product of these finite numbers, yet the total of such forms will not in general exceed the total number of forms which have already been produced, as an enormous number of varieties have been created in the past four and a half centuries.
  - Moreover, in a series of type faces of different body-sizes, it has been
- p.119 - vue 157/901
- - I20 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - customary to alter the proportions of height to width, and of relative thickness of stroke, so that the field covered by the various faces forming any particular series is enlarged, and the chance of producing a really original character is reduced still further. Hence it frequently happens that the difference of form which is found between the same character in different body-sizes of the same series is greater than that which is found in characters from two different series.
  - Seeing that type of the latin character have been cast for at least four and a half centuries, in thousands of complete founts, and in millions of individual characters, and that probably every possible variety of standard face and form of letter has been produced, so far as type design is concerned, modern type-designing is not and cannot be new and original type-designing, and careful consideration of the factors of the case is bound to lead any unprejudiced person to the same conclusion.
  - The authors believe that this question has never been fought and
  - decided in a court of law.
- p.120 - vue 158/901
- - CHAPTER IX.
  - SERIES, PROPORTIONS, AND WEIGHT.
  - " Brethren in Types be of different Bodies even as among Men brothers of one Family are of different bigness; Yet by their Faces may ye tell them together or apart even as Twins for Likeness of feature, though Bone be lesser and the Bulk ne so Grosse'
  - Mirrour of Pryntyng.
  - 10-point Cheltenham old-style italic (American Type Founders Co.).
  - Series.—Founts of different bodies but of faces made to appear similar are said to form a series. A fount of a small body generally has a greater a-z length than a large-body fount of the same series.
  - At present there is no uniformity in the set widths of the various faces, but it should be possible to cover all requirements by the adoption of a strengthened modern face in three widths, namely : extended, standard, and condensed, each bearing a definite ratio to the other. The only convenient unit for gauging whether type is extended, standard, or condensed, is by the measure of the alphabet, a-z, in ems. By em is meant the size of the em-quad; the total set of the alphabet is consequently expressed as a multiple of the body. In making such comparisons, however, it must be noted that it is only possible to compare founts of the same body and style by this measure.
  - It has been the custom of typefounders to have the punches cut so that the size of the small sorts is made larger than the truly proportionate size as the body diminishes, the length of the ascenders and descenders being correspondingly altered. If reference is made to the figures in tables 12 to 23, pp. 128-129, et seq., it is seen that nearly all the vowels and most of the more frequently-occurring consonants are small sorts, and this is not only the case in English, but also in the languages of the other countries in which typefounding has been longest established, namely, in Germany, Holland, France, and America. In the English language in 10,000 lower-case characters there are on the average 5830 small sorts; but only 3510 ascenders and 620 descenders, and 40 characters which both ascend and descend. It is the influence of the greater number of the small sorts and the adoption of
  - 121
- p.121 - vue 159/901
- - 122
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - as large a size as possible for the small sorts, in order to obtain legibility, which is responsible for this change of shape as the size of the face is reduced, and for the descenders being more shortened in proportion than the ascenders.
  - Series of type faces.—The minimum width usually permissible for the hair-line in modern faces is 0’002 inch ; owing to the enlargement of the small sorts and to the fact that the hair-line is the minimum width of line which will give a good impression, it is not possible to use the same model or former upon a punch-cutting machine for a large range of reduction, but, in order that the type may appear similar, other formers must be provided of the proper proportions. It will be found in practice that the same formers can be used for pica, small pica, and long primer; a second set is often required for bourgeois, brevier, and minion ; and a third set for nonpareil and ruby. In some cases one set is used for faces from 12-point, or pica, to 8-point, or brevier, with a second set for 7-point, or minion, to 51-point, or ruby. Larger body-sizes up to 36-point are usually cut from the same formers as the 12-point; the difference of form being more marked the smaller the body-size becomes.
  - A former is the enlarged model of the character to be produced upon the punch-cutting machine, and is described later on in the chapter on punch-cutting.
  - When three sets of formers are used, the set widths of the second set of formers are from 8 to 10 per cent greater than those of the first, and the set widths of the third set from 16 to 20 per cent greater than those of the first. When only two sets are used, the widths of the second set are from io to 15 per cent greater than those of the first.
  - The relative appearance of the characters produced from three sets of formers is shown in fig. 120.
  - The a-z length for a standard face in pica is about 121 to 13 ems, in brevier about 13 to 141 ems, and in nonpareil about 15 to 153 ems.
  - Owing to different characters being affected by differences in set width, an old-style face having its a-z length equal to 13 ems will average nearly the same length as a modern face of 121 ems. (See foot of tables 7 and 8, pp. 72 and 73.)
  - Family.-—When a number of series of type faces have common peculiarities, and differ only for the same body by increase or decrease of set and by thickening or thinning of the lines, they are said to belong to the same family. A well-known example of a type family, of American origin, is the cheltenham, which comprises the cheltenham old-style, Cheltenham bold, cheltenham wide, and cheltenham bold expanded series.
  - Line.—The line, on which the lower serifs of the lower-case m or capital H stand, was usually placed in a haphazard position relatively to the back and front of the type. Consequently different founts of the same body seldom lined alike, a fact which can be readily verified from the irregular appearance of sixteenth and seventeenth century printing, where
- p.122 - vue 160/901
- - SERIES, PROPORTIONS, AND WEIGHT.
  - 123
  - much italic was used in conjunction with roman, with the result that even when the roman and the italic occurred together, their lines were differently positioned.
  - For a long time it has been recognized that standardization of the line
  - 12 point (Pica) 9 times full size
  - 9 point (Bourgeois) 12 times full size.
  - 6 point (Nonpareil) 18 times full size.
  - Fig. 120.—Type series.
  - was desirable, and this important improvement has for some time past been accepted and used in the United States. The American practice has been adopted in several of the English foundries, though it is to be regretted that it has not yet come into universal use, and that the
- p.123 - vue 161/901
- - 124
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - standard line adopted in this country, while accepting the point as the unit, has not conformed in detail throughout to the American standard.
  - Two forms of standard line are in use : common line which applies to all ordinary founts, and title line which relates to founts consisting entirely of capitals and other signs without any descending portions, usually known as lining series.
  - A comparison of the American and English lines is made in table IO, in which the position of the line is given as beard or distance of line-to-front. The line-to-back, which is the dimension generally used when
  - TABLE ro.
  - Amount of beard expressed in points.
  - Type body. American common line. American point title line. S. B. & Co. point common line. S. B.&Co. point title line. Type body. American common line. American point title line. S. B.&Co. point common line. S. B.&Co. point title line.
  - 5 I I I 18 4 I 4 2
  - 6 I I I I 20 4 I 4 2
  - 7 2 I 2 I 24 5 1 2
  - 8 2 I 2 I 30 7 I 6 3
  - 9 2 I 2 I 36 8 I 7 3
  - IO 2 I 2 I 42 8 I 8 3
  - II 3 I 3 1 48 8 I 10 3
  - 12 3 I 3 i ! 54 8 1 II —
  - 14 3 2 3 I 60 8 7 12 4
  - 16 3 I 3 i 72 14 14 4
  - designing type faces, can, of course, be obtained by subtracting the number of points in the beard from those in the body-size.
  - The fact that the line does not always occupy the same relative position in type of different bodies leads to some difficulty in so designing faces that they can be reduced proportionately for different bodies. It is also necessary that when they are placed upon those bodies they shall not kern at the top or bottom, or, as some founders would say, " shall not beard.” It is necessary, in fact, that they should do more than this and leave an adequate amount of wall at the front and back.
  - In Germany the standard line of type has been laid down in accordance with the decisions of the commission appointed by the Deutscher Buch-
- p.124 - vue 162/901
- - SERIES, PROPORTIONS, AND WEIGHT.
  - 125
  - drucker-Verein and by the Verein deutscher Schriftgiessereien, Leipzig, 14 September, 1905, as follows :—
  - TABLE II.
  - Position of the standard line in German type, in Didot points.
  - Body. Line-to -back. Line-to-front. Gauge of capital H. Back wall of capital H. Difference of gauge of capitals.
  - 4 5 3'1 4’1 0-9 0’9 3-0 3:6 0-1 °’5 0-6
  - 6 46 1’4 4’4 0-2 0'5
  - 7 5-1 1’9 49 0*2
  - 8 9 6’1 71 1’9 1'9 5'8 6'8 0'3 0’3 0’9 1-0 0-6
  - 10 7-6 2'4 7‘4 0-2
  - Gr. IO 8-1 1’9 7'4 07 O’O
  - 12 14 9'1 11-I 2'9 2-9 8-6 9'8 0’5 1’3 1’2 1-8
  - 16 12-1 3'9 II-6 °'5
  - 18 14*1 39 13-1 1-0 1’5
  - 20 161 3'9 14-6 1’5 1 5 2’0
  - 24 181 59 16-6 1’5
  - 28 22*1 5'9 21*1 I’O 45
  - 32 241 7’9 23'1 1-0
  - 36 28-1 79 27-1 1-0 40 4’0 3'8 5'7
  - 42 32-1 9'9 31*1 1’0
  - 48 36-1 II°9 349 1'2
  - 54 421 II‘9 40*6 1’5
  - 60 461 1319 44:6 1’5 40
  - 66 501 15’9 48-6 1’5 4’0
  - 72 541 179 52:6 1-5 4’0
  - 84 64-1 19’9 62’2 1’5 10’0 8-0
  - 96 72’1 2319 70-6 1’5
  - 108 83*1 249 80-6 2'5 IO’O
  - 120 92’1 27'9 89:6 2'5 9-0 100
  - 132 102’1 29’9 99'9 2'5
  - 144 III'I 32'9 108:6 2'5
  - In this arrangement it was proposed to obtain exact agreement of the line in the various body-sizes by the addition of one or more quarter-Petit (corps 2) leads. Apparently a difficulty of considerable magnitude must have influenced the decision as to the position of the line which is uniformly O’I Didot point low to the nearest unit position, or half unit in two cases. In English measure this is only 0'0015 inch or about double the tolerance allowable in the alinement of a character. The German authorities have, however, appreciated that the successive difference of position of the line is of greater importance than the position of the datum. .
- p.125 - vue 163/901
- - 126
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - In the process for making formers, patented by the authors, special provision has been made for securing the necessary clearances on all the bodies comprised within the range which the former, or model, is destined to cover. This matter is fully dealt with in the chapter on punch-cutting.
  - The advantage of the standard line is particularly apparent in those faces known in the trade as lining and titling. These faces, which generally have no lower-case, are frequently used together to obtain effects similar to those usually produced by the mixture of lower-case and capitals. An example of this convenient alinement is given in fig. 121.
  - hhhhhHHHhh
  - HHHh
  - I point beard. 2 points beard. 1 point beard.
  - Fig. 121.—Point title line of letters. 7-point to 30-point.
  - Proportions.—Type is usually supplied according to a bill of fount, or fount scheme, which determines the proportion each character bears to the whole. In some cases the order is for a certain total weight of type and this is translated by the typefounder into a bill of so many m’s. In this case it is the lower-case m which is taken as the standard of demand, and the bill is for 3000 or 5000, etc., m’s ; for this reason the lower-case m is placed first in the bill. The spaces and quads are usually reckoned separately from the characters. For many of the problems which arise, in the design of typecasting and composing machinery, it is necessary to consider the total number either of type or of type and spaces together.
  - The authors have calculated tables 12 and 13, pp. 128 to 131, which show the number of each character in a million type either exclusive of or inclusive of spaces and quads up to the em quad. Although these proportions are followed very closely in making up an order, the trade recognize the possibility of irregularity in the demand ; for example, directories and voters’ lists require an abnormally large supply of capitals and small capitals, while almanacs and some scientific works require an excessive quantity of figures. Thus it may happen that printers occasionally require abnormal quantities of some particular character, of capitals, of small capitals, or of figures. By the custom of the trade the printer is entitled to be supplied with sorts or imperfections at the same rate as paid for the fount, provided these are ordered within three months of the date on which the fount was supplied.
  - In the above-mentioned tables the authors have given the proportions generally supplied by typefounders to printers using the English language. The proportions for other languages are, of course, different in each case.
  - Table 14, pp. 132 and 133, gives a bill of 100,000 type, exclusive of spaces and quads, for Welsh.
  - It will be noticed that the quantity of lower-case d is nearly double that in the corresponding English scheme, while the lower-case 1 has a frequency
- p.126 - vue 164/901
- - SERIES, PROPORTIONS, AND WEIGHT.
  - 127
  - more than two and a half times as great as in English ; so also have the lower-case w and y. The greater frequency of occurrence of these letters compensates for the small quantity of the lower-case 0, of which only one-half the number required for the English fount bill is provided.
  - The bill of fount for French type gives proportions very different from those of the English bill. The bill shown in table 15, pp. 134 and 135 (based on that of M. Rignoux), will probably be found useful. It is not usual to include italic unless specified ; when italic is supplied it is usually in the ratio to roman of about I to 6. The authors have taken 15 per cent. The quantities, for a fount of roman only, can be obtained by summing those given for roman and italic.
  - The superiors are used for abbreviations, such as :—
  - MET Monseigneur, cie Compagnie, N°S Numeros, etc.
  - It is the custom of the trade to supply only £ Is E in capitals, small capitals, and italic capitals, but in this bill the authors have included the other accented capitals which may be called for.
  - The supplementary nick, used for distinguishing the small capitals o s v w x z and I in old-style, is also used in France.
  - There are certain differences between some of the characters as usually cut in France and those cut in England ; for example, the capital C has cat’s-ears at the top and bottom (C), while in England they occur at the top only ; also a French fount comprises a sign for inverted commas «le guillemet » not used in England. The triple ligatures ffi and fl are now scarcely ever used (see chapter X) outside the English-speaking countries.
  - The German fount scheme presents considerable difference, according as the Fraktur, table 16, p. 136, or the ordinary roman (Antiqua), table 17, P. 137, style of character is used, one reason for this being the large number of ligatures in general use in Fraktur; these account for two letters each, so that the Fraktur scheme for 100,000 characters, or strictly speaking for 100,000 type, includes some 5,600 more letters than does the roman scheme.
  - The bills of fount of Italian, table 18, p. 138, and of Spanish, table 19, p. 139, as well as that of Bohemian, table 20, p. 140, call for no special comment, but the fount scheme for Greek, table 21, p. 141, is remarkable for the very large number of accents required and for the provision which must necessarily be made for adding these accents as loose type above certain characters, which must be cast on a smaller body as indicated in the scheme.
  - In the case of Russian, the italic face is generally treated as a separate fount, and accordingly both the roman, table 22, p. 142, and the italic, table 23, p. 143, have been given independently.
  - The Hebrew bill of fount as shown in table 24, p. 143, gives only the ordinary characters and does not take into account the numerous point combinations which would make a complete scheme nearly as complex as that for Greek. A great deal of news and other matter in Yiddish is set without these points and in this form its difficulty to the reader resembles that of shorthand written without the vowels.
- p.127 - vue 165/901
- - 128
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - TABLE 12 (continued on opposite page).
  - Bill of 1,000,000 type, exclusive of spaces and quads. (England.)
  - Roman lower-case. Roman small capitals. Roman capitals. Roman figures, fractions and points. Roman accents.
  - m a b C d e f g h i j k 1 n 0 P q r S t u w X y Z ae oe ff fi fl Hi 111 16,780 50.330 11,180 22,370 27,960 78,300 16,780 11,180 33,550 50,300 2,800 4,47° 27,960 44,74° 44,700 13.420 3,360 39,150 44,74° 55,930 25,170 8,390 13,980 2,800 13,980 1,680 1,120 560 2,240 2,800 1,680 1,680 1 1,120 : A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P 9 R S T U V W X Y Z E CE & 2,510 1,510 1,960 1,960 2,510 1,680 1,510 1,680 2,510 1,120 1,120 1,680 1,680 1,960 1,960 1,510 670 1,850 1,960 2,35° 1,340 1,120 1,510 670 1,120 670 330 330 1,120 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Z E CE & 3,900 2,510 2,800 3,070 4,200 2,510 2,510 2,510 5,020 1,680 1,680 3,070 3,630 3,070 3,070 2,800 1,120 2,800 3,320 4,44° 2,000 2,000 3,070 1,120 2,000 840 560 560 1,680 I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 1 $ % $ 3 8 § 7 8 , , > ! ? ( [ 3,900 3,350 3,350 2,800 2,800 2,800 2,800 2,800 2,800 3,900 840 840 840 280 280 280 280 280 280 16,780 25,170 4,47° 3,350 5,600 4,47° 1,120 1,680 2,240 : 1,120 : a a a a ~ a 9 e e e e 1 i i i n 6 0 6 0 u u u u | W W Q 250 1,200 600 250 200 250 1,200 600 400 600 250 250 250 250 200 250 250 300 300 250 250 300 300 200 200 50
  - Total 677,200 Total 43,900 Total 73,540 Total 101,500 i Total 9,400
  - Total number of sorts 275.
- p.128 - vue 166/901
- - SERIES, PROPORTIONS, AND WEIGHT.
  - 129
  - TABLE 12 (concluded from opposite page).
  - Bill of 1,000,000 type, exclusive of spaces and quads. (England.)
  - Peculiars and commercial signs. Italic lower-case. Italic capitals. Italic accents. Italic figures and points.
  - n -I- x i +384* s^©; | 'J ^^^^^ * 1,400 560 560 560 560 370 280 280 280 560 2,800 560 280 280 280 1,120 560 560 560 280 280 280 280 280 a b C d e f g h i J k I m n 0 P Q r s t u V W X y Z @ a? ff fi fl flfl ft 5.030 1,120 2,240 2,800 7,830 1,680 1,120 . 3,350 5,030 280 450 2,800 1,680 4,470 4,470 1,340 340 3,910 4-47° 5,590 2,510 840 1,400 280 1,400 170 IIO 60 220 280 170 170 IIO A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z TE CE 6 £ 390 250 280 310 420 250 250 250 500 170 170 310 360 310 310 280 IIO 280 330 440 200 200 310 IIO 200 80 55 55 170 IIO a a d d a g e e e e i i € i n 6 0 6 0 U it U a zb 0 C 25 120 65 25 20 25 120 50 40 65 ^5 25 25 25 20 25 25 30 30 25 25 30 30 20 20 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 ? ) ] 390 330 330 280 280 280 280 280 280 390 450 350 IIO 170 220 IIO
  - Total 4,530
  - Totals. R. 1. c. 677,200 R. s.c. 43,900 Re. 73,540 R. figs. , 2 (101,500 & pts.) ‘ R. accs. 9,400 Pec. & I Q . ( 13,810 coml.) Ital. 1.c. 67,720 Ital. c. 7,460 Ital. accs. 940 Ital. figs.1 4,530 & pts. 455
  - Total 13,810 Total 67,720 Total 7,460 Total 940 Grand total 1,000,000
  - K
- p.129 - vue 167/901
- - I30 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - TABLE 13 (continued on opposite page).
  - Bill of 1,000,000 type, INCLUSIVE of spaces and quads. (England.)
  - Roman lower-case. Roman small capitals. Roman capitals. Roman figures, fractions and points. Roman accents.
  - m 13.230 A 1,990 A 3,000 I 3,110 a 200
  - a 39.7°° B 1,190 B 1,980 2 2,640 a 950
  - b 8,820 C 1,540 C 2,420 3 2,640 a 47°
  - C 17.63° D 1,54° D 2,420 4 2,200 a 200
  - d 22,040 1 E 1,990 E 3,300 5 2,200 a 160
  - e 61,710 F 1,320 F 1,980 6 2,200 9 200
  - f 13.230 G 1,190 G 1,980 7 2,200 e 950
  - g 8,820 H 1,320 ' H 1,980 8 2,200 e 470
  - h 26,450 I 1,990 I 3,960 . 9 2,200 e 300
  - i 39.680 J 880 J 1,320 0 3.H0 e 47°
  - i 2,200 K 880 K 1,320 I 660 1 200
  - k 3.530 L 1,320 L 2,420 i 660 i 200
  - 1 22,040 M 1,320 M 2,840 t 660 i 200
  - n 35.300 I N 1,540 N 2,420 J 220 1 200
  - 0 35,270 0 1,540 0 2,420 5 220 n 160
  - P 10,580 P 1,190 P 2,200 I 220 0 200
  - q 2,640 Q 530 Q 880 i 220 0 200
  - r 30,860 R 1,460 R 2,200 5 8 220 6 230
  - S 35,270 S 1,540 S 2,640 7. 8 220 0 230
  - t 44,090 T 1,860 T 3,520 13,230 U 200
  - u 19,840 U 1,070 U 1,54° 19,840 U 200
  - V 6,610 V 880 V 1,540 » 3,530 U 230
  - W 11,020 W 1,190 W 2,420 2,650 U 230
  - X 2,200 X 530 ^ X 880 - 4,410 W 160
  - y 11,020 Y 880 Y 1,540 J 3,530 W 160
  - Z 1,320 Z 530 Z 660 ! 880 Q 4°
  - ae 880 2E 260 ^ 440 ? 1,320
  - ce 44° CE 260 CE 440 ( 1,760
  - ff 1,760 & 880 & 1,320 [ 880
  - fi 2,200
  - fl 1,320
  - fli 1,320
  - ffl 880
  - Total 533,900 Total 34,610 Total 57,980 Total 80,030 Total 7,410
  - Total number of sorts, including spaces up to the em quad, 281.
- p.130 - vue 168/901
- - SERIES, PROPORTIONS, AND WEIGHT. 131
  - TABLE 13 (concluded from opposite page).
  - Bill of 1,000,000 type, inclusive of spaces and quads. (England.)
  - Peculiars and commercial Italic lower-case.
  - signs.
  - * 1,110 a 3.97°
  - t 440 b 880
  - + + 440 C 1,760
  - II 44° d 2,200
  - § 440 e 6,170
  - 300 f 1,320
  - /— 220 g 880
  - — 220 h 2,650
  - — 220 i 3,97°
  - — 440 j 220
  - — 2,220 k 350
  - 440 1 2,200
  - @ 220 m 1,320
  - % 220 n 3,530
  - Ib 220 0 3.530
  - £ 880 p 1,060
  - 44° 4 260
  - % 440 r 3,090
  - / 44° s 3,530
  - + 220 t 4,410
  - — 220 u 1,990
  - X 220 V 660
  - - 220 w 1,100
  - = 220 * 220
  - y 1,100
  - Total 10,890 Spaces. Hair 13,230 Thin 35,270 Middle 35,270 Thick 88,150 En quad 26,450 Emquad13,230 z CB ce ff A fl ffi ft 130 90 50 180 220 130 130 90
  - Total 211,600 Total 53,390
  - Italic capitals. Italic accents.
  - A 300 d 20
  - B 200 d 90
  - C 240 d 50
  - D 240 d 20
  - E 330 a 15
  - F 200 : $ 20
  - G 200 6 90
  - H 200 e 40
  - I 400 e 35
  - J 130 e 50
  - K 130 1 20
  - L 240 i 20
  - M 280 I 20
  - N 240 i 20
  - 0 240 n 15
  - P 220 6 20
  - Q 90 0 20
  - R 220 6 25
  - S 260 0 25
  - T 350 U 20
  - I U 155 U 20
  - V 155 it 25
  - W 240 U 25
  - i X 90 W 15
  - y 155 0 15
  - Z 65 C 5
  - Z 45
  - CE 45
  - 6 130
  - £ 90
  - Total 5,880 Total 740
  - Italic figures and points.
  - ~ o 0*0 1% 00 310 260 260 220 220 220 220 220 220 310 360 260 90 130 180 90
  - Total 3,570
  - Totals.
  - R. l.c. 533,900
  - R. s.c. 34,610
  - R. c. 57,980
  - R. figs. & pts. % 80,030
  - R. accs. 7,410
  - Pec. &) coml.) 10,890
  - Spaces 211,600
  - Ital. 53,390
  - Ital. C. 5,880
  - Ital. accs. 740
  - It. figs.) & pts.J 3,570
  - — Grand
  - 0 & r
  - 0 0 0 0 0
  - 0
- p.131 - vue 169/901
- - 132
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - TABLE 14 (continued on opposite page).
  - Welsh bill of fount for 100,000 characters, exclusive of spaces and quads.
  - Roman lower-case. Roman small capitals. Roman capitals. Roman figures, fractions and points.
  - m 1,500 A 225 A 350 I 350
  - a 4,500 B 135 B 225 2 300
  - b 2,000 C 175 C 600 3 250
  - C 2,000 D 175 D 550 4 250
  - d 5.100 E 225 E 375 5 250
  - e 3,500 F 150 F 225 6 250
  - f 1,500 G 135 G 450 7 250
  - g 2,000 H 150 H 225 8 250
  - h 1,500 I 225 I 450 9 250
  - i 4,500 J 100 J 300 o 350
  - j 125 K 100 K 150 1 70
  - k 200 L 150 L 275 1 70
  - 1 7,700 M 150 M 650 1 70
  - n 2,000 N 175 N 275 1 35
  - 0 2,000 O 175 O 275 3 35
  - P 2,400 P 135 P 225 $ 35
  - q 300 9 60 Q 100 8 35
  - r 7,300 R 165 R 250 § 35
  - S 4,000 S 175 S 300 7 8 35
  - t 2,500 T 210 T 400 % 35
  - u 2,250 U 120 U 175 • 1,500
  - v 750 V 100 V 175 : 2,300
  - W 3,950 W 135 W 275 400
  - X 250 X 60 X 100 300
  - y 3,950 Y 150 Y 175 - 500
  - z 150 Z 60 Z 80 » 400
  - 36 100 E 30 E 50 ! no
  - oe 50 CE 30 CE 50 ? 150
  - ff 200 & 150 ( 200
  - fi 250 [ 100
  - fl 150
  - fi 150
  - fl 150
  - Total 68,975 Total 3,875 Total 7,880 Total 9,165
  - Total number of sorts 253.
- p.132 - vue 170/901
- - SERIES, PROPORTIONS, AND WEIGHT.
  - 133
  - TABLE 14 (concluded from opposite page).
  - Welsh bill of fount for 100,000 characters, exclusive of spaces and quads.
  - Accents: roman Peculiars and commercial signs. Italic lower-case. Italic capitals. Italic figures and points.
  - Lo W W W y y y C w W W Y V Y Si W * W x Y Y % w W y ) W w w y y Y wer-case. 100 100 100 100 100 TOO apitals. 15 15 15 15 15 15 n. Caps. 5 5 5 5 5 5 Italic. IO 10 10 TO 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 * t + + II § 1 (— - @ $ 1b £ $ % / + X 125 50 50 50 50 35 25 25 25 50 250 50 25 25 25 100 50 50 50 25 25 25 25 25 a b C d e f g h i j k 1 m n 0 P q r : u v w x y z ce ce ff A fl ffi fl 450 200 200 510 350 150 200 150 450 IO 20 770 150 200 200 240 30 730 400 250 225 75 395 25 395 15 10 5 20 25 15 15 15 A B C D E F G ^ I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Z Z C 6 f 35 20 60 55 35 20 45 20 45 30 15 25 65 25 25 20 IO 25 30 40 15 15 25 IO 15 5 5 5 15 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 / ? ( [ To R. 1. R. s. R. c R. f. Aces Pec. Ital. Ital. It. f. 35 30 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 35 40 30 10 15 20 IO tal 400 c. 68,975 c. 3,875 7,880 & p. 9,165 . 810 com. 1,235 l.c. 6,895 c. 765 & p. 400
  - Total 810 Total 1,235 Total 6,895 Total 765 — Grand total 100,000
- p.133 - vue 171/901
- - 134 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - TABLE 15 (continued on opposite page).
  - French bill of fount for 100,000 characters, exclusive of spaces and quads. (Police de 100,000 caracteres, les espaces et cadratins non compris.)
  - Ba: de casse.
  - a 4,220
  - b 845
  - C 2,110
  - 9 90
  - d 2,510
  - 6 9,250
  - f 845
  - g 845
  - h 845
  - i 4,630
  - j 420
  - k 80
  - 1 3,820
  - m 2,110
  - n 4,220
  - 0 3,820
  - P 1,720
  - q 1,010
  - r 4,630
  - s 5,54°
  - t 4,630
  - u 4,220
  - V 845
  - X 420
  - y 260
  - Z 260
  - a 4°
  - ce 80
  - W 40
  - ff 160
  - fi 300
  - fl 2I0
  - 32 65,025
  - Ponctuations.
  - 1,500
  - » 1,800
  - > 250
  - 170
  - ? 170
  - ! 170
  - 6 4,060
  - Signes.
  - - 95°
  - 950
  - » 300
  - * 4°
  - t 40
  - ( 130
  - [ 40
  - § 40
  - — 260
  - 9 2,750
  - Bas de casse accents.
  - ^ 380
  - a 210
  - a 4°
  - 6 1,250
  - 6 380
  - e 260
  - e 40
  - 1 125
  - i 4°
  - 6 125
  - 6 40
  - u 2I0
  - u 125
  - u 40
  - 14 3,265
  - Capitales.
  - A 260
  - B 125
  - C 210
  - 9 20
  - D 2I0
  - E 380
  - F 125
  - G 125
  - H 125
  - I 260
  - J 80
  - K 20
  - L 260
  - M 170
  - N 2IO
  - O 260
  - P 170
  - Q 125
  - R 260
  - S 260
  - T 260
  - U 2I0
  - V 170
  - X 65
  - Y 4°
  - Z 4°
  - E 20
  - CE 20
  - W 20
  - & 125
  - , 4,625
  - Petites capitales.
  - Capitales accents.
  - A 170
  - B 80
  - C 125
  - C 3 20
  - D 170
  - E 300
  - F 80
  - G 80
  - H 80
  - 1 2I0
  - J 80
  - K 20
  - L 170
  - M 125
  - N 170
  - 0 170
  - P 125
  - % 80
  - R 170
  - S 170
  - T 170
  - U 150
  - V IIO
  - x 65
  - Y 40
  - Z 40
  - E 20
  - CE 20
  - W 20
  - 80
  - A 65
  - A 35
  - E 80
  - E 65
  - E 20
  - I 15
  - 0 15
  - U 35
  - U 15
  - 9 345
  - Petites capitales accents.
  - Ital. capitales accents.
  - O O o & o o
  - Total number of sorts 259.
- p.134 - vue 172/901
- - SERIES, PROPORTIONS, AND WEIGHT.
  - 135
  - TABLE 15 (concluded from opposite page).
  - French bill of fount for 100,000 characters, exclusive of spaces and quads. (Police de 100,000 caracteres, les espaces et cadratins non compris.)
  - Superieures. Ital. bas de casse. Ital. capitales. Ital. ponctuations.
  - d 100 a 650 a 40 ; 40
  - e 200 b 125 B 20 25
  - g i I00 C f 325 20 C Q 35 5 > / 25 25
  - 1 150 d e 380 1,400 D E 35 60 4 115
  - in n 100 100 f g 125 125 F G 20 20 Ital. bas de casse accents.
  - 0 200 h 125 H 20 d 55
  - 150 i j 715 65 ; 40 15 a d 35 IO
  - 8 100 k 15 K 5 e e e e 190
  - t 100 1 m 575 325 L M 40 25 55 40 IO
  - n 650 N 35 € 20
  - 1,400 0 575 O 40 IO
  - P q r 260 150 715 P 0 R 0 20
  - 25 20 40 0 U U IO 35 20
  - Chiffres. S 840 S 40 a IO
  - I 400 t 715 T 40
  - 2 300 u 650 U 35 14 520
  - V 125 V
  - 25
  - 3 250 X 65 X IO Ital. chiffres.
  - 4 250 y 40 Y IO Z 75
  - 5 400 * 40 Z IO 2 65
  - 6 7 250 250 ae IO 15 ZE C 5 5 3 4 5 45 45 75
  - 8 250 W # IO 25 W 6 5 20 6 7 45 45
  - 9 250 A 45 8 45
  - 0 400 fl 35 9 0 45 75
  - — • .
  - IO 3,000 32 9.935 30 745 10 560
- p.135 - vue 173/901
- - I36 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - TABLE 16.
  - German bill of fount for 100,000 characters (Fraktur), exclusive of spaces and quads. (Giesszettel fur 100,000 Lettern, Fraktur.)
  - I. Gemeine. 2. Ligaturen. 4. Versalien. 5. Punkturen.
  - m fl 6 C d e f g h i i f I n 0 » q r 2 f § t u v w r y 8 2,000 4,000 1,600 250 4,400 12,000 1,100 2,200 1,660 5.500 300 800 2,400 8,000 2,200 600 150 5.500 80 1,900 1,600 4,000 3,600 800 1,400 120 350 900 ch c si ft si ff fi fl a 6 $ d 0 u I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 2,200 250 400 900 800 250 150 150 400 450 400 600 500 600 8,050 3. Ziffern. 720 640 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 720 % $ G D G 8 G $ I K % D 31 © $ a N s % U % % & 9 3 A d U 280 280 280 400 400 250 400 400 300 350 280 280 280 280 280 80 400 400 280 240 280 320 80 80 200 80 80 80 j ! ? ) fi ( [ § * t I 2 3 4 5 2,000 2,800 1,440 280 280 200 200 240 400 240 120 80 160 80 400 8,920 69,410 8,050 6,280 7.34° 8,920
  - 69,410 6,280 7.340 100,000
  - Total number of sorts 95.
- p.136 - vue 174/901
- - SERIES, PROPORTIONS, AND WEIGHT.
  - 137
  - TABLE 17.
  - German bill of fount for 100,000 characters (Antiqua), exclusive of spaces and quads. (Giesszettel fur 100,000 Lettern, deutsche Antiqua.)
  - I. Gemeine. 2. Lig. und Akzente. 3. Versalien. 4. Versalien Akzente. 6. Punkturen.
  - ni a b C d 6 f g h i i k 1 n 0 P I r S t u V w X y Z a oe 1,900 3,800 1,500 2,500 4,200 11,500 1,000 2,300 3,800 5,300 300 800 2,600 8,000 2,300 600 300 5,200 5,200 4,500 3,400 700 1,300 300 350 900 25 25 E: • e e O: 0 O' O' B F* O: o o- oo ~ @ @ PPEE& 60 300 200 200 20 120 40 600 40 120 60 40 40 20 20 40 40 20 20 20 40 500 20 4° 40 650 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W x Y Z E C 240 240 240 380 380 240 380 380 300 200 300 240 240 240 240 240 60 380 380 240 240 240 300 60 60 200 10 IO A Q E E E 6 0 U U U 5. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 40 20 20 20 20 IO 40 IO IO 40 230 Ziffern. 720 640 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 720 I L *cor— y . 9-0/ I 2,000 2,800 1,440 280 280 200 200 240 400 240 120 80 160 80 400 8,920 74,600 3,310 6,660 230 6,280 8,920
  - 74,600 3,310 6,660 6,280 100,000
  - Total number of sorts 117,
- p.137 - vue 175/901
- - 138 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - TABLE 18.
  - Italian bill of fount for 100,000 characters, exclusive of spaces and quads.
  - —
  - I. Lower-case. 2. Capitals. 3- Sm. caps. 4- Points. 6. Accents etc.
  - m 1,700 A 300 A 150 • 1,200 & 100
  - a 7,550 B 160 B 80 » 1,200 Af 200
  - b 1,400 C 200 C 100 - 750 fi 400
  - C 3,200 D 200 d 100 200 fl 200
  - d 2,800 E 300 E 150 J 200 a 400
  - e f g h 7,750 950 1,400 1,000 F G H I 150 150 100 480 F G H 1 75 75 50 240 ! ? \ ( I00 100 1,200 600 400 e 1 d 0 A 500 200 400 350 40
  - i 7,900 J 60 J 30 * I00 E 60
  - j 200 K 60 K 30 t 100 I 40
  - k 300 L 300 L 150 300 0 40
  - 1 5,750 M 180 M 90 U 4°
  - n 4,900 N 200 N 100 6,450 A 20
  - 0 6,750 O 360 O 180 & 1 30
  - P 2,700 P 180 P 90 20
  - q r 1,000 4,900 4,800 5,250 Q R I00 240 2 R 50 120 I Figures. 450 6 d 20 20
  - s t 5 T 240 240 5 T 120 120 2 3 450 400 3,080
  - u 2,900 U 180 U 90 4 400 —
  - V 1,800 V 200 V 100 5 400 1. 78,700
  - W 200 W 60 W 30 6 400 2- 5,080
  - X 300 X 200 X 100 7 400 3. 2,54°
  - y 200 Y 4° Y 20 8 400 4. 6,450
  - Z 1,100 Z 200 Z 100 9 400 5. 4,150
  - 0 450 6. 3,080
  - 78,700 5,080 2,54° 4,150 100,000
  - Total number of sorts 120.
- p.138 - vue 176/901
- - SERIES, PROPORTIONS, AND WEIGHT.
  - 139
  - TABLE 19.
  - Spanish bill of fount for 100,000 characters, exclusive of spaces and quads.
  - I. Lower-case. 2. Capitals. 3. Sm. caps. 4 Points. 6. Accents, etc.
  - m 1,840 A 430 A 430 2,700 & 100
  - a 5.550 B 280 B 280 » 2,700 ff 7°
  - b 930 C 330 C 37° - 2,140 fi 280
  - C 2,460 D 520 D 460 710 fl 140
  - d 2,970 E 570 E 57° » 860 a 480
  - e f 7,360 900 F G 280 280 F G 220 220 ! ? 380 380 a 9 9° 20
  - g 910 H 140 H IIO >) 70 620 e 430
  - 910 I 280 I 330 ( 500 1 430
  - j 5.240 J 160 J 180 140 6 430
  - 460 K 70 K 35 * 7° 0 100
  - k 70 L 360 1 360 70 u 360
  - 2.740 M 280 M 280 § 7° a 100
  - n 4,140 N 280 N 280 — 280 A 35
  - n 200 N 100 N 80 15
  - 4,650 1,570
  - 0 P O P 380 260 0 P 360 280 11,690 f 35 35
  - q 1,850 4,240 Q 240 330 % R
  - r R 240 360 5. Figures. 6 T 35 20
  - S 5,650 S 480 S 380 I 450 K 35
  - t u X 4,100 4,860 900 310 X < d H 360 480 430 240 T U v X 210 240 140 7° 2 3 4 5 450 400 400 400 9 E f 15 35 35
  - y 580 Y 280 Y 7° 6 400 0 35
  - Z 280 Z 140 Z 7° 7 400 U 30
  - W 40 W 35 W 35 8 400 100
  - 36 45 E 4° * 20 9 400 100
  - 0e 35 CE 30 CE 15 0 45°
  - 65.790 8,085 6,695 4,150 3.590
  - Total number of sorts 139.
- p.139 - vue 177/901
- - 140
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - TABLE 20.
  - Bohemian bill of fount for 100,000 characters, EXCLUSIVE of spaces and quads.
  - I. Lower-case. 2. Capitals. 3. Accents. 4. Points.
  - m a b C d e f g h i i k 1 n 0 p q r u W X y Z ff ' fi fl & 2,300 4.500 1.520 2,200 2,600 4,600 810 510 2,300 3.750 2,200 2,300 3.750 4,600 5.220 1,880 200 3,750 3,950 4,270 3,34° 2,920 300 150 1,300 1,460 250 150 150 100 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 260 240 240 240 260 220 100 240 300 350 240 240 270 260 260 37° 60 240 280 240 220 270 80 70 80 240 C d’ e n r 8 t’ Z a e 1 6 u a y C D E 8 * S T’ Z A E 1 6 U 0 U Y 900 170 1,100 150 900 1,050 170 1,050 1,700 1,250 2,400 250 300 600 900 200 30 40 30 I00 100 30 100 70 60 80 50 80 30 40 ! ? ) « ( [ * t § I 2 3 4 5 9 7 8 9 0 2,600 2,400 850 360 400 240 180 150 360 500 300 80 150 50 100 8,720 5. Figures. 450 450 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 450
  - 67.330 5,870 13,930 4,150
  - Total number of sorts 111.
- p.140 - vue 178/901
- - SERIES, PROPORTIONS, AND WEIGHT.
  - 141
  - TABLE 2i.
  - Greek bill of fount for 100,000 characters, exclusive of spaces and quads, with sorts on smaller body marked 0, for loose accents ; loose accents extra to the number of characters.
  - I. Lower-case. 2. Accented sorts. 3. Capitals. 4. Points.
  - a 0 a ^ Y 8 € § V O V e 1 K X V $ 0 0 0 7 P o s v 0 V $ x * & o° ( • s 4,200 2,350 1,380 1,120 2,450 4,800 550 1,950 2,100 1,000 3,600 2,350 1,380 2,850 5,200 400 3,220 2,100 2,150 2,300 2,150 2,600 4,450 2,250 2,600 750 920 320 1,380 1,380 150 150 150 O Q € € € € € »/ € € € n O 7 ( i € l » t l J l $ l 1 l i 6 B 0 ‘o ( 250 320 880 880 770 1,100 560 560 80 80 250 320 1,450 1,600 1,150 700 1,150 700 530 160 160 530 530 250 250 120 250 750 250 250 320 A A° B T E E° Z H H° © I I° K A M N a 0 O° n P P° 2 T Y Y0 • X • Q D° 350 200 350 350 350 380 120 350 350 120 350 400 120 350 350 350 350 350 350 120 350 350 120 380 350 250 120 350 300 300 350 120 > 2,800 2,600 750 200 450
  - 6,800
  - Totals. I. 66,700 2. 17,150 3. 9,350 4. 6,800
  - 100,000
  - 5.1 / \ » A e .f. 3. € • Loose accents. 3,100 2,500 2,000 2,300 2,100 850 500 800 500 120 120 120 120 560 560
  - 66,700 17,150 9,350 16,250
  - Total number of character sorts on full body 85 ; of character sorts on small 0 Y 16 , of loose accent sorts 15. Grand total 116.
- p.141 - vue 179/901
- - 142
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - TABLE 22.
  - Russian bill of fount for 100,000 characters, EXCLUSIVE of spaces and quads.
  - I. Lower-case. 2. Capitals. 3. Sm. caps. 6. Points.
  - a 3,900 A 410 A 100 2,000
  - 6 1,300 B 250 B 70 , 2,800
  - B 3,800 B 410 E 120 » 280
  - r 1,000 r 250 I 40 280
  - I 2,100 I 250 P 90 - 1,440
  - e 6,200 E 480 C 90 ! 200
  - 3 700 % 210 y 60 ? 200
  - 3 750 3 210 B 40 » 240
  - II 3,800 H 250 400
  - 11 1,200 II 170 240
  - i 850 I 170 610 120
  - E JI 2,500 3.000 K JI 250 340 * 160
  - t 80
  - M 2,500 M 250 § 80
  - H 6,300 H 500 4. Accents. 440
  - 0 6,400 0 500 e 420 20
  - II 2,100 II 250 E
  - : P C 2,500 3,800 P C 34° 340 E 70 8,960
  - T 3,800 T 340
  - y 1,700 y 210
  - d 420 • 90 510
  - x 680 X 2I0
  - I 680 II 2IO
  - 4 1,200 H 2I0
  - III 680 In 2I0 5. Figures.
  - III 550 m 170 I 720
  - • 3.000 b 250 2 660
  - HI 1,300 1,200 M B 170 170 3 4 600 600 Totals.
  - * 1,900 B 170 5 600 I 74,750
  - 3 550 9 130 6 600 2 8,870
  - 10 680 10 170 7 600 3 610
  - a 1,500 a 250 8 600 4 510
  - • 130 0 60 9 600 5 6,300
  - V 80 V 20 0 720 6 8,960
  - 74,750 8,870 6,300 100,000
  - Total number of sorts 108.
- p.142 - vue 180/901
- - SERIES, PROPORTIONS, AND WEIGHT.
  - i43
  - TABLE 23.
  - Russian italic bill of fount for 10,000 characters, exclusive of spaces and quads.
  - TABLE 24.
  - Hebrew bill of fount, for 100,000 characters, EXCLUSIVE of spaces, quads, and points.
  - I. Lower-case. 2. Capitals. 3. Figures.
  - a 400 A 45 T 80
  - 6 130 B 30 2 70
  - 8 400 B 45 3 60
  - 1 100 I’ 30 4 60
  - d 210 J 30 5 60
  - e 650 E 50 6 60
  - NC 70 X 25 7 60
  - 3 7° 3 25 8 60
  - U 380 II 30 9 60
  - H 120 i 20 0 80
  - i 90 I 20
  - K 250 E 30 650
  - .1 300 J 35
  - M 250 I 30
  - H 630 H 50 4- Points.
  - O 640 O 30 150
  - n 2I0 II 3° 9 170
  - P 250 P 30 3 40
  - C 380 C 35 40
  - m 400 T 35 - 150
  - U 170 y 25 ! 30
  - $ 40 d IO P 30
  - X 70 X 25 30
  - % 7° II 25 » 50
  - u 120 1 25 ) 30
  - w 7° in 25 ] 20
  - w. 60 III 20 — 4°
  - % 300 B 3°
  - % 130 bI 20 780
  - % 120 b 20
  - n 190 B 20
  - 9 60 9 20 Totals.
  - 10 70 IO 20 I 7.580
  - a 150 II 30 2 990
  - e 20 0 IO 3 650
  - r IO V IO 4 780
  - 7.58O 990 10,000
  - Total number of sorts 94.
  - Name. Character. No.
  - Aleph s 7,000
  - Beth 3 1,950
  - Gimel 1 2,100
  - Daleth T 3,140
  - He n 7.300
  - Vau 1 8,400
  - Zain i 2,100
  - Cheth n 3.500
  - Teth • 1,400
  - Yod 9 7.700
  - Caph ( 3 5,600
  - Do., final) 1 1,100
  - Lamed 5 7,000
  - Mem ( D 5.600
  - Do., final? • 2,100
  - Nun ( 3.500
  - Do., final) 1,670
  - Samech D 1,450
  - Ain y 3,140
  - Pe 6 1,400
  - Do., final) - 980
  - Saddi § 3 1,100
  - Do., final) 770
  - Koph P 1,250
  - Resch 1 4,200
  - Sin 7 8,400
  - Shin 5 w
  - Thau n 1,950
  - Accent Z 2,100
  - Accent I 2,100
  - Total 100,000
- p.143 - vue 181/901
- - 144
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Weight of type.—Type is generally made up into pages, about 8 inches by 4 inches; the weight of a page is usually about 84 lb. The weight of 1,000,000 type, exclusive of spaces and quads, in pounds, is given in table 25 for various a-z lengths. The weight of type characters per square inch is approximately 0-26 lb., or 37°5 lb. per sq. ft. The weight of type per sq. in., when composed, cannot be given as a definite figure because in most cases quads, leads, and furniture are used in making up, all of these being of a lower height-to-paper and some of them being cored and consequently of a still less weight per unit of area. The weight of spaces and quads of stereo height is approximately 0’25 lb. per sq. in., or 36 lb. per sq. ft. The weight of spaces and quads of trade height is 0’23 lb. per sq. in. and 33 lb. per sq. ft.
  - TABLE 25.
  - Approximate weight of 1,000,000 type in lb., exclusive of spaces and quads.
  - Points. Length a-z in ems.
  - Modern . — 8-75 1000 11-25 12-50 13-75 15-00 16:25 17-50 18-75
  - Old-style — 910 10’40 1170 I300 14-30 15-60 16:90 18-20 19-50
  - Gt. primer 18 6,050 6,770 7.490 8,210 8,930 9,650 — — —
  - Two-line brevier 16 4,780 5.350 5.920 6,490 7,060 7,630 — — —
  - English. 14 3,660 4,100 5X 4.970 5400 5,840
  - Pica 12 3,010 3,330 3,650 3,970 4,290 4,610
  - Small pica .{ II — 2,530 2,800 3,070 3,340 3,600 3,870 — —
  - 10% — 2,300 2,550 2,790 3,040 3,280 3,530 — —
  - Long primer . IO — 2,090 2,310 2,530 2,760 2,980 3,200 — —
  - 99 1,890 2,090 2,290 2,490 2,690 2,890
  - Bourgeois .{ 9 1,870 2,050 2,230 2,410 2,590 2,770
  - 84 — — 1,670 1,830 1,990 2,150 2,310 2,470 —
  - Brevier . 8 — — 1,480 1,620 1,760 1,910 2,050 2,190 —
  - Minion . 7 1,130 1,240 55 1,460 V 1,680
  - Nonpareil 6 910 990 1,070 1,150 1,230
  - Agate 5i — — — 760 830 900 970 1,040 1,110
  - Ruby 54 700 760 820 880 940 1,000
  - Five point 5 %& 740 800 860 920
  - Pearl 41 — — — — 620 670 720 770 820
  - Note.—-The stepped columns between the heavy lines show type which would appear in series.
  - In this table due allowance has been made for the commercial signs, figures and points remaining constant in set width.
- p.144 - vue 182/901
- - SERIES, PROPORTIONS, AND WEIGHT. 145
  - On account of the high specific gravity of type-metal, about 8'2, it is necessary to make the shelves and racks for carrying a store of type of very substantial design.
  - When type is stored in existing buildings, especially on upper floors, it is important to ascertain that the strength of the flooring is adequate to the heavy load that it may be required to carry. In an instance that came under the notice of the authors, neglect of this simple and necessary precaution nearly caused the collapse of a steel and concrete floor properly constructed in accordance with ordinary factory practice.
  - TABLE 26.
  - WEIGHT OF FRENCH TYPE.
  - Approximate weight of 1,000,000 type in kg., exclusive of spaces and quads. Poids approximatif de 1,000,000 caracteres en kg., les espaces et cadrats non compris.
  - Corps.
  - Length a-z in ems (longueur a-z en forces-de-corps).
  - Modern .
  - Old-style
  - Gros-romain Gros-texte Saint-augustin
  - Cicero Philosophic Petit-romain
  - Gaillarde Petit-texte Mignonne
  - Nonpareille Parisienne Diarnant
  - 18
  - 16
  - 14
  - 12 II
  - IO
  - 6
  - 5
  - 41
  - 0 m 0 NO N HO m or H
  - 3.550
  - 2,800
  - 2,150
  - 3,920
  - 3,100
  - 2,37°
  - 1,5801,740
  - 00 mo
  - 000 000 CONO Pop or
  - 00 o
  - UNO 1 00 000,
  - 885 W H H 000
  - 000 co 0 m V 1O - m T
  - 1,070
  - 850
  - I 650
  - 0-0 o o 0 0 00
  - HEN
  - Ln On 00 000
  - 330
  - 270
  - 0 0 0 1A OO 00 1 of HA
  - -— HNT 000
  - HNN 001 CU) H 000
  - 1,260
  - 1,000
  - 77°
  - 360
  - 290
  - 390
  - 3201
  - o 0 0 N-1 Oh 000.
  - 420
  - 340
  - 0 0 0
  - 1, 1, CO HC
  - 450
  - 360
  - O • 00 0
  - 9
  - 8
  - 7
  - Note.—The stepped columns between the heavy lines show type which would appear in series.
  - In the case of French type, and that of other foreign countries using the metric system of weights and measures and the same height-to-paper, the weight of 1,000,000 Didot type, exclusive of spaces and quads, in kilograms, is given in table 26. The weight is 18-8 grm. per sq- em. The weight of spaces and quads varies from 15:3 grm. to 18-3 grm. per sq. cm.
  - L
- p.145 - vue 183/901
- - CHAPTER X.
  - LOGOTYPES.
  - “ Sith wise men have Written that it is in very Heaven that Marriages are made, it is of very Hell and the old Pen-men that have come linked letters. [Logotypes ?]. For they do make a Multiplication of added Woes in seeming simplicity, piling Pelion upon Ossa, as it were, for some Mole-Hill of profit. Keep therefore thy Case simple and therewith be Happy of Heart, yea, and thereby also, will thy Credit grow to fatness and increase.” Mirrour of Pryntyng.
  - 8-point windsor condensed (Stephenson, Blake & Co.).
  - The authors of this treatise have nothing but sympathy with the spirit of the old and evidently practical printer whose piteous outcry, about the genuineness of which there can be no two opinions, voices the feeling of some long-departed chapel.
  - Some samples of the bewildering wilderness of ligatures, abbreviations, scribal shorthand, and other woes with which the compositor of the period was supposed to be familiar, are given in De Vinne’s “ Correct Composition,” and not only must one pity the poor printer, but with him also the even more miserable reader. The example subjoined, fig. 122, is taken from the “ Biblia Sacra Vulgata " of Bernhard Richel of Basel, printed in the year 1472.
  - The modern representatives of these antique contractions are very much simpler both in construction and in combination.
  - The subject of logotypes, or combinations of characters cast together, has not yet, so far as the authors are aware, been adequately studied in its bearing on typesetting. The very early patent (1782) of Henry Johnson was bought by John Walter, the founder of " The Times" newspaper, and was probably the only extensive application of the system ever made in practice.
  - Early in the nineteenth century Earl Stanhope introduced a set of eight logotypes, each in one piece, of which he gives the following numbers to be cast for a fount of 3000 m’s ; an 1620, in 1731, of 1035, on 897, re 1509, se 1152, th 3024, to 1095. It is also to be noticed that he proposed to alter the curve at the top of the f and to discard its ligatures.
  - The advantage of the use of logotypes in the case of hand or machine composition lies in the reduction of movements to be made by the hand of
  - 146
- p.146 - vue 184/901
- - LOGOTYPES.
  - 147
  - the operator; thus, a combination of three letters, like the, will save two lifts or key depressions, and a combination of four letters, like tion, will save three lifts or key depressions. It appears obvious that if a certain arrangement occurs so frequently that it is commoner than any individual letter of the alphabet, a saving of labour will result from the adoption of a logotype for such a combination with but little strain on the memory of the operator. On the other hand, where hand-composition is concerned, the number of case divisions will increase for each added combination, and consequently the size of the cases will be increased also.
  - ec hoc dico-g fit aliqb in me tale-quod vel polfis a me au dire wl veli dileero:fed quo ardor tous « difcendi ftubiu ecam ablos nobis per Fc proa
  - ban &kat."Ingemum codle-ct fine cocoze laudabile elt.nion quid muemas :Ted quid querae conficramas .Mollis cera « ad for-manduz Faclis:edi fi artifice et plalte celfet manue :tamen virtuto totum elt quiequid ef Te potelt. Paulus appollol9 ad wore gama lielie-lege moyli c aphetae didicle Te glo riatur: vt armatue Epiritualibue telis • pollea
  - FIG. 122.—Ligatures.
  - Moreover, the number of compartments or keys to be memorized by the compositor will increase, as also will the distance the hand of the operator has to travel.
  - A further objection to the use of logotypes in handwork is that, owing to the larger mass of the combination, the face of any of the characters is more easily damaged, and damage to any one character necessitates replacement of the whole logotype.
  - In view of the absence of reliable statistics on the subject of the recurrence of the commonest combinations of characters, and also with a view to testing the accuracy of the proportions in the ordinary bill of fount, the authors, after some preliminary trials, have examined 100,000 characters (exclusive of spaces), occupying rather more than two pages of matter from " The Times ” of 30 April, 1907, selected from: Leading Articles, Foreign Intelligence and Parliamentary Debate (this latter amounting to
- p.147 - vue 185/901
- - 148
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - nearly 60 per cent of the whole). The following method was adopted in counting the combinations : first the matter was gone over and all the four-
  - TABLE 27.
  - Number of logotypes in 100,000 characters.
  - the 1933 ther 132 who 85 car 44
  - and 800 pro 176 able 63 ple 43
  - of 910 ess 171 der 82 eve 43
  - tion 428 us 244 he 122 ert 42
  - in 843 all 160 oun 81 age 40
  - er 806 wh 236 ance 59 rec 39
  - ing 536 ate 155 out 78 very 29
  - ed 776 ere 147 will 55 ng 58
  - to 716 ter 140 his 73 He 58
  - re 667 ill 136 int 72 tor 38
  - that 314 not 135 so 107 miss 26
  - it 546 ion 134 end 71 ble 34
  - ou 522 had 134 one 71 if 48
  - al 519 est 134 por 7° It 44
  - is 450 ly 201 aid 69 col 27
  - ould 220 corn 125 per 69 Con 27
  - be 433 our 119 qu 103 than 19
  - for 285 ist 117 some 49 — —
  - was 282 by 169 are 63 — —
  - or 404 pos III man 63 — —
  - ar 380 ted 106 art 62 — —
  - at 366 igh 102 ough 44 — —
  - ment 182 sh 153 ade 57 — —
  - as 364 un 15I but 54 — —
  - an 355 ence 75 Com 54 — —
  - th 344 have 73 day 54 — —
  - ch 336 pre 97 ever 4° — —
  - ent 220 ant 97 act 49 — —
  - en 311 ver 97 has 48 — —
  - st 310 from 71 ace 46 — —
  - The 202 ect 93 cha 46 — —
  - con 196 ear 89 him 46 — —
  - with 140 ish 86 its 45 — —
  - 1
  - letter combinations, chosen from the preliminary trials, were counted ; then the three-letter combinations were taken, and, to avoid overlapping, treated in order of precedence—thus, in the word expressed the combination
- p.148 - vue 186/901
- - LOGOTYPES. 149
  - pre was counted, but ess was not counted; then in the remainder the two-letter combinations were similarly eliminated.
  - The number of each of the combinations counted in the 100,000 characters is shown in table 27, p. 148, in which the combinations are arranged in order of importance according to the total number of separate characters employed.
  - From this table the number of times any combination occurred, approxi-mately, can be obtained by adding together the figures opposite the different combinations in which it is found. Thus the combination th occurs in the, that, with, ther, than, or in all 2882 times, while Th occurs in The 202 times.
  - By summarizing the totals successively it is found that the first combination the accounts for over 6 per cent of the whole matter ; the first three combinations for over 10’4 per cent; the first eight for over 20'2 per cent ; the first fifteen for over 30’3 per cent ; the first twenty-six for over 40’5 per cent, and the first fifty for 501 per cent.
  - It is interesting to compare the proportions of logotypes in 100,000 characters, calculated from Earl Stanhope’s figures and from those of the authors contained in the preceding table.
  - TABLE 28.
  - Logotypes per 100,000 characters, roman lower-case, capitals, and points. (Comparison.)
  - Logotype. Authors. Earl Stanhope. Logotype. Authors. Earl Stanhope.
  - th 2,882 1,710 of 910 585
  - in 1,451 980 ed 882
  - an 1,393 916 or 759 —
  - on 1,378 507 to 754 553
  - er 1,305 — ng 594 —
  - re 1,013 854 se 651
  - The discrepancies that appear in the above table between the figures given by the authors and those calculated from Earl Stanhope’s work are at once apparent. The authors, however, with all due respect to him feel that he did not go into his subject as thoroughly as he might have done, or his figures and theirs would approximate more closely. Variation in the recurrence of the same combinations is dealt with elsewhere. Certain allowance must also be made for the matter taken and tested for an average of combinations.
- p.149 - vue 187/901
- - 150 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Logotypes are actually in use for the seven combinations ae, ce, ff, fi, fl, ffi, and ffl ; they are also used for the italics of these, and for the capitals E, CE, roman, italic and small capitals. In all, twenty different ligatures are actually supplied with every complete fount. All these combinations are rare, and, in most printed matter, could be abolished without seriously offending the eye or orthography; in France the ffi and ffi are no longer generally used, ffi and fl being substituted. These combinations were, originally necessary owing to the f being made to kern in the earlier type ; the combined letters had to be cut specially to avoid fouling. With machine-cast characters, which usually do not kern, the necessity for the special combinations ceases to exist, and combinations such as ff and fl do not offend the eye.
  - Why should not the seven commonest logotypes be substituted for these, and while performing the composition of nearly 20 per cent of ordinary reading-matter, at the same time save lifting type or depressing keys to the extent of nearly 12 per cent of the total work ? The answer is probably to be found in the conservatism of the printing-trade, and in the fact that the tendency is to abolish rather than to adopt ligatures. The long s (f) and all its combinations are still found in German, to the illegibility of which language they largely contribute. The ct and qu with several others have been generally dropped in this country, the ct alone being still occasionally supplied with some old-style faces. It is difficult to understand why the logotype qu should have gone out of use, for, with the exception of algebraic expressions and occasional quotations involving the occurrence of a very few foreign words, the q practically never occurs except in the combination qu.
  - TABLE 29.
  - Logotypes per 100,000 characters, roman lower-case, capitals, and points; variation in frequency of occurrence.
  - On 40 8 per cent. Per 100,000. On 59 2 per cent. Per 100,000. On 100 per cent. Per 100,000. On 40 8 per cent. Per 100,000. On 59'2 per cent. Per 100,000. On 100 per cent. Per 100,000.
  - the 1,958 1,915 1,933 in 897 806 843
  - and 635 914 800 er 981 684 806
  - of 1,040 821 910 ing 549 527 536
  - tion 532 356 428 ed 816 748 776
  - It may be asked how far does the above table of frequency of logotypes show the true proportion of logotypes in general, or how far may they have
- p.150 - vue 188/901
- - LOGOTYPES. 151
  - been affected by the particular character of the matter selected for the statistics. In the Leading Articles and Foreign Intelligence, 40’8 per cent of the whole, and in the Parliamentary Debate, 59*2 per cent of the 100,000 type, the first eight combinations as given in table 27 occurred in the numbers, reduced to per 100,000, compared in table 29.
  - The counting of the single letters gave the result shown in table 30, in which the actual number found is compared with that calculated fiom the bill of fount. In this table the calculated figures for the individual letters are reduced in the ratio of 100,000 to the total roman lower-case, capitals and points, that is to 812,540. In computing the number of points, it must be remembered that in the bill of fount about 10 per cent of the quantities of full point and comma respectively belong to the italic fount.
  - TABLE 30. .
  - Comparison of observed and calculated frequency of occurrence of individual characters per 100,000.
  - 1 Observed. Calculated. Per cent. I I Observed. , Calculated. Per cent.
  - e 11,520 9,638 119'5 r 5,880 4,819 122’0
  - t 8,832 6,885 128-3 s 5,442 5,502 98'9
  - O 7,161 5,502 130-2 h 4,990 4,130 120-8
  - a 7,078 6,195 114'3 d 3,524 3,441 102-4
  - n 6,231 5,502 113'2 1 3,407 3,441 99'0
  - i 6,225 6,195 100-5 u | 2,483 3.098 80-2
  - This shows that there was a considerable variation between the observed and calculated frequency of occurrence, and the total observed characters in the table exceeded the total calculated by some 13 per cent. This is in a great measure due to the matter selected consisting of long sentences. It is probable that if a much larger number of characters were taken and a greater diversity of printed matter selected, the result would agree more closely with the fount bill.
  - It has been suggested to the authors by Mark Barr, to whose brilliant and original work reference is made later, that, as the figures given in the various fount schemes are based on old and not very accurate records, it would be an interesting and instructive experiment to attach a counter to each verge-rod of a Linotype machine used in the composition of a daily newspaper—such as the " Daily Telegraph ” for the English bill—and take daily readings over a period of several weeks. From the resulting figures reliable statistics would be obtainable, not only for
- p.151 - vue 189/901
- - 152
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - the average frequency of occurrence of each particular sort, but also for the variations in demand for each sort.
  - The question of frequency of occurrence of particular letters—without regard to whether these are capitals or lower-case, roman or italic or small capitals—and the relation of these frequencies to the total number of letters, is a subject which has received a great deal of attention in connexion with cipher documents and messages and the solution of cryptograms ; it is dealt with in a number of text-books relating to cryptography and, in conjunction with the frequency of individual characters, the frequency of successions of letters, or, as they are often termed, bigrams, trigrams, etc., is there considered ; the resulting statistics, which have been compiled as an aid to those engaged in deciphering secret messages, are allied to, but not identical with those obtained in the investigations on the frequency of two and three-letter logotypes carried out by the authors.
  - POSSIBLE REFORMS IN THE ALPHABET.
  - Modification of the alphabet.—There are in the English language several sounds which are represented in writing and printing by combinations of consonants and in shorthand by single signs. The authors have investigated the frequency of occurrence of these, and have found that in the 100,000 characters counted the following combinations occurred which could be represented by single characters if the alphabet were modified.
  - TABLE 31.
  - Sounds represented by two-letter combinations per 100,000 characters.
  - th 2,882 wh 321 sh 239
  - Th or TH 259 Wh 27 Sh or SH 8
  - ng 594 st 490 ch 382
  - NG 5 St or ST 34 Ch or CH 50
  - The authors suggest that a saving of about 31 per cent in writing, typewriting, printing, and reading would be effected by adopting two new letters for th and ng respectively. It would also be very easy to design simple longhand letters to replace the two separate letters now used ; this saving does not only apply to the printer and compositor, but affects equally all who write and read the English language, and, moreover, it is a change which could be introduced first in the daily press and become gradually universal—a change already predicted by H. G. Wells in his romance " When the Sleeper Wakes.”
  - The authors do not consider that it would be easy to carry this proposal
- p.152 - vue 190/901
- - LOGOTYPES.
  - 153
  - further than the two new letters mentioned, which would merely increase the alphabet by two characters. The th (E) would rank eleventh in order of demand and the ng (B) twenty-third in this new alphabet of twenty-eight letters, the ng being in greater demand than k, q, x, j, and z. The adoption of the two new characters named could, moreover, be effected readily on nearly all composing machines by the elimination of some of the existing unnecessary logotypes, such as ffi, ffl- ae, and ce.
  - The average reader of books, newspapers, etc., would be none the wiser if the ffi were produced by single characters instead of by a logotype ; it is only the printer who would detect it. Composing machines have had to be made to conform to these long-established customs of the printing trade, which in many cases had ceased to be a necessity, whereas, with a freer hand, their designers could increase the efficiency of the machines, without in any way detracting from the appearance of the composition produced by them.
  - A great deal of unnecessary work is done both in writing and printing. The saving that would result from the mere introduction of two new letters into the English alphabet would be very remarkable. It is a change that could be made gradually, both old and new characters being used in the same papers and periodicals at the commencement, and a gradual introduction thus taking place through all printing. These new letters could be introduced later on in typewriting, and still later in handwriting, in which the tendency in the case of the ng, the less common of the two proposed letters, is visible already in the handwriting of many people. The other letter whose introduction is proposed, is th. The use of these two new letters would alone mean a saving of at least from three to four per cent, or more than ten days’ work to every daily paper in the year. The value of this saved space should at once appeal to every one who has anything to do with the advertisement departments of any of the great daily newspapers. The saving in time in the composing-room alone would be considerably over a quarter of an hour in the eight-hour day. The same saving which both fast and slow operators would effect would occur also in the case of typewriters, though in their case the saving in space would be of little or no account. Some saving to the reader, when not reading aloud, would also be effected; the eye, having once become accustomed to the novelty, taking in words composed with the combined letters faster than those printed with the present characters.
  - The paragraph set up, fig. 123, with the proposed new characters shows clearly what practical result will be arrived at by the change. The new characters can be read with absolute facility by people who have never seen them before and know nothing of the suggestion.
  - It is difficult to arrive at the figures for the earnings of the compositors, but it would appear that in the London district alone upwards of £1,000,000 per annum is paid to compositors in wages (taking only society men into account) ; probably in the whole of Great Britain and Ireland
- p.153 - vue 191/901
- - 154
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - about £3,000,000 per annum is paid. In America, with Canada and with the other English-speaking colonies, the amount is considerably larger, so that the annual wages earned in composing the English language may
  - THE SAVING EFFECTED BY REFORMING THE ALPHABET.
  - The one thing, above all things, that seemingly is required in the printing of newspapers, is the saving of time in going to press. In the second place, the saving of time, and therefore the saving of money in composing, is of the greatest impor-5 tance and ever-increasing interest to the trade. Thirdly, the mere altering or adding of a unit ensures a saving in space well worth the publisher giving it serious attention. This saving in the case of newspapers affords more space for the advertising, and in the case of the best books and the best io periodicals, there would be quite an appreciable saving in paper. The introduction of the two proposed letters h and g means a three and a half per cent, saving of matter in composing and printing throughout England and America. By dividing this saving between the operators and the proprietors, 15 the aggregate sum gained by each of them yearly would in itself amount to a fortune.
  - HE SAVIS EFFECTED BY REFORMIS HE ALPHABET.
  - He one Rig, above all Rigs, Rat seemigly is required in Re printig of newspapers, is Re savig of time in goig to press. In Re second place, Re savig of time, and Rerefore Re savig of money in composig, is of Re greatest importance and ever-
  - 5 increasig interest to Re trade. Hirdly, Re mere alterig or addig of a unit ensures a savig in space well worR Re publisher givig it serious attention. His savig in he case of newspapers affords more space for Re advertisig, and in Re case of Re best books and Re best periodicals, Rere would be quite an appre-io ciable savig in paper. He introduction of Re two proposed letters R and g means a Rree and a half per cent, savig of matter in composig and printig Rroughout Egland and America. By dividig Ris savig between he operators and Re proprietors, Re aggregate sum gained by each of Rem yearly 15 would in itself amount to a fortune.
  - Fig. 123.
  - well exceed £10,000,000 per annum. The saving in this item alone would, consequently, amount to about £350,000 per annum, apart from savings effected in materials in typewriting, time occupied in handwriting, etc.
- p.154 - vue 192/901
- - LOGOTYPES.
  - 155
  - The question also arises as to whether a similar saving can be effected in other languages. The authors have not been able to find any parallel case in French, but in German it would appear, from a preliminary examination that the substitution of three new letters for the combinations sch, c , an ng would enable a saving of more than 4 per cent to be effected. The Russian letter II should not be adopted for sch as it only differs slightly from the lower-case m in the serifs and hair-line; it would be desirab e that new characters should be designed which should be very dissimilar from all those in present use. The question of legibility, however, is fully dealt with in another chapter.
  - One of the few examples of the practical and extensive use of logotypes in the production of a printing-surface is the use to which they have been put for shorthand printing, fig. 90, p. 103, the whole of the shorthand matter in the " Phonetic Journal ” being set up from true logotypes, the term being, however, frequently used in printing for mere combinations of letters which etymologically, strictly speaking, are not logotypes.
- p.155 - vue 193/901
- - CHAPTER XI.
  - LEGIBILITY.
  - “He that laboureth in the Craft laboureth in vain be not that which he Setteth up plainly to be observed and understood of all Men's Eyes; Nay, even of him whose Sight is somewhat marred by Smoke and Sin God us Forgive and the Setting of ale-jug to ale-jug, albeit it be done without ill Intent and in all clerkly Fellowship and Learning.”
  - Mirrour of Pryntyng.
  - 8-point blackfriars (Blackfriars, formerly Wicks).
  - “ Unfortunately the needs of the reader are lightly regarded by the men who make types. They think more of the display of their own skill. The punch-cutter’s straining after a hair-line that stops just before invisibility is ably seconded by the pressman who scantily inks these light-faces with a hard ink-roller, and then with the feeblest possible impression impresses them against an inelastic surface on dry and hard calendered paper. This weak and misty style of printing is vastly admired by many printers, and perhaps by a few publishers, but it is as heartily disliked by all who believe that types should be made for the needs of the reader more than for an exhibition of the skill of the printer or type-founder.
  - De Vinne.—“ The Practice of Typography.”
  - Long primer modern.
  - The large amount of time spent by millions of people in reading makes the question of clearness of type one of enormous importance, though it has hitherto been almost unnoticed by the public. It is quite as necessary that the characters should be plainly dissimilar in form and appearance as that a face should be used as large as the nature of the work will permit.
  - Legibility is a complex subject, since it is affected by many different factors, amongst which are :—
  - I. The size of the characters.
  - 2. The amount of space between succeeding lines (or the amount of leading).
  - 3. The amount of white between the main strokes or in the counters.
  - 4. The length of the printed line.
  - 5. The resemblance of some characters to others.
  - 156
- p.156 - vue 194/901
- - LEGIBILITY. 157
  - 6. The presence of unnecessary lines or marks, ornamental or otherwise.
  - 7. The frequency of kerns in certain characters.
  - 8. The quality of the paper and its colour.
  - 9. The colour of the ink.
  - io. The capacity of the paper for reflecting light.
  - II. The illumination.
  - 12. Irradiation.
  - The subject has been studied by many oculists and professors of hygiene, amongst whom may be cited Dr. Sanford, Dr. Javal, of France, Dr. Cattell, of Leipzig, and Dr. H. Cohn, of Breslau.
  - TYPE, LEADING, AND LENGTH OF LINE FOR SCHOOL-BOOKS.
  - Size of type and leading.— The important influence which the size of type and the style of printing used for school-books may ultimately have on the eyesight of the people has been investigated in considerable detail. The authorities quoted describe the size of type and the amount of leading which they recommend in terms differing from those of the printer. They deal with that which they actually see and the " size of the type quoted in their researches is the gauge of the lower-case m; what they term the " leading ” is the distance between successive lines of lower-case small sorts, or in other words, the size of the actual body plus the thickness of the lead and minus the gauge of the lower-case m.
  - The influence of school-books upon eyesight was investigated recently by a committee of the British Association and the report based on this inquiry, to which oculists, medical officers of schools, directors of education, teachers, publishers, printers, and typefounders have contributed, contains suggestions for standardizing the typography of school-books. This report deals with the causes of myopia and other eye-defects and it discusses the technical and trade aspects of the typographical products as well as questions of paper and ink ; moreover it devotes particular attention to legibility and to the sizes of type most suitable for school-books. In the report the gauge of the small sorts is defined as the " minimum height of face of short letters ” and « by ‘ interlinear space ’ is meant the vertical distance between the bottom of a short letter and the top of a short letter in the next line below.”
  - Length of the printed line.—Since the surface of the printed page is a plane, it follows that the ends and the centre of the line are at different distances from the eyes and that this difference increases with increase in the length of fine. The continual change of focus required to accommodate the eye to these different distances is more trying and harmful to the vision than is its transverse movement in following from character to character. It is recommended that the length of fine should not usually exceed 4 inches in books of 10-point type and upwards, and that this maximum should be reduced in proportion to the body if smaller sizes are used.
- p.157 - vue 195/901
- - 158
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - RECOMMENDATIONS OF DR. COHN FOR TYPE FOR SCHOOL-BOOKS.
  - It has been advocated by Dr. Cohn that larger type should be used in the books to be read by children in their earlier years, and he makes the following recommendations to which have been added the nearest ordinary type sizes and actual thicknesses of leads :—
  - For the first year children should read from type of a gauge " at least 2-6 mm. with leading of 4-5 mm.,” in other words, the gauge of the m should exceed 0102 in.
  - 18-point with 4-point leads; equivalent to an 18-point face on a 22-point body.
  - For the second and third years they should read from type of a gauge " not smaller than 2 mm. with leading of 4 mm.,” in other words, the gauge of the m should exceed 0’079 in.
  - 14-point with 4-point leads ; equivalent to a 14-point face on an 18-point body.
  - For the fourth year they should read from type of a gauge “at least 1’8 mm. with leading of 3:6 mm.," in other words, the gauge of the m should exceed 0’071 in.
  - 12-point with 3-point leads; equivalent to a 12-point face on a 15-point body.
  - After the fourth year the size of type used should have a gauge " which should not be less than 1’6 mm. with leading of 3 mm.,” in other words, the gauge of the m should not be less than 0'063 in.
  - 10-point with 3-point leads, equivalent to a 10-point face on a 13-point body.
  - RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE BRITISH ASSOCIATION COMMITTEE.
  - The minimum width recommended for the characters is given in terms of the a-z length, and increases progressively with decrease of body-size from II ems for 24-point to 14 ems for 10-point.
  - The maximum length of line recommended is 4 inches for 18 point and 33 inches for the smaller bodies.
- p.158 - vue 196/901
- - LEGIBILITY.
  - O (O
  - The examples given in the supplement to the British ssocia ion Committee’s report are, in several instances, considerably larger in gauge and interlinear space than the minima recommended in the typograp table given in the body of the report. The sizes and interlinear spaces recommended are based on age-periods of the child and are as follows.
  - Children under seven years should read from type of a gauge of “minimum 3’5 mm. with minimum interlinear space of 5 mm.
  - 22-point with 3-point lead.
  - Children aged seven to eight years, should read from type of a gauge of "minimum 2’5 mm. with minimum interlinear space of 3:6 mm.”
  - 18-point with i-point lead.
  - Children aged eight to nine years should read from type of a gauge of " minimum 2'0 mm. with minimum interlinear space of 2 mm.” (? 3 mm.).
  - 131-point with I-point lead. soxalo
  - Children aged nine to twelve years should read from type or a of a gauge of " minimum 1:8 mm. with minimum interlinear eg space of 2 mm.” (? 2:4 mm.). xsav
  - 12-point solid.
  - Children above 12 years of age should read from type of a gauge of " minimum 1'58 mm. with minimum interlinear space of 18 mm. 11-point solid.
  - In the third and fourth instances given the figures for the interlinear spaces appear to be misprinted in the report, and the specimens here set up have been corrected in this respect so as to bring them into harmony with the other specimens shown ; the selection of these faces, as well as
- p.159 - vue 197/901
- - I6o TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - of those illustrating Dr. Cohn’s recommendations, has involved the measurement and examination of a large number of faces to obtain examples in agreement in both dimensions.
  - The influence upon the style of character arising from the manner in which payment is made to the compositor.—In Great Britain the payment of the compositor is by the thousand ens, and the scale of payment is increased with reduction in body-size. Nonpareil costs some 12 per cent more for composition than is paid for founts ranging from english to brevier, and pearl 25 per cent more than for these larger bodies. The effect of this scale of payment is to discourage the use of extended faces.
  - This system presupposes that the a-z length is the same for all founts, and consequently the printer prefers to use those founts which will enable the maximum of matter to be composed for a given outlay. In France a much fairer system prevails, based on the filling of the measure with the alphabet repeated as far as it may go, and basing the scale of payment on the actual number of letters thus found to be contained in the line. The result is that the French faces are much more open, and can have more white between the letters, with the corresponding reaction that more white is actually allowed between the lines.
  - From the foregoing paragraph, the authors do not mean it to be inferred that the French do not make use of any condensed faces—for, as a matter of fact, some of the French faces are even more condensed than anything met with in display founts in this country—but that, taking the body type of French books, they are on the average composed in more-extended faces than a similar average of English works would show.
  - Amount of white between the main-strokes and in the counters.—The forms of character which are most easy to read are those in which an ample amount of white is allowed between the main-strokes and in the counters; insufficient attention has hitherto been paid to the importance of using faces which are not too greatly condensed, and the above specifications for type for school-books should be amplified yet further by the condition that the a-z length should not be less than 13 ems, and that the normal space between words should not be less than the en quad.
  - RESEMBLANCES.
  - Resemblance of some characters to others.—The ordinary latin character generally adopted on the Continent of Europe, in England, her colonies, and in America, is fortunately more legible than many other forms of character, but even in its most common form—the roman lower-case—it suffers from the disadvantage that some of the letters of most frequent occurrence are, in reading, easily mistaken for each other. Thus it is found that the members of the following pairs, or groups, are specially liable to be misread: e for o or c ; n for u ; i for 1; h for b, and a for s. In all these
- p.160 - vue 198/901
- - 161
  - LEGIBILITY.
  - cases it is evident that the similarity of form is very largely, if not entirely, responsible for the confusion which arises.
  - The authors have investigated a large number of cases by the following method. From careful measurements, made by means of the micrometer microscope on new type, the characters were drawn out to a scale 45 times full size; the resulting drawings for the combination considered were then superposed, and the area common to both as well as the areas peculiar to both were measured by means of the planimeter. The size of body taken in each case was 12-point; the unit of area for the dimensions being that of a square having its side equal to 0*001 inch (or an area equal to I millionth of a square inch). The ratio that the sum of the areas peculiar to the individual characters bears to the sum of the total areas of the two characters, which may be termed the legibility coefficient, was calculated. If 100 per cent is taken as perfect legibility (in the case where there is no coincidence), then the difference between the 100 per cent and the legibility coefficient may be termed the illegibility coefficient. To obtain an accurate idea of the influence exercised by each of the characters examined on the illegibility as a whole, the illegibility coefficient was multiplied by the recurrence of the character as given in the fount bill, and the product termed the illegibility factor. The sum of these illegibility factors divided by the total recurrence of the characters under consideration gives the mean illegibility coefficient. By this method the influence of different styles of face can be compared, provided other conditions are sensibly constant. For this reason the faces shown in the illustrations were selected for this investigation, as they had as nearly as possible the same dimensions in gauge, main-stroke, hair-line, and set width. How far these conditions result in uniformity can be measured by the ratio of the total area of the face of the character to the cross-section of the type. This figure given as a percentage has been termed the blackness. It is obvious that with increasing blackness, other conditions remaining constant, the coincident areas will increase and the egibility coefficients will decrease, and conversely with decreasing blackness the coincident areas will decrease and the legibility coefficients will increase. If there is no coincidence to consider, the actual legibility may be assumed to vary directly as the blackness; hence the best comparative figure will be obtained as the product of the mean legibility coefficient by the mean blackness; this the authors have styled the specific
  - legibility.
  - In the tables which follow, the legibility of the combinations quoted above has been investigated for the following faces: modern, old-style, blackfriars, sans serif, and German Fraktur; a comparison of the relative ments of these for eleven of the worst characters or seven of the worst combinations was effected in this manner. The results are given in detail in tables 32 to 40, and the drawings of the superposed characters from which the measurements were made are shown in reduced size in figs. 124 to 140.
- p.161 - vue 199/901
- - 6 to
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The long s (f) compared with f gave, in the same modern face, a blackness of 20I per cent, and a legibility coefficient of 2*74 per cent. This is a much lower coefficient than in any other of the latin characters and the influence on legibility effected by the abolition of the long s (f) can be appreciated; see fig. 124.
  - The modern face chosen for investigation is one prepared by the authors with serifs having the same thickness as the serifs of the old-style fount under investigation; it is, therefore, a fount which has been made
  - Fig. 124.—Illegibility : modern, lower-case.
  - About 14 times full size.
  - specially legible by this modification. If a modern face had been chosen with the thin hair-line serif, referred to as the weak feature of modern, its inferiority as compared to the old-style would have been brought out more markedly. Actually the figure found for the specific legibility of this modern face is slightly greater than that for the old-style face investigated, although the legibility coefficient is much lower.
  - The values of the legibility coefficients given in the tables bring out clearly the inferiority of modern as compared with old-style and of old-style as compared with a face like the blackfriars, in which legibility of the
- p.162 - vue 200/901
- - TABLE 32.—Illegibility of roman modern (lower-case), 12-point; fig. 124.
  - The unit of area is a square with sides each one-thousandth of an inch.
  - I. Character . . . . e e 0 b h a S 1 1 n u
  - 2. Area (0‘001 in.)2 . 1521 i7°4 1793 | 2504 2795 2054 1610 1343 1669 2208 2257
  - 3. Combination of characters ce eo CO bh as il nu
  - 4. Sum of areas of characters
  - (0’001 in.)2 3225 3497 3314 5299 3664 3012 4465
  - 5. Sum of non-coincident areas
  - (0’001 in.)2 262 702 647 815 1857 513 573
  - 6. Legibility coefficient, per cent 8-1 20'1 195 15’4 50*7 170 12:8
  - 7. Illegibility coefficient, per cent 91’9 79’9 80 5 84:6 49’3 83-0 87-2
  - 8. Character . C e 0 b h a S i n U
  - 9. Mean illegibility coefficient of
  - each character of group or
  - pair, per cent. . 86-2 85’9 80-2 84:6 84:6 49-3 49-3 83’0 83-0 87:2 87-2
  - 10. Recurrence . . per cent 2:24 7:83 447 1’12 3’36 5’03 447 5’03 2:80 447 2-52
  - II. Blackness . . per cent 11'5 12'8 13:5 16-8 18-7 16*4 14:7 16*7 20-8 14:8 15-1
  - 12. Illegibility factor. per cent 1’93 6:73 3’59 0’95 2:84 2:48 2'20 4’17 2-32 3’90 2’20
  - For the eleven characters the total illegibility factor, 33*31, divided by the total recurrence, 43:34, gives a mean illegibility coefficient of 76:9 per cent, or a mean legibility coefficient of 23*1 per cent. The blackness similarly treated gives a mean blackness of 14:4 per cent, hence the specific legibility is 3’33 per cent.
- p.163 - vue 201/901
- - 164
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - lower-case was specially sought. Popular belief holds the sans serif, or, as it is popularly called, block letter, to be very legible, but to printers, and especially to those who do much display work, this view is known to be erroneous. The blackness is unavoidably greater than in the other faces examined, but the legibility is more than proportionately decreased.
  - The results obtained by this method might be extended to the remainder of the lower-case, the characters being grouped thus: hk ; fj ; vy ; dq ; gp : rt; mw; and xz; but the influence of these on the total legibility
  - Fig. 125.—Illegibility : old-style, lower-case.
  - About 13 times full size.
  - would not be very great, for the combinations already investigated account for 650 out of 1000 lower-case characters.
  - It is apparent from the illustrations that a heavy serif adds considerably to the non-coincident areas of the il, un and bh pairs of lower-case characters. Absence of the serif increases the similarity of capital letters more seriously as will be seen by comparing the examples FP, BR, given in fig. 133, p. 176, with the lower-case pairs shown in fig. 127, p. 168.
  - The combinations 3-5 and 6-8 of figures similarly treated (fig- 129, p. 172) show the superiority of the modern form over the old-style and sans serif, even though the particular example of old-style figures given here has been modernized with a view to increased legibility.
- p.164 - vue 202/901
- - TABLE 33.—Illegibility of roman old-style (lower-case), 12-point; fig 125. The unit of area is a square with sides each one-thousandth of an inch.
  - I. Character . . . . 2. Area . . . . . | 3. Combination of characters 4. Sum of areas of characters 5. Sum of non-coincident areas . 6. Legibility coefficient, per cent 7. Illegibility coefficient, per cent 8. Character . . . . 9. Mean illegibility coefficient of each character of group or pair, per cent 10. Recurrence . . per cent II. Blackness . . per cent 12. Illegibility factor . per cent c eo 1086 1437 1516 i ce eo co 2523 2953 2602 538 612 469 21*3 20*7 18:0 78:7 79*3 82’0 c e o 80:3 79’° 80:7 2'24 783 4’47 8-3 ii-o 11-6 1-80 6-19 3'61 b h a S 2089 2237 1541 1215 bh as 4326 2756 998 1373 23'1 49:8 76-9 50-2 b ha s 76-9 76:9 50*2 50’2 1'12 3*36 5-03 4-47 14-3 15-4 10-8 ITO 0-86 2*58 2:53 2:24 i 1 968 1240 il 2208 44° 199 80*1 i 1 80*1 80*1 5'03 2*80 13'0 16:6 4-03 2-24 n u 1872 1758 nu 3630 578 159 84'1 n u 841 84-1 4'47 2-52 12*8 121 3:76 2'12
  - LEGIBILITY.
  - The total illegibility factor, 31:96, divided by the total recurrence, 43’34, gives a mean illegibility coefficient of 73'7 per cent, or a mean legibility coefficient of 26*3 per cent. The blackness similarly treated gives a mean blackness of 12°2 per cent, hence the specific legibility is 3-21 per cent.
- p.165 - vue 203/901
- - i66
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The method shows plainly the influences which produce the greater illegibility in the German Fraktur type. Whereas, in the faces which have been compared, the minimum legibility coefficient in blackfriars is 171 per cent, in old-style it is 15’9 per cent, in modern it is 8’1 per cent, and in sans serif it is 10’4 per cent, but in the German Fraktur it falls to 2:6 per cent with the next lowest 6'2 per cent. In a 12-point face the difference between s and f is less than 80 millionths of a square inch ; for a lo-point face the figure falls to 55; for 8-point to 36, and for 6-point to less than
  - Fig. 126.—Illegibility : blackfriars, lower-case. About 14 times full size.
  - 20 millionths of a square inch. The double letters compounded of these characters add still further to the illegibility of this face ; the lower-case it and u differ merely by the transference of a small oblique hair-line from top to bottom, while the thickening of the ends of the strokes and the addition of the fine unnecessary serifs in many cases render these hair-lines shorter and less easy to distinguish. Many foreigners who attempt the study of the German language are seriously troubled by the illegibility of its literature, which has been aptly described as being " cursed with a blinding lettering." Not only is the German Fraktur lower-case of inferior legibility
- p.166 - vue 204/901
- - TABLE 34.—Illegibility of roman blackfriars (lower-case), 12-point; fig. 126. The unit of area is a square with sides each one-thousandth of an inch.
  - 1 I. Character . . . . 2. Area . . . . . 3. Combination of characters 4. Sum of areas of characters 5. Sum of non-coincident areas . 6. Legibility coefficient, per cent 7. Illegibility coefficient, per cent 8. Character .... 9. Mean illegibility coefficient of each character of group or pair, per cent . 10. Recurrence . . . . II. Blackness . . per cent 12. Illegibility factor . per cent c e 0 1 1412 1842 2128 ce eo co 3254 3970 3540 587 1373 745 18 1 34:6 21-1 81:9 65:4 78-9 c e o 80-4 73:6 72-2 2-24 7-83 447 11'4 14-9 17-2 1’80 5:76 3’23 b h 2306 2395 bh 4701 1175 25-0 75’0 b h 75’0 75’0 I-I2 3-36 16°2 16-9 0-84 2-52 a s 2543 1936 as 4479 1733 38-7 61-3 a s 61-3 61-3 5’03 4’47 18-5 17-4 3’08 2-74 i 1 1348 1393 il 2741 469 17 82-9 i 1 82:9 82-9 5’03 2*80 17-8 18:4 4’17 2-32 n u 2045 1916 nu 3961 1097 277 72-3 n u 72*3 72-3 4’47 2-52 144 13:5 3’23 1.82
  - LEGIBILITY.
  - The total illegibility factor, 31*51, divided by the total recurrence, 43:34, gives a mean illegibility coefficient of 72:7 per cent, or a mean legibility coefficient of 273 per cent. The blackness similarly treated gives a mean blackness 16*5 per cent, hence the specific legibility is 4:51 per cent. o
- p.167 - vue 205/901
- - i68
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - to latin in the case of the combinations already considered, but other pairs and groups have very small legibility coefficients ; the combination n, fig. 128, has a legibility coefficient of only 12'3 per cent, r and r differ only by a hair-line, while other very illegible combinations are av, Ift, ny, gq, and ij.
  - The comparative results proved so interesting that the same method was applied to the three worst combinations CG, OQ, and BR, and one other combination, XZ, of capitals in each of the roman faces above considered.
  - Fig. 127.—Illegibility : sans serif, lower-case.
  - About 14 times full size.
  - The results are given summarized in table 38, and the characters are shown combined in figs. 130 to 133. These show a nearly uniform legibility coefficient of about 15'3 per cent for the three worst cases in modern, old-style, and blackfriars, and a legibility coefficient of 10*2 per cent or only two-thirds as great in the case of sans serif. It may be some comfort to motorists to know that the form of the characters and figures selected for car numbering by the governments of this and other countries is less legible than many others which might have been chosen ; in fact, it would be difficult to improve them in the direction of greater illegibility except by
- p.168 - vue 206/901
- - TABLE 35.— Illegibility of roman sans serif (lower-case), 12-point; fig. 127. The unit of area is a square with sides each one-thousandth of an inch.
  - I I. Character . . . . 2. Area ..... 3. Combination of characters 4. Sum of areas of characters 5. Sum of non-coincident areas . 6. Legibility coefficient, per cent 7. Illegibility coefficient, per cent . . . . 8. Character .... 9. Mean illegibility coefficient of each character of group or pair, per cent 10. Recurrence . per cent II. Blackness . per cent 12. Illegibility factor . per cent | c e o 1852 2513 2281 ce eo co 43 65 4 794 4133 662 657 430 1512 13:7 10-4 84'8 86'3 89'6 c e 0 85'5 88'0 87'2 2-24 7'83 4'47 14-8 19-5 17:5 1-91 6'89 3-90 b h 3155 2845 bh 6000 706 11'8 88'2 b h 88'2 88'2 1’12 3*36 23-3 21'0 0'99 2-96 ^ S | 2696 2232 as 4928 1570 31:9 68'1 a s 68'1 68'1 5’03 4’47 19-5 18-6 3’43 3’04 i 1 1180 1605 il 2785 425 15’2 84:8 84'8 84*8 5’03 2*80 18-4 25-0 4’27 2'37 n u 2252 2266 nu 4518 825 18-3 81'7 n u 81'7 81:7 4’47 2-52 16:6 16'7 3-65 2'06
  - LEGIBILITY.
  - The total illegibility factor, 35*47, divided by the total recurrence, 43'34, gives a mean illegibility coefficient of 81:8 per cent, or a mean legibility coefficient of 18-2 per cent. The blackness similarly treated gives a mean blackness 18:9 per cent, hence the specific legibility is 3-44 per cent.
- p.169 - vue 207/901
- - 170
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - combining German Fraktur capitals with the existing sans serif figures. The German Fraktur capitals show an average legibility coefficient of only 3'8 per cent for the three worst cases, a figure which compares with the corresponding figures for latin faces even worse than does that obtained for the lower-case. Amongst the capitals the combinations (E, DD, V, and F are shown in fig. 134, page 178; All, MR, M23, and GS are also bad examples; these sorts are of very much greater frequency than 3 and 2) which have more distinctive forms.
  - Fig. 128.—Illegibility : German Fraktur, lower-case.
  - %
  - About 121 times full size.
  - From certain improvements that are steadily coming about in many of the newer faces of Fraktur in Germany, the authors feel confident that influential and far-seeing forces among the Germanic peoples are modifying the form of their typographical characters in such manner as to reduce the effect of the exacting demands made by it upon one of the most valuable of all national assets: the eyesight of the people.
  - There is yet another consideration that ought to weigh with Germans and that is that not infrequently their literature is neglected owing to the form in which it is presented to the world, see p. 190; for difficult though
- p.170 - vue 208/901
- - TABLE 36.—Illegibility of German Fraktur (lower-case), 12-point; jig. 128. The unit of area is a square with sides each one-thousandth of an inch.
  - I I. Character . . . . 2. Area . . . . . 3. Combination of characters 4. Sum of areas of characters 5. Sum of non-coincident areas . 6. Legibility coefficient, per cent 7. Illegibility coefficient, per cent . . . . 8. Character .... 9. Mean illegibility coefficient of each character of group or pair, per cent j 10. Recurrence. . percent 1 II. Blackness . . per cent 12 . Illegibility factor . per cent C C 0 830 1072 1358 ce co co 1902 2430 2188 242 721 726 12 7 29-7 33-2 87‘3 7°’3 66-8 C C 0 77-0 78-8 68-6 2-70 12-00 2-20 11-6 13-5 15-4 2-08 9-46 1-51 6 ^ 1827 1946 3773 415 11-0 89-0 89-0 89-0 I-60 1-66 19-7 20-9 1-42 1-48 If f 1550 1472 3022 • 79 2'6 97’4 f f 97’4 97’4 1’90 3’85 22'2 21-1 1-85 3’75 i I 1 988 IIII il 2099 469 22-4 77’6 i I 77’6 77’6 5’5° 2-40 18-0 20-3 4-27 1-86 It U 1630 1634 nu 3264 202 6-2 93’8 n u 93’8 93’8 8-oo 3-60 14’9 14’9 7’50 3’38
  - LEGIBILITY.
  - The total illegibility factor, 38-56, divided by the total recurrence, 45-41, gives a mean illegibility coefficient of 84-9 per cent, or a mean legibility coefficient of 15-1 per cent. The blackness similarly treated gives a mean blackness 16-2 per cent, 1 hence the specific legibility is 2-45 per cent.
- p.171 - vue 209/901
- - Modern.
  - Old-style.
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Blackfriars.
  - Sans serif.
  - Fig. 129.—Illegibility : figures. About 14 times full size.
- p.172 - vue 210/901
- - TABLE 37.—Illegibility of modern, old-style, blackfriars and sans serif figures, 12-point; fig 129. The unit of area is a square with sides each one-thousandth of an inch.
  - Modern. Old-style. Blackfriars. Sans serif.
  - I. Figure 3 5 6 8 3 5 6 8 w co 6 8 3 5 6 8
  - I 2. Area. 2671 2237 2489 2281 1664 1832 2074 2578 2716 2686 3007 3422 4489 4681 5190 5690
  - 3. Combination 3 + 5 6 + 8 3+5 6 + 8 3 + 5 6 + 8 3 + 5 6 + 8
  - 4. Sum of areas 4908 477° 3496 4652 5402 6429 9170 10880
  - 5. Do. non-coincident 2420 2637 1393 2499 1649 662 1230 2444
  - 6. Legibility coefficient, ') per cent/ 49'3 55’3 39’8 537 30-5 10*3 13’4 22'5
  - 7. Illegibility coefficient, per cent) 507 447 60-2 46-3 69:5 897 86-6 77'5
  - 8. Blackness . per cent 19-4 16-2 18-1 16:6 12-1 I33 151 18-7 197 19:5 21-8 25-0 24-1 25-1 27-6 30-5
  - LEGIBILITY.
  - As the various figures may be assumed to have the same frequency of recurrence the coefficients of legibility can be compared direct.
  - The means are : modern 52’3, old-style 46'8, blackfriars 20-4, and sans serif i8*o per cent respectively.
  - The blacknesses are : modern 17'8, old-style 14’9, blackfriars 21'5, and sans serif 26-8 per cent respectively.
  - The specific legibilities : modern 9'31, old-style 6-97, blackfriars 4*39, and sans serif 4-82 per cent respectively.
- p.173 - vue 211/901
- - 174
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - FIG. 130.—Illegibility : modern, capitals.
  - About 14 times full size.
  - Fig. 131.—Illegibility : old-style, capitals (continued on opposite page). About 13 times full size.
- p.174 - vue 212/901
- - LEGIBILITY.
  - 175
  - Fig. 131.—Illegibility : old-style, capitals (concluded from opposite page). About 13 times full size.
  - Fig. 132.—Illegibility : blackfriars, capitals.
  - About 14 times full size.
- p.175 - vue 213/901
- - 176 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - much of it is, it would yet be studied and appreciated far more than it is were it not that, as a recent writer in “ The Times ” has well said, " it is
  - Fig. 133.—Illegibility : sans serif, capitals. About 14 times full size.
  - rendered needlessly repellent by the retention to so great an extent as still prevails of a most irrational and eye-wearying mediaeval script.”
- p.176 - vue 214/901
- - TABLE 38.—Summary for latin, German and Greek founts.
  - Comparison of the illegibility of capitals : roman, German Fraktur and Greek ; figs. 130-135.
  - Modern. | Old-style. I Blackfriars. Sans serif. German. * Greek.
  - Characters. Blackness mean. Leg. coefft. percent. Black-ness mean. j Leg. coefft. percent. I Black- I ness mean. \ Leg. | coefft. per cent. Black- I ness mean. | Leg. coefft. percent. Characters. Blackness mean. Leg. coefft. percent. Characters. | Blackness mean. Leg. coefft. percent.
  - C G O Q B R X Z Aver- ) age of 1 first 6 J sorts ) 1515 19*3 21’0 16:6 18-6 13:0 1217 2017 51'0 15:5 11-8 162 172 13:5 I5-I 13:4 12-1 19’8 470 15′1 19:5 24’6 237 22-4 22:6 1317 II‘9 20′0 30'8 15′2 22:8 25’3 28-5 24′0 25’5 13*3 6’2 II’I 33′9 102 G G D O $ V 8 3 Aver- ) age of I first 6 j sorts ) 287 21’1 20’2 22:6 23’3 2'5 41 4-8 34:6 38 A A H n o 0 A A Aver- ) age of I first 6 j sorts ) 15.0 22′1 22′5 175 19’9 3-1 3'9 113 3212 6-1
  - "Egibility}2:88 per cent. 2*28 percent. 3*44 percent. 2-60 per cent. 0-89 per cent. Comparison of the illegibility of several styles of lower-case roman, German Fraktur and Greek compared ; 1* figs. 124- 21 per cent. -128 and 135.
  - Mean j of ii 1 sorts J 14’4 23-1 12'2 26’3 1655 2?*3 18-9 18-2 Mean 1 of II > sorts ) 16-2 151 Mean 1 of 4 % sorts I 18-9 32-1
  - Specific legibility. 3'33 per cent. 3′21 per cent. 4-51 per cent. 3′44 per cent. 2:45 per cent. Illegibility of several styles of figures, compared. 6′07 per cent.
  - Aver- ) age of > 4 sorts J I 7'8 52*3 14′9 46-8 21:5 20′4 26-8 18-0 — — — —
  - LEGIBILITY.
  - "Egibility)9 31 Percent- 6*97 per cent. 4*39 per cent. 4:82 per cent.
- p.177 - vue 215/901
- - 178
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - These improvements in the more modern Fraktur may be summed up generally as tending to the reduction of the redundant fine inclined serifs, to the thickening of the hair-line where this forms the sole difference between different characters, and to the exaggeration of the small peculiarities which alone enable like characters to be distinguished from each other. It is, however, a pity that the Germanic peoples cannot make up their minds
  - Fig. 134.—Illegibility : German Fraktur, capitals.
  - About 14 times full size.
  - at one fell swoop to do away with their beautiful, but, from a hygienic point of view, pernicious character.
  - Turning from these faces to the greek face, the worst examples in the lower-case, v v and S S table 39, and fig. 135, compare very favourably with latin faces. It is only in a few of the combinations of capitals, A A and 0 0, that the illegibility approaches that of the latin, while, in
- p.178 - vue 216/901
- - LEGIBILITY. 179
  - the two cases A A and H II, table 38, where the difference now depends on short hair-lines, it is so poor as to correspond to the German Fraktur.
  - §
  - Fig. 135.—Illegibility : greek. About 14 times full size.
  - The character generally used in Russia excels even the German Fraktur
- p.179 - vue 217/901
- - 180
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - in the illegibility of a few lower-case sorts. The III, ILL, and the H, H, II, I combinations have been compared • the four last characters are all liable to confusion with each other, table 39 and fig. 136. The legibility coefficient of the III and III combination is only 1’4 per cent, being the smallest
  - iiiiiiiiiih
  - Fig. 136.— Illegibility : Russian, lower-case.
  - About 14 times full size.
  - found by the authors. It would be easy to improve the legibility of the Russian upright character: the H could be made readily distinguishable by adopting the heavy inclined stroke with the thin upright strokes of the
  - FIG. 137.—Illegibility : Hebrew.
  - About 14 times full size.
  - latin N ; the tails of I and III could be made into ordinary descenders and the inside lower serifs of II shortened or removed. Russian italic is less legible than the upright character and in writing it is necessary to place additional horizontal strokes above and below several lower-case letters in order to prevent misreading.
- p.180 - vue 218/901
- - TABLE 39.—Illegibility of Greek and Russian, (lower-case), and of Hebrew, 12-point; figs, 135-137. The unit of area is a square with sides each one-thousandth of an inch.
  - Greek, fig. 135. H Russian, fig. 136. I Hebrew, fig. 137.
  - (nu) (upsilon ) (zeta) (xi) ( (pe) (en) I (ee) (tse) | (sha) (shtcha) (gimel) (nun) (mem 1 final) (samech)
  - I. Character v V 4 $ n H II I III III J J D D
  - 2. Area | 2208 2445 3556 3960 2361 2449 2563 2459 3516 3615 894 968 | 2435 2336
  - 3. Combination vv S IH HI IIIIII 1 •D
  - 4. Sum of areas 4653 7516 4810 5022 7I3I 1862 4771
  - 5. Sum of areas non-coincident 1531 1738 138 350 99 183 99
  - 6. Legibility coefficient, per cent 32:9 23-1 2-9 70 14 9-8 2-1
  - 7. Illegibility coefficient, per cent 67-1 76:9 97’1 93:0 98-6 90-2 979
  - 8. Character V V { $ n H II I In III J J D D
  - 9. Recurrence, per cent 5’20 4:85 0-55 0-40 2-10 6:30 3-80 0-68 0-68 0-55 2’10 3-50 2-10 1’45
  - 10. Blackness, per cent . 17-8 18-4 27-5 30:6 160 16:6 17-4 16:6 18:4 18-9 13:6 14'7 20-7 19-9
  - II. Illegibility factor 3*49 3-25 0-42 031 2-04 6'12 3’53 0-63 0-67 0-54 1-89 3-16 2-06 1-42
  - LEGIBILITY.
  - Greek (4 characters). Total illegibility factor 7-47. Total recurrence ii-oo. Mean illegibility coefficient 67:9. Mean'legibility coefficient 32-1 per cent. Mean blackness 18:9 per cent; hence specific legibility 6-07 per cent.
  - Russian (6 characters). Total illegibility factor 13-53. Total recurrence 14-11. Mean illegibility coefficient 95’9. Mean legibility coefficient 4-1 per cent. Mean blackness 16-9 per cent; hence specific legibility 0-69 per cent.
  - Hebrew (4 characters). Total illegibility factor 8-53. Total recurrence 9-15. Mean illegibility coefficient 93-2. Mean legibility coefficient 6’8 per cent. Mean blackness 16:6 per cent; hence specific legibility 1-13 per cent. -
- p.181 - vue 219/901
- - co N
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - In Hebrew the two worst combinations • (mem, final form) and D (sa-mech), and J (gimel) and 2 (nun), give low legibility coefficients, the average of the two combinations being below 6 per cent, table 39 and fig. 137. Apart from the combinations investigated there is also great similitude
  - Fig. 138.—Illegibility : devanagari characters. About 14 times full size.
  - between 3 (beth) and 3 (caph); 1 (daleth), T (caph, final) and n (resch); n (he) and n (cheth) ; 1 (vau), 1 (zain) and 1 (nun, final); and to a somewhat less extent between some other sorts.
  - Fig. 139.—Illegibility : arabic characters. About 10 times full size.
  - The devanagari character, which is so largely used for many of the languages of India, also suffers badly from illegibility. This is greatly due to the fact that most of the characters comprise an unbroken horizontal
- p.182 - vue 220/901
- - LEGIBILITY.
  - co
  - main-stroke and a vertical main-stroke. This characteristic is so prevalent throughout the individual characters and the combined characters as to serve as a diluent to what would otherwise be distinguishing portions of
  - TABLE 40. Illegibility of devanagari and arabic characters; figs. 138, 139.
  - DEVANAGARI (fig. 138). ARABIC (fig. 139).
  - Characters. Blackness. Legibility coefficient. Characters. Blackness. Legibility coefficient.
  - Value. Form. Per cent. Per cent. Value. Form. Per cent.
  - a • 23-0 ) Initial.
  - ch q 22:4 I 165 b } 8’5 1 19-3
  - n j 8'5 )
  - bh: * 19-2 6-0 Medial.
  - m F 217 I b . 79 1 22’0
  - • = 21-7 J n-8 y e 9’1 )
  - Normal.
  - dh y 18-9 ) 2 > 54 |
  - gh q 20*4 ) 3'6 r > 4-6 J 8-3
  - 1= 19’4 ) W , Initial. 11-9 51*7
  - i * 221 J 19:6 a 1 1 J 9'4 1 62-8
  - v * 22:6 2’0 100 )
  - Detached.
  - b q 23:6 )
  - 3’3 1 J 14 |
  - br = 25:2 ) n 6 8-5 J 33:5
  - Average 217 9-0 Average 8’9 329
  - DEVANAGARI :—
  - he specific legibility is 195 per cent.
  - ARABIC :-
  - The specific legibility is 2:93 per cent.
  - th etters; the interruption of the horizontal line occurs in only two of the 6 which, when the character is used for the Hindi language, appear to
  - ex ent of only about two per cent. The comparisons are shown in table 40 and fig. 138.
- p.183 - vue 221/901
- - 184
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - In arabic, legibility is greatly dependent on the dots and their combinations, table 40 and fig. 139. This character, if it were freed from the complication of the small vowel signs and were made less inclined, would be one of the most legible scripts. Amongst oriental peoples, especially those who are Mohammedans, this face is so largely used that its improvement in the direction of increased legibility, easier composition, and diminished kerning, would enable it to take a very much higher rank than at present. Excessive kerning necessitates the use of soft metal, which gives a poor printing-surface, and, by the yielding of the type, decreased legibility. The influence of modern mechanical methods in diminishing this evil is a great aid to the obtaining of clean, clear printing.
  - The question of legibility is not merely confined to ordinary letters, whether lower-case or capitals, roman or italic, but also is affected by
  - Fig. 140.— Illegibility; French lower-case accents ; points.
  - About 14 times full size.
  - the use of the accents which are common to most Latin languages. In French, the lower-case e is used in three accented forms, e, e, e, as well as unaccented, some other letters such as a and u are used in two accented forms, also unaccented, while the c is used with and without the cedilla. For the same lower-case e that is shown in various combinations in fig. 124, the area of which is given in table 32 as 1704 units, each a square having a length of side of 0’001 inch, or an area of one-millionth of a square inch, the respective areas of the accents, fig. 140, are : acute 240, grave 320 and circumflex 340 units; whence the ratio of the additional area to that of the original character varies from 14 per cent to 20 per cent, averaging about 17'5 per cent. The lower-case c of the same fount having an area of 1521 units has a corresponding area for the cedilla of 380 units or 25 per cent of the original character. The table shows that the non-coincident areas in the
- p.184 - vue 222/901
- - LEGIBILITY.
  - 185
  - comparison of the ordinary character with the accented character usually differ by as great an amount as exists between t e c an e. Joints and Common to nearly all European languages are the PointSamena. frequently very little difference exists between thefud pinta the full point In the fount which has just been considered, . than the mini-or period, fig. 140, measures 214 units, which is area yless fount, mum non-coincident area met with in the inves iga ion rd of
  - The difference between the full point and the comma, bat is T AN area the tail of the comma, amounts to only 160 units and althoushthserss is about 75 per cent of the area of the full point it is a difference-hESpet small compared to the minimum non-coincident area existi differentiating case. As a percentage difference it becomes more serious in differenLecns between the colon and the semicolon, since the a ed tail in this ; recog-affects the total area to the extent of 37 per cent. The difficulty inves
  - 1£.111 pint .1S not, DOWCVC nizing the difference between a comma and P Alone s (fl so great as the difficulty in recognizing the difference between theloas an and the f, because it usually happens that the full point is followed Rhae em quad instead of by an ordinary space; and consequent 1 can be matter, the full point, except when it occurs at t e end 0 a ine Dnee more easily recognized by the space which follows 1 an y
  - of the tail of the comma.
  - INFLUENCE OF PARTS OF THE CHARACTER ON LEG
  - The aid afforded by the various parts of a character in securing.egibiit can be investigated to some extent by cutting fhe.chare other characters, comparing each half with the corresponding small sorts If we take a horizontal line passing through the centre of the smaS-ESs a suitable halving will be obtained, and if another cheractre tops, bottoms, similarly divided by a vertical line into two equ atnet roman face lefts and rights of each can be compared. Taking 20ordiner WnTeATreramh modern or old-style, we find that the numbe T. •
  - sufficient difference of detail to be still recognizab e is as
  - 26 lower-case a-z
  - 26 capitals, A—Z
  - Total
  - O
  - CO
  - Top.
  - 19 II
  - Bottom. Left. Right.
  - 16 19 19
  - 22 15 22
  - 38 34 41
  - Thus a greater number of characters arerncosnr Abc‘% taken and cut the bottom or on the right side. Now 1 IT the two halves horizontally through the middle of the sma sor ‘ is quite easily compared, it is found that the print from the top hala’sit difficulty, legible while the print from the bottom half can on y
- p.185 - vue 223/901
- - 186 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - fig. 141. The reason for this can be seen at once if the frequency of occurrence of the letters is taken into consideration. If the above characters (lower-case and capitals) are arranged in order of frequency of occurrence and the first fifteen are taken, it is found that out of a total of 1000 characters these will aggregate about 650; of the 650, as many as 550 (or more than one-half the original matter) are recognizable from the top halves while only 275 (or slightly over one-fourth) are recognizable from the bottom halves. This supports the view that legibility is largely dependent on the easy recognition of frequently-occurring sorts, and that the slight difference between the lower-case e and c, in most cases only a hair-line, is a bad feature. De Vinne makes this line horizontal but much heavier. In the blackfriars
  - Upper Half.
  - This half can be read without much difficulty.
  - This half can he read without much diffirnl+u
  - Lower Half.
  - x lie UUiCi 11CI.11 10 1VICLCI v Cl y illucii iicti cici LU iCau.
  - The other half is relatively much harder to read.
  - Fig. 141.—Comparison of legibility of upper and lower halves of type.
  - face, produced under the direction of one of the authors, this line is made not only heavier, but also inclined in the manner adopted by William Morris in his golden type, thereby further increasing the legibility. A modification of this fount was introduced into America and is known as jenson ; the legibility of the golden type, however, is usually marred by the practice of spacing very closely so as to obtain greater uniformity of tint in the printed page.
  - THE LINE FOLLOWED BY THE EYE.
  - Several experimenters have examined the position of the imaginary line which the eye of the reader follows in forming mental pictures of words, but no definite conclusions based on actual measurements have so far been given. The problem is one of great importance to the designer of type, because the actual impression made on the eye by the same amount of ink, differently placed relatively to the imaginary line along which the eye travels, is different.
  - The authors have considered this aspect of the subject, and believe that much can be learned from the resultant character which is obtained by combining all the lower-case sorts, taken in the proportions in which they occur in the English fount scheme. The resultant optical effect of the lower-case letters so combined into the geometric mean of the whole of their printed impressions is shown in fig. 142. In this figure the external rectangle gives both the body and the set of the mean resultant type stem
- p.186 - vue 224/901
- - LEGIBILITY.
  - 187
  - for an investigation carried out on the 12-point old-style fount used in fig. 125 ; this being one of the most legible faces available. lo ontam the diagram shown, enlarged drawings of the whole of the lower case so and of the f-ligatures were measured horizontally for the brea 1 °
  - FIG. 142.-—Mean resultant character obtained by combining in their proper proportions the whole of the lower-case characters and f-ligatures of an old-style 12-point face. The centre of gravity of the character is marked by the white cross.
  - stroke, and were also measured for the distance 0 he ce d #he Sf from the left-hand side of the boundary of the JPOA true width of ordinates indicated by the short horizontal iness once reckoned each stroke was then multiplied by the frequency 0 ,. thus the as a percentage of the whole of the sorts under investigation ‘
- p.187 - vue 225/901
- - 00 Co
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - widths for parts of the letter e were multiplied by II‘56 per cent, for t by 8:26 per cent, for a by 7’44 per cent, and so on. The sum of all the reduced widths so obtained for the abscissae at each of the horizontal lines marked at the sides of the figure, gave the corresponding mean width of the inked impressions. The position of the centre of each of these different dimensions was obtained by treating each measured part of the impression as having a reading-value proportional to the product of its width multiplied by its frequency of occurrence. By the usual engineering method of taking moments about a given point, in this case on the left-hand boundary of the type of the respective characters—that is about a point in a line corresponding to the left-hand boundary of fig. 142—by the summation of these moments and by the division of the total by the aggregate reading-value of all the sorts, that is by 100, the position was found for the centre of each of the mean widths previously obtained. Some two thousand individual measurements and over two thousand calculations were involved in obtaining the illustration of the resultant mean figure for the lower-case characters.
  - The preponderance of blackness due to the small sorts can be clearly seen, as can also the relative magnitude of the blackness due to the ascenders and descenders respectively ; the influence of the latter is so small that if the figure were reduced to 36-point the line representing the descenders would be of the minimum thickness capable of printing an unbroken line. The outer lines give the body and the set of the resultant type.
  - The position of the centre of gravity of the area is shown by the intersection of the white cross-lines; it is situated above the centre of the gauge of the small sorts, which it divides approximately in the ratio of 5 : 4
  - A comparison of this figure with fig. 141 shows that the eye does not follow the line of maximum blackness, but travels along a line passing either through the centre of gravity of this figure or above it; those features of the type which distinguish one character from another being more apparent in the upperthan in the lower portions of the small sorts. Reference to fig. 125, p. 164, which was prepared from the same type face, shows some instances of this as well as one of the two ambiguous cases (h-b, i-j) in which the upper half of an ascender fails to determine the character.
  - OPERATIONS INVOLVED IN THE PROCESS OF READING.
  - Dr. J. McKeen Cattell, of the Psychological Laboratory of the University of Leipzig, in his article on " The Inertia of the Eye and Brain,” published in " Brain,” has made an important contribution to the subject of legibility.
  - He has analysed the time taken for the complete process of reading, divided into the various operations involved by the eye and brain respectively, and has further investigated the sensitiveness of the retina to
- p.188 - vue 226/901
- - 189
  - LEGIBILITY.
  - various colours. He found the eye most sensitive.ta orange aheviofec, sensitiveness decreasing through blue an ye to vedif light. He then the eye being less than one-fourtheosezensiforeiecters and words, using a investigated the sensitiveness of the He made some 15,000 similar method of exposure through a drop retina in the same observations and found that the sensitivenesz.S He took separate letters observer was by no means constant. 11 the relative times in and words of from four to eight letters, and obtainedtha that small latin which different kinds of letters were legit - the german letters letters were slightly less legible thancevizikenets, the same applying to were considerably less legible than ve characters. He sums up words in English and German set in th p his observations as follows : . _ life but at the same
  - Reading is one of the largest factorain our mvdywnefe in nature, the time a thoroughly artificial act. Heres a to its environment, but organism shows its power of accommod g a and weak-eyed, the large percentage of children who become sh»^£ “^ guard, and suffer from headaches, gives us sharp warning, a Pne immense tension lest these diseases become hereditary. tle Most vital importance to put of necessity upon eye and brain, it is can be read with the least relieve them by using the pnnted symbo $ % show that books effort and strain. Experiments are not n D Te but experi-(especially school-books) should be printer in age cleave the most favour-ments, such as I have described, may lead us o mine letters capital able type. It seems probable that the use of two vaneties Ailommaments on and small, is more of ahurt than help to the ey : auniR The simplest the letters hinder, consequently the German type is isE not be too thin ; we geometrical forms seem the easiest to see. T doubtful whether it seem to judge the letters from the thick lines, an 1 From all these is advantageous to use thin and thick lines in Prim 1 proved on the considerations it seems that our printing-press as not see, alphabet used by the Romans. Our punctuatiopezerks xepidcergor at all and, I think, quite useless. It seems to me responding in events supplement) them by spaces between t e wor , to the length to the pauses in the thought, or, what is the same lna" method pauses which should be made in reading the passage a 011 make reading of indicating to the eye the pauses in the sense would not only make easier, but would teach us to think more clearly. + but it is
  - In the opinion of the authors this proposa has man Ieeerent lines of subject to one grave disadvantage. The spacing of the. Tengen constant, pnnted matter must necessarily vary in order P de the pause and any such system would require that the space used to denote.^p the for the comma should, at least, be equal to a no icea would be
  - widest ordinary spacing, and a substantially larger maxi required to correspond to the long pause given for the pen
- p.189 - vue 227/901
- - 190
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Dr. Cattell further observed that not only are some type harder to see than others, but the different letters in the same alphabet are not equally legible. He made a further series of experiments on capital latin letters in which each letter was used 270 times. Out of the trials W was found the most easily legible, being read 241 times, whereas E was only read correctly 63 times. It is unfortunate that, as in the case of many other eye specialists, the capital letters should be chosen for such experiments instead of the more frequently-occurring lower-case sorts, since the ratio of occurrence of lower-case to capitals, in the English language as printed, is generally greater than nine to one.
  - Dr. Cattell goes on to say :—
  - “ The great disadvantage of having in our alphabet letters needlessly difficult to see will be evident to every one. If I should give the probable time wasted each day through a single letter as E being needlessly illegible, it would seem almost incredible ; and if we could calculate the unnecessary strain put upon eye and brain, it would be still more appalling. Now that we know which letters are the most illegible, it is to be hoped that some attempt will be made to modify them. Our entire alphabet and orthography needs recasting : we have several altogether useless letters (C, Q and X), and there are numerous sounds for which no letters exist. In modifying the present letters, or introducing new forms, simplicity and distinctness must be sought after, and experiments such as these will be the best test.
  - “ Experiments made on the small letters show a similar difference in their legibility. Out of a hundred trials, d was read correctly 87 times, s only 28 times. The order of distinctness for the small letters is as follows: dkmqhbpwuljtvzrofnaxyeigcs. As in the case of the capital letters, some letters are hard to see (especially s, g, c and x) owing to their form ; others are misread, because there are certain pairs and groups in which the letters are similar. A group of this sort is made up of the slim letters i j 1 f t, which are constantly mistaken the one for the other. It would not, perhaps, be impossible to put X in the place of 1, and the dot should certainly be left away from i (as in Greek). It seems absurd that in printing, ink and lead should be used to wear out the eye and brain. I have made similar determinations for the capital and small German letters, but these should be given up. Scientific works are now generally printed in the Latin type, and it is to be hoped that it will soon be adopted altogether. At present, however, it is impossible to get the works most read, Goethe’s works, for example, in Latin type.”
  - It is interesting to compare the results arrived at from observations by Dr. Cattell with those obtained by the authors as the result of direct measurements of the characters themselves.
  - Another condition, which appears to have been almost entirely absent in the tests carried out by the distinguished experimenters whose researches the authors have mentioned above, is that produced by
- p.190 - vue 228/901
- - LEGIBILITY.
  - 191
  - adjacent letters or combinations of letters, particularly those which imme-diately precede and follow the character under examination for legibility. For example, the effect produced by the vertical main-strokes of d and b in the combination dob would tend to give a very different average result when read from the same distance as the same letters placed in the order bod. The same reasoning would obviously apply to all those combinations which have formed the subject of the authors investigations.
  - In making these remarks the authors have no thought whatever of belittling the extremely valuable research work already carried out, but only have in mind the desirability of further research on legibility, especially that of the lower-case sorts, of one or two of the faces most commonly in use and in some of the combinations in which characters are most liable to be confused with each other.
  - ILLUMINATION AND REFLECTION.
  - The quality of the paper, its colour, and the colour of the ink. The quality of the paper has an important bearing on legibility, because a rough surface will of necessity take the surplus ink irregularly from the bevelled edges of the characters and thus produce an irregular appearance in the same sorts ; on the other hand, excessive smoothness is inseparable from the reflection of light, which has grave disadvantages. The best effect is secured by having the greatest contrast, and for this reason the ink should be perfectly black and dead in colour, and the paper as white as possible. Yellow and grey tend to diminish the contrast and are unfavourable, while pink and red are actually harmful to the sight. In the search for a distinctive colour which should be the least harmful to the eyes, the late Sir George Newnes consulted many of the highest authorities, and finally adopted °n their recommendation the light green shade of paper on which the " Westminster Gazette” has for many years been printed. In cases where much writing has to be carried out on forms printed on coloured paper, it is advisable that the tints selected should be light and should be chosen from thegreento the violet end of the spectrum. Connected with the problem of colour of paper is that of the colour of ink, which should be chosen as dark as possible, and for the sake of contrast should contain the complementary colour when intended for use on coloured paper. Printing in light blue, or green, on white paper should be avoided, as the contrast is insufficient.
  - Reflection of light, and illumination.—The question of reflection of light from the paper has still greater importance now that artificial light is so much used in reading. A highly-surfaced paper is required for printing the half-tone and process blocks with which many high-class papers, magazines and books are illustrated; in some instances the illustrations are printed on separate sheets or plates of high-surface or art paper so as t° permit of the use of a non-reflecting paper for the subject matter of the work. The increase in the use of high-surfaced papers demands that the
- p.191 - vue 229/901
- - 192
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - lighting of all rooms used for study should be as diffused and as uniform as possible.
  - Irradiation.—This factor also plays an important part in the legibility or illegibility of various forms of character and styles of type, but its effects are largely spread over and accentuate the reactions due to the other
  - Fig. 143.—Irradiation producing illusion of size.
  - causes enumerated above. It produces illusions in respect to size of figure and thickness of line which can be seen in fig. 143, in which the squares are of the same size though the large black square appears to be smaller
  - Fig. 144.—Irradiation producing illusion of tint.
  - than the large white square and the small white square larger than the small black one.
  - Another disturbing effect produced by black areas closely spaced on a white ground is that shown in fig. 144 ; on looking at this it will be seen that misty grey patches appear to form at the intersections of the white fines.
- p.192 - vue 230/901
- - CHAPTER XII.
  - PUNCH-CUTTING.
  - " Letter-Cutting is a Handy-Work hitherto kept so conceal’d among the Artificers of it, that I cannot learn any one hath taught it any other; But every one that has used it, Learnt it of his
  - own Genuine Inclination." ,
  - Moxon’s Mechanick Exercises.
  - zo-point blackfriars italic (Blackfriars, formerly Wicks).
  - So true is the quaint old quotation given at the commencement of this chapter, that but one other writer besides Moxon himself is known to the authors as having dealt technically with punch-cutting. It seems hardly credible that up to the end of the nineteenth century the only two books that deal fully with this important matter, the very basis of all typography, should be that of Moxon in 1683 and that of Fournier in 1764. Fournier, an original copy of whose beautiful work the authors have the good fortune to possess, states that in France up to his time no description of punch-cutting had been written ; and he was apparently unaware of the existence of Moxon’s work in English, for he says: "‘ L’Art de la Gravure des Caracteres n’a jamais ete decrit.
  - A great deal of attention, which he rightly characterizes as of no practical value, had been given to the designing of letters upon geometric principles, these principles themselves being based on the proportions °f the human form. In 1240 was published the striking mathematical and arithmetical work of that wonderful wanderer, Leonardo of Pisa, the knowledge contained in it being drawn from Arabian sources , and following him at a considerable interval came Lucas de Burgo or Paciolus. There is little doubt that these writers exercised considerable influence on the mathematical researches of Leonardo da Vinci when that marvellous genius in A.D. 1500, or possibly before that date, was making his series of studies of lettering and the design of letters based on arbitrary proportions of the human form combined with geometric figures. Albrecht Durer on his second journey to Venice in 1505 probably became cognizant of Leonardo s work, and he subsequently spent much time and labour in the elaboration
  - 193
- p.193 - vue 231/901
- - 194
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - of the same idea. From this period onwards many authors, notably among them Geofroy Tory, a bookseller in Paris in 1526, yet further developed the idea, and by him and his successors it was carried to impossible lengths. Fournier rightly says that the judgment of letters should be by eye and taste, and that the idea of reducing their design to arbitrary geometric rules is absurd, and still more absurd the reduction of the larger squares and circles of the earlier designers to sizes so minute as to be beyond handling by aught save the imagination. All through this mass of drawing, of letterpress and of lettering, one looks in vain for any practical hints for the reduction of designs to useful steel, and for any practical suggestion whatever as to their further use for the production of punches or for any description of the process it would be needful to employ.
  - Punch-cutting.—In the process of cutting a punch by hand, the end of a piece of steel about 2 inches long and 1 inch square (in the case of pica and smaller bodies) is filed up square to two adjacent faces which have been squared up. This face is ground true on an oilstone by means of the jointer or stone-facer of hardened steel shown in fig. 145. The character
  - I
  - 8
  - 5
  - 8
  - 20
  - I 8 $
  - Fig. 145.—Jointer or stone-facer for punches. Half size.
  - is then marked out on the face of the punch with a scriber and the counters struck in by means of counter-punches used by hand with a hammer. The punch is kept true on the face by occasionally rubbing on the oilstone in the stone-facer, and the sides are trimmed off with gravers and engraving tools. The production of the work requires the continued use of a magnifying eye-glass, combined with the artistic ability to produce the correct curves, and the accuracy to work to a limit of 0’0003 inch. There are not many good punch-cutters, and it can be easily understood that a punch-cutter capable of working to this degree of accuracy earns about £4 to £6 per week. Moreover, the amount of work finished by this method is not large, and the punches of a fount so cut by hand are found to cost on the average about fifteen shillings each : though to the engineer who has purchased a small complete alphabet of 27 punches with a set of 9 figures for 5s. or 6s., this cost, without further explanation, appears absurd. As the
- p.194 - vue 232/901
- - PUNCH-CUTTING.
  - 195
  - engraving of the punch is proceeded with, the face is smoked and an impres sion taken on a piece of fine-surface paper alongside an impression similarly taken from the corresponding standard character, the H, o, m, or p, according to the character which is being cut. The smokes are examined with the magnifier and the work continued till the result agrees to the desired extent. Since the punch is the first stage in the process, and from it a matrix must be obtained, in which again the type is cast, the problem is one of cumulative error. In the case of the punch, the very thin film of deposited carbon, forming the smoke, enables a higher degree of accuracy to be obtained than prevails with the inked impression made from the type. The hand-cut punch when finished has a long taper, from A inch to 1 inch in length, and the bevels of the actual strike are seldom constant in slope, fig. 146. Moreover, the face does not occupy a definite position relatively to the sides of the shank. Owing to the great expense of cutting punches by hand, the hand-cut punches for the vowels and the n are usually ground
  - FIG. 148.
  - Fig. 146. Fig. 147.
  - Hand-cut punch; with accent punch attached; and with accent punch detached.
  - away flat on the back to enable them to be used in conjunction with separate punches for the accents. This first step towards economy in punches gives very unsatisfactory results. Figure 147 is a reproduction of an illustration in Fournier’s classic work, which plainly shows that this practice was well known in his day.
  - Punch-cutting by machine.—The history of punch-cutting by mac nery is not difficult to trace. According to De Vinne, Darius Wells, a printer of New York, abandoned printing in 1827 for the manufacture of wood type. To abridge the tedious work of cutting away, by means of hand tools, the counters and shoulders from the drawing on wood as had been done hitherto, Wells made use of a simple tool which he called the router. This was a flat-faced and half-round steel bit, still known by the same name, made to rotate at a high speed. The bit was suspended vertically, over the wood to be cut by attachments made for raising it or depressing it at will. The bloc ° wood to be made into a type was firmly fastened under the router, and the operator moved the cutter spindle round the pattern until every part of the counter and shoulder was removed.
- p.195 - vue 233/901
- - 196
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - 0 0
  - O 0 O
  - Other machinery, with various improvements, was gradually introduced, and in 1834 William Leavenworth of New York adapted the pantograph to the manufacture of wood type. The router in this case was driven at the very high speed of about 14,000 revolutions per minute, and cut the superfluous parts out of the design. Letters, borders and ornaments of all kinds are still made with Leavenworth’s machine, or improvements upon it.
  - The routing machine used for the production of wood type carries a tracer at the remote end of the pantograph and a high-speed cutter at the copying centre of the frame. In principle it is the same as the
  - more accurately made engraving machine, fig. 214, plate XIII, the still more highly developed matrix - engraving machines, figs. 2II and 212, plates XII and XI, and the direct-cutting pantograph, fig. 164, plate X.
  - The earliest punch-cutting machine known to the authors is the Benton. It was of American origin and was patented in Great Britain by Linn Boyd Benton of Milwaukee in 1885.
  - Though this machine was originally
  - used for cutting master-type in type-metal
  - for the purpose of producing matrices by electro-deposition, it was
  - Fig. 149.—Original Benton punch-cutting machine; from patent specification.
  - subsequently improved, and, known as the Benton-Waldo, was used for the cutting of steel punches, and is still in use. To Benton, therefore, undoubtedly belongs the credit of priority in this field.
  - The machine is an
  - adaptation of the pantograph, but instead of the
- p.196 - vue 234/901
- - PUNCH-CUTTING.
  - 197
  - model and its reduction being in one plane, the punch is arranged vertically over the model or former. The machine, fig. 150, consists of a vertical
  - Enlarged view of details and follower-stem.
  - Details.
  - 6
  - 4
  - fra
  - f 6 I which carries the table 2 on which the formers are secured. The e is also fitted with a slide 3 in which the watchmaker’s lathe-head 4
  - Fig. 150.—The Benton-Waldo -punch-cutting machine.
  - 1
- p.197 - vue 235/901
- - 198
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - can be placed into position. Several of these heads are required for each machine, and they must be made interchangeable so that the axes of the milling, the roughing, and the finishing cutters all agree within the permissible error. At the top of the frame is fixed the top gimbal-plate 3 in which is pivoted the outer gimbal-ring 6. At right angles to the fixed axis of the outer gimbal-ring and in a plane passing through that axis are the centres of the inner gimbal-ring 7 to which the four slide-rods 8 are secured. These slide-rods are ground true and parallel and are a sliding fit in the lower outer gimbal-ring 9, the holes in which are fitted with bushes lapped true. The lower inner gimbal-ring 10 is pivoted to the outer gimbal-ring and also to the sliding head 11, the axes of the centres being parallel to those of the upper gimbal-ring. The sliding head is fitted with large flanges above and below the adjustable slide-frame 12, the surfaces being ground
  - to
  - 10
  - Fig. 151.—The Benton-Waldo machine; detail of sliding head and chuck. Half size.
  - Section al A.B.
  - Inverted Plan of Chuck.
  - true and parallel. The slide-frame has large vertical bearing-surfaces on the sides of the frame, and can be rigidly clamped at any desired height. The height is usually adjusted by bringing the frame down on a gauge 13 of the requisite size placed on the stop 14. The four slide-rods 8 are rigidly connected at their lower ends to the follower-head 15, to which is secured the follower-stem 15a. The upper part of the follower-head is cup-shaped ; it catches the shavings which fall from the tools and so keeps the former 18 clear. The lower end of the follower-stem is bored up with an axial hole in which slides the follower-carrier 16 ; a spring 16a keeps the follower-carrier pressed down on the former 18. The end of. the follower-carrier below the button fits into the holes in the larger followers 17, of which there are some twenty ranging from 3 inches to 0'13 inch in diameter ; the end of the follower-carrier is CIO inch in diameter, and some ten followers 17a of smaller diameter fit inside the axial hole in the follower-carrier which then compresses the spring 16a to a greater extent. The sliding of the
- p.198 - vue 236/901
- - PUNCH-CUTTING.
  - 199
  - follower-carrier in the follower-stem ensures exact proportionate movement of the punch when the axis of the follower-head is inclined to the vertical.
  - The sliding head, fig. 151, is bored and lapped axially with the lower gimbals, and the chuck of hardened steel 19 fits in this hole ; it is prevented from rotating by a ground and lapped feather fitting without shake. On each side of the chuck are distance-pillars 20 shouldered at the top ends to receive the bridge piece 21 carrying the chuck setting-screw. The chuck setting-screw is fitted with a divided wheel; the divisions are figured on the top and milled in the edge as nicks by which a spring latch locks the wheel to the bridge, and each division corresponds to 0'00025 inch of depth. Thus the chuck can be instantly removed, the punch inspected and accurately replaced as the work proceeds. Owing to the high degree of accuracy required, these machines formerly cost some £800 each. The authors recently found, however, that it was possible to
  - FIG. 152.—Roughing or chisel tool for punch-cutting machine.
  - 20 times full size.
  - in ACe this sum considerably, while obtaining the same degree of accuracy, Ter improved punch-cutting machine recently patented.
  - mactle form of milling cutter common to all the different punch-cutting in a nes Described, is shown in fig. 153. It is parallel and about 0’06 inch The me er. The other cutters used are the roughing and finishing cutters.
  - e are of peculiar shape, the four faces being cylindrical; the cutting surf S' which are formed by the intersection of each pair of cylindrical chiseresa are therefore elliptical. In the roughing cutter, which has a small, Pla s Se, fig. 152, two opposite cylindrical faces have their axes in a are ah ’ fferent from that of the other pair. In the finishing cutter the axes obtain one plane and a pointed symmetrical cutter results, fig. 156. To Plate : e cutting edges accurately true to position, a hardened steel rocker-secured used in conjunction with an oilstone slip. The rocker-plate is admit egainst its upper surface in the rocker frame, fig. 154, so as to and fro0 repeated regrinding to flatness. The oilstone slip is moved to Both then the hardened steel surface which is cut away to clear the cutter, lathe-bed rocker and the lathe-heads fit interchangeably on a watchmaker’s the tool : The heads are divided into four divisions, so that each face of can be brought uppermost, and while the oilstone is applied the
- p.199 - vue 237/901
- - 200
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - elevating screw is worked up and down by one finger of the operator, so that the plane of the oilstone is successively tangential to each portion of the cylindrical surface which forms the face of the cutter. To obtain the chisel face of the roughing cutter, the position of the lathe-head relatively
  - Elevation.
  - Plans.
  - I. Rough end milling.
  - Plans.
  - Opr
  - 22
  - 813 — 3
  - 11111 111 11 111 111111
  - 2. Finish end milling.
  - 3. Chisel roughing.
  - 11111 I 1111111111111
  - 8. Chisel milling.
  - I 111 I I 11 If I 1111 UIL
  - 11 1111111 I I 11111111
  - 13. Chisel milling. (Counters commenced.)
  - 19 to 22. Point milling.
  - Plans:
  - 18. Point milling.
  - Fig. 153.—Operations of punch-cutting. About 4 times full size.
  - The figures preceding the titles give the number of the operation performed.
  - to the rocker is varied slightly for two of the opposite faces by inserting a thin distance-piece between the head and the stop on the rocker.
  - The punch is cut in the following manner. Pieces of steel are cut off to a given length, annealed and ground true and square on two adjacent sides and on the end. To save work on the punch-cutting machine the ends of the blanks are rough-milled to certain simple forms, according to the
- p.200 - vue 238/901
- - 201
  - PUNCH-CUTTING.
  - & $
  - Roller
  - Roller
  - 1
  - 3 8
  - & $ %
  - 6
  - 0
  - Fig. 154.—Rocker sharpening appliance for the cutters used on the punch-cutting mac me.
  - 2
  - 6-
  - body of the fount required. The punch is held in the chuck against these true faces of the stem by the pressure of two grub-screws, and then is rubbed down truly flat on an 01 stone, the chuck acting as the stone-facer described above. The first operation in the punch-cutting machine, after setting it to the proper reduction ratio for the fount, is to round the outline to the depth of strike desired ; a follower is used of the proper diameter to prevent the mill cutting away any of the beard. For this operation the parallel end-mi is used.
  - The roughing cutter is next used, and two or three cuts are taken round the periphery 0 the punch; this finishes the beard next to the shoulder. The depth of cut is then reduced
  - pIG 154.—End elevation.
- p.201 - vue 239/901
- - 202 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - and a smaller follower used, the depth, corresponding to each diameter of follower, being obtained from a table which is prepared for each body ; thus a series of approximations are made to the plane face of the beard, fig. 153 elevation. Some twenty-two cuts in all must be taken round the outside of the character, and some of these also inside the counter, the finishing cutter being used at the end of the process in order to obtain the outline at the surface of the punch. Figure 153, operations 8 to 22, plans, shows the path of the point of the cutter at five different depths, while the elevation shows how an approximation to a uniform bevel is obtained. By suitably choosing the distance by which the chisel end is advanced in the
  - Fig. 156.—Point or finishing cutter for punch-cutting machine. 20 times full size.
  - O
  - sharpening, it is possible to obtain a cutting edge which closely approximates to a straight line for a length of about con inch.
  - The steel punch in three states: roughed out with the mill, cut out in the counters, and dressed to give a non-rubbing strike, is shown in fig. 155, plate V.
  - The dimensions of the height of the centre of the lathe and of the rocker being known, the various dimensions of the point cutter shown in fig. 156 can be obtained as follows :—
  - Let the height of the centre of the lathe a = 17464 inches, the height of the centre of the rocker plate c= 1’6145 inches, the height of the rocker-plate top when horizontal b = 17590 inches, and let the minimum inclination from the horizontal, 6, given to the plate when sharpening be the angle n° 10'. This dimension, however, is not really important.
- p.202 - vue 240/901
- - PUNCH-CUTTING.
  - 203
  - Then the details of the point cutter and the position of its vertex in relation to that of a square pyramid having the vertical angle between two opposite faces equal to 0 can be determined as follows :—
  - * the radius of the cylindrical face of the cutter = b— C =01445 inch, d the height of the lathe centre above the rocker centre = a-c = 0’1319 inch, m= «(r2 - d2) = 0’0590 inch, n=r sin n° io' = 0’0280 inch ; hence m—n= 0’0310 inch and
  - m—n+q=(r cos n° 10‘ — d) cot II° 10‘ = 0’0501 inch ;
  - whence q = 0’0191 inch.
  - Fig. 158.—Enlarged view of point as seen in the micrometer microscope.
  - FIG. 157.—Micrometer microscope measurer for position of point of tool. meNOTE—The amount of error introduced by the wear of the sharpening appliance is sured and added to the constants on the table of settings worked to on the machine.
  - The angle • between the tangent plane at the vertex and the horizontal can be found, since tan $= 0 445 ; hence $ = 240 o’ and over the cutting edges tan @= «2 tane; hence 0= 150 30' and tan $= 42 tan $; hence 1=32° 20’.
  - From these particulars it is possible to draw the point of the cutter to arge scale, such as looo times full size, using the dimension q to obtain 6 distance between the vertex of the pyramid formed by the tangent anes and the point of the cutter, and the dimension m — n to obtain the
- p.203 - vue 241/901
- - 204
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - position of the normal section at contact of the tangent planes. The curve can then be treated as an approximation to a parabola and drawn through points obtained by offsets from the tangent; then by taking sections a series of points on the cutting edge of the chisel tool can be obtained.
  - By completing the work it is possible to obtain the conditions giving a form of cutting edge for the chisel tool approximating to a straight line much more closely than could ever be obtained in practice ; and further, the inchnation • of the finishing portion of the cutting edge to the axis can be made such that tan $ = 0'500, or $= 26° 24'.
  - This angle enables all subsequent calculations to be greatly simplified, since the alteration in diameter of the cutter at a given distance from the lathe-stop is equal to the distance that the vertex has receded from its normal position.
  - The authors have designed a bifilar microscope, figs. 157 and 158, for the purpose of comparing the position of the cutter point after sharpening, with the normal position which it should occupy, the one hair of the field of the microscope retaining its normal position and the movement of the micrometer cross-hair giving the correction for the table of settings.
  - The finished punch must be examined under the microscope to see that no error has been made in the cutting. The next operations are hardening and tempering. These do not appreciably distort the character itself, but they introduce errors of three kinds into the punch, and these would prevent it being held perfectly true in the striking-press. The face becomes out of square to each of the originally true sides, and the fine is no longer square to these sides. To justify the punch, a small vice, swung on gimbals, has been designed, the two movements of inclination being each operated by a separate micrometer screw. To use the vice the errors of the punch are measured on two adjustable squares, in each of which the face of the punch is set true by a micrometer screw giving identical readings for the same angles as those operating the vice adjustments respectively. The swing vice is secured to the table of an ordinary surface-grinding machine, and one side of the stem of the punch is ground true to the face. The next side is similarly treated, and the depth of cut taken is so arranged as to justify the character relatively to these two sides. The trueing up of the remaining two sides to size then requires no special skill, a batch of punches being ground up together on a magnetic chuck.
  - Other improvements in punch-cutting machinery were brought out by Mark Barr for the English Linotype Company about the year 1900. His machine shows some useful and important improvements upon the earlier form of punch-cutter. Ball-bearings and ball-slides were used for ensuring optical contact without friction ; this was the method introduced by this able inventor after extensive tests made for the Linotype Company in which it was proved that the failures of many instruments of precision were due to the presence of an oil-film between the surfaces.
  - A device which is specially noteworthy, in connexion with the tool-
- p.204 - vue 242/901
- - PLATE V.
  - counter and finished.
  - ------
  - Imo. el mwowub
  - Fig. 159.—Barr or Linotype punch-cutter.
  - [To face page 204.
- pl.5 - vue 243/901
- - PLATE VI.
  - "-3.5
  - CASE R1
  - 7
  - Neseemeree
  - 0
  - Fig. 160.—Barr or Linotype punch-cutter; details.
  - To face plate VII.
- pl.6 - vue 244/901
- - PLATE VII.
  - 1., •SLut
  - Fig. 161.—Barr or Linotype automatic cutter-grinder.
  - [To face plate VI.
- pl.7 - vue 245/901
- - PLATE VIII.
  - Fig. 162.—Pierpont or Monotype punch-cutter.
  - To face page 205.]
- pl.8 - vue 246/901
- - PUNCH-CUTTING.
  - 205
  - feed micrometer, is a microphonic attachment with a telephone circuit 50 arranged that the operator can adjust the position of the tool to 0'00003 inch. By means of the microphone, it is claimed that the newly-ground tools can easily be put into the exact position of the tools that preceded them, and further, that the operators can use the device in order to listen to the cutting operation of the tool, and consequently the progress of the cutting can be followed by the operators as easily as the progress of work on big and heavy machines can be followed by listening to the sound of the cutting tool. The grinding of the tools also received Attention at the same hands, and an automatic tool-grinder was produced for grinding the tool-form to shape. The influence of the shape of tool-form on the alteration in the setting numbers was also investigated by Mark Barr, who prepared graphical diagrams to facilitate the establishment of tables of setting numbers for any desired ratio of reduction, the mathematics of the subject were carefully dealt with by the same authority, and a form of tool was adopted which is substantially the same as that adopted by the authors and shown by them in fig. 156.
  - The machine is illustrated in figs. 159, plate V and 160, plate VI, and the automatic cutter-grinder is shown in fig. 161, plate VII.
  - A great amount of inventive skill has been devoted to the design of Punch-cutting machines intended to operate in the same manner as the engraving machines used for the reproduction of medallions, busts, and other relief surfaces ; that is to say, having controlled movements in three dimensions instead of in only two dimensions. By means of a suitably-tapered tracing point, a former of sufficient depth, and a cutting tool which is an exact reproduction on a reduced scale of the shape of the tracing point, it is possible, by properly-designed mechanism, to adjust the depth of the cut of the tool by the depth to which the tracing point is carried on the former or model, and in this way it is hoped that a continuous cutting operation can be performed in the counters and the crotches of the letters instead of cutting a succession of contours as is the case in punch-cutting machines. The introduction of this third system of linear movement into the construction of the machine is one, however, which results in an amount of complication Altogether disproportionate to the small advantages which might be gained. The engineering and mechanical difficulties involved in making A punch-cutting machine to work in two dimensions only, with six interchangeable lathe-heads all capable of working to a total error of 0 00025 inch when used in conjunction with each other, is sufficient to deter those who have had much personal experience in the operation of these machines from undertaking any further introduction of gimbals, slides, or adjustments.
  - The Monotype or Pierpont punch-cutting machine, a front view of which is shown in fig. 162, plate VIII, is designed upon the same general principle as the Benton-Waldo, the common ancestor of all punch-cutting machines, but modified and improved so as to obtain a greatei
- p.205 - vue 247/901
- - 206 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - output with less-skilled labour. The formers, like those of the authors, are made with the letters properly placed relatively to their exterior, so as to produce a punch with a correctly-located face and one which will consequently require the minimum of justification ; the definite positioning of the former is obtained by means of a triangular projection from the side clamping piece, which engages with a notch of corresponding shape and size in the side of the former when this is clamped in place. The set of followers required for a particular size is carried in a holder which rotates step by step as each follower is used. The micrometer head by which the punch is raised after each cut has been made, is constructed with peripheral notches to receive a spring-pin, these notches being placed at the correct angles to correspond both to the ratio of reduction for which the machine is set, and to the follower to be used for the cut ; consequently it is only necessary to move the index-plate one notch for each change of follower.
  - The graduations of the adjusting collar are made in terms of maximum gauge, from the top of the highest ascender to the bottom of the lowest descender of the face ; the micrometer head index-plate and the set of followers are changed for each change of reduction ratio.
  - The finish of the punch is determined by examination of the tool after the cutting is completed. If the edges of the tool are perfect it can be assumed that the work is correct.
  - In order to make it possible to produce founts in which the set width is proportionately increased or diminished throughout, while the body-size remains constant, a compensating device is used. The tools are ground on a special appliance, diamond dust being used for finishing them; as is usual in such operations, the tools are measured under the microscope before being put to work.
  - The punch-cutting machine, shown in fig. 163, plate IX, designed and patented in 1910 by the authors, is in daily use for the production of commercial punches; it differs in important essentials from any of those described. Considerable experience in the construction and working of Benton-Waldo machines had made it clear that the chief sources of loss of time in operating were due to the position of the micrometer adjustment for the depth of cut, the difficulty of reading the setting of the wheel controlling this position, the absence of suitable arrangements for positioning the formers on the table, and the want of uniformity in the ratio of change of size of the tracing points. Further waste of time in operating these machines arose from the difficulty presented by the mode of securing the bridge-bar of the micrometer for setting the chuck, and the impossibility of examining the work while in progress.
  - In the machine designed and built by the authors the chuck is fitted on the point, line and plane system, so that one of the most costly features of the Benton-Waldo chuck, namely the extremely accurate fitting of the key and key-way, upon which the position of the chuck largely depends, is superseded by a far simpler and equally accurate method.
- p.206 - vue 248/901
- - PUNCH-CUTTING.
  - 207
  - The micrometer screw is placed alongside the chuck, the axes of both being parallel, and the nut, working on the micrometer screw, is cut with helical teeth and is controlled by a helical wheel carried on a horizontal spindle working in bearings fixed to the sliding head of the machine. The end of this spindle is provided with a graduated wheel of large diameter, and is so placed that the divisions to be read are directly in front of the eye of the operator. This enables the work to be carried on continuously by the operator without necessitating his rising from his seat for the purpose of looking down through the gimbal-rings at a small divided setting-wheel carried above the chuck head in a position somewhat difficult of access.
  - In the authors’ machine special attention has been given to the accurate Positioning of the formers on the table. This has become of greater importance now that the faces are almost without exception cut to standard line, which necessitates a change of position of the former relatively to the centre of the body on which the character will fall in different sizes.
  - Moreover, for certain reasons connected with the positioning of the punches in the striking process and the fact that a standard allowance °f side bearing is made in the matrices, it is necessary to provide accurate position of the face relatively to two faces of the punch-blank. The one set of conditions produces an irregular effect upon the alteration of position of the former or model, whereas the other set of conditions produces a proportionate change of position on the bed of the machine in order to keep that portion of the punch-blank, corresponding to the body-size required, in its proper relative position with respect to the two trued faces of the punch-blank. To enable the machine to deal with these conditions, the table is made recessed with a system of packing-pieces and vice-jaws, thus allowing the former to be placed accurately into the required position for the particular body-size for which the punch is to be cut. Special Provision is made for cutting accented characters by fitting an extra pair of vice-jaws for securing the separate former carrying the accent. Squares are fitted to the machine for the transference of the standard line from ordinary characters to accented characters, and squares are also provided of a novel form, with transparent blades ruled with lines, for enabling the sides of the punch to be milled as closely as may be desired to the periphery of the character when the punches are required for the production of non-dressing matrices or machine matrices similar in style to those used in the Monotype machine.
  - It may be here remarked that when all punches were cut by hand it was the practice to use the capitals of one fount as the small capitals for another, but under modern manufacturing conditions this has proved to be a mistaken economy.
  - The want of uniformity in the ratio in change of size of the followers or tracing points caused some irregularity in the appearance of work cut
- p.207 - vue 249/901
- - CD o NT
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - from the same former in different body-sizes. The authors adopted a system of followers in which the sizes increase uniformly from the smallest to the largest in geometrical progression. In order to examine the work in progress, in the Benton-Waldo machine, it was necessary to slack back the two screws securing the bridge-bar and to lift the chuck and bridge-bar clear of the machine. It also required considerable skill to machine out the counters properly with this arrangement for securing the chuck. To examine the work, it was necessary to remove the chuck, with the punch in place in it, to the bench and to examine it under a microscope. In the improved machine a microscope with a reflector and electric illumination is so arranged that under normal conditions it is swung on pivots to one side clear of the machine, but when it is required to examine the work it can be brought round against a stop, in doing which it automatically switches on the electric current necessary for illuminating the object, and the eyepiece comes into such a position that the operator can examine the face of the work without leaving his seat. The method of securing the chuck is also simplified ; the chuck is held in place against the micrometer by a spring-bolt controlled by a grip-handle which enables the chuck to be released instantly and removed from the machine when desired, without the necessity involved on the Benton-Waldo machine of slacking the two bridge-screws. In addition to the machine being more substantially constructed throughout, there are other minor advantages all tending to the increased comfort and convenience of the operator and therefore to greater output.
  - Formers.—The genesis of the former is to be sought in the somewhat primitive plant used for the production of wooden type. In the manufacture of wooden type, model letters were, in the first instance, drawn for all the characters on cardboard, and these were then neatly cut out to serve for patterns. Later, sheet-brass patterns were used instead of these cards, and after them came cast-brass patterns with elevated edges.
  - The first formers for the Benton-Waldo machine known to the authors, and indeed, the formers still generally used in that machine, are produced by electrotyping in the following manner. Type-metal plates of equal and uniform thickness are coated with a wax composition which is shaved off on a machine to the thickness required for the raised portion of the letter. The character is drawn on paper to an enlarged scale, and reduced by means of a pantograph, the tool of which is lowered so as to pierce the wax and push its way through it, the first tracks which it makes being kept a small distance away from the finished line. After the character has been roughed out the vertical wax surfaces are rubbed true by going round the enlarged letter with the outside of the tracer pin touching the line on the drawing. The burr on the wax is dressed off on the shaving machine ; the wax is examined and any holes or defects made good; it is then black-leaded and electrolytically coated with copper to a thickness of
- p.208 - vue 250/901
- - PLATE IX.
  - Fig. 163.—Grant-Legros punch-cutter.
  - A
  - N
  - R
  - O
  - U)
  - P
  - R
  - E S S
  - R 0 S
  - L
  - E
  - G
  - P R 0 C E S S
  - [To face page 208.
- pl.9 - vue 251/901
- - PLATE X.
  - Fig. 164.—Barr or Linotype direct-cutting pantograph for formers.
  - M
  - Hue
  - (
  - (a) The hard-brass plates before hydraulic soldering.
  - (b) After cutting and riveting through letter.
  - (c) The finished pattern.
  - FIG. 165.—Linotype ; production of former ; Barr’s process.
  - To face page 209.]
- pl.10 - vue 252/901
- - PUNCH-CUTTING. 209
  - about 0'03 inch. The copper shell is removed by melting out the wax, its rough edges are trimmed, and it is then tinned inside and filled with lead. The filled formers are milled off on the back to thickness, and squared up on the justified edges so that the character is truly in place relatively to these edges.
  - The authors understand, on excellent authority, that formers in the Mergenthaler Linotype Company’s Works in Brooklyn, New York, are made on a somewhat different system.
  - A blank of plaster composition, similar to that used for engraving in certain line-engraving processes, is cut away by a revolving cutter carried on the pantograph, the tracer pin of which is caused to follow the outline of an enlarged drawing previously prepared. The plaster blank so cut is then placed in a mould and a cast made from it in type-metal, this cast, produced under conditions comparable with those obtaining in a type-foundry, or rather in stereotyping, requires but little, if any, treatment before it can be used on the table of the machine.
  - The English Linotype Company has adopted a process invented by Mark Barr. In tlus process two strips of special brass, accurately drawn and milled to size, are soldered together with a special solder, of low melting-point, of which cadmium forms an important constituent. The soldering is performed under hydraulic pressure so as to avoid heating the brass unduly and thereby impairing the good cutting-quality for which it is specially selected. The milling cutter, carried on a pantograph of exceptionally substantial construction, fig. 164, plate X, is used to follow the outlines of the character which is enlarged from twenty to two-hundred times full size. After the outline of the character has been milled round, with the result that the removal of the superfluous metal would leave the character in relief on the backing-plate, holes are drilled through this relief and the backing-plate, and the relief is riveted to the backing-plate to Prevent change of position in the subsequent operation. It is essential, in the cutting operation, for the point of the cutter to penetrate the solder Without going beyond, so that on gently warming the plates the character remains in place as a relief and the superfluous metal, becoming detached, can be removed, fig. 165, plate X.
  - To obtain the requisite accuracy of rotation of the cutting tool, and to maintain this accuracy under the condition of the high speed at which it was necessary for the tool to rotate, a special form of cutter head was devised by Mark Barr in which tractrix bearings were used. The Peculiar property of wearing uniformly over the length of the bearing Possessed by the surface generated by the rotation of a tractrix about its axis proved effective in use and enabled the cutter heads to run, practically, without repair. It should be noted that this result was obtained by this sifted inventor by means of a novel and highly ingenious appliance for Originating an extremely close approximation to a true tractrix curve.
  - The Monotype, the Typograph, the Monoline, and the Victorline
  - P
- p.209 - vue 253/901
- - 210
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - companies, who are or were all large producers and users of formers so far as is known to the authors, employ the old Benton-Waldo electrotyping methods already described.
  - The American Type Founders Company, though employing the old electrotyping method for the production of their formers, make use of a rather interesting form of enlarging pantograph with a microscopic attachment. Directly beneath the field of the microscope is a small bed-plate or holder on which the character to be copied is secured. The point of intersection of the cross-hairs of the microscope, having been focussed on the outline of the character, is made to follow it, with the result that the pencil point of the extension arm of the machine reproduces the character as an enlarged drawing. The bed of the holder which carries the original character can be swivelled to any angle with the plane of the pantograph, by which means the style of the letter can be changed to extended or condensed. This machine is stated to have a range of production from o-point to 96-point.
  - The pantograph used by the American Type Founders Company in the cutting and making ready of their waxes as a preliminary to the electrotyping process differs from those already described. In it the wax-coated plate is held in a horizontal position at the top of the machine. Immediately under the tracing needle, which works on the face of the wax plate in an inverted position, is a mirror to enable the operator to follow the movements of the needle while copying the outlines.
  - Cement formers.—A new process for making formers, patented by the authors, may be briefly described as follows :—
  - A pantograph is used to trace from the enlarged drawing, and its work is facilitated for the operator by the use of a series of specially-designed curves of the form of logarithmic spirals, fig. 167. These curves are also used in the preparation of the enlarged drawings. Each of these drafting curves is made to fit the drawing and to reproduce it
  - Fig. 166.—Grant-Legros former.
  - either concave or convex, as may be desired. A series of logarithmic spirals of gradually-increasing obliquity is drawn, and the curves either used as single lengths or subdivided into two or more lengths for convenience of handling. Each of these sections is marked with a distinctive reference letter. Each of the curves is graduated along its length, and, by a well-known property of the logarithmic spiral, the division of the curves into a series of equal parts will give the radius at each point so marked. By combining two or more of these curves on a drawing, any desired degree of approximation to an existing curve can be obtained : and, by writing against points on any curve so drawn, the reference letter taken from the curve used and the radius at that point obtained from the graduation on the edge of the curve, it is possible, without loss of time, to select and place correctly the curve in
- p.210 - vue 254/901
- - PUNCH-CUTTING.
  - 211
  - question either on the inside or the outside, as may be desired, when using the tracing point of the pantograph.
  - A further advantage arising from the use of these curves is the facility which they afford for enlarging or reducing any curved figure proportionately; this is a property which is of great value in preparing those formers of similar shape but larger size used for the lower-case sorts °f the smaller bodies.
  - The curves used by the authors are graduated to correspond to the scale used on their drawings, so that a truly rational system of working
  - fig. 167.—Grant-Legros logarithmic spiral curves.
  - 200
  - 09
  - 250
  - 200
  - %
  - os
  - with curves is obtained, with the result that an unskilled opera or, y merely following instructions, can reproduce the original curve wi ou trial and error, and consequently at much greater speed. By t e use 0 Pantograph and of these curves, an intaglio letter is rapidly cut into a layer of wax previously cast on a glass or metal plate of true square form. The interior of the counters is removed from the characters, and the wax, which, unlike that used in the previously-described processes, is a homogeneous Substance, is planed true and finished. The glass or metal plate with the finished wax is then placed into a wooden or metal frame surrounded by Parallel prisms of glass, or metal, ground accurately to shape and locked
- p.211 - vue 255/901
- - 212
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - up in the frame. Carefully-gauged cement composition is then placed in the cell so formed, and shaken down into the corners of the lines by mechanical agitation. When this has been done the former is allowed to set. It is then removed from the locking frame, placed face downwards on two parallel slips of metal supported on a flat surface in such manner that the relief of the character does not rest on the slips or on the supporting surface. Two other packing-slips of greater thickness and of the appropriate size are placed one on each side of the former. Plaster composition in a fluid form is then poured on to the back of the former and, before the composition has time to set, a slab of oiled or soaped glass is pressed on the plastic mass until it comes into contact with the packing-slips. On setting, the glass is removed and any projecting composition trimmed off, no skilled accuracy on the part of the operator being required for this. The result is that the former obtained is accurate for dimensions, position, and thickness relatively to those faces by which it is secured against the stop-pieces on the table of the punch-cutting machine. Though, from the description of the various processes employed, the manufacture of these formers may seem long, yet the individual operations take each but a short time to perform, and the total time and material involved in obtaining the complete former are very considerably less than those required for the production of a former having the necessary accuracy, by any of the other processes known to the authors. .
  - All formers should be produced so that they are justified relatively to two sides corresponding to the trued sides of the punch-blank which bear against the interior faces of the chuck on the punch-cutting machine. The height adopted for the character in formers is usually from 0’06 inch to o‘08 inch, but the same standard must be retained throughout, as it is the upper face of the former which actually determines the ratio of reduction. The base of the former when electrotyped is about 0’010 inch thick when finished after filling with type-metal or lead.
  - In the case of accented sorts, owing to the limited area available for placing the former on the table of the Benton-Waldo machine, in which but little provision is made for adjustment, the upper part of the character-former is cut away and the accent-former is made on a narrower strip of metal so that it can be correctly placed on the bed of the machine. Special narrow accent-formers are required for the i owing to its small set width. A blank piece of equal size to the accent-strip is required for the production of the non-accented sorts. With the exception of those required for the i the accents can be made interchangeable.
  - A few of the formers, such as the mathematical signs, can be conveniently made on ordinary machine-tools out of two thicknesses of metal riveted together, but for the majority one of the other methods described is generally employed.
  - In the case of the cement formers used in the authors’ process, these have the same height of the character above the base, namely, 0'08 inch,
- p.212 - vue 256/901
- - PUNCH-CUTTING.
  - 213
  - but the thickness of the base including the plaster backing is 0’5 inch. In this case the formers for accented letters are not made smaller than the standard size, but the position of the character is altered so as to come near the top of its former and the accent is correspondingly placed at the bottom of its former which is also of standard size.
  - For some purposes it is required to use the punch-cutting machine for engraving, as, for example, in cutting out hollow punches or engraving the drags for moulds or other similar work. In this case the formers are so made that the character or design appears on them in intaglio and the whole of the surrounding surface is of the height of the top of the character in the normal form.
  - Pantograph.—The drawing of the character is usually made five times the size of the former to be produced from it, and carries lines corresponding to the edges of the former when finished ; it is fixed in position on the table of the pantograph by reference to these fines. The tracing pin of the pantograph is a plain cylindrical pin, and the tool which develops the character in the wax is also a plain cylindrical pin having the same ratio of diameter to the tracing pin as the ratio of reduction of the pantograph. It is essential that the pantograph should be free from back-lash in all its joints, that it should be extremely rigid, and that the lengths of the arms should be equal so that no distortion is introduced into the design. It is also necessary that the marking point should be capable of being raised above the upper surface of the wax blank and lowered again whenever required . this can be done in a simple manner by means of an arrangement of jointed shafts operated by a handle carried on the panto-Sraph arm adjacent to the tracing point.
  - Drawings.—The drawings of the characters are usually made to a scale Tom 20 to 100 times the size of the character to be produced. For simplicity in working, it is well to adopt the principle of producing the drawings of such size that they represent the character either enlarged, or reduced, to a pica or 12-point body. By this means one style of drawing-Paper can be prepared suitable for all sizes of type, the alterations from S1ze to size being effected by calculating the dimensions, with but little effort, by means of the slide-rule.
  - The drawing-paper used by the authors is of special quality and selected r its small coefficient of alteration of size under varying conditions of nempness. It is lithographed with horizontal and vertical scales and with nes corresponding to the exterior of the former blanks and of the type
  - V according to scale. Furthermore, two of the vertical lines are marked with points which show the position which the standard line would occupy when the body to which it refers is enlarged to correspond with its fo 0101106 lines on the drawing, fig. 168. When the range for which the th mer is required to be used is known, the highest and lowest positions of ine line can be ascertained from these marks ; whether the face is to be cut n all or only in the even sizes has to be taken into account. From this
- p.213 - vue 257/901
- - 214
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - range it is possible to obtain directly the amount of allowance which it is necessary to make at the top of the former and at the bottom, respectively, when preparing the drawing, so that the character when finished does not come too close to the back or front of the body.
  - The preliminary work of obtaining the dimensions of the particular face or character which is being reproduced or designed consists in the production of rough sketches of the letters, with dimensions, giving thicknesses of the strokes, amounts of side-wall, lengths of serifs, and such other details as may be necessary. Where an existing face is being reproduced, the authors find it best to use the bifilar microscope, with two cross-slides for carrying the object type, as affording the most accurate and direct
  - Fig. 168.—Grant-Legros process ; enlarged drawing of character.
  - 1°4 seco
  - means of obtaining the data required. By the use of the double micrometer slide carrying the type, the question of spherical aberration in the micro-scope is, of course, eliminated, but the bifilar micrometer can be used without sensible error for independently measuring the thicknesses of strokes and other small peculiarities simultaneously with the taking of the main dimensions. So far as the authors can ascertain, they are alone in using this method. Others working in this field use optical devices that give enlargements of the character which are of necessity neither exact nor sharp in outline. These require further correction by skilful manipulators to standardize the resulting drawing for gauge, thickness of stroke, form of character and position to be ultimately occupied on the body of the type to be produced.
- p.214 - vue 258/901
- - PUNCH-CUTTING. 215
  - The hand and size of the character as compared to 12-point body varies through these and the following operations thus :—
  - I. Drawing inverted . . . . 90 times full size.
  - 2. Wax former mould . inverted . . . . 18 „
  - 3- Former .... erect . . . . 18 ,, ,,
  - 4- Punch .... inverted . . . . natural size.
  - 5- Matrix .... erect . . . . J, »)
  - 6. Type .... inverted . . . . 3) »)
  - 7- Printing. erect . . . .
  - The ratio of reduction in the punch-cutting machine is, of course, greater for the smaller bodies, thus for 8-point the former is 24 times full size, while for 6-point it is 36 times full size.
  - In the case of newspapers and many books two more reversals occur, between the operations numbered 6 and 7 above: a mould in flong, which somewhat resembles papier mache, is taken from the type and then a stereotype is cast from the mould thus produced.
- p.215 - vue 259/901
- - CHAPTER XIII.
  - MATRICES.
  - “Therefore to proceed Methodically, he first slightly Files down the Bunchings out that the Punch made in the Sides of the Matrice . . .”
  - Moxon’s Mechanick Exercises.
  - 10-point Cheltenham bold expanded (American Type Founders Co.).
  - Matrices, which may be defined as the depression formed in the piece of metal that serves as the end of the mould in which type is cast, would, prior to the advent of the modern typecasting and composing machine, have been comparatively simple to describe. Now, however, owing to the requirements of these machines, the subject has been rendered much more complex, for not only has the conformation of the matrix changed, but in many instances the very material which was primarily used in its production has been replaced by alloys and metals more intractable than the original copper. To this complexity of material has also been added complexity of shape.
  - The finest matrices known to the authors are made of solid rolled nickel with the character impressed by machine-cut punches ; but matrices, slightly inferior, and of a somewhat less reliable description, are sometimes made by depositing nickel electrolytically to the full thickness of the matrix, or to a lesser thickness subsequently backed up with copper. Matrices are also sometimes made with the strike portion of nickel let into a copper bar. Most of the composing-machine matrices are stamped in sheet brass, not always of a very high quality ; others are stamped in a tough bronze, into the composition of which aluminium sometimes enters. Instances of these are to be found among machines of the linotype and monotype classes. Some composing machines have a composite matrix of steel and nickel or bronze, an instance of which is afforded by the Grantype. The commonest forms of matrix, namely, those used in simple typecasting machines, are made of copper, rolled or deposited ; the electrolytic deposition of copper not presenting the same difficulties as that of nickel. Matrices for rubber 216
- p.216 - vue 260/901
- - MATRICES.
  - H
  - type are sometimes made of aluminium ; for instance those used for the Addressograph. Matrices have even been and still are produced from soft iron by means of hydraulic pressure. Papier mache or flong has also been used for the manufacture of matrices. Many of the impression class of machines use this material, which, of course, is used on a large scale in the production of curved plates for cylinder printing-presses ; these flong matrices are known to the trade as moulds. It would be difficult to enumerate all the materials used for moulds or matrices, the list extending from wood, horn shavings, slate dust, steatite, sodium silicate, and plaster of Paris, to earthenware, porcelain, and various sulphur compounds. In fact, man’s ingenuity has ranged the whole realm of nature to press materials into his service for the purpose. Some of the patents taken out in connexion with this matter are perhaps among the most curious within the entire range of the subject of curious patents.
  - The early matrices were struck with a punch, fig. 146, p. 195, which had its edges bevelled all round at more or less equal angles usually not very constant, because in performing the work of cutting the punch by hand the engraver was apt to reduce the angle of slope when approaching the finished line. Type cast in such matrices had a projection on both sides, fig. 15, p- 19, and in the case of capitals, or ascenders, one at the back, and in the case of descenders, one at the front, all of which required to be dressed off before they could be used for composition. The first dressing operations were performed by rubbing down the type by hand on a rubbing-file, which was a large surface of steel, measuring about 14 inches by 2 inches by 1 inch thick and cut with teeth like a float. The subsequent dressing operations were performed by mounting the type in lines in a dressing-bench and taking a cut along those sides from which metal required to be removed, as already described. This, of course, could not be done with the two projections sidewise of the type unless any top and bottom projections had previously been removed, because such type could not be locked up in the dressing-rod.
  - A step taken to get over this difficulty was that introduced a good many years ago by Caslon, who machined off the two sides of the matrix to the set width of the type to be cast, and then made up the sides with Packing-pieces of the correct width for the side-bearing required, riveting the three pieces of metal together to form the complete matrix. In any such operation in which the metal forming the matrix is subjected to subse-quent hammering, it is of course necessary that the justification should be completed after the work of riveting has been performed.
  - Only at a much later date was it discovered that instead of removing the excess of type-metal by a subsequent dressing operation, it was possible to produce non-dressing matrices by grinding away those parts of the punch which, if left, formed these parts of the depressions containing the excess of metal. A difficulty introduced by so grinding the punches is that certain sorts are rendered very liable to break owing to the pressure exerted from the interior by the matrix-metal in flowing into its final form. One
- p.217 - vue 261/901
- - 00 of
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - of the essentials of good matrix-metal is that it should flow properly in striking; bad striking metal will not give the proper depth of counters, as shown in fig. 169, nor will it give a strike fitting the punch so closely as to permit of casting non-dressing type. This quality of flowing under
  - Fig. 169. — Bad striking metal: section. Scale: 5 times full size.
  - local pressure is analogous to that required in other stamping and pressing operations of which cartridge-case making is an example. The difficulty of broken punches arose largely from the depth of strike usual and necessary under the old conditions of printing, which depended upon the old method of inking, and to a certain extent upon the fact that in the early days of printing nearly every printer was his own ink manufacturer, and
  - frequently not very expert at the business.
  - The balls used for printing were made of circular pieces of pelt or leather stuffed with wool and nailed to the ball-stocks. In preparing these, the printer had to perform even the currier’s work of dressing the hide to a suitable surface and softness. In an old pressman’s directions, quoted in Savage’s " Dictionary of the Art of Printing,” we find the following :—
  - " Making Balls is a nasty job : there is an old proverb in the trade, that ‘ the devil would have been a pressman, if there were no Balls to make ; ’ that is, the printer’s devil.”
  - It will be obvious that the surface was rough and inaccurate, and, when coated with ink of unequal consistency would tend to fill any cavities of shallow depth in type ; that this was the case may be found from the care given to keeping these balls in what was considered proper condition. In relation to this matter, Moxon in his work gives " Ball-knife.—An old blunt-edg’d Knife, that Pressmen lay by, to scrape their Balls with.”
  - DEPTH OF STRIKE.
  - The modern conditions of inking, in which composition rollers are used for picking up a finely-ground and evenly-mixed ink from a true metal surface, are of course totally different; and it is more largely a question of the surface of the paper than one of the printing-surface which decides the quality of the impression. Thus it is found in practice that a depth of strike of only 0'02 inch is adequate for the bulk of newspaper work, and even less depth is common in the process and half-tone blocks printed on a high-surface, or, as it is frequently called, art paper. The depth of strike of ordinary matrices varies as shown in table 41.
  - In consequence of the care now expended on the punch, the actual impression made in the matrix when the punch is struck is practically as accurate as the punch when the mass of the matrix-metal is large, but in some cases the metal in the centre of the strike rises under the action of the
- p.218 - vue 262/901
- - MATRICES.
  - 219
  - internal stresses caused by striking, with the result that the character when cast is hollow in the face. This difficulty may be dealt with successfully,
  - TABLE 41.
  - Depth of strike of ordinary matrices.
  - 1 he height of moulds here given includes allowance for contraction.
  - Typefounder or matrix manufacturer. Body-size. Height of mould. Depth of strike. Depth of counter.
  - H. W. Caslon & Co., Ltd. Points. 6 to 12 3 18 to 72 2 Inch. from 0-886 to 0 860 from o’86o to 0’832 Inch. from 0'034 to o’o6o from 0’060 to 0088 Inch. from 0'012 to 0'024 from 0 026 to 0060
  - Miller & Richard 6 to 12 3 18 to 72 3 from 0 882 to o’86o from o’86o to 0’806 from 0 038 to 0 060 from o’o6o to 0114 from o’oio to 0’022 from 0'022 to 0’062
  - Stephenson, Blake & Co. 6 to 12 3 18 to 72 3 from 0’888 to 0’869 from 0’868 to 0’827 from 0'032 to 0’051 from 0’052 to 0'093 from 0’012 to 0'025 from 0'025 to o’o6o
  - R. H. Stevens & Co., late V. & J. Figgins 6 to 12 3 ( from 0’885 to 0’875 from 0’035 to 0-045 from O’OIO to 0'023
  - P. M. Shanks & Sons, Ltd. 6 to 18 3 24 to 30 from 0’885 to o’86o o’860 from 0'035 to 0 060 0060 from O’OIO to 0'030 0’040
  - The Blackfriars Type Foundry, Ltd. American Type Founders Co. 6 to 18 0’880 0’040 0’020
  - 6 to 12 3 18 24 to 72 3 0’887 0’878 0-856 from 0’847 to 0’832 from 0’033 to 0 042 0'066 from 0’073 to o’o88 from 0’015 to 0'023 0'042 from 0'020 to 0’070
  - Grant, Legros & Co., Ltd. up to 6 7 to 14 16 to 30 36 to 72 0’8865 0’878 0-8615 0’842 0-0335 0’0420 0-0585 0’078 from O’OIO to 0’020 from O’OIO to 0020 from O’OIO to 0’030 from 0-035 to o’o8o
  - Nuernberger-Rettig —- 5 to 14 18 to 48 0’890 O’860 0’030 0’060
  - ln some cases, by drilling a hole transversely in the matrix-blank below the centre of the strike, as shown at a in fig. 177.
- p.219 - vue 263/901
- - 220
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - FORMS OF TYPE-MATRICES.
  - The form of the matrices varies greatly with the machine in which they are used ; the simplest form, generally of copper, is that shown in fig. 170,
  - Fig. 171.— Nuernberger-
  - Rettig matrix. Enlarged.
  - Fig. 172.—Bhisotype matrix. Full size.
  - Fig. 170.—Ordinary matrix. Full size.
  - Fig. 173.—Barth matrix. Enlarged.
  - /W O
  - Fig. 174.—Wicks matrix. Full size.
  - Fig. 175.—Foucher matrix. Enlarged.
  - /
  - and is used in the ordinary typecasting machine for casting one character at a time.
  - The matrices of the Nuernberger-Rettig typecaster, fig. 171, and of
- p.220 - vue 264/901
- - MATRICES.
  - 221
  - the Bhisotype machine, fig. 172, are struck in rectangular blocks of copper or other metal.
  - The Barth matrix shown in fig. 173 is an example of a matrix produced °n a matrix-engraving machine; the flat top of the counter of the n, in the example shown, is machined parallel to but below the bearing surface of the matrix.
  - The Wicks matrix, fig. 174, is struck in the end of a stem of brass which is machined all over as described on p. 234 et seq. The matrix is provided with a steel jacket secured to it by two screws and is fitted with a hardened steel screw for setting the height-to-paper of the character to be cast. =
  - The Foucher matrix, fig. 175, is almost identical with the ordinary English matrix, except that the strike is placed more nearly central to the length. In France it is usual to justify the matrix for depth of strike only and not for line and set; im
  - contrary to English and American experience it is considered L__
  - Fig. 177.— Monotype matrix.
  - Full size.
  - FIG. 176.—Thompson matrix. Enlarged.
  - Fig. 178.—Monotype, large-work matrix. Full size.
  - desirable to trust to the judgment of the typefounder to correct for possible Wear of the matrix.
  - The Thompson matrix, fig. 176, is produced by electrotyping to fill a cavity provided in a brass plate fitted in place on the fusible or master type. The internal edges of the cavity are bevelled to ensure the retention of the stereotyped deposit and prevent its withdrawal from the body of the matrix by adhesion to the type when in use.
  - The Monotype matrix, fig. 177, is struck in the end of a small block of bronze of square section. The form of the Monotype large-work matrix is rectangular, with two opposite corners bevelled off for registering in the die case as shown in fig. 178.
- p.221 - vue 265/901
- - 222 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The Dyotype matrix, fig. 179, is of trapezoidal shape, and has semicircular grooves on two of the opposite sides for the retaining pins which lock the matrices in place in the matrix-wheel of the machine. The strike occupies a position on the outer surface of the wheel so built up.
  - The Linotype matrix, fig. 180, is struck in the edge of a sheet brass stamping, and in its simplest form the matrix carries one strike only.
  - Fig. 179.—Dyotype ; single matrix for fifty divisions. Full size.
  - Fig. 180.—Linotype; single-letter matrix. Full size.
  - Fig. 181.—Linotype; two-letter matrix for upper magazine of English machine. Full size.
  - Cross Section.
  - In this case the strike is comparatively shallow, and only 0’025 inch in depth; it is struck at the bottom of a routing 0’050 inch deep in the English matrices, so that the routing and strike together give a depth of 0’075 inch.
  - The Linotype two-letter matrix, fig. 181, carries two strikes, each at the bottom of a routing of the same depth as in the single-letter matrix. In
  - Fig. 182.—Linotype; rule-block matrix.
  - the majority of cases the two strikes are of the same character, but of different style of face, or are italic and roman, respectively.
  - When used on double-magazine or multiple-magazine Linotype machines, a means is provided for separating the different founts of matrices, prior to the operation of distributing them into the different magazine channels, by the use of a supplementary nick or nicks at the foot of the matrix, corresponding to the different magazines, as shown in fig. 181.
- p.222 - vue 266/901
- - MATRICES.
  - 223
  - Since the nick arrangement at the top of the Linotype matrix is symmetrical, a further modification of the matrix is possible in the form known as the Janus or two-faced matrix, in which both front and back of the matrix carry casting strikes.
  - The Linotype rule-block matrix, fig. 182, is made in one piece, to be dropped by hand into the raceway; it is spaced out at each end so as to centre on the slug to be cast. It is struck either with a plain rule or with one of numerous ornamental rules.
  - The Linotype vertical figure tabular matrix, fig. 183.—This form of matrix is used for tabular work, and the figures are struck into the matrix at right angles to the normal position : the matrix is used for setting up columnar work, the compositor reading the column from top to bottom and the slug produced being inserted into the matter at right angles to the
  - Fig. 184.—Linotype; slot-rule matrix. Full size.
  - DLLLLLLLLLLLL
  - FIG. 183.—Linotype; vertical figure tabular matrix. Full size.
  - Fig. 185.—Linotype; serrated columnar rule. Full size.
  - running matter. The object of this is to do away with a difficulty which arises in the justification of the line by means of wedge-spaces where columnar work is used in juxtaposition to ordinary matter.
  - The Linotype slot-rule matrix shown in fig. 184, is made with a projection in place of the usual strike. To enable it to pass through the raceways some small alterations or substitutions are made in the machine. The composition of the matter is so arranged that the rectangular holes in the slugs, which are left on the withdrawal of the matrices, come Vertically under each other in columns; and the serrated rule, also shown in fig. 185, is inserted in these and planed down in the usual manner. The rules are made with serrations of different pitch to suit different body-sizes of slug. The slugs with a rule in place are shown enlarged in fig. 186.
  - Another ingenious device adopted in the Linotype machine for columnar Work is the use of matrices struck each with a short vertical rule, the depth of strike being considerably increased at one end. The effect of this is to produce a slug which has the ends of each of these short sections of the
- p.223 - vue 267/901
- - 224
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - continuous vertical rules required somewhat raised above the normal height-to-paper, fig. 187. When the matter is locked up, a small tool consisting of a grooved roller, capable of rotating in a handle, is run up and down the column and throws down these points so as to form a continuous vertical
  - Section through slug.
  - Section through slot-rule.
  - ®
  - L®
  - Fig. 187.—Linotype; tabular rule-slugs, before and after using the roller. Enlarged.
  - Plan showing cavities and rule in place.
  - Fig. 186.—Linotype; columnar continuous rules and slugs. Enlarged.
  - printing-line ; the method is, in fact, a development of the process employed for long past by the founders of bronze statues, for securing the complete
  - Fig. 188.—Stringertype matrix. Full size.
  - obliteration of the joint which would otherwise be apparent where arms or other much-overhung portions of a statue, or group, are cast detached and subsequently fitted into their places.
  - The Stringertype matrix, fig. 188, is struck on the flat side of a brass stamping similar to that used for the Linotype matrix. It is machined with a notch on one side for setting the mould to the appropriate width required for the character
  - it bears.
  - The Victorline matrix presents no points of
  - novelty over the Linotype matrix, the lines of
  - which it has closely followed and with which it is interchangeable; the same description holds good for the Intertype matrices.
  - The Grantype matrices, figs. 189 and 190, differ according as the
- p.224 - vue 268/901
- - MATRICES. 225
  - machine in which they are composed is being used to cast lines of individual type or slugs. Figure 189 shows the matrix used for casting slugs. In this instance the strike is formed at the bottom of a routing, as in the case of the Linotype and similar matrices. It can also be either a two-letter matrix or one suitable for columnar work, as may be desired. The Grantype matrix used for casting lines of individual type is shown in fig. 190, in which it will be seen that the strike is formed on the end of a prominence in a manner somewhat similar to that adopted in the Wicks matrix. The matrix proper carries fixed to it a similarly-shaped piece of metal having a projection, usually equal in set width to the type to be cast, and of such length that it entirely fills the mould between consecutive type, thereby enabling the latter to be separated completely when the con-tinuous tang formed in the operation of casting is sheared from the ends
  - FIG. 189.—Grantype; slug matrix.
  - Fig. 190.—Grantype; loose-type matrix.
  - of the type. The matrix is accordingly a composite matrix, the portion Carrying the strike being of bronze and the other part of harder material.
  - The Rototype matrix is of disk form with a central hole and a polygonal edge for receiving the strikes; it has a hole drilled through on one of the radii joining the centre to a vertex of the polygon. The exterior is slotted at the vertices, as shown in fig. I91. These holes serve for Carrying the matrix and for setting it into position in the casting portion of the machine.
  - The Oddur matrix-disk, fig. 192, is of the form of a flat ring let into a disk which carries a central boss on the back, pierced with a square hole to fit the matrix-setting shaft of the machine. A copper ring is electro-deposited on to the electrotyped nickel matrices which are from 0°020 to 0 030 inch thick; this ring is then turned, fitted and pinned to an annular recess in the matrix-disk, as shown in the section.
  - The Monoline matrix.—The Monoline machine uses a combined matrix, fig. 193, having several strikes on one face of a long bronze bar routed to the appropriate depth, as in the case of the Linotype. Opposite to each strike is a similar routing used for carrying the matrix when in the casting Position.
  - Q
- p.225 - vue 269/901
- - 226
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Fig. 191.—Rototype matrix. Enlarged.
  - The hole is provided for registering the matrix on the machine.
  - / I ( \
  - )
  - / /
  - Fig. 192.—Oddur matrix-disk. Enlarged.
  - The eighty characters are arranged in sixteen groups of five each; three of the strikes only are shown in the figure.
- p.226 - vue 270/901
- - 8
  - FIG. 193.—Monoline matrix. Scale: full Size.
  - MATRICES.
  - 3Slightly ra
  - Fig. 195.—Typograph : two-letter matrix. Scale: full size.
  - Fig. 194.—Typograph ; single-letter matrix. Scale: full size.
- p.227 - vue 271/901
- - 228
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The Graphotype matrix is of rectangular form and its grid resembles that of the Monotype machine, but with the matrices electrotyped in one piece as in the case of the Oddur matrix-disk just described.
  - The Typograph matrix, fig. 194, is struck in one face of a bar of rectangular section ; this bar has, let in and silver-soldered to it, an eye of steel by which it is suspended from a steel wire throughout the operations of composing, line-justifying, casting, and distributing. As the matrix never leaves the wire, distribution is a very simple matter ; the whole of the upper portion of the machine rocks on an axis and is balanced by a spring so that a very small force only is required to tilt the top of the machine comprising the magazine, escapement, and keyboard until the magazine is at so low a level that the matrices slide back into place along the polished steel wires from which they are suspended. The matrices may be of two kinds; in the single-letter machines they have a rigid eye at the upper end and are cut away to a hooked form at the lower end, fig. 194, and in the two-letter machines, they have two notches at the lower end on the same side as the strike and two parallel notches on the opposite side above the strike, fig. 195. In the former case the matrices are pulled down to justify for alinement, the upper surface of the hooked end being used for this purpose. In the case of the two-letter matrices, fig. 194, these slide along the upper surface of one or other of the back parallel notches, and the justification for alinement is obtained by the gripper pressing the matrices upwards by means of one or the other of the front notches so that the lower face of one of the parallel rear notches bears against the setting bar which has been clear in the groove during the period of composition. The matrices do not bear against the faces used for alinement either during composition or distribution, consequently the tendency to wear and so to produce irregularity of alinement is reduced to a minimum.
  - SPACE AND QUAD MATRICES FOR ORDINARY TYPECASTING MACHINES.
  - The space-matrix used in the ordinary typecasting machine is usually a plain piece of copper, or bronze, of rectangular section and of the appropriate dimensions for the particular space to be produced ; but in some cases, to facilitate the ejection of the space from the mould, a rectangular depression slightly smaller than the body of the space is struck to a depth of about 002 or 0’03 inch.
  - Quad-matrices are usually struck with shallow figures corresponding to the body-size of quad cast from them. Prior to the introduction of the point system, they were frequently struck with the name or initials of the founder and later with the body-size either in full as PICA, or abbreviated, as BREV.
- p.228 - vue 272/901
- - MATRICES.
  - 229
  - NON-DISTENSIBLE SPACE AND QUAD MATRICES FOR TYPECASTING AND COMPOSING MACHINES.
  - Typecasting and composing machines generally make use of some non-distensible space and quad matrices. These are necessary for all work involving the use of figures, such as tabular matter, for which the em quad, en quad, and quarter-em quad or middle space are required. The em quad is also needed for such purposes as quadding out, or filling out the white at the end of a paragraph to the width of the measure. The quad and space matrices of the various machines as a rule resemble the ordinary letter-matrices used in the individual machine to which they belong except for the fact that they carry no strike and that, in certain cases, where the construction permits, that portion of the matrix, which in a letter-matrix
  - FIG. 196.—Linotype ; non-distensible space or quad matrix.
  - Fig. 197.—Monotype; low-quad, steel space-matrix. Enlarged.
  - Fig. 198.—Stringertype ; quad-matrix. Scale: full size.
  - would normally carry the letter, is increased or reduced in height according as the space or quad to be cast is required to be lower or higher. In some instances of matrices with multiple strikes, for example, the Monoline, one of the units forming the composite matrix, when this is of the correct set width, is itself a quad or space matrix, fig. 193.
  - The Linotype non-distensible space or quad matrix, fig. 196, differs from the ordinary letter-matrix, not only in the absence of the strike, but also in the absence of the routing. The same remarks apply to the non-distensible space and quad matrices of the Typograph and to the space, or quad, unit of the Monoline. In the Monotype, casting high spaces and quads, a single blank matrix of bronze serves for the casting of quads, or spaces, of all widths: it is described in its proper place with the matrix-grid, and requires no illustration here. The Dyotype, Rototype, and Oddur quad-matrices follow the Monotype.
  - The Monotype low-quad matrix, fig. 197, is of steel, and carries a Projecting cylindrical portion which raises the centring-pin of the machine to actuate the low-quad mechanism.
- p.229 - vue 273/901
- - 230
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The Stringertype non-distensible space or quad matrix, fig. 198, affords another instance of a space or quad matrix which differs from the letter-matrix only in the absence of a strike.
  - The Grantype non-distensible space or quad matrices, figs. 199 and 200, differ from the letter-matrices not merely in the absence of the strike, but, in the case of the individual-type matrix, in the length of the prominence,
  - Fig. 200.—Grantype; non-distensible space or quad matrix; individual-type.
  - Fig. 199.—Grantype; non-distensible space or quad matrix ; slug.
  - which may be short or long according as stereo or trade height spaces or quads are required to be cast.
  - DISTENSIBLE SPACE MATRICES FOR TYPECASTING AND COMPOSING MACHINES.
  - The Linotype distensible space-matrix, fig. 201, frequently called the space-band and also known as the wedge-space, consists of two main opposing wedge-shaped pieces dovetailed together, yet sliding freely and fitting sufficiently well to avoid trouble from metal getting between the two parts. A stop-pin is fitted at the end of the slide to prevent the parts from becoming separated when the matrix is lifted out of the machine.
  - The Monoline distensible space-matrix, fig. 202, is built up of three steel sliding parts, the outer two of which are secured to each other by riveting, and the widening is performed by springing these sides apart by the long wedge formed by the third or sliding part, which is moved upwards between them.
  - The Stringertype distensible space-matrix, fig. 203, is similar in many respects to the Linotype space-matrix, but is tapered on one side of the long wedge-piece so that this not only decreases in thickness towards its upper portion, but also in width, this decrease being used indirectly for effecting the setting of the mould on the machine in the earlier models.
  - The Typograph distensible space-disk, fig. 204, is of circular form made up of three pieces ; the main piece a is plain on one side and on the other
- p.230 - vue 274/901
- - MATRICES.
  - 231
  - is formed with a helical face and a cylindrical boss ; a loose plate b with a Projecting arm turns freely on this boss ; the portion of this plate by, which acts in making up the variable space, is also made helical on the face next to the main part so that the outer face is parallel to the back of the main
  - IG- 201.—Linotype ; wedge-space matrix, or space-band. Scale: full size.
  - Fig. 203.—Stringertype ; wedge-space matrix or space-band. Scale: full size.
  - Fig. 202.—Monoline; wedge-space matrix. Three views showing the three combined sliding pieces, A, B, C. Scale: full size.
  - Part when both helical surfaces are in contact ; the plate is retained on the boss by a cover-plate c riveted to the main portion.
  - The Grantype distensible space-matrix for the slug-casting machine, fig. 205, consists of two pieces of metal dovetailed together, and sliding on each other in a manner similar to that of the Linotype matrix ; but the external outline of the matrices is altered to suit the conditions of carrying, lifting, and transferring in the machine of later date.
- p.231 - vue 275/901
- - N C N
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The Grantype distensible individual-space matrix, fig. 206, is formed of two wedge-shaped pieces of metal, dovetailed together, as in the previous instance ; one of these carries a projection for filling the mould
  - 1
  - 6
  - 6
  - L
  - Front
  - Elevation
  - E
  - - V 45
  - 3
  - Fig. 204.—Typograph; distensible space-disk. Scale: full size.
  - Fig. 205.—Grantype ; distensible space-matrix; slug.
  - and the other an overhung prominence entering a notch in the projection and leaving a plane surface, which forms the top of the space cast in the mould, of variable width according to the elevation of the wedge.
  - Fig. 206.—Grantype; distensible space-matrix; individual-type.
  - The Bellows compositor matrices are of rectangular shape; they are struck in brass and measure 0’500 inch by 0’9375 inch. The depth of strike is 0"060 inch. Each fount has distinguishing cuts on the reference-letter side; each fount, regardless of size or face, has its
- p.232 - vue 276/901
- p.n.n. - vue 277/901
- - PLATE XI.
  - Fig. 207.—Bellows or Electric compositor matrices with slug.
  - Fig. 212.—Matrix-engraving machine; American Type Founders Co. To face page 233.]
- pl.11 - vue 278/901
- - MATRICES. 233
  - own combination of cuts, and the fount distinguisher can be set so that no other fount can pass it. The space-matrices are similar to the ordinary matrices except that they have no character-strike.
  - It is claimed for this machine that the justification adopted in it, which does not make use of wedge-spaces or space-bands, gives a longer life to the matrices, and that the space-matrices themselves are practically indestructible. The distribution of matrices in the Bellows machine, which was originally carried out by means of electricity, is now carried out very ingeniously on the same principle but by mechanical methods. Distribution is effected by means of a series of holes, eight in each matrix, which encounter certain pins in the distributing mechanism; this throws open the proper gate for its particular magazine-channel to each matrix in succession. The distributing speed is high. Figure 207, plate XI, shows a number of Bellows matrices with a slug. The distribution system of the Bellows niatrices being somewhat peculiar, is described here with the matrices.
  - MATRIX JUSTIFYING.
  - Justifying is the operation of fitting or machining the surrounding metal so that the face of the strike, which is at the bottom of the depression
  - Fig. 208.—Needle-point micrometer depth-gauge. Scale: full size.
  - m the matrix, is accurately placed relatively to the exterior. The matrix is tested by taking a trial cast, comparing this with a standard letter, usually the lower-case m, and measuring it with various appliances for depth of strike, position and truth of alinement and parallelism to the surface of the metal.
  - To perform the work of justifying, several delicate measuring instruments are necessary. For measuring the depth of strike a needle-point micrometer, fig. 208, is used; for measuring the face a bevel-edge or lining micrometer, shown in fig. 209, with a blade 0’1000 inch wide is used, the measurements being made on the punch. Great care is required m the use of this appliance, or the knife-edges of the blade may be damaged by contact with the metal being measured. Two readings are obtained by moving the blade back till it just shuts off the light reflected
- p.233 - vue 279/901
- - 234
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - from a portion of the face of the punch, or of the type, in one direction and then repeating the operation for the opposite side of the punch or type, making due allowance for the width of the blade when dealing with the figures obtained.
  - Squares are used for testing the face, the type being sighted against the light in two directions at right angles to each other. In the case of the simple matrix shown in fig. 170, p. 220, which is usually finished throughout with the file and by hand, the trial and error method suffices, but in matrices of elaborate form such as the more complex Wicks matrix, fig. 174, p. 220, a number of different milling operations being necessary, a number of successive measurements are required. The trial type must be
  - |
  - 3
  - Side Elevation.
  - T— 1
  - 3
  - J
  - Fig. 209.—Micrometer measurer for punches and type. Scale: half size.
  - measured, and the matrix stem bent and twisted to bring the strike true for squareness of face and line.
  - Cuts are then taken off the sides of the matrix and off the base; trial type are again taken, and the matrix further corrected if found necessary ; finishing cuts are taken, and finally the matrices are gang-milled to length and end-milled to body. With hand-cut punches some twenty-three operations were necessary; with machine-cut punches the number was reduced to about seventeen ; the various operations are shown in fig. 210. The work of justification is very highly skilled and a good justifier earns big wages ; it is therefore of great importance to reduce this work to a minimum. The reduction in number of operations was largely effected by rigidly holding the punch close to the face, by rigidly holding the matrix close up to the strike, by supporting the matrix-metal on all sides, and by accurately setting the punch in position before striking. The saving in justification was effected by elimination of some of the earlier roughing operations.
- p.234 - vue 280/901
- - MATRICES.
  - 235
  - In the case of matrices which are required in large quantities for matrix-composing machines, the adjustment of the striking press must be made by the justifier, and when set the product must be controlled from time to time. The larger the number of matrices to be struck and justified, the more important it is that the punches should be accurately justified
  - 2,3
  - 5. Burnishing end.
  - 8. End finished for depth of strike.
  - 16 & 17. Drilled and Tapped .
  - 12. Finished for line.
  - 15. Finished for body.
  - 14
  - OS
  - 13 & 14-. Finished for set
  - 10 & 11. Justified for li ne and set.
  - 7. Dressing sides.
  - Fig. 210.—Wicks rotary typecaster matrix; operations in machining. Scale: full size.
  - and accurately set in the press. In the earlier matrices made for the Wicks machine a light, overhung, hydraulic striking-press, weighing only about a hundred pounds, was used; for the later matrices made in Quantity, a st amping-press with symmetrical slides and a central plunger was used, weighing about a ton and a half, the extra rigidity contributing greatly to a saving in justification.
- p.235 - vue 281/901
- - 236 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - ENGRAVING MATRICES.
  - A method of manufacturing matrices has been introduced in the last few years, in which the operation is performed by a small high-speed cutter carried on a pantograph ; a hollow former is used and the process is the converse of that used in the punch-cutting machine.
  - The matrices produced by this method, however, except when cutters of extremely small diameter are used, must have a uniform bevel all round ; they cannot be used for producing non-rubbing type unless they are subjected to a machining operation and fitted with side strips as described above, or reduced to the same section as the type to be produced, in which case they must be fitted and secured in a hole of the same section pierced in a blank.
  - The Ballou engraving machine for matrices, fig. 211, plate XII.—The problem of engraving the matrix is much simpler than that of cutting the punches. The character for the hollow former can be cut out of metal plate like a stencil and then secured to the backing by riveting or soldering. The follower may be of constant diameter, but must be sufficiently small to allow it to follow the outline in the hair-lines. The shape of the cutter can be that obtained by grinding a small amount off two of the opposite faces of a square pyramid, so that these faces meet in a line, the length of which is in the same ratio to the follower as the reduction ratio to which the machine is to work. The depth of cut is constant, the flat surface of the main-stroke being obtained by traversing ten or more times to and fro over the length. The complex settings of the Benton-Waldo machine are here unnecessary, and since the material to be cut is soft the cutter lasts a long time without sharpening, and the sharpening itself is a comparatively simple matter. The machines when set and adjusted by skilled mechanics can be operated by girls.
  - A similar machine known as the Dedrick was introduced about 1899. It was arranged to operate simultaneously on four matrices.
  - When a matrix is engraved the actual depression corresponding to the strike of the punch has the same appearance as the surface run over by an end-mill; it looks like the engine-turning on the case of a watch, and must be subsequently polished to obtain a similar appearance of face to that given by any struck, or electro-deposited, matrix.
  - Perhaps the most highly-specialized form of engraving machine is that used by the American Type Founders Company to engrave some of their larger matrices. This machine in its early form was designed by Linn Boyd Benton, and was the predecessor of the original punch-cutting machine patented by him in 1885. Like its brother, the punch-cutting machine, it has developed through various forms under the supervision of its original inventor, and is shown, in the shape used to-day in the United States, in fig. 212, plate XI.
  - The limits of accuracy in its working parts are stated to be within
- p.236 - vue 282/901
- - PLATE XIL
  - 1
  - Fro. 211.-—Ballou matrix-engraving machine.
  - [To face page 236.
- pl.12 - vue 283/901
- - — V
  - PLATE XIII
  - [To face page 237.]
  - FIG. 214.—Engraving machine; Taylor, Taylor ^ Hobson.
- pl.13 - vue 284/901
- - MATRICES.
  - 237
  - 0'0002 inch, and practically the same careful workmanship is demanded throughout in its construction as in the case of punch-cutting machines. The pattern or former still used with it is the old-fashioned electro-typed former or model.
  - The matrix cutter used with the machine is seen in fig. 213, which shows the faces of the chisel cutting edge. These vary in size from 0'001 to 0'080 inch in width, the heavier faces being used for the roughing and the finer ones for the outlining of the characters. The cutting tool is driven by means of a flexible shaft at a speed of from 8000 to 10,000 revolutions per minute.
  - A grinding machine is used when the edge of the tool becomes dulled or broken. This machine consists essentially of a light steel spindle with a longitudinal feed motion. On the end of this spindle a small emery
  - ‘s S
  - Fig. 213.—Matrix-engraving cutter; American Type Founders Co.
  - or other abrasive wheel is mounted. The slide-rest is constructed with a single trunnion bed which enables it to rotate at the will of the operator through an arc of 900, with stops, one of which controls the angle of the tool for the matrix draft and the other determines a curvature on the end. On the top of the slide-rest there are two bevelled ways with a fixed stop on one end ; the hollow tool-spindle is held in position on these ways with the ring end against the stop. The ring end is the determining point in this machine for the length of the cutting tool, and in the engraving machine for the depth of cut. During the grinding operation the abrasive wheel wears away, and to prevent change in the size of the cutting tool, a fixed diamond Point with a micrometer adjustment is used, being so arranged that the wheel is brought to touch it in passing, thus ensuring the same relative position of the side of the wheel with the tool, and the grinding of the tool always to the same size and contour. Any desired width of tool face is obtained by means of hardened steel measuring-blocks, and when a tool of any desired face is ground, the block for that particular width of face is placed between the end of the ways and the travelling rest is brought
- p.237 - vue 285/901
- - 238 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - against it by means of a screw feed, which sets the axis of the cutting tool in its correct position.
  - The accuracy of the grinding is tested by a microscopic inspection of the cutting tool. Across the centre of the face or lens of the microscope a fine scale is arranged, reading to 0'0005 inch, and the edge of the tool is brought into alinement with the scale; this makes it easy to obtain an accurate reading.
  - The matrix is justified by means of a specially-designed facing machine, with inserted-tooth face cutters, which is driven by a clutch, and is held by means of a clamp on the table of the machine, directly under a microscope which has two cross-hairs at right angles to each other and one hair adjustable to any angle, so that the parallelism and position of the letter can be fixed relatively to the cutter.
  - There are many other engraving machines; for instance, that of Taylor, Taylor and Hobson, fig. 214, plate XIII, which is largely used for engraving die-blocks for printing biscuits, chocolate, and a great variety of other work.
  - ELECTROTYPING MATRICES.
  - The easiest method of making matrices for the simple typecasting machines is by electrolytic deposition of copper. A type of the desired character can be surrounded by two pieces of type-metal of similar form to the mould or a single piece of the size required for the matrix can be cast round it, in a suitable mould, and the face of the matrix is thus obtained true in the first place ; the rough deposited sides of the matrix are subsequently filed, or machined true.
  - The cast with the face of the character projecting from it is called a fusible ; it is made in a fusible-mould which is described in another chapter of this treatise. A number of fusibles are generally arranged in a frame in two or more rows, each being separated from its neighbour by a division strip of ebonite, or other insulating material. The deposition of copper from a solution of copper sulphate must be effected slowly if the resulting matrices, about 0'35 inch thick, are to be sound and tough. For this reason it was usual to use a Smee battery; but this had the disadvantage of a dropping voltage. A dynamo giving a voltage nearly equal to the maximum of the Smee battery produces as good a result more rapidly. The belief in the superiority of the battery over the dynamo for this particular class of work is one of many superstitions, dear to the hearts of those who find something intrinsically excellent in antique methods simply because they are old-fashioned.
  - For the matrices used in the later forms of typecasting machinery electrolytic copper is not generally hard enough to stand the wear, and the rough deposited surfaces require too much and too troublesome machining. The Grah process for depositing matrices in nickel, which has been used
- p.238 - vue 286/901
- - MATRICES.
  - 239
  - by the authors, produces matrices much harder than the copper hitherto in use. This process may be of considerable importance in the manufacture of matrices in the future in places where the more economical and rapid method of production afforded by punch-cutting and matrix-striking plant of modern design is not available. There are, however, practical difficulties in the carrying out of this process which may seriously militate against its complete commercial success.
  - A process has been invented by A. S. Capehart for electro-deposition, which has the advantage that the intaglios, corresponding to the strike in a punch-struck matrix, could be placed in the bars or plates after these had been machined to the necessary degree of accuracy, whereas in the ordinary electro-depositing processes used in typefoundries the matrix-bar or plate had to be machined, or justified to shape, after the intaglio had been formed or put into place. By this system the twelve intaglios required for each matrix-bar, in a line-casting machine like the Monoline, were electro-deposited in the edge of the bar after this had been machined to the requirements of the casting machine. It was found in use, however, that the thin copper edges would not stand the machine-handling and contracted, giving rise to fins between the letters. With compound matrix-plates, presenting flat surfaces to the mould, as in the Graphotype grid or the Oddur disk, this would not occur, nor would it take place in the case of individual intaglios under conditions where the thin edges of the intaglio were protected by the mechanism holding the matrix in position.
  - DEPTH OF STRIKE OF COMPOSING-MACHINE MATRICES.
  - It will be seen from the table of depth of strike of typecasting and composing machine matrices given below that the different makes of these matrices vary greatly in their depth of strike. It would be a matter of great advantage to both the builders and users of this class of machine if some fixed standard suitable to both sides could be agreed upon. It is certainly a matter for regret that one’s foes, so to speak, should be of one’s own household, when it is found that the depth of strike on the American Lino-type matrix differs from that of its similar and almost identical near relative, the English Linotype matrix. How this much-to-be-desired consummation is to be effected with machines made in so many different countries and under such widely different conditions, it is not for the authors to suggest, but the longer the period during which this reform is Postponed, the greater will be the ultimate confusion to be overcome before the rectification is adopted, for it must be remembered that this difference in depth of strike involves a corresponding difference in the height of the mould. The case is somewhat parallel to that of the different gauges adopted by railways in different countries, though there is much more excuse for the railway engineer owing to the wide variation
- p.239 - vue 287/901
- - 240
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - in the conditions which he has to meet, than there is for the engineers who settled the depth of strike of at least the American and English Linotype machines.
  - TABLE 42.
  - Depth of strike of composing-machine matrices.
  - The height of moulds here given does not include allowance for contraction.
  - Machine. Height of mould. Total depth of strike. Depth of routing. Maximum depth of counter.
  - Inch. Inch. Inch. Inch.
  - American Linotype . 0-875 0043 — —
  - English Linotype 0-843 0075 0055 0’018
  - Victorline 0-843 0-075 0-055 o-oiS
  - Monoline. 0-863 0-055 0-037 0012
  - Bellows compositor . — 0-060 — —
  - Typograph 0-878 0-040 0-025 0015
  - Oddur . . . . — 0-030 — —
  - Dyotype . 0-882 0-036 none 0-018
  - Rototype — 0-038 none —
  - Stringertype 0-882 0036 none 0’0x6
  - Monotype (type) 0-870 0050 none 0-028
  - „ high space 0-870 none none none
  - ,, low space . 0-770 — — —
  - Grantype 1-003 0-040 0-125 0016
  - (projects)
  - In actual practice the height of the moulds is made slightly larger than the figures given in this table, an allowance being made to compensate for the contraction of the type-metal.
- p.240 - vue 288/901
- - CHAPTER XIV.
  - MOULDS.
  - "We fill up the silent vacancy that precedes our birth by associating ourselves with the authors of our existence.”
  - Edward Gibbon. Memoirs of my Life and Writings.
  - Long primer condensed sans No. 5 (Stephenson, Blake & Co.).
  - Moulds.—The simplest form of mould consists of two halves which are nearly alike. Both are built up of pieces of hardened steel ground and lapped true, and screwed together. The mould thus made is of definite size for body, but variable for the width of set, the parts being fitted with stops which close on the matrix and obtain from it the correct set width; the width of each matrix being therefore the set plus a constant. In the direction of the height-to-paper of the type, the mould is wider than the length of stem, so as to provide for the gate for the injection of the molten metal. In one half of the mould are inserted the raised beads for produc-ing the nicks in the type, and in the counterpart grooves are ground and lapped to fit the raised beads which are exposed in the mould for a greater length as the set width of the type to be cast is increased.
  - A hand-mould of very early pattern is shown in fig. 215. This has a slight improvement upon the earliest form in the addition of a matrix-lifter for freeing the matrix from the type. The matrix is returned to place by the action of a spring, and the hooks shown are for use in removing the type by its attached tang from the mould.
  - The authors have found that type-metal under the conditions prevailing in typecasting will flow into an opening between surfaces varying from 0'0005 inch where the surfaces are water-cooled internally, to 0'0002 inch (and even less) where the mould is allowed to become warm. This inflow of metal will cause difficulty in ejecting the type, and will give it a fringe, fin, or ragged edge. In moulds of the kind just described, where no provision 15 made for continuously cooling the mould, the type cast in the mould before it has attained the working temperature are not accurate for size ; the speed is limited to that at which the mould does not overheat unduly, and in practice it is kept from overheating by stopping the machine from time to time and cooling with a wet rag. Some idea of the difficulty and
  - 241 R
- p.241 - vue 289/901
- - 242 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - expense of mould making may be gathered from fig. 216, which shows a
  - Fig. 215.—Early hand-mould.
  - Side Elevation, one half removed. Front Elevation .
  - Front Elevation, front half removed.
  - Plan.
  - Fig. 216.—Justifier’s type-mould. Scale: half size.
  - justifier’s mould for type with two nicks, though one is the usual number in such moulds. The justifier’s mould shown is fitted with a screw for
- p.242 - vue 290/901
- - MOULDS.
  - 243
  - securing the matrix in place. In the older pattern of justifier’s mouldacurved wire spring, fig. 215, was generally used to secure the matrix against the end of the mould. The one half of the mould consists of at least five pieces while the counterpart carries in addition the beads and the stop. The beads for forming the nicks contribute greatly to the difficulty, since the hole is only a part of a cylinder in one of the pieces of hardened steel which must be finished before the hole is lapped out, and the wire, which is made a gauge fit, must have its axis parallel to the surface within the degree of accuracy required for tightness as regards the melted metal.
  - Fig. 217.—Pivotal-machine mould. Scale: half size. Tang end elevation; plan; matrix-end inverted elevation.
  - As the mould undergoes some alteration of form when heated, and is subject to some change due to wear, the fit when new requires to be within 0'0001 inch.
  - The Pivotal-machine mould, the next to be considered, is shown with both halves in place in front elevation, plan and back elevation, in fig. 217. The halves of the mould are shown separately in perspective views in fig. 218 in which the upper view shows the top half of the mould as seen from the front of the machine, the middle view shows the bottom half of the mould seen from the same side, and the lower view shows the top half of the mould inverted and seen from the opposite side with that part in
- p.243 - vue 291/901
- - 244
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - front which forms the tang and comes in contact with the nipple-plate of the casting machine.
  - Figure 219 shows the details of a mould and gives the names of the various parts whose nomenclature has remained unchanged for at least two hundred and fifty years.
  - A different mould is required for each body, but the mould is adjustable
  - Fig. 218.—Pivotal-machine mould halves. Scale: half size.
  - Top half; bottom half; top half inverted.
  - for those variations in set width which occur in a fount of type ; different moulds are also required as the nicks differ for different faces of the same body, and a suitable mould is consequently necessary for each separate arrangement of nick. Different moulds are also required for spaces and quads owing to the fact that they are lower in height-to-paper, and these again may differ if the spaces and quads are required of stereo height
- p.244 - vue 292/901
- - MOULDS. 245
  - or of trade height; the position of the nicks in spaces and quads is not material as the body-sizes only require to be distinguishable.
  - In some instances it is possible to use the same mould for both quads and spaces, such moulds being known as combination moulds. In certain cases, however, it is necessary, owing to the liability of metal getting under the long nick-wire, that separate moulds should be used for casting the wider quads, that is those above an em in set width. When this is done the nick projects from the body less than an em and no corresponding groove is formed in the body of the counterpart; the resulting nick is, therefore, of short length, running only part of the way
  - 3
  - 0
  - 0
  - 0 0 0
  - Fig. 219.—Pivotal-machine type-mould; details. Scale: half size.
  - I. Back plate (bottom half).
  - 2. Carriage.
  - 3. Body (top).
  - 4. Body (bottom).
  - 5. Bottom register.
  - 6. Top register.
  - 7. Slip.
  - 8. Break.
  - 9. Lining brass.
  - 10. Nick-wire.
  - II. Wing.
  - 12. Stool.
  - across the quad, and the mould cannot be closed to cast a quad narrower than the nick-wire permits. It will be seen, therefore, that the number of moulds required in a foundry turning out many faces of type and of the ordinary range of sizes is very great and represents a large capital outlay.
  - Mould-making as a trade is over 300 years old, and as in the case of lapidaries’ work, the finishing is usually done by means of lead laps ; the skill attained by the workmen in this trade is very remarkable.
  - The kind of mould previously considered is in each case built up of component parts permanently secured to each other by screws. With the object of effecting economy in the large number of moulds required in
- p.245 - vue 293/901
- - 246
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - a foundry, owing to the range of each such mould being limited to a single body and a single arrangement of nicks, several makers have produced moulds in which some parts are made interchangeable with the object of enabling others to be substituted for them and so to effect a change of
  - Fig. 220.—Wicks rotary typecaster; soft moulds. Scale: full size.
  - 3
  - Fig. 221.—Wicks rotary typecaster; hard moulds. Scale: full size.
  - &
  - Fig. 222.—Wicks rotary typecaster; angle-base moulds. Scale: full size.
  - Sections of Wicks moulds and top cover showing arrangement for water-circulation and the different methods of mould construction adopted.
  - size of body. It would be invidious to particularize here about this matter, but in the authors’ opinion the finest quality of foundry type has hitherto only been continuously cast in that form of mould in which the parts retain their relative positions in each half and which is limited to
- p.246 - vue 294/901
- - MOULDS.
  - 247
  - the casting of a single body-size. The saving to be effected by the effort at interchangeability is largely discounted by the additional expense of the parts, the difficulty of dealing with ordinary wear, and the time and skill undoubtedly required for effecting the necessary change of the mould parts for each change of body.
  - The fusible-mould is of very different construction. Its parts are so arranged as to slide together and to embrace the stem of the type about which the fusible is to be cast. An adjustable stop is provided for so setting the face of the type that it projects by the proper amount from the face of the fusible when cast, and allows a sufficient addition to the depth of strike of the matrix to permit of justification. The fusible when cast is about 0'35 inch thick, and is similar to the matrix with the differences that instead of bearing a strike the type face projects from it, and that it is slightly larger in all its dimensions to allow for the removal of sufficient metal from the matrix to permit of this being cleaned up when justified.
  - MOULDS OF THE WICKS MACHINE.
  - The inventor and the engineer, however, are beset on all sides with novel and peculiar difficulties when they are called upon to design and make moulds different in form and construction from those to which mould makers are accustomed. In the following pages some account is given of steps taken to surmount them. The Wicks mould, illustrated in figs. 220, 221, and 222, p. 246, and in the chapter on casting machines, in figs. 301 and 302, pp. 312-3, will serve as an instance. In this machine the moulds take the form of 100 radial grooves in a disk 20 inches in diameter. The groove, three inches in length, forms three sides of the mould—the back and sides of the type. The stem of the matrix, fig. 174, P. 220, slides in the mould; the top cover c, fig. 301, which is fixed, and under which the mould passes, forms the remaining side of the body—the front of the type—and the shield q, through which the molten metal is injected, forms the foot.
  - The error introduced by the 10-inch radius of the foot is very small. A pica em quad has for sagitta of the arc forming its base a length of only 0-00035 inch, which is less than the permissible height-to-paper error in type.
  - The first attempts to build a mould not proving successful, the next step taken was an attempt to mill and lap out the grooves in the disk. This also failed to give satisfactory results, and recourse was again taken to building up the mould. The construction of the mould-wheel in this form was as shown in fig. 220; it was built up of a cast-iron wheel in which an annular groove formed the water-space, fig. 301 ; this was covered by a cast-steel foundation ring, turned all over, the latter being secured by studs to the upper surface of the cast-iron wheel.
- p.247 - vue 295/901
- - 248
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The upper surface of the foundation ring was turned flat and scraped true; the wheel was then mounted on a division-plate and dowel holes drilled through a jig carried on the central column of the division-plate. Dowel pins were driven into the holes in the foundation ring and the segments, also drilled in the jig, pressed down into place; tapped holes were also necessary in the segment to enable it to be drawn off the dowels for grinding and for lapping the sides. To obtain squareness in the parts of a mould, the diamond square, fig. 223, was used ; for straightness of the faces the knife-edge triangular straight-edge, fig. 224, was used ; and, to measure the width of the mould at various parts of its length, folding-wedge gauges divided on the upper sides, in such a manner as to form
  - Fig. 224.
  - Fig. 223.—Diamond square. Scale: half size.
  - Knife-edge straight-edge.
  - Scale: half size.
  - together a vernier reading to 0’0001 inch, fig. 225, were used. The segments were made of cast steel and left soft. Allowance for grinding was made on the thickness of the segments, and the aggregate top surface ground true in place. This wheel gave fairly satisfactory results, but the top of the segments wore rapidly under the top cover which was kept in contact by spring pressure. The next improvement was to adjust the top
  - • 0. 0
  - Fig. 225.—Folding-wedge gauges or measuring type-moulds; taper I in 100. Scale : full size.
  - cover by means of folding-wedges and a screw adjustment so arranged that the cover could be brought down into contact with the segments and then backed off about 0’0002 inch to 0*0003 inch. This did not, however, stop the wear of the segments owing to the difficulty of lubricating sufficiently and yet obtaining perfect type. The next step consisted in milling dovetailed grooves in the foundation ring, and in fitting the hardened steel base pieces which were secured by dowel pins, fig. 221. The whole surface of the foundation ring was then ground true in place on its column, transferred to the division-plate and hardened steel segments were fitted. These segments were secured by dowels and screws as in the case of the soft segments just described. This wheel was extremely costly to make, and when put to work showed appreciable wear in so short a period of time
- p.248 - vue 296/901
- - MOULDS. 249
  - that the amount of type produced before the wheel required new segments would not have been sufficiently large to ensure commercial success.
  - A number of machines had now to be constructed in a limited time, and the problem was dealt with in the following manner. The surface of the foundation ring was turned and ground true in place on its column, and the mould was built up of two segments as shown in fig. 222. The angle-base segments were of annealed cast steel and produced by the following operations, illustrated in tig. 226: (1) cut roughly to length ; (2) and (3) rough gang-milled all over; (4) reduced over part width by
  - 2
  - &
  - € -
  - 3
  - Pte —
  - Be I
  - 6 « in
  - Taper Milling
  - 7.
  - End - milling on Magnetic Chuck.
  - 10.
  - Grinding on Magnetic Angle - block.
  - “H r
  - Fig. 226.— Wicks rotary typecaster; angle-base operations. Scale: full size.
  - milling; (5) tapered by miffing in batches; (6) straightened; (7) end-milled in the angle on magnetic chuck ; (8) ground on back on magnetic angle-block ; (9) scraped straight on short vertical face ; and (10) ground to set width on magnetic angle-block. The top-segment operations consisted in (1) cutting to length; (2) and (3) rough gang-milling ; (4) tapering; (5) straightening ; (6) and (7) grinding on flats; (8) and (9) grinding on edges. Both top and bottom segments were at this stage about % inch longer than necessary for the reason that the bottom segment, if made to the standard dimension from the centre of the mould to the edge at the Periphery of the wheel, would fail to make up the width should the next Preceding segment be narrower in the set width of the mould of which it formed the base.
- p.249 - vue 297/901
- - 250
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The surface of the ordinary magnetic chuck, fig. 227, is probably familiar to most mechanical engineers, but for the class of work now in question it was frequently necessary to grind segments on the edge ; also, owing to the high degree of accuracy required, the surfaces of the vice on which the segments were placed required regrinding whenever the magnetic
  - Fig. 227.—Magnetic chuck; plan.
  - vice was replaced after being removed from the machine. Two kinds of magnetic angle-blocks were designed and are shown in fig. 228. These have proved useful for a number of purposes. The blocks each consist of
  - E G
  - 43
  - F H
  - 0 3 6 Ins
  - 11111111--------a-------1-------1_______I________i______i
  - Fig. 228.—Magnetic angle-blocks.
  - Side views with white-metal filling. Isometric views without filling. B has no magnetic connexion with ACD except through the work held ; the same relationship applies to EF and GH.
  - two soft mild-steel bars, of good permeability, milled out to L or L shape and cross-milled with cuts which leave space for the complete separation of the two pieces of mild steel. The ends are secured by brass plates and screws, and the whole of the interspace is run up with white metal. The block is placed on the magnetic chuck, so that its poles respectively come over the poles on the chuck. The exterior can then be ground true, in place, on the surface grinder.
- p.250 - vue 298/901
- - MOULDS.
  - 251
  - Some idea of the difficulties that had to be faced and overcome may be gathered from a consideration of the methods employed in correcting the division-plates for producing the Wicks machine.
  - The division-plates were in the form of a circular disk with a central boss scraped to fit a central column. The divisions were 100 in number and cut in the periphery of the disk with the ordinary dividing gear supplied with one of the best makes of milling machine. The form of division was such that the working face of each was radial and the other face inclined to the tangent, fig. 229 ; the locking bolt was accurately ground and lapped to fit in a slide on the base of the division-plate. At an early stage in the
  - Each division is compared with the arc o®—4° of the theodolite circle by aid of a distant object X.
  - X---
  - to :
  - Scale 1th.
  - Fig. 229.—First method of correcting division-plate.
  - 2 0
  - Ho
  - 5
  - /
  - 9 n+2
  - 9---n+1
  - On
  - —----n-1
  - manufacture of the Wicks machine it was found that the division-plates were not sufficiently accurate for the grinding processes on the segments to be carried out so completely that segments could be manufactured to stock as components. The maximum error permissible, so that the segments could be prepared up to the stage at which lapping would begin, was found to be about equal to an error of 0'0007 inch at the periphery of a circle 20 inches in diameter or less than 15 seconds of arc. This corresponds to about 42 inches at a distance of one mile and to ensure the result it was considered necessary to make the measurements to less than one-fourth of this amount.
  - I. In the first method employed a theodolite was used with two micrometer microscopes reading to 10 seconds centesimal. One side of
- p.251 - vue 299/901
- - 252
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - the plain end of a lightning conductor on a chimney about two miles away was used as the distant object, and the angle moved through from one setting of the division-plate to the next was obtained by direct reading on the graduated circle of the theodolite with the micrometer microscope, the reading obtained being of the form :—
  - 4'000 grades ± difference.
  - After taking the reading the theodolite was reset to zero, set on the distant object, and the plate moved another tooth ; the second angle was then measured. By this means the total of the readings should have equalled 400 grades, but the average errors of personal equation and of the standard arc of the theodohte were found to be equal to about 0'00045 grade (4'5 seconds centesimal).
  - It was then possible to determine the actual difference from the standard angle for each angle moved through by the division-plate, and, by continuously summing the differences, the maximum positive error—or, from the workshop point of view, the lowest tooth—could be determined. The excess of the maximum positive error above the sum of errors at any particular tooth gave the cut to be removed from that tooth.
  - The method devised for performing this work consisted in mounting the division-plate on a horizontal spindle between centres on a milling-machine, and applying a constant torque by means of a wire fastened to the periphery of the boss, passing over a pulley and loaded with a weight.
  - A micrometer screw was fitted so that it could be engaged with the flat radial surface of any tooth in succession. An angle-mill mounted on the spindle of the milling-machine could be fed across the face of the tooth to be reduced. This micrometer screw was set into contact with a different tooth of the plate, so that the cutter came inside the gap corresponding to the tooth to be reduced ; the micrometer screw was then slacked back till this tooth, following it under the action of the weight, just touched the revolving mill. The mill was then traversed to one side and the micrometer screw was turned through the amount desired to be removed plus a constant. This constant was 0'00i inch which represented the least amount that could be removed with certainty by a cutter without risk of refusal and consequent glazing of the surface.
  - The single distant-object method of measurement did not require any particular accuracy in centring the theodohte on the division-plate. It proved however a very troublesome method in practice owing to the rapid and frequent variations in light and atmosphere near London, and further owing to the yielding of the clay strata under the passage of trains on adjacent railways.
  - 2. As several division-plates were required, a different method was next tried, fig. 230, in which the chief troubles noted above were diminished. The same centesimal theodolite was used. Two pieces of fine piano-wire were stretched by suspended weights from a slide and slide-rest some 200
- p.252 - vue 300/901
- - MOULDS.
  - 253
  - yards from the instrument. The wires were blackened, a clean white paper background was placed behind them, and the suspended weights were immersed in water to damp out any vibration. The screw of the slide-rest was worked till the readings obtained, using the same side of each of the two wires, gave a close approximation to the desired angle of the division-plate (4-000 grades).
  - In this case it was necessary to set the theodolite more nearly central with the division-plate, an eccentricity of 0’06 inch only being permissible.
  - The mode of operation was as follows :—
  - (a) The bolt being inserted in the space n of the division-plate of the
  - Each division is compared with the angle subtended by the two fixed wires L and R at the centre 0 Scale J th.
  - 100 yards
  - \
  - \
  - 1
  - _ I -- I
  - /
  - I / / /
  - / /
  - I
  - 1=
  - 1
  - \
  - \
  - \ \
  - FIG. 230.—Second method of correcting division-plate.
  - theodolite, the telescope was first set on the left wire L and the reading In noted.
  - (b) The telescope was then turned on the right wire and the reading Rn noted ; thus by difference the angle LOR was obtained (Rn— Ln).
  - (c) The plate was turned till the bolt engaged in space (n + I) and the reading of the left wire Ln+1 was taken.
  - (d) The telescope was turned and another reading of the right wire Kn+1 was obtained; from these again the angle LOR was obtained as (RA+1-L+).
  - Thus the angle LOR was measured 100 times and from these measurements its error was obtained.
  - If d and e are the differences between 4’000 grades and the readings
- p.253 - vue 301/901
- - 254
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - of the left and right wires respectively, then the readings are of this form (where n is the starting point) :—
  - and
  - FT
  - + +
  - to H
  - II H II
  - Psss 1 + + HBH
  - =
  - I++ * 000 6000 O 00 09 OR O + 000 s Bep
  - O + +
  - B1
  - +
  - 1 w W W LESS
  - + +
  - B 1
  - II II II II +SSS +++ WLNH - 64 0666 I O O O 000
  - - 0Q 00 0 ; + + + H ((( BBS +++ O 1 H
  - where 8 is the mean error of standard angle and %+1 is the error in the theodolite arc over the portion used from space n to space (n + i).
  - Now taking the alternate readings,
  - L+= (n+ i) 4000+ dn+1
  - Rn = (n+ i) 4000+ en+1
  - and subtracting, we get L+1— R= dn+1— en+1 where n, the error of the theodolite arc, is eliminated, and if a represents the actual error of the angle from space n to space (n + i),
  - a== dm+1- (en+l— 8).
  - The actual arithmetical work can be reduced to about six columns of figures and the corrections are obtained without difficulty.
  - The degree of accuracy attained can be judged by the following result after three series of corrections had been applied. In this table the errors at the circumference of a wheel having a radius of io inches are expressed in millionths of an inch :—
  - TABLE 43.
  - Errors of division-plate after applying three series of corrections.
  - Errors. 0 to 7° 70 to 140 140 to 2I0 2I0 to 280 280 to 350 350 to 420 420 to 490 490 to 560 560 to 630 630 to 700 700 to 77°
  - Number of divisions) 10 21 15 19 7 7 7 6 4 0 4
  - The table shows that the errors had only just been reduced to the desired amount after the division-plate had been corrected three successive times.
  - 3. The next method devised, fig. 231, gave far better results, and did not involve the necessity for making so large a number of observations without interruption.
  - The column of the division-plate was fitted with centres, and a long bar of mild steel was suspended between them. This bar was forked at its outer end some 30 inches from the centre. A set screw and bolt were provided for springing open the forked part or closing it. Each arm of the fork was
- p.254 - vue 302/901
- - MOULDS.
  - 255
  - drilled and a plug of silver wire inserted in each ; a very fine radial line was drawn on each silver plug with a diamond. A micrometer microscope was arranged on a fixed support fast to the base of the division-plate so that the horizontal lever could swing under it. A stop was fitted on the division-plate with an adjusting screw with a long stem to enable the horizontal lever to be set so that either of the lines on the wires could be brought to zero ; the lever was kept under a constant pressure against the screw-end by means of a weight and fine cord. A device was provided for enabling the stop to be moved through an angle of approximately 4 grades after the reading had been taken. The gear was boxed in so that variations in
  - Each division is compared with the standard angle lor by the micrometer microscope.
  - Scale 1th.
  - H
  - --
  - 0
  - ] / a/ /
  - 30 Inches
  - C
  - 1
  - I
  - The pair of hair-lines can be traversed by the micrometer microscope screw till the (thick) object line occupies a central position between them.
  - Field of micrometer microscope.
  - Fig. 231.—Third method of correcting division-plate.
  - temperature, and radiation from the operator, did not affect the readings appreciably.
  - The method adopted was as follows: in the plan of the lever, R is the right-hand radial line and L the left. The line R was brought under the micrometer microscope and set to zero, then the plate was moved one tooth and the reading on the line L was taken, the reading being the difference between the angle LOR and the angle moved through by the plate. After the reading had been taken the stop and lever were moved so as again to bring R to zero; the plate was then moved another tooth and the next reading of L was taken.
  - The readings of R were always zero. The readings of L gave the differ-ences d1, d2, d3 . . . from the standard angle.
- p.255 - vue 303/901
- - 256 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Moreover, since the plate moves through 400 grades when it completes its revolution,
  - 2 d.+ d+ d3+ . . . d100 should = o.
  - Actually it was found to be equal to A, and 16 = 8 was the error of the standard angle between the lines on the silver plugs.
  - The corrected differences d1 — 8, d2 — 8, d3 — 8 . . . were then tabulated as D1, D2, Dg.. D100 and their summation made continuously thus :—
  - D D.+ D, D.+D+ D . . . D1+. . . D100, the calculation being of a form which makes checking very easy.
  - These totals were then each multiplied by a constant so as to reduce them to the scale of the micrometer adjustment for milling. The new values were T1, 02, 03, 04... 0100, of which the maximum value om corresponded to the lowest tooth ; adding 0’001 inch to this and subtracting (om+ 0’001) from each term in succession, the negative value obtained gave directly the amount of cut to be taken.
  - The results obtained are given in the following table, in which the error in millionths of an inch at the circumference of a 10-inch radius wheel is given in the top line, and the number of teeth falling between the limits is given in the succeeding lines, as shown by measurement after the first, second and third cuts had been taken.
  - TABLE 44.
  - Errors of division-plate after each correction; expressed in millionths of an inch at a 10-inch radius.
  - Measured 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
  - to to to to to to to to to to to to to
  - error. 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 8300
  - After 1st cut 15 18 22 16 10 7 4 0 2 3 I 0 2
  - After 2nd cut 10 20 17 14 13 10 4 4 3 2 1 o 2
  - After 3rd cut 16 26 30 16 9 2 I
  - The methods adopted may appear troublesome and complicated, but actually the calculation was merely of a simple arithmetical character. These division-plates, it should be remembered, were not light measuring apparatus, but had to serve for carrying numerous drilling and other jigs, and required sufficient surface to bear setting hundreds of times each day in continuous regular work.
  - After having been ground true on its upper face and periphery, on its own spindle, on a specially-constructed grinding machine, the
- p.256 - vue 304/901
- - MOULDS.
  - 257
  - foundation ring of the Wicks machine moulds was mounted upon one of the division-plates so prepared. It was then ready for the next operation.
  - Assembling.—'The first operation consisted in drilling and tapping the foundation ring ; the drilling was performed by aid of a jig carried on the division-plate and the tapping was done by an automatic tapping-head. The drilling-jig was then removed and a segment which had been clamped on the plate and drilled by aid of the setting-jig was put into place ; each segment was numbered when put into place ; the setting-jig had gauge surfaces a constant distance, C, from the centre of the mould ; gauges were used for the setting of a width equal to C — 1 {set). The setting-ring was then put on the outside of the wheel and secured roughly true by means of four set-screws ; this ring carried 100 screws, each of which served to adjust a segment in place by sliding it along the preceding segment ; and as each was brought to position, it was then clamped by a temporary clamping-plate and screw at the inner end. The setting having been completed, a sensitive drill, used in conjunction with the drilling-jig, drilled the necessary holes in each segment, namely, three clearing holes for the holding-down screws, one hole for dowelling the angle-base to the foundation ring, and one hole dowelling the top segment to the angle-base, one forcing-screw tapping hole for removing the angle-base from its dowel; and, in every tenth segment, a seventh hole for clearing the supporting stud of the matrix guide-ring. The angle-bases could now be removed from the wheel, cut to length, and the burrs removed ; the tapping could be performed and the straightness checked ; if found necessary the short vertical face was again scraped. The setting-ring was then raised and clamped roughly true so that the centres of the screws came opposite the top segments. The bottom segments were replaced on the wheel and secured by temporary screws through the clearing holes. One angle-base being dowelled to the wheel, a top segment was placed on this and another top segment on the next consecutive angle-base, each top segment having been lapped true on its vertical faces. The top segments were pressed towards the centre of the wheel by the setting-screws, and the width of the mould formed by them was measured by means of the folding-wedge gauges, fig. 225, p. 248. The angle-base was then forced off its dowel and lapped on the vertical face, until the mould obtained was a gauge fit throughout its length. Each mould was thus finished in turn and the top segments as finished were dowelled to the bottom segments, each being numbered when put into place. The top segments were then all removed, and the angle-bases secured by temporary screws with thin flat heads ; the wheel was transferred to its own central column on which the foundation ring had been ground true. The tops of the angle-bases were now ground true in place, the top segments replaced and also ground true, the depth of the mould or size of body being thus obtained. The wheel was then ground true on the periphery and the shield scraped to fit. The under side of the wheel was also ground true, to give a bearing
  - S
- p.257 - vue 305/901
- - 258 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - for the lower bearing-surface carried by the shield. These adjustable folding-wedges are shown in section at 03, 04, in fig. 301, p. 312.
  - The soft wheel, however, did not meet all requirements. The body-size could be restored a large number of times by grinding the tops of the angle-bases and the tops of the segments ; but the top segments became worn after a considerable period, so that the less important dimension, the set width, became large ; the greatest difficulty of all to be overcome was the provision for the nicks in the body. Experiments made on a wheel with soft segments demonstrated the possibility of casting the nicks instead of milling them, and thus obtaining type more free from burr or fringe, with a nick
  - 0 3 6 9 12 Ins.
  - Lili——i____i____I__i i______1___i___i___I___:___i____I
  - Fig. 232.—Method of planing cast-iron lapping-block.
  - more acceptable to the compositor, and with less risk of breakage of the thin sorts.
  - The necessity for hard top segments now became apparent. In making these the first five operations were the same as in the case of the soft segments. The sixth operation consisted in drilling in a jig, in which the segment was set into place with allowance for grinding, according to the sizes of the preceding and succeeding moulds of both of which it formed part. The seventh operation was cutting to length, and the eighth hardening. The tempering was performed by heating in an oil-bath at a temperature of about 3200 F. for some four hours. By this method the hardness could be adjusted with great nicety and equality for the whole of the wheel. The inner ends of the segments, into which the hole for the dowel pin had not yet been drilled, were softened. The segment was then rough ground
- p.258 - vue 306/901
- - MOULDS.
  - 259
  - on both flats, rough ground on the edges, reground on the faces after an interval of time for recovery, reground on the vertical faces, and finally lapped on these faces.
  - The wheel being assembled, the nick-grooves were ground in with a fine emery wheel turned to shape on the edge to give the required section and depth. The beads in the top cover were produced in the following manner: the top cover was mounted on the circular rotary table of a vertical milling-machine; a small cutter-spindle, driven by an electric motor, was used to mill out a groove of the required width for the bead, at the correct distance from the axis of the wheel. The bead was made of hardened steel wire ground and lapped cylindrical and subsequently ground flat on two faces to fit the milled groove tightly. At the one end the milled groove was tapered by hand to allow the bead to be removed. The final fitting was done by lapping the face of the wire opposite the bead. The curvature of the groove in the top cover was so slight that the nick-wire could be sprung into place without difficulty. The nick-wires are shown at e, in fig. 301, p. 312.
  - The lapping-block used for lapping mould segments was planed in the planing machine in such manner as to produce a slightly convex surface; the result was obtained in the usual way by supporting the block at each of its corners respectively on jacks, and holding the plate down by means of a set-screw screwed into its under side, and passing through a holding-down plate, which could be screwed down tightly so as to spring the block to the desired extent. The arrangement is shown in fig. 232, and is equally applicable to solid cast-iron laps or to lead laps cast upon an iron backing.
  - TYPECASTING AND MATRIX-COMPOSING MACHINE MOULDS.
  - Within the limited space of this treatise the authors cannot describe in detail the moulds of all typecasting machines, but only leading or well-known examples of them with the mention of noticeable peculiarities or differences in some of the many others that exist, together with examples of the slugs, individual type, or lines of individual type produced by them. These are shown in figs. 240-244 and 248-250, pp. 265-268, and plate XIV ; a comb of type is shown in fig. 253, p. 269.
  - The mould of the Monotype machine, fig. 233, is built up of several pieces. In the foundation plate of the fixed part is the hole for the injection of metal from the pump; this hole is coned to fit the end of the Pump-nozzle which is elevated into place before starting the machine. To the foundation plate is secured an intermediate plate, and on the top of this are fixed two body-blocks which form respectively the back and front of the type; between these blocks, through which water is circulated, slides a rectangular plate of the same section as the type measured from foot to shoulder. The position of this body-slide is regulated by means
- p.259 - vue 307/901
- - 260
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - of wedges, as described below, so as to give the required set width to the type to be cast. A vertical plate is secured to the end of the foundation plate opposite to the mould, and a hardened steel bearing-plate is secured to this by dowels. In the space between this bearing-plate and the face of the body-blocks the slide travels to and fro for each character cast. The slide itself is built up of a number of pieces, two of which, fixed to the main portion,form the front and back of the tang of the type, fig. II, p. 13 ; a tang-slide working between these forms another side of the tang. The fourth side of the tang is formed by the vertical face of the intermediate plate between
  - Perspective View of Mould.
  - Fig. 233.—Monotype mould ; single-blade. Scale: about half size.
  - Cross Slide for ejecting tang
  - %
  - 8
  - a. Foundation plate.
  - b. Intermediate plate.
  - c, c. Body-blocks.
  - d. Body-slide or blade.
  - e. Vertical plate.
  - f. Hardened steel bearing-plate.
  - g. Slide or cross-block.
  - h. Main portion of slide.
  - i, j. Tang-pieces secured to main portion of slide.
  - k. Tang-slide or jet-piece.
  - I. Cam-groove.
  - the foundation plate and the body-blocks. The slide is guided by the projection of the tang pieces below the body-blocks ; the tang-slide is moved by a projection fitting in the cam-groove milled out of the foundation plate.
  - The operation of casting is performed as follows : the slide comes to rest with the tang opening opposite the mould ; the body-slide moves to the set width required, which corresponds to the position of the matrix-grid; the matrix-grid descends on to the top of the mould and is brought to true position by means of the conical hole in the back of the matrix, fig. 177, p. 221. The pump-plunger makes its stroke and fills the mould and tang. The matrix-grid or case is lifted and the slide moves to the
- p.260 - vue 308/901
- - MOULDS.
  - 261
  - right, shearing off the tang from the type and the jet; as the slide continues its movement the tang-slide moves towards the body-blocks, ejecting the tang through the hole in the intermediate plate. When the slide has travelled clear of the type, the body-slide ejects the type from the mould into the type carrier which delivers it to the galley ; the slide then returns to the casting position. The whole cycle is repeated for each type cast; during the cycle three types are in progress ; the first is being determined, the second is being cast, and the third is being delivered.
  - An objection that was often raised against the Monotype in the past was
  - d. Normal blade.
  - m. Nick-pin, or nick-wire.
  - n. Supplemental or low-quad blade.
  - p. Distance piece.
  - q. Shoe for holding down the blade.
  - Fig. 234.—Monotype mould ; low-quad, double-blade.
  - Scale: about half size.
  - its inability to cast low quads and spaces; this difficulty has now been overcome by making the body-slide of two parts, fig. 234, capable of moving together when type are required and independent in their movement for spaces and quads, in such manner that the top part of the body-slide, of a depth equal to the difference in height between the quad and the shoulder of the type, is moved to its forward position after ejecting the last type cast, and that the lower part moves to occupy the position required for casting a space or quad of the desired width. The top part of the body-slide in this position forms the top of the mould and is supported by the pressure of the matrix-grid during the casting period.
- p.261 - vue 309/901
- - 262
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - A question that is sometimes raised is that of the relative advantages of the vertical or horizontal positions for the axis of the mould. In the opinion of the authors the matter is of but little practical importance as excellent type can be cast under either condition; it is however somewhat remarkable that the only noteworthy examples among casting machines in which the type is cast with its axis vertical are the Monotype and Grapho-type machines, in both of which a rectangular matrix-grid is used.
  - The mould of the Stringertype machine is similar to that of the Mono-type in its general arrangement of mould-blocks and of the body-slide, which can be set to variable position by a spring-controlled movement. After the line of matrices has been received in the assembling-box, it is filled out by the elevation of the wedges of the space-matrices ; these are pushed up by a table, L-shaped in plan, which maintains the lower ends of the space-matrices at the same height while passing before the mould. The matrices are then presented one by one in front of the mould, which closes to the set width given by the notch, the pump injects metal into the mould, which then opens, and one part, acting as an elevator, vertically raises the type with its tang to the receiving race, into which it is pushed by a horizontal pusher. By an ingenious arrangement of the mould, the tang joins the type above the feet, two V-notches being left, one at each side, fig. 9, p. 13; the tang can thus be readily broken off, and the rough fractured part is left clear above the feet. The breaking is done automatically by the machine before delivery, the tangs falling clear down a chute.
  - The moulds of the Dyotype casting machine are, in construction, somewhat similar to those already described in the Monotype and the Stringertype machines, each of which has a movable body-slide. In each of these moulds the body-slide is adjusted to give the appropriate set width of the character to be cast.
  - There are two moulds mi, m2, fig. 235, in the casting machine, and a collector-slide c which has a to-and-fro movement over them. This collector-slide forms one side of the mould ; it also contains two slots S1, S2, of the same section as the type, into which the type is received when the collector-slide has moved (after the casting has been effected), so as to bring one of these slots over a body-slide b1, b2. Each slot is in turn then brought over the elevator-slide e placed centrally between the two moulds, and this moves the type successively out of the collector into the guide-clip, from which it passes to the composing-stick.
  - The body-slide of each mould, like that of the Monotype low-quad mould, is made in two portions which move together, with their upper surfaces at the same level, when type are to be cast ; when a space is to be cast the portion nearest the face does not move, but acts as the matrix end of the mould, so that spaces are cast of trade height instead of shoulder height as in other machines of this class.
  - The two moulds are closed simultaneously by the collector, and the two type are cast at the same moment. At the end of its movement to
- p.262 - vue 310/901
- - MOULDS.
  - N O
  - O
  - the left the collector-slide pauses and receives the type cast in the left-hand mould mi; it pauses again when it has brought this type over the elevator e; the type received from the left mould is now ejected into the
  - Fig. 235.—Dyotype moulds. Scale: about half size.
  - e
  - •—0 E 6.4 J -P
  - guide-clip and the type from the right mould m2 is received in the right slot S2 of the collector, to be removed by the elevator e when the next successive type is being received in the left groove of the collector-slide.
  - It appears that the idea of the inventor of this machine is to exceed
- p.263 - vue 311/901
- - 264
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - the limitation imposed by the use of a single mould and to be able to cast up to twice the speed so obtainable, but of course there is some attendant complication in arriving at this result owing to the doubling of a large number of the parts which are essential for each mould.
  - The Linotype mould is shown in place in the mould-wheel in fig. 236 and also separate in fig. 237, plate XIV. As in the case of the moulds
  - 1 & §
  - Fig. 236.—Linotype ; mould and mould-wheel.
  - 72 Ins.
  - J
  - already described, it is built up of several pieces of hardened steel. In its ordinary form the Linotype mould casts a continuous slug; for
  - Fig. 238.—Linotype ; adjustable sectional mould.
  - certain purposes where two or more short lengths of slug are required to be cast simultaneously, the sectional mould, shown in fig. 238, is used. The gear by means of which the mould-wheel, with the mould in situ, is rotated—in the first instance, through 2700 from the casting to the trimming and ejecting position, and, in the second instance, through the remaining 900 to its normal or casting position—is shown in fig. 239.
- p.264 - vue 312/901
- - MOULDS.
  - 265
  - The special features of the Linotype mould are, however, best shown by the drawing of the type-slug cast from it, shown untrimmed in fig. 240. The cross-projections at the foot of the slug prevent the slug from being
  - Ins 12
  - 3
  - 6% SS
  - <
  - Fig. 239.—Linotype ; interrupted-revolution driving-gear of mould-wheel.
  - sucked forward through the mould when the matrices are withdrawn from the face. These projections are removed by the end-trimming knife during the partial revolution of the mould-wheel; to prevent the nozzle
  - 8 $
  - Runners
  - $
  - B
  - 1
  - 8 3
  - P 0
  - Fig. 240.—Linotype ; slug as cast in mould before trimming. Slightly enlarged.
  - from drawing the slug back, each end of the mould is formed with a small projection at the foot. The grooves in one long face of the mould form raised ribs on the back of the slug ; in ejection from the mould these pass
- p.265 - vue 313/901
- - 266
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - through between the trimming-knives which shave them down, and ensure correct body-size when the slugs are placed in column ; the trimmed and finished slug is shown in fig. 241.
  - When the Linotype machine is required to produce slugs of large body-
  - Fig. 241.—Linotype ; finished type-slug. Slightly enlarged.
  - size, up to 36-point, another special form of mould with attached blocks for forming recesses in the slug is used with the double object of effecting economy in metal and reducing the time required for cooling. The ribs left between the recesses are trimmed as in the smaller bodies. Figure 242
  - Fig. 242.—Linotype ; large-work recessed slug. Scale : full size.
  - shows a large work recessed slug, and fig. 243, plate XIV, shows this form of slug used for Arabic.
  - The mould of the Victorline machine is very similar to that of the Linotype, but the mould-wheel itself is water-cooled by means of passages
  - Fig. 244.—Monoline; finished type-slug. Slightly enlarged.
  - communicating with ports in the hollow spindle of the mould-wheel; the flow of cooling water is controlled from the operator’s chair by a tap adjacent to a visible outflow.
  - The mould of the Monoline machine is in many respects similar to that
- p.266 - vue 314/901
- - MOULDS.
  - 267
  - of the Linotype, with, however, the great difference that it is not contained in a mould-wheel, but remains in place in the machine.
  - The operations of casting, trimming, and ejecting the slug from the mould are effected somewhat similarly to those of the Linotype. Figure 244 shows a finished type-slug of the Monoline.
  - The mould of the Typograph machine.—Owing to the form of the space-disk, the Typograph mould, shown in section in fig. 245, is made concave
  - Fig. 245.—Typograph ; mould, tang-plate and ejector.
  - Section.
  - by
  - * V E
  - Fig. 246.—Typograph ; mould. Elevation. Scale: half size.
  - Tang-plate
  - Mould
  - Fig. 247.—Typograph ; mould, tangplate and ejector. Plan.
  - Fig. 248.—Typograph ; type-slug as cast. Section through a space.
  - Scale: full size.
  - Fig. 249.—Typograph; type-slug trimmed and tang sheared off. Section.
  - Scale: full size.
  - 1
  - 5
  - $
  - § A.
  - Scale: half size.
  - where it comes into contact with the space-disks which project slightly in front of the letter-matrices.
  - The cavity formed by the various portions of the mould for the body of the slug is plain and rectangular, there being no beads,grooves, nor projections in this portion ; the back is, however, recessed to a small depth, but only over a part of the length and width, so that the tang joins the slug below
- p.267 - vue 315/901
- - 268
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - the level of the surrounding portion, fig. 248. The tang is formed by a separate tang-plate, figs. 245 and 247, interposed between the mould and the pump-mouth.
  - The tang-plate moves upwards, after the slug is cast and the metal-pot has receded, shearing off the tang. The shearing is actually effected by the steel tang-plate against the type-metal of the recess in the slug and thus wear is avoided. The slug is then ejected towards the matrices by an ejector acting through a hole in the tang-plate. Ejection takes place in two
  - Fig. 250.—Typograph ; finished type-slug. Full size.
  - stages ; at the end of the first the fins on the shoulder of the slug, fig. 248, are removed by a pair of trimming-knives which travel in the direction of the length of the slug and towards the back of the machine. The second movement finally ejects the finished slug which is shown in section in
  - BU
  - Fig. 251.—Grantype; mould. Scale: quarter size.
  - UB
  - fig. 249 and in isometric projection in fig. 250. A second and smaller ejector removes the tang from the tang-plate causing it to fall into a chute. The finished slug is delivered into a galley.
  - The mould of the Grantype, shown in fig. 251, is somewhat similar to that of the Linotype or of the Victorline machine save that it is not carried upon a mould-wheel as in those cases, and that the water-cooling, unlike that of the Victorline and Typograph, in which the water passes merely through adjacent parts, is in its case carried through the actual metal of the mould
- p.268 - vue 316/901
- - MOULDS.
  - 269
  - itself, as is done in the Monotype. By changing the upper and lower mould jaws, fig. 251, the machine is capable of casting slugs, or fines of loose type, according to the jaws used. The length of the line is dependent on the mould-end jaws, fig. 252, one or both of which are adjustable. When the product is loose type, the entire line is cast at a single operation in a manner similar to that applied in machines of the Linotype class,
  - Fig. 252.—Grantype ; mould-end jaw. Scale: half size.
  - whose distinctive feature is the simultaneous casting of all the characters forming theline. In this respect it fundamentally differs from the Monotype and its congeners, whose distinctive feature is the successive casting of each letter from matrices successively presented for each successive cast.
  - Fig. 253.—Grantype; comb with tang attached. Enlarged.
  - In the Grantype a continuous, but individually-separated slug or comb of type, attached to the tang, is cast, as shown in fig. 253 ; before leaving the mould the tang is sheared off, and in the process of ejection the type are closed up ready, fig. 254, for removal by gripping-jaws into the galley.
  - The mould of the Bellows compositor is water-jacketed and universal, and like the Typograph—or the Grantype when used as a slug-producing
- p.269 - vue 317/901
- - 270
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - machine-—produces slugs with smooth sides. In the advertising machine a mould is used which gives a cored or hollow slug from 18-point to 36-point. Figure 255, plate XIV, shows various slugs from the Bellows compositor.
  - The problem of mould construction is amongst the most serious of those which have to be faced by the designer of typecasting machinery.
  - In the earliest forms of mould, although the parts are of simple rectangular section, the number of holes drilled in them and the proximity of these holes to the edge of the steel causes liability to fracture and to change of form in hardening. With the more complex forms used in the elaborate
  - Fig. 254.—Grantype ; individual-type line closed up and ready for galley. Enlarged.
  - moulds of casting and composing machines, these difficulties are greatly augmented, and some of the parts are of such complex shape that their production in hardened cast-steel presents excessive difficulty. In other industries the use of some of the special case-hardening steels has been found advantageous for the production of parts of intricate form, and it has been found that this material is capable of giving even greater hardness of surface without any reduction in toughness. It would appear, therefore, probable that the use of such case-hardening steels would be of advantage, at any rate in experimental work. As an example of the high cost of labour entailed in the making of experimental moulds, the authors may mention that it is within their knowledge that a mould of peculiarly difficult construction, made for a new casting machine, cost as much as £60 for net labour, owing to the large number of parts of which it was composed, to the great difficulty of preparing certain parts which failed by cracking through the water-ways, and to the replacement of parts made necessary by warping in the hardening process.
- p.270 - vue 318/901
- - PLATE XIV.
  - Fig. 237.—Linotype mould; details.
  - M
  - Fig. 243.—Linotype; arabic recessed slugs.
  - Fig. 255.—Bellows or Electric compositor; slugs.
  - 112 A kiy
- pl.14 - vue 319/901
- p.n.n. - vue 320/901
- - CHAPTER XV.
  - PUMPS.
  - " It be well said that is the best Pump that draweth best upward the Waters of Truth; By the Screw as Archimedes hath it, or by the Flap as hath become more common. But for us of the Craft an it draw Water from the House-Well, it hath done its duty for thereby Refreshed the Printer may pump forth store of Learning and streams of Letters into the hands of all men and their Brayne.” Mirrour of Pryntyng.
  - Long primer skeleton antique No. I (Stephenson, Blake & Co.).
  - The pump, as far as the authors know, was not used as a means for filling the mould with molten metal till the commencement of the nineteenth century.
  - A consideration of the very early efforts to introduce machinery for the process of typecasting shows that the first forward step in effecting good casts was based on obtaining an increase of pressure by " statical action,” as is set out in the patent of Anthony Francis Berte, in 1806, when he took means " to compress a body of air against the surface of the type metal for the purpose aforesaid.” In this he anticipated innumerable subsequent applications of the use of compressed air for displacing liquids. In the following year, 1807, he took out a further patent in which he makes use of " a plug or piston to expel the melted metal through the aperture described into the mould.” To this inventor therefore, beyond question, belongs the credit of the application of the pump to typefounding.
  - In 1820 Marc Isambard Brunel, father of the still more celebrated Isambard Kingdom Brunel, one of the world’s greatest engineers, also took out a patent for casting " under the pressure of compressed air ” ; for cooling by means of water ; for the use of a vacuum in the mould, which process he states is not new ; for cooling the cast by the expansion of compressed air; and generally, as was often the case with this genius, he showed himself far in advance of his time.
  - From this date onwards patents embodying the use of a pump in connexion with typecasting processes were taken out at frequent intervals.
  - As already stated, the earliest mention the authors have been able to find of a pump with a spring-propelled piston, is contained in the United 271
- p.271 - vue 321/901
- - 272
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - States Patent of M. D. Mann and S. Sturdevant of 7 January, 1831. This appears to forestall both the British patent of Sir Henry Bessemer, No. 7585 of 8 March, 1838, and the United States patent of D. Bruce, jun.. No. 632, of 17 March, 1838.
  - It is difficult to ascertain exactly what valve arrangement was adopted in the early pumps, but it is clear that many of the difficulties still encountered in typefounding machines were very serious to the early designers. Thus we find that Bessemer in his casting machine was troubled with what he terms the metal becoming rubbed to a fine powder in the jet. The production of a vacuum in the mould, to ensure the casting of sound type, was claimed by him as a novelty, although, as the authors have shown, this invention was then already nearly eighteen years old.
  - Bessemer’s patent and machine were sold to the Scotch foundry of the Wilsons, but he states that the invention was allowed to lapse in consequence of the hostility of the founders working with older methods.
  - In the matter of this invention credit appears to have been both claimed by and given to Bessemer for the origination of ideas which, as the authors have shown, were not novel; and little credit was either claimed by him or conceded to him for ideas and suggestions, which were in reality—like those of Brunel previously mentioned—far in advance of his time. Among these may be instanced duplex casting and the body-slide form of mould ; a form presenting such difficulties of construction with the methods and means available at the time, that none but a man in the very front rank of mechanical skill, such as Bessemer himself was, could ever have seriously contemplated its manufacture. It is possible that this, as well as the hostility of the founders to which he alludes in his autobiography, may have contributed to the premature abandonment of the invention.
  - From the mediaeval style of design which is found in the earlier pivotal typecasters, it would seem fairly clear that the pump must have been in use apart from a complete casting machine for some considerable time before a machine was constructed which so closely imitated the action of the hands in closing the mould, advancing it to the nozzle of the pump, receding with the cast, ejecting the cast, and repeating the cycle of operations.
  - It is probable that ball-valves were used at a very early date on account of the ease with which these could be fitted, and it is known to the authors that even in quite recent times some of the simpler forms of casting-machine pumps were working quite efficiently with ordinary clay marbles used as valves. Other machines, however, have used cone-valves fitted to the bottom of the plunger, and valveless pumps are found in which the admission of metal took place through a hole in the side of the cylinder uncovered by the plunger on its upward stroke and covered late in the downward stroke, the completion of which effected the pumping. Owing to the difficulties encountered in obtaining a sound cast in the mould, much superstition has been rampant and still exists amongst the workers in this industry. Any small change
- p.272 - vue 322/901
- - PUMPS.
  - 373
  - of form of the chamber at the base of the pump, or in the length of the port communicating to the nozzle, is expected to " cause the loss to force " of the metal, and the same is said even of altering the position of the pivot of the lever from one side of the machine to the other, which would merely alter the class of lever employed. The advent of the casting and composing machines is causing the death of many of these superstitions, and others are in a moribund condition, but the authors regret to say that they are dying hard. In fairness, however, to the earlier workers in this field, it must be admitted that the difficulties which they had to encounter and overcome are very similar to those encountered by the earlier designers of gas and oil engines in connexion with the form and details of the combustion chamber and valve passages; and men much more highly equipped technically than the old typefounders still have their own equivalent superstitions which have frequently proved a nightmare to the scientific engineer.
  - The difficulties generally met with are of three kinds: (1) freezing of the jet, (2) stoppage of the jet by accumulated oxide—which occurs in pumps of intermittent action-—and (3) difficulty in getting rid of the air which fills the pump delivery-pipe and mould and causes blow-holes in the type. These difficulties are overcome by various expedients ; the jet is separately heated by gas-burners, and is so arranged that metal does not remain adhering to the orifice and there become oxidized ; the plunger throughout the working length is immersed below the oxidized surface in the metal-pot and the surplus metal which is pumped is returned to the pot without exposure to the external air; the metal is delivered in large quantity and continuously, so that but little heat need be supplied by extra burners under the jet; an electric resistance is kept at a comparatively high temperature round the delivery pipe and nipple ; and finally, in some cases, special provision is made for clearing the air by fine grooves cut into the face of the nozzle, as shown in fig. 240, p. 265.
  - Justifier’s pump.—For filling the mould and making the trial casts required for the performance of his work, the justifier uses a pump formerly worked by hand, but now generally operated by foot-treadle, the plunger being returned by a spring which also lifts the treadle clear of the floor. The operator is thus able to vary the pressure and quantity of metal injected by altering the speed at which the stroke is made.
  - The evolution which has taken place in the pump as applied to the pivotal typecasting machine has doubtless been influenced by the practical experience gained from this primitive form of typecasting by means of a pump.
  - The pump used on the simplest typecasters consists of a single plunger mechanically fitted and spring-operated. The pressure on the plunger at the commencement of the stroke is about 60 pounds per square inch, and it falls during the stroke.
  - Practically the pumps of the early typecasting machines, such as those
  - T
- p.273 - vue 323/901
- - 274
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - of Mann and Sturdevant, Bessemer, Bruce, and other English and American inventors, present comparatively small differences ; and the later machines of Titchener and his contemporaries in England, of Kustermann in Germany, and of Foucher in France, do not present features calling for any particular comment. Foucher, however, has shown in some of the metal-pots (illustrated in his catalogues) two brackets, one on each side of the machine, and a link connecting the plunger to a lever which can be pivoted on either side of the machine so that the pump-plunger is depressed either on the up-stroke of the handle or on its down-stroke according to the position of the pin which is inserted in the bracket and the lever, this probably in deference to local superstitions, which seem as strong among our neighbours across the channel as among our own compatriots. As a matter of fact, even in the latest machines there is very little that calls for particular comment; the ingenuity of inventors seems rather to be turning towards devising means and appliances for preventing freezing in the nipple. In the case of the old machines a device called a jobber was and still is used. This is a metal spindle passing into the nipple through a hole in the back of the casting which forms the delivery pipe. This plunger is made of larger diameter where it passes through the casting, to give it sufficient strength to enable it to be moved ; it is, in some cases, flatted on two sides and operated by a fork lever embracing the central part. The action of the jobber is that it keeps the nipple closed during the whole of the period which lapses from the completion of one cast to the presentation of the mould in readiness for a succeeding cast, and consequently prevents oxidation taking place in the small port through which the whole of the metal must be ejected. The trouble which occurs from oxidation is largely due to the fact that the oxide adheres very tenaciously to steel or cast-iron surfaces, particularly the former, and undergoes a process of accretion very rapidly, with the result that, if once allowed to form, the orifice will speedily become so constricted that the casting of sound type becomes impossible. The Thompson typecasting machine contains an interesting modification of the jobber.
  - It is to be noted that in all pivotal machines, and in some others, the mould only makes temporary contact with the nozzle of the pump or with the nipple-plate interposed between the nipple and the mould ; in some other machines the nozzle is permanently in contact with the mould or its equivalent, and in such case freezing occurs much more readily.
  - In rapid typecasting machines, by which are meant machines capable of casting 12-point type continuously at a rate of 120 type a minute and upwards, the time within which oxidation can take place is cut so short that this does not become an important source of trouble ; but, owing to the necessity for the moulds of such machines to be water-cooled, freezing occurs more readily at the extreme end of the nipple which makes contact with the mould.
- p.274 - vue 324/901
- - PUMPS.
  - 275
  - A difficulty of this kind has been overcome by the authors in a manner the converse of that employed for cooling the twyers of the blast-furnace ; that is, instead of circulating water through the surrounding passage in the twyer to keep it cool, they have made the nozzle with an annular chamber round it, divided by ribs, and fitted with ports communicating with two channels in the casting, through which metal is pumped continuously by a supplementary pump kept running whether the machine is casting or not. This can be made as successful a method for keeping the metal at the nozzle end from freezing as is the water-circulation for keeping a twyer from melting.
  - The Wicks rotary typecasting machine pump has four plungers, of about 1-inch diameter and 2-inch stroke, each driven by an eccentric and rod from a belt-driven shaft. The plungers are a mechanical fit in holes in a steel block forming the cylinders ; the inlet and delivery valves are flat-seated disks enclosed in cover-plates bolted to the pump-body. The delivery pipe is fitted with a vertical branch which forms a cylinder in which a mechanically-fitting plunger operates ; this plunger is loaded by a lever and dead weight through the intervention of a long coiled tension-spring ; at the top of the travel of the plunger in the cylindrical bore is a cross hole ; the plunger thus serves the double purpose of accumulator and relief valve. The pump runs normally at 100 revolutions per minute, and the relief valve works at a pressure of 150 to 250 pounds per square inch. The diameter of the jet is about O’I inch. Through the jet the pump delivers a large surplus of metal, which is returned through a chute to the metal-pot of pressed steel in which the pump-body is immersed. The metal is kept at a temperature of 7000 to 800° F. by gas-burners beneath the pot.
  - The inventor of the Wicks machine made numerous experiments with multi-plunger pumps, constructing pumps with various numbers of plungers ; in one case the authors believe as many as thirty-six plungers were used. This is one of those cases in which a large sum of money would have been saved if the inventor had merely looked into the theory of pumps and their delivery instead of assuming that a more regular flow could be obtained by merely increasing the number of plungers. To judge from opinions several times expressed to the authors, it is not perhaps known, outside the circle of those who have specialized in pumps or their equivalent, that the ratio of minimum to maximum delivery is much higher with the 3-plunger pump than it is with the 4-plunger pump ; it is, in fact, the same with three plungers and with six plungers. Had the inventor of the Wicks machine been aware of this he would have made his pump with either three, five, or seven plungers which give respectively for the ratio of minimum to maximum delivery 86:60 per cent, 95’01 per cent, and 9748 per cent, instead of using four plungers, which give a corresponding ratio of only 7071 per cent. •
  - In order that the relative advantages to be obtained by the use of
- p.275 - vue 325/901
- - 276
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - different numbers of plungers in multi-plunger pumps of the pattern alluded to above may be easily appreciated, the following table has been prepared.
  - TABLE 45.
  - Delivery of single-acting pumps with one plunger, or with more than one plunger, driven by cranks set at equal angles to each other and completing their cycle in one revolution.
  - Number of plungers. Maximum. Mean. Minimum. Ratio of maximum to mean.
  - I 100 30’9 0 3’24
  - 2 100 61-7 0 1’62
  - 3 100 92-8 86’60 1-09
  - 4 100 90-0 7071 III
  - 5 100 967 95’01 1-03
  - 6 100 95'2 86-60 1-05
  - 7 100 98-3 97-48 1’02
  - The pump of the Monotype casting machine delivers the metal vertically upwards into the mould. The metal-pot is attached to a swing bracket, which is made to screw up and down so that the pot may be taken back away from its working position. Inside the pot is the pump-body, sometimes called the well-arm, one end of which carries a piston which forces the metal, let in through a port at the bottom of the pump-body, up a channel to the nozzle at the other end.
  - By the action of the pumping mechanism the pump-body rises so that the nozzle may meet the lower surface of the mould and form a metal-tight joint whilst casting is taking place ; it then recedes so as not to overheat the mould or chill the nozzle.
  - In the Monotype metal-pot, as well as in those of many other modern machines, a thermometer is fitted, in order to enable the temperature of the metal to be controlled. The mean temperature depends upon the kind of metal used, and may be taken at about 66o° F. for 12-point or pica, and 7000 F. for 6-point or nonpareil. Thermometers for this purpose are of a kind well known to engineers ; they are constructed of glass, filled with mercury, the boiling point of which is artificially raised by means of the compressed nitrogen with which the upper portion of the tube is filled. These thermometers of course require very careful handling and must not be subjected to jarring, as they are easily broken.
- p.276 - vue 326/901
- - PUMPS.
  - 277
  - The Linotype pump.—This pump-plunger is shown in fig. 256 and the jet in fig. 257. The plunger is made an easier mechanical fit than in the pumps previously described, and depends largely upon the effect of the grooves. This method is familiar to many engineers owing to its adoption
  - Fig. 256.—Linotype; pump-plunger. Scale: half size.
  - Fig. 257.—Linotype; metal-pot mouth. Section. Scale: nearly full size.
  - about thirty years ago for the piston-rod in certain tandem steam-engines. The pump is spring-operated, the pressure being about 27 pounds per square
  - II 1
  - Fig. 258.—Grantype; multi-plunger pump. Vertical section. Scale: quarter size.
  - inch at the commencement of the stroke and about 16 pounds per square inch at the end. The metal used is softer and has a lower melting point than that used in the pumps of machines casting individual types.
  - The Viciorline pump is similar to the pump used in the Linotype
- p.277 - vue 327/901
- - 278
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - machine except that there is no waste of the preliminary portion of the
  - pump stroke and that a longer dwell is given on the stroke.
  - The Grantype pump, shown in figs. 258 and 259, which is designed for
  - supplying metal to a tang of considerable length having small openings from it, is arranged with a number of
  - a large number
  - of
  - plungers working
  - Fig. 259.—Grantype; multi-plunger pump. Plan. Scale: quarter size.
  - i E 5 mH —‘A 5
  - AN
  - simultaneously with a view to the length of the tang, a result
  - obtaining
  - equality of pressure throughout
  - which could not be obtained with a single
  - central plunger. The nozzle-plate with its ports is shown in fig. 260.
  - ZXXXXXXX ZVZVVVX
  - Fig. 260.—Grantype; nozzle-plate. Elevation and section. Scale: about quarter size.
  - The Bellows compositor pump does not call for any particular comment, but it is stated that it produces a very homogeneous slug and a clean cast.
  - The Graphotype pump, which is placed at a rather greater distance from the mould than usual, is provided with an arrangement for heating the connecting pipe by means of a low-tension electric current.
- p.278 - vue 328/901
- - CHAPTER XVI.
  - THE CLASSIFICATION OF TYPECASTING MACHINERY, COMPOSING MACHINERY, JUSTIFYING APPLIANCES AND DISTRIBUTING APPLIANCES, AND OF MACHINES WHICH EMBODY TWO OR MORE OF THE OPERATIONS OR PROCESSES DESCRIBED.
  - A % 0 %
  - 6
  - &
  - —
  - 8
  - €
  - 8
  - e
  - 3
  - e
  - 18-point imperial script (Stephenson, Blake & Co.).
  - A Scientific classification of typecasting and composing machinery might be attempted on the following lines in which the sequence of classes follows the cycle of the principal operations in the order in which they are usually performed. Thus we should obtain as a first class machines which carry out single operations, subdivided into :—
  - (a) Machines casting type only,
  - (b) Composing machines,
  - (c) Line-justifying machines,
  - (d) Distributing machines.
  - A second class of machines would be formed of those which combine these operations two at a time ; six combinations are possible :—
  - (ab) Casting and composing machines,
  - (ac) Casting and line-justifying machines,
  - (ad) Casting and distributing machines,
  - (bc) Composing and line-justifying machines,
  - (bd) Composing and distributing machines,
  - (cd) Line-justifying and distributing machines.
  - Of these combinations only a few would be of any use in practice ; for instance, a number of machines have been constructed combining the operations of casting and composing (ab). A machine has been made combining the operations of casting and distributing (ad), but a machine which combines the operations of casting and justifying (ac) is not very 279
- p.279 - vue 329/901
- - 1
  - 00
  - O
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - likely to appear on the field, though it has been proposed and patented as an adjunct to a typesetter for inserting in a line of type the desired spaces of accurate size. Machines have been made for performing the operations of composing and line-justifying (bc), and of composing and distributing (bd), line-justifying being performed otherwise ; but it is not likely that any machine will be constructed to perform the two operations of line-justifying and distributing (cd).
  - In considering the triple combinations, the following are possible :— (abc) Casting, composing and line-justifying machines, (bed) Composing, line-justifying and distributing machines, (abd) Casting, composing and distributing machines,
  - (acd) Casting, line-justifying and distributing machines.
  - Of these, the first three are practicable, or exist, while no machine is ever likely to be built combining casting, line-justifying and distributing.
  - A quadruple combination forming a fourth class would consist of machines for performing the whole of the four operations, thus :—
  - (abed) Casting, composing, line-justifying and distributing machines.
  - No such machines, however, are likely to be built. It is therefore evident that of the total fifteen combinations or groups which exist, only twelve are represented by machines extant or likely to be made.
  - What, therefore, would perhaps be the ideal classification for all forms of machines engaged in the production of relief surfaces for typographical printing is the one given above. Admitting this to be the fact, the foregoing scientific classification unfortunately cannot be rigidly adhered to in practice, for the subject becomes complicated and the subclasses are so numerous and so tend to shade off into one another, to borrow each other’s attributes and often to combine such great differences and similarities in the same machine, as to make any truly scientific classification practically impossible.
  - A further complication, moreover, has also to be reckoned with owing to the fact that the modern typographical printing-surface is commonly reproduced one or more times for the printing-press by stereotyping, and that numerous attempts have been made to eliminate some of the processes and to obtain the stereotype-matrix direct, these efforts giving rise to an entirely new class of machine known in America as impression machines, and in England as stereotype-matrix machines.
  - A classification which has no claim to being scientific, but which is at least practical, is often adopted, and machines are divided into " hot " machines and " cold” machines. Even here, however, the classification can only be very rough. The term “matrix-circulating” machines, straining the meaning of the word circulating, might be used to designate a particular class ; but this classification is unsatisfactory, and the only thing that remains is to accept the scientific classification as far as it goes, and to consider any special machines, not covered by that classification, on their individual merits.
- p.280 - vue 330/901
- - CLASSIFICATION OF MACHINES.
  - N 0
  - For the general purposes of classification the authors have taken, as an entirely different class, machines which in conjunction with some form of typecasting mechanism are capable of producing the printing-surface more or less completely without the intervention of manual labour beyond the touching of the keys upon a keyboard. This classification has also the advantage of being roughly historic and chronological, for just as in the history of printing the Wicks rotary typecasting machine, in the authors’ opinion, is so far the highest development of its class of machine and is the legitimate descendant of the primitive hand-mould, so is the highest development of the typecasting and composing machine of to-day, the legitimate descendant of the combined composing, line-justifying and distributing cold machine. In this treatise, therefore, following the various casting machines will come the simple composing machine ; the simple line-justifying machine; the simple distributing machine; the casting and composing machine ; the casting and line-justifying machine ; the casting and distributing machine; the composing and line-justifying machine; the composing and distributing machine; the casting, composing, and line-justifying machine; the composing, line-justifying and distributing machine. In succeeding chapters the authors will deal in order with these respective combinations of operations, taking in each case as instances typical machines which effect, by various methods, the carrying out of the several processes of casting, composing, line-justifying, and distributing; either individually, or collectively, two or more at a time.
  - Most of the above machines are what are generally known as cold machines, that is to say, machines which receive their type cold and carry it in that condition through all its manipulations to its final position in the printing-surface. Even here the classification would break down, for there are machines which may be considered cold in some of their processes and hot in others. However, as a broad generalization the classification holds.
  - Composing, line-justifying, typecasting and (through the metal-pot') distributing machines.—In this category, with few exceptions, will be included the large class of machines known generally as hot. Their varieties are as numerous as those in the other class, but for the moment setting aside certain rarer classes, which are of no great commercial interest, they may be broadly divided into two classes, the monotype class and the linotype class, the generic difference between these two classes being that in the monotype class, the product, loose type, is cast by the successive presentation of matrices to a type-mould for the successive casting of the individual type or units which go to form the finished product of this class of machine—a line of individual type ; whereas in the second or linotype class the product of the machine, usually a slug, is cast in a single operation of pouring the metal into the mould. The further class of hot machines includes impression machines, in which dies form impressions in flong or
- p.281 - vue 331/901
- - 282 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - papier mache from which slugs, logotypes, or type are subsequently cast, or in which steel dies impress soft-metal blanks in various ways to form type, strips of type in relief, or type-slugs. Some of these are in one sense cold machines, but as they are heavy machines driven by power, they may be conveniently classed here under the general heading of impression machines.
  - Miscellaneous.—Under this head one may put machines which seek to arrive at the production of a printing-surface by methods dissimilar from any already described, such, for instance, as machines in which no type is used, but which reproduce the characters directly by means of photography and etching or lithography.
- p.282 - vue 332/901
- - CHAPTER XVII.
  - Keyboards.
  - " All through my keys that gave their sounds to a wish of my soul. All through my soul that praised as its wish flowed visibly forth/* Browning. Abt Vogler.
  - 8-point Venetian old-style (Shanks & Sons).
  - Before proceeding to the consideration of any form of composing machine, the question of keyboards demands individual attention. So far as the authors are aware, this subject has not been treated by itself in extenso, especially with regard to its development, and to the influences that have acted in determining the arrangement both of the printer’s case itself, and of the keyboards of the various composing machines by means of which its former functions are now so frequently performed.
  - In the first place the arrangement of the printer’s case must have been arrived at in a more or less haphazard manner, and the size of the different compartments gradually changed and varied to allow for the requirements of practice, dependent on the frequency of occurrence of the different characters and on the distance which the hand of the compositor must travel in picking up the characters successively in the performance of hand-composition.
  - ARRANGEMENT OF CASES.
  - The arrangement of the English case had attained very nearly its present form prior to the discarding of the long s (f), and its evolution may be studied from the following figures which give, (r) Moxon’s cases, 1683, fig. 261 ; (2) Smith’s cases, 1755, fig. 262 ; (3) the ordinary arrangement of the lower case, 1870, fig. 263.
  - No systematic attempt appears to have been made to improve the arrangement of the English case, but modifications have been gradually introduced and the case shown in fig. 263 has now been altered in many offices so that the compartments in the top row read: fl, [], (), :, ;‘; the large box for the lower-case e remains as before and is followed by : middle spaces, I. 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6; the compartments to the left of the b and 1 reading downwards now contain the ff, fi, &, q ; the compartments to the 283
- p.283 - vue 333/901
- - 284 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - right of g contain 7, 8, 9 and 0, the odd figures coming under the 5; and in the upper pair of compartments to the right of the r are placed the k and j respectively, the k occupying the compartment which previously contained the q. An illustration of this lay is given in Southward’s " Modern Printing.”
  - The size of the box in the case is not merely dependent on the number of characters required by a fount scheme, but also depends upon the set
  - Upper.
  - A B C D E F G a e i 6 u 8
  - H I K L M N O a e i 0 u * 8
  - P Q R S T V W a e 1 6 6
  - X Y Z E J U a e 1 0 u 8 +
  - 2 1 a 0 % # 5 o 8 n 2 S m *
  - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - m 4 ke A x
  - 8 9 0 ft k Ai fi Al Al R € $
  - Lower.
  - j ae ce e S fl A
  - 9 b C d i f f g Al ff fr
  - & A A
  - & 1 m n h 0 y P q w ?
  - > en ein
  - Z V u t Spaces. a r » Quadr.
  - X • -
  - Fig. 261.—Moxon’s cases, 1683.
  - width of the respective characters. This can be seen by comparing the size of the compartments containing the lower-case 1 and d respectively, the one compartment being one-half the size of the other, while the number of letters in each compartment is the same.
  - In these diagrams the authors have dealt chiefly with the lower case, because, owing to the importance of the characters, the influences have shown themselves clearly in this instance, whereas in the matter of the upper case, which is so much less used, the influences have not taken full effect. As
- p.284 - vue 334/901
- - KEYBOARDS. 285
  - a matter of historic interest, it may here be noted that Earl Stanhope, Upper.
  - A B C D E F G A B C D E F G
  - H I K L M N 0 H 1 K L - M N 0
  - P Q R S T V W 2 Q R S T V W
  - X Y Z E C J U X Y Z E CE J U
  - a e 1 0 U H.S. [] a e 1 0 U 51 §
  - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a e 1 6 U I #
  - 8 9 0 fb fl ft k a e 1 0 U t *
  - Lower.
  - & 86 06 € ? » e S () m fi fl fl fl
  - & b C d i f f g Th AT ff
  - 3 fi fi
  - I 9 1 m n h o y P w V en em
  - Z q u t Spaces. a r » Qaadr.
  - X • -
  - Fig. 262.—Smith’s cases, 1755.
  - — [ oe a ( j e THIN AND MID. SPACES • ? 1 fl
  - & ffl b C d i s f g ff
  - fi
  - ffi HAIR SPACES I m n h 0 y P » W E N QUADS EM QUADS
  - Z X V u t THICK SPACES a r q 2,3 AND 4 EM QUADS
  - © -
  - 0 5 10 Inches
  - Fig. 263.—Ordinary arrangement of lower case, 1870.
  - who devised a large number of improvements intended to assist the printer,
- p.285 - vue 335/901
- - 286
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - UPPER CASE.
  - Galley-ledge
  - X Y Z 1 m dash 2 m dash J U
  - £ I P 2 R S T V W
  - § t H I K L M N O
  - X Y Z 2 m brace 3 m brace J U A B C D E F G
  - P Q R S T V W 3 6 9 [] on
  - H I K L M N 0 2 5 8 () of &
  - A B C D E F G 1 4 7 0 to
  - LOWER CASE.
  - ZLX re an e f g in V
  - b c d th h se w
  - 1 9 : in space
  - in n i 0 S
  - P » n space
  - n
  - y u t Thick and middling spaces’ a r • Thin space Quadrats
  - Apos, q Hair space Hyp.
  - —— —
  - PECULIARITIES AND ADVANTAGES OF THESE CASES.
  - First. The nine logotypes now in use are omitted. They are proposed to be printed with separate types, thus : ff, fi, fl, ffi, ffl, &c. instead of ff, fi, fl, ffi, ffl, &c. And the Italic thus: ff, fi, fl, &c. instead of ff, fi, fl, &c. In 20 pages of Enfield’s Speaker, (namely, from page 71 to 90, both inclusive), those logotypes occur only 95 times, viz.
  - PRESENT LOGOTYPES.
  - fffiflffiffl^ECEaece Total, 28 51 10 4 2 0 0 0 0 j 95.
  - Secondly. Eight new logotypes are introduced. Their regular and frequent occurrence expedite the process of composition in a very considerable degree ; for, in those same 20 pages, the new logotypes would save to the compositor no less than 3072 lifts, viz.
  - STANHOPE LOGOTYPES. th in an re se to of on 1 Total, 771 441 413 385 291 279 264 229J 3073.
  - Thirdly. The introduction of the new logotypes, and the great imperfection of the various existing arrangements of composing cases, have caused the above new and very superior arrangement to be adopted.
  - Fourthly. The front side of each box of the lower case is made sloping, instead of upright ; which shape is convenient both to the view and to the hand of the compositor, and it enables him to lift the types with the same rapidity and ease when the boxes are nearly empty as when they are full. The types are much better preserved from wear, by means of this shape. It also allows the lower case to be made deeper than usual; so that, two of them contain as much as three lower cases on the old construction. At the bottom of each box of the upper case, the internal front arras is filled up.
  - The saving of time is of immense importance, especially in all cases where despatch is particularly required. The new cases are, by experience, found to save full one day out of six to the compositor.
  - Fifteen boxes on the left-hand side of the upper case are represented empty. They are intended for the sorts which are sometimes used for particular works ; such as, accented letters, mathematical marks, &c.
  - As the asterisk, or star [*] is very liable to be filled with ink at press, it is intentionally excluded from among the reference-marks.
  - Stereotyped and Printed by EARL STANHOPE, Chevening House, Kent.
  - Fig. 264.—Stanhope’s cases.
- p.286 - vue 336/901
- - KEYBOARDS,
  - 287
  - and, amongst other matters, devoted considerable attention to the introduction of logotypes, proposed an amended form of case in which provision was made for certain logotypes. This is shown in a page reproduced in reduced facsimile from his work, fig. 264.
  - In France the arrangement of the case appears to have been standardized at an early period in a form which left a considerable amount to be desired with regard to the distance travelled to and fro by the hand of the compositor in setting up and in distributing. The subject has been investigated at great length by Theotiste Lefevre, who publishes a table showing the distance moved by the hand both for composing and for distributing a quantity of matter equal to 18,000 ens with the case arranged in the old
  - A B C D E F G A B C D E F C
  - H I K L M N O H I K L M N 0
  - P Q R S T V X P Q R S T V X
  - a e i 6 fi Y Z J U E E E Y Z
  - E E E A (E W C 111 fi A C W C !
  - a e 1 t U ( r fi 3 t § ] / ?
  - » O U J j e m fr e i U * 1 &
  - a
  - Cadrats.
  - Esp. fines
  - Fig. 265.—Lay of French cases.
  - Cad. ratin
  - Cad-ratin
  - way and in the new way which he proposes. He takes the number of characters of each sort, multiplies by the distance and sums the totals, with the result that he is able to show a saving of 8 per cent in the distance travelled by the hand of the operator in composition. He also points out the interesting fact that in distributing type, the hand travels a considerably shorter distance than in composing it, the distances being respectively in the ratio of 66 to 100, according to the " Guide Pratique du Compositeur d’Imprimerie."
  - The lay of the French cases is shown in fig. 265 ; that of the German Fraktur case is shown in fig. 266; and that of the Russian case is shown in fig. 267.
  - Some mechanical devices have been produced with the object of saving handwork in composition, amongst which only one ever reached the
- p.287 - vue 337/901
- - 288
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - stage of coming on the market. This machine, known as the Lagerman Typotheter, subsequently as the Universal, and later as the Chadwick, was the invention of Alexander Lagerman of Sweden. It was based on the assumption that the compositor could take up type faster with both
  - 21 $ 6 D @ 57 63 $ I
  - 2 92 92 D $ 2 B G $ $
  - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 * U 233 & % 3
  - C e e 6 5 a ft d U r § t 1 2 1
  - t u r SV IV j ? ! )
  - si 8 v :
  - f 6 in i n 0 q mid. sp. th. sp.
  - « 1 hair sp. » em quad
  - 6 c a a en quad. e d f fi fl Quads.
  - 6 f 9
  - Fig. 266.—Lay of German Fraktur case.
  - hands than with one, and that a considerable portion of the time lost in composition was wasted in effecting the turning of the type to its proper position. The machine was constructed with a funnel into which the type
  - A B B r I E S 3 II I
  - K JI M H 0 n P C T y
  - © X I H HI m B BI B 9 IO SI e V § * » )
  - A B E I P C y • B — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
  - v e • C T y P B i ) !
  - Na *
  - i - 1 pt. sp.
  - 10 BI 3 M H H O n • 2 pt. sp.
  - X K JI n ) em & en quads.
  - ni in * a 4 pt. sp. e A b 4 Quads.
  - b s 6 r
  - Fig. 267.—Lay of Russian case.
  - were dropped as fast as they could be picked up and released from the fingers of the compositor. The machine received the type from the funnel, selected it for position and turned it end for end, if necessary, so that the type was arranged face up and nick outwards, irrespective of its position
- p.288 - vue 338/901
- - PLATE XV.
  - Fig. 268.—Chadwick typesetter.
  - Fig. 269.—Cases with Chadwick typesetter in position.
  - To face page 288.]
- pl.15 - vue 339/901
- p.n.n. - vue 340/901
- - KEYBOARDS.
  - 289
  - when it entered the hopper or was received by the filling mechanism of the machine. In this machine a bell warned the compositor when the line was full, and enabled him to shift it into a receiving galley in its unjustified condition and to proceed with the composition of the next line.
  - In the improvement of this machine known as the Chadwick, fig. 268, plate XV, an indicator showed the amount of space required to justify the line, and it was proposed that the compositor should empty into the hopper the requisite number of spaces to make up this deficit when the take was completed, and subsequently transpose them to their proper position between the words. Figure 269, plate XV, shows the machine in its place in front of the cases.
  - The machine in its earlier and later forms failed to make headway on account of the very small saving effected by it in actual practice. Amongst
  - Fig. 270.—Hattersley keyboard. Scale: about 3 full size.
  - other inventors in this direction may be cited L. K. Johnson, A. A. Low, and Alexander Dow, all of whom have patented various devices for assisting the composition of type by hand.
  - COMPOSING-MACHINE KEYBOARDS.
  - The arrangement of the keyboard of machines designed for effecting the composition of type has been influenced by various causes ; first, in machines like the Hattersley (1857), an attempt was made to group those keys near together which are most frequently used, fig. 270.
  - The Kastenbein keyboard (1869) also places the most frequently used keys together, fig. 271, but in two separate groups, it being intended apparently to use both hands more equally than could be the practice in hand-composition or than is usual in the arrangement now adopted in most typewriters.
  - Hooker (1874) adopted an arrangement in which the keys were not only arranged as, but were in size identical with the compartments of the
- p.289 - vue 341/901
- - N O 0
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - ordinary compositor’s case, fig. 263, with the exception that the compartment marked hair-spaces is used for the k. The keys formed electric contacts operating electro-magnets, one connected to each plate, and effected the ejection of the corresponding type from its channel.
  - Wicks (1883) in his composing machine arranged the keys in two parallel rows, fig. 272, with the object of obtaining a saving in the distance travelled by the hand of the compositor by giving special attention to the ease of production of chords forming logotypes. This inventor, however, like many others, appears to have been guided rather by his personal belief than by actual statistics.
  - Had the table of frequency of logotypes given in table 27, p. 148, been accessible at the time, it would have proved of considerable utility to the inventor in designing the Wicks composing machine. With the keyboard shown in fig. 272, chords can be struck for thirty-four of the logotypes given in the table accounting for nearly 33 per cent of ordinary reading matter. With the arrangement; btwpcheaioursngdly sp. qd., for the front row, chords could be struck for fifty-one of the logotypes given in table 27, and for over 44 per cent of the ordinary reading matter.
  - The Pulsometer keyboard, fig. 273, is arranged with the space-key of greater width and central to the board; this key is of much larger size than the others, extending over the whole depth of the four rows of character-keys ; at its front end it is fitted with a slide permitting it to act as desired on one or the other of two keys of normal size effecting the release of spaces from one or other of two corresponding magazine-channels. The arrangement adopted in this keyboard is one in which those characters which are most used are grouped together on each side of the central space-key, but no attempt is made to follow any well-known arrangement of keys.
  - The Monotype keyboard.—The arrangement of the original A, B, or C pattern keyboard of the Monotype, fig. 274, was influenced by a totally different set of conditions, namely, the set width of the various characters to be produced, and the grouping of these characters in classes according to the set widths. This arrangement did not permit of bringing those characters very close together which are most frequently used, and it produced a keyboard quite unlike that of any other class of machine.
  - All the fifteen characters of a row arranged vertically on the keyboard (or of a row arranged body-wise on the grid) have the same set width ; this is a most important feature in designing faces to suit the machine. The unit employed is one-eighteenth of the quad, and the vertical rows of keys give the following set widths; one row each 5, 6, 7, and 8 units ; three rows 9 units (en quad) ; two rows 10 units ; one row each II, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 18 units, fig. 367, p. 396. The space-key operates in a different manner and gives a setting of 4 units only ; the keys act by elevating stops which limit the travel of a rack engaging with the counting wheel, one tooth of which equals one unit, and one revolution of which is equal to 9 ems, fig. 365, p. 394.
- p.290 - vue 342/901
- - y 9 ffl fi fl ff 9 U s J 3 0 J 2 3 4 5 A BoD KVmwsUEUU" 0 6) 7 ® 9 ® E g g H
  - v gNgidUdbys x 0 Bz gywmdesdVdddddWdBU
  - FIG. 271.—Kastenbein composing machine ; keyboard. Scale: $ full size.
  - (1) (S) () @ 6 @ 6 6 © @ G (D 68 Q 6 © ® G S © © © © 0 & © © O O 8 8 88 @ 8 ® ® ® ® ® ® © © 0 0 (2 (2) 66 G G G O ® © 2 8 © © © ® @ 0
  - Fig. 272.—Wicks composing machine; keyboard. Scale: | full size.
  - Wlm m A123/80EG 0 RE2BEDE •UDEHHED XBAISICZeeGL •BDE567 BYLM 6zkE M S/SmUN 100DA OTNCE ealmlE A ECO
  - Fig. 273.—Pulsometer composing machine; keyboard. Scale: 3 full size.
  - KEYBOARDS. 291 When the Monotype machine is required to be used for two different nts of type, it is possible to change the lay-out of the grid and to give
- p.291 - vue 343/901
- - 292
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - different uses to some of the keys on the keyboard so that dictionary and tabular work may be set up on the same machine using sans serif or clarendon type, as the case may be, in conjunction with ordinary roman.
  - 6 0 © ® @ @ © (0) () @ •
  - & Space of same set as points for tabular work
  - . 00000000® 000000000® 0000000000 $0000600000 () 2 () ( (5) (©) (0) (H (4) (0) (D (1) () () () () (D) (b) ^ (0) 0060000000 0000000000 000000066 @@00000006 @000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 Key for setting line_1 1 .— , . _ —
  - dividing guide pointer WSpacing Drum Key to starting position (for Reversing)
  - 1 4 N
  - II
  - Italics: lower-case, capitals, points and quads. (Black)
  - *5 6
  - Sy 3 $
  - 6 :
  - F li I’
  - Two additional keys on extreme right of keyboard (Green).
  - Fig. 274.—Monotype composing machine ; pattern C keyboard.
  - Plan. Scale: about J full size.
  - In this form of Monotype keyboard it has been possible, by varying the lay-out and giving different uses to the keys, to replace the italics and accents with gothic or other display faces, but in doing this it has been necessary to follow the set widths of the characters changed and to give
- p.292 - vue 344/901
- - KEYBOARDS.
  - 293
  - uses to the keys other than those which they originally possessed. This involved a change in the fingering and the necessity for putting some special mark on those keys which no longer represent the original character.
  - This feature, while simplifying the work from the printer's point of view, makes the manipulation of the keyboard extremely difficult for the
  - n n n n n n •QWERT ASDFG
  - — zX CV B fl Q W E R T ffi A S D F G fl Z X C V B £ I 2 3 4 5 f q w e r t fias d f g
  - Vzx cv b < 4
  - HHHHE HHHHH YUIOP HJKLA NM! ? C YUIOP HJKL& NM- : ;
  - 6 7 89 0 y u i o p hj k 1
  - nm,.
  - Space V. O
  - FIG. 275.— Monotype D and DD
  - HHHH n n
  - 0 / /
  - — ACc fl Q WE ffi A S D fl Z X C $ 1 4 1 fq w e fi as d •zx c O%<[
  - ) E C e @ (ac c % i a i a 6 t » M M ‘ c • • •! R T Y U I F G H J K V B NM -
  - keyboards; lay-out for books or news.
  - operator. For this reason the Monotype Corporation have improved upon their original model.
  - The lay-outs of the new pattern D and pattern DD keyboards, for multiple founts, figs. 275 and 276, are so arranged that the ordinary standard typewriter arrangement of keys is adopted for the alphabet
  - n n HHHHE ♦ Q W E R
  - • A S D F — ZXC V fl QWE R A S D F
  - fl Z X C V £1 2 3 4 q we r fi a s d f Vzx Cv
  - < 4
  - HHHHHE n n n n n T Y U I 0 P CHJK LE B N M , ? C T Y U I OP G H J K L & B N M - : ;
  - 5 6 7 8 9 0 t y u i op g h j k 1 ‘ b n m, . ’
  - <..O
  - Space
  - HHHH HHHE — ! .•• — A Ca fl Q W E fi A S D fi Z X C £ 1 2 3 f q w e fi a s d •zx C O%%
  - ? • Ib ’ ’ ’ ] CIIIIWI R T Y U I 0 P FGHJKL& VBNM- : ;
  - 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 r t y u i o p f g h j k I 1 v b n m , . '
  - Space | V ..
  - FiG. 276.— Monotype D and DD keyboards; lay-out for jobbing.
  - throughout, thereby greatly facilitating the work of the operator. In the D type of keyboard the differences of set width between the characters are allowed for by mechanism, arranged below the keyboard, which effects the distribution of widths to produce the proper feed of the unit-counting wheel, while in the earlier form of keyboard the lines of keys from back to front corresponded to the set width of the characters similarly arranged in the grid of the casting machine.
- p.293 - vue 345/901
- - 294
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The DD keyboard differs from the D keyboard, not in arrangement of its keys, but only inasmuch as it will simultaneously compose at one operation by the compositor two different sizes of type in two different measures; there need be no agreement between body-sizes, measures or
  - Where two characters appear on the same key, the upper is roman or italic, the lower a small capital. The 30 hatched keys are coloured blue.
  - FIG. 277.—Linotype keyboard; English. Scale: j full size.
  - 70 78
  - 14 22 30
  - o • G 0 © © © ©
  - 77 69 81 53 45 37 29 21 13 5
  - (D((RB)(0000
  - 81 73 65 57 49 41 33 25 (7 9 1 2 10 18 28 34 42 50 58 66 74 82
  - 0G000000 00000000000
  - 79 71 63 55 47 39 31 23 15 7 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80
  - @Ow®0000 000000000
  - 83 75 67 59 51 43 35 27 19 11 3 4 12 20 28 36 4 4 52 60 68 76 84
  - ((((©(0000 0000000000(2
  - Fig. 278.—Typograph keyboard; English. Scale: about 3 full size.
  - spacing, the double product being quite independent. In the DD keyboard there are two paper-towers arranged for receiving the perforated rolls of paper. This form of keyboard is of use where the matter requires to be duplicated for editions of works to be published simultaneously in
- p.294 - vue 346/901
- - Keyboards.
  - 295
  - different styles, each tower being operated independently if required and also being capable of independent line-justification.
  - The Linotype keyboard, fig. 277, adopts what is probably the most rational arrangement of keyboard possible, as the characters are grouped
  - 0
  - on
  - Lu os
  - ~-
  - 1:
  - Nawa
  - o
  - = o
  - on
  - u
  - .o
  - 801
  - •08
  - Fig. 279.—Linotype keyboard; French. Scale: about 3 full size.
  - 27 69 6 53 45 37 29 21 is S 6 14 22 30 38 46 54 62 70 78
  - 06000000 00000000®@
  - 81 73 65 57 49 41 33 2 5 17 9 » 2 10 16 2 6 34 4 2 50 58 66 74 82
  - 000000000 000000000w@
  - 79 71 63 55 47 39 31 23 15 7 8 16 24 32 40 48 50 64 72 80
  - ©000000 6000000006
  - 83 75 67 59 51 43 35 27 19 II 3 4 12 20 28 36 44 52 60 68 76 84
  - 0000000000 00000000000 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------FIG. 280.—Typograph keyboard; French. Scale: about J full size.
  - HI CI CI CI CI C 19 CAD CAD _ 1 V1 6 L
  - b
  - m
  - P
  - A R
  - sou or
  - a
  - according to the order of their frequency of occurrence, and at the same time are placed conveniently for making those combinations which are the most common.
  - The Typograph has an arrangement of keyboard, fig. 278, which is based on the frequency of occurrence of the characters, those sorts which
- p.295 - vue 347/901
- - 296
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - occur most often being placed near the centre of the board; this is apparently intended to be operated with both hands. In machines like the Linotype and Typograph, different keyboards are used for different languages, the arrangement being dependent on the frequency of occurrence
  - % X
  - Fig. 281.—Linotype keyboard; German. Scale: about 3 full size.
  - 6 14 22 30 38 46 54 62 70 78
  - 00000000WN
  - 2 10 18 26 34 42 50 58 66 74 82
  - 0000000006
  - 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80
  - 00000000TP
  - 4 12 20 28 36 44 52 60 68 76 84
  - 00000000000
  - 77 69 61 53 45 37 29 21 13 5
  - 0000000
  - 81 73 65 57 49 41 33 25 17 9 I
  - 000000000
  - 79 71 63 55 47 39 31 23 15 7
  - (VM0000006
  - 83 75 67 59 51 43 35 27 19 K 3
  - 00000000
  - Fig. 282.—Typograph keyboard ; German. Scale: about 1 full size.
  - B
  - U
  - and on the succession of characters in the language in question. For this reason the English, figs. 277 and 278, French, figs. 279 and 280, and German keyboards, figs. 281 and 282, of the Linotype and Typograph are shown in conjunction with each other.
- p.296 - vue 348/901
- - KEYBOARDS.
  - 297
  - The Monoline keyboard, fig. 283, affords an example of an existing keyboard being adapted to a machine in which the arrangement of the matrices is determined by their set width quite as rigidly as in the instance of the Monotype machine. Notwithstanding the fact that each kind of matrix must carry twelve characters, and that there are eight kinds of matrices, the arrangement of the matrices with their distributing mechanism has been effected without in any way altering the desired keyboard arrangement.
  - In the Monoline machine a different factor operated in deciding the form of keyboard. This machine was intended originally to be worked by girls, and with this object the typewriter keyboard was adopted so as
  - 00000000@(@
  - (0) © (0) © (0) @ (S) (6)
  - (o) G ® (2) ( ( (o)
  - space
  - (B) © (A) © © (2) () (=) G
  - 000000000000
  - Fig. 283.—Monoline keyboard. Scale: about j full size.
  - to save all trouble of learning a special keyboard and to give the facility of obtaining without trouble operators accustomed to the fingering.
  - The keyboard of the Victorline machine is very similar to that of the Linotype, but has thirteen extra keys, making 103 in all; twelve of these are accents or special keys arranged in two columns on the right-hand side of the board ; there is also a logotype en next the lower-case a on the left of the machine.
  - The lay-out of the keyboard of the Bellows machine is similar to that of the Linotype except that the two top rows are for small capitals or head letters. The letter-buttons are fastened on straight levers which rest under the release rods and these are in turn connected to a four-pointed star-wheel releasing-mechanism in such a manner that a depressed key-lever causes a quarter-revolution of the star-wheel, allowing one matrix to be dropped from the magazine. There is no mechanically-controlled mechanism for repeated-matrix release. The key touch is stated to be light and quick.
  - The keyboard of the Stringertype follows the standard pattern adopted by the Linotype and therefore calls for no comment. The same arrange-ment is also adopted in the Grantype.
- p.297 - vue 349/901
- - CO
  - O NT
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The Unitype keyboard, fig. 284, has ninety keys — one for each channel in the cylinder—each key being connected by levers and wires with a small plunger at the bottom of the channel containing the character that it represents. The front end of the plunger rests immediately behind the foot of the bottom type in its channel, the point of the plunger being thinner than this type. When a key is depressed on the keyboard, its corresponding plunger is moved forward, carrying one type out ahead of it. A light touch of the finger depresses the keys, and their action is practically instantaneous.
  - The Unitype keyboard is arranged in such a manner that frequently-used combinations of characters can be played in chords such, for instance, as and, con, the.
  - This capability of the keyboard has been utilized in the case of many other machines, and although apparently an important matter, as there is hardly a word in the English language that does not present a combination of at least two letters that can be so treated, it does not in practice effect the saving anticipated. The authors have been informed by several
  - Fig. 284.—Unitype keyboard. Scale : about 3 full size.
  - users of chord-producing keyboards that the compositors have found that the small saving of time effected by striking a large number of chords is neutralized by the time wasted over corrections of the extra errors due to transpositions, etc., that invariably arise in practice when chords are struck ; for this reason theoperators generally disregard this capacity on any keyboard.
  - The Paige compositor keyboard, fig. 285, is also shown in perspective view in fig. 360, plate XLVI. It is claimed that the arrangement of this keyboard was arrived at by a very careful analysis of the frequency of recurrence of combinations of letters, or logotypes, so that as many sorts as possible could be placed in the line by playing chords on the keys. This statement appears to be fully justified, for on comparing this keyboard with table 27, p. 148, the authors find that it permits of playing fifty-seven chords, which together account for over 49 per cent of the total matter—a result which is even better than that obtainable from their own suggested improvement on the key arrangement of the Wicks composing machine.
  - The line-key of the Paige compositor is of equal length to the space-key and works horizontally below it; this is of L-section to prevent the finger of the operator slipping off and it is operated simultaneously with
- p.298 - vue 350/901
- - No p *
  - 0 x
  - a
  - 1
  - B
  - 4
  - >
  - * 0 x
  - + 00
  - 8
  - SPACE
  - FIG. 285.—Paige compositor keyboard. Scale: about 3 full size.
  - KEYBOARDS.
  - @@00^00000^000003
  - • ELEIh EYCECERLGLN BiE/FEUX De wa MB NEO]
  - Fig. 286.—Pulsometer distributing machine; keyboard. Scale: half size.
- p.299 - vue 351/901
- - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - 300 the touching of the last word or syllable. An enlarged view of the Paige keyboard is given in fig. 360, plate XLVI.
  - The two-em quad-key really is an em quad, but operates the key below it so that two successive em quads are composed in the line.
  - At the back of the first six keys is a word and line indicator ; this revolves one step for each depression of the word-key; the indicator point travels horizontally to the right and shows the space available for the last word or syllable.
  - The arrangement of keyboards, having for object the playing of chords representing the most common combinations of consecutive characters, was a feature of considerable importance in all machines dealing with loose type, but in matrix-composing and record-strip machines those arrangements have found greater favour which are dependent on bringing together the characters most frequently in use. In the case of the matrix-composing machine, arrangements of keys according to frequency of occurrence are usually adopted. In record-strip composing machines, the work of composition need not be performed in the casting-room, but can be carried out under less exacting conditions. The standard typewriter arrangement of keyboard may be advantageously adopted in these circumstances. It is, however, worth noting that the arrangement of keys on the typewriter is not purely dependent on the frequency of occurrence of the characters singly or in sequence ; but it is necessary, in arranging the keys of a typewriter, to take account of the actual width of the character on the type-head, so that the broad characters are not placed next to each other. The period of time which elapses between the passing of one type-head by another in effecting successive impressions is extremely short, and upon this period depends the limit of speed at which a typewriter can be worked. This problem of type-bar interference becomes of very serious importance in the case of automatic typewriters for recording messages sent telegraphically. According to Donald Murray, the inventor of the Murray automatic printing telegraph, the moment of inertia varies as the cube of the length of the type-bar and it is necessary to reduce the length of the type-bars to about one-half the ordinary typewriter length, that is to 2 inches long, in the automatic printing telegraph.
  - Distributing Keyboards.
  - For the distribution of type, otherwise than automatically, some machines use a keyboard for restoring to the channels of a magazine each character in rotation from the matter to be distributed as it is read back and the corresponding key depressed by the operator. An example of this is afforded by the Pulsometer distributing machine, the keyboard of which is shown in fig. 286. This and earlier proposals are discussed in chapter XXI.
- p.300 - vue 352/901
- - CHAPTER XVIII.
  - CASTING MACHINES.
  - “ That printers of the future will be their own typefounders is evidenced by the efforts being made by inventors to furnish them with machines for casting type as required. Logically the printing-office is where the typemaking should take place, and emancipation from present conditions is looked forward to by all printers.”
  - John S. Thompson. History of Composing Machines.
  - 9-point bourgeois modernized old-style No. 2 (Monotype).
  - " Out jumps a type as lively as a tadpole.” Thomas MacKellar. A Manual of Typography.
  - 10-point haddon (Haddon.)
  - IN Europe, Anthony Francis Berte appears to have been the first to use the Pump, in the year 1807, as an integral part of a typecasting machine, the type having been previously cast by band at extremely slow speeds. Fournier gives 2000 to 3000 types per day as the output of a French hand-caster, but Moxon gives the higher number of 4000 as the day’s work of an English caster. Marc Isambard Brunel’s invention of 1820 is remarkable because, as has been stated, he used a vacuum to ensure the absence in the type of blow-holes, which had been one of the great difficulties up to his time, and is one that is still met with even in the present day by numerous workers in this branch of the subject. That his use of a vacuum was subsequently adopted by other inventors, together with his statement that even at that date it was a known device, has already been mentioned.
  - Before the advent of typecasting machines the cost of hand-cast type was naturally high. The prices of English type per pound in the years 1763 to 1825 are given in the following table :—
  - 1763 to 1792 s. d. I s. 796 d. 1800 1805 s. d. 1816 s. d. 1825 5. d.
  - 5. d.
  - Pica 10 I 1) I 3 16 26 I II
  - Small pica 12 I 34 I 6 18 28 2 2
  - Long primer 16 I 8 I 10 1 10 30 2 4
  - Bourgeois 2 0 2 2J 2 6 26 38 3 0
  - Brevier .. 26 2 9 3 0 3° 4 0 3 2
  - Minion .. 3 6 3 10 3 10 4 0 5 0 4 0
  - Nonpareil 5° 5 6 5 6 60 70 5 6
  - Pearl .. 60 6 7 6 7 7° 80 6 6
  - 0
  - CO
- p.301 - vue 353/901
- - 302
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Foreign type at the commencement of the last century was generally of Dutch or French origin. According to Hansard the cost of French type cast by Didot in 1822 was as follows :—
  - " It does not appear that the French type has any advantage to offer on account of price that would be an inducement to its importation into England. The size equal to our Nonpareil is 12 fr. or 10S. per lb., that nearest our Brevier 6 fr. or 5s.; Bourgeois, 3 fr. 80 c. or 3s. 2d. ; Long Primer, 3 fr. 30 c. and 2 fr. 70 c., equal to 2s. 9^. and 2s. 3d. ; Small Pica, 2 fr. 30 c. or is. IId. ; Pica, 2 fr. or is. 8d. ; English, I fr. 95 c. and I fr. 90 c., equal to is. 74d. and is. 7d. ; Great Primer, I fr. 75 c. or is. 54d."
  - The first typecasting machine of which an illustration is available is that invented and patented in England by Dr. William Church, in 1822. It was intended to be worked in conjunction with his composing machine, also patented in England in the same year. This interesting typecaster is shown in fig. 287, plate XVI.
  - According to De Vinne, " In I8II, Archibald Binny of Philadelphia devised the first improvement in hand-casting. He attached a spring lever to the mould, giving it a quick return movement, which enabled the type-caster to double the old production. In 1828, William Johnson of Long Island invented a type-casting machine which received the active support of Elihu White of New York ; but the type made by it were too porous, and the mechanism, after fair trial, was abandoned. About 1834, David Bruce, Jr., of New York invented a hand force-pump attachment to the mould, for the purpose of obtaining a more perfect face to ornamental type than was possible with the regular mould. This attachment was known as the squirt machine. Large ornamental types owe their popularity to this simple contrivance. In 1838, the same founder invented a type-casting machine, which was successfully used for many years in New York, Boston and Philadelphia. In 1843 he added other improvements of recognized value. Most of the type-casting machines in Europe and America are modifications and adaptations of Mr. Bruce’s invention.”
  - The foregoing statement, by so great an authority as De Vinne, can only have been made through lack of opportunity for investigating early English progress in the art, as disclosed by the records of the British Patent Office, and their incontrovertible logic of fact.
  - The Bruce machine, improved, is the American representative of the machine commonly known in England as the pivotal typecaster; it holds its own to the present day for those particular classes of work for which such machines are specially adapted.
  - The hand or power-driven pivotal casting machine generally in use in British, Colonial, and some American foundries is illustrated in fig. 288, plate XVI, and is shown in side elevation in fig. 289.
  - Simultaneously with the developments in the construction of the pivotal machine in the United States and England, progress in the same direction was being made independently in France and Germany.
- p.302 - vue 354/901
- - PLATE XVI.
  - Fig. 287.-—Church typecasting machine (1822)
  - L
  - Fig. 288.—Ordinary (English') pivotal typecasting machine.
  - [To face page 302.
  - e
  - ihnuonenss
  - • ms
- pl.16 - vue 355/901
- p.n.n. - vue 356/901
- - CASTING MACHINES.
  - 303
  - Pivotal machines, as a class, usually follow between very close limits the forms adopted for their construction, as shown in figs. 288 and 289. The mould has been already illustrated in figs. 217 to 219, pp. 243 and 245, and the pump is very similar to the justifier’s pump, but has usually the
  - 6
  - Fig. 289.—Pivotal typecasting machine. Side elevation.
  - addition of a jobber and a nipple-plate for preventing the stoppage of the nozzle.
  - The action of the machine is that a pivoted frame is capable of rocking in such manner as to move the mould to and from the nozzle of the metal-pot, and in conjunction with this movement are combined movements for opening the mould and closing it at the appropriate times, and also for tilting
- p.303 - vue 357/901
- - 304
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - the matrix away from the face of the type so as to leave it clear for ejection at the moment of opening of the mould. The operations are performed by cams arranged on a cross-shaft generally in the front of the machine, the parts and levers performing the operation being spring-controlled as also is the pump-plunger of the metal-pot which is released by a cam carried on the driving shaft. Originally these machines were constructed with a hand-wheel for turning by hand, and the action of the hand-caster was to give the wheel a turn and pause, with the handle in one definite position corresponding to the closed mould, for a period of time which he varied according to the size of body being cast. The effect of this method of using the machine was to produce a form of time diagram for each of the cams different from that which would be obtained by running the machine continuously by power. The result has been great waste of time by the builders of these machines, who have experimented by rule of thumb to obtain the correct forms of cams under conditions of speed which were not constant. The influence of diameter of roller on the shape of the cam, and that of sine-curve form on the quietness and smoothness of its action, were apparently quite unknown to workers in this field.
  - The following is a description more detailed than the general resume which has preceded it, of the ordinary and simple typecasting machine in common use in English foundries. This machine, as has been said, is substantially the same as the Bruce machine invented and used in America. The machine, or yet further and more recent improvements and modifications of it, made by one or other of the few makers of typecasting machinery that there are in England, is in general use, so far as the authors can ascertain, by all the printers who cast their own type, and by all the typefounders in the United Kingdom, with the exception of P. M. Shanks and Sons, who also use a machine of their own design and construction, which has a vertical body-slide, and John Haddon and Company, who use both the pivotal and the Foucher machine.
  - The two halves of the mould are mechanically operated so that they are brought together and, by the action of a cam carried on the driving shaft, held in contact with the nipple-plate which covers the nozzle of the metal-pot. The sequence of operations in the ordinary pivotal casting machine is as follows :—
  - After the ejection of a type the swing frame of the machine is moved towards the metal-pot by the action of the cam on the driving shaft which bears against a roller carried in an adjustable roller-box on the swing frame. The movement of the swing frame towards the metal-pot causes the mould to be closed positively by the action of the ball-ended rod, the lower end of which is secured to the table of the machine ; the upper end actuates the lifting arm to which it is pivoted. Also pivoted to the lifting arm is the bent arm, or binding arm, which is connected to the top mould-block by a pin at right angles to its upper portion. A groove is turned in this pin into which fits a slotted latch-plate ; when this plate is lifted till the slot is clear
- p.304 - vue 358/901
- - CASTING MACHINES. 305
  - of the groove, the pin can be withdrawn to enable the mould to be opened by hand and to be examined, cooled or cleaned.
  - The pin carried by the binding arm comes into contact with the top mould-block and presses it firmly into contact with the bottom mould-block, thereby ensuring uniformity of body in the type.
  - After the mould has come into contact with the nipple-plate, the jobber-cam acting on the jobber-lever causes the jobber to retire through the nipple, leaving the opening in the nozzle clear and in communication with the gate of the mould ; the pump-cam then reaches the point at which the roller on the pump-lever can move under the action of the pump-spring, and the pump-plunger is allowed to descend, pumping the metal into the mould. When the pump-plunger has descended, the jobber returns into the nipple, and when the mould leaves the nipple-plate it assists the dot in leaving the plate ; the roller on the pump-lever then comes into contact with the spiral portion of the pump-cam and commences its up-stroke, filling the pump ready for the next shot.
  - As the swing frame with the mould attached to it leaves the nipple-plate under the action of the withdrawing-spring, when the maximum radius of the cam on the main shaft has passed the roller, the mould during the first quarter-inch of its movement from the metal-pot is still held closed ; but as the movement proceeds, the binding arm with the pin attached to it commences to move upwards and the pin in its upward movement comes into contact with an adjusting screw, fitted with a lock-nut, passing through the top mould-block and entering an elongated hole in it, through which the pin passes ; the adjustment of the screw enables the period of time for which the mould remains closed after withdrawal to be determined by limiting the travel of the pin before the opening commences. Thus, after the cast is made and the mould has been withdrawn from the metal-pot, the top mould-block is not constrained until the mould commences to open.
  - The actual opening of the mould is effected by the withdrawing-spring which draws back the swinging frame. The binding of the matrix in its presentation against the mould is effected by the lining-bar, the end of which carries an adjusting screw; this bears against a stop on the side-frame of the machine. The brass plate lining-spring, the point of which enters a hollow in the back of the matrix behind the strike, holds it in position for line and prevents it from falling out of the machine. When the matrix is presented and the mould has closed, it is held positively against the mould by the action of the lining-bar. When the mould is withdrawn from the nipple-plate and before it begins to open, the movement of the swinging frame, which lifts the lifting arm, acts on an adjustable roller-box carried on the lower end of the delivery-lever and causes its upper end to move towards the nozzle ; this causes the adjustable arm of the delivery to be pushed forward against the tail of the matrix and ensures the tilting of the matrix on the lower edge of the back plate of the mould; this rocking movement of the matrix about a point midway between the face and the lower end of the
  - X
- p.305 - vue 359/901
- - 306 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES
  - matrix, frees the type. After the type has been cast and while it is still attached to its tang, it is sometimes retained by the top half of the mould and sometimes by the bottom half. To ensure its being freed from the mould in the former case, an adjustable knife fixed to the bottom mould-block is so set that if the type sticks in the upper half as the mould opens, the knife comes into contact with the dot and causes the type to fall away freely. If, on the other hand, the type sticks in the bottom half of the mould, which in this form of machine is inclined, an adjustable knife fixed to a stud on the back of the lifting arm catches the dot and lifts the type up by its tang freeing it from the mould, from which it then falls. Both knives are now usually fitted on machines of this class.
  - The type, with their attached tangs, fall down a chute into a tray, the operations of breaking off, setting up, and dressing having to be subsequently performed by hand.
  - The Davis pivotal machine for casting finished type.—An improved form of pivotal machine for throwing out finished type has been devised by one of the authors in conjunction with H. Davis. In the 1912 model, fig. 290, plate XVII, a slotted nick-wire is fitted to the bottom half of the mould and projects across the gate through which the type-metal enters. Drags are fitted to the top half of the mould to ensure the type being retained and being broken from its tang as the top half of the mould lifts ; the act of breaking off causes the type to fall away from the top of the mould completely finished with the break below the level of the feet, as in the case of the Stringer break shown in fig. 9, p. 13. A knife, connected with the lifting arm and operated by a pin fixed to the lifting arm and working in a slotted cam-path in the knife-lever, effects the ejection of the tang from the nick-wire which has retained it, thus completely clearing the mould in readiness for the next cast.
  - The finished type fall down a chute into a tray or box and require none of the operations of breaking off, setting up, and dressing.
  - In this machine, as in the one next described, a straight-line movement of presentation and withdrawal of the matrix is used, the mode of operation being practically the same as in the original pivotal machines, with the exception that a helical spring on the guide-rod of the presentation box, or matrix-holder, is substituted for the brass plate spring, and that the delivery-lever is no longer required as the helical spring performs the work of withdrawing the matrix.
  - Pivotal machine for casting and setting up finished type in line.—In a further modification of the pivotal machine, fig. 291, plate XVII, also due to one of the authors and to H. Davis, the mould has been placed horizontally instead of in an inclined position. The matrix-presentation has been made rectilinear as in the machine last described. The sequence of operations and description of the points in which this machine differs from the original pivotal machine are as follows :—
  - After the presentation of the mould and the completion of the cast,
- p.306 - vue 360/901
- - PLATE XVII.
  - Fig. 290.—Davis pivotal typecaster ; throwing out finished type.
  - Abe
  - S3
  - m
  - Fig. 291.—Davis pivotal typecaster ; setting up type in line.
  - [To face page 306.
- pl.17 - vue 361/901
- - PLATE XVIII.
  - Be mumurd” —
  - Fig. 292.— Nuernberger-Rettig typecaster.
  - To face page 307-]
- pl.18 - vue 362/901
- - CASTING MACHINES.
  - 307
  - the swing frame with the mould is withdrawn from the nipple-plate by the action of the withdrawing-spring, and the opening of the mould commences as in the previously described case ; simultaneously with this the matrix is drawn back to a sufficient distance by the action of the withdrawing-spring acting on the matrix-box or holder. Two thin metal blades mounted on a slide-block are made to travel in the direction in which the type is to leave the mould ; the one blade or pusher on the side adjacent to the metal-pot is formed with a forked end which embraces the dot, or that portion of the tang which was formed in the cavity in the nipple-plate ; the supplemental pusher bears simultaneously or nearly so against the wall or relief projection of the face of the type left clear by the withdrawal of the matrix. The process of ejection by these two pushers is effected by means of a cam carried on the main shaft which operates a lever pin-jointed to the fixed pillar of the machine. This lever raises a spring plunger carried in a spring box, and the upper end of the spring plunger bearing against the end surface of the bent arm of the ejection-lever causes its forked upper end to act on the pin moving the slide-block to which the pushers are attached. The movement of the pushers when completed causes the type to be ejected on to the receiving-stick along which it pushes the last type, previously cast, forward towards the outer side of the machine, type following type in regular order. After the completion of the movement of ejection the finished type stands in the type-race under a presser, and on the return of the swing frame an arm on the jobber-shaft actuates a plunger carried on the swing frame, breaking off the tang from the type ; an alternative method of breaking the type can also be arranged in which the power required is provided by the movement of the swing frame towards the type-race ; a breaking-off lever is carried on a pin on the side of the type-race next to the metal-pot, and a fixed cam-path, over which the tail of the lever travels, causes the depression of the lever and breakage of the tang to be effected before the completion of the movement of the swing frame towards the metal-pot.
  - In this form of machine the nipple-plate is usually made of two thicknesses of metal, the one containing the cup-shaped depression for the end of the nozzle, and the circular hole for the jobber, while the other part is formed with a tapered elongated hole for producing a form of dot which, when embraced by the forked end of the pusher, will prevent the turning over of the type during ejection.
  - In this machine and in that last described it is possible to use a matrix-box or holder suitable for carrying either Linotype or Monotype matrices in place of those of ordinary form ; moreover, it is possible to use a box for containing two or more Linotype matrices, fig. 94, p. 108, and thus to cast complete logotypes.
  - Nuernberger-Rettig.—Another pivotal typecasting machine, of American origin, which in the last year or two has appeared on the market and has been considerably advertised, is the Nuernberger-Rettig, fig. 292,
- p.307 - vue 363/901
- - 308 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - plate XVIII. Apart from neatness of design and solidity of construction, this pivotal casting machine does not call for any particular remark. The main difference between it and its congeners lies in its mould, which has a somewhat peculiar method of removing the tang from the type when cast. This, however, has been treated of elsewhere (pp. 12 and 13) in this work, and here requires no further comment.
  - Speed of pivotal machines.—The maximum speeds claimed for pivotal casting machines are about 3000 type per hour for pica, increasing up to 6000 type per hour for 6-point and smaller bodies. Owing to the fact that the moulds of pivotal machines are not generally water-cooled and only occasionally have an air-blast fitted for cooling, it is frequently necessary to stop to cool the mould, and for this reason the figures given do not correspond to the mean rate of output which can be maintained for a longer period.
  - In the case of large work, from 24-point to 72-point, the pivotal machine requires to be run at a considerably-reduced speed, for which purpose it is usually fitted with a reducing-gear, and in some cases with a gear which cuts out the driving shaft for one or more revolutions, allowing it to turn freely and then throwing it into gear again. This is done in order to imitate the action of the hand-caster who allowed a dwell, in turning the handle, at the moment when the mould had been filled, of sufficient length to ensure the solidifying of the type before the mould was allowed to open. In some of the large-work machines, fig. 293, plate XIX, used for casting quotations, special arrangements of mould are made for coring these hollow. The core must of necessity be withdrawn before the quad is ejected from the mould. Somewhat similar arrangements are also necessary for casting large type of bridge-section, a form which is sometimes adopted to effect a reduction in weight.
  - In all ordinary pivotal machines a different mould is required for each body, but the mould is adjustable for those variations in set which occur in a fount of type ; a different mould of each body is also required for spaces and quads, on account of the difference in height-to-paper, and, where a nick is fitted, yet another mould is required for the 2, 3, or 4-em quads. As the nicks differ for different faces of the same body, a suitable mould is required for each different arrangement of nick. The nicks on the body are produced in casting, but the removal of the tang and the cutting of the heel-nick, as has been said, must be performed subsequently, except in those machines like the Nuernberger-Rettig or the Davis, in which special provision is made for breaking off the tang without leaving any projection beyond the feet of the type.
  - Rapid typecasters.—Among other classes of machines to be considered are rapid typecasters, casting finished type at a high rate of speed from a single mould ; the only one known to the authors is one designed and produced by them and in connexion with which certain novel patents have been taken out. This machine is perhaps the most rapid producer in the world
- p.308 - vue 364/901
- - PLATE XIX,
  - Fig. 293.—Pivotal typecaster for large-work.
  - [To face page 308.
- pl.19 - vue 365/901
- - PLATE XX.
  - Fig. 294.—Rapid typecasting machine.
  - annl
  - i hill lla ren 9
  - • %
  - -: Wbengene MI
  - 1
  - To face plate XXI.]
- pl.20 - vue 366/901
- - PLATE XXI.
  - J c 6
  - Fig. 295.—Kilstermann typecasting machine.
  - [To face plate XX.
- pl.21 - vue 367/901
- - PLATE
  - XXII.
  - Fig. 296.—Barth typecasting machine.
  - Fig. 297.—Automatic typecasting machine; American Type Founders Co. To face page 309.]
- pl.22 - vue 368/901
- - CASTING MACHINES. 309
  - of ordinary printers’ type from a single mould, which is water-cooled and constructed somewhat on the lines of the Monotype mould. It delivers its type in a continuous line, and is capable of producing over 10,000 10-point type per hour, a slightly slower speed being maintained in the case of 12-point, and the rapidity of production of the smaller sizes is of course proportionately increased. These machines deliver their type from the mould completely finished without using any form of knife, file, dressing-plane, or milling-cutter.
  - Several of these machines have been constructed ; the idea which led to their building not being the production of type for sale, but the supplying of type to the magazines of composing machines used in a newspaper office. A novelty in these machines is the holding in actual contact of a hot nozzle against a cold mould, freezing being prevented in the orifice of the nozzle by the circulation of molten metal round the nozzle delivery-pipe in the manner already described elsewhere in this work. This machine is shown in fig. 294, plate XX.
  - Foucher, of Paris, has also produced a rapid caster, for which very high rates of speed are claimed. The type, however, from this machine is not, as in the machine just described, delivered finished from the mould, which is duplex, but is finished by means of cutting knives in a manner somewhat similar to that adopted in his earlier machines. These machines respectively represent the highest speed at which type have been cast commercially, in the first instance from a single mould and a single matrix, and in the second from a duplex mould and two matrices.
  - Next must be considered a different class of machines, such as the ordinary machine of Foucher of France, of Kustermann of Germany, fig. 295, plate XXI, of Bottger of Germany, and of Barth of America, fig. 296, plate XXII, which may be taken as representative ; and along with these certain still later machines, such as the automatic typecasting machine of the American Type Founders Company, fig. 297, plate XXII, the Compositype sorts caster, fig. 298, plate XXIII, and the Thompson type-caster, fig. 299, plate XXIII.
  - The Foucher universal typecaster casts, breaks off the tang, rubs the type, finishes the foot, and sets up in line either type, or spaces, or quads.
  - The mould is made with one side adjustable and the body-slide is changed for each body. Any form of matrix can be used, adjustments being provided for setting the matrix for the line, position, and set width of the character to be produced.
  - The output of the small-size machines is stated to vary from 4500 to 2500 per hour ; the rate, of course, decreases as the section of the type increases. The machine is made in four sizes, the smallest making from 3 to 14-point Didot and the largest from 48 to 108-point Didot.
  - The Kustermann rapid typecaster, fig. 295, plate XXI, is constructed °n lines somewhat similar to the Foucher machine. A screw-adjustment 18 provided for setting the matrix to line, and the position of the matrix
- p.309 - vue 369/901
- - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - 310 as well as the set width of the character are also determined by adjustments. The machine is driven by a horizontal shaft which actuates a portion of the gear indirectly by means of a vertical shaft driven through bevel-wheels. The output of the machine is stated to vary in 10-point body from 4500 em quads to 9600 of the thinnest sorts per hour.
  - The Bottger typecasting machine.—The earliest German rapid typecaster produced was that of Gottfried Bottger of Leipzig. In this machine a curved slide is substituted for the pivoted rocking frame of the ordinary machine, and a vertical shaft operated by helical gear from the main horizontal shaft operates the mould.
  - The Barth machine, fig. 296, plate XXII.—The patent of Henry Barth was granted in the United States on " January 24, 1888, for a complete type-casting machine. He claims that this machine produces one-half more than the older machines; that it does its work with more accuracy, and that it permits the use of a harder quality of metal. Its construction and its processes differ radically from those of the Bruce machine. One half of the mould and the matrix are fixed upright and made immovable ; the other half of the mould rapidly slides to and fro on broad bearings, releasing the type that has been founded and closing again before the hot metal is injected for a new type. It breaks off the jet, ploughs a groove between the feet, rubs down the feather-edges at the angles, and delivers the types on the channel in lines ready for inspection.” (De Vinne.)
  - The American Type Founders automatic machine.—Figure 297, plate XXII, shows the automatic typecasting machine at present in use by the American Type Founders Company. These machines, which are both air and water cooled, are stated to be able to cast up to a rate of 12,000 type per hour. The type are, however, cast unfinished and ejected along a channel where, by means of supplementary mechanism, the burrs are trimmed off, the tangs removed, the heel-nicks and distinguishing nicks cut and the type delivered on to a stick ready for inspection. In many ways this machine closely resembles those of Foucher (French) and Kustermann (German).
  - The Compositype sorts caster, fig. 298, plate XXIII, had its origin and was manufactured in Baltimore, Md., U.S.A.; it casts any size of type from 6-point to 36-point, and also quads and spaces, at a speed of from 26 to 13 type per minute, according to the size.
  - The mould is so constructed that only one mould section is required for each body-size of type, including high or low spaces and quads, and is readily adjusted for any change of set required, without recourse to skill or to micrometric measurements. The usual equipment for a machine is five mould sections with space and quad matrices, and spaces can be cast of i-point set. It is claimed that the change from one body-size to another can be effected in from two to three minutes. The casting, ejecting, and trimming movements are automatic, so that the machine delivers a finished type at each revolution. The matrices are electrotyped and closely resemble those of the Thompson machine, fig. 176.
- p.310 - vue 370/901
- - PLATE XXIII.
  - Fig. 298.—Compositype sorts-caster.
  - ^ S:
  - [To face page 310.]
  - FIG. 299.—Thompson typecaster.
- pl.23 - vue 371/901
- - PLATE XXIV.
  - Fig. 300.— Wicks rotary typecasting machine.
  - To face page 311.]
- pl.24 - vue 372/901
- - CASTING MACHINES.
  - 311
  - The machine is of compact design, occupies about 9 square feet of floor-space and weighs about 800 pounds ; the pump works at about 200 pounds per square inch, and about 025 horse-power is required to drive the machine.
  - The Thompson typecaster, fig. 299, plate XXIII. Another machine of which a good deal has been heard of. late is the Thompson type-caster produced by the Thompson Type Machine Company of Chicago. This machine, the invention of John S. Thompson, the author of the well-known " History of Composing Machines,” belongs to the class of machines which have a body-slide and a composite mould with detachable and interchangeable components ; these give it a range of from 5-point to 48-point. The mould is cooled by the circulation of water through its jacket.
  - The casting of the type presents no marked peculiarity ; the removal of the roughness left by the tang when broken off, as well as the production of any supplementary nicks required, are effected by suitably-placed cutters ; as in other machines which finish the type in this way, these nicks are shallow as compared with the cast nicks.
  - The Thompson machine is usually fitted with an electric motor, and is capable of being run at varying speeds which are stated to give from 11 to 163 type per minute, the higher speeds of course being employed for the smaller bodies. In this machine Linotype matrices are generally used for bodies up to 24-point, and the matrix-holder is fitted with a micrometer screw for adjusting the alinement. For large bodies a copper matrix formed in a brass casing, fig. 176, p. 221, is used. The machine, Which is of extremely compact and neat design, delivers the type finished into a race.
  - The Wicks rotary typecasting machine, fig. 300, plate XXIV, represents the highest development, at the present time, of machines for producing finished type. The machine has 100 moulds mounted in a wheel which is revolved continuously by worm-gear, the number of moulds of each Particular set being determined by the demand for type of that set size. The last columns of tables 7 and 8, pp. 72 and 73, show the normal demand based on the bill of fount, and the number of moulds of each set must be determined from this so as to give the minimum of waste due to over-production of certain sorts.
  - Although type is produced by the Wicks rotary typecasting machine at a much lower cost than by the single-mould machine, it is obvious that the machine cannot cope with a heavy demand for extra sorts if these are of a set width of which there may happen to be but few moulds in the mould Wheel. Hence it is a commercial necessity that a foundry equipped with Wicks rotary casting machines should have, in addition, some single-mould machines ; these may, however, be adapted to use the Wicks matrices by providing suitable moulds. It is, moreover, necessary that some of the matrices should be changed at suitable intervals, so that the proper proportional number of each character may be cast. From these
- p.311 - vue 373/901
- - 0 1
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - considerations it follows that if more than one face is to be cast in the wheel, these faces must be so designed that they agree closely in total demand for each set width. Type of different faces may be distinguished
  - Asbestos washer
  - $ —
  - $ 8
  - Return Shoot
  - 1 K
  - 3 r
  - Type
  - Metal
  - % 0 %
  - AS
  - -3
  - & A
  - 2Ins.
  - Revolving portion, of Wheel
  - Fig. 301.—Wicks rotary typecaster ; section through mould at casting point.
  - Key for figs.
  - a. Cam-head (stationary).
  - b. Plate spring.
  - c. Top cover (stationary).
  - d. Chain-driving teeth.
  - e. Nick-wires.
  - f. Foundation ring.
  - g. Height-to-paper screw.
  - h. Height-to-paper cam.
  - 301 and 302.
  - j. Matrix-jacket.
  - k. Chain-link.
  - I. Chain-leaves.
  - m. Mould.
  - n. Mould-wheel.
  - 01 02 03 04 Folding-wedges (stationary).
  - p. Port.
  - by supplementing the cast nicks with a cut nick, milled by a cutter like that used for producing the heel-nick.
  - The sequence of operations in the Wicks machine is as follows : after the type has left the mould m, figs. 301 and 302, the matrix s is gradually withdrawn by a cam carried on the head a of the machine and bearing against
- p.312 - vue 374/901
- - CASTING MACHINES.
  - 0 on
  - the hard steel surface of the matrix-jacket j. The matrix is guided on the stem by the mould, and at the upper part by a groove in the matrix guide-ring r. After passing the withdrawing-cam w, fig. 302, the matrix is
  - Fig. 302.—Wicks rotary typecaster ; delivery of type.
  - € $ S % 69
  - 8 $8 D IF
  - Mould wheel with matrices, cam head and withdrawing-cam; re-taining-cam removed.
  - Y
  - 9 25
  - Key—continued.
  - q. Shield (stationary). v.
  - r. Matrix guide-ring. w.
  - s. Matrix-stem. x.
  - t. Type. y.
  - u. Sliding head. z
  - Retaining-cam (stationary). Withdrawing-cam (stationary) Side-cams (stationary).
  - Receiving-galley (stationary).
  - Chain-race (stationary).
- p.313 - vue 375/901
- - 314
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - slightly advanced towards the periphery of the wheel by the height-to-paper cam h, fig. 301, which acts on the screw g in the matrix-jacket; a light plate spring b carried on the top cover c presses against the outer surface of the matrix-jacket j, ensuring contact with the screw, and so secures uniformity in height-to-paper. Before reaching this point the end of the matrix-stem s has been covered by the top cover, and the end of the mould has also been covered by the shield q, which is mounted under an adjustable sliding-head u. On nearing the centre of the shield the port P, into which the stream of metal delivered by the pump is forced, becomes uncovered and the metal enters the mould. The type sets in a very short interval of time after the mould has closed the port in the shield, since the mould-wheel fn and the top cover c are both cooled by water-circulation.
  - So far as the authors can ascertain, the type sets in less than 0'03 second, in a water-cooled mould, for bodies not larger than 10-point. This figure was arrived at by experiments on the length of nick-wire necessary, in the top cover of the Wicks mould, to enable the type to set before it cleared the end of the wire. It was, of course, necessary that the wire should extend the width of the widest sort, say 0’25 inch to the left of the centre of the nozzle, and it was found in practice that if the wire extended for 0’3 inch beyond the centre the type did not show signs of flow of metal into the nick. The linear speed of the mould-wheel at the nick was about 10 inches per second, hence the time of setting could be arrived at. In practice the nick-wires were made a standard length of about 1-25 inches to cover all classes of work.
  - As the revolution proceeds, the type is carried round in the mould, and when it is clear of the shield the ejecting-cam (not shown in the drawings) begins to operate on the matrix-jacket, causing the matrix and the type t with it to move outwards. When ejected about 0’05 inch, and therefore well supported in the mould, the heel-nick is cut in the foot of the type by a rapidly revolving milling-cutter ; when further ejected, to about 0-20 inch, an extra body-nick for distinguishing founts may be milled in if required. The ejection continues with the revolution of the wheel, and the end of the type when ejected about 0’35 inch enters the space between the leaves I of the chain-link k corresponding to its mould, fig. 302. The chain consists of 100 links, and is driven by the teeth d cut on the periphery of the mould-wheel. The ejection continues till the type is just clear of the mould, when the retaining-cam v, carried by the head of the machine a, engages with one of the body-nicks in the type and prevents the type from being drawn back with the matrix by the action of the with drawing-cam w. The cycle of operations with the matrix is now repeated.
  - The type which has left the mould is carried by the leaves I of the chain-link k to the receiving-galley y ; this is slotted so that the type t1 t2 is supported at the ends on the galley-plate, while it is propelled along the galley, and prevented from tilting by the leaves I of the chain ; near the end of the slot in the galley-plate the leaves of the chain, which have up to the
- p.314 - vue 376/901
- - CASTING MACHINES.
  - 0 oi
  - present been carried on the chain-race z, drop so that the upper ends clear under the galley-plate ; the side cam-pieces x, which bear on the rounded shoulders of the leaves, control the dropping, fig. 302. The type is now free in the galley along which it is impelled by the next succeeding type. The stream of type is received on a stick of L-section, and removed by a boy who places the type either 300 or 400 at a time into a type-galley in which
  - I. Cutoff 2 & 3. Slab milling. 6. Cut to 7. Straddle
  - in lengths. 4 & 5. Gang milling. length. milled.
  - 8. Gang-milling grooves.
  - Traversed. Rotated. Traversed.
  - Profile milling in batches.
  - 9. Profile of single 10. Profile of double
  - joint.
  - joint.
  - Recess milling for single joint.
  - 12 & 13. Drilling and reaming.
  - Finished link complete with leaves (shown tinted) and pin.
  - Fig. 303.—Wicks rotary typecaster ; operations in machining chain-links. Scale: half size.
  - they occupy the same relative positions. The recurrence of the largest set size or of a sequence of characters of large set serves as a guide to the boy in sliding the type along on to the stick, and at the same time gives stability to the last line in the galley.
  - The type as received in the galley form a block, the appearance of which is shown in fig. 118, p. 116, which illustrates the lock-up test. The number
- p.315 - vue 377/901
- - 3i6 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - of lines in which the blocks are made up is so chosen as to give a nearly constant width of block body-wise of about 42 inches. The blocks are then divided by cutting them at right angles to the direction of the lines of which they are made up. This work is performed by girls who insert thin strips of metal or celluloid between the rows of different characters, and add the lines of the same character together in small galleys to form pages of an approximately constant width. These pages are examined for defective type which are replaced by sound type ; the pages are then tied round with string and packed in thick whitish paper. The handling of several lines of separate type between two flat pieces of metal requires a peculiar knack which the girls acquire easily.
  - The casting machine is operated by one skilled typefounder who attends to the lubrication, to the maintenance of the metal in the pot at the correct temperature and level, to the exact adjustment of the top cover so that the body-size is maintained, and to the finish of the type left by the milling-cutter. One boy takes off the type, and four to five girls distribute the output of each machine.
  - The output of the Wicks machine is from 70,000 to 60,000 finished type per hour for bodies from ruby to long primer, and falls with larger bodies to about 35,000 per hour for pica.
  - The pump runs at 100 revolutions per minute and requires about 0’7 horse-power. The machine runs normally on bodies up to long primer at 10 revolutions per minute and takes about I’I horse-power. The total power required to run both the machine and the pump is 1’8 horse-power.
  - The original idea of the inventor was that type could be produced so cheaply by this machine that it could be replaced by new type for less than the cost of distributing. The cost of distributing by hand is generally 25 per cent of the cost of composing by hand, or about 2d. per 1000 type. The type when so distributed is not, moreover, in lines in the form required by composing machines, and a small further expenditure would be necessary to set up the type in the composing-machine tubes. The authors are of opinion that, if the Wicks machine had been brought to its present state of perfection about 1886 and a foundry equipped with a large number of machines, the system adopted by " The Times " of using fresh type every day and distributing by remelting would have found favour with a great number of the most important daily papers.
  - Type-slicing machine.—For charging composing-machine tubes with type an auxiliary appliance was designed by F. Wicks; it is shown in fig. 304. This being a necessary adjunct for completing the series of operations contemplated by the inventor in the performance of a complete cycle of casting, composing, and distributing by the melting-pot, is inserted at this point, although, strictly speaking, the machine forms a class quite by itself.
  - The lines of type are transferred from the galley in which they are received to a slotted galley g, in which the faces are turned towards the
- p.316 - vue 378/901
- - CASTING MACHINES.
  - 317
  - galley. The slot is temporarily covered with a slip of metal which rests on the lower edge of the galley when placed on the slicer, and is ejected at the first stroke of the blade. The blade b is drawn back by means of the handle, a tube u is placed on the hinged carrier c in front of the machine, and is charged by the next stroke of the handle. The end type in the tube are pressed towards each other by the fingers of the operator, and at the same time the hinged carrier is brought forward (as at c1), till the type are
  - Table tilted for removal of the filled composing machine tube u.
  - Fig. 304.—Wicks type-slicer. Scale: J full size.
  - inclined upwards, when the tube can be lifted off and transferred to the magazine of the composing machine. About 200 of these machines were in use till recently at the printing-office of " The Times.
  - Distribution by hand could be realized at a speed of 5000 type per hour. Boy labour could arrange distributed type in line at some 10,000 per hour, and type was cast in “ The Times ” office, prior to 1900, at an average of 4000 per hour in the hope that new type could be supplied to the composing machine. J.C. MacDonald, then manager of “The Times," who conducted
- p.317 - vue 379/901
- - 318 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - the earlier experiments in the endeavour to cast a new fount of type for each day’s paper, concluded his efforts by the reflection that the more he pursued the inquiry the more he was struck with " the glorious simplicity of the compositor and a pair of cases.” In the Paris Exhibition of 1878 was exhibited the Delcambre machine, an improvement upon that of Church, whose machine was really the foundation of all the loose-type composing machines subsequently devised; this was used in composing the first number of the " Family Herald” in 1842. According to F. Wicks, a visit to that exhibition and a conversation he had with A. Delcambre, in company with J. C. MacDonald, started the series of ideas that resulted in the Wicks composing machine, which set many combinations and several short words with a single touch. The same conversation led later to the invention of the rotary typecasting machine, which put into line 60,000 finished type per hour. The realization of the rotary scheme solved the question of supplying loose type to a composing machine, seeing that it produced the finished type from molten metal at a speed twelve times faster than the hand or mechanical distribution of the manufactured type.
  - The mechanical difficulties involved in the production of type in a machine like the Wicks rotary are largely due to the fact that it is constructed in a shop temperature of, say, 6o° F., and has to deal with molten metal at a temperature of about 7000 F., having a freezing-point at about 500° F. As the product has to be delivered with a limit of error of 0’0002 inch it is necessary not only that the mechanical construction should be precise and accurate, but that it should withstand the expansion and contraction involved in the reception and chilling of these thousands of castings. Moreover, allowance has also to be made for the contraction of the type-metal due to cooling.
  - In typefounding, for three or four hundred years, ever since Gutenberg made use of separate types, the practice had been to cast dummies until the heat of the mould had reached about 4000 F., and then satisfactory casts began. After a few hundred type had been cast the mould became too hot, and the operator had to refrain from casting for a time until the mould had cooled down. In later machines automatic cooling by an air-blast or by water-circulation was adopted; but neither of these methods was adequate to the cooling down of castings produced at the rate of a thousand per minute, and a uniformly cold mould became a necessity.
  - It is somewhat a matter of regret that a machine, which in the course of its evolution had resulted in the solution of so many interesting mechanical problems, should have become practically obsolete by natural development on the lines of the principles it had demonstrated. It is not probable that many more rotary casting machines will be built, firstly owing to the great cost of building the machines except in batches of ten or twenty at a time, and secondly owing to their inability to cast different faces from the same wheel in the proportions commercially required, because variations in the set width of the same character in different faces necessitate
- p.318 - vue 380/901
- - CASTING MACHINES.
  - U
  - 6
  - the supplementing of the Wicks machine by a simple sorts-caster. This defect the inventor would never admit to the authors, nor allow it to be remedied, and, in their opinion, it was the primary cause of the commercial failure of the machine. As soon as the problem had to be solved of supply-ing type to foreign fount schemes, accompanied by heavy orders for sorts of rare occurrence in the English language, the philological as well as the technical problem already recognized by his engineers and advisers became a final obstacle to continuous financial development. The business of the Wicks Rotary Typecasting Company passed into other bands after the authors had ceased their connexion with it ; it is, however, within their knowledge that their suggestion of auxiliary sorts-casters was adopted subsequently by its new proprietors, the Blackfriars Type Foundry.
  - The Bhisotype.—This machine, a multiple-mould typecaster, the invention of Prof. S. A. Bhisey, is stated to be arranged to cast from thirty to sixty different characters per revolution of its cam-shaft, which runs at 4° revolutions per minute. The speed claimed for it is, therefore, even greater than that of the Wicks machine, being 2400 type per minute in the larger machine. The type are stated to be turned out with the full depth of strike and with nicks and groove finished.
  - As it is intended to work this machine in conjunction with a composing machine, the characters cast on the casting machine being conveyed by chains to a group of from eight to ten composing machines, it is treated °f elsewhere in this work, in chapter XXIV, under the heading of Casting and Distributing Machines. The Bhisotype machines are not at present in general use.
  - A new form of rotary typecaster, in which the axis is horizontal, has been invented and patented recently by Prof. Bhisey; this machine is fitted with groups of moulds so placed that the body of the type is arranged parallel to the axis of the mould-wheel; each group of moulds may comprise, say, four cavities and the wheel may carry twenty-five groups, so that the number of mould cavities available can be as large as in the Wicks machine ; there is, however, the important difference that in this new form of the Bhisey machine the type are cast with a tang which is subsequently sheared off. It is proposed to use Linotype matrices with the mould groups.
  - The Bhisotype single typecaster is a sorts-caster designed for casting single types, with the object in view of simplicity and capability of being operated by any person of ordinary intelligence.
  - The construction of the mould is different from that of the other single typecasting machines described. One side and the top retain their relative positions once the body-size has been determined by a third, L-shaped, piece which with the other two parts forms a n cavity against the under side of which a cover-plate is held during the casting operation and withdrawn downwards carrying the type with it when the cast has been made. This cover-plate is provided with a hook-shaped member
- p.319 - vue 381/901
- - 320
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - which engages with the tang; the cover-plate also carries a bead for forming the nick in the type. By means of the hook, assisted if necessary by a supplementary slot in the end of the nick-wire, the type is held during the down-stroke of the cover-plate till it comes into alinement with the stationary platform on to which the type is pushed by a horizontally-sliding pusher-plate. - The action of the pusher moves the type clear of the hook and also breaks off the small retaining-piece held by the supplementary slot in the nick-wire. A vertically-moving slide breaks off the tang when the type is ejected clear of the hook. After the type has left the surface of the cover-plate the pusher retires and the cover-plate rises to its normal position ready for a new cast to be made. As the type travels to the receiving-galley the edge is trimmed and any additional nicks that may be required are cut into it. The mould parts are water-cooled, and a feature of the design is that in casting there is no sliding movement of the parts of the mould on each other. The same mould with change only of the L-shaped body-piece serves for casting any body-size from 5 to 48-point; low spaces and quads are also cast in the same machine, which has been run experimentally.
  - The matrix-holder can be adjusted to suit Linotype or ordinary electrotype matrices, and is fitted with detachable packing-blocks to enable the change to be effected rapidly. The complete operation of changing from one size to another is stated to be effected in less than two minutes.
  - The total movement of the mould cover-plate is only about an inch, consequently a high speed is expected from the machine. Other special features are : the nozzle which is not fitted with a jobber, and the pump which is fitted with a gear for enabling the stroke to be varied while the machine is running. The matrix-holder and the mould can be withdrawn readily from the machine. Under normal conditions the machine is run by a variable-speed electric motor contained in the pedestal of the machine; the floor-space required is about 2 feet by 2 feet. The power required is 0-25 horse-power.
- p.320 - vue 382/901
- p.n.n. - vue 383/901
- - PLATE XXV.
  - Fig. 305.—Church composing machine.
  - 5
  - To face page 321.]
- pl.25 - vue 384/901
- - CHAPTER XIX.
  - COMPOSING MACHINES.
  - “Typesetting by machinery has done more to advance the cause of universal education than any other one factor since the art of printing was invented.”
  - John S. Thompson. History of Composing Machines.
  - Brevier old-style antique No. 7 (Miller & Richard).
  - The distinctive characteristic of the Analytical Engine, and that which has rendered it possible to endow mechanism with such extensive faculties as bid fair to make this engine the executive right-hand of abstract algebra, is the introduction into it of the principle which Jacquard devised for regulating, by means of punched cards, the most complicated patterns in the fabrication of brocaded stuffs. It is in this that the distinction between the two engines lies. Nothing of the sort exists in the Difference Engine. We may say most aptly, that the Analytical Engine weaves algebraical patterns just as the Jacquard-loom weaves flowers and leaves. Here, it seems to us, resides much more of originality than the Difference Engine can be fairly entitled to claim. Notes by Ada Augusta, Countess of Lovelace: Translator of the Memoir by General Minabria on the Analytical Engine invented by Charles Babbage.
  - 5-point old-style (Clowes).
  - Owing to the number and complexity of the various machines of the class now coming under discussion, only primary or salient and typical examples are given ; reference to others will be found in the lists of British and American patents at the end of the volume.
  - The earliest and simplest form of composing machine, so far as the authors are aware, was that of Church, whose patent is dated 1822. Dr. William Church, the patentee, though taking out his patent in England, was a native of Boston, Massachusetts, and to him we must accord the place of honour in originating the first of these labour-saving appliances. The accompanying illustration, fig. 305, plate XXV, is reproduced from J. S. Thompson’s well-known book.
  - Though somewhat crude in construction, it is surprising how many features its conception embodies which have since become common and are retained in a large number of well-known machines subsequently designed. The type, carried in channels in a wooden frame placed nearly vertical, were released on operating the keys of a keyboard. On the depression of a key the type was ejected on to a horizontal race, and by means of rocking arms was swept to the centre of the machine, where it was received as a continuous line In a collecting channel; it could be divided subsequently and line-justified by hand as was done later on in several other instances.
  - The machine was not driven by power derived from any outside source, the rocking arms or sweepers were operated by clockwork mechanism released by the depression of the keys.
  - 321 Y
- p.321 - vue 385/901
- - 322
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The next invention of this class made its appearance eighteen years later: this was the composing machine patented by E. R. Gaubert in 1840.
  - In the same year Young and Delcambre brought out their machine, which bears the next consecutive patent number.
  - The Young and Delcambre composing machine, fig. 308, does not present any very striking novelty over that of Church, but instead of the type being delivered into a race in front of the machine, it was delivered on to an inclined guide-plate at the back. The story of its practical genesis from the “ Autobiography of Sir Henry Bessemer ” may be here quoted with interest.
  - “ One day I was called upon by a gentleman, a Mr. James Young, who presented a card of introduction from a barrister to whom I was well known. His object was to obtain the assistance of a mechanician to devise, or construct, a machine for setting up printing type. I had a long and pleasant conversation with this most agreeable client ; indeed, our frequent meetings and friendly discussions resulted in a close friendship, terminating only with his death, which occurred several years later. My friend Young, who was a silk merchant at Lille, had persuaded himself that by playing on keys, arranged somewhat after the style of a pianoforte, all the letters required in a printed page could be mechanically arranged in lines and columns more quickly than by hand; but as he was personally wholly unacquainted with mechanism, he desired some one to elaborate all the details of such a machine, and asked me if I would professionally study the subject for him, and prepare models to illustrate each proposition. The matter seemed a very difficult one at first sight, and I said that it would be impossible for me to devote more than a portion of each day to its consideration. It was then arranged that I should give as much thought to the subject as I could, consistent with due attention to my general business, and to these terms was attached a guinea per day as a consulting fee.
  - " The general idea on which the machine was based was the arranging of the respective letters in long narrow boxes, from which a touch of the key referring to any particular letter would detach the type required ; this, when set at liberty, was to slide down an inclined plane to a terminal point, where other mechanism was to divide the letters so received, into lines if required, and thus build up a page of matter, such as a column in a newspaper, etc.
  - " It will be at once understood that this was not a very simple matter, in consequence of the many signs required. We have first the twenty-six small letters of the alphabet, and the double letters, such as fi, fl, ff, ffi, ffl ; then we have the points, or punctuations, signs of reference, etc. ; there are also the ten figures and the twenty-six capital letters and their respective double letters, as well as blank types, called ‘spaces,’ of different thicknesses, required to divide separate words from each other,
- p.322 - vue 386/901
- - COMPOSING MACHINES.
  - 323
  - etc. Now, as a primary necessity, these numerous letters, when wanted, must, of course, come from different places, and all must descend grooves m the inclined planes in precisely equal times. The time of the whole journey down the incline, say, 2 ft. long, must not occupy any one type more than one-hundredth of a second more or less than the one before or behind it, or its arrival will be too soon or too late, and the word will be wrongly spelt. Thus, suppose the word ACT is required, and the keys A, C, and T, are touched rapidly in succession. If the letter C should arrive first instead of A, the word would not be ' ACT,’ but ‘ CAT,’ and so for every word. A type that is less than 1 in. in length must never, on its journey, arrive its own length in advance or in the rear of the others that are simultaneously rushing down the inclined plane to the same terminus.
  - " The difficulty that this fact presented was almost beyond belief. Many models were made and much study devoted to it. Thus, suppose a type detached at the point A in the accompanying diagram [fig. 306] is required
  - Fig. 306.—Young and Delcambre composing machine; diagram illustrating Bessemer’s problem.
  - O' bo d e
  - Fig. 307.—Young and Delcambre composing machine; diagram of guide-plate.
  - to slide down the inclined plane to C, and another one from the point B is immediately to follow, it will be seen that not only is the road to be travelled by A much longer than that by B, but B also has the advantage of coming straight down the inclined surface, encountering friction only on the one surface on which it rests; while A has not only got a longer journey to perform, but it lays its whole weight on the inclined surface, and rubs also against the inclined side of its groove, thus causing additional friction, so lessening the speed of its descent, and resulting in the arrival of B at its destination before, instead of after, A.
  - " The result of studying this part of the question forced on my mind the important fact that the grooves on the surface of the inclined plane Would have to be all of precisely the same length, and every letter, in descending, would have to encounter exactly the same amount of sideway rubbing surface. This knotty point was at last settled in so simple and Perfect a manner, that when I had accomplished it I felt half ashamed that it had so long eluded me. The form of grooved incline thus indicated
- p.323 - vue 387/901
- - 324
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - ensured a perfect spelling of every word, and removed the greatest obstacle on the way to success.
  - " The diagram [fig. 307] represents a portion of the inclined plane, with its small shallow grooves so arranged that any one of the letters a, b, c, d, e, f, g, and h at the top of the inclined plane would, if allowed to slide down this series of curved grooves, pass along precisely similar paths, and travel precisely equal distances before arriving at the terminus C.
  - " It will be readily understood that a simple extension of this system would allow any number of letters arranged along the upper line to reach
  - Fig. 308.—Young and Delcambre composing machine.
  - the terminus in the same time ; hence each one would arrive in the order of its departure and every word would be spelt correctly.
  - “ I will not tire the reader with the many other difficult points surmounted, only by constant patience, during fifteen months. The type-composing machine was then a success, and my friend Young was greatly pleased at the result. His patent was much used in Paris, and in England it was employed by the spirited proprietor of the Family Herald, who gave an engraving of the machine at the head of the paper, very similar to the illustration [fig. 308], which shows the type-composing machine in operation. The person shown on the right ” [in the original illustration] “ is seated
- p.324 - vue 388/901
- - COMPOSING MACHINES.
  - 325
  - before a double set of flat keys, similar to the keys of a pianoforte, each key having its proper letter marked thereon ; the depression of a key detaches its corresponding type from one of the numerous partitions in the box or case A ; this type will then slide down the series of grooves allotted to it on the inclined plane B, and arrive at a point C, where a rapidly vibrating finger or beater tips up every letter as it arrives into an upright position, and forces it along the channel D. These rows of letters are moved laterally, forming one line of the intended page. The boy on the left hand ” [in the original illustration] “ divides the words with a hyphen if necessary, or he so spaces them as to fill one complete line * this operation he can complete while another line is forming in the channel D. In this way he makes line after line until part of a page is set up, when he moves on the galley E, shown at his left hand. Thus a page or a long column of matter was produced with the greatest ease, and in a very short space of time.
  - " In the ordinary way of composing types, each letter is picked up by hand from one of the numerous small divisions of a shallow box, or ‘ case,’ as it is called, and the letters are then arranged in their right positions in a small frame held in the left hand of the compositor. About 1700 or i8ooletters Per hour can be formed into lines and columns by a dexterous compositor, while as many as 6000 types per hour could be set by the composing machine. A young lady in the office of the Family Herald undertook the following task at the suggestion of the proprietor of The Times, viz. : she was to set uP not less than 5000 types per hour for ten consecutive hours, on six consecutive days ; giving a total of 300,000 letters in the week. This she easily accomplished, and was then presented with a £5 note by Mr. Walter.
  - " This mode of composing types by playing on keys arranged precisely like the keys of a pianoforte would have formed an excellent occupation for women ; but it did not find favour with the lords of creation, who strongly objected to such successful competition by female labour, and so the machine eventually died a natural death.”
  - It is a curious commentary on the difficulty and absence of exchange of ideas and knowledge of the trend of development, other than within individual limited circles of interest, that in the early part of the nineteenth century Bessemer wrote as in the passage just quoted, when, nearly twenty Years before the period he alludes to, the problem of composing by machine bad been propounded and solved by Church, whose machines were in actual operation when Bessemer was engaged by Young to carry out his ideas. Very different is the case to-day when the scientific discovery of one indi-V1dual becomes within a period of a few weeks, through the medium of the technical press, the scientific commonplace of his contemporaries.
  - brom 1840 onwards machines of this class appeared at intervals of from two to three years, and occasionally oftener, but they presented nothing of Permanent character until the year 1853.
- p.325 - vue 389/901
- - 326
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The Hattersley composing machine.—In the year quoted Hattersley applied himself to the subject with the result that in 1857 the Hattersley patent was obtained, and in 1859 the Hattersley machine, fig. 309, plate XXVI, was evolved. This machine marks a distinct advance, because the type was composed into a short line immediately accessible to the compositor who could readily space out the matter to the requisite length before removing it from the machine into the composing-stick.
  - As an adjunct Hattersley at one time had a separate justifier which was virtually a galley to which the unjustified matter, in lines temporarily separated by leads, was transferred line by line ; the leads were automatically ejected as each line was pushed forward in succession to the mouth of the
  - Fig. 310.—Hattersley composing machine; guide-plate.
  - galley into which the line was depressed and then spaced out by hand to the measure. This method was soon abandoned, the justification being more easily effected at the machine itself.
  - The guide-plate of the Hattersley machine, fig. 310, instead of being inclined, as in the case of the Young and Delcambre machine, is arranged vertically ; it is made of brass, but those guiding ribs which are subjected to the heaviest work in deflecting the type to its common destination are made of steel to enable them better to withstand the wear.
  - The magazines, or tables, as they were formerly termed by the inventor, in the Hattersley machine, unlike those of the Church and its congeners, are arranged horizontally, the type being ejected downwards from
- p.326 - vue 390/901
- - COMPOSING MACHINES.
  - 327
  - the front of the line contained in any groove in the magazines ; the type is arranged body-wise in the grooves of the magazines in which it is kept pressed forward by a presser operated by a cord passing over a pulley, and acted on by a spring. The keyboard is arranged with the keys in multiple rows and a more compact form is adopted than in the machines of Church, or of Young and Delcambre. The Hattersley machine is remarkable because it was constructed by a man without large financial backing, and is one of the few cases in which the inventor carried on a profitable business for a large number of years in a machine of this class. Hattersley was himself a first-rate mechanic and a friend of Roberts, of Sharp, Roberts & Co., one of the finest mechanics Manchester ever produced. Hattersley machines are still working in England successfully, the " South Wales Daily News,” for instance, being composed by means of these machines. The manager of the printing-department of this paper, who has a number of these machines in operation, has afforded the authors opportunity for seeing them in the performance of their daily work. Of their efficiency and cheapness there can be no question.
  - Although no provision was made in the Hattersley machine for justification, the requirements of the operator were provided for in the design, and the line when set is so conveniently placed and accessible that the work of justification is performed by the compositor in very few seconds ; in ordinary work an average compositor can set and justify some 6000 ens per hour.
  - The fact that the Hattersley machine has been in continuous use for so many years has led to the devising of a number of small accessories used m conjunction with it, which facilitate greatly such operations as the charg-Ing of the magazines and the replacement of a partially-emptied magazine by a fresh one fully charged. To such a fine point has this work been brought in the office above mentioned that the authors have seen the change of magazine effected in less than one minute.
  - These machines are worked in conjunction with the Hattersley distributor, which will be described later under its proper heading. The old type is distributed and the supply is maintained by means of type cast on the Premises in whole founts or sorts as may be required. Whether this combined installation would prove as adequate elsewhere the authors are not prepared to say, but certainly under the efficient and capable organization of the manager of the printing-department of the " South Wales Daily News " it leaves little to be desired.
  - According to an article dated II June, 1890, in the " Newcastle Daily Journal,” a paper which at that period was using the Hattersley compositor, a good man manipulating the Hattersley machine averages 150 lines 0r 7500 letters in an hour.”
  - The original invention by Bouchon of the use of a previously-prepared Perforated paper strip as a means of subsequent mechanical control, and aPplied by him to the loom in 1725, has often been overlooked. The
- p.327 - vue 391/901
- - 328 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - later improvements made by Falcon, who, in 1728, substituted a chain of cards for the strip, by Vaucanson in 1745, and finally by Jacquard, who perfected the card-control of the power-loom, have led to the popular association of the name of Jacquard with all perforated controllers, whether of card or paper.
  - The use of a continuous paper strip, similar to that of Bouchon, for the automatic setting of type.—though generally ascribed to William Martin, who claims a method of actuating type-composing instruments in his British patent 12,421 of 1849, and specifically mentions the machine of Clay and Rosenborg—appears to have been first suggested by D. Mackenzie in his British patent 12,229 of 1848. In this he claims the use of
  - key k
  - - Pusher 8308880303
  - 1X23320022
  - Fig. 312.—Kastenbein composing machine ; type-freeing mechanism.
  - a perforated band of paper for controlling musical instruments, and in his first description, or title of patent, he includes " type-composing machinery.” The invention does not, however, appear to have reached a practical form until it was utilized by Alexander Mackie in 1867 in the control of his automatic typesetting machine known in Manchester as the " pickpocket.” The " Manchester Guardian ” is stated to have been composed by the Mackie compositor, and the authors recently have had under their notice many large volumes of print produced with the aid of these machines.
  - The Kastenbein composing machine, fig. 311, plate XXVII, invented prior to 1870, was brought into practical working form at " The Times " Printing Office, and, with some modifications there introduced, was used for composing almost the whole of " The Times ” and many other publications printed in
- p.328 - vue 392/901
- - PLATE XXVI.
  - as
  - Fig. 309.— Hattersley composing machine.-
  - [To face page 328.
- pl.26 - vue 393/901
- - PLATE XXVII.
  - It
  - aote
  - 7
  - Fig. 311.— Kastenbein composing machine.
  - To face plate XXVIII.]
- pl.27 - vue 394/901
- - PLATE XXVIII.
  - Fig. 313.—Fraser composing machine. [To face plate XXVII.] Fig. 314.—Empire composing machine.
  - e : ^
- pl.28 - vue 395/901
- - PLATE XXIX.
  - C
  - A—
  - Fig. 315.—Wicks composing machine ; with Stringer line-justifier attached.
  - To face page 329.]
- pl.29 - vue 396/901
- - COMPOSING MACHINES.
  - 329
  - " The Times” Office. The tubes u, fig. 312, are U-shaped, and the type are arranged set-wise, all the nicks being downwards and the faces towards the operator when the tube is placed in the vertical position it occupies in the machine. The depression of a key k pushes the lowest corresponding type forward by the foot towards the front of the machine ; when more than half ejected, the front end comes over a bar b running along the front of the machine ; when the type is fully ejected it overbalances backwards from this bar (as shown dotted) on the release of the pusher, and falls feet downwards down a guiding groove in the guide-plate v of the machine. A lightly-balanced lower lever arm against which the type bears in falling into the race corrects any tendency to turn. The type as they arrive at the level of the race are pushed forward by a continuously-driven reciprocating plunger having a stroke a little greater than the body-size of the type. The type are thus delivered on a type-race from which they are drawn by hand by a second operator who performs the line-justifying. The keyboard of the Kastenbein machine is very compact, and comprises eighty-four keys arranged in four rows, as shown in fig. 271, p. 291.
  - The power required is less than O’I horse-power.
  - The Fraser machine, fig. 313, plate XXVIII, was brought out about 1872 at Edinburgh. The bulk of the ninth edition of the " Encyclopaedia Britannica ” is claimed to have been composed upon this machine. In construction the position of the magazine resembles that of the Church machine, but the guide-plate which is similar to that of the Hattersley, is placed in the front of the machine and below the nearly vertical magazine.
  - The Empire composing machine, fig. 314, plate XXVIII, was, according to Thompson, originally known in 1872 as the Burr and was one of the first American typesetting machines to come into common use. In 1880 the name Empire was adopted for the machine which remained in use for many years both in this country and in the United States. The type are contained in eighty-four tubes arranged in three separate magazines capable of a rocking movement for the purpose of refilling. The line-Justification, as in the Kastenbein and other machines of this class, is effected by a second operator. A subsidiary magazine placed above the end of the type-race furnishes the necessary spaces. As in the Kastenbein, the Wicks and other similar machines, a clear space is maintained in the raceway for the letters falling from the channels by means of a small motor-driven cam.
  - The Hooker composing machine, patented in 1872 and 1874, had its types placed in a series of slanting troughs. At the foot of each trough was an endless revolving carrier-tape, which received the type when discharged from the trough, and passed it on to another tape, running in a transverse direction. This transverse tape received the several types in Succession, and carried them forward in their proper order to a point where a collector arranged them in a continuous line ready for justifying.
  - Hooker dispensed with the keyboard, and instead of it he provided
- p.329 - vue 397/901
- - 330
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - a range of small electro-magnets in connexion with metal contact-plates. These plates, in size, shape, and arrangement, were a copy of the ordinary lower case, fig. 263, p. 285. Before these contact-plates, as before a desk, the
  - Plan normal to type races
  - Section normal to type races
  - Ms
  - Vertical Section. .
  - Inches 9
  - Fig. 316.—Wicks composing machine ; type-freeing mechanism.
  - compositor sat, and proceeded much as usual, only that, instead of picking out the types from the boxes of his case, he touched in succession the corresponding contact-plates. The touch instantly made the electric contact, and a letter was set free.
- p.330 - vue 398/901
- - COMPOSING MACHINES. 331
  - Hooker composing machines were introduced into the works of William Clowes and Sons, Ltd., in 1875, although not to any great extent, there being four machines in use at one time. These machines ran at their Beccles works for a number of years and only ceased to be used in 1905.
  - The approximate floor-space occupied by each machine was about 36 square feet, including the stand with rack.
  - The same inventor subsequently devised a distributing machine, and later still a line-justifying machine for equalizing the spacing of the lines, but none of these machines came into general use.
  - The Wicks composing machine. — In the Wicks composer, fig. 315, Plate XXIX, the keyboard is of great length, with only two rows of keys, the arrangement resembling more closely that of the piano than that of the typewriter. The keys k operate vertical rods q, fig. 316, which are jointed to plunger sectors of helical strip p working in the spaces of a coarse square-thread screw s. Two quarters of round bar with screws milled out are arranged, the one right-hand and the other left-hand, facing each other, and are machined so as to form a pair of races (between which is an intervening strip r) inclined at 45° to the horizontal for the type to slide down. The type t are contained in U-shaped tubes u of tin plate or brass inclined at 45° to the horizontal (and at 900 to the race). The type are arranged in the tube body-wise, the nicks lying against one side of the U. The depression of a key causes the plunger, the end of which is reduced to the set width of the type, to remove the lowest character from the corresponding tube and push it into the race down which it slides on its side by gravity to the nose of the machine where a star-wheel w catches it, brings it into an erect Position and pushes it into place against the line accumulating in the type-race x. The star-wheel is driven continuously by a pedal or a small electric motor. Sections of the line are drawn away by a second operator, who line-justifies each line and transfers it to a galley in exactly the same manner as in the other machines of this class.
  - The Wicks machine is interesting chiefly for the reason that the key-board was designed so as to enable a number of the most frequently occurring combinations of characters to be obtained by the simultaneous depression of two or more keys, for example the, ing, and and. While this effects some saving of time, the long distance which the more remote characters must travel under the action of gravity makes the machine slow in such cases, though this is said to be compensated for by the advantage Sained on the chords ; in addition the distance through which the operator must move his hand is much greater than in those machines which have a compact multiple-row keyboard.
  - A battery of Wicks composing machines, supplied daily with new type from the Wicks Foundry in Blackfriars Road, was used for several years in the offices of the " Morning Post,” where the machines performed Sood work from the time of their installation in 1905 till the combination was replaced by Linotype machines in 1910.
- p.331 - vue 399/901
- - 332
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The Wicks composer was a two-man machine, and was operated by a team who worked “ in pocket ” and alternated as operator and spacer-out respectively. Small capitals and italics not being on the keyboard were set when required from a separate case by the spacer-out. The speed obtained by the two operators together on long runs averaged 9000 ens per hour, while there were individual teams who produced 11,000 ens and upwards per hour on ordinary work ; moreover on memorized copy a much greater output could be obtained.
  - The machine weighed about 6 hundredweight, occupied a space of about io square feet, and required less than O’I horse-power to run it.
  - The Pulsometer composing machine, fig. 317, plate XXX.—The type t are contained in horizontal tubes u, fig. 318, and the contents of each tube
  - Key h
  - €
  - Fig. 318.—Pulsometer composing machine ; type-freeing mechanism.
  - or channel are kept pressed towards the front of the machine by a weighted follower f; the type are supported by a front plate v, which extends about 0’50 inch in height above the bottom of the tubes and is bevelled at the top to a knife-edge. This arrangement, though the fact was not known to the inventor and designers of the Pulsometer machine, had been designed in 1890 by H. T. Johnson, formerly one of Hattersley’s apprentices, as an improvement on the Hattersley machine, to avoid the alleged possibility of damaging the face of the type by the action of the pusher in ejecting the type downwards. The depression of a key k causes the front type in the corresponding tube to be raised till it clears the knife-edge, when the action of the follower ensures that this type is projected over the
- p.332 - vue 400/901
- - COMPOSING MACHINES.
  - 333
  - edge of the guide-plate. It now falls freely down a vertical groove in the guide-plate v of the machine, which is shaped as an inverted triangle. At the lower end of the vertical groove it is guided by the inclined raceways, into which it falls, to a central channel, and thence to the entrance to the composing-race, into which it is pushed by a continuously-revolving eccentric. The guide-plate is covered with a sheet of plate-glass g to keep the type from turning, and to enable the operator to see that the grooves do not become blocked. A continuously-driven horizontal shaft s imparts a vertical reciprocating motion to two steel swing plates p placed longitudinally with the machine. Across the direction of these are flat steel levers I, one for each character, pivoted at the front end and each carrying a triangular pawl q, which is normally raised. When a key k is depressed the corresponding pawl drops into the range of action of one of the swing plates which carries it and the lever upwards ; the keys acting in conjunction with the lower swing plate are not shown in fig. 318; the vertical pusher is driven upwards by the lever, and its upper end % passing through the lower side of the U-shaped tube, lifts up the corresponding first type till it clears the edge of the guide-plate and is free to fall down its particular groove. There are four rows of keys arranged as shown in fig. 273, p. 291.
  - The power required is stated to be about O’I horse-power.
  - Numbering-machines.—Numbering-machines, taken as a class, may be considered as a miniature, but highly ingenious, form of composing machine, because, though dealing with those ideographs which we term figures, they compose these in order to form numerical equivalents of what in the larger composing machines would be represented by the composed letters forming the words which in combination convey the same idea.
  - Numbering-machines were first devised with large wheels giving space for arranging the carrying gear and either pivoted and lever-operated by hand or treadle, or worked by a vertical slide so as to print consecutive numbers on sheets successively presented to the machine. Automatic arrangements were added later for inking the typewheels on the stroke of the machine, and for performing the operations of counting and carrying.
  - The earliest British patent for these machines dates back to 1845, but it was found that for many purposes, such as numbering bank-notes, bonds and similar documents, it was desirable to have machines made sufficiently small in size and height to be locked up in the forme with type, and in 1857 we find machines of this kind described. The actuation of some of these machines was effected by a plunger which was depressed by the platen, but as this plunger rose above the level of the printing-surface when the platen was raised, it follows that specially-devised means to prevent obtaining an impression of the plunger had to be provided. Some inventors and makers are preferred making the whole of the numbering-machine in a case to slide tside an outer case which is locked up with the type, the numbering-machine
- p.333 - vue 401/901
- - 334
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - itself acting as the plunger. As the operation of carrying is immediately dependent on the operation of the plunger or of the box containing the numbering-machine, it was found that the carrying which took effect immediately the platen rose, produced blurring of the printed characters, and means for obviating this blurring form the subject of recent inventions.
  - The printing of bonds, in particular, has had a great influence on the development of these machines, as the coupons attached to them require the simultaneous operation of a plurality of numbering-heads or numberingmachines for the identification of the whole of these detachable portions of the document.
  - The adoption of the arabic system of numbering, which harmonizes with a writing or printing reading from right to left, but in which the figures are written in the order opposite to that in which they would naturally be composed or counted for print running from left to right, has resulted in the production of many ingenious inventions, also dating from 1857 in Europe, for the suppression of the zeros by which low numbers would be preceded at the commencement of the operation of numbering. The abolition of the zero preceding the significant figure has been effected by what is termed the drop-cipher or drop-cipher wheel; in some cases the wheel itself drops to an eccentric position so that the zero falls below the level of the printing-surface, and in other cases the wheel has eleven divisions, and special carrying arrangements are fitted to enable the blank space to be passed over when carrying is effected, because once the wheel has begun to register significant figures, it is necessary that it should repeat the zero whenever it is required, and that the blank should never reappear.
  - The elimination of the zero appears to have been a most useless source of worry to inventors of these machines, because, having obtained a blank space in front of the significant figures, it was easily possible for a forger to substitute figures in the blank space. This disadvantage led to a further series of inventions for sliding or substituting other printing signs and characters—asterisks, ornaments, or special signs—so as to fill up the blank before the significant figure.
  - Still further inventive effort was directed to the elaboration of numbering-machines in which the carrying is performed in an inverted order ; that is to say, the figure next to the designating sign commences the units, and on reaching the tens, the second wheel from the designating sign moves to zero and the first wheel to one, the operation of counting continuing with the first two wheels, giving significant figures till ninety-nine is reached, when the first wheel turns to one, and the second and third both turn to zero. This arrangement is equally open to the objection, mentioned in the case of those numbering-machines with drop-ciphers, that it leaves blank spaces for the use of the forger, unless special precautions are taken to fill them up. Yet other and more complicated numbering-machines have been made to print from the wheel a sign for the purpose of occupying the space preceding the significant figures.
- p.334 - vue 402/901
- p.n.n. - vue 403/901
- - PLATE XXX.
  - /
  - -lie
  - -
  - Tide 1 r
  - AU. '
  - Parts released for cleaning and oiling.
  - N° 12345
  - Impression of figures.
  - Fig. 320.—American numbering-machine; opened.
  - Fig. 317.— Pulsometer composing machine.
  - Fig. 319.—A merican numbering-machine and impression of figures.
  - To face page 335.]
- pl.30 - vue 404/901
- - COMPOSING MACHINES.’ 335
  - The numbering of bond coupons involves the use of a group of numbering-machines, and much invention has been devoted to causing these to operate automatically and simultaneously in lines carried horizontally across the page or in columns vertically, or in combinations of both.
  - Although much of the composition of the printing-surface, where consecutive numbers are required, has been performed by these wonderful little machines, yet there are many classes of work such as duplicate check books, manifold books, and the like, which require the numbering-machine to act otherwise than consecutively. In some cases the same number is required m duplicate, triplicate, or even quadruplicate, while in other cases the machine is required to repeat a number indefinitely and to change that number only when desired ; other machines again can be set to number in different arithmetical series, for example : 1, 3, 5, 7..; 2, 4, 6, 8,..; 1,6, II, 16,.. ; etc. This is necessary where a group of numbering-machines is used in printing simultaneously on a sheet which is to be cut up subsequently.
  - Though attention was given to these machines in Great Britain and on the Continent nearly twenty years before they interested American inventors, yet American manufacturing methods have resulted in the production of highly efficient pieces of mechanism, examples of which are shown in figs. 319 and 320, plate XXX.
  - Numbering hand-stamps for numbering documents consecutively were a comparatively early invention, most of these machines being self-contained and having an inking-device. In their earlier form they were automatically operated by the depression of the hand-knob to print consecutively, but as their scope increased, machines were adapted to numbering in duplicate or triplicate, or quadruplicate, or even to repeat indefinitely. Certain of these machines used for marking yardage or other measures on slips for packages are fitted with means for setting each of the typewheels independently by hand. A recent development of the hand-stamp is its adaptation to take the small type-high numbering-machines used in the printing-press.
  - Another direction in which numbering-machines have developed is
  - that connected with the printing of railway and other tickets, and of tram-way or street-car tickets, either singly or in strip. These tickets are used 111 huge quantities, with the result that numbering-machines have been devised for printing them, working with ten to fifteen numbering-heads in the case of single tickets, and operating at very high speeds in the case of strip tickets printed on the web. In dealing with this class of work, peculiar uiculties were introduced by the inertia of the carrying gear, which became able to skip numbers, particularly when carrying takes place in a higher "tnificant figure. Several devices for preventing this, and for enabling the
  - Numbering-machine to work more slowly while the printing proceeds at a 8n speed, have been evolved by the use of a series of numbering-heads,
- p.335 - vue 405/901
- - 336
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - carried on a cylindrical printing-roller, which come into play consecutively in order that the carrying operations may be completed in ample time before the printing occurs.
  - Not only have machines been made for numbering consecutively in duplicate, triplicate, etc., but also for numbering either forwards or backwards, and in the case of special machines, devised for the numbering of bank-notes and bonds of great importance, special means have been sought by inventors for combining the control of multiple arrangements of numbering-machines in a single printing-forme, and ensuring their absolute agreement over the whole of the printed page.
  - The actual operation of numbering-machines differs from that of printing from the ordinary typographical surface because some portions of the numbering-surfaces only come into use intermittently or after long periods of rest; consequently the figures are not ready-inked when they take their place in the plane of the typographical surface, and they do not have that inked surface which invariably results from the pulling of a trial proof. This difference from standard conditions has led to the invention of means by which the carrying gear of the numbering-machines can be disconnected, the whole system of wheels rotated line by line and inked, so that once the machine is set to work a properly-inked surface comes into place when required.
  - In running the numbering-machines in practice, it sometimes happens that one job is required to follow another and to commence at some number different from that for which the machine is set. Devices have even been produced to deal with such cases as this, and to enable the future setting, at which the numbering-machine shall commence to work on the next job, to be decided and set on the machine while it is still occupied with other work.
  - When one considers the minute size of these appliances—generally less than one cubic inch in total volume—the extraordinary ingenuity displayed in their invention and construction is strikingly apparent. The difficulties overcome are the more remarkable when it is borne in mind that not only has a whole automatic composing machine been compressed within lilliputian limits, but a difficulty—from which most inventors of ordinary composing machines, themselves sufficiently complicated, have fled—has been overcome. In these interesting pieces of mechanism which form a link with calculating machines, the difficulty of producing characters, which in relation to the size of the machine that produces them would compare with six-inch type set by an ordinary composing machine, has been successfully met and mastered.
  - HAND-STAMPS, AUTOMATIC STAMPS AND RECORDERS.
  - In the section of this chapter dealing with numbering-machines, hand numbering-stamps and the range of numbering operations which they cover have been mentioned.
- p.336 - vue 406/901
- - COMPOSING MACHINES.
  - 337
  - Apart from numbering, hand-stamps have been devised for many purposes, for instance for endorsements, for obliterations, and, as in the common stamp for crossing cheques, for adding restrictive marks. The face of these stamps is frequently in the form of a stereotype, and usually of rubber, though other materials are also used.
  - Obliteration with the addition of a reference is an extremely common form of stamp, and probably its commonest form is that of the post-marking stamp. These stamps are usually fitted with a die-head, on which is engraved in relief the name of the post office and through which pass slots to receive shouldered steel type for the date, etc., secured in place by screwing an internally flanged collar over the die-head and on to the end of the handle. This form of obliterating appliance has been developed into the machine which separates a mass of correspondence into individual mail-letters, passes them through rollers for defacing the postage stamps and postmarks them; while a still further development is a machine of the coin-freed class, which not only receives the letter and franks it for the post in consideration of the coin placed in the machine along with it, but also performs the dating and obliterating operations.
  - Following on the use of hand-stamps for obliterating comes their use for marking documents with some frequently-recurring sign, sentence, or symbol; of such instruments the ordinary office-stamp is the most familiar example : a very common form of this is the addressing stamp, from which the various kinds and classes of addressing machines have been evolved. These machines have been dealt with in an earlier chapter.
  - There are other hand-stamps in which a certain amount of hand-composition is performed: of these the dating stamp is a common example ; some of these have numbering and dating wheels, while others have the characters raised on bands of rubber which can be shifted to bring the required combination of figures and letters, or logotypes, into the printing Position. From the dating stamps have been evolved other stamps and stamping machines, which are controlled by clockwork—mechanically in the machine itself, or electro-magnetically from a distance —for recording the actual time at which certain impressions are made. Such appliances are used by insurance companies for dating the commencement of their policies, and are also used in some cases for tickets or contract-slips where time, as in the case of hired appliances for amusement or exercise, is the only factor considered in the payment to be collected.
  - The various recording machines cover a field so wide that it is a matter of great difficulty to divide them into any satisfactory classification, but the best method appears to the authors to be that of following the physicists notation, with the addition of the money sign, $, to the usually accepted symbols: length or distance, L; mass or its commercial equivalent Weight, M; and time, T.
  - The particular class of machines dealing with abstract numbers only has already been partially considered in numbering-machines, but from
  - Z
- p.337 - vue 407/901
- - 338
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - the simple forms of counting and numbering machines have been evolved the more complex adding machines. These continuously add figures, and from this operation obtain a total that is printed by the machine when required. Adding machines are of considerable antiquity, their first invention being ascribed to Pascal in 1642, and, according to Babbage, one capable of adding small sums of money, the total not exceeding £100,000, was constructed " by Sir Samuel Morland ” in 1666 ; this machine is in the Science Museum at South Kensington. Following these somewhat crude inventions came the adding machine of Viscount Mahon, afterwards third Earl of Stanhope, designed and constructed by James Bullock ; this machine is also in the collection of the Science Museum, to which it was presented by Major-General H. P. Babbage. Out of these adding machines has been developed the calculating machine capable of performing the operations of multiplication or division, and in some instances of printing or typewriting a record of the results obtained.
  - Machines of this class to-day are the outcome of continued improvements upon the original calculator of Thomas de Colmar, which was followed by the Edmundson, and among the modern successors to these may be mentioned the Brunsviga, the Burroughs adding machine, the British adding machine, and the Comptometer, a machine which in its early form was termed the Comptograph, and in that form printed its record on paper.
  - Of much earlier date than the preceding and of far greater complexity is the Babbage calculating machine, or difference engine, which in its original form was never completed; parts of this machine were formerly in King’s College, parts still remain in University College, London, and the portion put together for purposes of demonstration and illustrated in fig. 448, plate LXXXVII, is now preserved in the Victoria and Albert Museum. The typographical portion of this machine, according to " Babbage’s Calculating Machines,” was intended to make impressions from the type-wheels in a stereotype-matrix, and an ingenious method was adopted of impressing rules in the card between the spaces to be occupied by succeeding lines of figures so as to afford room for the material of the matrix displaced by the impression of the line of figures. By this means a stereotype-matrix of the page was obtained direct from the machine without any handwork. Altogether some £17,000 were expended ‘by the Government, and at least an equal amount by the inventor, on this first difference engine.
  - The analytical engine invented by Babbage in 1834 and improved in succeeding years was unfortunately never made, although the drawings for it were prepared by the inventor. In this proposed machine the Jacquard card principle was adopted, and the machine itself could calculate and perforate cards for the logarithms or other constants which it would require in its subsequent operations. When started to work it would continue calculating till it required a new constant, when it would ring for its
- p.338 - vue 408/901
- - COMPOSING MACHINES.
  - 339
  - attendant to provide the requisite Jacquard card for which it showed the number; on being furnished with the card the machine would test it for correctness, and, if the wrong card were given to it, it would ring a louder bell and signal " wrong card.” The mathematical capabilities of this machine were fully investigated by General Menabrea in a memoir published in the « Bibliotheque Universelle de Geneve,” vol. xli, 1842, and translated with copious annotations by Ada Augusta, Countess of Lovelace, the daughter of the poet Byron. The results are summed up in the state-ment: ”... the whole of the developments and operations of analysis are now capable of being executed by machinery.” The principle of the first Babbage machine or difference engine, was, however, revived by Scheutz, a printer of Stockholm, later assisted by his son, by whom a difference machine was constructed. A replica of this was made subsequently under contract by Messrs. Donkin, in a form in which the printed results are produced by typewheels governed by a calculating apparatus and a numerator confined to quantities increasing by units. This replica of the Swedish machine was till quite recently in Somerset House; in January, 1857, the Scheutz machine was exhibited in the library of the Institution of Civil Engineers, together with a portion of a table of logarithms, calculated and impressed entirely on the machine without the use of loose type. It was estimated that these compound operations could be performed in less than half the time which a compositor would take to set the types by hand. Further reference is made to the machine in the ‘ Proceedings of the Institution of Civil Engineers,” April, 1857, and a brief description of the Babbage and Scheutz difference engines is given below in the chapter dealing with impression machines.
  - A history of the development of calculating machines from the simple engine-counter to the latest and most elaborate forms of calculating and Costing machines is so broad a subject that it might well in itself form a highly interesting text-book. It is to be hoped that such a history will include descriptions of two important machines for calculating and snmming costs, now in progress, and that these two machines will he completed and commercially available before long.
  - $.— Money: taking the classification under the headings given above, for reckoning in money alone many machines exist in the form of cash registers. Several of these appliances not only record the amount indicated by the key-depressions upon a strip, but also totalize the sums received, and, until reset to zero, carry forward the total.
  - L.—Length: machines for measuring continuous lengths exist for measuring fabrics which, while they are being manufactured or packed, Pass over a roller from which the primary movement for the recording mechanism can be obtained. From the simple form of measuring machine So operated, others have been evolved which calculate the money value of the lengths so recorded=L$.
  - L2-—The product of length by length, or surface, is measured and
- p.339 - vue 409/901
- - 340
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - recorded by machines in the case of certain articles of irregular shape ; of these hides are a common example. The operation of measuring an irregular area involves integration, and in the case of hides this is performed by a series of rollers spaced equally over a length at right angles to that in which the hide is caused to travel; each roller is caused to revolve by the hide as soon as it comes into contact with it, that is to say, the rollers measure the lengths of a series of equidistant ordinates, and the total aggregate rotation of the rollers is summed by the machine and recorded as an area on the hide.
  - L3.—The product of length by surface, that is to say volume, is generally measured by some mechanical means in which a unit volume is adopted, as in gas-meters. In such cases it is merely a question of combining the existing known methods of recording abstract numbers with the counting appliance actuated by the measuring machine or meter. In the case of the volume of liquids, measurement is sometimes made by weight, but where large quantities are concerned the Venturi meter permits the measurement of volume while the fluid is actually in transit in its pipe or main. A meter based on this principle consequently measures volume as a product of time by velocity=T(L/T), or in other words, as a simple length, L, and although such appliances should come, according to classification, into the class of recorders which deal with length alone, they are in practice of more complex nature.
  - The measurement of the volume of solids is usually determined commercially by the more simple method of weighing and dividing by the density, and most of the machines that record the volumes of solids are operated by weigh-gear ; it is, however, quite conceivable that the measurement of certain solids, such as grain, could be effected by the measurement of length multiplied by the cross-section of the recipient, if the article measured is at rest, or by the cross-section of its stream multiplied by its velocity and by time if the article is in flow.
  - M.—Machines for recording mass, or rather weight, exist, and are generally operated by the setting in position of the jockey-weight on the weigh-beam of the machine. Some of these appliances not only determine and record the weight of the object handled, but being also set to a constant for the quality, as represented by the rate value per unit of weight, they record and calculate the total value from the automatically-received record of weight and the set figure for rate. Machines have also been devised for recording the weighing of such articles as coal, in the following manner: the number of the coal truck is noted by a key-operated section of the machine, which does not add or subtract, but merely records ; the gross weight of the vehicle is also recorded upon the machine, and the tare weight of the truck which is also set by key-operation is subtracted automatically so as to give the net weight of the contents by difference. The summation of this difference is effected automatically by the machine, and a total of the differences is carried forward to be
- p.340 - vue 410/901
- - COMPOSING MACHINES. 34
  - printed at the foot of each complete page; the Schooling machine is an example of this class.
  - T.—Time-records have already been mentioned in connexion with record stamps, but a very much larger class exists of machines which deal with the time-records of employees and others. Most of these machines are operated by means of typewheels producing the records on a rolled sheet, or strip of paper, or on inserted cards ; the impression correspond-ing to the particular time at which it is made is effected by the agency of the employee, either directly by pressing a pointer into a hole in the dial as in the Dey time-register, or by means of a special key as in the Bundy time-recorder, or by inserting the employee’s card in a slot and depressing a lever as in the Rochester recorder.
  - It may be considered that recording machines could better be divided into three classes according as they are operated by hand, or semi-automatically or automatically, but this method is open to the objection that nearly all classes of recording machines enter the field as hand-operated machines, become partially automatic in the adding, carrying, or recording operations, and finally pass into the stage of fully automatic machines when applications of sufficient magnitude or importance arise to warrant their existence in the final elaboration. Of a machine rendered purely automatic, an example is afforded by an invention for translating the Wheatstone perforated record-strip into ordinary printed characters.
  - It must not be supposed that this brief survey of miscellaneous stamping and recording machines has by any means exhausted the field of freak inventions, for amongst these appliances we find machines for printing on as different substances as paper, fabrics, and hides; for marking on curved surfaces such as those of golf-balls, eggs and hams ; for recording on tickets, tags, and cards; for recording the various operations performed in railway signal-cabins, together with the times at which the respective operations are performed; and for recording the fluctuations of temperature in refrigerating chambers on board ship. Moreover, the hand-stamp has developed into machines for attaching to one s boots for marking characters in the form of tracks, for the training of boy scouts, and into a brobdingnagian stamp carried beneath a vehicle and intended for printing on roads, an appliance for which one can imagine a large utility, as a means for warning motorists of police traps, but which could only have an extremely limited sale owing to the objection of the authorities to the honest publication of the whereabouts of their Znominious sourici^res.
- p.341 - vue 411/901
- - CHAPTER XX.
  - LINE-JUSTIFYING MACHINES.
  - “Some of the methods proposed are spring and rubber spaces; corrugated or hollow spaces to be afterward crushed to proper size; selection of proper spaces by calculating devices after measurement of the line; cutting spaces from space timber after measurement or casting of the spaces based on measu rement of line or calculation of its constituent units; progressive substitution of spaces until justification is secured ; the use of wedges to operate the space-selecting mechanism, or type metal wedges driven through the line and the surplus broken or cut off; the method of inserting thin spaces until the line is justified or oversetting and subtracting them until the same result is achieved; and finally the latest proposition, to use em spaces and cut them down to the size desired after oversetting and measuring the line.”
  - John S. Thompson. History of Composing Machines.
  - Bourgeois No. 17 (Figgins).
  - In dealing with the subject of self-spacing type, the difficulties met with in spacing out a line of composed matter have been already briefly discussed, and perhaps there is no portion of the whole subject of the production of a printing-surface that has called forth more inventive ingenuity than the attempt to grapple with the mechanical line-justification of a composed line.
  - The main difficulties may be summed up in the facts (1) that the number of spaces in the line is variable, and (2) that the amount of white to be divided amongst these spaces is also variable.
  - Many inventors have endeavoured to effect line-justifying by the use of compressible spaces, but the difficulties have not been satisfactorily overcome. The compressible space should be capable of occupying the width of the em quad before compression and of being compressed to the thickness of the thick space. This should be possible without risk of throwing the sides of the adjacent type out of parallel, without lifting the type from their feet and without bending a character occurring singly, such as a or I, which may come between two spaces. Moreover, the space must not itself rise so as to interfere with the typographical surface. Some attempts to solve the problem of the compressible space are shown in figs. 321 to 323.
  - 342
- p.342 - vue 412/901
- - LINE-JUSTIFYING MACHINES. 343
  - In addition to these, spring-spaces of various kinds have been proposed, but there are difficulties in their application owing to the varying Pressure to which they would be subjected according to the spacing of the line, and to the large range between the maximum and minimum widths required in practice.
  - Other methods have been proposed such as (1) progressive insertion of thin spaces. In this method, thin spaces are inserted between the words or their equivalents, to the end of the line. This operation is repeated, if necessary several times, the final operation usually extending only over Part of the line. (2) Spaces in the form of folding-wedges were proposed and tried, but had the disadvantage of requiring too much width between the words for practical purposes; they had the further disadvantage of
  - Fig. 322.—Wicks compressible space.
  - Scale: two and a half times full size.
  - Fig. 323.—Dacheux compressible spaces ; two forms.
  - Section: enlarged.
  - FIG. 321.—Mackie compressible space.
  - Scale : twice full size.
  - not giving the top of the spaces that uniform height which is necessary for stereotyping. (3) A form of multiple space arranged as a slug in gradu-ated thicknesses nicked nearly through so that there was sufficient strength in the metal for this to be inserted in the line, and yet leaving a section so Weak that the sizes not required for completing the line-justification could be readily broken off, fig. 324, was invented by P. F. Cox in 1898. (4) A further method which has been used in conjunction with composing machines, but so far as the authors are aware has not been employed independently, consists in setting a line with temporary spaces, passing it through a measuring and calculating piece of mechanism and subsequently inserting spaces of the nearest appropriate thickness in place of the temporary spaces. In some of these machines the line is remeasured after each such space has been inserted, so as to avoid accumulation of the error caused by the differ-ence between the fractional width required and the fixed width available in the choice of spaces provided for insertion in the line. (5) Yet another
- p.343 - vue 413/901
- - 344 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - method is the one described in chapter XXIII of casting spaces of the appropriate width determined by the measuring and counting gear and inserting these spaces in the line.
  - In fact, so many ingenious devices have been evolved with a view to overcoming the difficulties of line-justification that it is not easy to imagine any new operation for effecting the purpose, except that of temporarily spacing the type and filling the interspaces left with a congealable fluid, a colloid substance such as gelatine, or with plaster of Paris or some similar composition introduced under pressure and allowed to harden when line-justification has been brought about. The authors do not recommend any of these methods as suitable for the requirements of the practical printer.
  - Lu
  - O O 5 0 m
  - MBHW
  - Fig. 324.—Cox multispace.
  - Various machines have been invented for carrying out line-justification, but with the exception of the machines which cut out spaces from hard-wood or metal and those which reduce spaces by saws or milling-cutters, all the methods employed are simply mechanical modifications of some of the methods already described.
  - The first inventor to produce a working machine giving justification by the reduction in the one case of a specially cut-out space was F. A. Johnson. The reduction of the ordinary quads of commerce by means of milling-cutters is a salient feature of the Stringer line-justifying machine.
  - The Stringer line-justifying machine.—A machine invented a few years ago by H. Gilbert-Stringer is shown in fig. 315, plate XXIX, attached to the Wicks composing machine, and separately in fig. 325, plate XXXI.
  - In this machine, within certain limits, a line of type as delivered by any suitable typesetting machine can be accurately line-justified.
- p.344 - vue 414/901
- - PLATE XXXI.
  - $
  - ‘e I
  - face page 344-]
  - Fig. 325.—Stringer line-justifier.
- pl.31 - vue 415/901
- p.n.n. - vue 416/901
- - LINE-JUSTIFYING MACHINES. 345
  - The method adopted is to set em quads throughout the line in place of spaces, and subsequently to reduce these by milling to the correct width for equably spacing the line. As it is essential that the justified fine should contain em quads in some places, for instance at the end of a sentence and at the beginning of a new paragraph, these must not go through the reducing process for line-justification. It is therefore necessary that two kinds of quads be used. Those which are intended to remain quads are of shoulder height, while those which are to be reduced may be of stereo height. The former are supplied by the depression of the quad-key on the typesetter, and the latter, or space-quads, by the depression of the space-key.
  - Coupled to the space-key, by tappet action, is a rod which advances a bar step by step below one pair of folding-wedges for each space-quad set in the line in the automatic line-justifier. The line is composed into a measure longer than the finished line, which allows for the amount to be machined from the space-quads. Having composed a line in excess of the length required, the operator depresses a starting key and resumes composition. The line-justifier, acting independently while he is so occupied, first transfers the excess of length of the line to the wedge-box, and when those wedges which are above the counting bar are driven home by vertically lifting the bar, and with it the long part of each folding-wedge, the amount by which the bar is lifted divides the difference of length by the number of spaces automatically and sets the milling-device for reducing the space-quads. The machine then operates by pushing the line of characters forward along a race which has an opening at the side, provided for a reciprocating feeler. Any character having the requisite height stops the feeler, and is then pushed through by the pusher into the continuation of the race. When a space-quad occurs, the feeler passes over it and the space-quad is then gripped between narrow jaws on its front and back edges in a slide and carried vertically down past a rapidly-revolving face-mill, the depth of cut being Proportional to the lift of the wedges of the measuring device. It is replaced in the line by the automatic release of the jaws and the forward Pressure of the next character. The gear which drives the feeler and Pushing-plunger is thrown out during the milling operation and comes into action again as soon as the milling is completed. When the composed line has been line-justified, it is automatically transferred to a galley.
  - About 0’5 horse-power is required to run the line-justifying machine.
  - Grant-Legros-Maw line-justifying machine, figs. 32b to 329. A latex machine of this class is a modification and improvement upon the one just mentioned. Invented in 1909 by the authors in conjunction with T. F. Maw, the complication of the older machine has been greatly reduced , Various practical improvements and an entirely original method of dealing with the line and reduceable spaces have been introduced.
  - The complication of even the simplest of these machines is such that
- p.345 - vue 417/901
- - Co
  - 6
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - a better idea of one can be obtained from the patent specification than from any general description, however carefully written; the official abridgment is therefore given here.
  - The specification relates to a machine " in which the line is overset to a greater length than the justified line, and the spaces are reduced to the proper thickness by means of a milling-cutter. The justifying-spaces are so formed that they can be carried in the line of types with their lower ends considerably below the bottom of the type to facilitate the operation of the feeler which selects the spaces for removal. The projecting portions of the spaces also actuate a counting-mechanism for recording the number of spaces in the line, and set in operation the extractor-slide which removes the spaces for reduction. An overset-indicator is provided to show
  - 62
  - 92
  - 230
  - 196
  - 221
  - 228
  - Fig. 326.—(Fig. I. in patent abridgment.) Grant-Legros-Maw line-justifying machine. Plan.
  - ------' '1
  - 122
  - the limits between which the composition of the line must be terminated, and the overset is measured and is divided by a compound-lever arrangement among the spaces in the line. The line of types is fed into a type-race I, shown in plan in fig. 326, which may receive the types singly from the delivery-shoot of a setting-machine. The types are pushed to the left by a reciprocating plunger, the front end of the line being supported by a finger on a sliding rod which is connected by a cord to a weight. The spaces 50, fig. 327, are formed with a deep heel-nick 51 which engages a rule projecting from the bottom of the type-race so that the types rest at a higher level than the spaces. The spaces may be cut away at one or both sides for the same purpose. The overset-indicator consists of a fixed pointer, which is adjusted to a position corresponding to the end of a justified line, and a movable pointer, which, at each depression of the
- p.346 - vue 418/901
- - LINE-JUSTIFYING MACHINES. 347 space-key of the setting-machine, is advanced by ratchet mechanism through a distance equal to the maximum amount removable from a space. The composition of the line must therefore be stopped when the front end of the line is between the two pointers, an alarm sounding when the end of the line passes the fixed pointer. The line is now moved to the left by a feed-slide operated by hand, and operates in its passage a space-counter comprising star-wheels, which are rotated through one tooth by each space. The star-wheels are connected with an escapement which releases step-by-step a spring-pressed rack-bar 62, fig. 326, connected to a member 64, fig. 328, carrying a series of stepped bars 65, which form part of the dividing-mechanism. The line is moved to the left until it strikes a measuring-jaw 66, fig. 326, mounted on a sliding carriage D. The jaw 66 is thereby moved slightly to the left, and the finger which supports the front end of the line
  - UT
  - 51
  - 50
  - Fig. 328.—(Fig. 32, in patent abridgment.) Grant-Legros-Maw line-justifying machine. Measuring-box.
  - FIG. 327.—(Fig. 4, in patent abridgment.) Grant-Legros-Maw line-justifying machine. Type with special foot-nicks.
  - is withdrawn, and is pulled back to the right by the weight. The move-ment of the jaw 66 pushes down a measuring-wedge, whereby a clutch is closed and the measuring-mechanism is started. An adjustable jaw 122 carried by an arm on the carriage D is moved down into the type-race behind the line, and a pinion, which is frictionally held against rotation mid is carried by a lever pivoted on the carriage, is raised into gear with a travelling pitch-chain 92. The measuring-wedge is pushed up by a cam, and the line is clamped between the jaws 66, 122, a measuring-slide, which operates the dividing-mechanism, being simultaneously moved by the Wedge through a distance depending on the amount by which the line is overset. The measuring-slide rocks a lever 150, fig. 328, which acts through a slide 153 upon a second lever 155 which adjusts a measuring-surface slide 159, fig. 326. The slide 153 is carried by a transversely-moving slide 136, the position of which is determined by the stepped bars 65, and
- p.347 - vue 419/901
- - 348
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - therefore varies with the number of spaces in the line. The parts are so arranged that the final position of the slide 159 determines the amount to be removed from each space in order to justify the line. The measuring-slide is locked in position, and the carriage D is released and is moved to the left by the chain 92 until the first space enters the extractor-slide F. The extractor-slide consists of two flat slides 163, 164 capable of slight relative movement and having between them an opening which forms a continuation of the type-race 1. Between the slides is pivoted a trigger of which the top is engaged by the lower ends of the spaces. The movement of the trigger sets in action the driving-gear of the extractor-slide which carries the space out of the line and past a milling-cutter 196. The space is meanwhile moved laterally between the parts of the extractor-slide by a pusher into contact with the measuring-surface slide 159 so that it projects from the extractor-slide by the amount which is to be removed by the cutter, after which it is clamped between the two parts of the slide. As the space is removed from the line, it is raised by an inclined ledge so that it is returned to the line at the same level as the types. After the return of the space, the line moves on until arrested by the next space when the operation is repeated. The milling-cutter is detachably secured to a spindle provided with spring-pressed thrust-bearings. The cutter may have two distinct sets of teeth, an outer set for roughing-down the space, and an inner set for finishing, and may be in one, two, or more pieces. At the end of its travel, the carriage D is locked in position opposite to a galley 221 into which the line is pushed. The pinion on the carriage is then moved into gear with the lower part of the chain 92 whereby the carriage is returned to initial position. If a line is prevented from entering the galley, the pusher yields and the return of the carriage is prevented. The galley is inclined, to obviate the necessity for guard-rules, and may be adjustable in width by means of a movable side-piece 230 and wedges 228 operated by a screw. The lines are supported by a bar which is frictionally locked against one side of the galley by a spring. In a modification of the machine the measuring-surface bears against the space during its reduction by the milling-cutter. The type-race is made up of two parts, a fixed race 250, fig. 329, into which the line is fed from the setting-machine, and a movable race 251 which can be moved by a hand-lever 252 into alinement with the fixed race. The movement of the hand-lever also causes the engagement of a clutch which starts the mechanism. The line is embraced between two jaws 276, 277 mounted to slide on a bar carried by the movable race. A cord 264 attached to the jaw 277 passes round a pulley 279 on the jaw 276 and is attached to a winding-drum. The jaws close on the line which then moves to the left, operating in its passage the space-counting gear B. The right-hand jaw is arrested by a stop 286 which is so adjusted that the jaw 277 moves a measuring-finger 292 through a distance equal to the overset. A dividing-mechanism similar to that before described is thereby operated so that a measuring-surface
- p.348 - vue 420/901
- - LINE-JUSTIFYING MACHINES.
  - 349
  - slide 300 is set. The race 251 is then moved back to initial position and the line is moved to the left by the cord 264 until the first space enters the extractor-slide F where it is arrested by a trigger as before, the winding-drum being now frictionally driven. The extractor-slide carries a plunger of which the projecting end strikes a bevelled part of
  - 286
  - 252
  - 221
  - FIG. 329.—(Fig. 36 in patent abridgment.) Grant-Legros-Maw line-justifying machine. Side elevation.
  - the slide 300 and is thereby caused to push the space out of the slide F by the amount to be removed by the cutter. After all the spaces have been reduced, the line travels on and is pushed into a galley
  - 221. The galley-pusher carries with it the jaw 277 which is mounted to slide. A spring catch retains the end of the line and prevents its return with the iaw.”
- p.349 - vue 421/901
- - CHAPTER XXI.
  - DISTRIBUTING MACHINES.
  - “ The sad mechanic exercise.”
  - Tennyson. In Memoriam.
  - 10-point monarch (Shanks ^ Sons).
  - Originally matter, after it had been used for printing, was distributed by hand back into the cases. This simple method is followed in devices such as the Hattersley, in which the operator is required to read the matter in a manner similar to that adopted in hand distribution, but with the modification that, in this instance, the line of matter is inserted in a distributing-stick somewhat resembling a pistol, fig. 330. This is successively presented against teeth in a vertical plate forming a guide above the mouths of the various channels of the magazine which is secured to a frame. In pressing the distributing-stick into place, a bearing-slip on the under side which supports the type is pushed back to the appropriate distance and timed to allow the trigger action of the distributing-stick when pushed home by the operator to depress the end type into its place at the mouth of the channel. As the line has been read in advance by the operator and the order of the characters and sorts is known, the stick can be rapidly moved from place to place and the distribution effected quickly and accurately. This work in the case of the Hattersley machine is usually performed by girls, who attain a speed of up to 4000 ens per hour ; hence a set of Hattersley machines consists of two distributors to one composing machine.
  - An example of another simple form of distribution is afforded by Clay and Rosenborg’s reversed composing machine, patented in 1840, the operator of which by reading the type as it passed along and touching corresponding keys of a keyboard caused the letters to be distributed into separate channels. These machines were for some time in commercial operation.
  - A later machine, very similar in principle, is the Pulsometer distributing machine, fig. 331, plate XXXII. The galley containing the matter to be distributed is inclined at 45°, and slopes downwards towards the keyboard. The lowest line is raised into the receiving trough, where it is read by the operator and is distributed through shutters on a guide-plate inclined at 45° to the horizontal and at right angles to the galley. There are twenty-four 35°
- p.350 - vue 422/901
- - DISTRIBUTING MACHINES.
  - 351
  - Elevation
  - O
  - Plan
  - Part inverted plan
  - End view from front
  - Fig. 330.—Hattersley distributing-stick.
- p.351 - vue 423/901
- - 352
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - keys, fig. 286, p. 299, and each generally corresponds to a group of three type which are selected so as to differ by at least 0’008 inch in set width among themselves. The distribution of the three sorts of type is performed automatically by two bridge-pieces, arranged at different heights, which divert the character to the mouth of the corresponding tube, fig. 332. A brass follower is placed in each tube to keep the type upright; the type as they fall are pushed into the tubes by a series of eccentrics, one to each tube, carried on a continuously-rotating shaft.
  - The power required is stated to be about O’I horse-power.
  - Automatic distributing machines perform the work by means of nicks cut on the back, and occasionally on both back and front, of the type. The type are nicked so that each sort dealt with by the distributor has a different combination.
  - In the Empire automatic distributing machine, fig. 333, plate XXXII, which was in use for some years at the office of " The Times,” and subsequently in the office of " The Hereford Times "—to the proprietors of which the authors are indebted for some of these data—the type were nicked on the back, fig. 334, by means of a planing machine with two sliding tool-holders. The setting of the tools could be effected rapidly by putting dowel pins into numbered holes in each slide. A table was provided with the machine giving the numbers of the holes to be used on each slide for each character. Actually the combinations in the nicking machine were arranged in a somewhat haphazard manner. The type in the distributing machine was automatically removed from the galley in a line and then pushed by a pusher, one character at a time, into a series of carriers. The carriers had a step-by-step motion and stopped consecutively in front of feelers which were formed to the counterpart of the nicks cut in the type. The feeler-slides advanced against the type, and when a feeler fitted the nick combination it carried, both could move forward releasing the type from the carrier and thereby allowing the type to fall into the magazine of tubes. The machine distributed eighty-four sorts.
  - The Thorne distributor, fig. 335, shows a method in which the nicks at the back of the type are utilized, by means of selecting wards, to effect the distribution of dead matter. In this machine the dead matter is filled into grooves in the upper one of two coaxial cylinders, which in its intermittent movement of rotation carries the type round step by step till it brings any individual type over the particular wards in the groove of the lower stationary cylinder that correspond with the nicks cut in the type. The lower stationary cylinder itself now forms the magazine of the Thorne composing machine.
  - The Dow automatic distributing machine, fig. 336, plate XXXIII, was designed and constructed by Alexander Dow to work in conjunction with his composing and line-justifying machine described later in this work (p. 364). The type for distribution by this machine, as for other automatic distributors, requires to be specially nicked. The dead-matter galley is capable
- p.352 - vue 424/901
- - PLATE XXXII.
  - Fig. 331.—Pulsometer distributing machine.
  - “e .8
  - FIG. 333.—Empire automatic distributing machine.
  - [To face page 352.
- pl.32 - vue 425/901
- - PLATE XXXIII.
  - 1
  - Fig. 336.—Dow automatic distributing machine.
  - To face page 353-]
- pl.33 - vue 426/901
- - DISTRIBUTING MACHINES.
  - 353
  - of holding about 40,000 ens of 6-point type as a charge, and it is not
  - Section- on A.B.
  - Section, on- C.D.
  - Section on E.F.
  - Fig. 332.—Sections through the Pulsometer distributor channels.
  - Fig. 334.—Type nicked for the Empire distributing machine. Twice full size.
  - The upper drum, revolves step by step ---------------
  - Quad, ready to fall
  - E
  - Inclined at 45°
  - FIG. 335.—Thorne distributor. Method of distribution.
  - 00 & Its : & &
  - -5 s 5 ft
  - Uis. 332.—Pulsometer dis-* uting machine channels.
  - Sections.
  - necessary to remove the leads from leaded matter before placing it on 2 A
- p.353 - vue 427/901
- - 354 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - the galley of the distributor. The tubes for receiving the type are arranged in a plane slightly inclined to the vertical and disposed radially to a central revolving disk which supports on its periphery thirty-six type-carriers. As these are rotated past the distributing channel each carrier receives a single type and carries it round until it arrives opposite its proper channel. When a type comes opposite the channel, which has wards corresponding to its nicks and is intended to receive it, it is pushed out of its carrier into the channel, the disk meanwhile rotating continuously. The mechanism is all positive in action and distributes at the rate of 30,000 ens per hour. A safety-lock prevents the type from being broken during the operation of transference to the channel from the galley. An equipment of Dow machines consisting of two distributors operated by one man could supply sufficient type to keep about six Dow composing machines in regular work.
  - In the opinion of the authors, without question the best method of distribution is that proposed by Church and subsequently elaborated and carried out by Wicks on single type—a system which has been almost universally adopted in all modern typecasting and composing machines—-namely, distribution through the melting-pot.
- p.354 - vue 428/901
- p.n.n. - vue 429/901
- - PLATE XXXIV.
  - me
  - (cue HP
  - Fig. 337.— Rototype composing and casting machine.
  - To face page 355.]
- pl.34 - vue 430/901
- - CHAPTER XXII.
  - CASTING AND COMPOSING MACHINES.
  - " GRAO GRAO ENCHE 0 PAPO A GALLINHA."
  - PORTUGUESE PROVERB.
  - Long printer condensed sans serif (Stephenson, Blake & Co.).
  - AN example of a machine of this class, one that produces its line type by type, is to be found in that of Charles H. Westcott of Elizabeth, New Jersey, who, in 1871, originated a machine in which the type was cast as its keyboard was operated. The authors believe this to be the first compositor which combined typecasting and typesetting unit by unit. In this machine dies were mounted on levers or arms similar to those of an ordinary typewriter, and the depression of a key in the keyboard caused a corresponding matrix to be swung to the central point and clamped before a pot of molten metal, from which a single type was cast. This operation was repeated at each stroke of the keys.
  - According to J. S. Thompson, this machine of Westcott’s was exhibited at the Centennial Exposition at Philadelphia in the year 1876.
  - A machine which followed the same lines and presented various improvements upon that devised by Westcott was made in 1894 by Joseph C. Fowler, who provided typecasting arrangements which cast the type and deposited it directly into magazines from which it could be assembled in the usual manner. He had a mould for each type character and a matrix adjacent to it adapted to lock against the mould and receive the charge of metal from the metal-pot. After casting, the type were ejected into channels directly beneath them, keeping them always supplied.
  - The Rototype machine, fig. 337, plate XXXIV, the invention of F. Schimmel, is operated by a keyboard having 123 keys and producing 120 characters. The matrices, one of which is shown in fig. 191, p. 226, are decagonal and arranged coaxially in a group of twelve to form a polygonal roller capable of both rotational and longitudinal movements in front of the mould-opening. Some four or five of these rollers are arranged in a vertical Tame which runs in slides and permits any desired roller to be brought oppo-site to the mould. The rotational movement of the roller is stopped by one of ten pins on the end of the frame which enters a hole in the matrix-roller.
  - 355
- p.355 - vue 431/901
- - 356
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - This stop arrests the rotational movement approximately, while the flats of the polygon give the exact rotational position ; the end-way movement is set approximately by levers regulated by twelve stops, and is set exactly by lugs on the frame above the matrix-roller, with which other lugs on the mould engage, thus setting the mould to the correct set width of character for the matrix presented to it.
  - The mould in opening has a movement of the top half upwards and towards the left, freeing the type which is ejected by horizontal cylindrical pushers passing through holes in the fixed mould-body. The type is ejected into a galley which, when full, is rotated through 900 into a vertical position.
  - The operation of composing on the Schimmel machine involves the presentation of a matrix to the mould for each key-depression, the casting of a type from the matrix, and its ejection from the mould ; after this the operation of setting another character can be commenced; the speed of the operator is therefore directly dependent on the speed at which the casting portion of the machine works. No provision is made for line-justification, but an indicator shows the amount of space required to complete the line, and spaces can be cast to approximate to this amount for subsequent use in the hand-justification of the line after the composition has been completed. The theory of the inventor is that as composed matter usually requires correction, and as justification involves a large amount of extra and complex machinery, it is considered unnecessary to provide this seeing that the line will probably require correction before going to press.
- p.356 - vue 432/901
- - CHAPTER XXIII.
  - CASTING AND LINE-JUSTIFYING MACHINES.
  - “Now in the setting of Space with Word, and Word with Space, there is Work that breaketh Bone at the Beginning, for they be Funded but few, and men's Words do stand apart, lean and large, of divers Distance, and with Labour enow be they Brought truly into Lap with meet Measure of Line.”
  - Mirrour of Pryntyng.
  - Long primer De Vinne italic (American Type Founders Co.).
  - IN chapter XVI, which deals with the classification of typecasting, composing, line-justifying and distributing machines, brief allusion has been made to machines of the class treated here. It must be obvious from the conditions implied in the classification that the operations performed by such machines must be confined to the measurement of the aggregate width to be filled by the spaces, the counting of the spaces in the line of type to be justified, the division of the aggregate width by the ascertained number of spaces, and the casting and inserting of this number of spaces of the desired width into their proper places in the line.
  - It must be further noted that it is possible to use such a machine as an adjunct to a simple composing machine in the same manner as a simple hue-justifying machine may be applied to the line-justification of matter independently composed.
  - The McGrath casting and line-justifying machine.—P. H. McGrath of Randolph, Massachusetts, applied in 1891 for a patent granted in 1898, for performing the operation of line-justifying by measuring the total set width of the spaces required, dividing automatically by mechanism which adjusts a mould to the appropriate set width, and casting and in-Serting the required spaces in place of temporary ones in the line. Such a machine could combine the advantages of the loose-type setter with the accuracy of length of line obtained by machines of the monotype class, and it would be possible to run the casting mechanism at a comparatively slow speed.
  - Though this idea has been set forth in patents, the authors have not been able to trace that any machine working on this principle has been actually constructed, though two other American inventors, F. A. Johnson and William Berri, have independently worked upon somewhat similar lines.
  - 357
- p.357 - vue 433/901
- - CHAPTER XXIV.
  - CASTING AND DISTRIBUTING MACHINES.
  - " Voici, ma foi, la chose en propre original.”
  - Moliere. Sganarelle.
  - Long primer ronaldson (Monotype Co.).
  - Machines for combining the operations of casting and distributing type do not form a large class. The question of the automatic distribution of the product of the Wicks rotary typecaster was considered by the inventor of that machine, but the idea was abandoned by him as he was rightly of the opinion that the extra complication would prove more costly than the cheap girl-labour then available which could effect the distribution of the product of the Wicks machine for about one-third of a penny per 1000 type. Under other conditions, however, mechanical distribution of the product of a casting machine may prove advantageous. The only machine which combines the operations of casting and distributing, known to the authors, is the one here described.
  - The Bhisotype casting and distributing machine, fig. 338, plate XXXV, consists of a rectangular sliding block on the top of which L-shaped uncovered moulds, varying in number from ten up to sixty according to the size of the machine, are fixed in a line and provided with a sliding coverplate which, when brought into position, completes the series of moulds. At one end of these moulds there are two plates fixed, to form a slot for the tang and for allowing the molten metal to enter, and there is a ridge to form a groove in the feet of the types. The opposite ends of the moulds are of course closed by matrices when in action—one for each mould —which are fixed in a row in a frame itself attached to the sliding cover-plate. Fingers F, figs. 339 to 341, are provided—one for each mould-— on the lower side of the matrix-frame for extruding the types from the mould. Molten metal is supplied to these moulds from the metal-pot in the usual way. There is water-circulation through the mould-block and coverplate for the more rapid cooling of the injected metal; the machine can be made in various sizes, in which case it will consist of one or more mould-blocks, each containing ten or a multiple of ten moulds and supplied from a single pump. Each mould casts a single type and is provided with projections to produce such nicks as may be desired in the type-body.
  - 358
- p.358 - vue 434/901
- - PLATE XXXV.
  - Co 3 0
  - tD
  - tipenye
  - Fig. 338.— Bhisotype casting and distributing machine.
  - To face page 358.
- pl.35 - vue 435/901
- p.n.n. - vue 436/901
- - CASTING AND DISTRIBUTING MACHINES. 359
  - In working the typecaster, the mould-block holding the moulds with the cover-plate, firmly closed by a pressure device, is pushed forward by cams to come into contact with the mouth of the metal-spout and to receive
  - S
  - B
  - M
  - G
  - A B C D E
  - REFERENCES.
  - Cover-plate. Mould-cavity.
  - Matrix.
  - Matrix-holder. Matrix pressure-block.
  - F Fingers.
  - G Platform.
  - H Mould fixture-block.
  - J Tang-slide.
  - K Moulds.
  - L Nozzle.
  - M Molten metal.
  - N Travelling chute.
  - O Fixed chute.
  - P Packer.
  - R Tang. S Matrix-holder slide.
  - T Type.
  - U Type-tray.
  - /2222222//22
  - __D °
  - Fig. 339.-—Bhisotype; vertical section through a mould in the casting position.
  - the charge of molten metal driven forward by the pump-plunger ; at each operation ten or more single types are cast simultaneously, one in each mould - the largest size of machine casts sixty types at a time.
- p.359 - vue 437/901
- - 360 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Fig. 341.—Bhisotype ; isometric view of moulds and matrices.
  - 0D
  - R
  - Fig. 340.—Bhisotype ; vertical section through a mould open for delivery of the type.
  - A B C D E F G H J
  - K
  - G
  - REFERENCES.
  - Cover-plate.
  - Mould-cavity.
  - Matrix.
  - Matrix-holder.
  - Matrix pressure-block.
  - Fingers.
  - Platform.
  - Mould fixture-block.
  - Tang-slide.
  - Moulds.
  - L M N O P R
  - S T
  - U
  - Nozzle.
  - Molten metal.
  - Travelling chute.
  - Fixed chute.
  - Packer.
  - Tang.
  - Matrix-holder slide.
  - Type.
  - Type-tray.
- p.360 - vue 438/901
- - CASTING AND DISTRIBUTING MACHINES. 361
  - After the cast has been made the mould-block is drawn backward from the metal-spout, the type tangs are broken off, and their removal leaves a groove in the foot of the type. This done, the matrices are released and the cover-plate raised sufficiently to clear the top of the moulds, after which the matrices are made to slide away from the face of the mould. The types are then extruded from the moulds on to a turning platform by means of the matrix-frame. The whole mould, including the platform, now travels horizontally away from the nozzle for a short distance, and during this time the matrix-frame with its fingers has moved vertically into a position which enables it to clear the top of the moulds. The platform also commences to rise into position to receive the type. The lower part of the mould containing the type continues to travel, leaving behind the cover-plate, fingers and matrices ; during this time the fingers have dropped into position ready to extract the type and the platform has risen into the position ready to receive the type. Also the tang-slide has separated the tang from the type and dropped to allow the tang to fall away. The mould-carriage now moves back to the nozzle, where pressure is applied by means of two balanced wedges to close the moulds which are now ready for the next casting. During this movement the type are extruded on to the platform by means of the fingers. The type are thence delivered first into the travelling chute and then into the fixed chute and assembled in separate channels on a tray, ready for making up into founts for hand-composition, or they are automatically distributed to the magazines of one or more composing machines for composition, or they may be assembled for putting up into founts.
  - After the type has been ejected and the parts returned to position, the mould-block with the empty moulds is again ready for the cast of another set of types. All the movements of the above series are automatic and occur during a single revolution of the machine. Each mould is made up of two Pieces, a set-piece, which also determines the body, and a wall-piece, fixed together to form an L-shaped rectangular slot, varying according to the body or size of the particular type it is designed to cast. The mould-plate is so shaped as to form with the cover-plate a tapered slot in which the tang is cast, and through which the molten metal is forced. The matrices are of comparatively simple construction and may carry two different faces. It is stated that the ordinary Linotype matrices can be used with this machine. Each mould and each Bhisotype matrix are on a fixed unit system and are interchangeable to effect a change in type-body, or can be grouped together to form logotypes ; and quads of any length can be cast hy the use of a plain block of the length required. Each mould occupies about a quarter of an inch for type up to 12-point, so that a row of ten moulds to cast ten single 12-point type is about two and a half inches long. To effect a change from one body to another it is stated that all that is required in this machine is the mere substitution of one simple L-shaped
- p.361 - vue 439/901
- - 362 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - mould-piece for another, the cover-plate, being common to all moulds, remaining undisturbed. The peculiar form of the Bhisotype moulds enables the operator to cast, side by side, type of varying bodies and set widths together with any logotypes within the capacity of the machine. A machine with only a few moulds, the authors are informed, can be made for the use of small printers.
  - It is claimed that a standard-size machine consisting of sixty moulds carried on two mould-blocks will cast sixty single types at every revolution of the machine. This latter, working at a speed of forty revolutions per minute, casts about 2400 types per minute and automatically assembles them into lines for distribution as desired, either into the magazines of composing machines or into paged founts.
  - This description is based on information furnished to the authors by the inventor, Prof. S. A. Bhisey, of Bombay.
  - The types from this machine are stated to be of excellent quality, and the data given appear to show that the output is greater than that of any other typecaster known to the authors.
- p.362 - vue 440/901
- - CHAPTER XXV.
  - COMPOSING AND LINE-JUSTIFYING MACHINES.
  - < If I justify myself, mine own mouth shall condemn me: if I say, I am perfect, it shall also prove me perverse.’’
  - Job.
  - Pica typewriter (Marr).
  - THE invention of the Mackie composing machine by Dr. Alexander Mackie of Warrington was made in 1867. Although the use of the Jacquard ribbon tor composing had been proposed earlier, this appears to be the first machine in which automatic composition from a previously perforated ribbon was satisfactorily effected. In the earlier pattern of this machine the perforations were made in the strip in fourteen rows giving ninety-one combinations taken two at a time. In
  - the later model used in 1877 there were twenty-four type-receptacles each containing seven or eight sorts of type and spaces. Thirteen rows of perforations were made in the strip, but the central continu-ously perforated row was used as a guide, and, to obtain the larger number of combinations required tor dealing with the greater number of sorts, combinations of three holes at a time as well as of two boles at a time were used. A specimen of this strip 18 shown in fig. 342.
  - A picture of the Mackie machine is impressed on the outside cover of each copy of the folio volumes of " Lords and Commons,” a reprint of important speeches of both houses of Parliament, composed
  - Fig. 342. — Mackie composing and line-justifying machine; perforated strip.
  - spaces were used to
  - upon the Mackie composing machine. Compressible effect line-justification.
  - The Empire composing and line-justifying machine.—A later form of the simple composing machine which has already been described in its Particular class, dealt with in chapter XIX, is the Empire composing and
  - 363
- p.363 - vue 441/901
- - 364
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - line-justifying machine which, though in other respects very similar to its predecessor, is combined with an automatic line-justifying appliance, invented in 1894 by Frank McClintock. The principle on which this line-justifier works has formed the subject of further inventions by F. B. Converse and later by J. D. Chalfant. The type are contained in three cases, each of about thirty channels, which are carried on cradles with glass fronts. The cradles can be placed horizontally for receiving the cases and then turned vertically with the face of the type to the front so as to be visible through the glass. The arrangement of guide-plate, pendulum-check and type-race is very similar to that of the Kastenbein compositor. Tapered space-bars are used temporarily in composing, and are put into position by the space-key. When the line is nearly completed a bell warns the operator, and he either completes the word or divides it. The temporary space-bars are then driven home to expand the line to the proper measure. The bars are arranged to correspond to six different set widths of spaces, namely, 0’25, 0*375, 0’5, 0:625, 075, and 0*875 of the body. The distance that the space-bar projects decides the width of space supplied ; the machine supplies a space not greater than the setting, and at the same time withdraws the space-bar. After each operation of inserting a space, the remaining space-bars are driven home, so that the final maximum possible error is 0'125 of the body. This is a considerably larger error than that usually obtained in spacing by hand, in which the limit of accuracy attainable in the most favourable circumstances is given by the product of the fractions of the body represented by the thin, middle, and thick spaces : Ixx3=6 of the body.
  - The Dow composing and line-justifying machine, fig. 343, plate XXXVI, is an invention of Alexander Dow, of New York City, the son of Lorenzo Dow, of Boston, Mass., who was also a clever inventor and mechanic. This machine was invented in 1896 and came under the notice of one of the authors in New York in 1901, at which time it was doing excellent work. The Dow composing machine is an extremely ingenious piece of mechanism. It occupies about 17 square feet of floor-space, stands over 6 feet high, and weighs about 2000 pounds. The type-magazine, on account of its weight, is divided into two parts for greater ease in handling, particularly when it is desired to change from one face to another. The machine is capable of composing all sizes of type from 5-point to 12-point. The type lie with their faces towards the operator and with the set vertical in channels which are 4 feet in length and afford a large capacity for type ; this is still further increased by the duplication of the channels most used. Thus there are four channels for quadrats, three for e and two each for t, 0, h. n, and a. Moreover, it is possible to refill any channel by means of a type-grab which can be used by hand to take a charge of type from the corresponding distributor-channel.
  - As in the Paige compositor, the movements are effected from a cam-shaft at the back of the machine, but with the difference that the type
- p.364 - vue 442/901
- - PLATE XXXVI.
  - Fig. 343.—Dow composing and line-justifying machine; front view.
  - ' = -
  - a
  - &
  - 9
  - 3 , v “5
  - pl
  - S
  - 1 i
  - [To face page 364
- pl.36 - vue 443/901
- - PLATE XXXVII.
  - 4
  - FIG. 344 —Dow composing and line-justifying machine ; back view.
- pl.37 - vue 444/901
- p.n.n. - vue 445/901
- - PLATE XXXVIII.
  - vo
  - TS)
  - 43.7 "
  - Fig. 345.—Dow composing machine ; line in process of composition.
  - 6.
  - 0 =---==
  - Fig. 346.—Dow composing machine; stick rotated through 90°; ejection of line.
  - Fig. 347.—Dow composing machine; line of composed type on the bridge; justification in progress.
  - To face page 365.]
- pl.38 - vue 446/901
- - COMPOSING AND LINE-JUSTIFYING MACHINES. 365 are placed in the channels with the set-dimension vertical. The back view of the machine, fig. 344, plate XXXVII, shows the arrangement of the cam-mechanism, while fig. 345, plate XXXVIII, shows the line in process of composition into the stick in its vertical position; fig. 34^ plate XXXVIII, shows the stick rotated to its horizontal position ready for the ejection of the type on to the bridge; and in this position, fig. 347, Plate XXXVIII, it is line-justified.
  - In the Dow composing and line-justifying machine the type is released by positive action, and the touching of the keys, which are only depressed about a tenth of an inch, merely serves to set in motion certain releas-ing mechanisms. As in other key-released, power-driven keyboards the keeping of a key depressed fills the line with the corresponding character or with quads ; in this instance it does so at the rate of ten per second. An average of 12,000 ens per hour is stated to be obtainable from the keyboard. The types are ejected into a raceway, and rapidly-reciprocating type-drivers traversing this raceway push the ejected types to a central channel where another blade, synchronized with the drivers, pushes them down into the assembling-stick which occupies a vertical position during the composition of the line. As the types are assembled, temporary type-high brass spaces are brought into place between the words. When the line is complete the Depression of a line-key causes the stick to make a half-turn about a hori-Zontal axis and the types are ejected on to a second raceway, where the line is automatically measured and the exact total amount it requires for com-Plete justification is registered by the calculating device which has already registered the number of times the space-key was depressed in composing the line. The registered shortage is thereupon divided by the registered number of spaces in the line, and the quotient obtained by the machine is the proper thickness for those spaces which, if inserted between the words, will accurately justify the line. If the calculation shows that no even division of the ten available spaces will exactly justify the line, the mechanism will select a combination of these spaces that will do so, and will place them between the words. Thus if the shortage on a line is equal to 0350 inch and there are eight spaces in the line, the machine may select five spaces each 0’040 inch thick, and three spaces each 0'050 inch thick, and the aggregate of these will equal the amount required. The line is then separated word by word, the temporary brass spaces are removed and returned to the magazine and the proper justifying spaces, brought from the space-magazine, are deposited after each word respectively as the word advances in turn to the galley, where the line is delivered either leaded or solid as may be desired. This automatic line Justifying apparatus is really the most ingenious part of the Dow machine, and it is not interfered with by changes in the measure of the line.
  - It is further claimed for the Dow machine that, as positive mechanical movements are employed throughout, it is possible to operate the machine
- p.365 - vue 447/901
- - 366 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - with type in any condition, moist, oily, or dirty. As the type does not fall the face is not subjected to risk of injury or to heavy wear and tear. The mechanical arrangements and speed of drive admit of possible composition at the rate of 24,000 ens per hour, so that there is no risk of the speed of the operator exceeding that of the machine. The authors are not aware if this machine has made any great commercial advance, but at the commencement of the century, regarded as a piece of mechanism, it was certainly quite in the front rank of composing and line-justifying machines.
- p.366 - vue 448/901
- - CHAPTER XXVI.
  - COMPOSING AND DISTRIBUTING MACHINES.
  - "Their office was to distribute." Nehemiah.
  - Long primer Italian (Reed).
  - IN its earlier forms the Thorne machine did not line-justify the type, but in a later form it was combined with an automatic line-justifier. It is here, therefore, regarded simply as a composing and distributing machine.
  - The Thorne machine, fig. 348, plate XXXIX, is not an experimental machine in so far as it is an automatic distributor and setter, apart from the line-justifier, which latter, as stated above, is a later addition. The machine, taken as a distributing and setting machine setting up into line, in a galley, has been manufactured for many years and is the oldest machine of its kind on the market in the United States, where it is stated to be still in use in many places for small country newspapers.
  - In the early foim of the Thorne machine there are two coaxial vertical Cylinders having radial channels to receive the type. The upper cylinder 18 charged with matter for distributing without special preparation except that, as in the Empire machine, the type are specially nicked in the back with a different combination for each character. The channels in the top cylinder are plain without any projections, as shown in fig. 335, p. 353. The channels in the lower cylinder, on the other hand, bear the combinations of raised wards corresponding to the nicks at the back of each individual character. The lower cylinder remains stationary, and the upper revolves with a step-by-step movement, and pauses when the grooves are in aline-ment. When the wards in the lower cylinder channel agree with the nicks in a type above it the latter descends, and is available in due course for composition. The composition is effected by ejecting the lowest type, rom the channel in the lower cylinder corresponding to the key depressed, an to a revolving circular disk. The type are brought round by the disk 0 the point of delivery, where they are received on a belt and thence travel 0 the receiving race.
  - In a later form of the Thorne machine, referred to above, and known 8 the Simplex, shown in fig. 349, plate XXXIX, line-justifying was 367
- p.367 - vue 449/901
- - 368
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - added, and this line-justifying mechanism comprised a summing device, which registered the total set of the line, and a registering device for the number of spaces. There were four set widths of spaces, and the justification took account of any tendency to under or over space the line as in the Empire composing and line-justifying machine; but owing to the smaller number of sizes available, the result was not even so close an approximation as in the case of the Empire composing machine in combination with the MacClintock line-justifier.
  - In a still later form of the Thorne machine, which may be considered as an early form of the Unitype, the design was modified so as to make the delivery of the type positive, with a view to permitting the attachment of a line-justifying machine. The construction of the machine may be briefly described as follows :—
  - There were two cylinders each having ninety-six longitudinal grooves or channels similar to those already described. The upper cylinder, known as the distributor, had plain channels, while the channels in the lower cylinder, known as the stationary cylinder, were fitted with wards to correspond to each character. The lower end of the stationary cylinder was formed as a hollow cone for receiving the type when liberated from the respective channels corresponding to each character. The distributor was turned step by step by a worm-gear which permitted a dwell, whenever the channels in the two cylinders came into alinement, for a period sufficient to enable the bottom characters in the distributor channels to drop into those of the stationary cylinder, which occurred when the wards in the channel, usually five in number, corresponded with the special nicks in the back of the type.
  - When the distributor channel in the upper cylinder was emptied, a whole line of characters was pushed into it for distribution. By this means the distributor was kept continuously at work sorting characters into their respective channels so that the channels in the lower or stationary cylinder were kept supplied.
  - A stationary shaft in the centre of the machine carried the distributor as well as the stationary cylinder with its attached cone. A cam running on this shaft revolved at three hundred revolutions per minute within the cone; the function of this cam was to carry a plunger up and down as follows. When the key corresponding to a character was depressed, a catch was released allowing the plunger to engage with the revolving cam. The plunger in rising caused the corresponding bottom character in the stationary cylinder to be ejected, the character falling by gravity down the surface of the hollow cone in a groove ; while the character was dropping, the plunger descended more rapidly, in a tenth of a second, and pushed the character, which had previously remained at the bottom of the cone from the last preceding operation, into a circular channel or raceway by a positive action. A revolving sweep cleared this channel or raceway and picked up any character that might be there. The sweep was met by a
- p.368 - vue 450/901
- - COMPOSING AND DISTRIBUTING MACHINES. 369 packer, fig. 350, which in turn picked the character from the sweep and pushed it towards the galley.
  - The keyboard, like that of the Wicks composing machine and several others, was so arranged that combinations or chords could be struck, such
  - as and, of, tion ; this was effected by arranging the characters so that they fell into the channel in their correct relative position, the sweep and packer pick-ing up the combination instead of a single character. The sweep revolved at the same speed as the cam, namely, three hundred revolutions per minute, so that it was difficult to strike the keys quicker than the machine could deliver, one-fifth of a second being available for each character : a speed of 10,000 ens per hour is stated to have been obtained quite easily. The striking of combinations or chords has not, however, been approved by the operators in Practice for the reason that the time saved in strik-ing the combination the, for instance, over that Occupied in striking the three characters t, h, e,
  - FIG. 350.— Thorne machine ; packing device.
  - Singly, is small as compared with that which is lost in rectifying the errors liable to be introduced by striking the keys simultaneously as a chord.
  - In connexion with this machine the line-justifier of Johnson has recently been tested. This justifying machine is similar in principle to the Stringer and Grant-Legros-Maw justifiers elsewhere described in this work, but instead of acting on the ordinary commercial em quad, the spaces for in-Sertion in the line are prepared by being cut off with a saw from a suitable bar or slug of type-metal. The machine is so designed that should the space break before it has entered its place in the line, a second similar space 18 cut off and pushed into place. This method facilitates distribution of the spaces by remelting. Experiments previously made with compressible spaces had shown that considerable difficulty arose in the distribution of these spaces, and this appears to have been an important factor in the Selection of the Johnson method of justification.
  - A serious difficulty with the Thorne machine or any other machine that sets up and line-justifies individual lines of type is the fact that thin characters such as i and t break easily when cast in hard type-metal, and ^re even more liable to fracture when they are specially nicked at the back 0r automatic distribution, and this breakage is likely to occur both in stribution and in line-justifying. When any such breakage occurs time wasted in replacing the letter and this reduces the efficiency from the output point of view.
  - In its still later form the Thorne machine is manufactured by the Uni-UPe Company of Brooklyn, New York, and is generally known as the LltPe. The Thorne machine patents for England were acquired by the notype Company after the machine had been worked here commercially
  - 2 B
- p.369 - vue 451/901
- - O on
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - for some nine to ten years, and had performed successful work on several leading newspapers among which may be cited the " Manchester Guardian " (some 18 machines), the " Bradford Observer ” (8 machines) and the " Sportsman,” London (8 machines). At the latter office an average speed of 10,000 ens per hour, maintained for a week, was obtained on two of these machines.
  - The body of the Unitype, figs. 351 and 352, plate XL, of which machine the Thorne composing machine was the prototype or forerunner, consists of two cylinders having a common axis, one being placed above and rotating upon the other. In both these cylinders, and extending vertically for their full length, are ninety parallel channels. The channels in the lower cylinder form the magazine into which type is distributed from the channels of the upper cylinder and is stored for resetting. These channels are slightly wider than the body of the type which the machine is constructed to set.
  - On the forward side of each channel in the lower cylinder, a series of steel strips are inserted and project partially across it. They are called wards, as they have the same functions as the wards of a lock. The combination of wards in each particular channel differs from that in all other channels. Each type-character is given a combination of nicks corresponding to the combination of wards in one particular channel, so that it can enter this channel and this channel only. The central ward extends nearly the full length of the channel and is cut off just short enough to permit one type to be pushed out at the bottom when the proper key is touched.
  - The channels of the upper cylinder have no wards, so that lines containing all characters will enter any channel in this cylinder. In each distributor channel there is a sliding weight, the function of which is to press down lightly on the line of dead type contained in the channel and make the bottom type drop quickly when it comes to its proper channel in the lower cylinder. The weight is lifted when a channel is to be loaded, the line of dead type is inserted in the channel, and the weight is lowered again on top of the line ; all these actions are automatic.
  - As the channels of the upper cylinder are supplied with lines of dead type, the cylinder is rotated step by step, bringing each channel in turn directly over each channel in the lower cylinder. At each step or movement of the distributor, the bottom type in each of its channels is tested on the wards of the channels of the lower cylinder. Any bottom type having a combination of nicks which matches the combination of wards in the channel over which it stops, drops down into its channel, while those type which differ in combination rest on the top of the wards, though in turn dropping when the rotation of the cylinder brings them to their respective channels. As the distributor can supply type much faster than operators can set it, it is not necessary to keep it working all the time.
  - The mechanism with which these results are accomplished is accurately
- p.370 - vue 452/901
- - PLATE XXXIX.
  - 1
  - DUS
  - 1
  - 1
  - A .u
  - Fig. 349.—Simplex composing and distributing machine.
  - Fig. 348.—Thorne composing and distributing machine.
  - To face page 370.]
- pl.39 - vue 453/901
- - PLATE XL.
  - [To face page 371.]
  - -
  - 6.
  - (1
  - FIG. 352.—Unitype composing and distributing machine; back view.
  - FIG. 351.—Unitype composing and distributing machine ; front view.
- pl.40 - vue 454/901
- - COMPOSING AND DISTRIBUTING MACHINES.
  - 371
  - made, and precision of movement is obtained by using a cam to operate the step-by-step movement of the revolving cylinder. This cam revolves on a horizontal shaft supported by a cross-head on the top of the machine, which in its turn is firmly attached to a rigid vertical stationary main shaft extending through both cylinders. Motion is imparted to the cam by shafting and gears, which connect with the main driving shaft of the machine placed beneath the lower cylinder. The cam thrusts against rolls which bear on pins driven solidly into the top of the cylinder. These rolls, forty-five in number, form a circle about four inches less in diameter than the cylinder. As there are just half as many rolls as there are channels, each revolution of the cam gives the cylinder two forward thrusts, moving it each time a distance equalling the distance between the channels. The rolls are shaped to conform to the shape of the cam, and revolve on their bearing-pins when the cam thrusts against them, thus preventing friction and wear on the cam. Means are provided for adjusting the cam when necessary.
  - Should anything prevent the type from dropping freely from the upper to the lower cylinder, or if a channel in the lower cylinder fills up, or if the forward movement of the distributor is stopped or blocked by any cause, an automatic clutch acts instantly, releasing the pressure of the cam, thus stopping the driving mechanism and preventing injury to the machine or type. The cylinder cannot be moved forward again until the cause of the block has been removed. The clutch requires no attention from the operator.
  - The mechanism for loading the channels of the distributing cylinder with lines of dead type is attached to an upright, the upper end of which is fastened to the cross-head and the lower end to one of the lugs which extend upward on the base of the machine to support the cylinders. The shaft that actuates the loader is connected with the shaft of the cam that moves the cylinder so that the two work in unison. A bracket on the loader serves as a shelf on which the galley of dead type for distribution is placed.
  - The working parts of the loading mechanism consist of an arm which lifts the weights in the channels of the distributing cylinder ; a plunger that pushes a line of dead matter into the channel when the weight is raised ; and a trigger device which causes these parts to act whenever an empty channel reaches the loading point as the distributing cylinder rotates. These parts are all driven by a single shaft situated beneath the loader, this shaft in turn being driven by a vertical shaft that extends up from the main driving shaft beneath the cylinder. This vertical shaft also imparts motion to the distributor cam-shaft on the cross-head.
  - A galley of dead type is placed in position on the loader bracket, with the type facing outward, and the distributing cylinder is started rotating. When an empty channel in the cylinder approaches the loading point, a Projecting lug on the top of the sliding weight in that channel trips the trigger on the loader, thereby releasing a spring and starting the loader;
- p.371 - vue 455/901
- - 372 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - the litter arm raises the sliding weight high enough to allow a line of dead type to enter the channel beneath the weight; and the plunger then moves forward, pushing a line of dead type from the end of the galley into the channel. The continuing movement of the loading mechanism then returns the plunger and the lifter arm to their position of rest. As the lifter arm lowers, it leaves the sliding weight resting on top of the line just loaded into the channel. The pressure of the weight holds the line in the channel and accelerates the dropping of the type when a character reaches its channel in the lower cylinder. As the plunger withdraws, the column of dead type in the galley is moved forward, bringing the succeeding line into position for loading into the next empty channel.
  - The instant that the sliding weight is raised by the lifter arm the trigger is released and then returns to its position of rest, simultaneously setting in position a connected part which stops the loader when it has completed the work of loading the line of dead type into the channel, and the loader then remains stationary until the continued rotation of the cylinder brings the projecting lug on the sliding weight in another entirely empty channel into contact with the trigger. The various movements of the loading mechanism are performed in the intervals between the steps or forward movements of the cylinder, so that loading and distributing proceed simultaneously. The loader acts quietly, and its parts are so constructed that the type is not subjected to strain or injury.
  - If leaded matter is being distributed the plunger is adjusted, by a very simple arrangement, to remove the leads ; as it recedes after having carried a line of type into the distributor channel, the plunger withdraws the lead which follows that line and drops it into a box situated below the loader. As they drop into the lead-box the leads pile themselves up in proper order for use. The distributing cylinder is not delayed by loading, but rotates at its normal speed.
  - The lower-case letters and other characters most frequently used are located in channels in the lower cylinder directly in front of the operator, and as they become filled or emptied, the operator stops or starts the distributor by pressing a button. When the dead-type galley becomes empty it is removed, and a full galley of leaded or solid matter is substituted.
  - The sorts distribute into the channels of the lower cylinder in about the proportion needed by the operator. This depends to some extent upon the character of the matter which is being set and distributed ; so provision is made for removing from their channels in the lower cylinder any sorts which distribute faster than is required, or for replenishing the supply of those which do not distribute rapidly enough.
  - The machine distributes and sets matter up to 30 pica ems (5 inches) in width and the method by which the setting is effected is as follows.
  - The plungers, operated by depressing the keys, eject the type on to the flat upper surface of a rapidly revolving disk which encircles the bottom of the cylinder, its upper surface being on a level with the bottom of the
- p.372 - vue 456/901
- - COMPOSING AND DISTRIBUTING MACHINES.
  - 373
  - channels, and having a projecting vertical rim on its outer edge to keep the type on the disk. This disk carries the types round to the right-hand side of the machine, where a switch raises them between the flanges of a vertical revolving wheel; the flanges of this wheel, immediately above the disk, are held just far enough apart to enable type to pass between them freely, but as the wheel continues its revolution, the flanges close together, gripping any type which has run between them, and carry the type in a vertical position to a point about three inches above the surface of the disk. Here the types are released from contact with the flanges, and Pass between two rapidly revolving rolls that carry them forward, on their feet, to a channel or type-way leading across the front of the machine, where they are line-justified by hand and divided.
  - The lifting wheel picks up type as fast as they are guided between its flanges by the switch, regardless of whether they reach this point at regular intervals or not; if the type should arrive at this point in a continuous stream, the head of each type pressing against the foot of its predecessor, the wheel would pick them up one after the other without delay, and is thus capable of raising hundreds of type each minute. The type then follow one another through the rolls, forming a long continuous line, which extends, in the type-way, clear across the back of the keyboard, the face of the type in this line being in convenient view and reach of the operator. If it should happen that two types arrive together at the point where they are deflected to the lifting wheel, the one nearest the cylinder is detained by a light spring until the one next to the rim of the disk has passed ; the detained type then slips away from the spring and follows to the wheel. This separation prevents the type from clogging.
  - The Unitype occupies about 6 feet by 6 feet of floor-space, including room for the operator to work it. It weighs about 1500 pounds and takes about 0-25 horse-power to drive it. It is stated to be capable of setting upwards of 4400 ens per hour with one operator, and this output can be considerably increased by the employment of a second operator assisting the first in line-justification and in recharging the loading-galley.
- p.373 - vue 457/901
- - CHAPTER XXVII.
  - CASTING, COMPOSING, AND LINE-JUSTIFYING MACHINES.
  - “ Is there anything whereof it may he said, See, this is new? it hath been already of old time, which was
  - before us." Ecclesiastes.
  - lo-point hawarden (Haddon).
  - A casting, composing, and line-justifying machine is that called the Casto-type, fig. 353, plate XLI, which was produced in 1902 by J. C. Fowler and J. C. Fowler, junior, of Baltimore, Md., U.S.A. In this machine a series of moulds were provided, the matrices being similar to those used in the Monoline machine. All the letters of a certain width were upon a single bar. The operation of one of the keyboard keys caused the corresponding matrix to be lowered to register with its mould and a single type to be cast. In the case of characters running from right to left on the keyboard, they could be operated at a single stroke, that is, a chord could be struck, and the several corresponding letters cast simultaneously, otherwise the casting mechanism was operated for the casting of a single type at each stroke of the keys. Soft-metal quads were used as spaces, the line was over-set and pressure was applied from the ends to bring the line within the limits of its proper measure. The completed line was afterwards passed between two trimming-knives which removed any metal protruding from the crushed spaces. It may be noticed that in this machine the use of quads as spaces, and the oversetting of the line are features common to the Stringer and Johnson line-justifiers, and similar methods are also used by the inventors of the Grant-Legros-Maw line-justifier.
  - The series of moulds in the Castotype has in it the basic idea, further extended in other typecasting machines, the Bhisotype for instance, of casting at will a variable number of type.
  - Another machine of this order is that invented by B. A. Brooks of Brooklyn, New York, who in 1904 took out a patent for a machine which caused a duplicate type to be cast and deposited in the type-magazine whenever one was ejected in the course of composition. There was one mould and for each letter a corresponding matrix. In this machine also, certain characteristics of the Bhisey casting and distributing machine 374
- p.374 - vue 458/901
- - PLATE XLI.
  - 1
  - 1. Is w
  - FIG. 353.— Castotype casting, composing and line-justifying machine.
  - [To face page 374.
- pl.41 - vue 459/901
- p.n.n. - vue 460/901
- - CASTING, COMPOSING, AND LINE-JUSTIFYING MACHINES. 375 were displayed. A measuring and calculating device computed the size of spaces necessary to accomplish the justification of the line, and the casting mechanism then proceeded to produce and insert them into their places in the line.
  - The idea, however, of multiplicity of moulds and corresponding matrices is a very old one. William Church in 1822 is stated to have constructed a typecaster in which the letters were cast and deposited in tubes ready for his composing machine at the rate of 75,000 type per hour, the object being, like that of later inventors such as Frederick Wicks, to cast new type instead of distributing dead matter. Church used a group of moulds with a matrix for each adapted to lock against its mould while type was being cast. A whole fount was cast at each operation.
  - Joseph Mazzini’s patent of 1843 covered a machine for a similar pur-Pose. Both of these patents were taken out in England and show how very old are often the latest novelties, so called.
  - That these inventors were proceeding upon right lines, though perhaps, like many of their class, somewhat ahead of their generation, is proved by what is really the practical triumph of the system in the modern matrix-composing, line-justifying, and type or slug casting machines described in chapter XXIX. Whether these are Monotype, Dyotype, or Stringertype as representing the basic monotype differentiation; or Linotype, Monoline, Typograph, or Grantype, as representing the basic linotype differentia-tion; all these machines distribute their product through the melting-pot. Church, Mazzini, Wicks, and those who believed with them, are fully Justified by the best of all tests : the test of time, and the survival of the fittest.
- p.375 - vue 461/901
- - CHAPTER XXVIII.
  - COMPOSING, LINE-JUSTIFYING, AND DISTRIBUTING
  - MACHINES.
  - " The application was filed in 1887 and was pending eight years, mainly owing to the work of examination by the Patent Office. One of the examiners died while the case was pending, another died insane, while the patent attorney who originally prepared the case also died in an insane asylum.”
  - John S. Thompson. History of Composing Machines.
  - Brevier condensed sans serif italic [Stephenson, Blake & Co.).
  - Two very interesting patents, machines constructed under which were capable of performing the entire cycle of operations of composing, line-justifying, and distributing, were that taken out by C. W. Felt in America in i860 (and in England in 1861), and that of J. W. Paige taken out in America in 1895. In many respects the earlier patent is the more remarkable for its curious anticipation of much that has followed. The Paige patent is perhaps, as far as size is concerned, the most voluminous ever taken out in the history of inventions.
  - The Felt composing, line-justifying, and distributing machine.—Felt’s machine, fig. 354, is remarkable for containing, among other things, the earliest complete scheme for the use of a perforated record strip, though this method of control had been suggested at least a decade earlier ; and he describes and illustrates a machine for producing this strip as a subsidiary part of his invention. Not only is the perforated record strip intended to be used alternatively as a method of composing, but also for effecting the distributing of the type when used in the reverse direction. The difficulty which would arise in the distribution of matter in which corrections had been made was apparently overlooked by this very thorough and capable inventor. The bell or indicator now long familiar on typewriters and other composing machines, is mentioned in this patent as the means of indicating when the line is nearly filled. The problem of conveying a large supply of type to any channel that required it is provided for by arranging the type in a spiral line or column wound on a drum by means of a flexible band. This is only one of many original and remark-able ideas proposed by this inventor.
  - 376
- p.376 - vue 462/901
- - COMPOSING, LINE-JUSTIFYING, AND DISTRIBUTING. 377
  - The drawings of the Felt machine are extremely lucid and complete, and provide for effecting the various operations described in a direct and workmanlike manner. The machine, though not complicated when compared with some of the elaborate machines of the present day, was, however,
  - FIG. 354-—Felt composing, line-justifying, and distributing machine. General arrangement.
  - ildently much in advance of the period at which it was designed, when, must be remembered, manufacturing operations could not be performed th cheaply as at present, and for this reason mainly, the authors believe, machine failed to attain commercial realization.
- p.377 - vue 463/901
- - Co on
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The Paige typesetter, or composing, line-justifying, and distributing machine.—The history of the Paige typesetting machine, which in its final form was named the Paige compositor after the inventor and patentee, is an interesting story of inventive and constructional evolution, several minds being concentrated upon the complex problem of distributing, setting and line-justifying movable type by positive, but controlled, mechanical action.
  - The authors are indebted for their history of the Paige machine to the distinguished mechanical engineer, Charles E. Davis, who, at an early period in its progress, took over charge and control of the drawings and mechanical engineering work connected with it, and superintended its manufacture from the first stage of its development, down to the completion and operation of all the models and machines which were built. The description here given is in his own words.
  - " J. W. Paige lived in Rochester, New York, and early in the seventies, while interested in the oil-fields, conceived the idea of a simple typesetter, and built his first machine to handle agate (51-point) type. From the start, the method of handling the type, edge upon edge, as against the universally accepted method of side upon side, was adopted : in other words, the type was always in the order of hand-composition, the same as in the compositor’s stick. [Evidently this statement can only refer to American practice as several of the earlier European machines handled their type in this manner.]
  - " At first no provision was made for distributing from the dead matter for resetting. The final arrangement of the keyboard for setting type by syllables and words [a plan conceived from the first] was the result of an analytical study of the language, covering all subjects, made by Charles G. Van Schuyver, a printer in the employ of Paige, and to his patient work all praise is due. The keyboard was so arranged that there was one, and only one, combination available for setting a word or syllable when reading from left to right. During the study of this portion of the problem four variations were tried ; first 89 characters, then 141 characters, and then 115. Finally 109 was adopted as the number of the best practical value.
  - " Early in his work Paige discovered the necessity for a machine which would either distribute the dead matter or recast the type for his typesetting machine. At about this time, the Shanks typecasting machine, a very rapid power-actuated typecasting machine, was invented in England. Paige secured the American rights for this and imported two of these machines for use in connexion with his typesetter.
  - " While Mr. Paige was working in Rochester, many others were studying the problem, notably J. M. Farnham, of Hartford, Conn., where the manufacture of the Farnham typesetter was in progress, a gravity machine with converging channels using type side upon side. The Farnham
- p.378 - vue 464/901
- - COMPOSING, LINE-JUSTIFYING, AND DISTRIBUTING. 379 Typesetter Company was also developing the Thompson distributor with a view to its use for supplying the Farnham machine by distribution of dead matter.
  - “ About 1877, Dr. George F. Hawley, President of the Farnham Typesetter Company, entered into a contract with Paige to use his typesetter and the Thompson distributor.
  - " The Farnham Typesetter Company had their own works in the building of the Colt’s Firearms Company, which were in charge of E. S. Pierce, as mechanical engineer and superintendent. A few months after the contract had been made with Paige, he produced a plan for a combined typesetting and distributing machine; it was decided to build a machine upon the new lines, and to abandon the separate machines. The new machine was planned upon the lines of the Paige, and used the Thompson principle for forwarding the type for distribution to the common type-case to avoid the necessity of transference. The work progressed rather slowly, and not until about the close of 1878, was it possible to show anything tangible ; six characters were distributed from a temporary channel into the main type-case, and were set from the same case, thus demonstrating the possibility of the combined type-case.
  - " It was shortly prior to this period, Pierce having resigned, that the Services of Charles E. Davis were secured by those interested in the matter.
  - " Soon after the test of the principle of the combined machine, various defects in the plan of the mechanism developed, and it was necessary in order to accomplish successfully the desired results to redesign the machine, using only such parts of the mechanism as could be made to meet the required conditions, and it was at this time that the plan was adopted, and never departed from, of working always to figures on fully-dimensioned drawings.
  - " Some months after the completion of the test referred to, Samuel L. Clemens, better known as Mark Twain, first became interested in the machine through the purchase of stock in the Farnham Typesetter Com-Pany, at the solicitation of Dwight Buell. It would be fruitless and tedious bistory to detail all the delays that followed due to limited capital and other causes. During the period which elapsed up to the time when the first combined machine was completed and used as a composing machine handling brevier type, operated by two men, one at the keyboard, and the other to Justify the type, Dr. Geo. F. Hawley, William L. Matson, William Hammersley, Samuel Coit, William Gaylord, and many others were identified with the enterprise. It was a difficult task to interest new capital, or at this time no one believed it possible to line-justify automatically and mechanically a line of movable type. Delay occurred until Paige con-ceived the idea of a printing-telegraph, operated by his combined keyboard, 0 be used either with Morse or roman characters, as a quick means of raising money to enable the composing machine to be proceeded with.
- p.379 - vue 465/901
- - OJ 00
  - O
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Several of these printing-telegraph machines were built, Samuel Coit being largely instrumental in furnishing the money, and Clemens being also called in to assist in the matter.
  - " It was while following the telegraph instrument that Clemens renewed his interest in the composing machine, and quite a number of his MSS. were set up on the machine. While the work on the telegraph instrument was in progress, Charles R. North, a skilled mechanic in the employ of Paige, invented an automatic justifier to work in combination with the Paige machine. After this matter had been presented to Clemens and a detailed estimate made at his request by experts from the Pratt and Whitney Company, covering the cost of building the first combined machine and its subsequent manufacture, he decided to undertake the responsibility for the construction of a new machine, combining North’s Justifier with the Paige Typesetter and Distributor ; for this purpose he deposited the first royalties received by him from the publication of his wonderfully successful book ‘ Huckleberry Finn.’
  - “ With Whitmore as Clemens’s financial representative work was commenced with Carl Grohmann, Chas. I. Earle and others as assistants in the engineering department; drawings were furnished to the Pratt and Whitney Company, and the machine was built at their works in Flower Street, Hartford, Conn., George A. Bates acting as their foreman.
  - " A grave error was made at this point which caused trouble later on ; many parts of the first combined machine were used in the construction of the new machine, with the result that when the machine was completed and in operation it contained features which prevented its use as a model upon which to base a plant for manufacturing. The machine as built at the Pratt and Whitney works, was, however, a successful machine in its operation, and demonstrated the possibilities of distributing movable type dead matter, and simultaneously setting, line-justifying, and assembling in column-form live matter on a single, power-driven, positive-action machine, operated by one man.
  - " It was when this result had been achieved that Clemens said one day: ‘ We only need one more thing, a phonograph on the distributor to yell, " Where in H is the printer’s devil, I want more type.” ’ The late Dr. Thurston, the eminent mechanical engineer, said when he saw the machine in operation : ‘ This is thought crystallized ; ’ and it was Theodore De Vinne of the Century Company who said, when somebody compared the Paige compositor to the Jacquard loom : ‘ True, but the Paige compositor unravels any old fabric, and from it reweaves any new design which the imagination of man can conceive.’
  - " Upon the completion of the Paige compositor at the works of the Pratt and Whitney Company, all the leading newspapers and publishing houses expressed their confidence in the project, and were ready to contract for its use. It was at this stage that George S. Mallory and Marshall H. Mallory undertook to finance the enterprise. The capital required was, however,
- p.380 - vue 466/901
- - COMPOSING, LINE-JUSTIFYING, AND DISTRIBUTING. 38I large and the reason the Paige compositor was never manufactured in quantity was due to the fact that at this time Paige, who controlled the Patents, refused to part with a sufficient interest to induce other capitalists to invest the large amount required to conduct the business successfully, and Was not attributable to any mechanical failure or defect in the machine. In this way three years were lost. It was during these three years that Philip T. Dodge assumed control of the Mergenthaler Linotype Company, and by a very successfully drawn contract with the newspapers and publishing houses, practically secured control of their composing rooms, and placed the Mergenthaler Company in a position to set the price at which the Paige machine could be marketed.
  - “ Finally, in 1892, Ward, Frink, and Kneval of New York formed the Compositor Company, and contracted with the Webster Manufacturing Company, of Chicago, to build the machines, and the first compositor and the enterprise were moved from Hartford to Chicago in that year. An addition to the Webster factory was built, and a force of draughtsmen and mechanics employed to redesign and build a model machine.
  - “ Again there were delays owing to the lack of funds, and although every effort was put forth to complete the machine in time for exhibition at the World’s Fair, it was not ready, and late in the fall of 1893 work was stopped. Once more Clemens came into the breach, and through his influence Henry H. Rogers became interested, and the Regius Company was formed, a con-cern which subsequently became the Paige Compositor Company. Work Was resumed and the machine carried to completion. When the Compositor Company went to Chicago, Mr. Scott, manager of the " Chicago Herald,” agreed to test the machine on the “ Herald.” In September, 1894, the compositor was erected in the " Herald ” office, and although it had not been tested on dead matter from which stereotype matrices had been made, a sixty days’ run was started on copy taken from the ‘ hook.’ For this test neither machinery nor repair tools were allowed to be erected. Any work that required to be done had to be taken to the company’s works two and a half miles away. During this test two or three radical changes were neces-sary, but even in the face of this handicap the Paige compositor, with all delays counted against it, delivered more corrected live matter to the imposing stone, ready for the formes, per operator employed, than any one of the thirty-two Linotype machines which were in operation in the same composing department, although the latter had had several years’ use on newspaper work. This record may fairly claim never to have been equalled by any composing machine on its maiden trial; moreover, the composition Which the compositor turned out was, in artistic merit, equal to the finest ook-work ever set by hand.
  - " The Paige compositor has been pronounced by competent engineers to be the foremost example of cam mechanism ever produced in the United tates, if not in the whole world, and to have performed by positive mechanical devices the largest amount of brain labour ever undertaken.
- p.381 - vue 467/901
- - W
  - a
  - CJ
  - 00 N
  - S
  - n n n m
  - FIG. 355--Paige composing, line-justifying, and distributing machine ; diagram of operations. =====25 Roeverc, soin . elower -e. AevoNS
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
- p.382 - vue 468/901
- - EXPLANATORY STATEMENT.
  - The types were guided on the feet and always under a light tension from the top; all the wearing parts were made easily interchangeable and readily replaceable.
  - The machine was built with parts parallel to or at right angles with the plane of the table, and when this was placed on the feet the whole of the upper part of the machine was inclined 25°, so that the type channels leaned backwards 25° from the vertical and the tables sloped downwards to the back at 25° to the horizontal. This ensured that the type remained on their feet, that the heaviest pressure was towards the face of the type, and that the columns in the channels were prevented from buckling forward.
  - REFERENCES.
  - a Dead matter; two or three columns of matter assembled in the m Words measured and spaces determined.
  - distributor galley.
  - b Type line moved forward.
  - c Type separated.
  - d Type registered from the foot.
  - e Broken type removed.
  - f Wide type selected.
  - g Spaces selected and forwarded to the left.
  - h Type forwarded to the right.
  - i Pie-box.
  - I Support for type-case.
  - j Type-case and channels.
  - k Regular pie-box for odd characters not nicked.
  - 1 Elastic collector.
  - L Composed type moved forward.
  - n Words kept separated and forwarded to the left.
  - o Space-selecting plates.
  - p Space registered by backward and forward movement from the foot.
  - q Space-case or magazine.
  - r Spaces inserted between words.
  - s Line formed and forwarded to the live-matter galley.
  - t Leads inserted in live galley. I, 2, or 3 leads could be inserted before the line was pressed down into the galley.
  - u Live-matter galley.
  - v Room left for leads below supporting shelf and above live matter.
  - w Depressing plunger.
  - x Live matter.
  - It will be noted that the types were moved forward to the right and registered for distribution before being received in the magazine, whereas the spaces moved, after selection, to the left until received in their magazine. The characters, after being composed, moved to the left, but at a higher level than the distribution level, and the words, as moved to the left, were kept separated until the space of separation was filled by the proper selected spaces, after which the words with the selected spaces completed their travel to the left with the live matter.
  - The spaces went through the same operation of separating, registering, removal of broken spaces, selection for distribution, and forwarding to their magazine channels as did the type, though the movement of the spaces was made in the direction opposite to that of the type.
  - COMPOSING, LINE-JUSTIFYING, AND DISTRIBUTING. 383
- p.383 - vue 469/901
- - 384 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES
  - " Some conception of the problem may be had if we follow the various operations required to deliver a finished column of live matter.
  - “ After coming from the forme the dead matter was made up in the galleys for distribution. These galleys were inserted in the machine without a stop, and the top line was raised and advanced towards the front of the machine for the separation of the individual types. The type were then separated from the line by a mechanism, which handled them as though of equal width, though they were of every width and arrangement required in composition. When separated the type were raised a short distance, and a series of tests was automatically made to remove wide type, broken or cracked type, dirt or foreign matter of any kind, and to pass along into the distributing mechanism only such type as were perfect for resetting. Distribution was made possible by a series of nicks. Here again the greatest care was necessary so that no two different type had the same nicks, and that it was not possible for a type which had been broken in any way to cause a wrong distribution. All quads and spaces were so nicked that if reversed they would still distribute correctly. The selecting mechanism was so arranged that it would detect two type that might become stuck together in stereotyping ; if they reached the body of the machine they were thrown out, and the distribution was automatically stopped until these type were removed. Whenever any particular magazine channel became full, the feed stopped automatically until the type had been set out of that channel, or until any excess of sorts in that channel had been removed by special pincers provided for that purpose. During the whole of the operation of distributing, the movement of the type progressed towards the right, and of the justifying spaces towards the left of the machine, and of both forward towards the operator, fig. 355-
  - " When the type in process of distribution was moved forward into the plane of the common type-case, a lifting mechanism removed the type from the end of the forwarding plunger, and lifted and placed it upon a supporting shelf at the bottom of the channel from which the type was taken in composing, so that it was possible in the machine to distribute a type into the magazine and set the same type out of the magazine during the same revolution of the cam-shaft. This distribution continued until any one channel became filled up by the insertion of some 200 characters, when a weight carried on top of the column of type in the channel came into contact with the mechanism which stopped the feed of the machine. The operator at the keyboard could set out syllables and words into a race in which a collector operated for transferring the type set to the line of composition. During composition the movement of the type was again towards the front of the machine, but the subsequent movements were towards the left instead of towards the right. At this point the operation of the automatic justification of the type commenced, the mechanical problem which the machine solved, being as follows : after adjustment to a predetermined length of line of composition, the machine automatically
- p.384 - vue 470/901
- - COMPOSING, LINE-JUSTIFYING, AND DISTRIBUTING. 385 measured the words and syllables as set up by the operator, added the sum of these measurements together, subtracted the sum from the length of the line required, divided the remainder by the number of words less one, and automatically selected a space, or a combination of spaces, for insertion m the line which would justify the line within the limit of 0'005 inch. When a word had been composed and delivered to the line by a collecting mechanism in the type raceway, a key was touched which caused another mechanism to operate positively in harmony with the remainder of the machine, and to move the word forward a sufficient distance to allow another word to follow: no spaces were inserted in the line at this stage. This process continued until the indicator showed the operator that the line in process of composition had reached a length which would not permit of the setting of another syllable or word. The operator then touched a key known as the line-key, and mechanism was brought into operation to send each of the words forward in harmony with the other words previously set in the line in such way that when the first word in the line passed the justifying-case—which was a duplicate in principle of the regular type-case, but located some distance to the left—the points of this mechanism acted as an automatic key for inserting in place the space or spaces which would justify the line. When the last word of the line passed the case no space was inserted, and a mechanism was automatically brought into play for moving the completed line forward ready for insertion into the live-matter galley. At this stage provision was made for automatically inserting one, two, or three leads into the column of live matter, before the line of type, which had now been justified, was moved downward ; by this means it was Possible for the operator at the keyboard to set either solid, single, double, or treble leaded matter at his discretion into the live-matter column. This live matter was placed in galleys ready for removal to the proof galley, and from thence, after correction, to the imposing stone.
  - " One very important, in fact the most important element in connexion with this machine was what was termed the ‘ time -lock; ’ this was purely mechanical in construction, simple in formation, yet so designed that it was possible for the operator to finger the keyboard without regard to the beat of the machine while the positive mechanism of the machine would operate so as to perform all its various functions without interference one with the other, and without danger of knife-edge contacts or damage to the mechanisms. It is true that there were a large number of mechanisms in the machine, but the subject had been so carefully worked out and charted that even an operator who was not familiar with the machine, by simply looking at the degrees shown on the indicator dial, could, by reference to the chart, know exactly what mechanisms were in operation at that particular time, and so be able to locate accurately any difficulties that might have arisen, or which might have caused the machine to stop automatically ; this it did whenever any undue strain was applied to any of the mechanisms.
  - The speed of the machine shaft was 220 revolutions per minute. At
  - 2 C
- p.385 - vue 471/901
- - 386
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - this speed it was possible to distribute approximately 7500 ems (15,000 ens) of solid matter per hour, and it was possible for an expert operator to set up and justify over 9000 ems (18,000 ens) per hour, and 12,000 ems (24,000 ens) on rush matter ; under these conditions, however, more frequent sorting of the case would be necessary, and provision was made for its easy accomplishment by the glass front of the case being spring-balanced, and so arranged that the removal of two screws, each turned one-half turn, would permit the case to be opened down to the bottom type.
  - " After the completion of the test at the offices of the " Chicago Herald,” the matter of the continuation of the manufacture was thoroughly discussed, and a report was made on the mechanical reliability of the machine, which was favourable in every way. At one time the Mergenthaler Linotype Company had offered to exchange half-interests with the proprietors of the Paige machine, but Paige would not accept this offer. During the three years of delay the Mergenthaler Linotype Company had secured the field in such a way as to be able to fix the price of the Paige machine, and this caused the capitalists to come to the decision that money could be made faster in other channels than in the manufacture of the Paige machine. As a consequence, about two years later Philip T. Dodge purchased the patents and the two machines for the Mergenthaler Linotype Company, who loaned to the Cornell University the machine manufactured in Chicago and tested in the " Chicago Herald " office, and to the Columbia University, in New York, the machine manufactured in Hartford by the Pratt and Whitney Company, and at these universities they now are.”
  - The Paige compositor, figs. 356 to 360, plates XLII to XLVI, used on the " Chicago Herald " test, was approximately eleven feet in length, three and one half feet wide, and six feet high. It weighed about 5000 pounds, and the power required was transmitted through a |-inch round belt to a grooved pulley 14 inches in diameter; it consumed about 1 to 3 horse-power. If could be started and turned up to speed with one finger at a 7-inch leverage. It was specially designed for newspaper work, and used nonpareil type ; the distributing, setting, justifying, and leading mechanisms were adjustable to any width of column desired for newspaper or book work.
  - Various statements have been made in regard to the amount of money expended in the development of the Paige compositor.
  - According to C. E. Davis, who was closely associated with the matter and who examined the accounts, the total expenditure did not exceed one million dollars. Davis believes that about eight hundred thousand dollars represents the actual expenditure on the engineering, experimental, production and patent work for all of the Paige machines manufactured.
  - The authors subjoin another description of the Paige compositor for which they are indebted to the good offices of Philip T. Dodge, President of the Mergenthaler Linotype Company, who has had it abstracted
- p.386 - vue 472/901
- - PLATE XLII.
  - Fig. 356.—Paige composing, line-justifying, and distributing machine; general view.
  - 1
  - bu
  - To face page 386.]
- pl.42 - vue 473/901
- - PLATE XLIII.
  - [To face plate XLIV.]
  - FIG. 357.— Paige machine ; front view from left end.
  - 0 CC
  - wen IN
  - : A, % € 0 140
  - v
  - • 9
  - . dost
  - in
- pl.43 - vue 474/901
- - PLATE XLIV.
  - 2
  - = As
  - GO
  - 0
  - 04
  - To face plate XLIII.]
  - Fig. 358.—Paige machine ; back view from left end.
- pl.44 - vue 475/901
- - PLATE XLV.
  - 3 \
  - 3 —
  - a si
  - —
  - roe
  - er-
  - .,
  - FIG. 359.— Paige machine ; back view from right end.
- pl.45 - vue 476/901
- p.n.n. - vue 477/901
- - PLATE XLVI.
  - 11
  - 1
  - 1
  - #1
  - e De pe w’o • or one for 4 4 pre
  - FIG. 360.— Paige keyboard.
  - To face page 387.1
- pl.46 - vue 478/901
- - COMPOSING, LINE-JUSTIFY ING, AND DISTRIBUTING. 387 for them from a contemporary official booklet. The Paige machine is of such interest both mechanically and typographically that the authors think any repetition which may occur is excusable, and that the more Personal description of the engineer responsible for its construction is well supplemented by the more prosaic information contained in the official account published by the Connecticut Company.
  - “ The Paige Compositor, using movable type and consequent perfect face, covers the whole problem in every detail, so that we claim for the Machine, without fear of contradiction, that by no known method can a Printing surface be produced which equals, or in fact approaches, in artistic Merit, legibility, hair-line effects, perfection of justification, economy of space occupied by given amount of reading-matter, or speed and economy of composition, that produced by this machine.
  - " The Paige Compositor really performs the entire work of the ‘ compositor ’ at the ‘ case ’ automatically, for while the machine does require a person to touch the keys which the copy to be printed calls for, as in a typewriter, the machine sets the type itself automatically and harmoniously with the action of the other parts of the machine, which, as a whole, acts as follows : When the type has been printed from and is ready to be distributed it is called ‘dead matter.’ This ‘dead matter,’ in column or Page form, is taken to a Paige Compositor in a galley, as it is called, placed in position in the machine while the machine is running, and then the Compositor works as follows : The machine separates one line from the top of the page or column, then separates each individual type from the line and puts it in position for the other operations of distribution. The Machine then removes any type which may have been damaged in the press or stereotype, or turned bottom-side up, or end for end, by the hand compositor in correcting or otherwise, takes the spaces used in justifying out of the line, distributes them into a separate case or channels provided for them, and distributes the types which remain into another case or channels, Putting the spaces and types into the bottom of their individual channels which are slightly inclined back from a vertical position. The types are then built up one on another from the bottom. On top of the type in each channel is placed a piece of metal, and, when any one of the channels of type reach up to a certain fixed line in the case, the piece of metal is brought in contact with a bar which stops the feed of type from the galley, pre-Venting an overflow of the case, no matter how careless an operator may be. Whenever a type is called for by the person who is operating the machine, r°M the channel which stopped the feed, the feed is automatically started and the distribution is resumed.
  - " At the same time that the distribution is in process the person operating 6 Machine is causing the part which sets the type to forward the letters called for in the copy into the line of composition. That is to say, the machine is so constructed that it distributes and sets type at the same time,
- p.387 - vue 479/901
- - Co
  - 00
  - 00
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - and a type can be put into and taken out of any of the channels during the same revolution of the machine.
  - " We next come to the justification ; and while this has been always considered impossible of mechanical accomplishment, its practicability will, we think, be clear to any one if considered on the mathematical side. Of course to make any number of things the same length one must start with some one length as a standard or unit. This unit can be made whatever length the work to be done requires, as, for instance, the width of any book, page, or newspaper column. With this length known, the problem is simply this : Take the length of any number of words which are to compose a line and subtract their sum from the unit or standard, and the remainder will be the length which is to be filled out by spaces to separate the words of the line. It is clear that the number of spaces would be one less than the number of words in any line as no space is needed at the end of the line. Hence, if we divide the remainder, found as above, by one less than the number of words, we shall have for the quotient the amount of space which, put between the words, will fill out the line and make it of standard length—or, in other words, justify the line.
  - " In the Paige Compositor the mathematical problem proposed above is automatically performed, and any one looking at the person operating the machine and following its automatic action incident thereto, would see type taken automatically from the case and assembled into column form or ‘live ’ matter ; and the novel features which would fasten his attention and hold it to the end would come in order as follows :—
  - " Observing that the person operating the machine touched words instead of letters would bring out the fact that the keyboard was a study of the living language as in every day use in all the various avenues of life, and that the man who spent ten years of his life on its arrangement had placed every key in its most valuable position in relation to every other letter, so that all the keys which go to make up common words and syllables in constant use can be touched simultaneously, as one touches the chord on a piano, and maximum speed with minimum mental effort can be attained. It follows also that the type will be set out and delivered to the line of composition by words, letters, or syllables as called for.
  - " Turning now to the type which has been started on its journey to the column, he sees the machine take the length of the first word, record it and move the word out of the way of the second word, already on its way to join the first; then it takes the length of the second and adds if to the first, and moves the two words out of the way of the third, and continues this operation until there is no room left in the standard line for more words to come in, which fact is indicated to the person operating the machine by an indicator placed in the direct line of vision and by a bell which sounds when he has reached a point in advance of the place where the longest word in the language which cannot be divided would go into the standard line. If the next word in the copy is so long that the indicator
- p.388 - vue 480/901
- - COMPOSING, LINE-JUSTIFYING, AND DISTRIBUTING. 389 shows it will not go into the line, then a key, called the ‘ line-key ’ is touched, and those parts of the machine are put into position which auto-matically accomplish the operations required to complete the justification of the line, and the parts connected with the operation of the keyboard are returned to their normal or first positions ready for the commencement of work on another line. The machine having now the sum of the lengths of the words which compose the line, the next operation is for the machine to subtract the sum of the lengths of the words of the line from the standard line and divide the remainder by one less than the number of words in the line, and to put into position for later action certain parts of the machine (which can be seen by the observer) which will at the proper time in the action of the machine cause to be inserted between the words which compose the line, and which words are separated for that purpose, one or more spaces of such a character as the quotient obtained by the above division may require to make the line of standard length. When the last word which was set in any given line has passed the case which contains the spaces used in filling out the line, then another part of the machine, which has been put in position by the touching of the ‘line-key,’ operates and lakes the now completed line out to, and puts it down into, a ‘ galley ’ arranged to receive the ‘live-matter’ column. When this ‘galley’ or column is filled, the action of putting in the last line locks all the keys, so that the mind of the person at the keyboard is free from any thought other than that connected directly with operating the keyboard or the copy to be composed. In connection with the ‘live-matter ’ column the machine is provided with means for inserting, between the lines composing the Column, ‘leads ’ for purposes of display or emphasis, this part being also Controlled from the keyboard (as called for by the copy) by means of a Switching lever at the volition of the operator. It also keeps a record of the number of lines composed by the machine, so that when the number of eras’ which the standard line contains is known, the number of ‘ ems ’ set by the machine is found without taking duplicate proofs or any measurements whatever.
  - “ It will thus be seen that the Paige Compositor has in its plan and ful-filment canvassed the whole problem and covered the entire work of composition. The machinery employed to do this work is of the most positive, Substantial, and successful character known to mechanics, and is the result of twenty years and over of the most careful study—the strength, dura-ility, accessibility, and simplicity of parts having been points which have always ruled in determining what should be used to accomplish the results esired. The machine in no way limits the operator, the speed of composition already obtained is from twelve to fifteen times that of the hand Compositor.
  - It may be stated in brief that the Paige Compositor does the entire ork of composition ; setting ordinary movable type with far greater speed, accuracy, and artistic effect, than has ever before been accomplished by
- p.389 - vue 481/901
- - 390
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - any method. It automatically distributes, and at the same time sets the type indicated by the operator, automatically spaces and justifies the matter, without mental effort on the part of the operator, places it in a galley ready for use on book or newspaper as desired, records the number of lines set, and leads the matter as and when required, and does all this by the employment of positive mechanism.
  - " The machine is not to be confounded with any other machine, as it is entirely unique in design, principle, and method of working.
  - " It is not a mere typesetting machine. It is a compositor in the truest sense of the word, as it performs simultaneously all the work of a human compositor.”
  - Lest any wrong impression should be conveyed by the quotation at the head of this chapter, which refers to persons other than those who actually carried out the onerous work of preparing the Paige specifications, and lest it be thought that others had found the work too much for them, the authors wrote to David H. Fletcher of Chicago, the patent attorney who prepared the final specifications ; his reply is of such interest that it is printed here in extenso.
  - Chicago. April 6th, 1913.
  - " I am in receipt of your favour of March 25th, 1913, in which you make inquiry as to my connection with the Paige Type-setting and Justifying Machine. I have never seen Mr. Thompson’s History, but can readily imagine what was meant by the ‘ disastrous end ’ to which you refer. Fortunately, as you suggest, I am ‘ still alive,’ although the words : ‘sufficient unto the day is the evil thereof,’ haunt me occasionally.
  - " I acted as Mr. Paige’s attorney and took out his three patents, although the first two applications were filed by another—their apparent compli-cations possibly having had something to do with the ' disastrous end.'
  - " The first application, although embodying a number of essential principles, was of minor importance. The second, which included the typesetting and distributing features, was, however, very elaborate. The patent issued thereon is known in the Patent Office as ' The Whale.’ This harmless leviathan, in its original proportions, greatly exceeded its present size. Its author evidently became lost in the wilderness of appalling details. With a view of severing the Gordian knot, he drew his specification like the sermon of an old-fashioned clergyman, with corresponding mystifying results. As a beginning, the machine was, regardless of construction, function or operation, divided into three ‘ Grand Divisions.’ Each division was in turn, divided into sub-divisions, and these again divided until the ' Sixteenth sub-sub-Division ’ was reached.
  - " Paradoxical as it may seem, this clarifying treatment tended only to confuse the mind of the Patent Office Examiner who held that there was a multiplicity of inventions and division was accordingly required. An
- p.390 - vue 482/901
- - COMPOSING, LINE-JUSTIFYING, AND DISTRIBUTING. 391
  - appeal was taken from the examiner’s ruling. As an indication of the complications involved, it required thirty days for the Assistant Commissioner to read the specification in order to decide the question.
  - “It was at this stage that I was employed. The Office required a ‘ working model ’ which could not be furnished. A compromise was finally made by having the Examiner come to Chicago, where, for a month he studied the working machine. In the meantime, disregarding all previous work, I rewrote the entire specification, in which process I eliminated forty °f the two hundred and six sheets of drawings originally deemed necessary to illustrate the anatomy of this wonderful creation. The revision was accepted without question.
  - “ The justifying application filed by me, although not quite so voluminous in appearance, was in fact more complicated and subtle than the other. Every sheet of drawing was packed to the limit with detail ; and, masmuch as it was necessary to associate the operation of many detached mechanisms, some of which were in continuous operation while others were intermittent in varying degrees from minutes to months, the problem became somewhat involved.
  - “ Eliminating the divisions and sub-divisions mentioned, the applications were accepted as embodying unitary inventions.
  - “ You ask ‘ if this work produced no ill effects upon my mind.’ Viewed from a purely human standpoint—yes ; viewed from the standpoint that the universe is not a blunder and that man is here for some great purpose— no. This extraordinary creation was both a triumph and a tragedy. Not-Withstanding all of the trying experiences and disappointments associated with it, it was in many ways uplifting, broadening, and inspiring. In Judging of it as an invention, I have tried to dismiss prejudice and to measure its merits with those of the great inventors of the world, and, as an auto-matic device, considering the character of the varying problems solved by it, I am of the opinion that it is the greatest thing of the kind that has been accomplished in all of the ages. Commercial failure as it was, for reasons which need not be mentioned, it was an intellectual miracle and its relation to men, as indicating the creative power of mind, is a suggestive verification of the prophecy that ‘ they shall become as Gods.’
  - " If I have gone beyond the answer to your simple question, please treat it as ‘off the record,’ and disregard it. Trusting that I have not made myself tedious, and that I have shown no marked signs of that mental decay which would seem to be the natural corollary of the work in question, I remain, with best wishes for the success of your work.
  - “ Yours sincerely,
  - “ (Signed) D. H. Fletcher.”
- p.391 - vue 483/901
- - CHAPTER XXIX.
  - MATRIX-COMPOSING, LINE-JUSTIFYING, AND TYPE OR SLUG CASTING MACHINES.
  - " Individual types may be said to be essential to economical production of this class of printing [high-grade book-work], and the machine of the future will unquestionably be one which casts, sets and justifies single types in one machine and with but one attendant.” John S. Thompson. History of Composing Machines.
  - Bourgeois old-style (Miller & Richard).
  - INTRODUCTORY.
  - This class, whose various representatives are of course all hot machines, is, historically speaking, comparatively modern, though at the speed at which progress, more especially commercial progress, moves to-day, several of its members have already grown up into middle age. The family may be broadly divided into two main branches, whose typical representative in the one instance is the Lanston Monotype, and in the other the Mergenthaler Linotype. Their characteristics in the case of the first mentioned, are the division of the composition and the casting into two processes, generally carried out by separate human supervision and separate machines, as opposed to the linotype class in which they are generally carried on simultaneously or conjunctively by one machine and by a single human supervisor. A further characteristic, differentiating these two classes, is the fact that in the first case every letter is cast successively as the final result of a series of operations, while in the other either the slug, the commonest product of the second class of machine, or the line of individual type in its latest development, is cast at a single operation of pouring or casting. This classification and these definitions may not be scientific, but speaking broadly and from a general commercial standpoint, they are believed by the authors to be sufficiently accurate to serve even in a text-book devoted to the subject of typographical printing-surfaces.
  - The only exceptions, so far as known to the authors, to the foregoing classification—and was there ever a classification without its exceptions— are the Stringertype and the Grantype. The Stringertype, which is described later on in part I of this chapter, belongs strictly to the
  - 392
- p.392 - vue 484/901
- - Fig. 361.—Monotype composing and casting machine; “ C” keyboard machine (now obsolete).
  - To face page 392.]
  - w 7-01 hr 1 Ni
  - ) 1
  - PLATE XLVII.
  - Fig. 362.—Monotype composing and casting machine ; “ D ” keyboard machine.
  - CAS xe
  - So.
  - 1.1 W1
- pl.47 - vue 485/901
- - PLATE XLVIII
  - [To face page 393-]
  - im
  - FIG. 363.—Monotype composing and casting machine ; DD ‘‘ keyboard machine.
  - ana D %
  - 3 •
  - out
  - T
  - FIG. 364.—Monotype composing and casting machine ;
  - typecaster.
  - 4
- pl.48 - vue 486/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND TYPECASTING.
  - 393
  - monotype class of machines, for though the matrices are assembled as the result of operations and mechanisms almost identical with those of the linotype class, brought into action by a single operator on a single machine, the fundamental or casting portion of the machine is carried out on the monotype principle of casting each individual character separately as the culmination of a series of separate operations necessary for the casting of that character.
  - The Grantype conforms to the broad general distinction governing the linotype class, the only difference being that the product is a line of justified loose type in the place of a slug bearing a justified line of characters in relief upon its upper surface, and it still retains the fundamental difference between the linotype and the monotype classes, namely, the casting of its whole line at a single operation of pouring, even though that line is composed of individual letters, spaces, and quads.
  - PART I.
  - MACHINES OF THE MONOTYPE CLASS; CASTING THEIR TYPE SUCCESSIVELY TO FORM THEIR COMPLETED LINE.
  - Bunure JIM, TO JeJOBBEB onpaBbIBaeTCS ABJaMH, a ne BBpor TOJIBKO? James ii. 24.
  - Russian, corps 12 (Monotype).
  - The Monotype composing and casting machines.—These machines consist of two separate and quite distinct parts ; firstly, the composing and line-justifying machine, figs. 361 to 363, plates XLVII and XLVIII, frequently called the keyboard; and secondly, the casting and setting machine, shown in fig. 364, plate XLVIII.
  - The keyboard of the composing machine, as already shown, figs. 274 to 276, pp. 292-3, is very much like that of a typewriter, but with a larger number of keys. The inverted comma and apostrophe are repeated in two set widths, to suit individual tastes, as some printers prefer more white.
  - A ribbon of paper is fed through the machine, guided, as in the Wheat-stone telegraph perforated strip, by side perforations. The perforated ribbon was proposed at least as early as 1848, and was actually adopted by Mackie, of Warrington, in 1868, for his composing machine. The latter used fourteen rows of holes in combinations of two at a time, the available Combinations being (14 x i3)/2 = 91.
  - In the original A, B, and C patterns of Monotype keyboard the arrange-ment, fig. 274, p. 292, corresponds to the arrangement of the matrices in the grid, fig. 371, p.400; the two top rows of (red) keys, fig. 274, bearing numbers, uilfil the function of line-justifying described later. The right-hand vertical TOW of keys and the bottom horizontal row of keys each effect one perfora-10n only in the ribbon. The other keys each effect two perforations. Each
- p.393 - vue 487/901
- - 394 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - key when depressed about a quarter of an inch admits compressed air to the required combination of thirty-one plungers, equally spaced, which perforate the ribbon ; fourteen of these perforations produce variation of the position of the matrix-grid in % and fourteen in y, so that a total of 225 characters, spaces, and quads can be produced (the case of x = o and that
  - 2
  - o
  - Fig. 365.—Monotype composing and casting machine ; keyboard unit-counting mechanism.
  - & A I
  - &
  - of y = 0, being provided for by the keys which give one perforation only). For the functions of the three remaining positions of the perforations, see fig. 370, p. 399, references A, B and C.
  - Above the keyboard proper is a pointer which rises step by step for each depression of the space-key, and a drum, somewhat like the cylinder of a Fuller’s slide-rule, on which are figures giving the resulting spacing
- p.394 - vue 488/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND TYPECASTING. 395
  - required for the line. This drum can be rotated up to a movable stop by depressing the upper of the two (green) keys on the extreme right of the B or C keyboards. The justifying-scale key is depressed when ready to justify, and causes the line-justifying scale to rotate until it stops with the correct number at the end of the pointer. The bell rings five ems before the completion of the line; this is sufficient to ensure the acceptance or rejection of the longest indivisible word. The mechanism driving the drum stop, fig. 365, aggregates the total set of the letters on a scale like that of a typewriter, and enables the operator to see whether he will proceed with the space and the next word, or will divide the word, or complete the line at the
  - Z I 0 Z 0 a P- Q V Y M P CE- dE —
  - 1 / J- * a T B G- X Z Z ZE X &
  - i S- t t L 0- R U- 0 B W X 0/ /0
  - / 9 C I 2 3 F. E- A- K G 7 V A 7
  - Z 2 e 1 6 % C- U n N- P E D 7 @
  - 6 / z g 3 4 5 8 / & / H L 7 A 7 C
  - 9 / S 2 1 2 3 8 .7 72 / D- C & A 77 Z
  - ! 1 /' b 1 4 1 8 k J P 1 & Q 4 lb W
  - • I C g • — y S fl ./ & V m ffl //
  - Their Jpan ) e 0 9 £ Z X fi S & B oe fli CE
  - 9 ( 9 ? 7 8 % q k a G Y X R
  - - 6 T 5 6 a b V s P O U K
  - 9 r Z 3 4 g y P Z L E R M —
  - 1 f t C 1: 2 a U n C F A N H W
  - i Lu" Space S e 0: En Space 0 n d ff T W D m Em Quad
  - FIG. 366.—Monotype matrices arranged as are the keys of pattern C keyboard. To enable the small capitals to be distinguished they are followed in the diagram by a dot. For a similar reason the figures 1 and o are each followed by two dots. The actual lay-out is as shown in figs. 368 and 371.
  - end of the word. Having completed the setting of the line, he depresses the upper (green) key, fig. 274, p. 292, and then refers to the reading shown on the drum, which is of the form ?- This reading gives the two (red) keys to be depressed in the top row and second row respectively; the reading corresponds to the settings of two differential wedges on the casting machine which divide the surplus space, left on completing the line, amongst the whole of the spaces in the line.
  - To enable different faces and different bodies to be cast from the same arrangement of matrix-grid two difficulties had to be overcome in the A, B and C keyboards :—
  - X- The difference in set widths which exists in certain sorts between old-style, modern or other faces.
- p.395 - vue 489/901
- - 396
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - 2. The increased or decreased set width which the sorts occupy as the body-sizes are varied, or when an extended or condensed face is required to be cast.
  - The first difficulty is overcome by designing the old-style face of modernized form so that the lower-case r, s, are wider, the h, k, n, u, etc., narrower, the a and the o much narrower, while the e remains unaffected. The resulting face is very legible, though many of the distinctive features of old-style are almost absent. It was, however, possible by altering the lay-out or arrangement of matrices, in the A, B or C pattern keyboards, and by marking certain keys for a character different from that originally shown on them, to cast an old-style face having the full peculiarities of old-style. The growing requirements of the printer engaged in jobbing work such as
  - The small figures below the columns show the set-values in eighteenths of an em for the type in each column. The em here referred to is the set width of the widest sorts.
  - ‘I°zmPQVYMPd* i / " J * a t b a x Z K T I %
  - i .• || s t + l o r u Q B w Y % l;§cFEAKGFVK4 tjlecuNOEDU ‘fzqlufHLTANC ‘isvlxnfDC&fHA !]rblkJp“ cQfilbW :[cg • -y S Al J aNm^M )eo9£dxfSwBofiC ; ( ’ ? 78hqkfG Y X E . - ‘156abv SPOUK .. ,jrz34gypZLERM — 1 f t c 1 2 a u h C F A N H W i seO ondfTwDm
  - 5 6 7 8 9 IO 11121314 15 18
  - Fig. 367.—Monotype composing and casting machine ; standard lay-out as cast in long primer modern.
  - railway time-tables, trade circulars and even dictionaries, have rendered necessary the simultaneous use of different founts, such as clarendon, sans serif and old-style. This could only be effected on the A, B or C models of keyboard by marking the keys to correspond to the altered characters, with the disadvantage that the alteration of character involved an alteration also in the fingering. Pattern C keyboard is shown in fig. 361, plate XLVII.
  - In the new D keyboard machine, and also in the DD keyboard machine, different lay-outs can be obtained with practically the same keyboard arrangements, figs. 275 and 276, p. 293, modelled, moreover, on that of the typewriter as was previously done in the case of the Monoline machine. The lay-out of the D and DD Monotype matrix-grids for book or news founts is shown in fig. 368, and that for jobbing founts in fig. 369.
  - The method by which the alteration of the keyboard can be effected, while the gear operating the perforating and counting device remains
- p.396 - vue 490/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND TYPECASTING.
  - 397
  - normal, consists in the insertion of a key-bar frame between the button-
  - ENGLISH—STAN DA RD.
  - / i 1 7 t 6 9 ! • 3 • 9 T i
  - 1- 7 • 3 j f 2 i T ) ( - j T
  - 0 77 t § 2 2 s C e ) 2 r t S
  - Z J- S- 6 q 7 b 9 0 ? T Z C e
  - 0 * t T 4 4 4 9 7 5 3 1: O:
  - a a # T 7 8 $ — £ 8 6 4 2
  - P- T L F- C- X % y & % a g a 0
  - Q B- 0- E- U 2 22 J S X q b y U n
  - V- G- R- A- n / 4 2 fl fi k V P h d
  - Y. x- U- K N- H- D- 4 S 7 $ Z C ff
  - M Z 0 G 0 L C @ a w a P L F T
  - P R B F E 7 & Q V B G 0 E A W
  - C A w- V D A 4 fi 22 oe Y R N D
  - c X Y A V 7 W fil ffi X K M H m
  - • % % 4 @ C 4 W M C A • • — W
  - Fig. 368.—Monotype composing and casting machine; book or news lay-out op matrices.
  - ENGLISH---JOBBING.
  - Fig. 369.—Monotype composing and casting machine; jobbing lay-out of matrices.
  - S
  - S P
  - and the operating rods which run transversely to the keyboard.
- p.397 - vue 491/901
- - 398 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The key-bars, of which there is one for each key, run at right angles to the operating rods; each key-bar carries on its upper edge a single projection which engages with the corresponding button bell-crank, and two projections, or in some cases one only, on its lower edge to engage with the operating rods of the perforating and counting mechanism.
  - The second difficulty is overcome by increasing the whole of the set widths proportionately ; the quads are thus no longer square or half square, though the em is double the en. A different drum is used on the keyboard corresponding to the number of points in the set width of the special em quad, and a wedge corresponding to this drum is used for determining the width of the characters in the typecaster.
  - The actual perforation of the ribbon is effected by means of compressed air from the same supply used for controlling the casting machine.
  - The lower of the two additional (green) keys to the extreme right of the keyboard, fig. 274, p. 292, serves for returning the counting gear to zero, ready for commencing a new line.
  - The appearance of the perforated ribbon is shown in fig. 370. The ribbon is rolled on a spool as it is perforated, and on completion is removed from the composing machine. The completed ribbon can now be fed into the typecasting machine, and is in proper order for this, as it travels in the direction opposite to that in which it was perforated, for the casting machine begins work at the end of the matter, and works back to the beginning. The last operation in composing was the depression of the two line-justifying keys in the two upper rows, fig. 274, p. 292; the perforations corresponding to these key depressions are now the first to come into operation, and provide for the adjustment of the space-wedges which retain their setting till the casting of the line is completed.
  - The perforated ribbon passes over the air-tower of the caster between a long port and a drilled surface which communicates by pipes with the cylinders of thirty-one plungers ; these correspond to the thirty-one rows of holes which can be punched in the ribbon. The holes in the ribbon act like ports in a valve, and admit air only to those cylinders the plungers of which are to be actuated. In the first instance the space-adjusting wedges for controlling the opening of the mould are set, and this setting remains constant till the line is completed and a new setting is given. Then for each character a third wedge comes into operation, determining the set width to be given to the mould for that character. The position of this wedge is dependent on the position of the matrix-grid in the direction of the set width relatively to the mould. The matrices in the earlier machines, fig. 177, p. 221, are secured in the grid, fig. 371, by wires passing through the cross holes. They are arranged in fifteen rows of fifteen each, all the characters of a row, body-wise, being of the same set width. The matrix-grid is controlled by a cam and lever movement through the intervention of buffer-springs, so that it tends to be driven the maximum distance in both directions, that is to travel to the origin in both x and 7, and it actually travels the full
- p.398 - vue 492/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND TYPECASTING.
  - 399
  - distance in both, to the fixed stops, when there is no perforation in the ribbon (em quad). The movement in other positions is checked by fourteen plungers, for each direction, which rise vertically and stop the travel of the
  - 2
  - $
  - VS
  - 1
  - 36
  - 2 %.
  - EC
  - C
  - - Positions in.
  - Q 5 7 9 11
  - 1 1
  - Positions iny
  - 13 11 9 7 As B 3
  - 7 top row 1 24 row em quad T y P $ 6 a s f.
  - n $ space a, d Space C a m P 0 s n I space M a. h V n e
  - y © Stop row 15 Z^row
  - Flo. 370.—Monotype composing and casting machine; perforated ribbon for typecaster.
  - Scale: about full size.
  - Space transfer. B Coarse wedge. C Fine wedge.
  - So ^hen C and B are operated the line is transferred to the galley. The caster can be Hi set that consecutive strikes of C and B do not transfer the line, enabling double or b tiple justification to be performed for tabular work. The final justification is effected sinstriking the required key of the top row, and then striking key No. I of the top row ultaneously with the required key of the second row.
  - arid horizontally. The plungers are operated by compressed air at a Pressure of about 12 to 15 pounds per square inch.
- p.399 - vue 493/901
- - 400 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The plungers also perform another function : the two justifying keys of the two upper rows on the keyboard, which are last depressed in composing the line, operate the plungers in x and y respectively ; the one controls the distance moved by the coarse space-wedge and the other by the fine space-
  - 3
  - Z
  - SI x
  - f CE
  - 1 a
  - 4
  - End Elevation.
  - Fig. 371.—Monotype composing and casting machine; matrix-grid. Pattern C; lay-out of matrices. Scale: about half full size.
  - Side Elevation
  - wedge, the taper of which is one-fifteenth of the taper of the coarse wedge. Once set, these wedges retain their position for the whole of the line ; hence all these spaces are equal in set width. The whole travel of the fine wedge may correspond to only 0'0075 inch in the mould, the minimum difference of width for each space being 0’0005 inch. The maximum error of line-justification
- p.400 - vue 494/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND TYPECASTING.
  - 401
  - in a line containing ten spaces will then be 0’005 inch, and in small pica body it will be nearly double the minimum error obtainable by hand-justification, but probably nearly equal to the error actually obtained in practice. The coarse wedge will move 0'0075 inch for each step, and the total range will be represented by 14 X 0'0075 inch +14 X 0'0005 inch = 0’1120 inch. In the case of small pica or n-point the space already represents 4 units (each °f about 0'0085 inch) or 0'0338 inch. The limits of width between which the space can be varied are therefore from 0'0338 inch to 0'1458 inch, or from rather less than the middle space up to nearly the em quad.
  - In the event of a line being cast of wrong length, the machine stops automatically. Multiple-j ustification for tabular work can now be obtained in the Monotype.
  - The machine presents some very special features. The ribbon, if rolled UP. can be used again an indefinite number of times. The ribbons moreover represent a much smaller amount of locked-up capital than is the case when type or stereotypes are stored.
  - A different drum must be used on the keyboard machine, however, and a different ribbon produced if the matter is required to be printed in a style which necessitates variation in the measure of width of column, in the space-wedge settings or in the lay-out. These requirements are met by the DD keyboard, fig. 363, plate XLVIII, which enables two ribbons to be produced simultaneously, so that an edition de luxe and a popular edition of a work may be produced by the same compositor, at one cost of composition, with pages of different size and of varying type faces.
  - When the keyboard is being used for two editions and a word occurs which would require to be divided on one of the drums only, the other drum can be temporarily disconnected by a lock on the drum. The per-foration for the hyphen accordingly appears on the drum in question.
  - A switch placed between the two drums is used to cut out either drum for breaking the line; the use of this switch permits of the line-justifying Perforations being made in one ribbon only; this device is also used for the line-justification of matter of greater width than the galley of the Casting machine. The operation of throwing the switch over to the one side or to the other sets the line-justification drum to give the requisite key-readings for the line-justification perforations.
  - This double tower keyboard can also be used for the composition of matter of double the ordinary width which the casting machine is capable of turning out; this is effected by composing alternate lines on each tower and combining the two galleys side by side when they have been cast.
  - The speed of the Monotype caster should not be greater than 170 type per minute on the smallest body-size, and in ordinary work 150 type per minute are obtained.
  - The power required to run the keyboard and the casting machine is about 0'5 horse-power.
  - The Monotype machine is also capable of being used as a typecasting
  - 2D
- p.401 - vue 495/901
- - 402
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - machine or sorts-caster. When it is so used the die-case adjusting mechanism, and the assembling and galley mechanisms are not required, consequently their action is suspended by locking the paper-feeding mechanism and locking the normal wedge to correspond to the set size of the type required.
  - A special grid, fig. 372, can be used for holding a single matrix in sorts-casting, while the standard matrices, moulds, die-cases, and galley
  - Fig. 372.—Monotype casting machine; matrix-holder for sorts-casting up to 14-point.
  - equipment can be used for sizes ranging from 5-point to 14-point. The matrix-holder or die-case resembles the ordinary die-case in outer form, but is provided with a seating and a sliding clamping piece. The sliding piece is first withdrawn from the holder, the matrix is then put into place, and the slide is pushed home, securing the matrix as shown in fig. 372.
  - Fig. 373.—Monotype casting machine ; large-work matrix-holder for sorts-casting.
  - The range of the Monotype machine as a sorts-caster has been increased to enable it to cast up to 36-point, while in America it has even been used for casting as large as 48-point. When used for above 14-point a special form of matrix is used, fig. 178, p. 221, which consists of a rectangular piece of metal having two bevelled or chamfered corners and the character impression sunk into one of the flat faces. This matrix is held in a special holder of
- p.402 - vue 496/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND TYPECASTING. 403
  - die-case, fig. 373, which is provided with a seating having two stationary gauging-faces, against which the top and bottom edges of the matrix abut; it is also fitted with two adjustable clamping-jaws which bear against the bevelled corners of the matrix and are simultaneously adjusted by a knurled screw to bring the matrix to its proper position and to secure it. The large work matrices are not provided with a cavity for the centring-pin, but the matrix-holder has a bushing into which the centring-pin enters.-
  - Special moulds are used for casting from 14-point up to 36-point, two adjustable moulds being used for these sizes, the one ranging from 14-point to 20-point inclusive, and the other from 24-point to 36-point inclusive. Several blades for the different sizes are used in the same mould with
  - FIG. 374.—Monotype casting machine; large-work mould-delivery and raceway.
  - e. Point-block. —
  - e1. Large-type block.
  - E. Type-block squaring-plate.
  - El. Mould-blade.
  - F. Adjustable type-channel block.
  - Ft. Fixed type-channel block.
  - Corresponding point-blocks and mould-blade stops ; the side blocks of the mould are made adjustable to accommodate the proper blade for the body-size to be cast. As in the case of the ordinary mould, the slide-block is reciprocated by the type-carrier from which latter the type is ejected by the mould-blade.
  - A few changes of details are necessary to accommodate the machine to the altered conditions. The pump-well is changed and a new piston and nozzle are fitted, while the strength of the centring-pin spring is altered. The SPecial normal wedges for casting sorts are set by hand from holes for the Wedge positions, instead of being set automatically as is the case when the machine is casting automatically from the perforated ribbon. The type-channel blocks used for casting and composing are removed, and the special adjustable blocks shown in fig. 374 are used instead. These blocks, as is
- p.403 - vue 497/901
- - 404 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - shown in the figure, are curved round so that the type, instead of being assembled in the channel, are delivered directly to the galley. The speed at which the casting machine can be run for casting large type depends upon the length of time required to chill the metal before the type is ejected from the mould, and a special speed-reducing gear is provided which effects this reduction. The gear is fitted with three controlling levers by means of which nineteen different speeds can be obtained.
  - The Tachytype, invented by F. A. Johnson of America, is a very similar machine. The perforated strip is narrow, being about 2 inches wide ; the line-justification is effected automatically by the machine; at the same time that the holes are perforated the character represented is typed on the strip so that the operator or any other person can read the record. The English rights in this machine have been acquired by the Linotype Company i the machine has not been worked commercially in this country.
  - The Graphotype, figs. 375 and 376, plate XLIX, invented by George A. Goodson of America in 1893, nad a keyboard similar to that of the typewriter and comprised 100 keys ; these operated a typewriter which gave a
  - Fig. 377.—Graphotype composing and casting machine; perforated ribbon.
  - written record of the work of composition as it proceeded, and, in addition, made certain electric contacts by means of pins which dipped into wells of mercury, closing electrical circuits by which any one or any pair selected by the key from two sets of ten perforating punches could be operated by electro-magnets. The perforated strip was narrow and had guide perforations on one side only, fig. 377; the perforations corresponding to any character, or space, occupied two consecutive transverse units of its length. The type-writer had, connected to it, a dial scale to show the amount of line to be made up by increasing or decreasing the spaces. The face of type used was of the self-spacing kind, having six units to the em quad. Five different set widths were used comprising two to six units. Corrections, should any be required, could therefore be made very easily by hand.
  - The line-justification was effected by pairs of perforations similar to those used for the characters ; a single hole at the left of the ribbon (as composed) and in the upper of the two possible positions formed the space, while another single perforated hole, in the lower position, formed the trip for the end of the line. As in the other ribbon machines described, the ribbon had to be
- p.404 - vue 498/901
- - PLATE XLIX.
  - FIG. 375.— Graphotype composing and casting machine (Goodson); keyboard machine.
  - 2
  - 9
  - jut M let 8’1-rth e E.1 5480-44/" eentcet s rs
  - Fig. 376.—Graphotype composing and casting machine (Goodson); typecaster.
  - 1
  - atESX [%, 1 VeN 38)
  - To face page 404.]
- pl.49 - vue 499/901
- p.n.n. - vue 500/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND TYPECASTING. 405
  - put into the machine in reverse order. The increase or decrease in set of the spaces was controlled by an electrically-operated escapement.
  - The matrices were all combined in a square matrix-block which was Produced by electro-deposition. The counterpart of the matrix-block was set up in type and accurately justified, so that all the characters were correctly placed both for body and set. The matrix-block, after removal of the type from it, was finished and secured to a steel back with conical holes for setting the respective matrices into true position ; the moving parts were light. The stop-mechanism for the grid was somewhat similar to that of the Monotype, but the perforations in this instance enabled certain electrical connexions to be made which brought electro-magnets into play, and these operated the stops. The matrix-grid comprised ten rows each of ten matrices, but some of these were used for quads. There were: one row 2-unit, two rows 3-unit, three rows 4-unit, two rows 5-unit, and two rows
  - sp. W Q P ( [ o qd. 3 qd. q R O ) I 9 ‘ B S p
  - ffi T N ] ? 8 1 J k
  - — U L £ ! 7 1 4 u ff
  - M V G * : 6 f A g o
  - em qd. H Y F qa. ; 5 j 3 fl d & E . z 4 i 3 ft b
  - ffi X D $ t 3 - f x n
  - w B wo u o K) cojo 4 s
  - m CAeri Kya
  - Units 6 553342644
  - FIG. 378.— Graphotype casting and composing machine; lay-out of matrix-block.
  - 6-unit. The arrangement of matrices in the block was as shown in fig. 378. The matrix-block being in one solid piece enabled the characters to be placed Very close together. This saved weight, as well as distance of travel of the matrix-block.
  - The adjustment of the mould for set width was dependent on the position occupied by the grid. The set width could be one of those enumerated, or occasionally, in the case of spaces, the single unit width. The mould Was water-cooled, and special precautions, peculiar to this machine, were taken to keep the temperature down. The pump was placed at some distance (about 15 inches) from the mould, and the metal-tube connecting it to the nozzle was heated by means of a low-tension electric current, this arrangement was found to work very well in practice, as it enabled the metal temperature to be kept very accurately within the desired limits, While the removal of the metal-pot to a distance permitted adjustments of the mould and adjacent parts to be made with ease and comfort. A
- p.405 - vue 501/901
- - 406
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - peculiarity of type cast on this machine was that it was hollow, owing to the suction applied to the mould immediately after the cast was made, with the result that a hard shell instead of a solid type was left in it.
  - The above brief description relates to the small machine, constructed under Percy W. Davis’s supervision in England. As originally made it ran at 140 revolutions per minute, and was capable of casting up to 12-point. By modifying the shape of the cams it was enabled to cast type at the rate of 170 per minute, which it effected with but little noise and without evidence of undue wear.
  - In the meantime, work had been steadily proceeding on the Graphotype in America, and an improved machine was evolved in which the matrix-plate comprises 225 characters and spaces. This new model is due mainly
  - 06 Q W E R T Y U IO %,s.
  - & A S D F G H J K L 1 II 38 %
  - ae z x c V B N M p * 1 % % %
  - Q W E R TYU IO fl ffl ? [ ]
  - & A S D F G H J K L ffffi ! / O
  - £ Z X C V B N M p 6. fi : ; X
  - Iq w e r t y u io ’78 9 0
  - a s d f g h j k 1 • 4 5 6 $
  - @ Z X C v b n m p , .12 3 /
  - 7d Q W E R TYU I0 fl ffl ? ( )
  - & A S D F G H J KL ff ffi ! 8d..
  - Z X C V B N M p 5' f: ; —
  - 6s q w e r t y u io ’78 9 0
  - 5s a s d f g h j k 1 - 4 5 6 $
  - 16s Z X C V b n m P , .12 3 8s
  - Fig. 379.—Graphotype, improved ; lay-out of keyboard.
  - to the inventive effort and mechanical skill of W. Nicholas and W. Ackermann.
  - In the first place, the keyboard and its electric connexions were modified so that the typewriter lay-out, repeated for each fount, capitals and lower-case, both roman and italic, could be adopted. A machine with this keyboard lay-out was exhibited in Madison Square Garden in May 1907, and the claim is advanced that the adoption of this principle by the Graphotype was made prior to its adoption by the Monotype. The range of set widths available was increased by dividing into sixteen equal parts the body, or the maximum set width selected for the quad, as in the Monotype. The set widths range from 4-unit to 16-unit inclusive.
- p.406 - vue 502/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND TYPECASTING. 407
  - there being three rows 8-unit (en quad), and two rows 10-unit. This arrangement may, however, be modified or changed according to the width of the alphabet to be adapted.
  - The lay-out of the keyboard is shown in fig. 379, and that of the matrix-plate in fig. 380. The method of preparing the matrix-plate has been greatly improved, and the use of the micrometer microscope has been adopted to ensure the correct relative positioning of the matrices in the plate with reference to the drilled centring-holes on its upper surfaces. This is effected by making a trial cast of each character from a matrix grown from foundry type with the centring-pin in the centring-hole placed in its
  - 12 14 8 8 5 7 6 8 9 10 10 11 13 15 16
  - v Q 8 9 ’ / ' $ fl q x HI KX%
  - + V J 7 i II | t fi v b F F Y%
  - - O P 3 1 J f 4 u d p ff L Afi %
  - PA Z 2 . I ; 0 o h n + RN%
  - Z D § 5 , S : a q y fl x TUW
  - B w C 1 i r - e g ff fi = E & M
  - Cm 5 1 - I t e b h k S G G H
  - w m 2 0 | S | | d n u k E ffl
  - LN 4 3 i r t a o p u Z A M —
  - B R 7 6 , ? f c y Q D P THW
  - F G 9 8 1 ! ; z v 0 V S O ffi ..
  - ae U - J 0 : $ X T G & D ffl %
  - Z K * 6 ] ] ‘ . R F L X Y & %
  - M X t ( ‘ [ I Z C Y K N Ve %
  - W P ) ’ J S B E A H Q @ %
  - 1 2 3 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
  - ROW
  - Fig. 380.— Graphotype, improved; lay-out of matrix-plate.
  - 2
  - 12
  - 6
  - INDIVIDUAL
  - normal position for each character. The error obtained in the cast is measured, and the centring-pin moved micrometrically to correct for this error, and a new cast is then taken.
  - The corrected casts, or slugs as they may be termed since the faces are Sst on a stem having its sides, both in body and in set, equal to the pitch the centring-holes, are then built up into a block and a complete matrix-ate is grown from them.
  - als A further improvement introduced is to make the unit for justification equal to one-sixteenth of the full set, or body measurement, and to wevide f°r the distribution of from one to sixty-four of these units, by C1 the line may be short when measured, over the spaces in such manner
- p.407 - vue 503/901
- - 408 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - that no one justifying space shall differ by more than one unit from any other in the line. That is to say, the method adopted is to cast spaces each a multiple of the unit, but not necessarily equal to each other ; it is furthermore arranged that where inequality occurs the wider spaces are cast first in one line and last in the next line, so as to keep the appearance of the justification more uniform. The perforated ribbon has guide-holes at one side only, as in the Goodson machine, and two sets of perforations, each in one of the fifteen positions available, are used for the production of each character ; two sizes of hole are used, a large one for determining the row, and a small one for defining the individual character in the row selected. The fifteenth or last perforation of one set is devoted to the trip, and of the other is devoted to the spaces ; these holes also are large and small respectively.
  - In this form of the Graphotype the composing mechanism or keyboard perforates the paper strip which is then rolled up and is worked backwards in the casting machine in the same manner as in the Monotype. The perforating and selecting devices as well as the other mechanical movements of the Graphotype keyboard and casting machines are electrically operated ; the current for operating can be obtained from any ordinary continuous-current electric lighting or power supply.
  - A new model of the Graphotype machine has been produced which is a one-man machine, for the whole work of composing and casting is performed on it; this machine contains several novel and original features, and is illustrated in figs. 381 to 384, plates L to LIII. The principal difficulty present in this class of machine is that of line-justification, for it is essential that the whole line should be composed and measured, and that the width of the spaces to be cast in the line should be determined, before the first space is cast. In this case a totally different form of control is adopted, consisting of a number of controller-elements, each of which can be set to represent any character or space, or to effect the change from character to space-width setting for line-justification, the change back again to character being made automatically.
  - To understand this it is necessary to refer to the drawing, fig. 385, of the controller-element and the escapement which frees it. The element consists of a parallel spindle carrying two fixed end-rollers and three intermediate rollers capable of longitudinal adjustment and of remaining held frictionally in any position to which they may be set by the selecting mechanism of the keyboard. The central adjustable roller is for purposes of line-justification only, and, when so used, may be shifted from its central position ; the other two adjustable rollers are set to position by the selecting device controlled from the keyboard, and they fulfil the same functions as are performed by the agency of the double perforations in the casting machines, using the perforated paper strip. The controller-elements are stored in a magazine, one being released by an electro-magnet operated
- p.408 - vue 504/901
- - PLATE L
  - FIG. 381.— Graphotype (new model) composing and casting machine ; view of right-hand
  - A%
  - wees
  - 1 Nut
  - side from the front.
  - [To face page 408.
- pl.50 - vue 505/901
- - PLATE LI.
  - * • NN
  - FIG. 382.— Graphotype-(new model) composing and casting machine ; enlarged view
  - 4
  - of right-h
  - To face plate LII.1.
  - >ing controller magazines and controller-elements.
- pl.51 - vue 506/901
- - PLATE LII.
  - Fig. 383.—Graphotype (new model) composing and casting machine ; view of left-hand side from the back.
  - B 4 — K
  - To face plate LI.]
- pl.52 - vue 507/901
- - PLATE LIII.
  - weT 1
  - det
  - FIG. 384.— Graphotype (new model) composing and casting machine ; view of right-hand side from the back.
  - To face page 409.]
- pl.53 - vue 508/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND TYPECASTING.
  - 409
  - when each key is depressed, and they are adjusted by an electrically-operated gear to correspond to the character selected by setting the two outer adjustable rollers for row and individual position of the matrix-plate respectively. Subsequently these rollers make the contacts which control the position in the rows, in x and y respectively, of the matrix-plate so as to bring the required character over the mould-opening, and to set the mould-blade or body-slide to give the proper number of units of set width to the character to be cast.
  - After the controller-elements for the characters of a word are assembled, a space controller is fed to the receiving magazine and following the completion of the measure or line a trip controller is delivered to the receiving magazine and a justification controller to a supplementary magazine. The arrangement of the controller-elements and that of the justification controller-elements in their respective magazines, together with the order in which they are fed
  - Fig. 385.— Graphotype, new model ; controller escapement and adjustable controller-element.
  - through the index-head and dealt with in the casting machine, are shown in fig. 386. The trip controller from the end of the preceding measure or line causes the justification roller to be the next to be received by the setting portion of the casting machine, and thus sets the justification of the spaces for the lines to be cast. As the casting of the line proceeds, the spaces are cast each to the proper width determined by the position of the rollers on the justification controller-element, and at the close of this measure or line the trip controller which follows causes the justifi-Cation controller-element for the next measure or line to be brought into Play.
  - It is therefore possible for the operator to work several lines ahead of the casting portion of the machine : the controller-elements set for the selection of characters and spaces being stored ready for use in one magazine con-structed in the form of a zigzag raceway, and those set for the setting of Justification mechanisms being stored in a similar supplementary magazine.
- p.409 - vue 509/901
- - 410
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - A third magazine receives all the controller-elements after they have successively served to control the operations of the casting portion of the machine.
  - While the controllers are in this third magazine, the three intermediate
  - Fig. 386.— Graphotype, new model; order and arrangement of controller-elements as composed and used.
  - CONTROLLERS.
  - O 10
  - CO o
  - Jo
  - Supplementary magazine.
  - .7
  - Main magazine. N
  - /
  - | |
  - \
  - MJ.—Multiple justification.
  - J.—Justification.
  - T.—Trip.
  - C.—Character.
  - S.—Space.
  - 120(k
  - 10.C
  - Order.
  - Com-
  - posed. Used.
  - 51.T 51
  - 50.J 49
  - 49.C 48
  - 48.C 47
  - 47.S 46
  - 46.C 45
  - 45.C 44
  - 44.S 43
  - 43.C 42
  - 42.C 5°
  - 41.T 41
  - 40.MJ 40
  - 39.T 39
  - 38.J 37
  - 37.C 36
  - 36.C 35
  - 35.C 34
  - 34.C 33
  - 33.C 32
  - 32.C 31
  - 31.C 30
  - 30.C 29
  - 29.C 28
  - 28.S 27
  - 27.C 26
  - 26.C 25
  - 25.C 24
  - 24.C 23
  - 23.C 22
  - 22.S 2I
  - 2I.C 20
  - 20.C 19
  - I9.C 18
  - 18.S 17
  - I7.C 16
  - 16.C 38
  - 15.T 15
  - 14.J 13
  - 13.C 12
  - I2.C II
  - U.S IO
  - I0.C 9
  - 9.C 8
  - 8.C 7
  - 7.S 6
  - 6.C 5
  - 5.C 4
  - 4.C 14
  - 3.T 3
  - 2.MJ 2
  - I.T I
  - adjustable rollers on each are automatically returned to their initial position : thus each controller-element is restored to its original setting ready for use in another cycle of the whole series of operations.
- p.410 - vue 510/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND TYPECASTING. 411
  - The system adopted for composing and justifying a line of type is as follows :—
  - The first action of the operator is to set a trip controller, which is deposited in the main receiving channel or magazine. Next, controllers for each character of the first word of the line are successively set. Then a controller for the first word-space of the line is set. The setting of a word-space controller gives no indication of the size of that particular word-space. Every word-space controller when set is exactly like every other word-space controller, that is it simply denotes that at that place in the line there shall be a word-space ; it gives no indication of what size any word-space shall be. The sizes of word-spaces are attended to when the end of the line is reached. After the first word-space controller is set, controllers for the successive characters and word-spaces of the line are set in their order. When the units-register indicates that no further whole syllable can be included in the line, the operator sets a line-justification controller, the function of which is to set the various movable parts of the castingmachine justifier so that the word-spaces of the line are of such a size or sizes as to fill out exactly the predetermined measure to which both the type-galley and the units-register have been previously set. Obviously, the units-register will indicate that some of the predetermined units of length of line have not been used up by the sum of all the various unit values of the type and word-spaces in that line—the units-register having registered four units for each word-space, although the line-justification mechanism may subsequently give these word-spaces a greater width.
  - When a justification controller has been set, it is deposited in the channel of the supplementary magazine separate from that which contains the trip controllers, character controllers, and word-space controllers.
  - The outlets of these two separate channels meet, and there is a mechanism provided for removing controllers from these channel outlets, one at a time, and presenting them in proper order to the index-head Which controls the circuits of the casting machine. Further mechanical arrangements present the controllers automatically to this index-head in the following order :—
  - (1) Trip controller ; (2) justification or justifier-setting controller ; (3) character controllers ; (4) word-space controller ; (5) character controllers ; and so on until the end of the line, when another trip controller is presented ahead of the justification controller for the following line.
  - The trip controller serves to trip into action those mechanisms which annul any previous setting of the justifier and which bring forward its movable components so that they are in position to fall back on such movable stops as may be set by the justification controller which follows.
  - When the justifier has been set, as described above, it retains its setting ring the entire line, because none of the movable stops can drop, for ey are all provided with lips or undercutting to prevent dropping.
- p.411 - vue 511/901
- - 412
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The mould does not receive a setting for line-justification word-spaces at the beginning of every line—as in the Monotype—but is set each time it is required for that purpose during the casting of the line, that is each time a word-space controller is presented to the index-head.
  - After a word-space has been cast, the setting for that space is annulled, and the mould is set for the size of the following character.
  - Whenever a word-space controller is presented to the index-head, a movable escapement contact-finger in the justifier is indexed one notch thereby automatically counting the spaces until the finger rests on another contact which causes the remaining word-spaces in the line to differ in size from those already cast in that line. This is the only portion of the justifier moved during the composition of the line.
  - The description given above relates to ordinary justification, in which the justification slide and the end-of-line slide are manually locked together, in which case the combination of trip and justification causes the necessary operations to be performed for the transference of the finished line to the galley.
  - The machine is rendered capable of performing multiple justification by manually unlocking the two slides for justification and end-of-line. This condition is shown diagrammatically in fig. 386, in which fifty-one controllers are shown composed for multiple justification ; the left and right columns of figures to the right of the diagram give respectively the order in which the controllers are composed into and used from the magazines. The order of passing through the index-head is as follows:—
  - I. Trip; trips the justification cam to draw up the justification slide.
  - 2. Multiple justification; operates an electro-magnet so that:
  - 3. Trip; causes the justification cam to be tripped a second time and the justification slide and the end-of-line slide to be drawn up as one slide causing the delivery of the finished line.
  - 14. Justification ; sets the justification mechanism for the line-justification of the section of the line 4-13, the controllers for which then pass from the main magazine and cause the required characters and spaces to be cast :
  - 15. Trip; trips the justification cam to operate the justification slide for: 38. Justification ; sets the justification for the section of the line 16-37, the controllers for which cause the required characters and spaces to be cast ; and so on.
  - The machine occupies a floor-space of 3 feet by 6 feet ; it weighs 125° pounds, and, including two 16-candlepower lamps, requires I kilowatt to drive and control it.
  - The Graphotype machine has also been adapted for use as a sorts-caster, and has been used successfully for casting from the limit of machine composition (18-point) up to 36-point inclusive. Each large-work fount is carried on three matrix-plates, and it is stated that a complete fount of 200 pounds of type has been obtained from the machine in a run of eight hours.
- p.412 - vue 512/901
- - PLATE LIV.
  - €
  - To face page 412.]
  - 00
  - *
  - Uo
  - "NT
  - 5 9
  - A 1
- pl.54 - vue 513/901
- - PLATE LV.
  - [To face page 413.]
  - Fig. 388.—Electrotypograph ; keyboard machine.
  - 'kJ
  - &
  - y =
  - 1
  - FIG. 390.—Dyotype composing and casting machine; matrix-wheel.
  - FIG. 389.—Dyotype composing and casting machine; typecaster.
- pl.55 - vue 514/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND TYPECASTING. 413
  - It is further claimed that it is possible to cast all kinds of script, and even type with extended kerns. Figure 387, plate LIV, shows the new model Graphotype used as a large-work sorts-caster.
  - The Electrotypograph composing and casting machine.—This exceedingly ingenious machine, fig. 388, plate LV, is the invention of C. Meray-Horvath, of Budapest, and was patented in 1897. It is a perforated-ribbon machine, and to its perforator, which has somewhat the appearance and size of a typewriter, a teletypograph may be attached. This apparatus effects the electric duplication of a perforation at a distance and thus permits simultaneous identical composition of the same matter in different places. The perforated ribbon is used to control the movements of the die-case of the type-casting mechanism. The justifying mechanism is the invention of Colomon Rozar, of Nuremberg. It is highly ingenious and exceedingly complicated, but practical in its working. The casting machine is of solid construction, and again somewhat complicated, but is stated to be practical in working. The perforated ribbon is used, not as in the Monotype in conjunction with compressed air, but in conjunction with an electrical apparatus which, every time a perforation passes under one of the feelers, transmits an electric current; the passage of this current determines the position of the die-case and the thickness of the set of the letter to be cast. The spaces for the line are cast at the beginning of each line, and the metal in the melting-pot is maintained at an even temperature by means of a mercurial regulator which keeps the heat uniform all the time the machine is running. The machine casts at the rate of from 4000 to 5000 characters per hour, and the Paper ribbon can be run through the machines over and over again to produce duplications of the matter set. By the teletypograph a speed of 180 characters per minute can be obtained, which is about double the speed of the typecasting machine, while if the triplex system of telegraphy is used on the wire, about 540 letters per minute can be sent and received, sufficient to keep six or seven Meray-Horvath-Rozar typecasting machines supplied with ribbons. The authors have seen it stated that a factory has been established in Paris and that machines have been constructed for the daily newspaper " Le Temps,” but of this they have no personal knowledge.
  - A somewhat further development on similar lines came under the notice of one of the authors a little while back in which H. Knudsen, a well-known Danish inventor, proposed and effected the working at different centres from a single machine and operator, of a number of linotype machines by wireless methods of telegraphy.
  - It is obvious that in Great Britain such machines would have to be tcensed by the postal authorities, owing to the government monopoly and control of telegraphic intercommunication of all kinds.
  - The Dyotype composing and casting machine, fig. 389, plate LV.—This pechine, the invention of J. Pinel, has recently been constructed in ars, and differs in several respects from the other machines of this class Which have been described.
- p.413 - vue 515/901
- - 414
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The matrices, fig. 179, p. 222, are of trapezoidal shape, and a number of them are built up into a wheel, fig. 390, plate LV, having solid longitudinal dividing-bars of the same section as the matrices. These .solid dividing-bars serve for casting spaces of the various thicknesses and for quads. The matrices are secured in the matrix-wheels by cylindrical pins which lock them to each other, to the dividing-bars formed on the solid portion of the matrix-wheel, and to the ends of the matrix-wheels.
  - Each matrix is provided with a small steel plate at one side which engages with the upper end of the bell-crank levers, li l2, fig. 235, p. 263, when the matrix-wheel is presented to the mould, and the other end of the lever depresses the body-slide against the pressure of a spring, so as to give the characters a set width proportional to the distance moved by the upper end of the bell-crank.
  - Each matrix-wheel contains twelve solid dividing-bars with four rows of matrices arranged circumferentially between each pair of dividing-bars. There are six circumferential rows of matrices, each of which contains forty-eight matrices arranged thus : the first row for roman lower-case ; the second row roman capitals ; the third row italic lower-case ; the fourth row italic capitals ; the fifth row small capitals ; and the sixth row the various signs and figures. Thus each matrix-wheel contains 288 matrices for characters, apart from the twelve solid dividing-bars from which spaces can be cast. There are two matrix-wheels on each casting machine.
  - Unlike the Monotype in which compressed air is used, or the Grapho-type, in which electro-magnets are used, the selecting needles are caused to enter the perforations in the ribbon by means of spring blades.
  - The perforated ribbon is very similar to that prepared in the Graphotype perforator. There are, however, two lines of guide-perforations, one on each side of the strip, fig. 391, which are made by the keyboard itself. The strip may receive perforations on thirteen longitudinal lines, of which the perforations on lines 1, 2, 10, Il and 12 indicate the kind of type or fount (and consequently the lateral position of the matrix-wheel), while perforations on lines 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 indicate the different characters, letters, or signs, and control the rotational movement of the matrix-wheel. Perforations on line 3 control the casting of spaces, giving a middle space when there is a perforation on line 3 alone, and a justifying space when the perforation on line 3 occurs in combination with another perforation. The perforation on line 13 is of larger diameter than the others, and sets in operation the trip gear for transferring the line to the galley.
  - A very important feature of the Dyotype is that it avoids the disadvantages of requiring the use of unit systems or self-spacing type-The keyboard is arranged to effect the summation of any widths of characters, this being performed by a metal piece which is changed for each fount used. The wheel, which is used for the summation, is a toothless ratchet, driven and held by friction. This arrangement allows the matrices to be struck from existing punches, and therefore permits the
- p.414 - vue 516/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND TYPECASTING. 415 work to conform to the faces already in use by the printer, a matter of considerable importance.
  - The line-justification of the line when composed is the same for all bodies and permits any shortness of length, from one point up to twenty-four points, to be made up. The line-justification is effected by an arrangement connected with the keyboard.
  - At the end of the line, the operator presses the line-justifying lever, and the machine modifies the space-perforations already made, without the further intervention of the operator, the strip being held in readiness for the purpose.
  - Unlike other machines of this class, the line-justifying perforations occur at the beginning of the line and the strip is put into the machine so as to start at the beginning of the matter. In order to obtain the requisite total
  - * ' Type - written Record
  - Fig. 391.—Dyotype composing and casting machine; perforated ribbon for typecaster.
  - 1
  - of combinations, the number of perforations varies for different characters, some characters being formed by one perforation and others by two, three, four or five perforations respectively.
  - It has been proposed by some inventors of machines of this class that the ribbon should be held by a portion of the perforating apparatus, after the trip perforation has been made and until the end of the line is reached, when this part of the perforating mechanism should be again brought into operation to punch the perforations corresponding to the set width of space required throughout the line. Such an arrangement would enable the Tibbon to be used in the same direction as that of composition, but the ribbon would require to be rewound before it could be used on the casting machine.
  - The Stringertype machine, fig. 392, plate LVI.—In this machine a line of matrices is composed, and the operations of line-justifying, casting a justified e. and setting are performed automatically. The Stringertype matrix, 8- 188, p. 224, differs from the Linotype matrix, fig. 180, p. 222, the strike
- p.415 - vue 517/901
- - 416 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - being on the flat. The matrix is notched at the side, and this notch serves to set the mould to the correct width for the character, the dimension from the bottom of the notch across the flat being the set width plus a constant. The matrices are assembled as in the Linotype and measured in a vice together with the space-matrices, fig. 203, p. 231, the measurement being made on the aggregate thickness of all the matrices.
  - In the original machine, when the line has been composed, the space-wedges are driven up to fill the vice. The set width of the spaces is obtained in just the same way as with the type-matrices ; the Stringertype space-matrix is tapered in side elevation, and the width at any point is equal to the set desired plus the same constant as in the type-matrix. It is not essential that the thickness of the matrix should be the same as the set width of the type cast from it, but all the matrices of a fount may be a constant multiple of the set width in thickness. The space-matrices must then be arranged with different tapers in front and side elevation. If 01 is the inclination of the wedge surface to the vertical in front elevation, and 02 in side elevation, and C is the constant multiple in the case of the type-matrices, then
  - tan 01=C tan 02.
  - It is thus possible to set the vice and its details to the dimensions of any convenient body-size, such as pica, and the difficulty of obtaining a sufficient thickness for the matrices of the thin sorts of small body-sizes is overcome.
  - The type during the casting and composing operations is horizontal ; when the line is completed it is automatically turned through 900 to the vertical position and placed in the receiving galley.
  - The matrices travel from the vice to the left of the machine after the measuring operation ; they are then pushed successively one at a time into the cross race and travel from the operator in front of the mould ; the last matrix cast from remains in the slide until the first of the next line comes along, when this matrix is pushed along the cross race. After the matrix has been cast from, it is pushed along the cross race by the pressure of the next succeeding matrix, and when it has travelled its own width past the casting point a plunger pushes it into the elevator race. On the completion of the line the elevator lifts the matrices then in the race to the slide where the space-matrices are transferred to their magazine, and the type-matrices elevated to the distributor-bar, which operates in the same way as in the Linotype machine.
  - Safety cut-outs are provided, and operate in any circumstances which would involve damage to the machine; in the event of a line being cast of incorrect length the machine is also stopped.
  - The advantages of casting separate type are many : corrections can be made by hand and away from the machine if necessary, while in the slug machines it is necessary to recast the whole of the line, even when the correction consists only of two transposed letters or a point omitted ; the depth of the strike can be deeper, and therefore a clearer impression can be
- p.416 - vue 518/901
- - PLATE LVI.
  - mfoe
  - 3 st
  - 24
  - id.
  - FIG. 392.—Stringertype matrix-composing and
  - casting machine ; front view. [To face page 416.
- pl.56 - vue 519/901
- - PLATE LVII.
  - ‘ Th 1
  - /J
  - FIG. 3
  - To face
  - ingertype matrix-composing and casting machine, 1913 model.
- pl.57 - vue 520/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND TYPECASTING.
  - 417
  - obtained, and the breakaway tang permits a hard metal to be used (similar to that of which ordinary type for hand-composition is made), while the metal used in the slug machines, and even in those similar to the Monotype, must necessarily be softer.
  - The normal speed of the Stringertype mould is stated to be 160 characters per minute ; as mentioned above, this does not represent the limit of output of a single mould ; the total output possible, if the mould were kept in continuous work, would be nearly 10,000 ens per hour.
  - It is not generally intended to distribute the type, but to remelt it ; when, however, it is desired to do so, a matrix can be left at rest in the machine and type cast from it continuously, so that sorts can be obtained from the machine for hand-composition, if both machine-work and hand-work are used.
  - The machine requires about 0'5 horse-power.
  - Important modifications have recently been made in the design of this machine, chief among these being a new method of justification, and a novel form of matrix distribution, by which the machine has been rendered more efficient and easy of operation, and its field of usefulness increased. The 1913 Stringertype machine is shown in fig. 393, plate LVII.
  - The distensible wedge-spaces of the earlier machine have been replaced by single non-expanding space-matrices similar in configuration to a character-matrix, and of a thickness proportional to the maximum justifying-space ; the set notch is of sufficient depth to permit of the production of the minimum justifying-space.
  - The matrices are assembled to a greater length than that corresponding to the length of the line of types in the galley, and justification is effected by measuring the overset or excess of length and dividing the latter equally among the number of spaces ; the mould-blade is then set to the appropriate position to give the correct space.
  - The essential parts of the mechanism for effecting line-justification are shown diagrammatically in fig. 394. The line-measuring vice a is fitted with a longitudinally slidable spindle c carrying the clamping-jaw b. The jaw b 18 adjustable and can be set for different measures by running it along the threaded spindle c and locking with the nuts d. The closing of the vice-law b on to the line is effected by raising the slide e which carries the line-justifying wedge f; the latter then engages with the block g on the spindle c, displaces the latter to the right, and thus moves the jaw b till it grips the line. The distance through which the slide e moves is therefore dependent on the length of the line of matrices between the vice-Jaws, and this movement is transmitted through the knife-edge h, the measur-mg-beam j, and the lever k to the mould-justifying wedge m. The extent of the movement transferred from the line-justifying wedge /to the mould-Justifying wedge m is properly proportioned to the number of word-spaces in the line. This result is obtained by providing the measuring-beam j with a movable fulcrum block n, and arranging that the position of the fulcrum
  - 2 E
- p.417 - vue 521/901
- - 418 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - block n is determined by means of a series of equally-spaced stops on the surface of the drum o, which is mounted on the spindle p. On one end of this spindle is an escapement wheel q having teeth equal in number to the stops; an escapement mechanism working in co-operation with the wheel and connected to the space-key r permits a stop of different length to be brought into position at every depression of the space-key.
  - The sequence of operations is as follows: on completion of assembly, the line of matrices is transferred to a position immediately above the vice. Simultaneously with this operation, the mould-justifying wedge is released
  - Fig. 394.—Stringertype; line-justification gear.
  - 4
  - from its previously adjusted position and allowed to rise into contact with the lever k. In the meantime the fulcrum block n is advanced to the right until it meets the stop corresponding to the number of spaces in the line. The beam j is now permitted to fall into contact with the knife-edge h. The slide s is next elevated, and this permits firstly that the vice may rise to embrace the matrices, and secondly, through frictional engagement with the slide e, that the latter and with it the wedge f and the knife-edge h may be driven upwards to measure the line. The appropriate position of
- p.418 - vue 522/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND TYPECASTING.
  - 419
  - the mould-justifying wedge having been thus attained, it is locked in this position, and the various mechanisms concerned are returned to their normal or zero positions.
  - Thus the line-justifying space-matrices do not themselves determine the thickness of the spaces to be cast, but act through suitable mechanism to bring the mould-justifying wedge into the path of the mould body-blade at the moment when the line-justifying space-matrix is presented to the mould preparatory to casting.
  - The latter remarks do not refer to the normal or fixed spaces, whose set thickness is determined in the same way as the set thickness of the
  - FIG. 395-—Stringertype; gear for distributing matrices to magazines. Cross-section.
  - Fig. 396.—Stringertype; gear for distributing matrices. Front view.
  - character-type, namely by means of the notch in the edge of the matrix, the depth of which varies according to the thickness of type to be cast.
  - The method of distribution of the matrices into the two magazines is illustrated in figs. 39,5 and 396. Its chief objects are: increasing the capacity of the distributor-bar, and providing improved means for separating the matrices into groups and for delivering them to their respective magazines.
  - With these objects in view the distributor-bar is given an eight-tooth combination of matrix-sustaining teeth, instead of seven teeth as used in the Linotype, fig. 412, and provision is made for discharging matrices from
- p.419 - vue 523/901
- - 420
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - b -
  - Fig. 397.—Stringertype ; gear for distributing matrices ; magazine mouths. Plan.
  - the bar at every half revolution, or every $ inch, instead of at every revolution of the distributor-screws, or every 1 inch, as usual; this enables a distributor-bar of given length to distribute twice the number of matrices which could be dealt with by the earlier arrangement.
  - The distribution of the different groups of matrices into their respective magazines is effected by means of an oscillating guide pivoted at a, fig. 395, and extending the whole width of the magazines ; it is provided on either side with chutes b and C for receiving and guiding the matrices d to the appropriate channels b’, c’, of their respective magazines, the chutes on one side being staggered relatively to those on the other; this is shown more particularly in fig. 397.
  - The oscillating guide is so correlated with the distributor-screws e, e1, e2 of the distributor as to make one complete stroke for each half-revolution
  - of the distributor-screws and this brings each group of matrix-chutes b, C alternately into the correct position to receive the matrices from the distributor-bar f and to guide them into the respective magazines.
  - With a distributing apparatus for multiple-magazine machines operating as above described, it becomes unnecessary for the matrices belonging to one group to be distinguished from those of the other group otherwise than by the combination of the serrations or teeth engaging with the distributor-bar.
  - It should be noted that in the Stringertype the conditions of matrix circulation differ from those of the Linotype in an important particular. In the Linotype, as soon as the cast has been made the line of matrices is elevated to the distributor, and distribution commences but few seconds after the line is completed and sent forward. In the Stringertype, on the other hand, after the line has been set, each matrix must be cast from separately so that in an ordinary line of, say, sixty matrices, about twenty seconds must elapse before distribution begins ; and whereas, in the Linotype, one magazine-channel of the most frequently used character is in general sufficient, it is necessary in the Stringertype to provide a larger number of matrices to enable uninterrupted composition to proceed while the casting is taking place ; it is this fact which is mainly responsible for the augmentation of magazine capacity which it has been found necessary to make.
- p.420 - vue 524/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND SLUG-CASTING.
  - 421
  - PART II.
  - Machines OF THE LINOTYPE CLASS J CASTING THEIR COMPLETE LINE AT A
  - SINGLE OPERATION OF POURING.
  - 63 673 al e
  - ajl y j^' La JE 1,\ al Je oll 03 MI cox) 83 J 15 Jew ern 06 9)9 44
  - The Koran, chapter XVII, intitled The Night Journey.
  - Composed and cast in Cairo on a Linotype machine in 18-point and 14-point arabic.
  - IN THE NAME OF THE MOST MERCIFUL GOD.
  - Say, Verily if men and genii were purposely assembled, that they might produce a book like this Koran, they could not produce one like unto it, although the one of them assisted the other. Sale’s Translation.
  - Brevier modern.
  - The Linotype machine, figs. 398 to 413, plates LVIII to LXVII.—To the persevering genius of Ottmar Mergenthaler the world owes the Linotype Machine and all its class, for to him belongs the credit of the original idea of a machine that should produce a bar or slug of type from a line of assembled and justified matrices. But the original idea of the Lino-type had its origin in France, for the French patent, No. 285, applied for by " le Sieur Herhan " on the 23 Dec. 1797, with additions made " le 27 brumaire an VII " (17 Nov. 1798), was in the first instance for the Composition in lines of matrices of soft metal struck from steel type which were not hardened, and in its later form for " la composition par matrices movibles." These matrices, made of copper, were set up in page form and stereotyped from direct. Herhan gives the composition of his stereotype-metal as: lead 80 per cent and antimony 20 per cent. In a French patent taken out at about the same time by Firmin Didot the Composition of stereotype-metal is given as: lead 70 per cent, antimony 20 per cent, tin 9 per cent and copper 1 per cent. The tin and copper Were to be melted first and the lead and antimony added subsequently.
  - Though the patent of Herhan may be viewed as the earliest forerunner in idea of the Linotype machine, the cost of the many individual matrices required and the impossibility of pulling proofs, and thus avoiding errors, prevented its practical adoption. It may be also mentioned that years before Mergenthaler made his matrices, the Caslon Type Foundry Patented a method of casting imprints and logotypes, in which single-letter matrices were set and secured together for use on the casting machine. Mergenthaler was probably unaware of these early inventions,
- p.421 - vue 525/901
- - 422 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - which contain principles embodied in the Linotype machine. Nevertheless, all the more credit is due to him because he had long been striving to produce transfer or impression machines and had been working on quite different lines; but when the new idea dawned upon him he cast aside ungrudgingly all his former achievements and started out for the fresh goal well knowing the troubles that would be his lot before he arrived at it. He has had many followers, imitators, and improvers ; his class of machine,
  - Fig. 398.—Linotype ; original machine of 1884, with enlarged views of the multiple-strike matrix-bars used.
  - a machine that casts a slug or line of type from a line of previously assembled and justified matrices at a single operation of casting, is still the most important factor in newspaper printing throughout the world.
  - The Linotype, which was first produced on commercial lines by the Mergenthaler Linotype Company of New York, has been the subject of so much invention, it has played so important a part in the development and production of a great proportion of the newspapers of the day, and it has
- p.422 - vue 526/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND SLUG-CASTING.
  - 423
  - involved the sinking of so large a capital sum that it is really worthy of a volume to itself; several text-books relating to it have already been written. It cannot therefore be dealt with so briefly as the preceding machines, although many interesting features must be here omitted for want of space.
  - The evolution of the Linotype can perhaps be best traced by reference to the series of illustrations of complete machines, beginning with the
  - ff^lJ tar 1 •OI E “-
  - *. eal -
  - FIG. 400.—Linotype ; independent matrix machine of 1885 with blower ; with views of slug, matrix, and wedge-space or space-band.
  - earliest form, fig. 398, in which a characteristic feature is the multiple matrix formed as a long bar—shown enlarged in the figure—with a very great number of strikes, and having as its penultimate that beautiful piece of mechanism known as model 9, fig. 410, plate LXV, with its four matrix-magazines, its four distributors, and its great range of faces.
  - At the top of all modern machines is the distributor-bar, fig. 412, which 1S formed with seven wards interrupted on the following system: the top
- p.423 - vue 527/901
- - 424
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES
  - ward, which may be styled No. I, is alternately tooth and space, the length of tooth corresponding to the pitch of the divisions in the magazine mouths
  - Fig. 402.—Linotype ; square base machine of 1890.
  - 3 * BI
  - 1 FM ’ 58558 ggl E
  - Fig. 404.—Linotype ; single magazine machine, American.
  - immediately below. Ward No. 2 is alternately tooth and space, but the length is double the tooth length of No. 1; similarly No. 3 is alternately
- p.424 - vue 528/901
- - PLATE LVIIL
  - 399.—Linotype; first individual-matrix machine.
  - /
  - /
  - U Y • Nmeeraren tonmmon I
  - 401.—Linotype; blower machine of 1886; introduced in 1889 into England.
  - [To face page 424.
- pl.58 - vue 529/901
- - PLATE LIX.
  - -
  - “w b1
  - Fig. 403.—Linotype ; twin machine, with step line-justification; 1894. To face plate LX.]
- pl.59 - vue 530/901
- - PLATE LX.
  - Fig. 405.—Linotype; single magazine machine ; English.
  - . ik
  - [To face plate LIX.
- pl.60 - vue 531/901
- - PLATE LXI.
  - Fig. 406.—Linotype; double magazine machine ; English model 3.
  - To face plate LXII.]
- pl.61 - vue 532/901
- - PLATE LXII.
  - 9- G
  - Fig. 407.—Linotype; arabic machine, with 180 keys.
  - [To face plate LX* )
- pl.62 - vue 533/901
- - PLATE LXIII.
  - 1
  - i 3 2
  - Fig. 408.—Linotype;
  - To face plate LXIV.]
  - treble magazine machine; English model 4 ; front view.
- pl.63 - vue 534/901
- - PLATE LXIV.
  - 4
  - FIG. 409.—Linotype; treble magazine machine; English model 4; back view.
  - [To face plate LXIII.
- pl.64 - vue 535/901
- - PLATE LXV.
  - 1
  - 4
  - Fig. 410.—Linotype; quadruple magazine machine; model 9 ; English and A merican.
  - To face plate LXVI.]
- pl.65 - vue 536/901
- - PLATE LXVI.
  - Fig. 411.—Linotype; model 10; English and American.
  - [To face plate LXV.
- pl.66 - vue 537/901
- - PLATE LXVII.
  - Fig. 413.—Linotype ; matrix distribution; perspective view. To face page 425.]
- pl.67 - vue 538/901
- - Pairs of corresponding teeth are removed, and that combination only is re-tained which corresponds to the wards removed from the rack at the point at Which it is desired that the matrix should fall ; fig. 413, plate LXVII. The
  - 0
  - %
  - 8
  - %
  - &
  - on
  - %
  - Released, at sections of bar through 1,2.
  - 2
  - The parts removed • are shown black above
  - Cross
  - Section.
  - 8
  - 0
  - 5 Ins.
  - FIG. 412.—Linotype ; distributor-bar and matrices. The arrangement of distributor-bar and magazine mouths with matrices in process of distribution is shown in fig. 413, plate LXVII.
  - tooth and space for four times the tooth length of No. I, and generally No. n is 2"1 times the pitch of the magazine mouths. Each matrix is formed in the blank with seven teeth on each side of the top V-nick ; one or more
  - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND SLUG-CASTING.
  - 425
- p.425 - vue 539/901
- - 426
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - arrangement on each side of the V is symmetrical. The matrices of the characters which are most used travel the shortest distance, return soonest to the magazine, and the keys releasing them are most conveniently placed together under the operator’s left hand. The order of release, detail of the distributor-bar, and detail of some of the matrices are shown in fig. 412, and the
  - .
  - Continuously revolving shafts
  - Fig. 414.—Linotype : matrix-liberating gear. Scale: half size.
  - c. Cam.
  - k. Key.
  - m. Matrix.
  - q. Cam-carrier.
  - S.S2. Roller-shafts.
  - Vr. Lower verge-rod.
  - V2. Upper verge-rod.
  - W. Escapement.
  - keyboard in fig. 277, p. 294. The matrices in the magazine are retained by an escapement w, fig. 414, which is freed on the depression of the key k. The key does not effect this directly, but releases a cam-carrier q, which permits the cam c to be driven by one of two roller-shafts S1, S2 which are kept revolving one in front of and one behind the lower verge-rods 71 which are raised by the depression of the keys. As long as the key remains depressed, the cam will roll on the roller and cause the upper verge-rod 12 to reciprocate vertically and release a matrix successively at each stroke.
- p.426 - vue 540/901
- p.n.n. - vue 541/901
- - PLATE LXVIII.
  - Fig. 415.—Linotype ; composed line of single-letter matrices ready for casting the slug.
  - FIG. 416.—Linotype ; composed line of two-letter matrices, casting part of the line in roman and part in italic.
  - To face page 427.]
- pl.68 - vue 542/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND SLUG-CASTING. 427
  - A very light touch of the key is sufficient, the power-drive completing the release. The matrices, as they fall, travel in a curved path from the magazine, which slopes downwards and forwards, into the guide-box in which the left-hand grooves are nearly vertical, and the right-hand grooves rudimentary; these are supplemented by a continuously-running belt to assist the matrices to the star-wheel. The star-wheel, of fibre, pushes the matrices through a set of pawls. In falling past the star-wheel the matrix was apt to hit against the last in the line and to damage the sharp edge at the strike. To obviate this, one corner has been cut away, and this has greatly increased the life of the matrices. The completed line of matrices is shown in fig. 415, plate LXVIII. Many matrices are now made with two faces ; when the second face is used, the lower side-tongues of the matrices travel in a groove at a higher level until the casting has been effected, fig. 416, plate LXVIII. The line is measured directly by the total length of the group of matrices. As in other composing machines the operator is warned by a bell, set about five ems before the end, when the line is nearly full; the length set must be short to allow for the spaces filling out the line. Between each word a distensible space-matrix, or space-band, is dropped; this has no teeth, consequently it is not elevated to the distributor-bar at the top of the machine, but goes direct to its own magazine. The space-band, fig. 201, p. 231, consists of two main opposing wedge-shaped pieces dovetailed together, yet sliding freely and fitting sufficiently well to avoid trouble from metal getting between the two parts. The line having been set up, the other parts of the machine come into operation when the operator depresses the handle which raises the composed line of matrices and starts the cycle of operations.
  - At the back of the machine is a cam-shaft carrying nine cams ; this shaft is belt-driven through the intervention of an internal expanding clutch. The clutch is thrown out of gear in the event of any accident Jamming parts of the machine; if too short a line to fill the measure should be composed the machine goes through all the operations except that the pump does not make its stroke and consequently no line is cast; if, on the other hand, the compositor should deliver too long a line of matrices a cut-out or safety stop comes into action and throws out the clutch. These and other safeguards render the machine practically fool-proof—a very necessary precaution—not only to avoid risk of damage by a learner, but because the expert operator, once he has composed a line depressed the lever, immediately begins the composition of the next line, and does not watch the line which he has set through the successive operations of casting and trimming, nor does he follow the matrices in the elevator and distributor.
  - The following is the sequence of movements made by the Linotype : a line of matrices having been assembled, it is raised by means of a lever, and passes into the delivery carriage, which carries it into the first elevator. n the following description the figures in parentheses denote the cams
- p.427 - vue 543/901
- - 428
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - actuating the lever or other member, counting from left to right along the cam-shaft at the back of the machine.
  - The first elevator descends (i); simultaneously the mould-wheel makes a quarter revolution (2), turning from the ejecting to the casting position : see fig. 419, plate LXIX ; the matrices are now in front of the mould. The mould-wheel now comes forward (8) and engages the matrices, the alining lugs of the latter passing under the alining edge of the mould, but it does not make complete contact. The vice-closing lever rises (3), allowing a spring to seat, which in so doing turns a screw which sets the vice-block to the correct size of the line. The first line-justification lever rises (4), pushing up the spaces successively from right to left in an inclined position, fig. 417, plate LXIX. Meanwhile, the delivery carriage has returned to the position of rest (9). The first line-justification lever having descended (4), pressure is also now removed from the end of the line by the vice lever returning to the position of rest (3). The first elevator now slightly rises (1), causing the matrices to aline along the edge of the mould. The metal-pot, fig. 418, plate LXIX, now makes a temporary forward movement the object of which is to press the mould against the matrix line to ensure face alinement. The pot having dropped back, the vice lever again rises (3), allowing the spring-controlled vice-block to determine the correct length of line. Both the first (4) and second (3) line-justification levers now rise simultaneously, and push the space-bands up evenly. The pot again advances (7), and is tightly pressed against the back of the mould ; the plunger descends (6), forcing the molten metal into the mould and matrices. The plunger having returned, the pressure on the bottom of the matrices caused by the first elevator is withdrawn, the line-justification and vice levers return to the position of rest, and the pot and mould-wheel retreat (8), leaving the slug in the mould. The mould-wheel now completes its revolution by making a three-quarter turn (2), fig. 419. plate LXIX, during which the back of the mould passes over a knife which trims off the superfluous metal, fig. 240, p. 265, including the retaining bars. The mould-wheel now advances (8) on to two steady-pins, the mould being in front of two parallel trimming-knives, through which the slug is forced by an ejector-blade (8), which pushes the slug from the mould, fig. 237, plate XIV, and thence through the knives into the galley at the front of the machine, fig. 419, plate LXIX, the ejector-lever being returned by (9). Meanwhile, the first elevator (1) has carried the line of matrices upwards to the intermediate channel, where it is met by the second elevator (5). The first matrix-pusher (9) now transfers the line of matrices from the first elevator to the second elevator. The pusher having tempo' rarily receded, the elevators return to their position of rest. Meanwhile, the first matrix-pusher, acting in conjunction with the space-shifter (9), again advances and causes the space-bands to be gathered by the space-shifter, which returns them to their receptacle at the right-hand end of the intermediate channel. In the meantime, the line of matrices has been pushed
- p.428 - vue 544/901
- - PLATE LXIX.
  - DISTRIBUTOR
  - PUMP
  - MELTING
  - [To face page 428.]
  - SPACSS
  - MOULD
  - EJECTOR
  - GALLEY
  - Fig. 419.—Linotype; ejector, mould wheel and galley.
  - 5 g
  - 2
  - 2
  - s
  - E
  - R
  - POT
  - M
  - 3 O
  - C < o
  - 1
  - K
  - B
  - GAS
  - 424 st
  - It
  - 81 le
  - 5
  - Fig. 417.—Linotype ; path of matrices.
  - COMPOSED
  - MATRICES
  - TYPE META
  - FIG. 418.—Linotype ; metal-pot, pump and mould.
- pl.69 - vue 545/901
- - PLATE LXX.
  - Fig. 421.—Linotype ; double magazine ; arrangement of escapements and shift-key.
  - To face page 429.]
  - go
- pl.70 - vue 546/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND SLUG-CASTING.
  - 429
  - by the second matrix-pusher (2) from the second elevator into the lift-box, where the matrices are lifted, one at a time, so that each successive
  - matrix is engaged by three distributor-screws, and passes on to the distributor-bar, fig. 412, p. 425, along which it travels, by means of the revolving screws engaging with the lugs. The matrices are suspended from the distributor-bar by their teeth, and when each arrives at that portion of the bar from which this particular combination of teeth has been removed, it falls between guides and passes back into the magazine. The path of the matrices through the machine is shown in fig. 417, plate LXIX.
  - The Linotype is driven usually by belting; the main-shaft carrying the clutch runs at about 72 revolutions per minute and the cam-shaft at about 6’5 revolutions per minute. About
  - 0'3 horse-power is required to run the machine ; the maximum torque is required when making the upstroke of the pump.
  - The mould and the body-trimming knives may be specially arranged so that when a suitable matrix is used the type can be kerned, or can beard, below the body-size, the kerned, or bearded, portion being entirely formed in the matrix. This is used to form the two-line letter used in newspapers at the commencement of advertisements. The beginning of the succeeding line must be set with two or more Quads so as to provide the clearance for the kern, or the exact length may be obtained by using the two-line matrix reversed. A portion of a slug commencing with a two-line letter is shown in fig. 420.
  - The two-line and other large matrices are
  - Fig. 420.— Linotype ; two-line letter. Twice full size.
  - formed without nicks, and
  - consequently are not elevated to the distributor-bar ; they drop into a tray near the space-magazine. Matrices for accented and special sorts have a complete set of nicks and drop from the end of the distributor-bar to the pie-tray on the right of the machine.
  - In the model 4 English and model 9 machines the magazines may be arranged so as to take matrices for two-line letters, up to 36-point. In the
  - case of the larger bodies the matrix carries only a single strike, the back of the character corresponding to the back of the lower character carried by a two-letter matrix; consequently such matrix is used in the raised position when composed, unless a mould of suitably large body is being used.
  - The rate of output of the Linotype machine is generally taken at a minimum of 6000 ens per hour, this representing the normal rate of an average compositor. Under good conditions, however, the compositor averages from 8000 to 10,000 ens. Under special conditions a very expert
- p.429 - vue 547/901
- - 430
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - operator is capable of greatly exceeding this speed. It is recorded that in a competition lasting for two hours, held in 1900 in the United States, between thirty-six operators, the winner attained the remarkable speed of over 17,200 ens per hour, and the lowest speed attained by any competitor was over 12,000 ens per hour.
  - To avoid confusion between the various models of Linotype machines which are, generally speaking, numbered differently in England and in America, it should be noted that :—
  - The first independent-matrix commercial machine is identical with that known in England as the blower machine, fig. 400, p. 423.
  - Following the square-base machine, figs. 402 and 404, p. 424, in both countries came the star base, which has since remained standard.
  - The next decisive step in the change of pattern was the introduction of the light, quick-change magazine, the outstanding feature of which was that the change was effected from the front of the machine ; the machines embodying this feature are American model 5 and English model 2, both of which are single-magazine machines ; fig. 405, plate LX.
  - Then followed the provision of two superimposed magazines with two distributing mechanisms; these features appear in American model 4 and in English model 3 ; fig. 406, plate LXI.
  - The next important step was the provision of an equipment of three magazines with a common distributing mechanism ; the machines so fitted are American model 8 and English model 4; figs. 408 and 409, plates LXIII and LXIV.
  - Following this came the four-magazine machines with four distributors, which are model 9 both in America and in England ; fig. 410, plate LXV.
  - A still later machine is known as model 10 in both countries. The differences between this and the standard models are that it holds one magazine at a time only, that the magazines are smaller with shorter channels, and that each holds fourteen instead of twenty matrices, but with two channels for e and an automatic change of channel at each line delivery ; fig. 411, plate LXVI.
  - The Linotype single-magazine machine, fig. 405, plate LX.—By a recent improvement the single-magazine Linotype can be arranged to take one of several interchangeable magazines, and may have two moulds fitted diametrically opposite each other in the mould-wheel. This enables the machine to be changed very quickly for face and to be operated on two different body-sizes without changing the mould.
  - The double-magazine Linotype is shown in fig. 406, plate LXI. Double-magazine machines are now in general use. There are two magazines which are placed one above the other ; the lower magazine has its escapement below, as shown in fig. 421, plate LXX ; the upper
- p.430 - vue 548/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND SLUG-CASTING.
  - 431
  - magazine has its escapement above, with separate upper verge-rods. By means of a lever on the right of the keyboard either series of verge-rods can be thrown into gear, the lever performing a similar function to the shift-key on typewriters ; thus any portion or portions of a line may be set in matrices from the upper magazine and the remainder from the lower magazine. Each magazine may contain two-letter matrices so that, with a keyboard of ninety keys, a total of 360 characters can be obtained. The return of the matrices to their respective magazines is effected by means of a central notch in the bottom of those matrices which belong to the upper magazine, fig. 181, p. 222. The matrices, after leaving the arm or second elevator, are received on a short rail, and those without notches engage with the lower distributor-bar, while the notched matrices straddle this short rail, travel between guides below the top ears, and drop sufficiently to clear below the lower distributor-bar ; they then fall into an elevating device which transfers them to their own distributor-box above the other. The return of the matrix to its proper place in its own magazine is therefore perfectly automatic. The magazines can be thrown backwards and raised clear of the escapements at the front end by means of an arrangement of levers; in this position they can be changed very quickly.
  - The American or Mergenthaler Linotype machine has the same difference in the matrices, but the notched matrix in this case falls down a chute to its distributor-box and enters the lower magazine. The escapement of the upper magazine is below, and that of the lower magazine is above. Thus in the American machine the additional magazine has been added below, and in the English machine above, the original position. With the American arrangement the lower magazine can be changed while the machine is being operated with the upper magazine in use.
  - These machines, known as model 3 in England and model 4 in America, comprise a number of improvements for facilitating, in particular, access to the mould-wheel and to the trimming-knives.
  - In the Linotype machine adapted to use the arabic character, fig. 407, plate LXII, there are two distributor-bars, and a corresponding increase in the number of distributor-screws, of which there are four as in model 3 instead of three as in the machines with only a single distribut-ing mechanism.
  - By special alterations in model 3 Linotype machine it has been made possible to carry out the composition of Arabic and other oriental anguages. The keyboard has twelve rows of keys in place of the usual SIX rows, and matrices of a single-letter fount are distributed into the Channels of the two magazines. The galley of the machine is of special construction, and So arranged that the completed slugs are delivered in column from left to right instead of in the usual order; the arrangement Which effects this is shown in fig. 407, plate LXII. In this machine the tribution is carried out in a special manner : the matrices from the two
- p.431 - vue 549/901
- - 432
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - magazines are automatically sorted and replaced in the magazine channels to which they belong by means of a duplicate distributor-bar; the mould can also be made of a special form for casting recessed slugs, and by this means slugs up to 36-point can be produced with only a small portion of the metal which would be required for the solid slug.
  - The recess mould when used for setting bodies not larger than 12 or 14-point may also be used to effect a considerable saving in metal.
  - Model 4 Linotype machine (English), like the other models, is capable of using the two-letter matrix, and can be made either as a simplex, duplex, or triplex machine ; that is, it can be provided with one, two, or three magazines with their matrix equipment, the arrangement being such that the machine can be increased in capacity progressively from simplex to duplex or to triplex, as may be required, by the addition of the extra magazines ; the same applies to American model 8.
  - The main feature of the design of this machine is the facilitation of quick-changing from one fount to another, the three magazines being retained in position, in the triplex machine, ready for operation at the will of the compositor who effects the change from one magazine to another by merely raising or depressing a hand-lever. The magazines are counterbalanced by means of a spring so that the operation of shifting them from one position to another can be effected with the minimum of effort. The change of the mould and the setting of the knives for effecting an alteration in type-body and measure can be made in the time required for the distribution of the matrices of the last line composed into their proper magazine. With this machine it is possible for the operator to make a complete change of face, body, and measure in a few seconds without leaving his seat.
  - The two upper magazines are of the light quick-change pattern, and can be easily removed by sliding forward on to the hooks, whence they can be lifted off by hand, and other similar light magazines substituted in their place if it is desired to make a further change of fount.
  - The range of these machines in body is from 5-point to 14-point, and the length of line ranges from 4 to 30 pica ems.
  - Among the improvements introduced into this model of machine are : an automatic knife-block for adjusting the trimming-knives by means of a hand-lever with an index-gauge ; a quick-change driving pinion for enabling the mould-wheel to be turned to any desired position ; a chute for convey-ing the metal chips from the back knife to a box at the base of the machine , and a quadder for the automatic quadding out of short lines without necessitating the use of the quad and space keys. In addition to the above an alteration has been made in the keyboard by carrying the space-key across the top of the board to give greater speed in composition ; the keyboard-rollers have also been geared. Improvements have been made in the metal-pot which is fitted with three independent gas-jets at the front, centre, and rear respectively, and the gas-supply is fitted with a mercury governor
- p.432 - vue 550/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND SLUG-CASTING.
  - 433
  - which allows the gas to be turned on fully without affecting the temperature for which the adjustment has been made. The galley, in front of the first elevator, has been improved so as to enable the compositor to see the slugs as they are delivered, and in addition to these modifications some minor improvements have been made in the assembling-slide and in the copy-holder.
  - All the upper magazines are standardized and interchangeable so that they can be placed upon or removed from the machine without adjustment.
  - For preventing matrices from falling into the lower magazine when the upper one is in use a plate is fitted covering the open space, so that any matrices fall into a tray instead of into the magazine below.
  - Model 9 four-magazine quick-change Linotype.--This machine, fig. 410, Plate XLV, presents the latest improvements on previous models of the Linotype, and is equipped with four interchangeable superimposed magazines, any one of which can instantly be brought into operation, and all of which are controlled from the standard Linotype keyboard of ninety keys; as each matrix is of the two-letter pattern, it follows that it is possible to compose any of 720 different characters from the one keyboard, and in addition to this any character of infrequent use may be set into the matrix line by hand, and will, after casting, automatically return to the pie-box.
  - Any face can be set continuously or all the faces can be mixed in the same line of composition, so that an operator can set complete display advertising work involving several different styles and sizes of face and body and varying measures without leaving his seat. As in model 4 described above, the magazines are interchangeable and can be quickly removed and replaced by others, so that the range of styles and faces can be increased as desired, the only limitation being the total range of faces available for use on the Linotype. The mould-wheel carries four moulds. The universal ejector and universal knife-block which are fitted to this model are instantly adjustable for all bodies and measures.
  - A single assembling-belt transfers matrices from any of the various maga-Zines to the assembling-elevator ; by swinging the front entrance open the assembling-mechanism becomes accessible. In this model the magazines themselves remain stationary, instead of being movable, as in model 4. Each magazine is provided with a series of escapements for controlling the delivery of its matrices ; the escapements of all four magazines are actuated by a single series of escapement-rods mounted in a frame, each rod having four notches in its edge. The escapement-rods are raised or lowered by shifting the hand-lever so that their upper ends are connected with the escapements of the particular magazine desired. The same move-ment of the handle couples these rods, through one of the series of notches, to the key-rods, and thus connects them with the usual keyboard mechanism. Both the magazine and the mould which are being used at the time are shown by indexes plainly visible to the operator. The cards of these
  - 2 F
- p.433 - vue 551/901
- - 434
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - pond sheen JIDAUIDCIDADC JIDGDUTDIDI
  - umbupumnumOID -HCOBBE
  - ISf^BII
  - ARABI 01
  - SI be
  - 2
  - I
  - HP WB: !!!
  - st st 2 lii EE
  - BA I I
  - Fig. 423.—Linotype ; embroidery block.
  - RHI HX XK
  - IB.
  - Hi H + H A
- p.434 - vue 552/901
- p.n.n. - vue 553/901
- - PLATE LXXI.
  - [To face page 435.]
  - and 9; escapement mechanism.
  - Fig. 422.—Linotype; models 4
  - m
  - O
  - O
  - Co
  - r. Escapement pawls.
  - . Escapement plunger guide-wires.
  - %. Escapement division-fixing wires.
  - d.
  - e.
  - IT
  - h.
  - k.
  - 1.
  - Escapement plunger guide-wires.
  - Escapement levers.
  - Escapement levers pivot-wire.
  - Wires fixing divisions between escapement levers.
  - Divisions between escapement levers.
  - Position of poker when machine is in operation.
  - Wires fixing divisions between escapement levers.
  - Escapement levers poker (in locked position).
  - Escapement-spring bar.
  - m. Escapement-spring locking-wire.
  - n. Escapement pawl-springs.
  - o. Escapement division-fixing wire.
  - p. Escapement pawl-links.
  - I. r. s. t. u.
  - V.
  - W.
  - Escapement pawl-links pivot-wire.
  - Escapement divisions.
  - Escapement plunger stop-piece.
  - Escapement plungers.
  - Distance-washer for divisions between levers.
  - Escapement levers stop-wire.
  - Escapement tumblers worked by key-rods.
  - Escapement tumblers pivot-wire.
  - Key-rod.
- pl.71 - vue 554/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND SLUG-CASTING. 435 indexes are changed by the compositor to correspond to the different magazines or moulds on the machine.
  - Any magazine can be removed by one man from the front of the machine without disturbing the other magazines, and it can be replaced by another containing a different fount of matrices, for each magazine is independently carried. The matrices are automatically locked in the channels, so that there is no danger of their falling out when the magazine is removed. The front entrance can be opened and closed without disturbing any adjustments, and the machine is ready for immediate use as soon as it is closed. The entire operation of changing the magazine can be performed by the operator in less than one minute. The four different kinds of matrices are selected and conveyed to their respective magazines by means of small bridges which engage with notches in the base of the matrix. Three different notches being required to differentiate between the different founts, it is of course necessary to alter the position of the respective bridge or selector to correspond to the fount to be distributed to any magazine which is changed.
  - The escapement for matrices in models 4 and 9 Linotype machines is not carried entirely on the framing of the machine as in the earlier models, but the escapement proper forms part of the magazine itself, while the escapement-operating gear is carried on the key-rod frames. The arrangement of the matrix-escapement and of the escapement-operating gear is shown in fig. 422, plate LXXI.
  - Figure 423 illustrates the flexibility of composing machines, a flexibility which is in some respects limited only by the matrices available. This particular example is from the Linotype, and, of course, cast in Slug. Specimens of similar work from individual-type machines might Perhaps, in the matter of their correction, afford greater facilities of altera-tion after setting, but, as above stated, the real limit in every instance IS merely the variety and supply of matrices.
  - The Dougall Linotype, fig. 424.—This machine was a Canadian inven-tion, and has been built and successfully operated. The authors are authoritatively informed that it was a very handy and practical machine. The machine differed but little from the Linotype in general appearance, but the line of matrices when assembled was rotated about a vertical axis before presentation in front of the mould occupying a position at right angles to that of composition. After the cast had been completed, the line of matrices was again rotated through a right angle to its original Position, and then transferred to the distributing mechanism. The mould was not carried upon a mould-wheel proper, but upon a lever arm which had a reciprocating angular movement through 900 instead of making a complete rotation as in the case of the Linotype. Any advantages which this machine may have had depended upon its more compact form and greater simplicity rather than upon any organic differ-ence from its great prototype.
- p.435 - vue 555/901
- - 436
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The authors understand that this machine came under the control of the Linotype Company and was withdrawn from the market.
  - The Victorline, fig. 425, plate LXXII.—This machine closely resembled the Linotype two-letter single-magazine machine, but comprised some
  - Fig. 424.—Dougall Linotype.
  - ©
  - as
  - special features. To facilitate changing the magazine this was so arranged as to swing to one side and to be capable of being tilted. The keyboard comprised thirteen additional keys. Water-channels were provided for circulating water through the mould-wheel and round the mould-blocks. Several minor improvements were claimed in respect to the matrix-rail, the
- p.436 - vue 556/901
- - PLATE LXXII.
  - The be
  - Fig. 425.— Victorline; general view.
  - [To face page 436.
- pl.72 - vue 557/901
- - PLATE LXXIII.
  - Ere
  - or 1 1
  - To face plate LXXIV.]
  - Fig. 426.— Intertype ; general view.
- pl.73 - vue 558/901
- - PLATE LXXIV.
  - Fig. 427 .—Linograph; general view.
  - [To face plate LXXIII.
- pl.74 - vue 559/901
- - PLATE LXXV.
  - r. Fount distinguisher.
  - 2. Elevator-mechanism
  - case.
  - 3. Upper line-carrier-slide.
  - 4. Matrix-carrier.
  - 5. Matrix-cage.
  - 6. Justifying-space magazine.
  - 7. Hollow temporary space.
  - 8. Elevator.
  - 9. Side-trimming knives.
  - 10. Tilting shelf.
  - II. Slug chute.
  - 12. Galley.
  - 13. Waste-box.
  - 14. Left pillar.
  - 15. Matrix-separator.
  - 16. Matrix-distributing pins.
  - 17. Matrix-distributor bell-cranks.
  - 18. Pie-matrix gate.
  - 19. Matrix-distributor and switches.
  - 20. Matrix-magazine.
  - 21. Matrix-gatherer.
  - 22. Assembler star-wheel.
  - 23. Keyboard.
  - 24. Space lever.
  - 25. Cancel-key.
  - 26. Right pillar.
  - 27. Control lever.
  - ^ Das
  - 11 5
  - B.
  - - —- W , Toe
  - -7
  - at
  - FIG. 428.—Bellows or Electric compositor ; front view.
- pl.75 - vue 560/901
- p.n.n. - vue 561/901
- - PLATE LXXVL
  - Fig. 429.—Bellows or Electric compositor ; back view.
  - To face page 437.]
  - 1 “hasagis
  - s eg
  - 5
  - I. Matrix-distributor segments.
  - 2. Pie-matrix chute.
  - 3. Matrix-escapement wheel.
  - 4. Release rods.
  - 5. Pie-matrix sortstray.
  - 6. Pie-matrix box.
  - 7. Justifier.
  - 8. Gas-governor.
  - 9. Ejecting mechanism.
  - 10. Metal-pot.
- pl.76 - vue 562/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND SLUG-CASTING.
  - 437
  - vice-jaw, the locking gear for the keyboard, and the release of the mould-wheel. The Victorline machine and plant were acquired by the Mergen-thaler Setzmaschinen-Fabrik shortly after it made its appearance.
  - The Intertype, fig. 426, plate LXXIII.—Like the Victorline, this machine closely resembles the two-letter, single-magazine Linotype. The matrices, space-bands, and other supply parts are interchangeable with those of the Linotype, and the constructors have given special attention to speed of operating. It is claimed that the magazine can be changed by the operator in twenty seconds ; that the act of removing the magazine locks the matrices at the front and back of the magazine and at the same time locks the keyboard and verge-rods. The knife-block and vice-jaws can be operated from the compositor’s seat and the mould is universal and adjustable. It is also claimed that the transferring of the matrices at all points has been simplified and that the cut-outs prevent the casting of a tight or loose line, with the resulting splash. It appears to be virtually a copy of American model 5 Linotype.
  - The Linograph, fig. 427, plate LXXIV, is of American origin, and closely resembles the Linotype machine, from which, however, it differs m the arrangement of the magazine, which is vertical in the Linograph as in the early models of the Linotype instead of inclined, as in the Linotype in its present forms. The distribution is the same as in the Linotype, but the line is transferred directly from the elevator to the distributor-box, and the spacers are separated from the matrices in the distributor-box before the matrices are elevated to the distributor-bar. The magazine-channels are designed to hold twelve matrices, two channels being provided for the most frequently-used letters, the release being effected from each of the two alternative channels by means of the same finger-key.
  - The Bellows compositor, figs. 428 and 429, plates LXXV and LXXVI, 18 the invention of B. F. Bellows of Cleveland, Ohio, and is a slug-casting machine using electro-magnets with a mechanically calculated justification employing non-distensible space-matrices; distribution is effected by combinations of holes in the matrices which serve for their distribution to the magazine. The machine is now manufactured by the Electric Compositor Company of New York.
  - In its present form the Bellows compositor only uses electric power for the driving motor and for the signal light which indicates the line length; the machine, however, can be driven from any suitable source of power and the signal light replaced by the bell which is usual on other machines.
  - The operations of composing, line-justifying, and slug-casting are performed in the following manner :—
  - The control lever 27, fig. 428, is connected to the rheostat controlling the driving motor, and used for starting and stopping the machine. The base is formed with a space between its two pillars so that the operator
- p.437 - vue 563/901
- - 438 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - can sit at the keyboard, as if it were that of a typewriter on a table. The keyboard 23, fig. 428, comprises 128 keys and a space-bar and lever; one of the keys is used for disposing of the line of matrices. The lay-out of the keyboard is similar to that of the Linotype, with the exception that the two top rows of keys are used for small capitals or titling letters. The key-buttons are fastened to straight levers which rest under the release rods, 4, fig. 429, which are in turn connected to a four-pointed star-wheel escapement mechanism, 3, fig. 429, in such a manner that the depression of a key-lever causes the star-wheel to make a quarter of a revolution and allows one matrix to be dropped from the magazine, 20, fig. 428. The matrix-release mechanism is not mechanically controlled as in the Linotype, but it is stated to be operated by a light touch.
  - As the matrices are released they drop into the gatherer, 21, fig. 428, where they are carried to the assembler star-wheel, 22, fig. 428, and formed into the line. The depression of the space-bar or lever, 24, fig. 428, permits a hollow temporary space, 7, fig. 428, to be dropped into the line. An assembled line of matrices and the slug cast for the matrices are shown in fig. 207, plate XI. Six temporary spaces are provided, and, should more than six spaces be required in the line, the space-bar or lever is automatically connected to the matrix-magazine and causes a normal space or en quad to be dropped into the line for each extra matrix. The range of the machine is such that it can compose any length from zero to five inches.
  - The operator continues the composition until the line has attained a sufficient length for justification, when a signal light, on the top of the keyboard, shows him that the line is nearly complete. When the line is ready for casting the compositor depresses the line-key (the centre key of the second row from the top of the keyboard), and the machine automatically proceeds with the line-justification permitting the operator to commence the composition of a new line almost immediately. The compositor has no calculation to make, but only has to watch for the signal light. The depression of the line-key puts in motion the mechanism for measuring the length of the line and transmits this measurement to the justifier, 7, fig. 429. By means of another star-wheel escapement, space or blank matrices of the proper number and size are selected and released from the space-magazine, 6, fig. 428. The space-matrices are carried to their respective places by rectangular tubes connected to the temporary spaces, 7, fig. 428; the temporary space-matrices are then withdrawn vertically from the line of matrices and returned to their normal place over the assembler star-wheel, leaving the justifying space-matrices in the line which is then carried horizontally to the left and into the elevator, 8, fig. 428, where it remains until after the cast, when it is delivered to the upper line carrier-slide, 3, fig. 428.
  - The horizontal water-cooled mould is then brought by a reciprocating movement into alinement with the matrices on one side and with the
- p.438 - vue 564/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND SLUG-CASTING.
  - 439
  - metal-pot, io, fig. 429, on the other; both the line of the matrices and the metal-pot are locked against the mould, and the pump-plunger makes its stroke. After the cast has been made the metal-pot and the elevator are both withdrawn from the mould, which is moved past a knife, for trimming the bottom of the slug, to the ejecting mechanism, 9, fig. 429; the slug is here pushed out of the mould, through the side-trimming knives, 9, fig. 428, on to the tilting shelf, 10, fig. 428, which drives it down the slug-chute, II, fig. 428, and on to the galley, 12, fig. 428, ready for the imposing-stone.
  - When the elevator has been released from the mould the chain causes it to ascend to the upper line-carrier slide, 3, fig. 428, where the carrier, 4> fig. 428, receives the line of matrices and takes them through the fount-distinguisher, 1, fig. 428, to the separator, 15, fig. 428, where the matrices are pushed one at a time into the matrix-cage, 5, fig. 428.
  - The matrix-cage presents the matrices singly against the distributing pins, 16, fig. 428, of which there are eight pairs. The illustration of the matrix, fig. 207, plate XI, shows that there are eight holes in each matrix, and that opposite to each hole there is a blank space. As the matrix is presented against the pins one pin of each pair enters the hole, and is moved forward by the other pin which is pushed backward by the blank part of the matrix ; this gives a possible motion to eight bell-cranks, 17, fig. 428, and these in turn operate the segments, 1, fig. 429, connected to the various gates which act as switches to the channels of the distributor. The first or top hole in the matrix operates a segment controlling one gate, the second hole operates a segment controlling two gates, the third hole a segment controlling four gates, and so on, so that the eighth hole controls 128 gates, which are capable of being moved from side to side according to the position of the hole and the blank in the matrix; the number of combinations possible for one hole is 2, and for n holes is 2", hence in the present case the total possible number of combinations is 28 or 256 ; seven holes would actually be sufficient for the 128 keys provided.
  - The presentation of the matrix against the pins sets the gates so that there is a continuous channel open for the matrix; the matrix-cage, 5, fig. 428, now recedes from the pins a sufficient distance to allow the matrix to clear, and to pass down the channel to its proper place in either the space-magazine or the matrix-magazine, 6 or 20, fig. 428. The matrices are given an initial acceleration as they leave the cage, the speed of distribution being at the rate of 300 per minute. The completion of the distribution terminates the sequence of operations started by the operator’s touch on the line-key. The distributor, 19, fig. 428, the justifying-space magazine, 6, fig. 428, and the matrix-gatherer, 21, fig. 428, each have hinged glass fronts; the matrix-magazine, 20, fig. 428, is made of aluminium alloy, and is designed on symmetrical lines.
  - Accessibility of detail has been made a feature of the design of the machine which has been divided into a number of units, each of which
- p.439 - vue 565/901
- - 440
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - is really a small machine in itself, and these small machines are so connected as to synchronize with each other. These units also have each been made accessible to permit of adjustments or replacements being easily made and to reduce the cost of manufacture and assembly. Most of the moving parts, including the motor, the casting and the ejecting mechanism, are housed in the left pillar of the machine, 14, fig. 428; the elevator mechanism is enclosed in a case, 2, fig. 428, and the line-justifying mechanism is also enclosed in a case, 7, fig. 429. These casings are useful for protecting the parts from external injury and from dust or other foreign matter, besides serving to retain oil and grease where lubrication is required.
  - The casting mechanism contains some special features, amongst these being the end-clamp, which is a spring-actuated slide of the same width as the matrices and rather more than five inches in length; this clamp follows the matrices into the elevator just before the casting is effected. The principal advantage of this device is to quad out or make blank the last portion of a line ; this portion being any length from zero to five inches. This usually obviates any possible trouble with long or short lines, and enables the machine to cast blank slugs without composing a line of quad or space matrices. The right-hand end of the slug, shown in fig. 207, plate XI, and the slug preceding the tabular matter in fig. 255, plate XIV, were automatically made blank by this device. The construction of the justifier is such that spaces of equal size are supplied in any line which does not require any modification of length after justification.
  - The mould is water-jacketed and universal; it produces slugs with smooth sides except for the holes shown in fig. 255, plate XIV ; the slugs are cast without ribs to permit them to be used in conjunction with loose type ; the pins remain in the slug until it is ejected and ensure uniform height-to-paper. When it is desired to cast repetitions of a line of matter, of a line of blanks, of borders, of dashes, or of kindred work, the mechanism can be controlled so that the repetition is effected without distribution.
  - The metal-pot is capable of containing about sixty pounds of type-metal, and is heated by Bunsen burners which are controlled by a gas-governor, 8, fig. 429. It is stated that the delivery of the metal from the pot and the peculiar method adopted for venting are such as to produce a very homogeneous and clean-cast slug.
  - The machine is stated to be capable of running for several weeks without filling the waste-box, 13, fig. 428, which catches all the trimmings. The side-trimming knives are controlled by a quick-change device so as to cover all sizes of slugs within the scope of the machine, and also to be capable of dealing with the overhung two-line letter which commences many short advertisements.
  - The matrix-magazine containing a full fount of matrices weighs about forty pounds, and can readily be changed by interlocking it and sliding it a few inches to the right ; the right pillar of the machine, 26, fig. 428,
- p.440 - vue 566/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND SLUG-CASTING. 44
  - can be used for the storage of three magazines. It is stated that a change of magazine can be effected in thirty seconds.
  - The standard matrices are made from the smallest size up to 14-point ; they are of brass and measure one-half inch by fifteen-sixteenths of an inch. The depth of the strike is 0’060 inch from the face of the matrix; distinguisher cuts are made on the reference-letter side of the matrix for distinguishing the fount to which each belongs. Each fount of matrices, regardless of size or face, carries its own combination of distinguisher cuts, and the fount-distinguisher, 1, fig. 428, can be set so that only the particular fount for which it is set will pass it.
  - The magazine contains 127 characters, but as many extra sorts as may be desired may be run as pie-matrices. The pie-matrices carry the combination of holes for opening the pie-matrix gate, 18, fig. 428 ; this allows them to pass down the pie-matrix chute, 2, fig. 429, into the pie-matrix box, 6, fig. 429. The pie-matrices are distributed by hand into the pie-matrix sorts-tray, 5, fig. 429.
  - In the process of composition pie-matrices are inserted by hand either at the top of the matrix-gatherer belt or at the assembler.
  - The space-matrices resemble the character-matrices except for the absence of the character-strike in the face. It is claimed that the use of solid space-matrices gives a longer life to the character-matrices, because of the absence of sliding motion under pressure which occurs where space-bands are used. Moreover, a set of solid space-matrices can be supplied for about a fourth of the cost of space-bands, and they are subject to less depreciation.
  - The alinement of the composed line of matrices is effected by lock-ing them against the top of the elevator by lifting them from the top of the Dovetail; this portion of the matrix is only used for this purpose. All matrices are made to a standard alinement regardless of fount or of body-size. A line of H’s ranged from 51-point to 36-point is shown in fig. 207, Plate XI ; above 14-point the matrices are used in the advertising machine.
  - The speed of the machine is beyond that at which the compositor can work. The casting mechanism runs at 84 revolutions per minute on all sizes of slugs from 2 to 18-point, or an equivalent of more than 26,000 ens Per hour of medium width 6-point on a slug 13 pica ems long. It is stated that actual runs have been made at the rate of 22,000 ens per hour for short Periods, and that no trouble is experienced in getting long runs averaging between 14,000 and 16,000 ens per hour, which is above the amount expected from the average operator. A cancel-key, 25, fig. 428, enables the operator to dispose of a complete line, or part of a line, without its being cast.
  - The machine above described is neat and compact; it weighs about 1550 pounds ; it rests on a rectangular pillar base and takes up about half the floor-space required for a Linotype machine. The power necessary to drive it is stated to be 0:25 horse-power.
  - In addition to the standard machine just described the Bellows compositor is also constructed as an advertising machine to be used for large
- p.441 - vue 567/901
- - 442
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - type for advertising and title-line matter. The two machines are identical except that the matrices from 13 to 36-point, the distributor, the magazine, and the keyboard are designed for seventy-seven characters only in the advertising machine, and that the mould is constructed so as to give a cored or hollow slug from 18 to 36-point. The ordinary standard mould being used for smaller sizes, the matrices from the standard machine can be run on the advertising machine. A 36-point slug is shown in fig. 255, plate XIV. The cores enable the weight of the 36-point slug to be reduced to such an extent that it weighs a little less than the ordinary 14-point solid slug of the same length. The casting speed of the advertising machine is 83 revolutions per minute, or the same as that of the standard machine. The smooth sides of the slug are even more advantageous in the case of advertisement slugs, as they allow all kinds of loose type, blocks, or furniture to work against them.
  - The Monoline, fig. 430, plate LXXVII, invented by W. S. Scudder, in 1892, is of American origin, though manufactured in other countries, and is remarkable for its great simplicity as compared with the other slug-casting machines. Reduction in the number of parts has been carried out consistently in the design, with the result that a very compact, much lighter, and much less costly machine has been evolved.
  - The keyboard, fig. 283, comprises ninety-six keys and a space-key, which are arranged in eight rows of twelve, the arrangement being very similar to the standard keyboard of the Barlock typewriter or of other machines which have no shift-key. There are, apart from space-matrices, fig. 202, p. 231, for line-justification, eight different kinds of matrix, fig. 193, p. 227, each kind carrying twelve strikes. The characters of a group are, of course, chosen so that they come on the same set width, fig. 431.
  - According to the particular key depressed, a matrix is released from the magazine compartment for the kind of matrix containing that sort, and is received on a stop, set by the key, so that it is at the proper level to bring the required character in line when it passes into the assembler. The space-matrix, fig. 202, p. 231, consists of a long steel wedge sliding between two short steel wedges, and is operated in the same way as the Linotype space-band, fig. 201, p. 231. The long wedge has a projection on the back against which the justifier pushes, lifting the wedges until the line is filled, but the distribution of the matrices after the line has been cast is effected in a much simpler manner. The hooks at the top of the matrices are arranged in a series of nine different lengths corresponding to the eight kinds of type-matrices and to the space-matrix. The selection into the nine magazine compartments is effected by sliding the matrices on their lower ends so that the hooks engage on a series of distributor-rails, which are then lifted and bring all those of each kind of matrix, which have been used in the line, opposite to their respective channels in the magazine, into which each kind is pushed laterally, off the distributor-rails, by a pusher.
- p.442 - vue 568/901
- - PLATE LXXVII.
  - Fig. 430.—Monoline; general view.
  - To face Lage 442
- pl.77 - vue 569/901
- p.n.n. - vue 570/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND SLUG-CASTING.
  - 443
  - The great gain in simplicity in the Monoline machine is obtained, however, at the expense of accuracy in the product. In other matrix-composing, line-justifying and slug-casting machines that portion of the matrices which is subjected to wear on the guides is not the same as that from which the alinement is determined ; this arrangement of supplementary guide-surfaces is not practicable in the Monoline and consequently wear of the alining surfaces is inevitable. Matrices with so large a number of strikes, moreover, are more difficult to produce commercially than are those with only two strikes, and they are also more liable to
  - Kinds of matrices. 12345678
  - bottom I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 IO II top* 12 7 1 qi ; Z @ & 6 $ b ) ‘ p ... Y en 1 o 2 thin r em U quad 2 8 • space — quad 5 I a e i T m R 8 y o t , O H w o fi n s 1 DWA iffhrfFMG 2 x d c . B — E 3 I- SffiN 4 8 P z i C ffi X 9 I v * ’ J K V S f k ( : Q 1b £
  - * Since, in composing, the matrices are added to the right, with their faces from the operator, it is necessary that the strikes should be inverted.
  - Fig. 431.—Monoline ; arrangement of strikes on matrices.
  - damage, as an accident to the feather-edge of any one of the strikes Tenders the whole multiple matrix useless.
  - The Monoline slugs are delivered into a galley in column.
  - The Monoline machine occupies a space of about 3 feet 6 inches by 4 feet 6 inches; it weighs about 800 pounds and requires about 0 17 horse-power.
  - The adoption in the Monoline of a rational keyboard in which the keys most used are placed close together is, in the opinion of the authors, Preferable to the methods adopted in some of the other machines described, in which the arrangement of keys is dependent on the set widths of the characters or on some constructional peculiarity of the machine.
- p.443 - vue 571/901
- - 444 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The Typograph, figs. 432 to 445, plates LXXVIII to LXXXIV.—This machine, invented by John R. Rogers, about 1888, was first constructed in America. It was bought up so far as that country was concerned by the Mergenthaler Linotype Company in order to acquire the rights of the wedge-space invented by J. W. Schuckers. The Typograph continued to be made in Canada and Germany, and was reintroduced into this country in 1908.
  - The space-disks, fig. 204, p. 232, are used in pairs one above the other, and are rotated equally so that the long stems of the letter-matrices are kept
  - 6
  - O
  - Fig. 437.—Typograph; assembly-channel filled with single-letter matrices and vice-jaw closed ready for line-justification.
  - parallel. Two steel bars of square section form the magazines for the space-disks ; each of these bars is separate from, but forms the continuation of the end of one of the square steel line-justifying shafts. In the normal position of these shafts, relatively to the bars, the space-disks can be made to slide freely from the one to the other in either direction. The hole through the centre of the main part of the space-disks is square, which enables this piece to be rotated relatively to the plate b, fig. 204, p. 232, the arm of which is held in a groove in a brass guide. The letter-matrices on each side of a pair of space-disks are thus wedged apart by the action of the helica surfaces ; equal rotation of the two square shafts is effected by spur gears on the overhung ends of the shafts engaging with a rack which is spring propelled on the line-justifying stroke.
- p.444 - vue 572/901
- - PLATE LXXVIII.
  - *
  - jy C J /A
  - Ai
  - [To face page 444.]
  - Fig. 433.—Typograph ; distributing position, upper part tilted back ; front view.
  - Fig. 432.—Typograph; normal composing position of upper part; front view.
- pl.78 - vue 573/901
- - PLATE LXXIX.
  - Fig. 434.—Typograph; normal composing position of upper part; back view.
  - To face page 445.]
- pl.79 - vue 574/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND SLUG-CASTING. 445
  - Figure 437 shows a line of single-letter matrices ready for line-justification, and fig. 438 shows the line after the shafts have been partially rotated to the requisite extent to make the space-disks fill out the line.
  - At the top of the machine, fig. 432, plate LXXVIII, is the keyboard together with the escapements and magazine. The keyboard comprises eighty-four keys, the arrangement of which for the English language is shown in fig. 278, p. 294 ; since the matrices do not leave the wires it is possible to adapt the machine to any other language without either the necessity for specially designing the faces to any particular system of set widths or the need for modification of the magazine, escapements, etc. It is, in fact, as easy to
  - O
  - Fig. 438.—Typograph ; line of single-letter matrices, line-justified ready for casting.
  - adapt the machine to use other characters as it is so to adapt a typewriter. The escapement, fig. 439, is operated by a rod from the key; it is of the shears variety, the pull on the rod raising the first blade and releasing the first matrix after the second matrix has been checked by the second blade of the shears. On the return of the key, the second matrix is allowed to come forward into the place occupied by the first matrix after the first blade has descended far enough to check its further movement. When the upper frame of the machine is tilted back the escapements, which are carried on a Separate frame, are raised clear of the wires by a lever having an eccentric movement, so that the matrices can return freely to the ends of their respec-five wires. The escapement-frame comes back into position on commencing
- p.445 - vue 575/901
- - 446
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - the return movement, so that the escapements are in place before the wires reassume a horizontal position.
  - The operation of tilting the upper portion of the machine back also ensures the return of the two sets of space-disks to their respective places on their magazine-bars, this being effected by a cam on the magazine-shaft operating a rack, which turns a pinion on a vertical shaft carrying two levers ; these act respectively upon the two space-disk shafts on which the space-
  - blade
  - U.
  - 1
  - 6’
  - 1
  - 3
  - Second blade
  - 83
  - 1
  - EV
  - First
  - Matrix
  - Fig. 439.—Typograph; matrix escapement. Scale: full size.
  - disks are threaded. These space-disks are released by a key-button just above the keyboard proper.
  - The operations of assembling and line-justifying are shown in the four figs. 440 to 443, plates LXXXI and LXXXII, the reference numbers in each of these being the same.
  - In fig. 440 the machine is shown at rest, neither the matrices, nor the space-disks being in the assembling-place which is open ready to receive them ; the vice-jaw 1 is in the open position and the square shaft 2 is empty.
- p.446 - vue 576/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND SLUG-CASTING.
  - 447
  - The part 3 is a removable stop-piece which can be changed when the mould is altered for varying the length of line. The two bars 4, 4 serve as a bearing to carry the matrices while being assembled, and to support them against the pressure of the metal-pot when the cast is being made. The alining bar 5 provides the bearing-surface for the feet of the matrix-bars to rest on during line-justification. The vice-jaw 1, connected to this bar, closes the assembling-place when the composition of the line has been completed, and keeps the line of matrices in position during the casting operation. There is an adjustable mark 6 above these parts, which shows the width of line to which the machine has been set to correspond to the mould in use. This mark warns the operator when he must finish the line and start the casting operation. The part 7 shown below the alining bar is called the gripper; it is mounted on the shaft carrying the mould-arm and bears against one of the notches in the matrix-bars pressing them up so that one of the back notches bears against the alining rib. This operation takes Place at the same time that the space-disks revolve and spread the line, the final justification of the line being performed after alinement has been effected.
  - The operations described here relate to the two-letter matrix. The description of the single-letter matrix shows how the position and action of the alining bars must differ in the single-letter machine. In the two-letter machine the gripper moves up to aline the matrices; in the single-letter it moves down.
  - Figure 441 shows the assembling-block with a line of two-letter matrices composed, but free ; the space-disks, nine of which are shown between the ten words composed, are barely visible as they occupy that position which presents the narrowest face towards the mould.
  - Figure 442 shows the vice-jaw in its erect position ready for closing in to the proper length of line indicated by the mark 6. This closing is effected Automatically on moving the starting-handle. When the vice-jaw 1 has reached the position corresponding to the proper length of line the space-disks, which have up to this time remained stationary, rotate by the action of the rack on the two pinions. The space-disks can assume any width from two to nine points.
  - Figure 443 shows the arrangement of the matrices after line-justification has been completed. The increased width occupied by the space-disks, as Compared with that shown in fig. 442, is easily seen. The gripper 7 holds the matrices in position for alinement. The mould is then brought up and held against the matrices pressing them against the back bars 4, 4. The metal-pot with its mouthpiece is then brought to face the tang-plate of the mould making the whole space to be filled with metal air-tight, except for the small air-ways ground into the face of the mould. The pump now operates and the slug is cast. After a slight pause, the pump and mould return to their original position and the line of matrices is then unlocked.
- p.447 - vue 577/901
- - 448
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - While the above operations are taking place the compositor is reading his copy, and as soon as the casting has been made the top of the machine or magazine tilts back automatically, thus distributing the line of matrices, after which operation it returns to its normal position; the compositor can then commence setting the next line. The upper portion of the machine is locked from the moment of moving the starting-handle until the casting has taken place.
  - After the matrices have been unlocked the tang-plate rises, cutting the tang clear from the slug ; when the tang-plate has reached its upper position the slug-ejector comes into operation, partially ejecting the slug ready for the trimming-knives to operate. After the knives have completed their stroke the slug is ejected and travels down a chute to the galley; the tang is ejected from the tang-plate by the small ejector, and the various parts return to their positions of rest in readiness for the next casting operation.
  - The slugs being smooth or both sides, lines of single type can readily be composed and used alongside of them.
  - The time occupied in performing the cycle of casting, distributing and returning the magazine to its normal position is three seconds. Immediately the cycle is completed, the operator, who in the meantime has been reading his copy, proceeds with the next line, simultaneously with the operation of trimming and ejecting the slug. It is stated that in practice the time occupied by the casting and distributing operations is equal to that required by the operator for reading his copy, and consequently no time is actually lost. The copy-holder remains fixed in its place while the upper portion of the machine is tilted.
  - Where repetitions of a line are required, it is merely necessary to move a lever which throws the distributing mechanism out of action and leaves the line of matrices standing, and to move the starting-handle as soon as each slug has been turned out. The time occupied in the cycle of operations necessary for the repetition of a line of which the matrices are standing is the same as the period of three seconds required for dealing with a newly assembled line.
  - In its earlier form the Typograph dealt with one face only, but its range was soon after increased by the adoption of the two-letter matrix-Change of face from the one strike to the other is effected by a shift-key, similar to that of a typewriter. Change of the complete fount or founts involved removing the entire top of the machine, including the keyboard, by taking out four screws; a duplicate top complete with magazine and keyboard was then substituted for the one removed.
  - According to the latest improvements change of fount is now performed by the following method: racks, each of which forms & continuation of the matrix-guides, are provided for fitting on to the frame of the magazine, on its right and left sides respectively, from which they are readily detachable. Under normal working conditions
- p.448 - vue 578/901
- - PLATE LXXX.
  - Fig. 435.—Typograph: line of single-letter matrices composed and line-justified.
  - Ri
  - S5
  - - [qnoc
  - ulli-luIMIUM ulluubuiumI: lillui ui Bill • ude JodAL 02DTU: 02qn0c9UL uO P’ 11011170011/910171. 7010, Immiimm iiimmmiiliiiommm
  - Hi HI un ue SMS HE •I
  - 1 HI L - BI I HI
  - 1 HI LCHI LIMI ( I
  - muamammmommammmamnumaamamaamn.mamam
  - Fig. 436.—Typograph ; line of two-letter matrices composed and line-justified.
  - II -LW Em
  - mmommimmum
  - 1
  - [To face page 448.
  - 1
- pl.80 - vue 579/901
- - PLATE LXXXI.
  - Fig. 440.—Typograph; assembly channel empty.
  - r 6%
  - ' • 3
  - Fig. 441.—Typograph ; assembly channel filled with line of two-letter matrices.
  - To face plate LXXXII.]
- pl.81 - vue 580/901
- - PLATE LXXXII.
  - Fig. 442.—Typograph ; vice-jaw closed but line not yet line-justified.
  - Fig. 443.—Typograph ; matrices line-justified ready for casting.
  - [To face plate LXXXI.
  - A
  - •CONSERU * SON
- pl.82 - vue 581/901
- - PLATE LXXXIII.
  - [To face plate LXXXIV.]
  - FIG. 444-—Typogvaph ; rack in position for changing fount.
  - -
  - 1 -
- pl.83 - vue 582/901
- - ** s
  - =====00/ Fig. 445.—Typograph ;
  - To face plate LXXXIII.]
  - PLATE LXXXIV.
  - matrices transferred from magazine to the rack, ready for removal.
- pl.84 - vue 583/901
- - PLATE LXXXV.
  - Fig. 446.—Rowotype matrix-composing machine. To face page 449.]
- pl.85 - vue 584/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND SLUG-CASTING.
  - 449
  - these racks are absent and when the magazine is tilted the matrices return against a stop-rail extending the whole width of each side of the magazine. The action of fitting the rack on to the magazine-frame raises the stop-rail and gives the matrices access to the rack; to enable the matrices to pass off the guide-wire the latter is bent downwards and then upwards in a plane at right angles to its length, as shown in fig. 444, plate LXXXIII. This bend passes through the opening in the matrix-hook when the matrices slide off on to the rack. When the transference has been effected, with the magazine in a horizontal position, fig. 445, plate LXXXIV, the rack carrying the matrices, secured by a locking-bar which duplicates the stop-rail, can be removed and a similar rack which carries another fount can be substituted for it. The rack which has been removed serves as a holder for the particular fount it carries until it is again required.
  - When it is also required to make a change in the body-size, the mould, which is retained in its socket by a spring-propelled bolt at each end, is released by the withdrawal of these bolts ; it can then be removed and one of another body-size substituted for it by simply pressing the new mould into the socket. The bolts then close upon it automatically and secure it in place without further adjustment.
  - No adjustment of the knives when changing the size of the body is necessary, but the knife-block is instantly detached and another corre-sPonding to the new body-size required is substituted for it.
  - A complete change of face and body can be effected without the use of any tools in less than three minutes ; the keyboard remains untouched throughout the operation.
  - The output of the Typograph is stated to average from 6000 to 12,000 ens Per hour, according to the skill of the compositor.
  - The capacity of the metal-pot is about 40 pounds of metal; it is heated by gas, the quantity required being about 11 cubic feet per hour.
  - The machine weighs about 9 hundredweight. It occupies a floor-space about 2 feet by 2 feet and stands about 5 feet high; the space required for a machine and its operator is about 6 feet by 6 feet, but a smaller allowance suffices where a battery of several machines is installed.
  - The power required to run the Typograph is about 0’25 horse-power.
  - The Rowotype, fig. 446, plate LXXXV, is a matrix-composing Machine in which there are as many sets or banks of matrix-bars as there are different characters carried by the machine, at present eighty-four, and all of the banks contain several matrices bearing the same character, there being as many of each character as can be required for the setting of a line. The matrices are plain and are attached to the upper and inner ends of the matrix-bars. These bars are hinged at their lower or outer ends, the hinges being concentric with the central and assembling position. There are two concentric arcs of the matrix-bars, one arc on each side of the machine.
  - 2 G
- p.449 - vue 585/901
- - 450
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - When the matrix-bars are released, they drop by gravity, turning about the hinges, and the matrices enter the composing-race at the centre of the machine. The matrix-bar escapements are electrically operated through covered wires formed into a cable and carried to eighty-five contact-points at the front of the machine.
  - In front of these eighty-five points is fixed a standard shift-key typewriter, and each key depression of the typewriter made when the operator fingers the keyboard causes the depression of a corresponding matrix or spacer. The operator can insert paper in the typewriter and obtain a typewritten copy as the composition proceeds. The typewriter can, moreover, be removed for use as a typewriter and readily replaced.
  - The line of matrices is assembled in a vertical position, and the slug is cast in the same position as the matrices stand, that is to say, reading from the bottom to the top of the line.
  - The justification is effected by means of pairs of space-wedges dropped between the matrices at the end of each word.
  - Cut-outs prevent the machine from starting if overset or underset. The machine locks and justifies the line of matrices at the place of assembly, consequently the time of transfer is not lost by the matrices, but, as in the case of the Typograph, it is necessary for the whole of the casting operation to be completed and the matrices returned to their initial position before the operator can proceed with the composition of a second line.
  - The Rowotype occupies between 5 and 6 square feet of floor-space.
  - Many other slug-casting machines have been proposed and some of these have been made experimentally ; amongst those which have achieved a fair measure of success are : the Linotype Junior evolved from the Typograph, and the Barotype invented by H. F. Brown. The Barotype, according to J. S. Thompson, resembles the Monoline in its multiple-strike matrix, the Bellows or Electric Compositor in its use of hollow temporary space-matrices, and like these and the Typograph if produces a smooth-sided slug; as in the Linotype the matrices are provided with distributor-teeth.
  - The Grantype.—In considering the evolution of machines which perform the complete cycle of operations, it may have been noticed that a limitation was imposed on the speed and freedom of the operator by the necessity for casting characters consecutively in one mould as in the Monotype, Stringertype, etc., and that further invention was directed to multiplication of the mould, as in the Dyotype, for the purpose of overcoming this difficulty.
  - The same tendency was observed in those machines which perform casting alone in its various forms, from the early pivotal machine with its single mould, to the Foucher machine with duplex moulds, and ultimately to the Wicks machine with its hundred moulds. The total number of characters composed per minute by the fastest operators on the Linotype machine greatly exceeds the maximum number of type which a single mould is
- p.450 - vue 586/901
- - MATRIX-COMPOSING AND SLUG-CASTING.
  - 451
  - capable of producing within the same interval of time, and this fact has had its influence on the development of the class of machines which perform the operation of composing independently of that of casting, such as the Monotype.
  - In order to obtain the maximum speed of which the operator is capable, and at the same time effect the casting of a line of loose type, it is obvious that a multiple mould or its equivalent must be used if the automatic portion of the mechanism is to be capable of working so rapidly that, in no circumstances, will it cause delay to the operator. In other words, it must be as easy to operate as are the slug machines so widely in use at present, and must perform the operations of casting, removing, and distributing the matrices within the time period allowed in the slug machine.
  - The slug machine is capable of creating a very large and increasing percentage of the typographical surfaces required for the production of printing of an ephemeral and periodic nature, but in spite of all improvements that have been made in slug machines, their work has not, up to the present, proved entirely satisfactory for the whole range of printing, owing largely to the inherent disadvantages that must always accompany the use of a slug. The authors do not by this mean to imply that the use of a slug is of itself a disadvantage, for it may actually, as in the case of newspapers, be of the very greatest assistance in facilitating the handling of the composed matter. In fact, inventions have been made and patented for securing loose type after composition in the form of slugs ; of this Hanigan’s patent, referred to in the next chapter, is an example. This property is also recognized in the machines that form the type-bar class, also described m chapter XXX. In the best-known and most practical of these machines, the major portion of the slug consists of a metal bar of body thickness and of less than normal height-to-paper, into which the characters forming the typographical surface are successively fed while the groove in the block 18 sprung open to receive them, closing when the line is finished, and, usually, line-justified as well.
  - For very many purposes, however, the printer finds it necessary to have more freedom than is given by slug machines of any kind, and the advantages of a loose-type machine are always making themselves apparent to him, a fact which is strikingly brought out by the large and increasing application which the Monotype machine has found in the last few years.
  - A class of machine, however, in which the speed of the operator at the keyboard and the speed of the casting machine are different, and the perforated record of which can be read by few people even with difficulty and by most people not at all, has very grave disadvantages in the Production of book-work, in which case the time elapsing from the commence-ment of a work till its final revision ready for the press is considerable. Not only is it necessary to arrive at the correct proportion of keyboards and casters to perform the work demanded by the particular conditions of each mstallation, or to have some machines of one class or of the other frequently
- p.451 - vue 587/901
- - 452
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - standing idle, but also any amendment or correction wanted in the proofs must necessarily demand the use of machines of each kind consecutively. It is clear, therefore, that the requirements of the printer are more adequately met by a machine which, for want of a better word, may be spoken of as having greater flexibility. A one-man machine performing the complete cycle of operations of composing, line-justifying, and casting •—at a single cast—a line of individual type composed into a galley, is, consequently, the highest ideal of the book-printer producing high-class work.
  - Briefly described, the chief differences between the Grantype and its parent, the Linotype, are as follows:—
  - I. The matrix is made to carry, as an integral part of itself, a portion of mould forming a division between the type cast against it and against the succeeding matrix.
  - 2. The justification of the line which has to take account of a constant added thickness in the space-matrix, and a proportionate added thickness in the type or quad matrices, apparently complex in theory, and involving considerable investigation, is simple in practice. Several modifications of line-justifying mechanism have been elaborated according to the general form of the machine.
  - 3. Owing to its peculiar form the matrix is required to be turned through 900 on its way to the mould and back again on its way to the magazine.
  - 4. The pump is made with a combination of plungers coupled to a common cross-head so as to produce a sufficiently constant flow of metal over the entire width of the mould or comb.
  - 5. Special forms of tang-break have been devised for enabling the complete tang to be sheared from the comb formed by it and the individual type as cast.
  - 6. The mould, which is water-cooled, is arranged in such manner that its ends can be removed for the ejection of the completed line of type to the galley.
  - 7. The form of break adopted and the method employed for removing the tang are such that it is possible to use hard metal as in founders’ type.
  - 8. The depth of strike is identical, both as to shoulder and as to counters, with the best products of the typefounders.
  - 9. Like the Linotype, the speed of the machine is not limited by mechanical considerations, but only by the capability of the operator.
  - Except to the expert the machine would appear to be an ordinary Linotype machine.
- p.452 - vue 588/901
- - CHAPTER XXX.
  - IMPRESSION MACHINES, TRANSFER MACHINES, TYPE-BAR MACHINES, PHOTOGRAPHIC AND UNCLASSIFIED MACHINES.
  - “ First impressions are best.” English Proverbial Saying.
  - 12-point Cheltenham old-style (American Type Founders Co.).
  - “ Fair exchange is no robbery.” English Proverbial Saying.
  - 10-point Cheltenham bold (American Type Founders Co.).
  - “ A soft head is misplaced upon a strong body.”
  - English Proverbial Saying.
  - 10-point Cheltenham wide (American Type Founders Co.).
  - “ Look here, upon this picture, and on this.”
  - Shakespeare.
  - 8-point Cheltenham bold expanded (American Type Founders Co.).
  - “ ‘E were a man of no class," said Bill sententiously, spitting through his incisors from the bunk ; “ we couldn’t put him nowheres ; leastwise me and my mates couldn t. Goa-Joe, our Portugee cook what came from Indier, said ’e were entered for no Caste at all, and I misdoubts that ’is words were true.”
  - Sucupira Smith.
  - 8-point Cheltenham old-style (American Type Founders Co.).
  - Impression machines.—A great deal of time, not very profitably spent either by readers or authors, would be taken up if the subject of impression machines was discussed at any length, for, though the class of these machines is large, and they have engaged the attention of numerous inventors—the most notable among whom was Ottmar Mergenthaler, subsequently the inventor of the Linotype machine—this form of composing machine has never been a success. The difficulties are inherently almost insurmountable. The broad feature of these machines is the impression from male dies, of the letters desired, character by character, or the impression of a complete line at a time from male dies assembled in the desired
  - 453
- p.453 - vue 589/901
- - 454
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - position and order, in some more or less soft material, metallic or non-metallic, which impressions later serve as a mould from which to cast a slug or stereotype-plate with the required relief characters upon it. Methods and details may vary, but the principle remains the same. Some of these machines are exceedingly ingenious and costly, and have done good work in what may be termed the experimental stage, but the difficulty of justification and other practical drawbacks have, as far as the authors are aware, prevented any of them from becoming really commercial. The most interesting facts in connexion with these machines are that, as already mentioned, Ottmar Mergenthaler spent much time on them, and that J. W. Schuckers, while working on an impression machine in 1885, invented the double-wedge justifier, which, as J. S. Thompson well says, proved to be a very important invention in the art of printing. It was curious that Schuckers only just preceded Ottmar Mergenthaler in filing his application for the patent, and as it was decided that he was the prior inventor, the Mergenthaler Linotype Company was compelled to buy his rights in order to use this spacer in the Linotype machine. The price given is stated to have been $416,000, and is said to be the largest sum ever paid up to that time for a single patent. It is also interesting to note that John R. Rogers, inventor of the well-known Typograph, was in 1888 the inventor of the only impression machine ever put into practical use, this being the original Typograph, which was an impression machine. Like Ottmar Mergenthaler, this inventor also developed his machine on similar lines, namely, the casting of the slug from an assembled and line-justified line of matrices.
  - Another incident also worth mentioning in connexion with these machines, which have been so fruitful in causing the discovery of cognate and highly practical inventions, was that Charles Sears, while working on one in 1898, evolved a differential feed for the carriage of a typewriter.
  - Among a number of impression machines may be mentioned the Typo-matrix, the St. John Typobar, Fowler’s impression machine, and the Heath matrix-typograph. A reproduction of an illustration of one of these machines, namely, Fowler’s impression machine, fig. 447, plate LXXXVI, is given to show what important and powerful machines some of these were, and to afford an idea of the large amount of time and money and effort that has been wasted to accomplish what has so far been found to be, if not practically impossible, at least a commercial impossibility in competition with the ordinary slug-casting machines. Further particulars of machines of this class are given in " The History of Composing Machines,” by John S. Thompson, from which the illustration shown in fig. 447, plate LXXXVI, is reproduced.
  - According to the writer cited, a few of the Rogers impression Typograph machines are still in operation in the United States of America, but as far as the authors are themselves aware, none of these machines has had any real practical or commercial success ; for, apart from the troubles arising from line-justification, the embarrassments due to distortion and the
- p.454 - vue 590/901
- - 2.
  - PLATE LXXXVI.
  - Fig. 447.—Fowler’s impression machine.
  - [To face page 454.
- pl.86 - vue 591/901
- p.n.n. - vue 592/901
- - CALCULATING IMPRESSION MACHINES. 455 difficulties of making corrections militate too much against any apparent, though dubious, advantages which they may possess.
  - CALCULATING MACHINES PRODUCING STEREOTYPE-MATRICES.
  - The most important impression machines ever made or proposed to be made are the calculating machines of Babbage and of Scheutz, in which the typographical operations are confined to the impression of figures for tabular work.
  - The tremendous labour involved in the calculation of tables of logarithms, of the trigonometrical functions of angles, of annuities and of astronomical tables such as those published in the " Nautical Almanac,” as well as of other tables, is only a part of that necessary for the final production of the printed works of reference. Errors may occur in transcription from the computer’s sheets on to the copy ; they may be introduced by the compositor setting a wrong type through the preceding operation of distribution having been imperfectly performed ; they may be subjected to error through the compositor misreading the copy or lifting the wrong sort, and again, even after the proof has been read, errors may be introduced by transposition of the figures or by mistake in correcting when the proof is being revised ; in fact the work of checking tables, such as those of the " Nautical Almanac,” is a most onerous and responsible matter, for there is practically no context to go by and the probability of an error passing uncorrected in a mass of figures is far greater than that of a mistake remaining in a literary work. Charles Babbage himself took the precaution to check his tables of seven-figure logarithms figure by figure with those of Vega, Callet, Briggs, Taylor and others, in all nine times, and yet, just before stereotyping no less than thirty-two errors were detected ; after stereotyping eight more were found and corrected in the plates. The large tables of Prony, which were calculated in France by a staff of six mathematicians, six assistant mathematicians, who converted the formulae to numbers, and from sixty to eighty computers, remain in seventeen folio volumes of manuscript still unpublished, though 100 pages were actually set up by Didot of Paris. The enormous amount of time occupied in the calculation and in checking the copy, and the even heavier work involved in checking the proofs, led Babbage to the invention of mechanism which would enable the whole of this purely mechanical work to be performed by machinery instead of by human agency.
  - Allusion has been made earlier in this work to calculating machines and to their evolution from the original adding machine invented by Pascal. The principle of the Babbage calculating machine may be briefly explained by means of the following simple examples :—
  - The squares of the natural numbers I, 2, 3, 4, 5, - - - form the simple mathematical series I, 4, 9, 16, 25, ... If it is desired to calculate many terms of this series, it is found that if each term in it is subtracted
- p.455 - vue 593/901
- - 456 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - from the term which succeeds it, the new series that is obtained is 3, 5, 7, 9, II,... which may be termed the first differences. If these first differences are again subtracted from each other, the series obtained is 2, 2, 2, 2, 2 . . . which may be termed the second differences. If these differences are again subtracted in the same manner the third differences, o, o, o, o, . . . are obtained ; the series is said to be of the order A3 = o. These figures may be arranged as shown in table 46.
  - In the arrangement adopted in the table for the series under investigation, any square above 3 consists of the sum of the immediately preceding
  - Table 46.—Squares of the natural numbers.
  - Natural number N. Square of number N2. First difference A1. Second difference A2.
  - I I 3 2
  - 2 4 5 2
  - 3 9 7 2
  - 4 16 9 2
  - 5 25 II 2
  - 6 36 13 -
  - 7 49 — -
  - square and of the differences taken diagonally upwards across the table to the right. Thus: 25 + 9 + 2 = 36.
  - In this simple example only two differences are required, but if a slightly more complex case is taken, that of the number of units in tetrahedral piles of shot, the series is obtained by the summation of the successive triangular layers of shot :—
  - The numbers contained in the piles form the series 1, 4, 10, 20, 35, 56, 84, . . . Treating this series by successive subtraction in the same
- p.456 - vue 594/901
- - CALCULATING IMPRESSION MACHINES.
  - 457
  - manner as the squares of numbers, the first differences obtained are : 3. 6, 10, 15, 21, . . . ; treating these again by subtracting, the second differences are: 3, 4, 5, 6, ... ; and treating these by subtraction for a third time the differences are : 1, 1, 1, ... , after which the fourth differences are 0. This series is said to be of the order A4 =0.
  - These figures may be arranged as shown in the following table :—
  - Table 47.—Number of shot in piles.
  - Number of layers of shot. Number of shot in the pile. First difference A1 Second difference A2 Third difference A3
  - I I 3 3 I
  - 2 4 6 4 1
  - 3 10 10 5 I
  - 4 20 15 6 I
  - 5 35 21 7 -
  - 6 56 28 - -
  - 7 84 — -
  - This table shows that for the series under investigation the number of Shot in any pile above 20 consists of the sum of the immediately preceding Pile and of the differences taken diagonally upwards across the table to the right. Thus: 35 + 15+5 + 1 = 56.
  - Now most of the figures required for the tables used in calculations are obtained from the summation of the terms of a series, and it is Possible, in practically all cases, to obtain a series which is convergent , a familiar example of a convergent series is
  - ________I-------(-... = 2 7182 8182 8...
  - I’I X2 I X 2 X3 I X 2 X 3 X 4
  - As the terms diminish rapidly in value a very limited number suffices for obtaining as many figures as are necessary for the degree of accuracy required in calculations of almost any kind based on measurements and
- p.457 - vue 595/901
- - 458
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - statistics, and the six orders of differences adopted by Babbage would have been adequate to most practical requirements.
  - Translating the mathematical requirements shown by the tables of differences, the mechanism was so contrived that whatever might be the numbers placed respectively on the figure-wheels of each of the different columns, the following succession of operations took place when the handle was worked. Whatever number was shown on the column of first differences, would be added to the number on the table column. The same first difference remaining on its own column, the number shown on the column of second differences would be added to that first difference, and so on for other columns. The first half-turn of the handle
  - Table 48.—Cubes of the natural numbers.
  - Numerator column. Table . column. First difference column. Second difference column. Third difference column.
  - - I - -
  - - 2 9 3 -
  - 5 5 I 6 6
  - After - 2 I -
  - first two - I 2 4 -
  - half-turns. 6 6 7 2 6
  - After — 3 I — -
  - second two - 4 6 4 -
  - half-turns. 7 3 9 8 6
  - performed the adding from wheel to wheel across the columns, while the second half-turn effected those carrying operations which may have been rendered necessary by the preceding additions or by the carrying operations themselves.
  - In the Babbage machine, a portion of which is shown in the illustration, fig. 448, plate LXXXVII, the reading wheels were arranged vertically over each other, so that the figures read downwards, the lowest wheel giving the units digit, the one above it the tens digit, and so on.
  - Thus in calculating the cubes of the natural numbers the figures 125 appear on the table column; 91 on the first difference column;
- p.458 - vue 596/901
- - PLATE LXXXVII.
  - 4 - “==* * 0
  - Fig. 448.—Babbage difference _engi
  - -i :
  - C o
  - r21 O
  - a
  - 2
  - IMHIHH :
  - ^M!>iO*H'Wi^ Lemma
  - o a
  - “
  - wst
  - : LI
  - 1
  - [To face page 458.
- pl.87 - vue 597/901
- - PLATE LXXXVIII.
  - [To face page 459.]
  - Fig. 449.—Scheutz difference engine. Side view; with scale of inches.
  - muulimoS Vrsnde
  - 4-5366370 4-4925954 4-4453765 4-3947357 4-3404171 4-28 21542 4-2196694 4-1526742 4-0808691 4-0039438 3-9215768 3-8334361 3-7391782 3-6384491 3-5308837 3-4161059
  - oc cc oc oc oc oc oc oc oc oc <1 -J -J —i ^ -o Co-] O0 S D H O 00-J 00
  - 90
  - 91
  - 92
  - 9 3 94 95 96
  - 97
  - 98
  - 99
  - 3-2937288 3-1633545 3-0245741 2-8769679 2.7201050 2-5535438 2-3768318 2-1895053 1-9910900 1-7811002
  - 100 1-5590397 101 1.3244012
  - Fig. 451.—Print from a stereotype cast from one of the original impression matrices, prepared on the Scheutz machine for Dr. Farr’s “ English Life Table.”
- pl.88 - vue 598/901
- - CALCULATING IMPRESSION MACHINES.
  - 459
  - 36 on the second difference column; and 6 on the third difference column. By making two half-turns of the handle, 91 is added to 125, giving 216 on the table column; 36 is added to 91, giving 127 on the first difference column ; and 6 is added to 36, giving 42 on the second difference column. Another two half-turns of the handle give the figures in the columns respectively as 343 in the table column and 169, 48, and 6 respectively in the first, second and third difference columns. The arrangement of the figures before and after the first two half-turns of the handle and after the next two half-turns of the handle is shown in table 48.
  - In the portion of the machine assembled in 1833 and now at South Kensington the upper wheels of one column serve as the numerator or counter and give the natural number of the series shown above. A wheel below the units wheel on the central column serves for the third differences, which cannot exceed nine in this case; this arrangement was adopted for the sake of compactness, and to avoid the use of an extra column for this single difference wheel. Another but smaller portion of the machine is in University College, London.
  - It was intended to construct the machine for calculating six orders of differences each to twenty places of figures, so that the machine would have required six sets of wheels in its width and twenty in its height. In the Work on " Babbage’s Calculating Engines " by General Henry P. Babbage, the son of the inventor, it is shown that the construction of the difference engine was fraught with many difficulties. It was necessary to design many special machine-tools and other appliances for the production of the large number of identical parts required for the difference engine. Difficulties, moreover, occurred with Clement, the engineer, with regard to the ownership of these special tools and appliances, and further difficulties were encountered in the typographical portion of the machine.
  - When Clement stopped work on the Babbage difference engine, in 1833, amongst the workmen discharged was a young mechanic, who after-wards became world-famous as Sir Joseph Whitworth. It is to the interest and to the active part taken by him in the preparation of parts of the difference engine that we owe the very groundwork of all modern engineering—standardization—and the great advance made by Whitworth through the introduction of gauges of high degree of accuracy and machine-tools of such excellence as enabled others to approach his standards.
  - It has been mentioned that Charles Babbage invented another machine Capable of a greater range of work than was within the capacity of the difference engine—a machine which he styled the analytical engine. So much investigation had been made of the possibilities of this engine, and of the claims of Babbage, supplemented by a series of elaborate drawings with a unique and simple system of notation devised by the inventor, that the question of the construction of the machine was investigated by a committee of the British Association appointed in 1878, consisting of
- p.459 - vue 599/901
- - 460 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Prof. Cayley, Dr. Farr, J. W. L. Glaisher, Dr. Pole, Prof. Fuller, Prof, (now Sir) Alex. B. W. Kennedy, Prof. Clifford, and C. W. Merrifield, “ To consider the advisability and to estimate the expense of constructing Mr. Babbage’s Analytical Machine and of printing tables by its means.”
  - From the conclusions arrived at by the committee it appears that the drawings for the analytical engine were not what would, even at that time, have been considered proper working drawings ; the drawings did not give the limits as modern drawings would, and it was found that further invention might be necessary to bring the design to such a point that a more definite conclusion could be drawn as to the ability of the machine to perform the work for which it was intended ; further, the committee was unable to give any estimate of the cost of the machine from the data laid before them ; it made, however, certain recommendations as to the possibilities of a less elaborate machine, for the calculation of determinants and for the solution of simultaneous equations.
  - Probably the most admirable of the many ingenious inventions of Charles Babbage was the anticipating carriage which he devised for the analytical engine.
  - A large amount of work was done by General H. P. Babbage on that portion of the analytical engine which his father styled the " mill.” This portion of the machine, which is the property of General Babbage, was exhibited at the Japanese-British Exhibition in 1910 and at the Coronation Exhibition in 1911 ; it is at present in the South Kensington Museum, where, by the kindness of the owner, one of the authors had an opportunity of inspecting it. This machine has been provisionally fitted with a printing device, of the ribbon-printing class, to enable the work done to be checked.
  - The other portion of the analytical engine in the South Kensington Museum has an impression device somewhat similar to that fitted to the Scheutz machine, but the authors are informed by General Babbage that it was proposed by the inventor to adopt a toggle action instead of a cam for obtaining the impression.
  - The analytical engine was arranged to print, in all, twenty-five figures in the width of the stereotype-matrix, and the number-wheels are engraved with a modern face of pica body.
  - The difference engines actually constructed and completed were those of Scheutz, a printer of Stockholm, Sweden, who was assisted by his son. The first Scheutz machine is stated to have been capable of calculating terms of five figures with three orders of differences of five figures each, and of printing its results. The second machine, which went to America, could calculate series with four orders of differences each of fifteen figures ; it printed the results to eight figures, with automatic correction of the last figure—where necessary—for the omissions : for example 3’1415927 for 3-141592653. . . .
  - The Scheutz difference engine was completed at Stockholm with the assistance of the Swedish Government on a guarantee by the professors
- p.460 - vue 600/901
- - CALCULATING IMPRESSION MACHINES.
  - 461
  - of the Academy of Stockholm. It is due to this assistance that the honour of producing the first complete machine for calculating mathematical tables by differences and printing the results was secured by Sweden. The Scheutz difference engine was exhibited at the great Exhibition of Paris and was then purchased for the Dudley Observatory at Albany, New York State, by John F. Rathbone, an enlightened and public-spirited citizen.
  - An exact copy of this machine was made by Bryan Donkin & Co., for the use of the British Government in the Department of the Registrar-General, Somerset House. The cost of this machine was £1200, and in the opinion of one of the authors who has examined it in detail, it must have cost more than this sum for net labour.
  - This machine is now in the South Kensington Museum, and by the courtesy of the director, F. G. Ogilvie, the authors are able to give the two illustrations shown in figs. 449 and 450, plates LXXXVIII and LXXXIX, as well as a portion of a stereotype, fig. 451, plate LXXXVIII, cast from a matrix actually impressed by this machine.
  - The Scheutz machine is slow in action compared to the Babbage difference engine, for the Babbage engine completed its cycle with two half-revolutions, forward and backward, of the operating handle, while the Scheutz machine requires thirty-eight revolutions of the handle to effect the complete cycle of calculation and impression.
  - A further difficulty with the Scheutz machine arises from the fact that many of the movements are gravity-controlled by small weights, and unless everything is working quite freely it is possible for the alining bar to be brought on to the tops of the teeth; the machine, when received at South Kensington Museum, bore evidence that this had occurred at some Period in the past.
  - The reversing of the carrying carriages is effected in the Scheutz difference engine by a mangle motion on the large gears which show at the front of the machine, fig. 450, plate LXXXIX.
  - The impression device consists of a group of steel toothed-wheels, mounted on concentric sleeves, the other ends of these sleeves being fitted with gear-wheels engaging with the controlling racks. The toothed wheels are engraved on the tops of the teeth with the die-figures for impression ; an alining bar of gun-metal is brought into engagement with a set of spaces between the teeth prior to the elevation by cam action of the stereotype-matrix bearing table. The stereotype-matrix is of card 0’05 inch in thickness, and the depth of strike is 0’026 inch. The depth of counter 111 the engraved figures of the wheels is O'OII inch. The face impressed by the machine is long primer old-style.
  - The authors are informed by the Dudley Observatory, Albany, that the Scheutz machine there has been out of commission for over twenty-five years. An example of the work performed by it remains in the " Specimens of Tables, Calculated, Stereomoulded, and Printed by Machinery,” 50+ kviii pp., Longmans, Brown, Green, Longmans and Roberts, London,
- p.461 - vue 601/901
- - 462
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - 1857, a work dedicated to Charles Babbage by George and Edward Scheutz. This machine was fitted with number impression wheels for long primer modern figures ; owing to this difference there can be no error made as to which machine produced tabular matter referred to either of them. Both of these machines gave an increased feed to the impression table, so as to produce the effect of leading, at every fifth line. The work of the Somerset House machine is represented by the “ English Life Table; Tables of Lifetimes, Annuities, and Premiums with an Introduction by William Farr, M.D., F.R.S., D.C.L.," 605-clv pp., Longmans, Green, Longman, Roberts and Green, London, 1864. The stereotype here reproduced in fig. 451, plate LXXXVIII, is from a matrix prepared for this work.
  - Dr. Farr says of this (third) Scheutz machine : " The machine has been extensively tried, and it has upon the whole answered every expectation. But it is a delicate instrument and requires considerable skill in the manipulation. It approaches infallibility in certain respects, but it is not infallible, except in very skilful hands. The weakest part is the printing apparatus, and that admits of evident improvement.”
  - Dr. Farr, in the appendix to the " English Life Table,” refers to the Scheutz machine, and after mentioning the use of the machine writes : " This volume is the result, and thus—if I may use the expression—the soul of the machine is exhibited in a series of Tables which are submitted to the criticism of the consummate judges of this kind of work in England and in the World.”
  - DIRECT AND INDIRECT TRANSFER METHODS.
  - Transfer machines.—Amongst the early attempts to produce a printing-surface mechanically, the idea of producing one by lithography rather than by the setting up of type and so producing a typographical printing-surface took hold of man’s inventive imagination. Two main lines of inventive development seem to have been followed, the one being the production on a metal plate, by the touching of keys, of printing-characters for lithographic use ; and the other by printing on a secondary machine from paper ribbon perforated on a primary machine on the Jacquard principle, with justification of the lines by some computation system, and the subsequent transference of the characters printed in lithographic ink to the metal plate from which the direct printing takes place. Where corrections are required, the paper is excised and patched.
  - Possibly with the offset press and the lithographic methods of printing now coming into general operation, there may be some small field for machines of this class, but this is very doubtful. As in the class of impression machines just discussed, an immense amount of ingenuity and brilliant invention has in the authors’ opinion been expended to no purpose on transfer machines.
  - It is stated that it was while experimenting with a transfer machine that Ottmar Mergenthaler made his invention of the Linotype, but that
- p.462 - vue 602/901
- - PLATE LXXXIX.
  - Fig. 450.—Scheutz different engine. Front view ; with scale of feet.
  - To face page 462.] - /o.Y
  - E
  - 5: is | 25
  - 3,
  - 0
  - - -auk
- pl.89 - vue 603/901
- - PLATE XC.
  - [To face page 463.]
  - Fig. 452.—Lithotype transfer machine ; keyboard
  - machine.
  - ; printing
  - Fig. 453.—Lithotype transfer machine mechanism.
  - Fig. 454.—Oddur type-bar machine; first model, using a matrix-disk and casting a grooved base upon a line of short type.
- pl.90 - vue 604/901
- - TRANSFER METHODS AND TYPE-BAR MACHINES. 463 diligent inventor was probably also at work on both transfer machines and impression machines when his most important invention, the Linotype, assumed a practical shape. Transfer methods seem to have had a greater fascination for American inventors than for British, as is shown in the list given of American patents covering this method, which begins with that of Pierre Flamm in the sixties, his patent being granted in 1866.
  - One of the latest of these machines is the Lithotype, figs. 452 and 453. plate XC, patented in 1903 by Walter S. Timmis of Brooklyn, New York, an exceedingly clever machine electrically controlled and provided with a keyboard of 100 keys. The line-justification is highly ingenious, and after the desired matter has been perforated and recorded in a first machine on a ribbon, this is passed through a second machine which, with equal ingenuity, at a very high speed, prints the copy on sheets of transfer paper. The sheets are made up into forme and a transfer taken on an aluminium plate lying on the bed of the transfer press. " When the transfer paper is removed from the aluminium plate, the ink characters are left on the surface of the aluminium. This sheet is ‘rolled up’ a few times, swabbed over with an acid solution, which fixes the design, and is then capable of producing an unlimited number of copies ” in the printing-press. The mechanical electric typewriter, for so we can call it, has been operated at 10,000 ems (20,000 ens) per hour, or at twice the speed at which an average operator can manipulate a keyboard. Thus each transfer machine can handle the output of two perforator machines. Mistakes of the operator can be corrected in the usual manner- with these machines and founts can be changed by simply slipping a new typewheel on the printer. The whole machine, as has been said, is exceedingly ingenious. For more detailed information concerning this apparatus and the subject of transfer machines generally, readers are referred to John S. Thompson’s “ History of Composing Machines," from which the two illustrations of the Lithotype are reproduced.
  - SHORT TYPE COMBINED WITH TYPE-BARS.
  - Type-bar machines.—.Another class of machine which may be here noted —for the ultimate aim in its development is to form a slug—is that class known as type-bar machines. The characteristic feature of these machines 18 to produce a short type, practically only the face of the type, and sufficient base to give it the necessary strength and contain some form, such as a dove-tail, notch, groove, furrow, or narrowing, capable of making an attachment with a bar, generally of steel, but in other cases of type-metal. This bar, by springing open or by a soldering or other process, such as swaging or casting on to the short types, is attached to the type-heads, which, before the attachment is effected, are in the later machines line-justified. The slug so formed is then passed into a galley to be used in the ordinary way. When a mechanical attachment of steel bars has been used, distribution is effected by returning the bars stripped from the type-heads to their magazine and consigning the type-heads themselves to the metal-pot.
- p.463 - vue 605/901
- - 464
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The use of short type was proposed by Mazzini in 1843, though in his case the type were intended to be secured from lifting by projections on the sides of the leads which were to engage with nicks on both sides of the type. In this arrangement the short type were jointly supported by two leads ; in the modern arrangement the types and leads together form a slug capable of being handled independently.
  - The Calendoli type-bar machine was invented in 1893 by Father Calendoli, a Dominican monk, of Paris. In this early machine no method of line-justification was provided for the words as they were transferred to their prepared bases.
  - The Composite type-bar machine, invented by Lucien A. Brott, of Brooklyn, in 1895, one of the most interesting of these machines, was exceedingly well devised and compact, and had a proper system of line-justification, and though it had good chances of coming into commercial operation, the inherent drawbacks of the system probably prevented the realization of its constructor’s anticipations.
  - The Unitype-bar machine, invented by Rolls P. Link, casts short type-heads with a dovetailed lower end which serves to retain them in the steel type-bars used to receive the characters. In this, as in the preceding case, the type-heads are arranged in position, and temporarily spaced by means of removable wedge-spaces; the channel in the steel type-bar which is in the form of a deep slot is then sprung open to permit of easy arrangement of the type-heads in line, during the processes of setting and line-justification. After the completion of each line the type-bar is permitted to close and grip the dovetailed ends of the type-heads, thus holding them in the position determined by the line-justifying mechanism ; the bar is then delivered automatically to the galley.
  - The Oddur machine is a type-bar machine based on the inventions of Oddur V. Sigurdsson, an Icelander, who has invented and developed several machines in which he has attempted to produce single types very rapidly from direct keyboard manipulation. In his earliest machine he used long matrix-bars, each carrying a full fount, and worked in combination with a corresponding number of adjustable moulds, the whole being so arranged that any one of the units could be brought into operation independently of others and in succession to them. At a later stage the matrix-bars were mounted upon drums, rotatable and axially adjustable, and for his latest machine a matrix-disk, fig. 192, p. 226, with rotational and radial movement has been evolved.
  - One of the earlier machines is illustrated in fig. 454, plate XC. In the machine shown in figs. 455 and 456, plate XCI, which represent the present form adopted, a matrix-disk is mounted on a steel matrix-holder, which is immediately detachable from the shaft on which it is carried. This shaft is rotated by a frictionally-driven gear, and performs so much of a rotation as may be necessary to bring the next matrix required opposite to the mould opening, fig. 457; the depressing of a key advances a stop at the right
- p.464 - vue 606/901
- - PLATE XCI.
  - Matrix Disc
  - Keyboard
  - Bar forming Mechanism .
  - Prepared Blanks in Magazine
  - Spaces and Type in Assembling
  - Channel
  - A
  - 5 12
  - restfil
  - D -, *-
  - Fig. 455.— Oddur type-bar machine, 1913 model; front view; casting short type and swaging a previously prepared base upon the line of short type.
  - Fig. 456.—Oddur type-bar machine, 1913 model; side view.
  - [To face page 464.
- pl.91 - vue 607/901
- p.n.n. - vue 608/901
- - TYPE-BAR MACHINES
  - 6
  - U
  - circumferential position for arresting the movement of the matrix-disk and withdraws the previously advanced stop used for positioning the matrix-disk when casting the preceding character. The shaft connecting the matrix-disk holder with the matrix stop-wheel is fitted with a double Hooke’s joint to enable the matrix-disk to slide at right angles to its axis so as to produce the radial change of position requisite for utilizing the concentric rings of matrix depressions. Carried on the upper table of the front of the machine is a second shaft, parallel with the matrix-disk shaft, and geared to it through the intervention of an idle wheel. This second shaft carries at the end next to the mould a stop-wheel capable of receiving a stop-disk formed by combining together two or more separate disks
  - Mould top
  - Fig. 457.— Oddur type-bar machine. Section at the casting-point. Scale: twice full size.
  - Metal pot nipple
  - Matrix
  - Matrix disc
  - Disc locking pin
  - Sprue or jet plate
  - Line of sprue or jet ejection
  - with the periphery cut by a narrow mill into the requisite number of divisions corresponding to each circle of depressions in the matrix-disk. Each stop-disk has the resulting teeth, or projections which are left, reduced in length radially by an amount corresponding to the opening required. The stop-wheel slides axially so as to bring into line with the body-slide stop-screw that disk which corresponds to the radius of the circle on which the particular matrix goes. The body-slide stop-screw is made adjustable to enable any wear to be taken up. The shaft which carries the matrix stop-disk is made D-shaped, so that the disks can be instantly removed and replaced in the same relative position to the gear-wheels. The same applies to the matrix-disk holder, so that a change of fount can be effected by
  - 2 H
- p.465 - vue 609/901
- - 466
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - removing the matrix-disk holder and the combined stop-wheel disks and replacing them with others of a different fount.
  - The operation of the machine is as follows :—
  - At each key-depression the matrix-disk makes a partial rotation, the matrix stop-wheel rotates through the same angle, lateral displacement of the matrix-wheel is made if required, and simultaneous axial movement of the stop-wheel takes place, the body-slide is brought back from its zero or closed-mould position as far as the mould stop-wheel permits, the pump
  - n
  - Measure of line.
  - Front Elevation.
  - Side Elevation.
  - Fig. 459. — The Oddur type-bar machine; space-band and type.
  - Fig. 458.—Oddur type-bar machine ; line-justification.
  - Scale: full size.
  - makes its stroke and a short type is cast, fig. 457 ; the matrix-wheel is then drawn back, the mould stop-wheel remaining in the axial position it last occupied. The mould cover-slide, fig. 460, makes a downward stroke leaving its upper surface flush with the mould-cavity ; the sprue or jet-plate makes a downward stroke shearing off the tang or jet and assumes the position necessary for the ejection of the jet; the mould body-slide then makes its ejecting stroke, pushing the type clear out of the mould into the type-race. At the end of a word the depression of the space-key causes a
- p.466 - vue 610/901
- - TYPE-BAR MACHINES.
  - 6
  - space-band, which is of the form of a plain tapered piece of steel of rectangular section, figs. 458 and 459, to come into place, and this is advanced by the type cast as the composition proceeds. When the line has been nearly completed, which is ascertained in the usual manner, the line is taken
  - between gripping jaws and transferred plain wedges are elevated, forcing the words apart and bringing the end characters of the end words into contact with the abutments and locking the line firmly between them.
  - The short type cast on the Oddur type-bar machines are shown with and without the jet or sprue, in figs. 461 and 462.
  - A grooved slug, fig. 463, previously cast in a separate machine, is then forced on to the line, and while in place in its proper relative position to the grooved slug, a corrugated steel swage is brought down into contact with the upper tongue of the slug covering the nick in the lower portion of the type ; it is then given an oscillating movement so that the metal of
  - to the swaging portion where the
  - • Mould cover-slide
  - Mould top
  - ' Bottom of mould
  - Mould-blade or body-slide
  - Fig. 460,—The Oddur type-bar machine. Front view of mould.
  - Scale: twice full size.
  - Fig. 463.—The Oddur type-bar machine; grooved slug for short type.
  - Scale: twice full size.
  - FIGs. 461 and 462.—The Oddur type-bar machine; short type with and without jet or sprue.
  - the slug is swaged into the depressions in the type and the whole is formed into a continuous slug or type-bar which is shown in section and in isometric projection in figs. 464 and 465.
  - By the adoption of the corrugated oscillating steel swage a greater depression is caused between the words than where the slug-tongue is partially supported by the type ; this renders the locking of the words in their proper relative position more certain than if it were merely dependent on the
- p.467 - vue 611/901
- - 468
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - friction produced between the individual type and that portion of the slug which is in contact with them.
  - The size of the type is, of course, much shorter than that cast in other body-slide machines such as the Monotype, but the speed at which type can
  - Figs. 464 and 465.—Oddur type-bar machine ; swaged slug. Section and isometric view. Scale: twice full size.
  - be cast in the Oddur machine can be as high as 360 per minute for 10-point type of en-set.
  - In some of the inventor’s earlier attempts the slug was cast on a short type, as shown in figs. 466 and 467, instead of being swaged in the manner
  - Figs. 466 and 467.—The Oddur type-bar machine ; slug cast on to short type. Section and isometric view. Scale: twice full size.
  - just described, and the method although successful from most points of view was abandoned temporarily owing to the difficulty arising from unequal contraction of the slug when cast. Further experiments have, however, satisfied the inventor that this difficulty can be easily overcome, and
- p.468 - vue 612/901
- - TYPE-BAR MACHINES. 469
  - in his new model of machine, following that here illustrated, the cast slug will be used in preference to the swaged pattern.
  - The matrix-disk is obtained by electro-deposition in a manner somewhat similar to that already mentioned in the description of the Graphotype machine. Five of the type are arranged in a jig with proper packing-pieces so as to form a segment equal to one-eighteenth of the wheel; from this a mould or stereotype can be taken and from the whole assembled eighteen sections a disk is grown in nickel.
  - This disk need only be of small thickness as it is adequately supported in the steel matrix-holder, in fact, a thickness of only 0'08 inch to 0’12 inch is sufficient for the matrix-disk. Moreover, as the machine is independent of wedges, or of any scheme for influencing the set of any particular character, other than the production of the tooth on the mould body-slide stop-disk to the requisite length to suit the set of the character to be cast, it is not necessary that the type should be specially designed to suit the machine in any respect, and it is claimed that the disks can be made more cheaply and economically, from any existing fount of foundry type, than is possible for any other combined casting and composing machine. The inventor recognizes that the key of the whole question of matrix-composing machines rests with the production of matrices, and adopts a method for dealing with this problem different from that adopted by the large companies who have each and all been forced to adopt manufacturing methods of considerable complexity in order to enable them to produce matrices in sufficient quantity and variety to meet the demands made on them. It is claimed for this machine that matrix-disks can be produced for a few shillings and within a few days from receipt of the sample type.
  - The use of this machine as a sorts-caster has also been considered, and an extremely ingenious universally adjustable mould has been devised for enabling the machine to deal with type of all sizes from 5-point to 48-point inclusive.
  - Inventors are still busy on these machines, two of which have come under the authors’ inspection while this volume was in course of preparation. Possibly a thoroughly practical and successful one may be devised, but it appears to them that the difficulties involved in the provision of the number of type-bars necessary to carry the type-heads produced by such machines Would far outweigh any other advantages claimed for the method. Still more so is this apparent when it is considered that each different measure of line requires the use of bars of its own particular length, a serious matter where bars of steel are used, but one of little moment where cast slugs are used in conjunction with type-heads.
  - The Hanigan machine.—So strongly has the advantage of the slug in convenience of handling impressed itself on the minds of certain inventors, that proposals have been made for converting a line of loose type, after it has been cast and line-justified, into a form of slug by the use
- p.469 - vue 613/901
- - 470
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - of a locking-strip. An instance of this may be noted in Hanigan’s machine, the product of which is shown in fig. 468. This machine may be called a composite slug machine ; for the individual type are cast their full height with a dovetail groove, and are then themselves turned into a type-bar.
  - In the method adopted by Hanigan there is no necessity for casting spaces of varying set width to meet the requirements of line-justification, because the spacing of the words can be effected directly by means of wedges, and, once the locking-strip has been inserted and hammered home, it is asserted that the type are securely held and further displacement of the characters laterally becomes practically impossible. Nevertheless, the
  - Fig. 468.—The Hanigan machine: composite type-slug.
  - inventor, in a later patent, as an extra precaution against possible lateral movement, has introduced means for depressing portions of the locking-strip edges between the words to act as positive keys ; one of these is shown in the illustration of a composite slug which is drawn inverted on the left of fig. 468.
  - PHOTOGRAPHIC METHODS.
  - Photographic machines.—Many suggestions have been made for doing away with type altogether and reproducing letters and signs directly by photographic etching; a patent for this purpose was granted in 1898 in America to W. Friese-Greene. The letters were placed on strips and the whole fount arranged with the letters one above the other in the order of their width. As the keyboard of the machine was touched, corresponding letters were assembled, and the letters of the line being brought before a camera, it was automatically operated and photographed the letters on the plate. Letters of large size were proposed for use, to be reduced, in the process of photographing, to any dimensions desired. Photography suggests endless ideas for various methods and means of producing a line-justified printing-surface directly, but there are so many practical difficulties in the way of the adaptation of this very widely-spread and useful process that at present they seem to the authors to militate against its introduction into the printing-world as a serious rival of the older methods.
- p.470 - vue 614/901
- - CHAPTER XXXI.
  - STEREOTYPING.
  - “ Besides the errors incidental to the process of computation, there are further liabilities in the process of transcribing the final results of each calculation into the fair copy of the table designed for the printer. The next source of error lies with the compositor, in transferring this copy into type. But the liabilities to error do not stop even here; for it frequently happens, that after the press has been fully corrected, errors will be produced in the process of printing. A remarkable instance of this occurs in one of the six errors detected in so many different tables already mentioned. In one of these cases, the last five figures of two successive numbers of a logarithmic table were the following:- 35875
  - 10436
  - Now, both of these are erroneous ; the figure
  - The Edinburgh Review.
  - 8 in the first line should be 4, and the figure 4 in the second should be 8. It is evident that the types, as first composed, were correct; but in the course of printing the two types 4 and 8 being loose, adhered to the inking-balls, and were drawn out; the pressman in replacing them transposed them, putting the 8 above and the 4 below, instead of vice versa. It would be a curious enquiry, were it possible, to obtain all the copies of the original edition of ‘ Vlacq’s Logarithms,’ published at Gouda in 1628, from which this error appears to have been copied in all the subsequent tables, to ascertain whether it extends through the entire edition. It would probably, nay almost certainly, be discovered that some of the copies of that edition are correct in this number, while others are incorrect; the former having been worked off before the transposition of the types.”
  - Babbage’s Calculating Engine (Dr. Dionysius Lardner).
  - 6-point, old-style (Monotype).
  - “SPREAD INTO PLATES . . . THE WORK OF THE WORKMAN AND OF THE HANDS OF THE FOUNDER.”
  - JEREMIAH.
  - Brevier egyptian.
  - Stereotyping may be defined as the art of reproducing, one or more times, as a single typographical surface, the composite surface of the type, °r of the blocks, or of both these components combined, which, either alone or in combination, may constitute a forme. It is effected by taking an impression in intaglio of the forme, and using the mould thus obtained as a matrix from which the whole typographical suiface is cast in relief so as to produce a fresh typographical surface identical with the original.
  - The process was originally proposed as an economic means for obtaining, for works, such as the Scriptures and the classics, of which successive editions are required and in which no change occurs, a permanent and practically convenient surface for the reproduction of the successive editions. The stereotype made at a single cast is much less costly than the original type in which the matter is composed; it enables the type to be released for
  - 471
- p.471 - vue 615/901
- - 472
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - fresh work once the proofs have been finally passed, and it ensures the absolute identity of one edition with another, so that a carefully corrected work may be reproduced in each successive edition equally perfect in all its detail. It has, moreover, the further advantage that the types need never be subjected to the heavy work of the printing-press, and that they can be returned to the case practically in the same condition as when new. Moreover, a work of great magnitude can be produced from a much smaller fount of type, for, as the reading and correcting are followed by the stereotyping process, distribution of the earlier pages can be effected and the type used again for composition. It is in the newspaper office that the introduction of stereotyping has proved to be a step of revolutionary character, for it has permitted the rapid multiplication of an original surface—itself unused in the actual press—and the simultaneous printing from replicas, instead of from the original, on a number of presses.
  - So great is the saving in capital formerly locked up in type, that stereotyping has now come into general use for all such works as remain practically constant in detail; it is also used for works of which a very large edition is to be printed, as it is cheaper to wear out the stereotype-plates than the type from which these plates are produced.
  - In many cases the stereotypes, or plates as they are called, are stored in readiness for a future demand, while in others the moulds from which the stereotypes are made may be preserved, and so give a still more economic method of future reproduction of the work. The advantage of stereotyping in the case of woodcuts and other costly blocks is obvious, as in the event of accident, damage, or excessive wear, a replacement can be effected at a trifling cost. Further advantages of the stereotype are the ease with which it can be handled, its immunity from becoming pied, and its freedom from blacks, monks and friars.
  - The stereotype mould or matrix is now generally made of one of two materials, plaster of Paris or paper; hence the various stereotyping processes may be divided broadly into two classes, according as the material used and its method of preparation approximate more closely to the one of these materials or to the other.
  - Of the two methods of stereotyping, the paper process is the simpler, and finds the larger number of applications because the material of which the mould is made enables it to be formed and handled more readily; several plates can be made from one mould, and the mould can be conveniently stored for use at some future date, or a replica of a stereotype taken from it.
  - The plaster process, on the other hand, an earlier invention, gives a deeper and sharper cast, and is for this reason preferred for the stereotyping of woodcuts; for the reproduction of blocks, however, it has now been superseded in most cases by electrotyping.
  - The flong or paper process requires the following sequence of operations: the preparation of the flong; the making of the mould; the
- p.472 - vue 616/901
- - STEREOTYPING. 473
  - pouring of the cast ; the trimming of the plate, and its mounting on the backing.
  - Flong (from the French word flan} is a kind of papier mache. It consists of a number of layers of paper of different qualities superposed and united by means of a special paste, usually composed of flour, starch, alum, and whitening. It is important that the paste should be quite free from lumps or impurities. The back of the flong may consist of a sheet of brown paper, to which is pasted a sheet of blotting-paper, usually followed by a second sheet of the same material and finished with two or more successive sheets of tissue-paper. It is important that no air bubbles should be formed between the sheets of paper, nor should the surfaces be in the slightest degree wrinkled ; the whole mass must be carefully smoothed and, in some cases, a steel roller is used to incorporate more thoroughly the various layers of paper and paste. The flong is generally used in a damp or partially dried state, and, if it has not been quite freshly prepared, care must be taken to damp it to the proper degree before attempting to obtain an impression from the type. To obtain the impression, the forme is placed on the imposing-surface and the face of the type slightly oiled by means of a brush, and the flong is applied with the tissue-paper side next to the type. It is then covered over with a piece of damp linen, and the flong is beaten, by means of a stiff-haired, long-handled brush, well down into the type, care being taken, however, to beat lightly on those parts of the forme which are more open. The beating must be continued until the depth required for the cast has been obtained, a matter which can easily be judged by experience. The damp linen is then removed, and the large depressions in the back of the mould, formed by the whites, are filled in with softened pipe-clay or with pieces of old flong mould, pasteboard, or other suitable material cut approximately to the shape of each depression. The next operation consists in the application of a pasted wrapping, or backing sheet, lightly beaten on to the flong; the forme, with the flong in place, is then passed into a gas or steam heated press in which it is dried for some ten minutes, and after this it may be removed from the forme.
  - It is obvious that the flong process is not suitable for taking moulds of Woodcuts, because the drying of the matrix tends to make the blocks split. The drying of the mould in place, on the forme of type, leads to a lengthening of the type due to the continued application of heat while the type is subjected to the pressure of the surrounding chase. This growing of the type in height-to-paper, renders it unfit, after the operations have been repeated several times, for use with new type ; for this and other reasons, of which speed in the production of the finished mould is one of the most important, various dry-flong processes have been devised, to which reference is made later. It is to be noted that as far back as 1880 a process for preparing dry-flong was patented by F. Wicks, whose name appears elsewhere in this work as inventor of several typographical machines.
- p.473 - vue 617/901
- - 474 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Plate-casting.—The casting is usually performed in a pivoted press and casting-box, fig. 469, into which the flong mould is placed when the press is in a horizontal position ; this is then turned to the vertical, fig. 470, for the metal to be poured in so as to obtain the requisite head to ensure a sound cast. The metal used for making the stereotype-plate is of similar composition to type-metal, but contains less antimony and little, if any, tin; it must not be poured at too high a temperature, or it will damage the flong mould. After the plate has cooled sufficiently, the casting-press
  - Fig. 469.—Casting-press for flat stereotype-plates: open.
  - is turned down to the horizontal position, unscrewed, and the plate removed ; it is then trimmed and machined to thickness ready for mounting on wood or other backing.
  - Plaster process.—The plaster process differs essentially from the paper process, for the plaster mould requires to be thoroughly baked in an oven to free it from moisture. The mould requires to be arranged in a particular manner in the casting-box, known as the dipping-pan, in which it can be immersed in a bath of metal and removed filled after the mould has acquired the temperature of the molten metal. Asin the preparation of the forme for
- p.474 - vue 618/901
- - STEREOTYPING. 475
  - the paper process, it is necessary to oil the face of the type slightly with a soft brush, in order to facilitate the removal of the plaster cast intact.
  - The casting-frame must then be placed on the forme, which should be imposed with stereo-high furniture round all the sides, and plaster, of the consistency of cream, poured on the face of the type. The plaster must he carefully dabbed, in so as to make intimate contact with the type without forming any air bubbles ; while the plaster is liquid it is struck off level with the top of the casting-frame, and left for a few minutes to harden. As in most operations involving the use of plaster of Paris, the secret of efficiency lies in the speed at which the operation is carried out and the care
  - all
  - FC. 470._Casting-press for flat s^P^^^ and turned to the
  - S vertical or casting position.
  - Which is expended in the proper mixing of the plaster. After.some-bwenkx minutes, whe n the plaster has set sufficiently hard, itmay be lifted fusrain type by means of proper lifting tools ; great care, loweve , stereb effecting this operation, because, even with the high qua $ t type typing, the piaster can enter some distance in between
  - and these parallel prisms above the quads must o viously been quite truly or they will break. Evidence that the mould has been removed without damage is afforded by the absence o picc removed remaining and adhering to the type. The mould must now rmes from the casting-frame by clearing away the super uous p as ’ one the frame upside down and tapping it to assist the mou in a
- p.475 - vue 619/901
- - 476
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Notches must be cut into the face of the plaster rim of the mould to admit the molten metal to the face, after which the mould is baked. The baking operation performed in the oven is conducted at a temperature of about 380° F. and is continued for about one hour and three quarters, or until the effect of the baking is just enough to brown the plaster slightly.
  - The mould, when dry and hot, is placed face downwards on an iron plate called the floating-plate, which fits loosely in the dipping-pan. The mould, floating-plate and dipping-pan, must all be heated to nearly the same temperature as the molten metal before they are immersed. After the floating-plate and mould have been placed in position the dipping-pan is covered with a lid, either flat or slightly dome-shaped, but with the four corners removed to give free access for the metal to enter and for the gases to leave the interior. The lid is firmly clamped in place by means of loose clamps and a screw; the whole arrangement is then immersed for some ten minutes in the dipping-pot, which contains the molten stereotype-metal; the long time of immersion is necessary to allow for driving off all the gases contained in the plaster, and to ensure that the face of the stereotype shall be quite free from blow-holes. The next operation is that of cooling the dipping-pan; when this has been done the contents are turned out and the gates at the corners are broken away.
  - The specific gravity of stereotype-metal being greater than that of the floating-plate causes it to rise in contact with the mould until the back of the mould touches the lid of the dipping-pan ; this permits of easy detachment, when cool, of that part of the stereotype-metal which occupies the space between the back of the mould and the lid of the dipping-pan. The trimming of the plate formed by the plaster process entails considerably more work than that required by the papier-mache method of obtaining a stereotype, so that the former process is not only more lengthy, but also more expensive in every way ; it is, however, preferred for certain work in which, as previously mentioned, the matter would not stand the temperature of the drying press or the severe mechanical conditions involved in the use of the dry-flong process.
  - A process somewhat analogous to the old plaster process is that which is used for obtaining stereotypes of process blocks by means of plaster-faced flong applied under heavy pressure.
  - Apart from flong, many attempts have been made to find other materials which would be capable of taking the impression of type within narrower limits of temperature than are required by the metal used for ordinary stereotype casts. In one of these processes the mould is made of a composition of yellow oxide of lead, or massicot as it is sometimes called, and glycerine; this composition hardens when subjected to slight heat under pressure in the press, and in some three or four minutes is sufficiently firm to bear removal from the forme. In another process, a celluloid sheet is placed in a press on the top of the matrix, and when heated by the admission of steam, is softened sufficiently to take a perfect impression of
- p.476 - vue 620/901
- - STEREOTYPING.
  - 477
  - the matrix. It is claimed for the celluloid typographical surface that it has more elasticity and softness than type-metal and yet does not yield under fair working conditions ; a plate of celluloid, moreover, can be curved easily to a cylindrical form. Further development, however, in these directions, has become less necessary since the stereotype process has been found to meet the exigencies of modern newspaper-work.
  - Although stereotyping has come into use very largely for book-work, it is in newspaper-work that it has found most scope, and it is in this connexion that the greatest amount of development of stereotype plate-making machinery has taken place. Very early in the last century it was realized that a single press was inadequate for news-printing, and that, for the economical production of large quantities of matter, several presses with several typographical printing-surfaces in simultaneous use, had become an economic necessity. Stereotyping was brought to a high degree of perfection by Tilloch and Foulis of Glasgow, who were ignorant of its previous invention by William Ged, a goldsmith of Edinburgh, but the process was not turned to Practical account by them. It is said that the third Earl Stanhope derived his instruction in stereotyping from Tilloch and Foulis, and it is recorded that he produced stereotype-plates from plaster in 1802. At first the process found but little favour, the " Monthly Magazine ” for April, 1807, stating that “ stereotyping had not been adopted by the booksellers of London, and that " it does not appear that more than twenty or thirty works would warrant the expense of being cast in solid pages, consequently the loss Would greatly counterbalance the advantages,” etc.
  - It is stated, but the authors are not aware on what authority, or with what degree of accuracy, that the art of stereotyping was known and Practised in the fifteenth century.
  - Johnson in his " Typographia,” published in 1824, regards the advent of the stereotype and the steam press at “The Times” offices in 1813-1814 with horror, and says of others who simplified the early machines : ... these
  - Persons, although not printers, set up an office for stereotype and printing by steam, in opposition to . . . who had steam only ; they also made machines for others: . . . thereby basely tearing down that beautiful fabric of our Art, which had caused so much labour and expense to rear. . . .
  - The paper process for matrix-making was originated in France in 1829 by M. Genoud of Lyons, but it was not until 1848 that it was intro-duced into England by an Italian named Vanoni, although a patent, com-municated from abroad, had been taken out for this process by Moses Poole in 1840. In the early part of the last century much thought was given by Printers and engineers to the problems involved in stereotyping. “The Times, ’ appreciating the value of such a process, entered into an agreement with Marc Isambard Brunel in 1819, an agreement, however, that was cancelled in 1821, for the use of certain improvements in stereotyping, and it is on record that even at this early date the production of the journal required the use of over 300,000 individual types. It was not, however,
- p.477 - vue 621/901
- - 478
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - until 1859, when the Swiss, Dellagana, brought the full advantages of the method to the notice of " The Times,” that, under the guidance of the manager of the printing house, the celebrated J. C. MacDonald—a kinsman of the father of one of the authors of this work—the first curved plate was cast. The difficulties met with at the outset were, however, very great, and it was not until 1863 that "The Times” used curved plates commercially. A period of nearly forty years elapsed before any further notable improvement in newspaper stereotyping took place.
  - At the beginning of this century the operations performed in the offices of a large daily newspaper, after the receipt of the last forme of corrected matter, comprised the making of the flong mould, including drying in a steam-heated press and the filling in of the whites; the transfer of the mould by hand to a semicylindrical casting-box and the making by hand of a cast, with a large riser attached, in this casting-box, fig. 471, plate XCII.
  - The plate was poured vertically and, after it had cooled sufficiently, it was removed from the press ; the plate then was bored in a machine, which finished it on the inside, and the header was cut off; the edges were then trimmed by hand and the plate finished. The whole cycle of operations was performed in the short period of eleven minutes under average conditions, as timed by one of the authors, and in special cases this time was reduced to as little as nine minutes from the receipt of the last forme of corrected matter to the dispatch of the finished plate to the printing-press. A small amount of this work had still to be done by hand at the period named, although the heavy operations of removing the head and of boring were performed by machines. The plate, when finished and trimmed, appears as shown in fig. 472, plate XCII.
  - An improvement on the method of pouring by hand has now been introduced in some French newspaper offices; the metal is pumped into a mould carried upon trunnions and so arranged as to facilitate the handling operations. This combined metal-furnace and mould is shown in fig. 473, plate XCIII. The plate, after removal from the casting-box, as in the hand-casting process, requires to have the head cut off, and to be bored and trimmed at the edges.
  - An automatic boring machine has since been introduced in some of the French newspaper offices, in which the plate has merely to be placed on the machine at one end and is bored, trimmed, and delivered finished at the other end ; fig. 474, plate XCIV.
  - An improvement on the vertical pouring arrangement, shown in fig. 473, plate XCIII, has also been introduced; in this a machine, actuated by hand through the medium of a lever and toggle-joint, closes a mould so arranged that the plate is poured from the edge instead of from the end. The movement of the lever, after the cast is cooled, throws the plate over into the position for trimming and removing from the machine, as shown in fig. 475, plate XCV. The machine is shown closed ready for casting the semicylindrical plate in fig. 476, plate XCV.
- p.478 - vue 622/901
- - PLATE XCII.
  - SNO
  - Fig. 472.—-Semicylindrical plate, with head removed.
  - IG. 471. — Semicylindrical plate, cast by hand, with head attached.
  - [To face page 478.
  - FIG. 479.—Finished plate as removed from the Autoplate machine.
- pl.92 - vue 623/901
- - PLATE XCIII
  - [To face plate XCIV.]
  - A
  - "€%, s ( 1
  - see
  - FIG. 473:—Metal-furnace with pump filling semicylindrical-plate mould in vertical position.
- pl.93 - vue 624/901
- - PLATE XCIV.
  - Fig. 474.—Automatic boring machine for semicylindrical plates.
  - 0 0.
  - J.DERRIEY
  - -========*
  - (To face plate XCIII.
- pl.94 - vue 625/901
- - PLATE XCV.
  - (C
  - and removing the plate.
  - . 6
  - Fig. 476.—Casting-press for semicylindrical plates; water-cooled with automatic
  - To face plate XCVI.]
  - closing and head-cutting gear.
- pl.95 - vue 626/901
- - 1
  - PLATE XCVI.
  - Fig. 477.—Autoplate; front view.
  - [To face plate XCV.
  - AS Xe 0
  - 19 ™——
  - Te 3
  - ---=)
- pl.96 - vue 627/901
- - PLATE XCVII. [To face page 479-]
  - FIG. 478.—Autoplate; back view.
- pl.97 - vue 628/901
- - AUTOMATIC PLATE-CASTING MACHINES. 479
  - AUTOMATIC PLATE-CASTING AND FINISHING MACHINES.
  - The Autoplate is one of the more important adjuncts of the printing-office which should, strictly speaking, be regarded not as a means for producing a printing-surface, but as one for rapidly reproducing and multiplying a printing-surface, already produced by other methods, and thus meeting the requirements of the modern newspaper office. The Autoplate practically stands in the same relation to a mould or matrix prepared from a mass of composed type as an ordinary typecasting machine stands to an ordinary matrix; hence the flong mould taken from the type mass as a whole may be regarded as a single, but gigantic, matrix.
  - In this machine, figs. 477 and 478, plates XCVI and XCVII, the invention °f Henry A. Wise Wood, of New York, the flong matrix is placed in a couple of clips, by which it is carried horizontally into the casting-box or semi-cylindrical mould of the machine. After the joint has been closed the mould is filled at the side of the machine, over the whole width of one end of the page, by the positive stroke of a pump-lever, the latter part of the movement of the lever compressing powerful springs. After a short pause the casting-box is lowered and simultaneously the flong mould is drawn away at the sides from the plate which has been cast, so that this is free of the mould and can be passed on through the machine without damaging the mould or matrix. The core-cylinder against which the plate has been cast then makes a half revolution, the opposite half serving as the core for the next successive cast. The cast which has been made is trimmed at the head and foot by saws placed in a diametral plane and encountered by the plate as it travels automatically from the casting-box to the boring-box. After leaving the casting-box it goes under the shaving-arch for boring, pauses for the boring to take place, and then passes routers, which finish the head and foot, and is finally delivered, at a rate of between three and four plates per minute after the first plate has been produced; the finished plate is shown in fig. 479. plate XCII. The total time for completing the first plate is usually about three-quarters of a minute from the time that the process is started.
  - The Autoplate is a large and very costly machine ; an equipment of two Autoplates, which is a plant suitable for an ordinary newspaper, involves a capital outlay of £10,000. An examination of the saving effected by its agency is of interest. In the old method of stereotyping the damp papier-wache flong, used to form the matrix, was beaten with brushes on to the forme of type and dried in situ in a steam-press, an operation which took s°me nine minutes. It was, when dry, removed from the type-surface and placed in a semicylindrical casting-mould, a core closed down upon it, and a plate cast from it. When sufficiently cool to handle, it was removed to a machine in which it was bored and the header cut off; the edges were then trimmed by hand, and the plate was finished.
- p.479 - vue 629/901
- - co O
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The next step towards the reduction of time was the use of a mangle-press with blankets, as in the intaglio process, to receive the impression of the type ; this reduced the time of preparing the mould to about four minutes. A still further improvement consisted in the introduction of the dry-flong process, in which specially prepared papier mache was laid on the forme, then covered with blankets, a sheet of rubber placed on the top, the whole passed through a mangle-press, and the flong taken off immediately ; the flong was then placed in a rotary matrix-dryer for about one minute and three-quarters, thus reducing the best time previously made by over 50 per cent.
  - The Autoplate economizes time still further, because the various operations connected with the formation of a plate are proceeding simultaneously on successive plates, so that forty or fifty plates, or even more if required, can be obtained from one mould in about fifteen minutes. This is rendered possible by a system of water-cooling in the mould-box and of internal water-spraying in the core-cylinder. The large number of presses used by some of the daily newspapers and the number of sheets of which each newspaper consists have in time of stress required the supply of an almost incredible number of plates. It is recorded that the proprietors of the " Daily Mail" on the occasion of the death of His Late Majesty, King Edward VII, recast all their plates with mourning borders, and achieved a total of 3344 plates in 24 hours ; the " Evening News,” consisting of far fewer sheets, on the occasion of receiving intelligence of the foundering of the Titanic, cast 1150 plates for one edition. Such performances would have been quite impossible by the methods of stereotyping in use but a few years ago.
  - The Autoplate Junior, figs. 480 and 481, plates XCVIII and XCIX, is a smaller and less costly machine in which the mould-box is vertical and the mould, while pump-fed, is not closed at the top, the charge of molten metal, raised by the pump, being simply poured in. After the pump stroke has been made, a timing mechanism is started which rings a gong, on the lapse of a period of thirteen seconds ; the remainder of the automatic operations of the machine—cutting off the head and automatically ejecting—are then performed. The plate is then transferred by hand to the boring-box of the Autoshaver, fig. 482, plate C; the head is returned by hand to the metal-pot while the next charge is cooling. After the first cast, the Auto-plate Junior produces casts at the rate of from two to three per minute. One Autoshaver deals with about six plates per minute, and is the complement of two of the Autoplate Junior machines. " The Times,” the third office in this country to adopt these machines, is equipped on this basis.
  - The Multiplate, fig. 483, plate CI, is another machine of later introduction than the Autoplate ; it practically combines a horizontal stereotype casting-box, an ordinary boring-box, a dressing-saddle, and a meltingfurnace with a semi-automatic pump. In this machine the mould, or matrix, once it has been set in position, is firmly held in place, so that the trimming devices can reproduce plates to a great degree of exactitude • the matrix
- p.480 - vue 630/901
- - PLATE XCVIII.
  - so 1° 2 890222077.0 .20 A
  - Ta o 2
  - 1
  - : man
  - . •* 1 mnl
  - ,00
  - 8 M- s
  - Fig. 480.—Autoplate Junior; front view.
  - [To face page 480.
- pl.98 - vue 631/901
- - PLATE XCIX.
  - [To face plate C.]
  - BS *c, as
  - 0, 2
  - talon
  - FIG. 481.—Autoplate Junior; back view.
- pl.99 - vue 632/901
- - PLATE C.
  - Fig. 482.—Autoshaver.
  - 1
  - tit
  - face plate XCIX.
- pl.100 - vue 633/901
- - Fig. 483.—Multiplate; at rest, after the first cast has been made.
  - PLATE CI.
  - " 7
  - 1
  - s
- pl.101 - vue 634/901
- p.n.n. - vue 635/901
- - PLATE CIL
  - closed.
  - Fig. 484.—Tubular-plate casting-box ;
  - Fig. 485.—Tubular-plate casting-box;
  - open.
  - To face page 481.]
- pl.102 - vue 636/901
- - TUBULAR PLATE-CASTING MACHINE.
  - 481
  - is, moreover, exposed to the view of the operator after each cast, so that it is possible for him to verify that it has suffered no damage. The complete cycle of operations-—stated to occupy about half a minute—performed by this machine is as follows: opening the casting-chamber, stripping the plate from the matrix, depositing the plate in the boring-box, cutting off the head, trimming the top and bottom edges, boring the plate, trimming the sides, delivering the finished plate, and pouring the succeeding one. These operations are effected by the agency of a system of cams and levers.
  - It is of interest to note that, while the cycle of casting, trimming, and delivering operations in an ordinary machine of the linotype class is effected in ten seconds, these stereotyping machines, dealing with many hundreds of times the weight of metal, accomplish their result in a period of time only three times as long in the case of the Multiplate, and in even less than that time in some of the previously mentioned larger machines. The Multiplate is installed in the office of one of the London daily morning papers.
  - It is almost impossible to describe the advances made in any one branch of the printing industry apart from those made in others, so much is progress in any one department dependent on the exigencies and requirements of another. Particularly is this the case with stereotyping and printing presses. To obtain duplicates of the typographical surface, so as to permit more than one platen press to work from the same matter, the plane stereotype-plate was necessary, and the very existence of the rotary press depended upon the successful production of curved plates.
  - TUBULAR PLATES.
  - The tubular-plate casting-box is shown in figs. 484 and 485, plate CII. In the ordinary cylinder-press the plates are semicylindrical; consequently each plate is idle, as far as printing is concerned, for one-half of each revolution, and therefore for one-half of the time the press is running. The require-inents of certain daily newspapers, as regards circulation and number of Pages, are such that they are intermediate between those successfully dealt with by the duplex flat-bed press and those met by the ordinary rotary press. Both the first cost and the expense of operating the latter are very great, while the output of the former is comparatively very small. Moreover, the only machines available recently for this class of daily paper required duplicate plates, and, when printing many-page editions, it was necessary to run them at a greatly reduced speed so as to enable the sheets to be collected. Much mechanical complication is involved, and other difficulties are introduced when papers with more than eight pages, and particularly those with ten, fourteen and eighteen pages, are required to be produced commercially. The consideration of these disadvantages and difficulties has led to the invention of the cylindrical or tubular stereotypeplate press, in which the plate is printing all the time instead of half the time, and which makes it possible to deliver the paper book-folded without
  - 2 1
- p.481 - vue 637/901
- - 482
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - the intervention of those collecting and associating devices which may be a cause of trouble in the larger presses. Not only is the output per plate per hour greater in the case of the tubular-plate machine than with the semi-cylindrical form, but the weight of plates used is less. Assuming that seven tubular plates do the same work as ten semicylindrical plates, then the actual weight of metal used in the former case is only one-half of that necessary in the latter.
  - The tubular plate is, strictly speaking, not a complete cylinder, but is so much of the curved surface as corresponds to the printed length of the page ; that portion which would correspond to the top and bottom whites is absent to provide space for an ingenious arrangement of clips which hold the plate in position when it has been pushed home on the carrying cylinder of the machine. Still more ingenious is the arrangement of the framing of the machine which permits the tubular plate to be slid into place without dismantling the gears and the carrying cylinder ; the framing which carries the bearing of the carrying cylinder is reduced on one side of the machine to a width narrow enough to pass through the longitudinal opening in the plate.
  - The conditions under which the tubular plate is used are not such as to require multiplication of the individual plate ; hence the casting and finishing plant designed for its production approximates more closely to that used in the earlier method of stereotyping than it does to the arrangements adopted in the highly specialized Autoplate ; in fact, it consists of a vertical casting-box containing a cylindrical core and having the two halves of the box hinged to each other ; the core is capable of being pivoted, after the box is opened, to a nearly horizontal position for the removal of the tubular plate. The plate, with its head, is removed by hand, after it has cooled, to a combination plate-trimmer and tail-saw which bores and trims both ends of the plate.
- p.482 - vue 638/901
- - CHAPTER XXXII.
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL ETCHING, RELIEF PROCESS BLOCKS
  - AND ELECTROTYPING.
  - ". . . skilful to work . . . also to grave any manner of graving, and to find out every device which shall be put to him, with thy cunning men and with the cunning men of my lord David thy father.”—Extract from letter of Huram, King of Tyre, to Solomon, King of Israel.
  - II. Chronicles.
  - Long primer No. 18 clarendon.
  - The process block with which papers and periodicals of the day are now generally illustrated is a complex entity. It has grown up into adolescence in little more than a generation, and it owes its existence and usefulness to a widely ramifying ancestry and to the inter-relationship of many branches of the arts and crafts. Its history, moreover, is wrapped up in the development of various other industries without which it could not have attained its present perfection.
  - In the second decade of last century two patents were taken out by Sir William Congreve for combining plates for the printing, in two or more colours, of the backs of bank-notes; these early colour-blocks consisted of a series of faces of metal, very perfectly fitted together mechanically to form the plane surface which was engraved, and so arranged that the one set of faces could be withdrawn from the other in a direction normal to the printing-surface, thus permitting separate inking of the two sets of faces. When the plates were again restored to their normal printing-position, the complete design was continuous, but partly inked in one colour and partly in another : this method is still used for some ornamental labels, those, for instance, on the bottles for " Stephens’ Ink,” which show both the mechanical perfection of workmanship of the portions of the two-colour block and at the same time afford an example of very skilled geometric-chuck engraving. In this early invention the difficulty of bringing the paper into true register as well as the other difficulty arising from difference of dampness and consequent variation in size were avoided by an extreme accuracy of fit between the different portions of the printing-surfaces.
  - 0 O
- p.483 - vue 639/901
- - 0
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Electrotyping as a method of reproducing a metal or other irregular surface came into existence about 1840, and in 1841 a patent was taken out by A. Parkes for growing matrices by electro-deposition. As a means for the reproduction of a typographical printing-surface, electrotyping is dealt with at the end of this chapter.
  - The first British patent for producing metallic plates with raised printing-surfaces is that of E. Palmer, and is dated 1841 ; this was followed in the succeeding year by a further patent for engraving through a wax-coated matrix-plate to form the printing-lines, or blacks in the positive electrotype taken from it. The process was termed by its inventor glyphography. The whites were built up in this process by adding wax by hand, assisted by various tools ingeniously constructed and heated. Figure 486 gives a section of the plate a, covered with a wax coating b, and shows the added wax c built up for the whites. The copper
  - 1
  - )
  - $06
  - Fig. 486.—Section of typographical etching-plate showing plate with wax built up for whites, and section of the electrotyped shell filled and mounted.
  - electrotype is shown by d, and e represents the backing-up metal used for reinforcing the electrotype shell after its removal from the wax, the flow of which gives a natural and gradually decreasing slope to the metal supporting the black lines in the final result. After building up, the wax is black-leaded and metal is deposited on the surface so obtained ; this deposit is then tinned on the back, backed up with lead, trimmed off on a lathe or shaping machine, and, when mounted on wood or metal to bring the printing-surface type-high, it becomes a finished typographical block. The method, much improved, is still in use to-day. One of the earliest works illustrated by Palmer’s process is “ The History and Antiquities of Brentford, Ealing and Chiswick,” by T. Faulkner, 1845, and the word glyphography occurs at the foot of many of the illustrations contained in it.
  - Some four years later came the method of forming a relief engraving by using a plate covered with a ground, protecting the blacks with the medium used for the direct or transferred drawing, and etching down the whites to the desired extent.
  - About the end of the first decade of the nineteenth century possibilities in the nascent art of lithography attracted the attention of a retired French military officer, Joseph Nicephore Niepce, who endeavoured to discover means for producing a lithographic printing-surface by the agency of light.
- p.484 - vue 640/901
- - TYPOGRAPHICAL ETCHING AND PROCESS BLOCKS 485
  - From 1814 to his death in 1833 Niepce worked continuously at the problem of producing a printing-plate from a transparent engraving, and in 1 29 invented a practical process of heliographic printing. His discovery a bitumen coating applied to a metal plate undergoes change and ceases to be so readily soluble in certain oils where it has been acted upon by Ugh , enabling an intaglio printing-surface to be etched, was the greatest step ma e towards photographic printing prior to the invention of photograp 1 1 by Daguerre after the death of his partner Niepce.
  - The most important advance, however, was that obtained by t e com bination of photographic methods with the processes already known and in use. W. H. Fox Talbot in his patent of 1852 describes the method of coating a metallic plate with a substance affected by exposure to light, exposing the plate photographically under a negative, and etching the parts on whic the light has not acted. The sensitized surface is produced by a combination of potassium dichromate and gelatine, and gauze is used to obtain a grain. From this patent maybe traced the evolution of the process block of to-day through all its numerous improvements.
  - Other methods rapidly followed the Talbot process, and in the succee ing year Applegath, to prevent forgery by photography, patented a method for printing in several colours, the possibilities of the photographic met 10 of reproduction now having secured recognition.
  - About this period inventors began to realize that a process which gave an intaglio surface would conversely give a relief surface and vice versa, and patents were taken out for methods by which transfei prints on copper could be increased to the desired depth in the whites by repeated etching, and, though forestalled by other workers, the Comte de Fontainemoreau patented in 1854 a method of producing relief zinco plates by etching. :
  - About this time various inventors sought concurrently for the so ution of the problem of printing in several colours, and the method of using several separate chases printed consecutively is claimed in the patent 0 E. Boileau, in which both type-blocks and quads were used. A later paten of the same year covers the method in which wood-blocks are made 0 ar wood, cut plankways, with two systems of grooves sawn in at right angles to each other, so as to present a number of spots of equal size and equa y spaced over the whole surface. All these spots except such as correspo to the required colour for each block, as shown by a design prepare on section paper ruled to correspond to the printing-block, are remove y suitable tools and the work of printing is divided over the same number of blocks as there are colours used. This method, practically wit or modification, is still used to-day for the printing of linoleum; the large wood-blocks in use for this purpose often exceed a square foot in area.
  - The simple zinc line process.—In the simplest form of this process, originally used, a drawing is made in lithographic ink on a zinc plate. Powdered asphaltum or resin is dusted over the plate ; some of this adheres to the ink, and the rest has to be carefully removed. The plate is then
- p.485 - vue 641/901
- - 486
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - heated gently, and in this way an acid-proof coating is obtained which protects the lines which are to form the future printing-surface. The under surface of the plate then receives an acid-proof coating, and the whole plate is plunged into a bath of dilute acid. The unprotected interspaces on the upper surface of the plate then gradually dissolve. As soon as a certain small depth has been reached, this action must be stopped, or else there is risk of the protected lines being attacked laterally by the acid. The coating is next reinforced, either by a dusting method or else by applying a roller carrying some acid-resisting composition, and by then gently heating the plate. The result of this is that not only the lines, but also the adjoining top of the walls of the interspaces have a protective coating. The plate is then again plunged into acid, and this series of operations is repeated several times until the smaller interspaces are sufficiently deep to give whites in printing. Finally the larger interspaces are routed, or cut out, by means of hand-tools. At a later date, routing machines were used for this purpose. If the plate when completed is generally satisfactory, but has some small part of the printing-surface missing, it can be repaired by putting on a little solder and working this up by hand. The zinc plate is then mounted on a block made of mahogany, or other suitable hardwood, of such thickness that the correct height-to-paper is obtained. This block—as the completed article is termed—is then used for printing in the usual way. If a very large number of impressions are required, it is advisable to have several electrotypes made, and use these for the printing proper.
  - The transfer line process.—In a modification of the simple zinc line process, introduced very little later, the drawing was made in transfer-ink on lithographic paper, and transferred to the zinc plate, which was then treated in the way described above. Considerable skill is required to carry out this process properly, particularly in heating the zinc plate uniformly and to the exact extent necessary.
  - The photo zinc line process.—A plate of zinc is coated with a substance sensitive to light, such as asphaltum or bichromated gelatine. A reflected negative is taken, with the help of a prism or mirror, from the original which is to be reproduced. This negative must be quite clear and transparent in the lines, and dense and dark elsewhere; it must contain no half-tones. The negative is then placed on the prepared zinc plate and exposed to light; this renders insoluble those parts of the coating which are below the whites of the negatives, and the remainder of the coating can then be dissolved and washed off. The plate then undergoes treatment similar to that applied in the zinc line process. This process makes possible the reproduction of all drawings in black and white in which the lines are of sufficient width to produce a typographical surface, when reproduced on the scale required. It is admirably suited to the reproduction of pen and ink sketches, machine drawings, patterns, designs, and, in fact, all work resembling the typographical printing-surface in its general characteristics. Blocks of this kind were formerly known as process blocks or zincos, terms which
- p.486 - vue 642/901
- - TYPOGRAPHICAL ETCHING AND PROCESS BLOCKS. 487 are still often used for them, although their use has now become extended to half-tone blocks, which were only invented at a later period.
  - The gelatine process.—This process resembles that last described in using bichromated gelatine, but with the difference that while the parts acted on by light become insoluble the remaining gelatine can be made to swell by immersion in cold water. By taking a plaster mould from this and working on an impression from the mould with wax, as explained in the paragraph devoted to typographical etching, these parts can be built up and a shell obtained by electrotyping in the usual manner.
  - Typographical etching.—Dawson’s process, invented by the brothers A. and H. T. Dawson and patented by them in 1872, is carried out by coating a plate of brass with a thin film of wax through which the etching is drawn with a needle used in a manner similar to that adopted in ordinary etching. Great care must be taken by the draughtsman to cut quite through the wax, or the resulting surface will not be type-high all over. The whites are built up on the wax coating with wax applied by means of several ingenious tools described in the patent. When built up the plate is black-leaded and an electrotype is taken from it in the usual manner.
  - Where printed matter is required in conjunction with a design, ordinary type can be pressed through the original film of wax. The process is used for preparing the illustrations for certain scientific works, and also for diagrams, maps, etc. The curve diagrams in the “ Proceedings of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers ” are prepared by this process, which is peculiarly suitable for work in which the use of lettering is often nearly equal in quantity to that of engraving. In England the diagrams of the “ Proceedings of the Royal Society of Arts ” are usually produced in this way ; other examples of this process are to be found in many of the maps in the eleventh edition of the " Encyclopaedia Britannica.
  - Half-tone blocks.—In this process, the picture is broken up into a series of dots, placed at regular distances from each other, the appearance of light or shade being produced by decreasing or increasing the size of the individual dots. These blocks are produced by processes based on that of Meisenbach, Patented in 1882. This inventor at first used a glass screen ruled with Parallel lines close together, which was inserted in the camera in front of the negative. In the original form of the process two exposures were given to each negative, the first with the screen placed in the camera with the lines running at 45° to the horizontal, and, after the first exposure had been given, the screen was withdrawn, turned through a right-angle and replaced, and the second exposure was then given. This double exposure had the result of breaking up the image on the negative into a series of dots. If a zinc Plate was then prepared from the negative, in a way similar to that adopted in the photo-zinc line process, the size of the dots on this zinc plate varied with the darkness or lightness of the corresponding dots in the negative. Thus this process made it possible to reproduce a photograph or an object of any kind, not merely one in lines.
- p.487 - vue 643/901
- - 488
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The difficulties, however, of accurately dividing the time of exposure, of moving the screen and replacing it in the camera, were obviously such as to handicap this invention very severely in its earlier form. It was soon found that the best effect was obtained when the screen or grid was not actually in contact with the negative, but a short distance away from it ; this discovery led to the great improvement of making the grid of two plates of ruled glass with the lines filled in, the plates being cemented together face to face so as to obtain a true cross-grid available for use as a screen. But difficulties which were at first insuperable arose in ruling these glass screens in such a way that regularity of tint could be obtained, and the screens were necessarily very expensive ; moreover one given screen could naturally only be used for one given size of grain. Other methods, many of them photographic, were hence devised for making suitable screens. Various woven materials, wire-work, etc., were tried with more or less success to obtain the necessary reticulations. One method which gave excellent results was the following : a series of fine parallel lines was engraved on a copper plate; the plate was then inked in and printed ; a negative was then taken of the print, with alternate exposures of the lines in a horizontal and in a vertical position if a straight tint was desired. If a diagonal tint was required, the lines were placed in each position at 45° to the horizontal. A reticulated negative was thus obtained, which was subsequently used as a screen. One great advantage of this method was that it was possible, by varying the distance of the print when making the negative, to vary the size of the reticulations. The angle through which the print was turned when making the alternate exposures could also be varied. When this angle was 900, as described above, a square tint was produced ; but oblique tints could be produced equally well. Once a really good print, with regular and sharply-defined lines of the dimensions necessary, had been obtained, it was a comparatively simple, although somewhat uncertain matter to make excellent screens having reticulations of any size and pattern desired. The objection to these screens was, however, their comparatively short life. They rapidly deteriorated under the influence of the strong light which had to be used in those days. Otherwise good results were obtained, and some of the blocks which were made in this way about twenty-five to thirty years ago, were quite as good as any which have been made since.
  - The art of ruling glass screens has made great progress since, and it is to Max Levy of Philadelphia that is due the first production of ruled screens of the requisite degree of accuracy.
  - It is essential in performing the work of ruling that the machine should be kept at a perfectly even temperature, and free from all vibration from extraneous sources. The work is performed by coating a sheet of plate glass with asphalt and wax on which the lines are mechanically ruled with a diamond giving the required width of line. The lines are then etched in with hydrofluoric acid, the coating is cleaned off and the lines are filled in, after
- p.488 - vue 644/901
- p.n.n. - vue 645/901
- - PLATE CUE [To face page 489.]
  - Figs. 487 to 492.—Study of a head by Prof. E. Lant^n.
  - 1 out
  - ay
  - V i
  - Examples of reproduction in half-tone using different screens. 487-50 per in.; 488-57 per in.; 489-100 per in.; 490-125 per in.; 491-150 per in.; 492-175 per in.
- pl.103 - vue 646/901
- - TYPOGRAPHICAL ETCHING AND PROCESS BLOCKS. 489 which the two grids are cemented together with the lines at right angles to each other. The pitch of the ruling varies according to the work to be done, and this is dependent on the surface of the paper to be used and the fineness of the ink.
  - The process blocks for illustrating the daily and evening papers, which are printed from ordinary stereotypes on the rotary press, are produced by means of a screen of 50 meshes per linear inch, fig. 487, plate CIII, or one even coarser. For better work printed on paper with a smoother surface, screens of 75 meshes per linear inch, fig. 488, or of 100 meshes per linear inch, fig. 489, are used ; for high-class trade catalogues and text-books the blocks are obtained from screens of 125 meshes per linear inch, fig. 490, to 150 meshes per linear inch, fig. 491; a screen very generally used for such illustrations as appear in this work has 133 meshes per linear inch. In still-higher-class work, printed on art paper, screens are used having 175 meshes per linear inch, fig. 492; the work produced by these requires great care to ensure that the minute depressions do not become filled in with ink in printing and the effect spoilt; for text-books on and catalogues of works of art, which require much detail, a screen of 200 meshes per linear inch may be used; the difficulty of obtaining satisfactory work from this or from even finer screens does not lie in the production of the block itself but in the printing.
  - Occasionally for advertising purposes the printed impression of a halftone is enlarged many times, with the result that the pitch of the dots may be increased to as much as one inch. Such advertisements will only appear to resemble the original print when they are seen from a sufficiently great distance; if an ordinary half-tone block is examined under a microscope, it is very difficult to identify which part of the picture it is that appears in the field.
  - With regard to the actual photography, that is to the optical side of the process as opposed to the mechanical, if the glass screen were placed so as to be actually in contact with the sensitized plate and this would only be practicable if a dry plate were used—the resulting print would be a series of intersecting lines with interruptions; the tint would not be broken up into a series of dots in the manner desired. This effect is Produced by diffraction ; the clear spaces in the screen permit the passage of divergent pencils of light which spread over a larger area on the plate, and these make the sizes of the dots vary according to the intensity of the light received through any particular opening. The operator must determine the correct distance between the screen and the plate in order to take full advantage of this diffraction effect, so that in the result the dots on the negative join together in the high lights and the shadows are represented by small separate dots.
  - At first, all process blocks, both line and half-tone, were made of zinc. Subsequently other metals were also tried, particularly for half-tone blocks. Very good results are now obtained with copper.
- p.489 - vue 647/901
- - 490
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Until 1892, most of the illustrations in newspapers and books were woodcuts. But the results obtained by means of the half-tone process were so superior not only as regards speed and price, but also as regards beauty and faithfulness of reproduction of the original, that in less than fifteen years the art of wood-engraving had died out almost completely. It is true that the Polytechnic and other art schools are making efforts to revive training in this art, which almost attained perfection in the hands of Albrecht Durer and other great artists, but these attempts are bound to remain futile, except perhaps in the case of individual efforts of the highest artistic order.
  - Colour-printing blocks.—Before the advent of printing for books, colour-prints were made from blocks produced by wood-engravers, and this method is still in use in Japan.
  - The Japanese colour-prints made from wood-engravings require a large number of blocks for their printing, and the method is admirably illustrated by the examples in the fire collection of actual blocks and the prints from them which are exhibited in the Victoria and Albert Museum at South Kensington. The method of inking the blocks differs from European methods, inasmuch as the ink used is not of an oily nature but consists of a starchy medium, to which colour is added, the mixture being applied to the wood with a wide brush. The blocks are cut with the grain running plankways, so that the absorption is not so great as it would be in an ordinary European end-grain wood-block. Graduated tints are obtained in the inking by intentional irregularity in the amount of colour applied to the printing-areas covered by the brush.
  - Following the coloured print composed from a number of independent wood-blocks as used in Japan, came the completely coloured picture produced on an intaglio printed key in the manner devised by Baxter; this was followed by the use of a wood-block key and the building up of a picture tint by tint, a method used by Edmund Evans, the engraver-printer of Kate Greenaway’s and Caldecott’s illustrated children’s books.
  - From this point it is very difficult to separate the history of typographical colour-printing from other methods of intaglio and surface printing, so interwoven is it with the progress made in intaglio colour-printing and in chromolithographic work. The three-colour process as printed from half-tone blocks has been made possible by its auxiliaries : photography, in its mechanical application dependent on the ruling of a screen to a very high degree of accuracy ; paper, coated and finished to a surface both flatter and smoother than anything previously attempted; ink, ground to a corresponding degree of fineness; and finally, a degree of exactitude in the register of the printing machinery, far greater than could have been obtained without the corresponding improvement which had simultaneously taken place in machine-tool construction.
  - One of the first steps taken was the use of a half-tone key, and the French paper, " Le Figaro Illustre,” produced coloured illustrations from a
- p.490 - vue 648/901
- - TYPOGRAPHICAL ETCHING AND PROCESS BLOCKS. 491 key made from an isochromatic plate, the colours being added from hand-drawn plates.
  - Meanwhile, colour-printing had made progress in other branches, for example intaglio colour-printing. Working, with a coloured picture by the artist before him, on an etched plate of the subject, the printer filled in each colour on this intaglio plate until he had obtained a result which in his opinion would produce a print resembling the original. This method was revived for a time, experimentally, by the Dawsons about 1886, and IS still being worked at Montmartre in Paris by Delatre, the son of the etching-printer of that name. At the present time this process is also being made use of by Emery Walker and others in London.
  - The collotype, with its resemblance in the ink-retaining quality of the reticulated surface of the hardened exposed portion of the plate to that of the stone in lithography, though but little known, has also taken its Part in the development of colour-printing; many good examples of chromocollotype have been published by the Medici Society.
  - The use of three negatives exposed singly to red, yellow, and blue light by the interposition of suitable filters, and the subsequent printing of the results in the same colours on paper, is stated to have been suggested Simultaneously by Ransonnet of Vienna and by Collan of London, in 1865. The idea, however, was premature, owing to the absence of photographic Plates properly sensitive to each group of filtered rays of light, for the early red and yellow plates were nearly opaque to actinic rays. This difficulty Was overcome when Vogel, of Berlin, discovered that the addition of eosine to collodion increased the range of colour to which the plate was sensitive ; this was applied practically by Ducos Duhauron in 1868. It is stated at the negatives obtained were excellent for their colour-values, but at the inventor used the same colours for printing instead of the complementary colours, and consequently the printed results were found 0 be unsatisfactory. It is difficult to reconcile this statement with the masterly exposition of the subject given by the inventor in his French Patent, No. 83,061, of 1868, at the conclusion of which he suggests the 0 lowing test for the truth of his claim :—
  - C est en essayant de reproduire le spectre solaire par mes divers Precedes qu’on reconnaitra s’il est reellement constitue par autant de aauleurs simples qu’il y a de refrangibilites, ou s’il est forme par une trinite as trois spectres, rouge, jaune et bleu superposes et dont le maximum itensite correspond a des points differents.”
  - was not until the early nineties that the three-colour process was ished on a commercial basis. Great difficulties had to be overcome in rung absolute register for all the three negatives ; very powerful light-fitt Was required to diminish the time of exposure; dark rooms had to be and with special lamps, deep red for plates sensitive to blue and yellow, was deep green for plates sensitive to red. Another difficulty that arose as due to the production of a moire effect in the print if the screen
- p.491 - vue 649/901
- - 492 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - position was not changed, and it was found necessary to use a screen capable of being revolved so that while the lines of dots were at right angles to each other on each plate, those of each of the three plates were inclined at an angle of 300 to those of each of the other two. Fixed screens are now used instead ; the one is usually arranged with its lines inclined at an angle of 45° to the edge of the plate for the blue, and another screen having lines inclined at an angle of 15° to the edge of the plate is used, the one way round for yellow and the other way round for red.
  - The colour-screens have been the subject of much research and invention; coloured films, coloured glasses and dye-containing cells have all been tried in turn, but it has been found that in every case optical flatness is an essential feature mechanically, and that the quality of the filter must pass a spectroscopic test. An orange-red filter has to be used for the rays sensitizing the plate which is to print blue, a green-blue filter for the plate which is to print red, and a blue-violet filter for the plate which is to print yellow. Thus good work depends upon many variables, and these are largely dependent on the judgment and experience of the operator :—-
  - For the proper illumination of the subject ;
  - For the selection of the proper light-filter ;
  - For the correct setting of the screens for angle and for distance from the plate ;
  - For the choice of the appropriate sensitized plate ;
  - For the correct time of exposure ;
  - For the development of the three negatives so that they will give plates from which, in combination and by the use of inks of the proper colour, a true ultimate result will be obtained.
  - The half-tone plates made from these three negatives by the photo-etcher must be trimmed, squared up, and mounted type-high. In making the trials the procedure is to print first from the yellow ; next, to take a trial proof from the red ; then to take a combined proof of yellow and red ; following this a proof print of the blue plate, and finally a combined print of the yellow, red, and blue plates. In the actual printing it is usual for the yellow block to be printed first and the paper allowed to dry ; the red is printed next, and also allowed to dry before the blue or last printing 1 done. The continuous spectrum, which has been chosen as an example of the three-colour process, is given in figs. 493 to 497, plate CIV. In this the yellow, printed first, is shown in fig. 493 ; the red is shown alone in fig. 494, and the combined yellow and red in fig. 495. The blue 15 shown alone in fig. 496, and the complete spectrum resulting from the superposed printing of the three blocks is given in fig. 497.
  - In the four-colour process there is the addition of black or a broken black ; the fourth colour is usually printed between the yellow and red-but occasionally it is printed first, though less frequently it is printed after the red or even after the blue. The yellow being the first colour to be
- p.492 - vue 650/901
- - PLATE CIV.
  - [ To face page 492.]
  - Siu
  - Fig. 493-— Yellow alone.
  - Fig. 494.—Red alone.
  - Fig.—.495.— Yellow and red.
  - Fig. 496.—Blue alone.
  - Fig. 497.— Yellow, red, and blue.
  - FIGS. 493 to 497.—Continuous spectrum reproduced by the three-colour process.
- pl.104 - vue 651/901
- p.n.n. - vue 652/901
- p.n.n. - vue 653/901
- - PLATE CV.
  - [To face page 493.]
  - ie 122-5
  - vsere
  - " 2 Vo
  - :
  - Fig. 498.—Example of Litho-block.
- pl.105 - vue 654/901
- - TYPOGRAPHICAL ETCHING AND PROCESS BLOCKS. 493 received by the paper is absorbed to a greater extent, and here comes into account the question of skill and experience in mixing the inks to the right tone to correct such absorption and give the desired result.
  - Whereas in ordinary language the words tone, tint, hue, and shade are used almost indiscriminately, for the niceties of colour-printing work it is necessary to use these as having different meanings, which are generally accepted as follows :—
  - Tone signifies intensity of colour ;
  - Tints refer to admixtures of colour with white ;
  - Hues relate to admixtures of colours with other colours ;
  - Shades indicate admixtures of colours with black.
  - In describing the effect which the various colours produce in the plate, it is commonly stated that:—
  - Yellow gives light and life to the subject;
  - Red gives colour and warmth ;
  - Blue gives shadow and depth and completes the form and outlines of the picture.
  - The success of colour-printing is largely dependent on the improve-ments that have taken place in the preparation of inks and in their application; in the parallelism and flatness of surface of the paper; and in the Printing-press itself, both in its power of impression and in its accuracy of register.
  - Attempts have been made to print in three colours simultaneously, that is without any intermediate period for drying the ink. Where attempts have been made to do this on the cylinder-press it has been found that the difficulty of obtaining sufficiently accurate register of curved plates is extremely great. In France three or four colours have been printed at one operation by means of a flat-bed press, introduced in 1902 by Lambert. This process, however, involves the difficulty of adding an impression to one not quite dry, though it avoids the still greater difficulty of change occurring in the paper with consequent impossibility of obtaining accurate register.
  - The fact that the process block is produced from any suitable photo-graphic negative permits it to be used to reproduce effects which could otherwise only be obtained by lithography; in fact, it is possible to obtain at a single printing an effect which would require two operations lithographically. An example of this is afforded by the process called the Litho-block, which is actually a process block obtained from two or more superposed images on the photographic plate, the lettering being Printed through the illustration or background of the block, usually an advertisement. An example of this process is given in fig. 498, plate CV.
  - Other results can be obtained by suitable combinations of process blocks. An extreme example is that process in which two stereoscopic plates are taken. Separate blocks are prepared from these plates and then printed in red and green colours, superimposed on the same sheet
- p.493 - vue 655/901
- - 494
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - of paper. The combined impressions produce a blurred effect when looked at in the ordinary way, but, when viewed through glasses, red and green respectively for the two eyes, the pictures actually seen by each eye become combined into a single stereoscopic image which is comparable in effect to that obtained by the two adjacent photographs of the familiar stereoscope.
  - In the issue of “ The Inland Printer ” for November, 1913, a very remark-able example of combined photographic and colour printing portraiture is shown. Three colour-record negatives were taken simultaneously and instantaneously of the sitter, a wonderful feat of photography, by means of the special camera and flashlight apparatus of the Polychromide Company of America. From these three colour-record negatives the Van Dyke Gravure Company of New York engraved photogravures on copper cylinders and printed off the seventeen thousand copies required for the edition of “ The Inland Printer,” from whose pages the preceding few lines have been summarized. This combination of instantaneous photography in colours and rotary photogravure in colours seems to be a consummation beyond which it would appear impossible for pictures in printing-ink to go. To what has been said above, the authors can only add their unstinted admiration of the beauty of achievement and workmanship in the specimen shown in the admirable trade-journal to which reference has just been made.
  - ELECTROTYPING.
  - This modern form of reproducing a typographical surface must have but very brief notice here, for although it gives very satisfactory results it can never compete commercially, for ordinary letterpress work, with the older process of stereotyping and its later developments. For the reproduction of process blocks, engravings, and surfaces other than typographical, it is very largely used. This process is still more largely employed in other branches of the arts: these, however, call for no comment in this work.
  - The process of electrotyping really consists in the separation of metals from their solution by electrolysis and their deposition in a solid form on a suitable mould. In practice the art of electrotyping requires very close and constant attention to minute details: the purity of the materials, the cleanliness of the vessels used and the perfection of the electric connexions being matters of the greatest importance, while the distance between anode and cathode, the temperature of the depositing bath, the composition of the electrolyte and the voltage of the current supplied are all variables, each of which must be confined between narrow limits.
  - It is not a process that can be carried on commercially and profitably on a small scale; it does not call for further description in this work, for it has formed the subject-matter of many scientific memoirs and has a considerable literature of its own.
- p.494 - vue 656/901
- - CHAPTER XXXIII.
  - THE LANGUAGE OF CHINA AND ITS TYPOGRAPHICAL
  - EXPRESSION.
  - g 2
  - 3
  - “ Riches and honour acquired by ways that are not right are to me as a floating cloud.”
  - Analects of Confucius.
  - Brevier abbey text (Stephenson, Blake & Co.).
  - IN dealing with Chinese, a man of any other race in the world has to divest himself of all preconceived notions and of every idea that has become familiar to him in connexion with speech, aural or written, and approach the subject from a standpoint not only novel, but as difficult of attainment as it is novel.
  - There is ample reason for this statement, for the Chinese language in its recorded state does not express itself through the ear as do other fanguages, but through the eye in pictorial ideographs, all of which, it is stated, can be traced back to some visualized fact. Hence it has no alphabet, no syllabary, practically but little real grammar, only an enormous range of characters or conventionalized pictures extending from over 100,000 in exaggerated estimates to 15,000 in conservative estimates. It is obvious, therefore, that its adaptation in this state for modern machine-composition is entirely out of the question, for it would be quite beyond the range of practical possibility to cut punches and strike and apply such a number of matrices to any known form of machine. Imagination boggles at a Linotype keyboard a quarter of a mile in length, or a Monotype grid Weighing over a quarter of a ton. Indeed, to bring the whole language within the scope of operation of an ordinary hand-compositor working at case, would draw one very near the late Mark Twains description of Chinese compositors at work, a matter already alluded to elsewhere in
  - 495
- p.495 - vue 657/901
- - 496 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - this book. In practice the ideographs in general use are restricted to some 6000 or 8000 characters, but even such numbers are unwieldy.
  - Fig. 499.—Archaic Chinese writing, in form 2,700 years old.
  - 1 d at 4eD€ AM-30
  - $8) % 20 *6 AR FE Sth HX00 Pori 23 MA :HDF 55
  - Disregarding certain archaic types, the Chinese recognize six orthodox styles of writing. First of these is that commonly called the seal character,” which is said to date from 827 B.C.
  - A X ? M ** $
  - Fig. 500.—Chuan shu or seal character.
  - Following this comes the " clerkly style ” used in public offices, dating probably from 213 B.C.
  - Fig. 501.—Li shu or clerkly style.
- p.496 - vue 658/901
- - CHINESE STYLES OF WRITING AND PRINTING. 497
  - Then we have the " pattern style,” from which all modern forms have originated, probably dating from the beginning of the Christian era.
  - 7 +% %
  - Fig. 502.— Ch’iai shu or pattern style.
  - Next there is the " running hand,” the pencil, or brush, being carried from stroke to stroke ; this dates from about a.d. 200.
  - 8x
  - 4 sle
  - Fig. 503.—Hsing shu or running hand.
  - Then come the " grass characters,” dating from about the same period. This is a very abbreviated running hand, full of difficulties even to an educated native ; it is still commonly in use, particularly in Japan and Korea.
  - Fig. 504.—Ts’ao tzi or grass character.
  - The sixth and last hand is that of the Sung dynasty, whose name it still bears.
  - Fig. 505.—Sung t’i or Sung dynasty style.
  - This is the printed style, and, since it came into use, the Sung ti has undergone no material alterations. It constitutes a medium of daily and common communication between the individuals of a large proportion of the human race, and is well called a " marvellous script by Sir Walter Hillier, one of the leading Chinese scholars of the world, and the gifted writer of the interesting volume, « The Chinese language and how to learn it, from which these illustrations are by permission reproduced ; an authority to whom the authors of this work are personally indebted for much of the information here given and for the admirable memorandum which follows.
  - 2 K
- p.497 - vue 659/901
- - 6 Co
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Classic Chinese writing is indeed a wonderful and beautiful form of conveying ideas, but apart from the fact that the whole of the rest of the world recognizes meanings through the ear and not through the eye, the difficulties of its acquisition are immense. Not only is there the portentous difficulty of memorizing an enormous number of ideographs, but each ideograph changes its meaning or expresses an entirely new idea according to the position in which it stands relatively to other ideographs. Merely to mention some of the technical difficulties of reproducing the classic Chinese characters by modern methods of preparing a typographical surface would take up several pages of this book, and, owing to these difficulties, the use of the language as a rapidly printed and easily understood means of expression not only throughout the Chinese Empire, but for foreigners, becomes an impossibility.
  - Many attempts have been made to write Chinese phonetically by means of latin characters, and these have to a certain extent come into use. All such foreign systems, however, have grave disadvantages, firstly, from the fact that the alphabet itself is foreign, and therefore objectionable, and secondly, from the tonal qualities of Chinese, necessitating, in addition to the ordinary letters of an alphabet, the use of a number of arbitrary marks, signs and accents. Further objection to the latin character arises from the different dialects spoken in China, which may practically be termed different languages using the same pictorial sign to express the same word-meaning, but having a totally different pronunciation ; for instance, the ideograph 4 metal, is in Peking pronounced chin, in Nanking it is pronounced kin, and elsewhere through China it is variously pronounced tsin, kem, cing, and ciang, and possibly may have many other pronunciations. The example given is in any case sufficient to show how impossible it is to produce a universal, correct, and efficient system of writing Chinese by means of a latin alphabet.
  - Within the last few years, however, a new Chinese alphabet, or more strictly speaking, syllabary, has been invented by the Chinese themselves and has come into a certain vogue and into semi-official use ; for instance, in matters connected with military affairs. By using this syllabary all variations can be represented, and many of the disabilities mentioned are incidentally removed. This syllabic form of writing, itself, however, presented almost insuperable difficulties to machine-composition or typewriting; but the difficulty has been overcome by an invention of the authors, which applies not only to the syllabary in question, but with slight modifications to any similar attempt at the phonetic expression of a language.
  - The new method of writing Chinese phonetically, which is, as already stated, a Chinese invention, includes: dividing the so-called mandarin pronunciation of each ideograph into two portions ; expressing each of these portions by a character of fixed phonetic value; and adding it to
- p.498 - vue 660/901
- - THE SYLLABIC SYSTEM OF CHINESE WRITING. 499 a symbol or mark which expresses the tone-value to be given to the whole composite character.
  - It is impossible to do without an example in a subject of such complexity as that with which this invention deals. Here, therefore, is given the ideographic character for fang D3 and after it, the same word as at present written in the new Chinese syllabic alphabet 3 L [f(u)ang]. Unless special matrices are made for the whole composite character—and not only for the whole composite character as here represented, but also for the same composite character in all its eight different variations of tone and elision—the new composite character, or syllabic word, is as impossible of production on the composing machine as would be the original pictorial ideograph itself unless it also had a special matrix made for each variety. In the one case the difficulties would arise from the large number of permutations and combinations of a limited number of characters and signs, and in the other, from the vast number of totally different ideographic matrices that would be required. Moreover, even though the syllabic character were divided into its several component parts in the attempt to get over one complex difficulty, it would still be impos-sible to set it, in its present position, on any form of composing machine using separate matrices, for this would necessitate producing at the same time and in the same mould at least two separate and interdependent 8 ugs, or characters. Similar difficulties would also arise in the attempt to adapt the script to the typewriter under the same mechanical conditions of circumstance and situation.
  - The invention of the authors consists in the mechanical and technical Processes involved in altering the position of the two components and the 1 net mark in such a manner that while retaining perfect naturalness and 81 llity to Chinese eyes, the composite phonographic character is rendered capable of being written with a typewriter or composing machine. This, speaking broadly, is done by placing one character after the other, followed y the tonal mark, or otherwise arranging it on the principle here in-a cd, so as to allow of its being brought within the range of machine-composition.
  - Should elision be required, a diamond may be composed between the W° characters forming the word.
  - • The following example displays the three methods of writing the same
  - Sraph ; firstly, the ideograph itself, which has already been given ; anandly, the syllabic form of expressing it, which is just coming into use;
  - thirdly, the syllabic form of its expression as adapted for the type-n er or composing machine :—
  - N *
  - C
  - e onal mark is shown in both examples of the syllabic form.
- p.499 - vue 661/901
- - 500
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Another example illustrates the use of the elision mark :—
  - $2. chin, metal LIL L
  - signifying the elimination of the initial letter of the second syllable.
  - Though apparently a simple innovation, the subject has baffled some of the ablest workers in the world, and it is one that affects the commerce, government, and intelligent and simple reproduction of ideas in typewriting and printing among nearly four hundred million human beings.
  - Whatever the ultimate system adopted, there is urgent need of the adoption of some system, by which, for the purposes of everyday life at any rate, the inhabitants of China shall no longer be handicapped in the ever accelerating race between the nations.
  - In the field of the written, as opposed to the printed character, it is not impossible that a system of Chinese writing invented by Dr. T. F. Lam of the Middle Temple, Assistant Professor of Chinese at King’s College, London, may some day usefully be worked in conjunction with the existing new Chinese script which has been under discussion. It is really a system of shorthand, with its own advantages. Its mechanical reproduction falls into the same category as the reproduction of ordinary shorthand. It is in no sense a rival to the printed character, but stands in the same light to it as European shorthand does to the ordinary latin character.
  - The brief foregoing reference made by the authors to a new Chinese script which is coming into use in that country, and their solution of the problem of adapting it to the consecutive operations of work performed on the typewriter and in connexion with any class of keyboard-operated composing machinery, are better explained in Sir Walter Hillier’s own words in the memorandum which follows.
  - If it is true that time is money, in this respect at least, there is urgent need of reform, for the time of the Chinese people is being grievously wasted when the time taken for the transcription of their own beautiful classic script is compared with that taken by the plainer and less expressive, but more severely practical writing of the western nations, their present and future great trade rivals, with whose systems of transcription, printing, and reproduction, the new Chinese script can now compete on equal terms.
  - The authors lay claim to no knowledge whatever of the Chinese language, while the writer of the following memorandum has an intimate personal knowledge of the language of China, of its peoples and of their needs.
- p.500 - vue 662/901
- - MEMORANDUM
  - BY
  - SIR WALTER HILLIER, K.C.M.G., C.B.
  - ON AN ALPHABETICAL SYSTEM FOR WRITING CHINESE, THE APPLICATION OF THIS SYSTEM TO THE TYPEWRITER, AND TO THE LINOTYPE OR OTHER TYPECASTING AND COMPOSING MACHINES, AND ITS ADAPTATION TO
  - THE BRAILLE SYSTEM FOR THE BLIND.
  - THE Chinese written language is expressed by some 13,000 to 14,000 characters or ideographs composed of from one to six lines, dots or strokes arranged in various combinations, the most complicated of these characters containing as many as twenty-seven of such lines, strokes or dots.
  - It is obvious that these various combinations cannot, for many reasons, be thus reproduced on a typewriter or by a typecasting and composing machine. The only way in which they can be printed is by means of separate dies or type for each character, and although the process of select-ing and arranging Chinese type is considerably simplified by the fact that every character in the Chinese language is capable of being assigned to one or other of 214 radicals or root indices, the process of selecting and arranging these characters from the root indices under which they are placed in the cases of type cannot but be slow.
  - Many attempts have been made to express the Chinese language by the use of roman letters, but romanization of Chinese sounds cannot be universally applicable for several reasons. First, no common system of romanization exists, nor can any system be found which would be under-stood, appreciated, or accepted universally by either foreigners or Chinese. The Chinese will not accept a common system because of the diversity of Dialects and of modifications of each dialect that exist even in places that are not far distant from each other. The foreigner, moreover, will not accept a common system of romanization for a similar reason, and for the urther reason that foreigners of different nationalities insist upon the romanization of Chinese sounds as they consider these ought to be repro-uced by their own systems of spelling, while even foreigners of the same nationality have never yet been entirely in agreement as to how certain hinese sounds should be spelt phonetically.
  - It is only in recent years that a script has been invented by Mr. Wang pao, an eminent native Chinese scholar, which appears to overcome all ese objections. The basis of this system is the adoption of a certain
  - 501
- p.501 - vue 663/901
- - 502
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - number of simple symbols representing the initials and finals of all the sounds in the Chinese language which in combination, and in some instances singly, adequately reproduce every Chinese sound that exists.
  - Before proceeding to discuss these symbols, which consist of twelve vowel sounds and fifty consonantal sounds, it should be explained, for the benefit of those who do not know anything of the Chinese language, that this language is restricted in the matter of sounds, of which there are in the Mandarin or Court dialect about 400. It follows, therefore, that many words must have the same sound. In Chinese writing this deficiency can be ignored, as each ideograph speaks for itself, but in speaking, or in reproducing spoken words in any but ideographic form, it is evident that unless some means were devised by which words of the same sound could be distinguished much confusion would result.
  - There is, however, a system by which these sounds are subdivided. In the first place, a considerable multiplication is effected by the duplication of many sounds having certain initial consonants by the interposition of an aspirate between the initial consonant and the vowel, as pa, p’a, tan, t’an, and so on. But the number is still more appreciably increased by the pronunciation of the same sounds in different tones or inflections of the voice. In the Mandarin or Court dialect there are, for conversational purposes, four of these tones which the foreigner, who is obliged to learn and remember them, commonly indicates by the figures 1, 2, 3, 4. The Chinese does not learn these tones; he picks them up intuitively as he learns to speak, and it is impossible for him to make a mistake in the intonation of a word. When he learns to read, he is told the sound of a character with its intonation, and he does not forget the intonation any more than he forgets the sound of the character. When, however, he is confronted with a system of writing his own language such as is here proposed, tones and tone marks have necessarily to be considered, and the Chinese, equally with the foreigner, must consider Chinese sounds as expressed by 1, 2, 3, 4, or, as indicated in the system about to be explained, by % • 7 and • .
  - TONAL MARKS
  - 1st Tone %
  - 2nd Tone a
  - 3rd Tone 7
  - 4th Tone •
  - ELISION MARK ♦
  - COMMA > FULL STOP
  - PROPER NAMES
  - Fig. 506.—Tonal marks and points.
- p.502 - vue 664/901
- - DIFFICULTY OF ROMANIZATION OF CHINESE.
  - UL o
  - O
  - Herein lies the difficulty to the Chinese mind. The Chinese reader has practically to regard his language in a new light, and must force himself to think in terms of I, 2, 3, 4 which he has never thought of before in connexion with the words he uses, and that will not be an easy task. If he can be persuaded to do so, the system will be a successful one. If he cannot, it is doomed to failure so far as the Chinese literary class is concerned, though it can be taught without difficulty to those who have not the education necessary to read the present form of Chinese ideograph.
  - As it is probable that not more than a third of the Chinese race can read the Classic script, the new system will still prove of immense advantage to many millions of people. It can be learnt in a few weeks, and books and newspapers can be printed in it with infinitely greater rapidity and at much less cost than in the old script. In the embossed form it can be read easily by the sightless, while it has successfully been adapted, as will be shown, to the braille system of embossed writing for the blind.
  - In the tables which are placed below—in the first instance arranged with the vowel sounds brought together and preceding the consonantal sounds, and in the second instance arranged as far as possible alphabeti-cally for the convenience of foreigners—are shown the twelve vowels and fifty consonantal sounds by which all sounds may be represented. The sounds which they represent are indicated for Chinese readers by ideo-graphs in the old style ; for foreigners, by a system of spelling which has been adopted by practically all English students of the official dialect, but is in no sense an arbitrary system. Any one can modify it to suit his taste. The German may adopt his system of spelling, the Frenchman can apply his idea of what the romanization should be. The Chinese will not apply any system of romanization to the symbols, each of which stands for a sound which, with three exceptions (the terminals eng, eh and ei), can be represented by a Chinese character. They are therefore applicable to every dialect. As the northern Chinese pronounces the character which represents the sound of the symbol, so will he pronounce the symbol; the southern Chinese will read the symbol as its indicating character is pro-nounced in the south. Thus, singly or in combination, each man will read the sounds that the symbols represent in the way he is accustomed to Pronounce them.
  - It is probable that in some dialects bearing very small resemblance to the official dialect the system will be found faulty in certain combinations, t it is also probable that by certain modifications it can be adapted to lose dialects. In any case it is to the official dialect, which prevails, with certain local distinctions, over the greater part of the Chinese Empire, that me system is intended to apply, and it is believed that it will do so more effectively than any system of romanization that has been or can be in-Vented. The objection has been raised that the written, as opposed to the soken language, cannot be intelligibly produced in this script. This may 6 true of the higher classical style, but it is contended that it can be applied
- p.503 - vue 665/901
- - o
  - 1
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - successfully to what is known as the " easy written style " as represented by what may be called " newspaper " Chinese, or the " easy wen li ” of the translated Scriptures.
  - The practical advantage of this system lies in the fact that it is the only one at present known (excepting of course the romanized system) which can be applied to the typewriter or composing machine with
  - ** mu ju = * tsu # 4 te *# k’0 LR chi am ang 3 M a
  - }* /u Xu nu f # ts'u 44 t’e *a he ++ ch’i A • me eng A VA e
  - •• wu k* lu / * SU zi ti 4 A ne X I hsi t - The eh f - * ai
  - ** pi %* tzu + AT tu 11% t’i V #h le <* yi )Lsz rh 76 —me fr
  - * # p'i Ta tz'u t’u 4% chih ** nu X * ku *8 hsU ) * ao
  - 1 u mi 2 * SZU ** chu Hi * ch’ih ng lu 1% k'u Tip yu 1 * ou
  - * pu 1 W ch’u d # shih Pi chit * hu ER ni -* an
  - ** p'u t # shu E • jih * • ch'u %# ke A • li L M tn
  - Fig. 507.—Chinese syllabic symbols; vowel sounds preceding consonantal sounds.
  - advantages in the matter of speed, simplicity and economy that are so obvious as to require no explanation.
  - The system, of course, has certain defects, some of which may possibly be remedied by experience, but it is claimed that it constitutes the nearest approach that has yet been made to the reduction of Chinese writing to a simple and intelligible form which, though it is not suggested that it should supersede the historic script of China, will supplement that script and be an incalculable boon to the millions of Chinese who can neither read nor write so complicated a character. The number of symbols might be reduced, but no attempt has been made to alter the form or reduce the
- p.504 - vue 666/901
- - USE OF FAMILIAR FORMS FOR CHINESE SYLLABARY. 505
  - number of these symbols as arranged by the Chinese scholar to whose ingenuity the system owes its origin, as it is already in limited use in northern China, where at least one magazine in the script was published, at any rate before the revolution, and where it was taught in various schools. But, in order to render the system applicable to the typewriter or linotype machine, it has been necessary to make one important change. In the existing Chinese system the symbols are placed side by side, reading from left to
  - ±% t’u 2 * SZU I * 0U ** lu H H jih L M en 111 #E ch'ih 3 5 a
  - 73 tzu i 43 ** pi • A la ju 9 ah » me dng f ** chu — * ai
  - Ta tz'u ** t’e 3 # p'i ** mi ** ke )L $ erh 21 % ch’u -* an
  - * WU z* ti * pu ** mu V # k'e } * fu Fm chu am ang
  - < S _ yi y 1 t’i ** p'u 4 AR ne 3* ku tu he ** ch’u ) * ao
  - T ih _ yu = * tsu • # shih ER ni 1% k’u X p hsi VA @ LB chi
  - F# ts'u ** shu 3 * nu V w le a hsu #%* (V #4 ch’i
  - + * tu / * su ** nu A • li 6* hu 4% chih
  - Fig. 508.—Chinese syllabic symbols, arranged alphabetically.
  - right, S 4) #1 / 5. It is not possible to compose these symbols side by side on the typewriter or linotype mach ’ other instead of placing them side by side, they are place one purposes the process becomes a simple one. For typewriting or pri the symbols must be placed on their side as below .
  - AP, 0. AA ^Ok
  - The
  - • tonal mark under each combination indicates the tones. When to An the finished line all that is necessary is to turn the paper half round
  - 6 right when the writing will be read downwards and from right to
- p.505 - vue 667/901
- - 506 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - left as is the rule in all Chinese writing. It should be stated that the credit of this invention belongs to J. C. Grant and L. A. Legros, formerly of the firm of Grant, Legros & Co., Ltd., the well-known engineers who have specialized in all matters connected with the production of the printing surface. In the existing system, numerals may be represented by single symbols preceded by an indicating mark, or they may be represented by the shorthand numerals at present in use in China with one or two slight modifications.
  - NUMERALS.
  - I i1, one * pa', eight
  - || 6rh*, two y chiu3, nine
  - III san', three 1f shih2, ten
  - % szu*, four 1A pai3, hundred
  - 5 wu’, five it ch'ien', thousand
  - j liu’, six ^ want, ten thousand
  - —L ch’il, seven 0 ling2, cypher
  - Fig. 509—Chinese numerals.
  - Tables of the symbols, known to the Chinese as kuan hua tzu mu, with a character showing the sound they are intended to represent, arranged under vowel and consonantal sounds, and also alphabetically, are given above, figs. 507 and 508, together with a phonetic rendering of the sound in what is known as the Wade system of spelling. Tone marks, points and proper name sign are given in fig. 506, and fig. 509 gives the numerals.
  - Words of one syllable, such as li, ti, pu, p’u, etc., are obviously represented by the symbols indicating these sounds. Compound words requiring two symbols, such as li-ang, tu-an, pi-eh, are equally easy to represent, as li tu pi
  - ang an eh
  - The formation of certain other compound words requires explanation. Take the sound ti-en. There is no symbol in the table to represent the sound en, the nearest approach to en being an. But an is quite good enough, because in certain combinations the sound an does not exist in the Chinese language. There is, for instance, no such word as ti-an. Therefore, when a Chinese reads the compound ti-an, he knows it must represent ti-en. Chi-en is a common word. There is no such sound as chi-an. Therefore, when a Chinese reads the combination chi-an, he knows it must be chi-en. Other combinations will present difficulties unless certain
- p.506 - vue 668/901
- - CHINESE SYLLABARY; ELISION AND PUNCTUATION. 507 principles are understood. Take the sound ma. This can only be represented by the symbols mu and a, but the combination will present no difficulty to the mind of a Chinese because there is no such sound as mu-a in the language. Moreover, by the system of representing the sounds of Chinese characters employed in Chinese dictionaries, he will have learnt that the final of the first sound must be eliminated—sometimes also the initial of the second sound. When a Chinese, therefore, sees the symbols mu-a in combination he will instinctively drop the u and read them as ma. Take, again, the sound chin. There is a symbol for chi in the table, but there is no final n or in. The nearest we can get to chin is chi-an, but we have already seen that chi-an must be read chi-en. To get chin, therefoic, we have to get rid of the a in an. This is the way it is done, when the initial sound of the second symbol has to be suppressed an indicator is employed. This indicator is a diamond-shaped mark placed between the first and the second symbol chie (a)n. Where no indicator is used and it is evident that something has to be cut out because the combination does not express a Chinese sound, always cut out the final of the first symbol. Another word that may puzzle the uninitiated is chiu. There is no symbol for u in the table, the nearest approach to it being ou. We must therefore represent chi-u by chi-ou. But there is no such sound as chiou, so the Chinese must read it chi-u. Of course all these little difficulties could be got over by the multiplication of symbols, but it is not necessary to simplify matters for the Chinese, because when he finds that the combination before his eyes does not represent a recognized sound he at once accepts the nearest approach to a recognized sound. A very little practice will enable the foreign reader to do the same. The Chinese do not use capital letters. They indicate these in the case of proper names by a line at the side of the characters indicating proper names. In the Present script proper names are indicated by a bracket placed above and below the symbols. Commas are indicated by the comma sign > and full stops by the sign of the full stop ° .
  - Of the four hundred millions usually taken to represent in round figures tbe population of China, it is possible that there are as many as one million blind, whose condition, in the absence of any vehicle of education, is one of dependence on their friends and of uselessness to the State. The relief to their affliction and the stimulus to their intelligence and usefulness to be gained by any system which would place it in their power to read and write is too obvious to require to be enlarged upon. So far as is known, nothing has been done by the Government of China or by any Chinese institution to teach the blind to read. Missionaries in various parts of China have taken this duty upon themselves, and there are two systems at present in use for enabling the Chinese blind to read. One, known as the Murray system, is taught to a limited number of blind in Peking, who are educated in a small school for the blind supported by contributions from abroad. This system, when once acquired, is effective enough, but as the readers have to commit
- p.507 - vue 669/901
- - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES
  - FIG. 510.— Extract from “ Sacred Edict,” printed in alternate lines of classic .Chinese ideographs and syllabic script.
  - AoA
  - 1K V A
  - *
  - L
  - A
  - #
  - A
  - + —
  - A
  - £
  - # J d
  - % —
  - x 3 A
  - A
  - A
  - # 6 A
  - £
  - H L 7
  - 1 1
- p.508 - vue 670/901
- - CHINESE BRAILLE.
  - 509
  - 408 sounds to memory, and to remember these sounds as represented by figures from I to 408, a considerable amount of study and practice is necessary before any blind person can read with ease. The second system is the romanized system translated into braille. This suffers from limitations which have already been pointed out. A third system—the application of braille to the symbols of the Chinese alphabet, or kuan hua tzu mu, as it is called by the Chinese—has been worked out by Mr. E. G. Hillier, C.M.G., Manager of the Hongkong and Shanghai Bank in Peking, has been thoroughly tested by him, and has been proved to be by far the most efficient system in existence. The following notes are an epitome of a Pamphlet on Chinese braille written by Mr. Hillier.
  - The basis of the braille system, now applied to all European languages and used in all schools for the education of the blind in Western countries, is the group of six dots representing the highest throw of a die. These dots are, for convenience of reference, numbered I to 6.
  - I 2
  - 3 4
  - 5 6
  - The various combinations, ranging from a single dot to the entire group of StX, which can be made of these, will be found to be sixty-three in number, and they furnish sixty-three distinct signs which can be either used alpha-etically or as representing syllables and words.
  - The system known as the kuan hua tzu mu, which reduces the Chinese anguage to what is practically an alphabetical basis, consists of fifty radi-cals and twelve phonetics (elsewhere described as consonantal and vowel sounds) which, used singly or in combination with the addition of a tone S1gn, furnish correctly every sound of the official Chinese language. The Present scheme of Chinese braille consists, briefly, in the application to each S these sixty-two radicals or phonetics of a corresponding braille sign. In n&ing it into practical shape it has been found necessary to discard as esuitable, for reasons suggested by experience, six of the sixty-three signs Tnished by the braille system, reducing the total number of Chinese braille signs to fifty-seven. These signs are exhibited in fig. 511 in order of series, with their corresponding Chinese sounds.
  - It will be noticed that the signs of the fourth series represent both 1cals and phonetics ; but as the phonetic, except when used singly, ays follows a radical, confusion is impossible. The second sign of a group of two (excluding the tone sign) must always be a phonetic. Where P onetic is used singly it is distinguishable from the radical of the same tn by prefixing the single phonetic sign. Similarly the comma and stop not be confused with the first and second tone signs because the latter ays precede a group while the former necessarily follow it. The tone - takes precedence of everything except the proper-name sign. The Sie phonetic sign, when used, immediately precedes the phonetic. The
- p.509 - vue 671/901
- - 510
  - IB, He • •
  - *
  - PG
  - Hsi
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Note.—The Chinese sounds are all in the 1st tone.
  - FIRST SERIES.—RADICALS.
  - 3 / H V • k T
  - 4 R SECOND SERIES/ A #* —RADICALS. * JE
  - Hsu Wu Ju Tz’u Li Lu Mu Ni
  - • • • • • • • • • • • • • - - •
  - • - e • • • • •
  - • • • • • • • • • • • -• • • •
  - x *. THIRD SERIES. A n —RADICALS. * t •
  - S z — HE # I 15 (E TH a? % 7
  - Chi Chih Chu Chu Ke Ku Te Ti Tsu Tu Pi Pu
  - • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • - • • • • • • • •
  - • • • • • • • • • • • • - • • • •
  - •. • • • • • • • • •. •. •. •. • • • • • •
  - L £ * / % FOURTH *: SERIES.—RADICALS. + * 1
  - Ch’i Ch’ih
  - W] Ch'u
  - PHONETICS.
  - AI
  - EI
  - AO
  - OU AN
  - EN ANG ENG EH
  - ERH
  - A
  - L
  - L &
  - C
  - FIFTH SERIES.—RADICALS. 5 #
  - *# * * % it
  - gul [U
  - 1
  - *
  - Yi Yu Shih Shu Su Szu
  - Th
  - 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Numeral Tone Tone Tone Tone Sign
  - Comma
  - Single Proper
  - Phonetic Name Decimal Stop Sign Sign Sign
  - 4 + % N
  - M
  - M
  - Fig. 511.—The application of the Chinese syllabary to the braille system.
- p.510 - vue 672/901
- - CHINESE BRAILLE.
  - Proper-name sign precedes the tone sign. In practice, it will be found possible to dispense with the tone sign in the case of words which frequently recur, and where ambiguity is not likely to result, as, for instance, the classical possessive chih or its colloquial equivalent ti. The ten signs of the first series are used as numerals, representing respectively 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0. When so used, each group or series of figures is immediately
  - % •. • • * Yu • • • • T
  - - P J 5 1 * X / ' *
  - 512.—Chinese braille syllabary arranged alphabetically (continued on next page).
- p.511 - vue 673/901
- - 512
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - H #
  - E T E * m 4 V IB 3
  - 4 4 * # % i Mi # Tr Th % Th #
  - 1st Tone 2nd Tone 3rd Tone 4th Tone Numeral Sign Comma Stop Single Phonetic Sign Proper Name Sign Decimal Sign
  - • « • * • • • • • . • *
  - • • • * • • • • * • • . • • • • • • • .
  - Fig. 512.—Chinese braille
  - syllabary arranged alphabetically (concluded from last page).
  - preceded by the numeral sign. Where the figures exceed four in number each group of four (a Chinese wan or myriad) is marked off by a comma sign. The decimal point is represented by dot 5, the same as the fourth tone sign. With moderate practice this Chinese braille can be written as fast as ordinary Chinese round hand, and with little more consumption, if any, of paper space.
  - Note.—For the information of those who are not familiar with the kuan hua tzu mu, or Chinese phonetic system, earlier referred to, the following examples will illustrate the practical application of the method. The two syllables in each case are slurred, so as to produce the effect of a monosyllable.
  - Liang (tael)- radical li, phonetic ang, in combination li-ang.
  - T’ien (day)- t’i. an, .. t’i-an.
  - Ch’eng (city)- .. ch’ih, eng, ch’ih-eng.
  - Ma (horse)- mu, a, .. mu-a.
  - Yueh (moon)- .. yu, eh, .. yu-eh.
  - Where a sound is furnished by a single radical or phonetic, these are used accordingly. Employed either singly, or in combination, with the addition of a tone sign, the radicals and phonetics given in the table will be found to cover the entire gamut of the Chinese Mandarin dialect, and to reproduce its various sounds with an accuracy unattainable by any system of romanization.
  - An example of Chinese braille with the corresponding Chinese ideographs is shown in fig. 513.
- p.512 - vue 674/901
- - CHINESE BRAILLE.
  - 0 in
  - Fro. 513.—Example of Chinese braille with Chinese ideographic equivalents; extract from “ Sacred Edict ” ; (continued on the next page).
  - 2 L
- p.513 - vue 675/901
- - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES
  - 514
  - 2N inn
  - null JiE
  - Fig. 513.—Example of Chinese braille ; extract from “ Sacred Edict ” ; (concluded from the previous page).
- p.514 - vue 676/901
- - CHAPTER XXXIV.
  - HIEROGLYPHIC, COGNATE, SYLLABIC, AND OTHER SCRIPTS.
  - ". . . men pourtrayed upon the wall, the images of the Chaldeans pourtrayed with vermilion.”
  - Ezekiel.
  - Long primer gothic No. i.
  - “And they made the plate of the holy crown of pure gold, and wrote upon it a writing, like to the engravings of a signet, . . ."
  - Exodus.
  - 10-point winchell.
  - ". . . David wrote a letter to Joab, and sent it by the hand of Uriah.”
  - II. Samuel.
  - 12-point columbus (Haddon).
  - "‘OH THAT MY WORDS WERE HOW WRITTEN! OH THAT THEY WERE PRINTED IN A BOOK!’
  - JOB.
  - Brevier inclined gothic No. i.
  - NE of the most interesting developments in connexion with the modern Pographical printing-surface js the increasing use of hieroglyphics, or more strictly speaking, of ideographs ; for hieroglyphics, as the term is more generally understood, are not pure ideographs, but ideographic symbols Or have in the course of time had certain phonetic values attached to them, facbally, however, they were purely ideographic, and it is a curious that the enormous development of locomotion due to the internal-ustion petrol engine has brought men of different tongues into such act that a demand has sprung up for a language, mute in itself, but by e is a conveyer of meanings through the eye, and may be interpreted T every man into his own aural language in his own particular sound values, not fact has been strikingly exemplified in chapter VI, where the great saving, errectn in printing to the printer but in time and trouble to everybody, ec ccl by the use of this medium of intercourse is illustrated.
  - 515
- p.515 - vue 677/901
- - 516 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - In the present chapter, however, hieroglyphics in their secondary application are considered, and certain points in the technology of their production and use are discussed. The authors here tender their fullest acknowledgments in the matter to an article by Albert Geiss, which
  - Forms.
  - 11 \\
  - ) €
  - J
  - Value.
  - a a
  - a
  - i
  - ou
  - b
  - P
  - f
  - m
  - n
  - r, 1
  - h
  - Forms.
  - Value.
  - h
  - kh
  - kh
  - s
  - sh
  - q k
  - 8
  - t d
  - 2
  - Fig. 515.—Hieroglyphic alphabet: simple sound-symbols.
  - appeared in the November number of the " Bulletin Officiel de l’Union Syndicale des Maitres Imprimeurs de France,” of 1910, and also to N. J. Werner, whose paraphrase of the foregoing article appeared in " The Inland Printer " of January, 1913.
  - The history of the decipherment of hieroglyphics is too well known to need discussion here; the key to its interpretation was given by the Rosetta stone, a stela of black basalt now in the British Museum. It dates from the year 193 B.C., and is trilingual, being written in hiero glyphic, demotic, and greek characters, fig. 514, plate CVI.
- p.516 - vue 678/901
- - PLATE CVI.
  - To face page 516.]
  - EC : 209 T 3 S. iaSis P2R (21 U % URSS ciasl DLCOSMEU. Amessdig E @(elu wR. ? 205 VaiEeG ; 053RBSEE GgHGRnt Cmersewssae 30089005 31509205 =C tide (01 $ I DsEetSESW! =9008020 5 5 Enst 0.1 E I 1 5 M SiS 350 359 IN 33081480*
  - Salk El IFisEFeC Ele
  - dBPTRi AkEErSHEt TEED 2hssi2 C$1 825505 silgch ieill -SEES sirceRl:
  - Sat 21: wisreH.5: iafAFScR: Mssosigl SEI CeES,ErS: Fax.9335
  - A e
  - hl 0
  - T Si I Pis: 1501 sHe ERES shest RSL KaeSY rh seRet the:
  - xC : , (FAZE CsBg: las nie it (Net fig 2040
  - 33 SV Fl
  - 'if C Segs i 0 in Set 21.
  - ST P
  - U17 HE isa T 4 25 TXT: ESsi Reel ILL
  - 22, 8 = 5. 1 2) 73 23:
  - LECii rhid sice 38(19 880 ocCec Stte Ige a x'
  - : F 2
  - I Khoay n ST MM or YIAIUBA -
  - : #
  - i Dy £52) $33
  - 3915 Et 382
  - &
  - | | |
  - 7
  - Fig. 514.—Rosetta stone.
  - *
  - W
- pl.106 - vue 679/901
- p.n.n. - vue 680/901
- - HIEROGLYPHIC. 517
  - The first clue to the decipherment of the writing was drawn from the characters contained in the cartouches surrounding royal names, and from this comparatively slight indication the various components of the hieroglyphic alphabet were gradually worked out, together with their phonetic values. With comparatively small differences which here require no discussion, the alphabet or list of sound-symbols is generally accepted; the particular sound-equivalents here followed—French—are those of the venerable authority, Maspero, the mention of whose name is sufficient.
  - Forms.
  - A * X 7
  - Value.
  - aa
  - oua ba pa ma
  - ra ha kha
  - Forms.
  - Value.
  - kha aq sa
  - scha ka
  - ta tha
  - za
  - Fig. 516.—Hieroglyphic alphabet: complex sound-symbols.
  - Had the letters given in fig. 515 been all that were worked out, it would have been no easy matter to decipher a hieroglyphic text, but, in addition to those shown, one hundred and twenty-five other signs were also made out, which, though occasionally differing in form, were none the less the phonetic equivalents of two or more of the sounds hieroglyphically. represented jn the original alphabet. Figure 516 shows a few of the more complex sound-symbols which are of frequent occurrence in hieroglyphic inscriptions.
  - In addition to these alphabetical signs, Egyptologists have discovered that certain signs, called determinatives, are always found after a series of letters or signs representing a word belonging to the category
- p.517 - vue 681/901
- - 518 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - to which the sign itself belongs. Thus the name of a man is always followed by the sign Y opposite the word men in the list below; the name of a woman by the sign 3 opposite the word women in this list, and
  - so on. Reference to the following list of a few of the commoner determinatives will make the use and meaning of these signs perfectly clear.
  - Forms. Determinative of Forms Determinative of
  - • Houses, buildings,
  - 1 Men, masc. pronouns abodes
  - 3 Women, fem. pronouns Peoples of the desert, to travel
  - da People, persons, human race, classes Meat
  - 3 Divinities, kings Fire
  - 3 Ancient gods O Time
  - % Goddesses • • • Dust, sand
  - Animals * Liquids
  - % Birds, flying insects A Marching (action), locomotion
  - Plants, flowers Sight (action),
  - At to know
  - Trees All which appertainsto the mouth (actions)
  - Earth * Little, wretched, mean, wicked
  - Water, level — Abstract (sense, things), writings
  - aaa Desert, steppes, foreign countries I A Violence, force
  - © Cities, villages
  - Fig. 517.—Determinatives.
  - The foregoing information is sufficient to give an idea of the mechanism of Egyptian writing. Its more detailed discussion is beyond the scope of this treatise, as well as beyond the knowledge of the authors.
- p.518 - vue 682/901
- - HIEROGLYPHIC. 519
  - The first hieroglyphic reproductions were autographic, and it was
  - k 1373 3 3175 1 A 3641 ? 3121 1 E J S
  - 3569 I 2393 2645 %. 1391
  - 1 3263 2002
  - 1 1786 1 1665 2487 CI +2 co
  - 3629 * 1266
  - 1 2774 w 2024 7 2494 0 i
  - 3017 He 8 la © 2041 • 3608 e 3460
  - $% 0 — co a 2 1 & > 1283
  - - cI Co * 199 3257 VAe
  - 1 F 1 3525
  - 6601 • J • 1419 * 3323 —
  - 5911 1 1799
  - 1040 1026 2 1605 •$4 -
  - • 1250 1412 “35 , 8 • 4D co O 2457 1
  - XS ql 1716
  - 0m • 2051 2366 P 3574
  - DS { 1674 a 1052 2788
  - — co D co once ° : 0
  - 1603 -1728 1 2597 * 1330
  - 3026 • 1467 1741 (E 1522 3540
  - ' 1 3030 ! 3353 3458 < S a 3633 * 3305
  - A co * 8 2305 2013 -8 Ci
  - 2048 • 2355
  - 1080 1 1686 * 00 6981
  - 2007
  - 1812 I 1943 18 1960 ! $
  - FIG. 518.—Hieroglyphic case: first portion.
  - not until 1842 that the Imprimerie royale de France commenced cutting the punches for their hieroglyphic founts, the first fount not being
- p.519 - vue 683/901
- - 520 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING SURFACES,
  - entirely completed until 1852. The complete founts to-day comprise 3972
  - 8061 * 6 X 1192 0 CI o Sax 2823 1950 VS 825
  - * 1939 1107 % 1245 05 Xj ci 1630 0908 1 699 --3691
  - Ms w 1097 * 1270 1091 ox no Ci 2429 — 3 519 dlb 3695
  - 1 937 1117 A 1252 770 . 3 1286 * 3066 77S . Hi 1 1795
  - 1087 — Cl 6 2070 r 3316 A 1221 f 3076 792
  - 1371 1398 2460 © 3216 % 1182 cu ID- 0 “ CO Cl 847 1 2601
  - 1388 * 2685 % 2719 6861 ++ hn 955 / 1342 A CO ° Ms ci
  - T 1878 64 537 T 2553 h 1535 ## 981 3
  - 1452 3670 540 + 3040 • 1381 1310 1362 665
  - X 2703 ( 3670 89 9 I 2357 J 138 • 1377 1 1190 2 834
  - g 1 r y co ci — co
  - A O B CO 1 to 1 Co VP no O De 6 G8
  - CO • ci A o co
  - k — C co A c re = 2 . cl o>
  - 1 to ,=00 Ci C. 00
  - ci 99 00 C CO
  - C Ci 6 So 40 Pc Cc
  - 1492 2a ke T 2520 Xs • 2674 3 $ 113
  - 696 K in • c © Th 3052 —8 ma 1966 2740 SVVS CM co
  - / 10 2882 % 3512 1135 4% * Ci 1 1657 { 814 is • 0
  - • 3 O 3615 • 1146 • 1914 4 254 850 1 2245
  - 2 1555 1 3291 1 1831 2876 J S PC X 3566 • 1 3359
  - 43 a 1491 2653 n 2145 X 3469 1977 724 8
  - Fig. 519.—Hieroglyphic case: second portion.
  - signs, the majority of which are on two type-bodies, together with a certain number on a third type-body. This series of signs is distributed
- p.520 - vue 684/901
- - HIEROGLYPHIC.
  - 521
  - in sixty cases, in addition to the ordinary case, which is made up of four sections, shown in figs. 518 and 519, and the space-case, which is made up of two sections, shown in fig. 520.
  - The cases shown in the illustrations are used in the printing-office of the Institut francais du Caire. They differ a little from those in use at Paris, but the principle of their construction and the classification of the signs are very similar in both places.
  - In connexion with such a matter as hieroglyphics, constant additions are being made to the founts, owing to the fact that new characters frequently appear when fresh manuscripts or inscriptions are deciphered. About one thousand fresh punches have been prepared for the production of characters not given in these cases, most of which have been cut by Henaffe of Paris following the fine designs and careful instructions °f the actual director of the Institut francais du Caire, M. Chassinat,
  - 17,-16 1-13 17.-13 3-13 2-13 2-14 1-14 1 7.-14 4-14 4-16
  - 1-16 37,-7 .17.-7 1-7 2-7 2-9 1-9 3-9 1 7.-9 2-16
  - 5-10 1-10 1 7.-10 4-10 2-10 2-5 1-5 1 7,-5 2 7,-5 5-5
  - 10-10 1-3 1 7.-3 3-3 2-3 2-4 1-4 3-4 1 7,-4 4-4
  - 6-6 ——— 1-6 1 7.-6 3-6 2-6 2-8 1-8 4-8 17.-8 8-8
  - 12-12 6-12 3-12 1 7.-12 1 7,-18 3-18 18-18 8-18
  - Cadrats 12 Cadrats 12 1-12 4-12 4-18 1-18 Cadrats 18 9-18
  - Fig. 520.—Hieroglyphic case : spaces.
  - Who has treated the subject most artistically. Private typefounders are not likely to rival the official and semi-official production of hieroglyphic type, which is practically a national matter for Egypt, where the Cairo mstitute can always draw upon the resources of the Imprimerie royale de France.
  - . The setting of hieroglyphic types, difficult as it may appear at first S18 ht, is relatively easy to those who are familiar with the work.
  - The real difficulties that had to be overcome were in the rational arrange-ment and classification of the type. Its composition became compara-ively easy once that was done.
  - Before going further into the details of composition, a facsimile, fig. 521, given, which shows in its upper half a portion of the manuscript of a Xt, and below its equivalent set up in hieroglyphic type.
  - This shows that the highly skilled writer of the manuscript portion
- p.521 - vue 685/901
- - 522
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - of the figure—M. G. Legrain, Director of Works in the Service des Antiqmtes de I’Egypte—has taken the trouble to commence each line of the text with
  - Original manuscript.
  - + 1 0 5 M f ^ ] 91 IN L 53 1:01 € 4 2 SE A N Zr.
  - 55 I — § - = = 3 0 26 7 0 57sor NE 2(0 Emil S“*== 0’4+= M 4 ? 1 ‘ ^ ^
  - So.
  - to
  - Al @ : O X -1 15 OOCX L
  - i 04
  - 3, 0E 3 e Dr 2
  - Fig. 521.—Specimen of hieroglyphic manuscript and printed text; slightly reduced from the original.
  - the same sign as that which begins the line of printed matter. It need hardly be said that manuscripts usually handed to the printer do not
- p.522 - vue 686/901
- - HIEROGLYPHIC.
  - 523
  - present this peculiarity, the groups being written and the lines filled out as the size of the paper permits. In the instance given the division of the lines is regulated by the measure and justification adopted in the particular quarto work for which the figure was originally prepared.
  - It will be noticed how the signs are grouped in the manuscript portion. The Egyptian scribes, and, even more than the scribes themselves, the stone-cutters, were wont to place their signs in squared groups.
  - For reproduction in movable type, these groups have to be analyzed and combined with the appropriate spaces, in order to reproduce as nearly as possible the appearance of hieroglyphic writing having this characteristic peculiarity. To attain this end, it was necessary to have the signs cast of more than one body-size. The Imprimerie royale de France has adopted three bodies of the sizes shown in fig. 522 :—
  - co
  - First body.
  - - 12 -
  - Second body.
  - 8
  - Third body.
  - First body, 18 typographical points (corps 18). Second body, 12 typographical points (corps 12).
  - Third body, 8 typographical points (corps 8).
  - Fig. 522.—Three standard body-sizes of hieroglyphic type.
  - It should be understood that these dimensions are those of full-sized Signs, and that the types themselves are cast on the square or em set of each body, as shown in fig. 522.
  - Signs which have one dimension small are generally cast on set widths or on bodies which conform to their shape and to a definite fraction of the respective standard body, as shown in fig. 523.
  - A On first body is 18 points body and 6 points set.
  - I On second body is 12 points body and 4 points set.
  - I On third body is 8 points body and 2 points set.
  - FIG. 523.—Widths of hieroglyphic type conforming to shape of character.
  - Certain signs only, of which the effect, if placed on the first or largest body, would be ungraceful, or which, when used by the Egyptians, are always placed above or below, or joined with others in the same group, have been engraved, and cast on intermediate bodies of ten points (corps 10), six points (corps 6), etc., according to their form; care is taken that the face is supported by a shank sufficiently large to facilitate composition and to give a good distribution of blank spaces within the groups.
  - To secure the easy justification of all these elements, a variety of spaces and quads have been provided, graduated in such a manner that the
- p.523 - vue 687/901
- - 524 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - compositor can space the groups evenly ; see fig. 520, showing the space-case. Thus in setting the group shown in fig. 524, the compositor first places the — in his stick—he knows that this is on 4-point body ; on 6-point body ; - on 6-point body, the three making up a total of 16 points.
  - As the group must occupy a space 18 points square, the compositor can place between the three signs two i-point spaces of the 18-point body, which would fill up the space. It is evident, however, that the common rules for spacing whites must also be respected in hieroglyphic composition.
  - Fig. 524.—Hieroglyphic-character group and its components.
  - Hence in this instance, instead of two spaces of i-point thickness, the compositor places a 2-point space between — and as the white space carried by - in its upper part is enough to permit of its being set close to the .
  - This group is now correct as to its height, but the width also has to be filled. The is cast upon a 6-point em quad; it therefore lacks 12 points of filling the entire width—18 points ; as the sign must be placed in the middle of the group, this space of 12 points must be divided between the two sides of the , and this is done by using two 6-point em quads. All the groups are made up and spaced according to this principle. Each group is temporarily separated from its neighbours by a 2-point space ; when the width of the line is reached, whatever spacing is required to fill it is added between the groups. There is no extra spacing between the words. Sometimes the lines of the original, especially of the inscriptions on stone, are indicated typographically by numbering them with figures, placed above a short vertical line, ordinarily less than 10 points long when
  - the 18-point body is being set, thus :
  - 1 10
  - Once these principles have been accepted, it is a simple matter to under
  - stand how the recognition by compositors of the hieroglyphic signs is
  - facilitated, and how the signs most in use are placed at their disposal to the best advantage. To begin with, the types are classified in families, of
  - which there are twenty-eight, made up as follows :—
  - I. Men.
  - 2. Gods.
  - 3. Women.
  - 4. Goddesses.
  - 5. Parts of the human body.
  - 6. Mammals.
  - 7. Parts of the bodies of mammals.
- p.524 - vue 688/901
- - HIEROGLYPHIC.
  - 525
  - 8. Birds.
  - 9. Parts of the bodies of birds.
  - 10. Saurians, batrachians, amphibians.
  - II. Reptiles.
  - 12. Insects.
  - 13. Fishes.
  - 14. Vegetables.
  - 15. Heavens, stars, earth, water.
  - 16. Plans, buildings, parts of buildings.
  - 17. Profane and sacred furniture.
  - 18. Measures, balances, various tools.
  - 19. Equipments for fishing, hunting, and war.
  - 20. Vessels, sacred barges, rigging.
  - 21. Head-dress, clothing, articles of adornment and toilet.
  - 22. Banner staves, sceptres, symbolic emblems.
  - 23. Music, writing, games.
  - 24. Loaves.
  - 25. Shallow baskets, panniers, vases.
  - 26. Cords, couplings, knots, packages.
  - 27. Geometric figures.
  - 28. Objects of nondescript form and use.
  - This done, the signs which correspond to the letters of the alphabet are Placed in two sections of the first portion of the ordinary case, fig. 519. Above these, and in the same portion of the case, are placed the determinatives and the other signs most commonly used. The second portion contains the hieroglyphics which are next in order of frequency. The same arrangement is also employed for those signs which are cast on the second body. The compositor’s frame has three divisions; on the central division and before him is placed the space-case, fig. 520, and above it the case for the signs of the third and smallest body ; at the right of these are placed the two portions for the signs of the first and largest body, figs. 518 and 519, and at the left the two portions for those signs which are on the second body. The complete equipment, therefore, of the compositor consists of six cases or portions of cases.
  - The other types are distributed amongst other cases, whose number varies according to the number of different characters in use, and it is to these supplementary cases that the compositor goes for the less frequently used odd sorts.
  - The difficulties which the compositor might be expected to meet with both in knowing where to look for and in recognizing any particular sign are got over in a practical, if not scientific, manner by the compositors adopting a nomenclature of their own which meets their requirements quite satisfactorily. The terms they use have nothing scientific about them, but bave the advantage of being easily expressed and understood, and really
- p.525 - vue 689/901
- - 526 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - vary but little from the scientific classification given above. In general,
  - the names used are descriptive of the forms of the written characters. Thus the compositor always calls Xh man, and A old man, and whatever may be the shape of a sign of this sort, he holds it to
  - belong to the category of man. J represents woman,
  - a woman
  - in childbirth, and so on. With regard to the various portions of the human body, there is no difficulty in distinguishing them ; for instance,
  - the arm,
  - ; the mouth, •; the leg,
  - It is the same with regard to animals and the other categories whose shapes readily recall to mind the creature, the plant, or the object depicted by the copy. Thus 1 is one which is instantly recognized. Among the signs best known to the compositors, but certain of whose shapes are less like reality, are % the eagle; • the chicken; A the owl; 7 the ibis; • the duck; • the wagtail, to which the compositor does not trouble to give their phonetic values such as a,
  - ou, or m, and so on. the Nile; 8 the core
  - It is the same with
  - the serpent; AMA
  - 0 the uraeus, or serpent-
  - symbol of sovereignty; 4 the lotus leaf; tifit the field of papyrus;
  - 1 the libation
  - A the tree; € the town; © the
  - sun ;
  - vase ;
  - # the palette of the scribe; $ the scarab the bee ; % the shallow basket ; 3% the
  - or
  - war
  - chariot; and
  - —x the sacred barge.
  - Some other rules have also been elaborated. It is taken, for example, that three | , properly termed unities, are the mark of the plural. These
  - I
  - signs may be placed either horizontally | | | , or verticallv | , according 1
  - as they happen to come after a sign of horizontal or vertical shape. These three unities must never be separated from the last sign of the word whose number they indicate, as they are a qualifying part of it. This rule applies also to determinatives ; the mark of the plural or of a determinative must come next to the word to which either is related,
  - and no division must occur between the mark of the plural or the determinative and the word it qualifies.
  - Equipped with no more than this rudimentary knowledge, a compositor is able to set up hieroglyphic matter quite correctly. Taking the copy, which as a rule is to be set in the first or largest body, in one hand, a
- p.526 - vue 690/901
- - HIEROGLYPHIC.
  - 527
  - sheet of paper before him, and a pencil in the other hand, the compositor scans the pages, carefully examining them line by line, having under his eyes his catalogue of hieroglyphic signs.
  - He identifies by their shapes and numbers, for all the signs are numbered, any of the signs which his memory tells him are not to be found in the ordinary cases ; and he writes down their numbers on the sheet of paper in the order in which they appear in the manuscript.
  - When he has picked out some forty or fifty of these signs, he takes a Wooden stick and proceeds to collect them on it so as to have them at hand when required and to avoid further search when he proceeds with the actual composition. If, for example, the first line of the matter in fig. 521 is taken, the first thing to be determined is the direction in which this copy is to be read and composed. Usually hieroglyphics are read from left to right, like European writing; but they are always read in the direction facing the pictorial symbols. In the specimen shown in fig. 521, the arm character — of the first group at the left is turned towards the left, and the man Xh, who alone forms the fifth group, is also turned in the same direction ; the copy, therefore, reads from left to right.
  - Certain texts, notably inscriptions, are engraved or written in the reverse direction. They are, however, rarely composed in this manner, and it is only in the case of inscriptions having the hieroglyphics arranged in vertical columns that these sometimes face one another. For isolated Phrases the precaution is taken of indicating by an arrow -*, or ^^^, the direction in which the original inscription is engraved or written.
  - Returning to the analysis of the first line, it has to be noted that all the
  - components of the first group are to be found in the ordinary case , the same thing occurs with regard to the second group - For the third group . , which is absent from the case, the compositor is compelled to search in the catalogue, where he finds it under head-dress, cloth-ing, articles of adornment and toilet, bearing the number 2941. The compositor has to continue these mental and physical gymnastics till he has completed the setting of the whole manuscript. After he has passed the fourth, fifth, and sixth groups, shown in fig. 521, he comes across the character T . This interrupts his work, as the sign does not exist, and will require to be specially engraved for the work in hand; the compositor therefore leaves a blank space for its reception when ready. On the dis-tribution of the matter, this new character will be placed amongst various tools ” in family 18, as its form approaches most closely to that particular Category. Continuing after 1, we easily recognize V* as coming
- p.527 - vue 691/901
- - UL N 00
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - from among the fishes, and j r , which belongs to family 15 of heavens, stars, earth, and water. Next comes 1 i 1 from family 27, where it is found among geometric figures, and finally Th, who, with his smart head-dress, his crooked staff and his whip, is identified, after considerable search among men in family 1, as No. 367 of the " Catalogue ” of the printing-office of the Institut francais du Caire ; and so on, line by line, the composition is carried out to the end of the copy.
  - Those signs which are not to be found in the ordinary case, having been sought out and assembled on the wooden stick, as already explained, the compositor can proceed with the composition at his cases where the work is then quite easy. There is another matter, however, to be noted. In the fourth line of the manuscript shown in fig. 521 there appear four signs or groups of signs surrounded by a cartouche or
  - As was said in the beginning of this chapter, the cartouche indicates the name of a royal personage. To render this typographically, the end ( is first taken; this is found in the second portion of the case; the signs are next taken of the second body, of 12 points (corps 12), and after the group — is set, comes the other end or closing portion of the cartouche ) ; when the line is filled out and justified, the portion 105, which makes up a 12-point body, is framed by the addition at the top and at the bottom, of two rules, each 3 points (corps 3) in thickness, with a i-point face, shouldered on one side, and having ends which fit exactly to the points of the brackets ( and ) .
  - The elementary principles of hieroglyphic composition have been given in the preceding description. It is impossible in the space at the disposal of the authors to treat of the rules which cover the intercalation of inscriptions or of isolated hieroglyphic words in the midst of roman text. An arrangement which places the roman under the centre of the hieroglyphics is the most usual form adopted in this class of composition. With regard to the spacing between lines of matter entirely hieroglyphic, no special directions apply ; the run of the work, and the exigencies of making it up into pages, as well as good taste, decide this question.
  - In Egypt the hieroglyphic or priestly engraved writing, which, as has been said, at first was purely pictorial but later developed into pictures representing different sounds, was soon found to be cumbrous ; priestly scribes, therefore, when using papyrus, first began to modify, and then to abbreviate, the pictorial characters until at length they developed the form of writing known as hieratic or priestly. This form of writing is shown in fig. 567, but this modification itself was in its turn found too cumbersome, and the later scribes modified it into a purely conventional
- p.528 - vue 692/901
- p.n.n. - vue 693/901
- - PLATE CVII.
  - AVATO
  - 6 P
  - 11 txt AD
  - tte —
  - W sat
  - 171 11111
  - Fig. 526.— Clay cylinder of Sennacherib, recording the siege of To face page 529.] Jerusalem, 700 B.C.
- pl.107 - vue 694/901
- - CUNEIFORM.
  - 529
  - system of signs from which most of the permanent characteristics of the true hieroglyphic and even hieratic characters were removed. This script was called demotic, or the writing of the common people, fig. 568, p. 548. Figure 514, plate CVI, showing the Rosetta stone, also gives an example of this form of writing.
  - Sumerian, the ancient language, which was followed by the Babylonian and Assyrian languages, began by representing objects by signs and giving the sound value of the object so represented to the sign. In the course of time, what were originally pictorial ideographs developed into syllabic sounds, without any reference whatever to the object originally represented ; thus, as stated in a lecture to compositors by Vincent Pitman, the sound
  - OLD NEW
  - BABYLONIAN. ASSYRIAN. BABYLONIAN.
  - 2.
  - 3. 0 AT * 4
  - 4. = er
  - 5. * •T
  - 6. 2. »y - %
  - FIG. 525.—Comparison of cuneiform writing, showing development from early ideograph to simple syllabic character.
  - of the sign * was an ; now * represented heaven, and the word for heaven was an. At a later time these sounds, which were really words, Were used both in the pre-Semitic Sumerian as well as in the Semitic Baby-mian and Assyrian language as syllables only, without any reference atsoever to the objects which they originally represented. Thus the sign in the ancient language was a picture for water, the name of which was a; but in the Assyrian word Y* a-bu, father, the sign YY is ased merely as a syllable without any reference to its original picture-*m or meaning. Figure 525 shows six of the characters and their develop-ment from ideographs into mere components of a syllabic system or P abet. An example of a clay cylinder with cuneiform inscription is dtven in fig. 526, plate CVII.
  - There are various other syllabic, and possibly alphabetic, scripts which Present generally come outside the scope of the printing-surface save as
  - 2 M
- p.529 - vue 695/901
- - 530 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - complete process blocks, such, for instance, as the Hittite, an example of which is given in fig. 527, plate CVIII, but for which, owing to recent discoveries and increasing interest, type is now being made, fig. 528; others, to go very far away indeed from oriental lands, are the curious inscriptions from Central America, at present undeciphered, or at least with their decipherment lying within the region of guess-work. Some day, possibly, punches will have to be cut and matrices struck and type
  - 00D0 U
  - ~0o 00 00 A
  - 9gS
  - 05*
  - Fig. 528.—Hittite inscriptions.
  - %
  - 4
  - 2
  - 1 % %
  - cast for these and similar scripts, but at present, strictly speaking, they are outside the true scope of this treatise.
  - In fig. 529, plate CVIII, is shown a beautiful example of the as yet untranslated script of a people who worked out an early civilization in Central America. Whence they came, who they were, and what became of them, are mysteries that at present, as far as the authors know, have not yet been solved. Possibly some happy coincidence may enable a second Champollion to start successfully a clue to their decipherment and all the wonder and the interest that awaits our learning. To-day intelligent man can but look and long for communion with this antique intelligence of his race.
  - The authors’ attention has lately been called to a curious form of writing referred to by P. Amaury Talbot, of the Nigerian Political Service, which is found in use among the negroes of Southern Nigeria.
  - According to the writer of " The Times " review of his volume, " A very interesting part of Mr. Talbot’s book is the account of the Sbididi, a secret system of writing used in connection with the Egbo mysteries. The characters are conventionalized ideographs, bearing a general resemblance to the script of the Easter Island tablets, though Bishop Jannsen and M. de Harlez, proceeding on Mr. Talbot’s plan of employing a native pundit, did not succeed in making much sense of the Polynesian tablets they studied.
  - " The Sbididi script, though vague and inexact as a means of preserving human thought, seems to be a genuine script evolved unaided by negroes.”
  - From reference to P. A. Talbot’s book, “ The Shadow of the Bush,’ recently published, the authors have learned that the first idea that there was a native African script, originated in 1905, when twenty signs of a secret primitive writing were discovered by T. D. Maxwell, District Com-missioner of Calabar; and that later on, twenty-four signs in all were published in the Government Civil List of July of the same year. A
- p.530 - vue 696/901
- - PLATE CVIII.
  - (&
  - ETC
  - wa has
  - Fig 527.—Stone lion with Hittite inscription from Marash.
  - Fig. 529.—Maya inscription from Piedras Negras.
  - 3
  - 8
  - o
  - | 3
  - Gal 03
  - [To face page 530.
- pl.108 - vue 697/901
- - PLATE CIX.
  - [To face page 531.
  - From “ l’A nthropologie."]
  - [Photo. Macbeth,[London.
  - Fig. fjyi.-pd^etify&d neolithic pebbles. fe^^j
- pl.109 - vue 698/901
- - NATIVE AFRICAN SIGNS.
  - 531
  - paper on this writing, by the Rev. J. K. MacGregor, was published in the “ Anthropological Journal” for 1909, and reference has also been made to it by Dr. Mansfeld, who figures certain of the signs in “ Urwald-Dokumente."
  - According to Talbot, the native Ibos declare that this method of writing was acquired long ago from the monkeys which used to gather
  - 2 —
  - &
  - &
  - (1)
  - &
  - “ (I) Husband and wife love each other ardently. They like to put their arms round one another (shown by extended hands). They are rich, have three pillows and a table on each side. The wife holds a comb.
  - (2) Wedded pair belonging to Egbo Society. Shown by the Egbo feather.
  - (3) Very great love between husband and wife. The central ‘star’ denotes a warm and loving heart.
  - (4) A husband cooks two calabashes of food to give to his wife.
  - (5) Man and wife with river between them. The latter is denoted by two ‘ canoes.’ The crosses show that messages are always being sent from one to another.
  - (6) Another sign for ardent love between husband and wife. They have many servants.
  - (7) Man and wife lying with their ‘piccan’ between them. The consorts lie with their heads in different directions.
  - (8) Quarrel between husband and wife. They turn their backs on one another and place a pillow between.
  - (9) A woman wants to marry a man, but her people object.
  - (10) A man wishes to leave his wife because she has craw-craw.
  - v11) The wife tries to hold back her husband by his loin-cloth. At the bottom of which her hand is seen.
  - (12) Woman who wishes to be rid of her husband.”
  - Fig. 530.—Sbididi or Nsibidi script.
  - round their camp-fires, a legend which in any case tends to prove that it is of considerable antiquity. The script is certainly not derived from any external or foreign source, and, though to a large extent pictographic, it has in the course of years become highly conventionalized.
- p.531 - vue 699/901
- - 532
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The Ekoi explanation of the name Nsibidi, or more properly, Nchibbidy, is that it is derived from the verb nchibbi, to turn, from which has been deduced the further meaning of agility of mind, and hence, therefore, that of cunning or double meaning.
  - Messages are sent in Nsibidi script, cut or painted on split palm stems.
  - The facsimile of a page from the appendix referring to this matter in Talbot’s highly interesting volume is given in fig. 530.
  - Perhaps the most suggestive, as well as the earliest known attempt at the permanent record of sound, and therefore idea, are the marked pebbles discovered by Ed. Piett at Mas d’Azil on the left bank of the Arize in the Department of Ariege, France.
  - These stones are coloured with peroxide of iron, and the characters are of many kinds, varying from a series of strokes or series of dots, which possibly indicate numbers, to graphic symbols and artistic patterns of various kinds. The authors have no doubt whatever that these venerable records are really marks produced by human agency. A reference to the work of Ed Piett, " Les galets colories de Mas d’Azil ” published in " L’Album de l’Anthropologie,” they think, will remove any doubt about the matter, if any is left after a study of the page reproduced here, fig. 531, plate CIX. The reproduction in black and white, however, gives no idea of the effect produced by the colour of the actual specimens. It is not for a moment suggested that these marked pebbles conveyed to their originators anything of the nature of what is conveyed to us by our methods of writing. They possibly are tribal marks, curt records of some incident, units in some form of game, or tallies and records of possessions, or crude notes of achievements in the chase. Venerable beyond words, and full of wonderful suggestion are these marked pebbles ; but this is not the place for the discussion of the thoughts and strange and varied emotions that they arouse. Likenesses have been found between these signs and early syllabaries such as the Cypriot, and early alphabets such as those of the Phoenicians, and also likenesses have been made out between them and sundry hieroglyphic characters, and though in many instances it is true that strong resemblances exist, it would not be safe to infer that any connexion exists between them.
  - In any case, these inscribed pebbles are interesting objects because they appear to be, so far as is known, the earliest efforts of mankind to record ideas by hieroglyphic, ideographic, or tonal methods; for, as has been said, there is good reason to believe that they are genuinely marked by human beings, and are not the result of mere coincidence and of the contact of stone surfaces with irregular surfaces of iron peroxide.
  - Fascinating, however, as these and many other more advanced scripts are, they have at present no practical technology, and therefore further reference to them and to their peculiarities are here out of place.
- p.532 - vue 700/901
- - CHAPTER XXXV.
  - ANCIENT AND MODERN SCRIPTS AND THEIR USES.
  - “.... from India unto Ethtopta, an hundred twenty and seven provinces, unto every province according to the writing thereof, and unto every people after their language, and to the Jews according to their writing, and according to their language.”
  - Esther.
  - Brevier tudor.
  - papa nia a2D0 x ppp TS-D81 onxn xipn-e npyi : mpps b-xun ws R nuin-5* nim 8
  - .(35 515 5W hew) -
  - — Exodus xxxii. 32, 33.
  - Pica Hebrew.
  - IN chapter XXXIII the authors have dealt with the classic Chinese character and its development in times nearer the present day.
  - In chapter XXXIV they have dealt with hieroglyphics and their derivatives, the hieratic and demotic forms of writing, as well as with the Assyrian and Babylonian developments of the cuneiform character.
  - In the present chapter those type faces are considered which are used to reproduce manuscripts or inscriptions in characters no longer 111 living use such as, for instance, Runic; characters which have been revived and brought into use for national or patriotic reasons such as, for instance, Erse ; and characters which are in general use amongst the Various nations scattered over the face of the globe.
  - The form of character used for recording languages has been determined in the majority of cases, in modern times, by the insistence of a religious aith, and these new scripts and alphabets may be appropriately termed the legitimate children of missionary enterprise as much as the human converts themselves. It is true that the trader, whether in more humble effort or backed up with modern artillery and big commercial powers, may, in the great majority of cases, have come first, but, as a matter of fact, it 1 the Bible and the Cross that have ultimately created new typographical
  - 533
- p.533 - vue 701/901
- - 534
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - domains. Following the slave-raider, or pushed southward by the ivory-caravan, or westward by the rush of Saracen conquest along the shores of the Mediterranean, or carried for war or trade upon dhow and Arab barque to the islands of the East, the swords of the followers of the Prophet have in somewhat lesser degree spread far and wide their beautiful script : and in other regions of the earth religious devotees have borne over vast tracts of country and through great varieties of peoples, of languages and of dialects, their chosen form of writing, as was the case with the devanagari character used for the Sanskrit in which the Brahminic books were written, and with Pali the sacred language of Buddhism. In another instance a character has confined itself almost exclusively to a people of one faith who have been dispersed over many countries; a particular example of this spread and retention of a character under religious stress is afforded by the Hebraic script that accompanies the Jews throughout every continent of the world.
  - To attempt to classify the various alphabets used for all these languages is an extremely difficult matter, and one that, to be dealt with adequately, would require a volume to itself. The authors have, therefore, adopted a method of dividing these different forms of lettering generally under typographical headings—though in certain instances they are placed under a geographical arrangement—instead of attempting some other classification which might, at first sight, perhaps, appear more rational.
  - They have commenced with latin, for it is the face in most widespread use, and have separated this into several classes according to the admixtures of accented characters and other sorts which have been made with the parent stock.
  - Latin in its simple form of character without any accents or quantities or additions is used by missionaries and others for over one hundred languages and dialects.
  - In one language, Iroquois, the figure 8 is used as a letter with the ordinary latin roman fount.
  - Following these may be taken those languages in which no accents are used, but for which the roman fount is mixed with some italic sorts; this practice is followed by some of the missionaries and Bible societies for languages of the Pacific Isles.
  - Next in order of classification may be considered those languages and dialects, over one hundred in number, which are currently represented by the use of the latin character supplemented by the accents given in the fount scheme shown in table I, p. 35.
  - After these may be taken those few languages and dialects which use the latin characters with the addition of the short and long vowel quantities, but which do not use accents.
- p.534 - vue 702/901
- - ANCIENT AND MODERN SCRIPTS AND THEIR USES. 535
  - For yet another small group latin characters are used with both quantities and accents, though not both on the same character.
  - Certain European languages and dialects make use of the latin character supplemented by some characters bearing accents which differ in form from those previously referred to; some examples of these are given on p. 36.
  - With the spread of religion over the world, the missionaries, usually educated men, have left, as has been said, examples of their erudition ; but unfortunately they have shown little knowledge of typography, as is evidenced by the selection made by them of the miscellaneously accented characters with which they have unhappily endowed the scripts of many countries.
  - Among the peculiarities they have introduced may be mentioned cha-racters which carry both quantities and accents; characters which are dotted above and characters which are dotted below; characters which re underscored, and characters which are overscored ; characters which are doubly underscored, and characters which are crossed with straight or curved lines. Not content with this, they have used figures as cha-Tacters and peculiars as characters ; they have not refrained from using existing characters reversed, distorted, and even inverted, disregarding the difficulties of alinement which are thereby introduced in many body-sizes; and when they have exhausted the resources of the latin fount, ey have unhesitatingly introduced admixtures of greek sorts, and, without qualm, have also endeavoured to improve upon the greek. To separate into classes the many founts in use for over one hundred languages and tects which embody one or more of these peculiarities would involve much space and a complicated classification.
  - Figures 532 and 533 show examples of the extremes to which mixture of sorts in some of these alphabets has been carried.
  - N mitoks.unw, spaimkak ywn ; imi-cutceswik-tisitg kuisuwn ; kintge-m.swutim p.kwtgihwtg ; Kulidvhs-dwmugwn wldhate wskitkwmikw -t uke eluhsk spamkak. Pemkisksk malan-etvskas-kskagEWE n’twbnw-mon ; Hs lanheltamnuanE mutesmsgwn-mu vl stake nulun el.oneltwm-"ugwt tsnik wetcanmu-inm.tcik: Hs mussk liphakek ssaluu-duasgam
  - 10-point Maliseet (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 532.—Maliseet.
  - SIDA Itse lhomgu Ina hatse, sa lonsa as khaihe re. Sa gaosib ab ha Tei sa fei-sa as i, Ihomi Inas i khemi, ||nati [hub-eib on ei. Netse Side tse-gorobe bereba ma da. E sida Ihawina luba da, si-da lhawi-xabena da ra ||kadi luba khemi. E ta Idi-tsab Ina tgai-tgui da, e
  - II-point Nama or Khoi-Khoi (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - FIG. 533.—Nama or Khoi-Khoi.
- p.535 - vue 703/901
- - 536
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Latin characters with the addition of some special characters are used for Anglo-Saxon, fig. 534, and the same face with fewer of these added sorts serves to reproduce Icelandic.
  - FADER upe pu pe eanc on heorenum, Si bin nama sehalsod. To-becume pin pice. Cepunbe pin pilla on eop^an, ppa spa on heoronum. Unne sedzshpamlican hlap ryle ur to das. And popsyr uy ^P® sylcay, J'Pa rpa P® popsyrad upum sylcendum. ri-point Anglo-Saxon (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 534.—Anglo-Saxon.
  - Other modifications of the latin character are used for the reproduction of inscriptions typographically; examples of inscription Roman are given in figs. 535 and 536.
  - CN . PISO . PRO . Q . MAGN . PRO . COS . CAESAR . CN . M . POBLICI .CN MAGNVS . M . TOB . LEG . PRO. IM . GVTNGAW3 . JHTVW . GVTNG8WI > . inMNn . aw . VIJ3THZ. aw . IKZVJ . IW . 21H31 . IWI . WIIV&R2. y 8-point inscription Roman No. 3 (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - FIG. 535. —Inscription Roman.
  - /DELR/ED REX ANELOX L/EPE OXFER-D M"O DOFRA /EDELPE M-O BA-DAN /EDELP/ED REX OFECE NEMO © DEY /EDE/REXD NELRR ANGLO LOD MQO LFELE HEREBY RHT MtO ANCEO ANEL EOLY LEOFPL 8-point inscription Roman No. 4 (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 536. —Inscription Roman.
  - After latin must be considered greek, which is still in use practically in its original form. Examples of early Greek are given in figs. 537 and 538. The normal greek alphabet consists of twenty-four letters, and the sorts
  - naTep HUNLONO ENTOICOTPANOIC ATIACOHTCOTOONOuACOr * CAO ETCOHBAGIAeacOr ’ FeNHOHTOTOOGAHUACOTOCENOTPANCOKAI enIrHC * TOM APTON HUCOHTOH EnOTCIOu AOC HUIN CHLEPON * KAI adeCH U11 ITAO ceiAr I LATAH U CON LOCKAI H11 eicacH KALel ITOIC 10-point manuscript Greek (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - FIG. 537-—Greek; Codex Vaticanus.
  - are shown in the fount scheme given in table 21, p. 141, while a specimen, composed on a Monotype machine, is given at the head of the technical
- p.536 - vue 704/901
- - ANCIENT AND MODERN SCRIPTS AND THEIR USES. 537 vocabulary, appendix III, p. 669. The greek character with the addition of special accents is also used for a few other languages and dialects.
  - TTePHMCDNOENTOICOYNOICATIXCOHTC TOONOMACOY • exeeTCHBACIXEICOY • TeNHOHTCDTOOEXHMACOYCCENOYN& KAIETTITHC • TONAPTONHMCDNTONETTI 18-point manuscript Greek (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 538.—Greek ; Codex Alexandrinus.
  - As in the case of latin a modified form of greek character is used for the reproduction of Greek inscriptions, of which fig. 539 is an example.
  - ANAPEZ A0HNAIOI KATA ANTA Qz AEIZIAAI MONEZTEPOYE YMAZ 0€QP2 AIEPXOMENOE TAP KAI ANAOEQPQN TA ZEBAZMATA YMON €YPON KAI BOMON EN & ETTErErPATTTo ATNOCTO OEC. 0 OYN ATNOOYNTEC EYCEBEITE TOYTO Erc KAT ArrEAAG YMIN . o 0EOC o noiHCAC Ton KOCMON
  - 10-point inscription Greek No. 2 (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 539.—Inscription Greek.
  - The black-letter used for Old English, an example of which is given at the head of chapter II, p. 4, closely resembles the german character, which is still in use in some countries of Central and Northern Europe. A fount scheme for the various sorts required for the composition of the merman language in Fraktur is given in table 16, p. 136. The German ‘oktur character, fig. 540, with or without accents, is used for some twenty languages and dialects.
  - Unser Vater in dem Himmel! Dein Name werde geheiliget. Dein Jeich komme. Dein Wille geschehe auf Erden, wie im Himmel. Unser taglines Brod gieb uns heute. Und vergieb uns unsere Schulben, wie wir unsern Schuldigern vergeben. Und fibre uns
  - 12-point german No. 3 (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 540.—German; Fraktur.
  - Based to some extent on the original Slavonic and on Greek, the yrillic character, in its more modern form, the Russian character, is used throughout the Russian Empire and in certain other Slavonic countries, supplemented, in some fifteen languages or dialects, by accents or Specialcharacters.
- p.537 - vue 705/901
- - UL 00
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The Russian alphabet comprises thirty-six letters; a fount scheme for it is given in table 22, p. 142, and an example set in Russian on a Monotype machine is given at the head of chapter XXIX, part i, p. 393.
  - The Ancient Slavonic form of the character, fig. 541, is used for Ancient Slavonic, Bulgarian Glagolitic, and Croatian Glagolitic.
  - 900803 P+18, 8063 328 P+ P3E32368, &+ 2% €00800 2€ 8%€ 0093 8+ P6803006 VA2+68200083 00%93. 8+ E86863008 %9&A 00%9A, &;<3
  - P+ P3E328 8 P+ 0398. W&AE8 P+Ws P+200+%8L++%3 88P3 8+8606 P+96 86P326. IP 900-8182008 P+96 868%8P P+W3, AN9 96P 900679-
  - u +3%8 888866P819%8 P+8%8. V P3 V8V388 P+28 %6 P+P+2006, 8-point Ancient Slavonic (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 541. —Bulgarian Glagolitic.
  - A more modern form of Slavonic character used for Bulgarian is shown in fig. 542.
  - GTE HALUX KOHTO CH HA HERECA TA, ftA CA CBATM MME TO TBOE. Aa npiMAE l|ApCTBO TO TBOE ; Aa ESAE BAA TA TBOA, KAKBOTO HA HERO TO, TAKA H HA 3EMAA TA. XAKEAT% Nauz KATAAIE-BNWIATZ AAH HH TO ANECh. H HpOCTH HH AVATOBE TE NIIl, KAKBOTO H HIE PH HpOyJABAME HA HAHJH TE ARANKUN. II HE 12-point Bulgarian (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 542. —Bulgarian.
  - In one instance—Abkhazian, fig. 543—the Cyrillic character has been used largely admixed with latin sorts, and, in an italic example, this
  - bapa ihaovy, yapa iqay axcqan axjqa, iusjanr iqaaaajm, yapa yxjzjajajm yapa ynchapa iqaaajm yapa urynaary, axcQan axjqa ajuw jepa ybapc ancabapaiuj aua hapa hassazapazr iham hapa jaxjta cij haznrocj hapa hayaarya japa yoapc hapej hacrsryroy iurpzrx-10-point Abkhazian (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - FIG. 543. —Abkhazian.
  - script is extremely confusing owing to the different meanings the same character may bear according as it is used in its Latin or in its Russian sense.
  - Dealing next with the remaining European characters, an example of Runic is given in fig. 544. In its simplest form the runic alphabet
- p.538 - vue 706/901
- - ANCIENT AND MODERN SCRIPTS AND THEIR USES 539 consists of sixteen letters, but others are frequently added, bringing the total to some twenty-three or even more sorts.
  - F4**A 04A WAY 1*1 I *IYPRY *IPFA FAR* MIT M4Y1 • 1IPYAYY* MT RIKI • HKI PIN HINT W4 H4YI *ITYIMK W4 ** B4 14RM4KK* • F4R1 44*1*4 BRA FIF 44 1 14*. ** F4AN1 4h N4R4 wr41A M4 MAY
  - n-point runic (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 544.—Old Norse; runic character.
  - For the typographical reproduction of inscriptions in Etruscan a face has been cut for the Imprimerie royale de France, and an example of it is given in « Debuts de 1’imprimerie en France,” by Arthur Christian. Gothic, fig. 545, has an alphabet consisting of twenty-five characters, to which nine ligatures are frequently added.
  - ATTA DHSAK On in hiMINAM: yethNAi U(AHQ Hei: UIMai Vnamassns Heis: yaieai yixqa Heus sye in hiMa Gah ANA Atdai: haaik DNSARANA • SINTEINAN rip INS IMHA AAra: GAh AJAET DHs ATei SKIAANS SIGAIMA syasye qahi
  - 10-point Gothic (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 545.—Gothic.
  - peThe Irish character or Erse, fig. 546, known in the trade as Gaelic, has n revived, and many Irish works have been printed in it. In its
  - An n-cai aca an near, so naomtan t'ainm. So o-cisead 00 Tosaco. So n-oeuncan 00 coil an an o-catam, man (oean-Car) an neam. An n-anan Laeceamuit cabaip ouinn sac La. Asur mai ouinn an b-peacurde ; 61 maiemio-ne pein 00 Sac II-point Irish or Gaelic (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 546.—Irish or Erse; Gaelic character.
  - aneplest form the Irish alphabet consists of eighteen letters; both capitals n lower-case are used, and sometimes as many as thirty-nine lower-case cha Ules are added, making seventy-five sorts. Among other uses for the wrecter may be mentioned that of painting it upon the few sign-posts ch the authors are informed have been erected in Ireland, with the that should motorists or tourists take the requisite trouble to learn - 6 alphabet they will find further complication in the fact that the cha-ers may give them the Irish name of the town instead of its English
- p.539 - vue 707/901
- - 540 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - appellation, and they will be reduced to the same expedient as if they had not known the alphabet, that is to say immediate reference to the kindly offices of the local priest, who, in country districts—it is stated—is alone capable of undertaking the double burden of reader and interpreter.
  - Passing to Eastern Europe, the Georgian character is used in some parts of the Caucasus ; the alphabet consists of forty letters, making, with one accented letter, forty-one sorts. Examples of Georgian are given in figs; 547 and 548.
  - ihi&ttiu fvqytfliii ihiu^iini ^ili Gi^m^ iplxw, 3^1^^-*m*t;viM li^t^mi'i ^1^. &ui*tFtiSili luuitp^i^Hj ^fi'i, iqunpli R^^ ^^^ *tpim*itih{i*i; G^m^ ^^ n^thnifi^ ^^^m^fx^h^ TryS^. ^nyihi' ’ t Kihhtu^h^, ^^^ ft^nfi ^wyh. ^^
  - 14-point ecclesiastical Georgian (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 547.—Georgian; ecclesiastical character.
  - 3
  - CJ> r
  - _C
  - FO
  - S & C
  - og^G libll^o 3^Go; S^^oti ^^^ S^Go, o^b^G G^b 3^Go, ^omb^^b ^bcnb 3oGb, 3j^g(5^ ^gbGbllb %^b. ^^o G^Go b^ho^oBb 3g>3^ G^G ^^k 18-point civil Georgian {set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 548.—Georgian; civil character.
  - In the form used for the language from which it takes its name, the arabic character, which is used by the great majority of the Mohammedan nations, comprises dotted, doubly dotted, and trebly dotted letters; the addition of these dots converts various incomplete basic forms into complete letters. In some instances the forms vary according to the position which the character occupies in the word, that is to say whether it is used as an initial, a medial, a final, or a detached letter. These changes of form of character occur in most of the letters of the Arabic alphabet, though in some cases the initial and detached forms are the same, while in others the medial and final forms are identical-Used for Arabic, the alphabet has twenty-eight letters, but these require ninety-eight sorts for their representation under the various conditions of position ; for Persian, Turkish, and many other languages other trebly dotted letters are used, bringing the alphabet to thirty-two letters, to which another character—or three sorts—forming the syllable la ('ll) is sonrc' times added. To these must be added a large number of ligatures, some fifty to sixty of which are commonly used, and, in addition to characters and ligatures, there are some eight points or accents mostly placed above
- p.540 - vue 708/901
- - ANCIENT AND MODERN SCRIPTS AND THEIR USES. 541 the characters, though some are placed below ; one or more of these signs may be used with certain characters or ligatures. An example of Arabic is given on p. 421.
  - As the arabic character spread to languages using not only the sounds used in Arabic but others that required differentiation in the new language, it became necessary to adopt means for distinguishing these new sounds. The obvious method of adopting three dots where three dots were not previously used and also four dots in combination with basic forms of character previously used, helped to extend the use of the arabic script, which with the addition of these other trebly dotted characters served for Persian. With the further addition of quadruply dotted characters it became the current vehicle of expression for various languages of Northern India and the adjacent country, of which Hindustani or Urdu, Sindhi, and Kashmiri afford instances.
  - The arabic character, in its quadruply dotted varieties, comprises three such letters which carry with them ligatures corresponding to the trebly dotted forms ; these letters and their ligatures may be accompanied by the various vowel and other points to which reference has already been made.
  - Arabic with trebly dotted characters is used for some thirty languages and dialects.
  - As was the case in the early production of latin founts, the first attempts to produce arabic type were directed to copying the character of manu-script as closely as possible ; this kept the characters in four forms, initial, medial, final, and detached. The early founts made in Germany, as well as those produced by the celebrated Le Be in the sixteenth century, were arranged so that the junction line was curved down to the lower portion
  - Double alinement. Single alinement.
  - Fig. 549.—Arabic : single alinement and double alinement.
  - of the letter; this modification made it possible to produce a fount from a reasonable number of matrices. In later attempts to obtain a result more closely resembling manuscript, it was necessary to follow the same system of joining one character to the next as was practised by the scribes, a system which results in a long Arabic word dropping lower in line owing to certain of the characters joining the next at different alinements at their commencement and at their end respectively: fig. 549 shows the same word set in single and in double alinement type. This peculiarity Produced a tendency to italicize the script, with the result that, if made to resemble the most beautiful examples of the written character, arabic
- p.541 - vue 709/901
- - 542 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - type kerned very heavily. The difficulty of change of alinement of the junction between the letters was first overcome by the French, who devised the two-line system, in which, when change of alinement occurs in a word, the upper line is used for commencing the composition, otherwise the lower line is that normally used ; but this method, though producing artistic work—and, in the case of certain characters, work that is more legible—is not now so generally used.
  - The early single-line system, as worked out by Le Be, has been revived and developed by several able workers, with the result that the bulk of hand-composition is now carried out with type which joins on this system; it is their work in carrying out this typographical improvement that has rendered machine-composition possible.
  - The composition of arabic, however, in any of the forms above mentioned is frequently a difficult matter owing to the additions of the
  - Fig. 550.—Arabic type with recesses for vowels. Isometric view and section.
  - vowel-points and other signs. In some instances these signs are added as separate type on a small body above the line in which the characters are composed, and also in another line of separate type of small body below the composed line, consequently the total body-size for the fount becomes large. In other cases the type are cast with a recess or recesses for receiving the vowel-points; an isometric view and a section of arabic type with two recesses are shown in fig. 550.
  - The arabic Linotype machine composes over one hundred and fifty sorts from the keyboard, in addition to the other sorts which may he inserted by hand in the line of matrices when necessary.
  - An example of Arabic set on the Linotype machine is given in the heading to chapter XXIX, part II, p. 421, in the section which deals
  - with matrix-composing machines. The form of character is perforce more upright than would be the case were kerning permissible, but the result attained testifies to the skill of those workers at the subject, who have overcome the really great and exceedingly complicated typographical difficulties involved in adapting the arabic character to the restrictions of the composing machine. Since arabic reads from right to left, the order of setting must be of the opposite hand to that usual with latin, greeb and Cyrillic characters. As the Linotype requires the matrices to be composed from left to right, the required result is obtained by the inver sion of the character on the matrix as compared with the latin sorts. Thus the composing portion of the machine remains the same in operation but the slug when cast requires to be turned upside down after ejection’ and to be placed at the left-hand end of the column of slugs already
- p.542 - vue 710/901
- - ANCIENT AND MODERN SCRIPTS AND THEIR USES. 543
  - cast, instead of at the right, as in the ordinary Linotype machine. The arrangement for doing this is shown in the illustration of the arabic Linotype, fig. 407, plate LXII. This figure also shows the manner in which the machine has been adapted to the customs of the oriental compositor, who generally prefers to sit cross-legged at work at the machine rather than upon a chair or stool as is the European practice.
  - The Nestorian character is used for Syro-Chaldaic, fig. 551; from
  - p ri b L P . [-6 F. t 8- f L
  - I
  - — Bor n %
  - 24-point Nestorian (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 551.—Syro-Chaldaic; Nestorian.
  - this is derived the ancient Syriac or Aramaic, a character which reads from right to left, and typographically resembles Cufic.
  - Other early forms of Syriac are Estrangelo, fig. 552, used in the fifth
  - G
  - 8 G G
  - 18-point Estrangelo (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 552.—Syriac; Estrangelo.
  - Sentury, and Peshito, fig. 553, of later date. S modern form is shown in fig. 554.
  - An example of Syriac in
  - Los I0™ •ZaS 1412 . -SA u^, dal •so. 1830007 16„S s So .133 0) .1100.3 13a 2 V V • o V • • o "Vo?* o so soy - ’~’ « a * • vaa -00s -1 -12 (19. • -20 — 00090
  - 18-point Peshito (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - FIG. 553.— Syriac; Peshito.
  - 592 2re -4 :50. 200 :50005ly 2N :508* #pos xis :29> as **** d-i 402 -6 :dso. s 30=%0 . abd. Q.p2 issqoop abs S 356 .asi= *AAi N. 50.29 Shd .*= e S - 12 :w50 S apoti io ..>
  - 12-point modern Syriac (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - FIG. 554.— Syriac; modern.
- p.543 - vue 711/901
- - 544
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The Sabaean or Himyarite character, which is the oldest form of Arabic, had an alphabet of thirty-eight letters, and read in alternate lines from right to left and from left to right. It was followed by the Cufic character, which has the peculiarity of kerning but little, in which respect it resembles
  - -1 0 2o11L juheiil 0 _L souil e ealL LLL
  - 212 LoiuilL 64 L.2 2itsl jail 23321 Li jocLs 01L LiLeL L42 Ly 0=32L alo
  - 18-point Cufic (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - FIG. 555.—Arabic; Cufic character.
  - inscribed characters rather than written characters. An example of Cufic is given in fig. 555.
  - Carshuni is Arabic in the Syriac character ; an example of this is shown in fig. 556.
  - 115 • 1 143
  - E
  - F
  - 1 1
  - 6
  - 24-point Carshuni (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 556.—Carshuni,
  - Armenian reads from left to right, and is used from Constantinople eastwards over a large portion of Asia Minor, both newspapers and books being printed in this character. The Armenian alphabet comprises thirty'
  - U’hp wug, ng EptupnLii bru. un-pe [hub .Pn uiunlp . uu Pn wppuyne[dhLlg , [lilh Pn tunuleg , bilzubu kpl "bgni-ifii' myhn LL bpkeh 4lpawy : V’lrg uiJb“L onLuy Siugl unnLg ukq uyung: CL [on uke uku uuuguunpleg , biuzuybu JE1p bp [d-unnui bup ukg uyuvpunuuluilibehl, : Ct n-point Armenian, No. 1 (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons). FIG. 557.—Armenian.
  - eight letters; in addition to these, of which there are both capitals and lower-case, there are ten lower-case ligatures and some thirteen points and loose accents, so that a fount for Armenian contains about ninety-nine sorts. The ordinary character, fig. 557, has a considerable slope; but another form of character is also used in which diamond-shaped dots replace
- p.544 - vue 712/901
- - ANCIENT AND MODERN SCRIPTS AND THEIR USES. 545 the short inclined strokes, the long strokes are made upright and thickened at one end, while the horizontal hair-lines are replaced by thick strokes: fig. 558. This face is used similarly to the latin italic.
  - G* “Im-E 3 *E Lu -----3, wit *. *** == 1-lmlE-bL t* *. Jam *- *** zmiui #% Lu une-mlam’ -w-ui)} tu «L1 "t: l.m .- 4L- .oym keo A -.- *=: 0- EL ... At
  - n-point Armenian, No. 1 (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - FIG. 558. —Kurdish; Armenian character.
  - The Armenian character is used for some six languages and dialects; ancient Armenian is a very similar character.
  - The Hebraic character is one which has accompanied the Jews through all their wanderings. The extreme antiquity of their sacred lettering, which retains the reverent affection of every believer and co-religionist, as well as the constant study of the sacred books by a large percentage of the people, have resulted in the maintenance of this character, almost un-ered, in all places where the Jewish community is sufficiently large to require the product of the printing-press. The one apparent exception is mentioned among languages using the Ethiopic face, p. 550.
  - The Hebrew alphabet consists of twenty-two letters, five of which take a different form when they occupy the final position in a word. More-as it is not permissible to divide the words in the composition of ebrew, short lines are filled out by the assistance of six sorts, which are cast in various increased widths to permit of line-justification being ected without the addition of excessive width to the spaces. In ition to these there are twelve varieties of points for use below the racters, and some fourteen kinds for use above them, as well as
  - 51) pn :03P 6 TDD 6 von ph ofi onfvn fro o6 onvi
  - :D »np6 • tvn 6 w oD 56 Exodus xxxii. 32, 33.
  - 12-point Rabbinical (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - FIG. 559. —Hebrew; Rabbinical character.
  - Various other sorts for punctuation; the composition of Hebrew, therefore, as ires a very large number of sorts or the use of two or of three bodies, explained subsequently in connexion with the devanagari and Javanese 6 Pe faces. An example of the simple rabbinical character is shown in F6 559, and a specimen of Hebrew with the vowel-points is given at the roof this chapter, p. 533.
  - the ne hebrew character reads from right to left, and, like the arabic, e dots required above and below may be either on a separate body, or
  - 2 N
- p.545 - vue 713/901
- - 546 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - provided for by special sorts representing the combined consonant and vowel. For newspaper purposes these points, most of which come below the body, are frequently omitted, so that the character may be composed from a smaller number of sorts, with the further result that nearly twice the amount of matter can be printed on the page. The reader, however, where this is done, must supply the vowels himself, as in our own early systems of abbreviated longhand, in which the vowels were omitted. This omission of the vowels is a feature common also to many of the languages set in the arabic character. A fount scheme for Hebrew without these vowel points is given in table 24, p. 143.
  - Among the dead languages of Asia Minor are those recorded in cuneiform letters. Inscriptions and tablets in these characters have been
  - 18-point Accadian cuneiform (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 560.—Accadian ; cuneiform.
  - I**# •7 TFT FETFEITT II <m -H IE =TTT= * =T ET BE# AI T-H IE =TTT= * a a FEIT *- q -E - (EI -^ 1 V II «* V - VI-ET ETT Y EU AT * *< - TH = 14-point Assyrian cuneiform (set by Wm. Clowes 6 Sons). Fig. 561.—-Assyrian ; cuneiform.
  - described in a previous chapter. The three forms of cuneiform repre-sented typographically are: Accadian, fig. 560; Assyrian, fig. 561; and Babylonian, fig. 562. Of these, the Assyrian form used for the
- p.546 - vue 714/901
- - ANCIENT AND MODERN SCRIPTS AND THEIR USES. 547 inscriptions of the Ancient Persians and of the Medes is the simplest, it comprises some thirty-two letters, many of which are represented by several different signs, and a fount contains about eighty sorts.
  - T* Y - Y FT <= ^ ART ET =H BT ^ ^ ^ ^ ET
  - = St 4 BTT W < * EAT 4
  - FEIT * 4 2W — A I* *E V - VET <= =T V H 4 4 ** < * 12-point Babylonian cuneiform (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 562.—Babylonian ; cuneiform.
  - The very ancient Phoenician character, of which, as far as the authors are aware, no manuscript exists, reads from right to left; the alphabet contains twenty-two letters, many of which have two forms, while in the case of a few three forms occur ; a fount consists of about forty-four sorts.
  - d. $4 3 x X C
  - i
  - X - £ J £ € $ f X € : 33 - € $% / 2 5 $ V
  - 2 X
  - 13 dx $4 2.1 8.3 S X $ 33 X) I 19 ~ 6 $ P
  - 14-point Pbcenician (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 563.—Phoenician.
  - Fr°m the predominance of straight lines Phoenician resembles runic in its rude simplicity. A specimen of Phoenician is shown in fig. 563.
  - The Samaritan alphabet is closely allied to Hebrew, like which it reads from right to left; and the characters have practically identical names in
  - SARA mxm : 3/732W NXSA : *% xucsem : wnrugugu <9/ 732 3/ *w*ms wrm A9R *3Wq2 : mA/9 18% wmug AM* : T/9YX m2v92 Tq2A AM* R3/R9T% AN *32 %2A% : wzm* AT22M* 32 ms : VAW *32-m* MA ms : 1*332 *3/9/ 2N* 12-point Samaritan (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 564.—Samaritan.
  - both sorts
  - languages. A fount consists of twenty-two sorts for letters, with four for points. An example of Samaritan is given in fig. 564.
- p.547 - vue 715/901
- - 548 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The Palmyrene alphabet also has twenty-two letters, and reads from right to left; an example is given in fig. 565.
  - Vy :3313933 Nas :333V V133 33Vav A55R 159 $ »p333 I533H3 :3N3 $3 3838V5 %R3 3523% 355H133 ASN %N3 15351H 155 5LH33 :380 9333 185331 :Ts »p5 ISN* IMA :53 J85H5
  - 12-point Palmyrene (set by Wm. Clowes 6 Sons).
  - Fig. 565.—Palmyrene.
  - With the Egyptian hieroglyphic scripts the authors have dealt in a previous chapter. Type are also made for outline hieroglyphic, fig. 566;
  - @
  - Q
  - 2144
  - -a 0B d 0a - O
  - (D 1
  - 18-point outline hieroglyphic (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 566.—Egyptian ; hieroglyphic.
  - as well as for hieratic and demotic, examples of which are given in figs. 567 and 568 respectively ; both of the latter examples read from right to left.
  - =9)=4231A134416li2$
  - £21j44-*2314S
  - 13£0**)/2£23*Z*=2 6,12381890-230 CH 21A
  - 18-point hieratic (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 567.—Egyptian; hieratic.
  - m B01 4 — w fa - 6303/2— ) 515)2 nu
  - % w S)4039-3 — 96 >)‘Twp 7% 35»)»16
  - w*e)3/5/% %/)3% G-»//% _ &Pdnu)‘v
  - 3-A*/*P*5 /%)4)-3 *>3-5»%
  - 12-point demotic (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 568.—Egyptian ; demotic.
- p.548 - vue 716/901
- - ANCIENT AND MODERN SCRIPTS AND THEIR USES. 549
  - The Coptic alphabet used for the languages of modern Egypt—Bohairic in the north and Sa'idic in the south—comprises thirty-two letters ; it has capitals and lower-case sorts ; in addition to these sixty-four sorts, seven of the letters carry grave accents, and six are overscored for purposes of
  - IIei ergenmhoi, sapeqroYRo NxeneKpan.
  - Mapeci Mxe TEKSETOpO. neTeZRaK uapeqsgcon denree MesZiXenmiKaZi. Tent nepact uHiq Man upoo. 008 XANH ETepon HAH eRo?
  - 12-point Coptic, No. 2 (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 569.—Coptic; Bohairic or Northern.
  - DENelT ETZNUHTE, uapeneKpaN oron. TeKuNTepO ua-Pecel. neKorcy uapeqscne uee GTeqZNTne Nqwcone ON ZxunKaz. neNOeIK ETNHT Nri uuoq NAN unoor. NTKC MAN EBOA MMeTepoM nee 2000M on TNK EBOA NNETGOr-12-point Coptic, No. 3 (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 570.—Coptic; Sa’idic or Southern.
  - abbreviation. Coptic is shown in figs. 569 and 570; this script partakes of the character of greek, and reads, like Greek, from left to right.
  - Zend, the sacred language of the Parsees, has an alphabet of forty-four c aracters, and the fount consists of about forty-seven sorts ; it reads from right to left, and an example of it is shown in fig. 571.
  - 9 • Fao,ygoas . ~Gyy . toto o Jwyas . Dyassanas . yao • % . glasoj® 3 3 800 • Ggjwawwas 0°0 owsssag,- GeJoxwo . 00 0% s.wssw . £^
  - 3859 • 3Ga . 300080 . aGap • €*33e . Fgpe)e3 . au •% 88 - a0o-ga»eo> 9 . wyo •% wojaas • qqyaeasg • Ggroglano . % *GXS . xqGwa . wouyo 3819/8)89 • *500)00)30) • woo • xgJays 14-point Zend (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 571.—Zend.
  - A. The Amharic alphabet consists of thirty-three letters, or seven more san Ethiopic ’ each of these can be used in its unaltered form or with the be ition of a mark signifying one of the six vowel sounds by which it can a followed; there are consequently 198 sorts representing syllables, and still further twenty combinations involve diphthongs, besides two other gns for points. The total number of sorts for the Amharic fount is 3 i for Ethiopic there are 182 syllables, twenty diphthongs, four points,
- p.549 - vue 717/901
- - 550
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - and twenty figure signs, that is 226 sorts ; this shorter fount is used with a few additions for Tigre and Tigrinya. This character is shown in figs. 572 and 573 ; it is used in the north-east of Africa.
  - The one exception to the general use of the hebrew character for the writing and printing of sacred books occurs in the case of the Falashas,
  - M^ : U‘E : nnowe : PgDTC :: noun: XP gh :: ovnwth : 190x :: 49ph : ngec: TU%: nnowe : Ri : UT :: Az.mh* : pomngn : nm: HZ :: EPC : noigu : ny : FAO-%: ATgU:
  - II-point Amharic, No. 2 (set by Win. Clowes & Sons).
  - FIG. 572.—Amharic.
  - Ani : HnnouPr : ervgn : noon :: 1908% : oonwin :: Eni : 49gh : now : nnowe : ongox-Ci :: npi ; HAA : 0A1* : uni : p-go:: 047 : Al : Anma : now : %1 : he ; AHANn :
  - 12-point Ethiopic, No. 1 (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 573.—Ethiopic.
  - who, however, it is stated, can only be doubtfully " identified ethnologically with the seed of Abraham.”
  - Passing further east, one finds, derived from the five Aryan dialects which emerged from the covering flood of Buddhism about 600 B.C., the devanagari character, which is used for thirty or forty of the languages and dialects’of India.
  - The Sanskrit alphabet, from which the more modern forms of devanagari (frequently called " clothes-line” by the trade) are derived, consists of about forty-four letters, nearly all of which include a horizontal and a vertical stroke with the distinguishing portions of the letters, frequently combined two or three together, on these main strokes. Some of the resulting characters are of great complexity, and in addition to the total of over 330 sorts, any or all of which can be included in a fount, and the ten figure signs, there are five accents representing vowel sounds, which can be placed above the characters, and six others which can be placed below.
  - This character has been alluded to already in the chapter dealing with legibility ; it reads from left to right.
  - As previously explained in the case of arabic and hebrew characters, the addition of accents above and below involves working with two or three bodies, and in many cases an 18-point fount is built up of the main character on 14-point with the accent on 4-point ; a 24-point with the main character on 18-point and the accent on 6-point, and so on; or, if accents are used
- p.550 - vue 718/901
- - ANCIENT AND MODERN SCRIPTS AND THEIR USES. 551
  - below as well as above, these founts become 22-point and 30-point respectively. A specimen of devanagari character is shown in fig. 574; the Marathi character resembles this very closely.
  - * ERR tiat far, at ** uf* fUT *TZ1 atr t are I at SET Sa w* H An qat u ut 614 I anTO fent a nA H* anal wit We F* auR -fiat at ETHT ata T an ERTO * si EFT at i wit E* UOte # na STe,
  - 16-point Hindi, No. 3 (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 574.—Hindi; devanagari character.
  - Derived from the devanagari character is the Bengali, of which the alphabet contains nearly the same number of letters as the Sanskrit, but for which a much smaller total number of sorts is required.
  - A specimen of this character which is used in some parts of the north-east of India not only for Aryan languages, but for some of the scattered Kolarian groups, is shown in fig. 575.
  - CR Wtiha 7f% f*rs8, cotta *1* 94 af131 *T *5* I Csita 3193 612** I cetata 21 * GAR Afos coxf “frs *0* I Sttha @09* Rw SWT stf-S* Rite I at 31*31 <19 <19 <931** GA 51 *fanf%,
  - 12-point Bengali, No. 2 (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 575.—Bengali.
  - Another derivative of the devanagari character used in the Punjab, 1 the Gurumukhi character shown in fig. 576.
  - @ wR3 fist # HOTT fv 5, BaT ar0 ufs d^WH m2 ST am we; BA ffwT fro HOTT fee a fo vast ya * dl st ne RTS am astfg a 3nam HT 6 feu. wa fH Wo old NF »TV® cdngtr 6 HTZ «de qi, fan Waal
  - 12-point Panjabi, No. 8 (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons), Fig. 576.—Panjabi or Sikh; Gurumukhi character.
  - The Thakuri character, which is used in the Chamba States of the unjab, is shown in fig. 577.
- p.551 - vue 719/901
- - 552
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - 3 M sus S gal wy 3 38 1 ua 31 59 Sh GI 53 Gxed 3 goaf ns G 3 sad u 4 ya 31 Jns ayhan ha 3m Zoh zo $ 1 73 shd zndl znus ssGh $ * 000 03 on ss: $ * 01 205 zd 18-point Thakuri (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - FIG. 577.—Chamba; Thakuri character.
  - An example of Gujarati or Guzerati, which has a slight resemblance in appearance to the last-named, is shown in fig. 578. The alphabet comprises forty-three sorts, to which eighty-seven ligatures, each formed from a consonant and a vowel, may be added.
  - 2 »is12*i*t 2MI2L "1, a •» uAA wu»0. a Rleat 21; 0* »isi2i an
  - 20 W2 aud gagi ya a Aax-l »* A4l »loy »*A 2. »A on MA MMIRL *0203 AL sAasA, a* § 2*21 *0 14-point Gujarati (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 578.—Gujarati or Guzerati.
  - A character largely used in Southern India is Kanarese ; it reads from left to right, and the alphabet comprises fifty-three characters, in addition to which fifty-four ligatures are commonly used, so that a fount consists of more than 107 sorts ; an example of this character is given in fig. 579.
  - Xoba 85 853 Bodobde, 863 obop 86585 0X0. J.3 00886 280. 82 8385 Mdt.g eXs 000 6.63005 ^0000/0 eXd. 852 e-d8-8 8,88305-3 %
  - 868. 50R SeXd. ~o 59 070067 203: oob, 14-point Kanarese, No. 1 (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons). FIG. 579.—Kanarese.
  - The Telugu alphabet is practically identical with the Kanarese, but has only fifty-one characters; it differs otherwise from Kanarese only in the form of some of its characters ; an example of Telugu is given in fig. 580 ; seventy-nine ligatures are frequently used for letter combinations.
- p.552 - vue 720/901
- - ANCIENT AND MODERN SCRIPTS AND THEIR USES. 553
  - ess-odra & bob! & ~3o xbodod 7*8 & ovag Syn*; & w 6S esoX der
  - R°6 ee-A 20-5000X3- 738.38 R*. &3o 3Wde ? esXo-68500 «Xd 830 od vodjod. J 2008 14-point Telugu, No. I (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - FIG. 580.—Telugu.
  - The Tamil alphabet has thirty letters, in addition to which 227 ligatures, consisting of the combinations of consonant and vowel, are used, as well as twelve figure signs ; the total fount, therefore, amounts to 269 sorts. This character is also used in Southern India. Tamil reads from left to right, and an example is given in fig. 581.
  - L D L6oTLO& o 60 ( & S or Bl & 6T L95 , D_L(LOLW 16 IT LDL uMFSSLUGa. D_L(LOLW IWi 6( OJ I 6; P_LD(LOLW 866i L I LD GOT L 60 6 8 60 OJuwuuG pg GLIo LLOuGovui Owiuogne. ofil 6 (61 6 (5 G616dr 4w -O & IT I 6 606 () or oT 1 86 (615 & (6 6 &I(i. of ihl & 6T &L 12-point Tamil, No. 2 (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 581.—Tamil.
  - A cognate but less known script of the Dravidian group is Malayalim, an example of which is shown in fig. 582.
  - 60 0839.65 oo-onoo afoou , colonbo 000 aye R200066g_56060 , olonbo 00083)0 0606962; ono-gYee Gai donejo olonbo 60 60 96056060 . 670)6839 6S ©oo (099 (go spem 6)0830006) 0006062. 60)0830 65 @06 4300 600 14-point Malayalim (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 582.—Malayalim.
  - An example of Oriya or Uriya, the script of Orissa, is shown in fig. 583.
  - S2 71949999 qg aci, 99Q 999 991 G9Q I 999 9194
  - ag I casica qSIGQ cas-sa qqlsQ 99Q 22 qa C9Q I ep 089999 $94 9a4 Ge | PIsscs Ge easjgsc case as 98, S999 esacQ egga @9I QQ | aola co esass $ ala, 9i 9gos% Qa 99; sag 919Q, 6S199, asjia 90/9601
  - 14-point Oriya (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - FIG. 583.—Oriya or Uriya.
- p.553 - vue 721/901
- - 554
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The Sanskrit sacred books of the Brahmins have been transcribed from devanagari into Bengali, Tamil, Kanarese, Malayalim, Oriya, and various other characters.
  - The Cingalese or Sinhalese character is used for the language of Ceylon. An example of this is given in fig. 584.
  - c@ec@ 80885 qeod 8052300 Be j @602 Geoc S0@c @€ 802302 ©166. @60aJceec 60c 00. @6006660 250,32 666605 tSecBBe 23 6€9 C66). qoe ecesao 6636 50 qes© ^ 8505. qoe S 0323006530 48 s8@6023 50 es3
  - 11-point Sinhalese (set by Wm. Clowes 6 Sons).
  - Fig. 584.—Cingalese or Sinhalese.
  - The Lepcha language, or dialect, of the Tibeto-Burman group, spoken in Darjeeling not far from the border of Sikkim and the peak of Kinchin-junga, makes use of the character shown in fig. 585.
  - 63 Co ( 403 #)/) *) (* • cet ty (0 t #) kv srco 03 0% & 0 « 0 6a) (6% S& 40) £ 4 46 € 6 Soy w &) #) « C .
  - St. John iii. 16. 22-point Lepcha (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons). Fig. 585.—Lepcha.
  - Tibetan, the character of the land of Buddhism, is a very beautiful but somewhat cumbrous character; it requires a large body, and presents some difficulties in kerning. The alphabet consists of thirty letters, from which many ligatures are formed. An example of this interesting and decorative character is shown in fig. 586.
  - ^’^’^’^q^^ 3505548
  - 88559557550555*7847 I 35052565555=
  - 847 12505=765055558'74751 5a-
  - *557587 I^’^’P’a^’^’^-^rSy^^-^-^
  - 18-point Tibetan (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons)-
  - Fig. 586 —Tibetan.
- p.554 - vue 722/901
- - ANCIENT AND MODERN SCRIPTS AND THEIR USES. 555
  - Further east the Burmese character is largely used, with derivative forms in adjacent countries. The Burmese alphabet consists of forty-five letters; the character reads from left to right. An example of Burmese is given in fig. 587.
  - GoDCzo8o889G00S GO02902%603301 ooScoS GsoocooS g0:8c00cc008:80lc0c00Du LocooS 00800600 9 00050000 sop CoS G00020Z1c83:coToG0S<0lc0cooon 90008G23
  - 18-point Burmese (set by Win. Clowes & Sons).
  - FIG. 587.—Burmese.
  - The Siamese alphabet consists of forty-four consonants (the vowels being represented by signs written over, under, before or after the consonants with which they are sounded), and a fount comprises some 150 sorts ; it is a character peculiar to Siam, and an example is given in fig. 588.
  - Th Wagon ELV3 %1W:%5:M010 % 0 16333A, 1 W3guA4 @03
  - U U
  - W3%03h duh to he %u vSant. ‘ welu Au @09 W38094 0163 20.
  - 7 U
  - W33lne 909 W33 03 d650a63ssh 203’3, hlmsolu ssclu du
  - Ban LMieu Ku 20 Coan dszmu anM13W5vs%n th Wavone la na
  - 18-point Siamese (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 588.—Siamese.
  - The Buddhist sacred books in Pali have been transcribed into this character, as well as into Burmese and Cingalese.
  - The Lao-tian or Lao-shan character is used in the south of Laos and on the frontier of Annam in French Indo-China ; an example of this character is given in fig. 589.
  - 83:8002 99 %o 83:.52 U @238611 51 10122 090359 6010218601 885a Alucebu&uc 0:59 099€ St. John iii. 16. 24-point Lao-tian (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 589.—Lao-tian or Lao-shan.
  - With the Chinese character, used generally throughout China, the authors have dealt in a previous chapter. The neighbouring nation-
- p.555 - vue 723/901
- - 556 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Japan—uses for its classics a character almost identical with the Chinese ideographic writing, known as Kana-majiri; an example of this is given in fig. 590. An abbreviated form of character, comprising some seventy-three sorts, forty-seven of which form the alphabet, used for Japanese writing, is the Kata-kana, an example of which is shown in fig. 591, while yet another written form, known as Hira-gana, is shown in fig. 592.
  - 00495 B#AB*=* .># c **** •RE*09 ## d N CRRH
  - VW
  - ** %* Ml • < 4
  - 14-point Kata-kana (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 591.—Japanese Katakana.
  - 14-point Hira-gana (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - FIG. 592.—Japanese Hira-gana.
  - 14-point Kana-majiri (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 590.—Japanese Kana-majiri.
  - The Korean character, fig. 593, in some respects resembles the Chinese, but in others it is similar to the Japanese Kata-kana, while some of the characters are like those proposed in the new Chinese syllabic alphabet, both being derived from a similar source. The Korean character was many
  - 1 J’ano 3 Ron TRa *** Urz KNW K-ZX TDR Top oxol E zupo+rk —1 gozop 30
  - la
  - St. John iii. 16. “The Gospel in many Tongues”; British and Foreign Bible Society. 14-point Korean. Fig. 593.—Korean.
  - years ago arranged to form an alphabet of eleven vowels, thirteen diph-thongs, and fourteen consonants, or in all thirty-eight sorts; in this respect this nation was ahead of its Celestial neighbour, although the form in which its alphabet is presented is not such as would render machine-composition possible without alteration in the method of arranging the letters.
- p.556 - vue 724/901
- - ANCIENT AND MODERN SCRIPTS AND THEIR USES. 557 In the interior of Asia a very curious character is used for languages of the Tartar family, examples of which are Kalmuk, shown in fig. 594, Manchu, fig. 595—now a dead language—and Mongolian, fig. 596. The Mongolian alphabet has twenty-four characters ; like arabic, most of the letters have different initial, medial, final, and detached forms. The Manchu alphabet has thirty-six letters, most of which exist in several of the four forms, initial, medial, final,
  - 18-point Kalmuk (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - FIG. 594.—Kalmuk.
  - 18-pointManchu (set by Wm. Clowes 6 Sons).
  - Fig. 595.—Manchu.
  - A09 i
  - fuc
  - e 65
  - 18-point Mongolian (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - FIG. 596.—Mongolian.
- p.557 - vue 725/901
- - 558
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - and detached, totalling 137 sorts. It has also a large number of ligatures, so that a fount comprises some 200 sorts. This character reads from top to bottom; the vertical lines do not follow, as in Chinese, from right to left, but read from left to right; consequently, any machine intended to compose in the Mongolian character would have to be arranged as is the arabic Linotype, to effect the equivalent of composing matter which is to read from right to left. The type or print would then require to be turned counter-clockwise through a right angle, that is, in the opposite direction to the clockwise quarter-revolution through which the character, written on a latin typewriter fitted with the new Chinese syllabary, requires to be turned to give the Chinese direction of reading.
  - The Mongolian character, however, possesses certain peculiarities due to the ambiguity of meaning of several sorts, and consequently presents so great a difficulty of interpretation to the reader that it is extremely improbable that machinery will ever be adapted to produce it in its present form.
  - Of the characters used for the languages of the islands of the Eastern Seas, Javanese, which is one of the most important, reads from left to right; an example of it is shown in fig. 597. The Javanese alphabet consists
  - O
  - a a 0.0 0 / 00
  - ootuonaavann % QA 0 0
  - a Q
  - oomnaou
  - 0Z °g
  - a 45
  - C
  - G
  - §
  - F §
  - £
  - 0% 02
  - . C/ a QQ a 0 0/0
  - 020 % 000 can amA a C (11 00200
  - a
  - OCO
  - dann 0 S. (L on QJ
  - 30
  - 3 2p
  - §
  - 6
  - 8
  - g
  - 3 80 So
  - §
  - § :
  - 30
  - 3
  - ' L 54
  - 3
  - QQJA 0
  - % acomoon • AT
  - 22-point Javanese (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 597.— Sundanese ; Javanese character.
  - of about thirty letters, most of which have two forms, according as the character comes on or below the line ; there are also five vowels for use separately, and twelve accents representing vowels, some used above the line, some on the line, and some below the line ; added to this there are about 120 ligatures. The large number of sorts and the fact that practically there are three lines to be set, makes the composition of Javanese a very complicated matter. The three lines in the aggregate are equivalent to a very large body on account of the great length of the descending sorts and the height of the accents.
  - In the island of Sumatra the Batta character is used, an example of which is shown in fig. 598.
- p.558 - vue 726/901
- - ANCIENT AND MODERN SCRIPTS AND THEIR USES. 559
  - V* • U- O 6 Co S - C 6,0- > G0% e
  - 10-point Batta (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 598.—Batta.
  - In the island of Celebes the Bugi character is used for that language and also for Makassar. The alphabet consists of twenty-three letters and five accents for vowel sounds ; two of these are placed before and after the tters respectively, one is placed below, and two are placed above ; the
  - 14-point Bugi (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 599.—Bugi.
  - number of sorts required for a fount is, therefore, not far short of a undred. An example of Bugi is shown in fig. 599.
  - In the Philippines a special character is used, known as Bisaya, or Visaya, of which an example is shown in fig. 600.
  - Vrc ey 5 x= = n 351 xFFSx % xY
  - 23 1 Y10 3EY A RY F06 I Sys A xY co3
  - • • •• ••
  - Sonos Yx5 1351 xoEY syVseyu
  - Y8313-3 1 3 F3V5Y =* 1 YU3 eY YxS aisvs
  - 18-point Bisaya (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 600.—Bisaya or Visaya.
  - fo Passing from the Pacific to North America, a special alphabet was made Or Cherokee, an example of which is given in fig. 601 ; this was, however,
  - SYVu sawa 2, sawac P40J SGVIT. Croc. PR ese-
  - AAT. Dh RG. OnsTOv oLO-BRET, eave sawa Fh§f@Jo.
  - VUR oSTOtBJ Oibaa TS. JPRviaz S@YSET,00v,
  - MHSMF KEsy. De LOJ OLAfa PR ©Joy no-wwo-y,
  - 10-point Cherokee (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 601.—Cherokee.
- p.559 - vue 727/901
- - O
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - found to be cumbrous and inconvenient. Cherokee, as a living language, is alluded to by Theodore Roosevelt in his account of a journey up the Paraguay, published in the “ Daily Telegraph ” of 23 March, 1914 ; in this the late President of the United States of America compares a daily paper published at Asuncion with parallel columns of Spanish and Guarani to a journal in the State of Oklahoma, " published in English and in the tongue which the extraordinary Cherokee Chief, Seguoia, a veritable Cadmus, made a literary language.”
  - The agglutinative languages of the Red Indian and allied tribes are now, in many instances, represented by the syllabic character, which has
  - h& - PC, UT 0 C/C DCUAx U <Ur b BD
  - TU, CBA UT UCB6 4cUn -900 H/x nn UA C/ DNU PC NO. Bx No Tb DAAU CDA DVB 48-DU, 49/ ib 4A/U, © DAT MOUx C/ Tb 94
  - 14-point Chippewyan (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 602.—Chippewyan.
  - several variations, two examples of which are shown in figs. 602 and 603. The first of these, a fount of which consists of about forty-nine sorts, is used
  - dcc P&sn <n° &d~D-x <noDo BaDbex AeLa Aodode, bar A$_ Pax Nor Abi<Ao-b Do-G/Ar-AJx ASAcb A/Lr-~8-<p, /%_ D<je ASAcATeN AALreSArisnrox DAA5~Db_- ADAC, Abeni-
  - 14 point Eskimo (set by Wm. Clowes 6 Sons).
  - Fig. 603.—Eskimo or Innuit.
  - for Blackfoot Indian, Chippewyan, Slave, and Tinne or Tenni, while the other serves for Cree both eastern and western, Ojibbeway, and Eskimo or Innuit-
  - A very ingenious universal alphabet, which may be termed the CV alphabet, consisting of two character components, internal and external, arranged at different angles of rotation, has been proposed by Prof-Robert H. Smith. The two signs C and V are rotated through eight post tions, advancing by 45° from each other, and represent the sixteen vowels and diphthongs of this alphabet. The central character V, used in com-binations with C to represent consonants, occupies a distinctive inclination for each group of four combinations, in which the external character C 15 rotated through 90° for each of the four sorts in succession ; thus one group represents the labial sounds, another the dental another the sibilant.
- p.560 - vue 728/901
- - PROPOSED NEW ALPHABETS.
  - 561
  - and so on. There are eight groups of four letters each, or thirty-two Consonants in all. The total alphabet consists of forty-eight sorts, and their relation to each other is shown in fig. 604. All of these sorts come
  - — D
  - (V
  - Ts
  - 19
  - V
  - da
  - u
  - FIG. 604.—C V or compass alphabet; relationship of characters.
  - the em quad. An example of matter set in this character, named Pass alphabet by the inventor, is given in fig. 605.
  - II-point compass.
  - FIG. 605.—CV or compass type.
  - 2 0
- p.561 - vue 729/901
- - 0 O 10
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Many further special character systems have been suggested, one of which is a system of universal syllabics, by which it has been proposed to represent the syllables of any languages, with their proper sound values.
  - An example of a few lines of " The Lord’s Prayer ” set in this character is given in fig. 606, which is taken—as are most of the other examples ale saga ai a if /exf, /aloe si ya
  - Our Father, which art - in heaven, hallowed be thy Kes. ga cirpas cas. ja ail si paf i/
  - name. Thy kingdom come, Thy will be done in ey as i? is if jesf. cir as gis ge ave
  - earth, at it is in heaven. Give us this day our pell 3302, ah seciy as ale azessazes as
  - daily bread. And forgive us our trespasses as
  - 18-point universal syllabics (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 606.—Universal syllabics.
  - in this chapter, except where otherwise stated—from " The Lord’s Prayer in Five Hundred Languages,” published by Wm. Clowes & Sons, Ltd., to whom the authors are indebted, with but one or two exceptions, for the specimens here shown, and for much valuable and reliable information.
  - Music Composition.
  - In the description of the composition of some of the foreign characters such as arabic, devanagari, and Javanese, allusion has been made to the necessity of composing simultaneously with two or even with three bodies. The difficulty which occurs in these founts, however, is small in comparison with that found in the composition of music. The appearance of music, with its two staves, each of five lines, and notes capable of falling either on the line or in the space between two adjacent lines, or again isolated between or outside the staves, makes it immediately apparent that many of the signs used must be built up of several component parts. Not only is the composition rendered difficult for the reasons already given, but also on account of the various additions which are made to give value to the notes, and the necessity for treating the length as a measure of time: in fact, the composition of music requires skill much greater than that necessary for the composition of tabular work or the even more difficult arrangement of pedigrees and genealogies. Music composition is a craft so difficult and complicated that it stands in a class by itself, which is only approach® in its difficulties by the composition of complex mathematical formulae-
  - A fount for music comprises some 255 sorts, ranging from the treble and base clefs, which are cast in one piece with the bars, the various
- p.562 - vue 730/901
- - MUSIC.
  - 5^
  - signs for sharps, flats, and naturals, the black and white note-heads with their up and down ties, hooks for grace-notes, note stems, rests, bars, slurs, binds, time-marks, and many other peculiar and special marks. The various characters which go to form a short fount of music type are
  - rit.
  - thril - ling each child, each child in rip - pling mirth,
  - ach - ing, that still, still sees the hid - den sun.
  - car - ing for moan, for moan and ire of life.
  - m i«i
  - Diamond music (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - FIG. 607.—Music.
  - Shown in fig 89, p 102. An example of music as composed typographically 1 given in fig. 607.
  - js An excellent description of the method adopted in music composition given by De Vinne in his work on " Modern Methods of Book Compo-
  - sition.”
  - Gregorian music, the invention of which is attributed to St. Gregory, which is used for chanting, has a much simpler notation. A similar
  - Bourgeois plain-song (set by Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - Fig. 608.—Plain-song.
  - DIgm of notation, which also has a single stave of four lines, is known as tabusons- This form of musical composition is as simple as ordinary true ar work, and it does not require the highly specialized skill of the abou music-compositor. The Gregorian or plain-song fount comprises 127 sorts; an example of plain-song is shown in fig. 608.
- p.563 - vue 731/901
- - 564 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Still more simple than the plain-song is the tonic sol-fa music, in which no stave is used, the notes being replaced by letters. This form of composition can be carried out by any compositor accustomed to tabular work.
  - f :m In :r
  - d :d Id :
  - 1 :s Is :s
  - r :MjlS) :s.
  - s :-.s If :m
  - Ir:d d :- It :—m :- f :-l-:n
  - 8
  - E BE
  - 3 E
  - 3
  - o —
  - 03 3%
  - CP
  - Fs U TT H st T T
  - S, :S, IC :t.delr :r sf : Is :-- se,:-
  - - E0 E EI .. *: olcle
  - If :d 1
  - 11, :1
  - If :f (
  - If, :r,)
  - Brevier sol-fa (set by Wm. Clowes 6 Sons).
  - FIG. 609.—Tonic sol-fa.
  - The number of sorts used is comparatively small, but comprises some logo-types and a peculiar form of lower-case m particular to this usage; this appears in the example, fig. 609.
- p.564 - vue 732/901
- - CHAPTER XXXVI.
  - CONCLUSION.
  - “Let us hear the conclusion of the whole matter.
  - Ecclesiastes.
  - id-point antique roman (Stephenson, Blake & Co.).
  - IN one of the early chapters of this work the authors have briefly touched upon the history of the art which culminates in the production of the printing-surface, and they have considered the gradual development of the production of a type from its first casting from crude wooden matrices, varied occasionally by its casting from matrices of lead or other soft metal, to its final Casting from copper, bronze, nickel or steel. They have discussed the first rough mechanical means for making these matrices, and the various early apparatus connected with them and their product, and have described the latest developments, showing the extremely narrow margin of error allowable in modern practice in every matter connected with the production of the type surface, the mechanisms used in the industry being perhaps among the highest developments of accurate human constructive effort. In this final chapter, therefore, a brief chronological account of the earlier foundries is not out of place. It is not very easy to throw much light on primitive foundry methods ; considerable secrecy accompanied at least this portion of the operations of the first printers, who were generally their own typefounders, and even to-day, the spirit of secretiveness as to ways and means of achieving certain results has not died out. There is no evidence to show whether Caxton was, or was not, the first typefounder in England as well as the father of printing, but there is every probability that his first two founts were cast for him at Bruges, and that the second of these was brought over by him to Westminster.
  - It is stated that the first allusion in any book to English typefounders appears in Archbishop Parker’s Preface to Asser’s " Elfredi Regis Res Gesta" (The Chronicles of King Alfred), London, 1574. It is here stated: lam vero cum Dayus Typographus primus (6 omnium certb quod sciam Solus) has formas an incident: facile qua Saxonicis literis perscripta sunt, "sdem typis diuulgabuntur.” The translation of which, given by Talbot Baines Reed, is as follows: " And inasmuch as Day, the printer, is the
  - 565
- p.565 - vue 733/901
- - 566 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - first (and, indeed, as far as I know, the only one) who has cut the letters in metal; what things have been written in Saxon characters will be easily published in the same type.” It is hence presumable that John Day was only one typefounder among others, and that therefore the art of type* founding, or at least of type production, was by no means a novel one. Day printed from about 1546 to 1584 ; the work quoted from presents the curious feature that the text of the book itself, while in the Latin language, is in Saxon characters ; a table is appended to the preface giving the equivalents of each character. It was not till about the beginning of the seventeenth century that typefounding and printing were separated from each other. Typefounding then began to be exercised as a trade by itself, and was divided into the several branches of punch-cutting, casting, and dressing-The workers in these various branches were indiscriminately called letter-founders, though few of them could perform the whole work themselves, or at least few of them did so.
  - In 1637 a decree was passed " that there shall be foure Founders of letters for printing, and no more allowed, . . .” The fact of the issuing of this regulation shows that typefounding had become by now a distinct trade in London, and that it was under rigid Government protection and supervision. The four founders named under this decree were : John Grismand, Thomas Wright, Arthur Nichols, and Alexander Fifield, all of whom cast from matrices obtained from Holland, no attempt having been made, so far as can be ascertained, to recognize original founders. These restraints on type-founders were taken away altogether, with those on printers, by the dissolution of the Court of Star Chamber on 3 November, 1640, on the assembly of the Long Parliament.
  - In 1662 an Act more burdensome than the Star Chamber decree of 1637 was passed, namely, 13-14 Charles II, by which the number of master founders was again reduced to four. This restriction, with some slight alterations, continued in force till 1693, when it expired. There must have been some connivance or virtual relaxation of the rules in the later years of its continuance before it expired, for notwithstanding these restraints, Moxon, writing in 1683, states that the " number of Founders and Printers be grown very many.” In 1669 was issued the first known dated type-specimen sheet, namely, " Proves of Several Sorts of Letter cast by Joseph Moxon,” though, according to Reed, a specimen consisting of a few lines only was specially cut, and privately dedicated to the King four years earlier. In 1685 the appointment of typefounders was revived by James II for seven years and extended for one more. The Act expired in 1693 and this appointment was not afterwards renewed.
  - The following quotations from Talbot Baines Reed’s beautiful un accurate work," A History of the Old English Letter Foundries,” are not without interest as showing in a practical manner the usual disregar. Englishmen have for the letter of the law when it does not tally with the
  - own convenience.
- p.566 - vue 734/901
- - CONCLUSION.
  - 5^7
  - Notwithstanding this liberty, the number of founders during the eighteenth century appears rarely to have exceeded the figure prescribed Dy the Star Chamber Decree of 1637, and occasionally to have been less.
  - One more attempt was made in the closing days of the eighteenth century to control the freedom of the press by law. There is something almost grotesque in the efforts made by legislators in 1799 to refit, on a ml-grown and invincible press, the worn-out shackles by which the tularts had tried to curtail the growth of its childhood ; and the Act of the 39th George III, cap. 79, in so far as it deals with printing, will always remain one of the surprises, as well as one of the disgraces, of the Statute-°ok. Among its worst provisions, the following affect letter-founders and etter-founding :—
  - t Sec. 23 ordains that no one, under penalty of £20, shall be allowed Possess or use a printing-press or types for printing, without giving notice thereof to a Clerk of the Peace, and obtaining from him a certificate 0 that effect.
  - t Sec. 33 provides that any Justice of the Peace may issue a warrant search any premises, and seize and take away any press or printing-types not duly certificated.
  - The following sections we give in full:—
  - Sec. 25. ‘That from and after the Expiration of Forty Days after the passing of this Act, every Person carrying on the Business of a Letter Founder or Maker or Seller of Types for Printing or of Printing Presses, shall cause Notice of his or her Intention to carry on such Business to be delivered to the Clerk of the Peace of the . . . Place where such Person shall propose to carry on such Business, or his Deputy in the Form prescribed in the Schedule of this Act annexed. And such Clerk of the Peace or his Deputy shall, and he is hereby authorized and required thereupon to grant a Certificate in the Form also prescribed in the said Schedule, for which such Clerk of the Peace or his Deputy shall receive a Fee of One Shilling and no more, and shall file such Notice and transmit an attested Copy thereof to one of his Majesty’s Principal Secretaries of State ; and every Person who shall, after the expiration of the said Forty Days, carry on such Business, or make or sell any Type for Printing, or Printing Press, without having given such Notice, and obtained such Certificate, shall forfeit and lose the Sum of Twenty Pounds.’
  - “Sec. 26. ‘And be it further enacted, That every Person who shall sell Types for Printing, or Printing Presses as aforesaid, shall keep a Fair Account in Writing of all Persons to whom such Types or Presses shall be sold, and shall produce such Accounts to any Justice of the Peace who shall require the
- p.567 - vue 735/901
- - 568
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES
  - same; And if such Person shall neglect to keep such Account, or shall refuse to produce the same to any such Justice, on demand in Writing to inspect the same, such Person shall forfeit and lose, for such offence, the Sum of Twenty Pounds.’
  - " Such was the law with regard to typefounding at the time when the widows of the two Caslons were struggling to revive their then ancient business, when Vincent Figgins was building up his new foundry, and Edmund Fry, Caslon III and Wilson were busily occupied in cutting their modern Romans to suit the new fashion. And such the law remained nominally until the year 1869, just upon four centuries after the introduction of the Art into this country. It is probable that, during the first few disturbed years of its existence, the Act may have been enforced, that certificates may have been registered, and accounts dutifully furnished. But its provisions appear very soon to have fallen into contempt, and certainly, as far as we can ascertain, failed to trouble the peace of any British letter-founder.”
  - Note.—“ The clauses relating to printers and typefounders were repealed by the 32 and 33 Vict., cap. 24: An Act to Repeal certain enactments relating to Newspapers, Pamphlets, and other Publications, and to Printers, Type-founders, and Reading Rooms. [12 July, 1869.]”
  - About 1667 Dr. John Fell presented his University with “ a complete typefoundry, consisting of the punches and matrices of twenty founts of Roman, Italic, Orientals, Saxons, Black and other letter, besides moulds and all the apparatus and utensils necessary for a complete printing office.
  - " The extent of this noble gift, the importance of which can only be estimated by recalling the low condition of letter-founding in England at the time, will best appear ...” [if the Inventory published by the University in 1695 be consulted.]
  - " Dr. Fell supplemented this gift by a further signal service, which is thus recorded by Bagford :—
  - The good Bishop provided from Holland the choicest Puncheons, Matrices, etc., with all manner of Types that could be had, as also a Letter Founder, a Dutchman by Birth, who had served the States in the same quality at Batavia, in the East Indies. He was an excellent workman, and succeeded by his son, who has been since succeeded by Mr-Andrews.’”
  - In 1677, according to Talbot Baines Reed, the University press was further enriched by another important gift of type and matrices presented by Francis Junius, the son of Francis Junius, the theologist, of Heidelberg. These comprised punches and matrices of founts of Gothic, Runic, Danish, Icelandic, Anglo-Saxon, Greek, Roman, Italic, Black-letter, and Swedish.
- p.568 - vue 736/901
- - CONCLUSION. 569
  - " The combined gifts of Dr. Fell and Francis Junius laid the foundation of the Oxford University foundry as it now exists.
  - At this period the types made in England were very coarse, and we were far surpassed by the Dutch, from whom, indeed, our founders often Purchased matrices; but even with the help of the Dutch matrices, they could not cast so well as the Dutch themselves. All specimens of type at this period were printed on sheets as a broadside, and several, both English and Dutch, are in the miscellaneous collection of John Bagford in the British Museum.
  - The eighteenth century witnessed the end of the last of the old school of typefounders, (John) James II, who died in 1772, and the rise of the first of the new race, (William) Caslon I. Despite the restrictive care of the Govern-ment during the previous century, the typefounders of Holland and Flanders, as has been stated, supplied English printers with better types than native art could produce, and this state of things continued up to the establishment of the first Caslon foundry. Edward Rowe Mores, a learned and eccentric antiquary and scholar, was the historian of early typefounding, and his
  - Dissertation upon English Typographical Founders and Founderies was Published in or about the year 1779, after his death. He was born in 1729 at Tunstall in Kent and died in 1778 at Low Leyton, and thus did not live to see the publication of his work. He was in possession of nearly ah the early English matrices and moulds. These were sold by auction in 1779, and it is not known what has become of them. In or about the year 1750 a foundry was established by Baskerville at Birmingham, but it is doubtful whether any specimen-book of this foundry was ever issued. The plant was ultimately sold to Beaumarchais and removed to Paris, where it was probably absorbed by one of the large Parisian foundries.
  - About the middle of the eighteenth century there were working con-temporaneously John Baskerville at Birmingham, the Caslons in London, and Alexander Wilson at St. Andrews, Scotland.
  - Alexander Wilson, Professor of Astronomy to Glasgow University, with John Baine, started, at St. Andrews, the first foundry in Scotland, in 1742. In 1744, they removed to Camlachie, and started the Glasgow foundry. In 1747 Baine went to Dublin and started a branch foundry in that city. He returned to Scotland in 1749, dissolved partnership with Wilson and went to America, where he died in 1790. In 1749 Wilson, who had remained in Glasgow, was carrying on his foundry alone, and there he produced some of the finest founts of type ever cut, faces which, in the opinion of most competent judges in many quarters, were unsurpassed in some respects by even the best productions of Caslon himself.
  - On the death of Wilson the Glasgow foundry was carried on by his two sons. In 1830 it descended to the grandsons of the founder, Alexander Wilson and Patrick Wilson, who established a branch at Edinburgh in 1832 and transferred their Glasgow business to London in 1834; in 1845 the plant of these foundries was dispersed by sale to various founders.
- p.569 - vue 737/901
- - 570
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Some time before 1809 the firm of Miller and Richard was started in Edinburgh by Miller, a typefounder, who had been employed by Alexander Wilson & Son of Glasgow. The first specimen book of this firm was issued in 1809.
  - William Caslon, born in 1692 and died in 1766, the most celebrated figure in connexion with type production in the history of the art in England, is reputed to have cut his first punches as early as 1716; he ultimately brought the art to a perfection previously unattained in England, and rendered the English printers independent of the Dutch punch-cutters and founders from whom it is admitted they had previously obtained all their best founts. The authors have seen it stated that his punches are in use to the present day.
  - With regard to the present principal English typefounders, it is worthy of remark that practically all of them have sprung from William Caslon, his apprentices or his successors. This being the case, it is hardly necessary to give any further historic reference to firms that are still in existence. Moreover, with the exception of the central stem to which all their pedigrees can be traced back, their individual pedigrees are of such recent date that their history is practically a matter of contemporary record.
  - Those who are interested in the history of the early English type-founders can find everything of interest in connexion with them, their lives and work in the work of Talbot Baines Reed, " A History of the Old English Letter Foundries,” London, 1887, to whose careful and critical work in the " untrodden bypaths of English typographical history " the authors here render their fullest measure of indebtedness and appre-ciation.
  - One of the difficulties in writing this book—a difficulty already referred to by the authors in their preface—has been the difficulty of omission. Endless points of importance as well as of great interest have sprung up during the course of its production, which they have been obliged to exclude as not strictly bearing upon the production of a typographical printing-surface though having close connexion with it. They therefore again apologize for any apparent omission, and again state not only their readiness to hear any suggestion, but their willingness to profit by it, should a reader find any subject connected with the production of the printing' surface, or some matter sufficiently closely allied to and bound up with it, that has not been included in the pages of this work.
  - It is now, perhaps, just beginning to be felt that a printing-surface may not always be necessary as one of the processes preliminary to the multiplication and spread of human ideas. This question of the future is considered a little further on.
  - With regard to the production of the modern typographical printing' surface—already so largely created by mechanical means, such as some of the various apparatus described in the work—it does not appear probable
- p.570 - vue 738/901
- - CONCLUSION. 571
  - to the authors that the old method of casting single type and composing by band will ever be entirely superseded by machine-composition ; the bulk of display work and a large portion of scientific works cannot be so treated on account of the great variety of sizes of type required on the one hand, and the great variety of sorts required on the other. In the case of most daily newspapers the whole of the ordinary matter, with much of the small-type advertising, is set in the form of slugs, the only exceptions being those advertisements supplied in the form of electro-blocks and that portion of the display advertisement matter which cannot profitably be set up on the machine. One or two of the high-class daily journals are using loose-type machines, and several newspapers within the authors knowledge are still composed by means of a supply of cast type used cold with a simple typesetter.
  - The authors have frequently had occasion to notice the poor results obtained by the mixture of old with new type; this result is, however, quite avoidable by the use of composing machines and fresh type cast either in the form of slugs or in that of individual type. For the period when The Times ” was supplied for each issue with fresh loose type from the Wicks machine, that journal had, in the authors’ opinion, the cleanest appearance of any printed sheet of the kind. Probably the advent of cheap accurate type with a simple composing machine and a thoroughly Practical automatic line-justifier would enable such a result to be obtained in the future even in face of the competition of the slug and other machines.
  - The biggest question affecting such a scheme as that suggested is that of plant. If there were only three widths of faces, condensed, standard, and extended, for each body, there would still be some twenty-one type-moulds and seven space-moulds required for ordinary work, from nonpareil to pica; but there are modern and old-style and other varieties of face required which must be suitably distinguished from each other by a different arrangement of nicks, so that, in all, the number of moulds may soon exceed a hundred and the matrices will run to many thousands. Apart from the Capital outlay on these, there would be the work of originating faces, so that a considerable amount of time, as well as money, would have to be spent before achieving any tangible result.
  - A very large quantity of high-class work for the better weekly periodicals, for magazines, for novels and for text-books is still being set by hand, but it is probable that most of this work also will be performed by machines in the near future because they give a better and more regular Product. One word of caution, however, is offered by the authors to those who think of competing in the field covered by these machines. Their details are so complex and the difficulties met with in working them out are so numerous that the time for which a patent is granted may easily be in greater part, if not altogether, absorbed in experiment before a commercial result is obtained. The outlay of both time and money must necessarily be very large before any real improvement can be made.
- p.571 - vue 739/901
- - 572
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - In conclusion, it may be of interest to record a conservative estimate of the approximate number of machines of the two most important classes in use at the present time :—
  - Linotype machines .... about 33,000
  - Monoline machines ....,, 2,000
  - Typograph machines ....,, 4,000
  - Monotype machines ....,, 5,000
  - Total about . . 44,000
  - These machines alone represent a capital outlay of over £20,000,000, apart from the sum invested in the works for producing them and their accessories.
  - Some 30,000 of these machines are at work in the United Kingdom, America, and other English-speaking countries, while the remainder are mainly used for other European languages, or languages current somewhere in Europe, amongst them being French, German, Dutch, Italian, Spanish, Danish, Norwegian, Swedish, Bohemian, Russian, Roumanian, Polish, Slavonic, Hungarian, Hebrew, Yiddish, and Arabic.
  - When one regards the wonderful development of the composing machine that has taken place in the last few years, it is very hard indeed to set bounds to its future, especially when one considers the immense amount of technical skill of a superexcellent quality that is being combined with the best brain-work in this department of human activity.
  - The statement that it is probable that the use of loose type cast separately and then composed, will never go out, may itself have to be modified in view of some of the developments that are taking place. A machine of the future —and such machines are not even now unthought of—may be capable of setting up any advertisement ever likely to be demanded, and, moreover, when the number of copies is sufficiently great to warrant the outlay for matrices, to be capable, at least to a certain extent, of producing illustrated advertisement matter.
  - Abandoning, however, any idea of entry into the field of advertisement, and returning to the question of the production of a printing-surface of plain straightforward matter, it is of interest to see what is in the mind of capable and thoughtful men.
  - The opinion of an authority like John S. Thompson whose experience in the field of composing machines, both practical and theoretical, is so wide, and not only wide but deep, must always be regarded with respect; and aS it is his carefully considered pronouncement that the machine of the future will unquestionably be one which casts, sets, and justifies single type in one machine and with but one attendant, and in one operation of casting, it is not for the authors to dispute it, as it coincides entirely with their own opinion. The distinguished authority they have quoted adds that such a machine would not only be a wonderful advance in every way, but that it would find
- p.572 - vue 740/901
- - CONCLUSION.
  - 573
  - a fallow field notwithstanding the very large number of typesetting machines of various kinds that are already in use throughout the world. Such a machine, casting its whole line of justified, separate, and loose type in one operation, and working with the absolute ease, swiftness, and precision of, SaY, an ordinary Linotype, especially if at the will of the operator it can cast either a slug, or a line of loose type perfectly justified and delivered, as the slug, to galley, has certainly a very ready welcome awaiting it. What the machine will be when it has had, like the Linotype, a score or two of years of the keenest engineering ability, specializing in that particular line, devoted to its improvement, is hard to tell. Possibly the glorious simplicity of the compositor and a pair of cases previously referred to in this work, may give place to a machine which will be capable, at the touch of an operator, of casting any type from 5 to 72-point, and not only setting it up in line and justifying it, but setting it up in any form desired for advertisement or display.
  - The idea, and it is one which it is not impossible to carry out, has occurred to the authors, of a machine whereby in answer to a system of spelling into a form of telephone receiver, of particular sounds, a slug or line of type could be Produced as it is to-day produced where the letters on the keyboard have been touched by the fingers of the operator. It is, however, unlikely that such a method would be as rapid as the operation of a keyboard.
  - Photography, moreover, though so far it has not gained any real foothold within the portals of typography, is yet knocking at the door. It certainly has a future for purposes of illustration in conjunction with sound, for telephones, phonographs, and similar instruments will be accompanied by pictures, probably thrown on to a ground-glass screen beside them or into some form of stereoscopic instrument, and mechanical speech together with these pictures accurately representing facts, scenes from nature, or mundane occurrences fixed in momentary appearance or represented in continuous action will largely take the place of the present newspaper. From the carefully synchronized cinematograph worked in Combination with a gramophone or auxetophone at music-halls and picture palaces to appliances ready for immediate use—as are the telephone and dictaphone—the step, experience tells us, is not a long one.
  - ft may also be as well to recollect, even in a work devoted to the echanism and apparatus for the production of a typographical printing-surface, that it is not altogether outside the bounds of possibility that in the future the printing-surface itself, such as the authors have considered It, may cease to exist except if we are to consider as a typographical print-n-surface one which is only an automatic record of sound itself and not a Combination of symbols conventionally and arbitrarily arranged and the reading of whose conventional and arbitrary meaning we translate into sound. It is possible in the not-far-off future that in civilized centres Practically almost all printed matter not required to be put by and used r reference, will be done away with, and its place taken by pages that
- p.573 - vue 741/901
- - 574
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - talk. It is quite probable that the future citizens of civilization will be able to turn on any portion of their morning paper at the breakfast table and listen to it as comfortably and with as little wonder as we to-day listen to the marvel of the electrophone.
  - This idea, which has probably occurred to many and possibly been often expressed in writing before, is only an extension of what has already taken place with regard to sermons, speeches, musical production of all kinds, and in connexion with the plays and performances of the legitimate stage and the variety theatre. Illustrations, as has been said, will probably accompany sound, and in addition to private lines and private tapping of sources of news, great public newspapers will display their changing notifications of contents and vivid advertisements to crowds too accustomed to marvels to wonder at the miracles that form a part of the ordinary affairs of their daily life.
  - The bare sides of great buildings and hoardings are at present clothed with advertisement in a comparatively simple manner ; the uses to which they will be put in the times to come, if we base our conjectures on the changes witnessed in the past few years, would certainly appear to us as astounding, were we suddenly to see them to-day.
  - These things, however, for the future. Not yet have we “ ransacked the ages, spoiled the climes,” not yet have we arrived at our full inheritance, nor will we ever do so; constant progress is the law of life, and man must progress unless some great cataclysm cuts off the race, leaving, maybe, but a few pairs to repeople under changed conditions, a changed
  - earth !
- p.574 - vue 742/901
- - APPENDIX I.
  - BIBLIOGRAPHY.
  - " Books are indeed like friends, but the volumes in a man’s technical library are more; they are not only friends, but dear counsellors and advisers, helpers upon whose aid and wisdom a man can rely; their presence makes him rich ; their loss no weight of gold can replace ; they are partners whose mouths speak for him with ‘ the adversary at the gate.’ ”
  - John Philips. Wanderings in the World of Science.
  - 9-point Monotype (Wm. Clowes & Sons).
  - IN the very short bibliography that follows, there have only been in-ctuded books which treat directly or indirectly of the production of POgraphical printing-surfaces either as their sole subject-matter, or as in Considerable part their subject-matter. The work of the authors being one on the production of the typographical printing-surface, they have as far as possible kept themselves within the terms of their reference, and it is surprising how very small is the number of books which come within it, even in Part. Had their book been one on printing, their bibliography would have run to scores of pages. A small book-case will easily contain all the books on YPOgraphical printing-surfaces ; quite a large library would be required to give elf room to books on the more frequently treated subject of printing or the of dealing with the typographical surface after that surface has been produced.
  - Moxon, Joseph. Mechanick Exercises. 1683.
  - Fournier, Pierre Simon (le jeune). Manuel Typographique. 1764.
  - Mores, Rev. Edward Rowe. A Dissertation upon English Typographical Founders and Founderies. 1778.
  - Johnson, J. Typographia. London, 1824.
  - Hansard, T. C. Typographia. London, 1825.
  - Savage, William. A Dictionary of the Art of Printing. London, 1841.
  - Hart, C. Machinery for Composing and Distributing Type; Journal of the Society of Arts, Vol. 10. 1862.
  - Lefevre, T. Guide Pratique du Compositeur, 2 vols. Paris, 1880.
  - Waldow, A. Illustriertes Worterbuch der graphischen Kunste. Leipzig, 1886.
  - MacKellar, Thomas. A Manual of Typography. Philadelphia, 1887.
  - Reed, Talbot Baines. A History of the Old English Letter Foundries. London, 1887.
  - Southward, J. Type Composing Machines of the Past, Present, and Future. London, 1890.
  - 575
- p.575 - vue 743/901
- - 0 in
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - Southward, J. Machines for Composing Letterpress Printing Surfaces;
  - Journal of the Society of Arts. London, 1895.
  - Southward, J. Modern Printing, 4 vols. London, 1898.
  - Landi, S. Tipografia, 2 vols. Milan, 1892-1896.
  - Leclerc, E. Typographie (Manuel Roret). Paris, 1897.
  - Wilson, F. I. F. Stereotyping and Electrotyping. London, 1898.
  - Oldfield, A. Practical Manual of Typography. London, n.d. (about 1900).
  - De Vinne, Theodore Low. The Practice of Typography. Vol. I : Plain Printing Types. New York, 1900.
  - Hermann, C. Geschichte der Setzmaschine und ihre Entwickelung bis auf die heutige Zeit. Vienna, 1900.
  - Thompson, J. S. The Mechanism of the Linotype. Chicago, 1902.
  - Fournier, Henri. Traite de la Typographie. 4th ed. Paris, 1903.
  - Thompson, J. S. History of Composing Machines. Chicago, 1904.
  - Sir Henry Bessemer, F.R.S. An Autobiography. Published by “ Engineering,” London, 1905.
  - Legros, L. A. Typecasting and Composing Machinery; Proceedings of the Institution of Mechanical Engineers. London, Dec. 1908.
  - For short papers in the engineering press see The Engineering Index, Vol. IIJ, 1896-1900, Vol. IV, 1901-1905, et seq., under Typefounding and Typesetting Machines; such publications as The British Printer, The Caxton Magazine, The American Printer, The Inland Printer, The International Printer, Deutscher Buch- und Steindrucker, etc., the 40,000th number of The Times (10 Sept. 1912), and also the article on Typography in the Encyclopedia Britannica.
- p.576 - vue 744/901
- - APPENDIX II.
  - BRITISH AND AMERICAN PATENTS RELATING TO THE PREPARATION OF THE TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACE, TOGETHER WITH A BRIEF NOTE ON EACH PATENT.
  - It is not a bad definition of man to describe him as a tool-making animal. His earliest contrivances to support uncivilized life, were tools of the simplest and rudest construction. His latest achievements in the substitution of machinery, not merely for the skill of the human hand, but for the relief of the human intellect, are founded on the use of tools of a still higher order.”
  - Ninth Bridgewater Treatise. Charles Babbage.
  - 10-point booklet.
  - Sometimes, when we ponder over the fate of inventors, we give way to despairing reflection on the wastefulness of genius, or else we deplore the melancholy contrast between intelligence at its finest and material prosperity at its lowest. But we must not seek to measure spirits touched to fine issues in commercial scales of loss and gain. A man’s life does not depend on the abundance of the Aings he possesses, nor yet does humanity advance solely on lines I physical comfort and ease. A great thought never dies. Ideas govern the world.”
  - Daily Telegraph : leading article on the death of Charles Tellier.
  - 9-point old-style.
  - T their preface to this work, reference has been made to the magnitude 6 task undertaken by the authors in the endeavour to furnish a theipete and reliable list of patents bearing on the subject-matter of lr treatise, and issued by the patent offices of the two greatest Anglo-Saxon communities.
  - th ad they appreciated all the difficulties of the task they had set selves, it might possibly never have been attempted. The mere " real labour expended in handling books has been sufficient to lay
  - 577
  - 2 P
- p.577 - vue 745/901
- - CO m
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - the brickwork of an ideal home ; the time expended has been out of all proportion to that spent on other portions of the work, and the trouble and work involved have been both tedious and wearisome. The affair, however, has been fought through and carried, the authors hope, to an issue which, if not entirely satisfactory, is at least more nearly perfect with regard to the subjects of which it treats, than any other list or classification, national or private, known to them. The early patents them-selves are terribly incomplete and not classified. They have, however, been examined one by one, and so far as the subject-matter of this text-book is concerned, the authors do not think that anything of importance has been omitted.
  - One of the troubles they encountered in their quest was the arbitrary way in which early attempts at classification were made and abandoned by patent office authorities. A bad, but continuous and consistent classification would have been much better than different attempts at good ones. The system of combined dates and numbers is, in the authors’ opinion, not a wise one.
  - Our British Patent Office began well by numbering patents consecutively irrespective of the date. This system was continued until 1852, when, having reached, say, a total of fifteen thousand, some person, miserly of figures, changed the system to one of rotational numbers for each year. The result of this was that instead of the natural expansion of the numbers up to seven figures—a number of digits not likely to be exceeded before the end of this century, if retained—the simple system was abandoned and the other system introduced, which has the disadvantage of a varying number of digits in the reference and a larger total number once the numbers exceed ten thousand in any particular year. It is, moreover, more lengthy, because it is necessary to separate the year from the patent number by 8 comma or space, or by the word of, and it has led to that worst of all abominations, the introduction of abbreviation into the dates in the attempt to keep the references within workable limits.
  - The endeavour to include a complete list of American patents gave the authors a very large amount of extra work, and was the cause 0 much expense. As it stands, they cannot guarantee that the list 19 accurate, seeing that the information in regard to the early patents, before a superior system of registration and numbering was introduced, is as chaotic in the United States Patent Office as it is in our own. Much time has moreover, necessarily been spent in ransacking outside papers and possible sources of information, such, for example, as the records and lists of the Franklin Institute, and various official letters transmitted to and ordere to be laid upon the tables of the House of Representatives. The list here presented is believed to be as nearly complete as is now possible, and the difficulties of its compilation will be evident when it is mentioned that the authors are not aware of any American work in which there has been an exhaustive attempt to take the subject in hand. So far as they are
- p.578 - vue 746/901
- - PATENTS.
  - 579
  - aware, the best and most complete list given in an American book is that in Thompson’s " History of Composing Machines”: this list, how-ever, only starts from 1842, as regards United States patents, though four British patents of earlier date are quoted; even this list has been found by the authors to be frequently so far from correct that the total errors amount to an average of several on every page. This, perhaps, is not so much the fault of the compiler as that of his sources of information ; moreover, the scope of the writer’s work, as its title shows, is more limited in the matter with which it deals. These remarks are made in no captious spirit by the authors, for here, as elsewhere in their work, their fullest acknowledgments have been given to the value of J. S. Thompson's unique book, but are simply made for the sake of accuracy, an especially important matter when dealing with questions involved in patent matters.
  - With regard to the American enumeration, the early years are dependent on date and name alone for identification; in later years a system of numbering was introduced. Moreover, the sizes of the paper on which the patents themselves were printed, were not standard, and in some years they jumped up to such inconveniently large dimensions that they cannot now be kept upon the same shelves with the other volumes. It is remarkable, too, that about the time that the British Patent Office made its change f°r the worse, the United States Patent Office took a turn for the better, and adopted the system of consecutive numeration.
  - Another difficulty that arises when the attempt is made to produce a Continuous and consistent list of patents, whether British or American, is the continuous inconsistency of both patent offices. Patents are not Infrequently recorded under the names of the patent agents employed by the patentees, the names of the patentees being sometimes given in brackets after the patent agent’s name, the patent agent being sometimes quoted as "______for_____”. In the United States patents, the matter is still further complicated by the introduction of the names of assignees. The authors have in their lists throughout excluded the names of all but the actual patentees, with whom they are alone concerned, except in cases of those communicated patents in which the name of the actual inventor is not quoted. In dealing with British patents from the year 1852, it is necessary to remember both date and number for reference, in dealing with American patents, the number alone is sufficient after the year 1839.
  - ft is, however, a matter of considerable complexity to endeavour to trace any American patent back through its earlier stages of invention, when it is remembered that there is not only the actual number given to the patent when issued, that is to say, one of the numbers given in these lists, but the number of the application, the serial number, or even the number of a reissue, where such exists, each of which may be quoted indiscriminately by the patentee.
  - Patents should either be numbered when they are handed in, or
- p.579 - vue 747/901
- - 58o TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - numbered when they are issued. The British Patent Office in this respect has the best and simplest system, as it numbers its patents when they are handed in. The United States Patent Office, while professing to number its patents when they are issued, introduces a further complication by the use of the other numbers mentioned in the preceding paragraph. In the course of application the United States Patent Office often divides the patent applied for into different heads, and compels the patentee to take out different patents, all of which have the same root or application number; in one instance the authors came across a patent which had over fifty divisions.
  - Enough, however, has been said to give the reader unacquainted with the subject some idea of the difficulties which occur in any extended analysis of the patents of the two countries mentioned.
  - It may be observed that some of the earlier British specifications are annotated in the list at greater length than any of the later ones, the reason being that in these earlier patents, there is practical anticipation, or at least the germ of anticipation, of many of the greatest and most far-reaching inventions in the history of the printing-surface ; in fact, it would be diffi-cult to say what has not been anticipated, perhaps not definitely in law, but without doubt in imagination if not in actuality. This truth is very interesting, and will be plainly evident to any who take up the task of following and studying the labours of the early inventors, as has been done by the authors. In some few instances individual cases have received note and comment.
  - The authors of this work, in making the above statements, have no wish to appear dogmatic, but rather desire to call kindly attention to those always fertile and frequently great minds which have trod before them the fascinating but hard and thorny pathway of invention, and to render tardy homage and tardy justice to their fellow-men from whom in so many instances justice has been withheld and homage has been filched.
- p.580 - vue 748/901
- - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS OF BRITISH PATENTS RELATING TO THE PREPARATION OF THE TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACE.
  - The priority of British patents up to 1853 is determined by the consecutive Lumber; from 1853 by the application thus: 2216/1854.
  - When it has not been possible to the inventor’s agent is given in italics.
  - number and the year, usually written
  - find the name
  - of the inventor, that of
  - 6
  - 2
  - 888
  - 999
  - o
  - % or
  - 1617.
  - Rathburne, A., and Burges, R. To make, describe, carve, and grave in copper, brass, or other metal maps of the Cities of London, Westminster, York, Bristol, Norwich, Canterbury, Bath, of the Universities of Oxford and Cambridge, and of the castle of Windsor :. • and to imprint or cause them to be imprinted.
  - Hillyard, N. Printing likenesses. To make, grave, and imprint pictures and representations of members of the Royal Family.
  - 1767.
  - Fougt, H. “New and curious types... for the printing of music notes.”
  - 1771.
  - Moore, I., and Pine, W. “ Metal cases for holding type,” hand-stamp.
  - 1778.
  - Johnson, H. “ A method of printing with types or figures so connected as to prevent the possibility of error in all business where figures are used, particularly of taking down the numbers of blanks and prizes in the lottery. Performed by means of types of figures cast in a body so as at one impression to form any number or numbers, figure or figures, without being liable to the usual errors, of misplacing, inverting, or substituting . . . said types may be made of iron, lead, brass, copper, or other metal, and when used are placed in a frame in a common Printing press.” Stereotyping.
  - 1780. Johnson, H. "A method of casting and moulding types for the purpose of composing find printing by or with entire words, with Several words combined, with sentences and syllables and with figures combined, instead of the usual method of composing and printing with single letters, and of endering the use of the said types and Printing with the same easy and familiar athe most ordinary capacity, whereby ter species of printing may be executed n one-fourth part of the time in which ey have been usually executed and con-arguently at much less expense . . . and noh syllables and words are formed or
  - No.
  - moulded either by single letters cemented together in words with the same metal or else by forming matrices of such syllables and words and casting them therein.” Logotypes.
  - 1784.
  - 1431 Foulis, A., and Tillock, A. “A method of making plates for the purpose of printing by or with plates instead of the movable types commonly used . . . whereby a much greater degree of accuracy, correctness and elegance will be introduced in the publication of the works both of the ancient and modern authors than had hitherto been attained. Performed by making a plate or plates for a page or pages of any book and printing from these at the press instead of throwing off impressions from movable types as is usual. Forming moulds or matrices for the page or pages.” Stereotyping.
  - 1435 Arnold, S. “ Printing vocal and instrumental music of all kinds in a neater and more expeditious manner than has hitherto been used, all notes, characters, etc., used in music cast as types. Some notes cast together from two to six in one piece. The music is sometimes printed at once, sometimes at twice. The lines are sometimes cast with the notes, sometimes without the notes, this depending on the nature of the composition of the music.”
  - 1790.
  - 1766 Barclay, R. “ Making punches for matrices of printing types ; ” uses a natural fracture to prevent forgery.
  - 1792.
  - 1852 Wilson, G. Post and commercial time marker. Hand stamp or seal with rotatable disks engraved on flat face to stamp minute, hour, a.m. or p.m., day, month, and year ; settings effected by hand or by a ratchet in the case of the hour disk.
  - 1802.
  - 2620 Rusher, P. “Improvements in the form of type to render it more uniform; effected by reducing the width of capitals and abolishing descenders in the lower case.”
  - 581
- p.581 - vue 749/901
- - 582
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1806.
  - 2931 Berte, A. F. “A machine for casting or founding types, letters, and ornaments usually made use of in printing. . . . And that I do in preference form my vessel of the figure of a box, or closed receptacle having a pipe or tube rising out of the same, so that the pressure afforded by the statical action of the metal in the said pipe, or tube, shall produce the desired effect at the aperture or place of casting. Or otherwise I produce or increase the said pressure by the statical action of water, or any other fluid, which may be used by the well-known means to compress a body of air against the surface of the type-metal for the purpose aforesaid.”
  - 2977 Bramah, J. Improvements in the art of printing; a number of bored disks with letters, figures, or designs engraved or raised on the outer surface capable of being relatively rotated or arranged in different order on the spindle; applicable to all varieties of printing and proposed to be used for conversing machines or universal telegraphs " by which not only information may be conveyed but likewise ordinary conversation in any language may be carried on between persons stationed at hundreds or even thousands of miles distant, and that with incredible facility.”
  - 2979 White, E. A machine for casting or founding types, letters, spaces, and quadrats, and for casting a number of letters at a single cast . . . “and in or upon the face of the matrix bar. . . is a wide groove into which is fitted a metallic box or long cell capable of holding as many matrices as the machine will cast letters at a single cast.”
  - 1807.
  - 3033 Berte, A. F. Improvements in casting machines. The vertical tube is now fitted with a plug or piston made use of to expel the melted metal through the aperture described into the mould. Also describes a mould with four adjustable pieces. When adjusted, the type is to be ejected through the length of the mould, there being no nicks.
  - 1809.
  - 3194 Peek, J. Improvements in casting machines, and in hand moulds which are fitted with a lever to withdraw the matrix from the type.
  - 1810.
  - 3307 Stuart, P. Printing maps of countries, etc., on wood, metal or other substance, so that they may be thrown off in a common printing-press for books, newspapers, etc. Performed by engraving plates and printing from these typographically so that the outlines of maps, rivers, figures, words, etc., appear white on a black ground when printed.
  - 1811.
  - 3439 Caslon, W., Jr. Improvements in the register belonging to the mould for casting types.
  - 1812.
  - 3610 Caslon, W., Jr. Short-type with dovetail end; stands in two pieces each half the body in thickness for bringing up to height-to-paper, and enabling the type to be locked up.
  - 1813.
  - 3734 Naish, J. Improved method of making movable characters for composing names and professions.
  - No. 1814.
  - 3757 Bacon, R. M., and Donkin, B. Improvements in printing from types, blocks, or plates. Adapting and fixing the types, blocks, or plates upon a revolving axle so that the printing-surface assumes a prismatic figure.
  - 3845 Didot, A. F. Casting type of special section for script.
  - 1815.
  - 3897 Ridgway, J. Simultaneously casting and fixing metallic type on the surface o metallic cylinders or blocks, for printing on cotton or linen.
  - 1816.
  - 4064 Clayton, R. New method of preparing, making and finishing metal types, etc. Uses a punch driven into end-grain wood, well seasoned and baked, to obtain a matrix, for making successive casts in 3 readily fusible alloy.
  - 1818.
  - 4249 Applegath, A. Improvements in casting stereotype and other plates.
  - 1819.
  - 4404 Congreve, Sir Wm. Inlaying or combining different metals or other hard substances, compound plates for printing the backs of bank notes in two colours ; for preventing forgery.
  - 1820.
  - 4434 Brunel, M. I. Improvements in making stereotype-plates. Multiplying plates accelerating the printing of daily papers, uses a composition faced with paper whice is stripped off after a slight impression ha been made in the matrix, but before th final impression is made. Casts under pressure of compressed air. Cools by 1 jecting water. “ Having the advantage chamber, which admits of being hermetically closed, I can make use of it to obtain a vacuum, a method which has been, understand, practised by others, but not 11 connection with nor immediately follow® by the expansive power of condensed which is productive of the best effect, any which, when coupled with the means ° cooling the metal, must accelerate materially the manufacture of the stereo type-plates in general.” Also propose-to bend the moulds for casting curve plates, or
  - 4521 Congreve, Sir Wm. Printing in one, twoa. more colours; method of using the com pound plates described in No. 4404/1819*
  - 1821.
  - 4594 Fergusson, J. Substitute for certain materia used in printing from stereotype-plat®" Cork used instead of paper for remedyin inequalities in stereotype-plates.
  - 1822.
  - 4642 Congreve, Sir Wm. Multiplying facsimile ine pressions to any extent. The type “in hollow (as matrices) and are composed the contrary direction to ordinary tyP the forme has laid on it a thin sheet of pared pewter or other soft metal, and, a passed through a mangle-press obtaining stereotype-plate direct. . #
  - 4664 Church, W. “Apparatus for printing, casting type on a multiple-mould castles machine and composing from chann filled with sorts into a raceway.
- p.582 - vue 750/901
- - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - 583
  - t z 8°
  - 4826
  - 4850
  - 5484
  - 5658
  - o
  - C N
  - go
  - 1 CO
  - Q
  - 00
  - or co
  - 1823.
  - Church, W. Segmental types with radial faces secured by rings entering grooves on the sides, for use on rollers for printing calico, linen, etc.
  - Vouchee, L. J. Typecasting improvements in multiple moulds and methods for ejecting the type. Uses the pump, which he states is not new.
  - Henfrey, J., and Applegath, A. Duplex machine, with two independent pumps and one metal-pot. This is an automatic machine, and is fitted with sliding drag-pins, normally flush with the surface of the mould, used for ejecting the type.
  - 1827.
  - Cowper, E. Printing music by blocks and types ; the block is made of three-ply wood into which holes are punched with appropriate tools and brass wire, sheet or sections, driven to project about 1 in., subsequently filed and stoned flat; the words of songs are cut from stereotype-plates and fixed with nails.
  - 1828.
  - Aspinwall, T. Method of suspending the swinging table, or moving the table with Parts of the mould towards the melting-pot, and bringing parts of the mould together, with a rectilinear movement of one-half relatively to the counterpart, etc., and the hot well between the plunger-barrel and the nipple.
  - 1831
  - Thomson, J. Casting a cake of metal with raised characters thereon, and sawing directly and transversely into individual types.
  - - 1832.
  - Edmonds, G. Philosophic Alphabet, or arrangement of letters, forms or figures, by which the articulate sounds of language may be scientifically denoted. Suggests forty-three characters for representing the consonant and vowel sounds used in different languages with the use of a suffixed dot below the vowel to indicate an additional syllable or with a horizontal line below the vowel of accented syllables; to be printed °n opposite pages to the foreign text in its own alphabet, for teaching pronunciation.
  - „ 1835.
  - Houstoun, W. Typefounding.
  - u 1837.
  - Woone, G. Forming plates with raised surfaces thereon for printing impressions on different substances (for printing cloth, etc.), engraves a matrix through a plaster and white lead coating to the surface of a metal plate and casts stereotypes from this. 1838.
  - Bessemer, H. (1) Metal reservoir above mould; (2) body-slide; (3) cover-slide; vacuum; (5) cold-air cooler; (6) preaking-off apparatus and separator; (7) intercepting plates; (8) counting-mechanism; (9) cut-out consisting of a brass Pin connecting the driving-mechanism, of only just sufficient strength for ordinary work, to break and be replaced when jamming occurs.
  - 1839.
  - M. Casting for printing purposes, making stereotype-matrices of paper composition with glue and successive layers of plotter’s earth and tissue paper.
  - millet, L. F. Typecasting machine; automatic with four or more moulds which are arranged on a rotating shaft to come alternately under each of the fillers.
  - No. 1840.
  - 8427 Gaubert, E. R. Machinery for distributing types into receptacles and placing them in order after setting up.
  - 8428 Young, J. H., and Delcambre, A. Setting up printing-types. Composing-machine with tubes for containing the type, key-operated pushers for ejecting the type singly to an inclined guide-plate, a composing-box for receiving the type from the guide-plate end (which is hinged to prevent breaking by the action of the pusher) and a packing-device for pushing the type into the galley.
  - 8538 Edmondson, T. Printing-presses; printing railway-tickets consecutively; uses two ratchet-wheels each with two sets of figures of printing-type from 00 to 99, with an automatic advance of one tooth for each impression, and with an automatic advance of one division in the second number-wheel for each completed revolution of the first number-wheel.
  - 8726 Clay, J., and Rosenborg, F. Arranging and setting up types for printing. Composing-machine in which the type and spaces are contained in two magazines, ejected to a common raceway by key-operated pushers and swept to the composing-box or, in a modification, received on an endless travelling belt and conveyed to the composing-box.
  - 8743 Mabley, W. T. Producing surfaces to be used for printing (by means of voltaic electricity). Growing by electro-deposition, upon joined surfaces of metal, printing-plates or surfaces suitable for printing or impressing.
  - 1841.
  - 8905 Parkes, A. Production of works of art in metals by growing by electro-deposition of copper matrices for various purposes, and growing metal articles by electro-deposition in the copper matrices or moulds.
  - 8987 Palmer, E. Producing printing-surfaces and printing china, pottery-ware, music, maps, and portraits (by electricity). Drawing or painting on copper or other metallic con-ducting-surfaces, etc., in such manner as to enable metallic plates with raised printing-surfaces to be produced by electro-deposition; prints may be taken from these plates as from wood-blocks or stereotype-plates.
  - 9010 Benjamin, N. Simultaneous casting in a multiple-mould machine operated by hand. The type as cast are connected and are subsequently separated.
  - 9022 Wheatstone, C. Causing by electromagnetic attraction marks to be made on paper and recording the time at which such marks were made.
  - 1842.
  - 9227 Palmer, E. Producing printing-surfaces. Coating a blackened plate of metal with a white composition and engraving through to the metal; growing up the whites with wax to obtain the desired depth in the plates to be grown by electro-deposition (typographic etching). Also deals with application of similar methods to other forms of printing; glyphography.
  - 9300 Clay, J., and Rosenborg, F. Arranging and setting up types for printing. A distributing machine key-operated by the operator reading back from the matter placed in a galley; also improvements on the composing-machine described in No. 8726/1840.
  - 9308 Beach, M. S. Tapered type for arranging radially in a wheel, formed with natural grooves and corresponding projections so as to lock in place on the cylinder.
  - 9374 Leeson, H. B. Depositing and manufacturing metals by electro-galvanic agency, etc. and apparatus therefor.
  - 9465 Cooke, W. F. Printing-telegraphs.
- p.583 - vue 751/901
- - 584
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1843.
  - 9731 Mazzini, J. (Partly communicated.) Typographical printing; special fount for each new work; pneumatic casting machine and uniplane composing-machine. The type are only | to | in. in height. Type-founding effected in vacuo. To prevent lifting of short-type in the press the type have nicks on both sides, leads have projections both sides and holes at the ends for threading with wire.
  - 9741 Siemens, C. W. Deposition of certain metals and apparatus connected therewith; uses thermo-electric battery.
  - 9745 Baine, A. Electric printing and signal telegraphs.
  - 9802 Duncan, J. (1) Spring for the injecting stroke of the pump ; (2) divided flue through which the jet-pipe passes; (3) plunger of pump with contained valve; (4) radiating arms used as nipple-plates and for ejecting the type; (5) mould attached to a large bar of metal to assist in cooling; (6) the matrix, mould, arm, and jet-pipe all compressed together; (7) method of retracting the matrix; (8) use of smoothing dies; (9) manner of setting up the type by means of a setting-up box; (10) placing the lower face of the mould at an angle to facilitate delivery. Type are carried through a right angle by means of the tang remaining in the revolving arm or nipple-plate; they are then broken from the tang and pushed into the setting-up arrangement.
  - 1844.
  - 10219 Woods, J. Improvements in producing and multiplying copies of designs and impressions of printed or written surfaces; anastatic printing; process for preparing metal planographic plates, preferably zinc, from new or old designs, writings or typographic impressions.
  - [The anastatic process was invented by Baldamus of Erfurt, and introduced into England in 1841 by C. W. Siemens, at whose instance this patent was obtained.] 10275 Kronheim, J. M. Stereotyping. Improved method of forming matrices from “ flanc ” (flong) and a casting-press with hinged lid, swung on pivots to facilitate casting.
  - 1845.
  - 10543 Shaw, W. Machine for paging books and numbering documents consecutively or otherwise; printing words, dates, marks, numbers or impressions alternately (odd or even by changing the wheels), or consecutively for book-pages.
  - 10655 Wheatstone, C. and Cooke, W. F. Electric telegraphs.
  - 10746 de St. Charles, P. P. Cold process for making type from wire of rectangular section by means of punches for face, nick, etc.; makes two type similar or different simultaneously.
  - 10939 Brett, J. Printing-telegraph with sending keyboard and typewheel for receiving.
  - 10947 Newton, W. Improvements in machines for casting (single) types. Water circulation in lower frame of mould.
  - 1846.
  - 11060 Hall, G. F. Machinery for writing and booking, numbering, etc., duplicates, tickets, etc., consecutive and repeating.
  - 11122 Woone, G. Engraving in relief (1) preparing a ground on copper using a granulating tool, protecting blacks of design and etching down to get required lightness of tint; another method (2) using a plate coated with white wax, the design when drawn is filled in with gum and vermilion and the wax removed with turpentine.
  - 11451 Beniowski, B. Type marked with a character or figure (not reversed) on sides and lower surface of shank protected by varnish ; uses spaces and quadrats some of iron, some of
  - wood for separation by magnetic attraction or floating in water; stores type in a nest of tubes called an “ authoriton ” for facilitating composition; poly-composing recurrent words; logotypes and phrase-types (slugs of several words) ; producing raised type for the blind.
  - 11455 Brockedon, W. and Hancock, T. Manufacture of articles where gutta-percha or india-rubber is used (includes forms and impressions to print from type).
  - 1847.
  - 11812 Lewthwaite, J. Numbering-machines. Consecutive or alternate; odd or even.
  - 1848.
  - 12022 Morse, S. E. Manufacture of plates or surfaces for printing or embossing; makes a direct drawing on copper, deposits copRE on the lines required, backs up with fusible metal, removes from original copper ano etches the fusible metal to leave the lines of deposited copper in relief. t
  - 12054 Brett, J. Printing-telegraphs ; improvemen on No. 10939/1845. .
  - 12137 Edmondson, T. Marking and numbering railway and other tickets or surfaces consecutively to 9999 with two number-wheels. for
  - 12229 Mackenzie, D. Jacquard machinery J various purposes including composing printing-types; uses a fixed curved PAN forated plate for an endless paper-slip "i perforations to pass over; proposes 1 apply the band of paper, with tune punche out, to the purpose of playing musics instruments, etc. 40
  - 12306 Harris, J. Improvements in typecasting machines, founding type, casting in mete plaster, etc. Runs type-metal through tn mould before completing the cast, so as get the air into the tang.
  - 12372 Newton, A. V. Casting printing-types, spacal quadrats and other raised surfaces. -ma provements in metal-pot, pumps, an details.
  - 1849.
  - 12421 Martin, W. The use of a continuous pared strip with perforations passing over a fix perforated plate, in place of Jacquard cared in machinery for figuring textile fabrics an other purposes ; of pegs sliding in a cylinn for actuating the levers of type-compost instruments, applied to the Clay an Rosenborg machine.
  - 1850. a
  - 12995 Brooman, R. A. Types, stereotype-plates an other figured surfaces for printing Plating the printing-surfaces of type, stere types, etc.
  - 13058 Newton, W. E. Casting type. (1) SU with mould-block ; (2) jobber.
  - 13062 Siemens, E. W. Combination of a traing mitting electric telegraph with a printoi telegraphic apparatus, the typewheel er which is impressed on paper by a hamm operated by an electromagnet. . .
  - 13063 Baranowski, J. J. Machinery for numbering ‘ hand-stamp, consecutive for cheques, Cher 13239 Newton, A. V. Cutting types and Olant irregular figures. Improved arranger or of machinery for cutting large types letters in wood or other materials. Pa° graph with slides.
  - 14102 Cumming, J. Production of surfaces toe printing, etc., by metallic deposition 1 No. 12022/1848). . ur.
  - 14113 Newton, A. V. Manufacture of printing-5 in faces; casting or moulding stereotypes to gutta-percha, etc., sufficiently elastic bend for use on cylindrical printing-PreS '
- p.584 - vue 752/901
- - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - 585
  - No. 1852 (continued).
  - *4309 Jude, H. G. G. Manufacture of type. Uses grooves in the wire or blanks, with compression of the faces in suitable matrices and attachment of the faces to bodies otherwise finished.
  - 325 Johnson, J. H. Composing and distributing type. Fig. 2, composing-machine practically identical with the Wicks machine except in the delivery. Distribution depends upon the compositor reading the type.
  - 333 Searby, G. Machinery for cutting, carving and engraving wood, stone, metal, etc. Pantograph with vertical and horizontal movements.
  - 342 Michel, F. A. V. Stereotyping in copper by E — galvanoplasty.
  - 5°5 Talbot, W. H. F. Improvements in the art of engraving. Coating a metallic plate with a substance affected by exposure to light, etching protected parts on which light has not acted; also uses bichromate of potash and gelatine to obtain a compound insoluble when acted on by light; uses gauze to obtain tint.
  - 097 Walker, H. Machinery and apparatus used in cylinder printing. Types curved to suit
  - 7 cylinder press, and mode of securing.
  - 793 Johnson, J. R. Improvements in the manufacture of type or raised surfaces for use in printing. Consists in use of zinc and its 10=0 , alloys.
  - 0 Appel, R. Anastatic printing.
  - 15
  - 189
  - 410
  - 514
  - 566
  - 696
  - 737
  - 796
  - 8t0
  - 812
  - 864
  - 1164
  - 1287
  - 1853.
  - Bellford, A. E. L. Manufacture of blocks for printing music. Composed notes, etc.; corrects and takes a plaster stereotype-mould which is then sawn into by five parallel files to cut the stave lines.
  - Newton, A. V. Improvements in manufacture of printing-surfaces; moulds for stereo-. typing.
  - Newton, A. V. Improvements in manufacture of printing-surfaces; moulds for stereotyping in india-rubber and gutta-percha.
  - McAdams, J. Improvements on machines for numbering pages, using type chains, one chain for the odd-number type and one for even-number type, so as to print both sides at once.
  - Calles, A. Improvements in manufacturing typographic characters; typecaster.
  - Stather, J. Taking impressions in gutta-Percha, shaving off the surface and printing from black relief, leaving characters in white. Applicable to cloth printing chiefly. Perry, T. J. Interlocking-type for use on Printing cylinders.
  - Newton, W. E. Improvements in producing Plates and surfaces which may be used as printing- or embossing-surfaces ; producing Polychromatic printing-plates from an in-tagliographic plate.
  - Mavity, W. Improved method of manufacturing letters and figures to be used as Printing-type, etc. Makes up from com-Ponents.
  - Purcell, G. Method of adjustment by means of various sized spaces and quadrats. Proposes to use the pica em quad and its multiples X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, also to use $. 3, t up to J, j, and 3ths of the body. These set-widths are used for all founts so as to facilitate columnar and tabular work. Urquhart, W. Cuts punches for logotypes for words or parts of words and makes copper matrices therefrom.
  - Bradbury, W. and Evans, F. M. Improve-ments in taking impressions and producing Printing-surfaces. Placing natural objects, leaves, etc., in soft lead and pressing with wsteel; stereotyping therefrom.
  - Ichel, W. H. Distributing and composing type. Type tubes vertical; horizontal rods to composing-machine. Type delivered on to travelling band and to a star-wheel, as
  - in many later machines. Line after composition set up in galley. Uses a bridge to separate thick from thin type in distributing.
  - 1351 Johnson, J. R. Improvements in typecasting. Straight-line presentation and body-slide mould.
  - 1546 Valls, L. Improvements in the production of printing-surfaces. Uses gutta-percha for printing.
  - 1639 Boule, J. T. and Cailland, F. Type with-drawn by key-operated forceps fall down grooved channel; proceeding reversed for distributing.
  - 2049 Calles, A. Improvements in manufacturing typographic characters.
  - 2073 Grant, P. and Doherty, J. Improvements in the method of cutting and finishing brass rule and wood reglet.
  - 2148 Poole, M. Improvements in distributing printers’ type. Automatic distributor dealing with 30 receiving channels and distributing 25 of the characters most frequently in use; the remaining characters have to pass through the machine a second time, having additional notches cut on the back for the purpose.
  - 2387 Applegath, A. Printing in several colours to prevent forgery by photography ; applicable to bank-notes.
  - 2413 Little, W. Improvements in typographic printing. Wedge-formed type for use on cylinders.
  - 2464 Bogue, D. Improved method of producing printing-surfaces by transfer, use of bitumen, heating and repeated biting, to result in a relief on metal plates ; a typographic etching process.
  - 2481 Vizetelly, J. T. (Partly communicated.) Producing plates for printing purposes by which the manipulatory process of engraving is superseded. Taking a print or transfer on copper and obtaining required depth of whites by repeated etching.
  - 2647 Delcambre, A. Improvements in machinery for distributing printing-type; hand operated.
  - 2748 Feldetrappe, A. Improvements in the production of printing-surfaces. Etching process for cylinders for calico printing.
  - 2836 Underwood, B. Printing oilcloths and other fabrics. Uses movable type, which may be formed with angular projections for fitting into grooves and retaining the type in their places.
  - 1854.
  - 91 Wilkinson, J. Manufacture of dies for producing printing-surfaces; draws with a pantograph on rollers, which are then etched and used to impress the design on other rollers or dies from which the printing-surface is formed.
  - 202 de Simencourt, A. C. Composing and distributing type. Two keyboards; lower case letters and signs, 45 ; Capitals, small capitals and figures, 65. Type held by nippers at bottom of each tube and freed on the depression of the corresponding key. The type fall into the stick in a vertical position. The distributor is operated by hand like the Hattersley.
  - 289 Graham, J. B. Production of printing-surfaces. The matrix of the printing-surface consists of a system of pins of suitable section bound together. The ends of all are brought to one plane. The operator depresses those pins not intended to print, leaving a relief surface ; or a mould may be taken from the side on which the pins project.
  - 316 Boileau, E. Producing raised printing-surfaces. Uses type for various parts of patterns and sets up characters suitable for the different colours in different chases which are printed consecutively for reproducing plaids and other patterns.
  - 462 Keenan, J. Improvements in printing-blocks or surfaces for printing. Veneers of thin felt sawn out and mounted.
- p.585 - vue 753/901
- - 586
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1854 (continued).
  - 556 Devincenzi, G. Improvements in producing , ornamented and figured surfaces and sur- 1 faces for printing from objects placed in annealed copper and subjected to heavy pressure.
  - 581 Newton, A. V. Improvements in the manufacture of raised printing-surfaces, cut out from thin felt and glued to block or cylinder.
  - 661 Perkins, J. Improvements in metallurgy, specially applicable to the production of type, etc. Depositing a thin shell on gutta-percha moulds, and backing up with alloy.
  - 662 Perkins, J. Producing block-surfaces for calico and other printing, by patterns of strip-metal placed on a tinned brass plate | heated to secure them by soldering.
  - 763 Devincenzi, G. Improvements in producing ornamented and figured surfaces and surfaces for printing by subjecting annealed metal to pressure and subsequently hardening it.
  - 817 Johnson, J. R. Improvements in manufacture of type and other raised surfaces for printing by use of harder alloys, using little or no lead.
  - 835 Trouble, L. M. Stamping apparatus or auto-peritype ; hand-stamp for Post Office.
  - 868 Devincenzi, G. Methods of producing engraved, figured and typographic surfaces for printing, using a limited number of types.
  - 937 Newton, W. E. Improvements in machinery for casting type ; jobber.
  - iiio Theiler, M. Printing-telegraphs. Typewheel or two typewheels with relief characters, a hollow inking-roller and paper-presser operated by electro-magnets.
  - 1225 Whitehouse, E. 0. W. Effecting telegraphic communications ; typewheel printer.
  - 1228 Taylor, I. Manufacture of metallic shells for calico and other printing; cylindrical.
  - 1256 Atkinson, D. Transfer printing-press; cylindrical.
  - 1548 Wiberg, M. Construction, setting-up and distribution of types for printing. Uses pairs of channels for each character in the composer, multiple-unit set widths and different positions and size of nick in the back of the type for distributing.
  - 1554 Brindley, E. H. Ornamenting china, earthenware, and glass ; printing with elastic blocks.
  - 1582 Fontainemoreau, P. A. Ie Comte de. Zincography; producing relief zinc plates by etching.
  - 1648 Delaye, P. V. Printing-blocks. Forms blocks as parallelepipeds some higher than others to produce one or more colours.
  - 1720 Cunningham, J. Uses Jacquard card for depressing pins on type forming part of i a printing-surface. (An improvement on 289/1854.)
  - 1737 White, C. Printing-blocks of wood for print- | ing ornamental or decorative paper.
  - 1932 Mitchel, W. H. Apparatus for distributing ! type ; shuttle and follower.
  - 2021 Cunningham, J. Preparation or production of printing-surfaces. (An improvement on | 289/1854.)
  - 2II2 Hare, C. B. Mode of manufacturing printing-blocks of wood with two systems of equidistant grooves at right angles to each | other; the spots are removed except such I as correspond to the required colour.
  - 2134 Crossley, T. An improved mode of manu-facturing printing-blocks. A similar method ] to that of No. 2112/1854, but the prepared block is impressed on gutta-percha to bind the spots together and prevent warping.
  - 2216 Scheutz, G. and Scheutz, E. Machinery or apparatus for calculating and printing the results of such calculations. Machine with a set of calculating wheels each of which can be turned backwards or forwards at pleasure. The wheels representing even differences turn in one direction, and those representing odd differences in the other, while the calculating wheels which represent tabular numbers are at rest. The figures on these latter are reproduced by typewheels which may
  - No.
  - impress the tabular terms in lead or in a stereotype-matrix. The calculating wheels have as many teeth as the system of rotation they represent—sexial, decimal, duodecimal, etc. The machine consists of three parts: the calculating-apparatus, the printing-apparatus, and the numerator which is confined to quantities increasing by unities. 2366 Siemens, C. W. Electric Telegraphs. Pre-paring and punching the paper with single or double holes and an appliance for perforating with two punches which may be depressed singly or together.
  - 1855.
  - 501 Tardif, E. Hand numbering-stamp; consecutive or repeat; zero figure removable on all but units disk.
  - 875 Johnson, J. H. Moulding rubber-type.
  - 1383 Little, W. Curved stereotype- and electro type-plates used.
  - 1478 Besley, R. Type-metal of lead, antimony, tin, nickel, cobalt, copper and bismuth.
  - 2084 Scully, V. and Heywood, B. J. Type-metal, of aluminium.
  - 2104 Dellagana, J. Stereotypes cast type-high and hollow. ’ .
  - 2380 Beslay, M. Filling electrotype-shells with molten metal. .
  - 2385 Rascol, E. H. Typecasting and trimming machine.
  - 2571 Newton, A. V. Making and backing upelectro-types.
  - 1856.
  - 717 Halvorson, H. Material for making type which will print in colour.
  - 822 Hogg, J. and Napier, J. Stereotype; casting from flong and plaster. ,
  - 886 Coulon, L. P. Simultaneously composing and distributing type. .
  - 1113 Beniowski, B. Logotypes of loose-tyP6 cemented with shellac.
  - 1267 Newton, W. E. Securing types on rotary printing machines.
  - 1871 Newton, W. E. Typesetting and distributing machine.
  - 2067 Duchateau, A. E. Automatic hand-stamp T° consecutive numbering.
  - 2444 Delcambre, I. Typesetting and distributing machine.
  - 2872 Negre, C. Producing a relief plate by electrar deposition of copper on a gold or silvs
  - plate bearing a photograph in bitumen. , 2968 Littlewood, G. Type drilled at end an raised on shouldered pins for printing geometric patterns.
  - 2980 Gerhard, F. W. Type made of aluminium-
  - 3089 Alden, T. Typesetting and distributa machine; horizontal wheel with radi tubes.
  - 155
  - 223
  - 481
  - 725
  - 1087
  - 1371
  - 1400
  - 1794
  - 2563
  - 3052
  - 3057
  - 1857.
  - Mitchel, W. H. Type-distributing machine' with ratchet-wheels for receiving and Pa
  - ing the type in channels.
  - Constance, F. Typecasting and trimming machine.
  - Foucher, L. L. Typecasting and trimming machine; mould of two main parts adjus able.
  - Juvin, E. J. N. Electrotyping and backing
  - up. H
  - Schaub, G. Casting stems on electro-deposits type-heads in a multiple-mould and sups quently separating. cm-
  - Vanderborght, M. J. Typecasting and tri ining machine,
  - Trouillet, A. Typographical numberor machine; consecutive, alternate, other arithmetical progression. . Hattersley, R. Typesetting and distribu machine. ...
  - Robinson, G. T. Automatically dating 3 counting.
  - Best, I. A. Casting shank upon an electrice 3 deposited face. . in
  - Stather, J. Relief surfaces or printing imitation of wood.
- p.586 - vue 754/901
- - 2 p
  - 1858.
  - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - Ul O
  - 231 Cunningham, R. Typesetting, distributing, producing indented metal surfaces and copy-holding.
  - 341 Schaub, G. Electrically-deposited backed - type faces.
  - 391 Galli, L. Preparing wood and stone for „typographic printing.
  - 092 thomas, J. Paging and numbering-machine, 6 alternate, consecutive or duplicate.
  - °00 Muller, H. L. Typographic mosaic block of o type formed as prisms of colouring material.
  - Boot, A. J. Casehardened type for printing
  - R labels.
  - O3i McElheran, J. Etches and presses type into a wax covered plate from which a stereotype , is taken.
  - 439 Wheatstone, C. Electric telegraph using perforated strip with three lines of holes.
  - 341 Young, J. H. Typesetting and distributing; 15-0 r ratchet-wheel collector for composing.
  - '50 Cunningham, R. Typesetting and distribut-c ing machine.
  - 34 Schaub, G. Machine casting type-bodies on copper heads.
  - CEA co — 000 CO O NOO V 01
  - 1859
  - Morgan, W. Type formed on cylinders for printing advertisements on pavements.
  - Young, J. H. Type-setting and distributing (uses airblast).
  - Moore, D. Machine for finishing type. Hadlow, F. V. Type of boxwood.
  - Wilkinson, J. A. Type notched on one side and with a projection on the other for cylindrical composition.
  - Shaw, W. Numbering-apparatus, large-wheel, consecutive.
  - Beslay, C. Making relief stamps by electro-typing.
  - 179 Collignon, J. V. and George, L. Logotypes of type soldered at low temperature.
  - Lee, G. L. Design etched on stone leaving lines in relief from which a wax cast is obtained and stereotyped.
  - Gilmer, J. B. Typesetting and distributing; the composing- or distributing-stick is applied to the end of the type channels.
  - Johnson, J. R., and Atkinson, J. S. Type-casting and trimming machine; body-slide and ejector.
  - Kostaing, C. S. Materials for making type which will print in colour.
  - N H O O to O C CO
  - N N 00 0
  - N Co
  - N C
  - ox D
  - NBNN HI HH H .
  - co. N NI-L 00 000 D
  - ONO- 00 CI POU H
  - A CO NT V CO 000 CT
  - 1860.
  - Davis, R. W., and Davis, D. Addressing machine ; chain of indented wood-blocks.
  - Young, J. H. Typesetting and distributing.
  - Shaw, P. Wooden printing-types.
  - Berri, D. G. Hand-stamp for dating and marking.
  - Low, W. Machine for finishing type.
  - Corduan, J. Coating type or stereotypes with brass.
  - Pavyer, J. G. Machine for finishing type.
  - Toung, J. H. Typesetting and distributing; copyholders for compositors.
  - Barnwell, S., and Rollason, A. Various vegetable and other compositions for type.
  - Wheatstone, C. Electric telegraph. Im-Provement on 1239/1858.
  - "types, E. F. Silicate of soda for cleaning Beniowski, B. Type materials; logotypes; electrically soldering type.
  - 1603 Kessler, L., and Michiels, J. A. X. Moulding in gelatine, etc., and treating chemically to obtain enlargements or reductions.
  - 1652 Harland, J. W. Type of horn-shavings, etc., compressed into suitable moulds.
  - 1765 George, L. Soldering type to form logotypes.
  - 2322 Bailey, A. H. Logotypes and logotype cases.
  - 2484 Dellagana, J. Finishing curved stereotype-plates.
  - 2521 Coathupe, H. B. and Waltham, F. H. Producing stereotype-surfaces.
  - 2531 Felt, C. W. Composing, line-justifying, and distributing machine operated either from keyboard or by perforated record-strip. Uses separators and spaces of different widths. Anticipates Paige and others.
  - 2699 Aufray, A. E. and Tabar, F. G. L. Obtaining electro-deposited plate from an engraving in slate.
  - 3081 Debons, F. and Denny, T. Producing typographic surface by repeated etching.
  - 3248 Harland, J. W. Type and furniture of paper-pulp, horn-shavings, etc., compressed.
  - 1862.
  - 38 Coryton, J. Stamping type from a travelling bar of lead.
  - 771 Cumming, J. Typesetting and distributing by special nicks on back or front of type.
  - 915 Caslon, H. W. and Fagg, G. Machine for breaking-off and rubbing type mechanically.
  - 1349 Richard, W. and Richard, J. Machine for rubbing type.
  - 2514 Johnson, J. R. and Atkinson, J. S. Machine for finishing type.
  - 2892 Placet, P. E. Typographic surface produced by moulding from a sensitized coating of a plate; the parts not acted on by light are dissolved and the remainder is removed by gelatine adhering to paper.
  - 3365 Hattersley, R. Distributing type, assists hand by automatically filling sticks with the distributed type ; for use with 1794/1857.
  - 1863.
  - 251 Ward, R. Quoins; combined screw and wedge.
  - 314 Norton, M. P. Combined cancelling and postmarking hand-stamp.
  - 529 Hoe, R. M. Thin steel plate backing for curving stereotype-matrices.
  - 697 Young, W. Typesetting and distributing; handling type.
  - 986 Rafter, H. Electrotype and stereotype; combined elastic and non-elastic films caused to adhere to plate and elastic film distended for the whites.
  - 1050 Harrison, S. Casting many type at once on electrically deposited faces.
  - 1934 Tucker, S. D. Stereotype; matrices, and shaving and bevelling plates.
  - 2038 Mauchain, A. Drawing in gum on a chalk or plaster plate and brushing out the whites ; resembles the graphotype process.
  - 2306 Chezaud, L. F. and Christen, H. J. Making relief plates or cylinders by pressure on engraved steel for postage stamp printing.
  - 3065 Aspinall, A. J. Hand-stamp; consecutive numbering.
  - 3086 Guthrie, E. (partly communicated). Handstamp.
  - 349
  - 465
  - 625
  - 1056
  - 1510
  - 1861.
  - Aggio, G. G. Stereotype-plates in one piece .type-high.
  - Massey, F. E. Hand-stamp with revolvable stamp.
  - Joyce, A. J. Inserting movable type in map-Printing-surfaces.
  - Uellagana, J. Flong-matrix making in mangle-press.
  - Napier, J. Stereotype-matrix of plaster on Paper back.
  - 1864.
  - 71 Mauchain, A. Engraving on a wax-coated steel or glass plate, moulding and electrotyping.
  - 664 Day, B. Drawing in non-penetrating ink on chalk plate and rubbing away whites.
  - 970 Guthrie, M. Type cut in reverse for reverse printing.
  - 1008 Leighton, A. Typographic surface of rubber vulcanized in a mould taken from type, woodcut, or stereotype.
  - 1403 Flamm, P. Impression machine for stereo-type-matrix composing.
  - 1595 Hay, J. Hand-stamp for making autograph signatures with permutations of additions.
- p.587 - vue 755/901
- - 588
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1864 (continued).
  - 1981 Kuhlmann, F. Reproducing crystalline designs on copper stereotype-plates.
  - 1999 Smith, J. J. C. Type faces sawn from a slug with electrically deposited type-heads of copper.
  - 2190 Placet, P. E. Photomechanical process producing a relief plate by electro-deposition.
  - 3051 Albert, A. Hand-stamp with revolving block.
  - 3198 Hay, J. Hand-stamp; improvement on 1595/1864 combined with a numbering-device.
  - 1865.
  - 625 Craig, T. and Carlaw, D. Numbering-apparatus ; lever, consecutive.
  - 865 Mathieu, A. Automatic numbering hand-stamp.
  - 1252 Mackie, A., Garside, H. and Salmon, J. Type-distributing machine.
  - 1257 Mayall, T. J. Stereotypes of vulcanized rubber.
  - 1271 Low, A. A., Low, J. O., Lyman, E. H. R., Livermore, C. F., Richards, A. C. and Yeaton, C. C. Typesetting and distributing machine.
  - 1277 Welch, P. Machine for finishing type.
  - 1536 Aspinall, A. J. Hand-stamp for postmarking.
  - 1541 Leggo, W. A. and Desbarats, G. E. Stereotypes and electrotypes by photomechanical process.
  - 1791 Swan, J. W. Photomechanical relief plates.
  - 1845 Mackie, A. and Jones, J. P. Typesetting.
  - 2135 Young, A. and Young, W. Typesetting and distributing.
  - 2303 Mackie, A. and Jones, J. P. Typesetting.
  - 3104 Mackie, A. Typesetting and distributing.
  - 1866.
  - 16 Young, A. and Young, W. Typesetting and distributing.
  - 324 Winstanley, D. Making a printing-surface of dots by applying a set of conical ended wires to a photomechanical surface; securing together and rubbing down.
  - 988 Fraser, J. Numbering-machine, hand, consecutive.
  - 1186 Nelson, M. Stereotype-matrix or impression machine.
  - 1334 Dallas, D. C. Photomechanical relief plates.
  - 1380 Cheverton, J. Graphotype process; friable-surface plate.
  - 1448 Sweet, J. E. Flong for stereotype-matrix or impression machine.
  - 1496 Delcambre, I. Combined typesetting and distributing machines.
  - 1683 Hudson, T. S. Hand-stamp for postmarking.
  - 2063 Elverson, J. India-rubber type for hand-stamps.
  - 2303 Mackie, A. Typesetting machine.
  - 2425 Gray, J. A. and Green, S. W. Typesetting and distributing machine.
  - 2609 Hill, C. J. Engraving machine for copying matrices.
  - 2704 Corey, A. and Harper, J. M. Typesetting machine.
  - 3222 MacDonald, J. C. and Calverley, J. Moulds for curved stereotypes.
  - 3396 Mackie, A. Type-distributing machine.
  - 1867.
  - 968 Disderi, A. A. Photomechanical relief surfaces.
  - 1722 Mayer, E. H. Type-metal cast on electro faces and sawn to shape.
  - 1776 Welch, P. Machine for finishing type.
  - 1890 Cornelis, E. Hand-stamp for dating through inked ribbon.
  - 2164 Mackie, A. Typesetting and distributing; simultaneously composing columns in duplicate or multiple.
  - 2432 Kniaghininsky, P., Galahoff, P., and Ossipoff, N. Typesetting and distributing machine.
  - 2800 Hattersley, R. Type-distributing machine. 1
  - No.
  - 3009 Bordes, E. Relief printing and perforating postage stamps.
  - 3164 Thorne, J. Typesetting machine.
  - 3366 Mackie, A. Typesetting and distributing machine; Jacquard principle.
  - 3516 Cornelis, E. Hand dating-stamp; see 1890/1867.
  - 3542 Reed, D. Material for making type of rubber, gum, etc.
  - 1868.
  - 25 Dellagana, J. Curved electrotype-blocks.
  - 521 Wilkinson, W. H. Cases for logotypes 01 words, roots, etc.
  - 1307 Chamberlain, E. Hand-stamp. T343 Brown, C. Surface heating apparatus f°r stereotype-making.
  - 1525 Wilkinson, W. H. Building up type from blocks united by rubber solution.
  - 1984 Mackie, A. Typesetting and distributing machine; Jacquard principle. v
  - 2094 Bebro, M., Hopwood, O., and Elam, Apparatus for printing consecutive numbets on tickets.
  - 2108 Francis, L. Stereotypes of glue and gelatine for printing on uneven surfaces. . 1
  - 2150 Wilson, G. R. Stereotypes of vulcanize india-rubber. ’ ,
  - 2175 Mayall, T. J. India-rubber composition to making types.
  - 2201 Edwards, E. Photomechanical relief plate. 2225 Hannart, L. and Aubertin, N. A. Type can in long strips and planed and sawn 1 size.
  - 3136 Worster, J. Backing for stereotype-plates. 3155 Taylor, T., Rogers, E. P., and Coryell, Vulcanized-rubber moulds for electrotypes.
  - 3255 Wimbridge, E. Typographic surface Pre pared by etching. .
  - 3470 MacDonald, J. C. and Calverley, J. Casting semicylindrical stereotypes.
  - 3713 Bruce, D. Machine for finishing type. e 3728 Mackie, A. Typesetting and distributing machine; Jacquard principle; line-jus fication by corrugated spaces.
  - 3840 Lennox, W. H., Pearman, J. W.,and Pearma > W. J. Stereotypes for printing music. .. 3956 Michel, F. A. V. Preparing electrotyP plates from a paper mould.
  - 1869. 1
  - 24 Hannart, L. Type cast in long strips an planed and sawn to size.
  - 149 Phillips, L. B. Filling electrotypes.
  - 306 Daw, T. G. Impression-machine. , e 367 Dawson, C. S. Hand-stamp; elastic surra of molasses and glue.
  - 806 Roper, E. and Shaw, G. Chalk blocks; 1 provement in graphotype process. .
  - 853 Robinson, J. V. Photomechanical print 6
  - 2031 Kastenbein, C. Typesetting and distributing machine. tro-
  - 2456 Klein, E. (Partly communicated.) Elec for lytic deposition of iron on moulds stereotyping. the
  - 2658 Colville, D. Impressing punches, etc., Ctro-surface of a wax-coated plate for elec typing and stereotyping.
  - 3358 Brown, 0. L. Type-distributing machineipe. 3643 Buirat, S. A. Making electrotypes from 1)7
  - 1870.
  - 725 Slingerland, J. T. Typesetting machine-
  - 797 Marinoni, H. A. Stereotype; preparing # mould.
  - 1776 Cunningham, W. J. and Dabb, A. Mace for cutting type. . ring
  - 2427 Dunn, W. W. Typecasting and trimm machine. . off
  - 2514 Norcombe, E. S. Stereotype; cutting the git before the metal has set. . ring
  - 2527 Overend, J. A. T. Typecasting and trim machine, for
  - 2562 Wright, J. W. Large cast-iron type advertisements.
- p.588 - vue 756/901
- - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - 589
  - No.
  - 1871.
  - 321 Winder, R. Typesetting machine.
  - 37i Millar, A. Hand-stamp for numbering automatically.
  - 410 Slingerland, J. T. Type-distributing machine.
  - 518 Leggo, W. A. Wax impressions for electro-, types.
  - 800 Thompson, D.B. Type-distributing machine.
  - 882 Hollins, M. D. Relief surfaces for printing on tiles.
  - 990 Mackie, A. Typesetting machine. 03 Knight, S. P. Blackleading electrotype-
  - No. 3064 3806
  - 3852 4145
  - or
  - 1
  - moulds. „ . A Barrett, R. and Wright, S. Hand-stamp for . automatic numbering or dating. a488 Mauger, V. E. Typesetting and distributing machine; magnetic type containing iron
  - 99
  - 477
  - 1445
  - 1899
  - 1935
  - wire.
  - 3374 Barrett, R. and Wright, S. Hand numbering-stamp ; to repeat indefinitely or conse-
  - . cutively.
  - Jullien, F. H. Hand-stamp for repeating
  - , number.
  - 3490 Tickle, R. P. Bed and clips for mounting stereotypes.
  - 1872.
  - 55 Cunningham, W. J. Apparatus for cutting type.
  - 552 Hattersley, R. Type-distributing machine.
  - 785 Paige, J. W. and Reynolds, D. Typesetting
  - - machine.
  - °50 Greene, J. Electrotype-matrices and markers
  - ToE c for type and logotypes.
  - T° Eraser, A- Type-distributing machine.
  - 429 Briggs, J. G. Stereotype-matrix making or impression machine using opposed type
  - E and dies.
  - 28 Dawson, A. and Dawson, H. T. Typographic etching process; coated brass Plate and mode of conducting paraffin for building up the whites.
  - Young, W- Stereotype-matrix machine.
  - 9*0 Macrone, W. and Mackenzie, W. Stereo-.typing by plaster process. 11 Westcott Typesetting Co. Typecasting and setting machine; casting, trimming and composing characters corresponding to key 216- .depressions. 21R -miriazeff, D. Stereotype-matrix machine, for Gally, M. Stereotype-matrix and like
  - 2=10 T machines.
  - 3° Lochhead, W. Stereotype; asbestos in 256, q flong. 2-63 Sperry, S. D. Typesetting machine.
  - ° Heinemann, L. and Muller, M. L. Type-286, setting machine.
  - 4 Kastenbein, C. Typesetting and distributing
  - 346- r Machine.
  - 1 Fraser, A. Typesetting and distributing
  - 35.8 —machine; magazine and galleys.
  - Young, W. Stereotype-matrix or impression 3811 r machine.
  - 4 Green, F. M. Type-cases for music-com-T position.
  - 4 Lauder, G. (partly communicated). Stereo-types cast flat and pressed to segmental 382. form for cylindrical press.
  - 9 toad, J. Moulds for electrotype; of lead, sulphur, gutta-percha, etc.
  - O 1 0
  - A 1873.
  - 88 Schmidt, H. Hand numbering-stamp; wheels = axial with handle. , , 039 Toad, J. Residue from preparation of lead
  - sulphide mixed with gutta-percha, etc., o „ for electrotype- and stereotype-moulds. Gough, H. F. Ornamental and geometric
  - $98 Shaw, W. Type cast narrow or slotted to
  - Is. facilitate withdrawing for correction.
  - 3 mluh, S. Hand-stamp with impression
  - Io- .stereotyped in india-rubber.
  - 254 Woodbury, W. B. Half-tone printing-blocks 3 uses netting, grained stone or fine ruled 22 lines.
  - 0 Macrone, W. and Mackenzie, W. Vulcanized-rubber stereotypes.
  - Whitney, E. R. Type cut from flint-glass. Tickle, R. P. Mounting and securing stereo-type-plates.
  - Mackie, A. Typesetting machine.
  - Bartlett, J. Rhomboidal type with bead and groove to save overhang of kerned letters ; for script type.
  - 1874. Mason, T. Backing-plate for securing stereotypes.
  - Hooker, J. Typesetting machine. Electric
  - control.
  - Lourdel, C. Type for printing music.
  - Miller, A. Typesetting.
  - Dillon, T. A. Hollow type and logotypes for inkless printing by means of chemicals.
  - 2178 Robcis and Sons, R. Machine for finishing
  - type.
  - Mackie, A. and Waldenstrom, E. H. Apparatus for perforating paper for type-composing machinery.
  - 2627 Nall, J., Goldsmith, G., and Dilkes, J. Making type for posters and show cards from sheet metal.
  - 3137 Winder, R. Electrically-operated typesetting machine.
  - Shaw, W. Type-cases.
  - Johnson, S. T. Design on lithographic stone etched to the required depth and moulded
  - 3410
  - 3432
  - 3444
  - H01
  - for stereotyping. Holyoake, W. R. Elastic type or type with elastic backing for printing on glass, china, etc.
  - Smith, W. N. Typesetting machine with revolving table.
  - Loftin, W., Koolman, W., and Isger, A. J.
  - Curving electrotype-plates.
  - Abercrombie, W. Hand-stamp with logotype
  - wheels.
  - 1231
  - 1255
  - 1875.
  - Winder, R. Type-distributing machine.
  - Brown, J. Electrotyping from indented lines drawn on thin lead or tin mounted on a yielding backing.
  - Shaw, W. Type-cases.
  - Holyoake, W. R. Type of soft material cemented to flexible backing, or type coated with gelatine, for ornamenting glass, china, etc.
  - Brown, R. Cutting designs in plaster and casting a relief-stereotype direct.
  - Hattersley, R. Typesetting machine and distributing apparatus.
  - i Trier, F. Stereotype-matrix or impression
  - 1275
  - 1566
  - 1659
  - 1812 FTMserhinA: Typesetting and distributing
  - 1957 Massey!": E. Hand-stamp with movable
  - 2020
  - Richards, T. Logotypes for numbering
  - 2073
  - coupons.
  - Chapman, G. Typesetting and distributing;
  - assisting hand.
  - Harding, G. P. and Johnson, J. R. Stereotype-matrix or impression machine.
  - Brooks, J. S. Making and backing electrotype-shells.
  - Grasser, C. Apparatus for casting stereo-
  - 2119
  - 2168
  - 2467
  - types.
  - 2649 Richards, A. C. Typesetting machine.
  - 2783 Wilson, R. Revolving disks used for ruling in conjunction with numbering-apparatus.
  - Westcott, C. S. Typecasting and setting
  - 2965
  - 4153
  - 163
  - 338
  - 355
  - 525
  - machine.
  - Wells, J. L. Printing with yielding printing-
  - surfaces.
  - 1876.
  - Ruth, T. Stereotype surfaces of glue, gelatine and glycerine.
  - Morris, E. E. Mounting-block for stereotype-
  - plates.
  - Bertin, L. White pine treated for use as type.
  - Heinemann, L. Typesetting and distributing; assisting hand.
- p.589 - vue 757/901
- - 590
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1876 (continued).
  - 567 Pattyson, W. D. C. Type-distributing by selector notches.
  - 1058 Mardon, H. Type-high numbering-machine; consecutive.
  - 1255 Green, S. W. Typesetting and distributing; type-cases.
  - 1300 Liebe, P. Type for branding and printing on rough surfaces.
  - 1552 Fleming, J. Holding elastic type in line.
  - 1580 Dellagana, J. Backing up flat electrotypes.
  - 1670 Muller, M. L. Typesetting machine.
  - 1841 Hannan, J. F. Means for preventing ink from cementing type together.
  - 1937 Griffin, T. Large metal-type cast on wood with saw-cuts in it.
  - 2005 Hooker, J. Typesetting and distributing machines.
  - 2029 Foot, R. G. Hand-stamps of electrotype or stereotype.
  - 2160 Cooke, G. K. Hand-stamp; rotating block with two printing-surfaces.
  - 2530 Harrison, A., and Evans, J. Casting flat stereotypes type-high with ribbed backs.
  - 2921 Otter, C. G. von. Printing records of Morse flash-light signals by typewheels on a travelling paper-strip.
  - 3165 Bartlett, J., and Murray, W. M. Casting raised or sunk type.
  - 3203 Phelps, G. M. Perforated strip for telegraphic transmitter with holes punched at distances to correspond to the spacing of letters on a typewheel at the receiving station.
  - 3766 Mackenzie, J. Printing records of weights automatically on paper or tickets.
  - 4262 Mason, T. Type cast with wedge-shaped shoulders on the jet or break.
  - 4401 Heinemann, L. Typesetting and distributing ; assisting hand.
  - 1877.
  - 329 Drummond, G. P. Printing on elastic surface; stretching to line-justify and photographing.
  - 2209 Cowper, E. A. Typesetting.
  - 2737 Reynolds, D. Type-distributing.
  - 2985 Mason, T. Machines for trimming and finishing type.
  - 3055 Fraser, A. Typesetting and distributing. 3383 Garbe, G. Wood-type.
  - 3659 Bowman, T. S. Type-high numbering-machine ; consecutive.
  - 4009 Capron, E., Duvivier, L., and Ponsolle, N. Producing typographical etched plates from photographs.
  - 4239 Delcambre, I. Typesetting and distributing.
  - 1878.
  - 1282 Bowman, T. S. Type-high numbering-machine with inner case ; consecutive.
  - 1420 Conisbee, W., and Morgan, J. W. Consecutive numbering-device; wheels coming through slots in table.
  - 1979 Michaud, A. Relief surface from chromated gelatine.
  - 2200 Lavater, M. L. J., and Levy, A. Mounting stereotypes and electrotypes.
  - 2289 Moss, J., Smith, J. H., and Hill, G. J. Hand-stamp for recording and receipting.
  - 3096 Lanham, R. Apparatus for casting flat stereotypes.
  - 3103 Richards, A. C. Typesetting and distributing machine.
  - 3221 Griffin, S. Mounting stereotypes. 3369 Wood, J. F. R. Printers’ furniture.
  - 4447 Cooke, G. K. Flanged india-rubber type.
  - 4921 Weston, E. Making electrotypes of nickel.
  - 5170 Slote, D. Plate coated with plaster, or chalk, etc., engraved for reliefs and stereotyped from direct.
  - 1879.
  - 94 North, J. Type-distributing.
  - 950 Wicks, F. Type-distributing apparatus.
  - 1033 Kaiser, F., and Duplessy, A. A. Sensitized coating of plate exposed, inked and etched.
  - No.
  - 1203 Clowes, E. A., and Batey, J. Improvements in machinery for coating the surface of wax or other moulds with blacklead for electrotyping. ,
  - 1422 Jannin, L. E. Matrix of massicot and gele tine whence plates are made in caoutchouc, gelatine or gutta-percha.
  - 1535 Day, B. Flexible printing-surface.
  - 1545 Culross, D. Matrices of wax for electrotyping line-rules, etc.
  - 1561 Bland, W. Flat stereotypes.
  - 1611 Smith, T. W. Preventing burrs on type by machining the matrices to set width and securing hard-metal sides thereto.
  - 1640 Wicks, F. Typesetting, distributing and line-justifying by compression of spaces. .
  - 1874 Humby, W. R., and Rose, H. Type formed by compression of steam or compressed
  - 1999 Le Moussu, B. C., and Swain, J. Hard-metal veneer surface etched away for whites which are then cut deeper.
  - 2374 McNish, T. T. Type-galley.
  - 2706 Spence, J. B. Metallic sulphides and sulphur used for stereotype.
  - 2808 Eisele, O. Typesetting and distributing machine.
  - 2969 Swan, J. W. Producing photo-relief plates.
  - 2984 Gear, A. S. Type made hollow and perforated at the sides for printing and branding.
  - 2993 Thomer, J., and Kohazy, F. Hand-stamp combined with lock for transport boxes, marking date and station.
  - 3064 Johnstone, A. B. Stereotype-beds of -section.
  - 3743 Smith, W. T. Stereotype-plates and mean of securing. ,
  - 3770 Calonne, Viscount A. A. de. Distribute type; assisting hand. •
  - 3816 Scott, F., and Collins, J. S. Treating sense tized surfaces with water, after exposur to light, to produce relief blocks.
  - 3853 Byles, W. P., and Allan, G. Drying stere
  - 3855 Sutherland, G. Converting a transfer to zinc into a typographic surface. ,
  - 3903 Robinson, J. Hand-stamp for dating railway tickets. t ne-
  - 3925 Fischer, C. G., and Langen, A. von. 1XP composing and distributing apparatus.
  - 4321 Smith, W. T. Stereotype-plates and -beds.on
  - 4326 Ward, W. Preventing formation of burrs edges of stereotypes. .
  - 4738 Petit, C. G. Typographic lined-plates ' half-shade negatives. ui.
  - 4856 Winder, R. Type-composing and buting.
  - 5242 Macdougald, G. D. Successive-impress! device.
  - 1880. a.
  - Type-cases; assisting han
  - Porter, T. J.
  - 356
  - 510
  - 769
  - 863
  - 864
  - 928
  - 1419
  - 1503
  - 1917
  - 2190
  - 2275
  - 2676
  - 2840
  - 3024
  - composition. . ling
  - Hilfiker, A. Composing and distribut
  - apparatus. de-
  - Schmidt, J. Hand roller-stamps with tachable type. .
  - Pearce, G., and Hughes, E. Drying matrices. .
  - Hepburn, J. M. Typecasting, trimming " finishing machine.
  - Reed, R. B. Stereotype-mould for cur plates. , com
  - Sachs, J. J. Obtaining relief blocks » exposed chromated gelatine surfaces. R., Macdougald, G. D., Adie, W., Adams, C for and Fleming, P. Producing matrices electrotypes and stereotypes. . Lets, Bebro, M. Numbering-machine for tichate, cheques, etc., consecutive, or altern using two machines for odds and evendiin Chaumeil, A., and Chaumeil, J. Porcer type.
  - Rogers, E. D. Mounting stereotypes. lugs-Fleming, J. Casting printers’ leads and Hubbard, H. P. Holding curved or and, lines of type. . at
  - Green, J. Type with typographic Tether one end for printing, and impressed at 0 end for reading.
- p.590 - vue 758/901
- - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - 591
  - N°- 1880 (continued).
  - 3°98 Thoma, J. G. Forming type-moulds; im-_ „ Pression machine.
  - 3308 Dittrich, J., and Ganty, P. Type-distributing and composing apparatus.
  - 3345 Wicks, F. Type-distributing machine.
  - 3340 Wicks, F. Dry-flong applied by a mangle-, press with an intermediate plate.
  - 3470 Parker, A. J. Mounting stereotypes.
  - 3547 Myers, F. Type-plates cast from routed wood patterns for printing on wooden SE - boxes, etc.
  - 3023 Dittrich, J., and Ganty, P. Type-distributing 36= c and composing apparatus.
  - 305° Sachs, J. J. Sulphur-compound type.
  - 3934 Thorne, J. Typesetting, distributing and . . feeding. | 434 Marinoni, A. H. Stereotype-plates; cutting, trimming, bevelling, routing, etc.
  - 1881.
  - ST or 00 ON C 00 V O S°
  - Clemens, S. L., Slote, D., and Sneider, C. Type made of bronze.
  - Faber, A. Stereotype-moulds of flong.
  - Weylandt, A. Roller hand-stamp with vulcanized-rubber type.
  - Wicks, F. Rotary typecasting machine.
  - Brackelsberg, E. W. Typesetting and dis-tributing apparatus.
  - N N on O N&
  - Co & N NH O Oh O H °T HH N P
  - Rubber-faced metal-type.
  - T°03 Weiss, L. Type and logotypes.
  - 924 Taylor, J. E., Allen, P., Evans, W., and Braith-waite, D. Drying stereotype-matrices.
  - Noad, J. H. Type coated with iron.
  - Woodbury, W. B. Pressing ductile metal into plaster moulds and backing with gelatine hardened with alum.
  - Delcambre, I. Typesetting and distributing machine.
  - Sachs, J. J. Type made of sulphur and slate-dust.
  - Cooke, G. K. Rubber-faced metal-type.
  - Rogers, A. H. Type with holes for composing
  - 330 - sticks.
  - 3302 Faber, A. Making flong-matrices for stereo-types.
  - 3477 Reeve, T. Type-distributing machine. Munson, J. E. Controlling the operation of typesetting machines.
  - terrachon, J. E. Type stamped from a metal ribbon.
  - Fischer, C. G., and Langen, A. von. Type-distributing and composing apparatus.
  - Marquez, J. A. Stereotype-matrix machine. Johnson, L. K. Compositors’ rule.
  - Harrild, F. Casting type-high cored stereo-. type-plates.
  - Burr, H. A. Type-nicking machine. (This patent includes composing and distributing 513, .machines.)
  - 3 Mossmer, J. Types with crosses or squares 5458 for printing embroidery patterns. Richford, E. M. Rubber typewheels for 5746 I hand-stamps.
  - 1 Hanscom, P. L. Numbering-machine; con-secutive or repeating indefinitely.
  - on U- - -+ O N H 4 AUA S 2°
  - 1882.
  - 67 Blum, E. B. Datinghand-stamp.
  - °3 Sowler, T., and Ward, W. Stereotypes with sunken edges to avoid the formation of IL - burrs.
  - Parsonage, C. Making stereotypes from flong-matrices.
  - Hagemann, H. Impression machine.
  - Liwczak, J. Casting and composing chains of threaded type.
  - toad, J. Sulphur composition for making
  - 8 0i IQ HO 00 00
  - 184 surf ace-printing blocks. .
  - Heuse, J. A., and Jouanny, G. Curving .electrotypes or stereotypes. ..
  - Meisenbach, G. Photomechanical printing; uses a hatched transparent plate moved one or more times during the taking of the negative from which a typographic block 38-5 t is made.
  - Low, A. A., and Johnson, L. K. Type-cases for assisting hand-composition.
  - 1NU.
  - 3879 Brackelsberg, E. W. Composing apparatus, and distributing apparatus.
  - 4071 Haigh, W. C. Gelatinous or rubber composition for printing-blocks for posters.
  - 4258 Low, A. A., and Johnson, L. K. Composing and distributing apparatus.
  - 4560 Delcambre, I., and Riesz, V. Composing and distributing apparatus.
  - 4749 Silvestre, J. A. Nickel-plating zinc plates or stereotypes.
  - 4789 Kolk, H. J., Gursch, C. A. J., and Klemm, C. H. J. Type-metal formed with iron; platinum, palladium and osmium used for facing the type.
  - 5004 Saule, E., and Durozoi, M. Type-distributing.
  - 5474 Taylor, W. W. Mounting stereotypes.
  - 5847 Thompson, C. H., and Thompson, C. W. Hand-stamps for recording time.
  - 5907 Berger, E. Type-dressing machine. 6129 Taylor, J. E., Allen, P., Evans, W., and Scott, C. P. Securing movable type in stereotype-plates.
  - 6188 Anthony, E. Curved flong-matrices for stereotypes.
  - 1883.
  - 997 Wyvill, F. C. Type-distributing.
  - 1104 Cooke, G. K. Hand-stamps for band of rubber type.
  - 1508 Marinoni, H., and Michaud, J. Trimming and shaving curved stereotype-plates.
  - 1665 Davids, C. H. Impression machine.
  - 1851 Lewthwaite, J. Apparatus for numbering railway-tickets, etc.
  - 1954 Gibergues, M. de, Soc. de Typographie par Procedes Rapides. Type-cases for assisting hand-composition.
  - 2231 Posselt, L., and Schimansky, H. Preparing flong for making matrices for stereotypes.
  - 2439 Eaton, G. S. Type-dressing machine.
  - 2531 Hepburn, J. M. Typecasting machine.
  - 2676 Black, J. M. Numbering tickets, etc., consecutively.
  - 2826 Hodgson, T. T. Mounting stereotype-plates.
  - 2981 Ortiz, F. B. y. Impression machine.
  - 3267 Cooke, G. K. Hand-stamps.
  - 3476 Brown, R., Barnes, R. W., and Bell, J. Photo-mechanical relief plates of electrotype or stereotype; improvement on Woodbury’s process.
  - 3502 Wilson, G. A. Mounting stereotypes. 3625 King, T., and Wilson, R. Numbering strip-tickets.
  - 3733 Dement, M. H. Impression machine. | 3734 Dement, M. H. Breaking stereo-bars into type.
  - 3785 Albizu, P. P. y. Typesetting and distributing machine.
  - 4032 Heywood, J., and Ross, R. C. Printers’ galleys with type-locking gear.
  - 1 4114 Sauvee, A. Moulds for casting stereotypes; curved.
  - 4350 Black, J. M. Numbering strip-printed tickets consecutively.
  - 4576 Anders, G. L. Typesetting in a central office and distributing the news to others; electric.
  - 4705 Brown, R., Barnes, R. W., and Bell, J. Producing by photography grained or stippled typographic surfaces.
  - 5778 Benton, L. B. Type of multiples of standard units.
  - 5808 Shields, T. Casting stereotypes with curved blocks in place.
  - 1884.
  - 246 Daw, T. G., and Daw, H. Stereotypematrix machines.
  - 382 Shaw, I. B., Shaw, E. S., and Shaw, W. S. Compound type for printing posters.
  - 383 Shaw, I. B., Shaw, E. S., and Shaw, W. S. Type for transfers cast in the positive form.
  - 385 Shaw, I. B., Shaw, E. S., and Shaw, W. S. Elastic printing-surface of printers’ roller composition.
  - | 1430 Clayson, J. H. Mounting stereotypes and electrotypes.
  - 1682 Cooke, G. K. Hand-stamps.
- p.591 - vue 759/901
- - 592
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1884 {continued).
  - 1992 Laval, A. A. Moulds for typefounding machines.
  - 3447 Moseley, C. Nickel or cobalt plating stereotype-plates.
  - 3484 Black, J. M. Numbering tickets, cheques, etc., consecutively.
  - 3865 James, T. Obtaining typographic impressions from photo-reliefs.
  - 4160 Hilder, C. F., and Cotterell, S. J. A. Stereotype-matrix machine.
  - 5408 Lowe, W., and Cavagna, D. Producing electrotype-moulds in wax.
  - 5490 Kimberley, R. L. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - 5795 Titchener, 0. Casting hollow quads and type-matrix delivery.
  - 5804 Cottrell, C. B. Casting curved stereotypes and backing electrotype-shells.
  - 5958 Bacon, W. R. Numbering strip-tickets.
  - 6318 Fischer, C. G., and Langen, A. von. Type-distributing.
  - 6581 Daw, T. G., and Daw, H. Stereotypematrix machines; paper-feed.
  - 7101 Dixon, G. C. Hand-stamp; holder for india-rubber type.
  - 7642 Nelson, R. W. Securing stereotypes to base-blocks.
  - 8205 Robinson, J. C. Dating, timing and endorsing stamps.
  - 8678 Black, J. M. Numbering strip-tickets consecutively.
  - 9800 Barker, A. J. Stereotype-matrix machine.
  - 10139 Fischer, C. G., and Langen, A. von. Typesetting.
  - 10525 Fraser, A. Type-distributing.
  - 10718 Dement, M. H. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - 10901 Engelen, A. J. Printing-surfaces; stamping relief characters.
  - 11670 Mergenthaler, O. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - 12784 Wicks, F. Rotary typecasting, and improvements thereon.
  - 13002 Baker, A. R. Numbering-mechanism for plane or cylinder presses.
  - 13376 Petch, J., and Marshall, J. Fudge; means for inserting type or logotypes in stereotypes.
  - 13505 Maynes, J. Numbering railway-tickets, cheques, etc.; operates on ten rows simultaneously; drop-ciphers; consecutive.
  - 13640 Iago, C. T. Photo-mechanical relief blocks.
  - 13696 Palmer, W. J. Producing moulds for stereotypes or electrotypes by consecutive application of two plates for outline and shading.
  - 14092 Smith, T. W., and Gamblen, C. J. Hollow metal mounting-block for stereotypes.
  - 14103 Baddeley, F., and Reynolds, W. J. Handstamps; T-shape type with sunk letters in the large end which forms the base.
  - 14378 Hayes, G. Tubular type.
  - 14519 Spark, F. R. Fudge; means for inserting rapidly in stereotypes.
  - 15246 Smith, T. W., and Chitson, R. J. Matrices laid side by side with spacing-pieces between to form phrases or logotypes.
  - 15256 Marinoni, H., and Michaud, J. Mould for casting curved stereotypes.
  - 15368 Oudin, M. A. P., Gudin, H. M. J., and Codig-nola, E. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - 16095 Harrap, G. T. Impression machine.
  - 16585 McCardle, A. Mounting stereotypes; grippers.
  - 1885.
  - 761 Dement, M. H. Stereotype-matrix machine.
  - 1085 Stonhill, W. J. Type of various regular or irregular forms.
  - 1151 White, J. H., and Clephane, J. 0. Stereotype-matrix strip; line-justifying by bending up between the words.
  - 1153 White, J. H. and Clephane, J. O. Preparing printing-surfaces from a series of independent slugs bearing line-justified characters cast in a special slotted mould from a stereotype-matrix sheet.
  - 1726 Foster, J., Foster, F., and Foster, J. Y. Type leads and rules for large-type for posters.
  - 1833 Mergenthaler, O. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - No.
  - 2168 Marshall, A. W., and Smith, O. J. Electrotypes for sending to papers at a distance > plate-matter.
  - 2571 Lagerman, A. Typesetting and distributing:
  - 2688 Brackelsberg, E. W. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - 2729 Wright, E. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - 2823 Mergenthaler, 0. Long vertical bars carrying matrices of all characters, moving UP and down to position before mouldi Linotype machine.
  - 5823 Mergenthaler, O. Linotype and stereotype, matrix machines; assembles lines of independent matrices.
  - 6218 Edmondson, J. B. Renewing types machines for dating railway-tickets. ,
  - 6359 Moussu, B. C. le. Photo-mechanical relier
  - 6398 Reinhardt, J. H., and Schmalzried, G. Type-high numbering-machine; slide in separate compartment from numbering-disks; drop" cipher. .
  - 7417 Fischer, C. G. Typesetting; assisting hand..
  - 7635 Munson, J. E. Typesetting machine; Jac quard system.
  - 8054 Richford, E. M. Rubber-faced type.
  - 8457 Mergenthaler,O. Linotype machines; wedge
  - spaces. .
  - 8539 Colley, W. W., and Hart, M. Numbering railway-tickets, etc.; consecutive.
  - 8995 Dreyer, W. Typesetting machines ; electro magnetic.
  - 9782 Jones, S. Composite large-type for posters. 9854 Codignola, E. Typecasting and setting. .
  - 9899 Carter, J. R. Numbering-machine for hign speed work.
  - 10926 Knowles, W. H. Typesetting; stereotyPe matrix machines. 1.
  - 11528 Knowles, W. H. Plates of soft wood, eno grain, for casting stereotypes.
  - 11648 Knowles, W. H. Type, self-justifying on numericalbasis. .
  - 11737 Welch, F. B. Producing stereotype-matrice by fluid pressure.
  - 11894 Benton, L. B. Punch-cutting machine. . 12621 Titchener, O. Improvements in casting hollow quads.
  - 12776 Taylor, J. A. Type-cases; for large four with logotypes. . .
  - 12777 Taylor, J. A. Apparatus for double matric for logotypes. 1
  - 13328 Smith, T. Moulding-material of sulphur an ground porcelain for stereotypes.
  - 14982 Corsain, H. Mounting stereotypes. 1 15516 Colley, W. W., and Hart, M. Printing an. numbering railway-tickets consecutively.
  - 1886.
  - 1786 Whitaker, D. W., and Lyon, J. E. GalleX lock; toggle levers with right and screws.
  - 1965 Wallace, J. S. Composing-stick, for pierce or double-notched type. .
  - 2624 Johnson, L. K., and Low, A. A. Type-case ‘ for assisting hand-com position. -3672 Bush, E., and Pickersgill, W. Mangle-Preo method for making flong-matrices, 1 stereotypes. .
  - 4427 Black, J. M. Numbering railway-ticket cheques, etc. ; ' disks have eleven faces st provide for blank instead of zero “ figure. .
  - 4657 Baldrige, G. W. Stereotype-matrix machine 4855 Peach, R. W. Double folding-wedge quoins. 5470 Buxton, J. H., Braithwaite, D., and Smith, " Fudge ; box with notched rules. . gc 6383 Thomson, D. C. Stereotypes with engraving-embedded.
  - 7699 Carter, J. R. Duplex numbering-apparar for both sides of paper.
  - 7738 Leland, H. C. Type-distributing. nog 7942 Edmondson, J. B., and Carson, J. Datt and clipping railway-tickets.
  - 8642 Hall, H. C. Machinery and typewheels * consecutively numbering tickets. ite
  - 9000 Konig, E. Rules and quoins for compos blocks of type and electrotypes. and
  - 9115 Mergenthaler, O. Linotype machines 3 stereotype-matrix machines.
- p.592 - vue 760/901
- - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - 593
  - No. 1886 (continued)-
  - °305 Jones, W. Numbering-apparatus; consecu-lot tive.
  - 10522 McMillan, J. L. Typesetting machine.
  - 10233 McMillan, J. L- Type-distributing. Mergenthaler, O. Linotype machines.
  - Langen, A. von, and Fischer, C. G. Type-distributing.
  - 4294 Oldfield, B., and Oldfield, W. Moulds of
  - 1= paper for stereotype-plates for posters.
  - 16420 Hedderwick, P. D- Type-distributing. Law, E. FitzG. Typesetting machines 168. -electrically operated.
  - 03 Chossefoin, A. Type for printing music.
  - 1887.
  - - O (O CO N O
  - N Uti O
  - N
  - 4688
  - 5271
  - 5420
  - 0 co
  - —1 CO 00H H V 0 CO
  - HH e co 00 085
  - oBN O NO COECOUN —0 0
  - Laraway, E. D., and Bridge, E. Wood im-Pregnated with paraffin pressed into type. Kammann, F., and Jurschina, F. Type moulded of finely ground quartz and solution of water-glass.
  - -all, H. C. Numbering railway-tickets, etc.
  - Ward, E., Lock, G., Bowden, J., Lock, J. H., and Wells, H. G. Type for producing pictures or drawings.
  - LOW, A. A. Typesetting.
  - Dallas, J. D. Typesetting; electromagnetic operating.
  - Wogg, T. W., and Jackson, P. J. Gelatine type.
  - 93 Hagemann, H. Typesetting. Adding up lengths of letters and words.
  - Eagerman, A. Typesetting and type-cases.
  - Eastwood, G. Flong-matrices ; coating and backing.
  - Lanston, T. Type; typesetting; ribbon-controlled apparatus; type formed by compression.
  - Smith, O. J. Mounting electrotypes or stereotypes.
  - Little, R. D. de. “White-letter” type for setting up posters.
  - Forte, A. E., and Ritchie, R. 0. Producing effect of superposed design by using light and heavy type, etc.
  - Carlaw, D. Numbering-machine for cheques, etc.; consecutive, with blank spaces on wheels.
  - Law, E. F. Electrically actuating typesetting .machines.
  - Weston, T. R. Stereotype-matrix impressing device.
  - Hawkes, J. M. Mounting-block for clamping 145145 electrotypes or stereotypes.
  - 14518 thorne Machine Co., and Thorne, J. Type-1450 setting and distributing.
  - 9 thorne Machine Co., and Thorne, J. Line-15-1. 0 justifying apparatus.
  - ‘ tandall, C. A. Date- and time-printing 1636, stamps ; operated by electricity and clock.
  - 4 Hoke Engraving Plate Co. Plate with coating cut away to form matrices for 1764 p stereotypes or electrotypes.
  - 19 Toucher, E., and Foucher, A. Typecasting
  - CO
  - - — and -oucuc- - .1 Machines; trimming and grooving.
  - 88
  - 103
  - 201
  - 202
  - 460
  - 1888.
  - Setchell, G. C. Dies and method of making
  - 2066
  - wood-type with pantograph.
  - Davids, C. H. Numbering-apparatus; con-secutive.
  - Setchell, G. C. Dies for wood-type worked in conjunction with pantograph.
  - Page, W. H., and Setchell, G. C. Dies for wood-type.
  - Statham, H. S., and Chudleigh, A. 0. Mounting-block for stereotypes with dove-- tail grooves and catches.
  - 2583 Eagerman, A. Typesetting. .
  - Sergeant, T. A., and Cook, W. E. Mitring
  - 3221 r leads and rules.
  - 324 gelding, W- H. Rules; mitring.
  - 333° Winder, R- Typesetting.
  - 3 Golding, W. H. Cutting
  - 3350 r Printers’ rules.
  - Law, E. F. Typesetting; electrically con-
  - and mitring
  - No. 3918
  - 4822
  - 4939
  - 5712
  - 5989
  - 7308
  - 7515
  - 7912
  - 8178
  - 9244
  - 10214
  - 10704
  - 10736
  - 11621
  - 12079
  - Thorne Machine Co. Typesetting and distributing.
  - McClure, T., and Vivian, J. H. Two-letter logotypes.
  - Eaton, G. S., and Birch, J. C. Type trimming and finishing.
  - Ellis, C. S., and Sturla, J. J. Numbering-mechanism, for locking up in chase; numbers carried on chains.
  - Buxton, J. H., Braithwaite, D., and Smith, M. Fudge ; type-boxes and securing same.
  - Randall, C. A. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - Bensly, F. G., and Cooper, J. Compressed-felt type.
  - Wentscher, E. Typesetting and line-justi-tying.
  - Scott, J. S., and Carroll, A. Stereotypematrix machines.
  - Mills, J. L. Preparing relief-printing surfaces by sand-blast.
  - Schirm, J. W. C. C. Printing-surface of agar-agar and glycerine.
  - Johnson, L. K. and Low, A. A. Type-cases for assisting hand-composition.
  - Rogers, J. R. Stereotype-matrix machine. Sets type in line, uses india-rubber spaces for line-justifying, makes a matrix from it, and distributes the type.
  - Reid, D. Method of fixing stereotypes to base-blocks.
  - Fietsch, H., and Ryan, D. W. Mounting-blocks for locking stereotypes and electro-
  - types.
  - 13378 Winder, R. Type-distributing.
  - 14529 Keehn, F. Typefounding machine.
  - 14845 Patterson, J. and Ashenhurst, T. R. Preparing flong-matrices for stereotypes.
  - 15026 Petch, J. C. and Mussell, T. Fudge; rapidly inserting in stereotypes.
  - 15666 Baker, J. Flong-matrices for stereotypes.
  - 16026 Thompson, T. C. Type coated with glue or glycerine and treacle.
  - 17510 Bundy, W. le G. Hand-stamps for time-recording.
  - 18058 Dow, L. and Powers, D. Type-distributing machine.
  - 92
  - 1889.
  - Hattersley, M. R. L. and A. M. (executors of Hattersley, R.). Typesetting and distributing.
  - Sauvee, A. Casting curved stereotypes with electrotype-blocks in position.
  - Adams-Randall, C. Date- and time-printing
  - 264
  - 1057
  - 1585
  - 2088
  - 2098
  - 2506
  - 3394
  - 3692
  - 4421
  - 4481
  - 6631
  - 7007
  - stamps.
  - Johnson, L. K. and Low, A. A. Type-cases for assisting hand-composition.
  - Dalziel, H. Mounting-blocks for stereotypes or electrotypes.
  - Kustermann, F. H. Typecasting machines.
  - Rogers Automatic Time Stamp Co. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - Martindale, W. B. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - Kustermann, F. H. Typecasting machines.
  - Phillips, J. Numbering-apparatus; consecutive, gear-operated on return stroke.
  - Braunig, J. Type-dressing machine.
  - Manning, J. Machines for bevelling stereotypes, etc.
  - Studders, C. and Kohl, G. Photomechanical plates; holding screens in a revolvable frame.
  - Craven, P. P. Typesetting and distributing machines.
  - Craven. P. P. Typesetting machines.
  - Page, W. H., Wood Type Co. Dies for forming wood-type.
  - Knight, S. P. Blackleading apparatus for electrotype-moulds.
  - . Tissington, R. Thin type for direct photographic or lithographic printing.
  - • Benedict, G. H. and Furlong, P. M. Preparing matrices for curved electrotypes.
  - 7 Petty, W. and Taylor, J. E. Locking up
  - 7146
  - 7147
  - 7637
  - 8047
  - 8504
  - 9687
  - 10967
  - formes.
  - Galley with pivoted side
  - 11346 Cummings, G. W. for releasing type.
  - 2 Q
- p.593 - vue 761/901
- - 594
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1889 (continued).
  - 12617 Thorne Machine Co. Typesetting and distributing.
  - 14418 Higgins, J. F. Typesetting, line-justifying, and distributing machine.
  - 14549 Wynne, W., Topliss, J. R. and Kay, J. A. Type on unit system equal to one-fourth of the em quad.
  - 14918 Clay, R. and Marchant, J. E. Typesetting.
  - 15291 Wynne, W., Topliss, J. R., and Kay J. A. Typesetting, line-justifying, and distributing machine.
  - 15829 Dow, L. Typesetting machine.
  - 16162 Thorne Machine Co. Typesetting and distributing.
  - 16214 Shaw, C. H. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - 16599 Adams-Randall, C. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - 16907 Sinclair, D., Dobbie, J. C. and Malcolm, W. A. Hand-stamps for giving a certain number only of repetitions of impression.
  - 17006 Reid, D. Key for securing stereotypes to base-blocks.
  - 17229 Sturrock, J. and Macdougald, G. D. Apparatus for drying flong-matrices.
  - 17614 Goodson, G. A. Stereotype-matrix machine.
  - 18225 Savage, H. Moulds for producing rubber numbering- and dating-stamps.
  - 18490 Sauvee, A. Flong for stereotype-matrices. 19446 Priddle, E. and Donovan, G. O. Manufacture of type-disks for numbering-machines.
  - 20067 Wentscher, E. Means for correcting composed type.
  - 20114 Priddle, E. and Donovan, G. 0. Typewheels for date-printing or stamping.
  - 20646 Cassagnes, G. A. Printing-telegraph operated by a small number of keys.
  - 20968 Odell, J. B. Typesetting.
  - 1890.
  - 6 Bowditch, F. J. Type of rubber or gelatine incorporated with aniline dye; for hand-stamps.
  - 1521 Tickle, R. P. Mounting stereotypes and electrotypes.
  - 2490 Wehmann, H. and Muller, P. Composition for facing flong-matrices.
  - 3053 Smith, M. Mangle-pressing flong-matrices under two rollers consecutively.
  - 3964 Merritt, J. C. Stereotype mounting-block. 4264 Howell, W. J. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - 4271 Topliss, J. R. and Kay, J. A. Type of set widths multiples of one-fifth of the em quad.
  - 4755 Wehmann, H. Drying frame for flong-moulds.
  - 4911 Topliss, J. R. Type-distributing.
  - 5418 Horn, W. W. Composing-sticks; adjusting movable slide.
  - 5577 Pitcairn, D. Keyboard for typesetting; for striking several keys simultaneously.
  - 5582 Mergenthaler, O. Improvements in linotype machines; “ blower” machine; Linotype.
  - 5903 Healey, R. H. Drying stereotype-matrices.
  - 7093 Hill, J. Mounting-block for holding stereotypes.
  - 7403 Chadwick, J. W. Typesetting; Typotheter. 7455 Goodson, G. A. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - 8093 Odell, J. B. Type-distributing; one key serving three different characters.
  - 9192 Pink, T. Hand-stamps for printing amounts of £s. d.
  - 9677 Botton, G. A. Typesetting. 9705 Bath, J. Hand-stamp for receipt checking.
  - 10008 Topliss, J. R. and Kay, J. A. Machine for grooving or nicking printing-type.
  - 10096 Tissington, R. Flexible printing-surfaces of glycerine and gelatine, etc.
  - 11208 Sturrock, J. and Macdougald, G. D. Drying flong stereotype-matrices.
  - 11439 Kletzker, A. J. Stereotype-matrix machines. 12305 Ball, E. Hand-stamps of rubber for printing and copying music.
  - 13169 Munro, F. P. Expanding quoin for locking up.
  - 13424 Odell, J. B. Typesetting.
  - 13427 Odell, J. B. Typesetting.
  - 13739 Glover, J. M. Time-printing stamps.
  - -O. eft
  - 13740 St. John, R. H. Bars with an edge ot so metal impressed on composed matric ‘ Typobar.
  - 14173 Osborne, J. W. and Edelheim, C. Mak stereotype impressions in flong by co pressed air. :
  - 14257 Lambert, E. J. Numbering-apparatu ‘ repeat or consecutive. „e.
  - 14582 The National Typographic Co. Impro ments in linotype machines. Linotype-
  - 15060 Rogers, J. R. and Bright, F. E. Linotyn. machines; disk wedge-space. Typograp
  - 15182 Bundy, W. le G. Time-printing stamps a hand-stamps.
  - 15215 Dobbie, J. C. Numbering-apparatus; c secutive or repeat two or more times. ith
  - 15391 Sauvee, A. Producing stereotypes * electrotypes inserted in place. lie-
  - 15638 Wentscher, E. Locking-up device for t)P. galleys. me-
  - 15799 Retaux, J. G. and Medawar, J. A. -VP setting and distributing. .
  - 16391 Dillberg, G. and Philp, J. A. StereotyP matrix machines. • and
  - 17804 Fels, A. and Crowle, J. Type-holders channels for typecasting machines. g. 18159 Phillips, J. and Hornby, F. Number of mechanism. Construction of centre type-disk and other components. on.
  - 18468 Jurschina, F. and Gunesch, R. R- With Various substances made into a paste Med, sodium water-glass moulded and harden ‘ for type-moulds and matrices.
  - 18478 Oldroyd, J. P. Hand-stamps for record
  - £s.d. for
  - 18646 Lamp’l, P. J. Vulcanite and cement type
  - posters.
  - 19045 Botton, G. A. Line-justifying apparatus.
  - 19173 Mallonee, J. D. Date- and time-prin
  - 19265 Butter, H. Supporting script on kerned tyre
  - 19529 Fraser, A. Typesetting. rk-
  - 20764 Jaffe, H. Time-printing stamps for wo
  - men’s cards. 100-
  - 20984 Corsa, G. Stereotype-matrix machines ;
  - type machines ; typesetting...
  - 21128 Hooker, J. Typesetting and distributing-
  - 130 672
  - 1951
  - 2344
  - 2361
  - 2733
  - 3092
  - 3361
  - 3818 3839
  - 4973
  - 5274
  - 5767
  - 5971
  - 7039
  - 7162
  - 7329 8852
  - 9218
  - 9260
  - 9337
  - 9797
  - Sherwood, E. P. Stereotype-matrix machines: Landsberg, V. and Kohler, P. StereotyP. matrix machines.
  - Allen, J. H., Newton, C. D. O. and Motling E. W. Hand date- and time-print stamps. .e, Johnson, F. A. and Crane, W. E. Linotyi. stereotype-matrix and like machines. nti-Alzugaray, J. B. Type of aluminium, a mony, and their salts. .
  - Hempel, H. A. and Dingens, J. A. Quoin: pairs, wedge-shaped, with rack teeth. for
  - Bundy, W. le G. Time-printing stamps tell-tales. Lines;
  - Electric Typographic Co. Linotype mac-stereotype-matrix machines. Iines, Hargrave, T. C. Stereotype-matrix macmiire Wolfe, J. C. Mounting-blocks and furni for electrotypes and stereotypes.
  - Wilson, J. C. Date- and time-printing Ste for telltales. iting
  - Standiford, E. C. and Hyers, S. A. Typeset, machine. . petal
  - Badoureau, E. Combined wood and mounting-blocks for stereotypes, etc. . for Dodge, P. T. Matrices with two strikes casting two slugs simultaneously. mime English, J. C. and Burnett, R. L. -printing stamps for telltales. con” Kucharz, L. Numbering-apparatus; secutive or repeated. Wicks, F. Typesetting machine. . with Flinsch, H. Type for printing script supported kerns. reo” Sturrock, J., and Macdougald, G. D. S type flong-matrix drying-press ; hot aw-
  - Gustafson, J. Typesetting; Typotheter: English, J. C. Time-printing stamps. opes Hoggson, S. H. and Stevenson, W. H. Amps, mounted on a belt for time-printing st
- p.594 - vue 762/901
- - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - 595
  - O O000* O0 0000N e 4
  - OTO 01 L NT INNAO 00
  - —O O10 HY000 oor 400OHNN 0 c COd 1 1 1
  - 1891 (continued).
  - co co — -0 0 U O0 N HO N N O NO H U1 O OU
  - N N NN 06 C°C
  - Mitchell, A. S., and Nutter, J. Machine for numbering sheets consecutively, etc.
  - Kerridge, T. H., Lane, C. E., and Lane, A.
  - - Type-distributing.
  - Redfield, C. L. Machine for cutting type-dies.
  - Godwin, B. Script type with rectangular faces and squaring-up spaces.
  - Wetter, J. Hand numbering-stamps; con-r secutive or repeat.
  - Bates, E. G. Hand numbering-stamps; con-r secutive or repeat once or indefinitely.
  - Beals, E. V. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - Warwick, B. W. Date- and time-printing • stamps operated from a central clock.
  - Reid, D. Mounting stereotypes and electro-c types.
  - Scott, J. S., and Mills, F. B. Linotype and - like machines ; stereotype-matrix machines. Ward, W. Forming stereotypes without c superfluous metal at edges.
  - Stoesser, A. D., and Stoesser, A. Backing up a and curving electrotypes.
  - Griffith, W. Sidesticks or furniture of two . Sliding parts.
  - Buck, T. S. Hand-stamps.
  - Mowers, E. P., Murray, T. P., and Grovenor, M. L. Quoins, two frames and two opposed + wedges with rack teeth.
  - Daw, T. G., and Daw, H. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - Auerbach, R. Numbering-apparatus with .sliding box and typewheels.
  - Mackenzie, J. W. Special nicking machines for cutting distributing-nicks in type.
  - Wright, C. Hand-stamps for printing ad-1 dresses.
  - Kay, J. A. Typesetting machine.
  - otto, P. Pantograph; three-dimensional for s engraving matrices, seals, etc.
  - Ketaux, J. G., and Medawar, J. A. Type-1912 —setting and distributing.
  - 9 Wicks, F. Matrices with body of hard-metal I910, • and strike in soft-metal.
  - 2 tavyer, J. G. Machines for casting and dress-20510 min type; pivotal. tachytype Manufacturing Co. Linotype and 2002 mike machines ; stereotype-matrix machines. 21342 McMillan, J. L. Type-distributing. 22366 Mdell, J. B. Type-distributing. ammen, O., Hagelmoser, R., Mosig, R., and Mosig, E. Short-types mounted on bases 2238- e for printing.
  - Symonds, F. H., and Garner, A. B. Time-2242= + Printing stamps.
  - ° podge, P. T. Linotype and like machines ; Supplying melting-pots automatically with - metal.
  - veland, H. C. Distributing type. . . McMillan, J. L. Typesetting and line-justifying.
  - 416
  - onoc Co I O N&H -000 O
  - O0 or 1 * CO 0( 1, 00 «
  - ML 1892.
  - JL. Matrix of thin sheet-lead backed rubber, etcer for stereotypes in celluloid, ‘Pelle, Electrotypes prepared by de-baaleing thin copper, thin nickel or iron and Baaecking with copper.
  - - marreau, E. Mounting-block of wood and 3239 Alfarcal for stereotypes.
  - 2081 Ker w Stereotype-matrix machines. diame Printing-surfaces produced by boamin on a wax-coated lead or card-chicard sheet and electrotyping.
  - matrix Matrix Machine Co. Stereotype-HOReix machines. .
  - Grothe * type-setting machines.
  - Claremont Adjustable typecasting apparatus, surface 3 — tinfoil pressed into a framed electrotspeaunted on glass, drawn upon and Task.S. S. Hand-stamps.
  - maci. and Watkinson, C. J. Casting, Michaud in and straightening printer’s leads. type 1 J.Making and registering stereo-Pes combined with electrotypes. 5
  - No.
  - 7139 Fowler, J. C. Linotype and like machines; spring-spacers.
  - 8056 Worbey, T. G. Scales engraved upon cellu-loid matrices are electrotyped and used for printing.
  - 9300 Mitchell, W. Electrically heated matrix-press for stereotypes.
  - 9386 Bentzien, J. R. L. Recessed type for hand-stamps.
  - 10324 Sears, C. Stereotype-matrix machine for impressing a line of characters in a matrix blank adapted for casting linotype-slugs.
  - 11165 Linotype Co. and Place, J. Linotype and like machines; projection on matrix to preserve the strike of the preceding matrix from injury.
  - 13524 Hilder, C. F. Type-distributing. 13524A Hilder, C. F. Typesetting machines.
  - 14548 Linotype Co. and Place, J. Matrices with characters on both sides; " Janus’.
  - 15494 Annand, R. C. Drying stereotype-matrices. 15573 Hinshillwood, T. K. Typecasting.
  - 15574 Fels, A. Matrices for typecasting machines.
  - 15907 Gallice, E. Type rules, leads, etc., of alu-minium or aluminium alloy.
  - 17236 Heath, T. T. and Verdin, A. N. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - 17265 Hoggson, S. H., and Stevenson, W. H. Date-and time-printing stamps ; electro-magneti-cally operated.
  - 17606 Place, J., and Linotype Co. Strengthening spacers by longitudinal ribs.
  - 18579 McCarter, T., and Starrett, S. Quoins of two opposed wedges and rack teeth.
  - 18651 Fels, A. Improvements in typecasting and finishing machines; body-slide.
  - 18652 Bates, E. G. Numbering-machines; type-high for consecutive numbering, with locking action.
  - 19150 Bullock, C. Apparatus for trimming and finishing type.
  - 19549 Warwick, B. W. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - 19642 Blake, R. A. Linotype, stereotype-matrix and like machines; improvements in spacers.
  - 20094 Kletzker, A. J., and Goesel, J. G. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - 20121 Martin, W. H., and MacCoy, J. S. Date- and time-printing stamps for telltales.
  - 20131 Maynes, A. W. Linotype and like machines; forming linotype-slugs and line-justifying by compression.
  - 20730 Gursch, J. M. H. Hollow metal-furniture with corrugated plate cast in place.
  - 22207 Carr, L. and Southey, G. Numbering-appa-ratus for printing on a travelling web.
  - 1893.
  - 299 Praunegger, F., and Toobe, H. L. B. Type-setting and distributing machines.
  - 534 Barnes, W. F. Type for making rubber stamps.
  - 754 Sears, C. Linotypes; casting a composite slug.
  - 888 Eastwood, G. Stereotype flong-press with hot-air drying.
  - 1392 Wiberg, K. E. Numbering-apparatus for loose sheets or continuous paper.
  - 1456 Hooker, P. Machine for numbering tickets.
  - 2011 Partridge, A. Paging- and numbering-machine.
  - 2915 Titchener, O. Typecasting machines.
  - 3425 Warburton, E. and Warburton, H. Type-setting and distributing.
  - 3681 Savage, H. Hand-stamp.
  - 3791 Levy, M. Photomechanical screens attached face-to-face.
  - 4614 Higgins, F. H. W. Vulcanized rubber type for covering telegraphic typewheel.
  - 4747 Dupont, J. A. and Lambert, E. Numbering bonds; numbers are carried on the plane faces of concentric rings and follow according to a key or index.
  - 4769 Lavender, H. P. Numbering-mechanism; consecutive.
  - 5074 Rodwell, G. J. B., Moore, S. J., and Secord, H. C. Printing-surfaces for rubber-stamps.
- p.595 - vue 763/901
- - UL O O
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1893 (continued).
  - 5702 Davis, G. A. Drying stereotype-matrices; gas-heated cylinder.
  - 5896 Maisey, A., and Dingley, W. Sidestick with multiple opposed-wedge faces and two sets of wedges actuated by right and left screws.
  - 6442 Jackson, A. J. Stamps; hand- or treadle-operated.
  - 6914 Low, A. A. Typesetting apparatus.
  - 6938 Haynes, J. I. Typesetting machine.
  - 7584 Dubeux,G.A. Means for fixing linotype-slugs on cylinders.
  - 8155 Pavyer, J. G. Typecasting and finishing machine.
  - 8364 Foucher, A. Typecasting machine; Duplex.
  - 8527 Sharpe, J. Date- and time-printing stamp.
  - 9457 Adshead, G. H. Stereotype-matrix of asbestos.
  - 9904 Lowe, W. G. Dating and numbering consecutively pawntickets, etc.
  - 10002 Hart, G. W. Machines for setting types in lines and taking stereotype-matrices.
  - 11523 Houten, F. R. van. Apparatus for making rubber-faced type.
  - 11621 Bishop, W. W., and Bishop, J. McE. Typesetting machines; bifurcated type to slide on carrier.
  - 14624 Hilder, C. F. Type-distributing machine. 16200 Scudder, W. S. Space-bars for slug-casting and like machines. Monoline.
  - 17135 Scudder, W. S. Machine for casting lines of type. Monoline.
  - 17677 Smith, M. Stereotypes combined with other printing-surfaces; curved.
  - 17853 Meray-Horvath, C. Stereotype-matrix machine. Perforated strip machine controlled electrically.
  - 18622 Edwards, D. Fudge-box for rapid insertion of slugs.
  - 19265 Smith, T. W., and Ross, F. Galleys with wedge faces locking-up device.
  - 19511 Healey, R. H. Apparatus for use in drying stereotype-matrices.
  - 21143 Sears, C. Stereotype-matrix, etc., machines. Method of line-justifying lines of matrices or types.
  - 21614 Banks, B. R. Rotary typecasting machine. 21921 Barth, H. Casting types with grooved bodies in a body-slide mould.
  - 22732 Eastwood, G. Stereotype-matrices.
  - 23510 Foot, J. E. T. Typecasting machine. Six pivotal moulds revolving on a drum.
  - 23849 Schulze, F. W. Typesetting machine. 23940 Place, J., Girod, E., and Linotype Co. Im-provementsinmatrix-magazines. Linotype.
  - 24288 Bright, F. E. Linotype machines. Preventing casting when too few or too many matrices are set.
  - 24966 Latimer, R. J. Backing up electrotypes. 1894.
  - 1069 Crocker, S. H. Producing matrices for relief-printing by drawing in adhesive ink, placing a rubber film in contact, and distending the loose parts by fluid pressure.
  - 4453 Watson, G., Watson, A. E., and McLaren, A. Numbering-machine with chain of blocks for consecutive printing.
  - 4986 Wicks, F. Improvements in rotary type-casting.
  - 6218 Allen, C. E. Electric keyboards for type-setters.
  - 6420 Taylor, W., Taylor, T. S., and Hobson, H. W. Pantograph engraving-machine.
  - 6541 Salomon, J. Type-distributing.
  - 7065 Hattersley, M. A. M., and R. L. Typesetting and distributing.
  - 7909 Hill, J. Mounting-block for stereotype-plates.
  - 8200 Beck, O., and Beck, O. Composing-stick.
  - 8258 Whittaker, M. H. Trimming-knives and type-blocks. Linotype.
  - 8504 Fraser, A., and Ross, F. Type-distributing.
  - 8513 Whitehead, W. Typewheel mechanism of time-printing stamps.
  - 9101 Werner, E. Stereotype-matrix machine.
  - 9384 Linotype Co., and Sigurdsson, O. V. Ejector blades; Linotype.
  - 9695 Martindale, W. B., and Brackett, L. M. Date-and time-printing stamps; operated pneumatically.
  - No.
  - 10167 Hilder, C. F. Typesetting machines. . .
  - 10257 Whittaker, M. H. Forming two-line capitals on type-slugs.
  - 10348 Calendoli, V., and Savarese, A. Short type-with grooves or recesses for sliding on a bar of correspondingly headed section.
  - 10349 Calendoli, V., and Savarese, A. Typesetting machines.
  - 10921 McMillan, J. L. Typesetting machines. 11589 Lowendahl, V. Drawing in pencil on aluminium; depositing electrolyticallyp the pencil lines; dipping to alloy deposited metal with the molten metali raising from bath ; cooling and removing
  - aluminium. .
  - 11716 Hughes, A. T. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - 11839 Levy, M. Photomechanical printing screens-12718 Gent, J. T., Staveley, A. W., and Parsons, I. H. Time-printing stamps for telltales.
  - 13351 Johnson, L. K., and Low, A. A. Typesetting machines. .. x
  - 13676 Cordeaux, W. Producing designs in relie on foil and printing therefrom.
  - 14459 Spear, M. H. Numbering-machine; larg ' wheel, driven by eccentric. , ,
  - 14525 Porzsolt, E. Photographing the letters 1 printing-matter successively on a plate be used as a photomechanical printing' 14695 Johnson, L. K., and Low, A. A. Typesetting apparatus; assisting hand.
  - 15644 Healey, R. H. Apparatus for drying stere type-matrices.
  - 15821 Thompson, G. H. Hand-stamps. 17517 Vorreiter, A., and Mullendorff, E. .TXP setting; line-justifying and distributing machine; electric. s
  - 18744 Coghill, A. S. Means for fixing stereotype or other plates in formes.
  - 18916 Vorreiter, A. E., and Mullendorff, E. . TyP setting, line-justifying and distributing
  - 19026 pages j"W. "Setting and like machines J engaging-device for clutches.
  - 19143 Farmer, W. W. Type-dressing machine. 19200 Salomon, J. Typesetting and line-justityme.
  - 20176 Weaver, G. W. Type for imitating writing; fine intersecting lines on facepig
  - 21335 Cox Typesetting Machine Co. Typesett
  - machines. de-
  - 21728 Capehart, A. S. Producing electrically posited matrix-bars. Monoline. : 22428 Johnson, L. K., and Low, A. A. Typesetting' assisting hand. .
  - 22921 Linotype Co., and Holliwell, C. Trimmy knives; Linotype. hts
  - 23130 Linotype Co., and Girod, E. Improveme in casting-mechanism ; Linotype. Ding 23243 Bundy, W. le G., and Bundy Manufacture Co. Time-printing stamps for telltales. 1.
  - 23471 Linotype Co., Ireland, C. L., and Place, Linotype shifting-mechanistn. eral 23578 Sears, C. Making ready by the use of SeYare sheets of plastic paper some of which removed.
  - 23684 Goodson, G. A. Type-composing, Castrol and setting mechanism; electric con from strip perforations. ang-
  - 24264 Eastwood, G. Press for making " matrices for stereotypes. ant-
  - 24603 Dodge, P. T. Linotype escaper mechanism. es;
  - 24604 Dodge, P. T. Justification of type-matrix
  - Linotype. zine
  - 24605 Mergenthaler, 0. Improvements in maga
  - etc.; Linotype. line
  - 24702 Mergenthaler, 0. Production of two initial letter; Linotype. ants
  - 24870 Place, J., and Linotype Co. Improver in moulding-mechanism.
  - Fowler, J. machines.
  - Smith, R. type.
  - Linotype Co.,
  - 473
  - 858
  - 1389
  - 1895.
  - C. Typecasting and set
  - H. Hand-stamp; removah , and Wich, F. J. Automatica
  - moving trimming-knives; Linotype-
- p.596 - vue 764/901
- - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - 597
  - 3009
  - 3574
  - 4037
  - 4119
  - 4754
  - 5240
  - 5718
  - c O O
  - 0000 0 0.00 VoC
  - 00 o
  - CO
  - 6
  - 00
  - o o crier HO HN0 co o HO CO 0000 H Nto O1 1O 1 1 10 1 1 CO co CO 00 00 0000
  - C S
  - No. 1895 (continued).
  - 2543 Maskelyne, j N. Iron type made by hy-„ draulic pressure.
  - 39 Sauvee, A. Casting-boxes for curved stereo-25 -types.
  - 049 Linotype Co., Girod, E., and Thomason, W. C.
  - 25=. t Adjusting length of mould ; Linotype.
  - 4 lachytype Manufacturing Co. Typecasting and composing machine; controlled by perforated strip; Tachytype.
  - Linotype Co., and Fletcher, W. Adjustable moulds.
  - Cox Typesetting Machine Co. Typesetting machines.
  - Meray-Horvath, C. Stereotype-matrix .machines. Electric and strip-controlled.
  - Meray-Horvath, C. Stereotype-matrix .machines. Electric contact strips.
  - Wentscher, E. Typesetting; method of eline-justifying lines of type.
  - Cleazer, p. j. Hand-stamp with type arranged in holders on a wheel for rolling. tachytype Manufacturing Co. Manufacture of mechanical controllers ; perforated strip ; Lachytype.
  - Alexander, A. H. Moulds for casting lines R of type.
  - Rogers, J. R. Matrix-composing; linotype machines.
  - Dodge, P. T. Linotype machines. Space bars; stepped; Linotype.
  - —ergenthaler, O. Linotype machines; —spacing lines of type.
  - Woodruff, C. P. Linotype machines; compressible space-bars, with expanding springs sibetween the members; Linotype.
  - Katulla, C. Linotype machines; means for controlling the action of the pump for lines composed too short; Linotype.
  - Pson, P. L. Linotype machines; control-ting delivery of space-bars into assembly block ; Linotype.
  - Calendoli, V., and Savarese, A. Typesetting machines.
  - tears, C. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - C. F. Typesetting; assisting in line-Whiteley, H. D. Moulding large rubber-type, "notype Co., and Ireland, C. L. Strengthen-L lng matrices; Linotype.
  - MoWr A. A. Typesetting; assisting hand. other, L. F. Linotype machines; leading mechanism; Linotype. eenleisen, C. Linotype machines; means spacing ; Linotype.
  - P. T. Linotype machines; justi-poing lines of assembled matrices ; Linotype, age, P. T. Linotype machines ; means for popacing lines of matrices ; Linotype.
  - oge,P. T. Linotype machines ; providing peditional or sorts matrices; Linotype.
  - 80, P. T. Linotype machines ; regulating wleat of melting-pot; Linotype.
  - erenthaler, O. Rendering length of mould-s.savity adjustable; Linotype.
  - Nee, A. Casting-box f°r flat stereotypes, ational Typographic Co. Additional maga-I for sorts ; Linotype.
  - Otype Co., and Ireland, C. L. Linotype s.moulds; Linotype.
  - plmansky, H. Dry-flong matrix for stereo-ttypes.
  - S. H., and P. E. Typesetting vachines; Pulsometer.
  - aise-, F. . Numbering-machine; for both Cart 5 of slips consecutively.
  - see, J. R. Numbering-machine ; for both Meh as of slip consecutively.
  - » F. Numbering-apparatus; consecu-walye, for rotary machines.
  - peter, G. Large wooden type for posters, notype Co- and Wich, F- J. Linotype Linsinei interchangeable ejector-blades; Linotype Co., Ireland, C- L., and Wich, F- J. 14366 walls trimming mechanism ; Linotype. . TtScher, E. W. Typesetting machines; 14497 s.line-justifying. zorgnan, D. di B. Postmarking machine; or coin-freed letter-box.
  - 1 H t 01
  - co co 0,00 VN No NN HI OON - N CO HO
  - No.
  - 15700 Linotype Co. Means of raising and lowering assembly-block; Linotype.
  - 15948 Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Mechanism of mould-wheel slide ; Linotype.
  - 16727 Schreier, E., and Auerbach, R. Numbering-mechanism; actuating wheels by pressure on the face of the block; moving the block bearing the abbreviation “ No.”
  - 17868 Hallet, A. Coating face of composed-type with silk, etc., to produce imitation of typewriting.
  - 17955 Linotype Co., and Fletcher, W. Ejector-mechanism ; Linotype.
  - 18886 Dodge, P. T. Linotype machines; matrices with duplex or multiple characters, one roman and one italic ; Linotype.
  - 19530 Giroud, P. G. Date-and time-printing stamps. 20181 Bonsch, J. Hand-stamp with curved printing-surface, for marking cases by rolling.
  - 20318 Linotype Co., Ireland, C. L., and Wich, F. J. Trimming two-line letter; Linotype.
  - 20778 Wright, D. Clamps for securing stereotypes.
  - 21075 Hughes, G. R. Facing linotype-slugs with harder metal electro-deposited.
  - 21366 Deville, E. G. D. Producing photomechanical screens of chess-board pattern by two exposures through pin-holes and an intermediate heavily cross-ruled plate.
  - 22478 Holdsworth, F. Type-distributing machine.
  - 22584 Cox Typesetting Co. Type-distributing machine.
  - 22825 Linotype Co., and Girod, E. Making new linotype-slugs appear old.
  - 24154 Johnson, L. K., and Low, A. A. Typesetting; assisting hand.
  - 24167 Thiele, H. Numbering-head; consecutive.
  - 24182 Hoe, R. Mounting flat or curved stereotype-plates.
  - 24705 Gressitt, J. H., and Fox, H. W. Hand-stamps. 25032 Sigurdsson, O. V. Pantographing type for a former from enlargement thrown on glass.
  - 1896.
  - 202 Placet, E. Chromium alloy for type.
  - 217 Richford, E. M. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - 992 Abbot, H., and Currier, E. A. Time- and date-printing stamps with money record.
  - 1355 Hughes, G. R. Typesetting ; scale for reading length of line.
  - 2009 Hilder, C. F. Compressible spaces of bent sheet-metal.
  - 2557 Heath, T. T. Machine for cutting type or steel punches direct.
  - 2559 Heath, T. T., and Verdin, A. N. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - 2817 Reeves, T. Case for printers’ furniture with inclined trays.
  - 2857 Linotype, Co., Ireland, C. L., and Wich, F. J. Vice-jaws; Linotype.
  - 2934 Meray-Horvath, C. Electric contact-strips for typesetting.
  - 3114 West, J. Typecasting machines; carbon plungers for pumps.
  - 3126 National Typographic Co. Space-bands; Linotype.
  - 3154 Whiteley, H. D. Type for posters.
  - 3293 National Typographic Co. Pump-stop mechanism; Linotype.
  - 3294 National Typographic Co. Keyboardmechanism; Linotype.
  - 3552 Young, C. Pen for applying molten wax to a glass typographic-etching plate.
  - 5621 Linotype, Co., Ireland, C. L., and Wich, F. J. Adjustable moulds; Linotype.
  - 6170 Linotype Co., Ireland, C. L., and Wich, F. J. Tapered moulds for slugs for cylinders; Linotype.
  - 6265 Gardner, J. Hand-stamps. 6845 Hodgkin, S. H., and Hodgkin, P. E. Typesetting machine; means for ejecting type ; Pulsometer.
  - 7189 Cummins, W. J. Mounting-block for electrotypes, etc. .
  - 7399 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Typecasting and setting machine; Monotype.
  - 8082 Bohensky, J. Hand-stamps.
  - 8166 National Typographic Co. Trimming-mechanism ; Linotype.
- p.597 - vue 765/901
- - 00 O 10
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1896 (continued).
  - 8302 National Typographic Co. Adjustable moulds ; Linotype.
  - 8603 Sherer, G. W. Spaces of thin sheet metal for line-justifying.
  - 9334 Ritzema, T. P. Trimming-mechanism; Linotype.
  - 9438 Linotype Co., and Ireland, L. M. Trimming-mechanism ; Linotype.
  - 9858 National Typographic Co. Ejector-mechanism; Linotype.
  - 9859 National Typographic Co. Distributing-mechanism; Linotype.
  - 10374 Linotype Co., and Place, J. Star-wheel mechanism ; Linotype.
  - 12170 Lartirana, A. Automatic engraving machine for relief plates.
  - 13237 Johnson, L. K., and Low, A. A. Type channels ; assisting hand-composing.
  - 13591 Linotype Co., and Wich, F. J. Curved slugs ; Linotype.
  - 13592 Linotype Co., Place, J., and Pearce, H. Delivery spout of metal-pot; Linotype.
  - 13884 Houten, F. R. van. Hand-stamps with yielding backing.
  - 13890 The Stenotype Co. One-machine mechanism for automatically setting a line of type, taking an impression from it, distributing the type, and permitting composition of the succeeding line to proceed while the first is being distributed.
  - 14453 Forth Graphotype Co. Linotype machines.
  - 14878 Prinetti Stucchi and Co., and Ricchieri, G. Typesetting and distributing machines.
  - 15490 Valk, C. C. van der. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - 15606 Reifgraber, J. J. Transmitting from perforated strips telegraphically and receiving as a stereotype-matrix or as a perforated strip for operating a typesetting machine.
  - 15607 Reifgraber, J. J. Punching perforated strip for telegraphic type-composing.
  - 16612 Linotype Co. Matrices for rules, dashes, etc.; Linotype.
  - 16623 Bright, F. E. Improvements in casting; Linotype.
  - 16752 Balls, P. T. Trimming-mechanism; Linotype.
  - 17816 Mergenthaler, O. Intermittent casting; Linotype.
  - 17817 Mergenthaler, 0. Spacing and line-justifying and casting and trimming ; Linotype.
  - 17882 Golding, W. H. Cutting printer’s rules and leads.
  - 17990 Rogers, H. R. Proving lines as cast; Linotype.
  - 18227 Converse, F. B. Typesetting and distributing.
  - 18718 Burg, H. Typesetting, line-justifying and distributing machine.
  - 18748 Cahill, T. Impression machine.
  - 19118 Leonard, E. G. Linotype and like machines; arrangements for tabular work; Linotype.
  - 19878 Boyes, J. T. Type-distributing machine. 20230 Litchfield, W. Types for typewriters to give different characters according to force of striking.
  - 20785 Ullmer, F. Printers’ leads; making by casting and hot-rolling.
  - 21452 Wynne, W. Trimming-mechanism; Linotype.
  - 22214 Griffin, T. Furniture and quoins of combined wood and metal.
  - 22822 Braly, A., and Braly, L. Hand-stamps. 23397 Pierpont, F. H. Microscope with camera lucida for delineating type-faces.
  - 23590 Catherall, T. H. Linotype machines; trimming-mechanism; Linotype.
  - 25937 Place, J. Linotype machines; mouths for metal-pot, multiple discharge; Linotype.
  - 26636 Dow, A. Type-distributing machine.
  - 26648 Linotype Co., and Girod, E. Distributing-mechanism ; Linotype.
  - 26649 Linotype Co., and Lawless, P. C. Ejecting-mechanism; Linotype.
  - 28078 Bates, G. A. Trimming-mechanism; Linotype.
  - 28079 Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Mould-wheel mechanism ; Linotype.
  - 28080 Fairchild, B. L. Means for justifying typematrices; Linotype.
  - 28081 Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Pump-stoP mechanism; Linotype. .
  - 28399 Catherall, T. H. Linotype machines ; casting type-slugs of varying heights; Linotype.
  - 28460 Delaze, C. Limestone and silicate of potasi for making type.
  - 29348 Beatty, H. A., and Wheeler, G. H. Comas posing-stick with alternative sets of notch for setting to multiples of different units-
  - 29924 Eyre, G. E. B., Spottiswoode, W. H., Spotts woode, C. A., and Passingham, EJ Process blocks; imposing fine conically pointed wires on a photographic relief.
  - 1897.
  - 505 Linotype Co., and Place, J. Alining matrices ‘ Linotype. 1
  - 506 Linotype Co., Lock, W. H., and Place, Moulding-mechanism ; Linotype. 0 3168 Reed, J. Linotype machines; identify10® slugs; Linotype. , .. 4517 Linotype Co., and Wich, F. J. Trimming, mechanism for slugs with two-line letters, Linotype.
  - 4518 National Typographic Co. Trimmine mechanism; Linotype. . .
  - 4766 National Typographic Co. Two-line trimmio mechanism. ble
  - 5006 Wicks, F. Line-justifying with compresstei
  - spaces.
  - 5436 Linotype Co., and Pearce, H. Distributing mechanism; Linotype. 1.
  - 5570 Cox Typesetting Machine Co. Type-0 tributing machine.
  - 6165 Scotford, L. K. Hand-stamps. . 7509 Capehart, A. S. Linotype machine > matrices; Monoline, etc. elt-
  - 7510 Capehart, A. S. Linotype machines; me ing-pots ; Monoline.
  - 8740 Eaton, G. S. Type-dressing machine. As 9080 Sigurdsson, 0. V. Stereotype-mat machines. ,15.
  - 9326 Rosdestwenskij, A., and Bounimowitch, Typesetting and distributing.
  - 9568 Linotype Co., and Place, J. Improveme in mouth-pieces of metal-pots; LinotyPe'ts 9569 Linotype Co., and Girod, E. Improveme in linotype machines; Linotype. e. 9570 Linotype Co., and Elliott, R. C. Impro ments in matrix-liberation ; Linotype- om-9585 Goodwin, H. Scales for measuring up 00
  - posed matter. ble
  - 11105 Wooltorton, H. H. Hand-stamp; text surface for printing on eggs. ting
  - 11115 Cox Typesetting Machine Co. Typeset" and line-justifying machines, ve-
  - 12213 Linotype Co., and Holliwell, C. ImPT for ments in matrix-delivery mechanism facilitating change of magazine ; Linotynd
  - 12214 Linotype Co., and Girod, E. Moulds ejectors; Linotype. _ Ape
  - 12960 Thorne Typesetting Machine Co. Linolie-and stereotype-matrix machines; 1 justifying mechanism. and
  - 13267 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Casting*
  - composing machines ; Monotype.
  - 13669 Michaud, J. Drying stereotype-matrices- like
  - 13891 Meray-Horvath,' C. Monotype and machines. and
  - 14003 National Cash Register Co. Paging- With numbering-apparatus. Type-disks "for duplex type diametrically opposite duplicate printing. and
  - 14451 Johnson Typesetter Co. Typesetting line-justifying. sing
  - 15498 Bundy Manufacturing Co. Engra machine for printing-surfaces.
  - 15617 Rieder, J. Making electrotype-blocks. . .. 16245 Thorneloe, W. J., and Hardy, T. J. -type machines ; casting short slugs. ng;
  - 16590 Johnson, L. K., and Low, A. A. Typesets assisting hand. Ailed
  - 17430 Davies, C. Fudge-box with three dovet sides.
  - 17469 Wicks, F. Improvements in rotary " casting machines. com
  - 18033 Electric Compositor Co. An electric posing or linotype machine.
- p.598 - vue 766/901
- - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - 599
  - 0 0 —
  - N 0
  - coco OH o 1 co VO OCTO cO CO 001000 0000 C OO o A PHAN N
  - O co 1 1 O) O 1 * 01 N CO O H O NN N N ON
  - ± oo 1.010*1 01 o to
  - V CO H CO H 0000 J.T * m
  - cT C N OTTN 00 1 (O (O
  - * - - * 1,0000 00 O O
  - CONN NNNN N O CO C
  - N ( 1
  - 0 N
  - 1897 (continued).
  - Carr, H. L. Combining half-tone blocks with stereotypes.
  - Campbell Printing Press and Manufacturing Co. Casting and finishing curved stereo-type-plates.
  - Scudder, W. S. Electro-deposit of matrix-bars or matrices; Monoline.
  - Mascord, G. W. Linotype machines ; trim-ming-mechanism; Linotype.
  - Mascord, G. W. Linotype machines; auto-matic trimming-mechanism ; Linotype.
  - Grant, J., and Rothery, G. C. Type of paper or wood-pulp.
  - Alexander, A. H. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - Johnson, L. K., and Low, A. A. Typesetting .machines.
  - Linotype Co., Lewis, W. J., Pearce, H., and Holliwell, C. Improvements in line-justi-T fying mechanism.
  - Linotype Co., Lewis, W. J., and Pearce, H. Cams and cam-stops.
  - Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Monotype keyboard machines.
  - Burk, R. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - Latherail, T. H. Linotype machines; com-Pressible space-bars; Linotype.
  - Smith, J. J. C. Casting bronze type in the form of a comb.
  - Levy, M. Screens for photomechanical plates; opaque squares overlapping at corners; chess board pattern.
  - Sears, C. Casting characters on slugs using lines of matrix-blocks.
  - Soyes, J. T. Typesetting.
  - pandeman, G., and Brown, G. M. Mono-+ type keyboard machines.
  - roung, C. Typographic printing-surfaces .Produced in wax by electricallv heated pen.
  - Linotype Co., and Booty, E. L. ' Matrices for linotype machines.
  - Townshend, W. Means for inserting fudge-linotypes in stereotypes.
  - Legler, A. S. Linotype machines ; preventing wear of star-wheels.
  - ponoline Composing Co. Monoline machine, sierpont, F. H. Spacing-mechanism.
  - plerpont, F. H. Casting apparatus.
  - Txder, J. Composing curved lines; using V -shaped spaces.
  - fall, I. Linotype machines; star-wheels.
  - Ntzema, T. P. Linotype machines; level-mling matrices and spaces.
  - rmpresa Macchina Compositrice Lamonica S Carlanda & Co. Typesetting machine. ears, C. Casting slug-edges on lines of matrix-bars.
  - 668 Sm: 1898. th, W. Machine for composing; casting inaividual type for each key-depression, mserting compressible spaces, and Jine-1202 I spttying by compression.
  - 1273 wioke, O. Hand-stamps. stlaker, M. H. Matrices with a normal ittke and an inverted strike, used turned vraugh r8o° about horizontal axis ; plain pat one end so that inverted matrices are 1905 LeT elevated to distributor; Linotype.
  - W. H., Lawless, P. C., and Chambers, R. 1979 KirbPeEmechanism ! Linotype.
  - seill B. Keyboard mechanism for typc-2138 Nation and stereotype-matrix making. wonal . Typographic Co. Trimming 2139 Limechanism; Linotype.
  - alxpe Co., and Lawless, P. C. Expelling *337 Roebel m mould-cavity ; Linotype.
  - feen, A. Aluminium and other alloys 2904 Lfor type.
  - ratype Co., Place, J., and Barr, M. Electric 3085 Limeating for melting-pots.
  - T’YPe C°- Barr, M., and Lewis, W. J.
  - Wall ovements in matrices with steel side-3135 pegols : Linotype.
  - £- 4, Linotype machines; reflector 3168 Rite essembly-box; Linotype. . wheel mechanishkinotype machines; star-
  - No.
  - 3500 Wetter & Co., J. Type-high numbering-machine with paper-lifter to obviate blurring.
  - 3921 Law, G. H., and Ingle, W. Linotype machines ; distributing-apparatus.
  - 4379 Boyes, J. T. Typesetting and line-justifying. 5385 Dedrick, N. Punch-cutting machine.
  - 5824 Law, G. H., and Ingle, W. Linotype machines; indicating devices.
  - 6117 Ohmer, W. J., and Kelch, W. M. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - 7430 Bolton, W. H., and Bolton, C. H. Hand-stamps for musical characters.
  - 7541 Lock, W. H., and Place, J. Pump; Linotype.
  - 7786 Ritzema, T. P. Linotype machines; casting slugs for fudge-boxes.
  - 7867 Paris, L. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - 8068 Tuerk, A. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - 8228 Lock, W. H., Chambers, R., Dolby, F. C., Elliott, R. C., Heap, W., Holliwell, C., Lewis, W. J., Pearce, H., and Whittaker, M. H. Improvements in linotype assembling-mechanism, line-justification block, vice-screw, space-band delivery, and matrix-lift ; Linotype.
  - 8269 Wicks Rotary Typecasting Co. and Wicks, F. Compressed-air regulator and other improvements ; pawl for type ; mould-sectors.
  - 8586 Ritzema, T. P. Linotype machines; lid of assembly-box.
  - 8722 Lock, W. H., and Nadall, B. Linotype machines; italic matrices.
  - 9246 Burg, H. Machine for dividing a continuous line of composed type for line-justifying by hand.
  - 9381 Towler, C. Fudge-box for receiving linotype-slugs.
  - 9601 MacCoy, J. S. Date- and time-printing stamps for telltales.
  - I 10019 Griffiths, A. Time-printing stamps.
  - 10142 Murray, C. R. Corrugated spaces. 10148 Deubner, J. W. Time-printing stamps.
  - 10267 Lock, W. H., and Pashley, C. W. Holding type-matrix blanks and gauge for setting registers of pivotal moulds.
  - 11033 Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Matrices for columnar-printing with strike at right angles to normal; Linotype.
  - 11238 Cox Typesetting Machine Co. Supplying typesetting machines with corrugated spaces.
  - 11239 Cox Typesetting Machine Co. Type-distributing and lead-discarding.
  - 11396 Landgren, W., and Holm, V. H. Composition backing for electrotypes, etc.
  - 11402 Lock, W. H., Nadall, B., and Barr, M. Metal-pot mechanism; Linotype.
  - | 11615 Lock, W. H., Place, J., and Lewis, W. J. Mechanism for metal-feeding to pot; Linotype.
  - 12633 Paterson, A. Printers’ furniture ; “ Locket.” 13246 Cahill, T. Double magazine machine; Linotype.
  - 13922 Duncan, J. S. Relief zinc, etc., printing-plates prepared by dies and counterparts. 14553 Smith, E. W. Electrotypes and stereotypes obtained from lithographic stone engraved away by sand-blast.
  - 15345 Gilbert-Stringer, H. J. S. Monotype and like machines; Quadrant.
  - 15923 Lock, W. H., Holliwell, C., and Lewis, W. J. Improvements in moulds ; Linotype.
  - 16254 Muehleisen, C. Linotype machines with two magazines and two keyboards; Linotype.
  - 16255 Muehleisen, C. Line-closing mechanism; Linotype.
  - 17302 Dickinson, C. W. Line-justifying type-lines set with temporary wedge-spaces.
  - 17962 Rogers, J. R. Matrices with multiple characters; Linotype.
  - 18041 Manning, J., and Manley, G. Reproducing printing-surfaces by electrotyping.
  - 192233 Smith, R. H. Hand-stamps.
  - 19234 Lock, W. H., Dolby, F. C., and Tattersall, W. Mechanism for releasing space-bands; Linotype.
  - 19713 Muehleisen, C. Separating matrices for distribution to their own magazines ; Linotype.
- p.599 - vue 767/901
- - o
  - 0
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1898 (continued).
  - 20641 Lock, W. H., Speechley, W. R., and Barlow,
  - H. E. Improvements in assembling-mechanism ; Linotype.
  - 20642 Lock, W. H., Place, J., and Pashley, C. W. Engraving machine for punches and matrices.
  - 20888 Lock, W. H., and Barr, M. Apparatus for reproducing the face of a type to a large scale.
  - 21479 Titchener, 0. Driving-gear with dwell for casting quads or large type.
  - 22456 Burg, H. Typesetting; supplying type to composing-machine channels.
  - 23204 Lock, W. H., and Nadall, B. Engraving machine for matrices.
  - 23453 Partridge, A. Paging- and numbering-apparatus, consecutive.
  - 23709 Wicks, F. Composing-stick for line-justifying type set with compressible spaces.
  - 23761 Lock, W. H., and Gardner, H. J. Cleaning indicating-character of matrix ; Linotype.
  - 24011 Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Linotype machine with long matrices hung on rods.
  - 24012 Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Matrices for rod machines.
  - 24305 Hodgkin, P. E., and May, W. Typesetting machine; race-connexion; Pulsometer.
  - 24624 Thorne Typesetting Machine Co. Type-distributing machine.
  - 24911 Day, R. J., and Collins, A. Securing type-blocks to cylinders.
  - 26086 Dedrick, N. Engraving machine for punches and matrices.
  - 27273 Sears, C. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - 27581 National Typographic Co. Casting-mechanism ; Linotype.
  - 27582 Ennisson, W. J. Typesetting and line-justifying.
  - 1899.
  - 375 Albrecht, C. A. Linotype machines; auxiliary magazine and keyboard; Linotype.
  - 617 Lock, W. H., Dolby, F. C., Elliott, R. C., Holliwell, C., and Lawless, P. C. Linotype machines; improvements in magazines and keyboards, changing fount, altering mould-block, advancing metal-pot, etc. Linotype.
  - 617A Lock, W. H., and Lawless, P. C. Securing late-news linotype-slugs. Linotype.
  - 617B Lock, W. H., Holliwell, C., and Lewis, W. J. Securing linotype-slugs for late-news. Linotype.
  - 1587 Converse, F. B. Typesetting; automatic line-justifying.
  - 2181 Bertram, W. E. Monoline machines; improvements.
  - 2720 Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Vice-adjusting mechanism. Linotype.
  - 2721 Lock, W. H., and Wich, F. J. Improvements in adjustable moulds; Linotype.
  - 2959 Tiano, A. Thick flong of paper pulp.
  - 3368 Dowell, A. E. Forming slugs by fusion of lines of single type.
  - 3649 Baine, J. G. Fudge-box for linotype slugs.
  - 3980 Kelly, A. R. Hand dating-stamps.
  - 4052 Wicks, F. Improvements in rotary type-casting machines ; pump.
  - 4289 Murray, C. R. Improvements in typecasting.
  - 4351 Risley, I. Stereotype-matrix and like machines.
  - 4440 Fischer, G. Monoline machines; making matrix-bars.
  - 4523 Guest, A. R., and Richmond, E. T. Arabic type; single-line junction, non-kerning.
  - 4983 Gardam, J. Time-printing stamps for time cards.
  - 4992 Lock, W. H., and Barr, M. Pantograph for cutting formers.
  - 5227 Fraser, A., and Rose, F. Type-distributing.
  - 5632 Gilbert-Stringer, H. J. S., and Wicks, F. Line-justifying type by ejecting spaces.
  - 6143 Derbyshire, H. J. Moulds; Linotype.
  - 6459 Lock, W. H., and Girod, E. Improvements in mould-mechanism ; Linotype.
  - 6706 Hoe, R. Stereotype casting-box.
  - 6927 Savarese, A., and Chateau, J. D. C. Typesetting machine.
  - No. 7691
  - 8633
  - 8634
  - 9487
  - 9643
  - 9644
  - 9645
  - 9951
  - 10779
  - 11410
  - 11712
  - 11753
  - 11778
  - 11878
  - 12082 12217
  - 12530
  - 13168
  - 13555
  - 13683
  - Kraus, A. Stereotype-matrix and lik machines.
  - Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Improve, ments in Monotype casting machines’ Monotype.
  - Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Apparahe for punching record-strips; Monotype keyboard. .
  - Bundy, W. Ie G. Date- and time-printino
  - stamps, vT
  - Lock, W. H., Barr, M., and Isherwood, T Improvements in casting-mechanisin’
  - Linotype.
  - Lock, W. H., and Mosley, F. Adjustaw
  - moulds ; Linotype. r
  - Lock, W. H., Nadall, B., and White, W.
  - Improvements in the production of type matrices; Tachytype. 11. Lock, W. H., and Heap, W. Steel side-war
  - of matrices; Linotype. Cottrell & Sons, Co., C. B. Composite electro type from type and engraving. T Lock, W. H., Holliwell, C., and Lewis, W. J'
  - Late-news linotype-slugs; Linotype. , . Zellenka, R., Kolbinger, J., and Hagyi-Ristd S. Acid-resisting mould-material for casting type. .1 Mohr, F. G. Type-matrices with nice
  - faces. .: Murray, D. Linotype and other machinen' operating keyboards by means of forated strip obtained by telegraphic 0
  - other method. s Widmann, R. Making relief printing-suriac
  - by transfer and etching.
  - Ohmer, W. I. Time-printing stamps. Knaak, F. C. F., and Campbell, J. S. Stere , type-matrix process for forming charact
  - Hodgkin, P. E. and Kenney, G. E. Type
  - distributing. 3.
  - Rogers, J. R. Matrix-assembling and tributing devices ; Typograph. . Davenport, J. Numbering- and markta
  - machines for laundry linen. , a
  - Kley, A. C. Hand-stamp for keyhole-slott
  - type. h
  - 13706 Lock, W. H. and Barr, M. Pantograph 13708/ engraving machines; three-dimensional
  - 13735 Gesellschaft fur Huber Pressung, C. Huber
  - Co. Making stereotype-plates by liq"
  - pressure. for
  - 14400 Burg. H. Type-distributing apparatus 1
  - nicked-type, a
  - 14986 Rouse, H. B. Machine for cutting leads a
  - rules. .
  - 15065 Maybell, S. and Maybell, M. Mounting-blo for stereotypes, etc. 1. of 15575 Linke, E. F. Supplying types to channels distributing machine ; Thorne.
  - 16145 Botz, C. J. Typesetting and line-justifyil 16267 Lock, W. H. and Milner, J. J. Sorting blan
  - for linotype matrices. « 16268 Lock, W. H. and Wich, F. J. Improvemer in magazines and escapements; Linotype 16660 Nydahl, E. F. Type-distribution. hies 16831 Rowntree, T. M. Chase for one or more U of type for margins of newspapers, mag zines, etc.
  - 17060 Hoyweghen, H. C. van. Stereotype-mar machines. ...
  - 17569 Knaak, F. C. F.and Campbell, J. S. justifying appliances. 1ds.
  - 17875 Hall, I. Linotype and like machines ; moued 18004 Chapman, A. and Walker, J. Dry-flong to
  - with asbestos-faced paper, oe 18228 Lock, W. H. and Wich, F. J. Linotas-machines; automatically adjusting ice-sembler gong; improved detent for V
  - screw; Linotype, for 18427 Garratt, J. H. Time-printing stamps time-clocks.
  - 18592 McClintock, F. Line-justifying apparatus* . 18638 Lanston Monotype Co. Apparatus for Bey-paring perforated strips; Monotype * board.
  - 18991 Lock, W. H., Barr, M., Lewis, W. J- hhu-Hughes, G. W. Linotype machines ; facture of matrices ; Linotype.
- p.600 - vue 768/901
- - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - 601
  - O 0 +100 ON0
  - COTOOC NACO O OTH pNN 0 N/101 CO d
  - AO H N c oc.c 11 NNNANNNN Nor
  - 1899 (continued).
  - Winter, J. L. Paste for stereotype-flong of potato-flour, gelatine and boiling water.
  - Lock, W. H. and Pritchard, W. C. Wiper-mechanism ; Linotype.
  - McClintock, F. Typesetting machines; key-mechanism.
  - Lam, I. Apparatus for casting cylindrical stereotypes.
  - Dow Composing Machine Co. and Dow, A. . Typesetting machines.
  - Baine, J. G. Setting up types or linotype-slugs for late-news.
  - Rogers, J. R. Auxiliary magazines; Lino-. type..
  - Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Ejector-blades; Linotype.
  - Converse, F. B. Typesetting machine.
  - Rogers, J. R. Duplex magazines; Linotype.
  - Lichtenberg-Madsen, D. Stamping celluloid containing camphor into a matrix originally pressed in material mainly nitro-cellulose and camphor.
  - coE+ HOUO OUNN
  - o to 00
  - Ch 000 O C N
  - 1900.
  - Lock, W. H. and Broadhouse, J. Matrices for music-type ; Linotype.
  - Unitype Co. Typesetting and distributing machine; Thorne.
  - Kalberer, E. and Feuchtwanger, E. Side-sticks and quoins with cam locking-gear.
  - Garvin, G. K. Lines of logotypes with line-justified spaces cast on from linotype matrices.
  - Sears, C. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - Gilbert-Stringer, H. J. S. Monotype and like machines; Stringertype.
  - Sears, C. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - 1979 -
  - to ‘Lock, W. H. and Barr, M. Improvements in
  - or co co co HA
  - • - • old wd- -V • ------
  - three-dimensional pantographs.
  - N Cn N C%
  - 3541
  - 3618
  - 0 co
  - 0
  - 3955
  - 4734
  - 4808
  - 4820
  - 4963
  - 4967 5054
  - O 1 88
  - 5325
  - 5731
  - 5884
  - 6299
  - 6692
  - Lock, W. H. and Barr, M. Tracer-rod with conical end for three-dimensional pantograph.
  - Wood, H. A. W. Casting and finishing semi-cylindrical stereotypes in one machine; Autoplate.
  - Kirby, E. B. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - Trownsell, W. C. and Trego. J. R. Setting up linotype matrices in lines of lengths required for surrounding cuts or pictures.
  - Haddad, S. S. Type for arabic of unit and twice-unit width, single-line system, 58 .characters.
  - Whittaker, M. H. and West, C. H. Linotype slugs or leads for fudge-boxes ; Linotype.
  - Lucke, F. Linotype machines ; casting type-slugs from composed lines of matrices.
  - McGrath, P. H. Typesetting and line-justifying.
  - Doolittle, W. H. Casting quads ; Linotype. Cox, S. L. Linotype machines; improve-ments in moulds.
  - Bates, A. H. Ejecting single types or matrices in type-setting and distributing machines.
  - Bates, A. H. Type-distributing machines.
  - Goodson, G. A. Composing, line-justifying, casting and typesetting machine; strip-controlled; Graphotype.
  - Dock, W. H. and Barr, M. Tracer grinder for punch-cutting machine.
  - 1 Beals, E. V. and Gray, F. A. Linotype machines forming printing-faces of slugs on blanks.
  - 1 Simpson, J. H. and Walker, E. W. H. Adjustable mounting-blocks for stereotypes, etc. Stover, J, W. Date- and time-printing stamp with automatic-change mechanism.
  - Lock, W. H. and Wich, F. J. Improvements i r in Distributing-mechanism ; Linotype. Dock, W. H., and Brown, H. Cushioning-, spring for second elevator ; Linotype.
  - Lock, W. H., Holliwell, C., and Elliott, R. C. Linotypes for display advertisements and 6716 wrepeat linotype-slugs; Linotype. . etter, J., and Wenz, W. Type-high, 6942 Plunger-operated, numbering-mechanism. Uncan, J. S. Combined link and type-bolder for addressing-machines.
  - - U.
  - 6943 Duncan, J. S. Moulds for making rubber-type in sheets.
  - 6944 Duncan, J. S. Composite rubber-type. 7141 Liley, E. and Cullen, W. H. Stereotypematrix machine; impressions made by pneumatic or fluid pressure.
  - 7347 Hansell, W. H. Numbering-apparatus for cylinder-printing sales-slips.
  - 8096 Nydahl, E. F., and Harling, G. A. Type-distributing.
  - 8397 Vice, J. H. Stereotypes with ribs or flanges for securing to sectional foundation-blocks.
  - 8422 Reid, D. Mounting stereotype-plates. 9029 Miles, H. Quoins of pairs of opposed-wedges with racks.
  - 9288 Des Jardins, B. M. Typesetting and line-justifying.
  - 9345 Rosinkiewicz, C., and Ramult, L. Type-distributing.
  - 9357 Monoline Composing Co. Improvements in Monoline machines.
  - 9431 Wentscher, E. Linotype and like machines; improvements in distributing. Linotype matrices.
  - 9625 Mole, F. M. Plastic mounting for stereotypes made type-high by pressure.
  - 9627 Lock, W. H.. and Fletcher, W. Mouthpiece of metal-pot; Linotype.
  - 9628 Lock, W. H., and Cox, H. L. Linotype machines; wiper-mechanism ; Linotype.
  - 9815 Rouse, H. B. Composing-sticks. 9915 Low, A. A. Type-distributing; Alden distributor.
  - 10685 Bowley, J. W. Roller hand-stamp. 10930 Dittmann, C., and Schutze, A. Type with multiple printing-surfaces.
  - 11285 Mullendorfi, E. Line-justifying machine.
  - 11492 Wicks, F. Type-slicer.
  - 11568 Thorne Typesetting Machine Co. Typesetting and distributing.
  - 11947 Krause, R. J. Quoins; pairs of opposed wedges with racks.
  - 12304 Gasse, P. A. Dating hand-stamps.
  - 13345 St. John, R. H. Impression machine; St. John Typobar.
  - 13400 Beseke, A. Printing-surface combining outlines with type.
  - 13789 Reinhardt, G. E. Mounting and locking up stereotype-plates.
  - 13886 Bowley, J. W. Roller hand-stamps.
  - 14036 Lock, W. H., Holliwell, C., and Elliott, R. C. Slotting linotype-slugs to receive loose-accent type for capitals, etc.
  - 16354 Stockall, J. J. Date-and time-printing stamps. 16522 Rosenhain, W. Counting words typewritten, composed in type or telegraphed by keyboard transmitter.
  - 16584 Pendlebury, H. Improvements in trimming-knives of linotype machines ; Linotype.
  - 17026 National Typographic Co. Improvements in escapement-mechanism ; Linotype.
  - 17550 Kuhn, J., and Lopez, J. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - 17871 Haan, F., Honig, I., and Freund, J. Dry-flong for stereotypes.
  - 18094 Schleicher, A. Type for line-justifying by compression.
  - 18375 Creed, F. G. Strip-perforating machine for automatic-telegraph or typesetting.
  - 18542 Rozar, C. Monotype and like machines; electrically strip-controlled.
  - 20178 Maruhn, E., and Uhthoff, E. Linotype machines; moulds of variable length.
  - 20602 Lock, W. H., and Barr, M. Automatic engraving machine.
  - i 20953 Gilbert-Stringer, H. J. S. Monotype machines; moulds ; Stringertype.
  - 21668 Dyson, H. Automatic time-printing stamp.
  - 21699 Lock, W. H., and Fletcher, W. Linotype machines ; matrices for tabular work.
  - 22106 Lock, W. H., and Barr, M. Punch-cutting machine head; with microphone in circuit through the cutting-tool.
  - | 22107 Lock, W. H., and Holliwell, C. Fudge, or late-news linotype-slugs; Linotype.
  - 22496 Elias, L. Stereotype-matrix of asbestos board.
  - 22674 Reveille, A. Stereotype-matrix machine.
  - 23114 Lanston Monotype Co. Monotype machines; improvements in punching and paper-feed ; Monotype keyboard.
- p.601 - vue 769/901
- - 602
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1900 [continued).
  - 23115 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Monotype and like machines; keyboard machines for perforating record-strips; Monotype keyboard.
  - 23205 Lock, W. H., Pendlebury, H., and Thomas,
  - W. H. Producing late-news linotype-slugs ; Linotype.
  - 1901.
  - 1050 Lock, W. H., Elliott, R. C., and Holliwell, C. Production of fudge-linotype-slugs of small height-to-paper; Linotype.
  - 1077 Pierpont, F. H. and Lanston Monotype Corporation. Cutting uniform lengths from a bar of metal for matrix-blanks.
  - 1078 Pierpont, F. H. and Lanston Monotype Corporation. Accurately positioning conical holes in matrix-blanks.
  - 1079 Pierpont, F. H. and Lanston Monotype Corporation. Matrix-milling and measuring machine.
  - 1080 Pierpont, F. H. and Lanston Monotype Corporation. Machine for striking matrices.
  - 1121 Lock, W. H. and Bean, A. Actuating several matrix-escapements consecutively from a single key.
  - 1152 Pierpont, F. H. and Lanston Monotype Corporation. Striking characters on matrices.
  - 1483 Gilbert-Stringer, H. J. S. Apparatus for line-justifying composed lines of type.
  - 1496 Low, A. A. and Breakey, J. Type-distributing.
  - 1686 Schleicher, A. Monotype and like machines ; moulds and matrices.
  - 1934 Lichtenberg-Madsen, D. Vulcanite or ebonite matrices for producing celluloid printing-surfaces.
  - 1978 Schmidting, J. Electrotypes from photo-reliefs.
  - 1983 Lock, W. H. and Lawless, P. C. Wiping mouthpiece of metal-pot after casting. Linotype.
  - 2470 Fowler Composing and Typesetting Co. Composing, casting and line-justifying machine.
  - 2895 Drewett, T. J. C. Flong for stereotype-matrices.
  - 3104 Calmels, G. H. Zinc typographic blocks with cross-lined tint.
  - 3343 Selleck, W. L. Extensible base-sections for mounting stereotypes or electrotypes.
  - 3603 Breakey, J. Type-distributing.
  - 3604 Low, A. A. Type-distributing.
  - 4030 Hoe, R. Stereotype casting-boxes for curved plates.
  - 4985 Nuernberger, P. G. Plurality of type-bodies or slugs cast and cut simultaneously.
  - 5019 Albrecht, C. A. Linotype machines; trimming slugs.
  - 5208 Hensley, D. A. Linotype machines; spacebars ; Linotype.
  - 5237 Lock, W. H. and Whittaker, M. H. Linotype machines; slugs with holes for inserting separate type ; Linotype.
  - 5295 Sander, E., Migula, W. and Krafft, R. Dry-flong for stereotyping.
  - 5358 Gasse, P. A. J. Hand-stamp with rubber-tape type.
  - 6153 Dodge, P. T. Soft steel matrices locally hardened at the strike ; Linotype.
  - 6541 Groningen, I. van. Hand-stamp; type-wheel for printing-characters for maps.
  - 7073 Smith, M. Apparatus for casting curved stereotypes.
  - 7781 Peoples, U. S. G. and Walther, C. F. Locking type or slugs in galley, sidestick wedged downwards.
  - 8024 Cesana, L. Linotype machines; automatically supplying metal to pot.
  - 8516 Lock, W. H. and Holliwell, C. Fudge or late-news slugs ; Linotype.
  - 8979 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Matrix-positioning mechanism of typecaster; Monotype.
  - 8980 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Monotype and like machines ; metal-pots and pumps.
  - 8981 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Monotype and like machines ; improvements in galley-mechanism.
  - ANU.
  - 8982 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Monotype and like machines ; improvements in strip" feeding mechanism.
  - 9165 Lock, W. H. Billington, G. and Elliott, R. C: Improvements in yoke or first elevator; Linotype.
  - 9477 Follett, O. S. Typewheel for number: printing; cast in one piece.
  - 9508 Elias, L. Felted asbestos stereotype-matrices.
  - 9884 Rockstroh, W. M. Making plane stereotype-matrices.
  - 9899 Converse, F. B. Typesetting and line-justifying.
  - 9907 Gilbert-Stringer, H. J. S. Stringertype adapted to Monoline machine.
  - 10217 Composite Type Bar Co. Typesetting; casting types simultaneously in moulds and supplying to magazines.
  - 10499 Mole, F. M. Mounting electrotype- or stereo" type-plates.
  - 10649 Roxburgh, J. and McClean, R. Sawing slots in linotype-slugs for inserting rules for tabular work.
  - 10787 Lock, W. H. and Wich, F. J. Trimming-mechanism; Linotype.
  - 10854 Ziegler, G. H. and Jordan, G. F. Machines
  - for trimming and finishing type.
  - 11079 Converse, F. B. Adjusting typesetting machines to different body-sizes of type-
  - 11476 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Monotype and like machines; combined strip-per forating and casting machines.
  - 11920 Bates Machine Co. Hand-stamps for number ing and dating; consecutive, duplicate 0 repeat. , .
  - 11967 Pendlebury, H. Linotype machines; adjus able trimming-knives.
  - 12445 Rogers, J. R. Linotype machines; improv ments in matrices and distribution.
  - 12569 Lock, W. H. and Gray, J. Short-measure slugs; Linotype. f
  - 13710 Baruch, A. Means for printing long rows: figures or words in consecutive order’ helical. ...
  - 13937 National Typographic Co. Linotype machines’ simplified construction for assembima matrices, elevator, line-justifying, m.°u . and casting, and distributing matrices’ Linotype. n
  - 14315 Zagdmann, H. Forming characters 0 numbering-disks. .
  - 14401 Albrecht, C. A. Linotype machines; ejecto mechanism.
  - 14457 Lagarde, J. Operating keyboards of tXPs setting machines, telegraphic transmitter" etc.
  - 14978 Rogers, J. R. Improvements in compost and slug-casting machines; Typograph.
  - 15362 Scott, W. Moulds for casting curved stere types. .
  - 15457 Roxburgh, J. and McClean, R. Linoty? machines ; slugs for tabular work. e 15538 Maruhn, E. and Uhthoff, E. LinotyP machines; mould-mechanism. e 15539 Maruhn, E. and Uhthoff, E. Linotype machines; improvements in mould-mece nism. .
  - 15540 Maruhn, E. and Uhthoff, E. LinotyP
  - machines; ejector-mechanism.
  - Maruhn, E. and Uhthoff, E. Means for com
  - 15759
  - posing matrices; Typograph. . „ 16019 Levy, M. Screens formed by fastentb together two ruled-glass plates. .+-16740 Gilman, A. S. Linotype machines; disti bution of matrices.
  - 16754 Maschinenfabrik Elektrogravure. Copy and reducing relief-engraved steel dies. -17280 Adams, F. W. Galleys with sides and en notched for sticks. A.
  - 17851 Dow Composing Machine Co. and Dow, Composing and line-justifying.
  - 18306 Lock, W. H. and Wich, F. J. Trimmine mechanism; Linotype. . ling
  - 18698 Roberts, T. H. Date- and time-print stamps. 1.
  - 19838 Zinsch, H. and Grosser, W. Type of groun cork and varnish or linoleum. .
  - 20006 Hine, C. L. Monotype and like machin ’ compressible and soft-metal spaces.
- p.602 - vue 770/901
- - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - CO
  - O NO
  - N N N No N N NNN N NN NN NN N N
  - O OOU C O C-O C D N HH 00 O O
  - —— DN OO0010 N ON C Ut O-P N M-O CH O0 O-U NU O-A O O Ch 09
  - O 0 00 0 00 A HUN N H Ut A0 A3 00 O C (
  - 1901 (continued).
  - Dodge, P. T. Producing slugs from several different founts; multiple-strike matrices; .Linotype.
  - Wood, H. A. W. Composite stereotype and half-tone plates.
  - Miller, G. H. Numbering-head.
  - podge, P. T. Linotype machines; Linotype Junior.
  - Dodge, P. T. Keeping molten metal at con-stant level in pot.
  - Tcherkassov, Baron P. and Hill, R. E. Arabic characters for type or slugs ; Nashki style ; bo primary characters and 30 others.
  - Albrecht, C. A. Trimming edges of slugs as ejected from linotype machines; Linotype.
  - Johnson Typesetter Co. Typesetting machine with line-justifying arrangement for casting and inserting spaces of the required width.
  - Lewellin, W. M. Hand-stamp for workmen’s time-sheets.
  - Muller, W. Electrotype nickel matrices.
  - Levy, F. Type-distributing
  - Kozar, C. Apparatus for perforating strips for controlling type- or matrix-composing machines.
  - Kozar, C. Keyboard-mechanism for com-Posing machines.
  - Ketaux, M. Monotype and like machines; a variation of the Monotype with multiple mould-cavity bars.
  - Lock, W. H. and Pinel J. Linotype machines ; V Production of slugs with accents.
  - Model Menu Maker. Type-case for contain-mg slugs or logotypes.
  - Larratt, J. J. R. and Atkinson, E. H. Adjustable mounting-block for printing-surfaces.
  - Kitzema, T. P. Linotype machines; casting type-furniture.
  - 66 CODNU 00
  - 1902.
  - Lock, W. H. and Cotsworth, A. G. Alining-mechanism ; Linotype.
  - uncan, J. S. Frames for printing-types; Addressograph.
  - taseley, C. S. Date- and time-printing c/stamp; controlled electro-magnetically.
  - ttchbury, W. T. and Schultz, H. R. Mono-IPe and like machines; electric line-collstifying mechanism ; Graphotype.
  - Utchbury, W. T. and Gorick, C. Monotype and like machines; electric indicating
  - 1
  - 0 1 N 0 1 NN 000*
  - 2469 rreChanisms; Graphotype.
  - tomae, R. L. Typesetting and composing-2627 machine.
  - 2762 wewellin, W. M. Time-printing stamps.
  - aSO?’ T. Mounting and securing stereotype-2900 Cox A electrotype-plates on multiple block.
  - K A. Quoins for locking up and adjusting poCkS ’ screw adjustment.
  - Sinkiewicz, C. and Ramult, L. Typesetting I Tom type-cases, assisting hand.
  - int.A. A. and Breakey, J. Type-distribut-"Entock, F. Typesetting and line-justify-Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Monotype like machines ; manufacture of justified Lmatrices; Monotype.
  - mston Monotype Machine Co. Monotype Monotype pump-actuating mechanism ; anston Monotype Machine Co. Monotype moike machines; fluid-metal injecting-
  - 2
  - 4263 Lmechanism; Monotype.
  - mston Monotype Machine Co. Monotype , - trecines; feeding controlling strips in 4265 casting machines; Monotype.
  - Monotype Machine Co. Monotype . for mines; record-strip feeding mechanism pul'Pecasting machines; Monotype.
  - Timeter. Engineering Co. and Adcock, E. A. . elersetting; means for operating type-5957 Lavectors. Pulsometer.
  - machi Monotype Machine Co. Monotype for mines; automatic-leading mechanism 0r typesetting; Monotype.
  - No.
  - 6001 Watson, J. Typesetting and line-justifying.
  - 6872 Cleghorn, T. Linotype machines; production of tabular printed matter; matrices struck at a right-angle to normal.
  - 6959 Cottrell & Sons Co., C. B. Making ready by building up on back of stereotype-matrix.
  - 6962 Lock, W. H. and Martin, T. Linotype machines ; setting short measures of tabular matter.
  - 6985 Wood, H. A. W. Machines for casting and finishing stereotypes.
  - 7284 General Typing Machine Co. Linotype and stereotype-matrix machines.
  - 7290 Hoch, A. and Wendling, G. X. Machine for printing rows of figures in arithmetical order and for calculating and printing the sum at the foot.
  - 7691 Bell, J. B. Linotype machines; double-magazine mechanism.
  - 8736 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Monotype machines; type-composing machines for tabular work ; Monotype keyboard.
  - 8737 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Monotype machines; composing tabular matter, the sections of each line being separately line-justified ; Monotype keyboard.
  - 9113 Holbourns, J. G. and Longhurst, H. A. Slug-casting machines; positive distributor used instead of tilting the frame; Typograph.
  - 9543 Mechanical Improvements Co. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - 9548 Bower, W. M., Mee, A. C. and Lawry, R. H. Addressing-machines; chain-feed galleys of linotype-slugs.
  - 9752 Pitman, E. Mounting-blocks for stereotypes or electrotypes.
  - 9889 Baker, C. Shallow linotype-slugs for printing addresses,
  - 10229 Davenport, J. Stamping numbers or marks on linen.
  - 10847 Stockall, J. J. Time-printing stamp with quick movement for typewheels.
  - 11I57 Silva, J. F. da. Triangular spacing-blocks or furniture, for setting up oblique matter.
  - 11198 Des Jardins, B. M. Typesetting and line-justifying apparatus.
  - 11511 Watson, J. Trip-lever mechanism of line-justifying machines.
  - 11512 McClintock, F. Improvements in line-justifying machines.
  - 11960 Wicks, F. Improvements in type-composing machines.
  - 12442 Bartlett, H. B. Linotype machines; distributing different founts of matrices.
  - 12631 Cordeaux, W. Producing relief printing-surfaces from sheets of tin-foil.
  - 12690 Holdsworth, F. Line-justifying machines ; improvement on 3486/1902.
  - 12775 Peacock, F. E. Improvements in pumps for typecasting machines ; Wicks.
  - 13092 Bartlett, H. B. Linotype machines; matrix-escapement.
  - 13122 Duncan, H. M. and Pierpont, F. H. Mono-type machines ; adjustable nick-formers.
  - 13199 Franklin, H. H. Improvements in type-moulds, for escape of air.
  - 13341 Z Thorne Typesetting Machine Co. Typesetting 13342 5 and line-justifying.
  - 13476 Ballantine, R. F. Stereotype-matrix impressing.
  - 13773 McClintock, F. Typesetting.
  - 13774 McClintock, F. Type-ejecting mechanism of typesetting machines.
  - 14388 Lagarde, J. Monotype and like machines, electrically-operated machine producing perforated strip.
  - 14453 Lock, W. H. and Girod, E. Assembling-mechanism ; Linotype.
  - 14590 Saunders, A. E. Moulds for stereotypes of carbonaceous clay.
  - 15356 Lagarde, J. Monotype and like machines; electrical mechanism for controlling per-forated-strip making machines.
  - 15549 Graves, J. G. and Gunby, T. H. Composing-sticks; means for adjusting and fixing angle-piece.
  - 15668 Pinel, J. Monotype and like machines ; machine for typecasting or automatic typecasting and composing; strip-controlled.
- p.603 - vue 771/901
- - 604 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1902 {continued).
  - 15798 Kraus, A. and Collins, N. Stereotype-matrix and like machines.
  - 16626 Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Feeding metal to melting-pot; Linotype.
  - 16939 Lagarde, J. Automatic control of typesetting and composing machines, situated at a distance from the operator, by electric keyboard.
  - 16947 Link, R. P. and Rowlands, W. E. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - 17753 Albrecht, C. A. Linotype machines; distributing-mechanism ; Linotype.
  - 18063 Muehleisen, C. Magazine-mechanism ; Lino-type.
  - 18495 Wicks, F. Improvements in rotary type-casting machine moulds; angle-base segments.
  - 18637 Piscicelli, Count R. Taeggi. Postmarking machine; date- and time-printing stamp; time to nearest 5 minutes.
  - 18681 Turek, F. M. and Tracey Manufacturing Co. Numbering-apparatus for sales-slips.
  - 18848 Duncan, H. M., Prichard, C. H. and Macauley,
  - C. R. Monotype and like machines ; casting low-quads; Monotype.
  - 20258 Schulze, A. Photomechanical screens with rulings at 60° and special stops.
  - 20301 Dodge, P. T. Space-magazine mechanism; Linotype.
  - 20302 Dodge, P. T. Dist-ibuting-mechanism ; Linotype.
  - 20432 Llewellin, W. M. Time-printing stamps.
  - 21087 Brackelsberg, E. W. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - 21810 Cole, B. and Wilson, A. O. Linotype machines ; leading-mechanism.
  - 21897 Bates, G. A. Linotype machines; double-magazines and single keyboard.
  - 22091 Bryan, J. P. Mounting electrotypes and stereotypes.
  - 22653 Creed, F. G. and Coulson, W. A. Apparatus for controlling typesetting machines ; translating Wheatstone telegraphic perforated-strip automatically into printed characters.
  - 22707 Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Adjusting movable vice-jaw ; Linotype.
  - 23699 Wachtershauser, J. Stereotype-matrix machines.
  - 23725 Newman, H. C. Means for securing slugs in fudge-boxes.
  - 23726 Dalziel, H. Securing electrotypes and stereotypes.
  - 25530 Lock, W. H. and Broadhouse, J. Trimming-knives for producing parallel-sided slugs ; Linotype.
  - 25781 Kley, A. C. Hand-stamps. 26659 Duncan, H. M. and Pierpont, F. H. Mono-type machines; apparatus for grinding type-matrices ; Monotype.
  - 26887 Duncan, H. M. and Macauley, C. R. Mono-type machines; pneumatically controlled means for casting low-quads and spaces ; Monotype.
  - 27035 Burda, F. A. E. Date- and time-printing stamps. •
  - 28233 Lock, W. H. and Wich, F. J. Preventing formation of a vacuum in the delivery pipe of stereotype-casting machines.
  - 1903.
  - 37 Roberts, T. H. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - 368 Lebrun, L. Typesetting and distributing; line-justification by spring space-types.
  - 622 Pulsometer Engineering Co. and Kenney G. E. Typesetting machine ; Pulsometer.
  - 755 Duncan, H. M. and Pierpont, F. H. Optical apparatus for measuring matrices; Mono-type.
  - 756 Hoe, R. Securing stereotype-plates to beds.
  - 868 Smith, R. H. Vulcanising rubber-type.
  - 1019 Stavenow. G. A. W. Stereotype-metal; preparing from two alloys remelted with additions.
  - 1656 Thommen, P. Linotype and like machines impression- or matrix-disks.
  - 1705 Winkler, F. Type-distributing machine.
  - No. 1
  - 2091 Post, A., Klarwasser, A., Willner, I. and Markus, P. Typesetting machine operatea electro-magnetically. ..
  - 2170 National Typographic Co. Linotype machines’ guard for distributing-mechanism; pre venting matrices from falling.
  - 2490 Kraus, A. Matrix-composition for stereotype matrix machines. ,
  - 3396 Cornelius, J. W. Mounting-block of sliding parts for clamping stereotypes D locking up. +
  - 3617 McGowan, H. Linotype machines; preven ing transposition of spacers. . 20 4914 Warwick, B. W. Date- and time-printing stamps; time-printing mechanism.
  - 5284 Peacock, F. E. Typecasting machine Me moulds carried on an endless band beto nozzle of metal-pot. 135
  - 5738 Storey, F. G. Linotype machines; mou-for ingots. 9
  - 6024 Seeds, W. A. Mould-blade for typecasting machines for low-quads. . .
  - 6330 Bellows, B. F. Linotype and like machine > Electric Compositor. J
  - 7465 Maley, H. A. Mounting electrotypes stereotypes.
  - 7475 Ottmar Mergenthaler Co. Linotype, mous: type, stereotype-matrix and like machine, producing line-justified lines of type, 106 types, impressions or linotypes. . „ 8060 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Centro. matrices on typecasting machine; Mor
  - 8169 Jacobson, J. Screens for photomechanical printing. and
  - 8266 Hansen, H. C. Type-matrix holders a depth gauges, for matrix-justifying. of 8272 Muehleisen, C. Linotype machines; two more moulds on mould-wheel; LinotyPoos.
  - 8755 Stappen, R. Date- and time-printing stating 8823 MacMaster, P. Date- and time-pin1 stamps. .e
  - 8998 Lock, W. H. and Lawless, P. C. Lino machines; double-magazines; LinotyPace-9325 Wehrlin, M. Line-justifying and SP casting mechanism ; Monotype, sine-9909 Mayer, J. Linotype machines ; magas delivery.
  - 10797 Johnson, F. A. Typesetting. . ireo-10813 Wildridge, G. J. Flong for making st types.
  - 10901 Boecker, C. Adjustable hand-stamp. 5; 11134 Wehrlin, M. Monotype and like machuiam. clutch-device for line-justifying mechanic of 11590 Lock, W. H. Flong for taking impression both type-matter and half-tone blockss.s ;
  - 11733 Wehrlin, M. Monotype and like machi of means for stopping machine at end
  - composition. , no-
  - 11872 Esson, J. and Esson, C. C. Galleys for m type and like machines, line-
  - 11903 Converse, F. B. Typesetting and justifying. ting
  - 12118 Dey, A. and Dey, J. Date-and time-pri stamps. ress
  - 12136 Janzer, C. and Lawson, E. Mangle aong with jockey-rollers for making 1 stereo type-moulds. . . cha-
  - 12176 Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Ejecting-® nism ; Linotype. „den,
  - 12494 Brown, F. H., Hanrahan, J. E. and DOorts G. A. Typecasting machine; casting in the printing establishment, for
  - 12850 Hopkins, C. E., and Wesel, F. Machitype-casting and trimming curved stereo 3 plates. Lines;
  - 13495 Wehrlin, M. Monotype and like macn * j device for increasing kinds of type combina-without increasing the number of com-con-tions of perforations in strip of strip-trolled machines. . tris”
  - 13772 Scudder, W. S. Monoline machines ; ® bar accelerating and stopping devices icing 13879 Black, J. Work-holder and stop for red stereotype-plates to width. . ting-
  - 13881 Muller, F. J. Typesetting and distriatris 14064 Tunaley, J. Linotype machines; ® assembly mechanism. e.high
  - 14183 Hummel, A. Mould for casting tyP stereotype-plates.
- p.604 - vue 772/901
- - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - 605
  - C1 or 1 co o 00 23 9 CC H H HH
  - 1903 (continued).
  - h 6
  - 1S
  - 8 N
  - I co F 8
  - Haddon, W. and Larder, F. T. Typesetting and composing.
  - Dodge, P. T. Two-magazine machines;
  - .Linotype.
  - Wilson, J. C. Time- and date-printing stamps.
  - Christy, M. Electrotype- and stereotype-150, blocks for printing garment patterns.
  - 15044 % Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Linotype ma-164 chines; improvements on 14582/1890. Dougall, J. R. Linotype machines; improve, ments in assembling, line-justifying and distributing.
  - Hews, F. W. Typecasting machines ; finish-ing and delivering various bodies of type at one time.
  - Hoovers, A. W. and Roovers, A. H. Stereo-type-matrix and like machines ; embossing in thin metal.
  - Dittmann, T. Screens for photomechanical plates used otherwise than in the camera. Pinel, J. Monotype and like machines; apparatus for perforating controlling-strip. 17118 r Dyotype. Creef & Co., A. Electrotyped shells or seg-ments; curved.
  - Bonneau, j. c. Drying stereotype-matrices by dry fluid pressure. [sic.]
  - Lock, W. H. and Speechley, W. R. Linotype machines ; casting linotype-slugs for tabular matter with notches to receive rules.
  - Jelenko, I. Hand-stamps; for recording hour and minute.
  - Kogers, J. R. Linotype machines; a modified linotype with vertical magazine. Brusselet, V. A. Barometric, etc., curves set UP of special rules with notches for the 1840. —readings.
  - Diss, A. de. Time-printing stamps worked 1958- in conjunction with locks.
  - °dge, P. T. Linotype machines; support-19636 r ing sectional-mould ; Linotype. Corey, J. A. Wooden mounting-blocks for 19853 Matereotyp es with metal-casing except at top. artyn, A. Forming type with hard face on 19852, soft body.
  - 3 Martyn, A. Moulds of papier machi for 21291 T casting type. amp 1, P. J. Mould for casting type-lines, 2206, pleadings and blocks.
  - 3 tierpont, F. H. and Duncan, H. M. [Vne -.1 1.1 1=
  - coco -AH 0 O 00 OO
  - .-, r. n. ana Duncan, n. M. Mono-type and like machines ; moulds ; Mono-type.
  - Wolters, 0. Mechanically-operated keyboard machine for producing perforated record-c strip.
  - Sc0tt, J. R. and Guthrie, C. Drying stereo-23006 m’ype-moulds by electric heaters.
  - -Immis, W. S. Monotype, linotype, stereotype-matrix and like machines ; apparatus ior producing perforated controlling-strips ; 2300- mine-justifying.
  - ‘ -Immis, W. S. Monotype and like pattern-controlled machines ; mechanism connected with pattern or perforated-strip; line-2306- —Justifying.
  - -ch, O. Stereotype-matrix machines; a continuously rotating typewheel impressing 00 Jubb, T. and Jubb, R. Linotype and like machines j special composition for use in 23744 wremelting metal.
  - 4 wetter Numbering Machine Co. Numbering-24314 T aPParatus ; type-high with paper-lifter.
  - nston Monotype Machine Co. Monotype machines; detachable keyboard for per-mitting different arrangement of symbols ; 24499 pMlonotype.
  - alley, W. T. Characters or figures, con-Secutive or repeated, printed by multiple numbering-appliances on rotary cylinder 2500- T for printing sales-slips, etc., on strip.
  - nston Monotype Machine Co. Monotype and like machines; matrix-centring 25684 pmechanism; Monotype.
  - T Qkstroh, C. F. Holder for electrotypes and 26953 Boereotyp es; curved.
  - oth, S. Printing-surfaces cast in composition of wax, sulphur and boiled oil,
  - oC 1O 1 N
  - N
  - o or
  - No.
  - 27476 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Monotype and like machines; matrix-centring mechanism ; Monotype.
  - 27480 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Monotype and like machines ; moulds ; Monotype.
  - 28628 Winnett, W. H. Hand-stamps; for use singly or in combination.
  - 1904.
  - 832 Bartholomew, W. F. Hand-stamp with movable arrow for printing time.
  - I 2168 Parker, A. J. Mounting-block built up of wood-blocks with grain at right angles to each other.
  - 2169 Mayer, J. and Albrecht, C. Linotype, mono-type and like machines; casting in mould-compartments for type, logotypes, ornaments, etc.
  - 3458 Addressograph Co. Rubber-type interlocking with holder. Addressograph.
  - 5092 Pulsometer Engineering Co. and Adcock, E. A. Typesetting and distributing machines; Pulsometer.
  - 5212 Wicks, F. Linotype and like machines. Casting logotypes with mould-ends.
  - 5619 Galwey, J. de B., and Schreier, E. Paging-and numbering-apparatus.
  - 5744 Clark, E. B. Linotype machines; trimming-mechanism.
  - 5797 Brooks, B. A. Typecasting and composing machine. Casts a new type to replace each type used; casts equal spaces and sets between each two words of the line.
  - 6439 Simpson, H., and Walker, E. W. H. Quoins and side- and foot-sticks.
  - 6543 Dey, A. and Dey, J. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - 7314 Wicks, F. Punch-cutting machine with ball-and-socket joint.
  - 7394 Foster, R. J. and Buckle, J. W. Linotype machines; shifter-mechanism.
  - 7826 Perry Time Stamp Co. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - 7960 Foster, J. and Foster, J. Y. Mounting type, stereotypes, etc., on cylinders.
  - 8117 Albert, E. Making thin lead matrices for electrotypes.
  - 9013 Cottrell & Sons Co., C. B. Process for levelling stereotypes; making-ready on flong-mould.
  - 9081 Waite, F. and Waite & Saville. Paging-types mounted in a chain.
  - 10032 Corey, J. A. Mounting-blocks of wood with a protective metal casing cast on with key-grooves.
  - 10338 Pierpont, F. H. and Duncan, H. M. Mono-type machines ; matrices.
  - 11501 Brown, S. Printing-cylinders with grooves and rods for securing notched type.
  - 11633 Wagner, P. Typesetting and distributing ; electro-magnetic control.
  - 11633A Wagner, P. Typesetting machine.
  - 11761 Dodge, P. T. Linotype machines; matrix-magazines.
  - 12007 Lock, W. H. and North, T. M. Improvements in machines for casting and finishing curved stereotypes; Autoplate,
  - 13007 Rudolphy, G. Monotype, linotype and like machines; distributing, matrix-composing, typecasting and matrix-distributing.
  - 13012 Cowper-Coles & Co. and Cowper-Coles, S. O. Production of copper electrotypes.
  - 13789 Huggins, S. A. Casting curved stereotypes for fudge or late-news.
  - 14050 Gray, J. G. and Redpath, R. Linotype machines ; cleaning face of mould.
  - 14693 Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Linotype machines; matrix-distributing apparatus.
  - 14964 Tympalyn Co. Mounting-blocks for stereotypes with first-action clamping and subsequent movement.
  - 15058 Albrecht, C. Linotype machines; double-magazines.
  - 15536 Hoe, R. Mould for curved stereotypes with water-cooling to core.
  - 15861 Hopkins, C. E. Casting-apparatus for curved stereotypes.
  - I 17038 Meadows, C. A. Casting alloys in small ingots.
- p.605 - vue 773/901
- - 6o6
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1904 (continued).
  - 18139 Dow Composing Machine Co. and Dow, A. Typesetting, composing and line-justifying machine.
  - 18140 Dow Composing Machine Co. and Dow, A. Line-justifying mechanism.
  - 18334 Oldfield, F. F. W. Mounting-block for clamping stereotypes with multiple serration of supporting portion.
  - 18500 Lock, W. H. and Speechley, W. R. Linotype machines; recessed slugs for tabular serrated rule. Linotype.
  - 19417 Waters, E. T. Linotype machines; tabulating-mechanism.
  - 19589 Mayer, J. and Albrecht, C. Linotype machines ; distributing-mechanism for double-magazine machine.
  - 20286 Pfitzer, F. Mounting-block faces of rectangular form with plastic cement.
  - 20398 Blanz, E. Dry-flong stereotype-matrices.
  - 21064 Murray, D. Operating keyboards of linotype machines, etc., by means of a perforated strip obtained by telegraphic means.
  - 21466 Bellows, B. F. Linotype machines; transferring matrices from casting-mechanism to distributing rail ; Electric Compositor.
  - 21467 Bellows, B. F. Linotype machines; casting-mechanism for logotypes or type-slugs; Electric Compositor.
  - 21468 Bellows, B. F. Linotype and like machines; assembling-mechanism; Electric Compositor.
  - 21673 Tuch, O. Stereotype-matrix machines; line-justification of strip.
  - 21971 Bhisey, S. A. Typesetting and typecasting apparatus; making and supplying compressible spaces.
  - 22331 Corey, J. A. Clips for mounting stereotypes.
  - 22972 Schreiner, F. Machine for impressing and drying stereotype-matrices.
  - 22994 Bellows, B. F. Linotype and like machines; matrix-distributing mechanism; Electric Compositor.
  - 22995 Bellows, B. F. Linotype machines; matrix, or type line-justifying mechanism ; Electric Compositor.
  - 23849 Eves, A. J. F. Stereotypers’ casting-box; for use also in impressing matrices.
  - 23929 Torrance, R. G. Construction of and means for securing wood-type on rotary printing machines.
  - 25058 Smith, M. Stereotype-matrices from formes containing half-tone blocks.
  - 25099 Corey, J. A. Clips for use in mounting stereotypes, etc.
  - 25392 Lock, W. H. and Sutcliffe, F. W. Linotype machines ; casting slugs of different lengths from the same line of matrices.
  - ,=Schaaff, J- T. Linotype and stereotype-324373 matrix machines; operating electrically or z5432| direct from the keyboard.
  - 26271 Goetz, G. Type-carrying wheels for automatic weighing-machine.
  - 26542 Hoe, R. Automatic ejector for curved-stereotype shaving machine.
  - 26572 Dove, W. and La Sor, W. A. Mounting-block for stereotypes and other plates.
  - 26824 Ward, W. Gauge for casting stereotype-plates without superfluous metal at sides.
  - 26899 Annand, R. C. Corrugated-paper backing for dry-flong matrices.
  - 27106 Taplin, W. J. Gauge for registering printers’ formes.
  - 27277 Bancroft, J. S. Measuring-mechanism of record-strip perforators; keyboard of Monotype.
  - 27278 Bancroft, J. S. Mould-adjusting device; Monotype.
  - 28180 Herrmann, C. B. Dies for stereotype-matrix machines.
  - 28439 American Type Founders Co. Engraving machine for cutting type-matrices or punches. Matrix-engraving with independent adjustment of one set of gimbal-bearings for producing condensed or extended type from the same former.
  - 28440 American Type Founders Co. Pantograph and tracing-microscope for use in producing formers.
  - No.
  - 28573
  - o
  - 00
  - NT
  - Reintanz, M. and Rothe, A. Hand-stamp for receipting, provided with means adding all amounts receipted.
  - Osborn, H. C. and Gammeter, H. C. Machine for use in composing and distributing shop, grooved type for printing imitation of type
  - written documents; Multigraph. . 0 , ... ... *. Date- and time-printing
  - 28849 > Llewellin, W. M.
  - 28850 5 stamps.
  - 29195 Howard, F. M. Time-printing stamps.
  - 29239 Stockall, J. J. Time-printing stamps.
  - 1905.
  - 1418 Andrieu, R. Clips for securing printing-plates in formes.
  - 1424 Toronto Type Foundry Co. Linotype ma chines; oscillating assembler-mechanism with movable wiper; Linotype. e
  - 1424A Toronto Type Foundry Co. LinotyR.
  - machines; line-justifying-bar mechanism ’ Linotype. .
  - 1424B Toronto Type Foundry Co. Linotyp. machines; oscillating-assembler and aut
  - 1597
  - 2155
  - 2238
  - 2852
  - matic mechanism; Linotype. If
  - Albert, E. Matrices for electrotyping formeds.
  - sheet lead bysuccessive pressing operation Baker, C. and Bower, W. M. Linotype an
  - like machines ; electric work-computatoka Fischer, G. Matrices for electrotyping pressof in sheet-lead having one or more series grooves on the back. .
  - Aix, F. C. L. d’. Linotype machines; m
  - trices with different body characters. . .
  - 2853 Aix, F. C. L. d’. Linotype and like machine ’
  - 2915
  - 2949
  - 2950
  - 3761
  - 4081
  - 4178
  - 4289
  - 4668
  - radial magazines for different founts. ck Warnock, W. S. Composite mounting-bied of several hollow, square blocks with ru tops, clamped together. ,
  - Dove, J. M., Bancroft, J. S. and Indahl. M Interchangeable die-cases for Monotype.
  - Bancroft, J. S. Centring-mechanism for tyP caster. Monotype.
  - Swift, E. S. Date-printing stamps. . in Reiter, J. Producing stereotype-matrices
  - hydraulic press with a sliding table. con-Bates, E. G. Numbering-apparatus ; nd-
  - secutive, duplicate or repeated; he stamp.
  - Follett, W. I. Time-printing stamps. sted Cowper-Coles, S. O. Electrotypes deposithe with forced circulation through holes in
  - anodes. . for
  - 4726 Bancroft, J. S. Die- or matrix-carriers
  - 5252
  - Monotype caster. ma-
  - Toronto Type Foundry Co. Linotype "
  - chines; mould-jaws; Linotype. ;
  - Bellows, B. F. Linotype and like mach 11 assembly-mechanism ; Electric Compostugs
  - Rogers, J. R. Linotype machines; 51 with slots to receive rules ; Linotype, sing 6450 Wesel, F. Machine for drilling and net electrotype-plates to mounting-blocks, nine
  - Addressograph Co. Addressing-mac® printing-plate with raised printing-suria •
  - Brown, C., Chance, H. G. and Bland, Clocks Mounting-process for zincographic-W within stereotype-plates on cylinders, etal-
  - Roberts, A. L. Linotype machines; me
  - 5344
  - 5859
  - 6675
  - 7270
  - H
  - 7505
  - feed. sire
  - Roberts, A. L. Chase with all its furnt and parts permanently attached. ble
  - Dodge, P. T. Linotype machines ; remoV
  - magazines ; Linotype. cfer-
  - Poe, D. A. Linotype machines; line-transpe. ring and distributing-mechanism; Linolding Kennedy, D. S. Linotype machines; 511
  - magazines; Linotype. Ites;
  - 8566 Hoe, R. Casting curved stereotype-P13
  - 0 O
  - 8551
  - 00
  - 10232
  - 11527
  - 11856
  - 12131
  - horizontal axis. ntiple
  - Rogers, J. R. Linotype machines; mutt -
  - magazines; Linotype, tope-
  - Duncan, J. Time-printing stamps; V*
  - wheel mechanism. Doing-
  - Albert, E. Making matrices for electrotycase Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Die-centring-mechanism; Monotype. . tope
  - Mackay, W. K. and Hardisty, C. Lindino machines; repeat work mechanism ; type.
- p.606 - vue 774/901
- - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - 607
  - No.
  - 12362
  - No.
  - 26449
  - 26651
  - 27044
  - 1905 (continued).
  - Pinel, J. A strip-controlled typecasting and setting machine, capable of casting two or more of the characters at once. Dyotype.
  - Corey, J. A. Clips for mounting stereotypes, etc.
  - co to CO 1 co — H H
  - 6 A O O O N
  - on v or IO I. CO (0 1 1O 1
  - d8C€
  - 660
  - coo o ON 00
  - Bright, F. E. Linotype machines; escape- ] ments of magazines ; Linotype.
  - Elektrizitats Akt.-Ges. vorm. Schuckert & Co. Producing high or low spaces in a type-casting machine. ,
  - Wood, H. A.W. Casting and trimming curved stereotype-plates; Autoplate Junior.
  - Schimmel, F. Linotype and like machines. Composes a line of polyhedral matrices, line-justifies with wedge-spacers and dis-tributes matrices.
  - Nelson, I. T. and Murray, J. Apparatus for backing up electrotypes.
  - Law, J. C. Type for printing braille cha- | racters for the blind with six dots of which | those not required are removed.
  - Hopkins, C. E. Machines for casting and trimming curved stereotypes.
  - Langen, F. A. Time-printing stamps with electrically controlled typewheels.
  - Kay, D. B. Compressible non-resilient spaces. Dyson, H. Time-printing stamps; position-cing the identifying number-printing wheel. Charlottenburger Farbwerke Akt.-Ges. Appa-eratus for cleaning matrices for stereotypes. Charlottenburger Farbwerke Akt.-Ges. Appa-ratus for finishing curved stereotypes.
  - Sepnett, S. J. Typecasting, nicking and finishing machine.
  - international Time Recording Co. Date- and time-printing stamps with automatically moving typewheels.
  - Lewis, I. E. and Corey, J. A. Making electrotypes.
  - Crabtree, C. H. and Crabtree, A. E. Fudge-boxes.
  - Monoline Composing Co. Composing-box and 188- c line-carriage mechanism ; Monoline.
  - Snowdon, T. W. and Rostron, J. Forming stereotype-plates to facilitate insertion of 19016 * illustration-plates.
  - toronto Type Foundry Co. Linotype machines; escapements operated directly 19014 * the keys; Linotype.
  - toronto Type Foundry Co. Linotype machines ; escapement-pawls pivoted to an extension of the matrix-delivery mouth;
  - 19332 —Linotype.
  - topkins, C. E. Machine for trimming the longitudinal and curved edges of curved 206-7 T stereotypes.
  - 2117, Teycock, W. Hand-stamps for rubber-type.
  - 4 tedderwick, p D Fudge-box with radial 21580 wribs in ends to separate type-slugs.
  - 3 acconnell, H c. Machine for trimming
  - straight and curved edges and for shaving 22680 pcurved stereotypes.
  - 0e> R. Machine for making stereotype-2422- pmatrices by alternately pressing and drying.
  - ay.J. M. Time-printing stamps for speed-24242 plndicators.
  - °ttger, C. G. Moulds for typecasting 24358 pimachines ! body-slide.
  - D., de Wagenen, E. van and Burton, w in Hand-stamp for dating and cancelling, pwith characters on four chains.
  - win, R. S. Monotype and like machines, vh modified monotype.
  - Jer> J. and Muehleisen, C. Linotype machines ; two or more identical characters peach matrix.
  - etc M. Record-printing stamps; clock-ariven speed-indicator disks printing when cspeed varies above and below certain limits.
  - eed, F. G., Coulsen, W. A., Brown, H. T.
  - and Brown, N. P. Typesetting ; a Jac-26074 s.aard-operated typesetting machine.
  - hiepe, A. and Schutte, C. Rotary type-
  - Sesting machine; mould-wheel rotates 26251 Aisbout a horizontal axis.
  - precht, C. A. Linotype machines; double-a®38; samgazine distributing-mechanism.
  - nutte, C> and Schiepe, A. Typesetting machines; means of line-justification.
  - 27259
  - 301
  - on to CO H v 1 or or
  - N U
  - 88 1 or
  - 987
  - 0
  - 8
  - Harris, C. G. Numbering-apparatus; duplicate or repeat. Whitehead, A. and Porteus, G. Machine for beating or moulding stereotype-matrices.
  - Wood, H. A. W. Machines for casting curved stereotypes; Autoplate Junior.
  - Annand, R. C. and Peel, F. Stereotype-
  - casting machines.
  - 1906.
  - Annand, R. C. Metal-pump carried on vertical pivots axial with metal-pot, for filling a succession of stereotype-moulds. Lock, W. H., Caine, F. J. and Mitton, G. H. Linotype machines; means for adjusting trimming-knives; Linotype.
  - Neue Photographische Ges. Inkless printing from relief surfaces of photomechanical plates.
  - Scotford, L. K. Numbering-apparatus; consecutive, duplicate, triplicate, or indefinite
  - 2258
  - 2342
  - 2421
  - 3551
  - 3568
  - 3679
  - 4300
  - 4668
  - 4684
  - 5249
  - 5640
  - 6277
  - repetition.
  - Webster, C. C. Machine for manufacturing
  - printers’ leads.
  - Kotyra, M. Machine for perforating strips for controlling typecasting machines operated electromagnetically.
  - Wood, H. A. W. Machines for casting curved stereotypes ; Autoplate class.
  - Goss Printing Press Co. Pivotally mounted stereotype-moulds connected to a ladling device.
  - Goss Printing Press Co. Multiple-mould for curved stereotype-plates with single opening- and closing-apparatus; three sets of casting-apparatus to one pot.
  - Pearce, Sir W. G. and Reeves, W. R. Time-printing stamp for recording railway-signals.
  - Hopkins, C. E. Apparatus for casting curved stereotypes; see 12850/1903.
  - Wood, W. A. Date- and time-printing stamps. Cowper-Coles, S. O. Pressing electrotype-moulds from a composite sheet of two thicknesses of lead with an intermediate sheet of rubber.
  - i Studer, C. Means for accurately mounting the successive plates for multi-colour printing.
  - > Clause, J. J. Securing linotype-slugs or type
  - in fudge-boxes.
  - 7 Hopkins, C. E. and Bennison, W. E. Apparatus for casting and trimming curved
  - 7201
  - 7206
  - stereotypes
  - Shepherd, T., Baker, W. J. and Lockett, J.
  - Printing-type of linoleum.
  - Duncan, H. M. and Pierpont, F. H. Machines for cutting punches and matrices ; Monotype punch-cutter.
  - Lock, W. H. and Lawless, P. C. Linotype machines ; trimming-knives.
  - Homans, T. S. Linotype machines ; changing
  - 7309
  - 7417
  - 7582
  - 8467
  - 8470
  - 8665
  - 8843
  - 8874
  - 8880
  - 9587
  - 9972
  - 10258
  - 10417
  - magazines.
  - Elektrizitats Akt.-Ges. vorm. Schuckert & Co. Monotype and like machines; selecting devices for types and line-justification for casting from the strip in the direction
  - composed.
  - McCrum, J. Linotype machines; pump-
  - stop mechanism.
  - Muller, F. J. Typesetting and distributing
  - machines.
  - Schilla, O. Composing-sticks.
  - Schimansky, H. Flong-matrices faced with
  - three sheets of thin lead
  - Kennedy, W. R. Double-magazine machines;
  - Linotype.
  - Dow, W. S. and Smith, E. J. Apparatus for casting a number of stereotype-plates in moulds arranged concentrically with the
  - melting-pot.
  - Dow, W. S. and Smith, E. J. Fudge-boxes with saw-shaped teeth for securing linotype-slugs.
  - Dethleffs, M. Composition for mounting-
  - blocks for printing-surfaces.
  - i Peczenik, C. E. Flong for stereotype-moulds. r Fanslow, B. O. Type-holder for printing letters, circulars, maps, etc.
- p.607 - vue 775/901
- - 00 o VS
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1906 {continued).
  - 10687 Mayer, J. and Albrecht, C. A. Matrix-releasing and guiding from two or more superposed magazines; Linotype.
  - 10898 Addressograph Co. Metal-type with skeleton bodies for use in type holders; Addressograph.
  - 10988 Defauw, T. Date- and time-printing stamps for race-timing.
  - 11237 Thomas, W. Hand-stamps.
  - 11599 Thomson, A. C. Hand-stamps.
  - 11650 Bryan, J. P. Production of stereotypes suitable for use in addressing-machines.
  - 11914 Nuernberger, P. G. and Rettig, G. Type-casting machines ; type-moulds.
  - 11915 Nuernberger, P. G. and Rettig, G. Typecasting machines; matrix-holders and adjustment of moulds.
  - 12672 Lock, W. H., Holbourns, J. G. and Longhurst, H. A. Linotype machines; escapement-mechanism; Linotype.
  - 12801 Brown, S. Type with grooves to engage with a special case and with a composing-stick or fork.
  - 13096 Duncan, H. M. and Pierpont, F. H. Machine for grinding cutters for punch-cutting. Monotype punch-cutter.
  - 13227 Taylor, W. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - 13854 Tillmanns, E. Hand-stamps; for recording vehicles entering railway-stations.
  - 13997 Jacobs, R. F. and Walther, C. F. Machine for cutting linotype-slugs to length.
  - 14035 Drummond, R. Casting low-quads and -spaces. Monotype.
  - 14619 Trama, E. Linotype machines; automatically supplying metal to pot by means of inclined plane and metal balls automatically-delivered as required.
  - 14621 Blackmore, L. R. Hand-stamp with flexible backing for type.
  - 14786 Safford, O. D. Hand-stamp for printing columns, names, addresses, etc.
  - 14933 Kristensen, S. A. C. Liquid compound for use in preparing flong stereotype-matrices.
  - 15270 Allam, G. and Byles, A. R. Mounting halftone process plates in stereotype-plates of rotary presses.
  - 15468 Druitt, P. W. and Baines, E. R. Starting, vice-justifying and matrix-separating mechanism ; Stringertype.
  - 15545 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Linemeasuring and indicating mechanism; Monotype.
  - 15650 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Linemeasuring mechanism for keyboard ; Monotype-
  - 15987 Aix, F. C. L. d’. Linotype machines ; casting, trimming and ejecting mechanism; line of matrices conveyed by rotating carrier.
  - 16363 Brown, T. Linotype machines; cleaning matrix-faces.
  - 16586 Weeks, F. W. Chase with holders for separate lines of type particularly adapted to type with a printing-character at one end and a proof-character at the other.
  - 16592 Dow, W. S. and Smith, E. J. Casting curved stereotype-plates.
  - 17546 Hewitt, T. P. and Hewitt, C. J. Time-printing stamps for recording the time of railway-signals.
  - 17726 Redington, F. B. Mounting-block for electrotypes, stereotypes, etc.
  - 17912 Laudenbach, H. Linotype machines; distinguishing characteristics for groups of keys.
  - 18054 Brown, W. and Weber, A. Composite backing-block for mounting half-tone plates.
  - 18230 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Detachable and interchangeable stop-bar and coupling arrangements for change of fount in record-strip perforators ; Monotype.
  - 18231 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Casting low quads or -spaces ; Monotype.
  - 18331 Lock, W. H., Holbourns, J. G. and Longhurst, H. A. Linotype machines; simultaneously adjusting mould and trimming-knives and also length of mould.
  - 19243 Macdonald, R. G. A. Perforated type for typewriters.
  - 20213 Annand, R. C. Apparatus for casting and trimming stereotype-plates.
  - No.
  - J 20617 Butlin, G. L. Rotary numbering-machine for printing longitudinally or circumferentially i consecutive. ,
  - 20681 Homans, T. S. Linotype machines; mould adjustable for length and width ; Linotypes 20731 Annand, R. C. Machine with collapsible cOE. for casting and trimming curved stereotype plates. J 20731A Annand, R. C. Machine for casting an trimming curved stereotype-plates ; matrix' stripping gear without collapsible core.
  - 21809 Thompson, A. C. Hand-stamps. -
  - 22239 Albert, E. Making soft-metal matrices electrotypes. 1
  - (Wood, H. A. W. Machine for trimming
  - 334593 cooling curved stereotype-plates; Autoy 2242°% shaver.
  - 22912 Hopkins, C. E. Apparatus for finishing curved stereotypes.
  - 22974 Stamm, J. Monotype machines. Templee equal or proportional to set widths of are composed and line-justified by spaces; the casting operations are thee controlled by the templets and the weds position.
  - 22995 James, R. L. and Braun, H. C. Printing-bloc for weather-charts in newspapers.
  - 23508 Pollen, A. H. Assembling-mechanism an line-delivery carriage ; Linotype. .
  - 23528 Baker, A. G. Typesetting and distributing. 23847 Pollen, A. H., Holbourns, J. G. and Lora, hurst, H. A. Linotype machines ; mecD nism for effecting change of magazine. . 24064 Patent-Industrie-Ges. Linotype machine ’ automatic safety device ; Monoline.. for 25213 American Type Founders Co. Machine > cutting ai d smoothing the ends of printe leads. tion
  - 25310 Chambonnaud, L. Typesetting; adaptati of typewriter-mechanism. . - 2 25454 Jackson, H. O. Date- and time-prinling stamps for coin-freed apparatus for issur insurance tickets.
  - 25484 Kempe, C. Keeping surface of stereotyn metal from oxidizing by floating iron
  - or plates. . and
  - 26595 Gottschling, A. Type with curved lines 3 clubbed ends to strokes, like 27060 Drewell, H. Monotype, linotype, andi. machines ; strip-controlled electro-mecising cal actuation of composing and typesetti machines.
  - 27130 Lebeis, M. Printing, numbering, dating of issuing railway-tickets using a chain
  - printing-plates. , sing
  - 27678 Knorr, W. Adjustable frame for hold together standing type. Irks
  - 27946 Brauchlin, G. Printing measurement-ma on fabrics. Iies,
  - 28683 Toronto Type Foundry Co. Linotype mactand assembly space-carrier, trimming galley mechanism; Linotype. e0.
  - 29194 Maurer, F. Machine for beating flong ste type-matrices. mme-
  - 29195 Pearce, Sir W. G. and Reeves, W. R. lly-printing stamp for recording electricaial-transmitted signals sent between sig cabins. ha-
  - 29398 Hewitt, T. P. Keyboard typewheel moon a nism for recording railway-signal times record-tape.
  - 709
  - 1286
  - 1560
  - 1818
  - 1819
  - 1821
  - 1907.
  - • and Brown, S. Flexible type-forme of chain hort bars of I-section engaging grooves in ST type. 1 of
  - Harrison, A. W. Wood mounting-bloc-several lateral sections, jpg
  - Aix, F.C. L. d’. Linotype machines ; vary the length and width of mould.
  - Ray, D. B. Type-distributing. . ga-Lock, W. H. and Pearce, H. Double-® zines, facilitating removal; Linotype- ong-Lock, W. H., Holbourns, J. G. and, .-hurst, H. A. Means for justifying tap matter; Linotype. Iines;
  - Drewell, H. Monotype and like mace strip perforator.
- p.608 - vue 776/901
- - BRITISH
  - PATENTS.
  - 609
  - OOOOOO O0O 0 ( ( C0N ~ ~ N Oh o oh oo on o A. C7C CN H HHO O O O O O O ( "1 ~ NTU HUO 00 CO CO "I N O CO Oo N O NpsoO OEO 00 to-AOAOHHH HO VO O OOO O4 CO N O0 Nr H C O W A oTOO NO O HO TUHUNONHODO NU O D 00 P Ul 00 O OHH OH O NH O, Ut Dor 04
  - 1907 (continued).
  - Gammeter, H. C. Machine for use in composing cylinders for imitation typewriting circulars; limiting the advance of the line and storing frequently-used characters.
  - Savarese, A. Typesetting; bifurcated type.
  - Buigne, F. de, and Schreiner, J. Type of hard-metal locally softened by heat and pressed into soft negative-dies.
  - Lock, W. H. and Pearce, H. Keyboard-mechanism ; Linotype.
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Protecting matrices in magazine-channels; Linotype.
  - Cowper . Coles, S. O. Electrotyping on moving moulds.
  - Foote, T. M., Wolfe, W. F. and Young, A. V. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - Lock, W. H., Gantzer, F., Pearce, H., Joy, J. H. and Billington, J. E. Divided moulds and ejectors for tabular work and short-measure ; Linotype.
  - Michaud, E., Spear, J. and Gibbs, F. H. Hand-stamp with rubber stereotype of thumb-print.
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Reducing contact-area of matrices; Lino-- type.
  - Thommen, P. Holder for alining detached rubber type.
  - motel Security Checking Co. Means for automatically numbering and accurately counting printed-sheets.
  - —ogel, F. Lines of type mounted in wedge-shaped holders and secured by bands to a cylinder.
  - Lock.W. H- Woodroffe, C. S., Pearce, H. and Billington, J. E. Quadding-apparatus for short-measure ; Linotype.
  - p’rus, E. Typesetting and distributing.
  - Toers, J. R. Improvements in distribution escapement for multiple-magazines; Lino-„type.
  - "Ug, F. W. and Klug, R. Coating the printing-machine bed with a resinous compound to prevent spaces from rising.
  - Lock, W. H., Holbourns, J. G. and Longhurst,
  - A. Assembling and distributing re-pversible.matrices ; Linotype.
  - tanigan, A. W. Forming slugs from loose-T 1 ype with locking-strips.
  - Lock, W. H. and Harris, J. J. B. Manually operated apparatus for casting, cooling and trimming curved stereotypes.
  - ton, J. P. Double-magazine distribution; Linotype.
  - etser, K. and Schatzmann, A. Printing-clocks formed of magnesite, starch and citalc mixed with magnesium chloride.
  - S . H. Printing-plates formed with p.relief surfaces to avoid use of underlays.
  - & H. and Jaunez, M. von. Typesetting machine and line-justifying by substituting spaces cut from lead-strip for temporary R spaces.
  - Urg, H. and Jaunez, M. von. Typesetting Blend distributing.
  - H. and Jaunez, M. von. Apparatus for peibuting nicked type.
  - 5 P. W. Monotype and like machines ; pTOducing low-spaces ; Stringertype. typeser, E. A. Casting low-quads; Mono-
  - Ttpeft, J. S. Melting-pot nozzles; Mono-
  - Bancroft, W. Improvements in control-B stnp ; Monotype.
  - Monotype J. Adjustment of unit-wheel; inke, E. F. Linotype and like machines; camprovements in assembly-wheel. ton, S. Etching process for preparing Roef-tone blocks.
  - Duni ’ J. R. Ejector-blades; Linotype.
  - Printing Press Co. Machine for Dieiting curved stereotypes.
  - TX Printing Press Co. Stereotype metal-tur nozzle with hinged joint to allow it to freezingck into 1116 metal-pot; preventing
  - No.
  - 10503 Dow, A. and Dow Composing Machine Co.
  - Type-cases with pusher mechanism assisting hand.
  - 10504 Dow, A. and Dow Composing Machine Co.
  - Type-distributing.
  - 10740 Sigurdsson, O. V. Monotype and like
  - machines; typecasting, keyboard-operated machine with multiple-moulds; line-justifying with corrugated, compressible spaces.
  - 10951 Soc. Anon. Internazionale per i Cliches in Celluloide Bacigalupi. Printing-surfaces of celluloid.
  - 11075 Duplex Printing Press Co. Means for keeping metal-level constant in stereotype-casters; hinged displacer.
  - 11140 Elliott, R. C. Monotype and like machines; a typecasting and composing machine resembling the Stringertype, but using selector-mechanism.
  - 11467 Hanigan, A. W. Linotype and monotype machines; casting type and locking by strip in grooves to form slugs.
  - 12134 Bannerman, R. P. Casting hollow quotations and furniture.
  - 12194 Rockstroh, C. F. Clamps and spacers for printing-plates.
  - 12209 Grant, S. Casting type from four L-shaped mould-members.
  - 12476 Tachytype Manufacturing Co. Monotype and like machines; record-strip perforators; Tachytype.
  - 12477 Tachytype Manufacturing Co. Monotype and like machines; Tachytype.
  - 12610 Hodson, G. Griffin-. Type or hand-stamps with two holes each and capable of being connected by dowels.
  - 12658 Ludlow Co. Linotype and like machines; casting from full-fount matrix-bars.
  - 12911 Elliott, W. E. Mechanism for effecting change of fount, change of mould and for distributing to proper magazines; Linotype.
  - 13018 Stockall, J. J. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - I Pierpont, F. H. and Lanston Monotype Corporation. Monotype machines; casting low-quads or -spaces by means of a divided mould-blade ; Monotype.
  - 13505 Dodge, P. T. Facilitating removal of magazines; Linotype.
  - 13778 Lock, W. H. and Wich, F. J. Assemblingmechanism for double-fount matrices. Linotype.
  - 13803 Elektrizitats Akt.-Ges. vorm. Schuckert & Co. Monotype and like machines ; rotary adjustment of matrix-disks in strip-controlled typecasting and composing machines.
  - 13829 Mercier, C. A. Date- and time-printing stamps.
  - 14088 Koske, O. Linotype machines; conveying matrices with deep slots.
  - 14388 Coles, S. O. Cowper-. Soft-lead matrix of electro-deposited lead on a lead-sheet.
  - 15508 Hodula, K. Hand-stamp for plane-tabling with polygonal and revolving-cylindrical stamps for railway-points, buildings, rail-signs, etc.
  - 15547 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Monotype machines; preventing delivery of defective lines ; Monotype.
  - 15548 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Hydraulic means for retarding the motion of the die-case ; Monotype.
  - 16417 Foster, J., Foster, J. Y., Dow, W. S. and Smith, E. J. Casting stereotypes in several moulds from a pot with swivelling nozzles.
  - 16860 Typograph Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Adjusting line of matrices and using two-letter matrices; Typograph.
  - 17125 Evans, G. Making type-metal alloys direct from ores, etc.
  - 17758 Foster, J., Foster, J. Y., Dow, W. S. and Smith, E. J. Machine for casting curved stereotype-plates.
  - 17864 Monoman Typesetter Co. Monotype machines; machine with combined keyboard and casting-mechanism.
  - 18172 Butcher, A. D. Special-sign types for representing sound values, printed between the lines of type.
  - 2 R
- p.609 - vue 777/901
- - 6io TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1907 (continued).
  - 18201 Bellows, B. F. Linotype and like machines; matrix-distribution improvements; Electric Compositor.
  - 18317 Toronto Type Foundry Co. Improvements in magazine adjustment; Linotype.
  - 18382 Electric Compositor Co. Linotype and like machines; various improvements in line-justifying mechanism and in transferring and starting casting; Electric Compositor.
  - 18383 Bellows, B. F. Linotype and like machines; improvements in moulds, trimming and ejecting mechanisms; Electric Compositor.
  - 18405 Green, J. Preventing warping of mounting-blocks by inserting dovetailed strips inclined to the grain.
  - 18579 Lock, W. H., Pearce, H. and Billington, J. E. Improvements in assembly; Linotype.
  - 18627 Lock, W. H., Billington, J. E. and Holliwell, C. Assembly-mechanism; Linotype.
  - 18962 Lock, W. H., Billington, J. E. and Holliwell,
  - C. Trimming two-line letter slugs; Linotype-
  - 19026 Toronto Type Foundry Co. Storage magazines ; Linotype.
  - 19567 Toronto Type Foundry Co. Assembly-mechanism ; Linotype.
  - 20934 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Improvements in punching record-strip; Monotype.
  - 20935 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Making record-strips; Monotype keyboard.
  - 21013 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Arrangement of keys actuating punches ; Monotype keyboard.
  - 21014 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Monotype machines; machine adapted as a sorts-caster; Monotype.
  - 21350 Stockall, J. J. Date- and time-printing stamps; preventing the minutes-wheel from jumping forward.
  - 21409 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Mould improvements in casting low-spaces.
  - 21718 Lock, W. H., Pearce, H., Joy, J. H. and Billington, J. E. Linotype and like machines; galley provided with adjustable shelves for short-measures.
  - 22065 Pautze, H. Printing-plates for addresses of vulcanized fibre with stamped raised characters.
  - 22358 Marinoni et Cie. Casting-box for producing curved stereotypes.
  - 22406 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Monotype machines; record-strips; Monotype.
  - 22553 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Typesetting ; producing record-strips for automatic type-casters ; Monotype.
  - 22554 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Typesetting; making record-strips; Monotype.
  - 22846 Kutschbach, W. Funnels with guides to prevent type from twisting in hand-distribution.
  - 23000 Lock, W. H., Pearce, H., and Billington, J. E. Linotype machines; changing magazines; Linotype.
  - 23114 Burris, H., and Burris, E. Linotype machines; automatically feeding metal-pot.
  - 23455 Haydock, W. Type with grooves for engaging in hand-stamp holders.
  - 24109 Degener, H. Linotype and like machines; matrices produced by compression; Mono-line.
  - 24110 Degener, H. Linotype and like machines; wedge-spaces ; Monoline.
  - 24377 General Composing Co. and Degener, H. Linotype machines ; means for composing characters of different styles; Monoline.
  - 24682 Bunau-Varilla, P. Cooling the core in machines for casting curved stereotypes.
  - 24777 Terrell, E. Typesetting; assembling L-shaped types for use on cylinder-machines.
  - 24803 Elliott, R. C. Monotype and like machines; justifying-mechanism.
  - 25046 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Linotype machines; alinement-device.
  - 25053) Wood, H. A. W. Moulding and drying stereo-250545 type-matrices.
  - 25057 Wood, H. A. W. Machine for casting curved stereotypes; means for holding the matrix and stripping it from the plate.
  - 25058 Wood, H. A. W. Apparatus for casting curved stereotypes; securing the mat
  - by flexible strips. „ed ,cn.A(Wood. H- A- W- Machine for casting cutis 2<o6oi stereotypes; means for holding the ma
  - 25 and stripping it from the plate. r 25529 Welsh, W. H., Royal, C. H. and Gounley, Shin Making matrices for electrotypes of
  - 26306
  - 26729
  - 26998
  - 27118
  - 27190
  - 27799
  - metal foil. . H.
  - Regina Maschinen Fabrik and Friedleini‘ts; Printing and registering railway-ticking. magazine of loose type-plates, number device and dating-stamp. the Cottrell and Sons, Co., C. B. Depressing edges of electrotype and stereotype-pi® ' Reid, R. B. Automatic machine for cas and trimming curved stereotype-plates. Taylor, W. Date- and time-printing stamp Barclay, J. C. Typesetting; machines perforating paper control-strip. 1Co. Elektrizitats Akt.-Ges. vorm Schuckert andher-Typesetting; machines for making P forated control-strip.
  - " like
  - 85 Sigurdsson, 0. V. Monotype and machines; key-operated typecasting chine with matrices on bars. F A.
  - 280 Pulsometer Engineering Co. and Adcock. 5
  - Typesetting machine; Pulsometer. E A. 281 Pulsometer Engineering Co. and Adcock, Dch-Typesetting and distributing; key-m anism ; Pulsometer. . mning
  - 405 Morris, E. T. Routing machine for trime curved electrotypes and stereotypes. H. 934 General Composing Co. and Degenentove-Linotype and like machines; imp-ments in Monoline machines, sting 970 Stockall, J. J. Date- and time-Piition. stamps; bringing extra type into POSFacks 1167 Bland, J. P. Machine for dressing the ° of stereotype-matrices. Aon
  - 1459 Derriey, C. J. Press for moulding dry stereotype-matrices. E.A
  - 1605 Pulsometer Engineering Co. and Adcock, Type-distributing; Pulsometer. . . [eo' 2336 Cottrell and Sons, Co., C. B. Making Sirkest types with higher elevation for
  - parts of plates. ettins
  - 2781 International Multigraph Co. TyPechort and distributing; hand-operated. foot-type grooved and wedge-shaped ®r Gammeter Multigraph. , thin
  - 3776 Lohmann, H. Plates for half-tone 01 copper film soldered to zinc. . prove” 4107 Rogers, J. R. Linotype machines; imP ments in the Typograph. mjah
  - 4196 Hulton and Co., E., Mackay, W. K., Jemea like
  - J. D. and Hardisty, C. Linotype aand-re machines; late-news slugs with 6 cesses. cawin
  - 4207 Miller, H. G. Leads; apparatus for 3 metal-stock and linotype-slugs. —notyPe 4248 Typograph Setzmaschinen Fabrik. tatii" and like machines ; improvements in 1 distribution; Typograph. achin
  - 4872 Schooling, W. and Randall, F. W. the, and for recording cash amounts, totaliztb’ recording totals. achine
  - 4873 Schooling, W. and Randall, F. W. Nectinl for recording with provision for corachin 4874 Schooling, W. and Randall, F. W. lents.0 for recording gross, tare and net we cordiob coal on wagons, totalizing, and re totals. 1 stere°
  - 5403 Pilz, O. Machines for casting curve ,
  - type-plates. cesO
  - 5587 Schimansky, H. Electrotype-matsied to several sheets of lead-foil cemen . gether. sent 1
  - 5906 Cleathero, E. T. Linotype attachmastet printing an impression of the slug leaves the machine. cetchel
  - 6027 Pollen, A. H., Holbourns, J. G., and T quid
  - W. Linotype and like machines; change mechanism for the magazins
  - 6073 Huggins, S. A. Fudge-box for recteviou" to receive names and numbers, P prepared, separately ; dovetail slots’
- p.610 - vue 778/901
- - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - 0
  - 000* 6 O0 N5 -PODN NP N0+
  - Ut
  - 1908 (continued).
  - Ellis, H. Linotype and like machines; separating sorts-matrices.
  - Read, G. F., and Longee, F. G. Means for trimming stereotype-plates, type-slugs, etc.
  - Thompson Type Machine Co. Typecasting machine; Thompson typecaster.
  - Prewell, H. Typesetting; improvements in electric typesetting machine.
  - Richford, E. M., Webb, C. S., and Garrod G. Hand-stamp; printing in more than one colour, from sectional type-blocks dowelled . together.
  - Pollen, A. H., and Bland, J. P. Improvements in means for cooling cylindrical core
  - S Co Oh
  - oo O co Ul
  - oo
  - 0 on
  - o
  - &
  - co
  - - c of curved stereotype-casting apparatus.
  - 795 ochwahn, K. Type; impressing internal - surface of hollow articles.
  - Castle, T. R. Linotype machines; com-posing tabular matter. _ Bannerman, R. P., and Bhisey, S. A. Type-casting machine; cooling type in process of casting.
  - deneral Composing Co. and Degener, H. Linotype and like machines; improvements in distributing-mechanism and magazine; Monoline. , Knudsen, H., and Barta, H. Linotype and like machines; typesetting; operating linotype machines by wireless means.
  - Cowper-Coles, S. 0. Facilitating inspection 9436 of electrotyping work.
  - 3 ° Wood, H. A. W. Means for drying stereotype-1006. C matrices.
  - 4 Sutcliffe, J., and Taylor, Garnett, Evans and Co. Monotype machines; improvements 1050, in strip-perforating apparatus.
  - 4 “tergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Linotype and like machines; vertical magazines ; Linotype.
  - Bhisey, S. A. Typecasting machine; for types and logotypes conveyed to a series of -composing-machines; Bhisotype.
  - Dates, A. H. Linotype and like machines; matrices with characters on opposite sides or at ends.
  - ates, A. H. Linotype or stereotype-matrix machines, assembling and distributing matrices.
  - Lock, W. H., Pearce, H., and Billington, J. E. Linotype and like machines; adjustable moulds.
  - Miller Saw Trimmer Co. Type ; cutting and trimming type-slugs.
  - YPOgraph Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Linotype and like machines ; improvements in matrix-basket; increased number of bars ; Typo-tsraph.
  - aberg, A. Linotype, stereotype-matrix, and j- machines: type, typesetting and 12450 .distributing. "la, J., and Prohaska, L. Monotype and 1265- vilke machines ; improvements in moulds. 1267- Targonari, V- Flong for stereotype-matrices. eneral Composing Co. and Degener, H. motype and like machines; improve-ments in casting-mechanism and in alining 12760 umatrices for distribution ; Monoline. tuff, C., Carter, J. T., and White, E. B. 12771 coPe; adjustable type-moulds. eral Composing Co. and Degener, H. motype and like machines; improve-sements in Monoline matrix-bar alinement.
  - mneisetzmaschinen Ges. Typesetting ;line-'15 puttying and strip-perforating.
  - 1 * - A. L. Monotype machines; casting '’"'-quads by means of a divided mould-12901 Cartel? Monotype. ,
  - Tercrume Co- Printing-cylinders for 12903 caveVing and actuating numbering-devices.
  - Ter-Crume Co. Plunger-operated repeat 3313 velmbering-apparatus. tenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Lino-VPe and like machines; circular wedge-3346 RSDaces ; Typograph.
  - Tier O. Linotype and like machines. 13749 ToroProements in matrix-slide wires. Type Foundry Co. Linotype and 13983 crse machines ! improvements in magazines. embonnaud, L. Typesetting.
  - 6
  - No.
  - 14531 Muller, W. and Ermbter, J. Machine for measuring and attaching measurement-marks to fabrics.
  - 14591 Warnock, W. S. Key-operated quoins.
  - 14780 Vogtlandische Maschinen Fabrik vorm. J. C.
  - & H. Dietrich Akt.-Ges. Automatic machines for casting curved stereotypes.
  - 15114 McDade, C. Printing measurement-marks on fabric.
  - 15331 Luck, F. Machine for beating, rolling, backing and drying stereotype-matrices.
  - 15334 Quillacq, A. L. G. de and Soc. des Etablisse-ments A. Foucher. Type; improvements in the body-slide casting-machine. Foucher. j 15738 Schnellsetzmaschinen Ges. Typesetting machines; cancelling incorrect groups of holes in perforated strip.
  - 16161 Schnellsetzmaschinen Ges. Typesetting ; cancelling incorrect groups of holes in perforated strip.
  - 16999 Stromberg Electric Manufacturing Co. Date-and time-printing stamps; locked movements.
  - 17163 Alexander, H. Typesetting for rotary machines. Improvements in type-carrier rings.
  - 17197 Pierpoint, F. H., and Lanston Monotype Corporation. Type-composing and casting machines; improvements in unit-counting mechanism; Monotype keyboard.
  - I 17198 Reymond, A. du Bois. Monotype machines ; proportional dividers for ascertaining the quotient of two variable quantities; Monotype.
  - j 17199 Bancroft, J. S. and Indahl, M. C. Monotype and like machines; improvements in line-justification indicator drums; Monotype keyboard.
  - 17375 Weiniger, H. and Progress Typewriter Supply Co. Typesetting.
  - 17868 Lock, W. H., Pearce, H., Billington, J. E. Holliwell, C. and Burgess, J. R. Linotype and like machines; quadding and short-line arrangements.
  - 17869 Lock, W. H., Pearce, H. and Billington, J. E. Linotype and like machines ; improvements in automatic pump stop-mechanism.
  - 18343 Hart, C. F. Machine for making stereotype-flongs.
  - 18518- Burlingame Telegraphing Typewriter Co. Linotype and like machines; electromagnetic control from a distance.
  - 18658 Schimmel, F. Linotype and like machines ; composing-frames supporting arms.
  - 19934 Novi, G. Stereotype-matrix machines; obtaining uniform depth of impression.
  - 20090 Lock, W. H., Pearce, H. and Billington, J. E. Quick-change mechanism for single magazines ; Linotype.
  - 20282 Aders, M. L. C. F. Typesetting; pneumatically or hydraulically actuated adjusting-mechanism.
  - 20527 Hulton & Co., E. and Hulton, E.- Apparatus for casting stereotype-plates for late-news.
  - 20731 Aders, M. L. C. F. Typesetting; keyboard mechanism.
  - 21047 Miller, H. G. Machine for grooving, trimming, mortising, routing and drilling slugs, electrotypes, etc.
  - 21268 Bancroft, W. Typecasting and setting machines; simultaneously composing two or more copies of matter in line-justified lines of different lengths ; Monotype.
  - 21641 Read, G. F. Use of air-blast for stripping stereotype-matrices from the plate.
  - 21953 Cohn, H. Protective coating for stereotype-matrices to prevent metal from penetrating.
  - 22374 Bancroft, J. S. and Indahl, M. C. Typecasting and setting machines; automatic line-justifying mechanism ; Monotype.
  - 22802 Riley, F. and Riley & Co., J. H. Apparatus for printing numbers or other measurement-marks on cloth.
  - 22861 Haddan, R. Apparatus for casting curved stereotype-plates.
  - 22866 Bannerman, R. P. Type; automatically withdrawing cores in casting hollow type.
  - 23271 Typograph Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type ; removing fins from set-up type surfaces ; uses rotary brushes.
- p.611 - vue 779/901
- - 6l2
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1908 (continued).
  - 23808 Dacheux, R. Compressible spaces formed from creased soft-metal tube.
  - 23885 Lock, W. H., Pearce, H. and Billington, J. E. Linotype and like machines ; improvements in magazine-mechanism ; triple magazine; Linotype.
  - 24010 Southgate Machinery Co. Preventing elongation in curving flat plates by first curving in the opposite direction while backed with fusible alloy; removing alloy, flattening, rebacking and recurving.
  - 24011 Southgate Machinery Co. Duplicate flat and cylindrical plates for use on the same machine.
  - 24629 Draper, T. and Draper, J. M. Composing-stick; notches to facilitate adjustment.
  - 25043 Hyde, A. G. and Link, R. P. Short shouldered-type and spring-clip holders or type-bars, for lines of short-type ; Uni-Typebar.
  - 25824 Grasso, N. Quoins with ratchet-toothed ribs; key-operated.
  - 26021 Neidich, S. A. Channels for grooved-type.
  - 26022 Neidich, S. A. Composing-sticks for picking up grooved-type.
  - 26676 Lock, W. H., Pearce, H. and Billington, J. E. Type-slug machines; matrix-feed from multiple magazines; Linotype.
  - 27128 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Ensuring entry of matrices into proper magazine channels; Linotype.
  - 27129 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Protecting matrices from injury ; Linotype.
  - 27130 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Close-fitting matrices; Linotype.
  - 27231 Huggins, S. A. Interlocking fudge-box type with bead opposite to nick.
  - 27399 Dutton, A. Stereotype-blocks; securing accuracy.
  - 27400 Dutton, A. Asbestos stereotype-matrices.
  - 27401 Dutton, A. Stereotype-casting apparatus.
  - 27762 Typograph Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Improvements in matrix-basket; Typograph.
  - 27770 Wiessler, E. Mounting-blocks for printing-surfaces.
  - 27891 Bland, J. P. Typecasting and composing machines; galleys for type cast in reverse order.
  - 28007 General Composing Co. and Degener, H. Water-cooling of moulds; Linotype.
  - 28533 Derriey, C. J. Machine for making stereotype-matrices by beating and rolling.
  - 1909.
  - 223 Lock, W. H. and Goulding, B. J. J. Machines for trimming curved stereotypes ; adjusting shaving-knife.
  - 1214 Schriftgiesserei, E. Gursch. Casting type from matrices without lateral cheeks.
  - 1618 Droitcour, M. A. Printing-surfaces of celluloid, hard rubber, etc.
  - 1646 Wesel Manufacturing Co., F. Securing printing-surfaces by means of adjustable clamps.
  - 1702 Williams, W. S. Hand-stamp comprising lines of fixed type and bands of adjustable . type.
  - 1707 Schimmel, F. Typecasting and composing machine; casts a slug or line of loose-type letter by letter ; Rototype.
  - 1822 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Improvements in magazine-changing mechanism ; Linotype.
  - 1992 Quiggan, J. P. Mounting-block of L-shaped sections with a series of holes.
  - 4229 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Adjusting star-wheel to cause multiple-character matrices to assume different levels ; Linotype.
  - 4347 Fishburn, T. H. Apparatus for cleaning formes of type.
  - 5348 Jackson, W. H. Fixing type on thin metal barrels which can be used interchangeably on a printing-cylinder.
  - 5674 Morris, E. T. Fudge-boxes with both ends movable.
  - 5780 Degener. H. and General Composing Co. Typecasting machines; preventing burring on type.
  - No.
  - 5948
  - O ON O W 4 00
  - 6633
  - 6755
  - 6756
  - 6793
  - 6873
  - 6942
  - 6955
  - 6990
  - 7170
  - 7192
  - 7401
  - 7402
  - 7421
  - 7924
  - 00
  - 1 %
  - 8295
  - o 6
  - 00 co
  - 8871
  - 8872
  - 8873
  - 8874
  - 8983
  - Bancroft, J. S. and Indahl, M. C. Monotype and like machines; line-justification ; 1 provements in line-deficiency and SPaspe number signals in record-strip; MonotyP keyboard.
  - Hoe, R. Machine for boring and trim®1 6 curved stereotype-plates.
  - Chanonhouse, J. F. S. Low-quad in record-strip; moulds for casting.10 . quads; casting and keyboard machine ‘
  - Monotype.
  - Ehrlich, M.
  - Strip-perforating machines type-actt
  - strip-controlled pneumatic
  - embossing braille characters. e
  - Link, R. P. and Morgan, A. C. Single-DT
  - composing and casting machines ; magazt mechanism; Uni-Typebar. he
  - Link, R. P. and Morgan, A. C. Single-tais.
  - composing and casting machines; C tributing matrices; Uni-Typebar. „
  - Harnett, J. Photographic method for P ducing relief surfaces. ,
  - Link, R. P. and Woodroffe, C. H. Single-ti,. composing and casting machines ; mat selecting mechanism; Uni-Typebar. e
  - Link, R. P. and Woodroffe, C. H. Single-composing and casting machines; cluon; driving mechanism for matrix select!
  - Uni-Typebar. ore
  - Slater, J. W. Hand-stamp; two or Tely portions of the printing-surface relatt movable. port-
  - Gestetner, D. Setting and distributing Sppe type with a non-circular cross-hole ; t)P cases and composing-sticks. Ape
  - Bancroft, J. S. and Indahl, M. C. Monom;
  - machines ; power-transmitting mechanizely varying the dwell-period proportions to set of type; Monotype. TE.
  - Pollen, A. H., Pearce, H. and Billington, J'
  - Automatic quadding-apparatus ; Linotyipe Link, R. P. and Hyde, A. G. Single and casting machines; metal-pots, pumps in moulds; creates a partial vacuum mould; Uni-Typebar. . type
  - Link, R. P. and Hyde, A. G. Singleirices casting machines; transmission of ma to and from mould ; Uni-Typebar. Aber-
  - Boorne, W. H. Making half-tone ru stamps from photographs. . and
  - Grant, J. C. Typecasting, line-justifyide of composing machines; casting a Iously individual type from a line of prey at a assembled and line-justified matrices single operation. Grantype. , Iting
  - Barr, M. and Clarke, E. R. Calcuucts; machine ; summation of partial PTOions; reducing number of carrying opera Srious use of ‘ slaves’; multiplication in Vith of scales of notation and of fractions W without recording gear. . Co:
  - Degener, H. and General Composing of
  - Typecasting machines; prevent® burrs. gexible
  - Chipperfield, W. Printing-surfaces; T carriers for type or stereotype-plates- for
  - Duplex Printing Press Co. Machin pg. boring and trimming tubular stereo ; plates. . Type
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. mecha composing machines; matrix-bar m nism ; Typograph. Type
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. ts in composing machines; improvemen matrix-bar suspension ; Typograph- Type
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. it composing machines; improvemen and matrix-bar assembling pins, guides, alinement; Typograph. A ajust:
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Chines: able-moulds for type-slug casting mac Linotype. As for
  - Duplex Printing Press Co. Apparel
  - casting tubular stereotype-plates. Lin®. Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. proo" type and like machines; obtaining strips from dies or matrices; LinotyPoty?
  - 9851 Pierpont, F. H. and Lanston Moposin Corporation. Typecasting and comotyPe machines ; leading-mechanism ; Mor
  - 9555 9556'
- p.612 - vue 780/901
- - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - 613
  - o 62
  - -P NO © O
  - 00 A
  - co N O N
  - — 1 or or O O C or
  - 1909 (continued).
  - Hoe & Co., R. Machine for trimming and — cooling curved stereotype-plates. -"ogtlandische Maschinen Fabrik, vorm. J. C.
  - & H., Dietrich Akt.-Ges. Apparatus for trimming curved stereotype-plates.
  - Bancroft, J. S. and Indahl, M. C. Making type-matrices; avoiding pressure in die-carrying frames in stamp presses.
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Harden-ing metal matrices by hammering; Lino-type.
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Escape-ments for double magazines ; Linotype.
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Alining matrices, maintaining central position on type-slug of type of varying body-thickness ;
  - 886 0.00 ON 0
  - GO N
  - o
  - 1213 r Linotype.
  - Goss Printing Press Co. Apparatus for 1227. Casting curved stereotype-plates.
  - - 9 Orsoni, P. Making-ready by hammering the under surface of stereotype-plates supported 1245, against thick plate-glass. ergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Apparatus for assembling and distributing matrices having three or more cavities;
  - 12615 p.Linotype. terpont, F. H. and Lanston Monotype Corporation. Casting low-quads with divided 1290- T mould-blade; Monotype.
  - 220 Beethem, F. C. Mounting-block for stereotype-Plates.
  - Leethem, F. C. Means for operating clamps tor securing stereotypes, etc.
  - Beethem, F. C. Mounting-block for stereo-type-plates, etc.
  - ergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Level-ting, multiple-face matrices between the typing and distributing mechanisms ; Lino-Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Level-lng multiple-face matrices between the casting and distributing mechanisms ; Lino-ptype.
  - terpont, F. H. and Lanston Monotype Cor-poration. Single type-composing and cast-ing machines enabling matrices of various p.SlZes to be used ; Monotype.
  - rPont, F. H. and Lanston Monotype Cor-Poration. Gauging type-matrices and 14121 .similar bodies. ergenthaler Linotype Co. Multiple super-Posed magazines and escapements; Lino-14262 -type. eener, H. and General Composing Co. \stributing matrices; fount separation 14289 werior to general distribution; Linotype.
  - genthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Assem-14723 ping multiple-fount linotype matrices.
  - Acheux, R. Distributing type; nicked *4971 cope fed by oscillatory slide across feelers.
  - Tisen, H. Making printing-plates of cellu-” craid and the like. 7
  - Pperfield, W. Cases for type for use with veexible type-carriers.
  - ftler, H. W. Number-printing apparatus measuring-machines for length of woven - fabrics.
  - Chnellsetzmaschinen Ges. Type-composing machines; setting and line-justifying fPe; record-strip controlled; provision oT spaces to follow each character to fill th lines with line-justifying spaces between camle words ; electro-magnetic control.
  - neral Composing Co. and Degener, H. Provements in matrices, for distribution ; welnotype.
  - and, H. A. W. Apparatus for casting NovEVed stereotype-plates.
  - Casting type-slugs from stereotype-onivell ces made on a typewriter.
  - . of J. Make-ready” by electro-deposition -7579 l p.eta 1 on the actual printing-surfaces.
  - 17580, croft, J. S- and Indahl,M.C. Low-quad *758r B-moulds ; Monotype.
  - meroft, J. S' and Knight, A. L. Improve-17866 cMonotypeccuring nick-pins of type-moulds;
  - "Vegetable Stereotype-matrices of pulped
  - or co or * 1 VO 1 1
  - CH U OO 000
  - , No.
  - 18367 Lambie, J. E. Composing and distributing type.
  - | 18419 Hoe, R. Continuously casting curved stereo-type-plates.
  - 18763 Davis, G. and Eisenmenger, R. Type; printing-faces of various sizes and shapes ; imitation of half-tone.
  - 19089 Goss Printing Press Co. Casting mechanism for semi-cylindrical stereotype-plates.
  - 19742 Watkins, A. O. Type for printing in light colours on a dark ground; taking a mould from ordinary type by electrodeposition, etc., machining down to near the face and printing from the machined surface.
  - 20209 Gilbert-Stringer, H. J. S., and Druitt, P. W. Typecasting machines; improvements in assembling matrices and in driving-mechanism ; Stringertype.
  - 20398 Grant, J. C. Type-moulds; moulds for producing self-dressed type.
  - 20554 Indahl, M. C. and Chalfant, W. E. Die-case arranged for receiving matrices of abnormal size of strike ; Monotype.
  - 21097 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Distributing matrices in machines producing mixed matter; Linotype.
  - 21159 Jones, P. Mounting-blocks built up of different kinds of wood.
  - 21246 Chipperfield, W. Composing and distributing type; flexible chases upon revolvable bodies.
  - 21422 Lock, W. H., Pearce, H. and Billington, J. E. Magazine-entrance mechanism ; Linotype.
  - 21609 Bancroft, J. S. and Indahl, M. C. Improvements in low-quad mould-mechanism; Monotype.
  - 21896 Wood, H. A. W. Apparatus for trimming, cooling and drying curved stereotypes.
  - 22161 Stockall, A. H. Adjustable quoin for securing printing-type in holders.
  - 22412 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Assembling-apparatus for matrices bearing two or more characters ; Linotype.
  - 22546 Gander, G. J. Improvements in strip-perforating machines; Monotype keyboard.
  - 22924 Graber, E. and Frey, O. Hand-stamp with retractable centre to permit of printing either part or both simultaneously.
  - 23297 Elliott, R. C. Composing type; improvements in producing record-strips; Mono-type keyboard.
  - 23298 Elliott, R. C. Single-type composing and casting machines; improvements in action of record-strip; Monotype.
  - 23360 Sigurdsson, O. V. Type-composing and casting machines; single-type composing and casting machines; keyboards; matrices; moulds; casts single short-type successively; assembles into lines and line-justifies ; each line made into a solid slug by a casting process; Oddur.
  - 23481 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Means for supporting in operative position two-fount matrices; Linotype.
  - 23615 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Cleaning space-bands by means of rotary brushes ; Linotype.
  - 24176 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Distribution of multiple-face matrices ; Linotype.
  - 24562 Walker, A. H., Maddy, A. J. and Holbourns J. G. Type-slug casting machines; improved escapement-mechanism for spacebars; Linotype.
  - 24933 Oddur Manufacturing Co. Single-type composing and casting machines; keyboards and matrices ; Oddur.
  - I 24940 Bendixen, N. Paste for application to a surface from which a flong-matrix is to be made.
  - I 24978 Goss Printing Press Co. Curved stereotype-plate clamping-mechanism adjustable for different widths; pneumatically operated.
  - 24987 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Means for taking up wear in escapement-mechanism ; Linotype.
  - I 24990 Goss Printing Press Co. Curved stereotype-plate clamping-mechanism; pneumatically operated.
- p.613 - vue 781/901
- - O
  - H
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1909 (continued).
  - 25020 Vogtlandische Maschinen Fabrik vorm. Dietrich, J. C. & H. Akt.-Ges. Stereotype-matrices, with additional ribs.
  - 25115 Rogers, J. R. Assembling-apparatus for two-letter matrices ; Linotype.
  - 25147 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Assembling-apparatus for setting mixed copy; Linotype.
  - 25616 Pierpont, F. H. and Lanston Monotype Corporation. Machine for stamping type-matrices ; Monotype.
  - 25801 Chipperfield, W. Setting and distributing type into and from flexible type-holders.
  - 25827 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-slug casting machine. Means for maintaining multiple-fount matrices in position before alinement.
  - 25872 Cottrell & Sons Co., C. B. Make-ready; machine for shaving the backs of printing-plates.
  - 25879 Cottrell & Sons Co., C. B. Make-ready; machine for securing plate and matrix and trimming back of plate.
  - 25894 Cottrell & Sons Co., C. B. Make-ready process in which plate and matrix are secured to the bed of machine, trimmed and subsequently heat-treated.
  - 25960 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Distributing apparatus,; driving-mechanism; and matrices; Linotype.
  - 26119 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Matrices having one or more faces upon opposite edges and capable of being inverted ; Linotype.
  - 26375 Dropiowski, T. Single-type composing and casting machines; a separate mould for each character in which a type is cast for each used; galley-mechanism.
  - 26481 Obermiller, M. W. Date- and time-stamps electromagnetically operated from a distant clock.
  - 26555 Printing Machinery Co., Pearce, H. and Wood, H. A. W. Means for trimming and cooling curved stereotype-plates ; (see 21896/1909).
  - 26564 Lambie, J. E. Printing-plates for addressing machines with inclined flanges struck up for engaging short dovetail-ended type.
  - 26923 Goss Printing Press Co. Machine for trimming and cooling curved stereotype-plates.
  - 27216 Cox, A. Composite mounting-block of fusible-alloy cast on to wooden blocks.
  - 27743 Tonkin, J. O. Printing time-records; hour, minute and an identification number on a vehicle-driven strip.
  - 28219 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-slug casting machines ; driving-mechanism ; improvements in clutches; Linotype.
  - 28259 Stockall, J. J. and Ireland, W. E. Date-and time-printing apparatus recording autographs on a record-strip.
  - 28273 Goss Printing Press Co. Apparatus for casting curved stereotype-plates without head or tail.
  - 28484 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Bringing matrices assembled at different levels to same level prior to distribution ; Linotype.
  - 28595 Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Distributing matrices; preliminary fount-selection; Linotype.
  - 28639 Droitcour, M. A. Printing-plate of celluloid, etc., with thinned and beaded edges for clamping under tension, flat or on a cylinder.
  - 28640 Droitcour, M. A. Stereotyper’s paste for flong stereotype-matrices.
  - 28642 Droitcour, M. A. Production of stereotypes having a graduated face to obviate makeready; use of underlays.
  - 28841 Brigode, A. G. Casting machines; moulds; machine for making lead-seals.
  - 28912 Pulsometer Engineering Co. and Adcock.
  - E. A. Type-line-justifying machines; Pulsometer.
  - 29202 Typograph Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Line-justifying wire-strung matrices; Typograph.
  - 29231 Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Arrangement of multiple-character matrices; selecting-device for matrix-releasing ; Monoline.
  - No. . t of
  - 29252 McNamara, J. Magazine arrangement _de-multiple-character matrices; selectinging. vice for matrix-releasing and lochine. arrangement for releasing-devices ; Mon Othin 29340 Rogers, J. R. Distributing thick and 1 matrices; Linotype. and 29341 Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Magazines , escapements for machines with two suP posed magazines; Linotype.
  - 29379 Suretios, C. Paste for stereotype-matrices-29526 Stockall, -A. H. Typecasting machin ’ galleys with hinged end. .ng ; 29673 Pudan, H. W. Date- and time-print stamps for receiving signatures. ing-I 29844 Rogers, J. R. Ejecting type-slugs; dry- 6 mechanism ; moulds; Linotype. for 29850 Converse, F. B. Distributing-mechanism thick and thin matrices; Linotype. . ting 29940 Stockall, J. J. Date- and time-prin stamps; operating typewheels. u, 29997 Pneumatic Rubber Stamp Co. (Buck’s Patting and Garland, E. S. Hand-stamps; secul cellular printing-surfaces. ap-
  - 30332 Bates Machine Co. Number-printing any paratus; repeats indefinitely or desired number of times.
  - 1910.
  - 557 Grant, J. C. and Legros, L. A. Casting tXPDy nozzles for typecasting machines heatrem. circulation of molten metal through the nd-
  - 961 Rushworth, G. A. W. Multicolour ne stamp. ove-
  - 1266 Pierpont, F. H. Type-moulds; impsces; ments in casting low-quads and -spa ' Monotype. .re-
  - 1772 Hoe & Co., R. Numbering-apparatus, peats in duplicate. H.
  - 1776 General Composing Co. and Degenetbody Type-slug casting machine; large-0 matrices for saving spacers ; Linotype- Co. 2742 Degener, H. and General ComposingLines, Type-slug casting machine; magatt keyboards, distributing-apparatus. tope-J 2845 Wilson, G.A. Clamping-devices forstereotyr plates ; preventing from slacking. rope-3308 Typograph Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Wire-slug casting machine; assembling strung two-letter matrices. e.slug 3309 Typograph Setzmaschinen Fabrik. TyPirices casting machine; wire-strung my for struck on back and front similar for interchange or with different face change of fount.
  - 3325 Dacheux, R. Distributing nicked type atins 3406 Underwood Typewriter Co. Strip-pertrip. machines for preparing controlling-51F.
  - 3714 Grant, J. C., Legros, L. A. and Maw, of Line-justifying type; justifying - the overset type by mechanically reducing individual spaces. Machine
  - 4101 Sensenschmidt, M. and Kaiser, E. -anting for dating railway-tickets; are operation unless correct central-tyPo inserted. osink”
  - 4818 Aix, F. C. L. d’. Printers’ comPhinei machines; type-slug casting maoulds deals with assembling matrices, trimming and ejecting slugs, gallezumph galley-mechanism, metal-pots and P and driving-mechanism. groove
  - 5340 Michaelis, W. Type-channels of 1 dish bars secured radially in a rotatapuas. , for short-type for duplicating machipig 0" 5434 Wood, H. A. W. Apparatus for cutt tails or risers of curved stereotypes- 85 5712 Schoop, M. U. Applying metal-coat under a spray by means of steam or hot 8a pressure for matrix-making. g the
  - 1 5999 Corfe, W. Alining and transferri berinb numbering-wheels of paging and num machines. * e
  - 6043 Degener, H. and General Compos, semen? Type-slug casting machine; impro azines’ in mechanism for quick-change mas . Linotype. Ies
  - | 6295 Hollingsworth, S. Numbering-machi
  - manifold sales-books ; consecutive.
- p.614 - vue 782/901
- - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - 10 6
  - 6 co
  - 2.0
  - 1910 (continued).
  - Lapston Monotype Corporation and Pierpont, T Typesetting and casting machines;
  - Frimprovements in Monotype machines.
  - Tedmann, H. Type-composing machines; improvements in keyboards and driving-mechanism for multiple-magazine single-ype machines, including line-justifying u nd galley mechanisms.
  - smacher, H. Hand-stamp for marking affix d with value of postage stamps to be
  - Dacheux, R. Type-composing machines; getting type; keyboards, line-justifying, galley and driving mechanisms.
  - eSenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-casting machine; levelling multiple-veece matrices; Linotype.
  - “ter, H. W. Machine for measuring con-tinuous lengths and recording by type-p.wheels printing numbers.
  - : M. and Clarke, R. E. Machine for cal-aplating and recording the value of a quality xpressed in a non-decimal system at a price per unit expressed in a non-decimal system.
  - rant, J. C. and Legros, L. A. Punch-parting; methods of producing models or vetterns for punch-cutting and like machines.
  - crenthaler Linotype Co. Linotype ma-nines; improvements in distributing-
  - “Pparatus for machines carrying two or crisore magazines : Linotype.
  - a C. Making type; matrix-setting Pparatus for composing and casting
  - Single-types.
  - sTenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-ug casting machine ; water circulation in mould-wheels.
  - nSenthaler Linotype Co. Type-slug casting camechine ’ pooling-arrangements for moulds.
  - copbell Printing Press and Manufacturing typesAPparatus for cooling curved stereo-
  - Smith, W. H. Number-printing apparatus two series of numbering-heads; ad-11 ng one series circumferentially or longi-
  - Deenally independently of the other series.
  - KeneD, H. and General Composing Co. in pe-slug casting machine ; improvements T assembling multiple-letter matrices;
  - R Linotype.
  - °ers, J. R. Distributing two founts of
  - co
  - o
  - 6
  - or
  - C O O
  - 6
  - 8952
  - 9096
  - 9332
  - 6 N
  - O (O
  - 10187 odatrices: Linotype.
  - mall: Manufacturing Co. Typecasting pacmines; improvements in machines.
  - Ying matrices in sides of rotatable 10670 veisks; Oddur.
  - sISenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-inee casting machine assembling, line-twiting and clamping matrices; moulds, , TiDelug ejecting, and galley mechanisms ;
  - 11226 Rog ype-
  - seers, J. R. Type-slug casting machine; meprovements in magazines and escape-
  - 1603 Grant ‘ for superposed magazines ; Linotype.
  - . JC and Legros, L. A. Improvements
  - 1902 Stubpuch-cutting machines.
  - in sic.O.J. Type-making; improvements 12398 DMonotypeS for typecasting machines;
  - rewell, H. and Schnellsetzmaschinen Ges. meprovements in keyboards and driving-. casti anism for composing and type-slug 12507 Deesting machines; Linotype.
  - Tyrell . and General Composing Co.
  - in Posing casting machines ; improvements — wcomposing from multi-face matrices;’ 12632 + Linotype.
  - Degener T
  - imee-1 Type-slug casting machine;
  - vements in ejector-slides for ejecting 12971 MeXPe-slugs; Linotype.
  - side haler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-quick casting machine. Improvements in 12972 Linotype.se mechanism for magazines;
  - SIEenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-asad.Casting machines; improvements in channshh psLinotgpices and driving-me-
  - No.
  - 12973 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-slug 'casting machine; improvements in magazines and distributing-apparatus; Linotype.
  - 13032 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Type-slug casting machine; improvements in water-cooled mould-wheels; Linotype.
  - 13110 Michaelis, W. Flat type-duplicator with short grooved-type carried in slotted type-bars.
  - 13205 Walker, A. H. and Holbourns, J. G. Composing type ; assembling and distributing-mechanism for extra-long lines of type.
  - 13444 Levy, A. Type-holders; type with wedge-shaped shanks for stamping on golf-balls.
  - 13499 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Type-slug casting machine; improvements in metal-pots and pumps ; Linotype.
  - 13500 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Type-slug casting machine; improvements in trimming-apparatus ; Linotype.
  - 13501 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Type-slug casting machine ; improvements in driving-mechanism.
  - 14070 Schreier, E. F. Number-printing apparatus for repeating, or indefinitely repeating, or consecutive numbering.
  - 14484 Jones, C. K. Electric selecting-system, for operating type-printing telegraph ; may be used to operate a typesetting machine.
  - 14503 Walker, A. H., Pearce, H. and Billington, J. E. Type-slug casting machine; improvements in escapements and magazines; Lino-type.
  - 14518 Aix, F. C. L. d’. Type-slug casting machine ; improvements in adjustable moulds.
  - 14818 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Type-slug casting machine; distributing matrices; Linotype.
  - 14903 Hammalian, P. M. Stereotype-moulds of a refractory material.
  - 15042 Schriftgiesserei, D. Stempel, Akt.-Ges. Typecasting machines ; arrangements of driving-shafts.
  - 15062 Upham, B. F. Method of bending printing-plates, faced temporarily so that the actual printing-surface is on the neutral axis.
  - 15144 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Type-slug casting machine; water circulation in mould-wheels (see 28007/1908); Linotype.
  - 15171 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-slug casting machine ; distributing matrices ; Linotype.
  - 15372 Nicholas, W. and Ackermann, W. Making type; single-type composing and casting machine, with line-justifying, galley-mechanism, and metal-pump; Graphotype.
  - 15399 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Type-slug casting machine; improvements in fount-distinguishing notches of matrices ; Linotype.
  - 15526 Druitt, P. W. Typecasting machines; improvements in moulds; Stringertype.
  - 15542 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Type-slug casting machine; improvements in matrix-distribution ; Linotype.
  - 15626 Schnellsetzmaschinen Ges. and Drewell, H. Composing type; improvements in strip-perforating machines and keyboards.
  - 16545 Stevenson, A. G. Triangular printers’ rules for use with type-slugs for tabular work.
  - 16622 MergenthalerLinotype Co. Type-slug casting machine; improvements in ejecting type-slugs ; Linotype.
  - 16789 Pierpont, F. H. and Lanston Monotype Corporation. Type-casting machines; improvements in producing low-quads or -spaces; Monotype.
  - 16829 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-slug casting machine; matrices with tilting-recess for hand adjustment; Lino-type.
  - 17113 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Type-slug casting machines; distributing matrices ; improvement in second elevator ; Linotype.
  - 17391 Bancroft, J. S. and Indahl, M. C. Automatic machine for stamping distinguishing marks on type-matrices; Monotype.
- p.615 - vue 783/901
- - 6I6
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1910 (continued).
  - 17666 Homaus, T. S. Type-slug casting machine; improvements in moulds; Linotype.
  - 18189 Eichengrun, A. Printing-surfaces, which can be worked when cold, of mixture of fibrous matter and acetyl-cellulose and camphor in solution.
  - 18544 Rogers Addresser Co. Typesetting machines ; machines for setting grooved-type in a holder for addressing-machines.
  - 18883 Bowman, T. Typecasting machines ; feeding metal to metal-pots.
  - 18917 Underwood Typewriter Co. Strip-perforating machines.
  - 18941 Typograph Ges. Type-slug casting machine ; improvements in moulds.
  - 19187 Reed, S. Hand-stamp with segmental face and dovetailed grooves to receive lines of type.
  - 19206 Drewell, H. and Schnellsetzmaschinen Ges. Type-slug casting machine ; moulds, driving-mechanism and trimming type-slugs; Linotype.
  - 19358 Wright, J. S. Types for blank-letter poster-printing of pieces cut-away for the white parts of the letters.
  - 19503 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-slug casting machine ; trimming type-slugs. (See 26676/1908); Linotype.
  - 19544 Duncan, H. M. Single-type composing and casting machines; type adapted for Semitic languages. (See 8633/1899); Mono-type.
  - 19615 Buigne, F. de. Typecasting from closed crucible by gas pressure.
  - 19693 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-slug casting machine ; assembling matrices ; Linotype.
  - 19702 Quertier, H. Apparatus for recording weights, quantity and quality of carcasses by means of typewheels.
  - 20223 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Type-slug casting machine; adjusting length of mould-slot to fractions of a typographical unit.
  - 20244 Walker, A. H., Pearce, H. and Billington, J. E. Type-slug casting machine; assembling, line-justifying, clamping and distributing matrices ; Linotype.
  - 20505 Typograph Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-slug casting machine ; keys, keyboards and escapements. (See 11799/1908); Typo-graph.
  - 20959 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Type-slug casting machine; distributing matrices; Linotype.
  - 20960 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Type-slug casting machine; cleaning spacers; Linotype.
  - 20961 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Type-slug casting machine; improvements in metal-pots and pumps; Linotype.
  - 21228 Degener, H. and General Composing Co. Type-slug casting machine; distributing matrices; Linotype.
  - 21787 Ransmayer, A. Making metal type-cylinders or typewheels by expanding the cylinder in a die.
  - 21898 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-slug casting machine; assembling and distributing matrices; Linotype.
  - 21971 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-slug casting machine; assembling multi-face matrices (see 21898/1910); Linotype.
  - 22114 Palmedo, D. Petri-. Type-slug casting machine; moulds for production of hollow type-slugs; Linotype.
  - 22422 Electric Compositor Co. Line-justifying matrices and type; setting type; escapements; Electric Compositor.
  - 22521 Aix, F. C. L. d’. Type-slug casting machine ; assembling matrices; moulds; trimming type-slugs; ejecting type-slugs; galleys and galley-mechanism; metal-pots and pumps; driving-mechanism.
  - 22613 Droitcour, M. A. Printing-surfaces graduated to avoid make-ready by pressing the matrix, when only a thin deposit has been made, against the overlay.
  - No.
  - 22770 Grant, J. C. Type-slug casting machine) special matrices and spacers for casting type-slugs or logotypes on single-tyP machine. Grantype slug-caster. .
  - 22976 Degener, H. Type-slug casting-machine' means for supporting two-letter matric during assembly; Linotype. . .
  - 23061 Boyer, A., and Godeau, P. L. M. Printing apparatus partly operated by travelling poise of weighing-apparatus ; for indicating weight, price per unit, and total cost, using typewheels.
  - 23414 Gyles, E. J. Type-slugs or stereotype-pi?1 for use on duplicating- and addressing machines. 40
  - 23474 Electric Compositor Co. Type-slug casting machine; improvements in mou—d mechanism ; Electric Compositor. .
  - 23840 Bancroft, J. S., and Indahl, M. C. StETP. perforating machines. Monotype key board. It.
  - 23970 Felten & Guilleaume Lahmeyerwerke AUWS Ges. Numbering-device with locking-mean to prevent fraudulent alteration and ensu positive advance at each operation. sth 24253 Droitcour, M. A. Printing-surfaces Win gradations to obviate the use of overlay. g
  - 24474 Goss Printing Press Co. Plate-clampte mechanism for printing-presses. for 24581 Hughes, D. C. Sheet-metal type-plate 1 addressing-machines.
  - 24695 Bunau - Varilla, P. Cooling stereotype plates.
  - 25018 Barr, M., Bell, R. A. and Beeton, H of Calculating machine for multiplication nd rates, percentages, measures, values a fractions; storage of products; converse., of foreign and English measures and 6 pressions. of
  - 25202 Pattle, C. Composite mounting-blocks th wooden blocks let into a metal grid; Do
  - ends of wood exposed. . e:
  - 25228 Kennedy, D. S. Type-slug casting machtol improvements in magazine-entrances; Li
  - 25229 Kennedy, D. S. Type-slug casting machinesd improvements in matrix-assembly a
  - driving-mechanism; Linotype. ; 25365 Rogers, J. R. Type-slug casting machines improvements in straight matrix-magazino-for multiple-magazine machines; -type. w.
  - 25664 Gilbert-Stringer, H. J. S., and Druitt, P: cti-Composing and casting type; line-Jusnd fying type; assembling, clamping Sing alining matrices in single-type compos
  - and casting machines; Stringertype. Leet-26259 Duncan, J. S. Printing-plates of she metal for addressing-machines. . Co.
  - 26289 Degener, H., and General Composing.es, Type-slug casting machines; magazin ; escapement, and matrix-distributl
  - Linotype. ess,
  - 26355 Linotype & Machinery, Ltd., and Burg J. R. Type-slug casting machin assembling matrices; Linotype.
  - 26504 Bancroft, J. S., and Indahl, M. C. Sines; type casting and composing machin casting sorts ; Monotype. creel
  - 26590 Stockall, A., and Stockall, A. H. bars hollow-furniture constructed of steel P
  - separated by stays. 11045
  - 26901 Stockall, A., and Stockall, A. H. Calfor with a loose or interchangeable end typecasting machines, ting
  - 27670 Grant, J. C., and Davis, H. Typecas ring machines; pivotal typecaster delive finished type into race or galley. ting
  - 28357 Taylor, A. S. Adjustable mould for cas duplicates from type. . ont,
  - 28692 Lanston Monotype Corporation, and PierPing.
  - F. H. Single-type casting; comPonitic galleys and galley-mechanism for Sen characters; Monotype. led
  - 28887 Sorg, W. A. Type-line holders for should
  - type. Lines.
  - 29007 Castle, T. R. Type-slug casting macbujar Securing rules in type-slugs for tap work.
- p.616 - vue 784/901
- - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - 617
  - No. 1910 (continued).
  - 29058 Ludlow Co. Type-slug casting machines; metal-pots and pumps ; moulds; trimming and ejecting type-slugs; galleys; driving-mechanism.
  - 9273 Bacigalupi, A. E. Incombustible cellulose composition for printing-plates; 70 per cent nitro-cellulose, 25 per cent camphor, 2050, — 5 per cent castor oil, etc. Hollingsworth, S. Numbering-machines, for printing manifolding books, with numbering-heads removably carried on cylinder . segments.
  - 34/2 Vogtlandische Maschinen Fabrik vorm., J. C., and H. Dietrich Akt.-Ges. Matrix-clamps 2018, r for stereotype-casting apparatus.
  - 1 Ludlow Co. Type-slug casting machines; improvements in matrix-bars; assembling; line-justifying; clamping and alining 20=0 . matrices.
  - Bacigalupi, A. E. Celluloid composition for 2000 n printing-surfaces.
  - 3999 Bancroft, J. S., and Indahl, M. C. Single-type casting and composing machines;
  - - adjusting centring pins ; Monotype.
  - 000 Bancroft, J. S., and Indahl, M. C. Single-type composing-machines; strip-perforating 30056 .machines; Monotype keyboard. 3° Pierpont, F. H., and Lanston Monotype Corporation. Improvements in strip-per-30034 „forating machines; Monotype keyboard.
  - ‘ terpont, F. H., and Lanston Monotype Corporation. Single-type composing and cast-ing machine moulds ; casting spaces integral with type ; Monotype.
  - — co N O
  - U
  - o
  - N co
  - N
  - N & 00 O
  - 1911.
  - Le Boeuf, A. W. Type-slug casting machines ; trimming type-slugs.
  - uitt, P. W. Single-type casting machines; improvements in body-slide moulds ; Stringertype.
  - Owe, A., Seger, A. J., and Lowe, J. Hand-p.tamp with ball-head and socket-handle.
  - flak, A. Perforating-machines for paper; for rapid automatic telegraphy and like Purposes.
  - Chimmel, F. Single-type composing and casting machine; matrices forming a Prismatic block; moulds; Rototype. umondson, T. J., Edmondson, W. B. Edmondson, G., and Edmondson, A. W. Holder for two lines of loose-type for dating T tickets.
  - VPograph Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-lug casting machines ; assembling matrices ;
  - 2825 Pograph.
  - XPOgraph Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-ST8 casting machines; assembling and Mining matrices; driving - mechanism ; 3108 pPOgraph. —arahan, j. E. Type-slug making and ypecasting machines; metal-pots; matrices ; moulds ; casting single-type and 3497 simultaneously.
  - V sworth, J. W. Use of products of phenol wcresol and formaldehyde for negative-6 typings for engraving or printing; stereo-
  - 2 Gilbert-Stringer, H- J. S.,and Druitt, P. W. pngle-type composing and casting machines ; moulds; metal-pots and 3613 cipumps; Stringertype. bert-Stringer, H- J- S., and Druitt, P. W. mgle-type composing and casting achines ; galleys and galley-mechanism ; 4251 seKtTingertype. Ttgiesserei, D. Stempel, Akt.-Ges. rPecasting machines; improvements in 4813 Geneulds for Foucher class of machines. mall. Composing Co- Type-slug casting 528 Linotype improvements in keyboards; Titish Automatic Co., and Savage, A. C. wpecholder for ticket-printing and like 5293 DrAchines.
  - al cour, M. A. Casting printingplates to without making-ready.
  - No.
  - 5299
  - 5926
  - 00 o o
  - Hunt, J. E. Single-type composing and casting machines; strip-perforating machines for duplicating perforated strip.
  - Rushworth, G. A. W. Flexible formes for rotary, etc., duplicators with removable type-plates for names and addresses. Typograph Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-slug casting machines ; improvements in distri-
  - • buting matrices for Typograph machines. 6404 Chaix, H. A. L., and Bourgeaux. M. C. A. Use of two or more formes successively for printing music: 1. Staff lines, bars, phrasing marks and signs outside the staff;
  - 2 . The signs or notes to be printed on the staff and all signs that pass through the
  - 6423
  - 7064
  - 7193
  - 7236
  - 7385
  - 7652
  - bar lines.
  - General Composing Co., and Degener, H. Assembling and distributing multi-character matrices; guiding-ledges of transportchannels; Linotype.
  - Schlueter, K. M., and Schlueter, F. Plate-clamping devices, with bevel-gear and screws.
  - Schimmel, F. Type-slug casting machine; assembling matrices ; escapements. Hipkins, W. E. Printing-mechanism in conjunction with a steelyard poise for recording in several weight-standards (English, Indian, Metric) uses three type-disks, one for each standard.
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Typeslug casting machines; improvements in magazines and distributing matrices ; automatic cut-out for distributor; Linotype. Linotype & Machinery, Ltd., and Holliwell C. Type-slug casting machines; providing type-slugs with identification marks ; Lino-
  - 7967
  - - type.
  - Smith, W. H. Number-printing apparatus; simultaneously moving all wheels for preliminary inking without altering their relative arrangement.
  - 8417 Bancroft, J. S., and Indahl, M. C. Single-type casting and composing-machines; improvements in metal-pumps; Monotype. 8594 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Typeslug casting machines. Keyboards; after-nate release of matrices from two magazinechannels by successive operations of the
  - 8673
  - 9435
  - 9559
  - 9696
  - 10336
  - 10359
  - 10360
  - 10670
  - 10832
  - 10928
  - 11225
  - 11235
  - 11256
  - 00
  - same key; Linotype.
  - Carlsen, H. H. Means for attaching printing-plates to base-blocks.
  - Elson, R. Hand-stamps for postmarking or numbering; automatically-locking frame and typewheels after making a given number of impressions.
  - Aylsworth, J. W. Printing-plates and stereotyping ; use of infusible phenol formaldehyde resins with a halogen-substituted phenol or naphthol.
  - Thornton, J. G. Printers’ furniture ; interlocking-blank frames.
  - Duncan, J. S. Printing-plate with recessed panel for addressing-machines.
  - (Typograph Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-slug I casting machines; changing matrices in j machines having matrices guided on wires;
  - ! Typograph.
  - Droitcour, M. A. Make-ready arrangements for toning printing-surfaces
  - Druitt, P. W., and Gilpin, W. R. Single-type composing and casting machines; improvements in multiple magazines;
  - Stringertype.
  - Rawson, F. L., and Knight & Co., A. Producing a matrix on a wax-coated glass-plate to the other side of which the print to be copied is secured.
  - Droitcour, M. A. Make-ready arrangement for celluloid printing-plates.
  - Henkle, E. A. Recording-apparatus for ship engine-room telegraphs for time and nature of signal sent and acknowledged.
  - i Richter, J. Moulds for printing-surfaces of acetone-soluble acetyl-cellulose treated with camphor and rolled.
  - 3 Schreier, E. F. Number-printing apparatus for multiple groups of number-wheels with means for actuating operating-pawls, constructed for adjustment axially.
- p.617 - vue 785/901
- - 0
  - 00
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No.
  - 11627
  - 11628
  - 11902
  - 11984
  - 12288
  - 12491
  - 12556
  - 1911 (continued).
  - Bertram, W. E. Type-slug casting machines ; magazines; escapements, and matrix-ejecting apparatus; keyboards; driving-mechanism; Monoline.
  - Bertram, W. E. Type-slug casting machines; magazines; escapements and matrix-ejecting apparatus; keyboardsand driving-mechanism; matrices of Monoline pattern; spacers ; assembling matrices ; distributing matrices ; Monoline.
  - Dodge, P. T. Single-type composing and casting machines; assembling, clamping, and line-justifying matrices to produce lines of separate types without change of matrices ; moulds ; metal-pots and pumps ; galley and galley-mechanism; driving-mechanism ; Linotype.
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-slug casting machines; escapements for releasing matrices from two magazine-channels alternately; Linotype.
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-slug casting machines; distributing matrices; Linotype.
  - Stevenson, A. G. Type with a step on the body for supporting shallow-depth rules.
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-slug casting machines; Keyboards and
  - No.
  - 17417
  - 17521
  - 17782
  - 17992
  - 18315
  - 18398
  - 18945
  - Bhisey, S. A. Casting type; typecasting machines; moulds; nicking and trimmo type; galley-mechanism. be-
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. LXPe. slug casting machines; moulds; Linotype. Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. IXPes slug casting machines; assembling matt at two different levels; Linotype. .
  - Rogers, A. H. Hand-stamp with detachaD y secured printing-surface. for
  - Kohnle, F., and Hunter, G. S. Holders loose-type with gripping-device. . e
  - Benzing, F. E. Apparatus for recording Uled of operating bolts and the position occup at the time. me-
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik.
  - slug casting machines. Assembling math
  - at two levels ; Linotype. mpe-
  - 8946 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik.
  - slug casting machines. Restoring lore character matrices to a common level be*
  - 18947
  - 18965
  - escapements; Linotype.
  - 12659 Aylsworth, J. W. Producing printing-surfaces; uses infusible but plastic product
  - so
  - 12827
  - 12940
  - 13515
  - of phenol and formaldehyde.
  - Wride, G. S. Hand-stamps; roller with removable type.
  - Duplex Printing Press Co., and Bechman, H. F. Casting tubular stereotype-plates.
  - 19350
  - 13542
  - 13554
  - Cottrell & Sons Co., C. B. ments for electrotype avoid making-ready.
  - Cottrell & Sons Co., C. B. ments for electrotype avoid making-ready.
  - Cottrell & Sons Co., C. B.
  - Backing-arrange-printing-plates to
  - Backing-arrange-printing-plates to
  - Casting stereotype-
  - 13557
  - 13560
  - 13791
  - 13876
  - 14321
  - 14533
  - 14580
  - 0 US
  - plates; holding matrix in mould by suction.
  - Cottrell & Sons Co., C. B. Casting stereotypes; matrix held in mould by suction.
  - Cottrell & Sons Co., C. B. Casting stereotype-plates with gradated surfaces, using a reverse overlay held in mould by suction.
  - Goss Printing Press Co. Machine for trimming curved stereotype-plates.
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Slug-casting machines; improvements in changing magazines.
  - Barber, E. B. Single-type casting and composing-machine; a complete keyboard-machine for composing and casting line-justified type and bonding together the line-justified type into lines by means of metal-strips, flattened from an originally-curved trough; the wedge-spacers co-operate with inclined recesses in the type.
  - Drewell, H., and Schnellsetzmaschinen Ges. Composing type ; strip-perforating machines; line-justifying.
  - Freeston, H., Freeston, R., and Harris, J. C. Furniture with mortices or tongued and grooved ends.
  - Martin, P. Means for securing curved stereo-
  - types to cylinders.
  - 15426 Drewell, H., and Schnellsetzmaschinen Ges. Single-type casting and setting or slug-casting machines; galleys and galley-mechanism.
  - 15767
  - 16516
  - 16517
  - 17101
  - Blume, M. E. Strip-perforating machines controlled from a typewriter for controlling typographic machines ; stamping characters of various widths.
  - Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Type-slug casting machines; magazines; assembling, clamping and distributing matrices; galleys; Linotype.
  - Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Type-slug casting machines; trimming type-slugs; Linotype.
  - Crabtree, C. H., and Crabtree, A. E. Fudge-boxes; cage of radial taperad-bars for holding type-slugs.
  - 19374
  - 19375
  - 19827
  - 20012
  - 20448
  - 20541
  - 20873
  - 21066
  - 21217
  - 1 B 00
  - distribution; Linotype. mpe-
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Zer-slug casting machines. Controlling shor; fingers and supporting line in elevat ’
  - Lucas, E. G. H. Producing a typographic printing-surface from an ordinary gelati bromide print. .Let,
  - Linotype & Machinery Ltd., and Whittarnd
  - M. H. Type-slugs with short rule-sect* e-having one end of rule high-to-paper and to pressed by a tool when locked up so as render the rule continuous; Linotypes tal Hughes, D. C. Forming stops in sheet-m type-holders for shallow-type. and
  - (Linotype & Machinery, Ltd., Pearce, Haring
  - Billington, J. E. Type-slug cosa-d.
  - machines. Keyboards and keybo for
  - | mechanism, with light-touch shift-keys , double magazines; Linotype. ting
  - Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Type-slug Caim-machines. Distributing matrices and proving magazine-entrances ; LinotyPulp
  - Marino, P. Types of compressed paper Etro-silver-coated ; may be subsequently ele
  - Linotype & Machinery Ltd., and Holbourpe: J. G. Type-slug casting machines. ESating ments; removing escapement-actee mechanism readily; Linotype. . Type-
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. tipe-slug casting machines. Trimming 7 slugs; Linotype.Dies for
  - Bacigalupi, A.E. Printing-surfaces, —elates making celluloid or similar printing Rated of a hard, plastic composition, hycr silicate of magnesia, etc. . „ by
  - Schoop, M. U. Obtaining metal-coating det spraying, against the surface, metal " very high pressure, two
  - Dement, I. S. Typewheel formed frou- the disks, one with radial lugs in whic Tently characters are impressed, subsed-other bent to a cylindrical surface, and the stamped to fit inside the first. Type Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik- mins slug casting machines. Moulds; trutype-type-slugs ; driving-mechanism ;. Lin Type Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. nanism slug casting machine. Assembly-niece
  - 21241
  - 21514
  - 21582
  - 21884
  - 21974
  - for mixed matter.
  - Lougee, F. G. Matrix drying-press
  - matic timing-device.
  - McCulloch, W. B. Type-slug machines; adjustable moulds; on
  - with auto
  - % 5
  - consists of two parts. . Cor
  - Pierpont, F. H., and Lanston MonotyPs for poration. Delivery spouts; pumPastine molten metals; nozzle of a tyPecannels pump, provided with one or more CT beins through which part of the metal pumped is circulated. . 1. C.
  - Vogtlandische Maschinen Fabrik, vormvice®
  - and H. Dietrich, Akt.-Ges. Milling C
  - for trimming stereotype-plates. j O Vogtlandische Maschinen Fabrik, vormis for and H. Dietrich, Akt.-Ges. Appanaingthe casting curved stereotype-plates; holopened’ plate to the core when the mould is V
- p.618 - vue 786/901
- - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - 0
  - 6
  - N
  - g 3 Co"
  - N
  - & O
  - N N O 00
  - CO o N
  - N
  - 1911 (continued).
  - Vogtlandische Maschinen Fabrik, vorm., J. C., and H. Dietrich, Akt.-Ges. Machine for casting curved stereotype-plates.
  - Vogtlandische Maschinen Fabrik, vorm., J. C., and H. Dietrich, Akt.-Ges. Machine for casting and finishing curved stereotype-plates.
  - Bancroft, J. S., and Indahl, M. C. Single-type casting and composing-machines. Stop-bars of die-cases ; Monotype.
  - Siemens & Halske Akt.-Ges. Record-strip
  - No.
  - 28714
  - 28939
  - 29212
  - 29223
  - perforating machine making typewritten record simultaneously; applicable to typesetting, and to casting and composing machines, but specially to telegraphic transmission.
  - Brown, A. W., and Hipkins, W. E. Printing a record from a type-drum in conjunction 22,0. . with weighing-apparatus.
  - Denison, S. Printing-apparatus for weighing-224, -machines using typewheels.
  - '30 Dean, A. A. Mounting-block for electrotypes, 23, - stereotypes, etc.
  - 395 Dacheux, R. Type-distributing. Distribu-2336 . ting ordinary and italic type.
  - Dacheux, R. Type-composing machines. Changing magazine-channels; improving type-setting rails and composing two kinds s of type.
  - Burgess, W. H. Date- and time-printing stamps for recording the movements of watchmen.
  - Cade, B., and Heldrich, A. A. Type-slug machines; matrices ; keyboards.
  - International Time Recording Co. Date- and time-printing; the first operation prints time and punches corresponding holes in the card; the second operation not only Prints and punches, but also calculates and Prints the working-hours from the two sets of perforations by means of typewheels.
  - oxton, J. Number-printing apparatus; holder for loose-type.
  - Grant, J. C., and Davis, H. Single-type casting machines; moulds; finishing type.
  - Pruitt, P. w., and Gilpin, W. R. Single-type composing and casting machines ; improvements in multiple magazine; see 10832/ T t9n ; Stringertype.
  - Dacheux, R. Distributing type ; galleys and galley-mechanism.
  - Doper, C. Rules for printing, perforating, : etc., with flanges.
  - Bancroft, S. S., and Indahl, M. C. Single-type casting and composing-machines; guiding and supporting types from the type carrier 27395 —to the galley; Monotype.
  - ypograph Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Magazines p °r type-slug casting machines; Typograph. Tershke, F- F., Rudd, E. H., and Matthews, W, Moulds for electrotypes of blotting-paper, 27553 , Paper-pulp, etc., impregnated with wax.
  - tan, G., Byles, A. R., and Byles & Sons, W.
  - 29272
  - 29281
  - Huebner-Bleistein Patents Co. Means for accurately positioning a machine-part for impression-mechanism of electrotype-matrix machines.
  - Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Type-slug machines; assembling matrices; driving-mechanism; Linotype.
  - Munchener-Zeitungs-Verlag Ges. Machines for trimming curved stereotype-plates.
  - Weigert-Sterne, L. Automatically controlling temperature of stereotype-metal by a thermostatic arrangement.
  - Collin, C. Setting and distributing type; galleys.
  - Bacigalupi, A. E. Mould for making celluloid cliches or stereotypes.
  - N N & 00 O
  - 00 1 co or
  - N N -A O H 00 00 O
  - PPM
  - VG%
  - GO
  - 00 0 - VS or er or
  - N &
  - p. .: Pyles, A. R., and Bytes & Sons, vv. providing raised square projections arranged Diagonally on the back of half-tone plates for incorporation in stereotypes to facilitate cine flow of stereotype-metal.
  - S Printing Press Co., and Pettigrew, C. H.
  - Pparatus for casting curved stereotype-Plates.
  - Castleman, S. T. Coin-freed printing-appara-tus, combined with weighing-apparatus tendering it inoperative beyond a pre-cet ermined weight 1 for insurance tickets.
  - fleman, S. T. Coin-freed printing-appara-us combined with weighing-apparatus and *7926 colmerecording apparatus.
  - » Printing Press Co., and Pettigrew, C. H. plaeratus for casting curved stereotype-Baldock, R. Building up designs for repro-swalctionby photography as printing-surfaces.
  - aeJ Type-slug casting machines; Bart blIng matrices.
  - ton, J. T. Frame for securing standing-_ matter.
  - Chlueter, K. M., and Schlueter, F. Gauge or aiming and adjusting printing-plates n Dase-blocks.
  - 29
  - N o N N
  - NNVNN 0000 -LN Co VV2
  - 249
  - N
  - O
  - 442
  - 701
  - 946
  - 1187
  - 1213
  - 1346
  - 2453
  - 2518
  - 2690
  - 1912.
  - Burroughs Adding Machine Co. Adding-apparatus with operating means; two counter-mechanisms arranged for use as two machines or for accumulating separate or partial totals on the second counter.
  - Hall, C. I. Date- and time-printing apparatus combined with electric meters.
  - Typograph Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Moulds and spacers for casting reglets; Typograph.
  - Burroughs Adding Machine Co. Adding and subtracting apparatus; performing operation of subtraction and recording for overdrawn accounts.
  - Typograph Setzmaschinen Fabrik and Dor-neth, J. Magazines; V-shaped matrix-basket; see 27395/1911 ; Typograph.
  - Automatic Vending Machine Co. Transfer and zeroizing mechanism ; permits setting by hand of time- and date-wheels of coin-freed apparatus.
  - Booth, J. B. S., and Lanston Monotype Corporation. Record-strip perforating machines; multiple line-justifying of type for tabular work ; Monotype.
  - Crook, C. E. Rotary hand-stamp for printing on eggs ; holders for loose-types.
  - Buigne, F. de. Types cast from alloys free from zinc, but containing aluminium, copper, tungsten, etc.
  - > Goss Printing Press Co. Machine for trimming curved stereotype-plates.
  - ; Klaczko, M. Autographic cash-recorder; with type-fingers for printing on vouchers and record-strip.
  - $ Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Line-justifying and alining matrices ; Linotype.
  - > Denison, G. H. Printing-apparatus for weighing-machines; for gross and tare
  - 2730
  - 3063
  - 3390
  - 3725
  - 4178
  - 4380
  - 4584
  - 4672
  - 4767
  - 4771
  - 5327
  - weights.
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Means for changing magazines for multiple-magazine slug-casting machines; Linotype.
  - National Cash Register Co. Cash-register; zeroizing mechanism.
  - Underwood, J. T. Adding-apparatus; numeral-keys which set up pins in rack-bars, for subsequently setting the computing-wheel.
  - Dick Co., A. B. Adding-apparatus ; zeroizing and error-correcting mechanism.
  - Dick Co., A. B. Adding-apparatus; transfer mechanism ; multiplying by repetition.
  - Pierpont, F. H., and Lanston Monotype Corporation. Record-strip perforating machines ; multiple line-justifying of type; Monotype.
  - Etienne, P. Type-printing telegraph; type-wheel positioning-apparatus.
  - Hopkins, C. E. Casting, trimming and cooling curved stereotype-plates.
  - Johnson, J. L. Machine for affixing and dating adhesive stamps.
  - Gompf, R. Numbering small tickets consecutively by distributing the work over ten numbering-devices on the printing-cylinders.
  - 7 Stigell, R. V. Recording-apparatus combined with weighing- and measuring-apparatus for granular or liquid material; typewheels.
- p.619 - vue 787/901
- - 620
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1912 (continued).
  - 6483 Linotype and Machinery, Ltd., and Field, J. G. W. Distributing matrices ; alternate lifter-strokes for thick sorts ; Linotype.
  - 7028 Jones, R. Assembling matrices; hinged finger for left-hand shifter-arm.
  - 7136 Trinks, F. Calculating machine ; uses the recording-wheels for printing the totals by means of racks.
  - 7222 Rogers, J. R. Magazines and escapements for multiple-magazine machines ; Linotype. 7280 Mortier, P. Printing process ; decomposition of pictures, designs, etc., into small areas the tone-values of which are transmitted telegraphically or telephonically; composing-stick and rules for special type.
  - 7376 Linotype and Machinery, Ltd., Parker, T. R. G., and Bennison, W. E. Machines for boring and trimming tubular stereotype-plates.
  - 7519 Rogers Addresser Co. Addressing-machines for circular letters in imitation of typewriting characters ; salutation controlled from address-plate; printing-mechanism controlled from address-plate for omitting.
  - 7522 Rogers Addresser Co. Addressing-machines for circulars in imitation type-writing characters ; dating-device with type-holder arranged to print at alternate revolutions.
  - 7979 Pierpont, F. H. and Lanston Monotype Corporation. Single-type' composing and casting machines; positioning-mechanism for matrices of abnormal size ; Monotype.
  - 7980 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Single-type composing and casting machines; positioning-mechanism for matrices of abnormal size ; Monotype.
  - 7981 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Type-moulds; adapted to produce short-body grooved-type ; Monotype.
  - 8261 Burroughs Adding Machine Co. and Terry, G. Adding-apparatus for avoirdupois measure ; transfer-mechanism.
  - 8746 Murray, J. Electrotype; backing-up electrolytically with lead before removal from wax-mould.
  - 8960 Kleinschmidt, E. E. Perforating-machines for telegraph transmitting tapes.
  - 9013 Akt.-Ges. vorm Seidel & Naumann. Adding-apparatus ; transfer-mechanism ; zeroizing mechanism.
  - 9075 Leuchter, A. Electrotypes of an alloy of iron and nickel.
  - 9159 Bannerman, R. P., and Bannerman, R. P., Jr. Type-moulds; break.
  - 94°5 Druitt, P. W., and Gilpin, W. R. Distributing matrices from a single distributor to two or more magazines; Stringertype.
  - 9471 Niederreuther, E. Locking-devices for stereotypes; clamp..
  - 9663 Ingrey, C. Indicating and registering mechanism; recording-apparatus for weights.
  - 9741 Druitt, P. W., and Gilpin, W. R. Assembling and clamping matrices; multiple line-justification ; Stringertype.
  - 9827 Howard, H. M., and Tanner, A. J. Printing-apparatus for fare registering-apparatus; effecting automatic change in part of registering-surface.
  - 9838 Borchers, H. Setting and distributing short-body, grooved, Multigraph type.
  - 10148 Piscicelli, R. T. Multiplying and dividing apparatus; transfer- mechanism ; zeroizing-mechanism ; keyboard-interlock.
  - 10174 Schimmel, F. Single-type composing and casting machines; continuously-rotating and reciprocating cylindrical matrix-block arrested by key-depression and casting-mechanism engaged; Rototype.
  - 10527 Pierpont, F. H., and Lanston Monotype Corporation. Moulds and galley-mechanism for casting and composing short-body grooved-type in the holders for addressing-machines ; Monotype.
  - 11059 Savarese, A. Typecasting machine and mould for short-body bifurcated type.
  - 11076 Bannehr, L. W., Dolton, J. H., Gilbert, J. B., and Watson, G. Calculating apparatus; gross and tare items set and recorded from
  - which net items are automatically calculate . and recorded ; control of printing of zerosi totalizing mechanism; overthrow-preven ing mechanism. . .
  - 11109 Brown, G. M., and Murray, J. Securing th electrotypes to printing-cylinders; ASle cumferential and longitudinal adjusta clamp-strips. . E
  - 11139 Printing Machinery Co., and Bennison, Woe. Machine for trimming curved stereotyP
  - plates. AS-
  - 11140 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik- A sembling multiple-strike matrices ; LinotyPs 11156 Carlisle, A. H., and Tanner, A. J. Apparat for issuing and checking zone tickets. . re-11330 Webner, F. E. Calculating apparatus; . cords time elapsed between two given timi ’ multiplies this by a wages-rate ; SUras time-intervals and wage-equivalents; recor totals; in terlocking-mechanism.
  - 11364 Moss, E. Postmarking machines, Wits, printing-surface formed in two sliding
  - 11401 Allgemeine Elektricitats Ges. Ticket-print & and issuing machine; preventing actuati when type-plate magazine is empty. . .
  - 11402 Allegemeine Elektricitats Ges. Ticket-print : and issuing machine; safety-device C trolling type-plate lifting-mechanism. rd-11449 Lanston Monotype Machine Co. Recofor strip perforating machine; guides punches and punch-bars; Monotype..
  - 11480 McCabe, H. B. Date- and time-prinints machine for workmen’s cards;
  - numbers also to facilitate finding net timing 11487 Typograph Setzmaschinen Fabrik. See “ling and releasing moulds for type-slug cas
  - machines; Typograph. a
  - 116041 Pope, E. Type-printing telegraph ; US 11605 flexible type-plate adjusted in x and Yiing 12024 Typograph Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Trimm
  - type-slugs; Typograph. . and 12040 Kuhn, M. Combined fare-registering cro-time-printing apparatus. Taximeter able vided with record-strip and detacn ticket. . .an-
  - 12107 Stewart, W. Machines for affixing and
  - celling adhesive stamps by dating. - T. B. 12216 Printing Machinery Co., and Harris, J. Jias; Casting stereotypes in vertical moiling means for preventing creeping and buc of the matrix.
  - 12313 Siemens & Halske Akt.-Ges. Type-prl
  - telegraph ; clutch-mechanism. sting 12342 Norman, J. F., and Norman Type —auld Syndicate. Typecasting machine and n
  - using a matrix similar to the Wicks, onick-12850 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Sating change magazines for type-slug ca machines ; Linotype. Ape-
  - 12868 Bhisey, S. A. Multiple-mould rotary IT casting machine with axis horizontal, ting-13183 Upright Grain Printing Base Co. Moumical. blocks of fibrous material with fibres ye and 13187 Chapple, W. A. Apparatus for dating marking insurance cards. orint-
  - 13490 Siemens & Halske Akt.-Ges. TyPeting-ing telegraph; selecting and P11 mechanism. .ting
  - 14011 National Cash Register Co. Calcnt of apparatus; permits lateral mover Tumns type-carriers for recording in other Chimns ; simultaneously printing two col transfer-mechanism. er for
  - 14057 Ferguson, O. Hand-stamp with hold loose-type for marking dates on eggs, chine ; 14094 Scholz, H. Type-slug casting m com-mechanism for assembling matricelusting prising two telescopic parts; ad) matrices for height. . repe-
  - 14220 Krause, G. Hand-stamp for markinting-tition signs in books; revolving P wheel. parallel
  - 14471 Lutz, C. A. Printers’ quoins; two P
  - faces separated by nut and screw. Adding-14777 Burroughs Adding Machine Co. " regis” apparatus ; preventing overthrow tering-wheel. .. setting
  - 14831 Hiltz, G. S. Type-printing telegraph jets in typewheel; uses two electromagiDement-series with polarized typewheel escap
- p.620 - vue 788/901
- - BRITISH PATENTS.
  - 621
  - . N. H No 00 O CO 60 in O) O 5 1 1 1O
  - 1912 (continued).
  - co
  - 8
  - 8
  - S
  - N O N O 8 °
  - CO
  - 8 A
  - w
  - - c
  - VONN O 0,00 0
  - s s) o Co
  - D-HH O HU OO O OVO
  - co CO CO ©
  - Hiltz, G. S. Type-printing telegraph; uses either of two printing-wheels.
  - Knudsen, H. Electric telegraph ; perforated strip and de-coding apparatus.
  - Black, H. D. Ticket-dating press.
  - Marchthal, E. M. von. Control-strip perforating machine ; forms a loop and punches line-justification symbols after completion of the line ; for use in forward direction.
  - Chicago Lino-Tabler Co. Type-slugs perforated by punching to receive and support column-rules.
  - Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Distributing matrices and type; permitting change of fount to be made without adjusting the magazine-channel entrance ; Linotype.
  - Standley, M. G. Recording hand-stamp; for simultaneous impression outside and record inside.
  - Douard, A. Hand-stamp for dating, post-marking, etc. ; uses typewheels.
  - Hall, C. I. Time-printing apparatus for electric meters; records position of type-wheels.
  - Gibbs, F. I. Hand-stamp with rubber-blocks for printing on glass, china, earthenware, enamelled iron, metal-plates, etc.
  - Duncan, J. S. Stamping characters closely in sheet-metal address-printing plates; Addressograph.
  - Puncan, J. S. Flattening sheet-metal address-plates ; Addressograph.
  - Puncan, j. s. Imitation type-writing Printing-forme sections ; facilitating assem-+ bling ; Addressograph.
  - Puncan, J. S. Dies for embossing address-Plates; enabling characters to be set close together ; Addressograph.
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Escape-ments. for type-slug casting machines; operating escapements of two different channels alternately ; Linotype.
  - Annand, R. C. Machine for casting and trimming curved stereotype-plates ; uses a „ Collapsible water-cooled core.
  - ^bbs, R. R., and Brown, A. W. Apparatus 1 for giving printed-records of weights. aub, A. F. Machine for printing and issuing tickets for zone services.
  - Tanner, A. J. Apparatus for printing and Issuing tickets for zone services.
  - —notype & Machinery Ltd., Pearce, H., and Billington, J. E. Metal-pots; detachable 18510 « mouthpiece ; Linotype.
  - 9 smith, E. J. Stereotype-matrix mangle-18504 e.press with bed operated hydraulically. z otockall, j. j Workmen’s time-recorders ; Printing mixed arrivals and departures. 1882. T Alining the minute-printing wheel. rypograph Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Distributing matrices; buffer arranged to receive the bottom ends of the matrices being dis-1898- T tributed 1 Typograph.
  - 3 Jensen, H. O. A. Printing-telegraph with typewheels ; selection of character on type-1918 —wheel determined by time-interval. testelhorst (nee Wenzel), T. Machines for recording and registering cheque-values etc. ; controlled by means of Jacquard cards. anderer-Werke vorm Winklhofer and Jae-nicke Akt.-Ges., an<j Greve, J. E. W. Key-set, lever-operated, calculating apparatus; Prints totals and sub-totals of separate \ columns independently ; error-key; repeat-19312 —key; means for printing serial numbers. arvey, J. B. Affixing and cancelling in-19428 sixurance-card stamps.
  - Affixing and cancelling insurance-devi stamps ; hand-stamp positioning-Betteley, J. H. Apparatus for printing dis-pinguishing marks on zone tram-tickets.
  - Zelke, W. Hand-stamp for printing s.admission-tickets.
  - "Alth, E. J. Longitudinally-movable dogs toT. securing curved printing-plates to cylinders.
  - unn, W. Producing lines in stereotype-matrices ; roller with ruling-disks.
  - No.
  - 20434 Ranger, A. W. Setting and distributing type ; keyboards ; galley-mechanism.
  - 20745 Stiles, N. R. Affixing adhesive stamps and cancelling by dating-wheels.
  - 20843 National Cash Register Co. Checking and recording receipts; duplicate retained in machine.
  - 20844 National Cash Register Co. Time-printing stamp for use with cash-register.
  - 20872 Keats, H. D. Metal mounting-blocks with wooden strips laid in diagonal grooves.
  - 21165 Siedle, A. J. and Yardley, J. H. R. Hand-stamp for affixing and cancelling stamps.
  - 21242 Link, R. P. Type-bar making machines; short-type cast in order of composition clamped in a clip (see 25043/1908).
  - 21277 Binns, M., and Binns, W. Measuring and marking fabrics by means of a typewheel.
  - 21332 Kessels, E. J. Type-printing telegraph; positioning type-cylinders step-by-step.
  - 21339 Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Slug-casting machine ; mould ; Linotype.
  - 21601 Ottino, G. P. Printing and issuing tickets and totalizing the fares.
  - 21662 Earle, H. A., and Druitt, P. W. Typographical composing-machines ; distributing matrices at every half-revolution of distributor-shaft ; oscillating magazine-mouths ; Stringertype.
  - 21668 Denison, S. Apparatus for giving printed-records of weight.
  - 21928 Ridsdale, J. W., and Pendlebury, H. Apparatus for recording the giving of orders and making of observations on ships ; time-printing apparatus.
  - 22106 Pierpont, F. H., and Lanston Monotype Corporation. Milling automatically type-matrices to correct length and depth of matrix-cavity ; Monotype.
  - 22218 Manufacture d'Horlogerie de Bethune. Weighing and recording apparatus ; type-disks locked till the steelyard sinks.
  - 22234 J. R. Rogers; Type-slug casting machine; delivering thick matrices to the distributor at alternate operations of lifter; Linotype.
  - 22920 Wright, A. H. Index-type machine with printing-surfaces for franking.
  - 23355 Brill, W. Fischer-. Type-printing telegraph.
  - 23658 Bylicki, S. von, and Parenski, J. Affixing and printing on postage stamps, labels, etc.
  - 23836 Linotype and Machinery Ltd., Whittaker,
  - M. H., and Holliwell, C. Type-slug with printing-edges overhanging the feet; tor Christmas-card printing, etc. ; Linotype.
  - 23873 Blackmore, P. R. Compound wood and metal mounting-blocks.
  - 23874 Typograph Setzmaschinen Fabrik. Type-slug casting machines ; matrices of cranked form ; preventing damage in assembling; Typo-graph.
  - 24134 Smith, E. J. Plate-clamps for engaging the inside edges of the plates on printing-cylinders.
  - 24497 Hatch, A. C. Type-slug casting machine; matrices are carried by pivoted rods and fall into the assembling-position by gravity ; two series of wedge-shaped line-justifying bars used to form double-wedge spacers ; mould ; pump ; type-slug ejector ; driving-mechanism.
  - 24652 Kristensen, S. A. C. Composition for making printing-surfaces of resin, sulphur and infusorial earth.
  - 24692 Decker, A. G. Setting and distributing short-body, grooved type.
  - 24758 Ellero, U. Facsimile telegraph; the picture is split up into elements of black and white squares to which symbols corresponding to the degree of shade are assigned; the symbols are telegraphed and the picture built up of type-elements of corresponding intensity.
  - 24965 American Cash Register Manufacturing Co., and Wells, B. B. Cash-register with check-slip recording and issuing mechanism.
  - 25114 Bancroft, J. S. and Indahl, M. C. Single-type composing and casting machine; die-case positioning and mould-adjusting mechanism; Monotype.
- p.621 - vue 789/901
- - 622
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1912 (continued).
  - 25361 Linotype & Machinery, Ltd., Pearce, H., Parker, T. R. G., and Carverhill, R. H. Retractable clamps for fixing tubular stereotype-plates on printing-cylinders.
  - 25382 Western Electric Co. Type-printing telegraph; two line-wires; typewheel control-mechanism.
  - 25432 Brown, A. M. Holder for loose-types for insurance-stamp cancelling.
  - 25525 Daniels, O. Postmarking machine; printing-surface of an outer portion for value of stamp, and inner portion of adjustable-types for date, etc.
  - 25869 Post, T. R. Dating-stamp for railway-tickets, etc.
  - 25951 St. Louis Cash Register Co. Cash-registers ; lever-operated; separate lever for setting higher amounts; totalizer and recordingmechanism.
  - 25959 Kolar, N. Counters with recording-apparatus; for monetary value of gas, electricity, etc.
  - 26168 Schnellsetzmaschinen Ges., and Drewell, H. Type-slug casting machine; automatic change of mould during composition.
  - 26306 Siemens & Halske Akt.-Ges. Punching machines; electro-magnetically operated for perforating strip for telegraphic or similar purposes.
  - 26386 National Cash Register Co. Cash-register; accumulating and recording totals.
  - 26448 Mergenthaler Linotype Co. Casting sorts from matrices not normally carried by the matrix-carrier of single-type casting machines such as described in 13297/1897 and 24933/1909.
  - 26588 Wadewitz, A. H. Securing printing-chases.
  - 26802 Leinweber, A. Casting stereotypes; supplying several moulds from one pump.
  - to
  - O
  - 27911
  - Universal Machine Co. Typesetting and distributing machine; keyboards; galley and galley-mechanism. e
  - Nelson, I. T., and Murray, J. Electrotydi. from moulds made up of intaglio me
  - type. are
  - Leskow, E. Composing-machine; typeial. contained in a series of stationary racim. channels and are set up in a rotatable co posing-channel. .
  - Nelson, I. T. and Murray, J. Printing-5 a faces of celluloid heated and impressed on matrix set up of intaglio-type. nd
  - Goss Printing Press Co., Raabe, O. Lu for Terry, A. Printing-surfaces; means clamping the printing-plates on cylinana. adapted for more than two plates end-to-e •
  - Denison, S. Weighing-apparatus with reco ing-mechanism. for
  - Pocock, J. Printing-surfaces; clip holding. . oa-
  - Schumann, K. Counter with re cording- a Pity ratus ; for marking upon a bill the qualter. of material consumed as shown by a moco.
  - General Engineering and Construction Type-printing telegraph ; letters made of combinations of four elementary typesat.
  - Hurcum, G. A., and Lawrence, E. C. Mou ing-board for stereotype-plates. .
  - Baronio, A. C. Electric printing-telegrapmive Clarke, E. R.,and Debenham, E. R. Selec-on-setting-mechanism' applicable to striPna y trolled typecasting machines having * ai . co-ordination for determining charact reducing number of perforations. ting 29798 Avery, W. &T., and Johnson, S. H. Counets.
  - and recording-apparatus ; printing tChing 29950 McClure, J. A. Hand-stamp; facilita setting of rubber-bands.
  - 28214
  - CO 00
  - C1
  - 28378
  - 28626
  - 28700
  - 28976
  - 29057
  - 29245
  - 29416
  - 29574
- p.622 - vue 790/901
- - AMERICAN PATENTS.
  - LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS OF UNITED STATES PATENTS RELATING TO THE PREPARATION OF THE TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACE.
  - 18 The priority of American Patents up to 1837 is distinguished by date; after 37 by the Specification Number. Numbers preceded by R are Reissues.
  - Year 1791 1805 1811 1811
  - Date.
  - Jan. 29
  - Aug. 28
  - Jan. 20
  - Feb. 4
  - or v • co 00 00
  - Feb. 7
  - May 17
  - Feb. 28
  - ( 00 ON co co co 00 00 0H* H HH N.O N NN N0 00 CO CO CO CO 0 0 0 00 co CO CO Co 00 Co 00 Co CO 00 00
  - Oct. g
  - Dec. 18
  - Jan. 20
  - April 4 Oct. 23
  - Aug. 21
  - Oct. II Oct. 13
  - Nov. 20
  - Feb. 9
  - Mar. 12
  - Aug. Ir
  - Nov. 27
  - Jan. 7
  - Jan. 7
  - Jan. 7
  - He ore co (0 00 co co co Co co 00
  - Mar. 8
  - May 21
  - May 28
  - July 13
  - Feb. 15
  - Name. Subject.
  - F. Baily; Punches for types, etc.
  - W. Wing ; Machine for casting types.
  - A Binney ; Printers’ type-mould.
  - A. Binney; Smoothing or rubbing printers’ types.
  - U. K. Hill; Music types.
  - A. Binney; Moulds for casting printers’ types.
  - G. Webster; Casting movable types.
  - F. Bailey ; Ornamenting gildings, etc., with types.
  - B. Lothian ; Type-moulds.
  - M. Smith; Stereotype printing-block.
  - G. Bruce ; Making shaded letters.
  - J. Sturdevant and E. Starr; Mechanical typecaster.
  - W. M. Johnson ; Process of casting printers’ types.
  - S. G. Goodrich ; Stereotype-block.
  - G. F. Peterson ; Machine forcasting printing-type.
  - N. Hale; Stereotype-plate.
  - W. R. Collier; Casting and setting types.
  - L. Blake ; Making and using types.
  - G. B. Lothian ; Cutting and casting music types.
  - G. Bruce; Music types by combi-nating printers’ types.
  - G. W. Grater; Extendible stereotype-block.
  - M. D. Mann and S. Sturdevant ; Vertical typecaster.
  - S. Sturdevant; Type rubber or machine for smoothing the bodies of type.
  - B. Haskett; Stereotype-plate block.
  - B. Haskett; Moving forward the “ hooker ” of stereotype-blocks.
  - S. Sawyer; Stereotype-block.
  - A. Chandler ; Cam and spring block for fastening stereotype-plates.
  - E. Hale; Stereotype-block.
  - CO CH op co co — 1 % ° S So ccc
  - No. 631
  - 632
  - 2139
  - 3013 3257
  - 3324 3835 4072
  - D. Bruce, Jr.; Type-smoothing machine.
  - D. Bruce, Jr.; Machine for casting printing-type.
  - J- H. Young and A. Delcambre ; Typesetting machine.
  - J. Stewart; Casting type.
  - F. Rosenborg; Type-distributing and setting-up machine.
  - D. Bruce; Typecasting machine.
  - C. Davison; Stereotyping.
  - D. Bruce ; Typecasting machine.
  - | Year. No.
  - 1845 4130 T. W. Starr; Preparing matrices for
  - type by the electrotyping process. I 1845 4239 C. F. Baldamus and F. W. Siemens;
  - Anastatic printing.
  - 1845 4315 R. Hemming; Cylindrical type-
  - setting.
  - 1 1846 4479 J. Warren; Composition for stereo-
  - type-plates.
  - 1 1847 5049 J. C. Petyt; Machinery for making
  - type.
  - 1847 5278 W. P. Barr; Casting type.
  - [ 1848 5420 J. L. Duncan; Type-rubbing
  - machine.
  - 1848 5483 D. Bruce, Jr.; Type-smoothing
  - machine.
  - 1848 5846 H. W. Day; Type-moulder.
  - 1849 6243 J. J. Sturgis; Typecasting machine.
  - 1849 6604 J. Bachelder and S. D. Dyer; Casting
  - type.
  - 1850 7581 L. V. Newton; Preparing the face of
  - metallic type, engraved plate, etc.
  - 1850 7669 J. M. Mahan; Casting stereotype-
  - plates.
  - 1851 8333 C. Hobbs; Moulding and casting
  - stereotype-plates.
  - 1851 8349 J. J. Sturgis; Typecasting machine.
  - 1852 9166 H. P. Cook; Casting stereotype-
  - plates.
  - 1852 9177 W. P. Barr; Casting type.
  - 1852 9418 E. C. Harmon; Spaces for setting
  - type.
  - 1852 9454 J. McCreary; Manufacturing wooden
  - type.
  - 1853 9548 J. L. Kingsley; Compound for
  - stereotype-plates.
  - 1853 9787 J. J. Sturgis; Typecasting machine.
  - 1853 9790 J. L. Kingsley; Moulding gutta-
  - percha stereotype-plates.
  - 1853 9870 L. Westbrook; Gutta-percha stereo-
  - type composition.
  - 1853 9911 J. Herriet ; Elastic type for printing
  - on irregular forms.
  - 1853 9964 S. Magoun ; Machine for cutting and
  - bevelling pointed rules.
  - 1853 9974 W. H. Mitchel; Type-distributing
  - and composing-machine.
  - : 1853 R 246 J. Warren; Orig. No. 4479- Composition for stereotype-plates (shellac, tar, and sand).
  - AMU. -------
  - 10377 C. Muller; Typecasting machine.
  - I 10656 V. Beaumont; Type-distributing machine.
  - 10659 D. Moore; Type-rubbing machine.
  - 10704 R. D. Mott; Stereotype pan.
  - 10929 W.H. Mitchel; Type-composing machinery.
  - 11831 J. Herriet; Gutta-percha stereotype composition.
  - 11955 G. Bruce; Casting type.
  - 623
- p.623 - vue 791/901
- - 624
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1855.
  - 12157 W. Cowles; Stereotyping apparatus.
  - 13197 W. McDonald; Machine for mitring printers’ rules.
  - 13609 S. S. Weed; Machine for making printers’ type.
  - 13710 W. S. Loughborough; Type-composing and setting machine.
  - *3935 D. Moore; Type-rubbing machine.
  - 1856.
  - 15340 J. J. Koenig; Type-composing and distributing machine.
  - 15358 O. F. Grover; Printers’ composing-stick.
  - 15386 E. Pelouze, Jr.; Valve for typecasting machines (back seating of jobber).
  - R 339 W. S. Loughborough ; Orig. No. 13710; Type-composing and setting machine.
  - 1857.
  - 16500 W. T. Tillinghast; Printers’ composing-stick.
  - 16743 W. H. Mitchel; Type-composing machine.
  - 16947 W. H. Houston ; Type-composing and distributing machine.
  - 17007 D. Winder; Printers’composing-stick. ’7457 J. W. Tidgewell; Printers’ composing-stick.
  - 18175 T. Alden; Typesetting and distributing machine.
  - 18264 W. H. Mitchel; Type-distributing machine.
  - 1858.
  - 19797 G. Schaub ; Casting type for printing.
  - 20081 J. McElheran; Method of preparing stereo-type-plates (impressing letter-dies on softer material).
  - 21208 J. McElheran; Feed-motion for cerotypo-graphy (printing by type on plastic surfaces).
  - 21321 A. Calhoun ; Printers’ composing-stick. 22423 H. Harger; Mechanical typographer (impression-device).
  - 1859.
  - 22634 R. Doble and M. A. Starr; Machine for making printers’ rules.
  - 23009 W. Blanchard ; Casting stereotype-plates. 23236 W. H. Elliott; Mode of obtaining curved printing-surfaces (by flexible matrix for cylindrical plates).
  - 24662 D. B. Ray ; Improved apparatus for punching stereotype-plates.
  - 25533 J. J. C. Smith; Mode of constructing matrices, etc.
  - 26149 J. B. Gilmer ; Typesetter and distributor.
  - 1860.
  - 28436 S. W. Brown; Printers’ composing-stick.
  - 28463 C. W. Felt; Typesetting machine.
  - 28472 O. F. Grover and H. S. Pelouze; Tool for mitring printers’ rules.
  - 28702 J. Villet-Collignon and L. George; Typography (logotypes; ordinary types combined with solder).
  - 28857 H. Harger; Typesetting (feeding type to assist hand).
  - 28899 J. G. Pavyer ; Type-scouring machine.
  - 29091 S. H. Mix ; Process for making stereotype-plates.
  - 29144 J. Corduan; Mode of coating type-metal with brass.
  - 30211 D. B. Dorsey and E. Mathers ; Typesetting (avoiding risk of pieing).
  - 30293 I. C. Bryant; Casting embossed type. 30630 D. C. Hitchcock and E. B. and E. M. Larcher ; Relief printing-plate, etc. (liquid silex to harden lines, the whites being rubbed away). R 943 J- J- C. Smith; Orig. No. 25533; Mode of constructing matrices (alloy of copper and tin).
  - 1861.
  - 31292 G. H. Babcock; Apparatus for mitring printers’ rules.
  - 31333 J. J. C. Smith; Type-cutting machine.
  - No. 1862.
  - 34265 D. B. Ray ; Typesetting machine. 35986 M. S. Beach ; Stereotype-plate.
  - 36991 O. L. Brown; Typesetting machine.
  - 37078 P. Schulze; Process of obtaining printing surfaces.
  - 1863.
  - 38955 C. W. Felt; Typesetting machine. 39946 W. Moore ; Type-rubbing apparatus. ring 40076 R. W. and D. Davis; Mould for cast printing-type.
  - 1864. er 42274 J. C. Clapp; Numbering-machine (with I® gear for printing consecutive numbers).
  - 42530 B. Day; Relief printing-plate. a. 43071 C. F. Cosfeldt, Jr., and T. T. Pears; "PL. ratus for melting metals for casting ster
  - type-plates. ing
  - 43323 J. D. McLean; Apparatus for form stereotype-moulds. ct.
  - 43648 J. J. C. Smith; Making printers’ type (C . ing a slug and sawing into individual , 43649 J. J. C. Smith ; Machine for cutting prim type (see 43648). , type
  - 45353 J. J. C. Smith; Making printers trip (soldering electrotype-heads to rolled and sawing into separate type).
  - 47262 H. Tubesing; Flexible type and appar for printing on uneven surfaces. ting
  - 48479 L. Bradley; Telegraph paper-perfora apparatus. Line
  - 48488 G. J. Hill; Numbering and paging mac (vertical slide).
  - 50245 H. J. Hewitt; Script-printing type. , 51437 W. F. Draper; Device for stereotype-P13
  - 52073 J. Paulding; Mechanism for setting typ making stereotype-plates, iting
  - 52254 H. W. Alden and W. Mackay; Typese and distributing machine. _ com-53587 J. Donlevy; Typographic printing 1 bination with intaglio).
  - 54110 A. Case; Stereotype-block. , anu-55299 T. S. Hudson; Construction and m facture of printing-type.
  - 57034 C. Baer; Typesetting machine. . im-59522 P. Flamm; Typography (successive pressions from type carried on a Wheetling-59675 S. W. Soule and C. L. Sholes; Num’s for machine (numbers on parallel bar
  - printing tickets).
  - 59786 E. Van Gieson ; Type-separator.
  - 60450 P. Welch ; Type-dressing machine.
  - 1006 ache 62058 W. Nelson; Construction of papier *" matrices for stereotype-plates.
  - 62826 A. T. De Puy ; Stereotype-plate holder, type 63611 D. H. Chamberlain; Method of casting on printing-wheels. cetting
  - 64200 A. Corey and J. M. Harper; Types machine. . ers on
  - 64410 D. A. Draper; Device for forming tage of type-blocks (by pressure on block). uld.
  - 65000 M. Nelson ; Machine for making type-mas for 65501 W. Nelson ; Machine for forming moui stereotype- or electrotype-plates. mbered 65839 S. W. Soule; Numbering-machine (n® auto disks connected to move serially an matically). ..letters
  - 66562 N. L. Chamberlain; Die for raising on typewheels.
  - 71104 J. M. Willbur; Stereotype-casting. type in 71610 J. M. Harper; Device for arranging 7
  - rows. . . mitrine
  - 71668 R. Walker; Machine for cutting and printers’ rules. . . stereo”
  - 72515 J. MacNair ; Machine for producing type-moulds.
- p.624 - vue 792/901
- - AMERICAN PATENTS.
  - 625
  - No.
  - 75681
  - 75700
  - o 0e — co * N 221
  - X 00 00 00 00 oo 00 co co co t C-ON DHH O 00
  - o DNOA -AH - NO
  - (O ONNO O+ P -PO
  - Ho cf 000 00 UO
  - 1868.
  - W. H. Houston; Typesetting and distributing machine.
  - J. Ramage and T. Nelson; Production of plates for printing (obtains relief stereo-type from photograph on gelatine).
  - F. T. M. A. Guyon; Printers’ furniture (extensible).
  - T. S. Hudson ; Die for forming letters, etc., on the edges of type-blocks.
  - B. Woodbury; Producing surfaces, for printing, from photographs (metallic intaglio from gelatine relief).
  - JL. Wait; Composing-stick.
  - W. Ustick; Apparatus for cutting and mitring printers’ rules.
  - D. Bruce; Type-machine (automatically breaking-off jets).
  - W. E. Clark ; Cutting printers’ leads.
  - J- W. H. Cheney ; Cutting printers’ leads.
  - J. M. Willbur; Machine for forming stereo-T type-plates.
  - J. M. Willbur; Stereotypers’putty.
  - P Bruce ; Typecasting machine.
  - - G. Foster ; Typesetting machine.
  - J- T..Slingerland ; Typesetting and distri-buting machine.
  - McDonald; Orig. No. 13197; Machine for mitring printers’ rules.
  - Sot N ( 0 K CO C
  - O 00 CO 00 H C0H CO 00O CO CO CO
  - 1
  - H o
  - CO
  - co H00 o v 1 00 ON1O CO0 O) CO OH NOT H 0 0 11 10 1
  - O 0000 0400
  - 86257 R 1869. 86968 C.N. Thing; Composing-stick.
  - 87941 C. F 1 i Type-breaker (breaking-off jets).
  - a Johnson, Jr.; Mechanical typographer A'Ccessive-impression matrix).
  - plateslogs ’ Block for holding stereotype-S. W.Murray; Composing-stick.
  - o n tucker ; Machine for making printers’ °9421 T
  - 8 rulesl'ead i Machine for mitring printers’ C-and C. Vogt; Producing from printed-90318 J.T Pecnew plates for reprinting (anastatic). de-mith ’ Casting metals underpressure apating wheel of moulds with guard-plate T -continuous stream of metal for articles 91240 G "P40Z. weight). apparatus Telegraph paper-perforating Mmastadter ’ Typesetting and distributing
  - Morris; Printers’ rule.
  - L. T ' Eaton; Composing-stick.
  - w A Smith ; Nickel-faced type.
  - forCameron and A- A. Detlaff ; Machine H. sumtring printers’ rules.
  - sheets) 6 ’ Numbering-machine (for loose wheels*'’ Method of manufacturing type-
  - A. Adams ; Composition for making type 95853 J. TKPrinting wall-paper, oilcloth, etc. 80330/G. Typesetting machine.
  - 99426‘R apparatus. Telegraph paper-perforating 97897 arte oct: Printing-type (hollow, open , {Delcambre; Type-composing and dis-9879g C. uting machine.
  - R. ine 6r’ Printers’ rule (joining by notch-3442 D. A n
  - R. fore. raper ; Orig. No. 64410; Device for 3572 T. AlaunS letters and figures on type-blocks.
  - distribitingemNek:ne:75; Typesetting and
  - Ior
  - 100366 0. T n 1870. 0368 w. porown ; Type-distributing machine.
  - squarllocki Machine for planing and 535 ptype-plates. ends of segmental stereo-102- BEephenson, W. Thompson, and W. G. 0t3 A. N ^’.Ornamental-scroll type.
  - 10210furnitegg and J. J. Schock; Printers’ 2183 D. "pure (block-bridge for headings). machine Thompson ; Type-distributing
  - No.
  - 102304 M. Nelson ; Stereotype-mould.
  - 104236 C. S. Westcott and A. K. Rider; Type-distributing machine.
  - 105463 K. M. Klees; Machine for making printers’ leads.
  - 105855 J. T. Slingerland ; Typesetting machine. 106641 W. H. Wilkinson; Logotype (metal-types united with rubber).
  - 107202 J. D. Smith; Numbering-machine (hand-stamp).
  - 107992 W. S. Wright; Type-planer.
  - 108451 A. F. Cloudman and G. W. Coffin; Composing-stick.
  - 108549 R. C. Young; Composing-stick.
  - 108813 W. T. Morgan; Machine for preparing stereotype-matrices.
  - 108879 A* Chase ; Stereotyping. 108980 M. de la Pena ; Typesetting machine.
  - 110077 W. S. Shipley ; Typesetting machine.
  - 110303 W. Spang ; Typecasting machine.
  - 1871.
  - 110752 W. Donald ; Quadrat (bevelled ends). IIIIII W. W. Dunn ; Typecasting machine.
  - 111896 F. H. Aiken; Machine for cutting and mitring printers’ rules.
  - 112292 A. C. Sine; Numbering and paging machine (lever gear).
  - 112384 I. Schoenberg, Jr.; Machine for making printers’ leads.
  - 112562 D. A. Draper; Process of manufacturing type-blocks (impression on heated metal).
  - 113912 F. M. Neff and J. E. Scruggs; Typesetting and distributing machine.
  - 114773 H. J. Davies; Elastic-type.
  - 114786 J. Fish ; Stereotype-block.
  - 114850 T. G. Plunket; Typesetting machine.
  - 115287 R. E. Draper ; Machine for producing stereotype-matrices.
  - 115777 J. T. Slingerland; Type-distributing machine,
  - 115796 C. S. Westcott; Combined type-composing and casting machine.
  - 115934 J. M. Conner; Machine for ornamenting printers’ rules.
  - 116304 L. Guex ; Stereotype-mould.
  - 118420 J. A. Adams; Treating formes of type, en-graved-blocks, etc.
  - 118425 B. B. Blackwell; Printers’ furniture (for use with stereotypes and bases).
  - 118439 A. J. H. Duganne; Printers’ column rule (grooved for stereotype).
  - 118978 C. L. Sholes; Numbering-machine (clutching number-wheels).
  - 119537 A. Shiland ; Machine for producing stereotype-matrices.
  - 120096 H. D. Perky; Making rubber-stereotype.
  - 120398 D. B. Ray; Typesetting and distributing machine.
  - 121036 F. H. Aiken; Stereotype (casting upon a wooden back with key-grooves).
  - 1872.
  - 122531 T. Miner and J. G. Moody; Manufacturing pointed-type.
  - 122744 D. B. Thompson ; Type-distributing machine. 124295 F. C. Smith and H. McCollum; Machine for bending printers’ leads and rules.
  - 126262 O. L. Brown; Typesetting machine.
  - 126944 J- M. Farnham ; Typesetting machine.
  - 127512 W. A. Pinnell; Stereotype-block.
  - 128285 A. Chase; Making stereotype-moulds of papier mache.
  - 128826 R. P. Tickle; Stereotype-block. 129106 J. M. Conner; Typecasting machine.
  - 129331) M. Gally; Combined stereotyping and tele-
  - 129725) graphing machine.
  - 130170 J. Wilson ; Composing-stick.
  - 130982 } A. Corey ; Typesetting machine.
  - 132184 G. and C. R. Scott; Metal-types (a printing-face supported by ribs or flanges for poster-printing).
  - 132253 O. Churchill; Rubber-type.
  - 132456 T. A. Edison; Telegraph paper-perforating apparatus.
  - 132722 P. S. Hoe; Printers’ composing-stick.
  - 2 S
- p.625 - vue 793/901
- - 626
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1872 (continued).
  - 133678 H. Stephenson, W. Thompson, and W. G. Blake; Scroll-corner type.
  - 134196 S. Crump; Paste for making stereotype-moulds.
  - 1873.
  - 135384 J. I. Sturgis ; Printers’ lead-casting machine.
  - 136018 W. H. Baldwin; Typesetting machine.
  - 136091 J. A. T. Overend; Typecasting machine.
  - 136204 H. Barth; Machine for planing stereotype-plates.
  - 136244 M. J. Hughes; Stereotype-block holder.
  - 136442 J. A. Marquez ; Machine for making matrices for stereotype-plates.
  - 136769 W. Schnaufier ; Stereotype-plate holder.
  - 136815 A. C. Converse ; Apparatus for casting type.
  - 137466 C. T. Moore ; Typesetting machine.
  - 138006 G. K. Cooke ; Making rubber-stereotype.
  - 138241 M. Gally; Type-distributing machine.
  - 138290 F. Scholefield; Stereotype-plate holder.
  - 138922 S. H. Orwig ; Typesetting machine.
  - 139365 D. W. Bruce; Printing-type (figures on 2/3 em, fractions without diagonal line).
  - 139393 C. Hurst; Stereotype-plate holder.
  - 139640 E. R. Whitney; Type (of glass; for poster printing).
  - 140278 C. Kastenbein ; Type-distributing machine.
  - 140279 C. Kastenbein; Type-composing machine.
  - 140436 W. Shaw; Type (reduced at the top and notched to facilitate removal for correction).
  - 140542 J. L. Ringwalt; Typographical printing-plate (typographic etching).
  - 140899 C. W. Dickinson; Numbering-heads (for numbering bank-notes, bonds, etc.).
  - 140921 R. A. Hill; Machine for making stereotypemoulds.
  - 141450 H. P. Montague ; Printers’ furniture (slotted to tooth together).
  - 142512 C. Reuter; Printers’ rule (adjustable clamps for).
  - 142652 D. B. Ray; Apparatus for arranging type for typesetting machines.
  - 142783 W. Filmer; Apparatus for casting printers’ leads.
  - 143875 L. Buschmann; Composing-stick.
  - 144066 J. M. Conner; Typecasting machine.
  - 144196 R. M. Evans; Consecutive-number printer (case with type-high numbering-wheels; automatic).
  - 144571 J. Silversmith; Manufacture of printing-type.
  - 145179 M. J. Hughes; Blocking stereotype-plates in casting.
  - 145549 J- B. Bancroft; Machine for preparing printers’ rules.
  - 145598 J. D. Smith; Numbering-machine (automatic type-head for notes, etc.).
  - 146163 J. Bryson ; Stereotype-block holder (making-ready).
  - 1874.
  - 146454 M. J. Hughes; Stereotype-plate.
  - 148624 D. B. Ray ; Space for type (double wedges).
  - 149239 F. J. Ott; Stereotype-machine.
  - 149647 F. G. Foster; Typesetting machine.
  - 150234 J- M. Farnham ; Typesetting machine regulator.
  - 151509 D. H. Perkins ; Machine for cutting printers’ rules.
  - 152868 J. A. Reynolds; Typesetting machine.
  - 152869 J. A. Reynolds; Type-distributing machine.
  - 153084 M. Joyce; Producing relief-line metal-plates for printing (engraving through plaster-coated plate and stereotyping).
  - 153095 W. Macrone and W. Mackenzie ; Composition for stereotyping (for plaster-moulds).
  - 154230 J. Dickson; Printing-plate or die (hard-rubber relief from intaglio).
  - 155609 J. Goodale; Machine for casting printers’ leads.
  - 155765 J. D. Smith; Numbering-machine (for bank-notes, certificates, etc.).
  - 156247 T. H. Winchester; Line-curver for type.
  - 157694 J. W. Paige; Typesetting machine (29 claims).
  - 157853 T. J. Mayall and R. W. Hartnett; Drier for matrices of stereotype-plates.
  - No. 1875.
  - 159696 T. J. Mayall and R. W. Hartnett; Stretcher for stereotype-matrices. Line
  - 159946 T. J. Mayall and R. W. Hartnett; Macspe-for shaving the backs of curved stereot)-
  - plates.
  - 160423 G. Greene ; Making typecasting matrices' ;
  - 161473 L. C. Bodie, J. Masse and W. Webs and Machine for numbering, embossing. Sing inking bonds, etc. (successive stamp and inking). . e0.
  - 161542 A. J. O’Shea; Registering-device for st type-blocks. liter.
  - 163540 J. A. Stanion ; Printers’ lead and rule cu 163872 A. N. Kellogg ; Stereotype-plate holder.
  - 163873 A. N. Kellogg; Stereotype-block.
  - 163874 A. N. Kellogg; Stereotype-plate, —ters’ 163998 W. Hawkins and W. F. Dodge; Pr.
  - lead-cutting machine.
  - 164037 A. C. Richards; Typesetting machineping
  - 165387 L. W. Tracy; Device for manufact printers’ leads. , iting
  - 165859 J. A. T. Overend; Printers’ lead-cu machine. .ate
  - 165871 T. Richards; Numbering printingibers (using type-bars, or slugs, to print num on bond-coupons, etc.). iters;
  - 166205 A. M. Howard; Type (for typewp removing the fin formed by swagilgine.
  - 166549 W. D. C. Pattyson ; Typesetting mach ering
  - 166681 T. S. Bowman; Consecutive-nuni
  - machine (type-high, platen-actuated;-
  - 166702 A. N. Kellogg and J. J. Schock ; Stereojumn plate holder (securing by grooves in C rules).
  - 167726 R. T. P. Allen ; Typesetting machine.
  - 168044 A. Millar; Typesetting machine.
  - 168591 D. B. Thompson ; Typesetting machi 168977 J. L. Firm; Stereotype-block. . setting 169215 ; C. S. Westcott; Typecasting and 169216/ machine. trine
  - 169638 H. W. Henley; Machine for 111 printers’ leads and rules.
  - 169701 A. M. Howard ; Type machine.
  - 170372 J. Hooker ; Typesetting machine.
  - 170593 A. C. Richards; Typesetting machin achine-
  - 171248 H. J. Stone ; Printers’ lead-cutting Minting 171408 G. H. Morgan; Typewheel for P
  - telegraphs.
  - 173373 173648
  - 173729
  - 174899
  - 174900
  - 174901
  - 174915
  - 174916
  - 175009
  - 175119
  - 175147
  - 175393
  - 175910
  - 175938
  - 178843
  - 1876. Stereo-
  - J. W. Kellberg; Machine for planing type-plates.
  - W. H. Thomas ; Composing-stick. ^ A. N. Kellogg; Stereotype-plate hot stereo” E. T. Jameson ; Machine for shaving
  - type- and electrotype-plates. chine-% C. W. Dickinson; Type-distributing me. C. W. Dickinson; Typesetting machianine. W. A. Lorenz; Type-distributing.
  - W. A. Lorenz ; Typesetting machine. rface-J. H. Banks; Producing printing (typographic etching).
  - J. Lindsay; Printing-type. Itribut”
  - W. D. C. Pattyson; Type-dts.
  - machine. ^reo^
  - S. D. Tucker; Mould for casting Sto
  - plates. .
  - W. H. Bell; Movable locking-tyPs: tributh A. Corey; Typesetting and al
  - machine. .
  - . S. V. Essick ; Stereotyping machine. ‘ 178910 J. M. Conner; Typecasting machin printe
  - H. J. Stone; Machine for casting + for leads. .etal
  - H. J. Stone; Machine for shaving G. printers’ rules and leads. a
  - H. Stephenson, W. Thompson an print!". Blake; Original No. 101535; of ribb type (for printing an imitation
  - 184115
  - 184738
  - R 7342
  - scroll).
  - 187278
  - 187880
  - 188232
  - 190434
  - 1877.
  - A. M. Howard; Type-machine (swa
  - T. Mason ; Type-mould (pivotal): ed).
  - T. S. Bowman; Printers’ rule (mitchine
  - J. M. Howe; Type-distributing m selecting nicks).
- p.626 - vue 794/901
- - AMERICAN
  - PATENTS.
  - 627
  - No. 1877 (continued).
  - 92281 D. Reynolds; Type-distributing machine 10,- - (by selecting nicks).
  - C. G. and 0. N. Blomgren and A. Hawkinson ; I0S6 , Printers’ lead-shaving machine.
  - 3 28 C. S. Westcott; Typecasting matrix (electro-Io,o— . typing method).
  - 33005 G. W. Casilear ; Hard-metal type (impression by rolling ; whites routed out).
  - W. A. Lorenz and C. D. Hughes ; Distributor type-carrier (for selecting nicks).
  - R. T. P. Allen; Type-distributing machine (for selecting nicks).
  - D. Reynolds and J. Thorne; Typesetting machine.
  - G. P. Drummond; Process and apparatus for producing printing-surfaces (typewritten on elastic material, stretched to justify and photographed automatically 198,5 line-by-line).
  - to- P. Drummond; Machine for obtaining 1982 ( printing-surfaces for reading matter (cuts 45) letters from printed-ribbons and sticks them, overlapping the whites, on an elastic band, which is stretched to justify; see 198237).
  - 00 CoOU Ng COUt ODN NON
  - No. 219861
  - 219887
  - 220039
  - 220942
  - 220999
  - 221366
  - 221685
  - 221825
  - 221853
  - 222642
  - 222910
  - 223584
  - S. J. Hoggson; Fountain type (hollow-type charged with ink).
  - G. F. White; Wooden printing-type (see 210229; Manufacturing articles of wood).
  - T. W. Smith; Type-matrix (non-rubbing with hard-metal sides).
  - C. D. Reppy; Printers’ composing-stick (gauge).
  - R. Smith; Curved-bodied printing-type (for setting up curved lines, ornaments, etc.).
  - W. Scott; Machine for shaving and trimming stereotype-plates (curved).
  - J. B. R. Lespinasse; Stereotype-plate (grooved edge; see 118425 and 166702).
  - L. E. Jannin; Composition for stereotype-moulds (protoxide of lead and glycerine).
  - J. North ; Typesetting machine (loose-type).
  - J. W. Schuckers ; Machine for making stereotype-matrices (impression from line of justified type dies).
  - M. J. Hughes ; Stereotype casting-box (flat).
  - 1880.
  - B. Duncan and J. E. Leyden ; Type-forme fol-electrotyping (filling in above trade-height
  - 1988 1878.
  - 47 J.P. Jamison ; Producing printing-surfaces 19801, —rolling for printing on wood, ivory, etc.). 2000,3 r'n' Fenton; Printers’ composing-stick. 20146- X R. Bettis; Type (portions of characters).
  - C. Ewing; Numbering-machine (controlled by ratchet-bars; simultaneously-num-201436 r bering the coupons of bonds).
  - 3 C T. Moore; Methods of preparing transfer-sheets or matrices for printing (justifying matter and spacing words on transfer-301632) sheets and matrices).
  - R 8401 ( A. H. Rogers; Elastic-faced printing-type. 201718 -
  - L. P. Taylor; Type-holder (hand, for names, dates, etc.).
  - W. Glazier; Manufacture of logotypes (set close and cemented in grooves).
  - F. Grover; Printers’ composing-stick.
  - J- Brown; Composition for supporting metallic plates for the formation of printing-surfaces (drawing made in thin metal and electrotyped from either side for relief
  - A or intaglio respectively).
  - A. Henning; Stereotype-block (base and clamps).
  - C. S. Westcott; Type (rounding vertical wedges).
  - W. H. Golding ; Machine for cutting printers’ rules and leads.
  - —S. Bowman; Numbering-machine (type-m high; see 166681).
  - - Mason; Machine for dressing printing-20818- A type.
  - A.N. Kellogg; Means for holding stereo-211038 T type-plates.
  - J. North; Type-distributing machine (by selecting-wards).
  - 8% o — + N 0 — UN O
  - co coHO ( CO ONA NOT O 11 0 00000 NONNI
  - 1879.
  - live’stearki Cleaning type (by the use of M. J. Hughes ; Apparatus for casting stereo-a types (flat).
  - “(see ichards ; Type-distributing machine A. C. Richards ; Typesetting machine (see M.64037 disclaimed).
  - coresy.Shes i Stereotype -cast (on wooden Huntoon ; Casting stereotype-plates * esative to support matrix and positive
  - 1 co to or 00 N H O oo
  - 355 -A U 4—2
  - 215259 F using this backing).
  - . "—. Bailey; Engraving machine (for
  - 216046 T Printing-surfaces).
  - mecdonough ; Numbering-machine. (Sim-, —ancously-numbering several columns
  - 217607 p of Coupons of bonds.)
  - "gfroerer; Printing-type (wood with 218572 wothber Printing-face).
  - * Price; Printers’ composing-stick.
  - 224166
  - 224167
  - 224372
  - 224755
  - 225457
  - 225468
  - 226297
  - 226377
  - 226383
  - 226623
  - 227017
  - 229291
  - 229861
  - 229862
  - 229869
  - 230021
  - 230784
  - 231427
  - 232157
  - 232786
  - 232983
  - spaces).
  - A. Fraser; Type-composing apparatus (loose-type).
  - A. Fraser; Type-distributing apparatus (key-operated).
  - W. J. Adams; Type-clamp (metal bands to replace string).
  - W. A. Wright; Machine for shaving and cutting stereotype and other plates (flat).
  - M. Bradley; Engraving printing-surfaces (in relief, using ruling machine).
  - P. Dillon; Typesetting and distributing machine (assisting hand-setting; automatic distributor).
  - A. Fraser; Type-composing machine (see 224166).
  - C. C. Webster; Type-rubbing machine.
  - G. C. Bell; Photo-relief-engraving (uses raised sensitized points for obtaining dots).
  - J. North ; Type-distributing machine (automatic by wards).
  - R. L. Kimberly; Matrix-forming machine (successive impression; justification by scale).
  - F. Wesel; Stereotype-plate holder (base and spring-clip).
  - E. P. Brown; Stereotype (oblique tongues for securing).
  - E. P. Brown; Block for interchangeable stereotype-plates.
  - E. D. Chamberlain; Elastic-faced printing-type (rubber on wooden line-core).
  - G. E. Jones; Stereotype-block (cast direct from female type).
  - L. K. Johnson; Type- and space-holder (assisting hand).
  - ' W. J. Johnson; Machine for trimming stereotype-plates (curved).
  - ‘ J. Thorne; Typesetting and distributing machine (two grooved cylinders; step-by-step movement).
  - > W. C. Walter; Printing-surface (of sand, or powdered rock, glued to a block).
  - ; G. Lautenschlager; Numbering or paging machine (improvements in ratchet carrying
  - 233608
  - 233704
  - 233749
  - 233894
  - N
  - gears).
  - J. Fleming; Machine for casting printers’ leads.
  - F. Schley ; Printers’ rule (brass with inserted steel edge).
  - W. E. Gump; Stereotype casting-box (flat).
  - F. S. Taft; Machine for cutting printers’
  - 34480 w.J. Johnson; Drying stereotype-matrices.
  - 1881.
  - 236768 J. Breakey ; Type-case (for setting and distributingmachines). . .
  - 237202 J. D. Parker; Composing-stick gauge (for setting-stick). . , 1
  - 237706 G. Scott; Manufacture of printers metal furniture. (Gang-milling mild steel, etc., in a jig.)
- p.627 - vue 795/901
- - 628
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1881 (continued).
  - 239942 P. Dillon; Mechanism for making, finishing and packing type (duplex caster).
  - 240173 J. G. Pavyer and J. Whitelaw ; Typecasting machine (pivotal).
  - 240809 E. P. Brown; Stereotype-casting apparatus. (Repetition of flat plates.)
  - 241128 C. W. E. Eberhard; Stereotype-block (securing to base).
  - 241759 G. Trimble; Column-rule and printing-forme (rule with line of type stereotyped).
  - 242244 H. E. Allen; Stereotype-plate holder (for permitting insertion of dashes and leads between paragraphs).
  - 242989 F. Schley; Stereotype-block (clip).
  - 243044 J. M. Hepburn; Apparatus for manufacturing types. (Shanks machine.)
  - 243981 W. Scott; Mould for casting stereotype-plates (semi-cylindrical).
  - 244634 W. A. Lorenz ; Typesetting machine (ejecting single type to assist hand-composition).
  - 244636 W. A. Lorenz; Mechanism for cutting ofl and elevating lines of quadrats. (Type slicer.)
  - 244721 L. K. Johnson; Type-distributing machine (see 174899).
  - 244723 W. A. Lorenz and L. K. Johnson; Machine for arranging type in lines.
  - 244724 W. A. Lorenz, E. G. Parkhurst and L. K. Johnson; Carrier for type-distributing machines.
  - 244725 W. A. Lorenz and L. K. Johnson; Type-distributing machine (see 174899).
  - 245064 J. P. Ellacott and T. K. Tracy; Stereotype-block (securing to base).
  - 245220 W. Robinson ; Numbering-machine (printing a dash or other sign in front of single units).
  - 245523 A. A. Low; Type-distributing machine (see 212503).
  - 245562 T. Reeve; Type-distributing machine (see
  - 212503 ; Alden).
  - 247418 J. J. Sachs; Producing printing and other surfaces (typographic etching).
  - 248047 W. A. Lorenz; Typesetting machine (see 174899).
  - 248233 H. H. Thorp; Type (multiple-unit set and multiple-unit position of line).
  - 250052 E. P. Brown; Stereotype locking-device (for facilitating changes of column).
  - 250238 C. H. Hansen; Printing-plate (relief).
  - 250239 C. H. Hansen; Preparing matrices for producing printing-plates (relief).
  - 250555 W. A. Lorenz and L. K. Johnson; Type-justifying machine (slicing and inserting leads in columns of hand-justifying matter).
  - 251380 D. Reynolds ; Typesetting and distributing machine (avoiding turning of thin sorts in automatic distributing by selecting nicks).
  - 251425 E. Farrar; Type-marking machine (marking wheel composed of loose-type).
  - R 9560 D. Reynolds; Orig. No. 192281; Type-distributing machine. (Automatic by nicks into channels on a cylinder.)
  - R 9720 A. A. Low; Orig. No. 233264; Type-case (see 212503-4).
  - 1882.
  - 251804 C. V. Steinbach; Machine for bending printers’ rules.
  - 252694 A. Overend ; Stereotype-plate holder (clamp). 253057 J. P. Hunt; Preparing type-formes (making slug by impressions).
  - 253153 E. W. Brackelsberg; Typesetting and distributing apparatus.
  - 253386 M. J. Hughes; Combined printing-press and stereotype casting-box.
  - 254018 L. K. Johnson; Printers’ composing-rule (for stick).
  - 254019 L. K. Johnson ; Type- and space-holder (see 230784).
  - 254792 L. B. Benton; Mould for casting printers’ leads.
  - 254827 W. P. Kidder ; Numbering-machine (to print from I to loo inclusive, blank preceding single figures).
  - 255667 T. J. Porter; Typesetting machine (presenting type for hand-composition).
  - 256490 G. E. Lloyd; Stereotype-shaving machi (flat). .-to
  - 259578 J. North; Hand type-distributor (guiding
  - case compartments). - -
  - 260084 J- B. Boyd; Printers’ rule (for setting curved work). x
  - 261378 J. North ; Typesetting machine (see 2218^ 263707 L. K. Johnson; Type- and space-holder (s 230784)-
  - 264084 L. K. Johnson; Typesetting apparat (assisting hand-composition). e_ 264085 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; 1^1. distributing apparatus (assisting han distribution).
  - 265623 V. M. Moreau ; Machine or cutting woon types (router). ,
  - 265660 C. E. Curtiss ; Stereotype-plate holder (CUD 265918 M. H. Dement; Preparing matrix-formes stereotyping (strips from impress! machines).
  - 266932 W. H. Welsh and C. W. Woodward; lyP rubbing and dressing machine. . .
  - 268084 C. L. Divine; Extension composing-sticK-268409 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-c taining channel (for machines).
  - 268513 T. McKinley; Injector for typecas machines (corrugated diaphragm plung less pump).
  - 268688 F. Keefer; Sectional-block for stereotyp plates (composite with clamps).
  - 270056 H. Hagemann ; Stereotyping-machine ( cessive impressions). . ,ers'
  - 271204 R. S. Robson ; Machine for cutting prin rules. and
  - 271349 C. Mitchell; Machinery for cutting mitring printers’ rules. . , re0-271380 S. D. Tucker; Machine for trimming st type-plates (curved).
  - 27171T L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Typese apparatus (assisting hand). reo-
  - 271858 W. J. Johnson ; Matrix drying-press (st type). . tpreo'
  - 274918 C. H. Davids; Machine for making st 0j type-matrices (successive impression lead-slugs).
  - 2 74993 H. H. Thorp; Type (script). Tvpe-275664 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low ; setting and distributing machine (assi
  - hand). iking
  - 275958 J. H. Stonemetz; Appliance for rn stereotype-plates (flat). p5).
  - 276204 F. Wesel; Stereotype-plate holder (cl‘. 276947 F. Wicks; Type-composing Ht^ecible (Wicks’ composer and compre spaces). , . machine
  - 276986 C. L. Ware ; Automatic numbering-ni t), (type-high with external operating-rat ^ 277740 L. K. Johnson; Type-holder and sep (facilitating hand-distribution). etc. 278211 A. B. Auer;. Type-forme furniture, (roughened face). (en'
  - 278652 C. Baechler ; Casting stereotype-plate veloped core).
  - 2 78 700 W. H. Golding; Composing-stick..
  - 278785 G. S. Eaton; Type-rubbing machine. |jer 279168 L. K. Johnson; Type- and space-(assisting hand). width3
  - 279352 A. Danziger; Composing-stick (two in one stick). ,ingi°® 280699 F. Wicks; Type-making and arr machinery (rotary caster). :nting 282174 M. H. Dement; Type-writing and P machine (successive impression). anting 282175 M. H. Dement; Type-writing and P machine (successive impression). . ufyinf 282176 M. H. Dement; Apparatus for ju and stereotyped line-strips, and
  - securing them in column, or page ^g). 282356 A. Neitsch; Type-grinding machine (ru . ojjet 282655 A. W. Marshall; Stereotype-plate (grooved back for rule). _ j^-nra^ 282866 J. F. Earhart; Casting a plate for de orative printing, etc. (obtaining a
  - effect from casting made nearly c£i pe-dj’' 282988 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; iLd-d15
  - tributing apparatus (assisting 11 tribution).
- p.628 - vue 796/901
- - AMERICAN PATENTS.
  - 629
  - to
  - CO
  - GO 0
  - N N N NN O 00 O 00 00 U — - GO GO - NO (O CO " ULO ON O V 0
  - No. 1883 (continued).
  - 283016 N. F. Olson; Automatic numbering-machine
  - (for tickets, 10 to 15 sets simultaneously).
  - R. H. Davies; Distributing printing-type (proposed type of celluloid, aluminium, etc., to be separated by difference of density).
  - J. L. Firm ; Plate-rack for stereotype-blocks.
  - J. Thorne; Typesetting and distributing machine (see 232157). J. F. Earhart; Printing-plate (see 282866).
  - E. E. Pratt; Stereotype-block (cast upon
  - . multiple wood-blocks).
  - M. H. Dement and A. W. Granville ; Appa-
  - ratus for stereotyping matrix-strips.
  - (Enabling cut-bars to be spaced for justi-28=6 fication.)
  - 3 43 W. Mears; Stereotyping (use of collodion in
  - 282 - matrix-making).
  - T. Bradwell and S. K. White; Stereotyping outfit (casting, sawing, shaving, and 90201 L. B. Benton; Printing-type (self-spacing 290628 J. c. Blevney; Machine for manufacturing
  - p. type (of soft-iron for case-hardening).
  - 385 M. H. Dement; Orig. No. 265918; Preparing matrix-formes for stereotyping (from impression devices).
  - 08 CON CO 00
  - 1 00 O
  - NO I — / 00 8
  - CO V o
  - NNN (O V 0010 WWD NO CONH
  - — co co 00 N I. NO C LO O O1 * “ ( NC O O O 00 O O C N C C 0
  - 1884. 29218I P. R. Shugg and G. Boyle; Making relief printing-plates or blocks (photo relief-2036 plate).
  - 33 J. M. Conner; Typecasting mould (pivotal, 20- - for heavily-kerned descenders).
  - 1355 E. C. Bell; Type-holder (locking binding-cord).
  - W. H. Golding; Composing-stick.
  - E. and A. H. Cowles; Stereotype-backing
  - Powder or filling (lime and glutinous substance).
  - R. S. Robson ; Composing-stick.
  - T. K. Tracy; Stereotype-plate (facilitating transposition of columns).
  - : L. Kimberly; Machine for making matrices (successive impression).
  - Pearce and E. Hughes; Method of and apparatus for drying matrices for stereo-p type-plates.
  - — E. Pratt; Device for locking removable stereotypes (spring-clip).
  - C 8. Cottrell; Electrotype and stereotype casting-pan (curved plates).
  - C B. Cottrell; Electrotype and stereotype casting-mould (curved matrix for casting curved plates).
  - T L. Kimberly; Machine for making matrices (successive impression).
  - J. Smith ; Stereotyping-apparatus (flat).
  - TW. Nelson; Mounting stereotype- or C electrotype-plates (inclined key-strip).
  - C. Surguy ; Mould for casting slugs and c leads for printers’ use.
  - • S. Eaton and J. W. Lyon ; Type-rubbing 30073, E machine.
  - * E. Pratt; Device for securing stereo-300732 R type-plates in the forme (spring-clip). 302653 M E Pratt; Stereotype-block (base).
  - • H. Dement; Typewriting and type-matrix making machine (successive im-Pression).
  - A. H. McClure and A. Pfirsch ; Device for T casting printers’ leads (hinged mould).
  - SPavyer 1 Type-matrix holder and gauge olfiling jig).
  - * Mergenthaler; Matrix-making machine (successive impressions of typewheel).
  - J. Hesselschwerdt; Numbering-machine D Auses endless type-chain).
  - • Reynolds; Type-distributing machinery 0 (see 192281).
  - N Peterson; Machine for setting and flaming impressions from type (impres-
  - R in wax fr°m a line). type Smith; Manufacturing elastic-faced 3 mawavyer ’ Machine for dressing type-
  - COOOLC 000000 OOOO — N ONCO N COON T N O OHONO
  - * 1 00 1 — 00
  - 8 8
  - No.
  - 307417 H. H. Thorp; Type. (Furniture grooved for the binding-string.)
  - 307446 M. H. Dement; Apparatus for putting matrix-strips in forme and preparing them for stereotyping (successive impression).
  - 308043 W. J. Shaw ; Stereotype-matrix and making the same (using non-conducting ink and electro-depositing on the spaces between).
  - 309093 E. E. Pratt, C. S. Partridge and G. E.
  - Lloyd; Machine for grooving stereotypes. 309596 G. R. Bacon ; Type-mould (pivotal, adjustable nick-wires).
  - 1885.
  - 310422 W. Hendrickson ; Composing-stick (knee-clamps).
  - 310486 W. B. Woodbury; Producing gelatinous printing-plates (photographic).
  - 311175 M. Crane and J. L. Firm; Stereotype-plate (surface with blow-holes for printing a tint).
  - 311350 O. Mergenthaler; Method of and means for producing printing-surfaces (impression-device, casts slugs and cuts them up for
  - 311400
  - 311411
  - 311412
  - 311413
  - 311414
  - 311524
  - 312145
  - 312302 312569
  - 313224
  - 313812
  - 314384
  - 314391
  - 314827
  - 315045
  - 315794
  - 316398
  - 316579
  - 317828
  - 318803
  - justification).
  - J. H. White ; Machine for justifying matrix-strips (successive impression; National
  - Typograph Co.).
  - J. O. Clephane ; Matrix for printing-surface (impression-device).
  - J. O. Clephane; Type for matrix-making (for successive-impression machines).
  - J. O. Clephane; Casting appliance for stereotype-bars (from matrix-strip).
  - J. O. Clephane; Means for producing printing-surfaces (impression-device).
  - E. E. Pratt; Stereotype-plate holder (spring-clip).
  - O. Mergenthaler; Machine for producing stereotype-matrices (impression from long type-bars set automatically to justify the line; a second line can be set while the first matrix is being beaten ; see 304272).
  - A. D. Stern; Printers’ rule (adjustable).
  - A. W. Marshall; Electrotype-plate and holder.
  - O. Mergenthaler; Machine for producing printing-bars (Linotype with long multiple-character matrices).
  - G. W. Cummings and J. R. Cummings;
  - Electrotype-shell and base.
  - W. F. Klose ; Machine for shaving printers’ leads, slugs, etc.
  - A. D. McLean ; Machine for shaving curved stereotype-plates.
  - R. Gnichwitz ; Typecasting mould (pivotal, adjustable core).
  - N. R. Lyman ; Machine for making printers’ leads (continuous).
  - W. J. Johnson ; Machine for shaving stereotype-plates (curved).
  - E. E. Pratt and C. S. Partridge; Machine for trimming stereotype-plates (flat).
  - J. W. Smith; Stereotype-shaving machine (flat).
  - O. Mergenthaler; Machine for producing printing-bars (Linotype; single character, or combined characters, on each matrix).
  - J. H. Reinhardt and C. S. Ellis ; Consecutive-numbering machine (platen-operated, typo
  - 318893
  - 320103
  - 320271
  - 320272
  - 320713
  - 323557
  - 3241I1
  - graphic).
  - C. M. Grow; Composing-stick (multiple gauges for separating columns).
  - E. A. Warren; Numbering-machine (for successive or successively repeated printing).
  - J. E. Munson; Setting type (perforated strip, ten rows of perforations; two rows determine case; two of remaining eight determine the character).
  - J. E. Munson; Typesetting machine (operated by perforated strip).
  - C. A. Skene; Impression-sheet for making stereotype-plates (matrix).
  - A. Z. Boda and L. Klopsch ; Stereotype-plate holder (dovetail-rib clamped between two base-sections).
  - J. M. Hepburn; Typefounding machine (body-slide).
- p.629 - vue 797/901
- - 630
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1885 (continued).
  - 324423 R. H. Smith; Manufacturing elastic-faced printing-types.
  - 325324 J. R. Cummings; Stereotype-plate and securing it in printers’ formes (means for clamping to base).
  - 325636 G. Sutherland; Producing typographic blocks or plates from photo-negatives.
  - 326009 I. Baas, Jr., and L. B. Benton ; Type-mould (pivotal).
  - 326376 L. H. Allen; Paper-mould for casting stereotype-plates (from impression machine strips).
  - 326599 R. H. Smith; Elastic-faced printing-type. 326663 J. W. Maclachlan; Numbering-machine (facilitating change from successive to repeated numbering).
  - 327079 J. F. Gabel and J. B. Guelpa ; Nipple-plate for typecasting machines (water- or air-cooled).
  - 327546 H. C. Hansen; Mould for casting printers’ leads.
  - 327648 E. R. Booth; Stereotype-plate and holder (double-sided, locked to base by column-rules).
  - 327798 M. Joyce; Stereotype-block (wooden back grooved longitudinally).
  - 327855 L. B. Benton; Punch-cutting machine (single column).
  - 327856 E. A. Blake; Stereotype-plate trimming machine (flat).
  - 327857 E. A. Blake; Stereotype-plate shaving machine (flat).
  - 328017 A. Filly; Printers’ rule mitring machine.
  - 328600 J. E. Munson; Electrical perforator (for typesetter ribbon).
  - 328677 E. R. and A. W. Hoffmann; Apparatus for making typewheels (for printing-telegraphs, etc.).
  - 328960 O. Mergenthaler ; Matrix-making and printing-machine (successive impression).
  - 328961 O. Mergenthaler; Machine for dressing type-bars (made from successive impressionmatrices).
  - 329466 F. D. Maltby; Machine for making type-matrices (successive impressions).
  - 330344 J. E. Munson; Automatic perforating-tele-graph (reproduces setting at a distance, from a single ribbon).
  - 331438 J. L. Poalk; Stereotype or matrix-making machine (single typewheel; successive impressions).
  - 332352 F. D. Maltby; Machine for justifying matrices for producing printing-surfaces (impression-device).
  - 332354 O. Mergenthaler ; Machine for forming type-matrices (impressing justified line with spring-spaces; see 311350).
  - 332419 J. E. Munson; Perforating machine (for typesetter ribbon).
  - 332873 J. X. Browne; Apparatus for making stereotype-matrices (flat).
  - 332990 L. B. Benton; Punch-cutting machine (single column).
  - 333018 G. E. Lloyd; Stereotype-plate roughing machine (flat).
  - 333325 J. North; Machine for mending stereotype-plates (punching slots).
  - 1886.
  - 333529 G. E. Lloyd ; Machine for shaving stereotype-plates (flat).
  - 333530 G. E. Lloyd ; Machine for fitting stereotype-plates and their backing (T-groove).
  - 334048 E. E. Pratt and C. S. Partridge ; Stereotype-casting box (flat).
  - 334544 G. Pepe; Apparatus for drying stereotype-matrices (rotary drum).
  - 335276 J. H. Ferguson; Stereotype-shaving machine (flat).
  - 336022 W. T. Smith ; Stereotype-plate and block or bed for the same (half-dovetail and rule).
  - 336483 C. Hochstadt; Typecasting mould, grooved or recessed.
  - 336645 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-distributing apparatus.
  - 336646) L. K. Johnson; Compositor’s type-case 3366473 (see 230784).
  - No. 336719
  - 336753
  - 336754
  - L. K. Johnson,and A. A. Low ; Composit type- and space-holder (see 230784). e. F. Schreiner; Type-case for stereoton-matrix making machines (for imprest: devices). eo-
  - F. Schreiner; Machine for making Stes of type-matrix impressions (of single line
  - 336824 D. J. Riker ; Matrix (lead, tin and mercury): 337406 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-tributing apparatus (assisting hand), dis-337407 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-tributing apparatus (assisting hand).
  - 337743 J. R. Cummings; Clamping-tool (for tan ing electro-shells to bases). ads 337744 J. R. Cummings; Type (spaces and 4 with projection to fit nicks of type).
  - 338259 C. Frecker; Composing-stick. 339076 H. Seger; Composing-stick. im-339609 T. D. Worrall; Type or die for formingksive pressions in metal surfaces (for succe impressions). Jing 339671 F. D. Maltby; Machine for produ stereotype-matrices (see 3042 72). Strix-339724 T. D. Worrall ; Typewriting and m making machine (impression-device). ,ay 339798 J. Mayerhoff ; Perforating-type and ov (tubular, cutting-edged-type). type-340104 G. Damon and E. S. Peets; Stereoa). block (tongued-plate and multiple-Da a.dis-340124 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type tributing apparatus, older 340125 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-n and separator (see 277740). veneer 341332 S. H. Horgan; Printing-plate A backing). (uses 342364 R. L. Kimberly; Justifying-machine v serrate flanged disks).
  - 342386 F. Russell; Type-smoothing machine.“.stick 342442 L. K. Johnson; Compositor’s galley
  - (to replace composing-stick). . Chine 342916 H. C. Leland; Type-distributing m (automatic by nicks). . rule-343640 P. S. Kellogg; Printers’ lead- and cutter. table
  - 344035 F. H. Dodd; Printers’ furniture (adju for length). aucing 344974 O. Mergenthaler; Machine for type-matrices (impression of a line) core 345433 M. Joyce; Stereotype-block (wooden and base strips), aucing 345525 O. Mergenthaler; Machine for Pr° (long” type-bars and matrices for the like 1 matrix Linotype; see 313224). ducing 345526 O. Mergenthaler; Machine for Pro type-bars (linotype-slugs). notary, 345697 R. H. Ingersoll and P. B. Henry ; Tachine hand, numbering- and printing-® (single-wheel). . machine 347222) E. A. Blake; Stereotype-shaving ® 347223 5 (flat). 347591 W. H. Golding; Composing-stick. 347626 J. L. McMillan; Typesetting machincachine
  - 347627 J. L. McMillan; Type-distributing m
  - (automatic by nicks). ducins 347629 O. Mergenthaler; Machine for Pr0 type-bars (linotype-slugs). . hanis" 347630 O. Mergenthaler; Type-matrix and mee. for distributing the same (see 317°3ctere0” 347818 O. Mergenthaler; Machine for casting types (impression-device). (saddle” 347837 E. C. Standiford; Stereotype-plate I formed plate). 1.bloc 348583 E. E. Pratt; Stereotype-plate an , (cast into wood-back). . inter 348804 H. F. Wellman; Machine for shaving P leads (see 314384). . ling type 348836 C. G. Fischer; Apparatus for setting (assisting hand). eceoty? 349257 N. R. Lyman and A. Morley; Stongue plate and base with locking-device 1 .
  - locking-rod and rule). . mbel 350640 J. H. Reinhardt; Consecutive-n machine (see 318803). clamP 350677 M. J. Hughes; Printing-plate holde ‘ ing plates). , older (>0
  - 350916 L. C. Crowell; Stereotype-plate n
  - curved plates). macb”
  - 351040 J. Brooks; Stereotype-casting
  - (curved).
- p.630 - vue 798/901
- - AMERICAN PATENTS.
  - 631
  - No. 351313 351355 352137
  - 1886 (continued).
  - c & co CCU ONN N C 485
  - OOC CC U CO CO- O 000
  - J- R. and G. W. Cummings; Printing-block (see 312569).
  - T. Bigelow ; Printing-type (with holes to face for supply of ink).
  - Lee; Numbering-device (enabling arbitrary characters to precede low numbers without zeros preceding).
  - V(at) Caps; Stereotype-casting machine P. Wenzel and H. Heinebach; Typecasting mould (pivotal).
  - J. H. Reinhardt; Consecutive-numbering machine (for ten tickets simultaneously, see 318803).
  - Wenzel and H. Heinebach; Mould for casting type (pivotal).
  - — K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-dis-tributing apparatus (assisting hand).
  - L. Tarbox; Mould for casting type-3540, r wheels.
  - R1035 T Rettig; Typecasting machine (pivotal).
  - T° J. North; Orig. No. 333325; Machine for mending stereotype-plates (correcting, etc.).
  - 356840
  - 356845 358041 358585 359021 359208 359625 359751
  - 359779 359960
  - 5 S ) 0
  - O
  - O
  - 35576S E.D. 1887.
  - •eLaraway and E. Bridge ; Manufacture 356749 T °type (from paper-pulp).
  - 3 Conner; Type-mould (pivotal for L hollow type).’
  - K. Johnson and A. A. Low ; Type-distri-A ating apparatus (assisting hand; Alden). . Low ; Lead- and rule-holder (assisting L hand; Alden).
  - A. Johnson and A. A. Low; Printers’
  - H sesetting compartment (Alden).
  - leadellman; Mould for casting printers’ G. F. Kimball; Mould for casting printers’ w eads and small furniture.
  - Gilman; Printers’ galley (operating R and securing sidestick).
  - LD. Nicol; Attachment for stereotype-E locks (levelling screws).
  - "A. Warren ; Numbering-machine (multiple L "umbering-heads).
  - and A. Foucher ; Machine for casting and T pishing type (body-slide).
  - Cummings; Type and leads (raised to 300096) L tick in type; see 337744).
  - 300097€ tlohnson and A. A. Low; Type-dis-— outing apparatus (assisting hand;
  - 360104 AlAlden). T — T—OW, Type-containing channel (see 360307 L 230784 ; Alden). . ilopsch; Base for (celluloid, etc.) stereo-360355 AtRe-plates. ‘ 1 360356( A Low; Type-containing channel (see 360357 A330784; Alden). - Aow ; Type-channel (for setters ; see 360358 A.33°784; Alden). . ALow; Type-containing channel (see 361306 w?3°784: Alden). 362 (clips) Martin; Stereotype-plate holder
  - 1 "ovebcokz pMnchigefornumberingpapers imsand H. Daw ;. Apparatus for producing 3627 machine). and printed surfaces (impression
  - . Lagerman; Typesetting machine (Lager-362987 C monTypotheter). wline-impressionsynting (making stereotype Xraliwsg Eiketsipparatus for numbering
  - A. Low; Type-distributing apparatus w.pting hand; Alden).
  - an: acon; Numbering-apparatus (con-T.secutive; see 363193).
  - tweenston; Producing justified-lines of (by increasing set width of types and T. Paces proportionately). trenston; Producing justified-lines of increasing set widths of types and T.Peces equally). 5 3
  - typenston; Producing justified-lines of equallype normal, spaces increased
  - Co O)
  - N
  - 8
  - cp OONN HCOL c00* (O . 0,000
  - N
  - N 1 CO
  - o
  - Gn N
  - O
  - No.
  - 364524 T. Lanston ; Type-forme (of lines of justified matter; see 364521, etc.).
  - 364525 T. Lanston ; Type-forming and composing-machine (Monotype).
  - 368757 J. A. Dear; Fastening for printing-plates upon cylindrical surfaces.
  - 369192 G. E. Lloyd and C. S. Partridge; Stereotype-plate finishing machine (for locking-device plates).
  - 369580 T. J. Bickster; Manufacturing printing-plates (relief).
  - 369720 L. K. Johnson; Type-containing channel (see 230784 ; Alden).
  - 370819 G. Rettig ; Type-rubbing machine.
  - 372076 A. A. Low; Type-distributing apparatus (assisting hand ; see 264085 ; Alden).
  - 372186) J. Thorne; Typesetting and distributing 372187J machine (see 232157).
  - 374048 W. W. Evans; Printing-surface (hollow-shell type united to flexible base).
  - 374438 J. H. White; Machine for making stereo-type-matrices (successive impression ; see 304272). 374629 J. H. Reinhardt; Consecutive-numbering machine (serial number and series).
  - 374667 W. Filmer; Clamp for securing stereotype-plates.
  - 374993 W. H. Page ; Producing dies for use in making wood-type (models for pantograph).
  - 375008 G. C. Setchell; Die for making wood-type and method of producing the same.
  - 375360 P. S. Kellogg; Composing-stick.
  - 1888.
  - 375753% A. A. Low; Type-line support (Alden).
  - 376348 F. Schreiner and A. Schott; Matrix for stereotyping (dry-flong).
  - 376541 O. Mergenthaler; Mechanism for electrically-controlling stamping machines, etc. (lino-type matrices).
  - 376743 I. D. Hurlbut; Stereotype casting-box (flat). 376765 H. Barth and E. Lietze; Typecasting and finishing machine (body-slide).
  - 378797 O. Mergenthaler; Machine for forming type-bars (Linotype ; see 317828).
  - 378798 O. Mergenthaler; Machine for producing type-bars (Linotype).
  - 378799 G. Mohr; Apparatus for fitting up matrices (gauge for squaring).
  - 378880 F. Geissel; Type-rubbing machine. 379241 W. H. Nelson; Stereotyping-machine (flat).
  - 379777 W. H. Golding; Machine for cutting printers’ rules.
  - 379778 W. H. Golding; Machine for mitring printers’ rules.
  - 380004 W. H. Welsh; Machine for dressing and grooving type (see 266932).
  - 380558) G. S. Eaton and J. C. Birch ; Type-rubbing 380559/ machinery.
  - 381105 J. M. Black; Numbering-mechanism (for consecutive-numbering and perforating).
  - 381227 C. S. Ellis; Numbering-machine (type-high, using printing-chains).
  - 381802 A. A. Low; Type-containing channel (see 230784 ; Alden).
  - 381820 E. D. Rogers; Means for securing stereo-type-plates which are cast separately from their beds (inclined ribs).
  - 381974 S. K. White ; Numbering-machine (vertically-reciprocating frame).
  - 383221 L. Goss; Machine for planing stereotype-plates (flat).
  - 383959\A. A. Low; Lead- and rule-holder (see 383962/ 356845; Alden).
  - 386783 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-line holder (assisting hand ; Alden).
  - 387007 C. S. Partridge; Stereotype-plate finishing machine (see 369192).
  - 387527 M. G. Merritt; Making wood-type (routed and finished by die-pressing).
  - 387546 J. Thorne; Justifying apparatus (assisting hand).
  - 388032 H. Fietsch, Jr.; Block for locking stereo-type-plates for printing.
  - 388088 J. Thorne; Justifying apparatus (assisting hand).
- p.631 - vue 799/901
- - 632 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1888 {continued).
  - 388307 J. H. Reinhardt; Consecutive-numbering-machine (typographic, platen-operated, quick-change of distinguishing letter, etc.).
  - 388361 J. W. Hoke; Relief-type production (steel plate coated with powder and soluble-glass and baked).
  - 388713 J. G. Pavyer; Printers’ type (side-cores).
  - 389108 J. R. Rogers; Machine for making stereo-type-matrices (line-impression Typograph).
  - 389112 G. C. Setchell; Making wood-type (pressing counters and outline-routing remainder).
  - 389113 G. C. Setchell; Producing dies for making wood-type (see 374993).
  - 389135 G. Bender; Type-metal pot and furnace (flue under metal-duct).
  - 389673 J- Thompson; Stereotype-casting-box (semi-cylindrical).
  - 389715 A. Overend; Stereotype-plate holder (see 252694).
  - 390680 F. Keehn; Typefounding machine (body slide).
  - 390774 L. Goss; Stereotyping (for mailed plates; subdividing illustrations).
  - 391289 F. W. Wicht; Numbering-head (type-high, reducing space occupied, drop-cipher).
  - 391516 E. H. Cottrell; Apparatus for drying matrices and casting stereotypes (flat).
  - 391798 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-distributing apparatus (see 264085 ; Alden).
  - 392188 G. Damon and E. S. Peets; Stereotype-plate (of xylonite or celluloid).
  - 392358 J. B. Odell; Typesetting and distributing indicator (assisting hand-work).
  - 392446 O. Mergenthaler; Matrix-delivering mechanism (Linotype escapement).
  - 392556 J. G. Harris; Method of graining plates for surface-printing (sand and balls).
  - 392710 H. Barth and E. Lietze ; Type-casting and finishing machine (body-slide).
  - 392806 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-distributing apparatus (assisting hand; Alden).
  - 393267 J. R. Risdon; Composing-stick.
  - 393846 O. Mergenthaler; Type-bar (linotype-slug with dressing-ribs).
  - 394255 L. Dow; Type-distributing machine (key-operated).
  - 394346 R. D. De Little; White-letter type (for intaglio-printing from type).
  - 394594 C. T. Murray; Stereotype-finishing machine.
  - 1889.
  - 395435 L. Goss; Stereotype-plate (casting columns joined only at the ends).
  - 395728 F. Wesel; Machine for cutting printers’ rules (also mitring).
  - 395984 A. A. Low ; Lead- and rule-holder for compositors’ use (see 356845).
  - 396478 L. Goss and S. W. Trew ; Machine for trimming, planing, and sawing stereotype-plates (flat).
  - 397003 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low ; Compositors’ type-case (see 230784 ; Alden).
  - 397232 R. B. Hastie; Matrix-impression guard for type-formes (type-high).
  - 398624 W. Koch ; Numbering-machine (consecutive, operated by vertical head-carrying rod).
  - 398852 W. G. Slauson; Stereotype-plate holder (swivel clamps).
  - 399911 F. J. Ludington and H. C. Leland; Composing-stick.
  - 399945 E. L. Tarbox; Moulding typewheels and other curved surfaces (multiple radial moulds).
  - 400000 M. G. Merritt; Making type (struck for typewriters).
  - 400001 M. G. Merritt; Die for trimming type (struck for typewriters).
  - 401738 G. Eastwood; Matrix for stereotype-plates.
  - 402317 H. Freeman; Type-case (assisting hand-justifying).
  - 402537 R. W. Nelson; Typesetting machine (see 232157)-
  - 402720 F. M. F. Cazin ; Producing matrices (tissue-paper facing).
  - 402850) W. H. Page and G. C. Setchell; Die for 402851J forming wood-type (by impression).
  - No. 402852
  - 402863
  - 403075
  - 404564
  - W. H. Page; Die for forming wood-type ( V impression). .
  - G. C. Setchell; Die for forming wood-tyP (see 402850). ,
  - W. Rennyson; Typewriting and mat-making machine (impression-device). £ F. Schreiner and A. Schott; Matrix
  - stereotyping (flat; see 376348).
  - 405273 G. D. Rogers; Typesetting and distributi 6 machine. nd
  - 405419 H. Klemm ; Typecasting mould (casting an delivering mortised type). .
  - 405662 J. R. Cummings and G. E. Lloyd; Storing typer’s sawing, trimming and groovi 5 machine (flat plates). 0.
  - 406371 E. D. Rogers; Means for securing sterom type-plates which are cast separately their beds (flat; longitudinal flanges):
  - 406398 J. G. Harris; Apparatus for grain-p printing-plates.
  - 406828 H. Fietsch, Jr.; Block for stereotype'., electrotype-plates (with holes for eccent headed stop pins). e
  - 406862 F. D. Thomason; Stereotype-plate and • (with spring sides and dovetails). line 407608 C. S. Partridge; Matrix-making mace (mechanically-operated beating-brush).ted 407670 E. A. Leland; Elastic-faced type (vulcant fibre). . for
  - 408195 A. D. Rood; Type (with raised points both perforating and printing).
  - 409518 V. Sperle ; Composing-stick. tus 409690 A. A. Low; Type-distributing appar (assisting hand).
  - 409748 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-nd; tributing apparatus (assisting ha
  - Alden). . (for
  - 409920 J. R. Carter; Paper-numbering machine." of simultaneously-numbering both sides strip). live-
  - 4106 73 J. Phillips; Apparatus for the consecuver-numbering of cheques, tickets, etc.
  - depression). with
  - 410714 J. C. Merritt; Stereotype-block (flat, side securing plates). Aereo-
  - 410830 J. F. Frey; Backing compound for st type-matrices. tope-
  - 410923 D. Reid; Means for securing sterecs). plates (dovetail-strips screwed to base for 410958 C. H. Davids; Numbering-device (gear
  - — releasing and re-engaging). Matrix” 411883 G. H. Benedict and P. M. Furlong; Mapes; plate clamp (for curved electrotype
  - Chicago Matrix Machine Co.). chine 412001 J. H. Rogers; Paper-perforating to (multiple-perforations corresponding characters). occes-
  - 412299 C. Sears ; Making stereotype-moulds (su see sive impressions in end-grain wood, 412489 W. A. Force and W. W. Sawyer; Conseo tive-numbering machine (hand-stamPlican 412606 L. Dow; Typesetting machine (Ame
  - Typesetter Co.). . „,606)-412714 L. Dow ; Typesetting machine (see 4‘tvpe-413042 A. J. Engelen ; Machine for making -[‘jo-bars (successive impressions of int 5 matrices on wood). .chine
  - 413087 J. G. Pavyer; Type-making me (pivotal). e for
  - 413522 W. A. Kelsey and R. Atwater; Machi cutting and mitring printers’ rules, slide). 413550 11. Popp ; Typecasting machine (body-414254 W. H. Price, Jr.; Composing-stick. 414399. G. A. Goodson; Matrix-making machine. 414400, ’ die: 414401 G. A. Goodson; Matrix-making mace (for 414402 G. A. Goodson; Clutch-mechanism successive-impression machine). . (b) 414521 G. A. Goodson; Forming matrice successive impressions). . chine 414636 G. A. Goodson; Matrix-making m
  - die. verting
  - 414637 G. A. Goodson; Device for COBive in” motion (electro-magnetic for success!
  - pressions). .high,
  - 414664 F. W. Wicht; Numbering-head (tyP6
  - plunger-operated). Ite for
  - 415615 J. I. C. Clarke; Interchangeable stereotype-formes (semi-cylindrical)-
- p.632 - vue 800/901
- - AMERICAN PATENTS.
  - O 8
  - No. 1889 (continued).
  - 415821 W. Scott; Machine for bending stereotype-= plates.
  - 4 568 E. 0. Chase; Machine for shaving printers’ . leads.
  - 4 716 J.R.Cummings ; Stereotype-plate separating, trimming and grooving machine (for flat . plates).
  - 1717 J. R. Cummings; Stereotype-casting .apparatus (flat).
  - C. L. Redfield; Type-die for matrix-making (for successive impressions; Chicago A Matrix Machine Co.).
  - C. L. Redfield ; Impression-device for matrix-making machines (for successive impres-, sions).
  - 4 0742 C. L. Redfield; Circuit-closing device for matrix-making machines (for successive
  - 4164 impressions). .
  - '43 C. L. Redfield; Escapement-device for matrix-making machines (for successive - impressions).
  - 1 0744 C. L. Redfield; Feed-device for matrix-making machines (for successive impres-412 - sions).
  - 57 T. J. Lumis; Typesetting machine (see
  - 4 232157)
  - 17074 EM Nelson; Type-distributing machine
  - 417142 B. A. Brooks; Preparation of printing-surfaces (logotypes formed by impression and justified with ordinary or automatic 418 T spring-spaces).
  - 92 J. Manning; Machine for bevelling stereo-418. - type- and electrotype-plates (flat).
  - 95 C. L. Redfield; Variable-feed mechanism for matrix-making machines (for successive 4185 T impressions).
  - 3 J. B. Odell; Typesetting machine (electri-41866, „cally operated).
  - 4 W. Dreyer; Electro-magnetic typesetting machine.
  - No. 427682
  - 427685
  - 427716
  - 427717
  - 427803
  - 427947
  - G. A. Goodson, A. S. Capehart, and C. L. Travis; Forming matrices for stereotype-plates (successive impression).
  - J. Gustafson; Typesetting machine (Lager-man Typotheter).
  - C. L. Travis; Producing type-dies for impression machines.
  - C. L. Travis; Matrix-machine (successive impressions of a small character to produce a large one, for advertisments).
  - F. Schreiner and A. Schott; Stereotyping-matrix (flong).
  - G. G. Allen; Typesetting and printing machine (sets, prints, and distributes the
  - C.Redfield ; Type-die holder for matrix-making machines (successive impressions). 428906 J. Gustafson; Typesetting apparatus (Lagerman Typotheter).
  - 428138
  - 42973Z)C. L. Redfield; Impression-device for matrix-429739) making machines (successive impressions). 429740 C. L. Redfield; Matrix-making machine
  - 429741
  - 429742
  - 429754
  - (successive impressions).
  - C. L. Redfield; Justifying-index for matrix-machines (successive impressions).
  - C. L. Redfield ; Impression device for matrixmaking machines (successive impressions).
  - J. W. Chadwick; Typesetting machine (Lagerman Typotheter).
  - C. L. Redfield; Forming matrices (successive
  - 429864-.----- impressions).
  - 429865) C. L. Redfield ; Type-die for matrix-making 429866, machines (successive impressions).
  - 429867 C. L. Redfield ; Forming matrices (successive impressions).
  - 430007 L. Dow and D. Powers; Type-distributing machine (key-board; see 394255).
  - F. Wicks; Typecasting machine (Rotary).
  - J. C. Parmerlee; Engraving-machine (for reproduction on plates coated with friable material for the production of stereo-
  - 430051
  - 430542
  - Oh co 1 O +H O 10 H 1 O 1. 00O H *O I CI Q OF
  - 1890.
  - G. E. Lloyd: Stereotype-shaving machine (plane).
  - A. M. White ; Composing-stick.
  - D. Reid ; Key for securing stereotype-plates (to their bases).
  - J -Gustafson ; Typesetting machine. (Lager-man Typotheter ; see 362751.)
  - B. Hill; Type-holder for rubber-type.
  - —K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-dis-42104 e tributing machine (see 363836 ; Alden).
  - C. L. Redfield ; Impression-device for matrix-4221, a making machines (successive impressions).
  - * + P. Craven; Typesetting machine (loose-4233,, r type setter).
  - 2 L. S. Mack and B. Woodward; Stereotype-42340, .plate holder (clip). . ,
  - tW;R. Wilson ; Machine for washing printers 42368a type-formes. .
  - 423680 % W. J. Howell; Apparatus for producing
  - 9) indented type-impressions (successive in 42408- matrix).
  - 5 —White ; Means for inserting movable-type in stereotype-plates.
  - H. w. Taylor and C. W. Welman; Relief-type. (engraving plate with soft friable 4231a ~ coating).
  - 4° O Mergenthaler; Machine for producing 425580 r type-bars (linotype-slugs ; see 317828).
  - J. H. Reinhardt; Consecutive-numbering 42558, t head (type-high, platen operated).
  - J. H. Reinhardt; Consecutive-numbering machine (type-high, alters designating-wetter and repeats).
  - H. E. G. Kohl; Plate-holder for mechanical printing (rotatable grid for half-tones).
  - J. T. Hawkins; Means for securing flexible 427365) Printing-plates.
  - 4273667 - Kobischung ; Means for holding printing-42768o c plates, on cylindrical or flat surfaces.
  - • A. Goodson; Attachment for type-writing machines (for impression-matrix 42768, cmaking).
  - • A. Goodson; Electro-matrix machine (successive impression).
  - co 00
  - O
  - (O
  - &
  - O
  - N CO &
  - 430624
  - 430630
  - 431280
  - 432407
  - 432627
  - 433030
  - types).
  - R. Clay and J. E. Marchant; Feed-appliance for typesetting machines (see 362751, but continuous running; Typotheter).
  - J. T. Denvir; Stereotype-plate locking-device.
  - J. B. Odell; Machine for perforating strips for use in automatic-typesetting apparatus (May and Jones).
  - C. E. Hopkins; Machine for sawing stereo-type-plates.
  - A. J. Kletzker; Matrix-making machine (successive impressions).
  - G. P. Prescott; Typesetting machine (loose-
  - 433232
  - 433448
  - 433449
  - 434880
  - 434881
  - 434942
  - 435344
  - 435564
  - 435753
  - 435777
  - 436028
  - 436039
  - 436109
  - 436314
  - 436372
  - 436379
  - 436531
  - type).
  - J. Brooks; Fastening for printing-plates upon cylindric surfaces (bands).
  - J. R. Cummings; Clamping-device for stereotypers’ casting-boxes (plane).
  - J. R. Cummings; Stereotypers' casting apparatus (box, plane).
  - J. B. Odell; Recording-telegraph.
  - J. B. Odell; Printing-telegraph (electrically-controlled typewheels).
  - J. B. Odell; Typesetting machine (loose-type setter).
  - F. M. F. Cazin; Matrix-making machine (successive impressions).
  - L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-distributing apparatus (for type dropped into receivers or conduits; Alden).
  - M. Joyce; Stereotype-block (cored cellular).
  - R. H. St. John ; Type-bar (St. John Typo-bar).
  - S. D. Tucker; Stereotype-plate holder (clip).
  - L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-distributing apparatus.
  - C. Spielmann ; Consecutive-numbering machine (hand-stamp; see 412489).
  - J. W. Osborne; Making matrices papier mache stereotype).
  - C. T. Murray; Stereotyping-apparatus (matrix drying-press and metal-pot).
  - I L. Quanchi; Making matrices for stereotyping purposes (also drying).
  - : O. Mergenthaler; Machine for forming type-bars (linotype-slugs; see 317828).
- p.633 - vue 801/901
- - 634
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1890 (continued).
  - 436532 O. Mergenthaler; Machine for producing linotype-slugs, type-matrices, etc. (see 317828).
  - 436614 M. Schwertfuhrer; Locking-device for printing-plates (clamp).
  - 436703 G. A. Goodson; Matrix-making machine (successive impressions ; see 414399).
  - 436740 J. B. Odell; Printing-telegraphs (electrically controlled typewheels).
  - 436925 C. Ostermann ; Adjustable drying-frame for matrices or moulds for stereotypes (cold process).
  - 437139 J- R. Rogers; Typograph (Rogers Typo-graph slug-caster; see 389108).
  - 437141 F. E. Bright; Typograph (Rogers Typo-graph slug-caster; see 389108).
  - 437374 G. H. Benedict; Mechanism for casting stereotypes (to interlock with bases).
  - 438354 O. Mergenthaler; Linotype-machine (melting-pot and mould-wheel).
  - 439334 G. W. Weaver; Stereotype-plate and base (detachable for mailing).
  - 439446 W. P. Uhlinger ; Governing-device for numbering-machines (hand-stamp for successive repetitions).
  - 440086 E. Wright; Typewriting and matrix-making machine (impression-device).
  - 441118 C. L. Redfield; Matrix-making machine (successive impressions).
  - 441340 T. A. Thorsen; Stereotype casting-box (cylindrical).
  - 441475 W. B. Fish ; Composing-stick.
  - 441564 M. Howard ; Matrix-making machine (successive impressions).
  - 441750 P. P. Craven; Type-distributing machine (corresponding to key-depressions).
  - 442341 J. H. Stonemetz ; Stereotype-plate casting-box (cylindrical).
  - 442363 J. R. Cummings; Stereotype-casting apparatus (box, plane).
  - 442364 R. J. Cummings; Stereotype-plate and device for locking (by means of grooved rule).
  - 442515 J. R. Cummings; Stereotype-casting apparatus (box, plane).
  - 442551 R. H. St. John; Type-bar machine (Typobar).
  - 443085 G. Corsa; Type-making mechanism (linotype-slugs, using wedge-spaces).
  - 443086 G. Corsa; Forme-setting and typecasting machine (slug-caster).
  - 443517 H. C. Hadstateand S. J. Martin ; Numbering-machine (for cylinder-press printing duplicate sales-slips).
  - 443656 C. E. Strong and H. G. Lange; Stereotype-casting machine (plane with ribs).
  - 443662 H. G. Lange; Stereotype-casting machine (plane).
  - R11056 J. A. Dear; Orig. No. 368757; Fastening for printing-plates upon cylindrical surfaces.
  - R11091 J. R. Carter; Orig. No. 409920; Paper-numbering machine.
  - 1891.
  - 444090 W. S. Scudder; Machine for casting linotype-slugs (curved for cylinders).
  - 444124? G. Calder, Jr.; Matrix-making machine 4441255 (successive impressions).
  - 444294 P. T. Dodge; Type-composing mechanism (Linotype matrix-delivery).
  - 444337 P. T. Dodge; Mechanism for justifying matrices, type, etc. (Linotype).
  - 444949 H. Dalziel; Backing-block for stereotype-plates.
  - 445040 G. Calder, Jr.; Matrix-making machine (successive impressions).
  - 445559 F. A. Johnson and W. E. Crane; Machine for producing printing-surfaces (impression-device).
  - 445702 A. A. Low; Type-containing channel (see 230784).
  - 446235 J. Patten ; Type-distributing machine (automatic).
  - 446695 H. Schimansky and L. Passelt; Frame for holding stereotype-moulds (matrices).
  - No. 446738
  - 446930
  - 447124
  - 447134
  - 447135
  - 447321
  - 447449
  - 448587
  - 448735
  - 448994
  - 449039
  - 449062
  - 449872 450083
  - 450665
  - 450783
  - 451276
  - 451625 453257
  - 453343
  - 453584
  - 453699
  - 453962 454063
  - 454066
  - 454774
  - 454862 455070
  - 455732
  - E. A. Henkle and J. C. Fowler; Apparates for the manufacture of curved linotzion bars (for cylinders, reading in direct of the length). . im-
  - C. Sears; Stereotype-mould (successive pressions in wood). for
  - A. B. Adams ; Type-distributing holder 1 hand-distribution). . or
  - H. Lee and E. Lebrun; Matrix-making typesetting machine (successive imp sions). iting
  - H. Lee; Matrix-making or typesetii machine (successive impressions).
  - T. C. Hargrave; Electric matrix-man machine (successive impressions).
  - T. C. Hargrave; Matrix-making mac-(successive impressions). . for
  - C. L. Redfield; Escapement-device im-matrix-making machines (successive pressions ; see 436703). mpe-
  - E. C. Standiford and S. A. Hyers; Tpe). setting or composing machine (loose-tytine C. L. Redfield; Matrix-making mac (successive impressions). ider
  - H. Fietsch, Jr.; Stereotype-plate no (clamp). . Lord-
  - A. F. Allen; Typefounder’s matrix ( and soft-metal).
  - P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine. (for
  - T. Mitchell and J. Milne; Type-mould 1 double-ended type). Sber-
  - J. J. Finke ; Detachable-holder for ru faced type and type for the same. Chine
  - T. J. A. Macdonald; Numbering-®® S 0f (for consecutive numbers on both s® sales-slips).
  - T. I. Knight and L. Quanchi; Stereoti casting machine.
  - N. E. Smith ; Type-frame for chases. po-
  - J. Gustafson; Typesetting machine V3
  - the ter ; see 427685). or
  - T. Mangan; Stereotype backing-powo filling for matrices. — _dis-
  - L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; TVPden). tributing apparatus (into channels; filing-
  - S. H. Hoggson; Type-belt (for ( machines, etc.).
  - J. O. Clephane ; Linotype machine. (en-
  - J. C. Parmerlee; Engraving machttereo-graving in wax-covered plate for typing). king
  - C. L. Redfield; Type-die for matrix-® machines (successive impressions). .-^;
  - C. Schraubstadter, Jr., and C. R. SCDiectro-Engraving machine (engraving e types, stereo-casts, etc.). . 4
  - B. Godwin ; Printers’ type (for scrPOhoned
  - A. T. Thayer; Printers’ furniture CT corners). . Aline”
  - S. C. Beckwith and W. W. Street; chines ment-bar for matrix-making me
  - (successive impressions). +pe)-
  - 456014 T. S. Buck ; Type-holder (for rubberlating* 456502 W. MacKay; Bed for metallic PT plates. the
  - 456873 J. M. Williamson; Type and holder same. (hand
  - 456874 E. G. Bates; Numbering-machine beat): stamp, consecutive, duplicate or rep (with 457182 R. Clarke; Portable type-distributo compartments for spaces and leadsaratus 457481 J. B. Odell; Type-distributing aPPa (automatic). „ bbins
  - 457575 J. C. Birch and C. Dancel; Type-machinery. makios
  - 457752 W. W. Street; Electrical matrix machine (successive impressions), machine
  - 457829 O. F. Teed; Type-distributing " (automatic). , castin
  - 4 57896 J. R. Cummings; Stereotypers apparatus (metal-pot and ladle). e-casti 457897 J. R. Cummings; StereotyP apparatus (type-high bases). .heatilb 458050 H. C. Hansen ; Typecasting machine 1
  - nipple). r
  - 458314 J. O. Clephane; Linotype machine. 10 458531 W. B. Fish; Method of and mac
  - making printers’ rules. T Rose:
  - 459825 C. Carlton, J. E. Caps and W. J
  - Stereotype-plate holder (clamp)-
- p.634 - vue 802/901
- - AMERICAN PATENTS.
  - 635
  - No.
  - 460035
  - 461141
  - 461186
  - 6 o Co A G) (D CO O
  - 1891 (continued).
  - C. Schraubstadter, Jr., and C. R. Schilling; Lead-cutter.
  - W. B. Lewis; Stereotype-casting box.
  - J. H. Reinhardt; Hand numbering-machine (hand-stamp, consecutive, duplicate, or triplicate).
  - R. Hammer; Consecutive-numbering
  - - machine (hand-stamp).
  - E. A. Henkle and J. C. Fowler; Curved linotype-bar (for cylinder, reading in 461408 - direction of the length).
  - - . F. Geary; Consecutive-numbering head 46256, • (type-high; see 318803). 7 °4 B. Harris, Jr. ; Stereotype-plate and base
  - 46— , with locking-device (groove and rod).
  - 900 A. T. Thayer; Printers’ furniture (with 463,0% - guide-bars type-high).
  - - . A. Johnson; Matrix-making and stereo-typing machine (Tachytype; successive 463, - impressions).
  - 3427 T. MacKellar; Metallic slug (lead, tin, anti-
  - 46, - mony and copper with aluminium).
  - 4 3 J. L. McMillan; Type-distributor (see 46445- e 347627). . .
  - 47 C. Joslyn; Type-distributing machine 4653-6 (see 347627).
  - 2 — Benson ; Device for locking up type in 4653- - galleys or chases (screw clamp). ST J. R. Cummings; Combined stereotype-plate trimming, bevelling and shaving machine.
  - J. R. Cummings; Delivery-mechanism for stereotype-plate trimming, grooving, and , shaving machines.
  - J. R. Cummings; Machine for trimming, I shaving, and grooving stereotype-plates.
  - C. Leland; Type-distributor (automatic r by special nicks).
  - E. P. Mickel; Stereotype-plate and base 4658. - retaining grooves). 465846 - M. Gage ; Matrix-board (stereotype-flong).
  - 7° J. L. McMillan ; Typesetting machine (loose-4658-- - type; see 347626).
  - 7 J. L. McMillan; Type-justifying machine RI10 - (loose-type).
  - 9 J. R. Rogers; Orig. No. 389108; Machine for making stereotype-matrices (Rogers Typograph).
  - O Ul N
  - O NN 1 CO CO col 1 1 1 09
  - t N H (O CO010 00 OAR 28 2929
  - 1892.
  - € S. Partridge ; Stereotype-box (for casting), t. T. Dodge; Typecasting machine (lino-- type melting-pot).
  - — Dow and D. Powers; Type-distributing wmachine (see 394255)-
  - V: A. Lorenz; Type-justifying apparatus (Thorne).
  - A. Lorenz; Type-arranger (for loose-1 type ; Thorne).
  - — J. Andrews ; Typesetting and distributing
  - 4676. - machine (Thorne).
  - 4 - J. Lumis; Typesetting and distributing 4680-8 - machine (see 232157 ; Thorne). .
  - -J. Lumis; Belt-driving mechanism (for
  - 468504 vThorne typesetter).. , 4685-J A E. Lyon; Composing-stick. ., ..
  - . - J. Lumis; Typesetting and distributing
  - 468973) machine (see 232157; Thorne).
  - 468974 LC. L. Redfield; Matrix-making machine (by
  - 468975) successive impressions; see 429742)-
  - 976 C. L. Redfield; Type-die (for successive 469108 - impression machine).
  - 9 J. F. Reinhardt; Consecutive-numbering 4706.0 - machine (type-high platen-operated).
  - 49 JC. Fowler; Spacer for type-matrices 47143, t (spring ; for successive impression machine) .
  - P: Reid; Device for mounting and locking interchangeable stereotype- and electro-type-plates to their bases (keying):
  - • T Clause; Machine for trimming seg-T mental cylindrical stereotype-formes.
  - J. G. Pavyer; Typecasting and dressing machine (see 413087).
  - E. Cunmiugs; Stereotype-casting ap-Poratus (matrix).
  - E Cummings; Stereotype-plate and base docking columns).
  - 471601 T type-plates t
  - J. J. Clause;
  - co to
  - O
  - 472473 T machine (see 413
  - S *- Cummings;
  - 472474 T Poratus <mat ‘ ‘
  - 4 Cummin,
  - No.
  - 472475
  - 472966
  - 473271
  - 473405
  - 473691
  - 474306
  - 474809
  - 474964
  - 475517
  - J. R. Cummings; Stereotypers’ casting apparatus.
  - M. Georgii; Means for justifying matrices (rotating helical-faced space-matrix halves).
  - J. R. Topliss and J. A. Kay; Machine for nicking printing-type (for distributing).
  - R. W. Nelson ; Typesetting and distributing machine (see 232157).
  - G. A. Botton; Typesetting machine (loose-type).
  - J. W. Schuckers; Mechanism for justifying composed-lines of type (see 222642).
  - G. Calder, Jr.; Matrix-making machine (by successive impressions; see 445040).
  - W. Mitchell; Electrically-heated matrix press.
  - H. S. Popp; Typecasting machine (movable body-slide).
  - 475804l c. Sears ; Matrix-making machine (successive impressions).
  - 475804)
  - 475805 (
  - 475806)
  - 123805‘C. Sears; Matrix-making machine type-writing-attachment (successive impres
  - 477008
  - 477009 477591
  - 478241
  - sions).
  - L. K. Johnson; Slug for type-containing channels.
  - L. K. Johnson ; Type-distributing apparatus.
  - H. Fietsch, Jr. ; Block for stereotypes, etc.
  - 478333
  - 478340
  - 478749
  - 479539
  - 479772
  - (clamp).
  - C. H. Shaw; Numbering-machine (hand-stamp; soft-type fitted to wheels).
  - 4782577 G. A. Goodson; Matrix-making machine (by 478258 successive impressions).
  - F. A. Johnson; Matrix-material (successive impression ; Tachytype).
  - A. Lagerman; Type-justifying apparatus (Typotheter)..
  - S. H. Horgan; Printing-plate and block (base).
  - C. L. Travis; Matrix-making machine (successive impressions).
  - G. A. Goodson and A. S. Capehart; Matrix-making machine (by successive impres
  - 479773
  - 480350
  - 480361
  - sions).
  - G. A. Goodson ; Matrix-making machine (by successive impressions ; see 414399).
  - W. W. Street and C. L. Travis; Justifying-attachment for matrix-making machines (successive impression).
  - S. C. Beckwith and W. W. Street; Matrix-making machine (by successive impres-sions).
  - W. W. Hastings and F. D. Foster; Type-setting machine (Typotheter).
  - G. D. Morse and M. Chase; Type-plate and
  - 480497
  - 480933
  - blank for the same. i .
  - 481286 L. K. Scotford; Type-holder (for rubber-type).
  - C. L. Redfield; Forming matrices (impres
  - 481308 <
  - 481760
  - 481920 .
  - 482784
  - 483023
  - 483252
  - 483544
  - 483716
  - 484082
  - 484135
  - 484389
  - 484390
  - sions).
  - T. K. Hinshillwood; Typecasting machine (movable body-slide).
  - J. C. Fowler; Machine for producing type-bars (linotype-slugs).
  - A. Coleman; Type (stereotype to replace wood-letter).
  - J. Slocum; Typograph attachment (Rogers
  - Typograph).
  - T. T. Heath and A. N. Verdin ; Typographic machine (successive impression).
  - J. R. Cummings ; Stereotype-plate and base.
  - W. A. Force; Composition for stereotype-plates.
  - M. Bennitt; Stereotype-plate and holder
  - 484391
  - 484514
  - 484588
  - (keying).
  - A. T. Brown; Type-making machine (auto-matically produced from wire).
  - E. G. Bates; Consecutive-numbering machine (type-high).
  - E. G. Bates; Machine for consecutively-numbering cheques, bonds, etc., in sheets (arrangement of numbers on wheels ; see - 484389).
  - E. G. Bates ; Consecutive-numbering machine (type-high, wheels close together, drop-cipher).
  - J. K. Bittenbender; Composing-stick.
  - F. Hainsworth; Printing-plate holder (clamp).
  - T. M. Kenney; Type-finishing machine.
  - 484915
- p.635 - vue 803/901
- - 636
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1892 (continued).
  - 485655 L. Ransom and A. W. Maynes; Type-line-forming machine (successive impression).
  - 485702 A. J. Kletzker and J. G. Goesel; Matrix-making machine (by successive impressions).
  - 486160 W. Filmer; Clamp for securing stereotype-plates.
  - 486240 A. Thomson; Stereotype-plate and holder (keying).
  - 486572 W. H. Steele; Printing-plate and making the same (matrix).
  - 488265 J. Hooker ; Typesetting machinery (see Brit, pat. 477/1874).
  - 488577 F. Sanders; Consecutive-numbering head (type-high ; see 391289).
  - 1893.
  - 489011 M. Joyce; Matrix and method of using matrices (for stereotyping).
  - 489449 E. G. Bates; Numbering-machine (hand-stamp for yardage-tags).
  - 489503 C. Sears; Linotype-making machine (from impression matrices in a cold mould).
  - 489834 H. C. and S. D. Snoddy; Typesetting machine (loose-type, temporary spaces, automatic justification).
  - 490263 E. V. Beals; Matrix-making machine (impression).
  - 490739 I. McK. Chase; Type-bar (linotype-slug with compressible space-connections for-justifying).
  - 492147 G. A. Davis; Matrix-drying machine (cylindrical for stereotyping).
  - 492164 J. A. Kay; Typesetting machinery (loose-type setter).
  - 493270 J. Hooker; Type-distributing machinery (automatic by thickness and nicks; see Brit. pat. of W. H. Mitchel 155/1857, type nicked for distributing).
  - 493448 A. V. Ruckmich; Typesetting machine (Lagerman-Chad wick).
  - 494564 J. I. Haynes; Typesetting machine (loose-type).
  - 494572 L. K. Johnson; Typesetting apparatus (Alden).
  - 494573 L. K. Johnson; Typesetting apparatus (setting composed combinations with spaces).
  - 494899 W. S. Scudder; Space-bar for line-casting machines (Monoline).
  - 495588 J. Hooker; Indicator-mechanism for typesetting machines (for length of line, electrical).
  - 495667 H. Dunning; Manufacturing types for printing and stamping, and type made by such process (in gelatinous material).
  - 495703 J. G. Pavyer; Type-machine (discharging and dressing).
  - 495704 J. G. Pavyer; Typecasting machine (discharging and dressing, uses compressed air).
  - 495705 J. G. Pavyer; Type-machine mould (discharging).
  - 495835 C. L. Redfield; Matrix-making machine (impressions made successively).
  - 496373 C. L. Travis; Matrix-making machine (impression ; see 414399).
  - 497729 F. Sanders ; Numbering-machine (one or more adjustable heads platen-operated from the side).
  - 497914 A. C. Ferguson; Phototype machine (arranging characters, photographing and transferring).
  - 498127 M. Levy ; Screen for making photomechanical printing-plates (half-tones).
  - 498248 T. T. Eckert and S. Bergmann; Mould for the formation of (soft-rubber) typewheels.
  - 498396 W. Kurtz; Photomechanical printing; consists of producing half-tone negatives by subjecting the sensitized plates to one exposure through screens provided with parallel lines running in one direction only, and others in which the lines run in different directions respectively; producing printing-plates from these halftone negatives; printing in different colours from the printing-plates.
  - 498425 J. C. Fowler; Spacer for type-matti (compressible for impression machine):Ices 498426 J. C. Fowler; Spacer for type-mat (compressible for impression machine), ting 499278 W. Berri; Matrix and matrix-assempi mechanism (Polygonal). iting
  - 499506 W. W. and J. M. Bishop; Typesetii machine (loose-type). A on 4995°7 W. W. Bishop; Type (bifurcated to se rules or rails). , by
  - 499546 A. A. Hill; Composing-stick (supportegg), body to leave both hands free for settei 499911 T. T. Eckert and G. B. Scott; Typewe (soft-rubber). , or
  - 500317 L. F. Campi; Machine for engraving sinking dies, matrices, or other object Tels 500801 F. Ecaubert; Die for making type"11 (by rolling in brass, etc.).
  - 501297 C. L. Redfield; Type-die for matrix-ma (impression ; see 416740). +).
  - 501358 S. H. Nesbit ; Type-holder (for dating, etine 501597 O. S. Bowman; Type-distributing mac (hand-operated). , Jing 501934 W. Grothe; Adjustable typefoun apparatus (hand-mould). iig-503324 A. J. Kletzker and J. G. Goesel; -2). making machine (impression ; see red 503950 G. Eastwood; Stereotyping (partially on), flong raised after receiving the impress
  - 505200 J. Hooker; Indicator-mechanism for V setting machinery. Line 506198 W. S. Scudder; Line-casting mac (Monoline). .cans
  - 506349 A. L. Thomas; Drying matrices and m
  - for so doing (stereotypes). tised
  - 507258 F. H. Bultman ; Type-mould (for mor
  - or cored type). metal 507275 W. Kemp, Jr.; Type-matrix (sott " inserted in a hard body). (for 507431 A. Gray; Printing-plate bending-Preskace). making to conform to cylindrical sunt sard 507485 W. B. Carr and A. G. French ; Matrix-D (for stereotyping). (for 507610 C. C. Bruckner; Engraving machine 1 relief or intaglio). . ores-508186 C. Sears; Justifying matrix-lines (17 508248 C. Sears; Matrix-making machine (impre
  - 509075
  - sion ; see 475804). 1ctro” H. Fietsch ; Base for stereotype- or ele
  - type-plates (clamping). eating
  - 509860 E. V. Beals; Apparatus for perton im-strips for actuating type-rings (for pression-matrices). . for
  - 510032 V. F. Lake and I. Risley; Machine im-justifying matrix-pages (produced
  - pression-de vices). . igee 510288 H. S. Popp; Typecasting machine 1 413550). . for
  - 510305 J. A. Watson; Justifying-mechanism ion-matrix-making machines (for impres devices). . tope-
  - 510853 J. C. Fowler; Machine for producing ions; bars (linotype-slugs from impress
  - 481920). high,
  - 510912 C. A. Haney; Numbering-head (type" platen-operated). —ming R11316C. L. Redfield; Orig. No. 429864 ; for
  - matrices (impression). ce-die R11335 C. L. Redfield ; Orig. No. 416740; 1Xon). for matrix-making machines (impress lief-R11363 J. W. Hoke; Orig. No. 388361; K type production (friable coating). 2525;
  - R11393 O. Mergenthaler; Orig. No 345‘and Machine for producing type-baEsation matrices for the same object (just e). of impression; see 313224; LinotyP 1
  - 512215 W. E. Post and S. J. Nevins; Matam-moulding and drying-apparatus heated mangle-press).
  - 512447 A. E. Newby; Holder-plate for tyP posters and labels). es of
  - 512924 J. Vierling; Binder or tie-up for Pad type. and
  - 513007 G. A. Dubeux ; Curved linotype-slus der-holder (dovetailed and tapered for cyn press).
- p.636 - vue 804/901
- - AMERICAN PATENTS.
  - 637
  - occo on er ov O . O 1NT HV 00O0 V N HO 2001.212 1 1 10 1 1-1 1
  - co on co or or O0 O 00 00
  - ON O
  - 1894 (continued).
  - A. Kayser; Stereotype-block trimming-apparatus (to make type-high).
  - C. Skatulla; Space-bar for line-casting machines (Monoline).
  - F.Sanders ; Numbering-machine (type-high, improvements).
  - A. Stall; Linotype machine.
  - E. T. Wheed; Printing-plate holder (sec-tional with clamps).
  - Lee; Matrix-making and typesetting machine (impression).
  - — K. Johnson; Typesetting apparatus (Alden).
  - H. Heinebach; Typecasting machine (for type-relief at one end and intaglio at
  - On o
  - co co
  - O U1
  - O O
  - N 0
  - O A L CO—1 1 0000 10 1
  - co CO He
  - 00H 00 O T000 1. 00000 0:
  - OVOHA NC NONNA NO 110 10 12 1 U
  - other).
  - H. A. Chase; Engraving machine (for
  - Printing-stamps and numbering-machines).
  - C: F. Hilder ; Type-distributing apparatus.
  - M. Gillam; Art of and apparatus for colouring the printing-surface of cast type (to stop glitter of linotype-slugs).
  - E and A. E. Hall; Matrix-drying machine (cylindrical).
  - C. Spielmann ; Consecutive-numbering machine (hand-stamp, consecutive, dupli-cate or repeat).
  - K. J. Sachers; Manufacture of printing-plates (hard and soft metals).
  - — Werner; Typographic machine (im-Pression-de vice).
  - — Werner; Typographic machine and attachment (impression-device).
  - —Forth and H. Glenzer; Mechanism for justifying matrix-lines (at two spaces only p instead of equably).
  - 1. Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - t. W. Libbey; Typograph (impression-5203IT c device).
  - 520465 w *. Hilder; Typesetting machine.
  - 3 We Weatherby; Device for removing leads 520642 r from type (uses an elastic base).
  - T. H. Healey; Matrix-drying apparatus 520968 K (stereotype). •Sanders; Numbering-machine (multiple-heads; modified plunger for cylinder and p rotary presses).
  - Sanders; Numbering-machine (multiple-
  - E heads operated by single plunger).
  - W. Wicht; Numbering-machine (type-T high, automatically-repeating series).
  - J l. Reinhardt ; Numbering-machine (type-T high).
  - J. H. Reinhardt; Numbering-machine (type-high with drop-cipher).
  - J • L. McMillan ; Method of and machine 0 for justifying type.
  - . • mergenthaler ; Linotype machine.
  - 5255*) f ‘ K' Johnson and A. A. Low; Typesetting 5232E6J apparatus (Alden Type Machine Co.).
  - 523255L - -
  - 523301 I ' H. Ziegler ; Typecasting machine.
  - 523740) - .
  - 523741c . Johnson; Typesetting apparatus 523742) Alden). 550 LL. K. Johnson and A. A. Low ; Typesetting 523765) “Pparatus (Alden Type Machine Co.). ° T. B. Caswell; Perforating strips for type-setting machines (for type-, matrix-, and 524099 woesetting and distributing).
  - • H. Welsh; Typecasting machine (casts 524285 O sumber of type simultaneously).
  - 524602 E’ V. Sigurdsson ; Linotype machine.
  - 524693 F Prauner—- * *
  - 525754 C Praunei
  - TcONH OVN 850 2 owoo N 10 112
  - inegger; Typesetting machine.
  - r unegger; Type-distributing machine.
  - —. V. Weaver; Type (imitation of type-writer stipple).
  - —K. Johnson ; Type-distributing machine (Empire).
  - "box Egan; Stereotyping-press (casting-A. Foucher j Typefounding machine (duplex-caster; see 359779).
  - T A. Stewart; Type-holder for rubber-type.
  - •> J. G., and M. 0. Rehfuss; Type-dressing machine.
  - No.
  - 527702 O. Mergenthaler ; Linotype machine.
  - 528308 L. K. Scotford; Method of and apparatus for making (matrices for) rubber-type.
  - 528660 F. B. Emery; Printers’ metal-furniture (with slots for curved lines).
  - 528855) P. F. Cox ; Typesetting machine (Cox type-5288565 setter).
  - 528857 P. F. Cox; Apparatus for automatically-justifying type (Cox typesetter).
  - 529205 C. Skatulla; Machine for producing cast type-bars (Monoline).
  - 529440 A. S. Capehart; Matrix-bar and making same (Monoline).
  - 529446) L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low ; Typesetting
  - 529447 5 apparatus (Alden Type Machine Co.).
  - 529497 L. K. Johnson; Typesetting apparatus (Alden).
  - 530279 M. Lane; Matrix-making machine (typewriting and impression-matrix making).
  - 530371 A. G. Wade; Printing-plate and base. 530428 J. A. Keyes; Composing-stick. 530479 G. A. Goodson; Apparatus for casting molten material (electrically heating connecting-tube between pump and mould; Goodson Typecaster and setter).
  - 530481 G. A. Goodson; Typecasting and setting machine (Goodson Typecaster and setter). 530931 P. T. Dodge ; Linotype machine. 531069 L. K. Scotford ; Machine for cutting rubber-type (for addressographs).
  - 531266 O. Mergenthaler; Composing-mechanism for Linotype machines.
  - 53153I C. F. Hilder; Type-distributing apparatus. 531586 T. G. and H. Daw; Machine for producing stereotype-matrices and typewriting (impression-device).
  - 1895.
  - 531786 P. T. Dodge ; Linotype machine.
  - 532368 J. C. Fowler; Typecasting and setting machine (Fowler composer).
  - 532680 W. Merl; Engraving machine (pantograph for stamps, plates, etc.).
  - 533285 J. C. Fowler; Machine for producing type-bars (Fowler composer).
  - 533346 C. M. Busch ; Linotype-slug for tabular work (slots in character-slugs).
  - 533389 J. C. Fowler; Type-distributing mechanism (Fowler composer).
  - 533848 F. A. Johnson; Typecasting and composing machine (Tachytype).
  - 534439 L. K. Johnson; Type-containing channel (Alden).
  - 534550 P. F. Cox; Typesetting and justifying machine (Cox typesetter).
  - 534917 J. R. Rogers ; Machine for making printing-surfaces (slug, or impression, Rogers Typo-graph).
  - 535III L. K. Johnson; Type-distributing machine carrier (Alden).
  - 535498 W. E. Hoole ; Numbering and paging machine (lever operated).
  - 536149 F. A. Johnson; Manufacture of controllers for composing-machines (Tachytype).
  - 536448 E. P. Teal; Numbering-machine (releasing and driving number-disks).
  - 537183 W. Bucher; Stereotyping-machine (casting-box).
  - 537668 R. A. Berger; Type-distributor for line-casting machines (either matrix-composing, or impression).
  - ( 537905 C. Sears and F. Miller; Matrix-making machine (impression machine).
  - 538094 C. P. Woodruff; Linotype machine. j 538100 P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - | 538123 P. L. Ripsom ; Linotype machine.
  - 538133 C. Skatulla; Linotype machine.
  - 538176 O. Mergenthaler; Means for justifying type-matrices and type (Linotype).
  - 538902 J. A. Erkson ; Linotype machine.
  - 539221 L. Grossman; Printing-plate (securing halftones in stereotype-plates).
  - 1 539253 A. C. Ferguson; Matrix-making and stereotyping.
  - 539544 J. H. Reinhardt; Engraving machine (pantograph for dies and stamps).
  - 539716 F. Wicks; Type-composing machine (helically grooved races).
- p.637 - vue 805/901
- - 638
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1895 (continued).
  - 539946) L. K. Johnson; Typesetting apparatus
  - 539948 J (Alden Type Machine Co.). 5329491 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low ; Typesetting ( apparatus (Alden Type Machine Co.).
  - 539983 P. T. Dodge; Type-justifying mechanism (Linotype; stepped space-matrices).
  - 539984) to > P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - 539986 )
  - 539992 L. F. Mather; Leading-mechanism for linotype machines.
  - 539993 0. Mergenthaler ; Linotype machine.
  - 539994 C. Muehleisen ; Method and means for justifying type (Linotype; two-part wedge-space).
  - 540000 J. Place; Separable matrix (preventing damage in assembling; Linotype).
  - 540001 J. Place ; Separable matrix (Linotype matrix with one strike on each side).
  - 540002 J. Place; Matrix and expanding spacer for linotype machines.
  - 540055 C. F. Hilder; Apparatus for packing type into receptacles (for loose-type setting).
  - 540656 G. F. Giesecke ; Type-finishing machine.
  - 540743 W. Kemp, Jr.; Typecasting and setting machine.
  - 5 40895 O. Bartusch; Numbering-machine (hand-stamp, consecutive, duplicate, or repeat).
  - 540914 A. S. Hoge; Typesetting machine (loose-type).
  - 540915 A. S. Hoge; Type-distributing machine (loose-type).
  - 541161 T. C. Hargrave; Matrix-making machine (impression machine).
  - 541180 J. H. Reinhardt and F. Sanders; Numbering-machine for successive numbers on strip-tickets.
  - 541182 F. Sanders; Numbering-machine (hand-stamp).
  - 541217 F. Q. Stuart; Typesetting machine (loose-type).
  - 541353 A. W. Hanigan; Spacer for line-casting machines (Monoline).
  - 541445 J. Rupertus; Machine for making stereotype-matrices (impression-device).
  - 541758 L. K. Johnson; Type-distributing machine (Alden Type Machine Co.).
  - 542140 L. A. Brott and G. A. Kay; Composite type-bar and making same (casting a connection between recessed-type forming a justified line).
  - 542224 H. Lee and E. Lebrun; Matrix-making and printing-bar-casting machine (slug-caster).
  - 542358 J. R. Carter; Numbering-machine (disk-wheels for duplicate and triplicate slips).
  - 542368 F. Meisel; Numbering-machine (for consecutively numbering both sides of sales-slips).
  - 542847 G. Eastwood; Manufacture of flongs for producing matrices for stereotyping.
  - 543272 C. Skatulla ; Type and matrix (Linotype).
  - 543497 O. Mergenthaler; Linotype machine.
  - 544317 W. S. Marder; Typecasting machine (American Type Founders Co.).
  - 544958 L. E. Chapin ; Stereotype-plate holder (back or base).
  - 545530 A. D. Pentz ; Linotype machine. 545568 L. B. Benton ; Type (combination-fractions ; superiors and inferiors each with part diagonal-stroke).
  - 545635 C. F. Moore ; Type-holder (for rubber-type). 545697 F. A. Johnson; Machine for making controllers for composing-machines (Tachy-type).
  - 546054 A. D. Pentz; Linotype machine. 546382 T. F. Geary and W. E. Bracewell; Numbering-machine (for use with rotary-press).
  - 546503 H. Barth; Typecasting machine (casting distribution-nicks).
  - 546542 J. G. Kingsbury; Engraving machine (engraving figures on counting-wheels).
  - 546610 J. C. Fowler; Type-distributing rail (Fowler composer).
  - 547392 W. H. Cox ; Automatic type-distributor and holder (logotypes).
  - 547448 F. Peterhansl; Unleading-machine for linotype matter.
  - No.
  - 547633 P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine. ,and
  - 547859 J. W. Paige; Typesetting, distributing filed justifying machine. [Application ets), Dec. 5, 1882 133 Drawings (31 1
  - 28 pages subject-matter and 130 clain and 547860 J. W. Paige ; Type-distributing, setting filed justifying machine. [Application “ts), Aug. 19, 1887. 471 drawings (163 sheej 5 "pages subject-matter and 146 clatmatic 547861 J. W. Paige and C. R. North; Autation type-justifying machine. [Applic_ (81 filed Feb. 14, 1893. 242 drawing 172 sheets), 64 pages subject-matter and claims.] . o nine
  - 548045 C. R. Ferguson; Typesetting me (Linotype). type-
  - 548320 V. Lowendahl; Manufacture of stereo.) plates.
  - 548432 P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine.. Land-548654 J. M. Padgett; Numbering-machine A stamp for sheets of coupons). Land-548802 W. A. Force; Numbering-machine ( stamp). .(for 549146 B. S. Molyneux; Engraving machin punches, matrices, etc.). (for 549147 B. S. Molyneux; Engraving machin punches, matrices, etc.). . for 550137 J. H. Richards; Brush and machin removing fins or burrs from type.
  - 550263 F. W. Feldman ; Composing-stick. Loring-550482 L. Carr and G. Southey ; Rotary num machine (to work with rotary-press) (Cos 550553 P. F. Cox; Type-distributing machin typesetter). . .type-550554 P. F. Cox; Ejecting-mechanism for setters (Cox typesetter). otter). 550555 P. F. Cox ; Type-distributor (Cox types Holder 551037 A. W. Marshall; Stereotype-plate (back or base). . . having 551071 J. C. Breuer ; Stereotype-casting and" machine. - etting 5513847 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low ; Types 551385/ apparatus (Alden Type Machine Co .con’ 551386 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; 1XP taining channel (Alden). holder 551387 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type (Alden). .clip)-
  - 551457 E. D. Tucker; Printing-plate holder and 551469 H. Lee and E. Lebrun; Matrix-making typesetting machine. hanis! 551981 O. Mergenthaier; Linotype and me for producing same.
  - 1090. ettio 552745 V. Calendoli; Simultaneous type machine (single letter or groups), textile
  - 552800 W. Wells; Impression stamp for materials. . (line
  - 552830 J. C. Fowler; Line-casting machin casting or indenting). vable
  - 553312 J. W. Osborne; Surface-treatment of m in type (for preventing adhesion a 1 pression). ivota
  - 553575 G. H. Ziegler; Typecasting machine — straight-presentation). cession”
  - 553909 T. T. Heath and A. N. Verdin; ImP
  - device. priction”
  - 553983 T. T. Heath and A. N. Verdin; -clutch (for cut-out). . profilin
  - 553984 T. T. Heath and A. N. Verdin; type): machine (for cutting punches and cartie
  - 553985 T. T. Heath and A. N. Verdin.; TXPSion). 1. for typographic machines (impres Tablet
  - 553986 T. T. Heath and A. N. Verdin ; (in holder for typographic machu pression). . matt
  - 553987 T. T.Heath; Ratchet-movement (for feed for impression machine). vultiple.
  - 553988 T. T. Heath and A. N. Verdin; "type 0 profiling machine (for cutting 3 punches). bon-co"
  - 554405 J. West; Typecasting pump (car 4 position lining). efractO
  - 554406 J. West; Typecasting pump • lining).
  - 554770 J. Burger; Linotype machine.
  - 554790) J. W. Phelps; Linotype machine.
  - 55479- )
- p.638 - vue 806/901
- - AMERICAN
  - PATENTS.
  - 639
  - or O 1 N000 —H O H000 —0 1 Ch 1000 ,2 v-10 1 NT 4 1 1 1D) 1 111 10 un 1 1 1 1 1
  - NO H 00 co • v HNr 20 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 10
  - CUU CLgUU Co 2— U A 0
  - 1896 (continued).
  - Smith; Linotype machine.
  - H. W. Libbey; Typograph (impression on celluloid).
  - G. W. Sherer; Type line-justifier (thin r pliable spaces).
  - *. Peterhansl; Linotype machine.
  - A. Larkin; Linotype machine. Mergenthaler; Linotype machine.
  - M. H. Whittaker; Means for facilitating alterations in printing-surfaces (changing r curved plates).
  - - E. Bright; Typograph (Linotype).
  - J. R. Rogers ; Typograph (impression-device).
  - W. Berri ; Space-bar for typesetting machines (compressible for Linotype).
  - W. Berri; Matrix and matrix-distributing mechanism (for matrices of different .lengths).
  - 4. I. Sundstrom; Mergenthaler Linotype machine.
  - -. Lanston; Machine for making justified slines of type.
  - W. Berri; Typecasting-device (mould-line composed of individual independent E separate moulds).
  - - Meisel and H. Fischer ; Rotary numbering-machine (multiple repetitions on paper-strip).
  - 2. Mergenthaler; Linotype machine.
  - C . C. Keller; Adjustable stereotype-plate
  - 1 o
  - co
  - 1
  - Son O Co C-L 08
  - 559201 e holder (clamp).
  - 5508, SF. Hilder; Type line-justifying machine.
  - 42 W. Spencer; Machine for engraving brass 56000- - or other rules, bars, or similar articles.
  - ° C. Holliwell; Knife for trimming type,
  - 56030- - Printing-bars, etc. (Linotype).
  - 560420 X’ M. Conley ; Stereotype-casting apparatus.
  - 560539 SA Albrecht; Linotype machine.
  - 56088, W. H. Randall; Linotype machine.
  - 561063 #. A. W. Wood ; setting stereotype-matrices.
  - 3 V., J. A. Rey; Type-preparing machine I (nicking for distributing).
  - . Sanders; Numbering-machine (high 5610,6 - speed, for rotary-press).
  - 4 JH. Reinhardt; Numbering-head (type-561903 T high with drop-cipher).
  - 33 — K. Johnson and A. A. Low ; Typesetting 562028 - apparatus (Alden).
  - — K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-56200) -transferring apparatus (Alden).
  - 562080 I — K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-con-56208, ) taining channel (Aldaml
  - CO 00 1
  - onU on co 06 O00
  - NN D.NSN Not 00O CI O 0.00 C HO OUN
  - d-1 co 1* » O ' 8.2
  - 10 1 ( O
  - VT 1. O
  - CO 00 O O N
  - 00* + -
  - (00 (O (O
  - 10 1 1 1 1
  - 88 2 6 On N N A
  - O Or on -C * CO CO P DP y 2 1 1 1 1 10
  - . JV1IDU1 ariu H. H. LOW ; -Pe-ou
  - ‘ taining channel (Alden).
  - — Johnson and A. A. Low ; Typesetting apparatus (Alden).
  - — Johnson and A. A. Low ; Typesetting
  - - case (Alden).
  - — K. Johnson and A. A. Low ; Typesetting - apparatus (Alden).
  - N. H. Whittaker; Means for trimming c linotype-bars.
  - X- Allen ; Linotype machine.
  - ftE Alexander; Mould for casting lines of 562816. C. Forth: Matrix-assembling and distri-56.224 c buting machine (Forth Graphotype).
  - C Forth; Linotype-casting machine.
  - P. Bertram and E. Sanders; Linotype ~ machine.
  - Mergenthaler; Linotype machine.
  - C- Muehleisen ; Linotype machine.
  - S. H., and P. E. Hodgkin; Typesetting or • composing-machine.
  - S. H. and P. E. Hodgkin; Typesetting , machine (Pulsometer).
  - A. Patch; Printing-plate and producing same, (of paper similar to stereotype-a matrix but in relief).
  - X C. Keller ; Stereotype-plate holder (clamp). A.B. Adair; Letter for linotype-slugs (two-line letter, half in each of two p matrices).
  - -- Dodge; Type-justifying mechanism p. Linotype),
  - p° - Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - T. Dodge; Linotype machine spacing-o device (step-by-step change of set width).
  - —Mergenthaler ; Type-justifying mechanism o Linotype).
  - * Mergenthaler; Linotype machine.
  - No.
  - 565485 O. Mergenthaler and C. Muehleisen; Lino-type machine.
  - 565486) to O. Mergenthaler; Linotype machine.
  - 565488 )
  - 565489 O. Mergenthaler ; Type-justifying mechanism (Linotype).
  - 565490 O. Mergenthaler; Linotype machine.
  - 565514 W. S. Scudder; Type and means for justi-fying same (wedge-space).
  - 565515 W. S. Scudder; Linotype machine (justi-fying).
  - 565661 I. Baas, Jr.; Type-mould (pivotal).
  - 565749 C. F. Hilder; Type-justifying mechanism (elastic-space).
  - 565820 F. Wicks; Type-moulding machine (rotary caster).
  - 567212 E. J. Andrews ; Typesetting and distributing machine (Thorne).
  - 567252 R. J. Moxley; Type-distributing machine (Empire).
  - 567256 J. Sachs; Electric typesetting machine.
  - 567926 O. C. Strecker; Producing relief-plates for printing (typographic etching).
  - 569337 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Typesetting apparatus (Alden).
  - 569876 W. Kemp, Jr.; Type-matrix (soft metal inserted and struck in a hard block).
  - 570098 L. K. Johnson, and A. A. Low; Typesetting appliance (Alden).
  - 571487 C. de Leon ; Numbering-machine (numbering-disks).
  - 571625 J. Seide; Type-binder.
  - 571809 A. W. Storm; Automatic-justifier (for Lino-type).
  - 572050 A. Dow; Type-distributor.
  - 572673 A. T. Brown; Type-making machine (swaging characters on pointed blocks).
  - 572705 C. D. Hughes; Type-distributing machine (Empire).
  - 572947 G. A. Bates; Linotype machine.
  - 572974 B. L. Fairchild; Means for justifying type (by wedge-surfaces).
  - 573175 O. Bartusch; Numbering-head (type-high, removable case).
  - 573199 W. Berri; Matrices and apparatus for dis-tributing same.
  - 573383 P. T. Balls; Linotype machine knife-attach-ment (two-line letter).
  - 1897. 574935 O. M. Peterson; Machine for setting and distributing type and producing impres-sions therefrom (impression-matrix).
  - 574936 O. M. Peterson and C. C. Hill; Machine for setting and distributing type and pro-ducing impressions therefrom (impression-matrix).
  - 576027 W. C. Chase ; Machine for removing fin from type (from slugs).
  - 576397 P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine. 576409 J. MacKirdy; Linotype machine.
  - 576414 J. Place; Linotype machine moulding-mechanism.
  - 576584 T. H. Keller; Linotype-trimmer.
  - 576731 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Typesetting appliance (Alden).
  - 576971 W. E. Taylor; Matrix-cleaning machine (for Linotype matrices).
  - 578065 H. F. Meistrell ; Linotype machine trimming-attachment.
  - 578216 P. F. Cox; Type-distributing machine (Cox typesetter).
  - 578278 L. C. Timroth; Matrix (flong for stereo-typing).
  - 578414 R. J. Moxley ; Typesetting machine (Empire typesetter).
  - 578527 L. K. Scotford; Blank for making sponge-rubber-type bases (for hand-stamps).
  - 578544 W. F. Capitain, L. W. Klute and G. F. Wells; Type-mould (pivotal,two cylindrical wires, central piece removed by knife).
  - 578713 J. B. Bell; Typesetting machine (impression-device).
  - 578828 J. L. McMillan; Type-holder (using two metal bands).
  - 579044 B. F. Curtis and D. E. Titsworth; Stereo-type-making machine.
- p.639 - vue 807/901
- - 640
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1897 (continued).
  - 579292 A. S. Capehart; Matrix-bar or plate (Mono-line).
  - 579293 A. S. Capehart; Type-line-casting machine.
  - 579541 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Typesetting apparatus (Alden).
  - 579863 B. K. Davis; Type-galley (for proof taking).
  - 580125 G. S. Eaton; Type-finishing machine (for rubbing).
  - 580144 G. A. Pickup and W. A. Moore; Making matrices (for rubber-type).
  - 581046 C. S. Sultzer and H. E. Shedd; Stereotype-plate holder (clamp).
  - 581382 J. West; Typefounders’ pump (mica-packing for stuffing-box).
  - 581954 P. F. Cox; Typesetting machine (Cox typesetter).
  - 582743 C. D. Hughes; Type-distributing machine (Empire).
  - 582778 B. F. Curtis; Printing-plate (central-rib keying in groove in bases).
  - 582801 A. Wirsching; Apparatus for casting type-wheels (rubber-face on metal centre for printing-telegraphs).
  - 582833 L. W. Southgate; Method and apparatus for forming and drying stereotype-matrices.
  - 583090 W. Scott; Stereotype-casting apparatus (for curved plates).
  - 583224 W. J. Ennisson and W. H. Honiss ; Type-justifying machine (Thorne typesetter).
  - 583360 P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - 583478.L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Typesetting
  - 583480) aPPliance (Alden).
  - 583637 W. Scott; Stereotype-plate cutting apparatus.
  - 583686 I. Kitsee ; Stereotyping (use of celluloid).
  - 584360 F. A. Johnson; Making controllers for composing-machines (Tachytype).
  - 584361) F. A. Johnson; Typesetting machine 584362 5 (Johnson typesetter).
  - 584363 F. A. Johnson; Linotype machine (Tachy-type).
  - 584364 F. A. Johnson; Matrix-making machine (Tachytype).
  - 584365 F. A. Johnson ; Typecasting and composing machine (Tachytype).
  - 584366 F. A. Johnson; Machine for making controllers for composing machines (Tachytype).
  - 584551 J. Jacobson; Matrix and producing same (relief effect by photography).
  - 584664 J. B. Bell; Printers’ lead-cutter (for leads and linotype-slugs).
  - 585234 C. Sears; Matrix-making machine.
  - 5862371 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low ; Typesetting
  - 586287 5 apparatus (Alden).
  - 586337 D. S. Kennedy; Linotype machine (Linotype).
  - 587816 T. T. Heath ; Typographic machine (making matrix by impression).
  - 587913 E. G. Bates; Numbering-machine (vertical slide).
  - 588087 I. Risley; Machine for justifying typographic impressions.
  - 588770 W. Lyon; Linotype-distributing tool.
  - 588996 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-fount (Alden).
  - 589470 T. T. Heath; Matrix (use of ridged backing when striking).
  - 589636 C. J. Botz; Typesetting and line-casting machine.
  - 590177 J. G. Weaver; Preparing onyx-marble for use in relief-printing.
  - 590763 T. Lanston; Machine for preparing perforated record-strips of type-forming machines (Monotype).
  - 591073 P. F. Cox ; Test-plate cleaner for type-distributing machines (Cox typesetter).
  - 591422 C. Pieper; Bed-block for stereotype-plates.
  - 591430 J. J. C. Smith; Process of and apparatus for casting printing-type (hard-bronze type).
  - 591777 C. Sears; Machine for making type-bars.
  - 591814 A. S. Capehart; Side-box matrix-bar for line-casting machines (Monoline).
  - 591914 C. W. Dickinson; Typesetting machine (Empire typesetter).
  - 591947 A. S. Capehart; Matrix for line-casting machines (Monoline).
  - 591948 A. S. Capehart; Matrix-bar and da* same (Monoline). .
  - 592743 C. W. Bowron; Type-justifying machin • e
  - 592813 C. T. Murray; Curved stereotyped finishing machine. n.
  - 593667) L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-c
  - 593668 5 taining channel (Alden).
  - 595079 W. S. Scudder; Method of and meansling making matrix-bars for line-cas ° machines (Monoline).
  - 596340 C. Sears ; Type-bar-casting machine.
  - 596489 596598
  - 1898.
  - G. S. Eaton ; Type-finishing machinery- g L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Typesett apparatus (Alden). ting
  - 596739 T. B. Caswell; Mechanism for operalted type-setting, or other machines (perfora
  - 597544
  - co O
  - 598622
  - 599390
  - 600292
  - controller).
  - R. J. Moxley; Device for lifting foshes hooks of type-distributing macht (Empire), line
  - B. F. Bellows; Type-bar-making mact (Electric compositor). :m
  - B. F. Bellows; Justifying-mechan
  - (Electric compositor). uing
  - L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Typeset
  - apparatus (Alden).
  - F. H. Pierpont; Apparatus for facility delineation of outlines of type-faces, e '
  - P. F. Cox ; Typesetting machine (Cox 7)5 setter). jsti-
  - E. B. Converse, Jr. ; Typesetting and J fying machine. sting
  - 602327 S. H. and P. E. Hodgkin; Typesett
  - 601498
  - tO 0
  - 0 V
  - 602439
  - 602904
  - W.
  - 603879
  - 604123
  - 604149
  - 604305
  - machine (Pulsometer). sing
  - T. Friese-Greene; Means for comPoohic characters and producing photogreP negatives therefrom.
  - F. A. Hill and W. E. Shehan;
  - Linotype
  - machine attachment. atus
  - B. F. Jackson; Matrix-drying appar (stereotyping).
  - B. Ring and B. W. Stickney;
  - Renewin
  - matrices (Linotype). . ting-
  - J. T. Hawkins ; Means for securing prin thin plates to cylindrical surfaces (by metal strips). . 1ads,
  - P. F. Cox; Machine for discarding latter spaces, and quads from dead m
  - (Cox typesetter). .
  - L. Fisher and E. W. Reynolds; Lino 3 machine. for
  - G. E. Lincoln; Linotype and matrix making same. . plate
  - 604472 S. H. Horgan; Composite printing'F
  - 604378
  - 604404
  - 604635
  - 605141
  - 605618
  - and making same.
  - J. G. Pavyer; Typecasting apparatus.
  - W. S. Scudder; Monoline compo machine. . . type-
  - E. Wentscher; Justifying-device pro-setting, or other machines (changing f
  - visional spaces).
  - P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine. acting 605777 T. Cahill; Linotype machine, line-c machine, and machine for making )
  - 605701
  - 605894
  - 605954
  - 605955
  - bars, linotype-slugs, and matrices. 1
  - C. T. Murray; Stereotype-plate (curve a for
  - G. A. Goodson; Composing-machenapho typecasting and setting machines (G1 -type). j setting
  - G. A. Goodson; Typecasting and 5
  - machine (Graphotype). Sating
  - 605956 G. A. Goodson; Controller for typec and setting machines (Graphotype)- ace
  - 605957 G. A. Goodson; Differential letteapho* register for composing-machines (G
  - type). for
  - G. A. Goodson; Composing-macre-apho* typecasting and setting machines (Gr type). .
  - T. H. Keller; Linotype machine. locke.
  - M. Gally ; Machine for making swagry such type-bars and product produced D) machine. ratus
  - 606657 M. Gally; Swaged type-bars and apP for constructing same. _ —empire) 606678 R. J. Moxley ; Typesetting machine (5
  - O O O O
  - 606168
  - 606656
- p.640 - vue 808/901
- - AMERICAN PATENTS.
  - 641
  - No. 1898 (continued).
  - 606765 J. S. Ogden; Manufacture of rubber-faced
  - 60- typewheels (for printing-telegraphs).
  - ' 45 F. A. Johnson; Typesetting and justifying
  - 602. K - machine (Johnson typesetter).
  - 7 46 F. A. Johnson; Type-justifying machine
  - 604 , (Johnson typesetter).
  - /047 F. A. Johnson; Typesetting and justifying
  - 60-5=0 r machine (Johnson typesetter).
  - G. W. Mascord; Linotype machine slug-
  - 608. - cutting mechanism.
  - 02 F. McClintock; Type-justifying machine 608664 r (Empire).
  - & Muehleisen; Linotype machine.
  - C. Muehleisen; Linotype machine line-608 - closing attachment.
  - 997 P. H. McGrath; Typesetting and justifying 6000. machine (Johnson typesetter).
  - 3 97 G. A. Goodson; Composing-machine, paper-609008 r controlled (Graphotype). . y 90 G. A. Goodson; Typecasting and setting 60931= umachine (Graphotype).
  - Wynne; Linotype machine knife-attach-
  - 600 ment.
  - 9453 R. J. Moxley; Type-distributing machine (Empire).
  - G. A. Bates ; Linotype machine.
  - 609770 w. A’ Bates; Linotype machine.
  - 6-9°03 E. Girod ; Linotype machine mould.
  - 6T0228 T. H- Catherall ; Linotype machine.
  - 23 M. Gally ; Type-making machine (impression by swaging from blanks for use with type-610 bars).
  - 6-0454 C. Muehleisen ; Linotype machine.
  - 2010 W. Berri; Machine for casting justifying-spaces, and justifying lines of type (126
  - 6 Figs.)
  - *3064 W. A. Force; Flexible sheet for rubber stereotype-bases.
  - 24 H. R. Rogers; Proof-taking and type-bar casting machine. .
  - G. W. Turner and A. F. W. Leslie; Composite printing-plate and apparatus for making same.
  - C. L. Ireland; Metallic matrix for Linotype
  - &
  - CO CO 0
  - or
  - 8.
  - o «
  - 6138, - machines.
  - 3T F. J. Wich; Interchangeable ejector-blade 6142, 0 for Linotype and analogous machines. 614259 Mergenthaler; Linotype machine.
  - 614530 T ' Mergenthaler ; Linotype machine.
  - 6112-9 J. D. Chalfant; Type-justifying machine.
  - C. L. Ireland and F. J. Wich; Linotype 614=6- machine vice-jaw. .
  - W. J. Lewis, H. Pearce and C. Holliwell; 61456. .Linotype machine justifying-mechanism.
  - W. H. Lock and J. Place ; Linotype machine 61458. - moulding-mechanism. 20V. Sigurdsson; Ejector-blade for Linotype 614=00 or analogous machines.
  - 61458L J‘ Wich and C- L- Ireland; Linotype 61459machine trimming-mechanism.
  - F. J. Wich; Linotype machine trimming-61460, r mechanism.
  - 6146= S A. Bates; Linotype machine knife.
  - 09 E F. Linke; Indexing-device for typesetting machines (Thorne).
  - — F. Linke; Lead-extracting device for V1466- t type-distributing machines (Thorne).
  - 61466- E F. Linke ; Type-channel follower (Thorne).
  - 1 02 E. F. Linke and G. L. Willey; Type-61476, .separating machine (Thorne).
  - 1 P. Ritzema; Linotype composing-6148= machine.
  - 15 N. Dedrick ; Engraving machine (for punches 6152. —or matrices).
  - 615549 W. Berri; Type-comb (of finished type).
  - Schimansky; Manufacturing matrix-61590g T sheets (stereotyping).
  - 61656) r 0 Rogers; Linotype machine. f — Sears; Method of and means for making matrices (in end-fibres of wooden blocks).
  - O to 0 to
  - 2 O
  - 2
  - 617052 W. 1899. € A sawyer; Numbering-machine (hand-08044 P stamp with number rings).
  - 6 de Podge ; Linotype machine (impression-
  - 308 F I TT
  - linotypesMechanism for casting curved
  - No.
  - | 618348 J. D. Harvey; Linotype or line-casting machine.
  - 618463 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Typesetting apparatus (Alden Type Machine Co.).
  - A. A. Low; Type-distributing apparatus.
  - G. A. Bates; Linotype machine mould.
  - L. B. Pendleton; Mould (Linotype).
  - F. B. Reed; Linotype machine.
  - C. R. Murray; Serpentine or crimped type-
  - 618475 618554
  - 618582
  - 618618
  - 618800
  - 618926
  - 619392 619393
  - 619441 619875 620133
  - 620183
  - 620230
  - 620288
  - 620289
  - 620381
  - 620804
  - 620890
  - 621329
  - 622989
  - 623014
  - 623075
  - 624454
  - space.
  - F. Wicks; Typefounding apparatus (Rotary caster).
  - W. S. Coe ; Linotype machine.
  - W. S. Coe; Linotype machine.
  - J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - P. T. Dodge ; Linotype machine.
  - S. H. Horgan; Method of and apparatus for securing engraved plates to stereotypes (soldering).
  - I. Risley and V. F. Lake; Typographic machine (impression ; see 588087).
  - B. F. Curtis; Stereotype-casting box.
  - A. E. Dowell; Linotype-slugs and making same.
  - A. E. Dowell; Means for forming type-line bars (from lines of individual type partially melted together).
  - W. C. Trownsell and J. R. Trego; Linotype machine attachment.
  - J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine (Linotype).
  - B. F. Curtis; Stereotypeplate trimming and finishing machine.
  - H. J. Derbyshire; Line-casting machine (Linotype).
  - W. E. Bertram; Monoline type-composing and casting machine.
  - A. W. Hanigan and G. H. Yardley; Linecasting machine space-bar (Monoline).
  - J. N. Chamberlain; Mechanism for feeding and melting metal (Linotype).
  - . L. M. Chapman and J. M. Gelatt; Linotype machine.
  - 624764 J. S. Duncan ; Machine for making printing-plates (Addressograph).
  - H. E. Reeves ; Type-tie (mechanical tightening of tape substituted for string).
  - W. A. Lorenz; Type-making machine galley-
  - O0O NDN Or 00 2 o+T
  - 625412
  - 625445
  - 625666
  - 625679
  - 625931
  - mechanism (Monotype).
  - E. S. Bradford; Fastening-device for securing printing-plates to cylinders (clamp).
  - C. W. Pashley; Ball and socket joint (for engraving machine ; Linotype).
  - J. D. Harvey; Linotype mould-adjuster.
  - P. M. Furlong; Composite printing-plate and producing same.
  - C. A. Hollenbeck and R. F. Wilson; Type-forming-machine attachment (for Lino-type).
  - L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Typesetting
  - 625972
  - apparatus.
  - C-3972 E. Girod; Linotype or analogous machine.
  - 625998 J. S. Bancroft; Typecasting and composing machine (Monotype).
  - I. Risley ; Typographic machine (impression ;
  - 626097
  - 626098
  - 626758
  - 626914
  - 627160
  - 628250
  - 628442
  - 628620
  - 628631
  - 629423
  - 629459
  - 629751
  - 630112
  - see 588087).
  - I. Risley and V. F. Lake; Typographic machine (impression ; see 588087).
  - C. D. Hughes; Typesetting apparatus.
  - E. F. Linke; Type-justifying apparatus (Thorne).
  - E. Van der Wee; Machine for locating and stamping matrix-bars (Monoline).
  - S. and M. Maybell; Instantaneous printing-plate holder (clamp).
  - C. J. Botz; Type-case (for receiving distributed type).
  - J. S. Bancroft and W. H. Wood; Machine for perforating strips for type-machines.
  - C. Meray-Horvath ; Typecasting and composing machine.
  - W. H. Caps; Stereotype-plate (coring for ribs).
  - B. Nadall and M. Barr; Metal-pot mechanism for casting machines (Linotype).
  - C. R. Murray; Typecasting machine (body-slide ; see 359779).
  - J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine; (arranging sorts-matrices in front of operator; Lino-type).
  - 2 T
- p.641 - vue 809/901
- - 642
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1899 (continued).
  - 630396 B. Nadall; Linotype machine.
  - 630412 J. R. Rogers; Mechanism for assembling and distributing type-dies.
  - 630772 C. J. Botz ; Typesetting apparatus.
  - 630831 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-containing channel (Alden).
  - 630832 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Typesetting apparatus.
  - 630917 E. C. McFarland ; Type-mould (pivotal).
  - 631062 P. F. Cox; Multispace (for justifying).
  - 631989 A. Greenleaf; Linotype machine.
  - 632484 E. V. Beals; Printing-type (relates to 490263).
  - 633088 T. Lanston; Typecasting and composing machine (Monotype).
  - 633190 A. S. Gilman; Distributor or assorter for linotyping or typesetting machines.
  - 633309 C. W. Dickinson; Type-justifying and spacing machine (Empire).
  - 634214 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-containing channel (Alden).
  - 634536 C. Muehleisen; Linotype machine.
  - 634715 E. V. Beals and W. B. Norton; Matrix-making machine (stereotyping).
  - 635305 H. J. Derbyshire ; Linotype-casting machine.
  - 635640 G. A. Bates; Linotype and mould.
  - 635649 B. A. Brooks; Printing-apparatus (producing a matrix by impression).
  - 635651 A. L. Campfield; Printing-type (projecting bead to interlock with nick).
  - 635830 F. J. Wich ; Linotype machine trimmingmechanism.
  - 635866 F. McClintock; Type-justifying machine (Empire).
  - 635997 F. C. Dolby; Mechanism for releasing spacebars of Linotype machines (Linotype).
  - 635998 R. C. Elliott; Magazine for Linotype or analogous machines.
  - 636001 C. L. Ireland; Linotype machine, trimmingmechanism.
  - 636378 G. P. Conant; Mould for casting solid type-wheels.
  - 636390 W. Reid and F. Hess; Linotype machine.
  - 636504 J. S. Duncan; Printing-plate (Addresso-graph).
  - 636622 D. Z. Borne and J. Frey; Typecasting machine.
  - 636686 C. A. Nelson; Apparatus for straightening Linotype matrix-dies.
  - 636911 O. Mergenthaler; Automatic milling-machine (for Linotype matrices).
  - 636912 O. Mergenthaler ; Machine for straightening metal stock (for Linotype matrices).
  - 636913 O. Mergenthaler; Punching press (for striking Linotype matrices).
  - 636915 O. Mergenthaler ; Automatic milling-machine (for Linotype matrices).
  - 636916 O. Mergenthaler ; Stamping press (for Linotype matrices).
  - 636917) O. Mergenthaler; Automatic milling-
  - 636918) machine (for Linotype matrices).
  - 637009 C. Muehleisen; Apparatus for locally hardening pieces of metal (for Linotype matrices).
  - 637086 J. D. C. Chateau; Composing-machine. (Type-bar machine ; see 552745.)
  - 637109 S. S. Haddad; Types for typewriters or printing-presses (Arabic).
  - 637117 C. Holliwell and W. J. Lewis; Linotype-machine mould.
  - 637858 A. Dow; Typesetting apparatus. 638176 J. S. Duncan ; Machine for making printing-plates (Addressograph).
  - 638866 F. C. Damm; Linotype machine.
  - 638868 E. Girod; Mechanism for moving Linotype-machine moulds.
  - 639077 H. F. Meistrell; Linotype-machine ejector. 639244) L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low ; Typesetting
  - 639245 5 apparatus.
  - 639379 A. R. Guest and E. T. Richmond ; Type for Arabic characters (of uniform set width for type-writing, etc.).
  - 639908 W. W. Sawyer; Numbering-machine (hand-stamp, consecutive, duplicate, or repeat).
  - 640033 $ J‘ R‘ R°8ers > Linotype machine. 640119 R. C. Elliott; Composing-machine (Linotype, using single key to bring down a combination in the correct order).
  - No. 1900.
  - 640274 F. B. Converse, Jr. ; Typesetting machindi 640678 J. D. Lyon; Spacing instrument (for W‘ of letters). Alices
  - 640805 J. W. Phoebus; Making stereotype-matr (dry process). for
  - 640867 F. E. Bright; Matrix-bar for machines making type-bars for printing graph). cling
  - 641296) L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low ; Typeset 641297 § apparatus. sting
  - 641298 L. K. Johnson, and A. A. Low; Typeset mechanism.
  - 641310 A. A. Low; Typesetting apparatus. key-641875 F. McClintock; Typesetting machine * mechanism. . (im-
  - 642263 C. Sears; Matrix-making machine 1 pression machine). . tified
  - 642264 C. Sears; Apparatus for preparing justiris-lines of type-matrices or justified ma lines (impression in wood block). pe-642335 L. K. Johnson; Type-follower for 7)7 containing channels. (for
  - 642389 F. M. Turek; Numbering-machine 1 rotary-press, for sales-slips). and 642441 H. J. S. Gilbert-Stringer; Typecasting composing apparatus (Quadrant). ting-643274 J. Place; Linotype-machine cas mechanism. Ape).
  - 643289 D. A. Hensley; Linotype machine (Linotype 643292 C. Holliwell and R. C. Elliott; Linopy machine.
  - 643329 J. MacKirdy ; Linotype machine. 643473 P. F. Cox ; Typesetting machine. tino-643976 J. Place; Matrix-alining mechanism for -type machines.
  - 644363 O. Mergenthaler; Linotype machine, ould-644558 P. C. Lawless; Linotype-machine m block. ing-
  - 644835 M. W. Smith ; Type-making and comp0 machine (monotype class). , had-645073 W. H. Doolittle; Linotype-machine 9 forming attachment. . table 645164 N. Dedrick; Engraving machine (see 614845). tool-
  - 645165 N. Dedrick; Engraving machine wing), grinder (for punch and matrix engra
  - 645438 J. S. Thompson; Linotype machine, cting” 645472 C. Holliwell; Linotype-machine ca mechanism. ,.
  - 645512 P. H. McGrath; Typesetting machine-ks; 645801 H. J. S. Gilbert-Stringer and F. W Apparatus for justifying set-type. Loring 646047 O. G. Bartusch; Consecutive-numa for machine (type-high, for high-speed ward or backward).
  - 646227 E. G. Leonard; Linotyping machine.
  - 646358 P. F. Cox ; Typesetting machine. . . and
  - 646359 P. F. Cox; Space- and lead-discarde distributor loader. . (for
  - 646547 C. Sears; Preparing wood-matrices stereotyping; end-grain wood). (for 646669 W. Scott; Stereotype-finishing machin curved plates). chine
  - 646953 J. N. Chamberlain; Linotype-m metal-heating apparatus. . type
  - 646971 A. Fraser and F. Rose; Automatic 3 distributing apparatus. . butin
  - 646972 A. Fraser and F. Rose; Type-distri apparatus. ipine
  - 647417 A. Kraus; Composition for stereo.) (from typewriter-made impression).
  - 648025 G. A. Goodson; Typecasting machingaving" 648116 G. Sandeman and G. M. Brown ; Justimilal mechanism for typesetting or 5 machines (monotype class). . e for
  - 648201 G. A. Goodson; Automatic macu producing print or printing-surfaces. ,ate5 648206 G. R. Hildyard ; Producing printing-(for typographic process). (type
  - 648433 J. H. Reinhardt; Numbering-machine' high; preventing blurring). e.highi
  - 648440 F. Sanders ; Numbering-machine (type preventing blurring). chine
  - 648449 F. J. Wich; Adjustable Linotype-m mould. - cettinb
  - 648750 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; TyPe apparatus (Alden).
  - 649110 T. P. Ritzema ; Linotype machine- nolinel 650296 S. Bradley ; Line-casting machine (M°
- p.642 - vue 810/901
- - AMERICAN PATENTS.
  - 643
  - 1 ov co CO * NOH
  - Q No wO1 —NN
  - A 00 Oh N * ~1 c —
  - O 00 H H HH NNN
  - 1 1 1 1O 1) 1) 10) 1 1 I V V0 V ( (0 (0
  - Nr co O WHO ONH 1 o or o on — o Nr No 100 Oh 1 1 HT 1 A Se * —v 00 00 O0 OHH H I. co — — 6 N N N NON COO 0 * 1 to to J 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 in 1 u 1115 1 0 00 000 0000 00 < « 0
  - No. 1900 (continued).
  - 50397 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-con-6505.8 t taining channel (Alden).
  - 390 K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Typesetting apparatus.
  - ifAfa Low, Type-distributing apparatus
  - 1 S. L. Long; Typesetting stick.
  - • J.C. Fowler; Machine for producing type-- bars (by impression methods).
  - F. U. Downing and C. A. L. Totten; Logo-type (Greek).
  - J. H. Richards ; Machine for removing fins • or burrs from type (of linotype-slugs).
  - S Smith; Linotype machine.
  - E. F. Linke; Type-distributing machine (Thorne).
  - £ W. Bowron ; Type-justifying machine.
  - H Burg ; Typesetting machine.
  - H. Burg; Character-supplying apparatus for type or matrix-setting machines (loose-
  - I type setter).
  - H. Burg ; Apparatus for setting lines of type roI matrices (perforated strip controlled), a. Burg ; Type-distributing machine.
  - C. D. Hughes; Carrier for type-distributing c machines.
  - & Muehleisen ; Linotype machine.
  - A. Bates; Linotype machine.
  - E. F. Nydahl; Automatic type-distributing T machine.
  - Winter; Stereotype-plate-trimming machine.
  - L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low ; Typesetting p APparatus.
  - t. H. Pierpont ; Line-casting machine (Typo-- graph).
  - — tanston ; Strip-perforating machine.
  - W. W. Sawyer; Numbering-machine (hand-wstamp).
  - Barr ; Pantograph engraving-machine E (three-dimensional).
  - - J. Wendell; Manufacture of stereotype-T Plates (improved alinement).
  - * S. Duncan; Rubber-type.
  - * S Duncan ; Type-holder (Addressograph).
  - J. S. Duncan; Mould for making rubber-R type.
  - TH. St. John ; Spacing or justifying device for type-bar or matrix machines.
  - 657040
  - 6570 (R. H. St. John; Type-bar machine. 657283 -
  - F. B.. Converse, Jr.; Type-machinery 65730, - ejecting-mechanism.
  - 9 Converse, Jr.; Distributing-machine 657420 T (for characteristically nicked type).
  - 6574-8 X Lynch ; Linotype machine.
  - - Cahill; Typewriting machine, linotype machine, typesetting machine, or other Keyboard-printing instrumentality (157 claims).
  - — K. Johnson and A. A. Low ; Typesetting T apparatus.
  - — K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-con-o taining channel (Alden).
  - 2- Mergenthaler; Linotype machine.
  - • Dow ; Type-grab (for moving lines of • loose-type).
  - . D. G. Goss; Casting-box for stereotyping 659384) (curved plates).
  - 659385 F. J. Wendell; Printing-plate and base.
  - 25 A. W. Hanigan : Melting-pot for typecasting Ie machines.
  - CW. Pashley; Chuck and vice for engraving
  - 33 T machines (for matrices).
  - J. Place and C. W. Pashley; Driving-wmechanism for engraving machines.
  - • C. Pritchard ; Linotype-machine wiper-
  - G mechanism.
  - A. Vassberg; Linotype machine.
  - X A.Bates ; Linotype machine.
  - p‘ Elliott and M. Shaen ; Type-holder.
  - C # McGrath ; Typesetting machine.
  - A : Ziegler ; Typecasting machine.
  - To: Storm ; Electric linotype machine.
  - * t Rogers; Linotype machine (Linotype).
  - U. Bates and C. Spielmann ; Typographic numbering-machine (type-high; preventing blurring).
  - v Qy o 1 co 10 L 1 1. 0000 Oh 8 8 22 2P
  - 00000000 00000 O0 O HH000 00 -ONNHO Co Co O 00 O0 00 O O ~ O0 NO 0016
  - co
  - O 0
  - No.
  - 661780 F. Wesel; Stereotype-plate holder (clamp).
  - 662106 F. J. Wich ; Linotype machine.
  - 662573 W. H. B. Miller; Reproducing type, or the like.
  - 662652 E. F. Linke; Type-composing and distri-buting machine (Thorne).
  - 662724 P. E. Hodgkin and W. May ; Typesetting or composing machine.
  - 663405 G. G. Allen; Keyboard (Stenotype). 663971 T. Lanston; Record-strip perforator for type-forming machines.
  - 663996 T. Lanston; Machine for perforating record-strips.
  - 664698 E. Wentscher; Distributing apparatus for matrix or die-setting machines (two-letter Linotype).
  - 1901.
  - 664860 D. A. Hensley; Matrix and space-band cleaning-mechanism for typesetting machines.
  - 665212 I. Hall; Linotype mould. 665326 I. Hall; Linotype (deep ribs for reducing to different bodies from same mould).
  - 665406 P. F. Cox; Typesetting machine. 665596 L. D. Clark; Composite printing-plate or block (metal-base).
  - 666280) A. A. Low and J. Breakey; Type-distri-6663233 buting apparatus.
  - 666412 J. Donegan; Linotype machine.
  - 666817 C. C. Pugh; Linotype machine.
  - 666835 F. J. Wendell ; Printing-plate and base.
  - 666882 C. Holliwell and R. C. Elliott; Linotype-slugs having accented capitals thereon.
  - 666884 E. C: McFarland; Typecasting mould (coring large-body type).
  - 667049 F. Wicks; Apparatus for charging tubes or cases for type-composing machines.
  - 667210 J. C. Fowler; Typecasting and setting machine.
  - 6672II J. C. Fowler; Producing typecasting moulds and matrices.
  - 667212 J. C. and J. C. Fowler, Jr. ; Typecasting, composing and justifying machine.
  - 667790 P. G. Nuernberger; Type-making machine (duplex, slug, or clump caster).
  - 668312 A. A. Low; Type-channel and slug (for dis-tributor and setter).
  - 668314 A. A. Low; Type-distributing apparatus.
  - 668346 J. Breakey ; Type-distributing apparatus.
  - 668374 W. G. Herz; Stereotype-chase (a chase for securing stereotypes).
  - 668457)
  - 669400 J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - 669401)
  - 669405 F. Wicks ; Metal-pump for typecasting.
  - 669661 T. R. Post; Dating-stamp for use in banks, railway offices, etc. (preventing fraud).
  - 669831 D. A. Hensley; Linotype-machine space-bar.
  - 670167 H. A. W. Wood; Printing-plate bending-apparatus.
  - 670329 O. Schonauer; Automatic type-metal-supplying apparatus for composing- and line-casting machines.
  - 671327 F. Wesel; Stereotype-plate holder (clamp). 671362 F. Wicks; Rotary typecasting apparatus.
  - 671932 C. S. Mills; Printing-plate holder (clamp).
  - 672131 L. E. and H. S. Merrill; Automatic type-justifying space (with recesses to interlock, or not).
  - 672199 M. H. Whittaker and C. H. West ; Linotype-machine mould.
  - 672200 M. H. Whittaker and C. H. West ; Linotype (tapered ribs for cylindrical work).
  - 672534 D. Lichtenberg-Madsen ; Producing matrices and stereotypes of celluloid.
  - 672859 F. A. Ringler; Stereotyping-plate (casting with electrotypes in place).
  - 673485 E. R. Storm; Printing-plate holder (clamp).
  - 673518 O. S. Follett; Numbering-machine printing-wheel (casting in one with ratchet).
  - 674080 P. T. Dodge ; Type-matrix.
  - 674092 O. Mergenthaler; Linotype-machine matrix.
  - 674362 J. S. Bancroft ; Paper-feed mechanism.
  - 674374 J. S. Bancroft; Fluid-injecting mechanism for typecasting or other machines.
  - 674375 J. S. Bancroft; Galley-mechanism for type-casting and composing machines.
- p.643 - vue 811/901
- - 644
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1901 (continued).
  - 674376 J. S. Bancroft; Die-centring mechanism for typecasting and composing machines.
  - 675495 A. Pollak and J. Virag ; Writing-telegraph ; the transmitted impulses and their mutual relation are controlled by a suitable strip, which is perforated to correspond with each character to be transmitted.
  - 675827 H. J. S. Gilbert-Stringer; Typecasting and composing apparatus (Stringertype).
  - 675828 H. J. S. Gilbert-Stringer; Producing formes for printing (Stringertype).
  - 675829 H. J. S. Gilbert-Stringer; Apparatus for composing and justifying matrices and casting types therefrom (Stringertype).
  - 675898 R. Maxwell; Printing-plate (using linotype-slugs on addressograph chain).
  - 676010 J. H. Simpson; Holding-block for stereotype-and electrotype-plates.
  - 676082 E. G. Bates ; Automatic numbering-machine (hand-stamp, consecutive, duplicate, or repeat).
  - 676083 E. G. Bates ; Numbering and dating machine (hand-stamp).
  - 676084 E. G. Bates ; Automatic numbering-machine (type-high; adapting to hand-stamp).
  - 676306 W. Fletcher; Mechanism for spacing and justifying tabular work on Linotype machines (Linotype).
  - 676513 F. G. Price ; Printing-plate and impression-surface holder (curved segments).
  - 676908 E. F. Nydahl and G. A. Harling ; Type-distributing apparatus.
  - 676975 W. Berri; Type and holder therefor.
  - 677144 F. Sanders; Numbering-machine (consecutive, plunger-operated).
  - 678036 J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - 678268 0. Mergenthaler; Linotype machine.
  - 678310 F. A. Vinton; Linotype machine.
  - 678831 G. H. Ziegler ; Typecasting machine (body-slide; see 376765).
  - 679479 C. Muehleisen ; Linotype machine.
  - 67948I(J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine (Typo-679482 5 graph).
  - 680685 L. B. Benton ; Type-dressing machine.
  - 682466 E. D. Hardy and W. W. Rebuschatis ; Type-locking-device (for locking in galley).
  - 683079 H. H. Stalker; Composing-stick.
  - 684104 J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - 685035% P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - 685083 G. H. Ziegler; Type-finishing machine.
  - 685142 O. F. Holmgren ; Composing-stick.
  - 685583 P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - 685980 A. S. Gilman; Linotyping and typesetting machine.
  - 686029 E. S. Crane; Matrix-distributing machine.
  - 686728 C. G. Harris and J. F. McNutt ; Numbering-machine (for successively numbering cheques, slips, etc.).
  - 687627 C. Holliwell; Mould and casting-mechanism of Linotype machines (Linotype).
  - 687691 P. C. Lawless; Automatic wiper for use in Linotype machines (Linotype).
  - IF. H. Pierpont; Stamping, or punching machine (for producing a matrix at each revolution; hand-controlled ; for Monotype matrices).
  - 687781 F. H. Pierpont; Apparatus for milling, justifying, and measuring matrices, etc., (Monotype).
  - 688218 F. J. Wich ; Linotype machine (magazine equipment and escapement; Linotype).
  - 688812 C. A. Albrecht ; Multiple-magazine Linotype machine.
  - 688928 H. Burg; Apparatus for provisionally separating lines of type or matrices.
  - 689603 G. A. Vassberg; Linotype machine.
  - 690169 G. H. Meserole ; Gas-conducting device for Linotype melting-pots.
  - 690170 G. H. Miller; Numbering-machine (large-wheel, consecutive).
  - No. € type-
  - 691583 A. Bean; Composing-mechanism otvoe)-
  - setting or Linotype machines for
  - R. C. Elliott and C. Holliwell; Means, pe-producing fudge, or late-news tin 3
  - 691615
  - 691619
  - 691685
  - 691925
  - 691971
  - 692072
  - 692183
  - 692883
  - 692994
  - 693145
  - 693445 694115 694141
  - 694269
  - 694297
  - H. J. S. Gilbert-Stringer ; Type-mould ( slide; Stringertype break).
  - M. H. Whittaker; Linotype machine. .
  - J. L. Winter; Matrix (dry process for5 typing). .ing
  - A. Reveille; Apparatus for impls etc. stereotype-matrices with musical nor chine
  - J. H. Reinhardt; Numbering-mac
  - (drop-cipher controller). A Lino-
  - M. P. Freebey ; Adjustable-mould mines
  - type, or other metal-casting m
  - (Linotype).Istri-A. A. Low and J. Breakey; Type-
  - buting apparatus. Ives and
  - J. S. Duncan ; Holder for card-indexes
  - printing-plates (Addressograph). chine F. McClintock; Type-justifying me
  - (Empire; see 608002). 1
  - A. V. Ruckmich ; Typesetting macnm
  - B. Smith; Stipple matrix-plate. pre-
  - D. F.Daley; Linotype-slug (end-lug5 vent reglets working up). . and
  - Z. Halacinski; Type-line composts
  - casting device. aeotype”
  - W. P. Nisbett and P. Andrews; Stere plate cutting-machine. .tion of
  - 694306; L. A. Brott; Machine for the proem 694307) types and type-bars.
  - 694308 L. A. Brott; Composite type-bar.
  - 694309 L. A. Brott; Production of type-Da •
  - L. A. Brott; Type-magazine. (head
  - J. F. McNutt; Numbering-macpis).
  - with large-wheels for plurality of 5 ove-con” L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; distr taining channel (for setting, 0 1
  - buting). —echanne
  - A. A. Low and J. Breakey; Type holder (for distributing-machine). (pre-
  - S. R. Shoup; Numbering-macueheck- of venting skipping in high-speed C
  - 00 H HO co 00 0
  - 9 8 S + co CO N CO
  - slip-printing). . Ievice.
  - J. R. Rogers; Linotype-justifying -X_
  - J. R. Rogers ; Linotype-machine Teotype
  - S. G. Yundt and W. J. Nolen; St plate-holder (clamp). _ . machine 695017 J. Watson; Type-justifying
  - (Empire). . orinting”
  - 696360 E. V. Beals ; Machine for producing P a line bars (casts the face on a blank IT of assembled matrices). . type
  - C.A. Albrecht; Tool for trimming ca lines in Linotype machines. , linotyP
  - C. Holliwell; Automatically-cored mould-block. iter-spaC
  - G. A. Goodson; Differential register for composing-machines., math
  - G. A. Goodson; Typefounding (Graphotype). voidib
  - G. A. Goodson ; Fount of type
  - 694788
  - 694789
  - 694905
  - 696532
  - 696637
  - 696732
  - 696733
  - 696734
  - 696806 697011
  - 697141 697456
  - 697859 697968
  - 698028
  - 698966
  - 1902.
  - 690707 P. T. Dodge ; Linotype machine.
  - 690720 H. J. S. Gilbert-Stringer; Typecasting and composing apparatus (Monoline matrix).
  - 691226 G. H. Ziegler; Typecasting machine matrix-carrier.
  - 699390
  - 699402
  - 699728
  - 700022
  - 700288
  - dressing kerns). . ,
  - P. T. Dodge ; Linotype machine, ifeedi
  - J. Place and W. J. Lewis; Spe). mechanism for metal-pots (Line ibing-
  - S. G. Goss ; Casting-box for stereopr
  - P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - F. Lucke ; Typecasting machine. of tyP
  - W. Berri; Device for justifying » or matrices (Linotype). , f stere
  - R. Krafft; Turf matrix-pulp to-typing. , stele.
  - I. Kitsee; Machine for producing elect type-plate matrices (typewrite machine), cally connected to an impression pe-CO L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low iibutin. taining channel (for setting or .fist
  - A. A. Low and J. Breakey; >
  - buting apparatus.
  - G. E. Wallin; Linotype-slug holoe tic P. T. Dodge ; Linotype matrix:. Autome"
  - J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl > es-leader for type-composing ma feed
  - 700289 J. S. Bancroft; Record-strip
  - mechanism. pur
  - 700290 J. S. Bancroft; Type-mace
  - actuating mechanism.
- p.644 - vue 812/901
- - AMERICAN PATENTS.
  - 645
  - OHO 000 0 ( 00 0 0000 220
  - No. 1902 (continued).
  - 700291 j. g Bancroft; Record-strip feeding-mechanism of automatic typecasting, or other machines.
  - A. W. Cathcart Making justified matrices (Monotype).
  - A. W. Cathcart; Matrix die-mechanism (Monotype).
  - M. C. Indahl; Machine for composing „tabular-matter.
  - W. Kemp, Jr. ; Type-composing machine for
  - 7003 t tabular matter. 700699 - Lanston; Type-composing machine. to IF. McClintock; Type-justifying machine 700701J (Empire).
  - 3 A • o'
  - X
  - co CO N H H N VOT H CO H 0 C 00 X 66 6 6
  - J.Watson; Type-justifying machine (Empire).
  - To. C. Zenke; Burner (for melting-pots, linotype machines, etc.).
  - T E. Milholland ; Linotype galley.
  - J- L. Carroll; Set of type for printing calendars (4-line logotypes).
  - -Holdsworth; Type-justifying machine (Empire).
  - NE Hodgkin and G. E. Kenney; Type-701989) distributing machine. 702999—J- B. Bell; Linotype machine.
  - F. McClintock; Typesetting machine key-mechanism.
  - F. McClintock ; Typesetting machine.
  - F. McClintock and F. Holdsworth ; Type-justifying machine (Empire).
  - C.S. Partridge ; Stereotype-plate and base (metal interlocking-bases).
  - J- Hinklein ; Type-distributing machine.
  - - Lanston; Type-machine composing-mechanism.
  - J- Breakey ; Type-distributing apparatus.
  - P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - CO O O 100 HH 0H A co to c H 100 o 1 1 T. 1 No co H — NO +0N000 *10 1 OTON0 O N (OH 0010 O NN N NO NN-NN ch CO O * 10111 1 00 0 00 00 00 o ° 00 000000
  - G- A. Goodson; Typecasting machine squirt-preventer.
  - E. Terrell and F. A. Ray; Typesetting machine.
  - J. Gray; Linotype or similar composing-machine.
  - E. R. Storm ; Printing-plate holder (clamp).
  - D. W. Fratcher; Composing-machine key-board attachment.
  - d. A. Goodson; Typecasting and setting machine.
  - A. G. Cotsworth; Alining-mechanism for linotype machines.
  - J. C. and J. C. Fowler, Jr.; Typecasting and setting machine.
  - E. Mullendorff; Mechanism for justifying lines composed of types or matrices.
  - ". J. Wich ; Trimming-mechanism for Lino-type machines.
  - V. G. Allen ; Keyboard (use of colours for
  - o
  - O 1 o or co co 00
  - 70752, - groups of keys).
  - J. R. Reynolds; Type-chase for making 70752, t matrix-plates (Graphotype).
  - 3 J. R. Reynolds ; Master type-bar for matrix-o-e plates (Graphotype).
  - O. Mergenthaler an(] W. T. Hoofnagle ; Linotype machine.
  - n. Barth ; Typecasting (producing a vacuum in mould).
  - O. G. Bartusch; Consecutive-numbering 708416 APparatus (plurality of sets, shaft-operated). Smith; Linotype-machine attach-70864 T ment.
  - 3 — K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-con-708646 t taining channel (Typesetter).
  - — K:. Johnson; Compositor’s type-stick 70866, r (facilitating removal of type).
  - JPinel; Device for forming accents on 709128 a tnotype-slugs (Linotype). A.P. Waterman and G. H. E. Berthold;
  - Numbering-machine (hand-stamp, consecu-709284 T tive or duplicate).
  - 709398 T —Weigl ? Stereotyping-matrix (dry).
  - 71005- I- Elias; Asbestos stereotype (matrix).
  - K Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-line 710066 A detaching mechanism (for distributor).
  - A. Low ; Type-distributing apparatus.
  - No.
  - 710140 J. J. Chattaway; Numbering-machine (hand-stamp, consecutive, duplicate, or repeat).
  - 710163 D. Murray; Keyboard perforator (production of a perforated strip from a typewriter keyboard).
  - 710380 F. M. Turek; Numbering-machine (consecutively, or serially by means of type-belt).
  - 710652 C. A. Albrecht; Mechanism for pushing the linotype-slugs out of moulds of Linotype machines.
  - 710970 H. Hamlin; Means for securing printing-plates.
  - 711143 W. W. Wotherspoon ; Monoline machine.
  - 711288 B. Cole and A. O. Wilson; Linotype leading-device.
  - 711590 C. B. Post; Numbering-machine (large-wheels for printing continuous web).
  - 711593 G. B. Shepard; Matrix-making machine (stereotype).
  - 711807 F. J. Wich; Linotype-machine trimming-mechanism.
  - 712324 A. B. Neill; Numbering or marking machine (large-wheels for printing on linen, etc.).
  - 712755 G. A. Bates; Linotype machine.
  - 712969 J. Roxburgh and R. McClean ; Linotype-slug slotting-apparatus.
  - 713246 G. B. Shepard; Matrix-making machine (impression machine).
  - 714621 B. F. Tcherkassov and R. E. Hill; Type for typewriting or printing (Arabic and Persian).
  - 715233 W. Ackerman; Omitting-means for automatic typecasting and composing machines (Graphotype).
  - 715936 J. F. Ames; Fount of type (serrated back and front to interlock; for very heavy pressures).
  - 716236 F. A. Johnson; Typesetting and justifying machine.
  - 716975 C. A. Albrecht; Matrix-distributing mechanism for Linotype machines.
  - 7x7169 F. B. Converse, Jr. ; Typesetting and justifying machine.
  - 717172 F. B. Converse, Jr. ; Typesetting machine.
  - R 12017 F. Wicks ; Orig. No. 669405; Metal-pump for typecasting.
  - 1903.
  - 717763 C. Rozar; Device for casting justifying-spaces in combined typecasting and setting machines.
  - j 717960 E. A. Adcock; Typesetting machine.
  - 718519 R. W. Pittman and G. C. Andrews; Holder for printing-plates (clamp).
  - 718622 J. A. Handiboe ; Type-holding clamp (metal-strip yoke).
  - 718781 C.Muehleisen; Linotype machine (Linotype).
  - 718837 H. C. Hansen ; Machine for mitring printers’ rules.
  - 718842 W. A. Hinners; Process of making relief effect printing-plate (half-tone).
  - 718883 J. L. Shilling ; Method of making relief effect printing-plates (principal object and background ; see 718842).
  - 719270 S. Smith; Linotype machine and matrix.
  - 719296 H. B. Bartlett; Linotype machine.
  - 719321 W. H. Francis; Clamp for pages of type (metal-strip).
  - 719375 C. Rozar; Typesetting-machine keyboard.
  - 719422 G. A. Bates; Linotype machine.
  - 719436 J. W. Champion; Linotype machine (Lino-type).
  - 720270 T. Martin ; Means for setting tabular matter in Linotype machines.
  - 720314 M. F. Benton; Type (extension-type carrying ornamentations adapted to register with the type between which they are placed).
  - 720736 F. H. Pierpont; Type-mould (body-slide ; see 625998).
  - 720795 F. X. Fleck; Linotype machine.
  - 720817 L. L. Kennedy; Linotype machine.
  - 721117 H. A. W. Wood; Automatic stereotype printing-plate casting and finishing apparatus (189 claims; Autoplate).
- p.645 - vue 813/901
- - 646
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1903 (continued).
  - 721118 ) H. A. W. Wood ; Stereotype printing-plate 7211195 casting apparatus (Autoplate).
  - 721120 H. A. W. Wood; Stereotype printing-plate casting and finishing apparatus (Auto-plate).
  - 721121 H. A. W. Wood; Stereotype-plate casting apparatus (Autoplate).
  - 7211227 H. A. W. Wood; Stereotype printing-plate 7211235 finishing-mechanism (Autoplate).
  - 721276 E. G. Bates ; Numbering or similar machine (automatic, hand; see 676084).
  - 721389 M. Reid; Type-bar making machine (impresses on a line of matrices a type-bar, the edge of which is made plastic by heat).
  - 722284 L. Cesana ; Linotype machine. 722354} G. A. Bates; Linotype machine.
  - 722404 H. C. Gammeter; Machine for duplicating circular letters to appear as if typewritten (Multigraph).
  - 723073 J. S. Thompson ; Linotype machine.
  - 723665 H. S. Folger; Type-holder (for rubber-„ type).
  - 724418 A. C. Anderson ; Stereotype (mortised base).
  - 725653 J. S. Bancroft; Type-machine matrix-centring mechanism.
  - 725861 C. Muehleisen ; Linotype machine.
  - 726019 S. J. Briden ; Linotype machine.
  - 726412 P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - 726725 F. E. Milholland ; Linotype galley.
  - 727046 F. Wicks; Typecasting machine, type-controlling device.
  - 727267 B. F. Bellows ; Type-line justifying machine. 727355 H. C. Hansen; Matrix-truing apparatus (filing-jig with adjustable spherical block).
  - 727914 P. T. Dodge ; Linotype machine.
  - 728194 T. H. Boss; Numbering-machine (automatic hand-stamp, consecutive, duplicate, or repeat).
  - 728845 J. C. Bovard ; Printers’ furniture (for use in making “ ribbon face ” impressions).
  - 730526 O. Friese ; Composing-board in form of a galley for storing composed columns.
  - 730734 G. A. Bates; Linotype machine.
  - 731666 C. H. Cochrane; Type-justifying means.
  - 732026 W. Nicholas ; Stereotyping (mould-block for stereotype for Goodson matrix-grid).
  - 732383 J. S. Thompson; Linotype machine.
  - 732395 T. Cleghorn ; Typecasting matrix.
  - 732560 W. J. Huston and C. W. Smith, Type-finishing machine.
  - 733202 C. E. Hopkins; Machine for casting and trimming stereotype-plates.
  - 73353I I. Baas ; Mould for casting printers’ furniture (gate to centre of core).
  - 733559 W. S. Scudder; Line-casting machine.
  - 733571 J. B. Allen; Linotype-machine nipple.
  - 733895 I. Baas; Process of making printers’ metal furniture (gate to centre of core).
  - 734096 J. R. Rogers ; Linotype machine.
  - 734106 J. S. Thompson; Linotype machine.
  - 734121 P. T. Dodge ; Linotype machine.
  - 734166 W. H. Francis ; Type-page binder-frame (of sheet-metal).
  - 734437 W. S. Scudder; Line-casting machine. 734576 J. Lagarde; Machine for producing perforated strips for composing, or like machines.
  - 734597 F. E. Peacock ; Typecasting-machine pump. 734746 D. A. Poe and W. H. Scharf; Linotype machine (Linotype).
  - 734879 P. F. Jones ; Space-bar for Linotype, or other typecasting machine.
  - 735142 G. Palmer; Making half-tone printing-surfaces (direct from original photographs).
  - 735226 J. L. Ebaugh ; Linotype machine.
  - 735804 C. S. Partridge; Stereotype casting-box (flat).
  - 737251 F. C. Leethem; Printing-plate finishing machine (flat).
  - 738269 F. Winkler ; Type-distributing device. 738476 C. S. Partridge; Stereotype casting-box (flat).
  - 738741 F. B. Converse, Jr.; Justifying-mechanism. 739369 F. W. Wicht and C. Spielmann ; Numbering-machine (typographic; drop-cipher; means for removing plunger).
  - 739591 J. L. Ebaugh ; Linotype machine (Linotype).
  - 739996 P. T. Dodge ; Linotype machine (Linotype).
  - No. . . Holder
  - 740310 R. W. Pittman and G. C. Andrews, -for printing-plates (clamp). . .for 740352 H. P. Arms; Process of producing Plsling printing (high relief from direct dr on plates and repeated etching).
  - 740470 J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine. 740471 C. P. Rubly ; Linotype-matrix cleaner- for 740537 C. H. Cochrane; Type-space and meer lines co-operating therewith for justifying of type.
  - 741294 H. B. Bartlett; Linotype machine. con-741311 C. R. Culley; Numbering-machine (Ton: secutively numbering pages, etc.).
  - 741423 F. W. Weeks; Compositors’ stick. (large-741819 A. Nordstrom; Numbering-machine (ckets, wheels, consecutive, for pages, etc.).
  - 741957 P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine. . , con-742523 W. S. Timmis ; Machine for producing trollers for printing, typecasting, et pulso-742671 G. E. Kenney; Typesetting machine AT meter). . (auto-
  - 743233 T. H. Boss; Numbering-machine . see matic hand-stamp; locking-device , 728194). Lest; 743284 J. G. Holbourns and H. A. Long-Linotype machine. . (typ0" 743569 F. Sanders; Numbering-machine 8440)-graphic ; preventing blurring ; see 64 frame 743812 J. C. Bonneau; Stereotype-matrix (dry-fluid pressure [sic]). . A pro-743890 A. Kraus and N. Collins; Machine Tatrices. ducing stereotype- or electrotype-maotype 744087 O. Mergenthaler and E. Lawrenz ; Lin | machine.
  - 744102 J. A. Proulx; Linotype leading-deviomatic 744230 J. Pinel ; Mechanical controller for au typecasting and composing machine -ter 744836 F. W. Weeks ; Type [with printing CR aractel at one end (negative) and reading oulder at opposite end (positive), and a sn from near this end for permitting remoy and insertion in the line]. isting
  - 744837 F. W. Weeks; Type-holder (for 3 hand; see 744836). .stick
  - 744838 F. W. Weeks; Combined compositor and type-chase (see 744836). . (heat
  - 744889 G. J. Wildridge ; Material for matric resisting flong). tus for
  - 745208 G. G. Little and E. A. Reed; Appars. forming type under pressure. . inting” 745263 C. G. Sunergren ; Method of making Pgraphic, surfaces for colour-printing (photog relief). . +-centri0
  - 745800 J. M. Dove; Type-machine matrix mechanism. hanism-
  - 746295 F. B. Converse, Jr. ; Justifying-me Cachine 746415 J. K. Van Valkenburg ; Linotype (Linotype). sortil
  - 747183 L. K. Johnson; Mechanism to-types,etc. e-dist!"
  - 747196 A. A. Low and J. Breakey ; 1)P buting apparatus. Jevice for
  - 747534 J. Burger; Automatic signalling-0 linotype machines. , cellulo"
  - 747738 B. Ludwig; Process of producing printing-plates. . tensible
  - 747794 S. Stephens ; Printers’ furniture (ex mat" 747832 F. C. L. d’Aix; Linotype-machin and justifying-device. base 10
  - 747845 C. E. Beach; Supplemental Press printing-plates (making ready)-
  - 1904. eparin 748578 B. A. Brooks; Mechanism for Pose-tyPe printing-surfaces (combined 1 setter and typecaster). , (castib
  - 748596 C. N. Field; Stereotype-block detachable-back on to plate). e-hold
  - 748715 H. S. Folger ; Type-holder (hand tyP for printing on postcards). ,
  - 748876 C. R. Murray; Type-mould. sm (T0
  - 749149 J. S. Bancroft; Centring-mecna for Monotype die-case). bar 1
  - 749243 L. H. Vold; Controller or stop centring-mechanisms (MonotyP ling-plate.
  - 749350 E. Wunsche ; Preparing Prl th tyP° (lithographic plates to work ‘ graphic matter).
- p.646 - vue 814/901
- - AMERICAN PATENTS.
  - 647
  - o 0 6 Co OH Nr O ON ~ H Ci O
  - N 00 vo OOT H O O H COCO HNN NN p r
  - &
  - 686
  - 620
  - O o
  - co o
  - 84
  - No. 1904 (continued).
  - 749720 F. B. Converse, Jr.; Justifying-mechanism (Converse Mfg. Co.).
  - F. B. Converse, Jr.; Typesetting machine (Converse Mfg. Co.).
  - J. E. Schlorff ; Type-holder (adjustable).
  - C. F. Rockstroh ; Printing-plate holder (block and clamp).
  - J. S. Duncan ; Machine for making printing-plates (Addressograph).
  - W. T. Stutchbury and C. Gorick ; Perforator-mechanism for preparing the composing-strip of typesetting and casting machines.
  - J. Broadhouse; Linotype for printing music typographically.
  - C. J. Hanfbauer ; Attachment for machines for perforating strips (Monotype).
  - H. Petersen; Linotype matrix (two halt characters arranged on a two-letter matrix).
  - J. S. Bancroft ; Type-mould.
  - F. and A. Leslie; Producing duplicate printing-plates (embossing the metal between male and female dies).
  - J. A. Watson; Composing-machine justi-7536. .fying-device.
  - 753 .04 W. G. Middleton ; Linotype-machine matrix.
  - 40 C. N. Smith; Preparing colour-plates for Printing (relief plate).
  - G. L. Venable; Linotype-machine alarm-attachment.
  - W; S. Scudder; Line-casting machine (Monoline).
  - W. R. Speechley; Producing notches in linotype-slugs or slugs as they are cast in Linotype machines (Linotype).
  - E. B. Clark; Linotype-machine attachment.
  - E. P. Sheldon ; Numbering-machine (plurality of numbering-wheels arranged transversely 756427 T on a cylinder).
  - 757000 p Cooney ; Linotype machine.
  - 757117 8: Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - 4 Hopkins; Stereotype-casting machine 757310 T (for curved plates). Lagarde; Typesetting or composing machine.
  - S J. Briden ; Linotype machine (Linotype). 758103 w D. Scott; Linotype machine.
  - 5 He) Randall; Linotype machine (Lino-758284 P. Shea; Linotype-machine attachment.
  - 9 K. J. Sachers; Printing-plate (aluminium 7595or T compound plate).
  - J-M. Cooney and H. L. Totten; Linotype T distributor (Linotype).
  - * N. Crofut; Linotype machine.
  - — G. Bates; Typographic numbering-machine (plunger ; drop-wheel).
  - Barr; Automatic engraving machine three-dimensional).
  - V Barr; Automatic engraving machine.
  - V Barr; Pantograph engraving machine.
  - A. McKee; Making even the faces of keaaytype- or electrotype-plates (making
  - A. Scheckner; Printing-plate and making same (photo-mechanical relief).
  - • S. Timmis ; Printing-plate holding-device (block and jaws).
  - A - Dodge ; Linotype machine.
  - ". Zeitinger; Typecasting machine M body-slide).
  - J ‘ Darn; Automatic engraving machine.
  - • F. Brewster; Numbering, or registering machine transfer-mechanism (carrying from wheel to wheel).
  - Spielmann; Numbering-machine (hand-stamp for yardage; setting wheels in-762323 F dependently). 7637352 Rohnle ; Type-chase (for ticket printing). 7641165 P. ' Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - 764163 D.S. Kennedy; Linotype machine. Junaley; Linotype-machine assembling-764517 F mechanism. "A. Berry; Stereotype-block (clamping-764660 T dogs). on uncan ; Addressing-machine (working printing-plates automatically with card-nidexes ; Addressograph).
  - dorol o Jl&l O00 V (O N0 ( OU O oto Ot C O UNO Ut ON
  - 1 O 0 Oe 1) 1. CO1 * N N NO 0C O O HH HH A A RA 2X
  - o
  - No.
  - 764793 J. Broadhouse; Matrix or type-die (for composing music on linotype-slugs, turned through a right angle for printing).
  - 765057 M. Wehrlin; Apparatus operated by a perforated band for casting spaces (Meray-Rozar). •
  - 765058 M. Wehrlin; Automatic clutch for type-casting and composing machines.
  - 765059 M. Wehrlin; Typecasting and composing machine.
  - 765574 J. E. Gilbert ; Half-tone printing-plate overlay and making same.
  - 765775 G. A. Goodson; Typecasting and setting machine (Graphotype).
  - 765965 J. C. Fowler; Typecasting and setting machine (Castotype).
  - 766037 C. B. Herrmann; Producing stereotype-plates for printing purposes (from keyboard impressions).
  - 766134 E. G. Bates; Numbering-machine (with drop-ciphers; see 721276).
  - 766255 T. J. Hume ; Automatic typesetting laundry-marking machine.
  - 766369 C. Meray-Horvath; Telegraphic apparatus (for perforating a band at a receiving station to be used for casting type).
  - 767169 J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine. 767202 J. C. Bonneau ; Stereotype-matrix press.
  - 768565 J. C. and J. C. Fowler, Jr. ; Typecasting and setting machine (Castotype).
  - 768910 J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine. 768981 J. S. Duncan ; Rubber-type (Addressograph).
  - 769022 C. S. Rosin; Cylinder-press type-carrier (for printing wooden boxes).
  - 769168 F. A. Johnson; Machine for manufacturing justified-line-matrices.
  - 769443 S. Lack; Composing-stick tilter. 770253 J. S. Bancroft; Type-machine mould-dimensioning mechanism (Monotype).
  - 770254 J. S. Bancroft; Perforating-machine measuring-mechanism (Monotype).
  - 770341 E. T. Waters ; Linotype-machine tabulating-attachment.
  - 770598 J. Mayer and C. Albrecht; Typecasting machine type-ejecting device.
  - 77E360) P. C. Lawless; Multiple-magazine Linotype 7711621 machine (see 436532).
  - 771854 W. Ackerman; Matrix-locating mechanism for typecasting machines (Graphotype).
  - 772116 R. D. Tittle ; Composing-stick. 772219 C. P. Cottrell; Stereotype-plate clamp (for curved plates).
  - 772337 S. Brown ; Apparatus and means for setting type and printing therefrom.
  - 772453 F. A. Berry; Stereotype-block (clamping-dogs).
  - 772494 M. Barr ; Variable-throw crank (for grinding punch- and engraving-machine cutters).
  - 773191 E. J. Buehler; Slug, quoin, furniture, etc. (for use with linotype-slugs).
  - 773341 J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - 773528 F. Schreiner; Stereotype-casting box (for type-high plates).
  - 774026 M. Barr; Apparatus for turning curved surfaces of predetermined non-circular section for three-dimensional pantograph). 774027 M. Barr ; Engraving machine (for punches or matrices).
  - 774239 S. Drummond and W. C. Lieberknecht ; Typecasting and setting machine leading-attachment.
  - 774528 E. A. Neben; Manufacture of printing-plates (relief).
  - 774686 G. H. Miller; Numbering-machine (large-wheel for check-slips ; see 690170).
  - 775o73 M. Barr; Automatic engraving machine.
  - 775426 L. K. Johnson ; Type-distributing apparatus (Alden).
  - 776499 A. H. Cruse ; Ejecting mechanism for stereotype-shaving machines.
  - 776779 P. T. Dodge ; Linotype machine.
  - 776890 C. P. Cottrell; Stereotype-plate clamp (for flat plates).
  - 777855 T. A. Haughton ; Typesetting machine.
  - 778196 M. C. Indahl; Detachable key-bank for punching or other machines (Monotype keyboard).
  - 778466 E. R. Storm; Printing-plate holder (clamp).
  - 778609 J. R. Rogers Linotype machine.
- p.647 - vue 815/901
- - 648 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1905.
  - 778996 E. A. Osse; Typecasting and composing machine.
  - 779167 J. W. Kerwin; Stereotype-cutting machine (for cutting plates into columns).
  - 779969 J. R. Rogers ; Linotype machine.
  - 780667 B. F. Kern and W. J. O. Johnson; Cuttingmachine for rubber-type, etc.
  - 781094 L. E. Quick ; Type-justifying machine.
  - 781464 F. Schreiner; Machine for impressing or embossing and drying stereotype-matrices.
  - 782299 F. J. Wich ; Metal-pump (Autoplate).
  - 782536 J. S. Bancroft; Type-machine adjusting or centring-mechanism.
  - 782549 J. M. Dove, J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Type machine die-case transposing-mechanism (Monotype).
  - 782775 L. S. Campbell; Typesetting and distributing machine.
  - 782990 C. Rozar ; Apparatus for perforating registering strips for typesetting machines.
  - 783504 M. F. Britt; Hand matrix-assembler (composing-stick for Linotype matrices).
  - 784133 B. F. Bellows; Elevator-mechanism for circulating-matrix machines (Electric Compositor).
  - 784196 F. W. Wicht and C. Spielmann ; Numbering-machine (typographic, plunger-operated).
  - 784245 J. S. Bancroft; Type-machine die-case equipment.
  - 784253 P. T. Dodge ; Linotype machine.
  - 784267 L. L. Kennedy; Linotype machine.
  - 784275 D. Petri-Palmedo ; Linotype machine.
  - 784287 G. E. Wallin ; Linotype machine.
  - 784729 E. G. Bates; Numbering-machine (hand-stamp ; wheels lever-operated).
  - 785200 L. A. Costigan; Type-page binder-frame.
  - 785349 F. W. Cann ; Machine for bevelling the edges of electrotype or stereotype printing-plates.
  - 785374 F. H. Pierpont; Type-mould.
  - 785375 F. H. Pierpont; Type-machine die-case equipment.
  - 785406 C. H. Cochrane; Keyboard (for linotype composing-machines).
  - 785477 F. C. L. d’Aix ; Linotype machine.
  - 785478 F. C. L. d’Aix; Matrix for linotype or line-casting machines.
  - 785648 E. A. Adcock ; Typesetting machine (Pulsometer).
  - 785649 E. A. Adcock; Type-distributing machine (Pulsometer).
  - 785783 K. West; Paper slack-provider and winding-mechanism (Graphotype).
  - 785823 W. Nicholas ; Typecasting machine squirt-preventer (Graphotype).
  - 785964 F. J. Martin; Numbering-machine (hand-stamp ; consecutive, duplicate, or repeat).
  - 786020 H. S. Folger; Type-chase and furniture for the same.
  - 786140 C. Muehleisen ; Linotype machine.
  - 786156 V J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - 786199 P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - 786211 C. L. Grohmann ; Linotype machine.
  - 786313 J. Pinel; Typecasting and composing machine.
  - 787138 M. Wehrlin ; Intermittent clutch-device for typecasting and composing machines.
  - 787197 J. W. Lewis; Punch-cutting machine.
  - 787769 D. S. Kennedy; Linotype machine.
  - 787786 S. C. Nielsen ; Linotype machine.
  - 787817 C. A. Albrecht; Linotype machine.
  - 787821 R. M. Bedell; Linotype machine (Linotype).
  - 788578 F. W. Blair; Linotype-machine alarm.
  - 789113 E. G. Bates; Numbering-machine (hand-stamp ; consecutive, duplicate, or repeat).
  - 789114 E. G. Bates; Numbering-machine (hand-stamp ; operating and inking).
  - 789646 H. A. Agricola, Jr. ; Typographic machine. (Linotype).
  - 789708 S. A. Bhisey; Type-making and setting machine.
  - 790348 P. T. Dodge ; Linotype machine.
  - 790447 R. F. Mercer; Linotype machine.
  - 791130 B. F. Bellows; Matrix-distributing machine (Electric Compositor).
  - 791131 B. F. Bellows; Matrix-assembling machine escapement-mechanism (Electric Compositor).
  - No.
  - 791165% J. R- Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - " L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type
  - 791558
  - 791747
  - 792247
  - 792313
  - 792472 792504
  - 792521
  - 792551 792574
  - 792851
  - 792973 792993 793691
  - 793766 794162
  - 794628
  - 794629
  - 794670 794959
  - 795028 795878
  - 795936 795969 796091
  - 796155
  - 796213
  - 796318
  - 796487
  - 796767
  - 796770
  - 796776
  - 796778
  - 796786
  - tributing apparatus. Iohism.
  - B. F. Bellows ; Logotype-casting mechaliing J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Typecsse).
  - machine centring-mechanism (Monotypcal G. H. Calmels ; Manufacturing typograP
  - blocks.
  - O. Southwell; Linotype machine.
  - P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - D. S. Kennedy; Linotype machine.
  - D. Petri-Palmedo; Linotype machine.
  - J. L. Firm; Stereotype-plate cas mechanism (Goss printing-press).
  - J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - P.T. Dodge ; Linotype machine.
  - D. S. Kennedy; Linotype machine. . lino-W. R. Speechley ; Serrated rule and) type-slug for tabular matter (LinotyPo
  - F. E. Bright; Linotype machine. and B. F. Curtis; Stereotype-plate casting finishing machine. Typo-
  - O. Mergenthaler and E Lawrenz ; com-graphic machine (producing a line posed of logotypes). , type-
  - O. Mergenthaler; Producing justified 3 lines.
  - R. J. Foster; Linotype machine. jor A. O. Taylor and F. A. Hackett; Mean locking printing-plates (clamp).
  - P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - H. C. Zenke ; Linotype machine.
  - J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - C. L. Grohmann; Linotype machine: type-W. Scott; Means for cooling stem casting boxes. . (auto
  - L. K. Scotford ; Numbering-machine licate, matic hand-stamp ; consecutive, duP triplicate, or repeat). . - (for
  - F. P. Howard; Linotype-machine moulds; Linotype). AS for
  - H. J. S. Gilbert-Stringer; Apparatype. equably justifying composed lines or logo
  - S. R. Withers; Type (characters an types with space cast in one).
  - O. Southwell; Linotype machine. -type J. H. Street and C. Karsten; -
  - machine space-bar.
  - B. Van Wie; Linotype machine.
  - F. A. Vinton; Linotype machine.
  - . P. G. Wolff ; Linotype machine. machine 796790 H. A. Agricola, Jr.; Typographic
  - (Linotype). (pr°'
  - 7Q682s(P- T. Dodge; Logotype machine, with 790025, ducing line of justified logotype 79 o blank added to logotype for space).
  - 796843 D. S. Kennedy; Linotype machine-
  - L. L. Kennedy; Linotype machine: C. Muehleisen ; Linotype machine.
  - D. Petri-Palmedo; Linotype macuuatus.
  - A. A. Low ; Type-distributing apPareotype W. Scott; Means for cooling st
  - casting boxes. . (tyP°
  - W. A. Porter; Numbering-machi
  - graphic ; double sliding case). Bering, C. F. Smith and P. R. Dill; NMivision machine (typographic ; “ eleven-o
  - 796844
  - 796850
  - 796859
  - 797008
  - 797022
  - 797370
  - 797381
  - 797405
  - 797411 to
  - for drop-cipher).
  - i R. Collins; Linotype mouthpiece.
  - ) ..inotyP
  - >P. T. Dodge ; Linotype machine —
  - ) Line (Lin°
  - 797413) Tine
  - 797436 D. S. Kennedy; Linotype machin
  - type). . hat
  - 797549 B. F. Bellows; Justifying-m
  - (Electric Compositor).
  - 797980 S. J. Sennett; Automatic
  - machine.
  - 798047 L. Quanchi; Matrix-blank-making
  - c %
  - co
  - a
  - (flong).
  - 798298 J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine-hine. . J. W. Lewis; Punch-cutting maceprintin T. S. Fox ; Apparatus for producing r plate designs (typographic).
  - P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine. .
  - D. S. Kennedy; Linotype machine for lino
  - J. M. Bryant; Compound space type machines (Typograph).
  - F. W. Hews ; Typecasting machin
  - 798354
  - 798668
  - 798994
  - 799007
  - 799030
  - 799054
- p.648 - vue 816/901
- - AMERICAN PATENTS.
  - 649
  - 00 0 co oo 00 NNT NI 666 00 (O000 V H
  - 000 00 00 V —
  - 00 U Ol -PH T O.
  - 000 CN - A0U H
  - CO O (0 00ONO V
  - 1905 (continued).
  - M. W. Morehouse; Motor attachment for
  - Linotype machines (Linotype).
  - W. Scott; Stereotype-casting mould.
  - J. Keenan ; Linotype machine.
  - E. E. Paddock; Linotype machine.
  - J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - F. Schreiner; Stereotype-matrix (from dry
  - sheets).
  - W. H. Scharf; Linotype machine.
  - J. Mayer and C. Albrecht; Typecasting machine type-mould.
  - P. T. Dodge ; Linotype machine.
  - L. Grohmann ; Linotype machine.
  - J. M. McGibney ; Type-holding device for 800023 . dating-machines.
  - 270 B. F. Bellows; Matrix-distributing mechanism
  - (ElectricCompositor).
  - B. F. Bellows ; Matrix-assembling mechanism (Electric Compositor).
  - R' J: Kittredge; Means for holding and registering stereotype and other printing-hlocks.
  - M. Barr ; Electrical means for detecting and
  - H N
  - o O
  - O H
  - O O
  - CO CO
  - or
  - en o
  - 00
  - announcing contact between two conducting bodies (for punch-cutting and engraving).
  - J. Engelhardt; Making printing-plates
  - — (stipple plates).
  - A. W. Wood; Composite printing-plate and making the same (stereotype and halftone).
  - L. C. Hay; Producing formes for rule-and-, figure tables (Linotype).
  - A. E. and E. Hall; Stereotype-casting .apparatus.
  - G. Reynolds ; Typesetting machine.
  - C. J. O’Brien; Linotype-machine attachment.
  - J. Keenan; Trimming-knife for Linotype machines.
  - * D. Tittle; Composing-stick.
  - H. Schmidt; Type-holder for rubber-type.
  - H- C. MacConnell; Machine for finishing + stereotype and other curved plates.
  - O H
  - — or
  - o o O0 00
  - — to coco or HIN
  - 2 H HO O O0O0
  - — , OH O OHV
  - — H HN N CO 00
  - O O 000
  - CO CO 00 CO CO 00 co co
  - co 0
  - on Co
  - O
  - N O 00 1O V 8,8.
  - 803928 T -ype and ouner curved plates.
  - 803906 % Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - 804020 T Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - 49 J R. Rogers; Logotype-machine (mould 80405 T for spaces for justified line of logotypes).
  - L R. Rogers; Logotype-machine (casting 8042- r Justified lines of logotypes).
  - 0 J- W. Butterfield and B. C. Schmitt; Stereo-80476. F type-plate and base-connexion (locking). 804820 a Peacock > Typecasting machine. 80483(4: H. Cruse; Matrix-making machine 805450 A (mangle-press method for stereotyping).
  - 9 A. Greenleaf; Justifying-mechanism for composing-machines (Linotype). J' R. and G. A. Pearson; Typecasting and setting machine (Pearson Typo-bar).
  - -0070 p‘ Petri-Palmedo; Linotype machine. 806504 a Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - 806520 p Achreiner; Stereotype-casting box. 807092 C - Dodge ; Slug-casting machine.
  - A. Smith ; Numbering-machine (numbers from left to right, prefix stationary ; thus: NO. 1, No. gg, or No. 100, instead of S07282 L.T° DOI, No. [99, or No. 099). °07566 p' & Kennedy ; Linotype machine. 008070 TV L d’Aix ; Line-casting machine.
  - , ST Caps and G- H- Vining; Stereotype-°08112 F Plate casting apparatus.
  - . T Pierpont; Standardizing or measuring 12404 ciachine for matrices.
  - . :. Rockstroh; Orig. No. 750395;
  - RI2416 Print---------- ’
  - , 6 CO C
  - D :. -ocKstron, i
  - I printing-plate holder.
  - hi Ruanchi ; Orig. No. 798047; Matrix-ank-making machine (flong).
  - 00 00 co 00 00
  - O O 0000
  - to ( 00 00 00 00
  - o N ON
  - to N ONH
  - ( (O HONU
  - F , 1906.
  - M w Barker; Printers’ composing-stick.
  - 1 'Morehouse; Linotype machine.
  - J. H" sogers ’ Linotype machine. ment Knoop; Linotype-machine attach-E emStorm; Printing-plate holder (plate-
  - C. F. Rockstroh ; Stereotype-plate holder.
  - No.
  - 809524
  - 809548
  - 810079 810153 810173 810205 811285
  - 811328
  - 811362 811372
  - 811508
  - 811623 811727
  - 811776
  - 812542
  - T. M. North; Trimming-mechanism for stereotype-casting machines.
  - L. B. Benton; Matrix and punch-cutting
  - machine.
  - F. A. Pettit; Linotype-knife wiper.
  - D. S. Kennedy; Linotype machine.
  - J. E. Saffery ; Linotype machine.
  - H. C. Hensel; Type-distributing mechanism.
  - J. G. Gosselin ; Typesetter’s machine. (For assisting hand-setter.)
  - C. F. Rockstroh; Printing-plate holder
  - (plate-clamp).
  - R. M. Bedell; Linotype machine.
  - D. Sr. and Jr., A. L. and J. W. Carlaw; Numbering-arrangement for use in connection with printing and numbering machines (for cheque-books, bill-heads, etc.).
  - G. H. Kendall; Printing-press numbering-mechanism (positioning and actuating).
  - J. S. Duncan ; Typesetting machine.
  - H. L. Koehler; Adjustable curved-type and cylinder.
  - H. L. Koehler; Interchangeable curved-type and plate.
  - E. V. Beals; Attachment for keyboard machines. (Linotype, matrix-making, or
  - 812585
  - 812586
  - 812708
  - 812924
  - 813261
  - 813848
  - 00 o
  - O
  - 813912
  - 814048
  - 814469 814542 814681
  - 815001
  - 815124
  - typesetting.)
  - C. Muehleisen ; Typographic machine.
  - C. Muehleisen; Linotype machine.
  - C. C. Webster; Machine for manufacturing printers’ leads (cutting plurality of short lengths).
  - S. G. Goss ; Stereotyping apparatus.
  - G. H. Vining; Producing folding matrices (of paper for mailing).
  - K. U. Whitted; Type (a thin type-face to rest on a block with descending parts top and bottom for clamping in combination with slugs).
  - T. E. Melvin; Typographic paper-punch (for locking up with type and producing holes in the printed matter).
  - D. B. Ray; Space for justifying lines of type.
  - F. A. Johnson; Type-packing mechanism
  - (Unitype).
  - C. Muehleisen; Linotype machine.
  - T. S. Homans ; Linotype machine.
  - W. J. Ennisson; Typesetting machine (Unitype).
  - E. Albert; Making matrices (for electrotyping).
  - L. K. Scotford; Numbering-machine (hand-stamp, consecutive, duplicate, triplicate, quadruplicate, or repeat).
  - R. C. Annand ; Manufacture of stereotypes
  - 815999
  - 816202
  - 816307
  - 816700
  - 816841
  - 816849
  - 817429
  - 817646
  - 818243
  - 818274
  - 818656
  - 818993
  - 819842
  - 820546 821076
  - 821127
  - 821296
  - 821342
  - 821885
  - 822089
  - and the like.
  - J. C. Wilson ; Time-printing and numbering-machine (hand operated for time, date and consecutive number).
  - W. S. Eaton; Engraving machine (electrically operated annunciation).
  - M. Barr ; Engraving machine tracer and tool (proportional to each other for punches or matrices).
  - R. M. Bedell; Linotype machine.
  - P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - J. D. Humphrey; Numbering and stamping machine (balanced head).
  - D. S. Kennedy; Linotype machine.
  - C. L. Grohmann; Linotype machine.
  - M. W. Morehouse; Linotype machine.
  - H. Barth; Producing printing-surfaces (stereotyping from etched plate).
  - M. Barr; Holder or quill for holding the rotating tools of engraving machines.
  - L. B. Benton; Matrix-trimming and similar machine.
  - A. J. Benjamin; Linotype machine.
  - C. B. Askew; Printing-type (stepped-type).
  - W. A. Schraubstadter; Type-perfecting mechanism.
  - P. E. Kent; Linotype machine.
  - E. S. Day and H. B. Hubbard; Linotype-machine attachment. ; D. B. Ray; Space for justifying lines of type.
  - ) F. Wicks; Punch-cutting or engraving apparatus.
- p.649 - vue 817/901
- - 650
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1906 {continued).
  - 822286 C. T. Libby; Linotype machine.
  - 823660 J. B. Allen; Linotype-machine casting-box.
  - 823788 R. F. Jacobs ; Machine for cutting orshorten-ing linotype-slugs.
  - 823888 J. W. McCann ; Dummy keyboard (for Linotype learners).
  - 824659 D. S. Kennedy; Linotype machine (Linotype).
  - 824704 J. B. Bell; Linotype-machine mould.
  - 824705 J. B. Bell; Linotype machine.
  - 825054 T. S. Homans; Linotype machine.
  - 825162 C. B. Smith; Geneva-gear numbering and recording machine (prints numbers from wheels).
  - 826578 F. A. Johnson; Typesetting and justifying machine.
  - 826593 M. W. Morehouse; Linotype machine (Linotype).
  - 827238 E. L. Holmes; Linotype machine.
  - 827485 F. W. Weeks; Line-holder and type-chase.
  - 827486 F. W. Weeks; Line-holder and cylindrical type-chase.
  - 827872 L. E. Levy; Matrix-making machine.
  - 828059 W. A.Schraubstadter ; Typecasting machine.
  - 828080 H. S. Wilson; Typecasting machine.
  - 828323 G. Kretzchmar; Linotype-machine attachment.
  - 828449 J. S. Bancroft; Perforating machine (Mono-type).
  - 828450 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Typecasting machine (Monotype).
  - 828451 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Composing-machine (Monotype).
  - 828470 J. French; Perforator line-measuring mechanism (Monotype).
  - 828541 P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - 828553 D. S. Kennedy; Linotype machine.
  - 828564 C. Muehleisen; Typographic machine (assembling from a plurality of magazines ; Linotype).
  - 828763 M. W. Morehouse; Linotype machine.
  - 828768 A. J. Parker; Mounting-board for stereotypes and other plates.
  - 829157 F. A. Johnson; Type-distributing machine. 829202 S. G. Goss; Stereotyping apparatus.
  - 829260 W. C. Downing ; Numbering-machine (hand).
  - 829290 D. A. Poe ; Linotype machine.
  - 829768 T. F. Dixon; Machine for forming printers’ rules (rolling-in grooves to restore to height-to-paper).
  - 829868 T. S. Homans; Linotype machine.
  - 830350 W. G. Middleton; Linotype machine.
  - 830358 P. G. Nuernberger and G. Rettig, Jr. Typecasting mould (pivotal).
  - 830436 T. S. Homans; Linotype machine (Linc-type).
  - 830445 J. A. Loyster; Typographic numbering-machine (perforated-strip controlled).
  - 831003 F. Johannesen; Linotype machine. 831182 W. D. Palmer; Printers’ border (straight, or curved continuous rules and means of locking).
  - 832033 W. N. Bowman; Slug-counter (Linotype). 832396) to ) C. T. Libby; Linotype machine.
  - 8323981
  - 832769 F. E. Bright; Linotype machine.
  - 832792 J. G. Holbourns and H. A. Longhurst; Linotype-machine escapement-mechanism.
  - 833477 A. G. Nelson ; Printers’ rule gauge (for catalogue work).
  - 833479 A. R. Noyes ; Linotype machine.
  - 833955 A. Dow ; Typesetting and justifying machine and the art relating thereto.
  - 833956 A. Dow; Type-composing and justifying machine.
  - 833957 A. Dow ; Typesetting machine.
  - 833958 A. Dow; Case-handling device for typesetting machines.
  - 834123 A. Greenleaf; Typographic machine (turning Linotype-matrices through a right angle as they descend; Linotype).
  - 834164 W. P. Quentell ; Typesetting machine. 834397 F. McClintock ; Type-distributing machine.
  - 834556 E. G. Bates; Plunger-operated numbering-machine (see 676084).
  - 834777 R. C. Vetter ; Type-making machine. 834835 W. G. Middleton; Linotype machine.
  - 834846 D. Petri-Palmedo; Linotype machine/
  - No.
  - 834971 F. C. L. d’Aix ; Line-casting machine.
  - 835256 J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine. Jing
  - 835346 A. G. Baker; Typesetting and distripe
  - 835795
  - 835993
  - 836026
  - 836053
  - 836332
  - 836349
  - 836374
  - 836687
  - 836697
  - 836698
  - 836710
  - machine. der
  - W. Laycock; Type and type-6 (rubber-type). ting-
  - A. J. Wadsworth; Monotype perfora machine keyboard.
  - H. C. Gammeter; Type (Multigraph), (for
  - A. Schiepe ; Rotary casting-machine 1 small articles, especially type). line.
  - F. McClintock; Type-distributing macpipe L. Ward; Adjustable liner for Lin 3 machine (Linotype).
  - P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine. . feving F. A. Johnson; Typesetting and just 3 machine. m.
  - F. McClintock ; Type-justifying mechan
  - F. McClintock ; Typesetting machine, oved
  - J. R. Rogers; Line-printing slug 85 can-face to receive a rule for printing
  - cellations ; Linotype). (drop* 836742 P. R. Dill; Numbering-machine 1 cipher for consecutive numbering). +pe). 837126 J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine (Linochines 837127 J. R. Rogers; Matrix for linotype mac (Linotype). (Lino-
  - 837226 T. S. Homans; Linotype machine ( type).
  - 837394 G. Fischer; Metallic matrix-plate. 837837 T. S. Homans; Linotype machine. Imn-837879 F. Pierce ; Forming an integral type-co Taring 838039 R. Miehle ; Means for holding and regts printing-plates (plate-clamp). type 838062 F. W. Sutcliffe and C. Holliwell; Lin
  - machine.
  - 838064% F- w- Sutcliffe; Linotype machine. :
  - 838512 C. Wagner; Means for holding Prl° plates (plate-clamp).
  - 838609 P. T. Dodge ; Linotype machine. tope-838741 T. M. North; Means for casting stere 3 plates. . (for
  - 838905 J. R. Rogers; Matrix-casting machie). casting Linotype-matrices ; LinotyPaving 8390II J. W. Lewis; Pantographic engrices: machine (for punches and ma Keystone Typefoundry).
  - 839484 L. L. Kennedy; Linotype machine. 839504 F. McClintock; Type-justifying macn (for
  - 839676 H. A. Toren; Printers’ slug and qua setting inclined lines). . Lino” R12494 H. B. Bartlett; Orig. No. 741294 i type machine. Mattis” R12545 H. C. Hansen; Orig. No. 727355 i M truing apparatus.
  - 1907. Lotype
  - 839924 J. L. Firm; Casting-box for stere apparatus. ine-bal
  - 840346 A. J. Kletzker and J. G. Goesel ; on machine. (Characters formed in Tope-bal the softened edges of metallic t)P blanks). . (pro”
  - 840775 S. A. C. Kristensen; Stereotypmg duction of matrices). . ensoni
  - 841098 W. S. Aikman and H. C. Stey shoes):
  - Printers’ furniture (plate and corner achine 841457 L. Schmidt ; Single-type casting 5). (compound body-slide for low-spashe (for 841656 W. Armstrong; Engraving macn dies for making typewriter-type)- prin" 842198 A. W. Harrison; Mounting-block T ing-plates.mcins“ 842297 C. A. Bonfils and H. G. Bradt ; Proog plate combined line and half-tone printuindrice, 842690 E. B. Oswalt; Printing-type (with CYarkinb hole and rotatable type fitted ; for
  - costs and prices). Anishi
  - 842842 C. C. Webster; Machine for ends’ printers'leads (cutting and smooth )
  - 843002 J. A. Corey; Printing-plate holder e dist 843173 D. B. Ray; Type-channel for tyP
  - buting machines. .
  - 843241 B. Van Wie; Linotype mould. machi 843304 L. Schmidt; Single-type castingices f
  - (two combined deciphering-op. useo1 permitting paper-controller to D the same order as produced).
- p.650 - vue 818/901
- - AMERICAN
  - PATENTS.
  - to
  - 00 00
  - 1907 (continued).
  - F. H. Brown, J. E. Hanrahan and G. A. Boyden; Type-making machine.
  - F. H. Brown, J. E. Hanrahan and G. A. Boyden; Matrix-making plate and block attached.
  - F. H. Brown, J. E. Hanrahan and G. A. Boyden ; Matrix-making means to position .plates and blocks.
  - W. D. Palmer ; Printers’ border (see 831182).
  - E. Mertens; Apparatus for producing Printing-surfaces (repetition of photo-
  - No. 851238 851504
  - co in 02 co
  - 0000
  - S8
  - 844==- n graphs on same plate).
  - 84422 s M. Des Jardins ; Type-justifier (Unitype). 844222€ M- Des Jardins; Type-justifying machine 844558, (Unitype).
  - 84456. B' M. Des Jardins; Type-justifier (Unitype). 844562)
  - to D. M. Des Jardins ; Type-justifying machine 044564) (Unitype).
  - 844565)
  - to W. J. Ennisson ; Type-justifying machine 8445672 (Thorne).
  - 844568. W; J. Ennisson; Type-justifying machine 844229 (Unitype).
  - 457° E. Wentscher; Justifying-apparatus (Uni-8445 6 - type).
  - 4 E. I. Rice; Printers’ lead-cutter (for rules 8440-4 sand slugs also).
  - "VN. Bowman; Linotype-machine attach-
  - 8 ment
  - 844968 L. F. Smith; Half-tone printing-plate.
  - 3 E. Spitzer ; Producing printing-plates (photo-845106 T mechanical ; typographic etching process). 8452)2 J R. Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - 7 K- J. Foster and H. Lauzon; Linotype 84526- .machine.
  - 84528- P B. Ray; Type-distributing machine.
  - 84530- C S. Wright; Typesetting machine.
  - 7 C.E. Marlatt ; Mechanism for throwing lines of matrices into Linotype-machines.
  - A. Whitehead and G. Porteus ; Manufacture E of stereotype-matrices.
  - Brown, J. E. Hanrahan and G. A.
  - Boyden; Matrix for casting type-characters.
  - Brown, J. E. Hanrahan and G. A.
  - Boyden; Matrix-plate for typecasting machines.
  - T.H. Brown, J. E. Hanrahan and G. A. Boyden ; Matrix for casting spaces and quads.
  - Brown, J. E. Hanrahan and G. A. 1 Boyden; Type-mould and matrix.
  - 00 00 00
  - OUA OH NU
  - Co on co
  - Ul
  - to co CO 1 (O O ( 10 + co co
  - J- R. Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - 846055) J' R. Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - 846584 C. T. Libby; Linotype machine.
  - 8470)7 J- Allan; Linotype machine.
  - 848308 3 McNamara ; Monoline composing-machine.
  - _ D. S. Kennedy; Linotype machine. 8483-0
  - 8483,0 D Petri-Palmedo; Logotype machine.
  - 848320 A. M. Bedell; Linotype machine (Linotype).
  - 848349 n G. Clark; Linotype machine.
  - “.Drummond and W. C. Lieberknecht 848771 T Typecasting machine.
  - 848808 J Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - 848810/ F. B. Converse,
  - 33 L. Kern ; Preparing'half-tone printing-plates 848806 avoiding making ready). . .
  - y KW. Goeb; Clamp for clamping type in 849142 F type-galleys. - ...
  - T. A. Langen; Apparatus for exactly Printing or impressing type (in conjunction 849795 with clocks, calculating machines, etc.). 849830 P Kennedy; Linotype machine.
  - TH. Brown, J. E. Hanrahan and G. A. 85009a t Boyden; Matrix-backing., 850x14 D McNamara ; Monoline-machine matrix. 85080- R S. Kennedy; Linotype machine.
  - 3 W. H. Stedham and J. N. Miller; Treating 850894 p PEinting-plates.
  - *G. Bates; Numbering-machine plunger 850895 p (typographic).
  - • G. Bates; Numbering-machine (typo-graphic).
  - 3 00 00 C
  - Jr. ; Justifying-mechanism.
  - 851855
  - 852162
  - 852215
  - 852224
  - 852642
  - 852786
  - T. S. Homans; Linotype machine.
  - H. Drewell; Mechanism for perforating automatic typesetting machine operating-bands.
  - L. B. Benton; Automatic typecasting machine.
  - F. H. Brown, J. E. Hanrahan and G. A. Boyden ; Mould for casting type, spaces and quads.
  - S. Boisseau ; Treating printing-plates.
  - P. T. Dodge; Producing logotypes.
  - H. Winter; Stereotype-plate-making apparatus.
  - W. K. Hodgman; Printing-plate holder
  - (clip).
  - -J-___W. S. Coe; Linotype machine.
  - 852905) F. H. Richards; Typographic machine 853208, (power-driven typewriter).
  - 853540 J. S. Duncan; Metal-type (Addressograph).
  - ' P. G. Nuernberger and G. Rettig, Jr. ; Type-
  - 852822
  - 853647
  - 853749
  - 853752
  - 853754
  - 853801
  - 854095
  - 854456
  - 854457
  - casting mould.
  - B. Van Wie; Linotype machine.
  - H. F. Bechman ; Machine or casting-box for making stereotype-plates.
  - H. F. Bechman; Stereotyping and type-metal founding apparatus.
  - D. S. Kennedy; Linotype machine.
  - L. Lebrun; Typesetting and distributing
  - 854458/
  - 854459
  - 854460 ]
  - 854675 1
  - 855225
  - 855731
  - 856026
  - machine.
  - F. H. Brown, J. E. Hanrahan and G. A. Boyden ; Producing matrices.
  - F. H. Brown, J. E. Hanrahan and G. A. Boyden ; Matrix-making master-block.
  - F. H. Brown, J. E. Hanrahan and G. A.
  - Boyden; Master-block for producing
  - S56539
  - 856815
  - 856898 857531
  - 857712
  - 857728
  - 857934
  - 857974
  - 857976
  - 858141
  - 858513
  - 858584
  - 858585
  - 858755 858756
  - 859053
  - 859170
  - 859202
  - 859583 859587
  - . matrices.
  - F. H. Brown, J. E. Hanrahan and G. A. Boyden ; Type-matrix.
  - E. Spitzer; Printing-plate (typographic etching process).
  - F. H. Brown, J. E. Hanrahan and G. A. Boyden ; Typecasting-machine mould.
  - F. H. Richards; Typographic machine (impression-device).
  - F. H. Brown, J. E. Hanrahan and G. A. Boyden; Pump-mechanism for type-casting machines.
  - W. I. Ludlow; Typograph (machine for casting slugs from assembled matrices; Ludlow Typograph).
  - C. W. Seaward; Gas-governor for type-machines and the like.
  - J. McNamara ; Monoline machine.
  - M. A. McKee; Printing-plate and preparing the same (making ready).
  - J. S. Bancroft ; Type-machine mould.
  - E. A. Eschinger; Type-mould (Monotype).
  - H. P. Hamburg; Hand-numbering machine (hand for repeating, consecutive, or duplicate numbering).
  - W. Bancroft; Record-strip or controller for composing, typecasting and other machines.
  - E. G. Bates ; Numbering and dating machine (hand-stamp).
  - R. M. Bedell; Linotype machine.
  - T. S. Homans; Linotype machine.
  - A. Dow; Type-distributing machine.
  - A. Dow ; Typesetting machine.
  - F. H. Richards; Type-bar blank.
  - F. H. Richards; Type-bar (vertically grooved sides).
  - J. S. Duncan; Printing-plate (Addresso-graph).
  - P. T. Dodge ; Linotype machine.
  - J. A. Corey ; Catch-block or mounting-block for printing-surfaces (clip).
  - A. Schiepe ; Typesetting machine.
  - A. B. Sherwood; Surface-printing plate
  - (offset).
  - 8596183 J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - 859647 P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - 859661 F. P. Howard; Ejector-blade for Linotype and kindred machines (Linotype).
  - 860166) G. H. Ward; Machine for distributing
  - 860167) printers’ leads.
  - 860671 S. A. C. Kristensen; Production of matrices for stereotyping and the like.
  - 860739 G. M. Darell; Gauge attachment for lead-cutters.
- p.651 - vue 819/901
- - 652
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1907 (continued).
  - 860844 R. C. Annand; Stereotype-plate casting-apparatus.
  - 861430) F. H. Brown, J. E. Hanrahan and G. A. E-2720 ? Boyden; Sorts-machines for making type. R 12726) (R 12726, Orig. Nos. 861430 and 861431). 861770 J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine (Typograph).
  - 861794 O. G. Bartusch; Numbering-apparatus (automatically covering non-prefix part to prevent inking without using a frisket).
  - 861864 E. C. Lampson ; Lifter-attachment for typesetting and typecasting machines.
  - 862511 F. H. Richards; Type-bar and typographic forme (device for securing slugs or type-bars).
  - 862800 W. E. Brand; Typecasting and composing machine; strip-controlled; 185 claims (Monoman Typesetter).
  - 863442 W. P. Quentell; Typesetting machine.
  - 863453 O. G. C. Schmitt; Typesetting machine.
  - 863754 D. A. Poe; Linotype machine.
  - 863965 A. J. Benton; Composing-mechanism for type-machines.
  - 863973 S. H. Emanuel; Printers’ furniture (securing wide-ribbon printing in imitation typewriting).
  - 864030 F. H. Pierpont; Machine for grinding type-matrices and other bodies.
  - 864064 H. F. Bechman; Sereotype-plate casting apparatus.
  - 864087 H. M. Duncan, C. H. Pritchard and C. R. Macauley; Typecasting machine.
  - 864430 F. H. Richards; Typographic machine (impression-device).
  - 864519 H. Drewell; Apparatus for the electric operation of typesetting machines.
  - 864564 J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - 864790 G. H. Lang ; Numbering or marking machine (for printing laundry-marks).
  - 864802 B. C. Schmitt; Stereotype-plate and base.
  - 865073 J. B. Bell; Fount of matrices (self-spacing for linotype tabular work).
  - 865086 P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - 865565 S. Brown; Type-fount or holder.
  - 865838 F. Wicks Machine for composing and casting logotypes.
  - 865846 C. A. Albrecht; Releasing-device for the matrices in composing-machines with two or more magazines placed one above the other.
  - 866343 H. Drewell; Mechanism for perforating the operating-bands of automatic typesetting machines.
  - 866419 O. G. Bartusch; Numbering-apparatus (simultaneously printing more than one set of numbers ; see 708295).
  - 866928 R. Grieser; Printing-plate chain (addressing-machine).
  - 867277 F. A. Johnson; Typecasting machine.
  - 867867 E. V. Beals; Justifying-mechanism for type-matrices and types.
  - 868538 H. Drewell; Linotype or composing-machine.
  - 868676 M. J. Lynch; Printers’ composing-stick (for rules, borders, leads, etc.).
  - 868754 H. O. Barth, G. H. Riehl and W. Honegger; Printers’ brass rule corner (L-section with overhanging quadrant).
  - 868961 E. F. Baum; Flong for stereotyping.
  - 869607 J. S. Weyl ; Stereotype-plate holder (clamp).
  - 870019 P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine.
  - 870699 E. Terrell; Typesetting machine.
  - 870926 E. V. Beals; Composing-mechanism for printing-bar, matrix-making, and typesetting machines (co-operation of multiple finger-boards).
  - 870994 C. F. Rockstroh; Printing-plate holder (clip).
  - 871020 L. Allen; Composing-machine (see 805580; Pearson Typo-bar).
  - 871080 J. S. Bancroft; Perforating-machine key-board-mechanism (Monotype).
  - 871081 J. S. Bancroft; Keyboard-mechanism for perforating and other machines (Monotype).
  - 871721 A. P. Miller; Making a printing-plate by photo-engraving (altering plate to avoid making ready).
  - 871899 J- P. Tihon ; Distributor of double-magazine Linotype machines.
  - No. 871902 872223 872630 872794
  - 872967
  - 873203 873251
  - 873642 873736 874262
  - J. T. Wilson; Typesetting-machine gauges.
  - F. B. Converse, Jr.; Justifying-mechan-
  - M. A. McKee ; Treating printing-plates.
  - E. C. Bruen; Forming plate-high tow printing-plates. . for
  - B. L. Parkinson; Assembling-elevator Linotype machines.
  - G. G. Babcock; Linotype machine. . e
  - C. T. Libby and G. G. Babcock; Linopy machine.
  - G. E. Wallin; Linotype-slug receiver.
  - S. E. Dittman; Printing-plate clamp- iting
  - O. Uhlworm; Typecasting and 56 machine.
  - 874353 W. H. Welsh ; Producing matrices.
  - 874354 W. H. Welsh ; Producing matrices. Chine
  - 875212 F. H. Richards; Typographic mac (impression machine). 04;
  - R12622 H. G. Gammeter; Orig. No. 722tters machine for duplicating circular “aims to appear as if typewritten; 278 (Multigraph).
  - 1908. .
  - 876030 W. S. Warnock; Printers’ furniture (she
  - metal). ... and
  - 876521 S. Brown; Flexible-forme for holding
  - assembling type. ldiBg
  - 876522 S. Brown; Flexible-strip forme for no
  - type. able
  - 876524 F. J. Caine and G. H. Milton; Adius trimming-knife for Linotype machines- oted
  - 876913 R. N. Rogers; Envelope-addresser (as ‘and to take address-plates from a stack to re-stack them). king
  - 877653 G. H. Lang; Numbering, or me machine (see 864790). . aching
  - 877775 C. E. Hopkins; Apparatus for " stereotype-plates. . A.
  - 878185 F. H. Brown, J. E. Hanrahan and —
  - 00 co
  - 878663
  - 879239
  - 880264
  - 880341
  - 880346
  - 880568
  - Boyden; Typecasting means. . (time H. Abbott; Time-printing mechanism cord of day of initial and final elapsed and date of each ; Calculagraph). Iction F. F. W. Oldfield ; Mould for the PrOCblocks of base-blocks for mounting printing" (interlocking serrations).
  - J. B. Bell; Linotype machine. type-
  - C. A. Albrecht; Linotype and other casting machines, type*
  - E. Terrell ; Assembling-attachment 1° setting machines. , for
  - R. F. Wilson; Assembler-slide bra
  - linotype machines. ine.
  - H. Pearce; Linotype-machine magazine.
  - 880779 F. B. Converse, Jr.; Linotype mace-veans H. M. Frysinger and W. W. Barrett i curved for setting type-compositions on lines. holde'
  - J. S. Duncan; Metal-type bar (Addressograph). mould:
  - D. Petri-Palmedo ; Linotype-machine (im” F. H. Richards; Typographic macni pression-device). er pro,
  - A. Lyle and C. Owens; Machine Tetal for ducing printing-surfaces (raised in addressing). (hand
  - W. C. Downing; Numbering-machin
  - CO 00 0
  - O:
  - 881467
  - 881716
  - 881955
  - 882704
  - N 0 0 0 1 or CO CO 00 00 00 co coco
  - stamp; see 829260). 1
  - P. T. Dodge; Linotype machine. yboar" J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl i - 3 1.
  - perforating-machine (Monotype): gecoTO 883377 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl: 7702531 strip composing-machine (see ‘ (Monotype). Type
  - 883378 7 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indan' . R 12819 5 machine (Reissued) (Monotype)- mpos!” J. R. Rogers; Typecasting and c
  - machine (Linotype). .casti
  - D. S. Kennedy; Galley for tn
  - machines (Linotype). . of sin D. Petri-Palmedo; Casting lines 1 type. . e mal
  - J. O. De Wolf; Printing-Platble met. apparatus (delivering impression for new against a matrix, curved plates papers). . : T)P
  - P. G. Nuernberger and G. Rettig, J ' ’ casting mould.
  - 883425
  - 884022
  - 884293
  - 884369
  - 884754
- p.652 - vue 820/901
- - AMERICAN PATENTS.
  - 653
  - No. 1908 (continued).
  - 884934 D. S. Knox; Signal attachment for lino-
  - 88- - type machines.
  - 05556 J. G. Holbourns and H. A. Longhurst;
  - 88.-Linotype machine. .
  - 3777 T. F. Muldoon ; Cabinet for liners and blades
  - 88-. . for Linotype machines. .
  - 88224° M. A. McKee ; Stereotype (making ready).
  - °49 H. G. McCool; Syllabic keyboard for type-
  - 886, - writers and typesetting machines.
  - 886327 E. H. Richards; Type-making mechanism.
  - 328 F. H. Richards; Apparatus, for making types and lines of type (forming by aid of 886, - external heat). . , 886329 F. H. Richards; Manufacture of type-bars. °330 F. H. Richards; Mechanism for making 886, - types and lines of type (see 886328). , 33T F. H. Richards; Manufacture of type and 88658, type-bars.
  - - 3 H. Degener ;
  - and
  - -; Spacer for typesetting 886584) line-casting machines.
  - o * 1 to Nr O w cc H 1 2002 A A co co co Co CO 00 00 Co 0 0
  - A. Dow; Linotype machine.
  - or
  - for
  - W. H. Scharf; Linotype machine.
  - A. Dow ; Linotype-machine matrix.
  - A. Dow; Linotype-machine spacer justifier.
  - J. McNaughton; Type and means s securing the same. K.C. Annand; Apparatus for casting curved
  - 00
  - CO ( (OK N C CM
  - ON100 co ODHNO H *1 0c O 00000 O 00 00 0 0 0 CO C0 Co co co C Co
  - 88737, R stereotype-plates. . . 88-6-3 A- C. Annand; Stereotyping-machine. . .
  - C. E. Wallin; Wide-spacing attachment for 88--,, . Linotype machines.
  - C. Annand; Casting of curved stereotype-888176) plates. 8881773D. S. Kennedy; Linotype machine.
  - 402 T. S. Homans; Linotype machine (Lino-888649) type). 888650s H. Petersen; Linotype machine.
  - 880026 F. B. Converse; Linotype machine. 8802/4 F. E. Wallin ; Linotype-slug trimmer.
  - J.G. Holbourns and H. A. Longhurst;
  - - Linotype machine.
  - X Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - H. Scharf ; Linotype machine.
  - P S. Kennedy; Linotype machine.
  - V. Sigurdsson ; Typecasting machine.. A.J. Benton; Leading or slugging device - (see 625998 ; Monotype). , JM. Dove, J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahli 890177) Type-composing machine. 800178, J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - 890363 F. B. Converse, Jr.; Linotype machine.
  - 4 F. B. Converse, Jr.; Type-distributing 89026- E machine. 890266 B. Converse, Jr.; Distributing-machine.
  - TB. Converse, Jr.; Matrix-assembling and 890260 - distributing machine.
  - 9 J. Froehlich; Sorting-mechanism for lino-890282 T type machines (Linotype). 89030) T Kennedy; Linotype machine.
  - 3 J. R. Rogers; Distributor for linotype 890425 T machines (Linotype). 090706 T'D: Homans; Linotype machine.
  - . J. Pinel; Printing-type casting and setting
  - T machine.
  - LE. Morningstar; Matrix and method of c forming same (stereotyping).
  - ~.Huff, E. B. White and J. T. Carter ; A -YDe-mould.
  - #* Schiepe; Typecasting machine.
  - •: H. Richards; Typographic machine wompression-device).
  - A. Roseberry and P. S. Junkin; Liner F for moulds for linotype machines.
  - . -. Richards; Typographic machine (im-894265 R Pression-device). , 3 * Geiser and A. Schatzmann; Printing-°94398 H Plate (tone-plates).
  - 894446, : - Rouse; Printers' rule- and lead-cutter. 893247' W. J. Knoll ; Printing-plate holder (clamp).
  - T B. F. Bellows; Spacer-selecting and -re-Teasing mechanism for use in justifying 896381 A wetrix-or type-lines (Electric Compositor). • W. Hanigan; Printers' type.
  - co co co co co Co to to t VO (
  - N N NH H H
  - co O OC O ——
  - o Co No N V
  - H On N O V
  - No.
  - 896487
  - 896908
  - 897051
  - 897358
  - 898141
  - 898836
  - 899019
  - 899374
  - 899843
  - 901111
  - 901443
  - 901478
  - 902134
  - 902196
  - 902197
  - J. C. Urbank; Printers’ furniture (exten-dible).
  - A. W. Hanigan ; Typecasting machine.
  - W. and H. B. Bell ; Manufacture of half-tone printing-blocks.
  - R. C. Elliott; Typecasting and composing machine.
  - W. W. Sawyer; Engraving machine (opera-ting two heads; Bates Mach. Co.).
  - B. B. Conrad; Numbering-machine (see 521001 and 388307; American Numbering Machine Co.).
  - H. G. Bartholomew and H. M. Bussy; Apparatus for the production of process printing-plates (half-tone, line and pro-cess printing-plates).
  - H. F. Bechman; Stereotype-plate casting-apparatus.
  - L. Roberts; Typesetting and distributing machine.
  - J. L. Lee; Producing stereotype-bases (with soft nailing-strips).
  - I. Hasselstrom ; Numbering-machine (num-bering backwards or forwards).
  - J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - H. Burris; Typographers' composing and founding machine (automatically charg-ing the melting-pot).
  - i I. Baas; Type-mould.
  - ‘ I. Baas; Typecasting mould.
  - J. S. Duncan; Printing-plate (Addresso-
  - 902281 .
  - graph). .
  - 902326% F. H. Richards; Mechanism for operating 00232-adjustable work-performing-members.
  - 902328 F. H. Richards; Mounting for adjustable
  - 902329
  - 902339
  - * working-members (for impression-devices). F. H. Richards; Mechanical movement
  - 902719
  - (securing alinement).
  - C. Spielmann and F. W. Wicht ; Consecutive-numbering apparatus (plurality of sets of numbering-wheels; any set arranged parallel or normal).
  - J. S. Duncan ; Type-holder (Addressograph).
  - 902861) W. Danenhower ; Type-washing machine. 902862) 90294I A. L. Case ; Stereotyping-machine.
  - — O. V. Sigurdsson; Typecasting and com
  - 903331
  - 903342
  - posing machine.
  - B. F. Upham; Bending printing-surfaces (elongating flat plate to register with one bent cylindrical).
  - J. R. Rogers ; Linotype machine.
  - F. B. Converse, Jr.; Justifying-mechanism.
  - J. S. Thompson; Typecasting and distri-buting machine.
  - W. E. Chalfant ; Matrix and holder for the same (for securing large-body matrices).
  - H. A. Reynolds; Matrix notch-chamfering machine.
  - H. A. Reynolds; Matrix corner-chamfering machine.
  - T. Draper; Printers' composing-stick.
  - J. O. De Wolf; Making metallic printing-plates (for newspapers).
  - E. F. Linke; Typesetting machine, etc.
  - 903405
  - 903677
  - 903917
  - 904510
  - 904995
  - 904996
  - 905060 905155
  - 905196
  - 905516
  - (Unitype).'
  - H. P. Hamburg; Hand numbering-machine. 905541 D. S. Kennedy; Line-casting machine. 905987 B. B. Conrad; Numbering-machine (hand-stamp, adjustable; automatic or lever-
  - 006305 y.Dncan; Type-chase (Addressograph). 906586 B. F. Upham; Bending printing-surfaces (making bent cylindrical or flat plates to
  - 907128
  - 907754
  - 907820
  - register).
  - B. B. Conrad; Numbering-machine (hand-stamp with readable setting).
  - O. H. Desmarais; Linotype-machine attach-ment.
  - J. Kurten ; Stereotype printing-plate cooling-device.
  - 908519 908593
  - 908634 908870 909115
  - 1909.
  - J. S. Thompson ; Typecasting machine.
  - M. S. Miller; Linotype-machine lines.
  - H. S. Wilson ; Type-perfecting machine.
  - W. H. Kolvenbach ; Type-checker.
  - W. A. Porter; Numbering-machine (typo-graphic; bottom plunger).
- p.653 - vue 821/901
- - 654
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1909 (continued).
  - 909832 B. F. Upham ; Method of bending electrotype-plates.
  - 910317 C. F. Rockstroh ; Printing-plate holder or bed-spacer.
  - 910489 J. E. Billington and C. Holliwell ; Trimming-mechanism for Linotype machines (Lino-type).
  - 910611 F. M. Turek; Printing-press numberingdevice (for rotary press ; see 830751).
  - 910866 F. Sander; Numbering-machine (typographic; Amer. Numbering Mach. Co.).
  - 911421 F. Maurer; Machine for the production of stereotype-matrices.
  - 911612 F. H. Richards; Type and type-bar making machine.
  - 911681 F. H. Richards; Typographical machine.
  - 911882 D. W. Jones; Casting of curved stereotype printing-plates.
  - 911887 H. Larsen ; Linotype machine.
  - 912056 H. A. Armstrong; Typesetting-machine attachment.
  - 912092 M. A. Droitcour; Making printing-plates.
  - 912093 M. A. Droitcour; Printing-plate (celluloid or pyroxilin).
  - 912169 F. H. Richards; Type and type-bar making machine.
  - 912180 W. H. Scharf; Linotype machine.
  - 912228 P. Bunau-Varilla ; Improvements in machine for moulding printing-plates of blocks.
  - 912961 W. T. Hoofnagle; , Machine for forming justified lines of type.
  - 913035 W. Neasham ; Printing-plate holder.
  - 913224 E. Mirus; Typesetting and distributing machine.
  - 913280 B. Gisevius ; Producing printing-plates.
  - 913306 F. H. Richards; Typographic machine key-mechanism.
  - 913307 F. H. Richards; Typographic machine key-mechanism.
  - 913447 C. A. Albrecht and C. Muehleisen ; Linotype and other typecasting machines.
  - 913546 P. G. Nuernberger and G. Rettig, Jr. ; Type-casting machine.
  - 913627 H. Degener; Line-setting and casting machine.
  - 913736 W. J. Knoll; Printing-plate holder.
  - 913743 W. W. Lininger ; Typesetting machine.
  - 913851 W. G. Reynolds; Typesetting machine.
  - 915538 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Type-casting machine.
  - 915553 J. B. Church; Composing-machine controller.
  - 915666 O. Dodge; Producing printing-surfaces (intaglio, or relief, building electrolytically).
  - 915748 H. Drewell ; Means for electrically operating typesetting machines.
  - 916488 F. H. Richards ; Typographical machine.
  - 916679 H. Degener; Linotype matrix.
  - 916782 F. H. Richards; Typographical machine.
  - 917975 J. S. Thompson ; Typecasting machine.
  - 918515 H. Drewell; Linotype machine.
  - 918572 C. K. Mayer; Linotype-machine copy-holder.
  - 918739 H. Degener; Typesetting and casting machine.
  - 918806 J. W. Willis; Producing relief plates for press-printing by the method known as photo-engraving (etching).
  - 919024 D. S. Kennedy; Linotype machine. 919215) to 7 F. H. Richards ; Making types and type-bars. 919220)
  - 919221 F. H. Richards; Typographical machine.
  - 919222 F. H. Richards; Making type-bars.
  - 919223) F. H. Richards; Making types and type-919224) bars.
  - 919225 F. H. Richards; Typographical machine feed-mechanism.
  - 919226 F. H. Richards; Making types and type-bars.
  - 919227 F. H. Richards; Type-bar machine. 919228.F. H. Richards; Die and die-mechanism (for making wrought types and type-bars).
  - 919229 F. H. Richards; Type-bar machine.
  - 919230) to > F. H. Richards; Making types and type-bars. 919232) 9192337 F. H. Richards; Feed-mechanism (for 9192345 making type-bars).
  - No. ting a
  - 919235 F. H. Richards; Means for impartinks, movement to type-bars or type-bar ble bar
  - 919236 F. H. Richards; Manufacture of type
  - blanks. Lars.
  - 919237 F. H. Richards ; Making types and type-0 919238 F. H. Richards ; Making type-bars. 919239 F. H. Richards; Wrought-metal type-pa ' 919240 F. H. Richards; Type-bar machine. 919241 F. H. Richards; Making types and 5 bars.
  - 919242 919243
  - 919408
  - 919805 919951
  - 919957 920021
  - 920086 920195 920617
  - 920917
  - 921063
  - 921064
  - 921065
  - 921067 921156 921600
  - 921753
  - 921946
  - 922129 922632 923131
  - 923252
  - 923275
  - 923998 924000
  - 924001 924243 924326
  - 924539
  - F. H. Richards; Type-bar. ting F. H. Richards; Die and die-operen mechanism (for making type-bars). . or H. Weiniger; Machine for composing setting-up type.
  - C. Albrecht; Linotype machine. and E. M. M. Retaux; Type setting-up casting machine.
  - J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine. ting B. Cade; Composing and line-cas machine.
  - A. Savarese ; Composing-machine.
  - I. Schonberg; Typecasting machine. ono-J. McNamara ; Line-casting machine (M line). hic
  - B. B. Conrad and F. Sander; Typogra” numbering-machine (see 910866). im B. F. Bellows; Line-justifying mechaitor). (temporary spacers; Electric Compos m. B. F. Bellows ; Linotype-making mechanism. B. F.Bellows: Matrix-distributing mechan
  - M. S. Bentley; Matrix-drying press.
  - S. H. Perky ; Printing-type. sing
  - J. S. Duncan; Printing-plate malt machine. . ting-
  - B. F. Upham ; Fastener for securing p°n plates to type-beds (clamp). . L F. H. Brown, J. E. Hanrahan and Jine. Sellar; Typesetting and printing-mac
  - S. C. Gaunt; Type-mould.
  - F. H. Richards; Justified type-bar. sling-J. E. Billington and C. Holliwell; Assemosing-mechanism of typographical comP° machines. 6 of
  - L. A. Diss; Machine for making o etc matrices for the manufacture of tyPeumned
  - P. E. Kent; Swage or reshaper for detoes. or battered teeth of Linotype matrice,
  - W. G. Reynolds; Type-making machin
  - J. R. Rogers; Line-casting machine
  - J. R. Rogers; Line-casting machine.
  - L. L. Kennedy ; Line-casting machinesating H. Degener; Typesetting and line-cs machine. . the
  - L. A. Diss; Machine for making dies Triting manufacture of type (for typew machines, etc.). , (Lino*
  - J. R. Rogers; Slug-casting machine 1 type). , ope-
  - J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; 3 machine controlling-mechanism. ould-
  - F. H. Pierpont; Type-machine m actuating mechanism.
  - F. H. Pierpont ; Typecasting machine (for F. H. Richards; Making ribbed-plate use in making type-bars). sing”
  - W. Bancroft; Multiple comp mechanism. stins
  - H. F. Bechman; Stereotype plate-c
  - 924939
  - 924957
  - 925023
  - 925024
  - 925028
  - 925073
  - 925268
  - apparatus. .1
  - 925321 W. R. Fisher; Facing stereotype-met
  - 925753 R. G. Clark; Line-casting machine.
  - 925754 F. B. Converse; Linotype machine.
  - 925842 J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine. (Lino-925843 J. R. Rogers; Line-casting machine I type). m for
  - 925844 J. R. Rogers; Keyboard-mechants line-casting machines. chine-
  - 925866 W. H. Brueckmann ; Typecasting Des. 926121 J. Jacobson ; Producing printing-Pi3: ‘ for 926158 F. J. Wick; Assembling-mechantsmipped typographic composing-machine ed with alternative founts. .
  - 926740 H. H. Hardinge ; Typecasting machtma kin
  - 927597 F. H. Richards; Mechanism for typographic formes.
  - 927598 F. H. Richards; Typographic forme- aryin
  - 927615 A. Waldt; Matrix-making and machine (stereotype).
- p.654 - vue 822/901
- - AMERICAN PATENTS.
  - 655
  - (o t ( 0 O
  - C GOO OOOO OOONND H C GOO NNNN H H O Co-Co CHO OOUN VO 00 009 O OU HON VO HO “ Ct OONO NNU OO CO N O 0
  - 1909 (continued).
  - 6 O
  - t oncon o O & 0
  - (6 OOO 000 800 N 0iL
  - W. G. Reynolds; Printing-forme and type (special type for sliding on bars).
  - Conrad; Dating-machine (advancing number-wheels).
  - J. Kukla; Device for casting short-quads T in typecasting machines.
  - J- R. Rogers; Linotype machine (reed or verge adjusting-mechanism; Linotype).
  - T Dacheux ; Device for justifying lines of „type.
  - Coopersmith; Matrix-making machine (impressing line by line).
  - W A. W. Wood ; Stereotype-casting device. Rapp; Linotype machine.
  - A. H. Cruse ; Printing-plate casting machine.
  - — A. Senegele ; Pot-feeder for typecasting machines.
  - PA. Brooks ; Typographical machine.
  - A. G. Goss ; Stereotype casting-box.
  - me- Welling; Linotype-machine attach-J' G. Holbourns and H. A. Longhurst; Means for justifying tabular matter in . typographical composing-machines.
  - J G. Holbourns and H. A. Longhurst ; Means for justifying tabular matter in .typographical composing-machines.
  - T *S.Warnock ; Printing-plate foundation. * White; Flexible printing-plate clamp.
  - : Pearce and J. E. Billington; Galley-mechanism for typographical composing-machines.
  - J- E. Billington and C. Holliwell; Linotype-R machine matrix.
  - "M. Des Jardins; Typesetting and justi-R tying machine.
  - D. Deyo; Election square rules and lino-936776 A tyPe-slug holder (mortised for slug).
  - 9 trifi Halfpenny; Typesetting and dls 937803 938074 938298
  - $38433
  - 938434 $38435
  - tiaiipenny, ibuting machine. . ,
  - W. J. Meyer; Linotype magazine-rack, or support.
  - A. F. Herbsleb ; Separable stereotype-plate and base.
  - - H. Pierpont; Punch-cutting and matrix-cutting machine. ,
  - J . S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Recordstrip composing-machine.
  - T H. Pierpont; Cutter-head mechanism I for punch-cutting and like machines.
  - H. Pierpont; Cutter for punch-cutting machines.
  - • D. Pierpont; Blank-holder for punch-938928 r cutting and like machines.
  - • A. Albrecht; Matrix for Linotype and other 939262 F typecasting machines.
  - 939291 T* Johannesen ; Linotype machine.
  - J- McNamara ; Line-casting machine (Mono-$39325 T line).
  - JR. Rogers; Keyboard-mechanism for mine-casting machines (Linotype).
  - Reynolds; Matrix-channelling machine (Electric Compositor).
  - * A. Reynolds; Dovetail-notch cham-tering-machine for matrices (Electric Com-Positor).
  - . A. Reynolds; Matrix-combination _ Punching machine (Electric Compositor).
  - : Carter; Linotype-slug trimming
  - machine.
  - • P Dodge; Producing matrices (Lino-o type).
  - • Mergenthaler Typographic machine or pmachine of like character.
  - devicell; Type-receiving and supporting P. J. Meyer; Engraving machine (for 940277 F mbering-machine wheels).
  - . . Richards; Machine for making types
  - 940377 wand type-bars.
  - . Ackerman ; Typecasting and composing
  - 940404 F machine.
  - 940708 C "- Richards ; Manufacture of type-bars.
  - r N. .McFarland; Keyboard-locking 940709 C wc hanism for adding machines.
  - . .McFarland; Adding machine; posi-
  - 940808 T tioning type.
  - llartnell, Jr.; Making half-tone plates ses crude-rubber and asphaltum).
  - coc N H
  - ( 7 6.6 606.0 HOODOO •) CO OOO-O KH COOC
  - 1 No.
  - 941383 H. Pearce; Keyboard-mechanism of typographical machines (Linotype).
  - 941384 H. Pearce and J. E. Billington; Typographical composing and casting machine ; multiple-magazine (Linotype).
  - 941549 C. W. Baeder ; Stereotype-trimmer.
  - 941932 } o. Koske ; Typesetting and casting machine.
  - 942102 F. H. Richards; Type-bar and typographic forme.
  - 942845 J. R. Rogers; Line-casting machine (Linotype).
  - 942846 O. V. Sigurdsson ; Typecasting and composing machine (successive casting of single type and assembly in lines rendered integral and delivered to galley; Oddur).
  - 942848 F. B. Converse ; Line-casting machine.
  - 943129 G. H. Vining; Machine for sawing and trimming type, plates, etc.
  - 943210 F. Wosinski; Numbering-machine (hand-stamp ; consecutive, duplicate, or repeat).
  - 943502 W. G. White; Justifying typewriter (automatic, high-speed, strip-controlled, producing justified lines).
  - 943611 W. G. White; Mechanical-controller composing-machine.
  - 943612 W. G. White; Typecasting and composing machine.
  - 944108 O. V. Sigurdsson; Typecasting and composing machine (single type cast and assembled into lines by manipulation of character-keys in a keyboard; Oddur).
  - 944405 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Record-strip composing-machine (Monotype).
  - 944408 B. F. Bellows; Universal type-mould. 1 944451 E. A. Lundvall and W. Olsen; Numbering-machine (hand-stamp; consecutive).
  - | 944493 F. McClintock; Typesetting machine.
  - 944535 S. H. Bean; Printers’ composing-stick (for quick-setting to measure).
  - 944588% F. C. L. d’Aix; Line-casting machine.
  - R 13048 F. C. L. d’Aix ; Orig. No. 834971; Linecasting machine.
  - 1910.
  - 945046 W. J. Rennie; Linotype machine.
  - 945051 W. H. Scharf; Linotype machine.
  - 945497 P. T. Dodge; Line-casting machine (Lino-- type).
  - | 945608 J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - 945609 J. R. Rogers ; Line-casting machine.
  - 945678 H. F. Bechman ; Stereotype casting-box.
  - 945694 R. G. Clark; Distributing-mechanism for line-casting machines (Linotype).
  - 9457183 G. D. Hartley; Linotype machine.
  - 945777 H. M. Freck ; Typesetting machine.
  - 945789 H. Lang; Stereotype-plate casting machine. ' 945826) J. J. Walser; Stereotype-plate casting-9458275 mechanism.
  - 945892 C. Woodroffe, H. Pearce and J. E. Billington ; Quadding-apparatus of typographical composing-machines.
  - 946443 L. K. Johnson and A. A. Low; Type-distributing apparatus.
  - 946768 J. B. Odell; Typesetting machine. 946824 H. Pautze; Press for stamping raised characters in printing-plates (for addressingmachines).
  - I 946866 F. H. Richards; Machine for making type-bars.
  - 1 946867 F. H. Richards; Manufacture of type-bars. 947005 F. H. Richards ; Type-bar forming machine. 947006 F. H. Richards; Type-bar making machine.
  - 947175 T. Dropiowski; Typecasting and setting machine.
  - 947350 F. H. Richards; Producing type-bars. 947760 F. H. Richards; Manufacturing type-bars.
  - | 947761 F. H. Richards; Type-bar producing mechanism.
  - j 948182 R. F. Mercer; Line-casting machine.
  - | 948291 H. Degener; Typesetting and casting machine.
  - 948605 W. N. Clements; Typecasting machine.
  - 948655 H. Winter; Apparatus for producing stereo-type-matrices.
  - 948677 G. S. Williamson; Matrix-forming machine (Stereotype).
- p.655 - vue 823/901
- - 656
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1910 (continued).
  - 949819 H. Cohn; Protecting matrices (coating stereo-matrices to prevent adhesion of metal).
  - 949849 E. P. Sheldon; Numbering-mechanism (changing duplicated and repeated numbers; without stopping machine).
  - 950747> J. S. Duncan; Printing-plate (with card-950748J index tab; Addressograph).
  - 951245 J. G. Holbourns and W. Fletcher; Magazine of typographical composing-machines.
  - 951382 W. Scott; Stereotype-plate casting-apparatus.
  - 951521 H. L. Bell, Sr.; Making cut-printing-plates (coarse-line plates for newspapers).
  - 951654 J. McNamara ; Monoline machine.
  - 951655 J. McNamara; Line-casting machine.
  - 951948 J. G. Holbourns and H. A. Longhurst; Typographical composing and distributing machine (Linotype).
  - 951968 J. R. Rogers; Matrix for line-casting machines (Linotype).
  - 952195 A. A. Hill; Time-controlled heating-system for Linotype machines.
  - 952271 C. Muehleisen ; Means for levelling matrices in typographical composing-machines.
  - 952312 M. A. Droitcour; Making printing-plates (celluloid ; avoiding underlay).
  - 952397 R- F. Wilson; Linotype machine.
  - 952569 D. S. Kennedy; Line-casting machine.
  - 952579 F. H. Richards; Type-bar and typographic forme.
  - 952584 J. R. Rogers; Keyboard-mechanism (Linotype).
  - 952596 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Matrix-dimensioning machine.
  - 952597 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Justifying-mechanism for pattern-controlled composing-machines.
  - 952598 J. S. Bancroft and A. L. Knight; Forming, attaching and positioning nick-pins in type-moulds.
  - 952621 T. Lanston ; Controller-composing machine. 952631 F. H. Pierpont; Units-measuring mechanisms for composing-machines (Monotype).
  - 952632 F. H. Pierpont; Pattern, or record-strip composing-machine (Monotype).
  - 952633 F. H. Pierpont; Letter-spacing mechanism for typecasting machines (Monotype).
  - 952639 F. H. Richards; Type-bar and typographic forme.
  - 952666 J. S. Bancroft and A. L. Knight; Type-mould (Monotype).
  - 952682 S. Moe; Numbering-machine (consecutive, or duplicate for rotary press).
  - 953237 F.Schimmel; Linotype machine (slugcaster; Rototype).
  - 953745 G. D. Hartley; Line-casting machine.
  - 953764 J. R. Rogers; Linotype machine.
  - 953819 B. B. Conrad; Numbering-machine (combined dater and numberer, hand-operated ; see 928740).
  - 954023 H. Drewell; Machine for perforating bands of typesetting machines.
  - 954028 H. H. Hardinge; Automatic typecasting-machine mould.
  - 954412 H. S. Aufermann ; Preparing printing-plates in grain manner (half-tone without using gauze).
  - 954459 H. Pearce and J. E. Billington; Typographical composing-machine; quick-change magazine (Linotype).
  - 955116 J. S. Duncan ; Machine for making printing-plates (see 624764; Addressograph).
  - 955681 H. Plaut ; Linotype machine; slug-guide to prevent transposition (Linotype).
  - 955695 J. R. Rogers ; Line-casting machine (Typograph.)
  - 955764 R. G. Clark; Justifier for line-casting machines.
  - 955785 W. F. C. Foster ; Numbering-machine (with rotatable disks).
  - 955849 W. Chipperfield ; Type-carrier.
  - 956337 G. W. Grasnick; Linotype-machine matrix.
  - 956344 G. D. Hartley; Linotype machine.
  - 956790 J. B. Allen ; Linotype machine.
  - 957433 W. G. Middleton; Line-casting machine, etc.
  - 957802 J. R. Rogers; Line-casting machine (Linotype).
  - NO. . pes
  - 95 7904 F. H. Richards; Machine for making etal). and type-bars (impression in sheet-m
  - 958076 R. M. Bedell; Matrix for line-ces. machines. two-
  - 958317 J. R. Rogers; Line-casting machine; magazine Linotype.
  - 958435 F. H. Richards; Type-bar. type-958436 F. H. Richards; Making type and 3 bars. . ilach-
  - 958530 C. G. Pickett; Linotype-machine at ment.
  - 958600 R. Dacheux ; Type-distributing appara and 958738 J. C. Fowler; Individual typecasting setting machine.
  - 959271 A. O. Taylor; Stereotype-block. ting-959323 E. S. Dunavant; Mould and opera mechanism for type-machines. —ph, 959725 J. S. Duncan ; Printing-plate (Addressod" for use with card-index ; see 692994)*
  - 959755 D. S. Kennedy; Line-casting machine. tjc 959961 H. Pearce and J. E. Billington ; Autotype pump-stop mechanism for Lino) machines.
  - 959968 H. J. Smith; Printing-type. . 960047 O. V. Sigurdsson ; Typecasting macpi 960096 L. K. Johnson ; Typesetting apparatuSolate 960218 M. A. Droitcour; Flexible printing core-and means for securing the same V venting elongation). . . plate
  - 960219 M. A. Droitcour; Flexible printing-(celluloid ; see 960218). . for
  - 960684 W. Nicholas; Making matrix-plate monotype machines, osecu”
  - 961035 C. B. Smith; Numbering-machine (cor tive numbering, typographic). . chine 961444 S. Hollingsworth; Numbering-m con (ascending, or descending numbers secutive, or repeated). g the
  - 961690 P. W. Druitt; Apparatus for reducing length of cast spaces. qype"
  - 961742 C. A. Albrecht and L. Leidenberg ; L setting machine for various sizes of .two
  - 961798) J. R. Rogers; Line-casting machinei 961799 ( magazine Linotype. oivins
  - 962408 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; and or transmission-mechanism for tyP other machines (Monotype). ving”
  - 962409 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; | press for matrices (Monotype). .quad
  - 962410 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Lon ' type-mould (Monotype). quad
  - 962411 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Lo ). mould for type-machines (MonotyPen trol’ 962412 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Mono mechanism for low-quad moulds t type). aphic
  - 962857 F. H. Richards; Type-bar and tyPo& forme.
  - 9630758 W. H- Scharf; Linotype machine.
  - 963692 J. S. Duncan; Typesetting and distri machine.
  - 963790 A. E. Miller; Typecasting machine-intinf 964174 C. A. McCain and C. Henderson; PT plate locking-device (clamp). intink. 964205 B. A. Brooks; Preparation of PUbjanki surfaces (line-impression on slug , see 494899). , inteP
  - 964328 J. Stivers; Retaining-slug for Me). , type-formes (clump with cord grooy stio 964677 W. Nicholas and W. Ackerman ; TyPes 114 and composing machine; 119 claim > figs. (Graphotype). oe-col
  - 964678 W. Nicholas and W. Ackerman ; 1XP 682 posing machine; 81 claims, 57 (Graphotype). astind
  - 964679 W. Nicholas and W. Ackerman ; TyPIms, 35 and composing machine 116 clap figs. (Graphotype). (sha"
  - 965044 W. H. Smith; Numbering-machine ‘ operated number-heads). e; " 965155 G. W. Clarke; Matrix-plate (sq" matrices ; 2 on each edge). . , ap!” 965241 J. J. C. Smith; Stereotype-making ratus. eoty?"
  - 965242 J. J. C. Smith; Making stere moulds.
  - 965300 T. S. Homans; Linotype machine, tubin’ 965448 F. H. Frey; Typecasting andubes)-machine (receiving short-type in 1
- p.656 - vue 824/901
- - AMERICAN PATENTS.
  - 657
  - 8 85 OUT N (o.O t 8
  - 00 a S
  - 8 88 o on 8 o o
  - + oo (001 O c -00 co a 006
  - J.%
  - —O 6 OX 00
  - v co CO HHH 1 CO N 0000 O O 1IHH — A A,AO O O 0000
  - to A A cs co & NCO OU HOTOCO OOLOO
  - 3
  - 1 A A’ s or 00 -P O
  - t co CO
  - 1910 (continued).
  - D. B. Ray; Apparatus for separating type into classes for distribution.
  - C. Muehleisen; Means for adjusting the mould of typographical line-casting machines (Linotype).
  - C. Muehleisen and C. A. Albrecht; Means for assembling multiple-face matrices in typographical composing-machines (Lino-—type).
  - E A. Adcock; Type-distributing machine.
  - E. Albert; Producing printing-plates (auto-type).
  - J- R. Rogers; Ejecting-device for line-, casting machines, etc. (Linotype).
  - A. E. Markwell; Linotype machine.
  - 968205 A. Miller; Typecasting machine.
  - 49 C-Muehleisen, G. Molthenkin and L. Leiden-berg ; Means for producing tabular matter a in typographical machines (Linotype).
  - A. Hoberg ; Type-arranging device.
  - G. E. Wallin; Chute-spring for Linotype machines.
  - Drewell; Typesetting machine.
  - A. W. Hamaker; Typecasting machine attachment.
  - ". H. Richards; Logotype, type-bar and ...typographic forme.
  - Steers; Engraving machine (engraving and routing letters).
  - Halloran; Type-measuring device.
  - —CL. d’Aix ; Line-casting machine (mould). ME. Elliott ; Linotype machine.
  - H. Hardinge ; Providing nick-projections
  - 9734= r on type-mould body-blocks.
  - 4 C. Muehleisen; Apparatus for effecting separation of matrices and space-bars in typographical composing-machines (Lino-T type).
  - JR. Rogers; Keyboard-mechanism for c linotype machines, etc. (Linotype).
  - — N. McFarland ; Computing and recording machine; multiple-key.
  - piateni ’ Machine for rectifying stereotype-V. Piagneri ; Cleaning attachment for space-bands of Linotype machines.
  - Stephenson; Printing-rule and system of applying same to printing-formes (for 974740 R tabular linotype-slugs).
  - • F. Bellows and C. Luttropp ; Justifying-975194 I mechanism (Electric Compositor).
  - • A. Adcock; Typesetting machine (Pulso-975344 H meter).
  - 9754332 ‘ S. Folger; Rubber type-base.
  - 9754346D. S' Kennedy; Line-casting machine.
  - E. Sanborn ; Hand-stamp for applying dates Upon letters.
  - We E. Bertram ; Matrix-delivery mechanism wror Monoline composing-machines.
  - • W. Greenwood; Type-scale (to give column length for 1000 ems).
  - 3: Reinhardt; Numbering-machine (for setting commencing number of next job "mile machine is running).
  - . Richards; Typographic forme (slugs F poured by dovetailed keys).
  - I. Richards; Mechanism for making type G and type-bars.
  - * Wallin; Space-band buffer for Lino-type machines.
  - aiC Papke; Printers’ rule in corner, praight-strip, curved or tubular form (of H ant and stamped sheet).
  - AW. Wood; Stereotype printing-plate plate)S-mechanism (see 721117; Auto-H Degener: Line-setting and casting G echine.
  - ".Read and F. G. Lou gee; Movable oug wor-gauge for stereotype-trimming 978108 w.echines, etc. i fo-Bertram; Fount-selecting mechanism 456 W wonoline composing-machines.
  - 050 to Kelly ; Typesetting and distributing 3/°754 A chine.
  - P "M^6 and R. P. Link; Type-alining 34 M. Supporting means.
  - • Proitcour ; Matrix (stereotype-flong).
  - 0 ofo/U N OU tO Co O 010
  - 88.8 N I HVUNH 00
  - 00
  - N
  - c
  - No.
  - 979111 B. F. Upham; Printing-surface and producing the same (making ready).
  - 979222 A. S. Taylor; Adjustable hand type-mould. 979864 R. P. Link and A. C. Morgan; Typecasting and composing machine.
  - 1911.
  - 980419 C. E. Hopkins ; Apparatus for casting curved stereotypes.
  - 980468 H. A. W. Wood; Stereotype-printing-plate casting machine.
  - 980902 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Automatic justifying means for pattern-controlled composing-machines (Monotype).
  - 980903 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Matrix side-grooving machine (Monotype).
  - 980904 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Composing-machine record-strip (Monotype).
  - 980933 R. C. Elliott; Pattern-controlled composing-machine.
  - 980957 J. J. Hummel; Typesetting machine (plurality of founts and series of magazines ; 155 claims).
  - 980959 M. C. Indahl and W. E. Chalfant; Type-machine, die-case equipment (Monotype).
  - 980960 M. C. Indahl and A. C. Knight; Type-mould (Monotype).
  - 980970 A. L. Knight; Low-quad type-mould equipment (Monotype).
  - 980997 F. H. Pierpont; Strip-perforating and -winding machine (Monotype).
  - 980998 F. H. Pierpont; Leading-attachment for composing-machines (Monotype).
  - 981195 M. C. Indahl and W. E. Chalfant; Type-machine matrix.
  - 981438 R. P. Link and A. G. Hyde; Typecasting machine (vacuum and pump).
  - 982172 H. Degener; Typesetting and line-casting machine (Linotype multiple magazine).
  - 1 982173 H. Degener; Linotype machine.
  - 982174 H. Degener; Matrix-setting and line-casting machine.
  - 982263 W. Flett; Numbering-device (number-cylinder with four number-heads for high speed).
  - 982834 A. W. Le Boeuf; Mould-lock for linotype machines (Electric Compositor).
  - 983648 V. Royle; Apparatus for registering printing-plates.
  - 984207 S. C. Gaunt; Type (for sloping italics and script).
  - 984372 S. Hollingsworth; Numbering-machine (series of numbering-cylinders to print one or both sides of web with numbers and department initials).
  - 984947 R. P. Link and A. C. Morgan; Typecasting and composing machine and typewriter (plurality of matrix-carrying sectors).
  - 985042 J. C. Lotterhand; Printing-mechanism for adding machines.
  - 985874 H. A. W. Wood; Stereotype-plate casting-and finishing-mechanism (Autoplate).
  - j 985875 H. A. W. Wood; Stereotype-printing-plate casting-apparatus (Autoplate).
  - 986234 W. H. Smith; Numbering-head (automatically turning all the number-wheels for inking row by row).
  - 987293 H. B. Gale ; Matrix-press electrically heated. 987372 C. L. Johnston ; Multiple numbering-machine (cylinder with five number-heads for consecutively numbering street-car transfer tickets).
  - 987473 S. M. Lummus; Linotype machine.
  - 987489 J. G. Ranch; Feeding attachment or slug or typecasting machines (feeding ingots in the metal-pot).
  - 987897 J. Mayer ; Distributing-mechanism for typographical composing-machines.
  - 988274 A. A. Low and L. K. Johnson; Holder for type-containing channels.
  - 988583 M. A. McKee; Treatment of printing-plates (electrotyped plates).
  - 988984 H. Drewell; Typesetting-apparatus (cancelling errors in bands).
  - 989129 H. Degener ; Linotype-machine matrix.
  - 989512 G. H. Riehl and W. Honegger; Typographical gauge.
  - 2 U
- p.657 - vue 825/901
- - 658 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1911 (continued).
  - 989553 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Low-quad mould-control (Monotype).
  - 989554 J. 8. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Matrix-holder for typecasting machines (Monotype).
  - 989555 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Web-guiding attachment for perforating machine (Monotype).
  - 989556 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Centring-pin adjustment for typecasting machines (Monotype).
  - 989557 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Multiplex composing-machine (Monotype).
  - 989575 H. Degener; Matrix-setting and line-casting machine (Linotype).
  - 989589 R. C. Elliott; Pattern, or record-strip, composing-machine.
  - 989637 F. H. Pierpont; Typecasting machine mould and mould-adjusting mechanism (low-quad; Monotype).
  - 989815 W. Scott; Stereotype-casting mould.
  - 989860 F. and C. A. Meisel; Numbering-head (con-trolling carrying, avoiding errors in large-numbers).
  - 989908 D. S. Kennedy ; Line-casting machine (Linotype).
  - 989943 R. M. Bedell; Line-casting machine (Linotype).
  - 989997 R. Paton ; Typecasting machine.
  - 9902 89 H. Pearce and J.' E. Billington; Quadding-apparatus of typographical composing-machines.
  - 990584 H. C. Osborn; Type-assembling and distributing.
  - 990970 W. Flett; Stub-numberer (plurality of cylinder-borne number-heads circumferen-tially-ad justable).
  - 99T937 W. E. Bertram; Fount-selecting mechanism for Monoline composing-machines.
  - 991938 W. E. Bertram ; Matrix-selecting and delivering mechanism for composing-machines.
  - 991955 A. B. Chilton; Typesetting machine slug-indicator (for various widths of columns).
  - 992030 C. Muehleisen; Composing and assembling mechanism of line-casting machines (Linotype).
  - 992031 C. Muehleisen ; Line-casting machine (Linotype).
  - 992032 C. Muehleisen; Distributing-mechanism of line-casting machines (Linotype).
  - 992033 C. Muehleisen; Clutch-mechanism for linotype machine (Linotype).
  - 992121 E. Flower; Preparing printing-plates for bending.
  - 992385 R. W. Pittman; Linotype-machine attachment.
  - 992900 H. Petersen ; Linotype machine.
  - 993328 A. G. Stevenson; Printing-rule and system of applying the same to printing-formes (type with second shoulder to carry rule of less height).
  - 993970 M. A. Droitcour; Printing-plate-making apparatus (making plates of celluloid).
  - 995655 H. F. Bechman ; Stereotype-plate casting-apparatus.
  - 996300 W. S. Timmis; Machine for producing justified lines (perforated-strip control).
  - 996568 H. Degener; Line-setting and casting machine (Linotype).
  - 996828 R. M. Bedell; Line-casting machine (Linotype).
  - 997130 J. J. Hummel; Magazine for typesetting machine (loose-type setter).
  - 997131 J. J. Hummel; Typesetting-machine operating-keyboard (latch for engaging type-carriers).
  - 997390 D. C. Hughes; Type (for addressing-machines).
  - 997437 E. G. Burkham and R. W. E. Yardley; Machine for cooling stereotype-plates.
  - 9977351 W. E. Bertram; Monoline composing-997736 5 machine.
  - 997811 E. J. Hearst; Matrix-straightening device (for bent Linotype-matrices).
  - 997966 E. W. Cooper; Stereotype-plate clamp.
  - 998081 A. Egli; Machinery for manufacturing curved printing-plates.
  - 998447 G. C. Andrews; Means for holding and adjusting printing-plates on a baseplate.
  - 998802 J. R. Rogers; Line-casting machine (Lino
  - 999513 A. E. Miller; Typecasting machine (sprin
  - 1000157
  - 1000445
  - 1000635
  - 1000789
  - 1001825
  - I002212
  - 1002220
  - 1002281
  - 1002320
  - operated pump). Sating
  - J. Dorneth ; Matrix-setting and line-ces machine. ting
  - H. Degener; Typographical line-cas machine (Linotype).
  - J. Steel; Type-disk supporting deviceipcin-F. L. Elliott and G. E. Eckerstrom i “ting ters’ lead- and rule-cutter (preven curling). Anting
  - H. Drewell; Machine for perforines. operating-bands of typesetting mace and
  - E. B. Barber; Machine for casting composing type-bodies; (see 8969°)zing
  - B. Cade ; Line-casting and type-comp0 machine. Chine
  - D. S. Kennedy; Line-casting ma (Linotype). “Lino”
  - J. R. Rogers ; Line-casting machine •
  - type). chine
  - O. V. Sigurdsson; Typecasting (mould and pump).
  - B. F. Bellows; Type-mould (body mould ; Electric Compositor). . n of 1003187 A. Leuchter; Electrolytic product iron printing-plates and the like (deposits or nickel and thickens with copper) pro* 1003482 W. J. F. Maidhof; Printing-forme; * of viding means for supporting the Dazype-type-blocks, and adjusting the” blocks in the printing-frame or chaseLino" 1004386 H. Degener; Typographic machine (
  - 1002325
  - 1002959
  - type). . cotal
  - 1004601 J. Steel; Type-assembling device receiving-table and scale).
  - 10053243 W. H. Scharf; Linotype machine.
  - 1005438
  - 1005463
  - 1005576
  - 1006207
  - 1006444
  - 1006445
  - 1007314
  - 1008056
  - 1008132
  - O 0 CO
  - O N co 000 O 00 00 00 00 O 00 O
  - 1008304
  - 1008364
  - A. W. Le Boeuf; Linotype mould. 1tted; D. Petri-Palmedo; Linotype mould (SKavios recessed in the rear face, and core."h fils laterally entended tail-piece whic-recess; Linotype). .uto
  - K. S. Reist and S. B. Batsford ; Distes. and assembler for Linotype machine and
  - H. C. Hansen; Printers’ rule-, lead slug-cutter. oosi06
  - H. Degener; Typographical line-com? and casting machine. astiol
  - H. Degener; Typographical lingre pa machine; levelling multiple-strut trices for distribution (Linotype), peril
  - C. Spielmann; Consecutive-num*' con” machine (hand-stamp, cheapening struction). . 11400
  - H. Pearce, J. E. Billington, C. Holliweosios J. R. Burgess ; Typographical com? machine.
  - D. Gestetner; Printing-type (hollole 10 pierced with a non-circular. Da), threading on manifolding machinesaucin
  - J. McNamara; Machine for Pro grop printing-slugs (for shaving more
  - one side than from the other). line.
  - C. Muehleisen ; Matrix-setting mac “ati
  - J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; 5
  - marking machine (Monotype). patter J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; hachi" or record-strip composing-"
  - (Monotype). vatd”
  - J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; * milling machine (Monotype). achi.
  - F. H. Pierpont; Typecasting Iie-case’
  - (varying the movement of the 0
  - Monotype).
  - A. H. Cruse ; Matrix-drying press. a 1008556 G. E. Pancoast; Matrix-drying Preing 30 1008705 H. Degener; Typographical compos 9 casting machine (Linotype). ioma" 1008936 E. A. Adcock; Machine for the autneteli justification of lines of type (Pulsolisn 0 1008981 C. Muehleisen; Distributing-meccaing 0° matrix-composing and line-cast* chines (Linotype).
  - 1009206 H. A. W. Wood; Machine for late): stereotype-printing-plates (Autopie pla 10092077 H. A. W. Wood; Stereotype-print* 5 1009208, casting machine.
  - 1008528
- p.658 - vue 826/901
- - AMERICAN
  - PATENTS. 659
  - No. 1911 (continued).
  - T009209 H. A. W. Wood ; Stereotype-printing-plate finishing-mechanism.
  - 10003IO H. A- W- Wood : Stereotype-printing-plate 1092IIS casting-apparatus.
  - °927 H. A. W. Wood; Stereotype-printing-plate Ioo-L finishing-mechanism (Autoplate).
  - 1000372 I H- A- W. Wood 1 Stereotype-printing-plate 10082° 7) casting apparatus (Autoplate).
  - 9622.C. A. Albrecht; Means for levelling multiple-face matrices in composing-machines 100-- - (Linotype).
  - 1008718 R. J. Blumenberg; Underscore-type. , ,
  - 9738 S. Q. Goss; Automatic stereotype-plate I00.0- . finishing machine.
  - 905T C. Muehleisen; Typographical line-casting
  - IoT machine.
  - 4o H. Degener; Typesetting and line-casting IoT. machine (linotype pump and metal-pot).
  - 435 D. S. Kennedy; Escapement-operating mechanism for linotype machines (Lino-1011442 D. s. Kennedy; Line-casting machine (Linotype). . ,
  - 55° E. B. Barber; Typecasting machine (re-101-0 _ volving foot plate for trimming). _ poT G. F. Coates; Device to be used in Mono-I01r= type machines.
  - H. Degener; Matrix-setting and type-R12 „ line-casting machine (Linotype).
  - 3442 W. H. Smith ; Orig. No. 965044; Numbering-R12 — machine. .
  - 3331 H. c. Hansen; Orig. No. 1006207 ; Printers rule-, lead- and slug-cutter.
  - 1912.
  - S g co co 6.6
  - O
  - 6
  - O 6
  - O ( C o
  - with with (see
  - 1
  - N 6
  - 6 &
  - K. M. Schlueter and F. Schlueter, junr. ; Gauge for alining printing-plates.
  - J- Steel; Typesetting machine for L-shaped embossed sheet-metal individual type (see 870699 and 880341).
  - A- Melchert; Clock-controlled mechanism for setting typewheels of time, etc., printing-devices for automatic insurance-policy vending. . +1. Wollheim ; Printing-roll of plurality of movable printing-disks for multiple strip-ticket printing.
  - — H. Sanborn; Dating-stamp adjustable date-ring concentric name-part and indicating-disk -975463).
  - J. K. Rogers; Line-casting machine; preventing the casting of slugs with errors 14740 due to reversal of matrices (Linotype). Strecker-Aufermann ; Process for pre-101495. .Paring printing-plates in a grained manner. 4: L. Dodge; Bank-cheque printing-machine ; segmental gears for setting A the type- and indicating-wheels.
  - • J. Ware; Printing-machine for bank-cheques; automatically rotating and
  - 1015020 T lacking type. ,
  - — Hanrahan ; Type-mould, three sides as well as strike formed in the matrix which slides on the nick-bearing front.
  - J. Dorneth; Matrix-setting and line-Casting machine; italic matrices on T separate guide-wires (Typograph).
  - SS Duncan; Protecting typographic plates used in conjunction with card-T index system (Addressograph).
  - S: Duncan; Typographic plates with index-cards. Printing-device of sheet-metal constructed to hold a reference-card for use in card-index system; H dressograph ; see 1015757).
  - — Gammeter; Rotatable type-holding mechanism for short-type transferred to G "b-headed carrying-bars (Multigraph). e Lund; Method of preparing plates Printing; make-ready by distorting wthe plate.
  - * Hadaway, junr.; Matrix-drying Press; electrically heated (see 890858; M anelectric heater). tvr Blume ; Apparatus for producing „POSraphic perforated-record sheets; P eumatically actuated punches con
  - o
  - o
  - o
  - 8
  - O
  - 6
  - O
  - 0 of
  - 1
  - o
  - o
  - N 0 o
  - trolled from a typewriter; facilitating corrections.
  - 1016224 W. M. Kelly; Printers’ type; different bodies grooved to same distance from back to permit of use in the same ribbed composing-machine channels.
  - 1016347 F. J. Matych ; Stereotype-plate cutter for cutting between the lines.
  - 1016433 P. G. Nuernberger and G. Rettig; Matrix-holder.
  - 1016605 H. F. Bechman ; Chase, for holding composed formes of type, with very narrow side-members and grub-screws.
  - 1016682 B. O. Fanslow ; Rotary printing-machine for circulars; notched short-type and holder for drum receiving multiple lines.
  - 1017046 H. Friedlein ; Transportable ticket-printing and fare-recording apparatus with part fixed and part adjustable types.
  - 1017387 H. Degener; Linotype machine, levelling multiple-face matrices for second elevator (Linotype).
  - 1017444 C. Muehleisen and C. A. Albrecht; Means for levelling multiple-face matrices in line-casting machines; preparatory to entering second elevator (Linotype).
  - 1017520 B. O. Fanslow ; Type-case with covers and hinges for transportation.
  - 1017771 E. Lawrenz; Typographic machine for producing lines of line-justified logotypes each bearing its succeeding space (148 figs. ; 44 claims; Linotype).
  - 1017772 E. Lawrenz; Typographic machine for producing lines of line-justified logo-types (177 figs., 131 claims ; see 794628; Linotype).
  - 1017776 H. S. Levy; Method of producing electrotypes; depositing graphite on wax-moulds.
  - 1017929 E. Uhthoff; Typograph composing-machine; ready removal of matrices (Typograph).
  - 1017979 G. H. Lang; Printing-machine for marks on shoe-boxes; plurality of logotype-wheels and number-wheels.
  - 1018233 M. E. Blume; Typographic stamping-apparatus for producing impressions in metal-sheets.
  - 1018519 L. M. Potts; Perforating machine for strip for controlling telegraph-transmitters or linotypes and like machines.
  - 1020023 P. Bunau-Varilla; Machine for moulding curved printing-blocks; accelerating cooling (see 912228).
  - 1020527 D. E. Walshe ; Rotary hand-stamp; for rolling impression; dating and cancelling.
  - 1021827 J. Dorneth ; Matrix-setting and line-casting machine (space-setting and -distributing device ; Typograph).
  - 1021828 J. Dorneth; Typograph machine (cut-out for preventing distribution after splashing; Typograph).
  - 1022067 J. M. Dow; Method and apparatus for making stereotype-plates (preventing formation of blow-holes).
  - 1022323 P. Martin; Holder for printing-surfaces; clip for cylindrical plates.
  - 1022418 W. T. Hoofnagle; Machine for line-justifying lines of type (type are received in word-holders to which the line-justifying spaces, subsequently cast, are transferred; see 91296r).
  - 1023958 F. J. Perrin; Composing-stick (easily adjusted knee).
  - 1024296 R. Thomas; Matrix-setting device (for matrix-bars arranged in a plurality of groups; Typograph).
  - 1024491 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Stopbars and racks for centring-mechanisms (reducing impact; Monotype).
  - 1024492 J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Type-casting and composing machine (preventing rotation and falling of type in transit from carrier to line-support; Monotype).
  - 1024503 R. C. Elliott; Line-measuring and automatic line-justifying mechanism for composing-machines (Monotype).
- p.659 - vue 827/901
- - 66o
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1912 (continued).
  - 1024512 A. L. Knight and W. N. Clements; Type-mould (for casting short-body type with carrying-grooves and delivering in line; Monotype).
  - 1024514 B. Lefingwell; Typecasting machine (record-strip controlled cut-out for casting-mechanism ; omission of defective matter; Monotype).
  - 1024524 F. H. Pierpont; Typecasting machine (increasing capacity of selective control-mechanism for same number of elements ; selective transfer for shifting positioning-control from one group to another; Monotype).
  - 1024606 S. Stephens; Printers’ furniture (for each body the use of spaces of 1, 2, ... 6 points and quads of 12, 18,... 42 points).
  - 1025317 M. Sensenschmidt and E. Kaiser; Control-device for ticket-stamping machines (prevents operation without insertion of the correct control-type).
  - 1025495 A. O. Watkins ; Printing; takes a shallow impression from reversed non-bevelled type, levels surface (prints from relief, giving white letters on black ground).
  - 1025779 R> H. Bremer; Hand printingroll stamp ; type-carrier and roll-carrier.
  - 1025993 H. Petersen; Ejector-blade for linotype machines (Linograph).
  - 1026185 J. S. Thompson; Typecasting machine (horizontal body-slide and vertical elevating-slide).
  - 1026243 H. Drewell; Typesetting device; correcting during composition (cancelling-symbol introduced on perforated-strip for cancelling letters, words, or lines incorrectly set).
  - 1026244 J. S. Duncan; Typographic plates with index-cards (elevating surface of type above frame ; Addressograph).
  - 1026245 J. S. Duncan; Typographic plate with index-card (frame; Addressograph).
  - 1026246 J. S. Duncan; Typographic plate with index-card (combined plate and frame; Addressograph).
  - 1026247 J. S. Duncan; Typographic plate for use with index-card system (plate used as card ; Addressograph).
  - 1026248 J. S. Duncan; Typographic plate with index-card system (changing name part of plate only for change of addressee ; Addressograph).
  - 1026249 J. S. Duncan; Typographic plate with index-card (visible back to card ; Addressograph).
  - 1026250 J. S. Duncan; Typographic plate with index-card (changing name part of plate only for change of addressee; Addressograph; see 1026248).
  - 10262S1 ( J'• S- Duncan; Typographic plate with -0565253 index-card (sectional printing-plate for ~ 2520 facilitating changes; Addressograph).
  - 1026253 J. S. Duncan; Typographic plate with index-card (detachable tabs for facilitating classification ; Addressograph).
  - 1026254 J- S. Duncan; Typographic plate with index-card (detachable section ; Addressograph).
  - 1026255 J. S. Duncan; Typographic plate with index-card system (display-ledge for facilitating reference ; Addressograph).
  - 1026739 A. Egli; Matrix for stereotype-plate moulds; (providing for protrusions to carry feeder-metal and prevent formation of depressions).
  - 1026767 J. P. Quiggan ; Clamps for printing-plates.
  - 1027142 F. D. Montgomery; Method of producing enlarged colour-type engravings by photographic enlargement of small relief plate filled with white.
  - 1027551 A. W. Le Boeuf; Linotype mould (means for holding the slug during the trimming-operation ; Electric Compositor).
  - 1027566 W. M. Rapp; Linotype machine (space-band supporting-bar).
  - 1027826 H. Drewell; Line-casting machine (hand lever operated gear for effecting automatic change of mould).
  - 1027833 J. F. Frey; Semicylindrical stereotylg plate trimmer (clamping and mactyi before the plate has cooled). chine
  - 1028137 J. R. Rogers; Line-casting me new (mechanism for permitting use O with pattern matrices of different bodies old common alinement at foot or l’top; pattern with common alinement at Linotype). steel
  - 1028299 M. Stamm; Process for making steel punches (duplicating shallow punches). .
  - 1028330 E. W. Cooper; Method of casting Goelec-printing-plates and backing curved bidly trotypes (centrifugal action of rotating mould). . , osiog
  - 1028660 E. B. Barber; Typecasting and compedge machine using matrix-plate ("body adjusting plate ; casting different sizes ; see 1002212 and 896908). ichiog
  - 1028694 A. Egli; Machine for casting and fe three cylindrical stereotype-plates ; uses ming, core-cylinders rotated 1200 for trim shaving, and casting. inting
  - 1028821 M. Hoge and P. C. Riebe ; Base for PEr tical plates of wood-blocks with grain Vaciou® united by septa of longitudinally ten material. bines
  - 1028955 H. Petersen ; Matrix for linotype moor all (bevelled edges to allow for escape g of from mould; provision of two .“Lino* unsymmetrical distributing-teeth; graph). type
  - 1029243 J. S. Thompson; Metal-pot forubulat casting machines and the like Cvenin jobber closing the pump-pot and op the nipple simultaneously). . „chinei 1029317 C. G. Pritchard; Composing-® hatoi” casts a slug from assembled " bars. .nine 1029568 H. S. Folger; Hand-stamp (main alinement of type-bands). coble (04 1029647 A. Waldt; Stereotyper’s steam to drying-press).. cemble" 1029714 W. M. Rapp ; Linotype-machine slide brake. nine for 1030399 J. C. Grant and L. A. Legros ; Mac- metal cutting punches and like master
  - 1030678 H. Petersen; Linotype mould (forugto mitting length and thickness of be varied; Linograph). k (f®
  - 1030864 H. Berold; Printer’s register-hoo clamping printing-plates). settin 1030878 J. Dorneth ; Typograph matri adjust and line-casting machine (matrix ing and alining gear ; Typography acbi"
  - 1030889 E. D. Huxford ; Cheque-printing . print (with word and number segments ‘sco" eleven to twenty in words as well posite numbers and figures). intiob
  - 1031267 M. Hoge and P. C. Riebe ; Base for Pincate plates (of end-grain wood of “Taing! triangular section with metal b® 9i° locking with sidesticks at only). e
  - 1031326 A. B. Dick; Typesetting mach du filling tubes with short-types 1° i eating machines ; see 919408). € sho
  - 1031630 A. B. Dick; Type-bars for lines “barat, type for multiple-copy printing-aPr sho.
  - 1031661 H. C. Osborn; Retaining-device "for type or plate printing-surfaces stop I culars ; combined spring ends grooved-type and clip for plates,
  - 1031803 C. S. Mills; Printing-plate base ' eitle clips and making-up plate to St76-galb 11-point thick stereotypes or g electrotypes. . , mposl
  - 1031952 C. Muehleisen ; Typographical Conce 8 machine (fixed assembler-ent® , . plurality of magazines ; LinotyPijnots
  - 1032306 E. E. Spencer; Pot-charger for gazine machines (automatic from a mao e; used slugs; Linotype). . achie
  - 1032564 W. J. Poole; Type-composing ,®or composes loose-type of equal a t): or multigraph ; controlled fro® writer.
- p.660 - vue 828/901
- - AMERICAN
  - PATENTS.
  - 661
  - No.
  - 1032594
  - 8 8 1. 00 N N C CO O O
  - 1912 (continued).
  - A.S. Ferguson and G. W. Robertson; Gauges for type-galleys (of L-section to give the length and breadth of the type matter).
  - T. R. Post; Dating-stamp (pivotal hand-operated; see 669661).
  - J. Bengough; Numbering-apparatus (high-speed; variable number of devices
  - of O CO CO O
  - H 8 0
  - O
  - N on 0 O
  - S S 6 S to Oo V K
  - o to N O 02 C o 8
  - 6
  - O c
  - 6 Co
  - co O 1 o
  - 6 6
  - 6 0
  - c 0 0
  - co
  - o
  - S o H
  - 8
  - 8
  - coO* H Hc O ON C000 0 0100 00
  - 6 co
  - U
  - S Co
  - O 0
  - o O 0 o
  - 6
  - S
  - & H
  - to CO
  - Q a
  - Co-acting; adjusting timing).
  - K. H. Little ; Typecasting machine (matrix formed of a plurality of character-forming units depressed by solenoids to form the whites of the type character).
  - H. M. Barber; Method of forming stereo-type-plates (holding the matrix by suction).
  - H. M. Barber; Machine for casting stereo-type-plates (combined vacuum-pan and casting-box ; see 1033371).
  - H. Drewell ; Line-casting machine (removing burr from slug).
  - H. C. Gammeter; Typesetting and distributing machine (transferring and interlocking; see 722404 and R. 12622; machine for duplicating circular-letters
  - * to appear as if typewritten ; Multigraph).
  - J. Yeoell; Method of producing print-ing-surfaces (in replica by swaging).
  - J- J- Franceschini; Registering-device for Printing-plates and the like (upper halves for mounting-blocks with dowel holes to fit dowels on fixed lower-half).
  - . Meisel; Printing and numbering machine (automatic disconnection at end of series repeating last number indefi-nitely; hand-operated disconnection coupled to automatic).
  - — Saltzmann; Method of printing and composition-unit (making ready by supporting type from a machined nick instead of from the foot).
  - T. B. Craig and A. Coffman; Printing-mechanism for indicating time in vending-machines (preventing blurring).
  - J- C. Grant ; Matrices for typecasting and composing machines (Grantype).
  - Cade and A. Heldrich; Line-composing and typecasting machine (keyboard-operated selectors for matrices pierced to slide on alining-bar ; composition of a second line can proceed while slug of first T is being cast).
  - — Mohr; Attachment for linotype machines (cutting off or trimming one end wof linotype-slugs).
  - k - Twining; Typesetting and distri-buting machine (for short-type in flat formes for duplicator).
  - € .an; Type-forming machine for forming characters on type for type-writers, etc.
  - 4. Stockall ; Printers’ galley for use with A Monotype or other typecasting machines. A. Smith ; Hand-stamp (legend-plate on back).
  - 3 S. Thompson ; Typesetting and line-justifying machine (for individual type, esing temporary line-justifying spacers
  - F lor which spaces are cast to line-justify).
  - • Schimmel; Machine for setting and casting lines of type-matrices (uses carrying arms for the composing-frames.
  - B E953237; Rototype).
  - Pham; Method of bending printing-Surfaces (in duplicate and registering goggplyi see 903342, 906586, and
  - H. Hopkins; Adding and writing machine (adding machine type-carriers in con-Junction with typewriter-mechanism;
  - T Addograph).
  - J J - Howard ; Changeable type-blocks (of 'I T "Ober with grooves adjacent to flanges).
  - " Bland; Apparatus for preparing wereotype-matrices (sand- or glass-backs)08 machine for levelling matrix-
  - 1043261
  - 1043334
  - O
  - 8
  - 0
  - 1045065
  - 1045162
  - 1045202
  - 1045360
  - 1046155
  - 1046351
  - 1046649
  - 1047289
  - N o
  - 1047533
  - 1047995
  - H of C
  - 0
  - 1048281
  - No.
  - 1041647 J. H. Matthews; Holder for changeable type-blocks (type-plate for hard-rubber blocks to interlock with main holder).
  - 1041674 J. C. Robertson ; Attachment for numbering-devices (carrying printing-surfaces intermediate to successive rotary numbering-heads).
  - 1041676 W. Rodiger and C. Muehleisen; Typographical composing-machine (releasing matrices alternately from two different magazine-channels by successive operations of same key ; Linotype).
  - 1041934 H. A. W. Wood ; Intaglio and relief printingdevice (the intaglio raised above type-height for operating at one handling).
  - 1042208 A. Egli; Device for finishing stereotype
  - 1042285
  - 1042292
  - 1042368
  - 1042382
  - 1042475
  - 1042476
  - printing-plates (milling to length and separating).
  - F. Schimmel; Machine for casting and composing type (matrices arranged on periphery of a prismatic block; Roto-type).
  - J. S. Thompson ; Printers’ tie-up (of parallel bars with pin-joints for locking up in the forme).
  - M. R. Parks ; Typesetting-device (selecting type).
  - J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Control-mechanism for typecasting and composing machines (suppression of cancelled matter; Monotype).
  - F. H. Pierpont; Matrix-stamping or punching machine (automatically supplying, supporting, and stamping blanks and delivering matrices ; see 687779 ; Mono-type). .
  - F. H. Pierpont; Spacing-mechanism for typecasting and composing machines (spacing out the individual type by uniform increment of body-widths ; Monotype).
  - O. V. Sigurdsson ; Typecasting and composing machine (for individual type; alining, see 942846; Oddur).
  - M. A. McKee ; Hot-bending machine for the treatment of curved printing-plates (producing accuracy of curvature).
  - E. Duscher; Type-setter (for shouldered-type in line-unit cases).
  - H. Neumann and A. Dorner; Hand-stamp for hams and meats.
  - J. McNamara ; Slug for line-casting machines (with raised ribs on sides and ends for unequal trimming to produce variation in the position of the line).
  - O. V. Sigurdsson; Typecasting machine; substitution of matrix-disks (Oddur).
  - A. G. Baker; Typesetting machine; distributor; (simultaneous hand-operated distribution and setting-up).
  - W. C. Downing; Numbering-machine; (means for dropping-cipher and automatically moving wheels to the printing-position ; see 829260).
  - W. B. Wait; Embossing-device ; (hinged sections carrying embossing plates for simultaneously embossing both sides of pages with raised characters for the blind).
  - J. R. Rogers ; Mould for linotype machines ; (self-contained mould variable in length without adding or removing parts ; automatic opening and closing and movement for trimming and ejection; Linotype).
  - W. M. Rapp ; Linotype machine ; improved gauge for recording the length of assembled line of matrices (see 932577).
  - E. L. Holmes; Linotype movable jaw-adjusting device ; (facilitating setting for length of line of matrices).
  - R. T. Johnston; Matrix-making press for stereotype-matrices ; (Autoplate).
  - E. G. Schwuchow and G. F. Johnston; Etching metallic printing-plates by electricity (to leave relief printing-surface).
  - A. H. Wadewitz; Printing-chase ; (arrangement of false chase dispensing with quoins).
  - W. S. Bing; Hand-stamp (with elastic diaphragm for use on both flat and convex surfaces).
- p.661 - vue 829/901
- - 662
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1912 (continued).
  - 1048459 J. S. Duncan; Printing-device of sheet-metal and method of making; characters closely-located.
  - S. Duncan; Die for closely-located 1040400 characters of sheet-metal printing-plates ; 10484 ( (see 1048459).
  - 1048560 T. A. McCall; Perforating machine for guide-perforations of controlling-strip.
  - 1048667 A. Egli; Mould for casting and finishing rotary printing-plates ; (holding plate to core and releasing it by slides).
  - 1049074 H. C. Gammeter; Composing-stick for multigraph type; (split tubular-body with fork-end'; Multigraph).
  - 1049165 A. G. Stevenson; Printing-rule (of triangular section for securing linotype-slugs having raised projections ; Linotabler).
  - R. 13489 J. R. Rogers ; Orig. No. 615909 ; Linotype machine; (two-letter matrices as in Patent 547633 assembling and alining, also levelling for distributor elevator).
  - 1913.
  - 1049477 J. S. Healy; Cooling-device for curved-stereotype printing-plate casting-apparatus; (Autoplate).
  - 1049518 S. C. Nielsen; Line-casting machine (matrix-escapement ; Linotype).
  - 1049787 W. H. Welsh ; Process of preparing matrices for electrotyping (in cooling chamber).
  - 1049965 J. J. Zeitz; Type-transfer device (connecting member for tubes and drums; Multigraph).
  - 1050015 J. E. Gartside ; Printing-roll (with longi- | tudinal key and internally notched typo- I graphic pattern-printing rings).
  - 1050495 A. Smith; Typesetting and distributing i machine (sets record-elements in a sector for each line to be composed; type handled by pneumatic suction).
  - 1050496 A. Smith ; Record-making machine ; record-element adapted to control the operation of typesetting and distributing machines).
  - 1051203 M. A. Droitcour ; Process of making toned printing-plates (made-ready).
  - 1051239 U. G. Lee ; Typograph (for embossing metal address-printing plates; hand-set and power-pressed).
  - 1051240 U. G. Lee ; Typograph (provision for taking thrust and keeping machine-frame in | compression).
  - 1051241 U. G. Lee ; Typograph (keyboard-operated ; preventing embossing from accidental blows to keys).
  - 1051243 C. T. Libby; Printing-types (of different gauges on same body on standard line ; caps of same or larger gauge than ascenders).
  - 1051385 W. E. Brand; Type-line quadder (for inserting loose-quads from a magazine automatically. See 862800; Vite-a-type).
  - 1051605 W. Mann; Type-distributing device (for assisting hand; grooved short-type; Multigraph).
  - 1051725 H. C. Gammeter; Type-distributing im- | plement (for assisting hand; grooved , short-type ; Multigraph).
  - 1052143 E. L. Hamilton; Rubber-stamp (plurality of sets of type-bands for cost, selling price j and division-bar).
  - 1052236 H. C. Gammeter; Type-holder (of slotted tube with enlargement for correcting ; see 836026; Multigraph).
  - 1052333 H. C. Gammeter; Type-case (for loose grooved short-type permitting extraction one at a time ; Multigraph).
  - 1052641 P. Andres; Ticket-printing and recording machine for booking-offices (uses movable type-bars and stationary type).
  - 1052678 W. Loveland and H. E. Sloan ; Type-turtle or fudge-bed for rotary printing-presses | (facilitating fitting of notched or un- | notched type-slugs).
  - 1052742 W. Mock ; Typesetting machine (for grooved short-type, key-operated for setting into and distributing from duplicator-drums).
  - No. . vice for
  - 1053167 E. Fjellander ; Matrix-changing dev (tube-Mergenthaler Linotype machines na dis-receptacles for storing matrices an charging to the notched-bar). coved 1053364 A. B. Dick; Type-holder (for. Spring-short-type to bring to type-high', T tube). . Iibuting 1053365 A. B. Dick; Typesetting and distr short-apparatus (type-holders for grogye buting type used in composing and distr machines). achine 1053440 J. R. Rogers; Typographical Abumpi (obtaining more rapid action 01 F Linotype). (with 1053518 W. J. F. Maidhof; Printing-forme ' support for die-bases). Hand-1053803 H. S. Folger and A. M. Comstock ite-line stamp (wheels for carrying 0 bands). having 1054130 M. A. McKee; Printing-plate 5 , off machine (for shaving more me make-unsupported portions; avoiding ready; see 857531). . —me (for 1054284 J. S. Duncan ; Sectional printing teatingi embossed-metal sections for dupitc Addressograph). ion (of 1054285 J. S. Duncan; Printing-forme sece writer sheet-metal with embossed dresso” characters for duplicating; graph). .type 1054384 E. B. Barber; Typographic machins h by with dovetail grooves; justificat. intro” spreading with temporary spacers , duces locking-strip ; see 1002212)% (com” 1054489 E. B. Barber; Typographic machine stripi plete with swaging-device for locking 189 claims ; see 1054384). . A pro
  - 1054582 E. M. von Marchthal; Machine “graph ducing printed matter (printing-Ltions is control with minimum of perforat record-strip). aucins
  - 1054790 W. J. Wilkinson; Process for Prohoto half-tone relief printing-plates graphic control of differential etch —sins 1054838 J. C. Grant; Typecasting and con ividual machine (producing a line of inoa line: type from previously assembled Aation o' justified matrices at a single opera casting; Grantype). sgand
  - 1055089 F. Schimmel ; Machine for compostentar) casting lines of type (supplen posi” polyhedral multiple-strike matrice tioned from keyboard; RototyPea for
  - 1055176 C. E. Hopkins; Cooling-appara). curved stereotype-plates (Autopla castio 1055300 H. Degener ; Typesetting and linepe): machine (trimming-device ; Linotzingin 1055301 H. Degener; Linotype machine Prices to multiple-strike, mixed-matter level for distributing. Linotype),, type
  - 1055302 H. Degener; Trimming-apparatus 0 line-casting machines (Linotype), (for 1055388 P. T. Dodge; Typecasting machy, froll casting type or logotypes singwa suc” strikes in a wheel or plate present cessively to a mould ; Linotype), (wheels 1055649 J. R. Nolan; Numbering-machine' each of numbering-head recessed into other). (su?”
  - 1055770 W. J. F. Maidhof; Printing-form porting bases of type-blocks). t tot 1056024 C. H. Heider; Printing-attachmeticall) lumber planing machines (autom name stamps or prints from die-plates address and grade). . (sets
  - 1056042 J. D. Morgan; Typograph machinna in” line of type line-justified, inked “graph” pressed for further use planob cally). . (pre
  - 1056267 P. T. Dodge; Typographical machin and venting transposition of spacepikingi character-matrices in rapid Woatris arrests a spacer in reserve near " 1 line; Linotype). achin
  - 1056314 H. A. Armstrong; Line-casting 111 and (preventing transposition of spacerkingi character-matrices in rapid WIx-jinei holds a spacer in reserve near math see 1056267; Linotype).
- p.662 - vue 830/901
- - AMERICAN PATENTS.
  - 663
  - 0000000 000000000 00000 0 00 00 6655.
  - O O) O O) 040 O O) 0000 OUU1 CM CM CM CM CMCM CM Ui Cm Cm CUI Ut 0O o—
  - mm m m mo o o 0000 ioio <0 co co co coco or NT AN 0 00
  - CMCM CM O 0 00 00 O CM CM tO O OO ^ GO NO MO 00 -AO H H Co r 0
  - CMCM O 00 - N NT COD HO OCM H OWN COO O OD0 CON O 00 CM
  - V, 00 00 00 00 CM V OH CO CMCM ON CM M0 O U 01 O N.U V CT N CM
  - 1913 (continued).
  - C. Muehleisen ; Matrix - escapement mechanism of typographical composing-machines (Linotype).
  - C. W. Ludtke; Type-case attachment (to ordinary case for spaces and quads).
  - J- F. Ohmer; Printing-mechanism for ticket issuing and auditing machines (typewheels for month, date and class).
  - A.L. Saltzman and J. D. Morgan; Chases for positioning typographic surfaces (for impressions to be used subsequently as relief or planographic surfaces).
  - B. Dick; Printing-apparatus (for duplicating; see 1053364).
  - G.E. Lee; Matrix-suspending bar for linotype machines (short removable grooved nose for elevator and distributor bars ; Linotype).
  - +1. S. Folger, and A. M. Comstock; Handstamp (spring support to type-holding frame).
  - C. Muehleisen ; Matrix or type-die for use in typographical composing-machines (facilitating correction with multiple-strike matrices ; Linotype).
  - J- R. Rogers; Typographical machine (feeding thin matrices to each thread and thick matrices to alternate threads
  - of distributor screws, preventing over-taking at release ; see 942845 ; Linotype). — M. Chapman; Line-casting machine (setting tabular matter; assembler-bar clutch; displacing star-wheel; Linotype). M. G. Standley ; Registering-stamp (records on a roll contained in the stamp).
  - P S. Kramer; Electric type-metal heater for linotype machines (alternating current).
  - C. Muehleisen; Typographical line-casting machine (adjusting trimming-knives for different bodies; see 941384; Linotype).
  - J- Dorneth; Typesetting and casting machine (swinging removable buffer to Prevent damage to matrices in distribu-I tion; Typograph).
  - ", Low ; Typographic composing-machine (plurality of magazines and matrix-dis-tributing mechanisms).
  - J- Dorneth ; Matrix-setting and line-casting machine (matrix carrying frame with plurality of adjacent rows of matrices).
  - E. Perry; Hand time-stamp (with indicating means in the handle).
  - Winter; Machine for trimming the edges of curved electrotype- and stereo-- type-plates.
  - J. W. Simmons; Die-block holder for striking matrices by a drop-hammer.
  - W.S. Warnock; Printers clamping-device (for plates).
  - Wells; Impression stamp (for textile R material ; see 552800).
  - F. Bellows ; Space-selecting and releasing mechanism; (see 895231 ; Electric Com-positor).
  - J. E. Hanrahan; Single-type casting attachment for linotype machines (bye-Pass from pump-channel; casts a loose-type as well as a slug at each mould-wheel revolution. Linotype).
  - A.W. Wood; Combined moulding machine and steam-table (for stereotype matrices).
  - S. E. Dittman ; Method of producing made-ready printing-surfaces.
  - C. Brown ; Stamping machine for thickness of material (automatic from plurality of stamps).
  - Le Boeuf ; Casting control-mechanism for linotype machines (cut-out; Electric Compositor).
  - — M. Todd and C. G. Tiefel ; Printing apparatus (for stamping limiting-amount characters on cheques, bonds, etc.).
  - • H. Pierpont; Matrix-gauging and sorting-F mechanism (Monotype).
  - * HI. Pierpont; Typecasting machine mould-adjusting and matrix-clamping mechanism ; Monotype).
  - No.
  - 1061560 F. H. Pierpont; Machine for the casting and composing of single types in Semitic languages (cast in order reverse to composition from matrices turned through 180° ; Monotype).
  - 1061561 F. H. Pierpont; Record-strip composing-machine (supplemental measuring-mechanism and signal for casting spaced-out German-characters ; Monotype).
  - 1061562 F. H. Pierpont; Pump (preventingfreezing).
  - 1061564 F. H. Pierpont; Machine for severing uniform lengths from a rod or bar (in uniform motion ; for matrix-blanks).
  - 1061745 J. E. Hewett; Means for locking type-formes in a chase (internal channel and ribs on sidesticks and quoins).
  - 1062283 F. Kohnle ; Type-chase (with type-holding sockets extending through).
  - 1062392 J. E. Gagnon and A. Kaufmann; Type-case (metal with interlocked partitions).
  - 1062487 W. G. MacMillan; Type-guard (spring galley-stop for holding reglets, type, etc., in position).
  - 1062616 A. G. Stevenson; Variable liner for line-casting moulds (in two parts interlocked by a cast piece).
  - 1062770 F. C. L. d’Aix ; Typograph machine (for successive types or slugs).
  - 1063027 H. H. Hancock ; Means for making up and piling pages of type (waiting for the press).
  - 1063232 P. Weber; Numbering-machine (hand-stamp holding wheel-frame depressed for changing).
  - 1063267 D. S. Kennedy; Line-casting machine (warning for metal low in pot ; Linotype).
  - 1063337 J. S. Duncan; Typesetting machine (for short grooved type ; Addressograph).
  - 1063348 J. P. Harrison, Jr.; Adding machine (10-key system).
  - 1063363 T. M. Lilleberg ; Machine for producing characters by use of a plurality of rectangular wires (63 wires shown in figure).
  - 1063668 A. Egli; Machine for casting and preparing curved stereotype-plates (agitating metal in pot).
  - 1063749 A. J. Tizley; Mould for electrotyping processes (celluloid for cyanide bath).
  - 1063979 G. Laemmer; Typographical machine (clutch-controlling mechanism operated by “ foreign ” matrices ; Linotype).
  - 1064052 A. L. Case ; Method of producing stereotype printing-plates (obviating trimming).
  - 1064134 M. A. Droitcour ; Method of making printing-plates (celluloid, etc., pressed between rigid plates and vacuum to exhaust air between celluloid and plates).
  - 1064247 U. Piagneri ; Space-band chute (Linotype).
  - 1064319 G. C. Glenn ; Mouthpiece-wiper for Linotype machines.
  - 1064451 E. L. de Forest; Calculating machine (multiplies by 1 to 9 by one movement of the handle).
  - 1064455 P. T. Dodge; Printing-forme (slugs recessed at sides and top at end to receive slugs overhanging above and below; Linotype).
  - 1064487 D. S. Kennedy ; Typographical composing-machine (Linotype).
  - 1065299 A. Dutton; Manufacture of stereotype-plates (gauge for securing accuracy in height).
  - 1065 300 A. Dutton; Matrix for the manufacture of stereotype and like blocks for printing (thin asbestos sheets).
  - 1065301 A. Dutton; Apparatus for making stereotype and like blocks (slide-valve for pouring).
  - 1065329 F. C. L. d’Aix ; Line-casting machine (see R. 13048).
  - 1065348 A. Eichler; Typographical composing-machine (Linotype).
  - 1065885 F. W. Merrick; Stamping, marking, or numbering-machine (facilitating change of number-wheels).
  - 1066032 C. Muehleisen; Typographical composing and casting machine (guides for matrices and spacers of multiple-face machines ; Linotype).
- p.663 - vue 831/901
- - 664
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No. 1913 (continued).
  - 1066086 H. Degener; Line-setting and casting machine (guides for matrices and spacers of multiple-face machines ; Linotype).
  - 1066148 F. B. Rae; Printing-telegraph system.
  - 1066336 H. S. Steege ; Type-chase (holding type at an angle to the inking-roller).
  - 1066576 L. B. Benton; Parallel-lining-device (for engraving matrices of shaded letters).
  - 1066625 D. S. Kennedy; Line-casting machine (trimming-knife wiper; Linotype).
  - 1066690 C. V. Wilgus; Keyboard for calculating machines (preventing inaccurate registration; see 940708; Adder).
  - 1066827 C. Martin; Rotary numbering-head for ticket-printing (differential peripheral spacing of plurality of heads).
  - 1066932 W. J. F. Maidhof ; Printing-forme for short-type (see 1003482).
  - 1067067 K. M. Schlueter and F. Schlueter, Jr., Mechanism for imposing and registering printing-plates.
  - 1067120 A. B. Ilsley ; Type-case of sheet-metal.
  - 1067222 C. L. Johnston; Numbering-machine (for successive repetition; uses embossed plates with plurality of characters).
  - 1067448 M. G. Standley; registering hand-stamp (external and duplicate internal impressions).
  - 1067503 C. E. Burdine; Typographical machine (transferring-device receiving two or more line-sections; for double-column matter; Linotype).
  - 1067519 J. G. Holbourns ; Typographical composing-machine (escapement; detaching bank of strikers ; Linotype).
  - 1067543 H. Pearce and J. E. Billington; Typographical composing and casting machine (preventing distribution and facilitating correction of improperly line-justified line; Linotype).
  - 1067552 J. R. Rogers; Line-casting machine (distribution for double-magazine; Linotype).
  - 1067553 J. R. Rogers ; Typographical composing-machine (escapement; initial acceleration of released matrix; Linotype).
  - 1067590 H. Degener; Matrix-setting and type-line casting-machine (assembling of multiple-face matrices; Linotype).
  - 1067591 H. Degener; Typesetting and line-casting machine (distribution of multiple-face matrices ; Linotype).
  - 1067592 H. Degener; Matrix-setting and line-casting machine (bringing multiple-face matrices to one level for distributing; Linotype).
  - 1068384 L. I. Darby; adding-machine (the aggregate sum of additions is recorded and printed).
  - 1068468 J. J. Walser; Chases (to permit close spacing of formes).
  - 1068478 L. B. Benton; Apparatus for cutting matrices (parallel-lining-device for making formers).
  - 1068786 H. Kfintzler ; Numeral-wheel support for adding machines (enumerating and accumulating).
  - 1068896 S. J. Harry; Ticket-dating hand-lever stamp.
  - 1068936 F. Schimmel; Apparatus for setting and casting separate types on linotype machines (casts a line of loose-type singly from individual matrices after-casting a slug; Rototype).
  - 1068947 J. W. Terry ; Ticket-stamping machine (for dates and destinations).
  - 1069104 F. H. Bickford; Calculating machine (quick-acting; over-rotation preventers).
  - 1069152 J. C. Lotterhand ; Printing-mechanism for adding machines (type-actuators ; Addo-meter).
  - 1069176 W. A. Reade; Typograph (slug-casting machine with matrix-bars ; see 856539 ; Ludlow Typograph).
  - 1069192 L. R. Schmidt ; Hand-stamp (securing type-band operating-mechanism).
  - 1069315 M. Baumann; Apparatus for printing text on tapes (type-segment on printing-roller).
  - No. . ggs). 1069356 M. Tilden; Hand-stamp (for printingonondle 1069468 E. M. Rathburn ; Hand-stamp (with n flexibly connected to head). jating 1069868 C. S. Ellis; Hand printing-stamp ( from type-bands). . Casting-1069927 H. Degener; Line-setting and Sating; machine (locking matrix-line for cas Linotype). (10 1069953 W. W. Hopkins; Calculating machtepeat number-keys also total, error and + keys). .hine 1070034 W. W. Hopkins; Calculating me dis-(totalizer-wheels rotated differen tances in registration of digits)., neving 1070235 B. M. Des Jardins; Type line-Jus para-mechanism (temporary spaces or_® line-tors in intervals are replaced D) justifying spaces; Unitype).
  - 1070410 E. S. Church ; Time-printing recordeTchine 1070485 D. S. Kennedy; Line-casting Miacent (alternate actuation of two akey; escapements from a single finge Linotype). sing-1070687 A. Hoyer; Typographical comparing machine (releasing matrices Tty of similar characters from a plural suc-magazine-channels alternately or cessively; Linotype). (for 1070876 H. Degener; Typecasting machintrices; casting sorts from Monoline, etc., me Linotype). . casting
  - 1070947 H. Degener; Line-setting and copy machine for producing mixed . (avoiding tilting of spacers ; Linoty- two 1071150 J. A. Fraser; Printers’ furniture o back stamped sheet-steel dishes united to back). ding 10713I1 W. S. Graffam; Adding and rec back” machine (rotating numeral-wheels wards for subtracting). . caper” 1071340 A. Pollak ; Apparatus for perforating, see strips (for automatic telegraphs' 675495; writing-telegraph]). , holder, 1071349 C. F. Rockstroh, Jr. ; Printing-plateegister and registering-clamp (or hook). otter" 1071527 W. J. Pannier, Jr. ; Stamp (roller Pubbe-with textile band carrying raised-characters). cosing” 1071582 J. R. Rogers; Typographical comhe-face Machine (levelling of multtsecond
  - matrices between first and
  - elevator ; Linotype). (see
  - 1071626 W. J. Pannier, Jr.; Hand-stamp
  - 1071527). cosing
  - 1071981 R. F. Barnes; Typographical couth for machine (distributing-mechanist* plurality of magazines ; LinotyPelachine
  - 1072037 J. R. Rogers; Line-casting Dices to (sorting and distributing mate) plurality of magazines ; Linotype device
  - 1072137 A. E. Markwell; Matrix-mouldingAils on (for casting rule-retaining doveine). type-slugs in the Linotype macmosing, 1072653 J. R. Rogers; Typographical comes all.
  - machine (second elevator recetVievelsi sustains matrices at different clevato' level changed between second e
  - and distributor; Linotype). chine 1072737 D. S. Kennedy; Typographical 01 (escapement-mechanism for plur magazines; Linotype). machine
  - 1072763 L. E. Morrison; Typographical ery to (distribution of matrices; dellotype)' distributor at different levels ; L1 machine 1072765 F. W. Neumayer; Line-casting emblin
  - (operating multiple-level @Spe).
  - slides from the keyboard ; Linotytype 1072902 G. H. Benedict ; Electrotype- or ster
  - plate cleaner. , simile
  - 1072917 C. Crisp; Type-slug casting and
  - machine. .achi
  - 1072927 J. Dorneth ; Typograph composing-^ an.
  - (setting matrices first horizonte TyP° then vertically for slug-casting,
  - 1073105 G.SE Dunton; Method of backike of electrotype-shells in the manure electrotype-plates.
- p.664 - vue 832/901
- - AMERICAN PATENTS.
  - 665
  - O o co 28
  - N N 0 0
  - 1 o o'
  - o'
  - 0
  - O
  - 8 o
  - co o
  - 1
  - O o
  - 6 0 % S Co (O co H
  - co v O U-) H N 0 2
  - of o'
  - 02 00
  - 0
  - 1913 (continued).
  - J. R. Rogers ; Typographical machine (distribution of matrices; font-determining notch additional to magazine-combina-tion ; Linotype).
  - T. Dempster, Jr.; Clamp for printers’ formes (securing centre to prevent sagging).
  - g. S. Hice and J. Barnes; Settable-type device (combination of typewheels and slugs in fudge-box).
  - C.G. Furman; Stamping-mechanism (for impressing records of signal-indicating marks).
  - F. W. Weston; Printers’ plate-holding device (hook or clip for facilitating regis-tering of multicolour-plates).
  - D. Petri-Palmedo ; Squirt-preventer mechanism for linotype machines (cut-out for pump; Linotype).
  - A. P. Brooks ; Printers’ type and furniture (with interlocking ribs and grooves).
  - J. T. Barton; Printer’s quoin (ribs and grooves to prevent movement relative to reglet).
  - P. T. Dodge ; Line-casting machine (means for controlling, from the keyboard, metal supply to melting-pot ; Linotype).
  - E. M. Erb; Printing-plate holder and registering-clamp.
  - T. S. Fox; Four-colour printing-process (with black key and screens at angles of - 15°, 45°, 75°, and 105° respectively).
  - H. J. S. Gilbert-Stringer and P. W. Druitt ; Apparatus for composing and casting type (assembly-box ; line-justifying vice ; reassembly-box ; Stringertype).
  - J. P. Hunter and H. Kuntzler ; Keyboardlocking mechanism for adding machines (of the “ Wales” class).
  - H. Degener; Matrix-setting and type-line casting-machine (preventing oblique
  - o co 00
  - 8 o
  - 1 o
  - O 0 10 o
  - movement of matrices; Linotype).
  - P. T. Dodge ; Typographical machine (interconnected mould-end and matrix vice-jaw for casting varying lengths of line ; Lino-stype).
  - . T. Dodge; Typographical composing-machine (movable throat for distribution to multiple magazines ; Linotype).
  - R. M. Grove; Matrix-distributing mechanism (cut-out operated when a matrix - fouls the distributor-screws ; Linotype).
  - 4950 D. S. Kennedy; Typographical machine (plural magazine matrix-escapement gear ; locking for inoperative magazine ; Lino-- type).
  - J. R. Rogers; Typographical composing-machine (cut-out operated when a matrix fouls the distributor-screws ; Linotype).
  - M. Barr and E. R. Clarke; Calculating
  - O
  - machine (multiplying and recording money values for non-decimal systems and at fractional rates ; Autokal).
  - H. Degener; Line-setting and casting machine (water-cooling for mould-wheel; Linotype).
  - C. Gammeter; Machine for feeding type (removes jet and distributes into two channels ; Multigraph).
  - R. O. Boardman; Typographical composing-machine (vertically sliding throat for plurality of magazines ; Linotype).
  - R. O. Boardman ; Typographical machine (transfer-mechanism for delivering
  - O 10 o
  - O 10
  - 0
  - co
  - 0
  - o'
  - O o V
  - matrices after leaving the distributor-bar in multiple-magazine machines; Lino-175141 H. Degener ; Mould-carrier of machines for casting type-slugs (ensuring contact over 10=5-0. TTmatrix-surface ; Linotype).
  - 5500 H. A. W. Wood; Slug-delivery for slug-casting machines (mould producing Io-4 . plurality of slugs).
  - 724 W. J. Poole; Distributing machine (for Ios.eindividual type).
  - 75822 E. E. Gregory; Dating-stamp for bills (with advancing gear for 30, 60, 90 days,
  - ANU.
  - -=06=(S. C. Cox ’ Printing- or addressing-machine 10329883 (selecting single or plural line-slugs and 10759°°% distributing to magazine or store).
  - 1076029 B. O. Fanslow; Machine for setting and distributing printing-type (for short-type ; Polygraph).
  - 1076046 C. M. Letz; Reinforcement for printing-plates (preventing crushing).
  - 1076064 J. R. Rogers; Typographical composing-machines (assembling multiple-strike matrices ; see 547633 ; Linotype).
  - 1076140 J. McNamara; Typographical machine (assembling matrices and spacers; Lino-type).
  - 1076184 R. M. Bedell; Typographical machine (interchangeable magazines; Linotype).
  - 1076187 R. O. Boardman; Typographical machine (distributing-mechanism and presentation of matrices thereto; Linotype).
  - 1076258 J. Alsenz; Hand-stamp for printing time.
  - 1076343 A. A. Ball, Jr.; Typographical casting-machine (safety-liner for mould).
  - 1076408 H. Degener; Matrix-setting and line-casting machine (changing magazines).
  - 1076409 P. T. Dodge; Typographical machine (interchangeable multiple-magazines; Linotype).
  - 1076433 G. P. Kingsbury; Line-casting machine (uses space-key to effect change of channel for duplicated channels for e, i, etc.; Linotype).
  - 1076478 R. O. Boardman; Line-casting machine (series of magazines operated by a single movable escapement; Linotype).
  - 1076487 H. Degener; Typographical line-casting machine (limiting descent of interchangeable magazines ; Linotype).
  - 1076640 H. C. Osborn; Typesetting and distributing machine (for short grooved-type ; Multigraph).
  - 1076906 H. C. Osborn; Mechanism for storing, assembling and distributing type (Multigraph).
  - 1077194 F. Eller; Automatic ticket-printing apparatus (selecting plates or formes from magazine).
  - 1077220 H. R. Cowan; Calculating and printing machine (for adding and subtracting and giving totals and differences; prints on paper fed below or on a book).
  - 1077332 H. Degener; Matrix-setting and type-slug casting machine (guide-ledges for multiple-strike matrices ; Linotype).
  - 1077362 M. W. Morehouse; Line-casting machine (bridge for altering distribution to other magazine of multiple-strike matrices; Linotype).
  - 1077397 N. Dodge; Typographical machine (distribution to multiple magazines; Lino-type).
  - 1077483 O. Luppe ; Method of producing printing-plates.
  - 1077493 A. Smith; Typesetting and type-distributing machine (see 1050495 and 1050496).
  - 1077512 H. Drewell; Matrix-setting and typecasting machine (assembly-block with two receiving-tracks ; Linotype).
  - 1077604 S. D. Handlin; Typographical machine (assembling multiple-strike matrices; Linotype).
  - 1077621 M. A. McKee; Treatment of printing-plates (obtaining uniform thickness and avoiding make-ready).
  - 1077642 J. R. Rogers; Line-casting machine (interchanging magazines; Linotype).
  - 1077721 D. S. Kennedy; Typographical machine (restoring to place and retaining displaced matrices in multiple-magazine machines ; Linotype).
  - 1077755 R. N. Rogers ; Addressing-machine (operating type-plates singly from a stack).
  - 1077759 A. Savarese ; Type-composing machine (for individual type subsequently line-justified by hand ; see 920086).
  - 1078049 T. H. Knapp; Space-band for linotype machines (with brass or copper inset on stationary wedge ; Linotype).
  - 1078358 H. Landsiedel; Adding machine (with recording-gear; see 1039130; Addograph).
- p.665 - vue 833/901
- - 666
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - No.
  - 1078359 H.
  - 1913 (continued).
  - . Landsiedel; Adding and recording machine (see 1039130 ; Addograph).
  - 1078400 W. R. Allen; Type (interlocking to work
  - No.
  - 1080348
  - O 00 O
  - 1078422
  - CO
  - C
  - together as individual type, logotypes, or slugs either on cylinder or flat; Multigraph).
  - W. R. Allen; Type-bar (with inclined portions removed to permit of setting on cylinder).
  - J. Dorneth; Line-setting and casting machine; (means for interchanging matrices; Typograph).
  - S. G. Goss; Matrix-forming machine
  - o
  - CO o
  - 1080350
  - 1080351
  - 0
  - co
  - O
  - (mangle-press for matrices).
  - A. H. Wadewitz;
  - flong stereotype-
  - Chase-lock (for false
  - I co O
  - chases).
  - N. Dodge; Pie-stacking device for typographical machines (for plural magazine ; separating founts; see 630112; Lino-
  - type).
  - 1078730 J. F. Hoxsey ; Adjustable liner (for moulds
  - 1078832
  - 1078854
  - °
  - O
  - 0 o
  - 1079061
  - 0 O on
  - O o
  - O
  - 00
  - O © Co O
  - 1079101
  - O % H
  - \
  - & o
  - 6 o
  - see 796213; Linotype).
  - C. Collin; Typesetting and distributing machine.
  - D. J. Higginbotham; Stamping-device (multiple-surface hand-stamp).
  - F. H. Lynds ; Linotype mould (for cored or recessed slugs ; see 1005463; Linotype).
  - J. F. Hoxsey ; Mould and liner (for adjustment from 60 to 360 points ; see 1078730 ; Linotype).
  - O. M. Pannier; Hand-stamp (applied by rocking-action).
  - H. Tugender; Plate holding means (clamps) for printing-machines.
  - N. S. Van Sant; Border-rule (slug carries border and corner and is recessed to receive the similar slug at right angles to it; Linotype).
  - F. F. Wilson; Printing-bar or slug (with overhung rule-slip cast integral thereto. Linotype).
  - M. Bottger; Typographical composing-machine (permitting composition of a large number of hair-space matrices; three keys operating channels independently or controlled by a special key controlling them in sequence ; Linotype).
  - J. S. Bancroft and M. C. Indahl; Centring or positioning mechanism for type-casting and composing machines (for normal and abnormal matrices; see 980959; Monotype).
  - J. B. S. Booth; Typographic composing-machine (multiple line-justification of line; Monotype).
  - F. H. Pierpont; Typographic composing-machine; (multiple line-justification of line ; see 944405 ; Monotype).
  - 1079366 F. Sally; Typecasting machine (keeping mould from contact with nozzle for one or more cycles ; Monotype).
  - 1079402 G. R. Cornwall; Types (photographic not typographic; transparent with opaque character for printing photographically).
  - 1079478 P. T. Dodge; Typographical machine (retarding matrices in falling into magazine; Linotype).
  - 1079486 A. W. F. Guest; Line-casting machine (retarding matrices in falling into magazines ; Linotype).
  - 1079498 D. S. Kennedy; Typographical machine
  - 1079716
  - O 00 O N O
  - 6 O 00
  - O
  - 1080330
  - (locking magazines against removal unless escapements are free; Linotype).
  - H. C. Osborn ; Typesetting and distributing machine (for short grooved-type ; Multigraph).
  - J. S. Duncan; Printing-device (name,
  - address, and salutation; index-tab
  - receiver ; Addressograph).
  - C. E. Gilbert; Device for locking lines of type (for short grooved-type ; Multi-graph).
  - H. Degener; Matrix for typesetting and line-casting machines (multiple-strike with bottom-groove and side-grooves; see 982172 ; Linotype).
  - 1080352
  - D. S. Kennedy; Typographical composing, machine (fount-distinguisher; see 68821 ‘ Linotype). .
  - L. L. Kennedy; Typographical machia (registering-marks for multiple-mo). casting machines; see 758103 ; LinotyP
  - G. P. Kingsbury ; Typographical compost; machine (alternate operation of a plural 3 of escapements; Linotype). .
  - G. P. Kingsbury; Typographical niach (locking means for plurality of mag? controlled by presence of matrices in 1 distributor; Linotype). 1
  - D. S. Knox ; Line-casting machine (retatshg for spacer assembling ; prevent
  - damage; Linotype). m
  - 080570 A. W. Le Boeuf; Slug-expeller-mecheCom-for line-casting machines (Electric
  - 1080579
  - O 00
  - O
  - %
  - 1080913
  - c O 00
  - 0
  - 1081026
  - positor). . for
  - D. Petri-Palmedo ; Trigger-mechanism key-operated machines (power-re Electric Compositor). . sible
  - H. Hopkins; Calculating machine (V1 printing). . ing a
  - B. F. Joline; Printing-mechanism (setters, relatively small number of words, o and figures for printing cheques, etc-ying
  - P. T. Dodge ; Typecasting and comp line-machine (casts individual type and lino-justified spaces from the ordinary 1 use type matrices and space-bands by to of an automatically adjustable modpre-which the matrices are successively Ban-sented after line-justification by enr sion of space-bands ; Linotype). (in
  - P. T. Dodge; Line-casting machinent-plural-magazine machines escapergular reeds or verge-rods moving in anshes; relation to the path of the magaz
  - Linotype).
  - Linotype).
  - 1081047 G. P. Kingsbury; Line-casting maceant (delivering matrices from two adjac channels alternately; Linotype). ..
  - J. H. Matthews and J. Stein ; Hand rocK stamp (detachable rubber-plate carry
  - 6 Co
  - 0
  - 00
  - 00 O
  - 8 0 05
  - O
  - 1081989
  - 1082006
  - O 00
  - N 9
  - 1082114
  - o CO D S
  - 6
  - 0 CO
  - 0
  - rubber-type). ing-
  - D. S. Kennedy; Typographical compoeeds machine (engaging and disengaging sash-or verge-rods by movement of Cino-frame ; interlocking ; see 930693 i -type). Chine
  - D. S. Kennedy; Typographical in (efiecting variation automatically^, width of magazine entrance-chan
  - Linotype). nine
  - R. O. Boardman; Line-casting ma for (matrices grooved longitudinally of a portion of the length to clear retube), sideway-acting escapement ; LinotyPpe
  - J. A. Roshon; Attachment for liny) in machines (maintaining metal-leyeach melting-pot; feeding an old slug for new one cast).
  - B. F. Bellows ; Line-justifying mecheition (single or multiple line-justin type applicable to matrices or individual 3 lines ; Electric Compositor). ting
  - H. A. W. Wood; Mould for slug-ces in machines (inserting dividing pieces for mould to effect casting of logotypes tabular work with ordinary rules), trix-
  - N. Dodge ; Typographical machine (maa tor assembling, transferring to first ele -and lifting to distributor; LinotyPlate
  - D. G. Holt and G. R. Horton ; Matrix? holder and spacer. ha-
  - A. W. Le Boeuf; Spacer-handling "nines nism for type-bar-making macn .
  - (tabular temporary-spacers ; see 92
  - Electric Compositor).* Abe-
  - E. M. Low; Device for treating metals (shell for inserting cleanto material into molten metal). 01-J. S. Duncan; Printing-device and contble 1082505) system (printing-plates with adjusting 1082506) tripper-mechanism for selection accord*
  - I to classification; Addressograph). for 1082541 F. M. Mahood ; Stamping-machine vouchers, cheques, etc. ; hand-operate 1
  - 1082279
- p.666 - vue 834/901
- - AMERICAN PATENTS.
  - 667
  - No. 1913 (continued).
  - 1082957 G. A. Julius; Apparatus for printing and issuing tickets or checks of different denominations and for registering and totalling numbers and indicating the . group- and grand-totals.
  - °02970 H. C. Osborn; Means for selecting addressplates (variously-located tongue or ,shoulder; Multigraph).
  - 083066 G. E. Dunton; Method of treating moulds used in the art of electrotyping (placed on edge in an oven to melt off the wax).
  - No.
  - 1083195 F. C. L. d’Aix ; Typographic machine (mould and ejector devices ; see 1062770).
  - R. 13539 J. C. Lotterhand; Orig. No. 985042. Printing-mechanism for adding machines.
  - R. 13597 H. Abbott. Orig. No. 878447; Time of day printing-mechanism for initial and final elapsed-time records (Calculagraph).
  - R. 13633 H. A. W. Wood. Orig. No. 1009271; Stereotype-printing-plate finishing mechanism.
  - NOTES.
- p.667 - vue 835/901
- - 668 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES
  - NOTES.
- p.668 - vue 836/901
- - APPENDIX III.
  - TECHNICAL VOCABULARY.
  - IIoXXoi uev Ovnrolg YGGCl, ula 8‘ ‘AO&V&TOLOLV.
  - Set on the Monotype in 11-point greek No. 90.
  - Multa terricolis linguae, Colestibus una.
  - Set on the Linotype in 12-point Cheltenham No. 1.
  - Many are the languages of the habiters of the earth, but one the language of the habiters of Heaven.—Rev. H. Carey.
  - Set on the Typograph in two 12-point faces.
  - English. Type (collectively) A type French. German. caracteres d’imprimerie Schrift (eine Letter un caractere ein (Druck-) Buchstabe (eine Type
  - The tang Ider Anguss le jet 3 der Gusszapfen
  - The face The counter The neck The shoulder The stem 1 the shank The body ) The front The back The nick nick The cut nick ) ne Planed nick 1 The cast nick The Supplementary nick i heel-nick I The foot-nick The groove J he depth of the groove The foot ) / . the feet ) (of the type) The drag 1 Pin-mark / The line he upper serifs (der Spritzer 1 Idas (Schrift-) Bild 10611 die (Bild-) Flache le contre-poin^on der Bunzen Ile contre-talus ) . 3. - das Fleisch (le support de talus j . (die Schulter le talus (die Achsel le corps der (Schrift-) Kegel • le devant die Vorderseite le dos die Ruckseite le cran die Signatur (-rinne) crener mit Signatur versehen le cran fait au coupoir die eingehobelte Signatur le cran du moule die eingegossene Signatur le cran supplementaire die Nebensignatur , . Ider (Fuss-) Ausstoss la gouttiere an pied lder (Fuss-) Ausschnitt la profondeur de la gout-1 die (FuSS-) Ausstosstieie desPpreds} (des lettres) (der Fasse der Letterm) die (Guss-) Marke das (Guss-) Zeichen la marque die (Anlege-) Marke das (Anlege-) Zeichen la ligne die (Grund-) Linie Idie oberen Auslaufer les obits (die oberen Anstriche
  - 669
- p.669 - vue 837/901
- - 670
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - English.
  - French.
  - German.
  - The lower serifs
  - The main-strokes The hair-lines
  - The line-to-front
  - The line-to-back
  - The side-wall
  - The body-size
  - The set
  - The depth-of-strike
  - The height-to-paper
  - Type-high
  - The head
  - Kerned and bearded sorts
  - Kerns and beards
  - A kerned sort
  - A bearded sort
  - To charge the body
  - A type with a face which 1 charges the body J
  - A fount (English) 1
  - A font (American) /
  - A short fount
  - The bill-of-fount 1 The scheme )
  - The slope (of italics)
  - The break
  - Ascenders (b, d, h, 1)
  - The ascending part
  - Descenders (g, p, q, y)
  - The descending part ( The tail J
  - Small sorts (a, c, e, m) lettres courtes
  - Sorts which charge)
  - the body (Gj,Q.f) lettres pleines
  - Long sorts 1
  - A bastard fount
  - A bastard type (an a-point face on a B-point body ; a+B)
  - Lower-case (characters) (a, b, c)
  - les empattements
  - les pleins les delies
  - le talus en pied
  - la ligne
  - 1’approche
  - la force de corps 1’epaisseur
  - la profondeur de l’oeil
  - la hauteur-en-papier
  - hauteur-caractere
  - la tete
  - les (lettres) crenees
  - les saillies run caractere crene a 1 droite ou a gauche run caractere crene en 1 1 haut ou en bas / faire plein ceil
  - un caractere plein-ceil
  - une fonte
  - un minimum
  - la police l'inclinaison) (des ital-lla pente / iques) la brisure
  - les longues du haut la queue de dessus les longues du bas la queue de dessous
  - une fonte sans nom
  - (un caractere avec un ceil de a points fondu sur un corps de B points)
  - bas de casse . (lettres) minuscules
  - (die unteren Auslaufer die unteren Anstriche die Grundstriche die Haarstriche
  - / der Raum unterhalb de
  - I Linie
  - ider Raum oberhalb do
  - 1 Linie .
  - /der (Matrizenseiten-) A
  - 1 stand
  - die Kegelstarke die Kegelweite
  - (die Bildtiefe 4 die Stempeleinschlagstie die Schrifthohe
  - (von Typenhohe (schrifthoch der Kopf
  - (unterschnittene und ube
  - l hangende Lettern die Uberhange eine unterschnittene Letter
  - eine uberhangende Letter
  - den Kegel ausfullen f (eine Letter mit Bild a
  - 1 voller Kegelgrosse
  - ein ganzer Satz
  - ein Satzminimum
  - der Giesszettel die Schrage (der Kursi schrift)
  - der Abbruch
  - (Buchstaben mit Obe
  - 1 langen
  - die Oberlange
  - (Buchstaben mit Unte
  - 1 langen
  - die Unterlange (Buchstaben mit) Mittel langen
  - kurze Buchstaben , el Buchstaben die den Keg
  - ausfullen J
  - Buchstaben auf volle
  - Kegel
  - ganze Langen
  - ein Bastardsatz . ein Bastardbuchstabe (ml a-Punkt Bild auf einer
  - B-Punkt Kegel)
  - ‘Gemeine
  - Minuskeln
  - kleine Buchstaben
- p.670 - vue 838/901
- - English.
  - Capitals (A, B, C)
  - TECHNICAL VOCABULARY.
  - 671
  - German. •
  - Versalien
  - Maj uskeln
  - grosse Buchstaben
  - petites capitales Kapitalchen
  - composition en maj uscules Versaliensatz
  - . ((unnotige Versalien be-
  - 3 majuscules U nutzen)
  - French.
  - Small capitals (a, b, c)
  - utter set in capitals wipusilua -ieefp "P tt0 use capitals} prodiguer les
  - °kep down (to use ) epargner les majuscules Capitals sparingly) ) -
  - klein drucken (moglichst
  - Matter interspersed with composition lardee
  - italics and small capitals ) -
  - Zures chiffres
  - An arabic numeral (1, 5,7) un chiffre arabe sroman numeral (I,V,VII) un chiffre romain punctuation ponctuation
  - Joints ...
  - Pi
  - omnts )..: points
  - Unctuation marks/::" les signes de ponctuation
  - d
  - To point
  - ponctuer
  - The The The
  - The The
  - comma (,) turned comma (‘) semicolon ()
  - colon (:)
  - la virgule
  - la virgule retournee le point-virgule
  - — broken colon (:—) The full point ' the full stop the period The en-dot (.)
  - 6 turned point (•, e.g. 35; used as decimal
  - le deux-points
  - le deux-points avec tiret
  - Ie point
  - wenige Versalien be-( nutzen)
  - gemischter Satz
  - Ziffern
  - eine arabische Ziffer eine romische Ziffer Interpunktion
  - } Interpunktionen /(inter-) punktieren (interpungieren Idas Komma (der Beistrich
  - das gedrehte Komma (das Semikolon (der Strichpunkt /das Kolon
  - (der Doppelpunkt
  - das Kolon mit Strich
  - jder Punkt
  - (das Punktum
  - mark in England)
  - The apostrophe ()
  - The caret (a)
  - Rotation marks 1
  - Quctled commas P " «») les guillemets
  - le gros point der starke Punkt
  - le point retourne (dont on der gedrehte Punkt (als fait emploi comme signe Dezimalzeichen in Eng-decimal en Angleterre) land gebraucht)
  - l’apostrophe
  - Ie bourdon
  - (der Apostroph
  - (das Auslassungszeichen das Einschaltungszeichen
  - die Anfuhrungszeichen
  - (die Gansefusschen
  - To quote
  - Quoted matter A quotation
  - guillemeter 1 texte entre guillemets { une citation
  - s ~ , (englische
  - ingle quotes (‘ ’) guillemets anglais simples l chen
  - rouble quotes ("") guillemet
  - The hyphen (in compounds) le trait d’union e hyphen (to join sepa- 1 rated syllables of word la division broken at end of line)
  - To hyphen
  - in Anfuhrungszeichen einschliessen
  - Satz zwischen Anfuh-rungszeichen
  - ein Zitat
  - einfache Hak-
  - guillemets anglais doubles Doppelhakchen - - • der Bindestrich
  - das Teilungszeichen das Divis
  - Division (of words) tionote of interroga-
  - The query mark
  - (?)
  - diviser
  - coupure de mot
  - le point d’interrogation
  - (mit einem Bindestrich
  - 1 versehen Trennungen
  - das Fragezeichen
- p.671 - vue 839/901
- - 672 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - English.
  - French.
  - German.
  - The note of exclamation (!)
  - Brackets (()[]{})
  - To bracket
  - The parentheses 1
  - The round brackets/ ( )
  - The crotchets yr 1 The square brackets / - -
  - The braces { }
  - Peculiars (%, %0, @, %)
  - The per cent mark (%) The per mil mark (%) The nullo (o)
  - The nuller (n repetition mark, England and France)
  - (Repetition mark, Germany)
  - The commercial a (@)
  - The per mark (P) The dash | .
  - The em rule/ ( )
  - The swell dash (—-----)
  - Leaders
  - Dot leaders (...) Hyphen leaders (—) Suspension points (..)
  - Abbreviations (abbr.)
  - To abbreviate
  - To write with abbreviations
  - Abbreviated
  - The ampersand (& 7)
  - The etcetera sign (&C., c)
  - The arrow (—>)
  - The fist )
  - The hand I (O°)
  - The index )
  - Reference marks (*t# §)
  - The asterisk) , .
  - The star /< *)
  - To asterisk
  - The (single) dagger ) The (single) obelisk ( (t)
  - The obelus
  - The double dagger )
  - The double obelisk(J)
  - The diesis J
  - The section (§)
  - The parallels (|| //)
  - The paragraph ( a The blind P / C11)
  - le point d’exclamation
  - mettre entre parentheses
  - les parentheses
  - les crochets
  - les accolades (signes accessoires ) (signes divers / le pour-cent
  - le pour-mille
  - le zero
  - la nullite (signe de repetition, Angleterre et France
  - (signe de repetition, Alle-magne)
  - ( (employe comme signe de | par en Angleterre) le signe de par
  - le tiret
  - le filet anglais 1 le couillard / signes conducteurs points conducteurs traits conducteurs les points de suspension
  - abreviations
  - abreger
  - ecrire en abrege
  - en abrege
  - l’et commercial
  - l’et caetera abrege la fleche
  - la main das Handzeichen
  - (renvois tappels de notes I’etoile (* cinq pointes) l'asterisque (* six pointes) marquer d’un asterisque
  - la croix das (Sterbe-) Kreuz
  - la double-croix
  - le paragraphe les paralleles la patte-de-mouche ( le pied-de-mouche /
  - das Ausrufzeichen Klammern _ en in Klammerneinschliess die Parenthesen die runden Klammern die eckigen Klammemn die Akkoladen
  - besondere Zeichen
  - das Prozentzeichen das Promilzeichen die Null
  - (Wiederholungszeichen, England und Frank reich) wie-der Nullstrich
  - 3 derholungszeichen,
  - I Deutschland) 1 (als Prozeichen in Engle benutzt) das Prozeichen
  - der Gedankenstrich
  - die englische Linie
  - Leitezeichen Leitepunkte Leitestriche Gedankenpunkte
  - ((Ab-) Kurzungen (Abbreviaturen abkurzen
  - (mit Abkurzungen
  - 1 , schreiben jabgekurzt tin Abbreviatur (das Etzeichen (&) tdas runde r (^ das Etceterazeichen der Pfeil
  - Nachweiszeichen Notenzeichen
  - I das Sternchen (* *) Idas Sternzeichen/ besternen
  - das Doppelkreuz
  - das Paragraphenzeichen die Parallelen das Absatzzeichen
  - das Lesezeichen
- p.672 - vue 840/901
- - TECHNICAL VOCABULARY.
  - 673
  - English.
  - Notes
  - A foot-note
  - T bottom-note } foot-note
  - A side-note
  - A shoulder note
  - Cut-in notes \ Let-in notes )
  - Marginalia 1 Marginal notes ) The runners To hook in, above To hook in, below An asterism ) *
  - The stars * The response mark (*) The versicle (V) | Heraldic signs The Greek cross 1 m The cross of St. ( (")
  - George )
  - The Latin cross (T)
  - St A (.
  - TheAndrew’s Cross (X) St. AWaltese cross (I) The tthony’s cross 1 -
  - The tan cross /CT)
  - The Buddhist cross (5) double cross (of I
  - EIchbishops and (+)
  - Thetdinals) )
  - The cross 1 1
  - The Papal cross /(#)
  - Jerusalem cross (-) J
  - "Periors (a 2)
  - An exponent 1
  - th index J
  - Inferiors (9)
  - A Suffix
  - Pronomicalsigns (6* 2 netary signs (8 4) gofiacal signs (S. m -)
  - Metelical signs (T- Q) signes botaniques
  - Archarological signs (A. =) signes meteorologiques
  - Medi 1 ogicalsigns(/DAZ) signes archeologiques
  - Cal signs (2 R7 3) signes de medecine Money .
  - 3 stgns U, $) signes de monnaie
  - French.
  - les notes
  - une note au bas de la ) . page / noter au bas de la page
  - June note marginale )
  - lune manchette 1
  - J(une note a 1’interieur en) 1
  - 1 haut de la colonne) ) 1
  - f(des notes qui rentrent I dans le texte) (les manchettes ) lies additions )
  - crocheter au dessus crocheter au dessous
  - un asterisme
  - le repons
  - le verset signes heraldiques
  - la croix grecque
  - 'la croix latine ) la croix haussee( la croix longue )
  - la croix de Saint-Andre la croix de Malte
  - la croix de Saint-Antoine
  - la croix de Bouddha
  - la double croix (des arch-. eveques et cardinaux)
  - la triple croix (du pape) la croix potencee superieures
  - un exposant
  - inferieures
  - un indice
  - (86 R) signes astronomiques
  - signes des planetes signes du zodiaque
  - German.
  - (Noten
  - (Anmerkungen
  - eine Fussnote
  - Fussnoten ansetsen
  - eine Randglosse
  - (eine Note an der oberen
  - Innenseite einer Ko-. lumne)
  - } Randglossen im Text
  - Marginalien
  - die Zeilenzahler uberschliessen unterschliessen
  - die drei Sternchen
  - das Responszeichen das Verszeichen heraldische Zeichen
  - das griechische Kreuz
  - (das lateinische Kreuz Idas Passionskreuz
  - das Andreaskreuz das Malteserkreuz
  - das agyptische Kreuz
  - das Buddhakreuz
  - das Doppelkreuz (der Erz-bischofe und Kardinale)
  - fdas dreifache Kreuz Idas Papstkreuz
  - das Kruckenkreuz (hochstehende Buchstaben 1 und Ziffern
  - (ein Exponent
  - (eine Hochzahl
  - / tiefstehende Buchstaben
  - 1 und Ziffern
  - (ein Zeiger eine Marke ein Index astronomische Zeichen planetarische Zeichen
  - J Zodiakzeichen
  - 1 Tierkreiszeichen botanische Zeichen meteorologische Zeichen archaologische Zeichen Apothekerzeichen (Geldzeichen iMunzzeichen
  - 2 X
- p.673 - vue 841/901
- - 674 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - English.
  - Geometrical signs (A | Q) signes de geometrie
  - The triangle mark (A) The square mark () The circle mark (O) The angle mark (Z) The right-angle mark (L)
  - The perpendicular mark(L) le signe " perpendiculaire ” das Lotzeichen
  - das Parallelzeichen
  - The parallel mark (I //) The rectangle mark ()
  - The rhombus mark ( L7)
  - The semicircle mark (C) The arc mark (~) Mathematical signs(+ X f~
  - The plus mark (+)
  - The minus mark (—) The plus-minus mark (±) The equal (-ity) mark (=)
  - The multiple mark (X)
  - The divide mark ()
  - Fractions (2 1)
  - VO 16/
  - A straight fraction (4
  - A sloping fraction
  - A diagonal fraction
  - Solid fractions (5 %)
  - Split fractions (5=5 Built-up fractions
  - The division line ( —/)
  - The horizontal bar (—)
  - The solidus 1 ,
  - The diagonal stroke ) V
  - The numerator
  - The denominator
  - The root mark 1 ( / The radix mark ) A ) The index of a root The vinculum (—) The degrees mark (°) The minutes mark (') The seconds mark (") The thirds mark (”)
  - The infinity mark (x )
  - The ratio mark (:)
  - The proportion marks (
  - French.
  - le signe " triangle ” le signe “ carre " le signe " cercle " le signe d’angle le signe d’angle droit
  - le signe " parallele " le signe “ rectangle ”
  - le signe “ losange ”
  - le signe " demi-cercle "
  - le signe d’arc
  - ) signes de mathematique
  - le signe " plus "
  - le moins
  - le signe “ plus ou moins " le signe d’egalite
  - le signe " multiplie par ”
  - le signe " divise par ”
  - fractions
  - une fraction a barre horizontale
  - une fraction arithmetique
  - (une fraction a barre diagonale
  - une fraction commerciale
  - , ., (zusammengegossene fractions d une seule piece| Bruchziffern
  - fractions en deux pieces fractions en trois ou plusieurs pieces la barre de fractions la barre horizontale
  - la barre diagonale
  - le numerateur
  - le denominateur
  - le radical
  - l’indice d’un radical le filet de racine le signe “ degre ” le signe “ minute ” le signe " seconde ” le signe “tierce ” le signe “infini” le signe “ raison ”
  - ) les signes de proportion
  - German. geometrische Zeichen das Dreieckzeichen das Quadratzeichen das Kreiszeichen das Winkelzeichen das Winkelrechtzeichen
  - das Rechteckzeichen (das Rhombuszeichen ldas Rautezeichen das Halbkreiszeichen das Bogenzeichen mathematische Zeichen
  - l das Pluszeichen
  - Idas Additionszeichen das Minuszeichen das Plusminuszeichen das Gleichheitszeichen /das Vervielfaltigungs-zeichen
  - das Multiplikations-zeichen
  - ( das Multiplizierzeichen j das Teilungszeichen ldas Dividierzeichen Bruche
  - ein gerader Bruch
  - ein schrager Bruch
  - zusammengesetzte BruC ziffern
  - der Bruchstrich . der gerade Bruchstrich /der schrage Bruchstric 'der Schragstrich
  - I die Oberziffer der Zahler
  - /die Unterziffer der Nenner
  - das Wurzelzeichen der Wurzelexponent der Oberstrich das Gradzeichen das Minutenzeichen das Sekundenzeichen das Tertienzeichen Idas Unendlich (-keits") ' zeichen
  - das Verhaltniszeichen Idie Proportionszeiche die Proportionspunk 6
- p.674 - vue 842/901
- - TECHNICAL VOCABULARY.
  - 675
  - English.
  - The variation mark (gc ) The inequality mark (+) The difference mark (~) The congruence mark (=) The integration mark (J) The differential mark (8) The greater mark (>) The not-greater mark( £) The less mark (<)
  - The not-less mark (4. =) Cartographical signs (0 X) Map type :: ::: Ornamental letters M R
  - An initial The first line - 6 initial line
  - Initial letters
  - The head-line
  - D Opped heads The
  - The
  - The
  - The
  - The The The
  - drop-down foot-line
  - direction-line 1 Signature-line J signature title-signature
  - Catch-line atline of a paragraph neap beginning of the
  - To make even
  - An egin even J A commompaeragraph } ull-out paragraph hanging paragraph
  - The brealk-line
  - To end a break) quad out (
  - French.
  - le signe de variation le signe d’inegalite le signe de difference le signe de la congruence (le signe " integrate " 1 lle signe “ somme " j le signe “ differentiel " le signe “ plus grand que " (le signe " pas plus grand 1 que”
  - (le signe " moins grand ) 1 que” j (le signe " pas moins grand 1 que”
  - signes cartographiques (caracteres pointillesi (caracteres grises /
  - lettres ornees
  - lettrines
  - une initiale la premiere ligne la ligne de tete
  - la ligne essentielle
  - les titres interieurs le blanc d’un titre ( . interieur • / le pied (d’une page) 1 la ligne de cadrats j
  - la ligne de pied
  - la signature
  - la signature de titre
  - la ligne perdue
  - (derniere ligne d’un alinea au commencement d’une page) renforcer une ligne faire ligne pleine une ligne pleine
  - tomber en ligne (pleine)
  - un alinea rentrant
  - un alinea aligne un alinea saillant un sommaire
  - la ligne perdue 1 la ligne boiteuse ? la ligne creuse ) remplir la ligne (avec des cadrats)
  - German.
  - das Variationszeichen das Ungleichheitszeichen das Differenzzeichen das Kongruenzzeichen das Integralzeichen
  - das Differentialzeichen das “ grosser ” Zeichen das " nicht grosser ” Zeichen
  - das " kleiner ” Zeichen
  - das “ nicht kleiner ” Zeichen kartographische Zeichen
  - Kartentypen
  - Zierbuchstaben
  - Initialen
  - grosse Anfangsbuch-staben
  - ein Anfangsbuchstabe die erste Zeile
  - die Anfangszeile
  - (die Hauptzeile
  - (die Kopfzeile
  - Spiegelseiten
  - der Spiegel
  - der Unterschlag
  - die Normzeile
  - (die Signatur
  - Idas Bogenzeichen
  - die Norm
  - die Stichzeile
  - die Leitzeile
  - ein Hurenkind
  - eine Zeile einziehen
  - eine Zeile stumpf halten eine volle Zeile
  - stumpf halten
  - ein gewohnlicher Absatz
  - (ein stumpf gehaltener
  - 1 Absatz
  - (der Ausgang
  - (die Ausgangszeile
  - den Ausgang ausschliessen
  - mit Quadraten ausschliessen
- p.675 - vue 843/901
- - 676
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - English.
  - To end even
  - A line of quads
  - A line of points Interlinear matter Diacritic marks ) (A ~ Diacritics / 3 2
  - Accents (z ~)
  - The acute accent (‘) The grave accent (')
  - The circumflex (A)
  - The tilde (~)
  - The curly n (n)
  - The short-vowel mark (“)
  - Short letters (a, 0, u)
  - The long-vowel mark (-)
  - Long letters (a, 0, u) The doubtful-length mark (~)
  - Long-shorts (i, 5)
  - The cedilla (5)
  - The diaeresis (")
  - The umlaut mark (”)
  - To accent ka letter)
  - To accentuate) 7
  - Accented letters (a, e, e)
  - Overscored letters (g, m)
  - Underscored letters (e, n)
  - Crossed letters (ft, I) Scratched figures (2) Dotted letters (a, n) Dotted 'figures (i, 3) Typewriter type abode
  - The point system
  - The standard point
  - The standard line
  - A cut-in letter)
  - A drop letter 1
  - A two-line letter
  - A cock-up letter
  - To cock up
  - To throw up A title-letter Titling type A ligature (fl, ae, ce) Two-letter ligatures (ff, fi) Logotypes (ment, ion)
  - French.
  - tomber en ligne
  - une ligne de blancs une ligne pointee intercalation
  - signes diacritiques
  - accents
  - l’accent aigu l’accent grave
  - l’accent circonflexe
  - le tilde
  - le n tilde
  - l’accent prosodique bref lettres breves
  - l’accent prosodique long
  - lettres longues
  - l’accent prosodique dou-teux
  - lettres douteuses
  - la cedille
  - le trema
  - le signe de 1’inflexion
  - accentuer (une lettre)
  - lettres accentuees
  - sortes barrees en dessus
  - sortes barrees en dessous
  - lettres barrees chiffres barres lettres ponctuees chiffres ponctues caracteres de machine )
  - a ecrire J
  - le systeme de points le point systematique la ligne systematique
  - (une lettre de deux points empietant sur la deuxieme ligne)
  - (une lettre de deux-points
  - une binaire une montante
  - faire ressortir une lettre a titre caracteres a titres une ligature les doubles logotypes
  - German.
  - mit einer vollen Zeile ausgehen eine Quadratenzeile
  - (diakritische Zeichen Unterscheidungszeiche
  - Akzente
  - Ton zeichen der Akut der Gravis der Zirkumflex . das Dehnungszeichen die Tilde das spanische n Idas Kurzezeichen Idas KurzungszeicheD
  - Kurzbuchstaben |das Langezeichen Idas Dehnungszeichen
  - Langbuchstaben das Kurzungs- un
  - Dehnungszeichen
  - die Cedille
  - das Trema
  - das Umlautzeichen mit ((einen Buchstaben)
  - 1 Tonzeichen verse-(Akzentbuchstaben ben akzentuierte Buchsta (Akzente Label
  - oberstrichene Buchs | unterstrichene Buch
  - I staben ben gestrichene Buchsta gestrichene Ziffern on punktierte Buchstap-punktierte Ziffern Schreibmaschinensch
  - das Punktsystem der Normalpunkt die Normallinie eine unterschnittene
  - Initiale ein unterschnittener
  - . Buchstabe .
  - Letabe ein Doppelkegelbue Istabe ein zweizeiliger Bucle eine liniehaltende Tniten Initialen in Linie S auszeichnen ein Titelbuchstabe
  - Titelschriften
  - eine Ligatur Zweiletterligaturen Logotypen
- p.676 - vue 844/901
- - TECHNICAL VOCABULARY.
  - 677
  - English. French. German.
  - Type metal (metal de caracteres 1 (Schriftmetall
  - To cast talliage / fondre U(Schrift-) Zeug giessen
  - A typefounder Jun fondeur (de caracteres lein Schriftgiesser
  - A typefoundry JPefounding (operation) ( d imprimerie) ) une fonderie de caracteres eine Schriftgiesserei
  - la fonte des caracteres Schriftguss
  - typecasting machine (une machine a fondre les 7 3 caracteres eine Schriftgiessmaschine
  - (une fondeuse J
  - — mould un moule eine Giessform
  - The type-mould le moule a caracteres (das (Schrift-) Giessinstru-i ment
  - The space-mould le moule a blancs (das Spatiengiessinstru-( ment
  - A Script mould un moule d’anglaise (eine Schreibschriftgiess-( form
  - he script-type mould (le moule a caracteres das Schreibschriftgiess-
  - 1 d’ecriture instrument
  - — and-mould for quads jmoule a main pour Handgiessinstrument fur
  - 1 cadrats Quadrate
  - nd lead-mould /moule a main pour inter- Handgiessinstrument fur
  - 1 lignes Regletten
  - Chine lead-mould KuPitwre.moula moule a machine pour ) 1 fondre les interlignes j moule a garniture Reglettengiessinstrument Steggiessinstrument
  - p T mould Rubbine moule a filet Liniengiessinstrument
  - pre The Rubbing file la frotterie Reibung
  - la lime a frotter der Reiber
  - To subbing stone la meule der Reibstein
  - To set up type ) CO Compose ”} composer Schrift setzen
  - Composition To . composition Schriftsatz
  - et up wrong yfaire une mauvaise com-y versetzen
  - Reset ! 1 position )
  - A literal recomposez ! Neusatz !
  - Wrong letter / une coquille ein versetzter Buchstabe
  - dittogram (a letter re-Peated by mistake) An un doublon (lettre double par erreur) (ein Dittogramm (ein irr-3 tumlich wiederholter ( Buchstabe)
  - fn out un bourdon (eine Leiche leine Auslassung
  - A double f(a word, etc., ' doublet I repeated by To double mistake) | un doublon (mot, etc., double par erreur) (eine Hochzeit (ein Wort, etc., irrtumlich wieder- ( holt)
  - wiS and doubles tions Wxt (abbrevia- } doubler Hochzeit machen
  - bourdons et doublons cil etranger Leichen und Hochzeiten falsche Schrift
  - nsposed words Tr mots transposes versetzte Worter verstellte Worter
  - ansposed Iines 0 compose in slip lignes transposes composer en placard /versetzte Zeilen verstellte Zeilen Packet setzen
  - be in type etre compose /(ab-) gesetzt sein ldruckfertig sein
  - To Set (a MS.) in type (composer (un manuscrit) 1 t en caracteres ) (ein Ms.) absetzen
- p.677 - vue 845/901
- - 678
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - English.
  - To set in columns
  - Matter set in columns
  - To set in narrow measure
  - Set in double columns
  - A column
  - A take
  - To set in panels \ To panel ) A panel
  - Rule-work
  - To set up broken type
  - To set up pie
  - A typedressing machine The setting-up stick
  - The dressing-stick Dressing (operation) The dressing-bench
  - The turning-gauge
  - The height-to-paper gauge
  - The body gauge
  - The micrometer
  - The depth-of-strike micrometer
  - The lining-gauge
  - The nicking plane
  - The kerning, nicking, bearding plane
  - To space
  - To line-justify 'i
  - To justify the lines / A space-mark (=)
  - Aspace between two words fune espace entre deux I mots
  - A space (type)
  - The spaces
  - Quads )
  - Quadrats /
  - A three-em quad
  - A two-em quad •
  - An em quad •
  - An en quad (4 em)
  - French.
  - composer en colonnes jmatiere composee en I colonnes
  - composer en lignes courtes engspaltig setzen
  - rcomposee en double ) 1 colonne )
  - une colonne une cote
  - ((composer en alineas ) 1 isoles par des lingots) / (un alinea entre lingots)
  - composition de tableaux
  - (redresser des caracteres ) ( couches J composer un pate
  - une emondeuse le baton
  - le composteur a coupoir la couperie le coupoir
  - le calibre
  - le calibre de hauteur le typometre (le palmer ) le micrometre ) le calibre de profondeur de frappe le calibre de ligne le rabot de pied
  - , and ) .
  - ( le rabot de coupoir
  - espacer
  - justifier
  - un signe de separation
  - une espace
  - (les espaces ) Iles blancs / cadrats
  - yun cadrat de quatre 1
  - 1 cadratins /
  - (un cadrat de trois ) 1 cadratins / fun cadrat de deux 1 I cadratins ( un cadratin un demi-cadratin
  - German.
  - in Spalten setzen } gespaltener Satz
  - zweispaltig gesetzt eine (Satz-) Spalte eine Schiebung
  - in Feldern setzen
  - ein (Satz-) Feld
  - r Tabellensatz (Liniensatz
  - die Schrift aufsetzen g(Zwiebel-) Fische auf I setzen
  - reine Schriftschleifmar
  - 1 schine
  - r der Fertigmachwinkel
  - 1 haken
  - das Bestossen
  - das Bestosszeug rdas Kalibermass klas Kernmass
  - die Schrifthohenlehre das Typometer
  - das Mikrometer
  - das Tiefenmass
  - (die Justiernadel das Justorium der Fusshobel
  - der Universalhobel
  - fausschliessen spatiieren spatiinieren die Linien justieren ein Spatiumzeichen ein Wortzwischenraum
  - (ein Spatium eine Spatie ein Ausschlusstuck
  - rdie Spatien
  - (der Ausschluss
  - Quadrate
  - rein 4-Cicero-Quadrat leine ganze Konkorde (ein 3-Cicero-Quadrat .. seine Dreiviertelkonko
  - I danz
  - rein 2-Cicero-Quadrat leine Halbkonkordanz
  - ein Geviert ein Halbgeviert
- p.678 - vue 846/901
- - TECHNICAL VOCABULARY.
  - 6
  - English.
  - A thick space (1 em)
  - A middle space (J em)
  - A thin space (I em)
  - A Sxth-em an eighth-em
  - A hair-space
  - The height-to-paper of spaces
  - A rule
  - A brass rule
  - type-metal rule (I to
  - . Points) 1 A reglet
  - 12
  - A wood rule
  - A Combination rule
  - A dotted rule OWaved rule ramental rules rule case we quotations Meed furniture steal furniture Co eel furniture Fo-iron furniture Allow quotations A lowed clump 1 frecessed clump J cproved french furniture AS furniture
  - A ced (I to 4 points)
  - A clump (English) 1 LSlUg (American) / Leaded Matter reeded type To lead
  - Solid matter
  - ein Drittelgeviert ein Viertelgeviert ein Funftelgeviert ein Sechstelgeviert ein Achtelgeviert ein Haarspatium $ eine Haarspatie
  - die Ausschlusshohe
  - eine (Setz-) Linie eine Messinglinie
  - eine Zeuglinie
  - eine Reglette
  - eine Holzlinie
  - eine Akzidenzlinie eine punktierte Linie eine Wellenlinie
  - Zierlinien
  - der Linienkasten
  - die Stege Holzstege Bleistege Eisenstege Guss (-eisen-) stege Hohlstege
  - To
  - run on solid
  - To
  - To To To
  - French. German. une espace forte une espace moyenne une espace fine un sixieme de cadratin un huitieme de cadratin
  - une espace tres-fine la hauteur-en-papier des espaces
  - un filet un filet cuivre un filet matiere (i a 12 ) points) ) une reglette un filet (de bois) pour 1 1 affiches J un filet systematique un filet pointille un filet ondule filets de fantaisie la casse a filets les garnitures garnitures en bois garnitures en matiere garnitures en acier garnitures en fonte garnitures creuses un lingot creux sur le plat
  - garnitures a colonnes
  - Bogenstege ein Durchschuss
  - ein dicker Durchschuss
  - durchschossener Satz
  - (Zeilen) durchschiessen undurchschossener Satz kompresser Satz
  - kompress setzen
  - run
  - run
  - on (a paragraph) over
  - run back
  - cause overrunning
  - MDaments )
  - Colural objects entional signs j
  - Borders
  - Combination borders
  - Atle borders
  - U e for borders
  - Order-pieces
  - A head-piece
  - garnitures cintrees une interligne
  - un lingot
  - matiere interlignee ) caracteres interlignes / interligner
  - composition pleine
  - freunir en composition )
  - 1 pleine j
  - freunir (a la fin d’un para-
  - ( graphe)
  - remanier
  - remanier
  - entrainer le remaniement
  - (ornements 1
  - (signes conventionnels /
  - les bordures
  - bordures a combinaison
  - filets de cadres
  - un filet pour bordures
  - (pieces de bordure 1 lmotifs de bordure /
  - une tete de page
  - uberlaufen zuruckbringen uberlaufen machen Zierleisten Ornamente Verzierungen
  - Vignetten Einfassungen Kombinationseinfass-
  - ungen Linieneinfassungen eine Einfassungslinie
  - Leisten
  - eine Kopfleiste eine Kopfvignette
- p.679 - vue 847/901
- - O 00 o
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - English.
  - French.
  - German.
  - A tail-piece
  - Corners
  - Groundwork
  - A cheque rule
  - The colophon
  - The catchword
  - The direction-word
  - A flourish ( e)
  - A rule-cutter )
  - A rule-cutting machine J
  - Wooden type (Wood-) Block letters Rubber type
  - A punch-cutter (man)
  - A punch-cutter (machine)
  - The art of punch-cutting
  - Punch-cutting
  - The punch
  - A steel punch The counter-punch
  - To bevel
  - To cut a bevel
  - The standards (H O mo p)
  - A smoke (-proof)
  - A matrix
  - A struck matrix
  - An electrotyped matrix To justify the matrix The justification
  - A matrix justified for line and set
  - To aline
  - To be alined
  - To be out of line
  - A compositor (abbr., a) comp) )
  - The composing-stick
  - To set the stick to the ( measure /
  - The fixed jaw (of the composing-stick)
  - The movable jaw (of the composing-stick)
  - un cul-de-lampe
  - les coins fonds
  - Jun filet azure pour
  - I cheques le colophon la reclame
  - un parafe
  - un coupoir a filets
  - caracteres en bois caracteres baton
  - caracteres en caoutchouc un graveur de poin^ons fune machine a graver les 1 poin^ons fl’art de graver les \ 1 poin^ons J
  - la gravure des poingons
  - le poin^on
  - un poingon en acier
  - le contre-poingon biseauter
  - tailler un biseau
  - les etalons
  - un fume
  - une matrice
  - une matrice frappee
  - une matrice electrotypee justifier la matrice la justification
  - une matrice justifiee pour ligne et pour epaisseur une matrice en registre . arrete
  - aligner
  - tirer ligne chevaucher
  - un compositeur le composteur justifier le composteur
  - le petit cte ) " 11 (du com-le talon X , le dos J posteur) la languette (du composteur)
  - eine Schlussvignette ein Finalstock eine Schlussleiste Eckstucke
  - Ecken Unterdruck eine Assureelinie eine Wechsellinie das Kolophon der Kustos der Blatthuter
  - ein Schnorkel
  - (eine Linienschneid-3 maschine t
  - (ein Langenschneidapp^
  - Holztypen
  - Holzschrift
  - Kautschuktypen
  - ein Stempelschneider eine Stempelschneid-
  - maschine
  - idie Stempelschneidekun Ider Stempelschnitt das Stempelschneiden
  - /der Stempel
  - die Patrize
  - ein Stahlstempel
  - der Konterstempel
  - gehren
  - die Gehrung schneiden
  - i die Normalbuchstaben die Zurichtsbuchstaben ein Russabdruck lein Russabzug
  - (eine Mater
  - leine Matrize Jte
  - seine mit Stempel gepras
  - % Matrize
  - eine galvanische Matnt die Mater justieren die Justierung
  - leine Matrize nach Lint ( und Weite justiert
  - alinieren auf Linie zurichten
  - Linie halten nicht Linie halten
  - ein (Schrift-) Setzer
  - der Winkelhaken den Winkelhaken stellen der Anschlag) Winkel-dwande
  - (der Schieber (desWinke
  - (der Schlitten/ hakens)
- p.680 - vue 848/901
- - TECHNICAL VOCABULARY.
  - 681
  - English. FRENCH. GERMAN.
  - The jaw clamp The setting-rule 1 e composing-rule J le levier du composteur /die Schleife der Frosch
  - le typometre die Setzlinie
  - The case To lay a case la casse der Schriftkasten der Setzkasten (einen Schriftkasten fullen
  - mettre en casse einen (Schrift-) Kasten
  - PI 4 lower case (abbrevia-mition, 1.c.) > le bas de casse ( einlegen der Kleinletterkasten
  - ti-WPper case (abbrevia-Close spacing , ciose-spaced setting / le haut de casse espacement serre der Grossletterkasten enger Satz
  - To set closely P To keep in 3 } composition serree serrer la composition gedrangte Schrift eng anschliessen
  - * close up 1 To take in / 1O join . rapprocher den Satz anschliessen leinbringen
  - T Jon up To drive out (a line) T sPace well 0 space too tightly reunir jeter des espaces ausbringen
  - justifier egalement serrer trop l’espacement gleichmassig ausschliessen zu eng anschliessen
  - To OverTun the line depasser la justification fiber das Format gehen liber die Justierung gehen
  - To space out espacer (sperren 3 spatiieren
  - | spatiinieren
  - Paced (-out) type (Ger-italics) equivalent of caracteres avec espace- )
  - ment a un point (au lieu d’italiques en ( gesperrter Satz
  - Un Allemand) )
  - Paced type (German (caracteres sans espace-
  - Auivalent of romans) ment (au lieu de romains Jungesperrter Satz
  - Tn . en Allemand)
  - To White out 1 (jeter du blanc ) (licht halten
  - branch out/ blanchir die Zwischenraume ver-
  - To drive out TO get in the format 1 donner de l’air ) ( grosser
  - chasser austreiben
  - gagner einbringen
  - The size of volume } le format das Format
  - The Dargins The neck margin les marges der Papierrand
  - le petit fond der Bundsteg
  - The fored margin . la marge de tete der Kopfsteg
  - The tail edge margin le grand fond der Aussensteg
  - ncommmnyre (ofa page or The length of a page The length of a column tiomoRuscript (abbrevia- The DMS., plural, MSS.) The Copy la marge de pied der Fusssteg
  - la largeur (d’une page ou die Formatbreite (einer
  - d’une colonne) Seite oder Spalte)
  - la longueur d’une page die Formatlange
  - la longueur d’une colonne das Kolumnenmass
  - la copie (das Manuskript (Kur-(. zung: Ms.)
  - T author o"Pe Wanted I l’auteur der Autor
  - It of sorts ! / Perfections sortes manquent ! defets Schrift fehlt ! Defekte
- p.681 - vue 849/901
- - 682
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - English. French. German.
  - The type is used up la fonte est finie die Schrift ist versetzt
  - A missing letter une sorte qui manque ein fehlender Buchstabe
  - Battered type (collec- 1 tively) J vieille matiere ladierte Schrift
  - A battered type un caractere cogne eine beschadigte Type
  - To turn for letters bloquer blockieren
  - Turned sorts caracteres bloques Fliegenkopfe (Blockaden
  - To rectify the turned letters ) debloquer (die Fliegenkopfe berich ( tigen
  - The making up of a line of several bodies (as in mathematical formulae) ) le parangonnage (die Uberlegung und ( Unterlegung
  - The tweezers les pinces (die Korrigierzange (die Pinzette
  - The bodkin la pointe die Ahle
  - A galley une galee ein (Setz-) Schiff
  - A pull une impression (ein Abzug (ein Druck
  - To pull (off) a proof The proof tirer une epreuve einen Abzug machen der Korrekturabzug
  - 1’epreuve (der Korrekturbogen
  - A proof impression le bon a tirer ein Probeabzug
  - A galley-proof i A galley-slip J une epreuve en placard ein Fahnenabzug
  - A brush-proof une epreuve a la brosse gein Burstenabzug lein Abklatsch
  - To mackle /maculer (doubler schmitzen duplieren
  - A mackle une macule ein duplierter Druck
  - A slur ) A shake / Blacks un papillotage fespaces qui levent 1 I espaces qui marquent / ein schmieriger Druck Spiess
  - To push down upstanding spaces A monk (black patch in } baisser les espaces (tache noire dans l'im- die Spiesse niederdricke (verschmierte Stelle in
  - letterpress) pression) Druck)
  - A friar (light patch in letterpress) (un moine Hendroit qui une fenteest reste (un bouquet) blanc) lein Monch (blasse Stelle ( im Druck)
  - To be full of friars venir par bouquets voller Monche sein
  - Monks and friars A type off its feet rebut un caractere couche Misdruck Lobe ein abgefallener Buchs
  - Picks lettres sales Putzen
  - Printed in slip imprime en placard in Fahnen abgezogen m-(den Satz zu Spalten
  - To make up into columns mettre en colonnes ( brechen m- (den Satz zu Seiten ( brechen
  - To make up into pages 1 To page ‘ ) mettre en pages
  - To paginate (paginer 1 folioter / (paginieren ehen (mit Seitenzahlen ver
  - A page An unnumbered page une page une page non-chiffree eine Seite ..e eine unpaginierte Ser
  - A numbered page une page chiffree eine paginierte Seite
  - The page number le folio die Seitenziffer
  - A full page une page pleine eine volle Seite
  - A blank page ) (une page blanche 1 eine Blankseite
  - A white page j (une fausse-page J
- p.682 - vue 850/901
- - TECHNICAL VOCABULARY.
  - 683
  - English.
  - The standard page
  - A long page 6 fieort page
  - The The
  - The The The
  - recto
  - verso
  - obverse page
  - reverse page odd pages
  - A ; even pages
  - A Signature-page AlPcimen Page
  - An inset
  - Teliminary matter 1
  - Th title-sheets J
  - The title-page the title 5
  - The sub-title
  - The half-title
  - Tre bastard title
  - He fly-titles
  - Tead-lines
  - me running-title
  - Th
  - e Catchword (heading)
  - A clean proof
  - A foul proof
  - The Second proof ) revise y
  - The third proof 1
  - Ale second revise }
  - TiCOrrection mark
  - corrections
  - The Proof-reader
  - The indoor (proof-) reader
  - The house-reader proozder °f the last }
  - To read proofs
  - read the last proof
  - The
  - The The The
  - type-corrector
  - Planer for proofs Printer’s plane chase
  - dress the chases
  - The quoins
  - French.
  - la page normale une page longue une page courte le recto
  - le verso
  - l’avers
  - le revers
  - les pages impaires
  - les pages paires
  - une page-signature
  - une page-specimen
  - un feuillet
  - un onglet
  - les parties eventuelles
  - la page du titre le titre
  - le sous-titre l’avant-titre
  - le faux-titre (principal) les faux-titres lignes de tete le titre courant
  - la lettrine
  - une epreuve peu chargee
  - une epreuve chargee
  - (la deuxieme epreuve l (la revision J
  - (la troisieme epreuve ) (la deuxieme revision /
  - un signe de correction les corrections
  - le correcteur
  - , le correcteur d’imprimerie
  - le correcteur en bon a tirer
  - Haire la correction (des 1 1 epreuves) / ((faire la correction pour) ( le bon a tirer) j 1 le corrigeur
  - le taquoir a epreuves , 1 le taquoir
  - le chassis
  - garnir les formes
  - les coins (de serrage)
  - German.
  - die Normalseite eine lange Seite eine kurze Seite die rechte Seite die linke Seite (die Vorderseite (die Schondruckseite /die Ruckseite
  - (die Widerdruckseite die ungeraden Seiten die geraden Seiten eine Normseite eine Probeseite ein Blatt ein Einsatz
  - die Titelbogen
  - die Titelseite der Titel der Nebentitel der Schmutztitel der Vortitel die Untertitel Kolumnentitel der lebende Kolumnentitel idas Schlagwort
  - (das Stichwort
  - i ein Abzug von reinem Satz (eine Jungfer
  - fein Abzug von unreinem
  - ( Satz
  - (der zweite Abzug
  - (die zweite Korrektur der dritte Abzug die dritte Korrektur die Revision
  - ein Korrekturzeichen die Korrekturen der Korrektor der Korrekturleser
  - der Hauskorrektor
  - die Korrektur besorgen
  - die letzte Revision
  - besorgen
  - der Korrektor auf dem Blei
  - das Klopfholz mit
  - Uberzug
  - das Klopfholz
  - der Formrahmen
  - der Schliessrahmen
  - das Format machen
  - das Format uber die
  - Form legen
  - die (Schliess-) Keile
- p.683 - vue 851/901
- - 684 TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - English.
  - To quoin up the forme
  - The locking gear The side-stick
  - The composing-machine
  - The keyboard
  - (The) Setting (of) several (different) bodies
  - (The) Setting (of) several (different) founts
  - The arrangement of the i keyboard )
  - Rivers of white
  - Straight rivers
  - The forme 1 The form J To unlock the forme 1 To untie the forme / The printing-ink
  - The black printing-ink
  - Rubricated
  - Rubrics
  - The balls
  - The ball-knife
  - The inking-rollers
  - Live matter 1 Standing matter / Dead matter
  - To distribute (type) To distribute (the type) into wrong boxes
  - Sorts
  - Pie
  - To pie
  - To fall into pie 1
  - To go to pie j
  - To distribute a pie
  - The distributing machine
  - The case for defective ) letters [
  - The hell-box J
  - The case frame
  - Imposing 1
  - Imposition )
  - The imposing-table I
  - The imposing-stone /
  - The stand for the im- 1 posing-table j
  - Stereotyping
  - French.
  - serrer la forme le serrage le biseau
  - la machine h composer
  - le clavier
  - la composition de plu-i sieurs corps (differents) / la composition de plu-i sieurs ceils (differents) /
  - la disposition du clavier { lezardes
  - rues
  - la forme
  - desserer la forme
  - 1’encre d’imprimerie jl’encre noire (d’impri- 1 I merie) / imprime en rouge lettres rouges les balles
  - le couteau a lame ronde
  - les rouleaux encreurs
  - (composition a conserver 1 (la conserve J composition a distribuer distribuer (les caracteres) faire des coquilles en 1 casse / des sortes
  - un pate
  - mettre en pate
  - (se mettre en pate ) tomber en pate 1 (distribuer un pat 61 idepatisser / la machine a distribuer
  - le cassetin au diable
  - le rang pour casses
  - imposition
  - le marbre
  - le pied du marbre
  - le clichage
  - German.
  - die Form verkeilen das Schliesszeug
  - die Setzmaschine die Klaviatur die Tastatur das Tastbrett der Tastapparat Satz verschiedener Kegel
  - gemischter Satz
  - das Klaviaturschema die Tastenanordnung krumme Gassen gerade Gassen
  - die Form
  - das Format abschlagen die Druckfarbe die Druckerschwarze rot gedruckt rote Buchstaben die Ballen
  - das Ballenmesser (die Farb (-auftrag-) 1 walzen
  - 1 druckfertiger Satz abzulegender Satz (Schrift) ablegen (Schrift) falsch ablegen abgelegte Lettern Zwiebelfische gequirlter Satz Eierkuchen hen
  - einen Eierkuchen massed (Satzzusammenschmet .
  - j zu Zwiebelfischen zusa I menfallen
  - Zwiebelfische ablegen die Ablegemaschine /der Defektkasten I der Zeugkasten das (Setz-) Regal
  - (Ausschiessen Ausschiessung Formatmachen (die Schliessplatte
  - die Ausschiessplatte (der Ausschiesstein ider Schliess (-platter 1 tisch
  - die Stereotypie
- p.684 - vue 852/901
- - TECHNICAL VOCABULARY.
  - 685
  - English.
  - he plaster process of
  - TEtereotyping
  - e Paper process of 1 stereotyping J Types in store | Tock types ) he height of type adopted
  - r a Printing-office 6 size of body of type
  - smsed in a printing-office type (Then) medium type (Then)
  - Targe type (Then)
  - The remove
  - Pright characters ) I (THEN) nclined characters ) W(THEN) } side type (Then) "dard-width type
  - . —-a) Narrow type (Then)
  - Full-faced type (Then) Bold-faced type (Then) Lean-faced type (Then) Book faces Jobbing faces 1 Bisplay faces ) Jobbing work Type for bills 1 Type for placards )
  - Sanserifs (Then)
  - Swash letters (AN ) Uncial letters (opa) Roman characters (as opposed to german) (Then) German characters (as ) opposed to roman) ) (KO..
  - 2 S C 55.3
  - ) (The) (caracteres italiques 1
  - J ' (les italiques )
  - Srotesque (THEN) vodemn roman (Then) odern italic (Tken) old style roman (Then) Tdstyle italic (Then) ^^ (Then) Aman) 0
  - mane (ro- (Then) les egyptiennes
  - les antiques
  - les romains classiques les classiques italiques les elzevirs romains les elzevirs italiques les egyptiens (romains)
  - French.
  - } le clichage au platre
  - • le clichage au papier
  - (caractdres (que les impri-) Lagerschriften
  - I meries ont) en nombre ) 0
  - la hauteur de caractere de Fimprimerie
  - la force de corps de
  - Fimprimerie ) petits caracteres
  - caracteres moyens
  - gros caracteres
  - la gradation
  - caracteres droits
  - caractdres penches
  - caractdres larges
  - caractdres normaux
  - caractdres etroits
  - caracteres gras caractdres egyptienne caracteres maigres caracteres de labeur
  - caracteres de fantaisie
  - travaux de ville
  - caractdres pour affiches
  - j lettres simples )
  - (lettres antiques /
  - lettres a parafe
  - lettres onciales
  - caractdres romains (oppose a allemands)
  - caractdres allemands (oppose a romains)
  - German.
  - die Gips-Stereotypie
  - die Papier-Stereotypie
  - die Haushohe
  - der Hauskegel kleine Schrift mittlere Schrift grobe Schrift der Schriftgrad gerade Schrift
  - schrage Schrift
  - breite Schrift
  - (Schrift von normaler
  - I Breite
  - dunne Schrift
  - fette Schrift
  - halbfette Schrift
  - hagere Schrift Brotschriften
  - Akzidenzschriften
  - Akzidenzarbeiten
  - Plakatschrift
  - (Buchstaben ohne Aus-1 laufer
  - Schnorkelbuchstaben
  - Unzialschrift
  - Antiquaschrift (Fraktur gegenubergestellt)
  - (Frakturschrift (Antiquaschrift gegenubergestellt)
  - Kursivschrift
  - (Grotesk (-schrift) Steinschrift
  - englische Antiqua
  - (gewohnliche Kursiv-
  - 1 schrift Mediavalantiqua
  - Mediavalkursiv
  - Egyptienne (Antiqua)
  - Clarendonschrift (An-( tiqua)
- p.685 - vue 853/901
- - 686
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - English.
  - French.
  - German.
  - French Clarendon (Then) 1’italienne Old English | =
  - Black-letter J (open) les gothiques
  - Elzevir (Then) l’elzevir
  - Venetian} (Then)
  - Script (latin and german)
  - ( Ohen)
  - Ronde (Then)
  - Music type
  - Shorthand writing 1
  - Stenography J
  - (Written or printed)
  - Shorthand j
  - Syllabic (system of) ( writing J
  - A syllable
  - A syllabic symbol
  - The syllabary
  - A letter
  - The alphabet
  - A character
  - (l’elzevir gras
  - lle jenson
  - ecriture (anglaise et allemande)
  - la ronde
  - signes de musique
  - stenographie
  - une reproduction steno-
  - 1 graphique
  - syllabisme
  - une syllabe
  - un caractere syllabique
  - le syllabaire une lettre l'alphabet un caractere
  - Italienne
  - gotische Schrift
  - Elzevirschrift
  - Schreibschrift (Antique und Fraktur) gewohnliche Rundschrift
  - Notentypen (Stenographic l Kurzschrift
  - ein Stenogramm
  - Silbenschrift
  - eine Silbe (ein Silben (-schrift-)
  - 1 zeichen das Syllabarium
  - ein Buchstabe
  - das Alphabet ein Schriftzeichen
  - Characters :—
  - Caracteres:
  - SCHRIFTEN :
  - Amharic characters Arabic characters Aramaic characters Armenian characters Burmese characters Chinese characters Coptic characters Cufic characters
  - Cuneiform characters
  - Cyrillic characters Demotic characters Devanagari characters, old kinds
  - Erse characters (known in Irish characters thetrade ( as Gacllc)
  - Estrangelo characters Ethiopic characters Etruscan characters Georgian characters, ordinary
  - Georgian ecclesiastical script
  - German characters (as opposed to latin)
  - Gothic characters (old)
  - Greek characters
  - Hebraic script, old Hebrew characters Hieratic characters
  - caracteres amhariques caracteres arabes caracteres arameens caracteres armeniens caracteres birmans caracteres chinois caracteres coptes caracteres koufiques caracteres cuneiformes les cuneiformes caracteres cyrilliens caracteres demotiques caracteres devanagaris, especes anciennes
  - ^caracteres irlandais caracteres estrangelas caracteres ethiopiens caracteres etrusques caracteres georgiens vul-gaires
  - caracteres georgiens \ ecclesiastiques ) caracteres allemands (oppose aux latins)
  - Kcarackgres (vieux) goth- } (alt'> gotische Schrift griechische Schrift althebraische Schu
  - caracteres grecs vielle ecriture hebraique caracteres hebraiques hierogrammes
  - amharische Schrift arabische Schrift aramaische Schrift armenische Schrift birmanische Schrift chinesische Schriftzeichen
  - koptische Schrift kufische Schrift
  - Keils chrift
  - cyrillische Schrift demotische Schrift Devanagarischriften Altsanskritschriften
  - irische Schrift
  - Estrangeloschritt athiopische Schrift etruskische Schrift georgische Verkehrschrift georgische Kirchenschrift deutsche Schrift (latein ischer gegenubergeste
  - hebraische Schrift hieratische Schrift
- p.686 - vue 854/901
- - TECHNICAL VOCABULARY.
  - 687
  - English.
  - Hieroglyphs myarite characters
  - Ideographs ) deograms J
  - Japanese characters (several kinds) Javanese characters anarese characters atin characters (as 1 opposed to german) Megadha characters Mongolian characters agari characters, modern kinds pumidian characters pehlavi characters prshito characters penician characters Tabbinical characters Tunes ) Runic characters J
  - “Ssian characters sobcan characters samaritan characters antic characters slamese characters cmhalese characters 1 silZalese characters 1 yriac characters amil characters Telugu characters etan characters tend characters
  - languages :— Albanian Arabic Armenian Baluchi Basque Bohemian Breton Sulgarian Aurmese Chinese Corsican Croatian Czech Danish Dutch English Erse ) Tish J Finnish flemish French Frisian
  - Gaelic
  - Georgian ’
  - French.
  - hieroglyphes
  - caracteres himyarites
  - ideogrammes
  - caracteres japonais (plu-
  - sieurs especes)
  - caracteres javanais caracteres kanaras
  - caracteres latins (op-pos6 a allemands) caracteres magadhas caracteres mongols caracteres nagaris, ) especes modernes / caracteres numides caracteres pehlvis caracteres de la Peshito caracteres pheniciens caracteres rabbiniques
  - / runes )
  - , caracteres runiques I
  - caracteres russes caracteres sabeens caracteres samaritains caracteres semitiques caracteres siamois
  - German.
  - Hieroglyphen himjarische Schrift
  - ideographische Zeichen
  - japanische Schriften (ver-schiedene Sorten)
  - javanische Schrift kanaresische Schrift lateinische Schrift (deut-
  - scher gegenubergestellt) Magadhaschrift mongolische Schrift
  - (Nagarischriften (Neusanskritschriften
  - numidische Schrift Pahlavischrift Peschitoschrift phonizische Schrift rabbinische Schrift
  - Runen
  - russische Schrift sabaische Schrift samaritanische Schrift semitische Schrift siamesische Schrift
  - caracteres cingalais caracteres syriaques caracteres tamouls caracteres telingas caracteres thibetains caracteres zends singalesische Schrift syrische Schrift tamulische Schrift telingische Schrift tibetanische Schrift Zendschrift
  - Langues: SPRACHEN :
  - Albanais Albanesisch
  - Arabe Arabisch
  - Armenien Armenisch
  - Beloutche Balutschi
  - Basque Baskisch
  - Bohemien Bohmisch
  - Breton Bretagnisch
  - Bulgare Bulgarisch
  - Birman Birmanisch
  - Chinois Chinesisch
  - Corse Korsisch
  - Croate Kroatisch
  - Tcheque Tschechisch
  - Danois Danisch
  - Hollandais Hollandisch
  - Anglais Englisch
  - Irlandais Irisch
  - [Finnois Finnisch
  - Flamand Flamandisch
  - Frangais Franzosisch
  - Frison Friesisch
  - Gaelique Galisch
  - Georgien Georgisch
- p.687 - vue 855/901
- - 688
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - English. French. German.
  - German Allemand Deutsch
  - Germanic Germanique Germanisch
  - Greek, modern Grec moderne Neugriechisch
  - Greek, old Grec ancien Altgriechisch
  - Hebrew Hebreu Hebraisch
  - Hindi Hindi Hindi
  - Hindustani Hindoustani Hindustani
  - Hungarian 1 (Hongrois 1 , Ungarisch
  - Magyar J (Magyar / (Magyarisch
  - Icelandic Islandais Islandisch
  - Italian Italien Italienisch
  - Japanese Japonais Japanisch
  - Javanese Javanais Javanisch
  - Kaffir Cafre Kaffernsprache
  - Kanarese Kanara Kanaresisch
  - Lappic ) Lapp / Lapon Lapplandisch
  - Latin Latin Lateinisch
  - Lettish Letton Lettisch
  - Livonian Livonien Livlandisch
  - Lithuanian Lithuanien Litauisch
  - Maghrabi Maghrebin Magreb
  - Moorish Maugrabin Maurisch
  - Malagasy Malgache Madegassisch
  - Malay Malais Malaiisch
  - Maltese Maltais Maltesisch
  - Manchu Mandchou Mandschu
  - Norwegian Norvegien Norwegisch
  - Pali Pali Pali
  - Palmyrene Palmyreen Palmyrisch
  - Persian Persan Persisch
  - Pidgin-English Pidgin Pidgin-Englisch
  - Piedmontese Piemontais Piemontesisch
  - Polish Polonais Polnisch
  - Portuguese Portugais Portugiesisch
  - Provencal Provencal Provenzalisch
  - Roumanian Roumain Rumanisch
  - Russian Russe Russisch
  - Ruthenian Ruthene Ruthenisch
  - Sanscrit Sanscrit Sanskrit
  - Sardinian Sarde Sardinisch
  - Serbian Serbe Serbisch
  - Siamese Siamois Siamesisch
  - Sinhalese 1 Cingalese / Cingalais Singalesisch
  - Slavonian Esclavon Slavonisch
  - Slovak Slovaque Slovakisch
  - Slovenian Slovene Slowenisch
  - Spanish Espagnol Spanisch
  - Swedish Suedois Schwedisch
  - Tamil Tamoul Tamulisch
  - Telugu Telougou Telingisch
  - Tibetan Thibetain Tibetanisch
  - Turkish Ture Turkisch
  - Urdu Ourdou Urdu
  - Wallach Valaque Walachisch
  - Welsh Gallois Wallisisch
  - Yiddish argot des Juifs Judisch-Deutsch
- p.688 - vue 856/901
- - APPENDIX IV.
  - NOTE
  - ON STANDARDIZATION OF
  - NOMENCLATURE.
  - Wg he first instance the “ Authors’ and Printers’ Dictionary,” by F. Howard Collins, Even lowed for spelling and capitalization, and for the hyphening of compound words, the ein that carefully written work corrections were found to be necessary, for example : not est impression gives " forme not form,” while the fifth impression gives " form boasome," and there are occasional discrepancies; for instance, in both editions the pelZe English is spelt with a capital E and double english with a lower-case e.
  - at th erence to Murray’s " Oxford Dictionary,” so far as it has been completed (to S-T reviai time of writing) has revealed other deviations from that standard work, and in TES the proofs an endeavour has been made to follow Murray as closely as possible, types 6 authors have found other difficulties due to the large number of printing and differeunding words which have several meanings, and to the inconsistency of the to meant authorities. It is remarkable that standardization of such order as to conform to eiadern mechanical methods of interchangeability should, in typefounding, date back nutsety years before its need became apparent in such common articles as bolts and unst but it is not remarkable that typographic nomenclature should have remained commidardized, for it is only in quite recent times that the work of such standardization stand ittees as those dealing with automobile parts have commenced their work with the xorlization of nomenclature.
  - The , menclature has been particularly vague and inconsistent in many instances, lead • erm slug was in use in America as the equivalent of the English clump or thick of th but no term existed for a line of type cast in one piece. In the descriptive matter type e Patents which lead up to the invention of the type-slug, bars with raised inven called type-bars, were used for making impressions in flong; in the next stage of and iron long multiple-strike matrices were used, these being also termed type-bars, until 1 term type-bar was in some instances even applied to the product or type-slug, Merge ater the term linotype was coined for the type-slug; it is used in this sense in save inthaler's American patent 393846 of 1888. This innovation, however, did not becan 6 patents from confusion of terms, for the word linotype shortly after its birth machi 6 applied to the machine producing the type-slug, and subsequently to all kinds of origin mes also producing type-slugs, but themselves of very different construction, the fact th meaning of the word being still maintained to denote the type-slug itself. In appuiar word linotype has come to be used so loosely that the authors have heard it
  - Al even to machines used for setting individual type.
  - letters tough the " Oxford Dictionary ” gives linotype and monotype with lower-case amble the authors, in their examination of patents, have suffered so severely from the that fuities introduced by the too extended range of meanings attached to these words, machi ey have capitalized the names Linotype, Monotype and also the names of other panieses, when reference is made to the particular machines constructed by the com-machi or corporations bearing those names. A statement referring to a Linotype the gene 1S’ Therefore, not necessarily true for all machines of the linotype class : for Monomeral meaning, including such widely different machines as the Typograph and the Monotne, a lower-case letter is used. The same applies to statements referring to the and TPe machine; such statements may not necessarily hold for the Graphotype
  - Tiechytype, which, however, belong to the monotype class.
  - of inai term type-bar has been confined in this work to a composite slug consisting lvidual type-heads combined with a bar which forms the body of the slug.
  - 689
  - 2 Y
- p.689 - vue 857/901
- - 690
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - The American term impression machine is also liable to be misunderstood, as it mex include not only matrix-impressing machines, but others which impress the type chara on a slug of soft or locally softened material, an ambiguity to which the English e stereo-matrix machine is not liable.
  - Even the word form with its double meaning proves a frequent source of diffice of and for this reason the authors have used the spelling forme merely for the Sabinal avoiding risk of misunderstanding. Amongst the names of the styles of type the orig and correct spelling of one is sanserif, and it is probable that the term serif has r of derived from this; the usual trade practice, however, is to call this particular Styihas type, which has no serifs, sans serif, and as this spelling is so much more common 1
  - been retained. + the
  - The authors are informed on what they believe to be the highest authority tha on capitalization of names derived from countries and persons should be abandoned so eek as these words have lost their geographical or personal association. Thus the Slack character is used for mathematics, for physics and for other purposes besides the Cha a language, the type for which is made up according to the Greek bill of fount, an is quotation from the Koran in the Arabic language is printed on a page whlc bet numbered in arabic numerals. There is method in this, but why the braille alpDased should be generally spelt with a lower-case letter, and the much more generally "
  - Morse with a capital letter the authors have not been able to discover. + im-
  - The use of the hyphen has also proved to be a matter in which it seems almost ted possible to establish consistency. It is usual, the authors believe, for two assoCining nouns to start their career, as in the case of rail way, as separate words, but on co chly into more general use they are joined by a hyphen as rail-way, and when thoroug acclimatized they become a single word as railway. . + with
  - Wherever definite expression or clearness of meaning has come into conflict had what some might consider the more scholarly use of words, nicety of language has to give way to the demand for accuracy of definition. oree;
  - Even on such apparently simple matters as punctuation the authorities do not 28 on Collins in the fourth edition of the “ Authors’ and Printers’ Dictionary ".statertext p. 318: “quotations, all extracts in the exact words of the original, if set in the each type, to have double turned commas at the commencement, and at the beginning of and paragraph {not each line) ...” while the 19th edition of " Rules for Compositors ters' Readers at the University Press, Oxford,” (the printers of the “ Authors’ and PEtion; Dictionary”) states, on p. 43: " Single quotes are to be used for the first quota then double quotes for a quotation within a quotation.” % of
  - Some of the difficulties which the authors have encountered from the lacuble a standard nomenclature are mentioned in the body of this work, examples are : “face; pica meaning 22-point or 24-point, and antique meaning more than one style 0 ct to the terms for expressing wider and narrower faces than the standard are also sub] eg differences of meaning, and students of this subject will doubtless recall other ins of ambiguity of nomenclature.
- p.690 - vue 858/901
- - FIG.
  - APPENDIX V.
  - LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
  - PAGE
  - 5
  - • Reproduction of xylographic printing
  - • Isometric view of type as usually cast , before and after breaking off the tang 3 isometric view of type .
  - 4. Plan of type . .
  - a Mason’s break .
  - 2 Non-dressing break ....
  - 3 Davis break............................
  - Nuernberger-Rettig break
  - Stringer break.............................
  - -yPograph break............................
  - Monotype break.............................
  - Grantype break .
  - Small capital types showing means of identification .
  - Composition of type-metal for different body-sizes type before rubbing .
  - avpe after rubbing .
  - setting-up stick............................
  - In Pressing-bench .
  - 20 Dressing-rod.............................
  - 2I Pressing-plane...........................
  - 22 section of dressing-plane, rod and bench . icking, kerning and bearding plane
  - 33. Kerning file...........................
  - 24 Detail of kerning file .
  - J- Brick ornamentation; Gloucester Road 26 n tube station...........................
  - Brick ornamentation; Down Street tube
  - —station....................................
  - 28 combined parallel and diagonal lines combined arrow-heads and vertical lines .
  - 30. clock letters with white hatched lines .
  - —icular dots appearing hexagonal . inclined strokes on background of square
  - 3, black dots . . . .Plate I, 26
  - Inclined strokes and black dots inter-
  - 12.
  - I3.
  - 15.
  - 16.
  - too
  - 12
  - 12
  - 12
  - 13
  - 13
  - 13
  - 13
  - 14
  - 14
  - 16 19
  - 19 20 20
  - 20
  - NNNN UNNH
  - 24
  - 25
  - 25
  - 25
  - 26
  - 27
  - sected . . Plate I, 26
  - inclined strokes overlapping . .Plate I, 26 port inclined strokes not overlapping
  - Plate I, 26 418-zag strokes . Plate I, 26 inclined strokes on chequered background c Plate II, 26-27
  - Circles appearing flattened in two direc-
  - tions each, at right angles . Plate II, 26-27 ircles appearing as logarithmic spirals
  - c Plate III, 26-27
  - circles appearing flattened in two
  - directions, alternately at right angles D Plate III, 26-27
  - Distorted figures appearing to be of
  - Circular form . . . Plate II, 26-27
  - 42" finement and peculiarities of type 43' pternational Phonetic Association type . example of mathematical composition and cross-section through the component 44. p type . .
  - acsimile reproduction of Fournier’s table pof Proportions of body-sizes
  - 46. pournier’s table (page 2) continued . pournier’s table (page 3) continued .
  - 48. rournier’s table (page 4) continued . 40. ournier’s table (page 5) continued . ournier’s table (page 6) concluded .
  - 33.
  - 34.
  - 35.
  - 36.
  - 37.
  - 38.
  - o
  - CO
  - 40.
  - 28
  - 37
  - 42
  - 62
  - 62
  - 62
  - 63
  - 63
  - 63
  - PAGE 69 73 74 75 75 76 79
  - 79
  - and figures .. . . 84-85
  - Comparison of styles; roman lower-case, ligatures and points . . . 84-85
  - Comparison of styles; italic capitals, figures, lower-case, ligatures and points 86-87
  - Narrow, standard and wide type . . 89
  - Comparison of a-z lengths of type founts 90-92 94
  - FIG. . .
  - 50. Body-gauge for type, single-ended . Body-gauge for type, double-ended Micrometer body-gauge
  - 51.
  - 52.
  - 53-
  - 54-
  - 55.
  - 56.
  - 57.
  - 58.
  - 59-
  - 60.
  - Turning-gauge". . . . .
  - Height-to-paper gauge . . . .
  - Lining-gauge . . . . .
  - Kerned type, as cast; isometric view
  - Kerned type, after dressing; isometric view ......
  - Comparison of styles; roman capitals 1- 1
  - 61.
  - 62.
  - 63.
  - 64.
  - 65.
  - 66.
  - Chess . Draughts Playing cards Dice .
  - 67. Dominoes . . . • :
  - 68. Backgammon or trick-track, showing small dice and counters . . . •
  - Script type section . . . .
  - 70. Script type section ; Laurent and Deberny 71. Script type section; Firmin-Didot .
  - 72. Script type with bracketed kern
  - 73. Test type from mould for Kanarese
  - 74. Chequered face typewriter type
  - 75. Duplicating-machine type; cored .
  - 76. Gammeter multigraph type .
  - 77. Roneo type ......
  - 78. Neostyle type .....
  - 79. Duplicating-machine type ; grooved 80. Addressograph metal type Addressograph rubber type .
  - Semaphore type with designating letter .
  - 69.
  - 70.
  - 00 CO 00 00 00 00
  - OU N H
  - 00 00
  - 00 .
  - Semaphore type......................
  - Morse type .. • -
  - Morse type; Estienne form . ‘ *
  - Wheatstone perforated ribbon and Morse
  - tape • •
  - Embossed metal type;
  - Addressograph
  - 94
  - 94
  - 95
  - 95
  - 95
  - 96
  - 96
  - 96
  - 97
  - 97
  - 98
  - 98
  - 98
  - 98
  - 98
  - 98
  - 99
  - 99
  - 99
  - 99
  - 100
  - 100
  - 100
  - Plate IV, 101
  - Embossing machine: hand “ Grapho-type”; Addressograph . Plate IV, 101
  - 103
  - 104
  - 106
  - 108
  - Music type .
  - 89. ..
  - 90. Shorthand type . •
  - 91. Braille type alphabet *
  - 92. Line-braille.......................
  - 93. Reversed type • • • ‘Daws
  - Logotype matrix-box for the Davis pivotal typecaster, using Linotype matrices
  - 95. Borders"
  - 96. Corners
  - 97. Combination borders
  - 98. Ornaments .
  - 99. Combination ornaments
  - 100. Groundwork
  - lor. Natural objects
  - 102. Rules and cheque rules .
  - 103. Scrolls
  - 104. Braces
  - 105. Arrows
  - modified
  - 108
  - 109
  - 109 109 109 IIO no no
  - 691
- p.691 - vue 859/901
- - 692
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - FIG.
  - 106. Ornamental dashes
  - 107. Pen or line dashes; flourishes and com bination flourishes
  - 108. Colophons .....
  - 109. Illusional forms ; screw-heads, nail-heads inkblots. ....
  - PAGE I12
  - II2
  - FIG.
  - 173. Barth matrix
  - 174. Wicks rotary matrix
  - 175. Foucher matrix
  - 176. Thompson matrix
  - iro. Lead-cutting machine .
  - iii. Cored clumps ....
  - 112. Quotations .....
  - 113. H or girder furniture
  - 114. Ordinary french metal furniture
  - 115. Improved french metal furniture
  - 116. Locket furniture ....
  - 117. Mild-steel furniture
  - 118. Lock-up test for accuracy of type .
  - 119. Exactitude of face reproductions
  - 120. Type series .....
  - 121. Point title line of letters
  - 122. Ligatures .....
  - 123. The saving effected by reforming alphabet. . . . .
  - the
  - 116
  - 117
  - 123
  - 126
  - 147
  - 177. Monotype matrix . . . •
  - 178. Monotype; large-work matrix ... '
  - 179. Dyotype ; single matrix for fifty division
  - 6
  - • 00
  - c
  - Linotype ; single-letter matrix Linotype ; two-letter matrix .
  - 182. Linotype ; rule-block matrix . :
  - 183. Linotype; vertical figure tabular matn
  - Linotype ; slot-rule matrix . 185. Linotype ; serrated columnar rule . 186. Linotype ; columnar continuous rule
  - 3 & (
  - and
  - 0
  - BBBBSSBSSSBBD* BDDDDPNDBD15D9 V09 P DBDHHH000E
  - 124. Illegibility : modern, lower-case
  - 125. Illegibility : old-style, lower-case .
  - 126. Illegibility: blackfriars, lower-case
  - 127. Illegibility: sans serif, lower-case .
  - 128. Illegibility: German Fraktur, lower-case
  - 129. Illegibility : modern, old-style, blackfriars,
  - 154
  - 162
  - 164
  - 166
  - 168
  - 170
  - and sans serif figures .
  - 130. Illegibility:
  - 131. Illegibility:
  - 132. Illegibility:
  - 133. Illegibility:
  - 134. Illegibility:
  - 135. Illegibility:
  - 136. Illegibility:
  - 137. Illegibility:
  - 138. Illegibility:
  - 6%
  - Illegibility:
  - Illegibility : points
  - Comparison
  - modern capitals . old-style capitals blackfriars capitals sans serif capitals German Fraktur capitals greek
  - Russian, lower-case Hebrew devanagari characters . arabic characters.
  - French lower-case accents ;
  - . 172 . 174 174-75 . 175 . 176 . 178 • 179 . 180 . 180 . 182
  - . 182
  - slugs .
  - 187. Linotype ; tabular rule slugs .
  - 188. Stringertype matrix .:
  - 189. Grantype ; slug matrix
  - 190. Grantype ; loose-type matrix
  - 191. Rototype matrix . . . •
  - 192. Oddur matrix-disk . . • '
  - 193. Monoline matrix . . •
  - 194. Typograph ; single-letter matrix
  - 195. Typograph ; two-letter matrix j
  - 196. Linotype; non-distensible space or qua matrix....................................•’
  - 197. Monotype; low-quad, steel space-man
  - 198. Stringertype quad matrix . • a
  - 199. Grantype; non-distensible space or qu matrix; slug . . .
  - 200. Grantype; non-distensible space or qu matrix; individual type
  - 201. Linotype ; wedge-space matrix
  - 202. Monoline ; wedge-space matrix . •
  - 203. Stringertype ; wedge-space matrix .
  - 204. Typograph; distensible space-disk . mg
  - 205. Grantype ; distensible space-matrix ; S. .
  - 206. Grantype; distensible space-matrix >
  - BBBSSSBSRI
  - 229
  - 229
  - 229
  - 555555
  - 1
  - of legibility of upper and
  - 0
  - lower halves of type . .
  - Mean resultant character obtained by combining in their proper proportions the whole of the lower-case characters and f ligatures of an old-style 12-point face
  - 186
  - 143. Irradiation producing illusion of size
  - 144. Irradiation producing illusion of tint
  - 145. Jointer or stone-facer for punches .
  - 146. Hand-cut punch .....
  - 147. Hand-cut punch, with accent punch attached. . . . . .
  - 148. Hand-cut punch, with accent punch
  - 187
  - 192
  - 192
  - 194
  - 195
  - 195
  - 149.
  - H
  - H
  - of
  - 1 H
  - detached. . . . . .
  - Original Benton punch-cutting machine ; from patent specification
  - Benton-Waldo punch-cutting machine
  - Benton-Waldo machine ; detail of sliding head and chuck . . . .
  - Roughing or chisel tool for punch-cutting
  - machine ......
  - 195
  - 196
  - 197
  - 198
  - 153. Operations of punch-cutting .
  - 154. Rocker sharpening appliance for cutters .
  - 155. Machine-cut punch
  - 199
  - 200
  - 201
  - Plate V, 204
  - 156. Point cutter for punch-cutting machine .
  - 157. Micrometer microscope measurer for position of point of tool
  - 158. Enlarged view of point as seen in the
  - 202
  - 203
  - 203
  - micrometer microscope ___
  - 159. Barr or Linotype punch-cutter Plate V, 204 Barr or Linotype punch-cutter; details
  - Plate VI, 204-05
  - 6 ) 0
  - 6
  - S N
  - Barr or Linotype automatic cutter-grinder . . . Plate VII, 204-05
  - Pierpont or Monotype punch-cutter
  - Plate VIII, 205
  - 163. Grant-Legros punch-cutter . Plate IX, 208
  - 164. Barr or Linotype direct-cutting panto-
  - graph for formers
  - Plate X, 209
  - 165. Linotype ; production of former; Barr’s
  - process
  - Plate X, 209
  - 210
  - 166. Grant-Legros former ....
  - 167. Grant-Legros logarithmic spiral curves
  - 168. Grant-Legros process; enlarged drawing
  - of character
  - 169. Bad striking metal
  - 170. Ordinary matrix .
  - 171. Nuernberger-Rettig matrix
  - 172. Bhisotype matrix .
  - 214
  - 218
  - 220
  - 220
  - 220
  - individual type . . .
  - 207. Bellows or Electric compositor; matri 233 with slug. . . . Plate 2233
  - 208. Needle-point micrometer depth gauge •
  - 209. Micrometer measurer for punches a 234
  - 210. Wicks rotary typecaster matrix; opera 235
  - tions in machining . . • "
  - 211. Ballou matrix-engraving machinplate XII, 212. Matrix-engraving machine; American. 233
  - Type Founders Co. . . Plate e’
  - Matrix-engraving cutter ; American TyP 237
  - N 0
  - 4
  - 215.
  - 216.
  - Founders Co.
  - Engraving machine Hobson
  - Early hand mould
  - Taylor, Taylor, &. 237
  - . Plate XH242
  - Justifier’s type mould .
  - 217. Pivotal-machine mould .
  - 218. Pivotal-machine mould halves
  - 219. Pivotal-machine type-mould; details
  - 220. Wicks rotary typecaster ; soft moulds
  - 221. Wicks rotary typecaster; hard moulsse
  - 222. Wicks rotary typecaster; angle-pa . moulds .
  - 223. Diamond square . . . •
  - 224. Knife-edge straight-edge . • "
  - 225. Folding-wedge gauges for measuring tyP .
  - moulds: taper 1 in 100 . use
  - 226. Wicks rotary typecaster; angle-pe operations .
  - 227. Magnetic chuck ; plan .
  - % 2AX 222222
  - 33380 LC SS%
  - 228. Magnetic angle-blocks . . . •′.
  - 229. First method of correcting division Plate
  - 230. Second method of correcting division Plate
  - 231. Third method of correcting division Pk
  - 232. Method of planing cast-iron lapping-blo
  - 233. Monotype mould; single-blade - LIade 234. Monotype mould; low-quad, double-p- . -235. Dyotype moulds . . . 204
  - 236. Linotype; mould and mould-wheel —TV, 27° 237. Linotype mould; details . Plate ' . 264
  - 237. Linotype mouia ; detans . -11
  - 238. Linotype ; adjustable sectional mould •
  - 239. Linotype; interrupted-revolution drives.
  - gear of mould-wheel . . • fore ,,
  - 240. Linotype; slug as cast in mould De- . 20% trimming. . . . .206
  - 241. Linotype ; finished type-slug . • . 200
  - 242. Linotype ; large-work recessed slug
  - ................ xIV,27°
  - 243. Linotype ; arabic ; recessed slug Plate
- p.692 - vue 860/901
- - LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
  - 693
  - 3
  - 344- Monoline ; finished type-slug .
  - -ypograph; mould, tang-plate
  - 26 —ejector. Section
  - 212 -pograph; mould. Elevation .
  - -pograph; mould, tang-plate
  - 2.8 ejector. Plan...........................
  - and
  - and
  - PAGE 266
  - 267
  - 267
  - 267
  - 267
  - 267
  - 268
  - 268
  - 269
  - 269
  - t
  - 270
  - 1 * -pograph; type-slug as cast. Section 240 - through a space .
  - yPograph ; type-slug trimmed and tang 250. - Sheared off. Section ... 22- -Pograph; finished type-slug 255. Grantype; mould ... 2=5° grantype ; mould-end jaw . ... 223 grantype ; comb with tang attached
  - 34* grantype; individual-type line closed up 25= . ready for galley .
  - D bellows or Electric compositor; slugs
  - Plate XIV, 270
  - NN NNN 00 CT O Ut 0° O10
  - Linotype - pump-plunger Grantypei metal-pot mouth .
  - G section ’ m."ttiplunger pump. Vertical Grantype: multi-plunger pump. Plan : section i nozzle-plate. Elevation and Noxon’s cases, 1683 : :
  - 277
  - 277
  - 277 278
  - 278 284 285 285 286 287 288
  - 288
  - FIG.
  - 306.
  - Young and Delcambre composing ma-chine; diagram illustrating Bessemer's
  - 00C CU O HHH 00 O N H o 00.
  - PAGE
  - 323
  - voungana” Delcambre composing ma- , chine: diagram of guide-plate • . • 323 voung and Delcambre composing machine 324
  - x ou-o Co ------------- 1:
  - Hattersley composing machine
  - Hattersley composing machine
  - Plate XXVI, 328
  - guide -. 326
  - R 1 Brg
  - P
  - B.& & E 8:
  - B o 0.
  - E 0Q B.
  - 0
  - S BE. ‘ O O
  - X X
  - H
  - Co N CO 0
  - Kastenbein composing machine; type-freeing mechanism : • * 3
  - 313. Fraser composing machinplate XXVIII, 328-29
  - 26T. Moxon's cases, 1683 .
  - 263 Smith's cases, 1755 .
  - 262 ordinary arrangement of lower case, 1870 261” ptanhope's cases ..
  - 268: Lay of French cases .
  - 26- of German Fraktur case .
  - Lay of Russian case .
  - 260 Chadwick typesetter . . Plate XV, 288
  - 9: Cases with Chadwick typesetter in position
  - — 3 Plate XV, 288
  - 22°. Hattersley keyboard . . . . 2-2° wastenbein composing machine ; keyboard
  - • Nicks composing machine; keyboard
  - - ulsometer composing machine; key-22 board.....................................
  - 4. Monotype composing machine ; pattern C 25. .keyboard. .
  - : Monotype D and DD keyboards; lay-out 246 for books or news .
  - • Monotype D and DD keyboards; lay-out - for jobbing .
  - 248 totype keyboard. English
  - 240 -yPograph keyboard ; English 280° —notype keyboard ; French .
  - 28- - yPograph keyboard; French 2 miotype keyboard ; German .
  - 28- -Pograph keyboard ; German
  - 283 Monoline keyboard
  - 284 Unitype keyboard
  - 286. compositor keyboard
  - * - ulsometer distributing machine;
  - 28- aboard............................
  - Church typecasting machine (I822)
  - 288 . . Plate XVI, 302
  - ordinary (English) pivotal typecasting
  - 280 „machine . Plate XVI, 302 9 riyotal typecasting machine; side eleva-
  - tion.. . . . .. . 303 Davis pivotal typecaster; throwing out -finished type . . . Plate XVII,306 Davis pivotal typecaster ; setting up type
  - win line . Plate XVII, 306 Nuernberger-Rettig typecaster
  - 203 r 5 35 Plate XVIII, 307
  - 3 -votal typecaster for large-work
  - . 5 Plate XIX, 308
  - sapid typecasting machine Plate XX, 308-09 Tustermann typecasting machine
  - . Plate XXI, 308-09
  - Earth typecasting machine Plate XXII, 309 Automatic typecasting machine ; American e Type Founders Co. . . Plate XXII, 309 200 —ompositype sorts-caster Plate XXIII, 310
  - 308: Thompson typecaster . Plate XXIII, 310
  - Wicks rotary typecasting machine
  - 301 w Plate XXIV, 311
  - VICkS rotary typecaster; section through
  - 302. wipuld at casting point typ rotary typecaster;
  - 3. Wicks rotary typecaster;
  - 30, —machining chain-links
  - 30: Wicks type-slicer .
  - murch composing machine
  - 0
  - N
  - NUNN tot NHO
  - N NN NN ( (
  - 00 NO IT
  - key-
  - 289
  - 291
  - 291
  - 291
  - 292
  - 293
  - 293
  - 294
  - 294
  - 295
  - 295
  - 296
  - 296
  - 297
  - 298
  - 299
  - 299
  - delivery of operations in
  - 314. Empire composing machine
  - Plate XXVIII, 328-29
  - 315. Wicks composing machine; with Stringer
  - line-justifier attached : Plate XXIX, 329
  - 316. Wicks composing machine; type-freeing mechanism . 330
  - 317. Pulsometer composing machine
  - Plate XXX, 335
  - 318. Pulsometer composing machine; type-freeing mechanism .. 332
  - 319. American numbering-machine and impres-
  - sion of figures . . Plate XXX, 335
  - 320. American numbering-machine; opened
  - Plate XXX, 335
  - 321. Mackie compressible space . . • 343
  - 322. Wicks compressible space . . • 343
  - 323. Dacheux compressible spaces; two forms.
  - Section . 343
  - 324. Cox multispace . 344
  - 325. Stringer line-justifier . Plate XXXI, 344
  - 326. Grant-Legros-Mawline-justifying machine.
  - Plan .
  - 327. Grant-Legros-Mawline-justifying machine;
  - type with special foot-nicks
  - 328. Grant-Legros-Maw line-justifyingmachine; measuring-box .
  - 329. Grant-Legros-Maw line-justifying machine. Side elevation. - .
  - 330. Hattersley distributing stick .
  - :. Pulsometer distributing machine
  - Plate XXXII, 352
  - 346
  - 347
  - 347
  - 349
  - 351
  - 8
  - 332. Pulsometer distributing machine ; detail 353
  - 333. Empire automatic distributing machine
  - Plate XXXII, 352
  - 334. Type nicked for the Empire distributing machine . 353
  - 335. Thorne distributor; method of distribu-tion. .. 353
  - 336. Dow automatic distributing machine
  - Plate XXXIII, 353
  - 337. Rototype composing and casting machine
  - Plate XXXIV, 355
  - 338. Bhisotype casting and distributing machine . . . Plate XXXV, 358
  - 339. Bhisotype; vertical section through a mould in the casting position
  - 340. Bhisotype; vertical section through a mould open for delivery of the type .
  - 341. Bhisotype ; isometric view of moulds and matrices. .
  - Mackie composing and line-justifying machine; perforated strip .
  - Dow composing and line-justifying ma-chine; front view . Plate XXXVI, 364
  - Dow composing and line-justifying machine; back view Plate XXXVII, 364-65
  - Dow composing machine ; line in process of composition . . Plate XXXVIII, 365 346. Dow composing machine; stick rotated through 90° ; ejection of line
  - Plate XXXVIII, 365
  - 342.
  - 343
  - 344.
  - 345.
  - 359
  - 360
  - 360
  - 363
  - 312
  - 313
  - 315
  - 317
  - . Plate XXV, 321
  - 347. Dow composing machine; line of com-posed type on the bridge ; justification in progress . . Plate XXXVIII, 365
  - 348. Thorne composing and distributing
  - machine . : . Plate XXXIX, 370
  - 349. Simplex composing and distributing machine . . . Plate XXXIX, 370
  - 350. Thorne machine; packing device . . 369
  - 351. Unitype composing and distributing
  - machine ; front view . . Plate XL. 371
  - 352. Unitype composing and distributing
  - machine; back view.. . Plate XL, 371
- p.693 - vue 861/901
- - 694
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - FIG. PAGE
  - 353. Castotype casting, composing and line-justifying machine . . Plate XLI, 374 354. Felt composing, line-justifying and distributing machine; general arrangement 377 355. Paige composing, line-justifying and distributing machine; diagram of operations ..... 382-83
  - 356. Paige composing, line-justifying and distributing machine ; front view Plate XLII, 386 357. Paige machine; front view from left end . . . . Plate XLIII, 386-87 358. Paige machine; back view from left end . . . . Plate XLIV, 386-87 359. Paige machine; back view from right end . . . . Plate XLV, 386-87 360. Paige keyboard . . Plate XLVI, 387 361. Monotype composing and casting machine ; “ C ” keyboard machine, (now obsolete)
  - Plate XLVII, 392 362. Monotype composing and casting machine ;
  - “D” keyboard machine Plate XLVII, 392 363. Monotype composing and casting machine; “DD” keyboard machine
  - Plate XLVIII, 393 364. Monotype composing and casting machine ; typecaster . . Plate XLVIII, 393
  - 365. Monotype composing and casting machine ;
  - keyboard unit-counting mechanism . 394
  - 366. Monotype composing and casting machine ; matrices arranged as keys of “C ” keyboard ..... 395
  - 367. Monotype composing and casting machine; standard lay-out as cast in long primer modern ...... 396
  - 368. Monotype composing and casting machine ;
  - book or news lay-out of matrices . . 397
  - 369. Monotype composing and casting machine ;
  - jobbing lay-out of matrices . . 397
  - 370. Monotype composing and casting machine ;
  - perforated ribbon for typecaster . . 399
  - 371. Monotype composing and casting machine ;
  - matrix-grid ..... 400
  - 372. Monotype casting machine; matrix-holder for sorts-casting to 14-point . 402
  - 373. Monotype casting machine; large-work matrix-holder for sorts-casting . . 402
  - 374. Monotype casting machine; large-work mould-delivery and raceway . . 403
  - 375. Graphotype composing and casting machine (Goodson) ; keyboard machine
  - Plate XLIX, 404 376. Graphotype composing and casting machine (Goodson) ; typecaster
  - Plate XLIX, 404 377. Graphotype composing and casting machine (Goodson); perforated ribbon 404 378. Graphotype composing and casting machine (Goodson) ; lay-out of matrix-block ...... 405 379. Graphotype, improved; lay-out of keyboard ...... 406 380. Graphotype, improved ; lay-out of matrix-plate ...... 407 381. Graphotype, new model, composing and casting machine; view of right-hand side from the front . . Plate L, 408 382. Graphotype, new model, composing and casting machine; enlarged view of right-hand side showing the controller magazines and the controller elements
  - Plate LI, 408-09 383. Graphotype, new model, composing and casting machine; view of left-hand side from the back . Plate LII, 408-09 384. Graphotype, new model, composing and casting machine; view of right-hand side from the back . . Plate LIII, 409 385. Graphotype, new model; controller escapement and adjustable controller-element 409 386. Graphotype, new model; order and arrangement of controller-elements as composed and used .... 410 387. Graphotype, new model; used as a large-work sorts-caster ; enlarged view taken from the left-hand side . Plate LIV, 412 388. Electrotypograph ; keyboard machine
  - Plate LV, 413 389. Dyotype composing and casting machine ; typecaster . . . Plate LV, 413
  - PAGE
  - FIG. ..
  - 390. Dyotype composing and casting machine, 413 matrix-wheel . . . Plate—.‘
  - 391. Dyotype composing and casting machine , 415 perforated ribbon for typecaster . :
  - Stringertype matrix composing and CaSvI 416 ing machine ; front view . Plate L > Stringertype matrix-composing and cas'I 417 ing machine, 1913 model . Plate LV 418
  - 392.
  - 393-
  - 398.
  - 394. Stringertype; line-justification gear • 395. Stringertype ; gear for distributing
  - matrices to magazines ; cross-section • 396. Stringertype; gear for distributing matrices; front view . : 397. Stringertype; gear for distributing matrices; magazine mouths. Plan • Linotype ; original machine of 1884, wit enlarged views of the multiple-strik
  - TA% O
  - 399.
  - 400.
  - 401.
  - 402.
  - 403.
  - matrix-bars used . . • %
  - Linotype; first individual matrix D LV111, 424
  - Linotype; independent matrix machine of 1885 with blower ; with views of slug 423 matrix, and wedge-space or space-ban -
  - Linotype ; blower machine of 1886 intron 424 duced in 1889 into England Plate ‘424
  - Linotype ; square-base machine of 189° : Linotype; twin machine with step line,~25 justification of 1894 . Plate LIX, 4 single magazine machine, 424
  - 404. Linotype ; American
  - 405. Linotype;
  - English
  - 409.
  - 410.
  - 40
  - single magazine machine,-25 L11511ou . . . Plate LX,44
  - 406. Linotype; double magazine machine,,~25
  - English model 3 . Plate
  - 407. Linotype ; arabic machine with 180 Key25 Plate LX1 424
  - 408. Linotype; treble magazine machine,
  - English model 4 ; front view ,24-25 Plate LXIL 4
  - Linotype; treble magazine machine,
  - English model 4 ; back view - ,4-25 Plate LXIV, 47
  - Linotype ; quadruple magazine machine, model 9 ; English and American ,425 Plate LXV:424 Linotype; model 10 machine; Englis 24-25 and American . . Plate LXyl, 4 425
  - Linotype; distributor-bar and matrices . Linotype ; matrix distribution ; perspeix, 425 tive view . . . Plate LX) 426
  - 414. Linotype; matrix liberating gear • ' 415. Linotype ; composed line of single-lette matrices ready for casting the slug 1 427 Plate LXM 416. Linotype; composed line of two-letti matrices; casting part of the line II 427 roman and part in italic Plate LXMX, 428 417. Linotype ; path of matrices Plate ’ 418. Linotype; metal-pot, pump and mould 428
  - Plate
  - 419. Linotype; ejector, mould-wheel any 428 galley . . . Plate LA 429
  - 420. Linotype; two-line letter . • % 421. Linotype ; double magazine ; arrangement 429 of escapements and shift-key Plate LX i 422. Linotype ; models 4 and 9 ; escapemew j 435 mechanism . . Plate LX: 434 423. Linotype; embroidery block . • ' 430 424. Dougall Linotype . . . -*11,430 425. Victorline ; general view Plate —136-37 426. Intertype ; general view Plate LXXI 436-37 427. Linograph ; general view PlateLXXIV 428. Bellows or Electric compositor; fron.,637 view . . . Plate LXXV 43° 429. Bellows or Electric compositor; bach 437 view • - - Plate LXAII, 442 430. Monoline ; general view Plate LXXV 431. Monoline; arrangement of strikes 01 443
  - 432.
  - 433-
  - 434-
  - matrices .... -
  - Typograph; normal composing position
  - of upper part; front view LXXVIII, 444
  - Typograph; distributing position, upper
  - part tilted back ; front view - 444 Plate LXXMU
  - Typograph; normal composing positing 445 of upper part; back view Plate LXK . ’
  - Typograph ; line of single-letter matrices X,448
  - composed and line-justified Plate LA*
  - 435.
- p.694 - vue 862/901
- - LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
  - 695
  - 02
  - PAGE
  - co C2
  - 439.
  - 440.
  - Typograph; line of two-letter matrices;
  - composed and line-justified Plate LXXX,448 typograph ; assembly channel filled with
  - single-letter matrices and vice-jaw closed ready for line-justification .
  - typograph; line of single-letter matrices line-justified ready for casting . .
  - typograph ; matrix escapement typograph; assembly channel empty
  - 444
  - 445
  - 446
  - 441.
  - * Plate LXXXI, 448-49
  - typograph; assembly channel filled with line of two-letter matrices
  - 442.
  - 443.
  - 444.
  - 445.
  - _ Plate LXXXI, 448-49
  - -ypograph; vice-jaw closed but line not
  - yet line-justified. Plate LXXXII, 448-49 typograph; matrices line-justified ready
  - for casting . Plate LXXXII, 448-49 typograph ; rack in position for changing —fount . . Plate LXXXIII, 448-49
  - typograph; matrices transferred from
  - magazine to the rack, peadzXXXV, 448-49 Rowotype matrix-composingmeexxxv, 449 Fowler impression machineplate LXXXVI, 454 Babbage difference engineplate LXXXVII, 458 Scheutz difference engine SeLXXXVIII, 459
  - Scheutz difference engine ; frare IXXXIX, 462 Print from stereotype cast from onarea on original impression matrices P Farr’s the Scheutz machine LT XXXVIII,459 “English Life Tables Plate —keyboard
  - Lithotype transfer machine ‘ plate XC, 463 machine . • • . printing
  - 453. Lithotype transfer machine, Plate XC, 463 mechanism • . Acct model,
  - 454. Oddur type-bar machine, na casting a using a matrix-disk anu -
  - o
  - 447.
  - 448.
  - 449.
  - 450.
  - 451.
  - 8 N
  - PAGE
  - 479. Finished plate as removed from the
  - Autoplate machine . • Plate XCII, 478
  - 480. Autoplate Junior; front "ie"Plate XCVIII, 480
  - 481. Autoplate Junior; back ViMlate xCIX, 480-81
  - 482. Autoshaver . .. - Plate C 480-81
  - " Multiplate ; at rest, after the first cast ha been made . - , Plate CI, 480-81
  - Tubular-plate casting-box; closeplate CII 481
  - 483.
  - 484.
  - 485.
  - 486.
  - Tubular-plate casting-box ; °Penplate CII, 48I
  - Section of typographical etching-plate showing wax built up for whites, and section of electrotyped shell, filled and ...484 E. Lanteri;
  - mounted . . .
  - 487 Study of a head by Prof, to ( examples of reproduction
  - 492.) using different screens:
  - 487.
  - 488.
  - 489.
  - 490.
  - 491.
  - 492.
  - 50 per inch 75 per inch
  - 100 per inch 125 per inch 150 per inch 175 per inch
  - 423 (Continuous spectrum
  - 497.)
  - 493-
  - 494-
  - 495-496.
  - 497.
  - 498.
  - 499-
  - ‘ three-colour process.
  - Yellow alone Red alone Yellow and red Blue alone .
  - Yellow, red, and blue Example of Litho-block Archaic Chinese writing,
  - in half-tone
  - . Plate CIII, 489
  - . Plate CIII, 489
  - . Plate CIII, 489
  - . Plate CIII, 489
  - . Plate CIII, 489
  - . Plate CIII, 489
  - reproduced by the
  - Plate CIV, 492
  - Plate CIV, 492
  - Plate CIV, 492
  - Plate CIV, 492
  - . Plate CIV, . Plate CV,
  - in form
  - 2700
  - grooved base upon a line of short type
  - 455 Plate XC’ 463
  - : ogeur type-bar machine, 1913 model;
  - front view; casting short-type and swaging a previously prepared base upon
  - 456 the line of short type . . Plate XCI, 464
  - oddur type-bar machine, 1913 model;
  - n side view • • • • Plate XCI, 464
  - oddur type-bar machine; section at
  - 458 ocasting point............................ oddur type-bar machine; line-justifica-
  - 450 otion ’ front elevation . type-bar machine ; space-band and
  - 460 olyPe ’ side elevation . . . •
  - oddur type-bar machine; front view of
  - 461 mould.....................................
  - 462.}Oddurtype-bar machine ; short type with
  - 463. ouand without jet or sprue
  - oedur type-bar machine ; grooved slug for
  - 464. short type..............................
  - 465.} . type-bar machine; swaged slug,
  - 466. losection and isometric view .
  - 467. 1 k r type-bar machine ; slug cast on to
  - —’ H short type ; section and isometric view canigan machine ; composite type-slug . -asting-press for gat stereotype-plates; copen........................................ Casting-press for flat stereotype-plates;
  - closed and turned to the vertical or s casting Position . .
  - emicylindrical plate, cast by hand, with
  - head attached . . Plate XCII, 478
  - emicylindrical plate with bead removed
  - 473 Plate XCII, 478
  - S metal furnace with pump filling semi-cylindrical-plate mould jn vertical
  - 47a A Position • . . Plate XCIII, 478-79
  - Automatic boring machine for semi-
  - cylindrical plates . Plate XCIV, 478-79 casting-press for semicylindrical plates;
  - opened for trimming and removing the
  - c Plate . . . Plate XCV, 478-79
  - asting-press for semicylindrical plates;
  - water-cooled with automatic closing
  - and head-cutting gear Plate XCV, 478-79 Autoplate ; front view Plate XCVI, 478-79
  - utoplate; back view . Plate XCVII, 479
  - years old . . . . . .
  - 500. Chuan shu or seal character .
  - 501. Li shu or clerkly style . . . .
  - Ch’iai shu or pattern style Hsing shu or running hand Ts’ao tzu or grass character . Sung t’i or Sung dynasty style Tonal marks and points . .
  - Chinese syllabic symbols; vowel sounds preceding consonantal sounds
  - Chinese syllabic symbols, arranged alpha-
  - 502.
  - 503-
  - 504-
  - 505-
  - 506.
  - 507.
  - 508.
  - CU H O 00
  - 468.
  - 469.
  - 470.
  - N
  - 476.
  - 492
  - 493
  - 496
  - 496
  - 496
  - 497
  - 497
  - 497
  - 497
  - 502
  - 504
  - 505
  - 506
  - 465
  - 466
  - 466
  - 467
  - 467
  - 467
  - 468
  - 468
  - 470
  - 474
  - 475
  - 512
  - 513
  - 514.
  - 515-
  - 516.
  - betically .....
  - Chinese numerals .....
  - Extract from “ Sacred Edict ” printed in alternate lines of classic Chinese ideographs and syllabic script .
  - . The application of the Chinese syllabary to the braille system . . . .
  - . Chinese braille syllabary arranged alphabetically................................ 511-12
  - ;. Example of Chinese braille with Chinese ideographic equivalents; extract from “Sacred Edict” . . . 513-14
  - Rosetta stone . . . Plate CVI, 516
  - Hieroglyphic alphabet: simple sound
  - Hieroglyphic alphabet: complex sound-
  - symbols ......
  - Determinatives . . . . .
  - Hieroglyphic case : first portion
  - 519. Hieroglyphic case : second portion .
  - 520. Hieroglyphic case : spaces
  - 521. Specimen of hieroglyphic manuscript and printed text; slightly reduced from the original ......
  - 522. Three standard body-sizes of hieroglyphic
  - 508
  - O
  - 1
  - 2
  - 517
  - 518
  - 519
  - 520
  - 521
  - 522
  - C 5
  - type.........................................
  - 523. Widths of hieroglyphic type conforming to shape of character
  - 524. Hieroglyphic-character group and its components .....
  - 525. Comparison of cuneiform writings, showing development from early ideograph to simple syllabic character
  - 526. Clay cylinder of Sennacherib, recording
  - the siege of Jerusalem . Plate CVII, 529
  - 527. Stone lion with Hittite inscription from
  - Marash . . . .Plate CVIII, 530
  - 528. Hittite inscriptions .... 530
  - 529. Maya inscription from Piedras Negras
  - Plate CVIII, 530
  - 523
  - 524
  - 529
  - 530. Sbididi or Nsibidi script . - - 53T
  - 53r. Inscribed neolithic pebbles . Plate CIX, 53
- p.695 - vue 863/901
- - 696
  - TYPOGRAPHICAL PRINTING-SURFACES.
  - FIG.
  - 532. Maliseet ......
  - 533. Nama or Khoi-Khoi ....
  - 534. Anglo-Saxon . . . . .
  - 535. Inscription Roman ....
  - 536. Inscription Roman ....
  - 537. Greek; Codex Vaticanus
  - 538. Greek; Codex Alexandrinus
  - 539. Inscription Greek ....
  - 540. German ; Fraktur ....
  - 541. Bulgarian Glagolitic ....
  - 542. Bulgarian ......
  - 543. Abkhazian ......
  - 544. Old Norse; runic character .
  - 545. Gothic ......
  - 546. Irish or Erse ; Gaelic character
  - 547. Georgian ; ecclesiastical character .
  - 548. Georgian; civil character
  - 549. Arabic; single alinement and double alinement . . . . . .
  - 550. Arabic type with recesses for vowels
  - 551. Syro-Chaldaic ; Nestorian
  - 552. Syriac; Estrangelo . . . .
  - 553. Syriac; Peshito . . . . .
  - 554. Syriac; modern . . . . .
  - 555. Arabic; Cufic character
  - 556. Carshuni ......
  - 557. Armenian ......
  - 558. Kurdish ; Armenian character
  - 559. Hebrew; Rabbinical character
  - 560. Accadian; cuneiform . . . .
  - 561. Assyrian; cuneiform . . . .
  - 562. Babylonian; cuneiform
  - PAGE
  - 535
  - 535
  - 536
  - 536
  - 536
  - 536
  - 537
  - 537
  - 537
  - 538
  - 538
  - 538
  - 539
  - 539
  - 539
  - 540
  - 540
  - 563. Phoenician
  - 564. Samaritan
  - 565. Palmyrene
  - 566. Egyptian;
  - 567. Egyptian ;
  - 568. Egyptian ;
  - hieroglyphic hieratic demotic
  - 569. Coptic; Bohairic or Northern
  - 570. Coptic; Sa’idic or Southern .
  - 541
  - 542
  - 543
  - 543
  - 543
  - 543
  - 544
  - 544
  - 544
  - 545
  - 545
  - 546
  - 546
  - 547
  - 547
  - 547
  - 548
  - 548
  - 548
  - 548
  - 549
  - 549
  - FIG.
  - 571. Zend .....
  - 572. Amharic ....
  - 573- Ethiopic ....
  - 574. Hindi; devanagari character
  - 575. Bengali ....
  - 576. Panjabi or Sikh ; Gurumukhi char;
  - 577. Chamba ; Thakuri character .
  - 578. Gujarati or Guzerati
  - 579. Kanarese ....
  - 580. Telugu ....
  - 581. Tamil .....
  - 582. Malayalim ....
  - 583. Oriya or Uriya
  - 584. Cingalese or Sinhalese .
  - 585. Lepcha ....
  - 586. Tibetan ....
  - 587. Burmese ....
  - 588. Siamese ....
  - 589. Lao-tian or Lao-shan
  - 590. Japanese;
  - 591. Japanese;
  - 592. Japanese ;
  - 593. Korean
  - 594. Kalmuk
  - 595. Manchu
  - 596. Mongolian
  - Kana-majiri Kata-kana Hira-gana
  - acter
  - 597. Sundanese ; Javanese character
  - 598. Batta .....
  - 599. Bugi........................
  - 600. Bisaya or Visaya .
  - 601. Cherokee ....
  - 602. Chippewyan
  - 603. Eskimo or Innuit .
  - 604. CV or compass alphabet ; relation characters.
  - 605. CV or compass type
  - 606. Universal syllabics
  - 607. Music . ....
  - 608. Plain-song ....
  - 609. Tonic sol-fa ....
  - ship of
  - PAGE 549 550 55° 551 551 55’ 552 552 552 553 553 553 553 554 554 554 555 555 555 556 556 556 556 557 557
  - 558 559 559 559 559 560 560
  - 561 561 562 563 563 564
- p.696 - vue 864/901
- - INDEX.
  - Un autor debe siempre escribir el indice, quienquiera que haya escrito el libro.
  - From the Spanish.
  - Set in the body-fount of the book ; 10-point old-style (Clowes). capithe.more. important references are given in heavy type; plates in roman numerals, in its ’ .Preliminary matter in roman numerals, lower-case; non-naturalized foreign words thic ; ICS ’ names "of type-bodies and of type faces commence with a lower-case letter when T is the ordinary practice.
  - Set in body-fount of index ; 6-point old-style (Clowes).
  - a. A
  - A, a,451, 184, 188, 342, 364, 396
  - 9 at,46
  - " A Mpmual of Typography,” 301
  - "A SORE siLfaisait beau, a Londres . . .” 79
  - Abbey signa 13 misplaced upon a strong body,” 453
  - Abbreviations, 146
  - Abkhazian, 538 4
  - ALL VEre 2splour by paper, 492-93
  - 461 my of Stockholm, Professors' guarantee, 460,
  - AcceniToreunetfgrm, 546
  - a Punches, 195’212
  - Accented capitals, 127
  - s^U1^ to, 80
  - ACDeRIESgBItels, 12
  - ltalic, 35 ’ 184, 676
  - temailz of, 184
  - ACconEsintiate, 36
  - ACcuTabyF or SodyWEeks pump, 275
  - facetrntype reproduction, 118
  - ilstifier’s work, 118
  - moulds, I18
  - set, 69
  - Accu’Pe faces, 116
  - Acid-p inaccuracies, 24, 28-29
  - Acknomof coating, 4.85, 486
  - a d, GMledgments, xiii-xvi
  - Ada german Fraktur, 168
  - Adding “Sta, Countess of Lovelace, 321, 339
  - Addres machines, 338, 455 139
  - AddresseS machines from hand-stamps, 337
  - Address graph short-type, 99
  - Adelas. Plate, 100,1o1, IV”
  - AdjustaB" ife of Roger I, Count of Sicily, 8
  - Advantaale. moulds, Oddur, 464
  - Advertisen loose type over type-slugs, 451, 469-70
  - Advertissments, enlarged half-tones, 489
  - =, 150 sing machine. Bellows, 441-42
  - A -3. 206
  - #450,286
  - Agateso, 705 Res/gestae," 565
  - Air in motive languages syllabic character, 560
  - Air grooves, 2653273
  - A-nECES) Monotype, 398
  - AibrecKe "nding when oversetting begins, 347
  - Alges-Manw-3.400
  - 321 Patterns woven by the analytical engine.
  - Algebraical signs, 39, 674-75
  - Alinement italic and roman, 123
  - tolerance in, 125
  - visible error in, 24
  - Alining surfaces, wear of Monoline, 443
  - Alining-bar, Scheutz difference engine, 461
  - . .Typograph, 447
  - All through my keys that gave their sounds . . ."
  - 283
  - " Almanac, Nautical,” 455
  - Almanac signs, 38
  - Almanacs, 38-39, 126
  - Alpha, resemblance to a, 42
  - Alphabet, hieroglyphic, 516-17, 525
  - modification of, 152
  - possible reform of, 152
  - standard, 36
  - Altering position of pump-lever pivot, 273
  - Alternation sign, 47
  - Aluminium alloy for furniture, 115
  - matrices, 216
  - American common line, 124
  - inventors of transfer machines, 463
  - models of Linotype, 430
  - nomenclature for widths of type, 89
  - numbering machine, 335, XXX
  - origin of Monoline, 442
  - Typograph, 444
  - " American Printer," The, 576
  - " American Society of Mechanical Engineers, Pro-
  - ceedings," 487
  - American title line, 124
  - American Type Founders Co., automatic typecaster, 309, 310, XXII
  - depth of strike, 219
  - former process, 210
  - matrix-engraving machine, 236, XI, 606
  - specimens, 24, 82, 84, 85, 86, 87, 91, 92,
  - 121, 216, 357, 453
  - Amharic type, 549, 550
  - Ampersand ( &), 35, 78, 85, 87, 128-35, 283, 672
  - an, 146, 148, 149, 286
  - Analects of Confucius, 495
  - Analytical engine, Babbage, 321, 338, 339, 460
  - ".. : Analytical engine weaves algebraical
  - patterns . . . ”321
  - Anastatic printing, 2
  - Ancient and modern scripts, 533-62
  - Slavonic character, 538
  - and, 148, 150, 298, 331, 369
  - " And by complicating the Letters and Points . . ." 55
  - " And they made the plate of the holy crown of
  - pure gold : . ." 515
  - Andrews, Robert, 32
  - anglaise, 96, 686
  - Angle-base segments, 246, 249, 257, 258
  - Angle-blocks, magnetic, 250
  - Anglo-Saxon face, 83
  - type specimen, 536
  - Annuity tables, 455
  - " Anthropological Journal," 531
  - Antichrist, the, 6
  - Anticipating carriage, Babbage, 460
  - 697
- p.697 - vue 865/901
- - 698
  - INDEX.
  - antique, 30, 55, 84-88, 89, 90, 685, 690
  - trench, 30
  - old-style, 15, 84-86, 90, 321
  - roman, specimen, 565
  - skeleton, 90, 271
  - Apostrophe (’), 283, 671
  - Appearance of accuracy, 24
  - type series, relative, 122
  - Applegath, A., method of printing in colours, 485
  - stereotype-plate, 582, 585
  - Aquatint, 2
  - arabic character, 421, 540, 542, 690
  - legibility of, 183-84
  - Arabic in Cufic-character, 544
  - Linotype machine, 431, LXII, 432
  - linotype specimen, 421
  - numbering system, 334
  - Aramaic or Syriac, 543
  - Archaeological signs, 44
  - Archimedes, 271
  - Area-recording machines, 339, 340
  - Arithmetical progression of type sizes, 66
  - Arize, river, Ariege, France, 532
  - Armenian, 544
  - Kurdish, 545
  - Arrangement of keyboard identical with lay of case,
  - 289-90
  - Paige, 378, 388
  - matrices, Monoline, 297
  - typewriter keyboard, 300
  - Arrows, 111
  - Arrow heads and vertical lines, 25
  - Art paper, 218, 489
  - Article LIX, Reglement de la Librairie, 61
  - Artificial light, reading by, 191
  - Artistic ability and accuracy of punch-cutter, 194
  - a S, 160, 162—69
  - blackfriars, 166, 167
  - modern, 162, 163
  - old-style, 164, 165
  - sans serif, 168, 169
  - Ascenders, 121-22, 188, 670
  - percentage of, 121
  - short in small bodies, 122
  - Ascendonica, 71
  - Asia Minor, dead languages of, 546
  - Aspect signs, 38
  - Asphaltum, 485
  - Assembling belt and slide, Linotype, 433
  - matrices, Rowotype, 450
  - Assembly of type, Unitype, 372-73
  - Assendonica, 71
  - Assyrian, cuneiform, 529, 546
  - used by Ancient Persians and Medes, 547
  - Asterisk, excluded from Stanhope case, 286
  - Asteroids, signs for, 38
  - Astigmatic letters, 25-26
  - Astrological signs, 39
  - Astronomical signs, 38, 673
  - tables, 455
  - Atanasia, 71
  - atlas (face), 33
  - A U, German Fraktur, 170
  - Augustan black, 10, 90
  - Augustijn, 71
  - Authors’ and Printers’ Dictionary, 689-90
  - “ . . . authors of our existence,” 241
  - “ Autobiography; Sir Henry Bessemer,” 17-18, 272,
  - 322-25
  - Automatic carrying and inking of numbering hand-
  - stamps, 335
  - distributor, 352-54
  - head-cutting and ejection, Autoplate Junior, 480
  - knife-block, Linotype, 432
  - leading-mechanism, Paige, 385, 386, 389, 390
  - line-justifier, Dow compositor, 365
  - McClintock, 364, 368
  - North’s, 380
  - loading-mechanism, Unitype, 371, 372
  - photographing of composed line, 470
  - plate-casting and finishing machines, 479-81,
  - XCVJ, XCVII, CI
  - printing-telegraph, 300
  - quadder, Linotype, 432
  - removal of leads, Dow, 352-54
  - Unitype, 372
  - safety clutch, Unitype, 371
  - tool grinder for punch-cutting, 205
  - Autoplate, 479-80, XCII, XCVI, XCVII
  - Autoplate Junior, 480, XCVIII, XCIX
  - Autoshaver, 480, C
  - Auxetophone, 573
  - a v, German Fraktur, 168, 170
  - Average legibility coefficient, 183
  - a-z length, 88, 90, 91, 92, 121
  - comparison of, 90, 91, 92
  - cost of composition, 88
  - in ems, 90-92,144, 145
  - legibility, 88
  - modern and old-style, 122
  - modern pica, 72
  - old-style pica, 73
  - presumed constant, 160
  - standard brevier, 122
  - nonpareil, 122
  - pica, 122
  - type for school-books, 160
  - B
  - b, 283
  - Babbage, analytical engine, 459-60
  - anticipating carriage, 460
  - calculating engine, 338, 459, 471 T 171
  - calculating machine, 338, 455-62, LXXXV1 *
  - Charles, 321, 338, 455, 458, 460, 462
  - difference engine, 338, 455-59, LXXXVI1
  - logarithms, 455
  - Major-General H.P., 338, 460
  - “ mill,” 460
  - Babylonian cuneiform, 529, 547
  - Back (of the type), 11
  - Backgammon, 95
  - Back-plate of mould, 245
  - Back-wall, 124-25
  - Bacon, Francis, Lord, x
  - Baden-Powell, Lt.-General R.S.S., 99
  - Baedeker, 54
  - Bagford, John, 32, 568, 569
  - Baine, John, 569
  - Baking plaster mould, 474, 476
  - Ball-knife, Moxon’s definition, 218 *1]
  - Ballou engraving machine for matrices, 236, *
  - Balls, golf, printing on, 341
  - Ball-slides, 204
  - Ball-valve for metal-pumps, 272
  - Bar or solidus, 39
  - Barlock typewriter, 442
  - Barotype, 450
  - Barr, Mark, former process, 209, X
  - method for true fount scheme, 151 643
  - patents, 599, 600, 601, 612, 615, 616, 64 ’
  - 647, 649, 665
  - punch-cutting machine, 204-05, V, VI
  - Barth engraved matrix, 220, 221 - 645
  - typecaster, 309-10, XXII, 596, 631, 632, 63°1
  - Bas de casse (police), 134-35
  - Base chamber of pump, 273
  - Baskerville, John, 33, 569
  - Bastard bodies, 64, 68
  - Bates, George A., 380
  - Batta character, 558, 559
  - Battle sign, 44
  - Baxter, colour-printing process, 490
  - b d p q, bowl, II
  - Beard or kern at front or back, 22, 670
  - or line-to-front, 14, 124
  - or neck, 11, 669
  - Bearded type, 78-80
  - Bearding-plane, 22, 81
  - Bearing-bars, Typograph, 447
  - Bearing-plate, Monotype, 260
  - Beaumarchais, 569
  - Bell, warning, Bellows, 437
  - Linotype, 427
  - Typotheter, 289 - g 649
  - Bellows, B. F., 437, 604, 606, 610, 640, 646, 04
  - 653-58, 663, 666 <XV
  - Bellows or Electric Compositor, 437-42,
  - LXXVI, 450
  - depth of strike, 240
  - keyboard, 297
  - matrices, 232, 233, 438-41, XI
  - mould, 269-70
  - pump, 278
  - slugs, 233, 269-70, XI, XIV
  - Bending-off break, II-12, 13-14
  - Bengali, 551 ,04
  - Bent (or binding) arm of pivotal typecaster, 3 629
  - Benton, Linn Boyd, 77, 196, 236, 591, 592, 0 ’
  - 630, 638, 644, 649, 651, 664 matrix-engraving machine, 236, Al
- p.698 - vue 866/901
- - INDEX.
  - 699
  - Banton-Waldo former process, 208, 210
  - p. punch-cutting machine, 196-99, 205, 206, 208
  - perlin Academy, 36
  - gerri William, 357, 636, 639, 641, 644
  - Berth Anthony Francis, 271, 301, 582
  - Berthold height-to-paper, 56, 57
  - “ ertillon, Alphonse, v
  - esides the errors incidental to the process of
  - computation . . .” 471
  - essemer, Sir Henry, 15,17, 272,274, 322-25, 576, 583
  - Beth Igutobiography, 171 322-25, 576
  - Bevelling kerns, 81
  - 0 160, 162-69, 188
  - Dlackfriars, 166, 167
  - effect of serif in, 164
  - German Fraktur, 166, 168, 170, 171
  - modern, 162, 163
  - Old-style, 164, 165
  - sans serif, 168, 169
  - phisey. Prof. S. A., 319, 362, 606, 611, 618, 620, 648
  - palsey rotary typecaster, 319
  - nisotype casting and distributing machine, 358-62,
  - 374. XXXV
  - matrix, 220-21
  - operations of casting, 359-61
  - BiblgEg/pggaster, 319-20
  - ABiblia Sacra Vulgata,” 146, 147
  - Biblical works, braille, 106
  - wpliography, 575—76
  - R.h iotheque Universelle de Geneve," 339
  - piehromated gelatine, 487
  - Bigrammjergscope, 203, 2°4’ 214
  - Bill by weight, 126
  - 01,1 of fount, 126, 670
  - abnormal demands, 126
  - Bohemian, 127, 140
  - English, 126, 128-31
  - exclusive of spaces, 126, 128, 129
  - inclusive of spaces, 126, 130, 131
  - French, 127, 134, 135
  - German Antiqua, 127, 137
  - Fraktur, 127, 136
  - Greek, 127, 141
  - Hebrew, 127, 143
  - imperfections, 126
  - Italian, 127, 138
  - Russian italic, 127, 143
  - Russian roman, 127, 142
  - sorts, 126
  - Spanish, 127, 139
  - Welsh, 126, 132, 133
  - $,126
  - bzfrchibald, improvement on handcasting, 302
  - Bisaya character, 559
  - BislltS, die-blocks for printing, 238
  - biKemmen coating for plates, 485
  - face, 4, 83-85, 90
  - Augustan, 10
  - oCClesiastical), tudor, 83-85, 90
  - tudor, 1
  - Block or broken black, four-colour process, 492
  - bickfoot Indian, 560
  - Kfriars face, italic, 86, 87, 91, 193
  - € roman, 82, 84-86, 91, 156, 161,163
  - Lures, illegibility of, 172-73
  - Bl-Yer-case, 162
  - Bi-Ckfriars Type Foundry, depth of strike, 219
  - Back leading, 208, 484
  - Blaekmle$5,762376888
  - srabic, 183
  - Dlackfriars lower-case, 167
  - capitals, 177
  - devanagari, 183
  - figures, 173' 3
  - erman Fraktur, capitals, 177
  - lower-case, 171
  - Greek, 181
  - Hebrew, 181
  - modern lower-case, 163
  - Rdsstane Igyer-case, 165
  - Biockieetektoreer-case, 169
  - Bio type from Wicks caster, 116
  - Biockbook, 6
  - °CKS, process, 2, 483, 487-94, CIII, CIV, CV
  - Blots, ink, 113
  - Blower Linotype, 423, 430
  - Blow-holes in type, 273
  - Blue, effect of, in three-colour process, 493
  - light, 189
  - (printing in light blue) insufficient contrast, 191
  - b o d, 191
  - Body, 11,669
  - part of mould, 245
  - quick-change of, Linotype, 430
  - Body-blocks, Monotype, 259
  - Body-gauge, 69, 72-74
  - Body-sizes and faces, American; relative importance
  - of, 60
  - of type, 59
  - range of, Bellows, 441, 442
  - used for hieroglyphic type, 523
  - Body-slide, Bessemer, 272
  - Dyotype, 262, 414
  - Monotype, 259-61
  - Oddur, 465
  - Stringertype, 262
  - Bohemian, 36, 572
  - bill of fount or scheme, 127, 140
  - Boileau, E., printing in colours, 485, 585
  - bold expanded cheltenham, 92, 122, 216, 453
  - bold latin face, 31, 84-85, 86
  - Bonds and coupons, numbering-machines for, 333-35
  - Book and news lay-out, Monotype D and DD key-
  - boards, 293
  - booklet face, specimen, 577
  - “ Books are indeed like friends . . ." 575
  - Borders, 109, 679
  - Borgis, 71
  - Boring machine, automatic, for stereo-plates, 478,
  - XCIV
  - Autoshaver, 480, C
  - stereo-plate on Autoplate, 479
  - Botanical signs, 45, 673
  - Bottger typecaster, 309-10, 607, 666
  - Bouchon, inventor of perforated strip control, 327, 328
  - bourgeois, 58, 59, 71,122, 144
  - cost of per pound, 301, 302
  - 84-point, 60
  - specimens, 90, 301, 342, 392
  - type enlarged, 123
  - Bower’s system, 66
  - Bowl (of type), 11
  - Boy scouts, 99, 341
  - B R, blackfriars, 168, 175, 177
  - modern, 168, 174, 177
  - old-style, 168, 174-75, 177
  - sans serif, 164, 168, 176, 177
  - i Braces, 40, III, 672
  - Brackets, 40, 672
  - “ Bradford Observer,” 370
  - | Bradshaw’s Guide, 59
  - ' Brahminic books in sanskrit character, 53
  - braille alphabet, 104-06, 690
  - Chinese, 509-14
  - “ Brain,” 188
  - Brass leads or space lines, 113
  - letters, 93
  - matrices, 216
  - temporary spaces, 365
  - Break, bending-off, 12-13, 670
  - Davis, 12
  - Grantype, 13, 14
  - Mason, 12
  - Monotype, 13
  - non-dressing, 12
  - Nuernberger-Rettig, 12-13
  - part of mould, 245
  - pulling-off, 13
  - shearing-off, 13, 14
  - Stringertype, 13, 306
  - twisting-off, 12
  - Typograph, 13
  - “ Brethren in Types be of different Bodies ... 121
  - Bretons, 51
  - BREV (Brevier) quad matrix, 228
  - Breviario, 71
  - brevier, 59, 71,122, 144
  - column of, 69
  - cost of per pound, 301, 302
  - or 8-point, 59, 71
  - specimens, 1, 55, 90-92, 321, 376, 471, 495, 515, 533
  - standard a-z length, 122
  - Brick ornamentation, 24, 25
  - Briggs, logarithms, 455
  - Brillante, 71
- p.699 - vue 867/901
- - 700
  - INDEX.
  - brilliant, 71
  - British adding machine, 338
  - British and Foreign Bible Society, 556
  - British and United States Patents, difficulties ot
  - classifying, 577
  - British Association Committee ; Babbage analytical
  - engine, 459-60
  - influence of school-books on eyesight, 157, 158, 150
  - British inventors of transfer machines, 463
  - British Museum, 4, 5, 516
  - “ British Printer,” 55-57, 576
  - broad-faced type, 89
  - Brobdingnagian machine for printing on roads, 341
  - Bronze matrices, 216
  - sign, 49
  - statues, roman joint, 224
  - Brooks, B. A., 374, 605, 633, 642, 646, 655, 656
  - Brooks casting, composing, and line-justifying
  - machine, 374-75
  - Brott, Lucien A., 464, 638, 644
  - “. .. Brought truly into Lap with meet
  - Measure . . .” 357
  - Brown, H. E., 450
  - Browning, Robert, 283
  - Bruce, D., Junr., 17, 272, 274, 302, 588, 623, 625
  - Bruce pivotal typecaster, 302
  - Brunel, Isambard Kingdom, 271
  - Brunel, Marc Isambard, 271, 272, 301, 477, 582
  - Brunsviga calculator, 338
  - Buddhism, spread of, 550
  - Buell, Dwight, 379
  - Bugi character, 559
  - Building-up whites on wax-coated plate, 484
  - Bulgarian Glagolitic, 538
  - type, 538
  - “ Bulletin Officiel de l’Union Syndicale des Maitres
  - Imprimeurs de France,” 516
  - Bullock, James, 338
  - Bundy time recorder, 341
  - Burgeois, 71
  - Burgo, Lucas de, 193
  - Burmese characters, 23
  - type, 555
  - Burns, F. A. J., 106
  - Burr, fin or fringe on type, 19, 241, 258
  - Burr composing machine, 329
  - Burroughs adding machine, 338, 619, 620
  - Button-bank, Monotype, 397
  - Button bell-cranks, Monotype, 398
  - Bryan Donkin and Co., 461
  - B V, German Fraktur, 177, 178
  - Byron, Lord, 339
  - C
  - c, 184,185
  - C Monotype keyboard, 290, 292
  - Cadmium used in solder, 209
  - Cadmus, 560
  - Caduceus, 51
  - Calculating device, Dow compositor, 365
  - “ Calculating Engines,” Babbage, 338, 459
  - Calculating machines producing stereotype-matrices
  - 455 .
  - Caldecott, Randolph, 490
  - Calendoli, Father V., 464, 596, 597, 598, 638
  - type-bar machine, 464
  - Callet, logarithms, 455
  - Cambridge University Press, 41
  - Cam-carrier of Linotype matrix-escapement, 426
  - Cam-mechanism of Paige compositor, 381
  - Cam-shaft, Linotype, 427
  - Canal sign, 44
  - Cancel-key, Bellows, 441
  - Cancelled sorts for typewriter type, 98
  - canon, 58, 71
  - specimen, 30
  - Canon, 71
  - Canoncino, 71
  - Canone, 71
  - Capacity of magazine channels, Linograph, 437
  - Capehart, A. S., process for depositing copper matrices,
  - 239, 596, 598, 633, 635, 637, 640
  - Caph, caph final, 182
  - Capital, saving effected by stereotyping, 472
  - value of machines for casting and composing, 572
  - Capitales, accents italiques, 134
  - romains, 134
  - italiques, 135
  - romains, 134
  - Capitals compared with small letters in eye tests,
  - German Fraktur, illegibility of, 170
  - in fount schemes, 35, 128-43, 671
  - legibility, 174-79
  - used for eye tests, 26, 190
  - small capitals of larger body, 207
  - Card formers, 208
  - Cards, playing, 94
  - Care of, sign, 46
  - Carriage (of mould), 245
  - Carrying gear of numbering-machines, 335-36
  - Carshuni, 544
  - Cartographical signs, 44
  - Cartridge-case making, 218
  - Case, access to, Paige compositor, 386
  - arrangement of printer’s, 283-85, 681
  - French, 287
  - German, 288
  - Russian, 288
  - for hieroglyphic founts, 519-20
  - spaces, 521
  - Moxon’s (1683), 283—84
  - ordinary arrangement (1870), 283-85
  - recent modifications in lay, 283-85
  - Smith’s (1755), 283-85
  - Case-hardening steel for moulds, 270
  - Cash registers, recording and totalizing, 339
  - Casings, dust-proof, Bellows, 440
  - Caslon & Co., depth of strike, 219
  - Caslon Type Foundry, 421, 587
  - Caslon, William, 569, 570, 582
  - Caslon’s built-up matrices, 217
  - Caslons, The, 568 . . ring.
  - Casting a line of type at a single operation or
  - 269, 392, 421
  - type-by-type, 279, 281, 355-56
  - and composing machines, 279, 281, 355-56
  - Fowler, 355 TV
  - Rototype or Schimmel, 355-56, 22*
  - Westcott, 355
  - and distributing machines, 279, 281, 358-62
  - Bhiso type, 358-62, XXXV 8I
  - and inserting spaces for line-justification, 219 344, 357
  - and line-justifying machines, 279-81, 357
  - McGrath, 357 evotvpe.
  - Casting and matrix-composing machines,
  - 413-15, LV
  - Electrotypograph, 413, LV
  - Graphotype, 404-08, XLIX
  - new model, 408-13, L-LIV -
  - Monotype, 393-404, XLVII-XLV-
  - Stringertype, 415-20, LVI-LVII
  - Tachytype, 404
  - by hand, furniture, 17
  - type, 16-17, 301 , ,80
  - Casting, composing and distributing machine" 281,
  - composing and line-justifying machines, 2001
  - 374-75
  - Brooks, 374, 375
  - Castotype, 374, XLI hineS
  - composing, line-justifying and distributing mac 280
  - dummy type, 318
  - finished type, 306-16
  - hollow quotations, 308 _
  - line-justifying and distributing machines, 2°
  - Casting machines, 301-20, 677
  - American Type Founders’, 310, XXII
  - Barth, 310, XXII
  - Berte, 271, 301
  - Bessemer, 272
  - Bottger, 310
  - Bruce, 302
  - Brunel, 271, 301
  - Bhisotype single type, 319-20
  - Church, 302, XVI „<1ll
  - Compositype Sorts Caster, 309, 310—11, "
  - Davis setting-up, 306-07, XVII
  - throwing-out, 306, XVII
  - Foucher, rapid, 309
  - universal, 309
  - Kustermann rapid, 309-10, XXI
  - Nuernberger-Rettig, 307-08, XVIII
  - ordinary pivotal, 302, XVI
  - pivotal, 302-08
  - large-work, 308, XIX
  - rapid, 308-09, XX
  - Thompson, 309, 31I, XXIII Wicks rotary, 10, 311-16, XXIV mechanism, Bellows, 440
- p.700 - vue 868/901
- - INDEX.
  - 701
  - Casting operation, Dyotype, 262, 263
  - Monotype, 260
  - Rowotype, 450
  - Stringertype, 262 1
  - setting and justifying single type in one macnire,
  - .392,572
  - single type and composing by hand, 57
  - spaces before characters of a line, 413 type-slugs, 264—70, 392-93, 421-33, 435-5T
  - casting-box, Autoplate, 479 for flat stereotype-plates, 474-75
  - hinged halves, tubular plate, 482 horizontal, Multiplate, 480, CI
  - tubular plate, 481, 482, CII
  - pasting-frame, plaster stereotyping process, 475
  - Casting-machine matrices, depth of strike, 239, 24
  - Casting-press for flat stereotype-plates, 474 75
  - semicylindrical plates poured from cage, 4/ >
  - Casting-speed, American Type Founders, 310
  - Bellows, 441
  - Bhisotype, 362
  - Electrotypograph, 413
  - Foucher, 309
  - Graphotype, 406
  - Monotype, 401
  - Pivotal, 308
  - Stringertype, 417
  - Thompson, 311
  - c Wicks, 116, 316
  - cast-iron lapping-block, 258-59
  - cast-steel for moulds, 248, 270
  - Castle sign 4 " .
  - Castotype casting, composing and line-justifying
  - a machine, 374, XLI
  - cat S ears, II, 12
  - Cattell, Dr. J. McKeen, 157, 188, 189, 190
  - Caution signs, 51
  - Laxton, 34, 565
  - ~Caxton Magazine,”' The, 576
  - CX,7P:01.400
  - C 160, 162-71, 186
  - blackfriars, 166, 167, 186
  - German Fraktur, 166, 170, 171
  - modern, 162, 163, 186
  - old-style, 164, 165
  - A Sans serif, 168, 169
  - X E,German Fraktur, 170, 177-78
  - Cedilla, 184, 676
  - colebes, use of Bugi character, 559 celluloid stereo-plates, 476-77 cement formers, 210 -
  - central American inscription, 530, CY
  - central column of Wicks machine, 257
  - century Company, 380 . . »
  - « C'est de Dieu nous vient cet Art ingeniet *
  - 4 est en essayant dereproduirelespectre
  - C cat's ears, II
  - blackfriars, 168, 175, 177
  - modern, 168, 174, 177
  - old-style, 168, 174, 177
  - Sans serif, 168, 176, 177
  - ch, 152,155
  - Ch, 152
  - Chadwick Typesetter, 288, 289, XV, 594, 633
  - chain of addressing plates, 100 . -=
  - Chain-links and leaves, Wicks rotary caster, 312 15
  - Chalfant, J. D., automatic line-justifier, 364
  - chamba states, 551
  - champollion, 530
  - mange of focus of eye in reading, 157
  - fount, Oddur, 465, 466
  - , Typograph, 449
  - lay-out of grid, Monotype, 291
  - typewheel. Lithotype, 463
  - CI uses of keys, Monotype, 292
  - caper, rYEF. Linotype, 432
  - Character-wedge of Monotype, 398 . .
  - Characters built of two or more bodies, 550-51, 55
  - Chinese divided into two portions, 49°
  - kerns in, 157
  - resemblance in, 156, 160-85
  - size of, 156
  - cunecessary marks in, 157
  - cmarles de l'Escalopier, Count, 9 ,
  - Charles II, Act limiting typefounders, 566 =
  - Chassinat, M., Directeur de l'Institut du Gairo, 52 necking tables, 455
  - Cheltenham bold, 92, 122, 453
  - cgpdnnecs-.2$.22, 218, 453
  - family, "American orgin.9612
  - old-style, italic, 86-87,
  - roman, 84-85, 91-92,122, 453
  - wide, 92, 122, 453
  - cheque rules, 110-11
  - chequered face typewriter type
  - Cherokee, 559
  - Chess, 94
  - Chesar shu or pattern style, 497
  - “ Chicago Herald,” 381,386 8
  - Chicago World’s Fair (1893), 381
  - ChUdmA,Shortsighted, ^89 type, 158-59 chudren's g9pKEhinese"chaRcterior. 198;500
  - Chinese absorbent nature of paper,
  - i archaic writing, 490
  - 1 atreraptsWrite phonetically, 498
  - 1 braihetexs"emhe Wasted in transcription and repro-
  - duction, 500 . 1 ch'iai shu or pattern style, 496 chuan shu or seal character, 4
  - i Classics, 4 characters by root indices, 501 . clxssptcetionat ora,‘sfark‘fwalns descruption, gukeket'ot etetedts 284,402
  - Ideographs in general use, 54.42m 506, 509, 512 Su«S nua «« mu or phonetiesyauemie. The,” 497
  - Ennese" sangEage‘and“its Yypoprapnicai expressloh.
  - Li $05 Scerkly style, 406 49
  - printed style, the Sung t 1, 497
  - range of characters,,495
  - 1 "GueekcRoneWYecd:zstY!Ke4Z7n,498
  - aded'macnine Cbmpositon. 498
  - | appIVRONTtUOMmEEChe dalects, 503
  - easy wen li, 504
  - written style, 504
  - =====-======
  - amEQLtp““CCMposing composite character, 499
  - ease of learning, 503 € ediorang, 00500:8582.. examete gyabary: 2504500,‘80s
  - existing system, 505 . Eut „ 508, 513-14 extract from Sacred Edict, D ter 499 example of composite characteg'
  - fonows mandarin pronunciation, 49
  - kuan hua tzi mu, 512
  - numpessearm braille, 512
  - pointSon°Rew arrangement, 499
  - PSEbdehkeoksigns in Chinese braille, 509
  - proper-name sign, 502
  - semi-official use, 498 ,
  - tonal marks, 498, 502
  - words of one syllable, 5966
  - words of two symbolaaphabetically, 505
  - syllaviszmanka consomantalsounds, 504
  - ts'ao tzi or grass character, 497
  - type, 495,50 ter and accents attempted, 498
  - use of roman letters F Tam, 500
  - writing system of Dr. T. F. —am 5
  - Chippewyan, 560
  - Chisel tool, 199.204 ointing, 238
  - Chocolate ; die-blocks for R'keyboards, 298, 300 8
  - Chord-producing feature.°keyboard; Paige, 378, 388
  - Chords struck on composer 59
  - Unitype, 29°
  - Wicks, 290, 33
- p.701 - vue 869/901
- - 702
  - INDEX.
  - Christian, Arthur; “ Debuts de l’Imprimerie en
  - France,” 539
  - Chromocollotype, 491
  - Chronicles, II, 483
  - “ Chronicles of King Alfred,” Archbishop Parker’s
  - preface to, 565
  - chuan shu or seal character, 496
  - Chuck, magnetic or electric, 250
  - of punch-cutting machine, 199
  - release-gear, 208
  - Church, casting machine, 302, 375, XVI
  - compositor, 302, 318, 321, 325, 327, 329, XXV
  - distribution through melting-pot, 354
  - Dr. William, vii, 302, 321, 325, 582, 583
  - invention not known to Bessemer, 325
  - Church sign, 44
  - Cicero, 71
  - cic^ro, Didot, 69, 70, 145
  - Fournier, 61, 62, 64, 65, 70
  - Cie., 127
  - Cincinnati Typefoundry, 76
  - Cinco lectura, 71
  - Cingalese or Sinhalese, 554
  - Circulation of molten metal round nozzle, 309
  - Civil Engineers, Institution of, proceedings, 339
  - clarendon type, 30, 84, 85, 87, 292, 483, 685
  - condensed, 34
  - french, 31
  - or egyptian or antique, 30, 84, 85, 87
  - Classics, 471
  - “ Classification more than discovery, appears to be
  - the work of to-day,” 279
  - Classification of hieroglyphics, 521, 524-25
  - machines, 279-82
  - type faces, 83-88
  - Clay and Rosenborg distributor, 350
  - typesetter, 328
  - Clay cylinder of Sennacherib, 529, CVII
  - marble used as valve, 272
  - Clefs on bars cast together, 562
  - Clemens, Samuel L. (Mark Twain), 103-04, 379-81,
  - 495, 591
  - Clement, constructor of part of Babbage difference
  - engine, 459
  - “ . . . clerkly Fellowship and Learning,” 156
  - Clerkly style or li shu, 496
  - Clifford, Prof. W. K., 460
  - Clothes-line type, 550
  - Clowes & Sons, Wm., Ltd., 331, 535-40,543-60, 562-64
  - Clubs, 51, 94
  - Clumps or slugs, 55, 114, 679, 689
  - Clutch cut-out, Linotype, 427
  - C 0, 160, 162-69
  - blackfriars, 166, 167
  - German Fraktur, 166, 170, 171
  - modern, 162, 163
  - old-style, 164, 165
  - sans serif, 168, 169
  - Coal weighing and recording, 340
  - Coarseness of screens compared, 489, CIII
  - Cohn, Dr., 157
  - Cohn’s recommendations, 158
  - Coin-freed, franking and postmarking machine, 337
  - Coit, Samuel, 379
  - Collan, three-colour process, 491
  - Collection of sheets on the press, 481
  - Collins, F. Howard, 689-90
  - Collotype applied to colour printing, 491
  - Colon, 185, 283, 671
  - Colonel, 71
  - Colophons, 112, 680
  - Colour of ink, 157, 191
  - paper, 157, 191
  - Colour-blocks for two colours, 483
  - three-colour, 491-93, CIV
  - Colour-printing blocks, 490-94
  - Colours, sensitiveness of retina to, 188
  - Colt’s Firearms Company, 379
  - Columbia University, 386
  - columbian, 70
  - Columbus, 91, 515
  - Column-width variable ; Paige compositor, 386
  - Comb of type, 259, 269, 452
  - Combination borders, 109, 679
  - Combination ornaments, 109-10
  - Combinations of characters, 161-85
  - arable, 183
  - blackfriars, lower-case, 167
  - capitals, 174-77
  - devanagari, 183
  - Combinations of characters—continued.
  - figures, 164, 168, 170, 172. 173
  - Fraktur, capitals, 177
  - lower-case, 171
  - Greek, 181
  - Hebrew, 181
  - modern, lower-case, 163
  - old-style, lower-case, 165
  - Russian, 181
  - sans serif, lower-case, 169
  - Combined drawings of type, 161
  - Comets, 38
  - Comma, 185, 671 ntual
  - “Commercial failure ... it was an intellec
  - miracle,” 391
  - Commercial signs, 35, 46, 129, 131, 133, 672 184
  - Comparison of accented and non-accented letters,
  - American and English standard line, 124
  - coarseness of screens, 489, CIII
  - halves of characters, 185, 186
  - flow in multi-plunger pumps, 275, 276
  - Linotype models, 430
  - point systems, 68
  - points, 185
  - right and left halves of characters, 185
  - of speed, Linotype and single typecaster, 45
  - plate-casting and slug-casting, 481 6
  - standard inches, British and United States, °
  - stereotyping and electrotyping, 494
  - Stringertype and Linotype, 420
  - styles, legibility, 162,164, 177
  - upper and lower halves of print, 185, 186
  - Compass or C V alphabet, 560, 561
  - Completion of line, Monotype, 395
  - Components of a fount, Fournier, 61
  - Composing advertisements by machine, 572
  - and casting performed independently, 451 267-73
  - Composing and distributing machines, 279, 281, 30
  - Simplex, 367-68, XXXIX
  - Thorne, 367, XXXIX, 368-70
  - Unitype, 298, 368, 369-73, XL
  - and line-justifying machines. 279, 281, 363-60
  - DOW. 364-66, XXXV1-XXXVIII
  - Empire, 363-64
  - Mackie, 363 -
  - Chinese syllabic characters on linotype, 50l> 5
  - composite Chinese characters, 499
  - hieroglyphic type, 521
  - into a hopper, 289
  - line-justifying and casting a
  - line of individual tyPe
  - 1 CO
  - 0
  - 451
  - line-justifying and distributing machines,
  - 376-91
  - Felt, 376-77
  - Paige, 376, 378-91, XLII-XLV-tal-
  - line-justifying, typecasting and (through the
  - pot) distributing machines, 281 ., -XX,
  - Composing machines, 279, 281, 321-41, XXV*
  - 684
  - Chadwick typesetter, 288-89, XV
  - Church, vii, 321, XXV, 325, 327
  - Clay and Rosenborg, 328
  - Empire, 329, XXVIII
  - Fraser, 329, XXVIII
  - Gaubert. 322
  - Hattersley, 326-27, XXVI
  - Hooker, 329-31
  - Kastenbein, 328-29, XXVII
  - keyboards, 289-300
  - Mackie, 328
  - Pulsometer, 332-33, XXX
  - Wicks, 331-32, XXIX
  - Young and Delcambre, 322-25, 327
  - Composing mathematical formulae, 40-43
  - mixed faces, Linotype, 433, 684
  - music, 562-64
  - single-line formulae and fractions, 40 20-51,
  - two or three bodies, 40, 523-24, 542, 545, 55°
  - 558, 562, 682, 684
  - type by hand, 287
  - Composite slug machine, Hanigan, 469-70
  - type-bar machine, 464
  - Composing-stick, 680-81
  - Composition of type-metal, 15-16
  - Compositors’ aggregate wages, 153-54
  - Compositor’s frame for hieroglyphics, 52
  - Compositors working “in pocket,” 332
  - Compositype sorts-caster, 309, 310-11, XXID
  - Compressed air, Monotype, 394, 398, 399
  - used for casting, 271
- p.702 - vue 870/901
- - 703
  - INDEX.
  - 270,442
  - compressed face, 89
  - Compressible spaces, 342, 343
  - CoRE S10n °f soft-metal quads for line-justification,
  - comptowrarh, adding and recording machine, 338
  - Con, 148,00, adding machine, 338
  - Conclusion 9565
  - "Spndbepgitenham bold, 24< 91
  - Tee esost*
  - faces in’France, 160
  - Sans serif, italic, 91, 376
  - coWindson,“n4c80, 91’ 241, 355
  - cmachmna necessary for single-type, one-man
  - confuvalxes for metal-pumps, 272
  - Congreves Analects of, 49557
  - Y Connoisseur William, colour-blocks, 483,582
  - —ODsona,i ’ -uc, 9
  - Contact DES, most frequently occurring, 121
  - Contents EvmR vnozzle and mould,274
  - ContraetUS spectrum, three-colour process, 492, CIV
  - Control of allowance made in moulds, 219
  - Contronet matrix die-case, 413
  - ConventiTS. Graphotype, 408-12
  - Converconal signs, 37-53
  - Converse P series, 457
  - 6 40, 643 automatic line-justifier, 364, 600, 604,
  - - "Besetting and distributing, 598, 601, 602, 604,
  - Copper for’ 242-43, 645, 652-55
  - r matrices half-tone blocks, 489
  - Coptic p 246
  - - Saidie ohairic or northern, 549
  - Copy €or southern, 549
  - Copy-hola.the hook for Paige trial, 381
  - Cordle, "inotype, 433
  - coreaPivoted for tubular-plate, 482
  - Cornell slow slugs, Bellows compositor,
  - 89F0n5,7998807-386o
  - 033190*286,669
  - coCneeect ComposiNongtxpe, specimen, 393
  - . Lithotys acilitated by self-spacing type, 404
  - asDidot type, 302
  - equiphutian of type by hand, 316
  - experiment of two Autoplates, 479
  - hand-mental moulds, 270
  - CoumpunchessigzPe) 301
  - counter-punches, 194
  - Countess White in, 156,160
  - Counting BLovelace, 339
  - s Wedges L for elevating line-justifier space-
  - . line-umechanism for spaces, Grant-Legros-Maw
  - Couniter, 346
  - Cox, U town sign, 44
  - e. patents" utispace, 343, 344, 642
  - COx, 100 S, 596-99, 637-40, 642-43
  - Cree, 560°
  - CFOSS The, 533
  - Crossedlock, Monotype, 260
  - Crosses Ltters, 39, 676
  - c-medais,”s73
  - Crotenegdssign, 51
  - SFOwnsAy, 43
  - cT'Fograms, 152
  - Cupeg Lectura, 71
  - Cumunatnatural numbers, 458-59
  - cuneiforwe errors, 195
  - ASYTTAh, s29°b2 (old Babylonian),
  - clayonian, 529, 547
  - c deverobinder of Sennacherib, 529, CVII
  - Cunning men, gym ideographs, 529
  - , 529, 546
  - Curry and Paxton, 25, 26
  - " Cursed with a blinding lettering," 166
  - Curved stereo-plates, 478-82
  - Curves, logarithmic spiral, 210-11
  - Cut-out for overset and underset lines, Rowotype, 450
  - wrong length of line. Monotype, 401
  - Stringertype, 416
  - Cutter, punch-cutting, chisel, 199, 204
  - finishing, 202, 203
  - milling, 198-201
  - point, 200, 202, 203
  - roughing or chisel, 199, 201, 204
  - Cutter-grinder, automatic, punch-cutting, 205, VII
  - Cutters for matrix engraving, 237
  - Cutting off spaces for line-justification, 344
  - C V or compass alphabet, 560, 561
  - Cycle of casting and delivering type. Monotype, 261
  - Cylinder, clay, of Sennacherib, 529, CVII
  - Cypriot syllabary, 532
  - Cyprus, letters of indulgence, 6
  - Cyrillic character, 537
  - D
  - d , 126, 151, 190, 284
  - D and DD keyboards. Monotype, 294, 401, XLVII,
  - XLVIII
  - Daguerre, L. J. M., 485
  - " Daily Mail," record plate production, 480
  - Daily newspapers, half-tone blocks, 489
  - " Daily Telegraph,'' 151, 560, 577
  - Daleth, 182
  - Daniel, 37
  - Danish, 568, 572
  - Darjeeling, Lepcha language, 554
  - Dating-wheels, 337
  - da Vinci, Leonardo, 193
  - " David wrote a letter to Joab . . ." 515
  - Davis break, 12
  - Davis, Charles E., 378-86
  - Davis, H., 306, 616, 619
  - Davis, Percy W., 406
  - Davis pivotal typecaster, 306, XVII -
  - Dawson, A. and H. T., 487, 491, 589
  - typographic etching process, 487
  - Day, John, 30, 565
  - d b, 191
  - DD keyboard. Monotype, for double composition, 293,
  - 401, XLVIII
  - Dead matter, 352-53, 382, 383, 384, 387
  - de Burgo, Lucas, 193
  - " Debuts de l'Imprimerie en France," 539
  - Decimal point or turned point, 39, 671
  - Deciphering secret messages, 152
  - Dedication, ix
  - Dedrick engraving machine for matrices, 236, 599, 600, 641, 642
  - Definition of stereotyping, 471
  - Definitions of printing-surfaces, 1-3
  - de Harlez, M., 530
  - Delatre, etching printer, 491
  - Delcambre, composing machine, 318, 583, 586, 588, 590, 591 distributing machine, 585, 586, 588, 590, 591 de l'Escalopier, Count Charles, 9
  - Delivery carriage. Linotype, 428
  - of paper, book-folded, 481
  - plate, Multiplate, 481
  - pumps compared, 275-76
  - Dellagana, 478, 586-88, 590
  - de luxe, edition, 401
  - demotic, 516, 529, 548
  - Density of type-metal, 145
  - Depth gauge, needle-point micrometer, 233
  - Depth of counter, 219, 240
  - Depth of routing, 240
  - Depth of strike of matrices, composing-machines,
  - 239-40
  - Grantype, 240, 452
  - ordinary, II, 218-19, 670
  - Stringertype, 240, 416
  - Scheutz number wheels, 461
  - " Der Entkrist,” 6
  - Descenders, 121, 188, 670
  - percentage of, 121
  - short in small bodies, 121
  - Design of a totally new letter, 36
  - type, 24-33
  - on geometric principles, 193
  - stores, 145
- p.703 - vue 871/901
- - 704
  - INDEX.
  - Designing of new type impracticable, 118-19
  - Dessendiaan, 71
  - Determinatives, hieroglyphic, 517-18, 525
  - Deutscher Buchdrucker-Verein, 124-25
  - “ Deutscher Buch- unci Steindrucker," 8, 576
  - deux points de Trismegiste, 70
  - devanagari character, 534, 545, 550-51
  - illegibility, 182-83
  - Devices for saving hand-work in composition, 287-89
  - . . Devil of his malice hath them marred . .
  - 24
  - Devil, printer s, 218, 380
  - De Vinne condensed, 82, 92
  - italic, xxi, 86-87, 92, 357
  - roman, xxi, 32, 33, 84-86, 92
  - De Vinne, Theodore Low, 56, 57, 83, 89,195, 302, 380, 563, 576
  - “ Correct Composition,” 146
  - description of Barth typecaster, 310
  - “ Modern Methods of Book Composition,” 563
  - Plain Printing Types, 61, 83, 88
  - “ The Practice of Typography,” 156
  - Devotional works, 58, 68
  - de Worde, Wynkyn, 30
  - Dey time-register, 341
  - Diagonal summation of differences, 456-58
  - tint, 488
  - Diagram of operations, Paige compositor, 382-83
  - Dialects, Chinese, difference in, 498, 503
  - diamant, 70
  - Diamant, 71, 145
  - Diamante, 71
  - diamond, 58, 71
  - music type, 563
  - Diamond ruling-point, 255, 488
  - Diamond-dust for grinding, 206
  - Diamonds, 51, 94
  - Dice, 95
  - Dictaphone, 573
  - “ Dictionary of the Art of Printing,” 218, 575
  - Didot ain6, 68
  - Didot, Firmin, 421, 45 5
  - height-to-paper, 56, 66
  - point system, 57, 66
  - script-type section, 96, 582
  - Die-case, Monotype, 400, 402, 403
  - Dies, embossing and erasing, roi
  - impressing, 282
  - Difference between D and DD keyboards, Monotype,
  - 294
  - Linotype American and English machines, 430-31
  - matrices, 239-40
  - standard inches, British and United States, 60
  - Difference engine, Babbage, 321, 338, 455-5 9, LXXXVII
  - revived by Scheutz- and constructed by Bryan Donkin & Co., 339
  - Scheutz, 460-62, LXXXVIII, LXXXIX
  - first or five-figure machine, 460
  - Swedish machine, 339
  - engines, Babbage and Scheutz compared, 461
  - Differences in time-diagrams in pivotal casters, 304
  - type series, 120
  - successive, 456-58
  - sufficient for legibility, 185
  - Difierent set widths for different styles, 395
  - Differential feed for typewriter carriage, 454
  - wedges for line-justification, 395
  - Difficulties in impression machines, 453, 454
  - with ro, 14, or 18 page newspapers, 481
  - Diffraction effect from half-tone screens, 489
  - Diffused lighting, 192
  - Dimensions and units, 55-81
  - for classifying recorders, 337, 339-41
  - of type, 10-11
  - Dipping-pan, 474, 476
  - Dipping-pot, 476
  - Direct keyboard manipulation, Oddur, 464
  - production of stereotype matrices, 453-54
  - Direction signs, 50
  - Directories, 126
  - Disadvantages of two-man composing and casting
  - machines, 451
  - Discriminating gear, Graphotype, 410
  - Disk, Typograph distensible space, 230-31, 232
  - Display faces, 292-93
  - work, 571
  - Dissimilarity of letters necessary for legibility, 156
  - 1 “ Dissertation upon English Typographical Found
  - and Founderies,” 569 dis-
  - Distance moved by the hand in composing and a
  - tributing, 287
  - Distance-piece, Monotype mould, 261
  - Distensible space-matrices, 230-32, 427
  - Grantype, 231-32
  - Linotype, 230-31, 427-28
  - Monoline, 230-31
  - Stringertype, 230-31, 416, 417
  - Typograph, 230-32
  - Distinguisher bell cranks, Bellows, 439
  - Distributing machines, 279, 281, 300, 350-54, 684
  - Clay and Rosenborg, 350
  - Dow automatic, 352-54, XXXIII
  - Empire automatic, 352, 353, XXXII
  - Hattersley, 350-51
  - Pulsometer, 300, 350, 352, 353, XXXII
  - Thorne automatic, 352, 353
  - mechanically versus recasting, 375, 378
  - through the melting-pot, 316, 354, 375
  - type by hand, 287 ,87
  - Distribution, automatic, Paige compositor, 384 3 <
  - 390
  - lock, Typograph, 448
  - of Chinese characters by radicals, 501
  - matrices, Monoline, 442
  - space-matrices, Linograph, 437
  - type, effected by keyboard, 300
  - speed, automatic, 354
  - Bellows, 439
  - to two magazines, Stringertype, 419
  - Type, 7 -IX
  - Distributor and composer, Simplex, 367-68, 22
  - Thorne, 367, 368-70
  - Unitype, 369-73, XL
  - automatic, specially nicked type for, 352, 353
  - for matrices, Bellows, 439, 442
  - of two magazine Linotype, 431
  - Distributor-bar, Linotype,423-25
  - Stringertype, 416, 419
  - Distributor-bars, Arabic Linotype, 431-32
  - Distributors, 350-54
  - Clay and Rosenborg, 350
  - Dow automatic, 352-54, XXXIII
  - Empire automatic, 352, XXXII
  - Hattersley, 327, 350, 351
  - Hooker, 331
  - Pulsometer, 350, XXXII, 352, 353
  - Thompson, 378-79
  - Thorne automatic, 352
  - Unitype, starting and stopping, 372
  - Distributor-screws, Linotype, 429, 431
  - Stringertype, 420
  - “ Diversarum artium Schadula," 9 . . ctifief
  - Dividing mechanism, Grant-Legros-Maw line-jus
  - 347
  - Division-plates, accurate, 251-56
  - dob, 191
  - Doble atanasia, 71
  - Doble lectura, 71
  - Doble lecturita, 71
  - Doble parangona, 71
  - Doble texto, 71 . 618,
  - Dodge, Philip T., 381, 386, 594-97, 602-06, 6026
  - 634-35, 637-41, 643-52, 655, 662-63, 665-0°
  - Dodgson, C. L. (Lewis Carroll), 108
  - Dominoes, 95
  - Donkin, Bryan, and Co., 461
  - Doppelcicero, 71
  - Doppelmittel, 71
  - doric, 30
  - italic 8, 41
  - Dot (of type), ro, 11
  - Dot and dash, 100
  - Dot combinations, braille, 105
  - Dotted figures, 39, 676
  - double english, 689
  - double great primer, 70
  - Double magazine, Linotype, 430-31, LXI
  - double pica, American, 70
  - British, 58, 71, 690
  - Double quotes, 671,690
  - double small pica, 70
  - Double-blade mould, Monotype, 261
  - double-canon, Didot, 69, 70
  - Fournier, 63, 70
  - Double-dotted figures, 39
  - Dougall Linotype, 435-36, 605
  - Dovetail-grooved type, Hanigan, 470
- p.704 - vue 872/901
- - INDEX.
  - o
  - OL
  - Dow, Alexander, 280, 352. 364. 598, 601-02, 606, 609, 639, 642-43, 650-51, 653
  - automatic distributor, 352-54, XXXIII
  - Composing and line-justifying machine, 364-66, Dow XXXVI-XXXVIII
  - « • Lorenzo, 364, 593-94, 632-33, 635 „
  - 82* Dower-Royal • - to tell Face from Face. *•
  - Down Street station, 23
  - 164 -
  - —Tags, II, 14, 306, 6=0
  - Draughts, 94 7
  - ravidian characters, kerns of, 22-23
  - „O"P of languages, 553
  - Drawings for formers, 273-15
  - meully dimensioned, Paige, 379
  - Dressing, 10, 20, 217, 678
  - heel-nick, 20, 21
  - kerned type, 21
  - nicking, kerning and bearding plane. 21, 22, 81
  - supplementary nick, 21
  - pressing-bench, Io> 20, 21, 217
  - Dressing-plane, 10, 20, 21
  - pressing-rod, 20, 21
  - prsSing-saddle, Multiplate, 480
  - welled hole in matrix blank, 219
  - Brilling-jig, 257
  - " Top-cipher in numbering-machines, 102, 334 uruckschriften des funfzehnten bis achtzehnten
  - Jahrhunderts,” 6, 88
  - poflong process, 473, 480
  - ry-point, defined, 1
  - T ebarbee, I
  - “Obele Augustijn, 71
  - Uessendiaan, 71
  - - Mediaan, 1
  - Ducale, 71
  - Buhauron, Ducos, three-colour process, 491
  - pammy typecasting, 318
  - "Plex casting, 272, 309
  - nat-bed press, 481
  - p.mould, 272, 309
  - p.Plicate check books, numbering, 335
  - p.Plicated editions in different styles, 294-95, 401
  - papicating-machine type, 98
  - Dutch’ Albrecht, 193, 490
  - Dutch matrices, 569
  - names of type, 71
  - or French type, cost of, 302
  - p Punch-cutters, 570
  - retype, composing and casting machine, 375, 413-15,
  - LV, 450
  - matrix, 222, 240
  - moulds, 262-64, 450
  - E
  - E 151, 184, 185, 188, 364, 369, 396, 430
  - 90, 190
  - 6*6184
  - E, 127
  - Earl were a man of no class,” 453
  - r Stanhope, 146, 149, 285-87, 338
  - adding machine, 338
  - Cases, 285-87
  - Earleisht logotypes, 146, 149
  - Ear, Charles I., 380
  - Printer, his own ink manufacturer, 218
  - paster Island tablets, 530
  - wen li, Chinese, 504
  - powitten style, Chinese, 504
  - ECClesiastes, 565
  - Clesiastical signs, 43
  - Ecbelle de 144 points, 62
  - ed. 18 stereotyping, 471-72
  - .Edinburgh Review,” 471
  - Eattion de luxe, 401
  - Edmundson calculator, 338
  - EaUGational works, braille, 106
  - Ee, TgA VII, His Late Majesty, death of, 480
  - Esho Society, 531
  - egysi Printing on, 341
  - EpPtan face, 30, 84—85, 87, 89> 471, 685
  - 8.WU1an scripts, 515-29, CVI, 548
  - 18.05. specimens, 84' 91. 93< 146, 156, 283, 453
  - wont, specimens, 158, 159, 279, 421
  - Ejecting blade, of type-slicer, 317
  - blades, pivotal, 307
  - Ejection of slug, Bellows, 440
  - Linotype, 265
  - Monoline, 266, 267
  - Typograph, 268
  - type, Bhisotype, 358
  - Rototype, 356
  - Unitype, 372
  - Ejector for tang, Typograph, 268
  - universal, Linotype, 433
  - Ejector-blade Linotype, 428
  - Ekoi explanation of Nsibidi, 532
  - Electric Compositor, Bellows, 437-42, LXXV.
  - LXXVI, 450, 599, 616
  - keyboard, 297
  - matrices, 232, 233, 240
  - mould, 269-70
  - pump, 278
  - contacts, Graphotype, 404
  - control Lithotype, 463
  - illumination, punch-cutting, 208
  - selection of characters, 408
  - Electrically operated escapements, Rowotype, 450
  - Electro-magnets for ejecting type, 290
  - Electrophone, 574
  - Electrotyped formers, 208
  - matrices, 216, 238-39
  - Electrotypes, 3, 484, 494
  - Electrotypograph, 413, LV
  - Elevation of wedge-spaces, Oddur, 467
  - Elevator, Bellows, 439
  - Linotype, 428
  - Stringertype, 416
  - Eleven-division wheel for numbering-machines, 334
  - 11-point, specimens, 159, 495
  - Elision mark, Chinese, 499, 500, 502, 507
  - elongated faces, 89
  - em quads, 55,131,678
  - Monotype, 398, 399
  - non-distensible matrices, 229
  - em-set; diagonal fractions, 41, 74
  - Embossed metal type, 100-01, IV
  - Embossing braille, 105
  - dies; punches; machine, 101
  - Embroidery block composed on Linotype, 434
  - emerald, 58, 71
  - Empire automatic distributing machine, 352, 353,
  - XXXII composing and line-justifying machine, 363-64
  - machine, 329, XXVIII
  - Employees time recorders, 341
  - ems to the alphabet, 90-92, 121
  - en, 148, 297
  - and em, 55
  - en quads, 55,131,398, 679
  - non-distensible matrices, 229
  - spacing, 160
  - en-set, figures and fractions, 40, 41, 74
  - “ Encyclopaedia Britannica,” 329, 487, 576
  - End-clamp for matrices, Bellows, 440
  - “ Enfield’s Speaker,” 286
  - Engine counter, 339
  - difference, Babbage, 383
  - “ Engineering,” 59, 576
  - “ Engineering Index,” 576
  - Engineering signs, 47
  - Engine-turning, 236
  - English and Cherokee in parallel columns, 560 English and Foreign Braille Literature Society,
  - 106
  - English and foreign type sizes compared, 70-71 english, body-size, 58, 59, 69, 71,144, 689
  - cost per pound, 302
  - English, fount scheme, 121, 128-31, 151, 186
  - language, 121
  - “ English Life Table,” 462
  - English models of Linotype, 430
  - proverbial sayings, 453
  - english 13± point, specimens, 159
  - Engraved face of matrices, 236 matrices, justification of, 238 seals used as printing-surface, 6 toothed wheels of Scheutz difference engine, 461 wood colour-printing blocks, 490
  - wood-blocks, 4
  - Engraving defined, 1 . . _ die blocks for printing biscuits, chocolate, etc.,
  - 238 machine, matrix-, 196,236-38, XI, XII
  - relief, 205
  - 2 Z
- p.705 - vue 873/901
- - VO
  - 2
  - INDEX,
  - Engraving machine,—continued.
  - Taylor, Taylor & Hobson, 238, XIII
  - 3-dimensional, 205
  - numbering-machine typewheels, 101-02
  - on punch-cutting machine, 213
  - tools, 194
  - ". . . engravings of a signet . . .” 515
  - Enlargements of half-tone blocks, 489
  - type, 123
  - ens, payment per 1000...160
  - per hour, Lithotype, 463
  - Paige compositor, 386
  - “. . . entered for no Caste at all . . ,” 453
  - “ Entkrist, der,” 6
  - Entredds, 71
  - 60, 160, 162-69
  - blackfriars, 166, 167
  - German Fraktur, 170, 171
  - modern, 162, 163
  - old-style, 164, 165
  - sans serif, 168, 169
  - Epigrams, Martial’s First Book of, 9
  - Epperse and (&), 35, 78, 85, 87, 128-35, 283, 672
  - Equipment of two Autoplates, cost of, 479
  - Autoplates Junior and one Autoshaver, 480
  - er, 148, 150
  - Erased letters and numbers, 39
  - Ermine, 47
  - Errors, compositor’s, 455
  - cumulative, 195
  - in division plate after correcting, 254
  - type reproduction, smallness of, 118
  - introduced between composing and printing, 471
  - line-justification, Monotype, 400-OI
  - “. . . errors .. . produced in the process of
  - printing,” 471
  - transposition, 455
  - Erse or Irish, 533, 539
  - Escapement, Linotype, 426, 430, 433, 435, LXX,
  - LXXI
  - Rowotype, electrically operated, 450
  - Typograph, 445-46
  - Eskimo or Innuit, 560
  - Esperanto, 54, 80
  - ess, 148, 149
  - Esther, 533
  - Estienne form of Morse, 100
  - Estrangelo character, 543
  - etaoinshrdlu. Linotype keyboard, 294
  - Etching, 1, 282, 484-87
  - Ethiopic, 545, 549, 550
  - etoanirshdlu . . ., frequency, 151
  - Etruscan, 539
  - Evans, Edmund, engraver-printer, 490
  - “ Evening News ” record plate production, 480
  - Even-point bodies, 60
  - Example of ideographic signs, 53
  - lock-up test, 116
  - saving effected by reforming the alphabet, 154
  - symbolic signs, 52
  - excelsior, 58
  - Exhibition, 1907, Madison Square Garden, N.Y., 406
  - Exodus, 533
  - expanded face, 89
  - expanded, Cheltenham bold, 92, 122, 216, 453
  - Exponents, 39, 46
  - extended faces, 82, 89, 121, 160
  - extra condensed face, 89
  - Extract from “Sacred Edict ” in Chinese, 508, 513-14
  - Eyck, Hubert and Jan van, 8, 9
  - Eye and brain, 188-90
  - Eye-glass, magnifying, 194
  - Eyesight, a most valuable asset, 82, 170
  - influence of school books on, 157
  - “. . . eye-wearying mediaeval script," 176
  - Ezekiel, 515
  - F
  - f, II, 78,146, 150
  - f, 78, 79, 81
  - f ligatures, 146, 150, 187, 286
  - Face, 10,11, 19, 669
  - absence of standard, 33
  - designing, 24-29
  - location on formers, 206
  - nomenclature, 30-33, 82-89
  - Faces and body-sizes, American; relative importance
  - of, 60
  - factorials, 40
  - “ Fair exchange is no robbery,” 453
  - Falashas, 550
  - Falcon, inventor of card-control chain, 328
  - Family, cheltenham, 91-92, 122, 453
  - De Vinne, 92
  - “ Family Herald,” 318, 324, 325
  - Family of type series, 122
  - Fancy faces, 83-88, 90-92, 685-86
  - antique, 30, 685
  - antique old-style, 84-86
  - atlas, 33
  - black, 83, 84, 85, 90, 686
  - black ecclesiastical, 83, 84-85, 90
  - blackfriars, 82, 84-87, 91
  - bold latin, 31, 84-86
  - cheltenham, 84-87, 91-92
  - De Vinne, 32, 84-87, 92 84-85,
  - egyptian, clarendon or antique, 30, 32,
  - 87-88, 90, 685
  - french antique, 30, 31, 686
  - gothic, 30, 83 01 685
  - grotesque, gothic or sans serif, 30, 83-87, 2 ‘
  - ionic, 31, 685
  - Jenson or venetian, 31, 686
  - old-face, 32, 83-87
  - old-style antique, 32, 84-86, 90
  - sanserif, or sans serif, 30, 83-87, 91, 685
  - skeleton antique, 90, 271
  - Fang, Chinese character for, 499
  - Farnham, J. M., 378, 625-26
  - Typesetter Company, 378-79
  - Farr, Dr. W., 460, 462
  - fat face, 82, 89
  - Father, Assyrian word for, 529
  - Faulkner, T., 484
  - Feed-screws, Linotype, 431
  - Feet (of type), 11, 669
  - Fell, Doctor, 31 oxford
  - Dr. John, presents a typefoundry to .
  - University, 568-69
  - Felt, C. W., 376, 587, 624 chines
  - composing, line-justifying and distributing
  - 376-77
  - Female sign, 45
  - Fergusson’s point system, 66-67
  - ff, fi, fl, 150, 283, 286, 322
  - ff fl, 150, 286
  - ffi ffl, 127, 150,153, 286, 322
  - seldom used in France, 150
  - ffi ffl, 150
  - ffi ffl, 286
  - Fifield, Alexander, 566
  - “ Figaro Illustre,” 490
  - Figgins; type specimens, 4, 90, 342
  - Figgins, V. & J., depth of strike, 219
  - Figgins, Vincent, 568
  - Figures dotted, 39, 676
  - double dotted, 39
  - illegibility, 164, 172-73
  - italic, 35
  - on en-set, 40
  - roman, 35
  - “. . . Files down the Bunchings out . . • *
  - Filling former shell, 209
  - length of line, Chadwick, 289
  - Filosofia, 71
  - Fin or fringe, 19, 241, 258
  - Finger-print, v, vii .
  - Finished curved stereotype-plate, 479, Ao
  - Firmin Didot, section of script, 96
  - Firmin Didot’s stereo-metal, 421
  - “ First Book of Epigrams”; Martial, 9
  - First elevator, Linotype, 428
  - “ First impressions are best,” 453
  - 5, figure, 164, 172-73, 284
  - 5-line nonpareil, 70
  - 5-line pica, 70, 71
  - 5-point, 59, 71,144
  - 5-point, specimen, 321
  - 5,-point, 378
  - F J, German Fraktur, 170, 177, 178
  - fj, 164
  - f jy, tail-dot, 11
  - Flamm, Pierre, 463, 587, 624
  - Flan, 473
  - Fletcher, David H., 390-91
  - Fleur-de-Lys, 47
  - Flexibility, 452
  - Floating-plate, 476
  - flong, dry process, 473, 480 477,471
  - ordinary process, 3, 215, 217, 472-74, 47 ‘7
- p.706 - vue 874/901
- - INDEX.
  - 7°7
  - Floor-space, Compositype sorts-caster, 311
  - Dow compositor, 364
  - Graphotype, new model, 412
  - Monoline, 443
  - Rowotype, 450
  - Typograph, 449
  - Unitype, 373 , o
  - Folding-wedge adjustment, Wicks typecaster, 4 , 258, 312
  - gauges for body-sizes, 248, 257
  - spaces, 344
  - Follower-holder, 206 -
  - Followers for punch-cutting, 197-98, 207-00
  - in geometrical progression, 207-08
  - Font or fount, 14, 670
  - Fontainemoreau, le comte de, 485
  - Foot-line, clump or slug used for, 114
  - Forked type, 346-47
  - form of guide-plate channels, 323-24
  - Forme, 684, 689, 690
  - preparation for stereo-moulding, 473, 474-75 - y
  - Formers, 122,126,198,206, 207, 208-15, 236, 2371 -
  - Barr or Linotype, 209, X
  - Benton-Waldo, 198, 208-09
  - cement, Grant-Legros, 207, 210-13
  - clearance allowances, 126
  - definition, 122
  - hollow for matrix engraving, 236
  - electrotyped, 237
  - Monotype, 206, 209-10
  - sets of, 122
  - Forms of character matrices, 220-28
  - Forms of serif, 30-33 . .
  - Foucher casting machines, 274, 304, 309, 450, 500,
  - 593, 596, 631, 637
  - matrix, 220-21
  - Fouling of kerns, 23, 78-79, 80, 81
  - Foundation plate, Monotype, 259
  - Le ring, Wicks typecaster, 247-49 . „
  - Founders and senators of states and cities, .. . *
  - Foundry, 34, 677
  - Fount, composition of, 35
  - of music type, 102-03, 562-63
  - or font, 14
  - Fount schemes, 126-43, 151,186
  - Barr’s method, 151
  - finding variations in, 151-52
  - fount-distinguisher. Bellows, 439
  - Founts of Type, 34-54
  - Four-colour process, 492-93
  - Tour-em quad, 55, 678
  - ine brevier, 70
  - 4-line pica, or canon, 71
  - L pica canon, 70 rour-magazine Linotype, 430, 433,_435 . ana Fournier height-to-paper used in Belgium and u Austria, 56
  - Manuel Typographique,” 61 output of hand typecaster, 301 .
  - Fournier, Pierre Simon, le jeune, ix, X, 60, 193, 1941
  - 575
  - Point, 60-61
  - table of body sizes, 62, 63
  - 14-point old-style, 158
  - -point, specimens, 158, 421
  - Fowler, casting and composing machine, 355 machine casting, composing and line-justifying man ‘ n 374 fowler, edition of Virgil, 326 Fowler, Joseph C., 355, 595-96, 602, 634 38, 431 647,656 . E
  - Fowler, J. C. and Fowler, J. C. Junr., 374, 643. 045 647
  - Fowler, ysesntyce, ’impression or stereo-matrix machine, 454, LXXXVI sans serif, 164, 176 „ .
  - Fractions, 35, 39,40-42, 72-73, 74, 78, 128,13°, 132, 674 avoided by negative indices, 42 set width, 74 Split, 39, 6-4 .
  - Fraktur character used in Central and Nort ern
  - Europe, 507
  - illegibility, 166, 168, 170, 171, 176, 177, 178
  - improvements in, 80, 170, 178
  - type specimen, 537
  - rame of tubular-plate press, 482
  - rance, Imprimerie royale de, 519, 521> 523
  - rance, origin of blind alphabets in, 105
  - Progress in typecasting by machinery, 302
  - Frankfort-on-the-Main, height-to-paper, 56
  - Franklin Institute records of Patents, 578
  - Fraser composing machine, 329, XXVIII, 589-90,
  - 594. 627
  - distributing machine, 592, 596, 600, 627, 642
  - Freezing of metal in the jet or nipple, 273, 274
  - prevented by molten metal circulation, 275
  - French accented sorts, italic, 135
  - roman, 134
  - french antique, 30, 31, 87-88
  - French bill of fount or scheme, 127, 134-35
  - french clarendon, 31
  - French height-to-paper, 56, 66
  - Institute of Cairo, 521
  - lay of case, 287
  - matrices, 221
  - french metal furniture, 114-15
  - French National printing office, 521, 523, 539
  - proportion of italics, 127
  - scheme or bill of fount, 127, 134, 135
  - type, cost of, 302
  - Frequency of occurrence of logotypes, 147, 148, 149
  - 150, 151-55
  - or recurrence, 126, 161-81, 186-88
  - Friction drive for matrix-disk, Oddur, 464
  - Friese-Greene, W., 470, 640
  - Fringe, fin or burr, 19, 241,258
  - “ . . . from India unto Ethiopia . . .” 533
  - Front of type, 11, 669
  - Front-wall, 124-25
  - Fry, Edmund, 568
  - ff, Fraktur, 166, 170-71
  - roman, 162,185
  - Full point or period, 185,07
  - turned or decimal point, 39
  - Fuller, Prof., 460
  - Fuller’s slide-rule, 394
  - fund, fundry, foundry, 34
  - Furniture, 16,17, 55, 57,114 15> 79
  - cast by hand, 17
  - definition, 55
  - ramrifure‘metRG,"eomRposition, 16
  - risible Jor electrotype matrices, 238
  - mould, 238,247 f news dissemination, 574
  - Future possibilities ot news o
  - G
  - 0, 284 trade name for Irish character,,539
  - “ 1 Gage ... or to use otherwise, 55
  - eaMarde, Didot, 70, 145
  - Fournier, 62, 64, 70
  - Galley, arabic Linotype, 431-3
  - Bellows, 439 *
  - Linotype, 428, 433, —*
  - Typograph, 448
  - Gammeter Multigraph short type, 98
  - Garamoncino, 71
  - Garamone, 71
  - Gasvgoverfor. Bellows, 440
  - Gatbekt"“Al composing machine, 322, 583
  - Gauge, body, double-ended, 69, 72-73
  - micrometer, 74
  - bodpEizendrdingwedge, 248, 257
  - depth-of-strike, 233
  - height-to-paper, 75-76,674
  - lining, micrometer, 233
  - ordinary, 76,678 „
  - Gauge of face of type, I
  - . 6 small sorts, 157-5%
  - Gauge, turning, 75, 673 „
  - Gauze'used to give grain, 485
  - Gaylord. William, 379
  - 1 Ged, William, 477
  - Getstine pROCes-ol'block making, 487
  - ! Gemeine, 136,137
  - Akzente, 137
  - Genoud, M., 477. -graving, 483
  - Geometric chuck s for follower sizes, 208
  - Geomrtricaypzesyaavantages of, 68
  - signs, 39
- p.707 - vue 875/901
- - 8
  - Co
  - INDEX.
  - George III, Act dealing with printing and type-
  - founding, 567-68
  - Georgian characters, 540
  - German accents, 80, 136, 137
  - Antigua, fount scheme, 137
  - characters, 42
  - Fraktur, fount scheme, 136
  - illegibility, 161,166,168, 170-71, 177, 178
  - injurious to eyesight, 189
  - ligatures, 127, 136
  - points, 136, 137
  - lay of case, 288
  - scheme, Antigua or roman, 127,137
  - Fraktur, 127, 136
  - type ; improved accented capitals, 80
  - specimen, 537
  - " Geschichte der Setzmaschine,” 576
  - Gibbon, Edward, 241
  - Giesszettel fur 100,000 Lettern, Antigua, 137
  - Fraktur, 136
  - Gilbert-Stringer, H. J. S., 344, 599-602, 613, 616-17,
  - 642, 644, 648, 665
  - Gimbal-plates and rings, 198
  - Gimel, 181
  - Girder furniture, 114
  - Glagolitic, Bulgarian and Croatian, 538
  - Glaisher, J. W. L., 460
  - Glosilla, 71
  - Glossary of common technical terms, xxi-xxiv
  - Gloucester Road station, 24
  - Glyphography, 484, 583
  - “ God hath given us Eyes, but herein is Mystery ...”
  - 24
  - Goethe s works, 190
  - Gold sign, 49
  - golden type, 186
  - Golf balls, printing on, 341
  - Goodson, George A., 404, 594, 596, 601, 632-35, 637,
  - 640, 642, 644-45, 647
  - Graphotype keyboard and typecaster, 404-08
  - matrix, 228, 239
  - Gothic, ancient, 539
  - gothic, inclined, 83, 515, 685
  - or sans serif, 30, 42, 83, 91, 292-93, 515, 685
  - Government telegraph monopoly, 413
  - gp, 164
  - g q, German Fraktur, 168
  - Graduated setting wheel, 207
  - Grah, R., process for depositing nickel matrices,
  - 238-39
  - Gramophone, 573
  - Grant, J. C., 612-16, 619
  - Grant, Legros & Co., Ltd., depth of strike, 219
  - Grant-Legros former process, 210-15, 615
  - -Maw line-justifier, 345-49. 374, 614
  - punch-cutter, 206-08, 615, 660
  - Grantype break, 13-14
  - comb of type, 269
  - depth of strike, 240
  - keyboard, 297
  - line of individual type closed up, 270
  - matrices, 224-25
  - matrix-composing machine, 375, 393, 450-52, 661-
  - 662
  - mould, 268-69
  - pump, 277, 278
  - “ Grao grao enche 0 papo a gallinha," 355
  - Graphotype (Addressograph) embossing machine, 101, IV
  - Graphotype, Goodson, 101, 404-06, XLIX
  - improved, 406-08, 414
  - matrix, 228, 239
  - mould, 262
  - new model (Nicholas and Ackermann) composing
  - and casting machine, 408-12, L-LIII
  - controllers, 410-12
  - sorts-caster, 412-13, LIV
  - graphotype process, 3
  - gras, 89
  - Grass character or ts'ao tzi, 497
  - Grave accent abandoned on A, 79
  - great primer, 59, 71, 144
  - cost per pound, 302
  - Greek accented sorts, 141
  - bill of fount, 127, 141, 690
  - capitals, illegibility, 177-79
  - codex Alexandrinus, 537
  - Vaticanus, 536
  - inscription, 537
  - lower-case, illegibility, 178-79, 181
  - greek mathematical symbols, 39
  - Greek, Rosetta stone, 516-17, CVI
  - scheme, 127, 141, 690
  - type, loose accents, 127, 141
  - specimen, 669
  - Green keys, Monotype, 292, 395
  - legibility, 189, 191
  - Greenaway, Kate, 490
  - Gregorian music, 563
  - Grey, legibility, 191
  - Grey patches between black squares, 192
  - Grids for screens, 487-89, 491-92
  - Grinding groove for nick, 259
  - Grismand, John, 30, 566
  - Grobe Kanon, 71
  - Grobe Missal, 71
  - Grohmann, Carl, 380
  - Groote Kanon, 71
  - Groove or heel-nick, 10-11, 20-21, 669
  - Grooved plunger for pump, 277
  - gros-canon, Didot, 69, 70
  - Fournier, 63, 70
  - gros-parangon. Didot, 69, 70
  - Fournier, 61, 62, 64, 70
  - gros-romain, Didot, 69, 70, 145
  - Fournier, 62, 64, 65, 70
  - grosse-nompareills, 63
  - gros-texte. Didot, 70, 145
  - Fournier, 62, 70
  - grotesque or sanserif, 30, 83-87, 91, 685
  - Groundwork, specimens of, 110 used.
  - Grouping together the keys most frequently
  - 289-90
  - Groups of hieroglyphic characters, 524
  - G S, German Fraktur, 170
  - Guarani and Spanish in parallel columns, 56° arie,”
  - “Guide Pratique du Compositeur d’Imprim
  - 287, 575
  - Guide-book, 53, 54
  - Guide-perforations, Dyotype, 414, 415
  - Graphotype, 404
  - Mackie, 363, 393
  - Monotype, 393, 399
  - Wheatstone, 100
  - Guide-ring for matrices, 257, 312-13
  - Guillemet, 127, 134, 671
  - Gujarati or Guzerati, 552
  - Gurumukhi character, 551
  - Gutenburg, Johan, vi
  - Guzerati or Gujarati, 552
  - H
  - h, 151, 364, 369, 396
  - H, 14, 89, 122, 123
  - Haase height-to-paper, 56
  - Haddon face, ro-point, 301
  - Haddon, John & Co., 32, 91, 301, 304, 374, 515
  - specimens, 32, 91, 301, 374, 515
  - Haddonian face, 32
  - “ Haec olim meminisse juvabit," xiii
  - Hair-line, 11,166, 670
  - minimum thickness, 122
  - thickened, 178
  - Hair-spaces, 55, 131, 679
  - Half-point sizes, 60
  - Half-title, i, 683
  - Half-tone blocks, 2, 487-90, CIII
  - breaking up picture into dots, 487
  - coarseness, 489, CIII
  - enlargements for advertisements, 489
  - paper for printing, 191 . 88
  - screen not in contact with negative, 4s
  - superiority to wood-blocks, 490
  - Halves of characters compared, 185, 186
  - Hammersley, William, 379
  - Hams, printing on, 341
  - Hand-cast type, cost of, 301
  - Hand-distribution, speed of, 317
  - Hand-pump for trial casts, 273
  - Hand-setting of type, vii
  - Hand-stamps, 335, 336-37
  - Hanigan machine, 469-70 6 23
  - Hanigan’s patents, 451, 609, 638, 641, 643, op
  - Hansard, “ Typographia,” 34, 66, 302
  - Haphazard line-position, 122
  - Hard metal for type, Stringertype, 417 _
  - Hardening and tempering mould parts, 25°
  - Hardwood furniture, 114
  - Harmonic system of body-sizes, 66-67 . Distribu
  - Hart, E., “ Machinery for Composing and -
  - ing Type,” 575
- p.708 - vue 876/901
- - INDEX.
  - 709
  - Hatched or astigmatic letters, 26
  - attersley Composing machine, 326-27, XXVI
  - Keyboard, 289, 327
  - distributing-stick, 350-51
  - wdistr ibutor, 327, 350-51
  - Haty, Vaxentin327.332, 586, 587, 589, 593,596
  - bawarden face, 91, 374
  - Hoz Dr. George 1. 379
  - Vinthat Jabogreth in the Craft ladoureth
  - in
  - that readeth a Face at Sight hath the Gift of
  - Heart and cross, 51
  - Heart, sacred,
  - Hearts, 51, 94 4
  - HebraR Babylonian ideograph for, 529
  - Hebrew of the Jews, 534
  - mnew bill of fount, 127, 143
  - "legibility, 180-82
  - abbinical, 545
  - scheme, 127, 143
  - with points, 127, 583
  - Helmick or groove, 10-11, 20-21, 669
  - of face of short letters, minimum, 157
  - composing machines, 240
  - casting machines, 219
  - . linotype, 239-40
  - Heidelief of formers, 212
  - eight-to-paper, 14, 55-57, 670
  - gauge, Barth’s, 76
  - horseshoe, 76
  - ordinary, 75-76
  - . steel for, 76
  - Monotype, 58
  - of clumps, 57
  - furniture, 57
  - leads, 57
  - quads, 57, 244-45
  - quotations, 57
  - spaces, 57, 244-45
  - .stereo and trade, 5’. 244-45
  - standard American, 56, 57
  - British, 14, 57
  - Continental, 56
  - Didot, 66
  - Fournier, 56, 61
  - trankfort (on the Main), 56
  - French, 56, 66
  - Haase, 56
  - Leipzig, 56
  - . Russian, 56
  - tolerance in, 76
  - 8S?"
  - Hetmess, 146,380
  - Heralalc Mehieroglyphic founts, 521
  - Aetmadore tipeg" asa
  - 576 - Co Geschichte der Setzmaschinen,"
  - Traeggphrodite sign, 45
  - Hieratic, 2896Q0,341
  - SF9R2X2A/-1s25-38548,CVI
  - csEinedemehicdat# 8252-26
  - determinatives, 517-18, 525
  - founts, BIOL grading, 527"
  - Meeming and spacing, 593-24
  - Tedisceipe" sancggan, 528
  - Wdherat g gngtIc,528
  - outlibering the lines of inscriptions, 524
  - Plural mark 526
  - Pointt system,5253
  - Suattstone, $26-17, 520, CVI
  - Highly6 body zeK USed5323523
  - Hign-lo-paperg geper, 191, 213
  - Hillier, E. G., C.M.G., Chinese braille, 509-14
  - extract from " Sacred Edict” in Chinese
  - braille, 513-14
  - Hillier, Sir Walter C., 497, 501
  - extract from " Sacred Edict," 508
  - memorandum on new alphabetical system for
  - writing Chinese, 501-14
  - " The Chinese language and how to learn it,”
  - 497
  - Hindi, 182-83, 551
  - Hindustani or Urdu, 541
  - Hira-gana, Japanese, 556
  - " History and Antiquities of Brentford, Ealing and
  - Chiswick," 484
  - " History of Composing Machines," 301, 311, 321, 342, 376, 390, 392, 454, 463, 576, 579
  - " History of the Old English Letter Foundries,"’ 566-
  - 570, 575
  - Hittite, 529, 530, CVIII
  - h k. 164
  - H m, standards, 14
  - Hmp, 123
  - Holder for fount of matrices. Typograph, 449
  - Hollow punches, 213
  - Hollow temporary space-matrix, Bellows, 438
  - Hollow type cast on Graphotype, 406
  - H o m p, standards, 195
  - Hooker composing machine, 329-31, 589, 590, 594, 595, 626, 636
  - keyboard, 289-90
  - distributor, 331, 590, 594, 636
  - Hooke’s joint drive for matrix stop-wheel, Oddur,
  - 465
  - Hooks for removing type from mould, 241
  - Hopper of Lagerman Typotheter, 289
  - Horse-power sign, 47
  - Hotel announcements, 37
  - Hours of light and darkness, 38
  - H-section furniture, 114
  - Hsing shu or running hand, 497
  - " Huckleberry Finn," 380
  - Hue, defined, 493
  - Hydraulic soldering press, 209
  - Hydrofluoric acid for glass screens, 488
  - Hyphen, 671, 690
  - I
  - i, 28, 29, 151, 369
  - I, 342
  - i, accent formers, 212
  - I, old style, small capital, 14
  - I, without dot, 190
  - " I hold every man a debtor to his profession, ..."x
  - Ibos, 531
  - Icelandic, 536, 568
  - Identification mark, 14
  - Identity of editions assured by stereotyping, 472
  - Ideograms, 54
  - Ideographs, 37, 53-54, 495, 515, 529
  - Ideophones, 54
  - " If I justify myself, mine own mouth shall condemn
  - me:.. ." 363
  - i, j, 57,188 ,
  - German Fraktur, 168
  - ijift, 190
  - il, 160, 162-69
  - blackfriars, 166, 167
  - effect of serif in, 164
  - German Fraktur, 170-71
  - modern, 162, 163
  - old-style, 164, 165
  - sans serif, 168, 169
  - illegibility, accents, 184-85
  - arabic, 182-83
  - blackfriars, capitals, 168, 175, 177
  - lower-case, 162, 166-67
  - coefficient, 161, 163, 165, 167, 169, 171, 173, 177,
  - 181
  - devanagari, 182-83
  - factor, 161
  - figures, 164, 172-73
  - German Fraktur capitals, 170, 177-78, 189
  - lower-case, 166, 168, 170-71, 189
  - results in neglect of literature, 170
  - Greek, 177-79, 181
  - Hebrew, 181-82
  - modern capitals, 168, 174, 177
  - lower-case, 162-63, 166
- p.709 - vue 877/901
- - 710
  - INDEX.
  - Illegibility—continued
  - old-style, capitals, 168, 174-75, 177
  - lower-case, 162, 164-65, 166
  - points, 184-85, 189
  - Russian, 179-81
  - sans serif, capitals, 168, 176, 177
  - lower-case. 164, 168-69
  - Illumination and reflection, 157, 191
  - three-colour process, 492
  - Illuminator’s work, 93
  - Illusional forms of type, 113
  - Illusions, 24-29, I, II, III
  - accurate inaccuracies, 28
  - arrow heads, 25
  - brickwork, 24-25
  - chequered ground, 27, I, II, III
  - circles as spirals, 27, III
  - flattened, 27, II, III
  - ellipses as circles, 27, II
  - hatched letters, 26
  - hexagonal appearance of circular dots, 27
  - letters appear out of true, 27, I, II
  - parallel and diagonal lines, 25
  - tint, 192
  - Illustrations, list of, 691-96
  - " Illustriertes Worterbuch der graphischen Kunste,”
  - 575
  - Imitation of hand-casting by machine, 272
  - typewriting, 97-98
  - imperial script, 279
  - Imperiale, 71
  - Impression device, Babbage analytical engine, 460
  - Scheutz difference engines, 461-62
  - or stereo-matrix machines, 280, 281, 453-62, 690
  - difficulties, 454-55
  - Fowler, 454, LXXXVI
  - Heath Matrix-Typograph, 454
  - original Typograph, 454
  - St. John Typobar, 454
  - Typomatrix, 454
  - Impressions taken for stereotyping, 471
  - Imprimerie royale de France, 519, 539
  - Imprints (colophons), 112, 680
  - Imprints and logotypes, 421
  - “ Imps of Hell are busy but in Mischief: . . ." 34
  - in, 146, 148-50, 286
  - “.. . In them is the power of Thought con-
  - tained . . .” 10
  - " In Memoriam,” 350
  - Inch, British and United States, 60
  - Inclination of screen-rulings, three-colour process,
  - 491-92
  - or slope of Italic, 81
  - Inclined sans serif, gothic, grotesque, 83, 86-87, 91,
  - 515, 685
  - Independent line-justification, Monotype, 294-95
  - matrix Linotype, 423
  - Index-cards, Linotype, 433-35
  - Index-plate, 206
  - Indicator and bell; Paige compositor, 388
  - dial; Paige compositor, 385
  - length of line, Chadwick, 289
  - Indices, use of solidus in, 41
  - Individual type, use of, 6
  - " Individual types may be said to be essential . . ."
  - 392
  - Indivisible word, longest English, 77
  - words, longest German, 77
  - Indulgence, Letters of, 6
  - “ Inertia of the Eye and Brain,” 188
  - Inferiors, 39, 673
  - Influence of set on keyboard arrangement, 290
  - Ing. 148, 150, 331
  - Initial letters, 93-94, 675
  - Ink, 8, 191, 218, 490, 684
  - blots, 113
  - fineness, 218, 489
  - Japanese, 490
  - legibility, 191
  - “ Inland Printer,” 8, 494, 516, 576
  - Innuit or Eskimo, 560
  - In-pocket work, 332
  - Inscribed neolithic pebbles, 532, CIX
  - Inscription, Central American, 530, CVIII
  - Inscription-Greek face, 537
  - Inscription, hieroglyphic, 516, 523-24, 527, 529, CV1
  - Hittite, 529-30, CVIII
  - Inscription-Roman, 536
  - Institut franfais du Caire, 521
  - Institution of Civil Engineers, Proceedings, 339
  - Mechanical Engineers, xi, xii, 59, 576
  - Intaglio colour-printing, 491
  - printing-surfaces, 1-2
  - Integration mark, 39, 41, 675
  - Interchangeability of type, 117
  - Interdot printing of braille, 105
  - Interline printing of braille, 105
  - Interlinear space defined, 157
  - Intermediate plate, Monotype mould, 259
  - International Phonetic Association, 36, 37
  - “ International Printer,” 576 .. -1
  - Inter-relation between typesetting and mathematic
  - notation, 40-43
  - Intertype, 224, 437, LXXIII
  - matrix, 224
  - Introduction, v-vii
  - Inventors, 577
  - “. . . inventors and authors of new arts, . • • *
  - ionic, 31, 88, 685
  - Irish or Erse, 539
  - Iron matrices, 217
  - sign, 49
  - Irradiation, 157, 192 76
  - Irregularity of flow in multi-plunger pumps, 275 This
  - “ Is there anything whereof it may be said, See,
  - is new ? ” 374 „
  - “ It be well said that is the best Pump . . • .27 him
  - " It is not a bad definition of man to describe
  - as a tool-making animal,” 577
  - Italian accented sorts, 138
  - bill of fount or scheme, 127, 138
  - Italian (type face), 90, 367, 686
  - Italic accents, 35, 129, 131, 133, 135
  - blackfriars, 86- 87, 91
  - capitals, 35, 86-87, 129, 131, 133, 135, 143 26-87
  - figures, lower-case, ligatures and points, 35,5°
  - Cheltenham old-style, 86-87
  - De Vinne, 86-87, 92
  - figures, 35, 87, 129, 131,133, 135, 143
  - formerly more common, 96
  - founts, 568, 685
  - lower-case, 35, 86-87, 129, 131, 133, 135, 143
  - modern, 86-87, 90
  - modernized old-style, 86-87
  - old face, 86-87
  - origin, 34, 95-96
  - points, 35, 129, 131, 133, 135, 143
  - sans serif, gothic, grotesque, 83, 86-87, 91
  - slope or inclination, 81
  - italien, 30, 31
  - J
  - j, 78, 153, 284
  - j, 78, 81
  - Jabberwocky, 108
  - Jacks, 259
  - Jacquard loom, 321, 328, 380
  - principle, 100, 363, 462
  - James ii 24...393
  - James II, appointment of typefounders, 569
  - James 11, John, typefounder, 569
  - James, John, 31
  - Jannsen, Bishop, 530
  - Japanese classic or kana-majiri, 556
  - colour-printing, 490
  - hira-gana, 556
  - ink, 490
  - kata-kana, 556
  - Japanese-British Exhibition, 460
  - Javal, Dr., 157
  - Javanese, 545, 558
  - characters, kerns, 23
  - three-body composition, 558
  - jenson (type face), 31, 186, 686
  - Jenson, Nicholas, 31
  - Jeremiah, 471 . , TI
  - Jerusalem, fall of, cuneiform record, 529, CX
  - Jet or sprue of short-type, Oddur, 467
  - troubles, 272-73
  - Jews, use of Hebraic script, 534
  - job, 363, 515
  - Jobber, 274
  - action, 305
  - and nipple plate, 303
  - Jobbing lay-out, Monotype, 293 637,
  - Johnson, F. A., 344, 357, 374, 594, 604, 634, °3 ’
  - 638, 640, 645, 647, 649. 650,652
  - Johnson, Henry, patent for Logotypes, 140, 5
  - Johnson, H. T., 332
  - Johnson, J., author of “ Typographia, 477
- p.710 - vue 878/901
- - INDEX.
  - Johnson, L. K., 289,591, 593, 596-98,627-28,630-48,
  - Johnson, William, 302, 623
  - Jointer, 194
  - Jolij, 71
  - Juwgnap of the Society of Arts, 575-76
  - Junius, Francis, 568
  - Justification of line, see Line-justification, 77-78,279
  - 200, 342-49, 357, 363-66, 374-75, 376-90, 393-470,
  - 68r
  - Justifier’s Pump, 273
  - justifying matrices, 19, 216-17, 233-35, 680
  - Justifying.vice adjustable, 204
  - K
  - Kleine Sabon, 71
  - K M N VW, 11
  - crotches, n
  - Knife-block adjustment, Intertype, 437
  - universal, Linotype, 433
  - Knife-edge Square, 248
  - straight-edge, 248
  - KNQRXZ, 79
  - Knudsen, operation of Linotypes by “ wireless,” 413,
  - 611, 621
  - Kolonel, 71
  - Koran, 421
  - Korean, 556
  - Korpus, 71
  - Kuan hua tza mu, 509, 512
  - Kustermann, 274, 593
  - rapid typecaster, 309-10, XXI
  - k 53, 284, 396
  - Ealmuk, 557
  - Lana-majiri, Japanese 556
  - Kanarese, 23, 97, 552
  - Kerning, 97
  - anon, 71
  - Kashmiri, 541
  - Kastenbein composing machine,289,291, 328-29, 364,
  - XXVII, 588, 626
  - R , Keyboard, 289, 291
  - * ata-kana, Japanese, 556
  - « • • • thy Case simple . . ." 146
  - Teep up practice of signalling . . .” 99
  - Tennedy, Sir Alexander B. W., 460
  - Kerned type, 21-23, 78-81, 96-97, 184, 670
  - difficulties for composing machines, 80
  - dressing, 21, 78
  - examples, 81
  - . weakness of, 78, 81
  - Kerning file, 22-23
  - machine, 81
  - Plane, 22, 81
  - Kerns, arabic, 184
  - bracketed, 97
  - Burmese, 23
  - definition, 21
  - Dravidian characters, 22-23
  - fouling of, 22, 80
  - Kanarese,23
  - for colour-printing, 490
  - & for logotype en, Victorline, 297
  - —unction. Pulsometer distributor, 350, 352
  - pey-bar frame. Monotype, 396-98
  - eyboard, 281,283,289-300, 355, 378, 388-89,393-95,
  - 396-99, 406-07, 431-32, 436-38, 442, 445-46,
  - 7451,684
  - Bellows, 438
  - chord producing, 290, 298
  - Grantype, 297 5514
  - graphotype, 406-07
  - dattersley composing machine, 289
  - Hooker, 289-90
  - intertype, 437
  - Kastenbein composing machine, 289, 291
  - Linotype, arabic, 431
  - English and American, 294, 432
  - French, 295
  - German, 296
  - Monoline, 297, 442
  - Keyboard, Monotype pattern C, 290-93, 393-95, 451,
  - XLVII
  - patterns D and DD, 396-99,451, XLVII, XLVIII
  - r lay-outs, 293-95
  - Paige, 298-300, 378, 388-89, XLVI
  - uisometer composing machine, 290-91
  - distributor, 299-300
  - Eototype, 355
  - -ringertype, 297
  - •ypograph, English, 294, 445-46
  - French, 295
  - .German, 296
  - Unitype, 298
  - Victorline, 297, 436-37
  - wiosking-gear, 437
  - RACKS composing machine, 290, 291
  - gey rods. Linotype, 433
  - RTS operating electric contacts, Hooker, 290
  - mhoi Khoi or Nama, 535
  - Inchinjunga, 554
  - Kis’s College, London, 338, 500
  - Kanon, 71
  - Kleine Missal, 71
  - I, 126, 151, 190, 283
  - “ La composition par matrices movibles," 421
  - La Mantia, Jos., 7-8
  - “. . . labour would make Hercules sweat,” vi
  - Lagerman, Alexander, 288, 592-93, 631, 635
  - Typotheter, 288-89, 631, 633, 635-36
  - Lam, Dr. T. F., system of writing Chinese, 500
  - Lambert, flat-bed press, 493
  - Landi, S., “ Tipografia,” 576
  - “ L’ANGLETERRE . . ." 80
  - Language of China, typographical expression of,
  - 495-514
  - Languages of islands of Eastern seas, 558
  - Lanston, Tolbert, 593, 631, 639-40, 642-43. 645, 656
  - Lanston-Monotype. See Monotype, 221, 229, 259-
  - 262, 290-95, 392-404, 597-606, 608-10, 612-20
  - Lao-tian or Lao-shan, 555
  - Lapping, 258-59
  - Lardner, Dr. Dionysius, 471
  - Large body-size formers, 122
  - ornamental type cast by squirt machine, 302
  - Largest reputed sum paid for a patent, 454
  - Large-work Monotype, 402-04
  - pivotal typecaster, 308, XIX
  - L’Art de la Gravure des Caracteres, 193
  - Latch-plate of pivotal typecaster, 304
  - Lathe heads for punch-cutting, 197-98
  - latin, 31, 84-86
  - Latin languages, 184
  - latin type (roman), 190
  - latin-face mixtures, 534-36
  - Laurel wreaths, 47
  - Laurent & Deberny, section of script, 96
  - Lay of case, 283-88, 681
  - Earl Stanhope’s, 285, 286, 287
  - French, 287
  - German Fraktur, 287. 288
  - Moxon’s, 283, 284
  - ordinary, 283-84, 285
  - Russian, 287, 288
  - Smith’s, 283, 285
  - Lay-out of Monotype matrix-grids, 396-97
  - Le Be, arabic fount produced by, 541-42
  - “ Le cocu imaginaire ” ou “ Sganarelle,” 358
  - “ Le Matin,” 80
  - “Le systeme metrique . . ." 80
  - " Le Temps,” 413
  - Lead lapping-block, 259
  - Lead-cutting machine, 113
  - Leaders, 672
  - Leading for school books, 157
  - incorrectly defined by oculists, 157
  - Leads, brass, 113
  - definition, 55
  - insertion of by Paige compositor, 383, 385, 390
  - machine scraped, 113
  - metal for, 16
  - scraper for, 113
  - temporary for unjustified type-lines, 326
  - lean face, 82, 89, 685
  - “. . . Learnt it of his own Genuine Inclination ...
  - 193
  - Leavenworth, William, 196
  - Leclerc, E., 576
  - Lectura, 71
  - Lecturita,71
  - Lefevre’s improvements in lay of case, 287
  - Lefevre, Theotiste, 287, 575
- p.711 - vue 879/901
- - H
  - INDEX.
  - Legal Reports, Scotland, 59
  - Legibility, accents, 184-85
  - arabic, 182-83
  - blackfriars capitals, 168, 175, 177
  - lower-case, 162, 166-67
  - British Association Report, 157,158,159-60
  - coefficient, 161
  - colour of ink and paper, 191
  - devanagari, 182-83
  - Dr. Cohn’s recommendations, 157, 158, 159-60
  - factors affecting, 156-57
  - figures, 83,164, 172-73
  - German Fraktur capitals, 170, 177-78, 189
  - lower-case, 166,168, 170-71, 189
  - greek, 177-79, 181
  - halves of characters, 185-86
  - Hebrew, 180-82
  - illumination and artificial light, 191-92
  - irradiation, 192
  - kerning, 184
  - leading, 157, 158-59
  - length of printed line, 157
  - modern capitals, 168, 174, 177
  - lower-case, 162-63, 166
  - old-style capitals, 168, 174-75, 177
  - lower-case, 164-65, 177
  - points, 184-85, 189
  - quality of paper, 191
  - reflection from paper, 191-92
  - resemblance of characters, 160-185
  - Russian, 179-81
  - sans serif capitals, 168, 176-77
  - lower-case, 164, 168-69
  - size of characters, 157, 158-59,160
  - unnecessary lines or marks, 157, 189-90
  - white between strokes, 160
  - Legrain, M. G., 522
  - Legros, L. A., 614-15
  - Leipzig height-to-paper; used in Holland, 56
  - Psychological Laboratory, 188
  - Length and value recording machines, 339
  - a-z, 88, 90, 91, 92, 121, 160
  - of leads, 113
  - nick-wires, Wicks rotary typecaster, 314
  - printed line, 156-57
  - 1,000,000 type, pica, 72-73
  - serif, 24
  - typebars for automatic typewriter, 300
  - recording machines, 339
  - Leonardo da Vinci, 193
  - of Pisa, 193
  - Lepcha, 554
  - Lepsius, C. R., 36
  - " Les grands services font les grands hommes, ..."X
  - “Let us hear the conclusion of the whole matter,”
  - 565
  - Letter-bodies, Fournier, 61
  - “ Letter-Cutting is a Handy-Work hitherto kept so
  - conceal’d . , .” 193
  - Letter-cutting, Moxon, 193
  - Letter from David H. Fletcher, 390-91
  - of Privilege by Pope Leo X, 96
  - Letters arranged on strips according to width, 470
  - Letters of Indulgence, 6
  - Lettura, 71
  - Lewis Carroll, 108
  - L-gauge, 69
  - li shu or clerkly style, 496
  - Lift-box, Linotype, 429
  - Lifting pantograph point, 213
  - plaster mould for stereotype, 475
  - type off their feet, 342
  - Lifting-arm of pivotal typecaster, 304
  - Ligaturen, 136, 137
  - Ligatures, 128-40, 146, 147,150,153,155, 677
  - Light-filter, three-colour process, 492
  - Light-blue ink for printing, 191
  - Light-green paper for printing, 191
  - Lighthouse sign, 44
  - Lighting should be diffused, 192
  - Lilliputian composer; numbering-machine, 336
  - Limit of body parallelism, 76
  - Limitation of speed of single mould, 264, 450
  - Limited possibility of designing new characters, 119
  - Limits of accuracy of type, 57, 69, 72, 74-76
  - Line, alinement, 11, 24, 28-29, 122-26, 670, 680
  - standardization, 123-25
  - Line of loose type cast at a single operation, 269
  - matrices, Stringertype, 262
  - maximum blackness, 188
  - Line-braille, 106-07
  - Line-casting metal, wastage, 15
  - Line-gripping jaws, Oddur, 467
  - Line-justification and “justification,” 77, 681
  - Bellows compositor, 438
  - casting and inserting spaces, 344, 357
  - Castotype, 374
  - compressible spaces, 342-43, 363
  - cutting spaces from wood or metal, 344
  - differential wedges of Monotype, 395
  - Dow, 365
  - Dyotype, 414-15
  - Empire, 363-64
  - folding-wedge spaces, 343
  - Grantype, 452
  - Graphotype, Goodson, 404
  - improved, 407-08
  - new model, 408-12
  - Hattersley compositor, 327
  - Linotype, 230-31, 428
  - Lithotype, 463
  - Monoline, 442
  - Monotype, 394-95, 400-01
  - Multispace, Cox, 343-44
  - Paige compositor, 384-85, 387, 388-89, 39°
  - progressive insertion of spaces, 343
  - reducing ordinary quads by milling, 344-49
  - Stringertype, 415, 417-19
  - substitution for temporary spaces, 343
  - Tachytype, 404
  - Typograph, 444-47, LXXXII
  - Unitype-bar, 464
  - Line-justifier, Grant-Legros-Maw, 345-49, 369
  - Johnson, 369, 374
  - McClintock, 368
  - North, 380
  - Stringer, 344-45, XXIX, XXXI, 369, 374
  - Line-justifying and distributing machines, 279-8°
  - machines, 279, 281, 342-49
  - Line-key, Dow compositor, 365 vT VI
  - Paige compositor, 298, 300, 385, 389, XLV
  - Line-length, range of, Linotype, 432
  - Line-measuring, Stringertype, 417
  - Lines, music, 103
  - of print, spacing of, 156-60
  - unjustified type separated by leads, 326
  - Line-to-back, rr, 14, 76, 124-25, 670
  - Line-to-front, 124-25, 670
  - Line-trip, Graphotype, 404, 409-12
  - Lining and titling faces, 126]
  - gauge, 76, 678
  - series, 124
  - Lining-brass, part of mould, 245
  - Link, Rolls P., 464, 604, 612, 621, 657
  - “. . . linked letters . . .” 146
  - Linnaeus, botanical signs, 45
  - Linograph, 437, LXXIV
  - Linoleum, printing, 485 ., 454,
  - Linotype, 151, 281, 375, 416, 419, 420, 452, 453> *
  - 462, 572, 573, XIV
  - Arabic type specimen, 421
  - Chinese syllabic system, 505 ~2-93,
  - linotype class of machines, 280-81, 294-96, 39
  - 421-52, LVIII-LXXXV, 689 0
  - Linotype Company, 79, 204, 209, 369, 404, 59579
  - cutter-grinder, automatic, 205, VII
  - former process, 209, X
  - punch-cutter, 204-05 vvIll,
  - composed lines of matrices, 427-28,
  - LXIX
  - cut-out, 427
  - distribution, 222, 424-26, 429, 431, LXV-
  - Dougall, 435-36
  - ejector blade, 428
  - embroidery block, 434
  - etaoinshrdlucmfwypvbgkqjxz, 425
  - evolution of, vii, 422-35
  - flexibility of, 435
  - Junior, 450
  - key arrangement, 426
  - keyboard, English, 294, 295, 296
  - French, 295, 296
  - German, 296
  - line-justification, 428
  - Linotype machine, arabic, 431-32, LXII
  - blower (1885), 430
  - (1886), LVIII
  - first individual-matrix, LVIII
  - independent matrix (1885), 423, 430
  - model 2 English, 430, LX
  - model 3 English, 430, 431, LXI
  - model 4 American, 430, 431
- p.712 - vue 880/901
- - INDEX.
  - 713
  - Linotype machine—continued.
  - LXiVlXXI 480, 432-33, 435’ LXIII,
  - model 6 American, 424, 430, LX
  - model s American, 429, 430, 432-33, LXIII,
  - LXIV.LXXI
  - model 9, 423, 429, 430, 433, 435, LXV, LXXI
  - model 10, 430, LXVI
  - origina 1(x8 84), 423, 430
  - seuare-base (1890), 424, 430
  - tarbase, 43Q
  - with step line-justification, LIX
  - magazine, double, 430-31, LXI, LXX
  - quick-change, 430
  - single, American, 424, 430
  - English, 430, LX
  - type,matrices, assembling, 427-28, LXVIII,
  - —AIX
  - Character, 222-23
  - continuous columnar rule, 223-24
  - depth of strike, 239-40
  - distensible space, 230-31, 427-28
  - escapement, 426-27, 435, LXIX-LXXI
  - or multiple magazines, 222
  - Janus, szsting, 108, 307, 311’ 361
  - multiple-strike, 422-3
  - path of, 429, L’xix 3
  - rule-block, 222-23
  - single letter, 222
  - s|0t-rule, 223-24
  - space and quad, 229
  - tabular-rule, 223—24
  - two-letter, 222, 429
  - two-line letter, 429
  - with complete set of nicks, 429
  - mwith out nicks, 222-23, 427, 429
  - maximum torque, 429
  - mechanism details, 426-29
  - okng mould, 264-66, 428, 430, XIV
  - mould-wheel, 428, 430, LXIX
  - newspaper production, 422-23
  - number of machines
  - operated ^X wireless’, 413
  - output, 429-30
  - Power required, 429
  - pump plunger, 277,428
  - zunch-cutter, 204-05, V, VI
  - smence of operations, 426-29
  - 224, 264-66, 428, XIV
  - recessed, 266 XIV
  - tabular-rule roller, 224
  - spaMCline letter, 429*
  - starspand or wedge-space, 230, 231, 427, 428
  - Wheel, 427
  - tymming knives, 265-66,428-29
  - ype specimen, 421
  - LWerning-bell, 427
  - LBPmonn and Dohme, 6, 88
  - Lithe w ritish and American patents, 577-667
  - Lint block, 493, CV
  - Lithography denned, 2
  - Live WDe (transfer machine), 463, XC
  - Ikt, getter, 382, 383, 385, 389
  - Lociar Eman Fraktur, 168
  - LockiL furniture, 115
  - Lock-up test foE Hanigan composite type-bar, 470
  - Logarithmic spiral curves, 210-11
  - "Logichms, tables of, 455,471
  - shoma the printing-office is where the typemaking
  - Logotve. ake place . . 301
  - TXRes, 108, 127, 136, 146-55, 282, 286-87, 290,
  - ac2081369, 421, 677
  - admally in use, 150
  - cast f ages’ 146-47
  - chorasom combined matrices, 108, 421
  - dessi.on composing machines, 290, 298, 369
  - Earl son, example, use, 108
  - easily damhages.46, 149, 286-87
  - Germany occurrence, 147-53, 290, 298
  - MESercemmniortsnce0f’ 149
  - Shorthand, 75547
  - LAgeinon memory, 147
  - Long mland, typefounding in, 302
  - trix-bars, Oddur, 464
  - Long Parliament removes restraint on typefounder, 566
  - long primer, 59, 60, 70, 71,122, 144, 301-02, 461-62
  - cost, per pound, 301-02
  - modern figures, Scheutz difference engine at
  - Dudley, Albany, N.Y., 462
  - nine-and-a-half point, 60
  - old-style figures, Scheutz difference engine, Donkin’s replica, 461
  - specimens, 4, 10, 15, 82, 90-91, 156, 241, 271, 355,
  - 357, 358, 367, 483, 515
  - Long s (f), 162, 185, 284
  - Longest indivisible word, 77
  - Longmans, Brown, Green, Longmans and Roberts, 461
  - Longmans, Green, Longman, Roberts and Green, 462
  - Longueur a-z en forces de corps, 90-92, 145
  - “ Look here, upon this picture, and on this.” 453
  - Loose accents, 127, 141, 542
  - “ Lords and Commons,” 363
  - “ Lord’s Prayer in five hundred Languages,” 562
  - Lorraine, double cross of, 47
  - Low, A. A., 289, 588, 591, 593, 596-98, 601-03, 628,
  - 630-34, 637-46, 648, 655, 657
  - Lower and upper cases, 283-87, 671, 681
  - lower-case sorts, italic, 35
  - roman, 35
  - Low-quad mould, 261-62
  - Low-temperature solder, 209
  - Lucas de Burgo, 193
  - Lunation signs, 38
  - M
  - m, 14, 19, 76, 122, 123, 126, 155, 157, 195, 233, 564
  - m and H, 14
  - m placed first in bill, 126
  - m, special form for tonic sol-fa, 564
  - m, standard for line, 14, 195
  - m, standard of demand, 126
  - McClintock, Frank, automatic line-justifier, 364, 368,
  - 600-01, 603, 642, 644-45, 650, 655
  - MacDonald, J. C., of “ The Times,” 317-18, 478, 588
  - McGrath, P. H., 357, 601, 642, 643
  - casting and line-justifying machine, 357
  - MacGregor, Rev. J. K., 531
  - Machine for printing on curved surfaces, 341
  - hides, 340, 341
  - roads, 341
  - translating Wheatstone strip, 341
  - “. . . machine of the future. . . unquestionably
  - . . . casts, sets, and justifies single types . . .” 392
  - Machine-cut punches, 234, 679
  - “ Machinery for Composing and Distributing Type,”
  - 575
  - “ Machines for Composing Letterpress Printing-
  - Surfaces,” 576
  - Machines for weighing and valuing, 340
  - lead-cutting, 113
  - of the linotype class, 421-52
  - monotype class, 393-420
  - of various classes in use at time of going to press,
  - 572
  - Machine-scraped leads, 113
  - Machining and mounting stereo-plates, 474
  - counters in punches, 208
  - MacKellar, Thomas, 301, 575
  - Mackenzie, D., perforated-strip control, 328, 584
  - Mackie, Dr. Alexander, 328, 363, 393, 588-89
  - composing and line-justifying machine, 363, 393
  - compositor, 328
  - Madison Square Garden, N.Y., Exhibition, 406
  - Magazine, Bellows compositor, 439, 441, 442
  - Graphotype, controllers, 408-II
  - Hattersley, change of, 327
  - Intertype, 437
  - Linograph, 437
  - Linotype, 424-33, 435
  - arabic machine, 431
  - counterbalance, 432
  - matrix-lock, 435
  - quick-change, 430
  - Monoline, 442
  - Victorline, 436
  - | Magazines, periodicals, 571
  - Magnetic angle-blocks, 250
  - chuck, 250
  - Magnifying eye-glass, 194
  - Mahogany, plate-backing, 486
  - Mahon, Viscount, 338
- p.713 - vue 881/901
- - 714
  - INDEX.
  - Ma in-strokes (of types), ii, 670
  - devanagari, 183
  - white between, 156, 160
  - “. . . mais nous avons change tout cela,” xi
  - Making balls, 218
  - Malayalim, 553
  - Male sign, 45
  - Maliseet, 535
  - " Manchester Guardian,” 328, 370
  - Manchu, 557-58
  - Mangle-press, 480
  - Mann and Sturdevant, 17, 272, 274, 623
  - Mansfeld, Dr., 531
  - Mantia, Jos. La, 7-8
  - “ Manual of Typography,” 301, 575
  - “ Manuel Typographique,” ix, x, 61, 575
  - Manuscript, hieroglyphic, 521-23
  - works in ancient Rome, 9
  - " Many are the languages of the habiters of the
  - earth,” 669
  - Marash, stone lion with Hittite inscription, 530,
  - CVIII
  - Margins, 681
  - Mark, identification (of small capitals OSVWXZ), 14
  - Mark Twain, 103-04, 379-81, 495, 591
  - description of Chinese compositors at work,
  - 103-04, 495
  - Paige compositor, 379-81
  - Marked pebbles of Mas d’Azil, 532, CIX
  - Marr Typefounding Co., specimens, 91, 363
  - Martial’s “ First Book of Epigrams,” 9
  - Martin, William, perforated strip for typesetting,
  - 328
  - Mas d’Azil, marked pebbles of, 532, CIX
  - Masonic signs, 48
  - Mason’s break, 12
  - Mass usually measured and recorded by weighing,
  - 340
  - Massicot and glycerine, 476
  - Mathematical formulae, composition difficulties,
  - 40-43, 562
  - notation, 40-43
  - signs, 39
  - formers, 212
  - “. . . Matrice . . .” 216
  - Matrices, 6-7,19,195, 216-40, 679
  - aluminium, 216
  - Barth, engraved, 220-21
  - Bellows Compositor, 232, 233, 438-41, XI
  - selector holes, 233, 439
  - spaces or blanks, 438
  - Bhisotype, 220-21
  - brass, sheet, 216
  - bronze, 216
  - built up, 217
  - composing and casting machines, depth of strike,
  - 239-40
  - copper with nickel strike, 216
  - definition of, 216
  - Matrices, depth of strike, 218-19, 239-40, 670
  - Dougall Linotype, partially rotated line, 435
  - Dyotype, 222, 240, 414
  - early, 6-7
  - Electric Compositor, 232, 233, 240, 438-41
  - electro-deposited, copper, 216, 238
  - nickel, 225
  - electrotyped in cavity, 221
  - flong, 217
  - Foucher, 220-21
  - French typecasters’, 221
  - Grantype, distensible space, 231-32
  - individual type, 224-25, 240
  - partially rotated, 452
  - slug, 225
  - Graphotype, Goodson, 228, 239
  - hand of, 215
  - Intertype, 437
  - justifying, 233-35, 680
  - Matrices, Linotype, American, 239-40
  - assembly, 427
  - depth of routing, 240
  - strike, 240
  - distensible space, 230-31, 427-28
  - distribution, 222, 424-26, LXVII
  - English, 239-40
  - for sorts-casting, 108, 307, 3ir, 361
  - fount-separation, 431, 435
  - Janus, 223
  - multiple-strike, 422-23
  - order of release, 425
  - path of, 429, LXIX
  - Matrices, Linotype—continued.
  - rule-block, 222-23
  - single-letter, 222
  - slot-rule, 223-24 0
  - space-band or wedge-space, 230-31, 427-2°
  - tabular rule, 223, 224
  - two-letter, 222, 427, 431, 433
  - vertical figure tabular, 223
  - with complete set of nicks, 429
  - without nicks, 429
  - miscellaneous materials, 217 442
  - Monoline, 225, 227,229,230,231, 239, 240, 3741
  - assembler, 442
  - distensible space, 230, 231
  - hooks, 442
  - multiple-strike, 442, 689
  - spaces and quads, 229
  - Matrices, Monotype, 221, 229, 240, 260, 398
  - depth of strike, 240
  - low-quad, 229
  - securing in grid, 398
  - multiple-strike, 225-28, 422-23, 442
  - not-non-rubbing, 19, 217
  - Nuernberger-Rettig, 220
  - ordinary, 220
  - depth of strike, 218-19
  - originally of copper, 216
  - patents, 217
  - pica, set widths, 72-73
  - punch-struck, vi, 195, 216-17
  - rolled nickel, 216
  - Rototype, 225, 226, 240, 355-56
  - Rowotype, assembly, 450
  - soft iron, 217
  - spaces and quads, 228-30
  - distensible, 230-32
  - steel and nickel, 216 , ,15-16
  - Matrices, Stringertype, 224, 230-31,240, 2021 4
  - 419-20
  - distensible space, 230, 231, 416, 417
  - distribution, 419-20
  - notched for setting mould, 224, 262
  - presentation, 262
  - thickness, 416
  - Thompson large-work, 221, 311 I
  - Typograph, assembling, 446, 447, LAX*
  - distensible space, 230-32
  - single-letter, 227-28, 240, 447, LXXX
  - two-letter, 227-28, 447, LXXX
  - Victorline, 240
  - Wicks rotary caster, 10, 220-21, 247, 35277
  - justifying, 234-35
  - jackets, 221
  - Matrix-alining bar, Typograph, 447
  - Matrix-bars arranged on drums, Oddur, 404
  - Rowotype, 4.49
  - Matrix-blank, drilled, 219, 221
  - Matrix-block, Graphotype, 405
  - Matrix-box for Linotype matrices, 307
  - Monotype matrices, 307
  - Matrix-cage, Bellows, 439
  - I Matrix-circulating machines, 280 or slug-
  - Matrix-composing, line-justifying, and type
  - casting machines, 392-452
  - Matrix-composing machine moulds, 259-/0
  - Matrix-delivery, Linotype, 427, LXV11 -66, 469
  - Matrix-disk, Oddur, 225, 226, 239. 240, 404 , -
  - Rototype, 225,226 . Founder
  - Matrix-engraving machines, American Type
  - Co., 236-37, XI
  - Ballou, 236, XII
  - cutters, shape of, 236, 237
  - Dedrick, 236
  - microscopic test of cutters, 238 LX2
  - Matrix-escapement, Linotype, 426, 430-35,43
  - Typograph, 445,446
  - Matrix-grid, Monotype, 260-62, 398-400
  - Matrix-gripper, Typograph, 447
  - Matrix-guide-ring, Wicks, 257, 312-13
  - Matrix-guide-wires, Typograph, 449
  - Matrix-holder, Monotype, 402
  - Matrix-jacket, Wicks, 220-21, 312-14
  - Matrix-lining spring, 305
  - Matrix-lock, Linotype magazines, 435
  - Matrix-magazine, see Magazine
  - Matrix-metal, flow of, 218
  - Matrix-plate, Graphotype, 407
  - Matrix-presentation, 305 I-
  - Matrix-pusher, Linotype, 428 LXXX
  - Matrix-rack, for founts Typograph, 448-4 ‘
  - LXXXIV
- p.714 - vue 882/901
- - INDEX.
  - 715
  - Matrix-release, Bellows compositor, 297, 438
  - Linograph, 437
  - Linotype, 425, LXVII
  - Matrix-roller, Rototype, 355-56
  - Matrix-stop, Monoline, 442
  - Matrix-wheel, Dyotype, 414
  - Matson, William L.. 379
  - Maw. T. F., 345, 614
  - Maximum blackness, line of, 188
  - — torque. Linotype, 429
  - Maxwell, J. D., District Commissioner, Calabar, 530
  - Mazzini, Joseph, typecasting machine, 375, 584
  - type-bar arrangement, 464
  - Mean illegibility coefficient, 161-63,165,167,169,171,
  - — 173, 177,181
  - Measurement of division-plate errors, 251-56
  - volume of solids recorded by weighing, 340
  - Measuring-box of line-justifier, 347
  - techanical and hand composition compared, 389-90
  - Mechanick Exercises,” vi, ix, 15, 55, 216, 218, 575
  - Medals, 48
  - Medes and Persians, 547
  - M eaiaan, 71
  - medieval script, 176
  - Medical signs, 43, 674
  - Medici Society, 491
  - Medio texto, 71
  - Meisenbach, G, inventor of half-tone blocks, 487-88,
  - 59I
  - Mem (final), 180, 181, 182
  - ce Memoirs of my Life and Writings.” 241
  - <( • . . Memory worketh not ever alike . . ." 34
  - : - : men pourtrayed upon the wall . . .” 515
  - Menabrea, General, memoir by, 321, 339
  - Meray- Horvith- Rozdr typecaster, 413
  - Mercury temperature regulator, Electrotypograph, 413
  - Linotype, 432-33
  - thermometer with compressed nitrogen, 276
  - Mergenthaler, early work on transfer and impression machines, 422
  - Mergenthaler Linotype Company, 381, 386, 422, 444,
  - 454, 597-600, 604-05, 614-15, 618-19, 621-22
  - former process, 209
  - see Linotype, 392, 421-35
  - Mergenthaler, Ottmar, vii, 421, 453,454,462, 592-94,
  - 596—98, 629-33, 636-39, 641-46, 648, 655, 689
  - Mergenthaler Setzmaschinen-Fabrik, 437, 609-21
  - meridian, 58,70
  - Merrifield, C. W., 460
  - Metal furniture, 114-15
  - pumped continuously, 273
  - signs, 49
  - stereotype-casting, 474
  - Metal-furnace and pump, semicylindrical plate-
  - casting, 478, XCIII
  - Metal-pot, Bellows, 438-40
  - Linotype, 428, 432
  - Monotype, 276
  - mouth, Linotype, 277
  - Typograph, 447, 449
  - Metal-pump, Autoplate Junior, 480
  - Metal-tube from pump heated electrically, Grapho-
  - type, 405
  - Meteorological signs, 46
  - Metric equivalent of standard point, 60
  - Mezzotint, defined, 1
  - ME", 127
  - Micrometer body-gauge, 74
  - head, 206
  - lining-gauge for punch measurements, 233, 234
  - microscope, 251, 255, 407
  - milling adjustment, 252
  - needle-point depth gauge, 233
  - screw for depth of cut, 207
  - Micrometer-slide microscope, 214
  - Microphonic attachment for punch-cutting, 205
  - Microscope, bifilar, 203-04, 214
  - Microscopic test of form cutters, 238
  - Microscopique, Fournier, 70
  - Middle spaces, 55, 131, 679
  - “ .. . mightiest of Monarchs among the Arts, ...” 4
  - Mignone (Didot), 71
  - Mignone, Fournier, 62, 70
  - Mignonne, Didot, 69, 70, 145
  - Mignonne, Fournier, 64
  - Mild-steel furniture, 115
  - " Mill ” of Babbage analytical engine, 460
  - Milled steel furniture, 115
  - Miller & Richard, specimens, 1, 30, 31, 32, 90, 91, 392,
  - 570
  - depth of strike, 219
  - Milling back of former, 209
  - groove for nick-wire, 259
  - minikin, 58, 71
  - Minimum and maximum delivery of pumps, 275, 276
  - height of face of short letters, 157
  - space between words in school books, 160
  - minion, 59, 71, 122,144
  - column of, 69
  - cost of per pound, 301
  - on brevier, antique, specimen, 55
  - specimens, 59, 90
  - minionette, 70
  - Miflona, 71
  - Mirrors, spherical, cylindrical, plane, 118
  - “ Mirrour of Pryntyng,” 1, 4, 10, 24, 34, 82,121,146,
  - 156, 271, 357
  - Miscellaneous machines, 282
  - signs, 51
  - Mitres, 43, 47
  - Mittel, 71
  - Mixed type from three foundries, 117
  - modern (face), 33, 82-84-87, 90,161, 685
  - compared with old-style, 60
  - figures, legibility compared with old-style, 173
  - with old-style founts, 83
  - italic, 86-87, 90
  - lower-case, 162, 163
  - " Modern Methods of Book Composition,” 563
  - modern pica matrices, set widths, 72
  - Stephenson & Blake, 82
  - Modern type-designing, 120
  - modernized old-style, 84-87, 301
  - figures, 164, 172
  - illegibility, 164, 173
  - italie, 86, 87
  - Mohammedans, 184, 534, 540
  - Moliere, 358
  - monarch (Shanks & Sons), 350
  - Money signs, 45
  - Money-adding machines, cash registers, 338, 339
  - Mongolian, 557
  - Monks and friars, 682
  - Monograms, 43
  - Monoline former process, 209-10
  - keyboard, standard typewriter arrangement, 297,
  - 442
  - machine, 375, 442-43, 450, 572, LXXVII
  - assembler, 442
  - delivery of slugs, 443
  - distensible space-matrix, 230-31
  - distribution of matrices, 442
  - line-justification, 442
  - magazine, 442
  - matrices, arrangement of strikes, 442, 443
  - multiple-strike, 225, 227, 240, 297, 374, 442
  - disadvantages, 443
  - wear of alining surfaces, 443
  - matrix-hooks and stop, 442
  - mould, 266-67
  - height, 240
  - power and space required, 443
  - weight, 443
  - Monotype, vii, 281, 290-95, 375, 393-404, XLVII,
  - XLVIII, 413, 414, 417, 450, 451, 572, 689
  - caster, air-tower, 398
  - automatic cut-out, 401
  - break of tang, 13, 261
  - character wedge, 398
  - compressed air control, 394, 398-99
  - pressure, 399
  - operations of casting and delivering, 260-61
  - plunger-control of matrix-grid, 398-99
  - space-wedges, 400
  - speed, 401
  - type-carrier, 261
  - monotype class of machines, 281, 392, 393-420
  - XLVII-LVII, 689 '
  - 1 Monotype former process, 209
  - keyboard; A, B and C models, 290—93, 393-96 adapting for dictionary and tabular work, 292
  - composing in two or more faces, 292, 395-96
  - marking keys for altered lay-out, 293, 396
  - bell, warning, 395
  - C model, 393-96, XLVII
  - D and DD models, 293-95, 396-401 alteration of lay-out, 396-98 standard typewriter key arrangement, 293
- p.715 - vue 883/901
- - 716
  - INDEX.
  - Monotype keyboard—continued.
  - DD model, 401, XLVIII
  - composing matter wider than galley, 401
  - two editions simultaneously, 401
  - green line-justification keys, 395, 398
  - red line-justification keys, 395
  - space-key, 290
  - unit-counting mechanism, 394-95
  - units in set-widths, rows, 290
  - line-justification, compared with hand justification.
  - 401
  - drum and pointer, 394-95
  - maximum error, 401
  - maximum space-width (ri-point), 401
  - Monotype matrices, 221, 260
  - conical hole for positioning, 260
  - large-work, 221
  - lay-out of book or news founts, 396, 397
  - jobbing founts, 397
  - set-widths of characters of different styles, 395
  - rows, 396-97, 398
  - matrix, low-quad, low-space, 229, 240
  - matrix-grid, 260, 262, 396-400
  - or die-case adjusting mechanism, 402
  - travel in x and y, 398, 400
  - matrix-holder for casting sorts, 402
  - pivotal typecaster, 307
  - metal-pot, 276
  - minimum space-width (ri-point), 401
  - multiple, 401
  - perforations, 398
  - space-wedges, setting, 398, 400
  - unit of increase of space-width, 400-01
  - Monotype mould, 259-62
  - axis vertical, 262
  - body-slide or blade, 259-60
  - cross-block or slide, 260
  - differential wedges for setting body-slide, 259-60,
  - 395, 400-01
  - distance-piece, 261
  - height, 240
  - large-work, 403
  - low-quad, 261
  - normal body-slide or blade, 261
  - supplemental blade, 261
  - nick-wire or nick-pin, 261
  - water-cooling, 259
  - Monotype perforated ribbons, 393, 398, 399
  - direction of travel, 398
  - function of holes, 394, 398-99
  - no perforation for em quad, 399
  - small capital value, 401
  - two produced simultaneously, 401
  - used again, 401
  - power required, 401
  - pump, 276
  - punch-cutter, 205-06, VIII, 207
  - quads not square, 398
  - set widths of extended and condensed faces, 396
  - proportionate increase, 398
  - units, 290
  - sorts-casting, 401-04
  - locking of normal wedge, 402
  - type specimens, 90, 91, 301, 358, 393, 471, 575, 669
  - “ Monthly Magazine” statement unfavourable to
  - stereotyping, 477
  - Moon, phase signs, 38
  - Mores, Edward Rowe, 32, 569
  - morland face specimen, 91
  - Morland, Sir Samuel, adding machine for money,
  - 338
  - “ Morning Post,” 331
  - Morris, William, 186
  - Morse tape-record, 100, 690
  - type, 100
  - Mortality tables, 375
  - Motor-car numbers, illegibility of, 168
  - Mould, 17, 18, 19, 241-70, 308, 677
  - adjustment for set, 241, 244-45, 247, 259-60, 262
  - allowance for contraction in, 219
  - Autoplate, core-cylinder, 479
  - Bellows or Electric compositor, 269-70, 440
  - Bhisotype, 358-62
  - body-slide, Bessemer’s, 272
  - case-hardening steel, 270
  - combination (character and space), 245
  - Dougall Linotype, 435
  - Dyotype, 262-64, 414
  - early hand, 241-43
  - experimental, costliness of, 270
  - fringe on type, 241
  - | Mould—continued.
  - fusible, 247
  - gate of, 19, 241, 305
  - Grantype, 268-69, 450, 452
  - Graphotype, 405-06, 409, 412
  - height of, 219, 240
  - Intertype, 437
  - justifier’s, 242-43
  - Mould, Linotype, 264-66, 428, 430, 433, ^Av
  - recessed slug, 432
  - Monotype, 259-62
  - large-work, 403
  - low-quad, 261
  - nick-wires or beads, 241, 243, 245, 259, 20T
  - fitting, 243
  - Oddur sorts-caster, universally adjustable, 49
  - type-bar machine, 464-67
  - overheating, 241
  - parts, complex form, 270
  - hardening, 270 . g
  - interchangeable for different body-sizes, 24
  - pivotal, closing, 305
  - halves, 243-44
  - operation of casting, 304-05
  - parts, 244-45
  - using Wicks matrices, 311
  - quad (2-em and over), 245, 308
  - Rototype, 356
  - space (and quad), 244, 308
  - stereotype, storage of, 472
  - Stringertype, 417-19 ,
  - tolerance for type-metal tightness, 241, 243
  - Typograph, 447 . „ , ,
  - Moulds, Linotype, two placed diametrically, 43
  - Moulds, pivotal, number required, 245, 308
  - water-cooling, 241
  - wax, for formers, 215
  - Wicks rotary caster, 246-49, 311-14
  - construction, 246-49
  - water-cooling, 246-47, 314
  - Mould-wheel, Linotype, 264, 428,430
  - interrupted-revolution driving-gear, 2°0
  - Victorline, release-gear, 437
  - water-circulation, 266, 436
  - Wicks rotary caster, 246-49, 256, 312-15 258 angle-base segments, 246, 249, assembling, 249, 257-59
  - division-plate for, 248, 251-57 257
  - dowels and forcing-screw holes, 240, drilling jig, 248, 258 foundation ring, 247-49, 257 hard segments, 246, 248, 258, 259 soft segments, 246, 248, 258 speed of, 314
  - Movable matrices, 3
  - type, 3, 4-5, 6
  - Movements in pivotal typecaster, 303-04 ,16 218,
  - Moxon, Joseph, vi, ix, 15, 32,34, 55, 193,2 ’ 566, 575 6.218
  - “ Mechanick Exercises,” vi,ix,i5, 55, 193, 21 ’
  - output of hand typecaster, 301
  - typefounding and type-metal, 15
  - Moxon’s arrangement of cases, 283, 284
  - Multa terricolis lingua Coelestibus una, 669
  - Multiplate, 480-81, CI
  - sequence of operations, 481
  - time compared with cycle of Linotype, 481
  - Multiple-justification, 401, 410, 412
  - Multiples of decimal sizes, 72
  - Multiple-strike matrix, disadvantages of, 443
  - Multi-plunger pump delivery, 275
  - Grantype, 277, 278 179
  - Multiplying a printing-surface by Autopiato 4 stereotyping, 472
  - Multispace, Cox, 344
  - Music composition, 103, 562-64 262
  - compared with mathematical formule, 3
  - diamond type specimen, 563
  - fount, 102-03, 562-63
  - Gregorian, 563
  - plain-song, type specimen, 563 564
  - tonic sol-fa, composition similar to tabular, J type specimen, 564
  - type, 102-03, 562-64, 686
  - Mutton quad or em quad, 55
  - m w, German Fraktur, 168, 170
  - roman, 164
  - M W, German Fraktur, 170
  - Myopia, causes of, 157
- p.716 - vue 884/901
- - INDEX.
  - N
  - N, 286151, 1951 364. 396
  - n and m, 55
  - Nail heads, 113
  - Nama or Khoi-Khoi, 535
  - Names of type-sizes, number of points preferable, 68
  - National Institute for the Blind, 107
  - Natural history signs, 45
  - “ apjects ; type specimen, 110
  - Nautical Almanac,” 455
  - Neck or beard, IT, 14, 669
  - edle-point micrometer depth-gauge, 233
  - Nehemiah, 367
  - Neolithic pebbles, inscribed, 532, CIX
  - Neostyle short type, 98
  - “ estorian character used for Syro-Chaldaic, 543
  - Never let it then be said, that a British Public ...”
  - New forms of letters (Cattell), 190
  - TAW York, typefounding in, 302
  - NewMegssie Raixpournal," 327
  - - ewspaper, length of column, 69
  - offices, stereotyping in, 215, 472, 477-82
  - ewspaper-printing from loose-type and slugs compared, 571
  - espapers in two languages in parallel columns,
  - Newspaper-work, 477-80
  - nB, 149, 152, 153, 155
  - Proposed new letter for, 153-54
  - NS.52, 154
  - donas c’i sube kiel specimenon ... 80
  - Nicholas and Ackermann, 406, 615, 645-48, 856
  - Nicholas V, Pope, 6
  - N ichols, Arthur, 30, 566
  - Nick, n, 14, 669
  - —SuPDlementary, 14, 81
  - ickel and steel matrices, 216
  - wimatrix-strike let into copper, 216
  - NicKing plane, dressing and, 21> 88> 81
  - SKS at back of type for distribution, 352-54, 369
  - segments of Wicks machine, 258
  - NicK wire or bead, 259, 261, 306
  - Hlepce, Joseph Nicephore, 484-85
  - xDoint specimen, 575
  - NPPle, freezing of metal in, 273, 274-75
  - NoRL, Rate, 274, 304, 307
  - Nomenclature for hieroglyphic characters, 525-26
  - .standardization of, 689-90
  - xmPareille, Fournier, 62, 64, 65, 70
  - Nomparelle, 71
  - Nompariglia, 71
  - ''on-distensible space and quad matrices, Grantype,
  - 230
  - Linotype, 229
  - Monoline, 229
  - Nor_e Stringertype, 229, 230
  - "on-dressing break, 12
  - Non matrices, 217
  - nokerning italic, specimen, 81
  - nonpareil, 58, 59, 71, 122, 144, 386
  - cost per pound, 301, 302
  - Fergusson’s, 67 °
  - or 6-point specimens, 90, 92, 471
  - Payment for composing, 160
  - standard a-z length, 122
  - type enlarged, 123
  - a speed of casting, 308
  - Vopbareille, Didot, 70, 145
  - N°nPlus-ultra, 71
  - wormal mould-blade, Monotype, 261
  - Nos,r2charles R" automatic line-justifier, 380, 638
  - Not-non-rubbing matrices, 19
  - Novelseads and signs, music, 102-03, 563
  - Novelty of design of type face, 118-20
  - N°w (according to Custom) is Half a Pint of
  - Sack • • 15
  - << Now i11 the setting of Space with Word . . •” 357
  - * of Introductions sooth be it Said .."V
  - Nozzle of pump, 274, 304
  - heated by burners, 273
  - electrically, 273, 405
  - —contact with mould, 274
  - in molten-metal circulation, 275, 309
  - N R, German Fraktur, 170
  - Nsibidi script, 530-32
  - n U, 160, 162-69
  - blackfriars, 166, 167
  - effect of serif in, 164
  - German Fraktur, 168, 170, 171
  - modern, 162, 163
  - old-style, 164, 165
  - sans serif, 168, 169
  - Nu, 181
  - Nuernberger-Rettig, break, 12-13, 308 casting machine, 307-08, XVIII depth of strike, 219 matrix, 220 patents, 608, 650-52, 654, 659
  - Number of machines for casting and composing in use, 572
  - matrices required in a foundry, 571 moulds required for ordinary work, 245, 571 points preferred to names, Didot, 68
  - Number sign, 46
  - Numbering forwards or backwards by machine, 336
  - Numbering hand-stamps, 335
  - lines of hieroglyphic inscriptions, 524
  - machines, 101-02, 333-36, XXX
  - American, 335, XXX
  - bank-notes and bonds, 333-35, 336
  - blanks an aid to forgers, 334
  - blur caused in carrying, 334
  - carrying in inverted order, 334 different arithmetical series, 335 eleven-division wheel, 334 groups and series, 335 large-wheel, 333 plunger-operated, 333 preliminary inking, 336 preventing plunger from printing, 333 substitution of signs for blanks, 334 type-high, I01, 333-36 typewheels, IO1, 102 drop-cipher, 102, 334
  - Numbering-wheels, 337
  - Nun, 180-82
  - Nut quad or en quad, 55
  - n y, German Fraktur, 168
  - 0
  - 0, 28, 29, 127, 151, 364, 396
  - Oblique tint, 488
  - Occhio di mosca, 71
  - Oddur sorts-caster, universal mould, 469
  - type-bar machine, 464-69, XC, XCI
  - change of fount, 465, 466
  - early model, 464
  - keyboard, 464
  - line-justification, 466-67
  - matrix-disk, 225-26, 239, 240, 464, 469
  - electrotyping, 225, 469
  - mould details, 464-67
  - sequence of operations, 466-67
  - slug cast on to short type, 468-69
  - previously cast swaged on to short type, 467-68
  - speed of typecasting, 468
  - oe, 150, 153, 286
  - CE, 150, 286
  - of, 146, 148-50, 286, 369
  - Off their feet, type, 342, 682
  - Offset-printing, reversed type for, 108
  - Ogilvie, F. G., C.B., 461
  - “ Oh that my words were now written ! ” 515
  - Oil-bath for tempering steel, 258
  - Oil-film, source of error, 204
  - Oilstone slip, 199
  - Ojibbeway, 560
  - Oklahoma, two language newspaper, 560
  - Old and new type mixed, irregular effect, 571
  - old gothic, 34
  - Old printing, microscopic examination, 7
  - Norse; Runic character, 539
  - old tudor black, I
  - old-face, 82, 33, 83, 84-87
  - italic, 86-87
  - Wilson’s, 32
  - | Oldfield, A., 576
- p.717 - vue 885/901
- - 718 INDEX.
  - old-style, 31, 32, 84-87, 161, 392, 685
  - antique, 15, 32, 84-87, 90, 321
  - bourgeois specimen, 392
  - Cheltenham, 84-87, 91, 453
  - 8-point, 453
  - italic, 121
  - ro-point, 453
  - compared with modern, 6o
  - 18-point specimen, 158, 159
  - II-point specimen, 159
  - face, 83, 90
  - figures, legibility, 83
  - 5-point specimen, 321
  - founts with modern figures, 83
  - lower-case, 162, 184, 165
  - modernized, 84-87, 90
  - Monotype, 471
  - pica matrices set widths, 73
  - Miller & Richard, 82, 90
  - 6-point, Monotype specimen, 471
  - venetian, 283
  - Omissions in this work, 570
  - on, 146, 148, 149, 286
  - 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,—283
  - " One-man ” composing and individual typecasting
  - machines, 408-12, 415-20, 451-52
  - Optical enlargements of type, correction of, 214
  - O Q, blackfriars, 168, 175, 177
  - German Fraktur, 170, 177, 178
  - modern, 168, 174, 177
  - old-style, 168, 174, 177
  - sans serif, 168, 176, 177
  - or, 148, 149
  - Orange light, 189
  - Orders, British, 48
  - Foreign, 48
  - Ordinary arrangement of cases, 283-85
  - matrix, 220
  - Oriental compositor, 543
  - founts, 22, 568
  - Originality of design of characters, 118-20
  - Originating a new character, 36
  - Orissa, use of Oriya script, 553
  - Oriya or Uriya, specimen, 553
  - Ornamental dashes, 112
  - Ornamented type injurious to sight, 189
  - Ornaments, 109
  - combination, 109-10
  - os v W xz I, 14,127
  - “ Out jumps a type . . ." 301
  - Outline hieroglyphic, 548
  - initials, 93
  - Output in ens per hour, Bellows, 441
  - Dow compositor, 365
  - distributor, 354
  - Hattersley compositor, 327
  - distributor, 350
  - Linotype, 429-30
  - Monotype caster, 401
  - Oddur caster, 468
  - Paige compositor, 386
  - distributor, 386
  - Stringertype, 417
  - Thorne, 370
  - Typograph, 449
  - Unitype, 373
  - Wicks compositor, 332
  - of hand-caster, English (Moxon), 301
  - French (Fournier), 301
  - plate-caster, Autoplate, 479
  - Autoplate Junior, 480
  - Multiplate, 481
  - Overscored letters and figures, 39, 676
  - Overscoring in Russian writing, 180
  - Overset cut-out, 401, 416, 427, 437, 450
  - indicator, 346
  - measurement, Stringertype, 417
  - Oversetting the line and reducing spaces for line-
  - justification, 344-49
  - Oxford Dictionary, 689-90
  - Oxford University foundry, 568-69
  - press, 41
  - Oxide, adhesion to nipple, 274
  - cause of stoppage of jet, 273
  - P
  - p, 123, 195
  - Paciolus, 193
  - Pages, composed, 682-83
  - Pages (of type) weight of, 144
  - Paige compositor (Paige composing, line-justigign,
  - and distributing machine), 376, 3
  - XLII-XLVI, 596, 626, 638 _ 300
  - automatic line-justification, 384-85, 387, 3 ‘
  - broken type removed, 383-84
  - cam mechanism, 381
  - capital expended on, 386
  - description by Charles E. Davis, 378-86
  - diagram of operations, 382-83
  - distribution, automatic, 384, 387, 390
  - edge-upon-edge, handling type, 378
  - insertion of leads, 383, 385, 390,80
  - keyboard, 298, 299, 300, XLVI, 378, 388, 3 9
  - chord production, 298, 378, 388
  - letter from D. H. Fletcher, 390-91
  - line-key, 385,389 , , whole
  - machine parts made at right angles ana "
  - inclined, 383 dition,
  - Mark Twain’s suggested phonograph ad
  - 380
  - maximum error in line-justification, 385
  - North line-justifier, 380 - Dodge,
  - official description abstracted by P. -
  - 387-90
  - operations of, 381-85, 387-90
  - output, 389
  - patent difficulties, 376, 390-91
  - power required, 386 86
  - Pratt and Whitney Co.’s machine, 380, 3
  - purchase by Mergenthaler Linotype, 380
  - record of ems and lines set, 389, 39°
  - speed of composition, 386
  - distribution, 386
  - time-lock, 385
  - trial at “ Chicago Herald ” office, 381
  - weight, 386
  - word and line indicator, 300 388
  - word moved consecutively forward, 3837 0
  - Typesetter, early machine for agate, 378
  - Palestina, 71
  - Palestine, Didot, 70
  - Fournier, 62, 70
  - Pali, 534 . 484,
  - Palmer, E., engraving through wax-coating,
  - 583
  - Palmyrene type specimen, 548
  - Panjabi or Sikh, 551
  - Pantograph, Barr, for formers, 209, X
  - for former moulds, 208-11, 213
  - wood type, 196 _ 210
  - Pantographs, American Type Founders Co
  - Paper, accuracy required by hard, 7, 218
  - colour and quality, 157, 191
  - early use in Europe and China, 7-8
  - hand and machine made, 7
  - high-surface or art, 7, 191, 218
  - light reflected by, 157 477
  - stereotype process. See Stereotype, 472741
  - thickness of, 7
  - Paper-fastener, 113
  - Paper-tower, Monotype, 294, 401
  - Papier mache. See Flong, 3, 215, 282
  - matrices, 217
  - Papyrus, 8
  - paragon, 58, 59, 70, 71
  - Paragraphs, composed, 675
  - Parallel and diagonal lines, illusion, 25
  - ruling of glass screens, 487-88
  - Parangona, 71
  - Parangone, 71
  - parangonnage, le, 40
  - Parchment, 8
  - Parel, 71
  - Parentheses, 40, 85, 87, 283, 672
  - Parijs Kanon, 71
  - Paris Exhibition (of 1878), 318
  - parisienne, Didot, 70, 145
  - Fournier, 62, 70 matrices’
  - Parkes, A., process for electro-depositing
  - 484, 583
  - Parmigianina,71 g
  - Parsees, 549 . Line, 33°'
  - Pascal, Blaise, inventor, of adding mac 455 . ,00-91 Patent difficulties, Paige compositor, 370, 39
  - of Johnson, H., logotypes, 146 specifications, body-size used for, 59 Patent Type Foundry (Shanks’s), 67 Patents, American and British, early, 57°s, 579 application, serial and reissue numb > anticipations, 580
- p.718 - vue 886/901
- - INDEX.
  - A
  - O
  - pica, cost per pound—continued.
  - Hebrew face, 533
  - moderrea-Zepoage/S analytical engine, South
  - Kensington, 460 matrices set widths, old-style, a-z length, 73 matrices set widths, ™ 363 533
  - or 12-point specimens, 90-92, 363, 5 PICA quad matrix, 228 pica sizes of various foundries, 58 standard. 58, 59
  - St a-z lenoth. 72, 73, 122, 144
  - type enlarged, 123 speed of casting, 30° . o
  - 36, 137, 138, 139, | Pickpocket or Mackie compositor, 328
  - P1mmuffity of stereotype plates from, 472
  - Pied de Toi, English equivalent, 66
  - piEdeasNegkasinscription at> 530, CVIII
  - PiercenE F*7 Runch-cutter, 205-06, VIII, 207
  - details,2206 602-05, 607-21, 640. 64 3-45,
  - P 648-49 5852, 864-38, 860-61,,$626666
  - “ nilins Pelion upon Ossa - • 14°
  - piett" Ed., discoveries at Mas d Azil, 532
  - Pinesecy, /3P80955605.3607, 645, 648, 653
  - Pink paper harmful to sight, 19
  - Pigenedkad tor tasking. 271
  - Pitman, VIeentgieckureo compositors, 529
  - PivurtbeSaStetyactIonco? Xiery knives,306
  - Patents—continued.
  - British and foreign, xi
  - consecutive numbering, 578
  - division of, 580
  - inconsistency of patent offices, 578-79
  - largest sum paid for, 454 rotational yearly numbering, 578
  - Pattern style or ch’iai shu, 497 Payment of compositors, 88, 160
  - P^, 181
  - pearl, 59, 70, 71, 144
  - cost of, per pound, 301 . V
  - Pebbles, marked, of Mas d’Azil, 532, C1A Peculiarities of characters, 28-29 Peculiars, 35, 129, 131, 133, 134, I
  - 140, 142, 672
  - Pedigree signs, 47
  - Per cent sign, 46, 672
  - Per mil sign, 46, 672
  - Per sign, 46, 672
  - Perforated card control, 328
  - paper control, 327 , . Aesetting.
  - ribbon (or strip) control applied to typesetting.
  - . 328
  - ribbon control, Dyotype, 413-15
  - Electrotypograph, 413
  - Graphotype, Goodson, 404-05
  - improved, 408
  - Lithotype, 463
  - Mackie, 363, 393
  - Monotype, 393-95, 398-99, 401 399
  - functions of perforations, 394, 8
  - Tachytype, 404
  - Wheatstone, 100 .
  - proposed use for distributing, 37°
  - small capital value, 401 . 8
  - used in direction reverse to composing, 39 ‘ 4
  - same direction as composed, 415
  - Perforating pangerseoperated by compressed air.
  - Perlon Y Fur 30012?8howea by cm quad, 185, 671
  - Periodicals, 551
  - Perla, 71
  - Persians and Medes, 547
  - Peshito character, 543
  - Petit, 71
  - Petit-canon, Didot, 69, 70
  - Fournier, 61, 62, 64, 70
  - Petites capitales, accents, romains, 134
  - Pelites capitales, romains, 134
  - Petit-parangon, Didot, 69, 70
  - Fournier, 62, 70
  - Petit-romain, Didot, 70, 145
  - , Fournier, 61, 62, 64, 65, 70
  - Petit-texte, Didot, 69, 145
  - p. Fournier, 62, 64, 65, 70
  - prtrarch handwriting, italic, 34, 95
  - Aadelphia, Centennial Exposition, 355
  - p/YPefounding in, 302
  - pranthropic association signs, 48
  - p^hPpines, use of Bisaya character 559 »
  - 575s’ John, “ Wanderings in the World of Science)
  - Philosophie, Didot, 70, 145
  - pournier, 62, 64, 70
  - noenician, resemblance to Runic, 547
  - type specimen, 547 .
  - nonetic Association, International, 36
  - “ type specimen, 37
  - phonetic Journal,” 103, 155
  - nonetic printing, specimen, 37 , , 266.
  - system of Chinese writing or kuan hua tzi mu, 5°0 509,512
  - sonograms, 54
  - - monograph, 573
  - suggested’by Mark Twain as addition to Paige
  - Ph Compositor, 380
  - Pl, .POS-OI, 300
  - pnotO zinc line process, 486
  - Photographic machines, 282, 470
  - methods, 470, 573
  - printing, 2
  - .Production of screens, 488
  - Psheng, ^ 48
  - pica Canon 709, 70, 71, 122,144
  - pica, cost per pound, 301, 302
  - ems per foot, 58
  - Fergusson’s, 67
  - Bruce, 302
  - Church, 302, AV1 XVII
  - Davis, setting up,306072
  - ihr wing-out, 306, XVII
  - dwell varying with body-size, 304
  - evolution of, 301-02
  - hand driven, 302-04, AVI
  - invented in England, 3
  - Nukenberber2Rett70,307-08, XVIII
  - output, 308 -VI
  - power driven, 3°2-04 X
  - .. pSS $90829r3630%,9%, * 89. 156, 195,
  - ..3".' $10175176to be observed • ” 156
  - plain-song notation, 503
  - Plane (for type), 20-22
  - bearding, 22, 81
  - dressing, 20-21 R
  - kerning, 21-22,81 38
  - Planets, greater, signs, 38
  - telescopic,
  - planimeter, 161 nicking backs of type, 352
  - Panins prankirr former mould, 209
  - "^^-"
  - making piaster cast 475-6
  - temperature of baking,47
  - trimming the plate, 47
  - 1 piaster-faced flong proceunaana etched, 484
  - ^nug^^^^^^^ a transparent engraving.
  - zokkyninaniead.vnorogtate. ”'" xcu
  - EUTooTe AuTCSRaVER, 480
  - hand-casting, 478,
  - Muteeinadeomthatrix, 482
  - tubslang“aatrimming, 482
  - PlateccosttEkeolypes, storage of,1,2
  - Playing-cards, 94 of working length, 273
  - Plunger, immersion v .
  - PTnOerzP WOnOtEpE’Caster, controlling ma,1“'8" ’
  - ke3bSa?&, operated by compressed air, 394 395
- p.719 - vue 887/901
- - 720
  - INDEX.
  - Pneumatic tyre, 108
  - Poids approximatif de 1,000,000 caracteres en kg, 145
  - en grm. par cm.*,—145
  - des espaces en grm. par cm.2,—145
  - Point, common line, 124
  - Point, decimal, 39, 671
  - Point, Didot, 66, 676
  - Fournier, 64
  - Point, line and plane setting, 206
  - Point sizes, 59
  - standard, 59, 60
  - in mm., 60
  - system, American, 60
  - applied to hieroglyphic type, 523
  - Didot’s, French, 66
  - Fournier’s French, 60-61, 62-66
  - in British Colonies, 60
  - in United States, 60
  - Shanks’s (decimal), 67
  - Point, title line, 124,126
  - Points or punctuation marks, 35,128-43,189,322, 671
  - Chinese, 502
  - on quarter-era, 40
  - suggested replacement by spaces, 189
  - Pole, Dr. W., 460
  - Police de 100,000 caracteres, 134, 135
  - Police traps, 341
  - Political signs, 48
  - Polychromide Company, 494
  - Ponctuations italiques, 135
  - romains, 134
  - Poole, Moses, 477, 583, 585
  - Pope Leo X, Letter of Privilege, 96
  - Nicholas V, 6
  - Port, length of in caster pump, 273
  - Portuguese proverb, 355
  - Positioning formers, 206, 207
  - matrix, 19
  - strike of matrix, 19
  - Possibilities of the future of news dissemination, 574
  - Postmarking machine, 337
  - Potassium dichromate and gelatine, 485
  - Power required ; Bellows compositor, 441
  - Bhisotype single typecaster, 320
  - Compositype sorts-caster, 311
  - Graphotype, new model, 412
  - Kastenbein compositor, 329
  - Linotype, 429
  - Monoline, 443
  - Monotype, 401
  - Paige compositor, 386
  - Pulsometer compositor, 333
  - distributor, 352
  - Stringer line-justifier, 345
  - Stringertype, 417
  - Typograph, 449
  - Unitype, 373
  - Wicks compositor, 332
  - Wicks rotary caster, 316
  - Practical man, the, 117
  - “ Practical Manual of Typography,” 576
  - “ Practice of Typography, The,” 56,156
  - Pratt and Whitney Co., 380, 386
  - Prayer books, 68
  - Prayer, The Lord’s, 562
  - pre, 148,149
  - Preface, xi-xii
  - Presentation of matrix, ordinary, 305
  - straight-line, 306
  - Press for plate-casting, 474-75
  - Pressed-steel furniture, 115
  - Pressure in Linotype pump, 277
  - Wicks pump, 275
  - Prevention of freezing in nozzle, 309
  - Prices of English type per pound, 301
  - French type per pound, 302
  - Primitive foundry methods, 565
  - Primrose League, 48
  - “. . . printed in a book.” 515
  - Printed line, length of, 156, 157, 158
  - Printer, early; inking conditions of, 218
  - Printer’s case, 283-88
  - arrangement of English, 283-85
  - French, 287
  - German, Fraktur, 287, 288
  - Russian, 287, 288
  - Earl Stanhope’s, 286
  - Printer’s devil, 218, 380
  - Printers their own typefounders, 301
  - Printing, 4-9
  - hand of, 215
  - Printing—continued.
  - in China, vi, 4
  - Europe, 5-6
  - Korea, 5
  - - ink, v, 8, 9
  - sixteenth and seventeenth century, 122
  - upon clay, vi, 4, 529, CVII
  - using Chinese syllabic system, 503
  - “ weak and misty style of—,” 156
  - xylographic, vi, 5, 6 for
  - Printing-surface may not always be necessary
  - spread of ideas, 570
  - Printing-surfaces, v, 1-3, 4-7
  - anastatic, 2
  - aquatint, 2
  - dry-point, dry point ebarbe'e, 1
  - electrotyped, 3, 494
  - embossed in thin metal, 3,100-01, IV
  - engraved; etched, 1
  - glyphographic, 484
  - graphotype process, 3
  - half-tone, 2
  - intaglio, 1-2
  - lithographic or smooth, 2
  - mezzotint, 1
  - photographic processes, 2, 470
  - photo zinc line process, 486
  - secondary, 4
  - simple zinc line, 485
  - stereotype plates, 3, 471-82
  - transfer line process, 486
  - typographical, defined, xi, 2-3
  - etching, 3
  - zincographic, 2, 485-90 0
  - Printing-telegraph, automatic, short typebars, 3
  - t ype, 101 i Engi-
  - Proceedings, American Society of Mechanical
  - | neers, 487
  - Institution of Mechanical Engineers, 59
  - Royal Society of Arts, 487
  - Process block, 2, 483, 487—90, 491-94, CIII 4g9,
  - Process blocks, coarseness of screens compareo,
  - CIII
  - Litho-block, 493, CV
  - three-colour, 491-94, CIV
  - Process for making formers, 126, 208-13 ss,
  - Product of legibility coefficient and mean blacs
  - 161
  - Progressive insertion of spaces for line-justinca
  - 343
  - Prohibition sign, 51
  - Prony, logarithms, 455
  - Proofs, 683
  - Proper-name sign, Chinese, 502
  - Proportions (in fount), 126
  - Prototype, 65 . rastet»
  - Provision for access to mould; pivotal typec
  - 304-05
  - Pseudo-scientific signs, 38
  - Psychological Laboratory of University of
  - 188
  - “ Psychology, British Journal of,” 27
  - Pulling off, break of tang, 13 , 6o3,
  - Pulsometer composing machine, 332-33, xaa,
  - 605, 610
  - guide-plate, 333
  - keyboard, 290
  - type-releasing mechanism, 332
  - distributor, 300, 350, 352, 353, XXXII, 605,
  - channel bridge-pieces, 352, 353
  - groups of three set-widths, 352
  - Pump, Autoplate, 479
  - Bellows or Electric Compositor, 278
  - first application to typefounding, 271
  - for early casting machine, 17-18, 271-72, 273
  - Grantype, 277-78
  - Graphotype (Goodson), 278, 405
  - justifier’s, 273
  - Linotype, 277
  - cut-out, 427
  - Monotype, 276
  - Multiplate, semi-automatic, 480
  - multi-plunger, Grantype, 277, 278
  - nipple-plate; nozzle, 274 . rnbusti00
  - problems analogous to those of internal com
  - engines, 273
  - spring-operated, 271, 273, 277
  - supplementary, 275
  - Typograph, 447
  - valves, 272
  - Victorline, 277-78
- p.720 - vue 888/901
- - INDEX.
  - 721
  - Pump—continued.
  - Wicks rotary typecaster, 275-76 working pressure, 273, 275, 277 Pump-plunger, action of, pivotal caster, 305
  - Bellows, 439
  - immersion of working length, 273
  - Linotype, 277, 428
  - Lumps, multi-plunger, delivery, 276 ‘ Punch,” 59
  - Punch, hand of, 215
  - hand-cut, with accent punch, 195 lining micrometer for measuring, 233, 234 machine-cut, 202, V
  - Punch-blank, 200, 207 Punch-cutters’ wages, 194 Punch-cutting, 24,193, 194-200-208, 680 angle of bevel, 204 automatic cutter-grinder, 205, VII bifilar microscope, 203, 204, 214 by hand,194 by machine, 197—208 correction for wear of rocker-plate, 203 machine, Barr or Linotype, 204-05, V, VI
  - Benton, earliest, 196
  - Benton-Waldo, 196-204
  - chisel or roughing cutter, 198, 199, 204 chuck, 199, 201, 206-07 cost of, 199
  - followers, 197,198,207-08 formers, 122,196-98 gimbal-plates and rings, 198 Grant-Legros, 206-08, IX interchangeable lathe heads, 198, 199 milling cutter, 199-202 .
  - Monotype or Pierpont, 205-06, 207, vin operations, 196-99, 200-02, 215 point cutter details, 202-04 ratio of reduction, 215 rocker sharpener, 199-201, 202-04 setting-screw divided-wheel, 199, 193_215
  - Punches, vi, 7, 19, 99, ror, 103, 107, 108, 193-215, 216-18, 234-35, 680 cost Of, 194 embossing, ror errors due to hardening, 204 tor accented sorts, 195 . non-dressing matrices, breakage of, 217, 218 jointer or stone-facer for, 194 Justified, 204, 235 machine-cut, striking, 234 unch-justifying vice, 204 unch-struck matrices, 216-18, 680 ,
  - Punctuation marks; proposed replacement spacing, 189 "nkturen, 136, 137
  - by
  - 0
  - gu,i%s"36283,284
  - ouador quadrat, 55, 678
  - sadder, automatic. Bellows, 440
  - Quad notype, 432
  - ouadding-out. Bellows, 440
  - -matrix. Bellows, 233
  - Crantype, 230
  - sinotype, 229
  - Monoline, 227
  - Monotype, Iow-quad, 223
  - ordinary, or pivotal, 228
  - Quads ringertype, 229-30
  - low em and en, 55
  - of ueMono ype _ nd Dyotype, 261, 262
  - soenequal set and body, 398, 406
  - 2. 2 „ j’ Compressed for line-justification, 374
  - Qual and 4-em, 55, 678
  - oualtty of paper, legibility, 191
  - quarter pm set (middle space), 55, 74, 679
  - Quick (corps 2) leads, 125
  - Change of Bellows trimming-knives, 440
  - Linotype fount, 432
  - magazine, 430, 432-33
  - mould, 432
  - mould-wheel driving pinion, 432
  - - trimming-knives, 432
  - 'ypograph knife-block, 449
  - matrix-fount, 448-49, LXXXIII-LXXXIV
  - Quota mould, 449
  - ^^
  - Quotes, double, 671, 690
  - single, 671, 690
  - R
  - r, 151, 284, 396
  - Rabbinical character, 545
  - Rack, carrying fount of matrices, Typograph, 448-49
  - LXXXIII-LXXXIV
  - Radicals, Chinese, classification and distribution of
  - characters by, 501
  - Radix, 39, 40, 41
  - index figure of, 41
  - Rail way, rail-way, railway, 690
  - Railway gauges, 239
  - sign, 44
  - time-tables, 108
  - “ Raised work of Metal engraved ...” 1
  - Range of body-sizes, Bellows, 441, 442
  - Compositype sorts-caster, 310
  - Foucher, 309
  - Graphotype, 412
  - Linotype, 432
  - Monotype, 402
  - Thompson, 311
  - line-lengths, Linotype, 432
  - Ransonnet, three-colour process, 491
  - Rapid typecaster, 274, 308-09, XX
  - Foucher, 309
  - Rate of delivery of plates, Autoplate, 479
  - plate-casting, Autoplate Junior, 480
  - plate-finishing, Autoshaver, 480
  - Rate-value setting for recording machine, 340
  - Ratio of distances moved by hand in distribution and
  - composition, 287
  - face-area to type-section (blackness), 161
  - height to length of line or stroke, 119
  - re, 146, 148, 149, 286
  - I Reader (printers’), 146, 683
  - Reading copy during casting, Typograph, 448
  - long lines, change of focus of eye in, 157
  - operations of eye and brain, 188-89
  - time spent in, 156
  - Reale, 71
  - Receiving-telegraph, Hughes, ror
  - Recessed slug, Linotype, 266, 432, XIV
  - Recess-mould, Linotype, 266, 432
  - Record of ems set and of lines, 389-90
  - Recording and totalizing money, cash registers, 339
  - fluctuations of temperature in refrigerating
  - chambers, 341
  - machinery, classification of, 337
  - evolution of, 341
  - machines adding and calculating, 337-39
  - area, 339-40
  - automatic and hand-operated, 341
  - length, 339
  - mass or weight, 340-41
  - money, 339
  - partially automatic, 341 •
  - time, 341
  - value (rate x weight), 340
  - volume, 340
  - 1 . operations in railway signal-cabins, 341
  - Records in plate production, Autoplate, 480
  - Recurrence or frequency, 160,161,163,165,167,169,
  - 171, 173, 181, 187
  - Red, effect of, in three-colour process, 493
  - on eyesight, 189, 191
  - hand of Ulster sign, 47
  - Red Indians, syllabic alphabet used by, 560
  - Red keys, Monotype line-justification, 292, 395
  - ! Reduction in size of fount by stereotyping, 472
  - Redundant serifs, 178
  - Reed, Sir Chas. & Sons, specimen, 367
  - Reed, Talbot Baines, 565, 570, 575
  - Reference signs (peculiars), 35, 72, 73, 78, 129, 131,
  - 133, 134, 136, 137, 138, 139, 140, 142,284-88,322,
  - 672-73
  - Reflection and illumination; legibility, 191
  - Reforming the Alphabet, savings effected by, 153, 154
  - Refrigerating chambers, record of temperature variation, 341
  - Register, bottom and top, part of mould, 245
  - j Register of colour-printing blocks, 490
  - Regius Company, 381 .
  - Re'glement de la Librairie, Article —61
  - Reglet, 55, 113, 679
  - Regulator for melting-pot temperature, 413, 432-33
  - 3 A
- p.721 - vue 889/901
- - N
  - INDEX.
  - Relative appearance of type-series enlarged, 122
  - Release of type effected by stereotyping, 471-72
  - Relief engraving machines, three-dimensional, 205
  - of formers, height of, 212
  - printing-surface, 2
  - embossed thin metal, 3
  - Relief-valve ; Wicks pump, 275
  - Repetition of line, Bellows, 440
  - Typograph, 448
  - Reports; Legal, Scotland; Parliamentary, 59
  - “ Repository, Chinese,” 5
  - Reproduction of original typographic surface by
  - stereotyping, 471
  - Resch, 182
  - Resemblances between characters, 160-85
  - Resin, 485
  - Response sign, 43
  - Restoring controllers to initial setting, Graphotype,
  - new model, 410
  - moulds to size, Wicks caster, 258
  - Restrictions on letter founders, 567
  - printers, 567
  - Resultant character, 186, 187, 188
  - centre of gravity of, 187, 188
  - Return of surplus metal to pot, 273
  - Reversed composing machine for distributing, 350
  - type ; early patents for, 108
  - specimen, 108
  - Revolution cut-out; large-work pivotal caster, 308
  - Revolving screen; three-colour process, 492
  - Rheinlander, 71
  - Ribbon, perforated; see perforated ribbon control,
  - 393-95, 398-99, 401, 404-08, 413-15, 463
  - two sizes of perforation, 408, 414, 415
  - Richel, Bernhard, of Basel, 146
  - “ Riches and honour acquired by ways that are not
  - right . . ." 495
  - Right ascension sign, 38
  - “... Right-Rogues and offend in any Forme,” 82
  - Rignoux, M., 127
  - Road sign, 44
  - Roads, printing on, 341
  - Roberts (Sharp, Roberts & Co.), 327
  - Robijn, 71
  - Rochester recorder, 341
  - Rocker sharpener; punch-cutting, 199-204
  - Roger I, Count of Sicily, 8
  - Rogers, Henry H., 381
  - Rogers, John R., 444, 454, 593-94, 597, 599-602,
  - 605-06, 609, 614-16, 620-21, 632, 634-35, 639,
  - 641-44, 646-65
  - Impression Typograph, 454
  - Roller and roller-box of pivotal typecaster, 304
  - diameter, influence on cam-form, 304
  - grooved for tabular-rule slugs, 224
  - roman accents, 35,128,130, 133, 134, 137, 138, 139,
  - 140, 676
  - antique, specimen, 565
  - capitals, 35, 84, 85, 128, 130, 132, 134, 137, 138, 139,
  - 140
  - figures, 35,85,128, 130, 132,135,136,137,138, 139,
  - 140, 142
  - founts, 82, 84-85, 90-92, 568
  - fractions, 128, 130, 132
  - Roman, inscription, type specimens, 536
  - roman lower-case, 35, 128, 130, 132, 134, 137, 138, 139,140
  - ligatures and points, 84, 85
  - points, 35, 128, 130, 132, 134, 137, 138, 139, 140, 141,142
  - small capitals, 35, 128, 130, 132, 134, 138, 139
  - romanization of Chinese language, attempts at, 498,
  - 501
  - Ronaldson face, 91, 358
  - Roneo, short type, 98
  - Roosevelt, Theodore, 560
  - Root indices, Chinese, classification of characters by,
  - 501
  - Root signs, 39, 674
  - Rosetta Stone, 516-17, 529, CVI
  - Rotary photogravure printing, 494
  - press, 481
  - Rototype, 355-56, XXXIV
  - depth of strike, 240
  - disk-matrix, 225, 226
  - hand-justification, 356
  - keyboard, 355
  - operations of, 355-56
  - polygonal matrix-roller, 355
  - Roughing or chisel tool, punch-cutting, 198, 199,
  - 204
  - Router for wood type, 195-96
  - pantograph applied to, 196
  - Routing large interspaces of process plates, 486
  - plate at head and foot, Autoplate, 479
  - Rowe Mores, The Rev. Edward, 32, 569, 575
  - Rowotype, 449-50, LXXXV
  - assembly of matrices, 450
  - banks of matrix-bars, 449
  - casting operation and cut-outs, 450
  - detachable typewriter used as keyboard, 45°
  - typewritten copy made during composition, 45°
  - Royal Printing Office of France, 519, 523
  - Society of Arts, proceedings, 487
  - Society’s standard foot, 67
  - Rozar, Colomon, 413, 601, 603, 645, 648
  - Rubber bands with raised characters for dating,
  - 337
  - signature stamps, 6
  - type, 89, 99
  - Rubbing, 19, 677
  - Rubbing-file and rubbing-stone, 19
  - ruby, 59, 71, 72, 122, 144
  - Rule of thumb experimenting, 304
  - Rule-mould, III, 677
  - Rules, brass, in, 679
  - cheque,110-11
  - “ Rules for Compositors and Readers,” 690
  - Ruling glass screens for half-tones, 487-89
  - Runic, 533, 539, 568
  - alphabet, 538-39 6
  - Runner notches, plaster stereotyping process, 47°
  - Running hand or hsing shu, 497
  - Russian alphabet, 142-43, 538
  - bill of fount or scheme, italic, 127, 143
  - roman, 127, 142
  - character used in Slavonic countries, 537
  - characters, 42, 142-43, 180
  - illegibility in combinations, 179-81
  - legibility, possibility of improving, 180
  - corps 12 (Monotype), specimen, 393
  - handwriting, 180
  - height-to-paper, 56
  - italic, 143, 180
  - lay of case, 288
  - r x, German Fraktur, 168
  - S
  - S, 28, 29, 151, 190, 396
  - f, abolition of, 162
  - S, long, 162, 185
  - 8, doric italic, 41
  - Sacred heart sign, 43 .
  - Sacred Edict, extract from, Chinese braille, 513-
  - new Chinese syllabary, 508
  - saint-augustin. Didot, 69, 70, 145
  - Fournier, 61, 62, 64, 70
  - St. John face, 83-85
  - St. John Typobar, 454, 594, 601, 634, 643
  - “ . . . Saint Paul saith,” 4
  - Sale’s translation of the Koran, 421
  - “. . . Sallad Oyl provided for each Workman
  - drink . . .” 15
  - Samaritan, type specimen, 547
  - Samech, 181, 182
  - Samuel II, 515
  - San Agustin, 71
  - San Francisco, Chinese printing in, 103
  - Sanford, Dr., 157 355,
  - sans, sans serif, sanserif condensed, 30, 91, 241.
  - 685, 690
  - illegibility, 168-69, 172-73, 176-77
  - italic, 83, 86-87, 91
  - popularly believed very legible, 164
  - resemblance to incised lettering, 29
  - roman, 29, 30, 83, 84-87, 91, 161, 292
  - Sanskrit alphabet, 550
  - character of Brahminic books, 534 . ring,”
  - Savage, William, “ Dictionary of the Art of Print
  - 2I8> 575 .
  - Saving effected by reforming the alphabet, 154
  - two new letters for th, ng, 153, 154. wicks in distance hand moves over keyboard, ’
  - compositor, 290
  - time by dry-flong process, 480
  - effected by Autoplate, 480 flong-mould made by mangle-press, 480
  - weight, tubular-plates, 482
  - possible by reforming German alphabet, 155
- p.722 - vue 890/901
- - INDEX
  - 723
  - Saxon characters, 566, 568
  - “ Say, Verily if men and genii were purposely assembled . . .” 421
  - Sbididi script, 530, 531
  - Scale of points, Fournier’s, 62, 65
  - drawings and formers, 215
  - sch, 155
  - Scheme (bill of fount), 126
  - abnormal demands, 126
  - for 100,000 type, Bohemian, 127, 140
  - French, 127, 134, 135
  - German Antigua, 127, 137
  - Fraktur, 127, 136
  - Greek, 127, 141
  - Hebrew, 127, 143
  - Italian, 127, 138
  - Russian italic, 127, 143
  - Russian roman, 127, 142
  - Spanish, 127, 139
  - Welsh, 126, 132, 133
  - 1,000,000 type, English language, 126, 128-31
  - deviation from, 126
  - exclusive of spaces, 126, 128-29
  - inclusive of spaces, 126, 130-31
  - sorts or imperfections, 126
  - Scheutz, Edward and George, 462, 586
  - difference engine. See difference engine, 460-62, LXXXVIII-LXXXIX
  - Schimmel, F., casting and composing machine, Rototype, 355-56, XXXIV, 607, 611-12, 617, 620, 656, 661-62
  - Schleichst, 77
  - Schnarchst, 77
  - Schoeffer, Peter, vi
  - School-books, a-z length of type, 160
  - gauge of m, 157
  - influence on eyesight, 157
  - leading, 157, 158-59
  - length of line, 157, 158
  - spacing, en-quad, between words, 160
  - type for British Association Committee recommendations, 158-59, 160
  - Dr. Cohn’s recommendations, 158, 160
  - Schooling, W., weight-recording machine, 340-41, 610
  - Schuckers, J. W., 444, 454, 627, 635 wedge-space, 454
  - Science Museum, South Kensington, 338
  - Scientific works, 126
  - Scott, Mr., Manager, “ Chicago Herald,” 381
  - Scratched figures, 39, 676
  - Screens, coarseness of, compared, 489, CIII
  - for half-tones, ruling, 487, 488
  - produced photographically, 488
  - Screw-heads, 113
  - Scribal abbreviations, 44
  - shorthand, 146
  - script, anglaise in France, 96, 686
  - bracketed kern, 97
  - cast on Graphotype, 413
  - script, imperial, face, 279
  - type sections, 96
  - special for end of line, 96
  - Scriptures, 471
  - Scrolls, III
  - Scudder, W. S., 442, 596, 599, 604, 634, 636, 639-40, 646-47
  - se, 146, 149, 286
  - Seal character or chuan shu, 496
  - Seals engraved, used for signing, 6
  - Sears, Charles, 454, 595-97, 599-601, 634-37, 640-42
  - Second elevator, Linotype, 428, 431
  - Secondary printing-surfaces, 4
  - Secret society signs, 48
  - secretary (type face), 34
  - Sectional mould, Linotype, 264
  - Secunda, 71
  - Securing tabular plate on press, 482
  - sedanoise, Didot, 70
  - Fournier, 70
  - Segments of Wicks mould-wheel, 246-49, 257-59 angle-base, 246; 249, 257 hard, 246, 248, 258, 259 soft, 246, 248, 257
  - Seguoia, the Cherokee Chief, 560
  - Selector holes in Bellows matrices, 233, 439
  - needles spring-operated, 414
  - Self-spacing type, 77-78, 342
  - used for Graphotype, 404
  - Semaphore, type specimen, 99
  - Semicolon, 185, 283, 671
  - Semicylindrical and tubular plates compared, 482 plate boring or shaving machines, 478, 480,
  - XCIV, C
  - plate-casting, 477-81, XCIII, XCV-XCIX, CI metal-furnace and pump, 478, XCIII
  - plates, 477-81, XCII idle period of, 481 semi-nompareille, Fournier, 70 Seminonpareille, 71
  - Sennacherib, clay cylinder, 529, CVII
  - Sensitiveness of retina for letters and words, 189 to colours, 188-89
  - german and latin characters, 189
  - Separation of spacers, Linograph, 437
  - Sequence of colours in printing three-colour process, 492
  - operations, Bellows, 437-39
  - Linotype, 427-29
  - Multiplate. 481
  - Oddur, 466
  - pivotal typecaster, 304-06
  - Stringertype, 416
  - Series, convergent, 457
  - Series, lining. 124
  - of type faces, 121-22, 123
  - ' Serif, 11, 24, 29-33, 670
  - absence of, effect on legibility, 164 classification of faces by, 29-33 exaggerated, 33
  - influence of, 29-33 ,
  - S ervice des A ntiquites del’ Egypte, 522
  - Set, 11, 670
  - and body of quad unequal, Graphotype, 406 Monotype, 398
  - widths of modern pica, 72
  - multiples of one-sixth of body, 77-78
  - old-style pica, 73
  - points, figures, and fractions, 74
  - range of, Graphotype, 406
  - spaces, 55
  - Setting accented-letter formers to standard line, 207
  - mould for spaces, Graphotype, 412
  - screens, half-tone, 492
  - Setting-jig, ring and screws, Wicks, 257
  - Setting-up stick, 20
  - 7, 8, 9, 0,-284
  - Seventeenth-century printing, 122
  - “ Sganarelle," 358
  - sgcx, 190
  - sh, 148,152
  - SH, Sh, 152
  - Sha, 181
  - Shade, defined, 493
  - “ Shadow of the Bush, The,” 530
  - Shakespeare, 453
  - Shank or stem, 11
  - Shanks & Sons, P. M., 30,31, 34,283, 304, 350
  - depth of strike, 219
  - music type, 102
  - typecasting machine, 304, 378
  - Shanks’s Patent Type Foundry, 67
  - point system, 66, 67
  - decimal division of nonpareil, 67
  - Shaving machine for former moulds, 208
  - Shaw, William A., 9
  - Shearing-off break, 13, 14
  - Sheet-brass formers, 208
  - Shift-lever, Linotype, 431
  - Shoe for holding down the mould-blade, Monotype, 261
  - Short type, dovetailed, Unitype-bar, 464 for duplicating machines, 98-99 formed to fit type-bars, 463-69 proposed by Mazzini, 464
  - Shortage of length of line as composed, 365
  - Shorthand, 103, 127
  - printing, use of logotypes for, 155
  - type; specimen, 103
  - words engraved, 103
  - Shot, tetrahedral pile of, 456-57
  - Shrinkage of paper, 65
  - Shtcha, 181
  - Siamese, 555
  - Sicily, Roger I. Count of, 8
  - Side-wall, 10, 11, 670
  - Siemens, C. W., 584, 586
  - I Signal-cabins, recording operations, 3-4
  - Signal light for line-length alarm, Bellows, 437, 438
  - Signalling, 99
  - Signature stamps, rubber, 6
- p.723 - vue 891/901
- - 724
  - INDEX.
  - Signatures, 675
  - Signes, 134
  - Signs, 37-54
  - algebraical (mathematical), 39, 674-75
  - almanac (astronomical), 38
  - archaeological, 44, 674
  - aspects (astronomical), 38
  - asteroids (astronomical), 38
  - astrological, 38-39
  - astronomical, miscellaneous, 38, 673
  - botanical, 45, 673
  - cartographical, 44, 675
  - archaeological, 44
  - caution (roads) English, 51
  - French, 51
  - commercial, 35, 46, 672
  - conventional, 37
  - coronets (heraldic), 47
  - crosses (ecclesiastical), 43, 673
  - crowns (heraldic), 47
  - direction ; route-book, 50
  - ecclesiastical, 43, 673
  - engineering, 47
  - geometrical (mathematical), 39, 674
  - guide-book, ideographic, 53
  - helmets (heraldic), 47
  - heraldic, 47
  - ideographic, 37, 53-54
  - Linnaeus (botanical), 45
  - lunations (astronomical), 38
  - masonic, 48
  - mathematical, miscellaneous, 39 674-75
  - measures (weights and), 47
  - medals, 48
  - medical, 43, 674
  - metal, 49
  - meteorological, International, 46, 673
  - miscellaneous, 46
  - miscellaneous, 51
  - money, 45, 674
  - music, 102, 562-63
  - natural history, 45
  - Orders, British, 48
  - foreign, 48
  - pedigree, 47
  - philanthropic associations, 48
  - political, 48
  - pseudo-scientific, 38-39
  - scribal abbreviations, 44
  - secret societies, 48
  - solar system (astronomical), 38
  - sports, 51
  - symbolic, 52
  - travel, 49-50
  - weather phenomena (meteorological), 46
  - weights and measures, 47
  - wreaths (heraldic), 47
  - zodiacal (astronomical), 38
  - Sigurdsson, Oddur V., 464, 597-98, 609-10, 613, 637,
  - 641, 653, 655-56, 658
  - Sikh or Panjabi, 551
  - Sikkim, 554
  - Silver, sign, 49
  - Silvio, 71
  - Similarity of appearance required in different bodies, 122
  - form of characters, 160-85
  - Simple sounds represented by letter combinations, 152
  - zinc line process, 485-86
  - Simplex composing and distributing machine; line-
  - justifying attachment, 367-68, XXXIX
  - “ simplicity of the compositor and a pair of cases,” 318, 573
  - Simultaneous composition in two different sizes of type and two different measures, Monotype,
  - of duplicated editions, Monotype, 294, 295
  - printing of three colours, 493
  - Sindhi, 541
  - Sine curves for silent cams, 304
  - Single-letter, Typograph, 444-48
  - matrix, Typograph, 447
  - Single-magazine, Linotype, 424, LX, 430
  - Single-quotes, 671, 690
  - Single-type, advantages of, 416
  - and slug-casting compared, 450, 451
  - caster to supplement Wicks machine, 311,
  - 318-19
  - Sinhalese or Cingalese, 554
  - Siphons, 51
  - “ Sith wise men have Written that it is in V 7
  - Heaven . . .” 146
  - 6-8, legibility, 164, 172, 173 173
  - blackfriars, modern, old-style, sans serif, 17*, 6-line pica, 70, 71 ting.
  - 6-point or nonpareil, temperature of metal for cast 5’
  - 276
  - specimens, 92, 471
  - type, speed of casting, 308
  - Sixteenth-century printing, 122
  - Sizes of body of type ; inch, 59, 70-71
  - Corps, 70 -
  - type; British Association Report, 157, 158-6
  - Dr. Cohn’s recommendations, 158 for children’s school-books, 158-60
  - skeleton antique, 90, 271
  - “skilful to work . . . also to grave . . ." 483
  - Skipping of carrying gear at high speed, 335
  - Slavonic character, ancient form, specimen, 538
  - Slide, Monotype, 259
  - Slip, part of mould, 245
  - Slope of italic, 81, 670
  - Slotted galley for type-slicer, 316, 317
  - Slotted nick-wire, pivotal mould, 306 070,
  - Slug, Bellows (or Electric) compositor, 233, 26
  - XI, XIV cored or hollow, 270, 442
  - trimming-knives, 439 trices,
  - cast from a line of assembled and justified mat 281, 422
  - Grantype, 269
  - Linotype, arabic, delivery, 431
  - finished, 266
  - recessed, 266, 432, XIV
  - short lengths from sectional mould, 264
  - trimming-knives for, 265-66
  - untrimmed form of, 265
  - Monoline, 266, 267
  - delivery, 443
  - Oddur, cast on to short-type, 468
  - swaged on to short-type, 467, 468
  - Typograph, recessed foot, 267-68
  - smooth sided, 448
  - trimmed, 267
  - trimming-knives, 268
  - untrimmed, 267
  - unequal contraction of cast, 468 157-42,
  - Slug-caster, Bellows or Electric Compositor, 4
  - XIV, LXXV, LXXVI
  - Dougall Linotype, 435-36
  - Grantype, 450-52
  - Intertype, 437, LXXIII
  - Linograph, 437, LXXIV 421-
  - Linotype, 222-24, 229-31, 2 6 4- 66, 294-90,
  - 435, 572, XIV, LVIII-LXXI ,19-43,
  - Monoline, 225, 227, 230-31, 266-67,
  - LXXVII, 450, 572
  - Rowotype, 449-50, LXXXV ,67-68,
  - Typograph, 13, 227, 228, 230-31, 232, %VIll-294-96, 375, 444-49, 450, 454, 572,
  - LXXXIV
  - Victorline, 224, 266, 297, 436-37, LXXI1 450,
  - Slug-casting compared with single-type casting,
  - 451
  - machines, scope of, 451 60-70
  - Slugs, advantages for newspaper work, 451, 4 9
  - Slugs (clumps) body sizes of, 55, 114 cored for tying up, 114 for foot-lines, 114
  - or clumps, 679, 689
  - Slugs produced telephonically, 573 . Grapho
  - single-type for electrotyping matrix-block, —
  - type,407
  - smooth sided, advantages of, 442, 448
  - 36-point, 432, 442
  - used for newspapers, 571
  - Smalian, Hermann, 55-57
  - Small bodies, type-metal for, 15-16
  - greater a-z length in ems, 121-22
  - small capitals, roman, 35, 671
  - capitals of smaller body used, 207
  - small pica, 59, 70, 71,122,144
  - cost per pound, 301, 302
  - specimens, 59 loi-point, 59, 60 . 11 bodies
  - Small sorts, disproportionately large in smai 121, 122, 123 gauge of, 157 preponderance, 121 . 118
  - Smallness of total error in type reproducti 580-61 Smith, Prof. R. H., compass or CV alphabet,
- p.724 - vue 892/901
- - INDEX.
  - 725
  - Smith s arrangement of cases, 283, 285
  - Smoke impression, 195, 680
  - Smooth printing-surfaces, 1, 2
  - Society of Book Printers, German, 124-25
  - German Type-Casters, 125
  - Soft-metal quads for line-justification, 374
  - Solar system signs, 38
  - Solidus, 39, 41, 674
  - “ Some of the methods proposed are spring and rubber spaces . . .” 342
  - Somerset House, 339
  - “ Sometimes when we ponder over the fate inventors . . .” 577
  - Soprasilvio, 71 •
  - Sorts-caster, Compositype, 310, XXIII
  - Graphotype, 412-13, LIV
  - Monotype large-work, 402
  - ordinary range of, 401-02
  - Oddur, 469
  - Stringertype, 417
  - Sounds for which no letters exist, 190
  - Souricieres, 341
  - South Kensington Museum, 459, 460, 490
  - “ South Wales Daily News,” 327
  - Southward, John, 575, 576
  - Space and quad matrices, Dyotype, 414
  - Space between lines of type (leading), 156-59
  - Space lines; brass, 113
  - Space maximum and minimum, Monotype, 401
  - Space-band, Linotype, distensible, 230-31, 427
  - Monoline, distensible, 230-31, 442
  - Oddur, 466-67
  - Stringertype, distensible, 230-31, 416, 417
  - Space-counting, Graphotype, new model, 412
  - mechanism, Grant-Legros-Maw line-justifier, 346
  - Stringertype, 417-19
  - Space-disk, Typograph, distensible, 230-32, 444,
  - 446-47
  - Space-key, Linotype, 432
  - Monotype, 290
  - of
  - Paige, 298-300
  - Pulsometer composer, 290, 291
  - Stringertype, 418
  - Typograph, 446
  - Space-magazine, Linotype, 428
  - Space-matrices, Bellows, 438, 441
  - Stringertype, 417
  - Space-quads for milling down, 345
  - Spaces, 55, 679
  - and quads, 126
  - cast and inserted, 344
  - compressible, 342, 343
  - cut from wood or metal, 344
  - direction of movement in Paige compositor, 383-84
  - em quads, heights, Stringer line-justifier, 345
  - used temporarily, 345
  - en quad, 160, 679
  - filling interspaces with congealable fluid, 344
  - fixed widths suitable for substitution, 343-44, 364,
  - 365, 384-85
  - folding-wedges, 343
  - hair, 55, 77, 78, 131, 679
  - low, Monotype, 261
  - middle, 55, 77, 131, 679
  - multiple, Cox Multispace, 343-44
  - music, 103
  - number of, in a line, 77
  - ordinary quads machined, 344
  - progressive insertion of, 343
  - range of size in line-justification, 343, 401
  - rising of, 342
  - self-spacing, 77-78
  - set widths of, Dow compositor, 365
  - Empire compositor, 364
  - spring, 343
  - temporary, 343
  - thick, 55, 77, 131, 679
  - thin, 55, 77, 131, 679
  - weight of, 144
  - with deep foot-nick, 346-47
  - Space-shifter, Linotype, 428-29
  - Space-wedges, Monotype, 400
  - Stringertype, 416
  - Spacing, 76-78
  - Monotype, maximum error, 400*01
  - or line-justification, 77
  - tolerance in, 77, 364
  - Spades, 51, 94
  - Spanish accented sorts, 139
  - Spanish, bill of fount or scheme, 127, 139
  - Specific gravity of type, 145
  - I Specific legibility (defined), 161
  - arabic, 183
  - blackfriars lower-case, 167
  - capitals, 177
  - devanagari, 183
  - figures, 173
  - German Fraktur capitals, 177
  - lower-case, 171
  - greek capitals, 177
  - greek lower-case, 181
  - Hebrew, 181
  - modern lower-case, 163
  - old-style lower-case, 165
  - Russian, 181
  - sans serif lower-case, 169
  - Specifications, patent, 59
  - Specimen-book, 570
  - “ Specimens of Tables, Calculated, Stereomoulded
  - and Printed by Machinery,” 461
  - Spectrum, continuous, example of three-colour
  - process, 492, CIV
  - solar, Ducos Duhauron on reproducing, 491
  - Speed of cam-shaft, Linotype, 429
  - clutch-shaft, Linotype, 429
  - composing, Bellows or Electric compositor 441
  - Dow compositor, 365, 366
  - Hattersley, 327
  - Linotype, 429, 430
  - Paige compositor, 386
  - Thorne, 370
  - Unitype, 373
  - Wicks, 332
  - distributing by hand, 317
  - Dow distributor, 354
  - Hattersley distributor, 350
  - Paige, 385-86
  - machine shaft, Paige compositor, 385
  - operating, Grantype, 452
  - operator and of Dow compositor, 366
  - of Linotype and of single-type casters compared
  - 450 o
  - perforating, teletypograph, 413
  - plate-casting, Autoplate, 479, 480
  - Autoplate Junior, 480
  - Multiplate, 481
  - typecaster, American Type Founders Co.’s
  - automatic, 310
  - pivotal, 308
  - typecasting, Bhisotype, 362
  - Electrotypograph, 413
  - Foucher, 309
  - Graphotype, 406
  - Monotype, 401
  - Oddur, 468
  - Stringertype, 417
  - Thompson, 311
  - typewriter dependent on length of typebar, 300
  - portion of Lithotype, 463 ‘3
  - Speed-limit sign, 51
  - Spirals, logarithmic, 211
  - Splash-prevention, Intertype, 437
  - Split fractions, 39, 674
  - Sport signs, 51
  - " Sportsman,” 370
  - " Spread into plates ... the work of the work-
  - man . . . 471 -
  - Spring-controls of pivotal caster, 304-05
  - Spring-propelled piston for pump, 17 271-72
  - Sprue or jet of short-type, Oddur, 467
  - Square brackets, 40, 85, 87, 283 672
  - Square, knife-edge, 248
  - Square tint, 488
  - Square-base Linotype, 424, 430
  - Squares of natural numbers, 455-56
  - Squirt machine, 302
  - st, 148, 152
  - ST, St, 152
  - Stainsby, Henry, 107
  - Stamped steel furniture, 115
  - Stamps, rubber signature, 6 -
  - “ Standard Alphabet,” 36
  - Standard face, 89, 121
  - height-to-paper, American, 56, 57
  - British, 14, 57
  - Continental, 56
  - Didot,66
  - Fournier, 56, 61
  - Frankfort (on the Main), 56
  - French, 56, 66
  - Haase, 56
  - l Leipzig, 56
- p.725 - vue 893/901
- - INDEX.
  - Stereotyping—continued.
  - plaster of Paris process, 472. 474-76, 685
  - preparing forme for, 473
  - storage of plates or of moulds, 472
  - Stevens & Co., R. H., depth of strike, 219
  - Stockholm Academy, Scheutz machine, 46o-0 cha-
  - Stone inscriptions, grouping of hieroglyphic racters, 523-24, 527 -
  - lion with Hittite inscription, 530, CV111
  - Stone-facer or jointer, 194
  - Stool, part of mould, 245
  - Stoppage of jet of typecaster, 273 . 6
  - Stop-screw for body-slide, adjustable, Oddur, 4
  - Stop-wheel, axial movement, Oddur, 465
  - Straight tint, half-tone, 488
  - Straight-edge, knife-edge, 248
  - Straight-line presentation of matrix, 306
  - Strengthened modern face, 121 ,
  - Strengths, longest English indivisible word, 77
  - Strike of matrix, accuracy of, 218
  - preventing hollowness of face, 219
  - Striking chords on keyboards, Fowler, 374
  - Paige, 378, 388
  - Unitype, 298, 369
  - Wicks, 290, 331, 369
  - Striking-press, adjustment and weight of, 23,-I
  - Stringer line-justifier, 344-45, XXIX, 374, AS
  - use of two heights of em-quads, 345
  - Stringertype, 375, 415-20, LVI, LVII, 450
  - break, 13, 306
  - conditions compared with Linotype, 420
  - depth of strike, 416
  - distensible space matrix, 230-31
  - distributor-bar, 416, 419
  - keyboard, 297
  - . line-justifying, 415—16
  - line-measuring vice, 417
  - matrix, 224, 415-16 distribution, 419 notch for setting mould, 224, 262 thickness a multiple of set width, 416
  - measuring beam, 417, 418
  - mould, casting operation, 262 justifying-wedge, 417-19 V-notches in body-slide, 13, 262
  - 1913 model, 417-20 , n 417
  - non-expanding space matrices (1913 mode- 4 overset measurement, 417
  - oscillating matrix-guide, 419-20 power required, 4'17
  - quad matrix, 229-30
  - resemblance to Monotype, 392
  - safety cut-outs, 416
  - sequence of operations, 416, 418-20
  - sorts-caster, 417
  - speed of casting, 417
  - stop escapement, 418
  - two magazines, 419
  - type cast horizontally, 416
  - word-spaces, 417
  - Stroke, thickness of, 24
  - Struck matrices, 216, 680 , paying
  - Style of character, influence of method or -compositors, 160
  - Subfactorials, 40 e class
  - Successive casting of letters on monotyp machines, 392 differences, 456-58
  - Sucupira Smith, 453
  - Suffixes, 39, 673
  - Sumatra, use of Batta character, 558-50
  - Sumerian, ancient language, 529
  - Sung t’i or Sung dynasty style, 497
  - superieures, 135, 673
  - Superiors, 39, 127, 673
  - and inferiors, 39, 41, 673 166, 168,
  - Superposed drawings of type, 161, 162,164,
  - 170, 172, 174-76,178-80, 182 peculiar measurements of common ana -
  - areas, 161
  - Superstitions, 238, 273, 274
  - Supplemental mould-blade, Monotype, 261
  - Supplementary nick, 21, 127,669 cutting, 21
  - Swaging slug to loose type, Oddur, 467-02, 460
  - I Swedish Government, assistance to Scheutz, “chines
  - Syllabary for phonetic Chinese writing, be Syllabary, 498-514
  - Symbolic signs, 52, 53 s of the
  - “. . . Symbols and Abbreviations . . • -
  - I Case;” 34
  - 726
  - Standard height-to-paper—continued.
  - Russian, 56
  - inches, British and United States, 60
  - line, 123, 124, 126
  - American, 123, 124
  - American and English compared, 124
  - common line, British and United States, 124
  - German, 125
  - position of, 125
  - title line, British and United States, 124, 126
  - variation in relative position of, 124
  - Standard of fount scheme (m), 126
  - Standard point, 59
  - millimetre equivalent, 60-61
  - Standard typewriter key arrangement, Monoline, 297 key arrangement, Monotype, D and DD, 293 width of face, 88-89
  - De Vinne’s nomenclature, 89
  - Standardization, 459 of nomenclature, 689-90
  - Standards for height-to-paper, German, 56, 57
  - Stanhope, third Earl, 146, 149, 285-87, 338, 477
  - composing cases, 286
  - Star Chamber decree, of 1637, limiting type founders, 566, 567
  - Star-base Linotype, 430
  - Stars, 38
  - Star-wheel, Bellows or Electric compositor keyboard, 297, 438
  - Linotype, 427
  - Wicks compositor, 331
  - Statistics of characters, 128-31, 101
  - for solving cryptograms, 152
  - letters irrespective of case, 152 logotypes, 148-52
  - Steel letters and punches, 89, 101
  - type, 89, 421
  - typewheels, 89, 101-02
  - Stem or shank, II, 669
  - Stems, music, 103
  - Stenography, braille, 105-06
  - Step-by-step movement of distributor, 370
  - “ Stephens’ Ink ” labels, 483
  - Stephenson, Blake & Co., abbey text, 495
  - common line, 124
  - depth of strike, 219
  - patents, 625, 626
  - skeleton antique, 271
  - specimens, 32, 90-91, 146, 241, 355, 376, 495, 565
  - title line, 124
  - Stereo height-to-paper, 57
  - Stereo-matrix or impression machines, 690
  - Stereo-mould of massicot and glycerine, 476
  - Stereo-plate, 3, 471-82
  - of celluloid, 476-77
  - Stereoscopic two-colour prints, 493-94
  - Stereotype, 3, 215, 280, 286, 471-82, 581-667, 685
  - matrix-card, Scheutz difference engine, 461
  - Stereotype-matrix or impression machines, 280, 453-455
  - Stereotype-metal, Didot, 421
  - Herhan, 421
  - Stereotype-plate curved (or semicylindrical), 478, XCII
  - Autoplate for casting and finishing, 479-80, XCVI, XCVII
  - Autoplate Junior for casting, 480, XCVIII, XCIX
  - Autoshaver for boring or scraping, 480, C
  - combined metal-furnace and mould, 478, XCIII
  - machine for pouring from edge, 478, XCV
  - automatic boring or scraping machine, 478, XCIV
  - Multiplate for casting and finishing, 480-81, CI
  - operations in preparing, 478
  - flat, casting, 474-76
  - tubular, 481-82, CII
  - Stereotyping, advantages of, 471-72
  - “ Stereotyping and Electrotyping,” 576
  - Stereotyping compared with electrotyping, 494
  - definition of, 471
  - dry-flong process, 473, 480
  - flong or paper process, 3,215,217, 472—74, 476,477,
  - 478, 479, 480-81, 68 5
  - for newspapers, 472
  - impression of the forme, 471
  - invention of, 477
  - permits release of type, 471-72
- p.726 - vue 894/901
- - INDEX.
  - 727
  - Symbols or ideographic signs, 53-54
  - Syriac, Estrangelo character, 543
  - modern character, 543
  - or Aramaic, 543
  - Peshito character, 543
  - Syro-Chaldaic, Nestorian, type specimen, 543
  - systeme Didot, 66
  - Fournier, 64, 66
  - t, 28, 29, 151, 188, 364, 369
  - Table generate de la Proportion des Corps, 62—63
  - Table of sizes, Fournier’s, 62-63, 65
  - Tables, xix-xX
  - Tables; annuities,astronomical,trigonometrical, 455
  - of logarithms, 455, 471
  - Tabular and tonic sol-fa composition, 564
  - work, 40, 74
  - Tabular-rule slugs, 224
  - Tachytype (Johnson), 404
  - Tadpole, 301
  - Tags, printing on, 341
  - Tail-dot, 11
  - Take, 289, 678
  - Talbot, P. Amaury, “ The Shadow of the Bush,” 530
  - Talbot, W. H. Fox, use of potassium dichromate and
  - gelatine, 485, 585
  - Tamil, type specimen, 553
  - Tang, 10, 11-14, 19, 669
  - Tang-break, 11
  - Bhisotype, 359, 361
  - Davis, 12
  - Grantype, 13-14, 452
  - Mason, 12
  - Monotype, 13, 261
  - non-dressing, 12
  - Nuernberger- Rettig, 12-13
  - Stringertype, 13, 262, 417
  - Typograph, 13, 267-68
  - Tang-ejector, Typograph, 207, 268, 448
  - Tang-plate, Typograph, 267-68, 447, 448
  - Tang-slide, Bhisotype, 361
  - Monotype, 260-61
  - Tartar family of languages, 557
  - Taylor, logarithms, 455
  - Taylor, Taylor and Hobson, engraving machine, 238,
  - XIII, 596
  - Tears, 43
  - Technical vocabulary, 669-88
  - Tekst, 71
  - Telegraph, Government monopoly, 413
  - Telegraph, triplex system, 413
  - Telegraphic methods, limited scope in Great Britain,
  - 413
  - Telephone, 573
  - Telephonic circuit for microphone in punch-cutting,
  - 205
  - Teletypograph, speed of perforating, 413
  - Tellier, Charles, death of, 577
  - Telugu, similarity to Kanarese, 552
  - type specimen, 553
  - Temperature of molten metal, Monotype, 276
  - Wicks, 275
  - stereo-metal for casting, 474
  - regulator of metal-pot, Electrotypograph, 413
  - Linotype, 432-33
  - Temporary space-bars, Empire compositor, 364
  - space-matrix, Bellows compositor, 438
  - spaces, Dow compositor, 365
  - Tennyson, Lord Alfred, 350
  - 10-point old-style specimens, 158, 697
  - 10-pointspecimens, 24, 91-92, 121, 158, 193, 216, 301,
  - 350, 374, 453, 515, 565
  - 10-point type, speed of casting, 309
  - Tertia, 71
  - Test, lock-up, 116
  - Test type, 97
  - Testino, 71
  - Testo, 71
  - Tetrahedral piles of shot, 456-57
  - Text, 71
  - Text-books, 59, 339, 423, 571
  - half-tone blocks for, 489
  - Texto, 71
  - th, 146, 148, 149, 152, 153, 286
  - proposed new letter for, 153, 154
  - TH, Th, 149, 152, 153
  - Thakuri character, type specimen, 551-52
  - used in Chamba states, 551, 552
  - than, 149
  - that, 149
  - “ That printers of the future will be their own type-
  - founders ...”301
  - “ That shorthand is . . .” 103
  - the, 148, 149, 150, 298, 331, 369
  - “ the adversary at the gate.” 575
  - “ The application was filed in 1887 and was pending
  - eight years . . .” 376 . ,
  - " The distinctive characteristic of the Analytical
  - -Engine . . .” 321
  - “ The Expert,” 117,118
  - “ The influence of school-books on eyesight,” British
  - Association Committee’s report, 157
  - “ The Night Journey,” The Koran, 421
  - " The Practice of Typography,” 156, 576
  - “ . . . The Prynter hath Woes of his own enow ...” 1 “ The sad mechanic exercise,” 350
  - “ The setting of Type to Type . . .” 4
  - " The Times,” 59, 146, 147, 176, 316, 317, 325, 328, 329, 352, 477, 478, 480, 530, 571
  - Autoplate Junior and Autoshaver, 480
  - “ Foreign Intelligence,” 147, 151
  - 40,000th number, 576
  - “ leading articles,” 147, 151
  - “ Parliamentary Debate,” 147, 151
  - type required for printing, 477
  - “The Whale ” (Paige’s original specification), 390
  - “ Their office was to distribute.” 367
  - Theodolite, 251-54
  - eccentricity on division plate, 253
  - elimination of error in arc of, 254
  - Theophilus, 9
  - ther, 149
  - “ Therefore to proceed Methodically . . .” 216 Thermometer, mercury, with compressed nitrogen,
  - 276
  - Thick spaces, 55, 131, 679
  - Thickened hair-line, 178
  - serifs, 162
  - Thickness of former-shell, 208, 209
  - line, 119
  - stroke, 24
  - Thin spaces, 55,131, 679
  - 134-point old-style specimen, 159
  - 30-point specimens, 30
  - 36-point specimens, 31, 32
  - Thomas de Colmar calculator, 338
  - Thompson, D. B., compositor, 626
  - Thompson, D. B., distributor, 378-79, 589, 625
  - Thompson, John S., 301, 311, 321, 329, 342, 355,376,
  - 390, 392,450, 454, 463, 572, 576 579, 611, 642, 646,
  - 653-54, 660-61
  - Thompson (J. S.) matrix, 221
  - typecaster, 274, 309, XXIII, 311
  - interchangeable mould components, 31t
  - large-work matrices, 221, 311
  - range of type bodies, 311
  - speed of casting, 311
  - use of linotype matrices, 311
  - Thorne automatic distributor, coaxial cylinders, 352, 353
  - grooved cylinder used as magazine, 352
  - type nicked for wards of type-channel, 352, 353
  - Thorne composing and distributing machine, 367,
  - XXXIX, 368-70, 593—94, 600-01, 603, 625, 627, 629
  - breakage of thin sorts, 369
  - coaxial vertical cylinders, 367
  - keyboard, 369
  - line-justifier, 593, 598, 603, 631
  - positive type-delivery, 368
  - speed of, 369, 370
  - type nicked for wards in type channel, 367
  - Three-colour process, 491-94
  - accuracy of register, 491
  - dark-rooms for different colours, 491
  - Ducos Duhauron’s process, 491
  - effect of individual colours, 493
  - eosine and collodion used, 491
  - example, 492, CIV
  - inclination of screen rulings, 491, 492
  - light filters, 491, 492
  - order of printing, 492
  - rotary photogravure, 494
  - simultaneous printing, 493
  - three negatives taken simultaneously, 494
  - variables involved, 492
  - three-em quad, 55, 678
  - 3-5, legibility, 164, 172, 173
  - blackfriars, modern, old-style, sans serif, 172, 173
- p.727 - vue 895/901
- - Index.
  - 728
  - 3-line pica, 32
  - Three-magazine Linotype, 432-33
  - “ Through the looking Glass,” 108
  - Thumb-print, v, 113
  - Thurston, Dr. Robert H., 380
  - Tibetan, type specimen, 554
  - Tibeto-Burman group of languages, 554
  - Tickets, printing on, 335, 341
  - Tilloch and Foulis, stereotyping, 477, 581
  - Time for completing first plate, Autoplate, 479
  - recovery of steel for moulds, 259
  - of exposure, three-colour process, 492
  - Linotype and plate-casting machine cycles com-
  - pared, 481
  - required for change of face and body, Typograph, 449
  - cycle of operations, Typograph, 448
  - designing and constructing new casting and
  - composing machines, 571
  - spent in reading, 156
  - taken by type in setting in mould, 314
  - Time-lock ; Paige compositor, 385
  - Time-recording machines, 341
  - Time-recording stamps, clockwork and electro-
  - magnetic controls, 337
  - Timing mechanism for cooling, Autoplate Junior,
  - 480
  - Timmis, Walter S., Lithotype, 463
  - Tinn6 or Tenni, 560
  - Tinning electrotype shell, 484
  - Tint defined, 493
  - Tints, diagonal, oblique, square, straight, 488
  - tion, 148, 150, 369
  - “ Tipografia,” 576
  - " Titanic,” foundering of the, 480
  - Titchener, Oliver, 274, 592, 595, 600
  - Title-page, iii, 683
  - Titles, 883
  - Titling faces, alinement of, 126
  - type, 676
  - to, 146, 148, 149, 286
  - Tolerance in line-justification by hand, 77, 364
  - Monotype, 401
  - type dimensions, 75-76
  - Tonal marks, Chinese, 498, 502, 505, 510, 512
  - Tone (colour printing), defined, 493
  - Tones, Chinese, 502, 505
  - tonic sol-fa composition, 564
  - Tool grinder, automatic, for punch-cutting cutter,
  - 205
  - Toothless ratchet for set summation, 414
  - Top-cover of Wicks mould, 246-48
  - Tory, Geofroy, 194
  - Totalizing in recording machines, 339, 340
  - Town sign, 44
  - Tracing pin, pantograph, 213
  - Tractrix bearings for cutter spindle, 20
  - Trade catalogues, half-tone blocks, 489
  - Trade custom for supplying sorts, 127
  - height-to-paper, 57
  - of mould making, age of, 245
  - trafalgar or 2-line double pica, 58, 71
  - Transfer by lithography, directly and indirectly, 462
  - using perforated strip with line-justification
  - perforations, 462
  - line process, 486
  - prints, etching to desired depth, 485
  - to aluminium plate, Lithotype, 463
  - machines, 462-63
  - Lithotype, 463, XC
  - Transposition of figures, Vlacq’s logarithms, 471
  - letters on composing machines, 323
  - Travel signs, 49, 50
  - Treadle operated pump, 273
  - Trefoil, 51
  - Trick-track, 95
  - Trigonometrical functions of angles, 455
  - Trigrams, 152
  - Trimming curved plate, Autoplate, 479
  - Multiplate, 481
  - flat stereotype-plates, 476
  - former shells, 209
  - Monoline slug, 267
  - soft-metal quads after compression, 374
  - Trimming-knives, Bellows, 439
  - Linotype, 265, 266, 428, 429
  - Typograph, 268
  - Trip-controller, Graphotype, 409-12
  - triple-canon, Didot, 70
  - Fournier, 63, 70
  - Triplex system of telegraphy, 413
  - trisme'giste, Didot, 70
  - Fournier, 63, 65, 70
  - Tse, 181
  - ts’ao tzu or grass character, 497
  - Tube-railway stations, 24-25
  - Tubes for composing machines, filling, 316
  - Tubular plate, 481-82
  - boring and trimming, 482
  - casting-box, 481, 482, CII
  - machine-frame arrangement, 482
  - saving compared with semicylindrical, 482
  - slot for securing-clips, 482
  - tudor black, 90
  - ecclesiastical, 84, 85, 90
  - tudor face, specimen of, 533 f jaws
  - Turning-gauge ; construction of; inclination 01 J
  - of; graduations, 75, 678 Typo-
  - Turning of type for position and end for end, "
  - theter, 288
  - Twain, Mark, 103-04, 379-81, 495, 591
  - 12-point old-style, mean resultant character, 10/
  - specimens, 158, 159 . ,76
  - or pica, temperature of metal for castinggibility, type selected for comparison of letters, 1691-
  - 161 453,
  - specimens, 82, 84-87, 91-92, 158, 159 515
  - 22-point old-style specimen, 159
  - 24-point specimens, 33, 59 ,,
  - “. . . Twins for Likeness of feature . . •‘ 121
  - Twisting-off break, 12 ,02
  - Two processes of monotype class of machines, two-em quad, 55
  - key of Paige compositor, 300
  - Two-letter matrix, Linotype, 431, 433
  - Typograph, 446-49
  - 2-line brevier, 59, 71, 144
  - 2-line double pica or trafalgar, 58, 71
  - 2-line english, 58, 71
  - specimens, 30, 32
  - 2-line great primer, 58, 71
  - specimens, 30, 31, 32, 33
  - 2-line letter, Bellows, 440
  - Linotype, 429
  - 2-line letters, 93
  - 2-line paragon, 71
  - 2-line pica, 58, 59, 71
  - 2-line small pica, 58, 59
  - Two-magazine Linotype, 430-31
  - Twyer, nozzle made to resemble, 275
  - Type, 3, 4, 10, 11, 669
  - and spaces considered collectively, 126
  - braille, 104-08, 507, 509-14
  - bridge-section, 308
  - channels, capacity of, 384
  - collector, Paige compositor, 384, 385
  - comb, Grantype, 269, 452
  - after breaking off and closing, 270
  - commercially perfect, alinement, 7 6
  - face flatness, 75
  - height-to-paper, 76
  - parallelism, 76
  - position of face, 76
  - side-wall, 76
  - tolerances, 75-76 present
  - “ Type Composing Machines of the Past,
  - and Future,” 575
  - Type, cost of, per pound, 301-02
  - delivery-knives, pivotal caster, 306
  - description, 10-11
  - design, 24-33, 118-20
  - accurate inaccuracies, 24, 28-29
  - classification by form of serif, 29-33
  - Illusions, 24-28 .99 123
  - influence of body-size, 118, 120, 121,1
  - illusion on form of characters, 287
  - new, essentials of, 118-20
  - totally new letter, 36 . mposito
  - Type, direction of movement in Paige Co- -
  - 383-84
  - distribution by hand, 7, 316
  - dot, 10, 11
  - earliest movable, 6
  - edge-upon-edge in magazine, Paige, 378
  - ejecting in Monotype, 261
  - enlargements of, 123
  - Type faces, 82-120, 685-86
  - absence of standard nomenclature, 33
  - accuracy of, 116-18
  - a-z lengths of, 90-92
  - classification, 29-33, 82-83, 86-88
- p.728 - vue 896/901
- - INDEX.
  - O' N
  - Type faces—continued.
  - comparison of italic, 86-87 roman, 84-85
  - copyright in, 118 diminished, enlarged, narrowed, widened, 118 golden (Morris), 186 groups of, 82 illegibility compared, 177 influence of serif, 29-33
  - illusion on form of character, 28-29 initials, 93-94 interchangeability, 117 italic, 34, 98-96, 118 lock-up test, 116 music, 102-03 new design, 119-20 originating new, 118 reversed, 108 script, 96-97 series of, 121-22, 123
  - variation in, 120
  - sheared (italic), 118 “ The Expert,” 117 typewriter, 91, 97-98, 363 widths Of, 88-89
  - Type for backgammon, 95 chess, 94 dice, 95 dominoes, 95 draughts, 94 illustrating games, 94 playing cards, 94 the blind ; braille, 104-08, 507, 509-14 trick-track, 95
  - Type Founders’ Association, U.S.A., 60
  - Type furniture, metal for, 16
  - growing in steam-heated press, 473 hand of, 215 height-to-paper, 14, 55-57, 58, 61, 66 hollow, cast on Graphotype, 406 individual or movable, 6 leads, metal for, 16 line-braille, 106-07 line-casting metal, 15 mixed from three foundries, 117 music, 102, 103, 562-64
  - nicked at back for automatic distribution, 352 367, 369, 370
  - off their feet, 342
  - on smaller body for loose accents, Greek, 127 perfect, selection of by Paige compositor, 384 point, 59
  - system, 57-61
  - removal of broken, in Paige compositor, 383 reversed; example of, 108
  - for offset printing, 108 saved from wear by stereotyping, 472 self-spacing, 77-78, 342 semaphore with designating sign, 99 sizes, British Association Report, 157, 158-59
  - Dr. Cohn’s recommendations, 157, 158, 160 for school-books, 157, 158-59 small bodies, metal for, 15 unnecessary multiplication of units, 64 space-lines, brass, 113 steel, 89, 421 tang, 10, 11-14,19, 669 tolerance in parallelism, 69 typewriter face, 91, 97-98, 363 weight of, 144-45
  - Didot, 145 Wicks, 14, 116
  - 0 i
  - Type-bar machine, 451, 463-69, 689
  - Calendoli, 464
  - Composite Type-bar, 464
  - Oddur, 464-69, XC, XCI
  - Unitype-bar, 464
  - of steel, sprung open, 463
  - Type-bars, short length for automatic printing j telegraph, 300
  - Type-carrier, Empire distributor, 352
  - Monotype, 261
  - Type-case or magazine, Paige compositor, 385
  - Typecaster; Automatic of American Type Founders
  - Co., 309, 310, XXII
  - Barth, 309, 310, XXII
  - Bottger, 309, 310
  - Bruce, 302
  - Church, 302, XVI
  - compared with Autoplate, 479
  - Compositype, 309, 310-11, XXIII
  - I Typecaster—continued.
  - Davis pivotal, 306-07, XV11
  - Foucher, 309, 310
  - Kustermann, 309-10 XXI
  - Meray-Horvath-Rozar, 413
  - Nuernberger Rettig, 307—08, XVIII
  - pivotal, 302-08, XVI, XVII, XVIII, XIX
  - rapid, 308-09, XX
  - Thompson, 309, 311, XXIII
  - Wicks rotary, 10, 311-16, XXIV
  - Type-Casters Society of Germany, 125
  - Typecasting and setting unit-by-unit, 355
  - by hand, 16, 301-02
  - machine, 301-16, 318-20, 677
  - Typefounding, 15-23, 677
  - Berte, 271
  - Bessemer, 15, 17, 272
  - Bruce, 17, 272
  - Brunel, 271
  - duplex mould, 17
  - Mann and Sturdevant, 17, 272
  - Moxon,15
  - separated from printing, 566
  - spring-propelled piston, 17, 271-72
  - use of pump, 17, 18, 271-78, 301
  - vacuum in mould, 17, 18, 271, 301
  - water-cooling, 17-18, 246-47, 268-69, 271
  - i Type-heads for printing telegraphs, 101
  - I typewriters, curved face, 97
  - Type-high, mounting of blocks, 484
  - numbering machine used in hand stamps, 335
  - 1 Type-metal, 15-16
  - Bessemer, 15
  - composition of, 15, 16
  - former, Linotype, 209
  - Moxon,15
  - plates for electrotyping formers, 208
  - “ Types to they that be of the Craft . . .” 10
  - Typesetters. See composing machines, 321-41, XV, XXV-XXX
  - Typesetting and distributing combined; Paige, 379 as an occupation for women, 325
  - “ Typesetting by machinery has done more to advance
  - the cause of universal education . . .” 321 Typesetting in relation to mathematics, 40-43 Type-slicing machine, 316-17 Type-slug, 689
  - Typewheels, aluminium, IO1
  - of time recorders, 341
  - Scheutz difference engine, 339
  - steel, ror
  - Typewriter face, 77, 91, 363
  - type specimen, 91, 363
  - used as keyboard, Rowotype, 450
  - Typewriting in Chinese syllabary, 498-500, 501, 503-05
  - Typewritten record made of composition, Rowotype, 450
  - on perforated strip, Graphotype, 404
  - Tachytype, 404
  - Typobar, St. John, 454, 594, 601, 634, 643
  - Typograph, 13, 227, 228, 230-31, 232, 267-68, 294-96
  - 375, 444-49, 450, 454, 572, LXXVIII-LXXXIV advantages of smooth slugs, 448 automatic return of top frame, 448 break, 13
  - distensible space-disk, 230-31, 232, 267, 444-47
  - distribution lock, 448
  - escapement, 445, 446
  - floor-space required, 449
  - former process, 209-10
  - fount-change, new method, 448
  - height of mould, 240
  - keyboard, English, 294, 295-96
  - French, 295, 296
  - German, 296
  - line-justification, 444-47, LXXXI-LXXXII
  - matrices, alinement, 228, 447
  - matrix guide-wires, 449
  - single-letter, 227, 228, 340, 447
  - two-letter, 227, 228, 240, 447
  - matrix-fount, rack holder, 448-49, LXXXIII LXXXIV
  - I metal-pot, 447, 449
  - mould, 267-68, 447
  - non-distensible space matrix, 229
  - output in ens per hour, 449
  - power required, 449
  - pump, 447
  - quick-change knife-block, 449
  - quick-change mould, 449
- p.729 - vue 897/901
- - 730
  - Typograph—continued.
  - reading copy during casting, 448
  - repetitions of line, 448
  - sequence of operations, 446-48
  - single-letter machine, 448
  - space-disk magazines, 444
  - time for change of face and body, 449
  - completing cycle of operations, 448
  - top frame tilted for distribution, 445, 448
  - type specimen, 669
  - weight, 449
  - Typograph impression-machine, 454
  - “ Typographia,” Hansard, T. C., 301-02, 575
  - “ Typographia,” Johnson, J., 477, 575
  - statement unfavourable to stereotyping, 477
  - Typographical etching process, 3, 484
  - cutting through wax-coating, 487
  - ordinary type used in conjunction with, 487
  - Typographical point, Fournier, 61
  - system, 64
  - Typographical printing - surfaces from movable matrices, 3
  - of movable type, 3, 4, 5, 6
  - scope of subject, 570
  - xylographic, defined, 5
  - “ Typographie ” (Manuel Roret), 576
  - Typography, 4-9
  - “Typography,” article in “Encyclopaedia Britan-
  - nica,” 576
  - Typomatrix, Heath, 454, 638, 640
  - Typometers, 57
  - Typotheter, Lagerman, 288, 289, XV, 631, 633, 635,
  - 636
  - U
  - U, 151, 184, 396
  - U psilon, 181
  - Underscored characters, 36, 535, 676
  - Underscoring in Russian writing, 180
  - Underset line cut-out, Rowotype, 450
  - Underset line of matrices, Linotype, 427
  - “ Unfortunately the needs of the reader are lightly
  - regarded by the men who make types . . ." 156
  - Ulster, red hand of, 47
  - Uniform ratio of follower sizes, 207
  - United States Type Founders’ Association, 60
  - Unit of area for legibility measurements, 161
  - Unit-counting mechanism, Monotype, 394, 395
  - Unities, mark of plural in hieroglyphics, 526
  - Units of type measurement, 55-61
  - Unitype composing and distributing machine,298, 368, 369, 370-73, XL
  - automatic loading-mechanism, 371, 372
  - distributor, 370
  - floor space, 373
  - hand-justification, 373
  - keyboard, 298
  - maximum width distributed and composed, 372
  - output in ens per hour, 373
  - power required, 373
  - weight, 373
  - Unitype-bar machine, 464
  - Universal mathematical and physical notation ; pro-
  - posed International Commission, 41
  - syllabics, 562
  - Typesetter (Typotheter), 288
  - Universally adjustable mould, Oddur, 469
  - University College, London, 338
  - University of Leipzig, 188
  - Unnecessary serifs, 166
  - Urdu or Hindustani, 541
  - Uriya or Oriya, type specimen, 553
  - “ Urwald-Dokumente,” 531
  - Use of mangle-press for flong-mould, 480
  - sine-curves for cams, 304
  - vacuum in mould, 17, 18, 271, 272, 301
  - V
  - Vacuum in mould, 17, 18, 271, 272, 301
  - Valveless pumps, 272
  - Van Dyke Gravure Company, 494
  - van Eyck, Hubert and Jan, 8, 9
  - Van Schuyver, Charles G., arrangement of Paige keyboard, 378
  - Vanoni, flong process, 477
  - Variable number of spaces in line, 342
  - Index.
  - Variation in a-z length, 88-89, 90-92, 122, 123
  - in relative position of standard line, 124
  - of form in series, 119, 120, 122, 123
  - Varieties of type faces, 82, 119
  - Vau, 182
  - Vaucanson, perforated control, 328
  - Vega, logarithms, 455
  - venetian, 31
  - old-style, 283
  - Verein deutscher Schriftgiessereien, 125
  - Verge-rod or key-rod, Linotype, 151, 426-27, 43073 ’
  - LXX, LXXI
  - lock, Intertype, 437
  - Vernier, 24
  - Versalien, 136, 137
  - akzente, 137
  - Versicle, 43
  - Vice-jaw adjustment, Intertype, 437
  - Typograph, 446-47 ,17
  - Vice-jaws, matrix-line measuring, Stringertype, 138,
  - Victoria and Albert Museum, South Kensington, 33
  - 490 iters
  - Victoria, Queen, Act repealing restrictions on prin
  - and typefounders, 568
  - Victorline, 436, LXXII, 437
  - and Linotype keyboards compared, 297
  - former process, 209
  - height of mould, 240
  - keyboard, 297
  - locking gear, 437
  - matrix, 224
  - mould and mould-wheel, 266
  - mould-wheel water circulation, 436
  - pump, 277, 278
  - Vinci, Leonardo da, 193
  - Vinculum, 39, 674
  - Violet, legibility, 189, 191
  - Virgil, edition of, by Aldus Manutius, 96
  - by Fowler, 32
  - “ Vlacq’s Logarithms,” 471
  - Vogel, use of eosine in collodion, 491 „
  - “ Voici, ma foi, la chose en propre original.” 35°
  - Volume recording machines, 340
  - Voters’ lists, 126
  - Vowels, small sorts, 121
  - vy, 164
  - W
  - W, 28, 29, 127
  - W, 190
  - Waldow, A., 575
  - Walker, Emery, 491
  - Walter, John, founder of “ The Times,” 146
  - Walter, Mr., of “ The Times,” 325
  - Wan, Chinese sign for myriad, 506, 512
  - Wang Chao, Mr., 501
  - Ward, Frink and Kneval, 381 -type.
  - Wards in stationary cylinder channels, on 3 370
  - Warning bell, 289, 376, 395, 427
  - Waste-box, Bellows, 440
  - Water, Assyrian ideograph for, 529
  - Water-cooling of mould. Autoplate, 480
  - moulds, 17-18, 246, 247, 259, 312, 314
  - mould-wheel, 312, 314, 436
  - “ . . . Waters of Truth ; . . .” 271 8
  - Wax composition for electrotyped formers, 200
  - former mould, 215
  - homogeneous, 211
  - Wax-coated plate, engraving on, 484 , out
  - “ We fill up the silent vacancy that precea birth ...” 241 ,156
  - "... weak and misty style of printing . • •
  - Wear of soft segments, Wicks machine, 258
  - Weather phenomena signs, 46
  - Webster Manufacturing Co., 381
  - Wedge space, Grantype individual type, 232
  - slug, 231, 232
  - Linotype, 230, 231, 427
  - Monoline, 230, 231, 442
  - Oddur, 467
  - Stringertype, 230, 231, 416, 417
  - Unitype-bar, 464 . cal line”
  - Wedges and space-counting gear for mecnan
  - justification, 345
  - for setting body-slide, Monotype, 259-60, 3
  - Weekdays, signs, 38
  - Weighing and valuing machines, 340
  - machine for net weight of coal, 340-41
- p.730 - vue 898/901
- - INDEX.
  - 731
  - Weight of Bellows compositor, 441
  - Dow compositor, 364
  - French type, approximate, 145
  - Graphotype, new model, 412
  - metal in tubular and semi-cylindrical
  - compared, 482
  - Monoline, 443
  - Paige compositor, 386
  - quads and spaces, 144,145
  - stereo-height spaces, 144
  - trade-height spaces, 144
  - type, 44-45
  - Typograph, 449
  - Unitype, 373
  - Weights and measures signs, 47
  - Wells, Darius, 195
  - Welsh accented sorts, 133
  - bill of fount or scheme, 126, 13a, 133
  - Wen hsien tu’ng Ka’o, 5
  - Werner, N. J., 516
  - Westcott, Charles S., 355, 625-27
  - “ Westminster Gazette,” 191
  - Wh, 152
  - wh, 152
  - Wheatstone, perforated ribbon, 100, 393
  - White between main strokes, 156, 160
  - White, Elihu, 302
  - White inside counters, 156, 160
  - Whitmore, Mr., financial representative of
  - Clemens, 380
  - Whitworth, Sir Joseph, 459
  - plates
  - S. L.
  - Wicks casting machine. Ser Wicks rotary typecaster, 10, 246, 247-59, 311-16, XXIV
  - composing machine, 290, 291, 331-32; 344, XXIX ejection of type, 331
  - floor-space required, 332
  - keyboard, 290, 291, 331
  - output of, 332
  - power required, 332
  - striking chords, 331
  - weight of, 332
  - worked by two men “ in pocket,” 332
  - Wicks, Frederick, 318, 473, 590-92, 594-96, 598-601,
  - 603-05, 628, 633, 637, 639, 642-43, 645,
  - 649
  - casting new type at cost less than that of dis-
  - tribution, 316
  - distribution through the melting-pot, 354
  - dry-flong process, 473
  - Wicks rotary typecaster, 10, 116, 234-35, 246, 247-59,
  - 275, 311-16, 318-19, 450, 571, XXIV
  - adjustment of top-cover, 248, 312
  - angle-base segments, 246, 249, 257-58
  - assembling, 249, 257-59
  - block of type, 116
  - cam-head, 312, 314
  - casting different faces, 312, 318
  - central column, 257
  - chain race, 313, 315
  - chain, link and leaves, 312-15
  - curvature of foot of type, 247
  - cutting nicks, 314
  - , difficulty of supplying sorts, 319
  - distribution by remelting, 316
  - division plates for, 248, 251-57
  - dowels, 248, 257, 258
  - ejecting cam, 314
  - expense of making, 318
  - folding wedges, 312
  - foundation ring, 247-49, 257, 312
  - grinding nick groove, 259
  - hard segments, 246, 248, 258, 259
  - hardening and tempering segments, 258
  - heel-nick, 312,314
  - height-to-paper screw and cam, 312, 314
  - jet, 275
  - labour required, 316
  - lapping segments, 259
  - lubricating moulds, 248
  - machining chain-links, 315
  - matrices, 10, 220, 221, 234-35, 247
  - method of justifying, 234
  - matrix guide-ring, 257, 313
  - matrix-jacket, 220, 221, 312, 313-14
  - matrix-stem, 313, 314
  - moulds, 246, 247-59, 312, 314
  - mould-wheel, 312, 314
  - nick-wires or beads, 259, 312, 314
  - number of moulds of each set width, 311
  - output of, 316
  - port for metal, 312, 314
  - Wicks rotary typecaster—continued.
  - power required by casting machine, 316
  - pump, 316
  - pump, 275
  - receiving galley, 3x3, 314
  - restoring moulds to size, 258
  - retaining and withdrawing cams, 313, 314
  - return of surplus metal, 275
  - sequence of operations, 312-16
  - shield and sliding head, 312-13, 314
  - side cams, 313, 315
  - soft segments, 246, 248, 258
  - speed of machine, 316
  - pump, 316
  - supplementing by simple sorts-caster, 319
  - temperature of metal-pot, 275
  - temperature of mould and metal, 318
  - top cover of mould, 246, 259, 312, 314
  - type, 313, 314
  - type received on sticks, 315
  - type set up in blocks, 116, 315, 316
  - wear of moulds, 248, 258
  - worm drive, 311
  - Wicks type, 14
  - curved foot, 247
  - Typefoundry, 331
  - Width of column, 76
  - face, 88-89
  - Wightman, 56
  - William Clowes & Sons, Ltd., 331, 535-40, 543-60,
  - 562-64
  - Wilson, Alexander, 568, 569
  - starts typefoundry with John Baine, 569
  - . Wilson, F. I. F., 576
  - Wilson of Edinburgh, 18, 272
  - Wilson, Patrick, 569
  - winchell face, specimen, 91, 515
  - Windsor face, 91
  - condensed, 146
  - I Wing, part of mould, 245
  - with, 148, 149
  - Wood, Henry A. Wise, 479, 601, 603, 607-08, 6x0-11,
  - 613-14, 639, 643, 646, 655, 657-59, 661, 663,665-67
  - Wood type, 195, 680
  - Wood-blocks and half-tones compared, 490
  - engraved, 4-6
  - with crossed grooves for linoleum printing, 485
  - Wooden letters, 93
  - Word and line indicators, Paige compositor, 300
  - Words moved consecutively forward, Paige compositor, 383, 385, 388
  - ; Word-space controller, Graphotype, 411
  - I Word-spaces, Stringertype, 417
  - Wreaths, 47
  - j Wright, Thomas, 30, 566
  - Wynkyn de Worde, 30
  - X
  - x, 153
  - X and Y, German Fraktur, 170
  - Xi, 181
  - Xylographic printing-block, reproduced, 5
  - printing for initial letters, 6
  - in Europe, 5
  - of decorations, designs and patterns on woven fabrics, skin and vellum, 6
  - Xylography, 5
  - X z, 164
  - X Z, blackfriars, 168, 175, 177
  - modern, 168, 174, 177
  - old-style, 168, 175, 177
  - sans serif, 168, 176, 177
  - Y
  - I y, 127
  - I Yardage recorded by numbering hand-stamps, 33
  - Yellow, legibility, 189, 191
  - effect of in three-colour process, 493
  - “ Yet by their Faces may ye tell them . . .” 121
  - Yiddish, 127, 572
  - Yielding of kerned type, 184
  - i Young, James, 322-25, 583
  - Young and Delcambre compositor, 318, 322-25, 3 583, 585-86, 588, 590
  - inclined guide-plate, 322-24
  - separating lines and dividing words, 325
  - speed of composing, 325
  - vibrating finger, 325
- p.731 - vue 899/901
- - 732
  - INDEX.
  - german—continued.
  - Z
  - z, 153
  - Zain, 182
  - Zend, sacred language of Parsees, 549
  - Zeta, 181
  - Ziffern, 136, 137
  - Zinc for half-tone blocks, 489
  - line block, 486
  - photo process, 486
  - plate mounting, 486
  - repairing damage, 486
  - process, simple, 485
  - Zincography, 2
  - Zinc-plate for embossing, 100, 105
  - Zodiac, signs of, 38
  - & &
  - & (ampersand), 35, 78, 85, 87, 128-35, 283, 672
  - RUSSIAN.
  - BHAWTe .III, 'ITO VeOBBEB .... 393
  - II, 142, 180
  - Il n, 142, 180
  - II II, 142, 180, 181
  - II 11, 142, 180, 181
  - n, 142, 180
  - n II, 142,180
  - II, 142, 180
  - III, 142, 155
  - III m, 142, 180, 181
  - III, 142, 180
  - GERMAN.
  - A U, 136,170
  - a v, 136,168,170
  - b H, 136, 170, 171
  - B 2, 136, 170, 177, 178
  - C C, 136, 170, 177, 178
  - C f, 136, 170, 171
  - C 0, 136, 170, 171
  - t 0, 136, 170, 171
  - F 3, 136, 170, 177, 178
  - f s, 136, 166, 170, 171
  - f f, double letters of, 166
  - 9 136, 168
  - G S, 136, 170
  - i j, 136, 168
  - I { t, 136, 168
  - M W, 136, 170
  - m w, 136, 168, 170
  - N R, 136, 170
  - n U, 136, 166, 170, 171
  - 11 y, 136, 168
  - D O, 136, 170, 177, 178
  - I F, 136, 168
  - Unser Vater in bcm Himmel ! Dein Name . • • .537
  - X, 136,170
  - 9, 136, 170
  - GREEK,
  - a/ydeSeixAuvmpor o x v 0,39
  - A A, 141, 177, 179
  - FAOAEIIPVO, 39
  - A, 141, 177, 178, 179
  - € (=2'718281828..), 457
  - C 8, 141, 178, 181
  - H n, 141, 177, 179
  - © 0, 141, 177, 178, 179
  - A, 190
  - v v, 141, 178, 181
  - IIoxXal uev Ovnrols yhwaaai, p.ia 3’ ‘AOavaroLOW
  - 669
  - . HEBREW.
  - 182, 143 23
  - 182, 181, 180, 143 33
  - 182,.143 111
  - 182, 143 nn
  - 182,143 771
  - 182, 181, 180, 143 DD
  - DEVANAGARI
  - •• 182,183
  - * * 182,183
  - % * 182,183
  - T*H 182,183
  - 44a 182,183
  - ARABIC.
  - 183,182 I
  - 183,182 5:
  - 183,182 et
  - 183, 182 9 3)
  - I 183,182 0J
- p.732 - vue 900/901
- - PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN BY
  - WILLIAM CLOWES & SONS, LIMITED
  - LONDON AND BECCLES.
- p.733 - vue 901/901